W/PLA"S BIDDIN~~~~NTS iNc.\. . ~ i L LOS ANGELES UNIFIED SCHOOL DISTRICT
LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL 4650 W. OlympiC Blvd. Los Angeles, CA 90019
PROJECT A - BID NO. 1810033* REPLACE BLEACHERS- WEST GYM OWNER PROJECT NO.: 10367531 I 23.11816
PROJECT B -BID NO. 1810034* CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & PATH OF TRAVEL UPGRADES OWNER PROJECT NO.: 10367253 I 23.11659 *BID NUMBERS 1810033 & 1810034- TO BE AWARDED AS A WHOLE In the Los Angeles Unified School District Prepared by OWNER: LOS ANGELES UNIFIED SCHOOL DISTRICT FACILITIES SERVICES DIVISION 333 South Beaudry A venue, 28th Floor Los Angeles, California 90017 For OWNER: LOS ANGELES UNIFIED SCHOOL DISTRICT Los Angeles, California November, 2017 Richmond Carlton
'6l oroed3nt4AR) THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES (PROJECT B)
LOSANGEtPVC07re c:r
~)
REVISED 10/31/2017 PROJECT TITLE PAGE 00 0101-1
BIDDJNG DOCL!MENTS FOR THE LOS ANGELES UNIFIED SCHOOL DISTRJCl' VOLUME 1 of l CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPC3RADES AT
LOS ANGELES HlGH SCHOOL 4650 W. Olyl}lpit: I3lvd, Los Angeles, CA 90019
In the. Los Angeles Unified School District Prepared by OWNER: !
L()S ANGELES UNIFrED SCHOOL DISTRICT FACILITIES SERVICES DIVISION 333 SouthBeaudry Avenue, 23rd Floor Los Angclcs,:Califom'ia 90017 For OWNER: LOS ANGELES UNIFIED SCHOOL DISTRICT Los Angeles, California August, 20 17
OWNERPROjECT NO.: 23.11659, 10367253
An
~#
Noe Portilla.. ¥E~HANICAL ENGrNEER/ ./
I
(
~
t£/
'
~
r
Kuni)i Shai;:ELECTRICXLENGINEER
!
1/ (.
CORWlNTHEATER REPAIR & P.O.T.UPGRADES
Los ANGELES HtGH scHOOL
·
REVISED 711 0/20 13 PROJECTTITLE PAGE 00 0101-l
BIDDING DOCUMENTS TABLE OF CONTENTS DIVISION 00 - PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS ............... Number of Pages
00 0110
Project Title Page······~··················································································································· 02 Table of Contents .......................................................................................................................... 05
00 1116
Invitation to Bid ............................................................................................................................ 03
00 2113
Instructions to Bidders .................................................................................................................. 07
00 2515
Pre-Bid Meeting (Not Mandatory) ............................................................................................... 01
00 3000
Available Information ............................................................................................................. 02
00 3126
OWNER'S List of Pre-qualified Asbestos Abatement Subcontractors ...................................... 01
00 3148
Project Directory ........................................................................................................................... 04
00 4001
Required Bid Forms ................................................................................................................. 14
00 4100
Bid and Acceptance Form ........................................................................................................... 05
00 4313
Bid Security Forms ....................................................................................................................... 01
00 4336
Subletting and Subcontracting Fair Practices Act List ................................................................ 01
00 4500
Certification Requirements ........................................................................................................... 05
00 4519
Non-Collusion Affidavit ............................................................................................................... 01
00 6113
Payment Bond (Labor and Material) ............................................................................................ 01
00 6114
Performance Bond ................................................................................................................... 03
00 7000
General Conditions ....................................................................................................................... 94
00 7300
Supplementary Conditions ............................................................................................................ 14
00 7316
Owner Controlled Insurance Program (OCIP) .......................................................................... 188
00 7339
Small Business Enterprise (SBE) School Facilities Program .................................................. 01
00 7349
Project Stabilization Agreement (PSA) .................................................................................... 72
00 9110
Pre-Bid Clarification... :................................................................................................................. 01
00 9113
Addendum No. 01 ......................................................................................................................... 02
00 0101
DIVISION 01 -GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 011100
Summary of the Work ................................................................................................................... 08
011216
Phasing of the Work ...................................................................................................................... 03
011219
Phasing of the Work - Appendix A, B ......................................................................................... 05
01 2513
Product Substitution Procedures ................................................................................................... 02
01 2613
Request for Clarification ............................................................................................................... 02
01 2973
Schedule of Values ....................................................................................................................... 03
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES (PROJECT B) LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
REVISED 03/27/2015 TABLE OF CONTENTS 00 0110-1
01 2976
Progress Payment Procedlires .. ~ .............. ~ ...................................................................... ~ .............. 04 ·
01 3113
Project Coord.ip.ation ........................... :...................................................... ~ ................................... 04
01 3119
Project Meetings ......... ~ ..... ~ ..................................... ."... .-.............................................. ~ ....................... 06
01 3213
Construction Schedule ...... :......................................................................... ;....................... ~ .......... 17
01 3229
Ptoject Forms ..·.... :............ :............................... ~ ..... ,......................... :....................., ...................... 111
01 3300
Submittal Procedures .................................................. ,...................... :... ,...................................... .-09
01 3546
·Indoor Air Quality Procedures .......................................... ;........................................................... 13
01 4213
Abbreviations, Symbols and Acronyms ................................................. ,.... :................................ 11
oi 4523
Testing and Inspection ......... :.....·..........................:............ ~ .........·............ ,............................... :.:..... 12
01 5000
Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls :.................. :........................... ~ ......................... 17
01 5719
CEQA Mitigations .............................. :....•..........•... :...................................................................... 09
016000
Product Requirements ..................... :............................................................ ~ .... ,.. ;....................._. ... 06
o1 n23
Field Engineering.; ................................................... ~ ............... ,.:..·.......•.............. :.......................... 06
01 7329
Cutting and Patching ................. :................... ;................. :..............~ ............................................ ~ ..... 07
01 7418
Water Pollution Control ..·............... ;,.~ .......:······· .................. :................ ;.•................. ;.............. ~ ....... 03
01 7419
Construction & Demolition Waste Management. ..................................................... :................... 06
01 7700
Contract Closeout .................. :...... .".......... ;~ ... ,........................................ :.......•............................ .".. 07
01 7836
Warranties ......... ~ ........................................................................................................................... 03
017900
Maintenance & Operations StaffDemonstrationand Training ................................................... 11.
DIVISION 02 -EXISTING CONDITIONS · 022600
Abatement of Hazardous Materials· ............... :.............................................................................. 148
024116
Demolition."....................... ;... ;........•..•........... :............ ;.-................................................... ;... :.•........ 04
~213
Asbestos Abatement & Asbestos Related Distur.bance .......................................................... ~:····· 31
02 8216
Asbestos Abatement ofNon-Friable Floor Tile ...... ;......................................... ~ .................... ;..... 18
02 8333
Lead Abatement and Lead Related Co~ttuction Work. .............................................................. 29
02
DNISION 03 - CONCRETE 03 1000
Concrete Forming Accessories········~·; .......................................................................... ;, .............. 04 ·
03 2000
·Concrete Reinforcing ..... :....................................................................................... :...... ;~ ............... 04
03 3000
Cast-In-Place Con.crete......... ;................................................·.............................. :·····:.. :........•.......... 15
DNISION 04- MASONRY- NOT USED DNISION 05 -METALS .
.
.
05 1200
. Structural Steel Framing ......... ;............................................_................................................... ~·......... 13
· OS 3000
Metal Decking ............ ~ ......... :.. ,:........................... ~ .. :.................................................... :........ :.-.. ,."....... 04
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES illGH SCHOOL
REVISED ()3/27 flO 15 . TABLE OF CONTENTS 00 0110-2
05 4100
Structural Metal Stud Framing ................................ ~ .................. :................................................. 05
.) . 05 5000
Metal Fabrications .......................................................................................................... :.......... :... 04
DIVISION 06 - WbOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES · 06 2000
·Finish _Carpentry ...... ,....................... :.......... .".. : .......... _..................................................................:.. 03
06 4000
-Architectural Woodwork ............................................ ;...............·............................... .".................. 08
DIVISION 07 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 07 1800 . Laticrete Tile Waterproofmg ............ :...... ~ ..... _...................................;: .................................. ~ ....... 11· 07 2100 · Thermallnsulation .... ~ .................... ."....... ~ ................................:....................................................... 06 .· 07 6000 07 8413 07 9200
Flashing ~d Sheet Metal ... :................. ;.................... :.................. ~ ... ,.... ~ ............... ~ .... ,.. .-..... :......... 06 · Penetration Fire~topping ............ ;_......... ;....................................... :.......................... ~ ................._.... 07 Joint Sealants ..... ."........·......................................................... ~_.........,.........._............. ,...-............. ." ...... 06
DIVISION 08 - OPENINGS 08 1113 · Hollow Metal Doors· and Frames ...... :........... ."........ :............... _............................... :..........._........_..._.13' 08 1416 08 7100
)
.
Flush Wood Doors ........... .".. .'................................................................·......... :................... .'........... 07 Door Hai:dware .... ·........... :.... ;........................................ ~ .....................................-...._...... :.... ;............ 29
DIVISION 09 - FINISHES 09 2216 · Non-Structural Metal Framing ..... :........_....................... ,.. :..... :.. ,............. ,..._.................... ,............·.o7 092900 Gypsum Board ...........·........................... .- .......... ;.................... ;.......-....... :... ,...............·.................... : 10 09 3013 Ceramic Tiling ................................. .-............. ~ .. :........................ ,....................... ,.... ~ ....... ~ ............. 11 09 6513 Rubber Base~ .................... ,.~ ... :......... ,................. :....... ~ .................................................................. 03 09 6518 .Rubber Flooring and Stair Covering ................................... ;......................... :.. ,.._....- ....._................. 06 . . .. .
09 6519 09 6816 .· 09 9000 09 9013
Vinyl Compositio.n tile ............................-....-................................................................................ 07 Carpeting .................... :_........ :'................ .-....·......._....... .-:......................... :; ......" .............. :~ ......_.:... :....... 10 · Painting and Co-ating.~ ......... :.. .:...................................... .-...·................. ~ .......... ,......... :............ ~ ... ,.... 09 . . . · .. . . . fE . . F '1' . . . Pamting o x1stmg act1tles ......... :··· ..................... ~ ................. ~ ..... ~ ........ ;..................................... 26. '
DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES 10 1400 10 2813
Signage ...... ,...... ,_.... :.. :.............................................................................. ,...... _......................... :..... 10 Toilet Accessories_...... ~ ...... .-..... ...................................... _ :...........-.~ .......................·....... :.................... 04
10 2815
Hand Dryers ......... :......:..........................._.-.... :.................. :................... :............... :... ~ .. :................... 04
DMSION 11 -EQUIPMENT- NOT USED . DIVISION 12 ""FURNISHINGS- NOT USED DIVISION 13 - SPECI.A.L CONSTRUCTION- NOT USED CORWINTHEATERREPAIR&P.O.T. UPGRADpS . LOS ANGELES lllGH SCHOOL
REVISED 03/27(20i5 TABLE OF CONTENTS 00 0110-3
DIVISION 14- CONVEYING EQUIPMENT- NOT USED DIVISION 21 -FIRE-SUPPRESSION 21 1313
Fire-Suppression Sprinkler System .... :............................ :.......... :................................................. 12
DIVISION 22 _,..PLUMBING 22 0500
Common Work Results for Plumbing···~······ ................................................................................ 09
22 0513
Basic Plumbing Materials and Methods ...•...•...................... .-....•................................. ,................. 16 ·
22 0553
Plumbing. Identification.................................................... ·.............................._. ....... :....................... 04 .
22 0700
PlUinbing InsUiation ..................:............ ~··················: ....... ,.. :............ :........... :.... :............................. 08
22 1000
PlU1Tibing .. ,.............. ~ ............................................................... ~ ........................... :.. :·· ............ ;......... 16
DIVISION 23- HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 0500 Common Work Results for HVAC .......................................................................................... ~ ... 09 23 0513
Basic HVAC Materials and Methods ............ ,.............................................................................. 02
23 0553
03 HV AC Identification ... ·....... :......... :............ :.............................., ..................................................... .
23 0900
HV AC Instrumentation and Controls ................. :...............................................·............................ 05
23 3000 .· 23 8000
Air Distribution· .................................................... ,........................................ ;............................... 18 Heating, Ventilatiilg, and Air Conditioning Equipment ................................. :............. ~ .............. 04 ·
DIVISION 26..,. ELECTRICAL . 26 0126 Test and·Acceptance Reqliirements .......... .-...................... ~ .............................................. :............... 47 26 0500
Common Work Results for Electrical ....... ~ .......·........................................ ;................................... 06
.26 0513
Basic Electrical Materials arid Methods ............. ;............................................................. :........... 15 . .
. 26.0519
Low Voltage Wires (600 Volt AC)· ....................... :.... ~ .................... ;... .-.. :...................................... 05
26 0526
Grounding and Bonding ................ ~ ........................................................ :......... ~ ... ,.................... :..... 05
260533
Raceways~ Boxes, Fittings, and Supports .... ~ ...................... :.-..................... ;.................................. 13
.26 0923
Lighting Control Systems .......... ~ ......................... ~ ................ ;.: ...... :.; ................... :............. :........... 15 . .
26 2416 · Panell~oards and Signal Terminal Cabinets ................................................................. ~ ................ 07 26 5000
Lighting ............ ~ ..................,...................... :........................ :........................ ,.:... ,........................... 17
DIVISION 27- COMMUNICATIONS . 270126 Test and Acceptance Requirements for Structured Cabling ......................... ~ ... :.......................... 40 27 5116
·Public Add:fess and· Intercommunication Systems ............. :., ....................... ,... :............................. 39
27 5128
Autonomous Public Address Systems ....... ,................................................................. ~ ................ l8
DIVISION 28--: ELECTR()NIC SAFETY AND SECURITY 28 3100
Fire Detection and Alarm ................................................................................................................ 41
DIVISION 31 - EARUIWORK. REVISED 03/27/2015 CORWINTHEATERREPAIR.&P:O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES IDGH SCHOOL .
TABLE OF CONTENTS
00 0110-4
.., I
..
--
")
311000
Site Clearing· ......·............................ :................................... :....................... :.............................. :.. '" 02.
31 2?00
Grading ...... ;..... :.................. :................................................. ;.................... :.. ~~ ............................... 03
31 2313
Excavation and Fill ........... ;............................................. ·..... ,............................. ;......... :................... 08 ·
31 2316
Excavation-and Fill for Paving ..............................................................·........... ~ ............. ,....... :..... 06.
31 2326
Base Course .................................. :..................... ::.; ........................................ :............. :................. 03
DIVISION 32 -.EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS. 32 0117 . Asphalt PavementRepair.............. ~ ..... :...................... ~ ..... :............................................................ 04 321216
AsphaltPaving ............................... :............................................................................................ ,.... 05
32 1236
Seal for Bituminous Surfacing .................................................. ,..·.......... :...................................... 01
32 1313
Site Concrete Work ....... :.................................. :........................ :....... .".. ;.. ;........... ,......................... 03
32 1723
·Pavement Markings............. :......... ,·..... ;....... ~ ................................................:................................ 02
32 1726
Tactile Warning Surfacing ............ :.............. :.................................................................................. 10
32 3113
Chain.Link Fences and Gates .................. :............................... :.................................................... 07
DIVISION 33- SITE IMPROVEMENTS- NOT USED
END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS
) .:
CORWIN THEATER. REPAIR & P.O.T~ UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
REVISED 03127/2015 TABLE OF CONTENTS 00 0110~5
SECTION 00 1116 INVITATION TO BID Subject to all conditions prescribed by OWNER, sealed bids for a lump sum contract are invited for the following Work: LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL 23.11659 LOS ANGELES UNIFIED SCHOOL DISTRICT AS OWNER CENTRAL REGION- Local District 1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & PATH OF TRAVEL UPGRADES (PROJECT B) OWNER is committed to sustainable or "high performance" design and construction in all of its schools because high performance schools enhance student and teacher performance, reduce operating costs, and protect the environment. To implement this commitment, the Owner endorses the high performance school strategies defined in the Collaborative for High Performance School (CHPS) Best Practices Manuals (available at www.chps.net), and requires that all qualified projects achieve, at a minimum, a "CHPS School" rating. The Owner shall be responsible for monitoring compliance with the CHPS criteria necessary to achieve this objective. Bidding Documents will be available to bidder after the first date of advertisement and can be obtained at: AMERICAN REPROGRAPHICS COMPANY (ARC) LLC 934 W Venice Blvd Los Angeles, CA 90015 Business Hours: Monday through Friday 7:00a.m. to 12:00 midnight Telephone: (213) 745-3145 Facsimile: (213) 745-3160 Additional office locations are listed at the end of Section 00 3148. Bidders may access www.crplanwell.com and then click on the button by "Public Planroom" to view and order Bidding Documents over the Internet. Bid will only be accepted from a pre-qualified bidder pursuant to the OWNER prequalification process. Bidders should note that the OWNER's prequalification requirements include mechanical, electrical and plumbing subcontractors licensed pursuant to Section 7058 of the Business and Professions Code, specifically holding C-4, C-7, C-10, C-16, C-20, C-34, C-36, C-38, C-42, C-43, and C-46 licenses ("MEP Subcontractors"). Bidders who will be utilizing any first-tier MEP Subcontractors to perform such specialty work must only select MEP Subcontractors on the OWNER's List ofPrequalified Subcontractors. Bidders or MEP Subcontractors that have not been prequalified by the OWNER at least five (5) business days prior to the bid due date will not be eligible to bid or perform work on the Project. The OWNER'S list of prequalified subcontractors can be found at http://www.laschools.ondnewsite/pregualificationlforms, by clicking on "Subcontractor PQ Program- List of Approved MEP Subcontractors." The list will be updated on an ongoing basis. Bids that fail to adhere to these requirements will be deemed non-responsive. Bidder should note the disclaimer in Section 00 2113, 1.09 E, concerning the use of District prequalified subcontractors.
Effective June 1, 2017, Bidder shall prequalify any non-MEP Subcontractors, as set forth in Article 5.4.8 of the Supplementary Conditions. CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & PATH OF TRAVEL UPGRADES (pROJECT B) LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
REVISED 5/30/2017 INVITATION TO BID 00 1116-1
Bidder is advised that no contractor or subcontractor may be listed on a bid proposal for a public works project (submitted on or after March 1, 2015) unless registered with the Department of Industrial Relation pursuant to Labor Code section 1725.5 [with limited exceptions from this requirement for bid purposes only under Labor Code·section 1771.1(a)]. No contractor or subcontractor may be awarded a contract for public work on a public works project (awarded on or after April1, 2015) unless registered with the Department of Industrial Relations pursuant to Labor Code section 1725.5. This project is subject to compliance monitoring and enforcement by the Department of Industrial Relations (DIR) and the Los Angeles Unified School District's DIR-approved Labor Compliance Program. BID DUE DATE: Bid will only be accepted before lO:OOam, December 05, 2017.
The only acceptable time of receipt is the date/time stamp imprinted upon the bid package by the representative of Facilities Construction Contracts. Deadline for MEP Subcontractors to be placed on OWNER'S List of Prequalified Subcontractors: November 28, 2017. Bidder must only list MEP Subcontractors that are on the OWNER'S List of Prequalified Subcontractors as of this date. Bids that fail to adhere to this requirement will be deemed non-responsive. Bidder is responsible for the cost of bid package. Cost for bid package is non-refundable. Bid package is nonreturnable. Bid security in the amount of ten (10) percent of the lump sum base bid, excluding bid items, as set forth in Section 01 2300, shall accompany each bid. Surety issuing the bid bond shall meet the requirements set forth in Article 5.17 of the General Conditions. A not mandatory pre-bid meeting and pre-bid job walk will be held in accordance with Section 00 2515. The bidder is responsible for ensuring that they have complete Bidding Documents including all Addenda provided by the OWNER, prior to the bid due date. Any bidder that does not attend a not mandatory pre-bid meeting shall be held accountable for any reasonably foreseen condition had they attended the meeting. If additive or deductive bid items are not set forth in the Bidding Documents, the lowest bid shall be determined by the lowest, responsive base bid price on the proposed Contract.
Pursuant to Labor Code Section 1771.7, this Project will be subject to the Owner approved Labor Compliance Program (Final Approval, December 7, 1996). For questions or assistance concerning the Labor Compliance Program, contact the Labor Compliance Office at (213) 241-4665 or
[email protected], or go to www.laschools.org on the internet. Any Contractor to whom a contract for the Work is awarded by the Owner shall comply with the provisions of the California Labor Code, as well as the Owner Labor Compliance Program for the Project, including, without limitation, the obligation to pay the general prevailing rates of wages in the locality in which the Work is to be performed in accordance with, without limitation, Sections 1771, 1773.1, 1774, 1775 and 1776 of the California Labor Code and the obligation to comply with Section 1777.5 of the California Labor Code governing employment of apprentices. Copies of the prevailing rates of per diem wages are available to any interested party at www.laschools.org/contractor/lc or www.dir.ca.gov/dlsr. The successful bidder will be required to pay prevailing wages in accordance with law and is required to have the following State of California Contractor license current at the time of bid submission: LICENSE CLASSIFICATION: B-only (General Building Contractor) Prime Contractor self-performing any of the following trades must be appropriately licensed to perform such work. • Flooring and Floor Covering must be performed with a C-15 license CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & PATH OF TRAVEL UPGRADES (PROJECT B) LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
REVISED 5/30/2017 INVITATION TO BID 00 1116-2
Bidder is required to participate in an OWNER Controlled insurance Program (OCIP) as set forth in Section 00 7316 and Article 5 of the General Conditions. Bidder is subject to the Small Business Enterprise (SBE) participation requirements as set forth in Section 00 7339. PURSUANT TO PUBLIC CONTRACT CODE SECTION 2002, THE LOS ANGELES UNIFIED SCHOOL DISTRICT BOARD OF EDUCATION HAS REVISED ITS SBE POLICY TO INCLUDE A BID PREFERENCE PROVISION FOR CERTIFIED SBE CONTRACTORS ON LOW BID CONSTRUCTION CONTRACTS VALUED UP TO ONE MILLION DOLLARS ($1,000,000.00) BASED ON THE OWNER'S PRE-BID ESTIMATE. THE PREFERENCE IS FIVE PERCENT (5%) OF THE LOWEST RESPONSIBLE BIDDER MEETING SPECIFICATIONS. THIS PREFERENCE IS USED ONLY TO DETERMINE THE WINNING BID, AND DOES NOT CHANGE THE ACTUAL BID OR CONTRACT AWARD AMOUNTS. ELIGIBLE BIDDERS SEEKING THIS PREFERENCE MUST INCLUDE A COPY OF THEIR CURRENT AND VALID SBE CERTIFICATE WITH EACH BID SUBMITTAL. (REFER TO INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS SECTION 00 2113 1.01 B.7). \
WORKER CERTIFICATION - Only Workers skilled in the various trades required on this Contract shall be employed upon the Work. In addition to all other requirements stated in the Bidding Documents, all craftsmen must adhere to the following requirement(s): Journeyman plumbers must possess a plumbing certificate issued by the Los Angeles County and City of Los Angeles, Building and Safety Divisions. All HV AC technicians must possess an EPA-608 Certification. Electricians working for a contractor with a C-10 license must possess a California State Electrician certification. Electricians that are certified can be verified via the State database at www.dir.ca.gov/DAS!ElectricalTrade.htm. Elevator companies must possess a Certified Qualified Conveyance Company License (CQCC). Journeymen will be required to have their Certified Competent Conveyance Mechanics License (CCCM) from the State of California and Journeymen working within the City limits of Los Angeles will be required to have their Journeymen Elevator Mechanic's License. The State of California (Elevator, Ride and Tram Unit) will inspect all County Elevator Modernizations and Alterations.
School will be in session and contractor will be required to work around school operations and swing shift when school . . . 1s m sess10n. CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE TO PROVIDE ALL MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT TO ENABLE TIMELY COMMENCEMENT AND COMPLETION OF ALL PHASES OF THE WORK PER SPECIFICATION SECTION 01 1216 AND 01 1219 ESPECIALLY PHASE 1 INCLUDING ANY AND ALL COSTS FOR EXPEDITING SHIPMENT AND OR PRODUCTION NO MATTER THE DATE OF ISSUANCE OF NTP.
Pursuant to Public Contract Code Section 7201, OWNER has determined that the retention withheld on progress payments for this project will be _5_ % based on the complexity of the project. The District's contract bond estimate is $2,925,000 (Project A- Bid No. 1810033 plus Project B- Bid No. 1810034). The Contract Time is 395 calendar days (to run concurrently Project A & B). CONTRACTOR should consult the General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and General Requirements regarding Milestones and Liquidated Damages. CONTRACTOR has those options regarding retention as set forth in Public Contract Code Section 22300. END OF SECTION
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & PATH OF TRAVEL UPGRADES (PROJECT B) LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
REVISED 5/30/2017 INVITATION TO BID 00 1116-3
SECTION 00 2113 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 1.01
GENERAL A. This Section provides bidder instructions on bidding conditions, requirements, and procedures and stipulates the classification of licenses bidder must possess in order to bid on the Project. B.
1.02
Bidder shall complete and submit the following documents as part of their sealed bid (as identified with solid borders). Failure to submit shall render the bid non-responsive. The documents for actual use by the bidder can be found in Section 00 4001- Required Bid Forms. 1.
Document 00 4100- Bid and Acceptance Form (signature required)- Lump Sum
2.
Document 00 4313 - Bid Security Form (signatures required)
3.
Document 00 4336- Subletting and Subcontracting Fair Practices Act List
4.
Document 00 4500 - Certification Requirements (signature required)
5.
Document 00 4519- Non-Collusion Affidavit (signature required)
C.
Both Bids (Project A- Bid No. 1810033 & Project B - 1810034) shall be submitted in the same sealed bid envelop
D.
Bidder shall submit Small Business Enterprises compliance requirements and additional supplemental subcontractor information within five (5) days from the date of OWNER request. The document for actual use by the bidder will be provided to the bidder by the OWNER. Failure to submit within five (5) days may render the bid non-responsive.
RELATED SECTIONS
A.
Section 00 2515- Pre-Bid Meeting (Not Mandatory)
E.
Section 00 3000 - Available Information
F.
Section 00 3126- OWNER List of Pre-qualified Asbestos Abatement Subcontractors
G.
Section 00 3148- Project Directory
H.
Section 00 4001- Required Bid Forms
I.
Section 00 6113- Payment Bond (Labor and Material) (CC § 3247, 3248)
J.
Section 00 6114- Performance Bond
K.
Section 00 6217 - Certificate of Insurance for Hazardous Materials
L.
Section 00 7000 - General Conditions
M.
Section 00 7300 - Supplementary Conditions
N.
Section 00 7316- Owner Controlled Insurance Program (OCIP)
0.
Section 00 7339- Small Business Enterprises (SBE)
P.
Section 00 7349 -Project Stabilization Agreement (PSA)
Q.
Section 00 9110- Pre-Bid Clarification
R.
Section 00 9113- Addendum No. 01
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADEES (PROJECT B) LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
REVISED 5/30/2017 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 002113-1
1.03
1.04
LICENSE REQUIREMENTS A.
At the time of bid submission and throughout perfonnance of the Work, bidder shall ensure bidder and all subcontractors, regardless of tier, possess the appropriate license issued by the California Contractors State License Board for the Work to be perfonned under the Contract.
B.
OWNER will verifY bidder license before the Notice of Award.
OBTAINING BIDDING DOCUMENTS A.
Bidding Documents, including envelopes for submission of bids, may be ordered and obtained from: American Reprographics Company LLC 934 W Venice Blvd Los Angeles, CA 90015 Business Hours: Monday through Friday 7:00a.m. to 12:00 a.m. Telephone: (213) 745-3145 Facsimile: (213) 745-3160 Additional office locations are listed at the end of Section 00310. B.idders may also access vvww.cn)lanwell.com and then click on the button by "Public Planroom" to view and order Bidding Documents.
1.05
1.06
B.
Bidder shall utilize a complete set of Bidding Documents in preparing a bid.
C.
The failure or omission of bidder to receive any Bidding Document, fonn, instrument, Addendum, or other document shall not relieve bidder from any obligations with respect to the bid and/or Contract.
EXAMINATION OF PROJECT SITE, WORK AND BIDDING DOCUMENTS A.
Bidder shall thoroughly examine and be familiar with the Bidding Documents.
B.
Bidder shall, prior to submission of bid, inspect and examine the Project site of the Work and sites adjacent to the Work, compare them with any other Work being bid or presently under construction which relates to the Project for which the bid is submitted, examine the grounds and all improvements and must satisfY by examination, testing and/or other means the bidder may prefer in order to detennine the actual conditions and requirements under which the Work must be perfonned. Refer to Section 00 3000- Available Infonnation.
C.
If upon inspection and examination by bidder there is any existing improvement, condition, matter or thing, or condition or requirement of the Work which bidder does not completely understand, bidder shall inquire as set forth in Section 00 2113- Instructions to Bidders and Section 00 9110- Pre-Bid Clarification.
D.
The failure or omission of bidder to examine any Bidding Document, fonn, instrument, Addenda, or other document or to visit the Project site and be acquainted with existing conditions shall not relieve bidder from any obligations with respect to the bid and/or Contract.
HAZARDOUS MATERIALS ON OWNER PROPERTY A.
California Code of Regulations, Title 8, Section 5194 requires bidder be notified of hazardous materials they may encounter while on OWNER property.
B.
In order to comply with these regulations, reference is made to Section 00 3000 - Available Infonnation for identification of, but not limited to, the chemical inventory and all historical hazardous materials reports for the Project site. REVISED 5/30/2017 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 00 2113-2
1.07
C.
If the scope of Work for the Project includes hazardous materials abatement, OWNER representatives may prepare, and/or cause to be prepared, specific reports to be used and relied on for the Project. If such reports have been prepared for the Project, the reports will be included as Attachments to Division 02, Existing Conditions.
D.
If the scope of Work for the Project includes asbestos abatement exceeding specifications allowable for bidder to perform as set forth in Section 02 8213 - Asbestos Abatement and Asbestos Related Disturbance, the bidder or subcontractor performing the work shall be listed on the OWNER's List of Pre-qualified Asbestos Abatement Subcontractors as set forth in Section 00 3126.
E.
It is a bidder's obligation to review all hazardous materials documents, whether identified in Section 00 3000- Available Information or included as Attachments to Division 02, Existing Conditions, before submitting the bid to ensure employee protection and to ensure that all costs for performing the Work are included in the bid. ·
F.
Refer to Section 00 7000 - General Conditions for additional requirements affecting the Work of the Project.
PREY AILING WAGE RATES A.
1.08
1.09
Bidder will be required to comply with, but not limited to, the provisions of Section 00 4500Certification Requirements in its entirety.
ADDENDA A.
Clarification or any other notice of a change in the Bidding Documents will be issued only by the OWNER office of Facilities Construction Contracts and only in the form of a written Addendum, transmitted by fax or e-mail to all who are known by the issuing office to have received a complete set of Bidding Documents. Any other purported Addenda are void and unenforceable.
B.
Bidder is responsible for ascertaining the disposition of all addenda issued regardless of OWNER notification and to acknowledge all addenda in the submitted sealed bid prior to the bid opening.
C.
Copies of Addendum will be made available for inspection wherever Bidding Documents are on file for inspection.
D.
Each Addendum will be numbered, dated and identified with the Project number.
E.
Oral statements or any instructions in any form, other than Addendum as described above, shall be void and unenforceable.
F.
Addendum issued by the Owner office of Facilities Construction Contracts and not noted as being acknowledged by bidder as required in Document 00 4100- Bid and Acceptance Form, may result in the bid being deemed non-responsive.
COMPLETION OF BID FORMS A.
All documents listed in subparagraph 1.01(B) of this Section shall be completed in their entirety.
B.
Blanks: All blanks shall be completed by filling in the requested information; the bid may be deemed non-responsive if this requirement is not met.
C.
Erasures: The submitted bid shall not contain any erasures, delineation or other corrections unless each such correction is authenticated by affixing in the margin immediately opposite the correction the signature or signatures of the person or persons signing the bid.
D.
Modifications: Changes in, or additions to the bid form, recapitulations of the Work bid upon, alternative proposals, or any other modifications of the form which is not specifically called for in the Bidding Documents may result in the bid being deemed non-responsive.
REVISED 5/30/2017 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 00 2113-3
E.
Subcontractors: Bidder shall follow all instructions herein regarding the listing of subcontractors as set forth in Document 00 4336- Subletting and Subcontracting Fair Practices Act List. If the Project includes mechanical, electrical and plumbing ("MEP") components that will be performed by firsttier MEP subcontractors, bidder must only use MEP subcontractors that are (i) licensed pursuant to Section 7058 ofthe Business and Professions Code, specifically holding C-4, C-7, C-10, C-16, C-20, C-34, C-36, C-38, C-42, C-43, and C-46 licenses, and (ii) identified on the OWNER's List of Prequalified Subcontractors at least five (5) business days prior to the date of bid for the Project. The District's list of prequalified subcontractors can be found at http://www.laschools.org/newsite/pregualification/fomls, by clicking on "Subcontractor PQ Program - List of Approved MEP Subcontractors." The list of prequalified subcontractors will be updated on an ongoing basis. Bidders or MEP subcontractors that have not been prequalified by the District at least five (5) business days prior to the bid due date will not be eligible to bid or perform work on the Project. Bids that fail to adhere to these requirements will be deemed non-responsive. DISTRICT DISCLAIMER OF LIABILITY: The District requires prequalification of subcontractors in certain specialty trades. The District provides all prospective bidders with a list ofprequalified subcontractors. Bidder is required to list a prequalified subcontractor for each specified trade as set forth in the Bid Documents, or else its bid will be rejected by the District as non-responsive.
The District only represents that each specialty subcontractor identified on the list of prequalified subcontractors has satisfied the District's prequalification requirements. The District makes no representations, express or implied, regarding the ability of any prequalified subcontractor to perform work or fulfill its obligations to bidder with respect to this Project or any other project. Contractor shall be solely responsible to the District for the performance of any prequalified subcontractor. Bidder, in submitting a bid for this Project, acknowledges the District makes no warranties,. express or implied, concerning the abilities of any prequalified subcontractor, and bidder agrees to hold the District harmless from any claims, demands, or causes of action arising out of, or alleged to have arisen out of, any act or failure to act by a prequalified subcontractor. F.
Small Business Enterprises: Bidder shall follow instructions herein regarding the listing of Small Business Enterprises as set forth in Document 00 7339- Small Business Enterprises.
G.
Name and nature of bidder legal entity: bidder shall complete the bid form according to the following: 1.
The firm name or name style of the bidder shall agree with bidder license issued by the California Contractors State License Board.
2.
Bid shall be signed by bidder or an individual on behalf of the bidder and only a handwritten signature shall be acceptable.
3.
Successful bidder may be required to furnish a letter setting forth the organizational structure of bidder and further describing the firm members and those persons authorized to sign legal documents.
H.
Bidder shall make no stipulations on the bid form nor qualify the bid in any manner.
I.
Bidder, by not submitting a price for any bid item or unit price, agrees subject bid item or unit price is included in the base bid amount submitted to the OWNER. Bidder failure to submit a price for any bid item or unit price will result in the bid being deemed non-responsive. If bid items are called for and no change in the lump sum base bid is required, enter "No Change".
REVISED 5/30/2017 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 002113-4
1.10
1.11
BID GUARANTEE A.
Bidder shall attach to the bid a bid guarantee, if required herein, in the form of a certified or cashier's check or a bid bond. If bidder intends to submit a bid bond, bidder shall utilize the Bid Security Form, Document 00 4313, which shall be secured by a California-admitted surety company satisfactory to OWNER.
B.
The bid guarantee shall be applied toward, but shall not be considered a limitation upon, any damage, which may be sustained by OWNER if the bidder fails to abide by any provisions of the Notice of Intent to A ward.
C.
In the case of an irregular bid bond, OWNER will contact the surety to confirm the validity of the bid bond.
D.
Attorneys-in-Fact who sign bid bonds must file with each bond a certified and effective dated copy of their powers of attorney.
E.
An annual bid and performance bond on file in the offices of OWNER is not acceptable as a guarantee of this bid.
F.
Bid shall be guaranteed for a period of sixty (60) days from the date of submission, or as extended by mutual agreement.
BIDDERREPRESENTATIONS Bidder, by submitting a bid, warrants and represents:
1.12
A.
Bidder has read, comprehends and submits bid in full accordance with provisions of the Bidding Documents.
B.
Bidder has visited the Project site and is completely familiar with the conditions under which the Work is to be performed and the local conditions as related to the requirements of the Bidding Documents.
C.
Bid is based upon the scope, materials, equipment, and systems required by the Bidding Documents without exception.
D.
Bidder has the expertise and financial capacity to perform and complete all obligations under the Bidding Documents.
E.
The individual executing the bid forms is duly authorized and empowered to execute the bid forms on behalfofthe bidder.
F.
Bidder is aware of and will comply with all applicable code requirements in the performance ofthe Work.
G.
All expenses incurred by bidder in preparing the bid shall be borne solely by bidder.
SUBMISSION OF BID FORMS A.
Submit all documents listed in paragraph 1.0 I (B) of this Section with the sealed bid. Bid shall be submitted by the bid due date at the customer service desk located in the lobby on the first floor of 333 S. Beaudry Ave, Los Angeles, CA 90017.
B.
Submit all supplemental documents as set forth in paragraph 1.01 (C) of this ·section within five (5) business days of OWNER's request.
C.
OWNER invites bid on Document 00 4100- Bid and Acceptance Form, to be submitted at the time and place indicated in Docillnent 00 4100. REVISED 5/30/2017 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 00 2113-5
1.13
D.
Bid shall be sealed and submitted in the envelope provided by OWNER or in a similar envelope clearly marked "Bid Envelope".
E.
Bid Envelope shall plainly show California Contractors State License name of bidder, description of the Work, contract number, bid opening date; and shall be deposited with Facilities Construction Contracts prior to the time scheduled for bid opening.
F.
A bid arriving on or after the specified time is deemed non-responsive and will not be opened at the stated time.
G.
Bidder assumes all responsibility for timely delivery of the bid at the location designated for receipt of bids.
H.
Oral, telephonic, facsimile, or telegraphic bids are invalid and will not be accepted.
I.
The submission of a bid shall be taken as prima facie evidence of compliance with Section 00 2113 Instructions to Bidders. ·
MODIFICATION OR WITHDRAWAL OF BID A.
Prior to bid deadline, a submitted bid may be modified or withdrawn by notice to OWNER at the location designated for receipt of bids. Such notice shall be in writing and signed by bidder. A change so made shall be worded so as not to reveal the amount of the original bid.
B.
A withdrawn bid may be resubmitted up to the bid deadline, provided it then fully complies with the bidding requirements.
C.
Bid security shall be ten (10) percent of the amount of the base bid.
D.
If bidder claims to have made a mistake in its bid pursuant to Public Contract Code Sections 5100 et seq., OWNER must receive a written request for release from bid within five (5) business days after the opening of the bid. In this written request, bidder must indicate the date of the bid, the Project name, ask to be released from bid, and certify under penalty of peljury: 1. 2. 3. 4.
1.14
1.15
That a mistake was made, Provide details of how the mistake occurred, That the mistake made the bid materially different than intended (include original unaltered bid estimate sheets), and That the mistake was made in filling out the bid, and was not due to error in judgment, or to carelessness in inspecting the site of the project, or in reading the plans or specifications.
OPENING OF BID A.
Bid will be opened and read about one-half hour after the bid deadline at Facilities Construction Contracts, 333 S. Beaudry Ave., 281h Fl., Room 28-102, Los Angeles, CA, 90017.
B.
Bidder, its representatives, and other interested persons may be present at the bid opening.
REJECTION OF BID A.
OWNER has the right to reject any and all bids.
B.
OWNER has the right to deem any bid not accompanied by all items required by the Bidding Documents, or a bid which is in any other way deemed materially incomplete or irregular, as a nonresponsive bid.
REVISED 5/30/2017 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 00 2113-6
1.16
BID PROTEST A.
OWNER will process bid protests in a timely and consistent manner to assure that all bidders are accorded equal considerationfor the award of Contracts.
B.
All bid protests must be submitted in writing to Facilities Construction Contracts within seven (7) days after the bid opening. Any protest received after the seven (7) day timeframe will not be considered. OWNER will only consider those protests from bidders who submitted a bid for the applicable Project.
C.
The protest should include all matters the bidder wishes OWNER to consider in deciding the protest outcome. Additionally, the protest must include: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
D.
1.17
OWNER will thoroughly review and evaluate all bid protests and base its determination on the merits of the protest. A written decision will be issued by the OWNER with all findings and specified remedies considered final.
AWARD A.
OWNER has the right to waive immaterial irregularities in a bid and to accept the lowest responsive bid and responsible bidder.
B.
OWNER may ask bidder to submit a bid breakdown, additional information, and clarifications prior to award. Failure of bidder to timely submit the requested information may render a bid nonresponsive.
C.
OWNER will transmit a Notice oflntent to Award or reject all bids. Within ten (10) days after receipt of the Notice oflntent to Award, bidder shall submit to OWNER the following:
D.
1.18
School name and Project description; Project number and contract number; Nature of the protest; Documentation or references supporting the protest; Statement of the specific relief requested.
1.
One(!) executed original of the payment bond.
2.
One (I) executed original of the performance bond.
3.
Confirmation that bidder has submitted the required paperwork to enroll in Owner Controlled Insurance Program (OCIP) as set forth in Article 5 of the General Conditions.
If bidder submits all items as required by the Notice of Intent to Award within the specified time, and if all such items comply with the requirements of the Bidding Documents aiJ.d are acceptable to OWNER, OWNER will execute the Contract and issue a Notice of Award with copy of the executed Contract to the CONTRACTOR.
CONTRACT DOCUMENTS A.
After execution of the Contract by OWNER, OWNER shall provide to CONTRACTOR, at OWNER expense, three (3) copies of the Contract Documents. Any further copies of the Contract Documents are at the sole expense of the CONTRACTOR.
END OF SECTION
REVISED 5/30/2017 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 00 2113-7
SECTION 00 2515 PRE-BID MEETING (NOT MANDATORY) 1.01
GENERAL A.
Bidder may attend a pre-bid meeting for comprehensive scope delineation of the Work and/or Project.
B.
Bidder shall visit the Project site(s) prior to the bid date in order to determine the conditions normally encountered and generally recognized as inherent in the Work; take measurements, perform and/or cause to be performed all quantitative tests; observe and gather all information necessary in order to determine a comprehensive bid amount. Any bidder that does not attend a not mandatory pre-bid meeting shall be held accountable for any reasonably foreseen condition had they attended the meeting.
c.
Additional visits to the Project site(s) shall be coordinated through the Owner Authorized Representative (OAR).
1.02
PRE-BID MEETING A.
A pre-bid meeting will occur in the administrative office as listed below: 1.
School:
Los Angeles High School
2.
Street:
4650 W Olympic Blvd
3.
City:
Los Angeles, CA
4.
Time:
!O:OOAM
5.
Date:
November 17,2017
B.
Sign-in sheets will be provided for issuing any changes to the Bidding Documents. Bidder must print their name legibly, sign their name, submit business cards for identification purposes, and comply with all requirements of the sign-in sheet.
c.
The bidder is responsible for ensuring that they have complete Bidding Documents including all Addenda provided by the OWNER, prior to the bid due date. NO VERBAL CHANGES
1.03 A.
Nothing said or discussed before, during, at or after this meeting shall in any way affect bidder's obligation to strictly comply with the Bidding Documents. END OF SECTION
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES (PROJECT B) LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
REVISED 01/05/2012 PRE-BID MEETING (NOT MANDATORY) 00 2515-1
SECTION 00 3000 AVAILABLE INFORMATION
1.01
GENERAL A.
This Section sets forth the following information made available to bidder. The provided information is not part of the Contract Documents.
B.
The information is provided in conjunction with, but not limited to, the provisions of Sections 4.2, 4.3, 4.5, and 4.6 of the General Conditions.
1.02
SUBSURFACE CONDITIONS A.
In the preparation of the Drawings and Specifications, ARCHITECT and/or ARCHITECT Consultants have relied upon the following reports of exploration and tests of subsurface conditions at, or contiguous, to the Project site of the Work: 1.
Fire Alarm NFPA 72 Certification- Refer to Spec Section 21 1313 Exhibit 'A'.
2. RTA dated 04/06/2017, Asbestos and lead reports (FETU report for Phase I and Phase II dated 01116/2017) supplied by the OWNER's consultants to be identified and inserted in Division 02, under Section 02 2600 Abatement of Hazardous Materials, Section 02 8213 and 02 8216 for Asbestos Abatement and Section 02 8333 for Lead Abatement 3. DSA Approved Drawings for Reference: FA-2.0 !-Partial Site Plan West Portion, FA-4: Admin! Classroom & Drama Studio First Floor Plan (South Portion), FA-1.1- FACP and RPS Schedule and Wire Legend, FA-26- Riser Diagram, FA-30- Details, FA-31- Details. B.
The information is provided for bidder investigation. OWNER does not warrant the accuracy or completeness thereof. Bidder is responsible for conducting all tests, investigations, sampling, and/or inquiries to ascertain all actual conditions that may affect the Work. PHYSICAL CONDITIONS
1.03 A.
In the preparation of the Drawings and Specifications, ARCHITECT and/or ARCHITECT Consultants have relied upon the following drawings, descriptions, photographs, and/or mapping of physical conditions, other than Subsurface Facility, which are at, or contiguous, to the site of the Work: 1.
Fire Alarm NFP A 72 Certification - Refer to Spec Section 21 1313 Exhibit 'A'.
2. RT A dated 04/06/2017, Asbestos and lead reports (FETU report for Phase I and Phase II dated 01116/2017) supplied by the OWNER's consultants to be identified and inserted in Division 02, under Section 02 2600 Abatement of Hazardous Materials, Section 02 8213 and 02 8216 for Asbestos Abatement and Section 02 8333 for Lead Abatement 3. DSA Approved Drawings for Reference: FA-2.01-Partial Site Plan West Portion, FA-4: Admin! Classroom & Drama Studio First Floor Plan (South Portion), FA-1.1- FACP and RPS Schedule and Wire Legend, FA-26- Riser Diagram, FA-30- Details, FA-31- Details. B.
The information is provided for bidder investigation. OWNER does not warrant the accuracy or completeness thereof. Bidder is responsible for conducting all tests, investigations, sampling, and/or inquiries to ascertain all actual conditions that may affect the Work.
1.04
SUBSURFACE FACILITY- NOT USED
1.05
AVAILABILITY
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
REVISED 09/12/2014 AVAILABLE INFORMATION 00 3000-1
A.
Copies of these reports, assessments, drawings and other information may be examined at BOA Government Services, 370 Crenshaw Blvd., Ste. El04, Torrance, CA 90503, (310) 783-5129 during regular business hours of ARCHITECT.
END OF SECTION
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
REVISED 09/12/2014 AVAILABLE INFORMATION 00 3000-2
•
•
SECTI.3126 OWNER'S LIST OF PRE-QUALIFIED ASBESTOS ABATEMENT SUBCONTRACTORS August 7, 2017
If the. scope of Work for the Project includes asbestos abatement exceeding specifications allowable for bidder to perform as set forth in Section 02 8213- Asbestos Abatement
.
and Asbestos Related Disturbances, the bidder or subcontractor shall be listed on the OWNER's List of Pre-9ualified Asbestos Abatement Subcontractors CONTACT
COMPANY
ADDRESS
PHONE
FAX
VENDOR# DOSI-I #
LIC#
Lie Classification C-2, C39, C22, ASB
American Services Group of California, Inc.
Carls Adams
300 S. Walnut Avenue, #403 San Dimas, CA 91773
909-592-6007
909-592-8660
1000010281
736
769061
American Technologies, Inc.
Tom Sandoval
21 0 W. Baywood Avenue Orange, CA 92865
714-283-9990
714-283-9995
1000013123
213
B, C47, C21, C39, 571784 C-6, C15, C-61, C22, ASB, I-IAZ
Asbestos-lostant Response, Inc.
Gabriel Cristofaro
323-7 33-0508
323-732-3414
1000002152
812
795278
Castlerock Environmental, Inc.
Danny De La Rosa RamiAwwad
562-644-8360 562-644-8393
562-941-9204
1000012272
788
776105
562-249-8131
562-381-8131
1000002679
1044
970089
562-438-7999
562-438-7997
1000002586
820
811415
9 51-479-0700
95.1-479-0701
TBD
224
572682
7i4-385-1490
714-385-1878
1000000678
045
481416
866-945-5379
626-927-93 70
1000011823
1098
888905
B, C33, C21, C10, C15, C22, ASB
562-209-0541
562-236-2725
1000002760
869
860131
B, C2, C7, ClO, C21, C22, ASB, HAZ
310-732-1991
310-832-4989
1000006370
828
765851
C21, C12, A, C22, ASB, HAZ
714-581-6013
1000014221
1143
959469
C21, C22, C8, ASB
Rey Rivera
Eagle Contracting, Inc. Environmental Construction Group, Inc.
I
i
Clif Shirley
3517 W. Washington Boulevard Los Angeles, CA 90018 10040 Painter A venue Santa Fe Springs, CA 90670 6720 Hoover Avenue Whittier, CA 90601 3271 E. 19th Street Signal Hill, CA 90755 2025 Tandem Way Norco, CA 92860 2300 E. Orangewood Avenue Anaheim, CA 92806 7459 Toll Drive Rosemead, C\ 91770 2330 E. Cherry Industrial Circle Long Beach, CA 90805 1536 W. 25th Street #248 San Pedro, CA 90732
Janus Corporation
Campbell Scott
Karcher Environmental, Inc.
Joe De Los Santos
Maier International, Inc.
Brian Clark Gil Ramirez
Matrix Environmental, Inc.
Adam Lowe
National Demolition Contractors
Jennifer Martin
Specialty Contracting Company dba Diversified Demolition Company
James Baldwin
1304 S. Allee Street Anaheim, CA 92805
714-581-6011
Dave Stefko
15220 Raymer Street Van Nuys, CA 91405
818-782-4604 I 818-782c5099 I 1000006283
B, C-2, C21, C22, ASB, I-IAZ A, B, C2, C15, C21, C22, .ASB, I-I.r\Z B, C21, C22, ASB, I-IAZ B, ASB, C21, C22, HAZ A, B, ASB, C-2, 1-IAZ, C21, C22 ASB, B, C-2, C21, C22
FOR ROOFING ONLY: Eberhard Roofing
B,C20, C22, C39, C43, ASB
Revised 817/2017 OWNER's List of Pre-Qualified Asbestos Abatement Subcontractors 00 3126-1
SECTION 00 3148 PROJECT DIRECTORY 1.01
GENERAL A
1.02
This Section provides contact information relative to the Work of the Project.
SPECIFIC A
Name of Project: Project Number(s): Project Description:
Los Angeles High School 23.11659, 10367253 Corwin Theater Repair & P.O.T. Upgrades
B.
Location(s):
4650 West Olympic Blvd. Los Angeles, CA 90019
c.
OWNER:
Los Angeles Unified School District (LAUSD) Facilities Services Division 333 South Beaudry A venue, 23rd Floor Los Angeles, CA 90017
D.
OWNER Authorized Representative (OAR):
Richmond Carlton, Project Execution- Central Region 333 S. Beaudry Ave., 19th Floor Los Angeles, CA 90017 (213) 241-8345 richmond.carlton@ lausd.net
E.
All Pre-Bid Clarifications shall be directed to:
Richmond Carlton, Project Execution- Central Region 333 S. Beaudry Ave., 19th Floor Los Angeles, CA 90017 (213) 241-8345 richmond.carlton@ lausd.net
F.
ARCHITECT:
AnthonyWu BOA Government Services 370 Crenshaw Blvd, Ste. E104 Torrance, CA 90503
G.
MECHANICAL ENGINEER:
Noe Portilla PBS Engineers Inc. 2100 East Route 66, Ste 101 Glendora, CA 91740
H.
ELECTRICAL ENGINEER:
Kunal Shah PBS Engineers Inc. 2100 East Route 66, Ste 101 Glendora, CA 917 40
I.
STRUCTURAL ENGINEER:
Gary Chang Century Structural Engineering 24719 Narbone Ave Lomita, CA 90717
J.
CIVIL ENGINEER:
Rodulfo Niere Uniplan Engineering, Inc. 550 E. Carson Plaza Drive, Ste 116 Carson, CA 90746
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
REVISED 4/20/2016 PROJECT DIRECTORY 00 3148-1
K.
Distribution of Bidding Documents:
American Reprographics Company LLC 934 W Venice Blvd Los Angeles, CA 90015 Business Hours: 7:00AM- 12:00AM Phone: (213) 745-3145 Additional locations are listed at the end of this section.
L.
Prequalification/ Safety Requirements/ Bidding Information/ Addenda! Notices to Proceed! Stop Notices:
LAUSD- Facilities Construction Contracts 333 S. Beaudry Ave., 28th Floor Los Angeles, CA 90017 Business Hours: 7:30AM- 4:00PM Phone: (213) 241-2650
M.
OCIP Administrator
LAUSD- Division of Risk Management & Insurance Services 333 South Beaudry Avenue, 28th Floor Los Angeles, CA 90017-5141 Phone: (213) 241-1843 Fax: (213) 241-8993
N.
Prevailing Wage Issues I Information:
LAUSD- Labor Compliance Program 333 South Beaudry Avenue· 21st Floor Los Angeles, CA 90017 Phone: (213) 241-4665
0.
Project Stabilization Agreement
LAUSD- Project Stabilization Agreement Administration 333 South Beaudry Avenue, 23rct Floor Los Angeles, CA 90017 Fax: (213) 241-8356 Email:
[email protected]
P.
Filing of Claims/ Copies
Los Angeles Unified School District Executive Officer of the Board 333 S. Beaudry Avenue, 24th Floor Los Angeles, CA 90017 Copies to: OAR as listed in item D. above. Office of the General Counsel - FSD Los Angeles Unified School District 333 South Beaudry Avenue, 23rd Floor Los Angeles, CA 90017 LAUSD- Construction Claims Unit 333 South Beaudry Avenue, 23rct Floor Los Angeles, CA 90017
Q.
Owner contact as per Section 00 2113, 1.06, c.
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
Los Angeles Unified School District Facilities Environmental Technical Unit 1240 South Naomi Avenue Los Angeles CA 90021 (213) 745-1450
REVISED 4/20/2016 PROJECT DIRECTORY 003148-2
R.
Owner contact as per Section 08 7100, 2.03, C, 1, b.
Los Angeles Unified School District Central Lock Shop 1240 South Naomi Avenue Los Angeles CA 90021 (213) 745-1650 END OF SECTION
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
REVISED 4/20/2016 PROJECT DIRECTORY 00 3148-3
-•
e
e
II
~
ARC Southern California Locations
Document Solutions
Beverly Hills 900 S. Robertson Boulevard Los Angeles, CA 90035 Phone: (310) 657-Q040 Fax: (310) 6~2-6297 Walter Mayen e:
[email protected]
Irvine Spectrum 9803 Research Irvine, CA 92618 Phone: (949) 753-4700 Fax: (949) 753-1149 Stephanie Soroka e:
[email protected]
Murrieta 41521 Date Street, Suite 101 Murrieta, CA 92562 Phone: (951) 445-4480 Fax: (951) 461-8977 Marlo Machuca e:
[email protected]
City of Industry · 1207 A John Reed Ct. Oty of Industry, CA 91745 Phone: (626) 333-7005
Lancaster 42342 10th street #C Lancaster, CA 93534 Phone: (661) 726-5531 Fax: (661) 726-5530 Undsay Knight e:
[email protected]
Ontario 3546 Concours St Ontario, CA 91764 Phone: (909) 476-7682 Fax: (909) 466-4707 Mario Machuca e:
[email protected]
Fax:(626)961~368
Kelly Wlntermote e:
[email protected] Corona 850 E Parkridge, SUite 101 ~!.~~~·- ~ 92879 Phone: (951) 280-4430 . Fax: (951) 738-1730 Richard Fernandez e:
[email protected]
· Long Beach'
San Bernardino 328 E. Commerical Rd., Suite A-110 San Bernardino, CA 92408 Phone: (909) 381-6535 Fax: (909) 381-4590 Mario Machuca e:
[email protected] ·San Diego 1200 4th Avenue San Diego, CA 92101 Phone: (619) 232-8440 Fax: (619) 232~043 Brian Revere e:
[email protected]
Orange
1
Sorrento Mesa
1435 Daisy Street . ·- ... _ ·.· -~W Chapman..IJnitA __ ~- ~-·-/-··· . S~.Mira.M~ Blvd, SUite A - ----: tong Beach, CA 90813 -- ---- ---- ···--EJTange, CA 92858 · - ----------·-1 -·-Siih-Oiego, CA 92121 · Phone: (562) 436-9761 Phone: (714) 532-4852 1 Phone: (858) 362:0999 Fax: (562) 437-0741 Fax: (714) 532-5136 1 Brian Revere Edgar Mendoza Mike Crowley · ; e:
[email protected] e:
[email protected] e:
[email protected] ;
Valencia 27891 Smyth Drive Valencia, CA 91355 Phone: (661) 702-9684 Fax: (661) 702-9743 Nicolas Jaramillo e:
[email protected] VanNuys 15013 caUfa Street Van Nuys, CA 91411 Phone:(818)908-Q222 Fax: (818) 785-9352 DannyMeza e:
[email protected] Ventura 5917 Olivas Park Drive Suite C Ventura, CA 93003 Phone: (805) 6SS:0156 Fax: (805) 658-8108 Julia Bondarenko e:
[email protected]
Costa Mesa 345 Ointon St Costa Mesa, CA 92626 Phone: (949) 660-1150 Fax:(714)424-8526 Kevin Oermann e: kevin;
[email protected]
Los Angeles 934 W Venice Boulevard los Angeles, CA 90015 Phone: (213) 745-3145 Fax: (213) 745-3160 Angel Martinez e:
[email protected]
Pasadena 681 South Raymond Avenue Pasadena, CA 91105 Phone: (626) 583-1122 Fax: (626) 583-1133 Thomas Gleason e:
[email protected]
Thousand oaks 171 E. Thousand Oaks Blvd. Suite 108 Thousand Oaks, CA 91360 Phone: (80S) 496-0993 Fax: (805) 658-7108 Louie Garza e:
[email protected]
West Los Angeles 2435 Military Avenue. los Angeles, CA 90064 Phone: (310) 477-6501 Fax: (310) 477-1819 Mitchell Caceres e:
[email protected]
Glendale 628 Allen Ave. Glendale, CA 91201 Phone: (818) 241-4181 Fax: (818) 242-0506 Oscar Murillo . e:
[email protected]
Los Angeles CBD 609S.Oiive Los Angeles, CA 90014 Phone: (213) 977-8200 Fax: (213) 977-9200 Darlene Smith e:
[email protected]
Riverside 4295 Main Street Riverside, CA 92501 Phone: (951) 686-Q530 Fax: (951) 683~454 Jason Albin e:
[email protected]
Tustin 560 West First Street Tustin, CA 92780 Phone: (714) 838-2855 Fax: (714) 665-2038 Matt Schwartz e:
[email protected]
Woodland Hills 22522 Ventura Blvd Woodland Hills, CA 91367 Phone: (81&) 224-3557 Fax: (818) 224-2265 Bobby Rush e:
[email protected]
'
I I
I
SECTION 00 4001 REQUIRED BID FORMS PART 1- GENERAL 1.01
SECTION INCLUDES A.
1.02
As stated in Section 00 2113 -Instructions to Bidders, this Section contains the original bid forms and supplemental bid forms that shall be utilized by the bidder in preparing and submitting the bid, except for the document referenced in section 1.02B below.
ORIGINAL BID FORMS FOR USE BY BIDDER A.
Fill out and submit the following original bid forms with your sealed bid: 1.
Document 00 4100- Bid and Acceptance Form (signature required)- Lump Sum
2.
Document 00 4313- Bid Security Form (signatures required)
3.
Document 00 4336- Subletting and Subcontracting Fair Practices Act List
4.
Document 00 4500- Certification Requirements (signature required)
5.
Document 00 4519- Non-Collusion Affidavit (signature required)
B.
Both Bids (Project A- Bid No. 1810033 & Project B- 1810034) shall be submitted in the same sealed bid envelop
C.
Bidder shall submit Small Business Enterprises compliance requirements and additional supplemental subcontractor information within five (5) days from the date of OWNER request. The document for actual use by the bidder will be provided to the bidder by the OWNER. Failure to submit within five (5) days may render the bid non-responsive.
END OF SECTION
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES (PROJECT B) LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
REVISED 07/30/2014 REQUIRED BID FORMS 00 4001-1
DOCUMENT 00 4100 BID AND ACCEPTANCE FORM Bidder Name: - - - - - - - - - -
1.01
1.02
BID SUBMISSION INSTRUCTIONS A.
Submit this form, sealed in an envelope provided by OWNER, plainly showing bidder State Contractor License name and number, description of the Work and the bid opening date; and deposit with Los Angeles Unified School District, Facilities Construction Contracts, 333 S. Beaudry Ave., Los Angeles, CA 90017. The bid shall be submitted by the bid'due date at the customer service desk located in the first floor lobby of the building. The bid will be opened and read on the 28th Floor, Room 28-102, about one-half hour after the bid deadline.
B.
Bidders shall keep the Bid and Acceptance Form intact and return all pages when submitting bid.
C.
Failure to submit the complete Bid and Acceptance Form may invalidate the bid.
BID DUE DATE: Before 10:00 A.M. on DECEMBER 05, 2017
The only acceptable time of receipt is the date/time stamp imprinted upon the bid package by the representative of Facilities Construction Contracts. 1.03
PROJECT IDENTIFICATION: A.
The undersigned, is familiar with the terms of the Contract, the local conditions affecting performance of Contract, the cost of the Work at the place where the Work is to be done, and with the Drawings, Specifications and all other Bidding Documents. The undersigned hereby proposes and agrees to perform, within the Contract Time stipulated, the Work including all of its component parts; and to provide and furnish any and all of the labor, materials, tools, apparatus, facilities, expendable equipment, and all utility and transportation services necessary to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract and complete all Work in a workmanlike manner for: REPLACE BLEACHERS- WEST GYM, 10367531,23.11816 (PROJECT A) & CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & PATH OF TRAVEL UPGRADES, 10367253, 23.11659 (PROJECT B) @ LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL; in strict conformity with the Drawings and Specifications prepared by: Facilities Services Division Los Angeles Unified School District
1.04
Bidder acknowledges the following Addendum: PROJECT A I BID NO. 1810033 Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number
PROJECT B I BID NO. 1810034 Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES (PROJECT B) LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
REVISED 9/29/2017 BID AND ACCEPTANCE FORM 004100-1
1.05
BASE BID (MUST BE FULLY COMPLETED BY BIDDER) A. Bidder will complete the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents for the following base bid amount for a)
LOS ANGELES HS- REPLACE BLEACHERS- WEST GYM (PROJECT A- BID NUMBER 1810033) ($. _ _ _ _ _ _ _),
(numeric figures) b). LOS ANGELES HS- CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES (PROJECT B I BID NUMBER 1810034) ($_ _ _ _ _ __
(numeric figures)
TOTAL LUMP SUM OF VOLUME 1 & 2 (AWARDED AS A WHOLE)* *SUBMIT IN SAME SEALED BID ENVELOP
($._ _ _ _ _ __
(numeric figures)
The current IFB consists of two (2) project numbers. For the purposes of allocation of funding, Project A will be considered to comprise 62% of the contract, Project B will be 38%. The approved Schedule of Values will be based on this breakdown.
1.06
BID ITEMS- N/A
1.07
The base bid amount includes all Contract Allowances, if any, as set forth in the Specifications or as described in Section 01 2100- Allowances. N/A
1.08
The base bid amount includes all applicable taxes and does not include Federal Excise Tax as set forth in Article 6.38 of the General Conditions.
1.09
BASIS OF AWARD OF CONTRACT: A
If additive or deductive bid items are not set forth in the Bidding Documents, the lowest responsive bid shall be determined by the lowest bid amount for the base bid.
B.
OWNER RESERVES THE RIGHT TO REJECT ANY AND ALL BIDS. Article 1- Scope of Work
The CONTRACTOR shall perform, within the time stipulated in. the Contract Documents, all of which are incorporated herein and shall provide all labor, materials, equipment, tools, utility services, transportation and everything else necessary to complete in a workmanlike manner, and in exact compliance with the terms of the Contract Documents, all of the Work required in connection with the following titled Project:
LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL REPLACE BLEACHERS WEST GYM (PROJECT A)- BID NO. 1810033 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR AND P.O.T. UPGRADES (PROJECT B)- BID N0.1810034 [Contract Number/Project Number(s)- to be .filled in by Facilities Construction Contracts]
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES (PROJECT B) LOS ANGELES IDGH SCHOOL
REVISED 912912017 BID AND ACCEPTANCE FORM 00 4100-2
Article 2 - Time for Completion
The Work shall be commenced on the date stated in the OWNER Notice to Proceed. The time period for Contract Completion of the Work shall be 395 calendar days to run concurrently (Project A & Project B) from the date set forth in the Notice to Proceed issued by the OWNER, and in accordance with the Contract regarding milestones and liquidated damages. TIME IS OF THE ESSENCE. Article 3 - Hold Harmless, Defense and Indemnification To the fullest extent permitted by law, the CONTRACTOR, even if it is without fault itself, shall indemnify, defend and hold harmless the OWNER, the Board, the OCIP Administrator, and its and their respective officers, employees, program administrators, representatives, agents and consultants, from every liability, claim, loss, cause of action, action, demand, penalty, cost, expense (including without limitation, attorneys' fees) related to or arising from: 1. Any injury to person or property sustained by the CONTRACTOR or by any person, firm, or corporation, employed directly or indirectly by it upon or in connection with the Work;
2. Any injury to person or property sustained by any person, firm, or corporation, caused by any act, neglect, default, or omission of the CONTRACTOR or any person, firm, or corporation, directly or indirectly employed by it upon or in connection with the Work, whether the injury or damage occurs upon or adjacent to the Work; 3. The furnishing or use of any copyrighted or uncopyrighted composition, secret process, patented or unpatented invention, article, or appliance under the Contract Documents; and 4.
As otherwise provided in the Contract Documents.
The CONTRACTOR at its own cost, expense, and risk, shall defend all legal proceedings that may be brought against all such potential indemnities for any such liability, claim, loss, cause of action, action, demand, penalty, cost and expense, and satisfy any resulting judgment that may be rendered against any of them whether or not the liability, claim, loss, cause of action, action, demand, penalty, cost and expense (including without limitation, attorneys' fees) was actually or allegedly caused wholly or in part through the negligence or other tortious conduct of any of them. OWNER shall have the right to approve counsel proposed for any such defense and shall be consulted with regard to any proposed settlement. This Article 3 is not meant to require the CONTRACTOR to defend, indemnify or hold harmless the potential indemnities from their own active negligence, such as is prohibited by Civil Code Section 2782.
Article 4 - Insurance The OWNER maintains an Owner Controlled Insurance Program (OCIP). The specific provisions of that program are set forth in the General Conditions. CONTRACTOR will provide its own insurance coverage as to all types of insurance not provided for in the program and relevant to the Project in amounts of coverage and by carriers approved by the OWNER. Article 5 - Bonding If the amount of original award of the Contract exceeds TWENTY-FIVE THOUSAND DOLLARS ($25,000.00), the CONTRACTOR shall furnish to the OWNER Payment Bond (Material and Labor). CONTRACTOR shall also provide a Faithful Performance Bond. Both Bonds shall be for 100% of the Contract Amount and contain the terms and conditions required by Articles 5.16 through 5.17 of the General Conditions. The CONTRACTOR is also required to submit all other bonds as required by the Contract Documents.
a
CORWIN THEATER REP AIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES (PROJECT B) LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
REVISED 9/29/2017 BID AND ACCEPTANCE FORM 00 4100-3
Article 6 - Provisions Required by Law Deemed Inserted Each and every provision of law and clause required by law to be inserted in the Contract Documents shall be deemed to be inserted and the Contract Documents shall be read and enforced as though it were included in the Contract Documents. If through mistake or otherwise any such provision is not inserted, or is not correctly inserted, upon application of either party the Contract Documents shall forthwith be physically amended to make such insertion or correction.
BID DATE: _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ , 20_ __
By_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ ___
(SEAL)
(Firm Name as it appears on Contractor's State License)
(Authorized person to sign bid- print name)
(Signature of authorized person to sign bid)
Business A d d r e s s : - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Phone No. _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __ Fax No. _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ ___ Email Address _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES (PROJECT B) LOS ANGELES HIGHSCHOOL
REVISED 9/29/2017 BID AND ACCEPTANCE FORM 004100-4
:-_;:~,:-"~' t.. L,
'F(m FQc ·usE- c5Nli:¥
.. ~~ .• ~~ }, ~~·~
~
J
'l·~
- . ! I .......
~
·::-·::
"'"""'' _;.,-""
tl
Contract Number 1.10
0 0
ACCEPTANCE
with Plans withSpecs
This Contract is made and entered into on the date set forth on Page 4 of this Contract, by and between the Los Angeles Unified School District, by and through its Board of Education (hereinafter the "OWNER"), and
{Name as it appears on Contractor's State License- to be filled in by OWNER I Facilities Construction Contracts} ___________________ ,a ___________________________________________________________ {sole ownership, partnership, corporation, joint venture, or other} This Contract is for the purpose of constructing that Project identified as LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL and commonly referred to as REPLACE BLEACHERS WEST GYM (PROJECT A) & CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & PATH OF TRAVEL UPGRADES (PROJECT B) CONTRACTOR is the lowest responsible bidder in response to an Invitation to Bid issued by the OWNER and represents that it is qualified to perform all of the terms, covenants, promises and conditions of this Contract.
Article 7 - Contract Amount The OWNER shall pay, and the CONTRACTOR shall accept, in full payment for performance as required by the Contract Documents, the sum of (To be filled in by OWNER I Office of Facilities Construction Contracts) ($ ), subject to any additions or deductions, if any, as provided in the Contract Documents. It is understood and agreed that all applicable taxes are included in the Contract Amount and that the Federal Excise Tax, from which the OWNER is exempt, is not included. The OWNER, upon request, will furnish the CONTRACTOR such Tax Exemption Certificates as may be required by the Manufacturer or Dealer. All of the above-named Contract Documents are intended to be complementary. Work required by one of the above-named Contract Documents and not by others shall be done as if required by all.
, 20_ _ at Los Angeles, California. Executed on (To be filled in by Chief Procurement Officer, Deputy Chief Procurement Officer (Facilities) (up to $20M), Director of Contracts Administration (Facilities) (up to $1M), Facilities Contracts Administrator (up to $500K), or Contract Administration Manager (up to $300K)) LOS ANGELES UNIFIED SCHOOL DISTRICT By: _ _ _ _ _ _,--_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __ CHIEF PROCUREMENT OFFICER, DEPUTY CHIEF PROCUREMENT OFFICER (FACILITIES), DIRECTOR OF CONTRACTS ADMINISTRATION (FACILITIES), FACILITIES CONTRACTS ADMINISTRATOR, OR CONTRACT ADMINISTRATION MANAGER BLUE INK SIGNATURE REQUESTED
FAILURE TO SUBMIT TIDS FORM OR ANY MODIFICATION(S) TO THIS FORM SHALL RENDER THE BID NON-RESPONSIVE END OF DOCUMENT
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES (PROJECT B) LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
REVISED 9/29/2017 BID AND ACCEPTANCE FORM 00 4100-5
.J.J.
DOCUMENT 00 4313 BID SECURITY FORM Bond Number _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __ Surety
-----------------~--------------------------------------------------------- Bidder THE LOS ANGELES UNIFIED SCHOOL DISTRICT, acting by and through its BOARD OF EDUCATION OF THE CITY OF LOS ANGELES ................................................................ OWNER/Obligee TEN PERCENT (10%) OF THE AMOUNT OF THE BASE BID ATTACHED ................................................ Amount of Bond Project Description: CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES (PROJECT B)@ LOS ANGELES HS Date of Bid Opening: Project Number(s): 23.11659 Contract Number: 1810034 WHEREAS, the bidder is herewith submitting to OWNER the above described bid, which is attached hereto and made part thereof. NOW, THEREFORE, the Surety and the bidder are firmly held and bound, jointly and severally, to OWNER in the amount set forth above, lawful money of the United States, for which payment we bind ourselves, our heirs, executors, administrators, and assigns, jointly and severally, by these presents. If the bid or any part of the bid shall be accepted and a contract awarded to the bidder by OWNER, and if the bidder shall well, truly and fully perform all the terms, conditions, and obligations to be kept and performed on the part of the bidder, and shall within the required time enter into a written contract and shall furnish bond(s) as required by the contract and specifications, or the call for bids, or by law, with a surety acceptable to OWNER, then this obligation shall be void; otherwise it shall remain in full force and effect for a minimum period of 60 days from the date of the bid, or longer if required by law, or longer through mutual agreement of the OWNER and bidder. This instrument and the amount of money set forth above shall be applied toward, but shall not be considered a limitation upon, any damages which may be sustained by OWNER if the bidder fails to execute a written contract, or fails to secure the necessary bond(s), or fails to comply with all the terms, conditions and obligations to be kept and performed on the part of the bidder. The maximum amount of Surety's liability claimable and recoverable under this instrument shall be and hereby is expressly limited to the amount of money set forth above. In addition to the liability of the Surety under this bond, the Court shall award to the prevailing party in any suit brought on this bond reasonable attorneys' fees and costs, even if such amounts exceed the penal sum of this bond.
Dated this _______ day of _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 20 ____ ACKNOWLEDGMENT BY AN ATIORNEY-IN-FACT State of _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
ss
BIDDER
County o f - - - - - - - - - - - - By ( s i g n e d ) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Signature of Authorized Person
On - - - - - - - - - - - - - - • before me,
Title _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ ,a Notary Public
Personally a p p e a r e d - - - - - - - - - - - Personally known to me (or proved to me on the basis of satisfactory evidence) to be the person whose name is subscribed to this instrument and acknowledged to SURETY me that he/she executed the same in his/her authorized capacity, and that by his/her signature on the instrument By ( s i g n e d ) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - the person, or the entity upon behalf of which the person Signature of Attorney-In-Fact acted, executed the instrument. WITNESS my hand and official seal. (Notary Seal) Address _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __ City, S t a t e - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Telephone-----------------------
Signature of Notary
ATTACH CERTIFIED COPY OF POWER OF ATTORNEY AND ALL-PURPOSE ACKNOWLEDGMENT. (THIS DOCUMENT CANNOT BE ALTERED, MODIFIED, OR CHANGED.)
[If you do not submit a certified or cashier's check, failure to submit this form shall render your bid non-responsive] END OF DOCUMENT
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES (PROJECT B) LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
REVISED 01105/2012 BID SECURITY FORM 004313-1
DOCUMENT 00 4336 SUBLETTING AND SUBCONTRACTING FAIR PRACTICES ACT LIST 1.01
GENERAL A.
Bidder Name: In performance of Work, bidder is required to comply with the Subletting and Subcontracting Fair Practices Act as set forth in, but not limited to, Public Contract Code Sections 4100 et. seq. Violation of any provision of the Act shall subject the bidder to the penalties and other consequences prescribed in the Act.
B.
In compliance with Section 4104 of the Public Contract Code, bidder submits the following complete list of each subcontractor who will perform Work or labor or render service or specially fabricate and install a portion of the Work in an amount in excess of one-half of one percent of the total bid.
c.
Bidder shall list only one subcontractor for each portion of the Work. If the Project includes mechanical, electrical and plumbing ("MEP") components that will be performed by first-tier MEP subcontractors, bidder must only use MEP subcontractors that are (i) licensed pursuant to Section 7058 of the Business and Professions Code, specifically holding C-4, C-7, C-10, C-16, C-20, C-34, C-36, C-38, C-42, C-43, and C46 licenses, and (ii) identified on the OWNER's List of Prequalified Subcontractors at least five (5) business days prior to the date of bid for the Project. Bids that fail to adhere to these requirements will be deemed non-responsive.
D.
Bidder, by not listing a subcontractor for a certain portion of the Work, certifies bidder is qualified to perform and will perform said portion of Work itself.
E.
Certain penalties may be imposed for the subsequent employment of an unlisted subcontractor.
F.
No contractor or subcontractor may be listed on a bid proposal for a public works project (submitted on or after March 1, 2015) unless registered with the Department of Industrial Relations (DIR) pursuant to Labor Code section 1725.5 [with limited exceptions from this requirementfor bid purposes only under Labor Code section 1771.1(a)].
TYPE(S) OF WORK
PROJECT B I BID NO. 1810034 -
NAME OF SUBCONTRACTOR(S) (Firm Name as it appears on Contractor's State License)
LICENSE NO.
DIR REGISTRATION NO.
LOCATION OF BUSINESS (CITY. STATE)
'
(THIS DOCUMENT CANNOT BE ALTERED, MODIFIED, OR CHANGED) [YOU MUST SUBMIT THIS FORM EVEN IF YOU DO NOT INTEND TO LIST SUBCONTRACTORS. FAILURE TO SUBMIT THIS FORM SHALL RENDER THE BID NON-RESPONSIVE] END OF DOCUMENT
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES (PROJECT B) REVISED 7/1912017 LOS ANGELES lllGH SCHOOL SUBLETTING AND SUBCONTRACTING FAIR PRACTICES ACT LIST 00 4336-1
DOCUMENT 00 4500 CERTIFICATION REQUIREMENTS 1.01
GENERAL
BidderName: - - - - - - - - - - - - -
A
Bidder must comply and abide by the certification requirements contained herein by completing this document in its entirety and submitting with sealed bid.
B.
Failure to submit this document shall render the bid non-responsive.
C.
Bidder is advised that no contractor or subcontractor may be listed on a bid proposal for a public works project (submitted on or after March 1, 2015) unless registered with the Department of Industrial Relations (DIR) pursuant to Labor Code section 1725.5 [with limited exceptions from this requirement for bid purposes only under Labor Code section 177l.l(a)]. No contractor or subcontractor may be awarded a contract for public work on a public works project (awarded on or after Aprill, 2015) unless registered with the DIR pursuant to Labor Code section 1725.5. This project is subject to compliance monitoring and enforcement by the DIR and the Los Angeles Unified School District's DIR-approved Labor Compliance Program.
1.02
ETIITCS POLICY A
This certifies and confirms bidder is familiar with and in compliance with all provisions of the OWNER Ethics Policy including: 1) any employees, subcontractors or consultants, who, within the last three (3) years have been or are employees of the OWNER are disclosed below; 2) the bidder or its subcontractors have not compensated any former OWNER employee or consultant to influence any action on a matter pending with the OWNER, if that employee, within the last 12 months, held a OWNER position in which they personally and substantially participated in that matter; 3) the bidder or its subcontractors does not employ a former OWNER employee or consultant who, while serving in a OWNER position within the last two (2) years, substantially participated in the development of the bidding requirements, specifications, or in any part of the contract's contracting process; 4) the bidder has not employed as a lobbyist any former OWNER employee who left the OWNER within the last 12 months; and 5) the bidder did not receive any confidential information in connection with the procurement.
B.
The bidder further certifies that set forth below are the names of all former Board of Education Members and employees it intends to employ in connection with the services to be performed by the contract, who have been Board of Education Members or employed by the OWNER within the last three (3) years. (IF TillS SECTION DOES NOT APPLY, PLEASE INDICATE "NONE" OR "N/A" BELOW.)
Former Board of Education Members, Employees, Consultants, Subcontractors:
C.
The OWNER Ethics Policy is available online through the following link: http://ethics.lausd.net/default.asp?Page=portal2 contractorConsultantCode
D.
Bidder shall answer the questions below to determine its need to register under the OWNER's revamped Lobbying Disclosure Program. 1.
Do you or others in your organization do the following: (please check all that apply)
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES (PROJECT B) LOS ANGELES IDGH SCHOOL
REVISED 5/30/2017 CERTIFICATION REQUIREMENTS 004500-1
D D 0 D D 0
0 0
0
Attend or arrange meetings with OWNER officials in person or over the phone; Draft recommendations for OWNER officials to consider; Give gifts, meals, event tickets or other benefits to OWNER officials; Introduce or market your organization's products or services to OWNER officials; Provide advice or recommend a strategy to a client on OWNER matters; Seek support or opposition from a third party (e.g. the public) on OWNER matters; Send letters or write emails to OWNER officials in order to influence their decision-making; or Take any action to influence purchasing, contracting, policy, or other decisions under consideration by OWNER officials? (Outside of the service requirements of a contract or written agreement with OWNER and outside of a specific OWNER-issued bid process)
CHECK THIS BOX IF NONE OF THE ABOVE ARE APPLICABLE.
If the bidder indicated that it performs one or more of the activities above, the bidder shall proceed to the question(s) below. If the bidder checked that none of the activities in question 1 are applicable, the bidder is to skip questions 2 and 3 and note the information for all prospective bidders provided after the instructions below. 2a. Does your organization perform these activities in-house (i.e. with internal staff) on its own behalf? OR 2b. Does a client pay your organization to conduct these activities on the client's behalf? If the bidder answered "yes" to question 2a, the bidder shall proceed directly to question 3. If the bidder answered "yes" to question 2b, the bidder shall skip question 3 and follow the instructions provided immediately after question 3. 3.
Will your organization spend over $10,000 this year performing these activities? Use the grid below to estimate the total amount of monf!y your organization as a whole expects to spend during the entire calendar year (Jan 1- Dec 31) to conduct these activities.
Salaries, wages, and commissions for the people who conduct these activities Copies, publications, and other materials
$
Transportation and meals
$
Gifts, meals, and benefits for OWNER officials
$
Media and advertisements
$
Other expenses to support the selected activities
$
$
$ INSTRUCTIONS If bidder answered "yes" to question 3 (or question 2b), the bidder apparently meets at least one registration trigger. Bidder is therefore required to visit http://ethics.lausd.net/elfs to access the OWNER's training materials and to register. Answers to various questions can be obtained either at the website referenced above or by calling the Ethics Office at 213-241-3330. All prospective bidders on OWNER projects are advised of the following: o
Bidder should keep updated about the Lobbying Policy & Program by signing up on our mailing list. Bidder should visit http://ethics.lausd.net for more information.
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES (PROJECT B) LOS ANGELES IDGH SCHOOL .
REVISED 5/30/2017 CERTIFICATION REQUIREMENTS 004500-2
1.03
1.04
o
Even if the bidder does not hit the registration trigger now, bidder should keep a mental track of their organization's spending in order to be ready to register when necessary.
o
Bidder should review who is lobbying the OWNER by visiting our website and clicking on "Lobbying Disclosure."
SWEAT-FREE PROCUREMENT POLICY A
The OWNER has established policies to restrict purchases to only those products and services that have been manufactured without the illegal use of sweatshop (including exploitive, "child", "forced", "convict", and indentured") labor. All sales/goods provided to the OWNER by the bidder and/or their subcontractor shall be in abidance with the OWNER's official policy regarding "sweat-free" schools.
B.
The objective of this policy is specifically to discourage and prevent the use of any form of "exploitive labor" but not cause undue and unnecessary economic hardship for laborers. This policy targets those types of child labor that effects the mental, physical, and emotional developments of children such as those types of exploitive labor which fall under the broader category of "sweatshop labor".
C.
The Sweat-Free Procurement Policy includes the following principle/requirements: a. Safe and healthy working conditions b. Prohibition of child labor c. Disclosure of manufacturing plant locations d. Verification and enforcement mechanisms e. Compliance with applicable codes f. Penalties for violations g. Responsible bidder forms h. Non-Poverty wage standard (domestic and international)
D.
For the purpose of establishing a non-poverty wage, the OWNER uses the definition of non-poverty wages as formulated by the Union of Needletrades, Industrial and Textile Employees (UNITE), utilizing the Department of Health and Human Services' guidelines to determine non-poverty wages domestically. Internationally, the OWNER recognizes the World Bank's Gross National Income Per Capita Purchasing Power Parity figures to determine comparable wages in other countries.
E.
The consequence for any violation by the bidder in the adherence to the aforementioned laws and /or provisions may result in action being taken by the OWNER against the bidder, which may include, but not limited to, contract cancellations, vendor defaults, and/or debarment.
F.
Bidder certifies that the products and services provided to the OWNER are manufactured in strict compliance with all applicable sweatshop, child and slave labor laws. of this and all other countries of the products origin.
G.
This further certifies that the bidder and its subcontractors shall abide by all the provisions of the District's Sweat-Free Procurement Policy as set forth in this section.
PREY AILING WAGES A
In compliance with provisions of the California Labor Code, all workers employed by bidder or any bidder subcontractor in the execution of Work shall be paid not less than the general prevailing rate of per diem wages, including payment for travel and subsistence; and not less than the general prevailing rate of per diem wages for holiday and overtime work, as determined by the California State Director of Industrial Relations for each craft, classification or type of worker needed to execute the Work. (See Article 6.53, General Conditions).
B.
Copies of the prevailing rate of per diem wages are on file in the following OWNER Office and shall be made available to an interested party on request: Labor Compliance Program 333 South Beaudry Avenue, 2P1 Floor Los Angeles, CA 90017 (213) 241-4665
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES (PROJECT B) LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
REVISED 5/30/2017 CERTIFICATION REQUIREMENTS 004500-3
C.
Information on the prevailing rate of per diem wages and the OWNER Labor Compliance Program is available at the following lin1c http://www .laschools.org/fcs/lcp
1.05
1.06
D.
Bidder certifies that it will submit the certified payroll records of Bidder and all subcontractors, of any tier, including Non-Performance payroll records, on a weekly basis to the OWNER Labor Compliance Program in the method provided by the OWNER Web-based Certified Payroll Reporting System.
E.
Bidder certifies that its bid amount includes funds sufficient to allow Bidder to comply with all applicable local, state and federal laws and regulations governing the labor and services to be provided for the performance of the Work of the Contract and shall indemnify, defend and hold District harmless from and against any and all claims, demands, losses, liabilities and damages arising out of or relating to Bidder's failure to comply with applicable law in this regard.
PREQUALIFICATION A.
To be considered for award, bidder must (i) abide by and comply with the OWNER Construction Safety Standards, including prime contractor, subcontractor and/or safety prequalification requirements for bidder and all tiers of its subcontractors, as applicable, before tendering the bid to OWNER, and (ii) enroll bidder prior to commencement of the Work, and all eligible subcontractors prior to commencement of their subcontracted Work, in the OWNER Controlled Insurance Program (OCIP) (See Article 5, General Conditions). An experience modification rate exceeding 1.00 at the time of the bid may disqualify subcontractors from enrollment in OCIP.
B.
This certifies and confirms that the bidder is in compliance with the OWNER's prime contractor prequalification requirements at the time of bid, and that the bidder has safety pre-qualified all tiers of subcontractors (other than first-tier mechanical, electrical and plumbing subcontractors licensed pursuant to Section 7058 of the Business and Professions Code, specifically holding C-4, C-7, C-10, C-16, C-20, C-34, C-36, C-38, C-42, C-43, and C-46 licenses ("MEP subcontractors")) in accordance with OWNER safety prequalification requirements. If the bidder will be using any first-tier MEP subcontractors, this certifies that the bidder has selected MEP subcontractors from the OWNER's List of Prequalified Subcontractors available at least five (5) business days prior to bid opening and that all MEP subcontractors have been listed on Document 00 4336.
PROJECT STABILIZATION AGREEMENT (PSA) A.
If the Work, or any portion thereof, under the Contract Documents is funded with Proposition BB funds and/or Measure K funds, and/or further Propositions and/or Measures enacted by Los Angeles Unified School District voters prior to September 30, 2013, then the Contract for the Project is subject to the Project Stabilization Agreement (PSA) as entered into between OWNER and the Los Angeles and Orange County Building and Construction Trades Council on May 12, 2003 (See Article 6.53 of the General Conditions).
The obligation to abide and be bound by the Project Stabilization Agreement shall extend to all construction and major rehabilitation work pursuant to prime multi-trade construction contracts that exceed $175,000 and all prime specialty contracts that exceed $20,000 as set forth in Article 2 of the Project Stabilization Agreement. Bidder shall require all subcontractors of whatever tier to become similarly bound for all their Work within the scope of the Project Stabilization Agreement by executing a certification or letter of assent in terms substantially identical to Attachment A-Letter of Assent of the Project Stabilization Agreement. B.
This certifies and confrrms bidder has read and agrees to abide by and be bound to the Project Stabilization Agreement as entered into between OWNER and Building Trades Council on May 12, 2003, and amended from time to time by the parties or interpreted pursuant to its terms thereof.
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES (PROJECT B) LOS ANGELES IDGH SCHOOL
REVISED 5/30/2017 CERTIFICATION REQUIREMENTS 004500-4
1.07
DEBARMENT, SUSPENSION, INELIGIBILTY FOR AWARD A.
By signing and submitting this document, ~idder certifies: Neither bidder nor any of its principals is presently debarred, suspended, proposed for debarment, or declared ineligible for the award of contracts by any Federal agency, and; [ ] Have, [ ] have not, been convicted of or had a civil judgment rendered against them for: commission of fraud or a criminal offense in connection with obtaining, attempting to obtain, or performing a Federal, state or local government contract or subcontract; violation of Federal or state antitrust statutes relating to the submission of offers; or commission of embezzlement, theft, forgery, bribery, falsification or destruction of records, making false statements, tax evasion, or receiving stolen property; and are not presently indicted for, or otherwise criminally or civilly charged by a Government entity with, commission of any of these offenses.
B.
1.08
If bidder answers "Have", a responsibility hearing may be held prior to award to determine the eligibility of bidder to remain qualified to bid and perform OWNER projects.
BIDDER CERTIFICATION A.
"The signature below binds bidder to all the above conditions and bidder certifies under penalty of perjury under the laws of the State of California that the foregoing is true and correct." Executed on _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ , at _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ , California. By: --------------------------------------------------------Signature and Title of Bidder Representative Certification shall be signed by bidder or an authorized representative of bidder. (TIDS DOCUMENT CANNOT BE ALTERED, MODIFIED, OR CHANGED.) [FAILURE TO SUBMIT TIDS FORM SHALL RENDER YOUR BID. NON-RESPONSIVE] END OF DOCUMENT
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES (PROJECT B) LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
REVISED 5/3012017 CERTIFICATION REQUIREMENTS 004500-5
DOCUMENT 00 4519 NON-COLLUSION AFFIDAVIT 1.01
GENERAL A.
The following affidavit is required by Section 7106 of the California Public Contract Code.
B.
The Non-Collusion Affidavit shall be executed by bidder and submitted with bid.
C.
Failure to submit this affidavit, filled out and signed in its entirety, shall result in the bid being deemed non-responsive.
State of California County of
ss.
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ' b e i n g first duly sworn, deposes and says that he or she (N arne of person signing bid) _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ of _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ is the party making the (Title of Signer) (Name of Licensee Bidding) foregoing bid, the bid is not made in the interest of, or on behalf of, any undisclosed person, partnership, company, association, organization, or corporation; the bid is genuine and not collusive or sham; the bidder has not directly or indirectly induced or solicited an:/ other bidder to put in a false or sham bid, and has not directly or indirectly colluded, conspired, connived, .or agreed with any bidder or anyone else to put in a sham bid, or anyone shall refrain from bidding; that the bidder has not in any manner, directly or indirectly, sought by agreement, communication, or conference with anyone to fix the price of the bidder or any other bidder, or to fix any overhead, profit, or cost element of the bid price, or of that any other bidder, or to secure any advantage against the public body awarding the contract of anyone interested in the proposed contract; that all statements contained in the bid are true; and, further, the bidder has not, directly or indirectly, submitted his or her bid price or any breakdown thereof, or the contents thereof, or divulged information or data relative thereto, or paid, and will not pay, any fee to any corporation, partnership, company association, organization, bid depository, or to any member or agent thereof to effectuate a collusive or sham bid.
Check One:
Bidder Name Name as it appears on Contractor's State License
Sole Ownership _ _ IRS Employers Identification N u m b e r : - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Partnership Contractor's State License: _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __ Number
Classification(s)
Corporation Other
Name of License H o l d e r : - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Expiration D a t e : - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Address _____________________________
Phone(_ _) _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
City --------------------------- State _ _ Zip Code ______
F~
(_ _) _______________
"The signature below binds bidder to all the stated conditions and bidder certifies under penalty of perjury under the laws of the State of California the foregoing is true and correct."
By - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Print Name
Signature and Title
(Affidavit shall be signed by bidder or an authorized representative of bidder. Do not type or use rubber stamp.) Dated this _____________________
day of _____________ 20 ____
(TillS DOCUMENT CANNOT BE ALTERED, MODIFIED, OR CHANGED.) [FAILURE TO SUBMIT THIS FORM SHALL RENDER THE BID NON-RESPONSIVE] END OF DOCUMENT
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES (PROJECT B) LOS ANGELES IDGH SCHOOL
REVISED 01/05/2012 NON-COLLUSION AFFIDAVIT 004519-1
DOCUMENT 00 4100 BID AND ACCEPTANCE FORM Bidder Name: - - - - - - - - - - -
1.01
1.02
BID SUBMISSION INSTRUCTIONS A.
Submit this form, sealed in an envelope provided by OWNER, plainly showing bidder State Contractor License name and number, description of the Work and the bid opening date; and deposit with Los Angeles Unified School District, Facilities Construction Contracts, 333 S. Beaudry Ave., Los Angeles, CA 90017. The bid shall be submitted by the bid due date at the customer service desk located in the first floor lobby of the building. The bid will be opened and read on the 28th Floor, Room 28-102, about one-half hour after the bid deadline.
B.
Bidders shall keep the Bid and Acceptance Form intact and return all pages when submitting bid.
C.
Failure to submit the complete Bid and Acceptance Form may invalidate the bid.
BID DUE DATE: Before 10:00 A.M. on DECEMBER 05,2017
The only acceptable time of receipt is the date/time stamp imprinted upon the bid package by the representative of Facilities Construction Contracts. 1.03
PROJECT IDENTIFICATION: A.
The undersigned, is familiar with the terms of the Contract, the local conditions affecting performance of Contract, the cost of the Work at the place where the Work is to be done, and with the Drawings, Specifications and all other Bidding Documents. The undersigned hereby proposes and agrees to perform, within the Contract Time stipulated, the Work including all of its component parts; and to provide and furnish any and all of the labor, materials, tools, apparatus, facilities, expendable equipment, and all utility and transportation services necessary to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract and complete all Work in a workmanlike manner for: REPLACE BLEACHERS- WEST GYM, 10367531,23.11816 (PROJECT A) & CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & PATH OF TRAVEL UPGRADES, 10367253, 23.11659 (PROJECT B) @ LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL; in strict conformity with the Drawings and Specifications prepared by: Facilities Services Division Los Angeles Unified School District
1.04
Bidder acknowledges the following Addendum: PROJECT A I BID NO. 1810033 Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number
PROJECT B I BID NO. 1810034 Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES (PROJECT B) LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
REVISED 9/29/2017 BID AND ACCEPTANCE FORM 004100-1
1.05
BASE BID (MUST BE FULLY CO:MPLETED BY BIDDER) A. Bidder will complete the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents for the following base bid amount for a)
LOS ANGELES HS- REPLACE BLEACHERS- WEST GYM (PROJECT A- BID NUMBER 1810033) ($_ _ _ _ _ _ __
(numeric figures) b). LOS ANGELES HS- CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES (PROJECT B I BID NUMBER 1810034) ($,_ _ _ _ _ __
(numeric figures)
TOTAL LUMP SUM OF VOLUME 1 & 2 (AWARDED AS A WHOLE)* *SUBMIT IN SAME SEALED BID ENVELOP
($_ _ _ _ _ __
(numeric figures)
The current IFB consists of two (2) project numbers. For the purposes of allocation of funding, Project A will be considered to comprise 62% of the contract, Project B will be 38%. The approved Schedule of Values will be based on this breakdown.
1.06
BID ITEMS- N/A
1.07
The base bid amount includes all Contract Allowances, if any, as set forth in the Specifications or as described in Section 01 2100- Allowances. N/A
1.08
The base bid amount includes all applicable taxes and does not include Federal Excise Tax as set forth in Article 6.38 of the General Conditions.
1.09
BASIS OF AWARD OF CONTRACT: A.
If additive or deductive bid items are not set forth in the Bidding Documents, the lowest responsive bid shall be determined by the lowest bid amount for the base bid.
B.
OWNER RESERVES THE RIGHT TO REJECT ANY AND ALL BIDS. Article 1- Scope of Work
The CONTRACTOR shall perform, within the time stipulated in the Contract Documents, all of which are incorporated herein and shall provide all labor, materials, equipment, tools, utility services, transportation and everything else necessary to complete in a workmanlike manner, and in exact compliance with the terms of the Contract Documents, all of the Work required in connection with the following titled Project:
LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL REPLACE BLEACHERS WEST GYM (PROJECT A) -BID NO. 1810033 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR AND P.O.T. UPGRADES (PROJECT B)- BID NO. 1810034 [Contract Number/Project Number(s)- to bej7lled in by Facilities Construction Contracts]
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES (PROJECT B) LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
REVISED 9/29/2017 BID AND ACCEPTANCE FORM 00 4100-2
Article 2 - Time for Completion
The Work shall be commenced on the date stated in the OWNER Notice to Proceed. The time period for Contract Completion of the Work shall be 395 calendar days to run concurrently (Project A & Project B) from the date set forth in the Notice to Proceed issued by the OWNER, and in accordance with the Contract regarding milestones and liquidated damages. TIME IS OF THE ESSENCE. Article 3 - Hold Harmless, Defense and Indemnification To the fullest extent permitted by law, the CONTRACTOR, even if it is without fault itself, shall indemnify, defend and hold harmless the OWNER, the Board, the OCIP Administrator, and its and their respective officers, employees, program administrators, representatives, agents and consultants, from every liability, claim, loss, cause of action, action, demand, penalty, cost, expense (including without limitation, attorneys' fees) related to or arising from: 1. Any injury to person or property sustained by the CONTRACTOR or by any person, flrm, or corporation, employed directly or indirectly by it upon or in connection with the Work;
2. Any injury to person or property sustained by any person, flrm, or corporation, caused by any act, neglect, default, or omission of the CONTRACTOR or any person, flrm, or corporation, directly or indirectly employed by it upon or in connection with the Work, whether the injury or damage occurs upon or adjacent to the Work; 3. The furnishing or use of any copyrighted or uncopyrighted composition, secret process, patented or unpatented invention, article, or appliance under the Contract Documents; and 4.
As otherwise provided in the Contract Documents.
The CONTRACTOR at its own cost, expense, and risk, shall defend all legal proceedings that may be brought against all such potential indemnities for any such liability, claim, loss, cause of action, action, demand, penalty, cost and expense, and satisfy any resulting judgment that may be rendered against any of them whether or not the liability, claim, loss, cause of action, action, demand, penalty, cost and expense (including without limitation, attorneys' fees) was actually or allegedly caused wholly or in part through the negligence or other tortious conduct of any of them. OWNER shall have the right to approve counsel proposed for any such defense and shall be consulted with regard to any proposed settlement. This Article 3 is not meant to require the CONTRACTOR to defend, indemnify or hold harmless the potential indemnities from their own active negligence, such as is prohibited by Civil Code Section 2782.
Article 4 - Insurance The OWNER maintains an Owner Controlled Insurance Program (OCIP). The specific provisions of that program are set forth in the General Conditions. CONTRACTOR will provide its own insurance coverage as to all types of insurance not provided for in the program and relevant to the Project in amounts of coverage and by carriers approved by the OWNER. Article 5 - Bonding If the amount of original award of the Contract exceeds TWENTY-FIVE THOUSAND DOLLARS
($25,000.00), the CONTRACTOR shall furnish to the OWNER a Payment Bond (Material and Labor). CONTRACTOR shall also provide a Faithful Performance Bond. Both Bonds shall be for 100% of the Contract Amount and contain the terms and conditions required by Articles 5.16 through 5.17 of the General Conditions. The CONTRACTOR is also required to submit all other bonds as required by the Contract Documents.
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES (PROJECT B) LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
REVISED 912912017 BID AND ACCEPTANCE FORM 00 4100-3
Article 6 - Provisions Required by Law Deemed Inserted Each and every provision of law and clause required by law to be inserted in the Contract Documents shall be deemed to be inserted and the Contract Documents shall be read and enforced as though it were included in the Contract Documents. If through mistake or otherwise any such provision is not inserted, or is not correctly inserted, upon application of either party the Contract Documents shall forthwith be physically amended to make such insertion or correction.
BID DATE: _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ , 20_ __ By_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
(SEAL)
(Firm Name as it appears on Contractor's State License)
(Authorized person to sign bid- print name)
(Signature of authorized person to sign bid)
Business Address: _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
Phone No. _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __ Fax No. _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __ Email Address _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES (PROJECT B) LOS ANGELES HIGHSCHOOL
REVISED 9/29/2017 BID AND ACCEPTANCE FORM 00 4100-4
FOR FCC USE ONLY
Contract Number 1.10
D D
ACCEPTANCE
with Plans with Specs
This Contract is made and entered into on the date set forth on Page 4 of this Contract, by and between the Los Angeles Unified School District, by and through its Board of Education (hereinafter the "OWNER"), and
{Name as it appears on Contractor's State License- to be filled in by OWNER I Facilities Construction Contracts} ____________________ ,a _______________________________________________________________ {sole ownership, partnership, corporation, joint venture, or other} This Contract is for the purpose of constructing that Project identified as LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL and commonly referred to as REPLACE BLEACHERS WEST GYM (PROJECT A) & CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & PATH OF TRAVEL UPGRADES (PROJECT B) CONTRACTOR is the lowest responsible bidder in response to an Invitation to Bid issued by the OWNER and represents that it is qualified to perform all of the terms, covenants, promises and conditions of this Contract. Article 7 - Contract Amount The OWNER shall pay, and the CONTRACTOR shall accept, in full payment for performance as required by the Contract Documents, the sum of (To be filled in by OWNER I Office of Facilities Construction Contracts) ($ ), subject to any additions or deductions, if any, as provided in the Contract Documents. It is understood and agreed that all applicable taxes are included in the Contract Amount and that the Federal Excise Tax, from which the OWNER is exempt, is not included. The OWNER, upon request, will furnish the CONTRACTOR such Tax Exemption Certificates as may be required by the Manufacturer or Dealer. All of the above-named Contract Documents are intended to be complementary. Work required by one of the above-named Contract Documents and not by others shall be done as if required by all.
, 20____ at Los Angeles, California. Executed on (To be filled in by Chief Procurement Officer, Deputy Chief Procurement Officer (Facilities) (up to $20M), Director of Contracts Administration (Facilities) (up to $1M), Facilities Contracts Administrator (up to $500K), or Contract Administration Manager (up to $300K)) LOS ANGELES UNIFIED SCHOOL DISTRICT By: ___________________________________________________ CHIEF PROCUREMENT OFFICER, DEPUTY CHIEF PROCUREMENT OFFICER (FACILITIES), DIRECTOR OF CONTRACTS ADMINISTRATION (FACILITIES), FACILITIES CONTRACTS ADMINISTRATOR, OR CONTRACT ADMINISTRATION MANAGER BLUE INK SIGNATURE REQUESTED FAILURE TO SUBMIT TIDS FORM OR ANY MODIFICATION(S) TO THIS FORM SHALL RENDER THE BID NON-RESPONSIVE
END OF DOCUMENT
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES (PROJECT B) LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
REVISED 9/29/2017 BID AND ACCEPTANCE FORM 00 4100-5
DOCUMENT 00 4313 BID SECURITY FORM Bond Number _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __ Surety
----------~------------------------------- Bidder THE LOS ANGELES UNIFIED SCHOOL DISTRICT, acting by and through its BOARD OF EDUCATION OF THE CITY OF LOS ANGELES ................................................................ OWNER/Obligee TEN PERCENT (10%) OF THE AMOUNT OF THE BASE BID ATTACHED ................................................ Amount of Bond Project Description: CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES (PROJECT B)@ LOS ANGELES HS Date of Bid Opening: Project Number(s): 23.11659 Contract Number: 1810034 WHEREAS, the bidder is herewith submitting to OWNER the above described bid, which is attached hereto and made part thereof. NOW, THEREFORE, the Surety and the bidder are firmly held and bound, jointly and severally, to OWNER in the amount set forth above, lawful money of the United States, for which payment we bind ourselves, our heirs, executors, administrators, and assigns, jointly and severally, by these presents. If the bid or any part of the bid shall be accepted and a contract awarded to the bidder by OWNER, and if the bidder shall well, truly and fully perform all the terms, conditions, and obligations to be kept and performed on the part of the bidder, and shall within the required time enter into a written contract and shall furnish bond(s) as required by the contract and specifications, or the call for bids, or by law, with a surety acceptable to OWNER, then this obligation shall be void; otherwise it shall remain in full force and effect for a minimum period of 60 days from the date of the bid, or longer if required by law, or longer through mutual agreement of the OWNER and bidder. This instrument and the amount of money set forth above shall be applied toward, but shall not be considered a limitation upon, any damages which may be sustained by OWNER if the bidder fails to execute a written contract, or fails to secure the necessary bond(s), or fails to comply with all the terms, conditions and obligations to be kept and performed on the part of the bidder. The maximum amount of Surety's liability claimable and recoverable under this instrument shall be and hereby is expressly limited to the amount of money set forth above. In addition to the liability of the Surety under this bond, the Court shall award to the prevailing party in any suit brought on this bond reasonable attorneys' fees and costs, even if such amounts exceed the penal sum of this bond.
Dated this _ _ _ _ _ _ _ day of _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 20 _ __ ACKNOWLEDGMENT BY AN ATTORNEY-IN-FACT State of _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __ BIDDER
County of ______________
ss
By (signed) _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __ Signature of Authorized Person
Title _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
On _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ , before me, _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ , a Notary Public
Personally appeared _____________ Personally known to me (or proved to me on the basis of satisfactory evidence) to be the person whose name is subscribed to this instrument and acknowledged to SURETY me that he/she executed the same in his/her authorized capacity, and that by his/her signature on the instrument By (signed) _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __ the person, or the entity upon behalf of which the person Signature of Attorney-In-Fact acted, executed the instrument. WITNESS my hand and official seal. (Notary Seal) Address __________________________ City, S t a t e - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Telephone------------------------
Signature of Notary
ATTACH CERTIFIED COPY OF POWER OF ATTORNEY AND ALL-PURPOSE ACKNOWLEDGMENT. (THIS DOCUMENT CANNOT BE ALTERED, MODIFIED, OR CHANGED.) [If you do not submit a certified or cashier's check, failure to submit this form shall render your bid non-responsive] END OF DOCUMENT
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES (PROJECT B) LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
REVISED 01105/2012 BID SECURITY FORM 00 4313-1
DOCUMENT 00 4336 SUBLETTING AND SUBCONTRACTING FAIR PRACTICES ACT LIST 1.01
GENERAL A.
Bidder Name: In performance of Work, bidder is required to comply with the Subletting and Subcontracting Fair Practices Act as set forth in, but not limited to, Public Contract Code Sections 4100 et. seq. Violation of any provision of the Act shall subject the bidder to the penalties and other consequences prescribed in the Act.
B.
In compliance with Section 4104 of the Public Contract Code, bidder submits the following complete list of each subcontractor who will perform Work or labor or render service or specially fabricate and install a portion of the Work in an amount in excess of one-half of one percent of the total bid.
c.
Bidder shall list only one subcontractor for each portion of the Work. If the Project includes mechanical, electrical and plumbing ("MEP") components that will be performed by first-tier MEP subcontractors, bidder must only use MEP subcontractors that are (i) licensed pursuant to Section 7058 of the Business and Professions Code, specifically holding C-4, C-7, C-10, C-16, C-20, C-34, C-36, C-38, C-42, C-43, and C46 licenses, and (ii) identified on the OWNER's List of Prequalified Subcontractors at least five (5) business days prior to the date of bid for the Project. Bids that fail to adhere to these requirements will be deemed non-responsive.
D.
Bidder, by not listing a subcontractor for a certain portion of the Work, certifies bidder is qualified to perform and will perform said portion of Work itself.
E.
Certain penalties may be imposed for the subsequent employment of an unlisted subcontractor.
F.
No contractor or subcontractor may be listed on a bid proposal for a public works project (submitted on or after March 1, 2015) unless registered with the Department of Industrial Relations (DIR) pursuant to Labor Code section 1725.5 [with limited exceptions from this requirementfor bid purposes only under Labor Code section 1771.1(a)].
TYPE{S} OF WORK
PROJECT B I BID NO. 1810034 -
NAME OF SUBCONTRACTOR{S} (Firm Name as it appears on Contractor's State License)
LICENSE NO.
DIR REGISTRATION NO.
LOCATION OF BUSINESS (CITY. STATE)
(THIS DOCUMENT CANNOT BE ALTERED, MODIFIED, OR CHANGED) [YOU MUST SUBMIT THIS FORM EVEN IF YOU DO NOT INTEND TO LIST SUBCONTRACTORS. FAILURE TO SUBMIT THIS FORM SHALL RENDER THE BID NON-RESPONSIVE] END OF DOCUMENT
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES (PROJECT B) REVISED 7I 1912017 LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL SUBLETTING AND SUBCONTRACTING FAIR PRACTICES ACT LIST 00 4336-1
DOCUMENT 00 4500 CERTIFICATION REQUIREMENTS 1.01
BidderName: __________________________
GENERAL
A
Bidder must comply and abide by the certification requirements contained herein by completing this document in its entirety and submitting with sealed bid.
B.
Failure to submit this document shall render the bid non-responsive.
C.
Bidder is advised that no contractor or subcontractor may be listed on a bid proposal for a public works project (submitted on or after March 1, 2015) unless registered with the Department of Industrial Relations (DIR) pursuant to Labor Code section 1725.5 [with limited exceptions from this requirement for bid purposes only under Labor Code section 1771.1(a)]. No contractor or subcontractor may be awarded a contract for public work on a public works project (awarded on or after Aprill, 2015) unless registered with the DIR pursuant to Labor Code section 1725.5. This project is subject to compliance monitoring and enforcement by the DIR and the Los Angeles Unified School District's DIR-approvedLabor Compliance Program.
1.02
ETHICS POLICY A
This certifies and confirms bidder is familiar with and in compliance with all provisions of the OWNER Ethics Policy including: 1) any employees, subcontractors or consultants, who, within the last three (3) years have been or are employees of the OWNER are disclosed below; 2) the bidder or its subcontractors have not compensated any former OWNER employee or consultant to influence any action on a matter pending with the OWNER, if that employee, within the last 12 months, held a OWNER position in which they personally and substantially participated in that matter; 3) the bidder or its subcontractors does not employ a former OWNER employee or consultant who, while serving in a OWNER position within the last two (2) years, substantially participated in the development of the bidding requirements, specifications, or in any part of the contract's contracting process; 4) the bidder has not employed as a lobbyist any former OWNER employee who left the OWNER within the last 12 months; and 5) the bidder did not receive any confidential information in connection with the procurement.
B.
The bidder further certifies that set forth below are the names of all former Board of Education Members and employees it intends to employ in connection with the services to be performed by the contract, who have been Board of Education Members or employed by the OWNER within the last three (3) years. (IF THIS SECTION DOES NOT APPLY, PLEASE INDICATE "NONE" OR "N/A" BELOW.) Former Board of Education Members, Employees, Consultants, Subcontractors:
C.
The OWNER Ethics Policy is available online through the following link: http://ethics.lausd.net/default.asp?Page=portal? contractorConsultantCode
D.
Bidder shall answer the questions below to determine its need to register under the OWNER's revamped Lobbying Disclosure Program. 1.
Do you or others in your organization do the following: (please check all that apply)
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES (PROJECT B) LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
REVISED 5/30/2017 CERTIFICATION REQUIREMENTS 004500-1
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0
Attend or arrange meetings with OWNER officials in person or over the phone; Draft recommendations for OWNER officials to consider; Give gifts, meals, event tickets or other benefits to OWNER officials; Introduce or market your organization's products or services to OWNER officials; Provide advice or recommend a strategy to a client on OWNER matters; Seek support or opposition from a third party (e.g. the public) on OWNER matters; Send letters or write emails to OWNER officials in order to influence their decision-making; or Take any action to influence purchasing, contracting, policy, or other decisions under consideration by OWNER officials? (Outside of the service requirements of a contract or written agreement with OWNER and outside of a specific OWNER-issued bid process)
CHECK THIS BOX IF NONE OF THE ABOVE ARE APPLICABLE;
If the bidder indicated that it performs one or more of the activities above, the bidder shall proceed to the question(s) below. If the bidder checked that none of the activities in question 1 are applicable, the bidder is to skip questions 2 and 3 and note the information for all prospective bidders provided after the instructions below.
2a. Does your organization perform these activities in-house (i.e. with internal staff) on its own behalf? OR 2b. Does a client pay your organization to conduct these activities on the client's behalf? If the bidder answered "yes" to question 2a, the bidder shall proceed directly to question 3. If the bidder answered "yes" to question 2b, the bidder shall skip question 3 and follow the instructions provided immediately after question 3.
3.
Will your organization spend over $10,000 this year performing these activities? Use the grid below to estimate the total amount of money your organization as a whole expects to spend during the entire calendar year (Jan 1 -Dec 31) to conduct these activities. Item I Salaries, wages, and commissions for the people who conduct these activities Copies, publications, and other materials
Total
$ $
Transportation and meals
$
Gifts, meals, and benefits for OWNER officials
$
Media and advertisements
$
Other expenses to support the selected activities
$
' G1 ahcl Total I ,
$
INSTRUCTIONS If bidder answered "yes" to question 3 (or question 2b), the bidder apparently meets at least one registration trigger. Bidder is therefore required to visit http://ethics.lausd.net/elfs to access the OWNER's training materials and to register. Answers to various questions can be obtained either at the website referenced above or by calling the Ethics Office at 213-241-3330. All prospective bidders on OWNER projects are advised of the following: •
Bidder should keep updated about the Lobbying Policy & Program by signing up on our mailing list. Bidder should visit http://ethics.lausd.net for more information.
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES (PROJECT B) LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
REVISED 5/30/2017 CERTIFICATION REQUIREMENTS 004500-2
1.03
1.04
•
Even if the bidder does not hit the registration trigger now, bidder should keep a mental track of their organization's spending in order to be ready to register when necessary.
•
Bidder should review who is lobbying the OWNER by visiting our website and clicking on "Lobbying Disclosure."
SWEAT-FREE PROCUREMENT POLICY A
The OWNER has esta.blished policies to restrict purchases to only those products and services that have been manufactured without the illegal use of sweatshop (including exploitive, "child", "forced", "convict", and indentured") labor. All sales/goods provided to the OWNER by the bidder and/or their subcontractor shall be in abidance with the OWNER's official policy regarding "sweat-free" schools.
B.
The objective of this policy is specifically to discourage and prevent the use of any form of "exploitive labor" but not cause undue and unnecessary economic hardship for laborers. This policy targets those types of child labor that effects the mental, physical, and emotional developments of children such as those types of exploitive labor which fall under the broader category of "sweatshop labor".
C.
The Sweat-Free Procurement Policy includes the following principle/requirements: a. Safe and healthy working conditions b. Prohibition of child labor c. Disclosure of manufacturing plant locations d. Verification and enforcement mechanisms e. Compliance with applicable codes f. Penalties for violations g. Responsible bidder forms h. Non-Poverty wage standard (domestic and international)
D.
For the purpose of establishing a non-poverty wage, the OWNER uses the definition of non-poverty wages as formulated by the Union of Needletrades, Industrial and Textile Employees (UNITE), utilizing the Department of Health and Human Services' guidelines to determine non-poverty wages domestically. Internationally, the OWNER recognizes the World Bank's Gross National Income Per Capita Purchasing Power Parity figures to determine comparable wages in other countries.
E.
The consequence for any violation by the bidder in the adherence to the aforementioned laws and /or provisions may result in action being taken by the OWNER against the bidder, which may include, but not limited to, contract cancellations, vendor defaults, and/or debarment.
F.
Bidder certifies that the products and services provided to the OWNER are manufactured in strict compliance with all applicable sweatshop, child and slave labor laws ofthis and all other countries of the products origin.
G.
This further certifies that the bidder and its subcontractors shall abide by all the provisions of the District's Sweat-Free Procurement Policy as set forth in this section.
PREY AILING WAGES A
In compliance with provisions of the California Labor Code, all workers employed by bidder or any bidder subcontractor in the execution of Work shall be paid not less than the general prevailing rate of per diem wages, including payment for travel and subsistence; and not less than the general prevailing rate of per diem wages for holiday and overtime work, as determined by the California State Director of Industrial Relations for each craft, classification or type of worker needed to execute the Work. (See Article 6.53, General Conditions).
B.
Copies of the prevailing rate of per diem wages are on file in the following OWNER Office and shall be made available to an interested party on request: Labor Compliance Program 333 South Beaudry Avenue, 21st Floor Los Angeles, CA 90017 (213) 241-4665
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES (PROJECT B) LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
REVISED 5/30/2017 CERTIFICATION REQUIREMENTS 004500-3
C.
Information on the prevailing rate of per diem wages and the OWNER Labor Compliance Program is available at the following link: http://www.laschools.org/fcs/lcp
1.05
1.06
D.
Bidder certifies that it will submit the certified payroll records of Bidder and all subcontractors, of any tier, including Non-Performance payroll records, on a weekly basis to the OWNER Labor Compliance Program in the method provided by the OWNER Web-based Certified Payroll Reporting System.
E.
Bidder certifies that its bid amount includes funds sufficient to allow Bidder to comply with all applicable local, state and federal laws and regulations governing the labor and services to be provided for the performance of the Work of the Contract and shall indemnify, defend and hold District harmless from and against any and all claims, demands, losses, liabilities and damages arising out of or relating to Bidder's failure to comply with applicable law in this regard.
PREQUALIFICATION A.
To be considered for award, bidder must (i) abide by and comply with the OWNER Construction Safety Standards, including prime contractor, subcontractor and/or safety prequalification requirements for bidder and all tiers of its subcontractors, as applicable, before tendering the bid to OWNER, and (ii) enroll bidder prior to commencement of the Work, and all eligible subcontractors prior to commencement of their subcontracted Work, in the OWNER Controlled Insurance Program (OCIP) (See Article 5, General Conditions). An experience modification rate exceeding 1.00 at the time of the bid may disqualify subcontractors from enrollment in OCIP.
B.
This certifies and confirms that the bidder is in compliance with the OWNER's prime contractor prequalification requirements at the time of bid, and that the bidder has safety pre-qualified all tiers of subcontractors (other than first-tier mechanical, electrical and plumbing subcontractors licensed pursuant to Section 7058 of the Business and Professions Code, specifically holding C-4, C-7, C-10, C-16, C-20, C-34, C-36, C-38, C-42, C-43, and C-46 licenses ("MEP subcontractors")) in accordance with OWNER safety prequalification requirements. If the bidder will be using any first-tier MEP subcontractors, this certifies that the bidder has selected MEP subcontractors from the OWNER's List of Prequalified Subcontractors available at least five (5) business days prior to bid opening and that all MEP subcontractors have been listed on Document 00 4336.
PROJECT STABILIZATION AGREEMENT (PSA) A.
If the Work, or any portion thereof, under the Contract Documents is funded with Proposition BB funds and/or
Measure K funds, and/or further Propositions and/or Measures enacted by Los Angeles Unified School District voters prior to September 30, 2013, then the Contract for the Project is subject to the Project Stabilization Agreement (PSA) as entered into between OWNER and the Los Angeles and Orange County Building and Construction Trades Council on May 12, 2003 (See Article 6.53 of the General Conditions). The obligation to abide and be bound by the Project Stabilization Agreement shall extend to all construction and major rehabilitation work pursuant to prime multi-trade construction contracts that exceed $175,000 and all prime specialty contracts that exceed $20,000 as set forth in Article 2 of the Project Stabilization Agreement. Bidder shall require all subcontractors of whatever tier to become similarly bound for all their Work within the scope of the Project Stabilization Agreement by executing a certification or letter of assent in terms substantially identical to Attachment A-Letter of Assent of the Project Stabilization Agreement. B.
This certifies and confirms bidder has read and agrees to abide by and be bound to the Project Stabilization Agreement as entered into between OWNER and Building Trades Council on May 12, 2003, and amended from time to time by the parties or interpreted pursuant to its terms thereof.
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES (PROJECT B) LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
REVISED 5/30/2017 CERTIFICATION REQUIREMENTS 004500-4
1.07
DEBARMENT, SUSPENSION, INELIGIBILTY FOR AWARD A.
By signing and submitting this document, bidder certifies: Neither bidder nor any of its principals is presently debarred, suspended, proposed for debarment, or declared ineligible for the award of contracts by any Federal agency, and; [ ] Have, [ ] have not, been convicted of or had a civil judgment rendered against them for: commission of fraud or a criminal offense in connection with obtaining, attempting to obtain, or performing a Federal, state or local government contract or subcontract; violation of Federal or state antitrust statutes relating to the submission of offers; or commission of embezzlement, theft, forgery, bribery, falsification or destruction of records, making false statements, tax evasion, or receiving stolen property; and are not presently indicted for, or otherwise criminally or civilly charged by a Government entity with, commission of any of these offenses.
B.
1.08
If bidder answers "Have", a responsibility hearing may be held prior to award to determine the eligibility of bidder to remain qualified to bid and perform OWNER projects.
BIDDER CERTIFICATION A.
"The signature below binds bidder to all the above conditions and bidder certifies under penalty of perjury under the laws of the State of California that the foregoing is true and correct." Executed on _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ , at _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ , California. By: --------------------------------------------------------Signature and Title of Bidder Representative Certification shall be signed by bidder or an authorized representative of bidder.
(THIS DOCUMENT CANNOT BE ALTERED, MODIFIED, OR CHANGED.) [FAILURE TO SUBMIT THIS FORM SHALL RENDER YOUR BID NON-RESPONSIVE] END OF DOCUMENT
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES (PROJECT B) LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
REVISED 5/30/2017 CERTIFICATION REQUIREMENTS 004500-5
DOCUMENT 00 4519 NON-COLLUSION AFFIDAVIT 1.01
GENERAL A.
The following affidavit is required by Section 7106 of the California Public Contract Code.
B.
The Non-Collusion Affidavit shall be executed by bidder and submitted with bid.
C.
Failure to submit this affidavit, filled out and signed in its entirety, shall result in the bid being deemed non-responsive.
State of California County of _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ ss. - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ' b e i n g first duly sworn, deposes and says that he or she (Name of person signing bid) _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ of _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ is the party making the (Title of Signer) (Name of Licensee Bidding) foregoing bid, the bid is not made in the interest of, or on behalf of, any undisclosed person, partnership, company, association, organization, or corporation; the bid is genuine and not collusive or sham; the bidder has not directly or indirectly induced or solicited any-other bidder to put in a false or sham bid, and has not directly or indirectly colluded, conspired, connived, or agreed with any bidder or anyone else to put in a sham bid, or anyone shall refrain from bidding; that the bidder has not in any manner, directly or indirectly, sought by agreement, communication, or conference with anyone to fix the price of the bidder or any other bidder, or to fix any overhead, profit, or cost element of the bid price, or of that any other bidder, or to secure any advantage against the public body awarding the contract of anyone interested in the proposed contract; that all statements contained in the bid are true; and, further, the bidder has not, directly or indirectly, submitted his or her bid price or any breakdown thereof, or the contents thereof, or divulged information or data relative thereto, or paid, and will not pay, any fee to any corporation, partnership, company association, organization, bid depository, or to any member or agent thereof to effectuate a collusive or sham bid.
Bidder Name
Check One: Name as it appears on Contractor's State License Sole Ownership _ _
IRS Employers Identification Number:-------------------~-Partnership Contractor's State License: _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __ Number
Classification(s)
Corporation Other
Name of License H o l d e r : - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Expiration D a t e : - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Address _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ ____
Phone(_ _) _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
City ________________ State _ _ Zip Code _ _ _ __
Fax
(_ _ ) ______________________
"The signature below binds bidder to all the stated conditions and bidder certifies under penalty of perjury under the laws of the State of California the foregoing is true and correct."
By - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Print Name
Signature and Title
(Affidavit shall be signed by bidder or an authorized representative of bidder. Do not type or use rubber stamp.) Dated this _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ ____ day of _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 20 _______
(TillS DOCUMENT CANNOT BE ALTERED, MODIFIED, OR CHANGED.) [FAILURE TO SUBMIT TillS FORM SHALL RENDER THE BID NON-RESPONSIVE] END OF DOCUMENT
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES (PROJECT B) LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
REVISED 01105/2012 NON-COLLUSION AFFIDAVIT 00 4519-1
DOCUMENT 00 6113 PAYMENT BOND (LABOR AND MATERIAL) WHEREAS, LOS ANGELES UNIFIED SCHOOL DISTRICT BOARD OF EDUCATION, hereinafter called the OWNER, and - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - hereinafter called the CONTRACTOR, have entered into a Contract
fur -----------------------------------------------------~ Contract Amount NOW, THEREFORE, the CONTRACTOR , as Principal, and the following named Surety, are held and firmly bound to the OWNER in the amount set forth under the bond, for the and Surety bind themselves, their heirs, executors, administrators, successors and PAYMENT BOND In an amount equal to One Hundred Percent (100%) of the above Contract Amount. The condition of this obligation is that if Cont.r~ctor or his Subcontractors, fail to pay for any materi proviSions, provender or other supplies, or teams1 used m, upon, or about the performance of the Work contracteo to be done, any work or fabor thereon of any kind, or for amounts due Unemployment Insurance Code with respect to such work or for any amounts required to be deducteo, withheld, and paid the Franchise Tax Board from the wages of employees CONTRACTOR and his Subcontractors pursuant to SectiOn 1 the Revenue and Taxation Code, with respect to such work that the surety will pay for the same, in an sum specified above, and also in case suit a reasonable attorney's fee, to be fixed by the The Surety, for value received, hereby stipulates and to the Work to be performed thereunder shall in change, extension of time, · or addition to the
of time, alteration or addition to the terms of the Contract or the above bonds, and it does hereby waive notice of any such
'YH•n<•=
r----dayof___________________________ 20___________ SURETY
By ______________________________________ Attorney-in-Fact
Address.______________________________________ Telephone Number_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __ Bond Number___________________________________
By _ _--1 Title _____
CERTIFICATION BY LOS ANGELES COUNTY CLERK'S OFFICE I hereby certify: 1. That the Surety named above has been certified by the State Insurance Commissioner as an admitted Surety Insurer and that such authority is in full force and effect. 2. That there is on file in this office the financial statement of the surety for the period ending__________________________________ showing capital and surplus not less than ten times the amount of the above Contract Amount. Conny B. McCormack, County Clerk Date__________________________________________ By________________________________________________ Deputy
(THIS DOCUMENT CANNOT BE ALTERED, MODIFIED, OR CHANGED)
END OF DOCUMENT
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
REVISED 01/05/2012 PAYMENT BOND (LABOR AND MATERIAL) 00 6113-1
DOCUMENT 00 6114 PERFORMANCE BOND
WHEREAS, LOS ANGELES UNIFIED SCHOOL DISTRICT BOARD OF EDUCATION, Hereinafter called OWNER, and _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __ hereinafter called CONTRACTOR, have entered into a Contract, which is incorporated by reference herein in its entirety, denominated as number _ _ _ _ _ _ __ described as _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ ,at _ _ _ _ _ _ __ and is in the Contract Amount of _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ , NOW, CONTRACTOR, "SURETY"), for assigns,
of which is hereby deemed acknowledged, (hereafter and
be adjusted under ...,""~,~"'~"~'"'". nu11].pfllr~a Contract, subject,
t~bl
CTO~"~~~:t± :;:~like
1. of a manner the terms · · ns sions of the promptly, c faithWily r: Contract, in strict conformity therewith, then this Bond shall be null and void; otherwise, this Bond shall remain in full force and effect. 2. In the event CONTRACTOR breaches the Contract and OWNER exercises its right to terminate CONTRACTOR's right to proceed with the Work, and subject to the terms of the Contract, OWNER shall notify CONTRACTOR and SURETY in writing, and SURETY shall promptly: a. Arrange for CONTRACTOR, with consent of OWNER which OWNER may withhold in its sole discretion, to perform and complete the Contract; or b. Undertake to perform and complete the Contract itself, through its agents or through independent contractors, provided that OWNER either has prequalified such person or has no reasoned objection to such person performing the Work; or c. Obtain bids or negotiated proposals from qualified contractors acceptable to and prequalified by OWNER for a contract for performance and completion of the Contract, arrange for a contract to be prepared for execution by the OWNER and the contractor selected with OWNER's concurrence, to be secured with performance and payment bonds executed by a qualified surety equivalent to the bonds issued on the Contract, and pay to OWNER any excess of the amount of the completion contract over the remaining balance of the Contract Amount; or d. Waive its right to perform and complete, arrange for completion, or obtain a new contractor and with reasonable promptness under the circumstances, and no later than thirty (30) days of SURETY's receipt of notice of termination from OWNER, or such longer period to which OWNER may agree:
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
REVISED 0110512012 FAITHFUL PERFORMANCE BOND 00 6114-1
(i) subject to a full reservation of all rights of OWNER, CONTRACTOR and SURETY, deny liability in whole or in part and notify OWNER in writing of the reasons and bases therefore; or (ii) determine the amount for which SURETY may be liable to OWNER, and thereafter promptly tender payment thereof to OWNER. During the period in which SURETY determines which of its options to pursue under this paragraph 2, OWNER may take such actions it determines are appropriate to perform the Work and/or protect the Project, and OWNER's costs and expenses of such efforts may be charged against the contract balance. 3. In addition to any costs incurred in meeting its obligations pursuant to paragraph 2 above, SURETY shall pay OWNER any amounts due to Owner or for which Owner has become obligated in connection with the Contract arising from CONTRACTOR's failure to perform in accordance with the Contract, including any liquidated damages or other delay damages recoverable under the Contract; provided, hqwever, that the aggregate liability of SURETY under this Bond, including under paragraph 2 and this paragraph 3, shall not exceed the amount of the Penal Sum as adjusted as provided in paragraph 7. 4. to perform pursua other items of wor ,, 5.
6. SURETY hereby stipulates and agrees that no adjustment to the Contract Amount or Contract Time, nor any other alteration, addition and/or deletion to the terms of the Contract, or to the Work to be performed thereunder, shall in any way affect its obligations under this Bond, and SURETY waives notice of any such change, adjustment, alteration, addition or deletion to the terms of the Contract Documents. 7. The Penal Sum of this Bond shall automatically increase as the Contract Amount increases; provided, however, the initial Penal Sum shall not increase more than fifteen percent (15%) absent written consent from the SURETY. SURETY's refusal to consent to such an increase in the Penal Sum shall not be a breach of this Bond. 8. SURETY shall be held and firmly bound by this Bond for any breach of CONTRACTOR's obligations, including any warranty of the Work, occurring within two (2) years of Substantial Completion of the entire Work. Any action on this Bond shall be commenced within three (3) years of the date of Substantial Completion. 9. OWNER may name SURETY and demand that SURETY partiCipate in any arbitration authorized by the Contract, or SURETY may elect to intervene in any such arbitration as provided by law, in which case SURETY shall be bound by the arbitration award. If OWNER does not name SURETY or demand SURETY's participation in any arbitration, and SURETY does not elect to intervene, SURETY will not be bound by the arbitration award except to the extent the arbitration award determines CONTRACTOR'S obligations under the Contract and that determination is binding on SURETY under applicable law. 10.
In case any suit, arbitration or other action is brought upon this Bond, reasonable attorneys' fees
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
REVISED 01/05/2012 FAITHFUL PERFORMANCE BOND 00 6114-2
shall be awarded to the prevailing party, only the amount thereof being within the Court's or arbitrator's discretion. 11. Where they are used herein, the following terms that are specially defined in the Contract shall have the same meaning ascribed to them in the Contract: OWNER, CONTRACTOR, Contract, Work, Contract Documents, Contract Amount, Contract Time, Day, Punch List, and Substantial Completion. Signed and sealed this _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ day of _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 20 _ _ _ __ CONTRACTORIPRINCIP AL
By_________________________
Title,______________________________________
Surety Name _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ ___ Address of Surety _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
By __________________________________ Attorney-in-Fact : Address _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
Telephone Number Bond Number The OWNER will
. :,: odmtl
1.
2.
penod en showing capital and surplus not less than ten times the amount of the above Contract Amount. Conny B. McCormack, County Clerk
Date_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
By_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ ____
Deputy
#
(THIS DOCUMENT CANNOT BE ALTERED, MODIFIED, OR CHANGED) END OF DOCUMENT
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
REVISED 01105/2012 FAITHFUL PERFORMANCE BOND 00 6114-3
•
SECTION 00 7000 GENERAL CONDITIONS WORK OF THE LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES PROJECT BY THE LOS ANGELES UNIFIED SCHOOL DISTRICT (OWNER) 08/22/2017
•
•
•
SECTION 00 7300 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS WORK OF THE LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES PROJECT BY THE LOS ANGELES UNIFIED SCHOOL DISTRICT (OWNER) 08/22/2017
•
•
•
SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS The following supplements modify the General Conditions. Where a portion of the General Conditions is modified and or deleted by these Supplementary Conditions, the unaltered portions of the General Conditions shall remain in effect.
Article 1 - GENERAL CONDITIONS 1.33
Notice to Proceed - Administrative ("NTP1 ") -- The written notice issued by OWNER to CONTRACTOR following the Notice of Award authorizing and/or directing CONTRACTOR to proceed with its administrative obligations under the Contract including, but not limited to, submittals, mobilization and other activities as identified in the written notice.
Article 2- GENERAL CONDITIONS
2.2
•
Notice to Proceed and Contract Time Commencement: The Contract Time will commence on the date specified in the Notice to Proceed. OWNER will issue the Notice to Proceed within sixty (60) days after the Notice of Award. If, for any reason, OWNER does not issue the Notice to Proceed within this sixty (60) day period, OWNER shall have an additional sixty (60) day period to issue the Notice to Proceed. However, OWNER shall pay to CONTRACTOR, as liquidated damage, not as a penalty, but rather as a reasonable approximation of all damages to CONTRACTOR, the following sum based on the Contract Amount beginning on the sixty first (61st) day of the date the Notice of Award until the date that the Notice to Proceed is issued: $100 per day for contracts less than $1,000,000; $250 per day for contracts between $1,000,000 and $10,000,000; $500 per day for contracts between $10,000,001 and $40,000,000; and $1,000 per day for contracts in excess of $40,000,000. The amount of liquidated damage is CONTRACTOR exclusive remedy for delay of issuance of the Notice to Proceed. If the Notice to Proceed is not issued within one hundred and twenty (120) days after the Notice of Award, the Contract will be terminated for convenience by OWNER, unless OWNER and CONTRACTOR mutually agree in writing to extend the period within which the Notice to Proceed may be issued.
Article 5 - GENERAL CONDITIONS
•
5.1.3
Owner will purchase and maintain Builder's Risk insurance in the amount of the initial Contract Amount (and thereafter adjusted pursuant to any Change Orders issued to CONTRACTOR) for the full replacement value
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
5/30/2017 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 00 7300-2
•
of the Work. The Builder's Risk insurance will cover the interests of OWNER, CONTRACTOR and Subcontractors of every tier covering for all risk of direct physical loss, excluding earthquake and flood, and insuring against fire, extended coverage, theft, vandalism, and malicious mischief at limits and sub-limits determined by OWNER. CONTRACTOR will be provided a detailed Certificate of Insurance for the Work. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for payment of a $10,000 deductible for each occurrence. CONTRACTOR is exclusively responsible, at its sole expense, for obtaining any additional insurance to protect its interests including coverage for Contractor's $10,000 deductible per occurrence required by the OCIP Insurance Policies.
5.4.8
•
•
use only mechanical, electrical and plumbing ("MEP") Subcontractors that are licensed pursuant to Section 7058 of the Business and Professions Code, specifically holding C-4, C-7, C-10, C-16, C-20, C-34, C-36, C-38, C-42, C-43, and C-46 licenses, and identified on the OWNER's List of Prequalified Subcontractors at least five (5) business days prior to the date of bid for the Project, if the Project includes MEP components that will be performed by first-tier MEP Subcontractors. For all other trades, Contractor shall use only Subcontractors that it has safety pre-qualified in accordance with the procedures outlined in the Safety Standards Manual and verified by CONTRACTOR to have Experience Modification Rate (EMR) that complies with OWNER'S requirement upon the date of bid. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible to provide documentation verifying all Subcontractors of CONTRACTOR have an EMR that complies with OWNER'S requirement upon the date of bid. OWNER may prohibit access to the Project site by CONTRACTOR or any Subcontractor for which CONTRACTOR has not provided documentation of an EMR that complies with OWNER'S requirement upon the date of bid or waiver by OWNER of this requirement or has not met the safety pre-qualification requirements outlined in the Safety Standards Manual.
5.4.10 submit an online payroll report (Alliant Payroll Form) for each completed payroll period and Application for Payment. Instructions for online access are provided in Section 8 of the OCIP Manual. This obligation includes compliance with all existing requirements and all new requirements implemented during the term of the Project. OWNER may decline to process or may apply a Withhold against, until receipt of the Alliant Payroll Form, any Application for Payment submitted without completion of the Alliant Payroll Form that is consistent with CONTRACTOR and Subcontractor (all tier) information submitted for the corresponding Certified Payroll Report periods.
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR& P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
5/30/2017 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 00 7300-3
•
5. 7.3
CONTRACTOR represents on its own behalf, and on behalf of its Subcontractors, that the Costs of OCIP Coverages were deducted in CONTRACTOR bid or proposal for the Work, the Contract Amount, and will not be included in any Change Order Proposals or any Application for Payment relative to the Work. The "Costs ofOCIP Coverages" is defined as the amount of CONTRACTOR and its Subcontractors' reduction in insurance costs due to eligibility for OCIP Coverages as determined by using Alliant Form-B located in the Insurance Manual and information available to OWNER and/or the OCIP Administrator regarding the costs of similar coverages taking into account limits of liability, coverages, and rating of the insurer;
Article 6 - GENERAL CONDITIONS
6.7
•
Unless otherwise specified in the Contract Documents, CONTRACTOR shall provide and furnish qualified personnel to survey, layout, and construct the Work. Only Workers skilled in the various trades required on this Contract shall be employed upon the Work. In addition to all other requirements stated in the Bidding Documents, all craftsmen must adhere to the requirements specified in Article 6. 7.1. CONTRACTOR shall furnish, supply, install and maintain all items necessary for proper execution and completion of the Work whether temporary or permanent and whether or not incorporated or to be incorporated in the Work, including without limitation, all labor, material, equipment, apparatus, tools, construction equipment and machinery, appliances, fuel, power, light, heat, ventilation, telephone,, sanitary facilities, water, gas, utilities, transportation, and all other incidental facilities and services for the furnishing, performance, testing, start up, and completion of the Work. 6.7.1
•
Worker Certifications Journeyman plumbers must possess a plumbing certificate issued by the Los Angeles County and City of Los Angeles, Building and Safety Divisions. All HV AC technicians must possess an EPA608 Certification. Electricians working for a contractor with a C10 license must possess a California State Electrician certification. Electricians that are certified can be verified via the State database at www.dir.ca.gov/DAS/ElectricalTrade.htm. Elevator companies must possess a Certified Qualified Conveyance Company License (CQCC). Journeymen will be required to have their Certified Competent Conveyance Mechanics License (CCCM) from the State of California and Journeymen working within the City limits of Los Angeles will be required to have their Journeymen Elevator Mechanic's License. The State of California (Elevator, Ride and Tram Unit) will inspect all County Elevator Modernizations and Alterations.
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
5/30/2017 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 00 7300-4
•
"Or Equaf' and "Substitutions": 6.14
When an item of material or equipment is specified by the use of a proprietary name, make, trade name, or catalog number the intent of the Specification is to establish the type, function, and quality required. Unless the provision of the Contract Documents indicate that no substitutions are permitted, for purposes as described in Public Contract Code Section 3400, the provision will be followed by the words "or equal," and other items or material may be accepted by the OAR in accordance with the following provisions and applicable General Requirements.
"Or Equal" 6.14.1 Within sixty (60) days after the Effective Date of the Contract, CONTRACTOR may, in accordance with Public Contract Code Section 3400, submit to OAR proposed "or equal" material or equipment CONTRACTOR believes to be functionally equal to and sufficiently similar to those specified in the Contract Documents. CONTRACTOR must provide to OAR substantiating data.
"Substitutions"
•
6.14.5 Sixty (60) days after the Effective Date of the Contract, a specified item of material or equipment, which is no longer manufactured and/or cannot be acquired from existing inventories, will be considered a basis for a proposed substitute item. Substitution requests arising due to new subcontractor entering contractual relationship with prime contractor during the contract period may be considered as long as there is sufficient time to review and approve the substitution without altering the previously accepted construction and material submission schedule. Proposed substitutions of materials or equipment must be made by CONTRACTOR and on the substitution request form available from OWNER. CONTRACTOR shall certify the proposed substitution will be readily available, perform adequately the functions and achieve the results called for by the design concept, be similar in substance to that specified, and be suited to the same use as that specified. The substitution request shall include all variations of the proposed substitute and an itemized estimate of all costs or credits directly or indirectly resulting from acceptance of such substitute, including costs of redesign and of Subcontractors affected by the resulting change. CONTRACTOR shall bear all the costs associated with the proposed substitution, unless the substitution is made necessary by OWNER'S specification of material or equipment that is not available because it is no longer manufactured or produced within sixty days after issuance of NTP(l), in which case OWNER shall bear such costs. In addition, the following items shall also be considered:
Article 6.41.6 Badge Requirement:
•
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR& P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
5/30/2017 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 00 7300-5
•
6.41.6 All onsite personnel associated with CONTRACTOR and Subcontractors shall wear photographic identification badges at all times. The badges shall be visible at all times. Article 6.49.4 Working Hours:
6.49.4.1.4 PHASE 2 & 3A (REGULAR HOURS) - Where a single shift is worked, eight (S) consecutive hours between 7am and 3pm shall constitute a work day at the applicable prevailing wage rate(s). Saturdays Sam - 5pm.
PHASE 1 & 3B (AFTER HOURS) - Where a single shift is worked, eight (S) consecutive hours between 3pm and 11 pm shall constitute a work day at the applicable prevailing wage rate(s). Saturdays Sam5pm. No noise after 9pm per city ordinance.
Article 12 - GENERAL CONDITIONS
•
12.7.1 CONTRACTOR will be liable to OWNER for liquidated damages _pursuant to Article 12.7 for each calendar day of delay in the amount of $750.00/day . Article 14- GENERAL CONDITIONS 14.7
If the certified Application for Payment is undisputed and properly submitted as per Articles 14.2 and 14.3, payment, less five percent (5%) retention, any. OWNER assessments and withholds will be made within thirty (30) days from receipt. 14.7.1 Ifthe certified Application for Payment is not properly submitted and/or is otherwise disputed, the OAR will return it with a written statement setting forth the reason why the payment request is not proper. 14.7.2 If the payment request is properly submitted, and only a portion thereof is disputed, OWNER may pay the undisputed portion thereof and refuse to pay the disputed portion thereof until the dispute is resolved. 14.7.3 If CONTRACTOR disputes any OWNER assessment, CONTRACTOR shall give written notice as set forth in Article 16 .
•
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR& P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
then
5/30/2017 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 00 7300-6
•
Article 16 - GENERAL CONDITIONS
16.1
Public Contract Code section 9204. This Article 16 is intended to comply with the provisions of Public Contract Code section 9204 pertaining to claim resolution.
16.2
What is a Claim?
The term "Claim" means a written demand by CONTRACTOR sent by registered mail or certified mail with return receipt requested for one or more of the following: (1)
An extension of the Contract Time, including relief from damages or
penalties assessed by OWNER for delay; (2) Payment by OWNER of money or damages arising from work done by, or on behalf of, CONTRACTOR pursuant to the Contract and payment that is not otherwise expressly provided for in the Contract Documents or to which CONTRACTOR is not otherwise entitled; (3) Payment of an amount that is disputed by OWNER.
•
•
16.3
What is not a Claim? 16.3.1 The term "Claim" does not include, and the Claims procedures provided under this Article 16 do not apply to, the following: 16.3.1.1
Penalties, forfeitures or other remedies prescribed by statute or regulation which a government agency is specifically authorized to administer, settle, or determine, including revocation of pre-qualification status, barring a bidder from OWNER contracts; however, penalties sought against a public agency pursuant to statute, such as Public Contract Code sections 7107 or 20104.50, are considered Claims.
16.3.1.2
Personal injury, death, reimbursement, or other demands for compensation arising out of or resulting from liability for personal injury or death.
16.3.1.3
The OWNER's determination of whether the Work complies with the Contract Documents, or concerning a latent defect, breach of warranty, or guarantee to repair.
16.3.1.4
Stop payment notices .
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P .0. T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
5/30/2017 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 00 7300-7
• 16.4
16.3.1.5
OWNER's rights under the Contract Documents including, but not limited to, Articles 12 and 15 .
16.3.1.6
Disputes arising out of or pertaining to the LCP or PSA.
16.3.1. 7
An OCIP insurance claim or dispute with an OCIP Insurer.
When does a Claim arise? A Claim arises upon the issuance of a written decision by the OAR denying in whole or in part CONTRACTOR's Change Order Proposal.
16.5
Where must the Claim he submitted? 16.5.1 CONTRACTOR must submit the Claim to the OWNER's Construction Claims Unit ("CCU") located at 333 S. Beaudry Avenue, 23rd Floor, Los Angeles, California, 90017. CONTRACTOR must also submit a copy of the Claim to the OAR.
16.6
When must the Claim be submitted? CONTRACTOR must submit a Claim in writing, together with all supporting data specified in Article 16.7.1, no later than the earlier of either: (1) thirty (30) days after the date the Claim arises under Article 16.4; or (2) sixty (60) days after the date of Substantial Completion. It is the intent of OWNER to evaluate and resolve Claims with CONTRACTOR as close to the events giving rise to such Claims as possible and to avoid stale or late Claims, including late notice and documenting of Claims, and to timely mitigate the issue, event, condition, circumstance and/or cause of the Claim and any Adverse Impacts or damages related thereto. Should CONTRACTOR fail to submit a Claim by the deadline set forth in this Article, CONTRACTOR waives and releases such Claim, including all rights and remedies in connection therewith.
• 16.7
What must the Claim include? 16.7.1 A Claim must include the following: 16.7.1.1
•
A statement identifying it as a Claim signed by an authorized agent or officer of CONTRACTOR under penalty of perjury and including the following language immediately above or before CONTRACTOR's signature: "I declare under penalty of perjury under the laws of the State of California that the information provided and statements made in this Claim are true and correct, substantiated and of merit." CONTRACTOR recognizes and acknowledges that this requirement is not a mere formality but is intended to ensure that CONTRACTOR only submits Claims that it believes are true and correct,
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
5/30/2017 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 00 7300-8
) )
•
•
•
substantiated and have merit. Should CONTRACTOR fail to submit the foregoing written statement signed under penalty of perjury, CONTRACTOR waives and releases its Claim, including all rights and remedies in connection therewith.
16.7.1.2
A detailed description of the act, error, omission, unforeseen condition, event or other condition giving rise to the Claim.
16.7.1.3
A statement demonstrating that the Claim was timely submitted as required by Article 16.6. If the Claim arises from the issuance by OWNER of a Construction Directive, a statement demonstrating that a Change Order Proposal was timely submitted.
16.7.1.4
A detailed justification for any remedy or relief sought by the Claim, including to the extent applicable, the following:
16.7.1.4.1 If the Claim involves extra work, a detailed cost breakdown of the amounts claimed, including the items specified in Article 11 shall be provided by CONTRACTOR. The breakdown must be provided even if the costs claimed have not been incurred when the Claim is submitted. To the extent costs have been incurred when the Claim is submitted, the Claim must include actual cost ·records (including without limitation, all payroll records (including Subcontractors), material and rental invoices and the like) demonstrating that costs claimed have actually been incurred. To the extent costs have not yet been incurred at the time the Claim is submitted, actual cost records must be submitted on a current basis not less than once a week during any periods costs are incurred. A cost record will be considered current if received by CCU within ten (1 0) days of the date the cost reflected in the record is incurred. At the request of OWNER, claimed extra costs may be subject to further verification procedures (such as having an inspector verify the performance of alleged extra work on a daily basis). 16.7.1.4.2 If the Claim involves an alleged error or omission in the Contract Documents: (i) an affirmative representation under penalty of perjury by CONTRACTOR and any affected Subcontractors and suppliers that the error or omission was not discovered prior to submitting a bid for the CORWIN THEATER REPAIR& P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
5/30/2017 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 00 7300-9
•
Contract, and (ii) a detailed statement demonstrating that the error or omission reasonably should not have been discovered, by CONTRACTOR, its Subcontractors and/or suppliers, prior to submitting a bid for the Contract. 16. 7.L4.3 If the Claim involves an extension of the Contract
Time, written documentation demonstrating CONTRACTOR's entitlement to a time extension under Article 12.1. 16.7.1.4.4 Ifthe Claim involves an adjustment of the Contract
Amount for delay, written documentation demonstrating CONTRACTOR's entitlement to such an adjustment under Articles 11 and 12.1. 16. 7.1.4.5 Pursuant
•
•
to Public Contract Code section 9204(d)(5), a Subcontractor may request in writing, either on its own behalf or on behalf of a lower tier Subcontractor, that CONTRACTOR submit to OWNER a Claim for work which was performed by the Subcontractor or by a lower tier Subcontractor on behalf of the Subcontractor. The Subcontractor requesting that the Claim be submitted to OWNER shall furnish reasonable documentation to support the Claim. Regardless of whether or not CONTRACTOR decides to submit the Subcontractor's Claim to OWNER, CONTRACTOR shall provide a copy of the Subcontractor's written request, including all supporting documentation, to the OAR within ten (10) days of CONTRACTOR's receipt of the request. In the event CONTRACTOR agrees to submit a Subcontractor's Claim to OWNER, CONTRACTOR shall submit such Claim as a Change Order Proposal in accordance with Articles 10, 11 and 12, unless such Claim was previously submitted to OWNER as a Change Order Proposal. Within forty-five (45) days of receipt of the Subcontractor's written request, CONTRACTOR shall notify the Subcontractor in writing as to whether CONTRACTOR submitted the Claim to OWNER and, if CONTRACTOR did not submit the Claim, CONTRACTOR shall provide the Subcontractor with a written statement of the reasons for not having done so and shall concurrently provide a copy of such written
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR& P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
5/30/2017 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 00 7300-10
•
statement to the OAR. In the event CONTRACTOR includes supporting documentation with such written statement, CONTRACTOR shall concurrently provide a copy of such supporting documentation to the OAR. 16. 7.1.4.6 If CONTRACTOR submits a Claim on behalf of a
Subcontractor as set forth in Article 16.7 .1.4.5, in addition to the penalty of perjury language required by Article 16.7 .1.1, the Claim shall also include a statement in writing and signed by an authorized agent or officer of CONTRACTOR under penalty of perjury that includes the following language immediately above or before CONTRACTOR's signature: "I declare under penalty of perjury under the laws of the State of California that [insert name of CONTRACTOR] has thoroughly evaluated the claim of [insert name of Subcontractor] and determined that the information provided and statements made in the claim are true and correct, substantiated and of merit."
•
16.8
Upon receipt of a Claim, OWNER shall conduct a reasonable review of the Claim and, within a period not to exceed forty-five (45) days, shall provide CONTRACTOR a written statement identifying what portion of the Claim is disputed and what portion is undisputed. Upon receipt of a Claim, OWNER and CONTRACTOR may, by mutual written agreement, extend the forty-five (45) day time period. OWNER shall process and make payment of any undisputed portion of a Claim within sixty (60) days after OWNER issues its written statement. Failure by OWNER to provide a written statement in response to a Claim from CONTRACTOR within the forty-five (45) day time period, or within an agreed upon extended time period, shall result in the Claim being deemed rejected in its entirety. A Claim that is rejected by reason of OWNER's failure to respond, or failure to timely respond, to the Claim shall not constitute an adverse finding regarding the merits of the Claim or the claimant's responsibility or qualifications. 16.9
•
District Review of Claims:
Meet and Confer:
If CONTRACTOR disputes OWNER's written response made pursuant to Article 16.8, or if OWNER fails to respond within the time frame prescribed in Article 16.8, CONTRACTOR, within fifteen (15) days of OWNER's written response or if OWNER fails to respond, within fifteen (15) days after OWNER's response was due, may demand in a writing sent to CCU by registered mail or certified mail, return receipt requested, with a copy to the OAR, an informal conference to COR WIN THEATER REPAIR & P .0. T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
5/30/2017 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 00 7300-11
•
•
meet and confer for settlement of the issues in dispute. OWNER shall schedule a meet and confer conference within thirty (30) days of its receipt of CONTRACTOR's written demand.
16.10 Mediation: Within ten (1 0) business days following the conclusion of the meet and confer conference, if the Claim or any portion of the Claim remains in dispute, OWNER shall provide CONTRACTOR a written statement identifying the portion of the Claim that remains in dispute and the portion that is undisputed. Any payment due on an undisputed portion of the Claim shall be processed and made within sixty (60) days after the OWNER issues its written statement. Any disputed portion of the Claim, as identified by CONTRACTOR in writing, shall be submitted to nonbinding mediation administered by the AAA under its construction industry mediation rules. The expenses and fees of the mediator and the administrative fees shall be divided among the parties equally. Each party shall pay its own counsel fees, witness fees, and other expenses. OWNER and CONTRACTOR shall mutually agree to a mediator within ten (10) business days after the disputed portion of the Claim has been identified in writing. If the parties cannot agree upon a mediator, each party shall select a mediator and those mediators shall select a qualified neutral third party to mediate with regard to the disputed portion of the Claim. Each party shall bear the fees and costs charged by its respective mediator in connection with the selection of the neutral mediator. The foregoing notwithstanding, pursuant to Public Contract Code section 9204(f), the parties may mutually agree in writing to waive mediation.
16.11 CONTRACTOR's Obligation to File Government Code Claim (All Claims): Nothing in this Contract, including Article 16, waives or modifies CONTRACTOR's obligation to present a timely Claim under Government Code section 910, et seq. Therefore, in addition to complying with the contractual Claims procedures, CONTRACTOR is required to present Claims to OWNER pursuant to Government Code section 910, et seq. If after the requirements of Articles 16.8, 16.9 and 16.10 are satisfied, and all or a portion of the Claim remains unresolved, and if the Government Code Claim is rejected by OWNER, CONTRACTOR may proceed under Article 16.12.
16.12 Litigation (All Claims): The sole forum for resolution of unresolved Claims shall be in the Superior Court of the State of California in the county in which the Project is located. Each party shall pay its own counsel fees, witness fees, and other expenses in such litigation.
16.12.1
•
Claims of $375,000 or Less: The provisions of Public Contract Code section 20104.4 shall apply. Pursuant to Public Contract Code section 20104.4(a), within sixty (60) days, but no earlier than thirty (30) days, following the filing of responsive pleadings, the court shall submit the
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
5/30/2017 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 00 7300-12
•
matter to nonbinding mediation unless waived by mutual stipulation of both parties. Pursuant to Public Contract Code section 9204(d)(2)(D), a mediation conducted pursuant to Article 16.10 shall excuse the obligation under Public Contract Code section 20104.4(a) to mediate after litigation has been commenced unless otherwise agreed to by the parties in writing. 16.13 Waiver: A failure by OWNER to enforce any time or other requirement in the Contract Documents, including those in Articles 9, 10, 11, 12 or 16 in connection with any Claim shall not constitute a waiver of, and shall not preclude OWNER from enforcing, such requirements in connection with any Claim. 16.14 District Claim Approval:
•
CONTRACTOR agrees and understands that any approval, either express or implied, of any Claim shall not be binding upon OWNER unless and until such approval is approved or ratified by execution of a written Change Order approved by the Board of Education or Deputy Chief Procurement Officer under the delegated authority of OWNER's Board of Education or by a Settlement Agreement executed by the Board of Education or Deputy Chief Procurement Officer under the delegated authority of OWNER's Board of Education or a person to whom the OWNER's Board of Education has delegated authority to execute a Settlement Agreement within the dollar amount of the Settlement Agreement which he or she is executing.
16.15 No Cessation of Work: Notwithstanding the making of any Claim or the existence of any dispute regarding any Claim, unless otherwise directed by OWNER, CONTRACTOR shall not cause any delay, cessation, or termination in or of CONTRACTOR's performance of the Work, but shall diligently proceed with performance of the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. OWNER will continue to make payments in accordance with the Contract Documents. 16.16 Strict Compliance:
•
For good and valuable consideration, the receipt and adequacy of which are hereby acknowledged, and as an express, material condition of OWNER accepting CONTRACTOR's bid for this Contract as responsive, CONTRACTOR agrees that strict compliance with the requirements of Articles 9, 10, 11, 12 and 16 is an express condition precedent to CONTRACTOR's right to prosecute an action in any forum. COR WIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O. T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
5/30/2017 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 00 7300-13
•
16.17 No Payment for Claim Preparation Costs:
CONTRACTOR shall bear all costs, fees and expenses of CONTRACTOR, its Subcontractors and suppliers in preparing and presenting any Claim to OWNER.
END OF SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS
•
•
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR& P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
5/30/2017 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 00 7300-14
•
SECTION 00 7316 OWNER CONTROLLED INSURANCE PROGRAM (OCIP) 1.01
1.02
•
1.03
RELATED DOCUMENT: A.
LAUSD Owner Controlled Insurance Program - The School Repair and Construction Program Insurance Manual (07/08/2014 v. 02)
B.
LAUSD School Repair and Construction Project Safety Standards
ELIGIBILITY: A.
Bidder is instructed to fully review the enclosed/following LAUSD OCIP Insurance Manual and Safety Standards, especially Section 3, Pages 7-8, Section 4 and Section 5, as to their eligibility for coverage under the OCIP Program.
B.
Bidder is required to determine eligibilities prior to tendering a bid for this Contract. To enroll in OCIP, bidder must be pre-qualified and subcontractors may not have an Experience Modification Rate exceeding 1.00.
·EXCLUDED PARTIES: A.
Excluded Parties must meet the insurance requirements established in Section 5 of the LAUSD OCIP Insurance Manual and Safety Standards, and provide evidence of coverage to the OWNER.
B.
Excluded Parties must provide evidence of Worker's Compensation, General Liability, Excess/Umbrella Liability and Automobile Liability insurance for all activities, including both on-site and off-site activities per the insurance requirements of the Contract.
C.
For construction projects meeting any of the conditions specified below the contractor will be considered an "Excluded Party" for OCIP coverage. In addition to obtaining the insurance coverage specified above in 1.03B, bidder will be required to provide evidence of Pollution Liability insurance for all activities including both on-site and off-site activities as per the insurance specifications in the Contract. 1. Any demolition project with a construction estimate that exceeds $1,000,000 or 2. Any project with demolition and/or hazardous materials abatement that is more than 10% of the value of the construction estimate
•
1.04
COST OF INSURANCE IN BID PRICE:
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
REVISED 7/24/2014 OWNER CONTROLLED INSURANCE PROGRAM (OCIP) 00 7316-1 ·:..·.
~
.·
I.
•
A.
Each OCIP eligible bidder is required to exclude from its bid amount, the cost of the OCIP Coverages provided by the OWNER.
B.
Each OCIP excluded bidder is required to include in its bid amount, the cost of all insurance coverages required under the Contract.
END OF SECTION
•
•
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR& P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
REVISED 7/24/2014 OWNER CONTROLLED INSURANCE PROGRAM (OCIP) 00 7316-2 • ···" ...... _, • • .l• -~ •• \
' ....
)I"
;z~
... ,. . .,._ • • ""··
-:.z.. c··~
-•
.:, '•-·- · . ...-.· : .-:_; ,.
......
<:..:...,::-rJ .•
.,.
••
--~
• ..,.. , ..,-,,..,. ·-. - ,.·,
LOS ANGELES UNIFIED SCHOOL DISTRICT The School Repair and Construction Program
Owner Controlled Insurance Program OCIP III Contractors Insurance Procedures Manual July 8, 2014
The LAUSD OCIP III - Insurance Manual 07/08/2014 Alliant Version 02
Table of Contents 1.0
INTRODUCTION ........................................................................................................... 4
1.1
Overview ................................................................................................................. 4
2.0
PROJECT DIRECTORY ................................................................................................... 5
3.0
PROJECT DEFINITIONS ................................................................................................. 7
4.0
OCIP Coverages ......................................................................................................... 10
4.1
Excluded Parties .................................................................................................... 10
4.2
Evidence of Coverage ............................................................................................. 10
4.3
Summary Description of OCIP Coverages ................................................................ 10
4.4
Assignment of Return Premiums ............................................................................ 10
4.5
Workers’ Compensation and Employers Liability: ................................................... 11
4.6
Commercial General Liability ................................................................................. 11
4.7
Excess Liability ....................................................................................................... 12
4.8
Builders Risk .......................................................................................................... 12
4.9
Contractor’s Pollution Liability ............................................................................... 12
4.10 5.0
Additional Information ....................................................................................... 13
Contractor and Subcontractor Required Coverage .................................................... 14
5.1
Enrolled Parties ..................................................................................................... 14
5.2
Excluded Parties .................................................................................................... 14
5.3
Certificate Requirements ....................................................................................... 15
5.4
Evidence of OCIP Coverage..................................................................................... 15
5.5
Workers’ Compensation and Employer’s Liability ................................................... 16
5.6
Commercial General Liability Insurance.................................................................. 16
5.7
Automobile Liability............................................................................................... 16
5.8
Property Insurance ................................................................................................ 17
5.9
Watercraft and Aircraft Liability ............................................................................. 17
5.10
Professional Liability........................................................................................... 17
5.11
Pollution Liability ............................................................................................... 17
5.12
Other Insurance Requirements for All Subcontractors ......................................... 18
The LAUSD OCIP III - Insurance Manual 07/08/2014 Alliant Version 02
2
6.0
Contractor and Subcontractor Responsibilities.......................................................... 19
6.1
Contractor Bids ...................................................................................................... 20
6.2
Adjustments for OCIP Insurance Costs .................................................................... 20
6.3
Enrollment............................................................................................................. 22
6.4
Medical Provider Network (MPN) Requirements .................................................... 22
6.5
Maintaining Enrollment in the OCIP ....................................................................... 23
6.6
Safety Standards .................................................................................................... 23
6.7
Payroll Reports ...................................................................................................... 23
6.8
Insurance Company Payroll Audit........................................................................... 24
6.9
Change Order Procedures ...................................................................................... 24
6.10
Demolition / Abatement Work ........................................................................... 24
6.11
Crane Work ........................................................................................................ 25
6.12
Close Out and Audit Procedures ......................................................................... 26
7.0
Claim Reporting Procedures ...................................................................................... 27
7.1
Workers’ Compensation Claims.............................................................................. 27
7.2
General Liability Claims .......................................................................................... 28
7.3
Automobile Liability Claims .................................................................................... 28
7.4
Pollution Liability Claims ........................................................................................ 28
7.5
Builders Risk Claims ............................................................................................... 29
7.6
Enrolled Contractors Incident / Claims Investigations ............................................. 29
8.0
APPENDIX ................................................................................................................. 30
The LAUSD OCIP III - Insurance Manual 07/08/2014 Alliant Version 02
3
INTRODUCTION
SECTION
1
1.0 INTRODUCTION 1.1 Overview
Welcome to the Los Angeles Unified School District (LAUSD) School Repair and Construction Program Owner Controlled Insurance Program. LAUSD has arranged for its construction projects to be insured under its Owner Controlled Insurance Program (OCIP). An OCIP is a single insurance program that insures the District, the Board, all Enrolled Contractors and Enrolled Subcontractors, and other designated parties for Work performed at the Project Site(s). Certain Contractors and Subcontractors are excluded from this OCIP. These parties are identified in Section 3 of this Manual. Coverage under the OCIP includes Workers’ Compensation, Employer’s Liability, General Liability, Excess Liability, Builders Risk, and Contractor's Pollution Liability Insurance (“OCIP Coverages”) for operations of Enrolled Parties at the Project Site. The District will pay the insurance premiums for the OCIP coverages described in this Manual. You should notify your insurance broker/insurer(s) of the coverages provided under this OCIP to avoid the duplication of coverage. Each bidder is required to EXCLUDE from its bid price the cost of the OCIP Coverages provided by the District. The Contractor's and Subcontractor's cost of insurance would include the reduction in insurance premiums, related taxes and assessments, markup on the insurance premiums and losses retained through the use of a self-funded program, self-insured retention or deductible program. The total cost of insurance must include expected losses within any retained risk. The Contractor must deduct the cost of insurance for all their Subcontractors from the bid in addition to their own cost of insurance.
DISCLAIMER: The information in this Manual is intended to outline the OCIP. If any conflict exists between this Manual and the OCIP insurance policies the insurance policies will govern.
The LAUSD OCIP III - Insurance Manual 07/08/2014 Alliant Version 02
4
PROJECT DIRECTORY
SECTION
2
2.0 PROJECT DIRECTORY OCIP ADMINISTRATOR / BROKER Alliant Insurance Services Construction Services Group 333 S. Hope St. Suite 3750 Los Angeles, CA 90071 PROGRAM MANAGER
PROGRAM ADMINISTRATOR
Martin Cunningham II Office: 866-394-7937 Fax: 866-867-5811
[email protected]
Dennis McGowan Office: 866-394-7937 Fax: 866-867-5811
[email protected]
PROGRAM ADMINISTRATOR Lisa Clark Office: 866-394-7937 Fax: 866-867-5811
[email protected] WC and GL CLAIMS REPORTING
DIRECT CLAIM REPORTING TO: ACE-ESIS Claims
Dedicated Line: 888-709-3644 Email:
[email protected] OCIP PORTAL – ALLIANT WRAPX OCIP Document Submission Email:
[email protected]
Online Enrollment, Payroll Reporting & Document Management Website: https://alliantwrapx.alliantinsurance.com/contractorportal
*Contact Project Administrator for User Access The LAUSD OCIP III - Insurance Manual 07/08/2014 Alliant Version 02
5
PROJECT DIRECTORY
Los Angeles Unified School District Division of Risk Management & Insurance Services 333 South Beaudry Avenue, 28th Floor Los Angeles, CA 90017 Director of Risk Mgmt
OCIP Manager
Robert Reider (213) 241-1843 (office) (213) 241-8956 (fax)
[email protected]
Aristeo Aguilera (213) 241-7994 (office) (213) 241-8956 (fax)
[email protected]
OCIP WC Claims Supervisor Don Hughes (213) 241-2210 (office) (213) 241-8956 (fax)
[email protected]
OCIP Coverages POLICIES Workers’ Compensation General Liability Excess Liability
Additional Coverages POLICIES Builders’ Risk Pollution
The LAUSD OCIP III - Insurance Manual 07/08/2014 Alliant Version 02
6
PROJECT DEFINITIONS
SECTION
3.0 PROJECT DEFINITIONS
3
The following definitions apply to this project and to the descriptions of the Project Coverage used in this manual: Approved Off-Site Locations: Storage yards or staging areas used solely in connection with performing work at the Project Site. All locations must be approved by the Sponsor and insurer. Certificate of Insurance: A Document providing evidence of the existence of coverage for a particular insurance policy or policies. Contract: A written agreement between the Sponsor and the Contractor for specific work and also includes an agreement between a Subcontractor and any tier of Subcontractor. Contractor Claims Obligation: The amount Contractors of every tier are responsible for paying as their contribution for settlement of an insured loss. District: Los Angeles Unified School District (LAUSD) Eligible Parties: Parties performing labor or services at the Project site are eligible to enroll in the OCIP unless they are an Excluded Party. Employer: Any individual, firm, or corporation that provides direct construction labor for work performed at the Project Site. Enrolled Parties: Those eligible Contractors and Subcontractors that have submitted all necessary enrollment information and have been accepted into the OCIP as evidenced by a The LAUSD OCIP III - Insurance Manual 07/08/2014 Alliant Version 02
7
PROJECT DEFINITIONS
LAUSD OCIP Confirmation Letter and LAUSD OCIP Certificate of Insurance provided by Alliant Excluded Parties: • Hazardous materials remediation, removal and/or transport companies and their consultants; • Architects, surveyors, engineers, and soil testing engineers, and their consultants; • Vendors, suppliers, fabricators, material dealers, truckers, haulers, drivers and others who merely transport, pickup, deliver, or carry materials, personnel, parts or equipment or any other items or persons to or from the Project site; • Contractors and each of their respective Subcontractors who do not perform any actual labor on the Project site, during the term of the Contract; • Any parties or entities not specifically designated by in its sole discretion, even if otherwise eligible. • All crane operators and crane operations. OCIP: LAUSD’s Owner Controlled Insurance Program – A coordinated insurance program providing certain coverages, as defined herein, for the District, Eligible and Enrolled Contractors, and Eligible and Enrolled Subcontractors performing Work at the Project Site. OCIP Insurer: The insurance company named on the policy or on the Certificate of Insurance that provides coverage for the OCIP. Program Administrator: Alliant Insurance Services, Inc. Project Site: Project Site shall mean those areas designated in writing by Sponsor for performance of the Work and such additional areas as may be designated in writing by Sponsor for Contractors use in performance of the Work. Subject to notification and other requirements for off-site locations, the term Site shall also include (a) field office sites, (b) property used for bonded storage of material for the Project approved by Sponsor, (c) staging areas dedicated to the Project, and (d) areas where activities incidental to the Project are being performed by Contractors covered by the workers’ compensation policy included in the OCIP, but excluding any permanent locations of Contractors.
The LAUSD OCIP III - Insurance Manual 07/08/2014 Alliant Version 02
8
PROJECT DEFINITIONS
Safety Standards: Establish minimum standards for contractor safety programs. Safety Standards are provided to all participants during the bidding process. Work: Operations as fully described in the Contract, performed at, or emanating directly from the Project Site. Also, the entire completed construction or the various separately identifiable parts required to be furnished under the Contract documents.
The LAUSD OCIP III - Insurance Manual 07/08/2014 Alliant Version 02
9
OCIP INSURANCE COVERAGE
SECTION
4 4.0 OCIP Coverages This chapter provides a brief description of OCIP Coverages. The actual policies dictate coverage.
4.1 Excluded Parties Excluded Parties must meet the insurance requirements established in Section 5 and provide evidence of coverage to the District.
4.2 Evidence of Coverage The OCIP Administrator will provide a Certificate of Insurance evidencing Workers’ Compensation, General Liability, Excess Liability, Builders Risk, and Contractor’s Pollution Liability insurance to each Enrolled Contractor and Enrolled Subcontractor. Each Party enrolled for Workers’ Compensation coverage will be issued their own Workers’ Compensation policy listing them as the Named Insured. Enrolled Contractors and Enrolled Subcontractors will be an Additional Insured on the other OCIP policies as those policies provide.
4.3 Summary Description of OCIP Coverages The following descriptions on these pages provide a summary of OCIP insurance coverages ONLY. Contractors and Subcontractors may review the policies for actual terms, conditions, exclusions and limitations.
4.4 Assignment of Return Premiums The Sponsor will pay the cost of the OCIP insurance coverage. The Sponsor will be the sole recipient of any return OCIP premiums or dividends. All Participating Contractors shall assign to Sponsor all adjustments, refunds, premium discounts, dividends, credits, or any other monies due from the OCIP insurers.
The LAUSD OCIP III - Insurance Manual 07/08/2014 Alliant Version 02
10
OCIP INSURANCE COVERAGE
4.5 Workers’ Compensation and Employers Liability: State: California Workers’ Compensation and Employer’s Liability Part One: Workers’ Compensation Part Two:
Statutory Limit
Employer’s Liability Bodily Injury by Accident, each accident Bodily Injury by Disease, each employee Bodily Injury by Disease, policy limit
Annual Limits Per Insured $1,000,000 $1,000,000 $1,000,000
Each Enrolled Contractor will be issued a separate workers’ compensation policy
Each Enrolled Party will be issued an individual Workers’ Compensation policy
4.6 Commercial General Liability Coverage Form: Occurrence General Liability Limits of Liability Shared by All Insureds for All Projects
General Aggregate (Reinstates Annually) Products/ Completed Operations Aggregate Personal/ Advertising Injury Bodily Injury & Property Damage – Each Occurrence Limit Fire Damage Legal Liability Medical Expense •
• •
$ 4,000,000 $ 4,000,000 $ 2,000,000 $ 2,000,000 $1,000,000 $5,000
This insurance will NOT provide coverage for products liability to any insured party, vendor, supplier, off-site fabricator, material dealer or other party for any product manufactured, assembled or otherwise worked upon away from the Project Site. The General Aggregate reinstates on an annual basis. Ten (10) Years Products & Completed Operations Extension beyond final acceptance of the entire project with a single, non-reinstated aggregate limit.
The LAUSD OCIP III - Insurance Manual 07/08/2014 Alliant Version 02
11
OCIP INSURANCE COVERAGE
The policy contains exclusions. Some of these exclusions are: Off-site exposures, Real & Personal Property in the care, custody or control of the insured; Asbestos; Lead; Discrimination & Wrongful Termination; ERISA; Architects & Engineers Errors & Omissions; Owned & Non-Owned Aircraft, Watercraft, Pollution and Automobile Liability; Nuclear Broad Form Liability, Terrorism.
4.7 Excess Liability Excess Liability Limits of Liability Shared by All Insureds for All Projects
General Aggregate (Reinstates Annually) Each Occurrence Limit •
$ 100,000,000 $ 100,000,000
Policy follows form of underlying Commercial General Liability and Employer’s Liability policy wording (provisions, coverage, exclusions, etc.).
4.8 Builders Risk Projects under $50 Million Builders Risk Limits of Liability
Each Occurrence Limit Contractor or Subcontractor Deductible •
$ 50,000,000 $ 10,000
All projects in excess of $50 million in construction value must be submitted for individual underwriting prior to binding coverage.
4.9 Contractor’s Pollution Liability Shared by All Enrolled Parties $50,000,000 $50,000,000
Each Occurrence Limit Annual General Aggregate Limit
The LAUSD OCIP III - Insurance Manual 07/08/2014 Alliant Version 02
12
OCIP INSURANCE COVERAGE
4.10 Additional Information •
Insurance coverage and limits provided under the OCIP are limited in scope and are specific to Work performed after the inception date of your enrollment into this OCIP. Your insurance representative should review this information. Any additional coverage you may wish to purchase will be at your option and expense.
•
Contractors and Subcontractors are advised to arrange their own insurance for Contractor or Subcontractor owned, used, leased or rented equipment and materials. The OCIP will not cover Contractor or Subcontractor property.
The LAUSD OCIP III - Insurance Manual 07/08/2014 Alliant Version 02
13
SUBCONTRACTOR REQUIRED COVERAGE
SECTION
5.0 Contractor and Subcontractor Required Coverage
5
Contractors and all Subcontractors are required to maintain coverage to protect against losses that occur away from the Project Site or that are otherwise not covered under the OCIP. Contractors and Subcontractors are required to maintain insurance coverage for the duration of the Contract(s) that protects the District from liabilities. These liabilities may arise from the Contractor’s and Subcontractor’s operations performed away from the Project site, from coverages not provided by the OCIP, or from operations performed by Excluded Parties. The OCIP places Contractors and Subcontractors into one of two main categories: Enrolled Parties and Excluded Parties.
5.1 Enrolled Parties Enrolled Parties must provide evidence of Workers’ Compensation, General Liability, and Excess/Umbrella Liability insurance for off-site activities and Automobile Liability insurance for both on-site and off-site activities as specified in the Contract. See Section 3 for the definition of Enrolled Parties. Prime Contractors must provide their Certificate of Insurance to Alliant upon enrollment in the OCIP. The certificates can be uploaded into WrapX or emailed in to:
[email protected].
5.2 Excluded Parties Excluded Parties must provide evidence of Workers’ Compensation, General Liability, Excess/Umbrella Liability, Automobile Liability and Pollution Liability insurance for all activities including both on-site and offsite activities as per the insurance specifications in the Contract. See Section 3 for the definition of Excluded Parties. All Excluded Prime Contractors must provide their Certificates of Insurance to Alliant. The certificates can be uploaded into WrapX or emailed in to:
[email protected].
The LAUSD OCIP III - Insurance Manual 07/08/2014 Alliant Version 02
14
SUBCONTRACTOR REQUIRED COVERAGE
5.3 Certificate Requirements All Prime Contractors, Enrolled and Excluded, must submit verification of insurance in the form of a Certificate of Insurance on a standard ACORD form 25-S. They must provide verification of insurance to the OCIP Administrator (Alliant) within ten (10) working days of Notice of Intent to Award of contract, and at least thirty (30) days prior to any renewal, change or replacement of coverage. LAUSD must be added as an Additional Insured to the General Liability and Automobile Liability and a Waiver of Subrogation in favor of LAUSD must apply to all lines of coverage, including Workers' Compensation. A sample of an acceptable Certificate of Insurance is provided in Section 8. Please note the requirement for thirty (30) days notice of cancellation, modification or material change. The Additional Insured endorsement shall state that the coverage provided to the Additional Insureds is Primary and Non- Contributory with respect to any other insurance available to the Additional Insureds. All Contractors and Subcontractors are responsible for monitoring their Enrolled Subcontractors Certificates of Insurance whether they are enrolled or not. The District reserves the right to disapprove the use of Subcontractors unable to meet the insurance requirements. Certificates of Insurance evidencing compliance must be made available to the District or the OCIP Administrator upon request.
5.4 Evidence of OCIP Coverage Each Participating Contractor will be issued an individual Workers’ Compensation policy including Employer’s Liability coverage. The OCIP Administrator will also provide a Certificate of Insurance evidencing General Liability, and Excess Liability insurance to each Participating Contractor, each of whom will be a named insured on the policy. Other documentation including forms, posting notices, if any, will be furnished to each Participating Contractor. A complete copy of the policy will be furnished to an authorized representative of each Participating Contractor upon written request.
The LAUSD OCIP III - Insurance Manual 07/08/2014 Alliant Version 02
15
SUBCONTRACTOR REQUIRED COVERAGE
5.5 Workers’ Compensation and Employer’s Liability Workers’ Compensation and Employer’s Liability Part One: Workers’ Compensation Part Two:
Statutory Limit
Employer’s Liability Bodily Injury by Accident, each accident Bodily Injury by Disease, each employee Bodily Injury by Disease, policy limit
Annual Limits Per Insured $1,000,000 $1,000,000 $1,000,000
Enrolled Contractors shall provide evidence of Workers’ Compensation insurance for off-site activities. Excluded Contractors shall provide evidence of Workers’ Compensation applicable to on and off-site projects.
5.6 Commercial General Liability Insurance General Liability Limits of Liability Shared by All Insureds for All Projects
Each Occurrence Limit Personal/ Advertising Injury General Aggregate (Reinstates Annually) Products/ Completed Operations Aggregate
$ 1,000,000 $ 1,000,000 $ 2,000,000 $ 2,000,000
Enrolled Contractors shall provide evidence of General Liability insurance for off-site activities. Excluded Contractors shall provide evidence of General Liability insurance applicable to on and off-site projects.
Coverage must be an Occurrence form and it must apply to bodily injury and property damage for operations (including explosion, collapse and underground coverage), independent contractors, products and completed operations. Limits can be provided by a combination of a primary Commercial General Liability policy and an Excess or Umbrella Liability policy. Additional Insured Endorsements required. (section 5.12)
5.7 Automobile Liability A Commercial Business Auto Policy which covers all owned, hired and non-owned automobiles, trucks and trailers with coverage limits not less than $1,000,000 Combined Single Limit each accident for bodily injury and property damage. Coverage will apply both on and away from the Project Site(s). All contractors shall be required to maintain limits of not less than $1,000,000 Combined Single Limit. All Subcontractors shall provide evidence of automobile liability. The OCIP does not cover automobile liability. The LAUSD OCIP III - Insurance Manual 07/08/2014 Alliant Version 02
16
SUBCONTRACTOR REQUIRED COVERAGE
5.8 Property Insurance Contractors and Subcontractors are advised to arrange their own insurance for owned, used, leased or rented equipment, whether such equipment is located at a Project Site or “in transit”. Contractors and Subcontractors are solely responsible for any loss or damage to their personal property and property not intended for incorporation into the structure including contractor tools and equipment, scaffolding and temporary structures, whether owned, used, leased or rented by the contractor. Contractors and Subcontractors are also responsible for any loss or damage to any off-site property and/or materials created or provided under the Contract. The OCIP does not cover subcontractor’s property.
5.9 Watercraft and Aircraft Liability The operator of any watercraft or aircraft of any kind must maintain liability insurance with limits of at least $5,000,000 that names the District and the respective Contractor and/or Subcontractor as an Additional Insured with Primary and Non-Contributory wording. In addition, the limit of liability must be satisfactory to the District. Such insurance requirements will be determined as the need arises. The OCIP does not provide Watercraft or Aviation insurance.
5.10 Professional Liability All professional service firms must provide professional liability insurance appropriate for their profession and satisfactory to the District. The OCIP does not provide Professional Liability insurance.
5.11 Pollution Liability Work related to the removal, remediation or abatement of hazardous materials, i.e., asbestos, lead, PCBs, heavy metals, specified demolition, etc. is specifically excluded from OCIP coverage. Contractors/subcontractors performing this type of work must provide and maintain a Pollution Liability Policy covering the exposures mentioned above. The District will determine limits based on the nature of the contract and the risk involved.
The LAUSD OCIP III - Insurance Manual 07/08/2014 Alliant Version 02
17
SUBCONTRACTOR REQUIRED COVERAGE
5.12 Other Insurance Requirements for All Subcontractors Waivers of Subrogation Required: The Contractor's Workers’ Compensation, General Liability, Automobile Liability and Umbrella or Excess Liability insurers shall provide Waivers of Subrogation in favor of the District, the Board, its officials, employees and agents and the OCIP Administrator. Additional Insured Endorsements Required: The Contractor's General Liability and Excess Liability Insurance policies will name the Los Angeles Unified School District, the Board, its officials, employees and agents, and the OCIP Administrator as Additional Insureds and it will state that the coverage is Primary and NonContributory.
The LAUSD OCIP III - Insurance Manual 07/08/2014 Alliant Version 02
18
SUBCONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITIES
SECTION
6.0 Contractor and Subcontractor Responsibilities
6
Throughout the course of the Project(s), Contractors and Subcontractors will be responsible for reporting and maintaining certain records as outlined in this section. Contractors and Subcontractors are required to cooperate with the District and its OCIP Administrator in all aspects of OCIP implementation and administration. Responsibilities of the Contractor include all contract responsibilities, including but not limited to the following: • • • • • • • • • • • • •
Safety Pre-Qualification prior to submitting a bid. Contractors may only contract with Subcontractors that they have safety pre-qualified EXCLUDE the cost of OCIP insurance from their bids, if eligible for the OCIP Provide each Subcontractor with a copy of this Insurance Manual & Safety Standards Enrollment in the OCIP, if eligible, within ten (10) working days of Notice of Intent to Award of Contract Include OCIP provisions in all contracts with Subcontractors Provide timely evidence of other insurance or contractor required insurance to the OCIP Administrator within ten (10) working days of notice of intent to award of contract Notify the OCIP Administrator of all subcontracts awarded Maintain and report monthly payroll records Cooperate with the OCIP Administrator’s and/or the OCIP Manager’s requests for information Comply with insurance, claim and safety procedures Monitor and maintain its Subcontractors’ Certificates of Insurance on-site Notify the OCIP Administrator immediately of any insurance cancellation, modification, material change or non-renewal of Contractor required insurance Ensure that their own eligible and enrolled subcontractors EXCLUDE the cost of OCIP insurance from their bids.
The LAUSD OCIP III - Insurance Manual 07/08/2014 Alliant Version 02
19
SUBCONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITIES
Responsibilities of Subcontractors of all tiers: • • • • • •
Safety pre-qualification Enrollment in the OCIP, if eligible, within ten (10) working days of the Notice of Intent to Award and prior to mobilization on-site Maintain and report monthly payroll records Cooperate with the OCIP Administrator's and/or OCIP Manager’s requests for information Comply with insurance, claim and safety procedures Monitor and maintain its Subcontractor's Certificates of Insurance on-site
6.1 Contractor Bids The District provides insurance for all Enrolled Contractors and Enrolled Subcontractors under the OCIP for Work performed at the Project Site(s). The section below, “Adjustments for OCIP Insurance Costs” describes the procedure for bidding and how you must identify and EXCLUDE your insurance costs from the bid. Section 8 of this Manual contains worksheets that can help you estimate your insurance costs for this Project. The OCIP Administrator can also assist you in identifying the insurance costs. See Section 8 for sample forms that can help identify your insurance costs. See Section 2 for information on contacting the OCIP Administrator.
6.2 Adjustments for OCIP Insurance Costs Each Contractor and Subcontractor is required to EXCLUDE the Costs of OCIP Coverages from its bid price for the proposed scope of work (including subcontracted work whether or not the Subcontractor is identified at the time of the bid). Change orders must also be priced by the Enrolled Parties to EXCLUDE the cost of insurance. “Costs of OCIP Coverages” is defined as the amount of Contractor’s and its Subcontractors’ reduction in insurance costs due to eligibility for OCIP Coverages as determined by the Owner using the Alliant Insurance Cost Worksheet located in the Insurance Manual (Section 8) and information available to the District and/or the OCIP Administrator regarding the costs of similar coverages taking into account limits of liability, coverages, and rating of the insurer. In the event of failure of any tier to furnish and maintain said insurance and to furnish satisfactory evidence The LAUSD OCIP III - Insurance Manual 07/08/2014 Alliant Version 02
20
SUBCONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITIES
thereof, the Sponsor shall have the right to take out and maintain same coverage for all parties on behalf of the Contractor of any tier who also agrees to furnish all necessary information thereof and to pay the cost thereof to the Sponsor immediately upon presentation of a premium invoice. The Contractor's and Subcontractor's cost of insurance would include the reduction in insurance premiums, related taxes and assessments, markup on the insurance premiums and losses retained through the use of a self-funded program, self-insured retention or deductible program. The total cost of insurance must include expected losses within any retained risk. The Contractor must DEDUCT the cost of insurance for all their Subcontractors from the bid in addition to their own cost of insurance. To aid the Contractor and its Subcontractors in identifying its Workers’ Compensation, Employer’s Liability insurance, General Liability insurance, Excess Liability insurance, Builders’ Risk insurance and Contractor’s Pollution Liability insurance costs, the Insurance Cost Worksheet is included in Section 8. Contractors and Subcontractors should use this worksheet to determine the costs of insurance to be DEDUCTED from their bid. A separate form can be used for the Contractor’s self-performed work, each identified Subcontractor, and for unidentified Subcontractors at the time of the bid. The worksheets are for assistance only. Contractors should maintain these on file but do not include these worksheets with the bid submission or OCIP enrollment documents. However, each Enrolled Contractor and Enrolled Subcontractor may be required to submit insurance documentation that supports the Cost of OCIP Coverage deducted from the bid. Documentation must include the following pages from the Workers’ Compensation, Employer’s Liability, General Liability, Excess Liability, Builders Risk and Contractor’s Pollution Liability policies as applicable: • • • • •
Declarations or information page Rate page(s) Deductible endorsements Verification of experience modification (Workers’ Compensation only) Years of loss history for entities that retain losses
Under the District’s OCIP, final payroll is determined by an audit by the OCIP insurer. The audited payroll information will be used to calculate the Contractor’s and Subcontractor’s true insurance costs (in the absence of the OCIP). If the results of this comparison demonstrate that the final, actual payrolls would have produced a DIFFERENT DEDUCTION for insurance costs, AN ADDITIONAL AMOUNT WILL BE WITHHELD from the Contractor’s payments under the Contract. Contractors are solely responsible for ensuring that their Subcontractors of all tiers also DEDUCT the cost of insurance from their bid. The LAUSD OCIP III - Insurance Manual 07/08/2014 Alliant Version 02
21
SUBCONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITIES
6.3 Enrollment Each Enrolled Contractor shall provide details about themselves and their Subcontractors to the OCIP Administrator in order to enroll them in the OCIP. The Contractor and Subcontractor must each complete Online Enrollment Application in Alliant WrapX. Instructions for online access and enrollment are included in Section 8 of this manual. A separate enrollment must be completed for each and every contract, even if they already have another contract enrolled on the same project. This Enrollment must be completed and submitted to the OCIP Administrator within ten (10) working days of Notice of Intent to Award Contract to obtain coverage under the OCIP. Failure to do so will result in the Contractor being barred from entering the Project Site(s).
Each Enrolled Contractor and Enrolled Subcontractor will receive an OCIP Confirmation Letter. An OCIP Confirmation Letter is a letter issued by the OCIP Administrator (Alliant) that confirms acceptance of the applicant into the LAUSD OCIP and includes a Certificate of Insurance evidencing coverage. In addition, a separate Workers’ Compensation policy (if applicable) will be issued to each Enrolled Contractor and Enrolled Subcontractor enrolling in the OCIP for the first time. Contractors with an existing Workers’ Compensation policy under the LAUSD OCIP will receive an endorsement adding the new contract to the existing policy following submission of the Online Enrollment Application the OCIP Administrator (Alliant).
EACH CONTRACT MUST BE ENROLLED INTO THE OCIP: Enrollment into the OCIP is not automatic. Every contract must be enrolled separately. All Eligible Contractors and all Eligible Subcontractors must complete the online enrollment and participate in the enrollment process for OCIP coverage to apply. Access to the Project Site will not be permitted until Enrollment into the OCIP is complete.
6.4 Medical Provider Network (MPN) Requirements Attached to this manual is the Medical Provider Network (MPN) notice and the MPN Form-B. The MPN is a network of authorized medical providers and facilities arranged by the OCIP’s Workers’ Compensation Insurance Carrier (ACE) to treat all minor and non-life threatening injuries. The LAUSD OCIP III - Insurance Manual 07/08/2014 Alliant Version 02
22
SUBCONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITIES
The LAUSD OCIP requires Enrolled Contractors and Subcontractors of every tier MUST give the MPN Form-B to each employee and obtain their signature on the Form-B prior to the employee starting work. The Form-B’s should be maintained onsite. In the event of a worker injury, notify the OCIP Insurance Carrier that you have a signed MPN Form-B on file for that injured worker and send them a copy as per their directions. The MPN notice and MPN Form-B is Exhibit 5 to this Insurance Manual.
6.5 Maintaining Enrollment in the OCIP If you do not comply with all the terms of this Manual in a timely manner, including the Construction Safety Standards, you may not remain enrolled in the OCIP. Contractors eligible for enrollment in the OCIP who are not enrolled in the OCIP will not be granted access to the Project Site(s).
6.6 Safety Standards Each Contractor and Subcontractor is required to have a written safety program and to provide a designated safety representative who is on Site when any Work is in progress. If there are fifty (50) workers or more on a job-site, the Contractor must have a DEDICATED, FULL-TIME, Safety Representative that has no other tasks other than administering the Contractor’s and LAUSD’s Safety Programs. Safety Representative Requirements are as specified in the contract and LAUSD Safety Program. Minimum standards for Contractor safety programs are outlined in the LAUSD’s Safety Standards.
6.7 Payroll Reports Each Enrolled Contractor and Enrolled Subcontractor of every tier must submit monthly payroll reports. The reports will identify worker-hours and payroll by Workers’ Compensation classification code for all Work performed at the Project Site. This information will be used to provide the District's insurers with information required for determining the District's premium. All Enrolled Contractors and Enrolled Subcontractors must submit payroll reports prior to the 10th of the following month. Payroll must be reported online. Instructions for online access are provided in Section 8. The monthly worker-hour and payroll reports should include all on-site workers. Supervisory and clerical personnel payroll should also be included provided that it occurred on-site and covered only Work performed at or emanating directly from each Project Site.
The LAUSD OCIP III - Insurance Manual 07/08/2014 Alliant Version 02
23
SUBCONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITIES
The payroll report (Alliant Payroll Form) for the prime contractor and all subcontractors must be submitted with the contractors request for payment. The District will not process payment requests unless the Alliant Payroll Form is attached.
6.8 Insurance Company Payroll Audit Each Enrolled Contractor and Enrolled Subcontractor is required to maintain payroll records for each Contract. Such records will allocate the payroll by Workers’ Compensation classification(s) code and exclude the excess or premium paid for overtime (i.e., only the straight time rate will apply to overtime hours worked). Furthermore, such records will limit the payroll for Executive Officers and Partners/Sole Proprietors to the limitations as stated in the State of California manual rules. It is important that you properly classify payrolls, as these are reported to the rating bureau for promulgation of future Experience Modifiers for your firm. All Enrolled Contractors and Enrolled Subcontractors shall make available their payroll records, vouchers, contracts, documents, and records, of any and all kinds, to the auditors of the OCIP insurer(s) or the District’s representatives. Availability of records must be for the policy period, any extension, or during a final audit period as required by the insurance policies. Failure to submit the payroll reports as required may result in the withholding of contract progress payments or final payment until the reports are received and may also result in being barred from future opportunities with the District.
6.9 Change Order Procedures As mentioned above, change orders must also EXCLUDE the Enrolled Contractor's Costs of OCIP Coverage for the insurance coverages that are provided by the District in the OCIP.
6.10 Demolition / Abatement Work For demolition projects totaling $1,000,000 or less, or projects with hazardous materials abatement of 10% or less of the total project costs, OCIP coverage will extend to all portions of work except for hazardous materials abatement. Contractors/ The LAUSD OCIP III - Insurance Manual 07/08/2014 Alliant Version 02
24
SUBCONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITIES
subcontractors performing this type of work must provide and maintain a Pollution Liability Policy covering hazardous materials abatement. The contractor/subcontractor shall complete and submit to the Director of Risk Finance and Insurance Services (Robert Reider) or to the OCIP Manager (Aristeo Aguilera) the 00620 Certificate of Insurance for Hazardous Materials form as verification of insurance coverage for hazardous materials work. Demolition projects with no hazardous materials abatement or disturbances that may be performed by properly trained personnel according to Specification Sections 13280 and 13282 are fully covered by the OCIP. For demolition projects totaling above $1,000,000, or any project with hazardous materials abatement of more than 10% of total project costs, the contractor will be considered an “Excluded Party” for OCIP coverage. No portion of the project will be eligible for insurance coverage through the OCIP. Contractors will be required to name LAUSD as an Additional Insured and provide a Certificate of Insurance of Workers’ Compensation, General Liability, Excess/Umbrella Liability, Automobile Liability, and Pollution Liability insurance for all activities including both on-site and off-site activities as per the insurance specifications in the Contract. The Owner Authorized Representative (OAR) assigned to the project shall ensure that the appropriate insurance is maintained by the contractor for the duration of the project FOR DEMOLITION ABATEMENT
6.11 Crane Work As respects any operations requiring CRANES, contractors should notify the LAUSD OCIP Manager, Aristeo Aguilera, so that an appropriate plan can be developed in advance of the work beginning. Such notification shall give the Safety Director time to participate in the review, preplanning and monitoring phases of crane operations. Crane operations are excluded from the OCIP program; therefore the Owner Authorized Representative (OAR) assigned to the project shall ensure that the appropriate insurance is maintained by the contractor for the duration of the project. FOR CRANE OPERATIONS, the Los Angeles Unified School District, the Board, its officials, employees and agents, and the OCIP Administrator must be added as Additional Insureds as respects general liability and automobile liability. The coverage is Primary and Non-Contributory. Certificates must be sent to: Los Angeles Unified School District Division of Risk Management & Insurance Services 333 S. Beaudry Ave. 28th Floor The LAUSD OCIP III - Insurance Manual 07/08/2014 Alliant Version 02
25
SUBCONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITIES
Los Angeles, CA. 90017-5141 Attention: Aristeo Aguilera (213) 241-7994
6.12 Close Out and Audit Procedures Enrolled Contractors and Enrolled Subcontractors must submit the Notice of Work Completion form, when a Contractor and/or a lower tier Subcontractor has completed it’s Work at the LAUSD School Repair and Construction Program Project Site(s) and no longer has workers on the Project Site(s) covered by the contract. The Notice of Work Completion form will initiate the final payroll report and audit of payroll and worker-hours by the OCIP Insurer. A copy of the form is found in Section 8. Coverage ceases upon completion of work at the Project Site as documented by a Certificate of Substantial Completion from the Owner. However, a grace period of sixty (60) days of additional coverage will be extended should a Contractor be required to return to perform work on site directly and solely related to the completion of the Enrolled Contract. In no event will coverage exist beyond sixty (60) days after substantial completion nor for any work not directly and solely related to the Enrolled Contract.
OCIP coverage will cease 60 days after the date of Substantial Completion is reached on the project.
The LAUSD OCIP III - Insurance Manual 07/08/2014 Alliant Version 02
26
CLAIMS REPORTING PROCEDURES
SECTION
7.0 Claim Reporting Procedures
7
This section describes the basic procedures for reporting LAUSD OCIP claims: Workers’ Compensation, General Liability, Pollution Liability, and Damage to the Project (Builders Risk).
7.1 Workers’ Compensation Claims The main responsibility for any Contractor and Subcontractor is first to see that the injured worker receives immediate medical care. Immediately contact 911 for any serious, traumatic, and life-threatening injuries. For all minor or non life-threatening injuries, the injured worker must seek treatment within the Medical Provider Network (“MPN”). Once medical care has been arranged, the next step is to notify the OCIP Insurance Carrier (ACE) of the injury. To assist you in reporting an injury we have established a dedicated toll-free telephone number.
Immediately report any injury to ACE-ESIS at: 888-709-3644 When calling in you will need to know: 1) Project/school name, 2) Project/school address, 3) Employer name, 4) Prime contractor’s contract number with LAUSD 5) Employer’s WC policy number. You may report your WC First Report of Injury 24 hours a day, 365 days per year. When you report the Workers’ Compensation injury using the special reporting telephone number, the OCIP Insurance Carrier (ACE) will make the necessary filing with the State of California (form 5020). It is the employer's responsibility to provide the injured worker with the Employee's Claim Form (DWC-1) within 24 hours of employer’s knowledge of injury. The employer must also send a copy of the completed Employee's Claim Form (DWC-1) and the Supervisor's Accident Investigation Report to the OCIP Insurance Carrier, ACE. The OCIP Administrator provides Claims Kits to all Enrolled Contractors and Enrolled Subcontractors at time of enrollment. These kits include required claim forms and
The LAUSD OCIP III - Insurance Manual 07/08/2014 Alliant Version 02
27
CLAIMS PROCEDURES
postings. Additional kits or claims forms can be obtained from the OCIP Administrator (Alliant) upon request.
7.2 General Liability Claims Accidents at or around the Project Site(s) resulting in damage to property of others (other than your own work product) or personal injury or death must be reported immediately. Report all GL Claims to ACE-ESIS at: 888-709-3644 Cooperate with the District and the OCIP insurer representatives in the accident investigation. Do not voluntarily admit liability.
7.3 Automobile Liability Claims No insurance coverage is provided for automobile accidents under the OCIP. It is the sole responsibility of each Contractor and Subcontractor to report accidents/claims involving their automobiles to their own insurance carriers. However, all accidents occurring in or around the job site must be reported to the OCIP Administrator. The accident will be investigated to determine any liability arising out of the project construction activities that could result in a future claim against the LAUSD OCIP. Each Contractor and Subcontractor shall fully cooperate in the investigation of all automobile accidents. Report all Auto claims to your insurance carrier and the OCIP Administrator.
7.4 Pollution Liability Claims The District's OCIP policies may provide coverage for certain pollution conditions. Any known or suspected pollution conditions or incidents must be reported promptly by telephone to the Director of Risk Finance and Insurance Services (Robert Reider) at 213-241-1843 or OCIP Manager (Aristeo Aguilera) at 213-241-7994.
The LAUSD OCIP III - Insurance Manual 07/08/2014 Alliant Version 02
28
CLAIMS PROCEDURES
7.5 Builders Risk Claims All risk of direct physical loss or damage excluding earthquake and flood is subject to policy terms, conditions and exclusions. Alliant is the broker for the Builders Risk program. All Builders Risk claims must be reported promptly by telephone to the Director of Risk Finance and Insurance Services (Robert Reider) at 213-241-1843 or OCIP Manager (Aristeo Aguilera) at 213-241-7994.
7.6 Enrolled Contractors Incident / Claims Investigations LAUSD is the first “Named Insured” and shall act as sole agent for LAUSD enrolled insured(s) with respect to incident / claim investigations, claim payments and claim settlements under LAUSD’s OCIP policies, OCIP insurance manual and contract General Conditions. LAUSD is entitled to any and all material relating to incidents, reports and claims on District project job sites, including, but not limited to: authorized/unauthorized investigation reports, pictures, witness statements, incident reports, medical reports, etc… This information shall not be contingent upon any payment or reimbursement from the District. Any additional investigation cost will only be approved if written authorization has been obtained from the OCIP management prior to the initiation of the requested investigation.
The LAUSD OCIP III - Insurance Manual 07/08/2014 Alliant Version 02
29
APPENDIX
SECTION
8.0 APPENDIX
•
Enrollment
8 – ONLINE SUBMISSION REQUIRED
o Alliant WrapX Online Enrollment Instructions •
Insurance Cost Worksheet
– NO SUBMISSION REQUIRED
o Provided to assist in removing insurance costs from Bid. •
Monthly On-Site Payroll Report
– ONLINE SUBMISSION REQUIRED
•
Notice of Work Termination
– ONLINE SUBMISSION REQUIRED
•
Notice of Contract Award o Provided for use in notification of new subcontractors.
•
Exhibit 1: Sample Off-Site Certificate of Insurance
APPENDIX
Alliant WrapX Enrollment Process • • •
• •
Enrollment into the program will be completed online. You will receive access to the online system: Alliant WrapX, within two days after Alliant has been notified of your awarded contract. Please contact Dennis McGowan if you have not been given a login ID and Password o
[email protected] o 866-394-7937 Link to the Contractor Portal: https://alliantwrapx.alliantinsurance.com/ContractorPortal After logging into the system, find your newly awarded contract under the Awarded Contracts window.
• •
Click on Complete Enrollment to begin the process The enrollment wizard will start on the Review page. Any section that is not compliant will be listed in Red. Click Edit to begin updating that section, and continue through the enrollment wizard by clicking Next
•
Please see the required information listed below so you can have all the information ready when you are attempting to enroll.
APPENDIX
Required Information for Online Enrollment Required Information 1
Contractor name
2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Parent contractor name Contractor Federal ID Number Start Date at project site Estimated completion date Contract Value Contract Description Contractor Address
9 10 11 12
Contractor Main Phone and Fax numbers Contractor Primary Contact Name Contact position Contact phone and fax numbers, and email address Contractor Payroll Contact Name Payroll Contact phone and fax numbers, and email address Workers’ Compensation Class Codes to be used on job Estimated Man hours and Payroll Risk ID # Rating Bureau Experience Modifier (EMR) WC Offsite Carrier WC Offsite Policy # WC effective date Policy Expiration Date If any work is being subcontracted out, please include information about subcontractors so enrollment can be started for each contractor
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
Help May include type of company: Corporation, LLC, etc… Name of company you are contracted with Check Alliant data and update Day physical work starts at jobsite Can be an estimate Scope of work Physical address of office. Any P.O. Box should be entered under Mailing address
Email is preferred method for communication Can be the same as the Primary Contact Email is preferred method for communication Can be found in your company WC rate pages Required for enrollment Also called Rating Board file # NCCI or WCRIB or similar name Can be found in your company WC rate pages Corporate WC carrier name Corporate WC policy number Corporate WC effective date Corporate WC expiration date At a minimum: Contractor name; estimated start date; contact name, email and phone number; and contract value for subcontracted work.
LAUSD OCIP III
FORM – B INSURANCE COST WORKSHEET Section I
Contract/Bid Information
Company Name:
Alliant Assigned Contract #
Gross Contract Value(including insurance cost): Estimated On Site Payroll: (Auto-fill from Section II) $ 0.00
Net Contract Value(excluding insurance Cost): Estimated Work Hours: (Auto-fill from Section II) 0.00
Section II
Calculate your insurance premium. WC Trade WC Class Work Classification Code Hours
* Use Project Site Payroll only to
General Liability Current Rate
$ $ $ $ $
Current WC Rate
+ + + +
Modified $ $ $ $ $ = Total WC Premium WC Premium Rate (Cost/Payroll)
or or or or -
Rate
Do you have a Large Deductible Program?
Deductible Amount:
Factor 100/1000
Premium = Est. Payrolls x WC Rate
$ 0.00 $ $ $ $
Attach separate worksheet if more codes apply. Total Manual Premium x Experience Mod = Modified Premium
calculate Total Insurance cost.
Description
Estimated Payrolls
$ 0.00 $ Running Total $ $ $ $ $ 0.00 $
□Yes
Payroll OR Receipts $
$
Premium
$
□
Excess Liability Is your Excess coverage Non-auditable (Flat)? Yes Current Rate Factor 100/1000 Payroll OR Receipts $
$
Premium
Your O & P % (Overhead and Profit Percentage) % $ TOTAL INSURANCE COST $ Insurance Rate (Cost/Payroll) $ I hereby warrant that this worksheet reflects the projected insurance cost that would apply in the event that my regular insurance program was in force at this location. I also recognize that the [CLIENT NAME] or their Representative - Wrap-Up Administrator Alliant, may request copies of my actual policies to confirm these costs.
*Attach your applicable WC, GL and XS rate pages for rate verification.
Signature: ___________________________ Date: __________________________ Name: ______________________________ Title: __________________________
LAUSD OCIP III
FORM – F NOTICE OF SUBCONTRACT AWARD SUBCONTRACTOR MAKING AWARD:
Alliant Assigned Contract #
BY:
TITLE:
PHONE:
FAX:
EMAIL ADDRESS:
DATE:
WE HAVE AWARDED A SUBCONTRACT AS FOLLOWS: SUBCONTRACTOR NAME: ESTIMATED ON-SITE START DATE:
CONTRACT VALUE:
SCOPE OF WORK
SUBCONTRACTOR ADDRESS: CONTACT NAME: PHONE:
EMAIL ADDRESS: FAX:
Please Note: It is the responsibility of the Contractor awarding Subcontract to ensure that their tier sub(s) fill out, maintain, and file all necessary Wrap-up Enrollment forms and Insurance documentation with the Wrap-up Administrator. No hired tier sub may commence work until they are properly enrolled into the Wrap-up program, as evidenced by a Certificate of Insurance provided by the Wrap-up Administrator
Please return by Email, Fax or Mail to: Alliant Insurance Services Email:
[email protected] Dennis McGowan [Program Administrator Name] Email: [
[email protected]] [Project Team Address] Fax: (XXX) XXX-XXXX 866-867-5811 333 S Hope St. Suite 3750 [City, State XXXXX] Phone: (XXX) XXX-XXXX Phone: 213-270-0996 Los Angeles, CA 90071
APPENDIX DATE (MM/DD/YY)
CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE
THIS CERTIFICATE IS ISSUED AS A MATTER OF INFORMATION ONLY AND CONFERS NO RIGHTS UPON THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER. THIS CERTIFICATE DOES NOT AMEND, EXTEND OR ALTER THE COVERAGE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES BELOW.
PRODUCER Contractor/Subcontractor’s Insurance Broker Name & Address
COMPANIES AFFORDING COVERAGE INSURED
Contractor/ Subcontractor Name Contractor/ Subcontractor Address
COMPANY A
Insurance Carrier Name
COMPANY B
Insurance Carrier Name
COMPANY C
Insurance Carrier Name
COMPANY D
COVERAGES THIS IS TO CERTIFY THAT THE POLICIES OF INSURANCE LISTED BELOW HAVE BEEN ISSUED TO THE INSURED NAMED ABOVE FOR THE POLICY PERIOD INDICATED, NOTWITHSTANDING ANY REQUIREMENT, TERM OR CONDITION OF ANY CONTRACT OR OTHER DOCUMENT WITH RESPECT TO WHICH THIS CERTIFICATE MAY BE ISSUED OR MAY PERTAIN, THE INSURANCE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES DESCRIBED HEREIN IS SUBJECT TO ALL THE TERMS, EXCLUSIONS AND CONDITIONS OF SUCH POLICIES. LIMITS SHOWN MAY HAVE BEEN REDUCED BY PAID CLAIMS. CO LT R
TYPE OF INSURANCE
POLICY NUMBER
POLICY EFFECTIVE DATE (MM/DD/YY)
POLICY EXPIRATION DATE (MM/DD/YY)
GENERAL LIABILITY
COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY CLAIMS MADE
OCCUR
Policy Number
Effective Date
Expiration Date
LIMITS
GENERAL AGGREGATE
$2,000,000
PRODUCTS-COMP/OP AGG
$2,000,000 $1,000,000 $1,000,000 $50,000 $5,000
PERSONAL & ADV INJURY EACH OCCURRENCE
OWNER'S & CONT PROT
FIRE DAMAGE (Any one fire) MED EXP (Any one person)
AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY COMBINED SINGLE LIMIT
ANY AUTO
Policy Number
ALL OWNED AUTOS
Effective Date
Expiration Date
(Per Person)
SCHEDULED AUTOS
$ $
BODILY INJURY
HIRED AUTOS
$1,000,000
BODILY INJURY
(Per Accident)
NON-OWNED AUTOS
PROPERTY DAMAGE AUTO ONLY - EA ACCIDENT
GARAGE LIABILITY
Policy Number
ANY AUTO
Effective Date
Expiration Date
OTHER THAN AUTO ONLY: EACH ACCIDENT AGGREGATE EACH OCCURRENCE
EXCESS LIABILITY
Policy Number
UMBRELLA FORM
Effective Date
Expiration Date
AGGREGATE
OTHER THAN UMBRELLA FORM
WORKERS’ COMPENSATION AND
STATUTORY LIMITS
EMPLOYERS’ LIABILITY
EACH ACCIDENT
THE PROPRIETOR/
INCL
PARTNERS/EXECUTIVE
EXCL
Policy Number
Effective Date
Expiration Date
$ $ $ $ $ $ $
DISEASE - POLICY LIMIT
$1,000,000 $1,000,000
DISEASE - EACH EMPLOYEE
$1,000,000
OFFICERS ARE:
OTHER DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONS/LOCATIONS/VEHICLES/SPECIAL ITEMS: Los Angeles Unified School District, the Board, its officials, employees and agents, and the OCIP Administrator as Additional Insureds as respects general liability and automobile. The coverage is Primary and Non-Contributory.
CERTIFICATE HOLDER Los Angeles Unified School District c/o Alliant Insurance Services 333 S. Hope St., Suite 3750 Los Angeles, CA 90071
CANCELLATION SHOULD ANY OF THE ABOVE DESCRIBED POLICIES BE CANCELLED BEFORE THE EXPIRATION DATE THEREOF, NOTICE WILL BE DELIVERED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE POLICY PROVISIONS.
AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE
ACORD 25-S (3/93)
© ACORD CORPORATION 1993
L
DIS
TRICT
LOS ANGE LE
IFIED SCH UN O
O
S
N
B
O AR IO DO AT F EDUC
Facilities School Maintenance and Operations Repair & Construction Safety Standards
LAUSD FACILITIES SERVICES DIVISION SAFETY POLICY STATEMENT Safety is the Los Angeles Unified School District’s (LAUSD) first priority for all contractors, vendors, staff, employees and the public when performing construction, maintenance and operations, and related support activities at all LAUSD sites. Every person is entitled to a safe and healthful place in which to work. Establishment and maintenance of safe environments are the shared responsibility between the District, contractors, staff, and vendors at all levels of the program. Reasonable efforts will be made in achieving the goal of zero incidents preserving the health and welfare of people and the environment. LAUSD promotes safety and health as an integral part of the District’s sustainability initiatives and strives to include all entities with an active interest in the success of education and community services for each city, township and neighborhood that LAUSD serves. As an employer, educator and business partner, LAUSD provides opportunities for contractors, vendors, and the public to actively participate in the LAUSD safety and health training activities through multiple venues including: the We-Build programs; various forums including conferences, meetings, trainings and presentations. LAUSD encourages all interested parties to participate in safety by supporting the efforts to build modern schools and facilities designed to educate and inspire future generations. The Los Angeles Unified School District leadership understands that the success of the safety at LAUSD Facilities Services Division, Maintenance and Operations, and Construction Safety is dependent on the partnerships with our contractors, employees, and the local communities. It is the expectation of LAUSD that our partners share our values for providing a safe and healthful working environment which includes: promoting regulatory compliance with regard to Safety, Health and the Environment; (SHE); identifying and prioritizing risks; and implementing proactive controls and Best Management Practices (BMPs) to reduce risk to lowest level reasonably achievable. LAUSD believes that all incidents and accidents are preventable. Safety is the responsibility of everyone while on LAUSD sites and accountability lies with line management. Safety is a line management function and line management shall ensure that the tenets of the LAUSD Facilities Services Division Safety and Health program are effectively implemented.
i
CO N T E N T S Page
Section 1.
LAUSD SAFETY PHILOSOPHY ........................................................................................... 1
2.
REGULATORY COMPLIANCE ............................................................................................ 4 2.1 2.2
3.
EMERGENCY PROCEDURES .............................................................................................. 7 3.1 3.2 3.3 3.4 3.5
4.
JOB SITE EMERGENCIES (FIRE, ACCIDENTS/INCIDENTS, & MEDICAL EMERGENCIES) ................................................................................................................................... 7 FIRE ......................................................................................................................................................... 7 MEDICAL EMERGENCY .................................................................................................................... 7 EMERGENCY CONTACT LIST ......................................................................................................... 8 EMERGENCY ACTION/EVACUATION PROCEDURES ............................................................ 8
EMPLOYEE CONDUCT ..................................................................................................... 10 4.1 4.2 4.3 4.4
5.
CONFLICTS BETWEEN SAFETY CODES AND STANDARDS ................................................ 4 DEFINITIONS ....................................................................................................................................... 4
NEWS MEDIA AND COMMUNICATION .................................................................................10 CONSTRUCTION VEHICLE PARKING........................................................................................10 IDENTIFICATION ..............................................................................................................................10 ASSIGNED WORK AREA(S)...........................................................................................................10
LAUSD SCHOOL CONSTRUCTION AND RENOVATION PUBLIC SAFETY REQUIREMENTS ............................................................................................................... 11 5.1 5.2 5.3 5.4 5.5 5.6 5.7
PEDESTRIAN HAZARDS ................................................................................................................12 LIGHTING............................................................................................................................................13 RADIATION ........................................................................................................................................13 EQUIPMENT/MACHINERY/VEHICLES ......................................................................................13 FALLING AND WINDBORNE OBJECTS ....................................................................................13 SECURITY ............................................................................................................................................14 VIBRATIONS AND SUBSIDENCE ................................................................................................14
6.
LAUSD CONTRACTOR SAFETY PRE-QUALIFICATION REQUIREMENTS ..................... 15
7.
RESPONSIBILITIES ........................................................................................................... 16 7.1 7.2
PRIMARY SAFETY RESPONSIBILITIES .......................................................................................16 SUBCONTRACTOR SAFETY RESPONSIBILITIES ....................................................................16
8.
SITE-SPECIFIC SAFETY PROGRAM (SSSP) ..................................................................... 17
9.
CONTRACTOR SAFETY MANAGER, CONTRACTOR SAFETY REPRESENTATIVE AND SUBCONTRACTOR SAFETY REPRESENTATIVE.............................................................. 22 9.1
DEFINITIONS .....................................................................................................................................22 ii
9.2
CONTRACTOR SAFETY MANAGER, CONTRACTOR SAFETY REPRESENTATIVE, AND SUBCONTRACTOR SAFETY REPRESENTATIVE RESPONSIBILITIES ................................25
10.
LAUSD SAFETY RESPONSIBILITIES ................................................................................ 27
11.
CONTRACTOR PROGRESS MEETINGS ........................................................................... 28 11.1
SITE PRE-PLANNING/PLANNING AND PROGRESS COORDINATION MEETING(S)29
12.
JOB HAZARD ANALYSIS (JHA) ...................................................................................... 31
13.
SAFETY MEETINGS .......................................................................................................... 33 13.1 13.2
ACCIENT/INCIDENT REVIEW MEETINGS ................................................................................33 PRE-SHIFT EMPLOYEE/CREW PRODUCTION AND SAFETY COORDINATION MEETINGS ..........................................................................................................................................33
14.
REPORTS AND FORMS COMPLETION ........................................................................... 35
15.
CONTRACTOR SAFETY VIOLATIONS ............................................................................. 36 15.1
16.
SUBSTANCE ABUSE & ALCOHOL POLICY ..................................................................... 38 16.1 16.2 16.3
17.
CONTRACTOR DISCIPLINARY ACTION – POLICY ENFORCEMENT ..............................36 PURPOSE ............................................................................................................................................38 FUNDAMENTAL REQUIREMENTS .............................................................................................38 GENERIC DRUG PROGRAM .........................................................................................................38 16.3.1 Drug Free Work Environment ...................................................................................... 38
DISABILITY MANAGEMENT/RETURN TO WORK PROGRAM ...................................... 44 17.1 17.2 17.3
DISABILITY MANAGEMENT/RETURN TO WORK POLICY .................................................44 PURPOSE ............................................................................................................................................44 PROCEDURE ......................................................................................................................................44
18.
CONTRACTOR SAFETY STANDARDS ............................................................................. 46
19.
AIR TESTING EQUIPMENT .............................................................................................. 47
20.
ASBESTOS......................................................................................................................... 48
21.
BARRICADES AND FENCING .......................................................................................... 49
22.
HOT WORK, WELDING, CUTTING .................................................................................. 51
23.
CLOTHING/PROFESSIONAL DEMEANOR ...................................................................... 54 23.1
CLOTHING..........................................................................................................................................54
24.
CELLULAR TELEPHONE USE ON Emergency ................................................................. 55
25.
COMPRESSED GAS CYLINDERS/BOTTLES ..................................................................... 56
26.
CONCRETE AND MASONRY ........................................................................................... 57 26.1
CONCRETE CONSTRUCTION ......................................................................................................57
LAUSD School Repair & Construction Site Safety Standards
PRINTED DOCUMENT IS UNCONTROLLED/UNOFFICIAL Page iii
26.2 26.3 26.4 26.5 27.
CONFINED SPACE ENTRY ............................................................................................... 59 27.1 27.2 27.3
28.
STRUCTURAL CONCRETE .............................................................................................................57 POURING AND PUMPING OPERATIONS ...............................................................................57 MASONRY CONSTRUCTION .......................................................................................................58 CUTTING, GRINDING AND PROFILING ...................................................................................58 PERMIT REQUIRED CONFINED SPACE ....................................................................................60 UTILITY HOLES (MANHOLES AND VAULTS) .........................................................................61 CONNECTIONS TO UTILITIES .....................................................................................................63
CRANES/BOOM TRUCKS AND RIGGING ....................................................................... 64 28.1 28.2 28.3
LAUSD SAFETY REQUIREMENTS................................................................................................64 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS...........................................................................................................64 DETAILED REQUIREMENTS ..........................................................................................................65 Mobile Cranes - Setup ................................................................................................................. 65 28.4 LOAD RATINGS ................................................................................................................................66 Determination ................................................................................................................................. 66 28.5 CRANE INSPECTION .......................................................................................................................66 28.6 OPERATOR QUALIFICATIONS AND OPERATING PROCEDURES ...................................68 Operator Qualifications ............................................................................................................... 68 Operating Procedures .................................................................................................................. 68 29.7.1 Rigging Requirements ................................................................................................... 69 29.7.1 Slings: Safe Operating Practices .................................................................................. 70 29.7.3 Sling Inspection ................................................................................................................. 70 29.7.4 RIGGING SLINGS AND HOOKS ....................................................................................................71 28.8 CRITICAL LIFTS (CRANES, BOOM TRUCKS, DERRICKS, ETC.) ..........................................73 29.
DEMOLITION.................................................................................................................... 75
30.
ELECTRICAL ...................................................................................................................... 77
31.
E LEVATING WORK PLATFORMS AND AERIAL DEVICES ............................................. 79
32.
ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROLS ....................................................................................... 81
33.
EQUIPMENT/TOOLS ........................................................................................................ 83
34.
EXCAVATIONS ................................................................................................................. 84
35.
FALL PROTECTION .......................................................................................................... 86 39.1 TRAINING AND RETRAINING...........................................................................................................86 39.2 PERSONNEL FALL PROTECTION TRIGGER HEIGHT .................................................................86 39.3 PERSONNEL FALL ARREST/RESTRAINT ........................................................................................87
36.
FIRE PROTECTION AND PREVENTION – FIRE EXTINGUISHERS .................................. 90
37.
FLAMMABLES AND COMBUSTIBLES USE AND STORAGE........................................... 91
38.
FIRST AID ......................................................................................................................... 93 iv
39.
FOREIGN VOLTAGE DETECTORS .................................................................................... 94
40.
FORKLIFTS (INDUSTRIAL TRUCKS AND TRACTORS) ................................................... 95
41.
HEAVY EQUIPMENT-MATERIAL HANDLING/EARTHMOVING ................................... 97
42.
HAZARD COMMUNICATION.......................................................................................... 99
43.
PORTABLE HEATERS ..................................................................................................... 101
44.
HORIZONTAL BORING/JACKING ................................................................................ 102
45.
HOUSEKEEPING ............................................................................................................. 103 49.1 TRASH DISPOSAL .............................................................................................................................. 103
46.
INCIDENT REPORTING .................................................................................................. 104
47.
LADDERS - EXTENSION AND STEPLADDERS .............................................................. 105
48.
LEAD ............................................................................................................................... 107
49.
FIRE/LIFE SAFETY ........................................................................................................... 108
50.
LIQUIDS - CORROSIVE ACIDS AND CAUSTICS ........................................................... 109
51.
LOCK-OUT/TAG-OUT/BLOCK-OUT .............................................................................. 110
52.
LOCATING UNDERGROUND UTILITIES BEFORE EXCAVATING ................................. 112
53.
MOTOR VEHICLES ......................................................................................................... 113
54.
OVERHEAD UTILITIES.................................................................................................... 114
55.
PERMITS ......................................................................................................................... 115
56.
PERSONAL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT ......................................................................... 116 56.1 57.2 57.3
56.5 57.6 57.7 57.8
HARD HATS .................................................................................................................................... 116 EYE AND FACE PROTECTION ................................................................................................... 116 HAND PROTECTION.................................................................................................................... 117 57.3.1 GLOVES ............................................................................................................................. 117 57.4 HIGH VISIBILITY SHIRT, VEST, OR JACKET ........................................................... 117 RESPIRATORY PROTECTION .................................................................................................... 118 HEARING PROTECTION ............................................................................................................ 118 FOOT PROTECTION ..................................................................................................................... 119 PERSONNEL FALL ARREST/PROTECTION ........................................................................... 120
57.
POSTING REQUIREMENTS ............................................................................................ 121
58.
POWDER-ACTUATED TOOLS........................................................................................ 122
59.
ROOFING HAZARDS ...................................................................................................... 123
60.
SANITATION .................................................................................................................. 124
61.
SCAFFOLDS - ERECTION, INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE ................................... 125
LAUSD School Repair & Construction Site Safety Standards
PRINTED DOCUMENT IS UNCONTROLLED/UNOFFICIAL Page v
62.1
SUSPENDED SCAFFOLDS .......................................................................................................... 128
62.
STEEL ERECTION ............................................................................................................ 129
63.
TAR AND MELTING POTS ............................................................................................. 133
64.
UTILITY HOLES - PUMPING WATER ............................................................................ 134
65.
WARNING SIGNS........................................................................................................... 135
66.
WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL ................................................................................. 136
67.
PLATE BRIDGING ........................................................................................................... 138
68.
JOB SITE ORIENTATION FOR CONTRACTOR EMPLOYEES ........................................ 139
69.
PUBLIC PROTECTION PLAN.......................................................................................... 141 70.1 CONSIDERATIONS ............................................................................................................................ 141 70.2 COMPONENTS ................................................................................................................................... 141
vi
1.
LAUSD SAFETY PHILOSOPHY
‘All Incidents and Injuries are Preventable” LAUSD is dedicated to the principle that all Construction, Maintenance and Operations, and related activities may be performed safely without incidents through proper planning, engineering, education, training, and proper supervision. Once the need for Construction or Maintenance and Operation (M &O) activities has been identified, LAUSD will plan the nature and scope of the work based on best available information including, the various mechanisms established through Federal, State, Local and regulatory agencies as well as National Consensus Standards and identified and agreed upon Best Management Practices (BMPs). Safety will be integrated into all planning activities including: site conception and design; construction activities; and maintenance and operations. Safety program integration of all stakeholders including LAUSD employees’, contractors, Construction Management firms, Vendors, the public, LAUSD officials and labor unions is imperative to ensure all personnel may have input into the LAUSD-Facilities Service Division (LAUSD-FSD) safety program to ensure the program’s sustainability... In the design process, the main goal should be to turnover a site that is regulatory compliant and can be safely maintained by LAUSD maintenance and operations personnel once the work is completed. LAUSD has the responsibility for implementing processes to ensure sites are completed in a manner that strives to prevent accidents. These processes include ensuring that only qualified CM firms, Contractors, and Vendors are utilized for work-related activities. Depending upon the size and scope of the site, the oversight for each site may include: a CM firm; General Contractor (GC), subcontractors, vendors, consultants and staff to implement safety at each site. LAUSD or its contracted representative has responsibility for safety at the site project to include: initiating, maintaining, supervising and enforcing all safety precautions and programs in connection with the performance of the contract. In addition, all Contractor employees are expected to work safely and to contribute to the safety of others. This is a critical responsibility for everyone working on LAUSD School Modernization and Repair, New Construction, and M and O Sites. Accident/incident prevention is viewed as an integral component of the construction process along with productivity and quality, all of which will have a positive impact on reducing site costs. The community also benefits directly from accident prevention efforts when potential damage to the environment, property or injuries to members of the community is effectively mitigated. All incidents can be prevented in part by eliminating hazards and unsafe behaviors. But where this is not practical, safety engineering controls, administrative controls, proper training,, safe operating procedures and personal protective equipment can be used to safeguard against the hazards, PROGRAM OBJECTIVES The Safety Standards contained in this document were developed as minimum guidelines to eliminate or reduce hazards and risk associated with maintenance and construction activities within LAUSD. These LAUSD School Repair & Construction Site Safety Standards
PRINTED DOCUMENT IS UNCONTROLLED/UNOFFICIAL Page 1
standards shall not conflict with any negotiated governing document such as the General Conditions or PSA agreement provided the agreements do not pose a negative impact to safety or the environment. However, LAUSD, its authorized representatives, and the OCIP Administrator and Insurer will neither assume nor relieve any entity of their direct responsibility for the safety and health of their employees, the protection of students, faculty, visitors and the public and the protection of equipment, property and the environment. LAUSD, their authorized representatives and the construction management teams will monitor these Safety Standards and review the efforts of all contractors’, subcontractors’, and staff in the performance of the following: • Ensuring a safe and healthy environment for LAUSD students, faculty and the public during construction and maintenance activities; • Minimizing conflict, by communication with the Owner Authorized Representative (OAR), LAUSD Safety and Construction Management to coordinate work and keep school administration informed about all construction schedules; • Implementing and including safety planning/pre-planning protocol in all site management and Contractor progress and/or safety meetings. The Job Safety Analysis/Job Hazard Analysis (JSA/JHA) format shall be utilized to assist with safety pre-planning; • Provide safety audits/inspections to identify, prioritize, and correct non-compliance conditions; • Protect public and private property adjacent to all construction site work zones; • Provide a safe work environment for all workers by implementing and enforcing compliance with the following training protocol: 1)
New hire safety orientations i. Mandatory LAUSD New Hire Orientation Checklist must be maintained for each employee on site. ii. In addition, the OCIP manual requires the MPN letter be signed by the employee upon hire and retained on site;
2)
Toolbox/tailgate safety meetings;
3)
Safety training, i.e., hazard communication, fall protection, equipment operations, trenching, shoring, confined space entry, etc;
4)
Mandatory personal protective equipment (PPE) use and enforcement.
5)
Mandatory employee compliance with the Contractors’ and LAUSD Safety Standards.
• Injury reporting and record keeping maintaining up-to-date accident experience and trend analysis; • Using accident investigation and safety inspection information to correct unsafe acts and conditions identified in order to eliminate or reduce the probability of additional losses; 2
• Informing the OAR and/or the LAUSD Safety staff of any visit from a regulatory agency such as Cal-OSHA, OSHA, EPA, AQMD or other regulatory agency. • Conflicts shall be brought to the attention of the OAR and/or LAUSD Safety. The OAR and/or LAUSD Safety reserve the right to issue a final determination for conflicts. • During the competitive and/or negotiated bid process, Contractors shall incorporate the most protective safety requirements as found in Federal, State, Local regulatory, and National Consensus standards such as ANSI/ASSE, NFPA, NSF, CGA, NIST, ADA or other relevant and applicable standards. It is the bidder’s responsibility to be knowledgeable of all EHS regulatory and National Consensus Standards. • No change order for safety purposes shall be approved without the review and recommendation of the construction safety director in conjunction with the site management team.
LAUSD School Repair & Construction Site Safety Standards
PRINTED DOCUMENT IS UNCONTROLLED/UNOFFICIAL Page 3
2. 2.1
REGULATORY COMPLIANCE
CONFLICTS BETWEEN SAFETY CODES AND STANDARDS
Unless otherwise specified in the LAUSD School Repair and Construction Site Safety Standards and/or the Contractors’ Safety Standards, Contractors shall comply with all applicable provisions of Federal, State, and local laws, ordinances, codes, regulations and other contract document criteria pertaining to or affecting safety and health, including but not limited to the Cal/OSHA Safety Orders (California Code of Regulations, Title 8 and Title 29 Code of Federal Regulations (29 CFR)) and National Consensus Standards whether or not incorporated by reference in this manual. In all cases the most protective safety rules, policies, procedures and/or standards will apply regardless of source. LAUSD Safety in conjunction with LAUSD-FSD management reserves the right to impose more stringent requirements as may be necessary depending upon the nature of the hazards and the associated risk to the district, employees, the public and the environment. 2.2
DEFINITIONS
The following titles may not reflect the actual titles in use by all entities on LAUSD sites and therefore do not have any force or effect beyond the LAUSD Safety Standards. Due to such differences in nomenclature between LAUSD and contractors, the following are used throughout the LAUSD Safety Standards to establish the functional framework for compliance with LAUSD job site safety protocol. Authorized Person: (In reference to an employee's assignment) Selected by the Contractor for that purpose. Competent Person: One who is qualified to identify existing and predictable hazards in the surroundings or working conditions which are unsanitary, hazardous, or dangerous to employees, and who has the authorization to take prompt corrective measures to eliminate them? Contractor: The entity with which LAUSD enters into this contract. Contractor/Company Safety Plan (C/CSP): The Contractors/Company Safety Plan prepared in accordance with the requirements of this document and any other applicable LAUSD contract documents. The C/CSP will include the Site Specific Safety Plan and IIPP. Contractor’s Site Manager (CPM): The senior management person for the Contractor with responsibility for execution of the contract, including compliance with the LAUSD Safety Standards. The CPM is responsible and accountable for the development, implementation and monitoring compliance with the Contractor’s Site-Specific Safety Program. Contractor’s Site Superintendent (CPS): The senior on-site Superintendent for the Contractor with responsibility for execution of the contract, including compliance with the LAUSD Safety Standards. In some cases, the actual on-site representative may be an Assistant Superintendent or a Foreman. In such cases, this is the applicable person when the CPS is referenced. The CPS is responsible and accountable for project implementation and enforcement of the Contractor’s Site-Specific Safety Program and the LAUSD Safety Standards.
4
Contractor’s Safety Manager (CSM): Qualified Contractor safety management representative assigned responsibility for drafting and monitoring compliance with the Contractor’s Site-Specific Safety Program and the LAUSD Safety Standards, including ongoing identification and correction of hazards. Contractor’s Safety Representative (CSR): Qualified on-site Contractor employee assigned the responsibility of implementing and monitoring compliance with the Contractor’s Site-Specific Safety Program and the LAUSD Safety Standards, including ongoing identification and correction of hazards. Employee: Person employed by a Contractor as defined by this section. Employer: Firm or entity that has employees working on site. The term employer includes the contractor and subcontractors of all tiers. For the purposes of the safety standards, vendors, suppliers, and service providers on the site for the furtherance of the site are covered by this definition and are subject to the provisions of the LAUSD Safety Standards even though they are not covered by the OCIP. IIPP (Injury Illness Prevention Program): In California every employer has a legal obligation to provide and maintain a safe and healthful workplace for employees, according to the California Occupational Safety and Health Act. An Injury and Illness Prevention Program (IIPP), is required for every California employer, employers with 10 or more employees must have a written IIPP. The Injury and Illness Prevention Program must be a plan that includes procedures and is put into practice. These elements are required: • Management commitment/assignment of responsibilities; • Safety communications system with employees; • System for assuring employee compliance with safe work practices; • Scheduled inspections/evaluation system; • Accident investigation; • Procedures for correcting unsafe/unhealthy conditions; • Safety and health training and instruction; and • Recordkeeping and documentation Insurance Carrier (IC): Principle companies providing the coverage for Workers’ Compensation, General Liability, Excess Liability, and any other insurance coverage. LAUSD Safety Engineer: LAUSD Safety Engineer(s) responsible for monitoring, coordinating and auditing the Contractor’s compliance with all applicable safety, health, and environmental standards defined in the contract documents. Loss Control Consultant (LCC): Insurance Administrator or Insurance Carrier Safety representative(s) providing technical construction safety expertise, conducting loss control safety audits, and performing other pertinent construction safety tasks on behalf of LAUSD. Los Angeles Unified School District (LAUSD): The Owner. LAUSD School Repair & Construction Site Safety Standards
PRINTED DOCUMENT IS UNCONTROLLED/UNOFFICIAL Page 5
OCIP Administrator: Program.
The party responsible for brokering and administering the OCIP Insurance
OEHS: Office of Environmental Health and Safety – has primary responsibility for the safety and health of all employees, including Facilities Maintenance and Operations, LAUSD structures, property and grounds not covered by the construction Owner Controlled Insurance program (OCIP). OSHA: OSHA as used in the context of these Safety Standards refers to the State or Federal agency with jurisdiction over workplace occupational safety and health at the site. Owner: Los Angeles Unified School District (LAUSD). Owner’s Authorized Representative (OAR): The Owner’s Employee or agent with overall responsibility for the site. Owner Controlled Insurance Program (OCIP): Owner’s (LAUSD) wrap-up insurance program which provides insurance coverage for eligible and enrolled Contractors, and Subcontractors of any tier, working on LAUSD construction site(s). The Owner identifies OCIP participants. Qualified Person, Attendant or Operator: A person designated by the Contractor who by possession of a recognized degree, certificate, or professional stands, or who, by extensive knowledge, training and experience, has successfully demonstrated their ability to solve or resolve problems relating to the subject matter, the work, or the site. Site-Specific Safety Program (SSSP) [IIPP which will apply or be referenced in the Standards]: The Contractor’s Site-Specific Safety Program prepared in accordance with the requirements of this document and the Contracts. Subcontractor: Firm or other entity awarded work by a Contractor on a particular construction site. Subcontractor as used herein shall apply to all tiers of Subcontractors, as well as vendors and service providers performing work for the benefit of the Contractor. For the purposes of the LAUSD Safety Standards, vendors, suppliers, and service providers on the site for the furtherance of the site are covered by this definition and are subject to the provisions of the Safety Standards even though they are not covered or may not be enrolled in the OCIP. Subcontractor’s Site Manager (SPM): The senior management person for the Subcontractor with responsibility for execution of the contract, including compliance with the LAUSD Safety Standards. The SPM is responsible and accountable for development, implementation and monitoring compliance with the Subcontractor’s Site-Specific Safety Program and LAUSD Safety Standards. Subcontractor’s Site Superintendent (SPS): The senior on-site management person for the Subcontractor with responsibility for execution of the contract, including compliance with the LAUSD Safety Standards. In some cases, the actual on-site representative may be an Assistant Superintendent or a Foreman. In such cases, this is the applicable person when the SPS is referenced. The SPS is responsible and accountable for site project implementation and enforcement of the Subcontractor’s Site-Specific Safety Program and LAUSD Safety Standards.
6
3. 3.1
EMERGENCY PROCEDURES
JOB SITE EMERGENCIES (FIRE, ACCIDENTS/INCIDENTS, & MEDICAL EMERGENCIES)
All job site emergencies must be reported immediately to the LAUSD OAR, the Contractor (if applicable) and LAUSD Safety. M and O personnel must use the procedures outlined by the LAUSD Office of Environmental Health and Safety (OEHS) most current reporting system for all emergencies. Job Site Emergency Telephone Numbers shall be posted on the job site bulletin board and, where applicable, in every Contractor’s job site office trailer. A local street map clearly identifying the site and active entrances/exits shall be maintained and posted on the job site bulletin board next to the Emergency Telephone Numbers. All first line supervisors and construction management personnel (foremen and above) shall be trained in First Aid, CPR and use of an Auto External Defibrillator (AED). AEDs shall be maintained on site for all construction sites that will exceed 25 personnel at anytime during the project with a projected 911 paramedic response time of more than 4 minutes. In the event that there are no hard-wire (“land line”) telephones available at the site, the contractor shall identify and post an alternate phone number (in addition to 911) to be used to contact emergency service providers via cell phone. This policy is necessary since dialing 911 on a cell phone does not always provide a direct connection to local Emergency Services. 3.2
FIRE
Call 911 or the Local Fire Department • At minimum, provide the street address and location (floor/area) of the fire. In case of fire in any building: • Evacuate the immediate area, • Activate the fire alarm system (if available), and • Call the Fire Department • Call/notify the OAR and/or LAUSD Safety For fire outside of buildings: • Evacuate the immediate area, and • Call the Fire Department. • Call/notify the OAR and/or LAUSD Safety 3.3
MEDICAL EMERGENCY
Render first aid promptly to the injured employee. Call 911 or the local Emergency Medical Services. Call or report the job site medical emergency immediately to the Contractor. A medical emergency includes, LAUSD School Repair & Construction Site Safety Standards
PRINTED DOCUMENT IS UNCONTROLLED/UNOFFICIAL Page 7
but is not limited to: unconsciousness; chest pain; difficulty breathing; excessive bleeding; acute trauma related to neck and/or spine and any other illness or injury deemed to require paramedic or emergency response medical professionals. WHEN IN DOUBT, CALL 911 OR OTHERWISE INITIATE THE EMERGENCY RESPONSE PROTOCOLS. The preferred provider for serious traumatic injuries is: Consult the Job Site Postings Notice, also reference the LAUSD Insurance Manual and Accident Reporting and Investigation Procedures in the LAUSD Safety Standards. The designated provider for non-life threatening or minor injuries requiring medical treatment is: Consult the Job Site Posting Notice, also reference the LAUSD Insurance Manual and Accident Reporting and Investigation Procedures in these Safety Standards. Call/notify the OAR and LAUSD Safety. 3.4
EMERGENCY CONTACT LIST
Each Contractor shall provide LAUSD, OAR and LAUSD Safety with an Emergency Contact List. • This list shall include 24-hour contact information for key site personnel. • The Contractor shall maintain this list throughout the duration of the contract, and provide a revised copy to all parties when made necessary by changes to personnel or their contact information. 3.5
EMERGENCY ACTION/EVACUATION PROCEDURES
Construction activities which could interfere/compromise LAUSD emergency action/response protocol to include emergency evacuation procedures and routes will require coordination between all Contractors involved, LAUSD representatives, school administration and emergency response personnel to determine if alternate emergency evacuation protocol will be required. Contractor shall know the location of school evacuation routes, exits, gates and assembly areas utilized by school/personnel, students and the public and shall ensure that during construction work activities all evacuation routes, exits, gates and assembly areas are always accessible, open and clear. When required or warranted, Contractors will post signage on temporary fencing used during construction to identify evacuation routes to ensure LAUSD Staff, Students and the public know the correct routes. LAUSD school emergency action/evacuation procedures (when required) will be integrated with the Contractor’s emergency action plan. Contractors will know the location of and will not block access to the school’s emergency supplies/equipment (first-aid kits, fire extinguishers, etc.). In the event of an emergency scenario, Contractors will provide, inspect and maintain on site first-aid, fire extinguishers, etc. Contractors will, if partial, avoid the use of LAUSD emergency supplies/equipment. If an emergency situation arises which warrants the use of LAUSD emergency supplies, equipment the Contractor will expedite the used supplies/equipment so it is available if needed by LAUSD representatives. 8
Contractors will know the location of utility shut-offs. The General/Prime Contractor is responsible for the development of a site-wide Emergency Action Plan that shall take into account all potential emergency situations. • Each Contractor shall develop a written job-specific Emergency Action Plan that will take into consideration all potential emergency situations specific to their scope of work. • This Emergency Action Plan shall be shared and coordinated with all Contractors and LAUSD representatives on site. Job site personnel will be trained in the emergency procedures incorporated in the Emergency Action Plan. • The Emergency Action Plan shall be revised throughout the course of the project to reflect changed conditions. The Emergency Action Plan shall be maintained at the site, and available for review upon request. At minimum, the Emergency Action Plan shall contain: • Site map • Street map of immediate area showing Site location that clearly identifies one-way and dead-end streets. • Building Plan, including a plan for each floor • Emergency notification list • Emergency notification procedures • Evacuation procedures • Evacuation route(s) • Evacuation refuge area • How Employees will be trained on the contents of this plan • Intervals for refresher training
LAUSD School Repair & Construction Site Safety Standards
PRINTED DOCUMENT IS UNCONTROLLED/UNOFFICIAL Page 9
4.
EMPLOYEE CONDUCT
All employees on the site must maintain professional behavior at all times. Horseplay, fighting, any type of harassment or discrimination, possession or use of alcohol and/or unauthorized drugs, possession of firearms and gambling are not allowed and will result in immediate removal of the Contractor employee(s) from the site. Schools are not like other job sites! Control noise, eliminate profanity and use proper refuse disposal. TOBACCO USE IS PROHIBITED ON ALL LAUSD PROPERTY! LAUSD PROPERTIES ARE DRUG FREE WORKPLACES! School restroom facilities are off limits to Contractor personnel. 4.1
NEWS MEDIA AND COMMUNICATION
The Contractor shall refer questions from news media personnel (radio, television, newspaper) to the LAUSD Public Relations Spokesperson. The Contractor and its employees must refer all inquiries from the news media (radio, television, newspaper) pertaining to job site incidents/accidents to the LAUSD Public Relations Spokesperson or their designated representative. 4.2
CONSTRUCTION VEHICLE PARKING
Contractors must park in authorized areas only. Do not block or obstruct intersections, traffic or fire lanes, fire hydrants, driveways or parking lot entrances. Do not park in red, yellow or green zones marked on curbs. Offending vehicles may be towed without notice at the vehicle owner’s expense. Private vehicles are not permitted on the job site except in authorized/designated areas. 4.3
IDENTIFICATION
All Contractors and Subcontractor employees must have a company photo ID listing their name, company, site identification, ID issue date and tracking number. All Contractor employees will wear shirts or hard hats which display the Contractor’s name and/or logo. Contractor equipment and vehicles entering and/or working at the site must have the Company name/identification clearly displayed on the vehicle. 4.4
ASSIGNED WORK AREA(S)
Contractors and Subcontractors are confined to their assigned work areas. Wandering throughout the job site is strictly prohibited.
10
5.
LAUSD SCHOOL CONSTRUCTION AND RENOVATION PUBLIC SAFETY REQUIREMENTS
The protection of LAUSD staff, students and the public is a priority and will be an integral and required component of every Contractors Site-Specific Safety Plan. Contractors will implement and enforce “best practices” safety guidelines that are specific to potential public exposure hazards affiliated with their scope of work. In addition to the requirements in this section, ANSI A10.34 (MANDATORY) shall be followed. Both new school construction and existing school renovation job sites are closely monitored by parents, LAUSD staff and the community therefore Contractor compliance with all applicable safety criteria defined in these Safety Standards, Federal, State and local and National Consensus standards, regulations, ordnances and laws, is mandatory. LAUSD CONSTRUCTION PUBLIC SAFETY REQUIREMENTS Be aware of your work environment: • Determine Lead and Asbestos construction/demolition activities.
content
of
building
materials
PRIOR
to
any
• It is the Contractor’s responsibility to review both the Asbestos Survey/Inspection Report and the Lead Survey/Inspection Report prior to commencement of work and take the necessary steps to ensure the safety of students, faculty/staff, the public and Contractor employees. • Contractors are responsible for hazardous waste disposal per contract specifications. • Schedule dusty, noisy or odorous activities with School Administration and the OAR/IOR in order to avoid disrupting normal school activities. • Install barricades when needed to protect students and faculty/staff from construction activities. • Keep equipment and extension cords away from students. [Equipment and extension cords should not be stored or utilized in areas where students/faculty is present.] • All exits, emergency exits, must be clear, free and unobstructed. remain unobstructed, functional and intact.
Panic hardware must
• All alarm systems must remain operable unless approval has been granted by the designated/authorized LAUSD representative and Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ). • Fire watches must be maintained at all times during hot work activities. • Escort deliveries onto the school site or make deliveries when students and faculty/staff are not present. • MSDS sheets for all chemicals must be available on the job site. Hazardous materials must be stored in designated/approved secured area(s) a minimum of 50 ft. from school buildings and 50 feet from adjacent neighboring properties and stored in a locked LAUSD School Repair & Construction Site Safety Standards
PRINTED DOCUMENT IS UNCONTROLLED/UNOFFICIAL Page 11
properly designed hazardous storage facility or containment. For roofing jobs block off air intakes or shut off air conditioners to prevent fumes from entering buildings. • Any construction activities that impact neighbors adjacent properties such as fence removal or installation of fencing on neighboring properties, excavation or undermining of sidewalks, or any other activity that may pose a direct impact to the property or occupants of the neighbors shall be reviewed by the construction safety department authorized representative. In order to ensure that the above safety protocol is implemented and followed, public safety preplanning will be incorporated into all construction site management meetings. Additional public safety requirements are summarized in the applicable sections throughout these Safety Standards. 5.1
PEDESTRIAN HAZARDS
At the construction site, areas for public pedestrian traffic will be clearly marked at all times. Public pedestrian traffic areas will be maintained so that slipping, tripping and falling hazards are reduced. Non-level surfaces will be delineated with high-visibility markings, signs or notices. Stairs or ramps will have handrails on both sides. Elevated areas will have standard guardrails. Building exits, sidewalks and areas accessible to pedestrian traffic which are adjacent to overhead construction work areas shall be provided with falling object protection and/or barricaded/fenced a minimum of 10 feet from the falling object exposure. The Contractor will monitor public ingress and egress routes to make sure that construction operations do not block stairways, doors, entrances, and exits, paths of travel, and gates or hallways. When construction activities may require closing or blocking any stairways, doors, exits, entrances, gates, paths of travel or hallways the Contractor will notify LAUSD school administration and the OAR in advance so alternate access/egress routes which comply with all applicable safety standards, codes, ordinances and regulations can be identified. Contractors shall know the location of school evacuation routes, exits and assembly areas utilized by school personnel, students, and the public and shall ensure that before, during and after construction work activities all evacuation routes, exits, gates and assembly areas are accessible, open and clear. When required or warranted Contractors will post signage on temporary fencing used during construction to identify evacuation routes to ensure LAUSD staff, students, and the public will know the correct paths of travel. Special attention will be given to the emergency evacuation of buildings, structures and jobsites and how the construction may affect this evacuation. 12
5.2
LIGHTING
Lighting and welding flash on the jobsite that may project or illuminate areas offsite will be directed or shielded so that they do not create a public hazard. Walking surfaces and other public areas affected by the construction site will be adequately illuminated. 5.3
RADIATION
Operations that may produce public radiation exposure hazards will be controlled and shielded. The area must be barricaded to prohibit public access. Signage that designates what type of radiation exposure may cause public harm or injury will be clearly displayed. Ionizing and non-ionizing radiation hazards, including, x-ray, laser, microwaves, ultraviolet and infrared radiation, welding rays or high-radiant heat sources and exposure, will be considered. If the site is located near a nuclear power facility, additional coordination for the evacuation must be considered. 5.4
EQUIPMENT/MACHINERY/VEHICLES
All equipment or devices, machinery and vehicles shall be inspected, tested and maintained in accordance with manufacturer’s guidelines/criteria and all applicable regulatory standards. Sufficient barricades, shields, guards, alarms, signs, markings and safety systems will be provided or installed on all equipment. If any machinery or vehicles require special licenses, permits or operator training before they are used, the Contractor should secure or provide these before working with that equipment. Areas with mobile equipment that is accessible to the public will be barricaded/fenced or guarded before and during the operation of the equipment. Warning signs, fencing, barricading or personnel should be placed at a sufficient distance from the areas to prevent the public from entering the areas by mistake. If loads are hoisted or if other overhead hazards exist, a clear area below, which is sufficient to prevent public hazards, will be barricaded or fenced to prevent inadvertent public access. The area will be monitored during overhead work to ensure that it remains clear. If noise makes it difficult to hear warnings or signals from mobile equipment, the decibels will be increased so that the warnings or signals can be heard. If this cannot be done, visual signals should be established to protect the public. Visual or radio contact will be maintained between the equipment operators and those who will provide the signals. 5.5
FALLING AND WINDBORNE OBJECTS
To prevent construction objects or debris from creating a public hazard, barriers, fencing, catch platforms, enclosures, perimeter or vertical debris netting or other required administrative or engineering controls must be employed. LAUSD School Repair & Construction Site Safety Standards
PRINTED DOCUMENT IS UNCONTROLLED/UNOFFICIAL Page 13
Public areas adjacent to the jobsite will be protected by fencing, sheds, overhangs, perimeter netting systems, platforms, scaffolding or similar structures to protect pedestrians from falling objects or debris. Construction material, tools, debris, waste, equipment, or other items will be contained, secured, tied-off, removed, braced, enclosed or restrained so that they do not fall, blow away or enter public areas. 5.6
SECURITY
Measures will be established to restrict public access to the jobsite. If access control is not possible, items that may create a hazard will be locked, barricaded or removed. Security systems or personnel may be employed during or after work hours to ensure that the public cannot gain access to the jobsite. Authorities and security personnel should receive a list of those individuals who are authorized to access the jobsite during non-work hours. Local enforcement authorities will be made aware of all security plans, and they will receive a list of personnel who will assist them. 5.7
VIBRATIONS AND SUBSIDENCE
Construction operations that produce ground or air vibration will be analyzed to prevent damage or subsidence of adjacent land or structures. A pre-construction survey of the surrounding area, structures and accessories will be required and conducted before any construction activity begins. Any weaknesses or deterioration found during the survey should be reported to the presiding authority before construction The Contractor will provide data that show the maximum limits of expected vibrations or subsidence. These limits must not exceed those specified by the presiding authority. Seismographic recordings will be made if required. If warranted during the pre-construction survey, structural and geological investigation maybe conducted. Adjacent roadways, waterways, airways, sidewalks, buildings and utilities will be monitored periodically during construction operations. All excavations, cuts and trenches in public areas will be backfilled with approved material and then tamped and compacted as soon as possible. Any public areas or structures that are disturbed, cracked or broken during construction operations will be inspected, repaired or replaced.
14
6.
LAUSD CONTRACTOR SAFETY PRE-QUALIFICATION REQUIREMENTS
The Contractor Safety Prequalification Questionnaire has been developed to evaluate each contractor’s overall past safety performance. Note: Not applicable to LAUSD M and O. The OEHS department shall follow existing LAUSD policy for M and O. All Contractors seeking to bid on, or receive award of, LAUSD Sites must have an active Safety Prequalification. Verification of prequalification of subcontractors may be performed at the sites during construction safety audits. The Safety Prequalification Questionnaire is no longer included in the Safety Standards. Current Safety Prequalification Questionnaires must be obtained from the following sources: To obtain a current Prequalification Questionnaire for both Formal and Informal Contracts contact the: • Facilities Construction Contracts Prequalification Unit: To download current forms and information, go to the LAUSD Facilities Contracts Administration website, http://www.laschools.org/new-site/ A copy of the Safety Prequalification Questionnaire is also included in the addendum. General/Prime Contractors are contractually required to prequalify all their Subcontractors of all tiers using the LAUSD Contractor Safety Prequalification Questionnaire prior to executing a contract with the Subcontractor. Instructions for evaluating and scoring Subcontractors Safety Prequalification Questionnaires are contained in the Questionnaire. The General/Prime Contractor shall not permit any Subcontractors to perform work on a LAUSD site without a current approved safety prequalification. Failure to safety prequalify all Subcontractors utilizing the most current revision of the Safety Prequalification Questionnaire may adversely affect the Contractors’ prequalification status. Use of Subcontractors that do not meet the minimum LAUSD safety prequalification requirements may also adversely affect the General/Prime Contractors prequalification status. Note: Labor compliance issues will be handled by the Labor Compliance Department. LAUSD and/or their designated representatives will, at their discretion, audit Subcontractor Safety Prequalification Questionnaires to verify the accuracy of the data.
LAUSD School Repair & Construction Site Safety Standards
PRINTED DOCUMENT IS UNCONTROLLED/UNOFFICIAL Page 15
7. 7.1
RESPONSIBILITIES
PRIMARY SAFETY RESPONSIBILITIES
The Prime Contractor or Construction Management (CM) firm shall be responsible for initiating, maintaining, supervising, and enforcing all safety precautions and programs in connection with the performance of the construction contract for the on-site safety of their employees and (if applicable) their subcontractors performing work under their authority. To that end, an Environmental Health and Safety Management System (EHSMS) is required of all contractors. THE EHSMS may be modeled after ISO 14000, 14001 and OHSAS 18001 or equivalent. At the site location, this includes responsibilities for vendors, delivery and transportation services, service providers, LAUSD facility, students and the public. Note: Not applicable to LAUSD M and O. The OEHS department shall follow existing LAUSD policy for M and O. The Contractor shall comply with all applicable provisions of Federal, State, and local laws, ordinances, codes, regulations, standards and practices affecting safety and health of employees, the public and environment. Each Contractor and Subcontractor shall comply with the most stringent of the following: • Applicable Cal OSHA Standards and Safety Orders or Federal OSHA Standards (Code of Federal Regulations, Title 29), • The Contractor’s Site-Specific Safety Program, • Applicable National Consensus Standards (NCS) including ANSI, NFPA, etc., • These LAUSD Safety Standards. Each Contractor shall have available for use and reference on the job site at a minimum; the contractor’s Site Specific Safety Program, one copy of all applicable OSHA regulations and the LAUSD Safety Standards. 7.2
SUBCONTRACTOR SAFETY RESPONSIBILITIES
General/Prime Contractors will be responsible for ensuring their Subcontractors initiate, maintain, supervise and enforce the safety requirements of the LAUSD Safety Standards and the General/Prime Contractor’s Site-Specific Safety Program, even though the requirements may be above and beyond the Subcontractor’s own safety policies and Federal and Cal OSHA requirements.
16
8.
SITE-SPECIFIC SAFETY PROGRAM (SSSP)
Each Contractor shall have a written “Site-Specific [SSSP] Safety Program” in accordance with the provisions contained in the California Labor Code § 6401.7, 8 CCR § 1509 and § 3203, OSHA and LAUSD Safety Prequalification criteria. The Site-Specific Safety Program shall include, but not be limited to, the following site-specific components as they apply to the Contractor’s scope of work. Note: This section is not applicable to LAUSD M and O. The OEHS department shall follow existing LAUSD policy for M and O. • Safety and Health Policy Statement • An Environmental Health and Safety Management System (EHSMS) with assignment of accountability and responsibilities for key personnel responsible for implementation and enforcement of the Site-Specific Safety Program • Identification of Competent Persons and Qualified Persons • Audit/Inspection Program • Leading and Lagging safety metrics • Scope of Work Evaluation • Job Safety Analysis/Job Hazard Analysis Program (JSA/JHA) Task-specific Hazard Assessment (THA) • Hazard/Risk/Exposure Assessment • Control Measures/Activity Hazard Analysis • Minimum Three Week Look Ahead Safety Pre-planning incorporated into the Job Site Progress Meetings. • Procedures for effectively communicating safety and health matters to Employees • Safety Incentive Program/Safety Recognition Program • Progressive Disciplinary Action Program • Job Site Hazard Identification Inspection and Corrective Action Program • Safety Training Program (including provisions for Supervisory and Craft Employee training) • Site-specific Employee Safety Orientation Program • Provisions for maintaining orientation, training, inspection, corrective action, and accident/incident investigation records • Written Hazard Communication Program and Respiratory Protection Program o To include Material Safety Data Sheets for all products at the site • Emergency Response and Evacuation Plan • Storm Water Pollution Prevention Program (SWPPP) • Fire Prevention Program LAUSD School Repair & Construction Site Safety Standards
PRINTED DOCUMENT IS UNCONTROLLED/UNOFFICIAL Page 17
• Hot Work Program • Drug Free Workplace/Substance Abuse Prevention Program • Accident/Incident Reporting and Investigation Program • Disability Management Program (Light Duty/Return to Work Program) • Near Miss Incident Investigation Program • Fall Prevention Program • Scaffold Safety o Scaffold Inspection shall be addressed in the Scaffold Safety Program o Scaffold Erector and User Training shall be addressed in the Scaffold Safety Program • Confined Space Entry Program • Lockout/Tagout/Control of Hazardous Energy Program • Excavation Safety Program • Site Logistics Plan • Other written programs required by this and other contract documents or regulatory agencies (i.e., heat stress, respiratory, equipment inspection program, etc.) • Barricades and fencing protocols • List of Attachments The Contractor shall submit to LAUSD Safety within 10 days of contract award an electronic copy of the Corporate/Company Safety Plan and Site-Specific Safety Plan for review and approval. • The Program(s) will be reviewed for inclusion of the requirements of California Code of Regulations, Section 3203 (T8 CCR 3203) Federal OSHA Standards, the LAUSD Safety Standards and applicable sections of the Site Contract Specifications. • The approval of the Program(s) will be based solely on the content of the Program relative to compliance with California Code of Regulations, Section 3203 (T8 CCR 3202) Federal OSHA Standards, the LAUSD Safety Standards and Site Contract Specifications. The Contractor retains responsibility for regulatory compliance, and the means and methods employed to implement the contents of the Program(s). • Failure to attain approval of the Program prior to the scheduled commencement of contract work is not grounds for a time extension. • Upon approval of the Program(s) for conformance to said requirements, the Contractor shall submit two copies of the Program signed by the Contractor’s Owner or CEO to the OAR. Prior to mobilizing on site or during “Notice to Proceed I” (NTP-I) the General Contractor will submit to the OAR and/or LAUSD Safety copies of their Sub-Contractors Job Hazard Analysis (JHA) for review and recommended improvement suggestions/comments. 18
Each JHA will summarize specific job task(s) performed, potential hazards associated with each task and the safety protocol required/implemented to reduce the injury /accident potential. Reference the Job Hazard Analysis section of these Standards. Prior to beginning work each Contractor will ensure and review with their employees the JHA specific to the work to be performed. As evidence of training each employee will sign the applicable JHA. Copies of the JHA will be maintained on site for review by LAUSD Safety. The General/Prime Contractor shall be responsible for ensuring that their Subcontractors comply with the provisions summarized above. The Contractor’s scope of work shall include compliance with the LAUSD Safety Standards. This shall include all services required for the complete performance of the LAUSD Site contract work and all related site work in accordance with the LAUSD Safety Standards and all applicable State and Federal regulatory criteria/standards. Every Contractor and/or Subcontractor is responsible for planning and executing work in harmony with stated objectives of the LAUSD Safety Standards and all applicable State and Federal regulatory criteria/standards. Every Contractor and/or Subcontractor shall furnish all information concerning the safety of their LAUSD job site operations upon demand to LAUSD authorized representatives. Every Contractor and/or Subcontractor will enforce compliance with all job site safety work practices and procedures applicable to their scope of work as defined in the contract. Drugs and Alcohol - The Contractor must support and encourage a drug-free workplace. Alcohol, drugs and weapons shall not be allowed on the job site under any circumstances, and violation of this policy shall be the cause for immediate removal. All contractor and subcontractor site management/supervisory personnel shall have evidence of completing an OSHA 10/30 Hour Construction Outreach Training Program prior to mobilization. Specifically, the following is required: •
A minimum of 20% of the jobsite workers to be OSHA 10-hour General or Construction Industry Safety and Health Certified.
•
All foreman/first-line supervisors must have OSHA 30 hour training;
•
Hazardous Waste Operations and Emergency Response (HAZWOPER) workers must comply with the Federal and State mandated HAZWOPER regulations, including physical exams and training;
•
Asbestos Workers must comply with the Asbestos Training requirements of the Asbestos Hazard Emergency Response Act (AHERA) and licensing requirements;
Applicable personnel assigned to the site after mobilization shall complete this training within 30 days of assignment. LAUSD School Repair & Construction Site Safety Standards
PRINTED DOCUMENT IS UNCONTROLLED/UNOFFICIAL Page 19
Prior to beginning work, all employees shall fill-out new-hire paperwork (MANDATORY) are to receive a site safety orientation which at a minimum reviews the IIPP, site safety rules, policies, procedures, regulations and applicable emergency and evacuation plans. This shall be done at the jobsite trailer prior to any job-setup, dropping off of tools, or taking part in any work related activity. Authorized vendors, suppliers, haulers, visitors, etc. shall either be accompanied by a qualified Contractor employee or be provided with an orientation that is appropriate for their job task exposures during their time on site. In order to address specific areas of concern LAUSD reserves the right to request additional Site Safety Meetings be conducted. Every site shall schedule and conduct (at a minimum) monthly site safety meetings with their on site personnel to properly coordinate the work within the trades and resolve matters related to safety and health associated with site work. The General/Prime Contractor’s safety pre-planning shall be incorporated into the job site progress/schedule meetings. Minutes shall be kept of each meeting which will include topics covered and attendees. The Contractor will ensure that all personnel are properly trained and instructed for all jobs which require specific training and/or competency to meet all applicable Cal OSHA and Federal OSHA regulations, State and Federal laws, and compliance with the LAUSD Safety Standards and the contractor’s Site-Specific Safety Program. The Contractor shall conduct toolbox safety meetings with their Employees at least once a calendar week. Minutes of these toolbox meetings are to be prepared and maintained by the Contractor, and available for review by authorized LAUSD representatives. • Meeting minutes shall contain the following: o Employee names in a legible format o Signature of each Employee o Contractor name o Date of meeting o Description of meeting topics o Name(s) of person(s) conducting the meeting Prior to starting work, each Contractor and Subcontractor (via the General/Prime Contractor) shall submit to the OAR a list of (a) Competent Persons and Qualified Persons as applicable to the Contractor’s scope of work, and (b) First Aid/CPR trained personnel. • Each list shall be clearly dated, and updated as required throughout the contract period. Each time the list is updated, a copy shall be provided to the OAR. Each Contractor is responsible for handling, on a daily basis, rubbish and debris generated by its work. The Contractor must keep the work place clean.
20
The Contractor is responsible for ensuring that corrective action is taken when Loss Control Survey forms are issued to the Contractor. The Safety Audit Corrective Action form must be completed by the Contractor and returned to the OAR as required by these Safety Standards. Copies of these forms are provided in the appendix. The Contractor will cooperate with inspections conducted by Cal OSHA/Federal OSHA and other regulatory agencies. The Contractor will immediately notify the OAR and LAUSD Safety of these inspections. The cited Contractor(s) shall immediately upon receipt submit copies of all regulatory agency citation notices (if applicable) to the General/Prime Contractor, LAUSD OAR and LAUSD Safety. • The General/Prime Contractor shall ensure that the cited Contractor posts copies of all citations as required by OSHA or the applicable regulatory agency.
LAUSD School Repair & Construction Site Safety Standards
PRINTED DOCUMENT IS UNCONTROLLED/UNOFFICIAL Page 21
9.
CONTRACTOR SAFETY MANAGER, CONTRACTOR SAFETY REPRESENTATIVE AND SUBCONTRACTOR SAFETY REPRESENTATIVE
In order to ensure/maintain a safe work site, Contractor(s) shall designate a responsible and qualified member of its company who has the authority to assure compliance with the Contractor and LAUSD Safety Standards. 9.1
DEFINITIONS
Contractor Safety Manager (CSM): Projects which at any time throughout the duration of the contract will exceed 50 or more employees or contracts exceeding $10,000,000 or more in contract value will require a professional Contractor Safety Manager (CSM). The Contractor Safety Manager will be assigned to the site full time to carry out the duties as described in this document. The Contractor Safety Manager shall have no other duties other than maintaining the OCIP and Safety Programs. Alternate Contractor Safety Manager (ACSM): An individual meeting the same requirements of the CSM that assumes the role of the CSM on a temporary basis. Contractor Safety Representative (CSR) Less than 50 employees: A Contractor employee assigned safety responsibilities for shift work and distinct work locations as required. The CSR reports to the CSM. Additional SSR personnel shall cover shift work and distinct work locations as required. The Contractor can delegate the CSR duties to a qualified on-site Field Supervisor. CSR responsibilities cannot be delegated to an office or staff employee. Alternate Contractor Safety Representative (ACSR): An individual meeting the same requirements of the CSR that assumes the role of the CSR on a temporary basis. Subcontractor Safety Representative (SSR): Subcontractor employees assigned safety responsibilities for shift work and distinct work locations as required. Additional SSR personnel may be required to cover shift work and distinct work locations. The Subcontractor can delegate the SSR duties to a qualified onsite Field Supervisor. SSR responsibilities cannot be delegated to an office or staff employee. Contractor Safety Manager (CSM)/Alternate Contractor Safety Manager (ACSM) • The CONTRACTOR shall provide at a minimum, one (1) FULL TIME on-site competent and qualified English-speaking Contractor Safety Manager, with a proven record of accomplishment on sites of similar scope and complexity and the appropriate number of years as a Contractor Safety Manager on sites of this scope and complexity as evidenced by submitted background information. This person shall be physically present at the site while any aspect of the Work is being performed and shall have no tasks other than administering the Safety Program and ensuring adherence to the LAUSD Safety Standards. The Contractor Safety Manager shall be retained at this capacity for the duration of the Work. Should there be a need to replace the Contractor Safety Manager, the CONTRACTOR shall submit to LAUSD Safety for approval, within thirty (30) days prior to the proposed date of replacement, the appropriate background information for the new Contractor Safety Manager prior to such replacement. At a minimum, the Contractor
22
Safety Manager shall be on-site full time from NTP-1 thru Substantial Completion of the project. Any Safety Manager Personnel change requires 30 day notice to LAUSD. Note: LAUSD construction safety will facilitate the proper transition of safety personnel in the event a Safety Manager leaves without knowledge or notification to their employer. The Contractor Safety Manager (CSM) or Alternate Contractor Safety Manager (ACSM) must meet one of the following minimum qualifications: • Degreed Safety Professional–(Bachelor’s or higher) plus two (2) years of construction safety experience. • Certified Safety Professional (CSP) as recognized by the Board of Certified Safety Professionals plus two (2) years of construction safety experience. • Certified Health and Safety Technician (CHST) Board of Certified Safety Professionals (BCSP) seeking a program to certify people who will fill job site safety positions at construction sites with two (2) years of construction experience. •
Training and certification in the OSHA Construction Safety 30 Hour Program and must have received additional training, when required by OSHA standards, on specific hazards of the site, and has completion of the OSHA 500 Basic Instruction Course in Occupational Safety and Health Standards for the Construction Industry is recommended. This individual must have performed full-time safety responsibilities for a minimum of five (2) years in the construction industry. • At the discretion of LAUSD, other certifications and qualifications may be considered.
In accordance with the Owner Controlled Insurance Program (OCIP), If at any time a Subcontractor has over 50 workers on the jobsite, the Subcontractor shall also have a DEDICATED, FULL TIME Subcontractor Safety Representative (SSR) on the site. If Subcontractors provide a FULL TIME SSR it will not absolve the General/Prime Contractor of their responsibilities to provide a FULL TIME, qualified CSM. The Subcontractor(s) Safety Representative(s) shall have no other tasks other than administering the Safety Program and ensuring adherence to the LAUSD Safety Standards. The Subcontractor(s) Safety Representative(s) shall also meet the minimum qualifications identified above. • If the General/Prime Contractor and/or their Subcontractors daily job site work force will at no time throughout the duration of the site exceed 50 combined total employees, the Contractor and/or Subcontractor can delegate a Contractor Safety Representative (CSR) or Subcontractor Safety Representative (SSR) duties to an on-site supervisor who meets one of the following criteria. o The CSR/SSR must be credentialed with a Safety Trained Supervisor (STS) certification. o Or have successfully completed the OSHA Construction Outreach 30 Hour Programs within the past 3 years and have a minimum of two (2) years of construction safety experience.
LAUSD School Repair & Construction Site Safety Standards
PRINTED DOCUMENT IS UNCONTROLLED/UNOFFICIAL Page 23
• Prior to or during NTP-1, Contractor will submit to LAUSD Safety the resume of the person(s) who will manage their safety responsibilities on site. Once approved by LAUSD Safety, the safety representatives regardless of their job title designation will not be changed except with the approval of LAUSD Safety. Such approval is not an acceptance of responsibility. The Contractor shall submit for approval, within thirty (30) days prior to the proposed date of replacement, the appropriate background information for the new Contractor Safety Manager. • All pre-qualified Contractor safety personnel regardless of their job title will have: o Construction safety experience relevant the scope/type of work the Contractor performs. o Current First Aid training from a provider recognized by OSHA. o Current CPR training from a provider recognized by OSHA. • The CSR and/or SSR must be allocated sufficient time to perform their job site safety duties and responsibilities. • If necessary, LAUSD Safety reserves the right to direct the removal and replacement of the CSM, CSR or SSR. o A CSM, CSR or SSR shall be present at all times, including overtime and weekends when work is being performed within the scope of their employer’s authority or responsibility. o The CSM shall be provided on the job site from NTP-1 through Substantial Completion. The CSR(s) and/or SSR(s) shall be provided on site for the duration of work performed by their employer. • An Alternate Contractor Safety Manager (ACSM) or Alternate Contractor Safety Representation (ACSR) meeting the same qualifications as the CSM or CSR shall be present when the CSM or CSR is not present on the job site. The ACSM or ACSR shall have the same responsibilities as the CSM or CSR. ACSM, ACSR or SSR duties may be assumed by a similarly qualified site supervisor. • The Contractor will notify the OAR when the CSM and CSR will not be present on the job site. This notification will include the name of the ACSM or ACSR. • The General/Prime Contractor shall maintain a list of all Contractor and Subcontractor safety representatives on the job site. Upon request this list will be made available for review by authorized LAUSD representatives. • The OCIP Coordinator or Risk Manage may exclude contractors form the OCIP or claims may be denied for failure to follow the OCIP Manual requirements as part of the employer contract including the provision to have a full time safety representative as stated in this section.
24
9.2
CONTRACTOR SAFETY MANAGER, CONTRACTOR SAFETY REPRESENTATIVE, AND SUBCONTRACTOR SAFETY REPRESENTATIVE RESPONSIBILITIES
All Contractor Safety Representatives (regardless of their job title designation) responsibilities and authority must include but are not limited to the following: • Authority to enforce COMPLIANCE WITH the Contractor’s Site-Specific Safety Program, IIPP and LAUSD Safety Standards. • Responsibility to assure compliance with the OSHA Act and any other safety standards relative to their scope of work. In addition to requirements described elsewhere in the Safety Standard, the Contractor’s Safety Manager, Alternate Construction Safety Manager and Contractor’s Safety Representative and Subcontractor Safety Representative shall have at minimum: • Authority to stop work when a serious safety or imminent danger/hazard is identified. • Authority to implement corrective action(s). • Authority to remove individuals, supervisors, or subcontractors from the site for refusing to comply with Contractor, LAUSD and OSHA Safety Standards. Specific responsibilities of the Contractor’s Safety Manager/Representative must include, but are not limited to assisting, completing or overseeing completion of the following by their Employer and Subcontractors: • Assist Contractor Management with the planning and scheduling of work operations to prevent personal injury and/or property damage hazards. • The CSM or CSR shall conduct safety orientation sessions for employees new to the site, prior to their beginning work. Documentation of site safety orientation will be maintained and identification made by the use of a hardhat sticker specific to the site. • Conduct, participate in, or assist field supervisors with weekly tool box safety meetings. • Conduct weekly supervisor/management safety meetings. • Instruct and inform supervisors/management on safety rules and regulations. • Assist supervision with correcting unsafe acts by employees through proper job placement, training, and the use of good discipline. • With the support of Contractor Management, setup/draft, implement, monitor and enforce, the Job Hazard Analysis (JHA) Program. • Instruct supervision and employees in the proper use and care of personal protective equipment (PPE). • Instruct supervision and employees concerning special procedures for imminent hazard exposures (e.g. confined space entry, excavations, lock out/tag out, fall protection, etc.) • Conduct OSHA required training. LAUSD School Repair & Construction Site Safety Standards
PRINTED DOCUMENT IS UNCONTROLLED/UNOFFICIAL Page 25
• Complete and maintain on site for review OSHA, State, Federal, Company and site-specific safety reports. • Complete accident reporting and investigation reports in accordance with the LAUSD Insurance Manual and LAUSD Safety Standards. Take corrective action to prevent recurrence of similar type accidents. Records will be maintained on the site and distributed as described in the Safety Standards. • Ensure that required first aid supplies are adequate. • Coordinate transportation of employees with minor injuries to the designated Medical Clinic. • Maintain training documentation on site for review by authorized LAUSD and/or regulatory representatives. • Implement site-specific safety policies and procedures. • Demonstrate, by example, proper safety behavior. • Keep the Project Manager, OAR, and LAUSD Safety informed of any safety related problems that have or may develop. • Conduct and document (at a minimum) daily site safety inspections. Documentation shall be created and maintained on site listing action(s) taken to correct deficiencies identified during inspections. • Forward copies of inspection and corrective action records to the OAR and LAUSD Safety. Review LAUSD Safety Audit Reports received from LAUSD Safety or the Insurance Carrier Safety Representatives that note safety non-compliance items. • Disseminate the LAUSD Safety Audit Reports to Subcontractors if necessary. • Ensure corrective action is taken. • Return the completed LAUSD Safety Audit Report Corrective Action Plan to the OAR and LAUSD Safety and others as required on the project within three (3) business days. LAUSD Safety Audit Report Corrective Action Plan will be reviewed at the Weekly Progress meeting.
26
Los Angeles Unified School District
10.
LAUSD SAFETY RESPONSIBILITIES
LAUSD Safety is responsible for auditing the Contractor’s Company/Corporate Safety Plan (C/CSP), including their Injury Illness Prevention Plan (IIPP) and Site-Specific Safety Program (SSSP). Note: This section is not applicable to LAUSD M and O. The OEHS department shall follow existing LAUSD policy for M and O. LAUSD Safety reports these findings to LAUSD Construction Management, the OAR, and the Contractor for corrective action and enforcement. Responsibilities and duties of LAUSD Safety may include, but are not limited to the following: • Compile and maintain safety performance statistics for the site. o Communicate the above information to LAUSD Construction Management, the OAR and other authorized LAUSD representatives to ensure they are informed and/or involved with safety management activities. • Keep apprised of and communicate to Contractor management new regulations and developments to assist Contractors with keeping safety policies and procedures current and effective. • Conduct safety program audits and site safety surveys of Contractors and Subcontractors work activities to verify compliance with LAUSD, and Contractor safety protocol, confirm regulatory compliance, identify and document noncompliance items, and make recommendations for improvements. • LAUSD Safety will document non-compliance items, recommendations, and or comments on the Safety Audit Report. Copies of the completed Safety Audit Report will be submitted to the OAR and Contractor(s). The Corrective Action Plan form will be submitted to the Contractor when a written response is required. • Review and communicate safety methods and procedures to the Contractor’s Safety Manager/Representative, and authorized LAUSD representative(s) to foster the highest level of accident/incident prevention performance possible. • Provide special consulting to LAUSD Construction Management, OAR, Contractor and Subcontractors regarding safety issues and challenges that may arise on the site(s). • If required, conduct or participate in accident/incident investigations. LAUSD Accident Investigation Reports shall not relieve Contractor(s) of their obligation to conduct their own investigation, or of any responsibility they have to complete and file notices, reports and forms in accordance with applicable regulatory requirements and LAUSD accident reporting protocol as defined in the LAUSD Insurance Manual. Review all Contractor incident investigation reports to ensure thorough investigations were conducted and controls instituted to prevent future accidents or incidents.
LAUSD School Repair & Construction Site Safety Standards Page 27
Los Angeles Unified School District
11.
CONTRACTOR PROGRESS MEETINGS
Following is a suggested agenda for the Safety and Loss Control component of the Progress Meeting. This agenda may be modified to reflect site needs. Note: This section is not applicable to LAUSD M and O. The OEHS department shall follow existing LAUSD policy for M and O. Contractor: Report on accidents/incidents involving the Contractor or its’ Subcontractors since the last progress meeting. If the SAF 3 accident/incident form has been completed, it shall be distributed and discussed with the Contractors during this meeting. Contractor discussion is to include corrective or preventative action taken to prevent a reoccurrence. Contractor shall report on the work status of each injured Employee until said Employee returns to full duty. Report on near-miss incidents involving the Contractor or its’ Subcontractors since the last meeting. If the SAF 4 form has not been filed relevant to any incident discussed, it shall be distributed and discussed with the Contractors during this meeting. Contractor discussion is to include corrective or preventative action taken to prevent a reoccurrence. Provide a description of work activities until the next meeting, including anticipated Employee and public safety concerns and non-routine tasks/activities. Contractor is to report on safety pre-planning that has been done to include steps that will be taken to minimize hazards. Contractor will be prepared to discuss potential public and vehicular exposure hazards and the loss prevention controls to be implanted to reduce the exposure potential. In order to reduce the probability of schedule delays, provide a brief description of work activities anticipated (utilizing the job schedule) covering the next three weeks to identify in advance potential concerns to facilitate safety pre-planning by all parties. A Job Safety Analysis (SAF-6) or Activity Hazard Analysis may be requested from the responsible Contractor(s) for future activities. LAUSD Safety, OCIP Safety: Report on non-compliance violations/hazards identified on Loss Control Surveys that have not been corrected.
LAUSD School Repair & Construction Site Safety Standards Page 28
Los Angeles Unified School District
Report on non-compliance violations/hazards identified on Loss Control Surveys that are repeat items (i.e., the same or substantively similar type violations/hazards that has been identified in the past, and has reoccurred). Report on accidents/incidents involving the Contractor or its’ Subcontractors since the last progress meeting. Report on Near-Miss Incidents involving the Contractor or its’ Subcontractors since the last progress meeting. Report on any existing or emerging trends in the Contractor’s safety performance Report on future activities that require safety pre-planning. Identify Potential Public and vehicular exposure hazards. Review of Job Safety Analysis issues. LAUSD OAR: Reporting or discussion of any item(s) described herein. Any additional/other topic(s)/item(s) not described herein. 11.1
SITE PRE-PLANNING/PLANNING AND PROGRESS COORDINATION MEETING(S)
Safety and loss control activities are to be integrated into the work plan such that safety is an integral component of the construction management process, rather than a separate activity. There are five main elements to the preplanning and schedule component of the LAUSD Safety Standards. • Site Survey: Prior to the start of work, the Contractor shall review the plans and specifications and conduct a physical survey of the job site. • Construction Process Plan: From the Site Survey, the Contractor shall develop in conjunction with the job schedule a written Construction Process Plan. The Construction Process Plan shall identify tasks and activities under four main categories: o Construction sequence and procedures o Temporary Structures/Shoring/Reshoring/Bracing/Retention Systems required o Critical Structures or Processes o Description of required tests and approvals • Job Hazard Analysis: Job Hazard Analysis (JHA) needs may be pre-determined in part by reviewing the Construction Process Plan and Construction Schedule. The JHA should be prepared far enough in advance of the task or activity to ensure that changes or revisions will not affect the scheduled execution of the
LAUSD School Repair & Construction Site Safety Standards Page 29
Los Angeles Unified School District
task or activity. criteria.
Refer to Job Hazard Analysis Section for specific program
• Site Progress Meetings: These meetings are typically held on a weekly or biweekly basis, and are typically chaired by the OAR. Safety pre-planning should be incorporated into these meetings. o The Contractor shall prepare a Three-Week Look-Ahead Schedule and submit same for review prior to each Site Progress Meeting. • Pre-Planning Meetings: Pre-planning meeting needs may be identified from the Construction Process Plan and/or job schedule. The Pre-planning agenda should be incorporated into the Site Progress meetings. o The Contractor shall schedule Pre-Planning into the Master Schedule far enough in advance of the start of the relevant phase to ensure that changes or revisions to JHA’s and coordination efforts will not affect the scheduled execution of the relevant phase of work. o The pre-planning shall include the OAR, as well as all Contractors and Subcontractors involved in that phase of work. At their discretion, LAUSD Safety may also be involved. This meeting shall identify and address the safety and coordination issues of the relevant phase of work. o Job Hazard Analysis’ shall be prepared using the JHA form (or an acceptable equivalent); specific JHA’s are to be prepared using the Job Hazard Analysis as a guide. o Subsequent meetings may be required throughout the phase of work to maintain safety and coordination efforts.
LAUSD School Repair & Construction Site Safety Standards Page 30
Los Angeles Unified School District
12.
JOB HAZARD ANALYSIS (JHA)
The Job Hazard Analysis (JHA) is a written work plan that incorporates safety into work procedures to ensure that job task(s) or operations receive proper safety planning prior to beginning work. Prior to mobilizing on site or during “Notice to Proceed I” (NTP-I) the General Contractor will submit to the OAR and/or LAUSD Safety copies of their Sub-Contractors Job Hazard Analysis (JHA) for review and recommended improvement suggestions/comments. A Job Hazard Analysis (JHA) is to be developed by the site management or designee for each job task. Each JHA will summarize specific job task(s) performed, potential hazards associated with each task and the safety protocol required/implemented to reduce the exposure potential. Prior to the start of each shift each employee/crew shall review the JHA(s) applicable to their scope of work. As evidence of training each employee will sign the applicable JHA. Copies of the JHA will be maintained onsite for review by LAUSD Safety. JHA’s are to be completed by a supervisor familiar with the task(s) to be performed. A particular task is chosen and employees begin to identify potential hazards associated with performing the task. • When specific tasks require that a JHA be completed, the CSM/CSR/SSR shall facilitate the JHA process and document review of the JHA with the supervisor(s) in advance of the work shift. Following is the process which should be used to develop the JHA: Select the job to be analyzed. Use the following factors as a guide in selecting jobs to be analyzed, remembering that those with the highest incident/accident severity potential shall be evaluated first. • Frequency of incidents • Disabling injuries • Potential for severe injury • New operations/jobs Break the job down into successive steps. (Avoid making the breakdown too detailed or too general) • Select an experienced and cooperative employee/crew to perform the job. • Explain the purpose of the analysis. • Observe the employee/crew as the job is performed.
LAUSD School Repair & Construction Site Safety Standards Page 31
Los Angeles Unified School District
• Record each job step in the breakdown. • Review with the employee/crew and seek comments. Identify the hazards and the potential incidents. • Is there a danger of striking against, being stuck by, or incurring other injurious contact with an object? • Can the work be caught in, between, or by objects? • Is there a potential slip, trip, or fall hazard? • Are there strain exposures from pushing, pulling, reaching, twisting or lifting? • Are there environmental hazards in the form of gases, vapors, fumes, mists, or dusts? Develop ways to eliminate hazards and prevent potential incidents. • Find a new way to do the job. • Change the physical conditions that create hazards. • Implement: •
Engineering Controls
•
Administrative Controls
•
PPE
LAUSD School Repair & Construction Site Safety Standards Page 32
Los Angeles Unified School District
13. 13.1
SAFETY MEETINGS
ACCIENT/INCIDENT REVIEW MEETINGS
The Contractor’s Safety Manager (CSM), Contractor Safety Representative (CSR) or immediate supervisor shall adopt a practice of scheduling an Accident/Incident Review Meeting within 72 hours of the occurrence of an accident/incident. Note: This section is not applicable to LAUSD M and O. The OEHS department shall follow existing LAUSD policy for M and O. For the purposes of this section, “Accident/Incident” may be defined as any or all of the following: • Near-Miss Incident • First-Aid Case • Recordable Injury • Lost-Time Injury • Vehicular Incident • General Liability/Third-Party Incident • Property Damage The intent and purpose of this meeting is to interactively and cooperatively identify causal factors that had, or may have had, a role in the accident/incident, and to identify corrective action(s) and practice(s) which, when implemented, will reduce the probability of similar type occurrences in the future. It is NOT a fault-finding or blame-finding event. Attendees should include: • OAR (Owner Authorized Representative) • CPM (Contractor Site Manager) • CPS (Contractor Site Superintendent) • CSM/CSR (Contractor Safety Manager/Representative) • SSR (Subcontractor Safety Representative) [if applicable] • LAUSD Safety • Senior Project Management Representative and the Contractor/Subcontractors’ Foremen accountable for the incident via the functional structure of the site • Craftperson(s) involved with and/or witness to the incident. 13.2
PRE-SHIFT EMPLOYEE/CREW PRODUCTION AND SAFETY COORDINATION MEETINGS
At the start of every shift, each Contractor and Subcontractor crew shall conduct a pre-shift production and safety pre-planning meeting.
LAUSD School Repair & Construction Site Safety Standards Page 33
Los Angeles Unified School District
These meetings shall: • Review the scope of work for the shift. • Review of safety activities that are a component of the job tasks (JHA) to be performed. Such meetings are to generally be five (5) to ten (10) minutes long, and are, at minimum, to focus on the following: • Tasks for the shift o Applicable Job Hazard Analysis • Tools and equipment needed for those tasks • Materials needed for those job tasks • Proper material handling techniques • Safe work procedures to perform those job tasks • PPE needed to safety perform those tasks • Questions from the crew These meetings shall be documented in the same manner as the weekly Safety Meeting.
LAUSD School Repair & Construction Site Safety Standards Page 34
Los Angeles Unified School District
14.
REPORTS AND FORMS COMPLETION
The Contractor will cooperate with and participate in inspections conducted by OSHA inspectors. Copies of all OSHA citation notices will be submitted to LAUSD Safety immediately upon receipt by the Contractor. Note: This section is not applicable to LAUSD M and O. The OEHS department shall follow existing LAUSD policy for M and O. The Contractor is responsible for ensuring that corrective action is taken when Loss Control Survey forms are issued to the Contractor. The LAUSD Corrective Action plan must be completed by the Contractor and returned to the OAR and LAUSD Safety. Each Contractor shall maintain copies of weekly safety tool box meeting reports, inspection reports and corresponding corrective action records, on site for periodic review by authorized LAUSD representatives and/or LAUSD Safety. Contractor(s) will furnish LAUSD representatives and/or LAUSD Safety with a copy of completed Incident/Accident reporting and investigation forms, as described in the LAUSD Safety Standards and Insurance Manual, no later than 24 hours after knowledge of the incident/accident. NOTE:
The accident investigation report forms do not constitute notice of injury and do not replace the “Employers First Report of Injury” (Form 5020) form that must be completed by the Contractor and provided to the LAUSD OCIP Insurance Company and/or LAUSD Risk/Claims Management.
Forms summarized throughout the LAUSD Safety Standards are provided in the Appendix.
LAUSD School Repair & Construction Site Safety Standards Page 35
Los Angeles Unified School District
15. 15.1
CONTRACTOR SAFETY VIOLATIONS
CONTRACTOR DISCIPLINARY ACTION – POLICY ENFORCEMENT
It is imperative that all Contractor employees at every level comply with all safety protocol relative to their scope of work at all times while working on LAUSD sites. Note: This section is not applicable to LAUSD M and O. The OEHS department shall follow existing LAUSD policy for M and O. • All Contractors/Subcontractors will be contractually required to comply with all applicable Federal, State and LAUSD safety polices/procedures and regulations. When a Contractor/Subcontractor fails to correct unsafe conditions and/or unsafe actions of their employees, LAUSD will undertake corrective action(s) and, at their discretion, deduct the cost thereof from the responsible Contractors’ progress payment. LAUSD cannot be held responsible for safety or security related work delays associated with violations of LAUSD Safety Standards and Federal or State regulatory requirements. • Contractors/Subcontractors that are not responsive to safety issues, that have unsatisfactory safety evaluations(s) and/or repeated or willful safety violations by their employees will indicate non-compliance with the safety provisions included in the contract documents which may result in removal from the LAUSD bid lists and/or denial of job-site access for a period of time designated by LAUSD. • Authorized LAUSD representatives have the right at any time to stop work activity that is dangerous to life or health until safety violations are corrected. • An initial violation of a non-life threatening safety policy by a Contractor’s/Subcontractor’s employee(s) will result in a notification to the Contractor(s) supervisory personnel the OAR and/or LAUSD Safety. A second violation may result in the Contractor employee being excluded from the site for a period of time designated by LAUSD. • Willful or repeat safety violations by Contractor employee(s) will result in permanent denial of LAUSD site access. • The removal procedure may be accelerated and/or expanded to include removal of a Contractor’s or Subcontractor’s supervisory personnel and/or their entire workforce where violation(s) of safety regulations is widespread, or where the Contractor does not demonstrate good faith effort. • Foremen/supervisors who give direct orders in violation of the safety protocol or are found to be present at the time and knowingly allow an employee safety infraction may be denied LAUSD site access for a period of time deemed appropriate by authorized LAUSD representatives.
LAUSD School Repair & Construction Site Safety Standards Page 36
Los Angeles Unified School District
• Should an imminent danger/hazardous condition be discovered, all work in the area of the danger/hazard must be stopped until corrective action has been taken. • Contractors shall report legitimate unsafe actions/ conditions of other Contractors to the OAR, IOR or other LAUSD site representative(s) and/or LAUSD Safety.
LAUSD School Repair & Construction Site Safety Standards Page 37
Los Angeles Unified School District
16. 16.1
SUBSTANCE ABUSE & ALCOHOL POLICY
PURPOSE
In order to maintain a safe, healthful and efficient work environment, Contractors and Subcontractors shall implement a Substance Abuse & Alcohol Policy. Note: This section is not applicable to LAUSD M and O. The OEHS department shall follow existing LAUSD policy for M and O. 16.2
FUNDAMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
All Contractors shall implement and enforce a policy which prohibits the possession, distribution, promotion, manufacture, sale, use or abuse of illegal and unauthorized drugs, drug paraphernalia, controlled substances and alcoholic beverages by any Contractor employee, agent or any person otherwise under the control of the Contractor, including employees and agents of Subcontractors and consultants while on any LAUSD construction site, including the work site, or while otherwise working on the project. Further, employees shall be prohibited from reporting to the premises under the influence of drugs or alcohol. This Policy will apply to all employees, including but not limited to regular, part-time probationary, casual and contract employees of the Contractor, as well as to employees and agents of Subcontractors and consultants. The Contractor shall take whatever legally permissible steps are necessary or appropriate to enforce compliance with this policy. Employees governed by this policy may possess a prescription medication in its original container and prescribed for current use by an authorized medical practitioner. The Contractor shall ensure that employees taking prescription medication inform their employer about potential side effects of medication which may affect the employees’ ability to work safely. At the discretion of the Contractor and/or LAUSD any Contractor employee working on LAUSD sites may be drug and alcohol screened in accordance with the protocol outlined in the LAUSD Safety Standards to include: • A post accident/incident drug screen for those persons involved in any type accident/incident whether or not injury or property damage was in incurred. Any employee who tests positive for drugs and/or alcohol or refuses to take a drug and alcohol screen shall be removed from the site. 16.3
GENERIC DRUG PROGRAM
16.3.1 Drug Free Work Environment A.
It is the responsibility of the Contractor/supplier/vendor to implement and maintain a drug free work environment and screening program to ensure a drug free workplace.
B.
A post accident drug screen shall be required for those persons involved in accidents/incidents resulting in injury and/or property damage on LAUSD property.
LAUSD School Repair & Construction Site Safety Standards Page 38
Los Angeles Unified School District
C.
Contractor/supplier/vendor employees who are reasonably suspected of being under the influence of narcotics or alcohol shall be drug tested as deemed appropriate by Contractor/supplier/vendor management, their designee and/or LAUSD.
D.
Substance Abuse Testing LAUSD reserves the right to require Contractor employees to undergo medical and/or physical examinations or tests at any time as a condition of being granted access onto LAUSD property, including urine drug tests, breathalyzer tests, hair samples, blood tests or other examinations to determine the use of any illegal or unauthorized drugs or substances prohibited in this policy LAUSD shall reserve the right to approve the facility utilized for sample collection and/or testing utilized by Contractors/suppliers/vendors. Workplace testing may be altered or changed at the discretion of LAUSD. These tests may be utilized under the following circumstances:
1.
Post Accident. If a Contractor employee suffers an Occupational on-the-job injury (requiring treatment from a medical practitioner) or following a serious or potentially serious accident or incident in which safety precautions were violated, equipment or property was damaged, unusually careless acts were performed, or where the cause was due to an employee’s or other person’s failure to wear prescribed personal protective equipment or follow prescribed safety rules while working on LAUSD property, the employee will be tested. Refusal to undergo drug testing will be considered as a violation of the drug policy and the employee will be denied access to Owner’s property.
2.
Reasonable Suspicion Testing: “REASONABLE SUSPICION” means a suspicion based upon the observation of objective facts or specific behavior (or the report of such facts or behavior by a person believed to be reliable) which would lead a prudent person of ordinary intelligence to conclude that an individual may be using drugs and/or alcohol or in some other way is unfit to safely perform their job tasks.
3.
For Cause, Reasonable Suspicion Testing will be used when there is a reasonable suspicion that a Contractor employee shows signs of possible intoxication, or is under the influence of drugs, or other facts that would lead a prudent person to be concerned about the individual’s safety, the safety of others due to the person’s physical condition or behavior covered under this policy.
4.
All Contractor employees must agree to abide by this policy and must consent to drug testing and to the release of test results to their employer and/or LAUSD designated representatives as a condition of continued LAUSD job site access.
LAUSD School Repair & Construction Site Safety Standards Page 39
Los Angeles Unified School District
E.
General Testing Procedures
1.
The drug test will be taken from urine specimens or other standard testing methods and analyzed by a certified professional laboratory and may be administered by a Certified Third Party such as ASAP, DISA, LACC or equivalent .
2.
The contracted facility will assure proper handling of the specimens so that the sample results can be traced to the proper individual. A chain-of-custody procedure will be developed to show a paper trail of the custody of samples at all times. The facility will also take necessary steps to avoid any dilution or alteration of specimens. This will be facilitated by using tamper resistant seals on all sample bottles.
3.
Confirmation of test results will be reported to the employee’s employer. The process normally takes 24 to 48 hours to be completed.
4.
Testing will check for the following drugs: Amphetamines
Cocaine
Phencyclidine
Opiates
Marijuana (THC)
5.
Any Contractor employee who is tested will have the right, if requested by that Contractor employee, to see the results of their test.
6.
Contractor employees who have a positive test result will have a follow up confirmation drug test supervised by the designed testing facility.
7.
Once documentation of a positive drug test is received, the Contractor will be notified. LAUSD will be notified of positive test results by the Contractor.
8.
Contractor employees whose tests are confirmed positive by the confirmation drug test will be notified by the Medical Review Officer (MRO). At the earliest reasonable time, an interview with the MRO will be scheduled with the Contractor employee to discuss the impact of the positive test results on continued access to Owner property.
9.
LAUSD and the Contractor will:
•
Maintain confidentiality of records associated with the administration of this policy.
LAUSD School Repair & Construction Site Safety Standards Page 40
Los Angeles Unified School District
• 10.
F.
G.
When required or requested, LAUSD will counsel management regarding the administration of this policy.
Contractor
Prescription Drugs •
Contractor employees are required to inform their employer of any use of current prescribed medicine that could affect their performance. They may be required to obtain written statements from their doctor(s) regarding the drug(s) effect on the Contractor employee's performance of job duties and to present this statement to their employer.
•
Contractor employees will not be allowed to operate equipment or perform their assigned job tasks if medication could interfere with safe equipment operations or work performance.
•
Contractor employee failure to notify their employer with a written statement from their doctor regarding the use of medication that could affect performance on the job could lead to denial of job site access.
Post Accident Drug Testing
1.
Any Contractor employee involved in an accident/incident resulting in injury/illness or property damage will be required to be tested for chemical substances within two hours of the incident (medical circumstances permitting). Failure or refusal to be tested will be considered as an insubordinate act and the Contractor employee will be denied access to LAUSD property. All accidents/incidents reported after the fact will be subject to drug testing.
2.
The designated medical treatment facility will be responsible for the collection of specimens assuring proper handling of samples.
3.
Contractor employees may be required to sign a consent form for drug or alcohol screening in the event of an occupational injury/illness.
4.
In the case of an accident/incident requiring drug screening, it will be the Contractor supervisor’s responsibility to see that the appropriate releases have been signed and that the Contractor employee proceeds with testing per above. This can be completed when the supervisor transports the employee to the designated medical facility.
5.
If the test results indicate alcohol concentration at or above (.02%) or other regulatory standards, the Contractor employee is subject to having LAUSD site access denied.
Testing for Just Cause
LAUSD School Repair & Construction Site Safety Standards Page 41
Los Angeles Unified School District
H.
1.
Upon reasonable suspicious acts, a Contractor employee may be required to take a drug test. “Just cause” testing must be approved by the employee’s supervisor.
2.
The individual observing a Contractor employee who, in their objective opinion, shows abnormal behavior, impairment, or incoherent tendencies must confirm such observation through their immediate supervisor.
3.
If the immediate supervisor confirms such observations, the Contractor employee shall be tested by the Contractor’s designated testing facility. If the employee refuses, disciplinary action to include denial of LAUSD site access will be warranted. It is the Contractor’s responsibility to see that a drug test requisition is signed, and that the employee is provided transportation to the collection site for testing.
4.
If the test results indicate alcohol concentrations at or above (.02%) or at or above regulatory standards, the employee is subject to LAUSD site access being denied.
Collection Procedures The contracted collection facility shall adhere to procedures assuring the security and Chain of Custody of the testing procedure consistent with regard for individual privacy.
I.
Positive Detection Procedure
1.
No information on drug types or amounts will be released to anyone other than the employee’s employer, and if applicable, the General/Prime Contractor supervising construction activities.
2.
In order to ensure the accuracy of the initial test results, all positive test results will have an additional confirmation test. If the confirmation test results are positive the employee will be notified by the MRO. The employee and his supervisor will meet following notification in a confidential setting.
3.
If the test results are positive for cocaine, opiates, phencyclidine, barbiturates, amphetamines, marijuana, the Contractor employee will be denied access to LAUSD property until evidence of drug treatment through a State recognized program is obtained.
4.
If the test results show an alcohol concentration equal to or above .02%, the Contractor employee will be denied access to LAUSD property.
LAUSD School Repair & Construction Site Safety Standards Page 42
Los Angeles Unified School District
5.
J.
The above provision (3 and 4) also applies to incidents where an employee refuses to submit to a drug screen. Refusal to test will be considered a positive test result.
Violations Meriting the Denial of Access to LAUSD Property Any employee or person will be denied access to property for the following violations, even if such violations are “first offense”:
K.
1.
The Contractor employee or person refuses to submit to a search, and/or inspection, and/or drug test when requested by their employer, LAUSD and/or (if applicable) the General/Prime Contractor.
2.
The Contractor employee or person has submitted to a drug test and, in the judgment of their employer, LAUSD, (if applicable) the General/Prime Contractor and/or the approved drug testing facility, has degraded, diluted, switched, altered or tampered with their sample.
3.
While on LAUSD property, the Contractor employee or person was using, manufacturing, distributing, dispensing, selling, or possessing any alcohol or illegal drugs.
Reinstatement to Work on LAUSD Following a Failed Drug Screen 1.
Applicable Union applicable rules and agreements shall apply.
2.
Non-Union workers shall show proof of drug and alcohol rehabilitation; a.
Minimum Level 1 Outpatient Treatment
b.
Verification documentation of completion is required.
LAUSD School Repair & Construction Site Safety Standards Page 43
Los Angeles Unified School District
17. 17.1
DISABILITY MANAGEMENT/RETURN TO WORK PROGRAM
DISABILITY MANAGEMENT/RETURN TO WORK POLICY
It is the policy of LAUSD, with support from all the Contractors working on LAUSD sites to assist a Contractor employee to return to work from an on-the-job injury at their regular rate of pay, as soon as possible after the Contractor employee has recovered sufficiently from the adverse effects of the injury and in accordance with guidance from the treating physician. Contractors will assist in this endeavor by finding their employee a productive task to accomplish. The employee will draw their regular rate of pay even if the designated task to which the Contractor employee is assigned is outside of their normal work assignments because of temporary physical limitations imposed by the consulting physician. LAUSD, in conjunction with the Contractor, recognizes that an on-the-job injury can impose financial hardships upon a Contractor employee, in addition to other burdens. Through this return-to-work policy, we will endeavor to assist the Contractor employee in returning to productive employment. Under normal circumstances, restricted duty positions will be provided for as long as recommended by the treating physician. Employee refusal to accept limited or restricted duty, when appropriate and approved by the treating physician, can be considered as a voluntary resignation and Workers Compensation benefits will cease. 17.2
PURPOSE
This policy is implemented to establish basic guidelines for an Early Return to Work (transitional duty) Program which will minimize the time away from the job for injured Contractor employees who are unable to work or perform the normal functions of their jobs due to work-related injuries, but are able to work in a limited capacity assignment. Each Contractor shall have a written Early Return to Work Program that shall be implemented on LAUSD sites unless specifically prohibited by the terms of a Collective Bargaining Agreement. 17.3
PROCEDURE
The specified steps taken to return an employee to work through modified/light duty must be carefully thought out to avoid aggravating the injury or illness. For this reason, each decision will require input from the attending physician and the Contractor. • The Worker’s Compensation Claims Coordinator and/or the LAUSD Claims Manager and construction safety department will contact and advise the Contractor of the need to develop a modified duty position for the employee involved. • The attending physician will determine the work restrictions necessary to ensure that the employee does not aggravate the existing injury. The physicians work restrictions will be listed on the Work Status Report form.
LAUSD School Repair & Construction Site Safety Standards Page 44
Los Angeles Unified School District
• If necessary, after the modified/light duty job description is finalized the Worker’s Compensation Claims Coordinator and/or the LAUSD Claims Manager will contact the attending physician to determine if the employee can be released to perform the proposed work assignment. • If the employee refuses the modified/light duty work assignment the Contractor will notify The Worker’s Compensation Claims Coordinator and/or the LAUSD Claims Manager. [In most cases, Workers Compensation indemnity payments will be immediately suspended. • As soon as it can be determined through effective employee and physician contact that an employee is sufficiently recovered from a disability every effort will be made to quickly bring them back to work. • If the employee accepts the modified/light duty work assignment, every effort should be made to bring them back to work at their normal pay rate. • Injured employee considered for light duty work assignment will comply with the attending physician’s work restrictions.
LAUSD School Repair & Construction Site Safety Standards Page 45
Los Angeles Unified School District
18.
CONTRACTOR SAFETY STANDARDS
No attempt has been made to restate applicable Cal OSHA, Federal OSHA, ANSI, NFPA, standards in their entirety. Contractors are reminded it is their responsibility to have at least one copy of all applicable OSHA Standards, as well as other Standards incorporated by reference into the LAUSD Safety Standards, available on their sites for reference and review. In some instances, the LAUSD Safety Standards are more stringent than the applicable Cal OSHA and Federal OSHA standards. In other instances due to variables in the CalOSHA program, the applicable CalOSHA standards may be more stringent than the LAUSD Safety Standards. The Contractor is reminded that, in most instances, the most stringent safety requirements, regardless of source, shall apply.
Access for Maintenance and Operations (M and O): All items requiring maintenance including all those related to Mechanical, Electrical, and Plumbing (MEP) require safe access for M and O personnel. A safe means of access and egress to all mechanical unions, shutoff valves, pumps, HVAC, Utility Vaults, Interstitial Spaces or similar locations must be evaluated for safe access with regard to: Electrical safety, Confined Space, Fall Protection or other recognized hazards and safe access are provided as part of the construction project. This may require locating valves, unions, and associated MEP equipment as to be accessible preferably without the use of Personal Fall Arrest Systems (PFASs)
LAUSD School Repair & Construction Site Safety Standards Page 46
Los Angeles Unified School District
19.
AIR TESTING EQUIPMENT
• Approved air testing equipment shall be used to test utility holes, cable vaults, pits, confined spaces and similar spaces for flammable, toxic, or oxygen deficient atmospheres. The exposing Contractor(s) are responsible for the use, maintenance, calibration and testing of said equipment. • Air testing equipment shall be UL classified for use in Class I, Division 1, Groups A, B, C & D hazardous locations as defined by the National Electrical Code. • Before each use air testing equipment must be tested and calibrated as required by the manufacturer to verify that it is fully functional. • The use and repair of air testing equipment shall be in accordance with the manufacturer’s operating manual and instructions. • Prior to use, Contractor employees must be trained per manufacturer requirements on the use, limitations and alarm modes of each air-testing device that they use. Verification of training must be maintained on the job site. • Employees must immediately leave a work area whenever an equipment alarm sounds due to: o Low or high oxygen level (acceptable range is 19.5% to 23% oxygen). o Flammable/combustible gas detected above 10% of the lower explosive limit (LEL). o Set point for a toxic gas level is reached (e.g., 10 ppm hydrogen sulfide) o Sensor failure o Low battery alarm. • Equipment must be carried with the Contractor employee or placed immediately adjacent to the work area and set to operate in a continuous monitor mode. • Never enter an enclosed work/confined work space (i.e., utility hole, vault, pit, etc.) without: o Completing required air testing. o Purging the space. o Providing continuous ventilation. o Following all applicable regulatory guidelines specific to “Confined Space Entry” and “Utility Hole” work. Also reference “Confined Space Entry” and “Utility Hole” sections in these Safety Standards.
LAUSD School Repair & Construction Site Safety Standards Page 47
Los Angeles Unified School District
20.
ASBESTOS
• Asbestos is to be handled only by qualified and certified Contractors. Asbestos Contractors/Subcontractors must be approved in accordance with applicable State, Federal, and Local regulations and must be approved by LAUSD to perform abatement and disposal of asbestos containing materials (ACM) and asbestos containing construction materials (ACCM), as defined. • It is the Contractor’s responsibility to review the Asbestos Assessment Report (Phase I) and the Abatement Design (Phase 2) prepared for a site prior to the commencement of work and take the necessary steps to ensure the safety of students, faculty, Contractor employees, and the general public through compliance with regulatory and LAUSD specification requirements. • Contractors must verify the presence or absence of asbestos content in building materials PRIOR to impacting these materials during construction remodeling or demolition work. • Upon discovery of any asbestos containing materials (ACM or ACCM) or presumed asbestos containing materials (PACM) not identified in the Phase I report, the Contractor will stop work in such areas and notify the LAUSD Construction Inspector. The material will be inspected and tested, if necessary, by the District’s Asbestos Technical Unit (ATU) or by a LAUSD assigned environmental consultant. • The Contractor shall ensure employees are trained in asbestos awareness to identify ACM, ACCM and PACM. Training will be in compliance with the requirements of the District’s Standard Specification Section 13280 – Asbestos Abatement and Asbestos Related Disturbance – and be documented. Proof of such training is required to be submitted to a LAUSD authorized representative prior to commencement of work. • All asbestos abatement/removal work must follow all regulations of OSHA, the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA), and/or the applicable State agency and the South Coast Air Quality Management District (SCAQMD). • Maintenance and Operations personnel working in areas with ACM or PACM must have appropriate asbestos training which may include minor abatement and compliance with Negative Exposure Assessment Protocols. OEHS is responsible to ensure all asbestos surveys have been completed and information and training disseminated to effected employees and contractors per the applicable asbestos standards and LAUSD protocols.
LAUSD School Repair & Construction Site Safety Standards Page 48
Los Angeles Unified School District
21.
BARRICADES AND FENCING
• Contractors shall provide and erect barricades around unprotected excavations, holes or openings in floor or roof areas, edges of roofs and elevated platforms, around certain types of overhead work, and wherever necessary to warn or protect people against falling in, through, off of or being struck by falling objects. Barricades may also be used to isolate people (such as employees of other Contractors, LAUSD personnel, faculty, students and the public) from vehicular and pedestrian traffic and/or work activities as required by the activity, potential hazards created by the activity, or the location of the activity. • The type(s) barricades/barricade tape/fencing/perimeter protection required, its location and duration of use shall be reviewed during pre-construction and/or job progress meetings. • To ensure the safety of students, faculty, and the general public, the Contractor, as directed by LAUSD, must provide and maintain adequate perimeter protection, such as chain link fences, gates, barricades, etc. to separate work areas from areas outside the perimeter of the job site. • Void of sufficient illumination, lighting may also be required to sufficiently warn vehicular and/or pedestrian traffic of obstacles, trenches, evaluations, overhead work, etc. • Barricades must be at least 42 inches high and must be square and level. • Barricades must be suitable for the area of use (i.e., blinker type barricade for traffic control or protective barricade to provide physical protection from falling). Barricades/fences are to be placed around all construction trenches. However, barricade tape may be utilized to warn construction personnel of trenches/ excavations or overhead work inside construction sites which are provided with perimeter fencing. • Construction work areas utilizing barricade tape shall be posted and protected using nationally accepted color coding as follows: o RED – IMMEDIATELY DANGEROUS o YELLOW – CAUTION • Red barricade tape shall include placards/signage with work duration dates, responsible Contractor’s name and contact person’s telephone number. • Entry into immediately dangerous (red tape barricaded) areas shall be by authorized personnel and only after being advised on the dangerous condition. Unauthorized entry into red tape barricaded areas is prohibited unless prior approval has been granted by a representative of the responsible Contractor. • All barricade tape must be appropriately removed and discarded upon job completion or when the hazardous condition no longer exists.
LAUSD School Repair & Construction Site Safety Standards Page 49
Los Angeles Unified School District
• Projects extending over 30 days will require barriers that are not easily removed (must withstand 200 lbs. pressure). • Portable/temporary fencing shall be installed around construction work areas, Contractor storage areas, and Contractor’s heavy equipment if these areas are not otherwise protected within the confines of the sites perimeter fencing. Fencing must be in good repair and installed to ensure stability of the fencing from being knocked over by students, employees, or the general public. • Chain link fencing shall be free from barbs, icicles (excess galvanizing material that may form sharp projections) or other projections that may cause injury. • Portable fencing shall be installed/braced to prevent its being blown over during windy conditions. Portable fence braces shall not create a trip and fall exposure. • Base supports of portable fencing shall be installed/placed to eliminate tripping hazards when fencing is placed adjacent to sidewalks and walkways. • LAUSD reserves the right to prohibit use of temporary fence panel systems that require the use of a tubular pedestal base support system that presents a potential trip hazard to pedestrians.
LAUSD School Repair & Construction Site Safety Standards Page 50
Los Angeles Unified School District
22.
HOT WORK, WELDING, CUTTING
• For fire prevention all Contractors performing hot work activities shall at a minimum implement and enforce the following Hot Work Program criteria: • The Contractor’s Hot Work Program shall meet or exceed the requirements of NFPA SIB, “Standard for Fire Prevention during Welding, Cutting and Other Hot Work.” • Hot work includes, but is not limited to, the following activities: grinding, cutting, welding, brazing or soldering, heating, hot air welding or other operations that generate heat, flames, arcs, sparks or other sources of ignition. • Prior to performing hot work the Contractor shall evaluate the following: type of hot work to be performed, site preparation, atmospheric conditions, use of appropriate personal protective equipment, and firefighting equipment. • Site preparation should include a survey for the following: flammable/combustible materials; hazards posed by heat transfer; flammable, corrosive, or toxic residues; equipment linings; appropriate lock/tagout application; confined space exposure and housekeeping. • Contractor shall also evaluate the work area for the potential consequences of thermal conduction. Thermal conduction is the transfer of heat that could cause ignition by/through an object heated by the hot work operation. • Contractor shall furnish their own UL/FM approved pressurized/charged portable fire extinguishers and/or other required fire protection equipment for all “hot work.” This equipment shall be located on the same elevations of the work and within 25 feet of the hot work activity. • The need for a fire watch in New Construction buildings will be contingent on the fire potential and/or at the discretion of LAUSD Safety. • A fire watch person will be required for “hot work” operations conducted inside all Existing Facility school buildings. • Fire watch personnel responsibilities/duties: o Fire watch personnel shall have fire-extinguishing equipment readily available and be trained in its use. o If available, they shall be familiar with alarm systems for sounding an alarm in the event of a fire. o They shall watch for fires in all exposed areas, try to extinguish them only when obviously within the capacity of the firefighting equipment available, or otherwise sound the alarm. o A fire watch shall be maintained for at least a half-hour after completion of welding, cutting or other hot work operations to detect and extinguish possible smoldering fires.
LAUSD School Repair & Construction Site Safety Standards Page 51
Los Angeles Unified School District
o Fire watch personnel may be required on different floor/surface levels and possibly in other rooms depending on the configuration of the building. • Oxygen Acetylene Torches: Goggles approved for use when employees are working with oxygen acetylene torches will be worn. • Arc Welding and Cutting Personnel Protective Equipment. o Welders shall wear the required eye protection contingent on the type welding activity performed. o They shall wear appropriate welding helmets, long-sleeve shirts, leathers and welders gloves. o If grinding or chipping is done, a face shield shall be worn in addition to safety glasses. o If respirators are required, they also shall be used according to the employer’s written respiratory protection program. • Arc-welding and cutting equipment shall be industrial rated, in good condition, and meet all governing authority requirements regarding application, installation, and operation. Trained and qualified personnel shall make a complete preventive maintenance inspection in accordance with manufacturer and/or other applicable regulatory criteria. The last inspection date shall be marked on the equipment. • Before each use, the following items shall be inspected: o All leads for broken or cut insulation o Electrode holders for broken insulators or worn holders o Oil and fuels on gas or diesel-powered units o Covers are in place where leads attach to welding machines o All connections have no exposed current-carrying parts • Inspect all leads, grounds, clamps, machines, hoses, gauges, torches, cylinders, etc. before each use. • Do not run hoses and weld leads through doorways. • All work must have a separate and adequate ground. • Do not leave the rod in the electrode holder when not in use. • Do not exceed 15 PSI on the torch side of the gauge when using acetylene. • Do not use matches or cigarettes to light a torch. • Anti-flashback arrestors shall be installed on all fuel gas cylinders or built into the regulators.
LAUSD School Repair & Construction Site Safety Standards Page 52
Los Angeles Unified School District
• Move all flammable/combustible materials at least 50 feet away from the welding/cutting area. • Ventilation Requirements: o Any welding, cutting and heating in enclosed/confined spaces should follow applicable confined space work protocol. o General mechanical or local exhaust ventilation shall be provided whenever welding, cutting, or heating is performed in areas with inadequate ventilation in enclosed spaces or a potential fire or explosion threat from flammable or combustible gasses is present. The ventilation shall be of sufficient capacity and so arranged as to produce the number of air changes necessary to maintain welding fumes and smoke within safe limits. Levels below OSHA PELs and/or TLV’s will be considered to be “safe limits” as described above. In some cases OSHA Action Levels, excursion limits and STELs may be substituted as “safe limits”. The adequacy of the ventilation shall be determined by air monitoring and/ or ventilation measurements. o When sufficient ventilation, as described above, cannot be obtained, the employees shall be protected by appropriate respiratory protection as described in the employer’s written respiratory protection program. Confined space procedures will apply. o When air monitoring is required, the Lower Explosive Limit must be nondetectable (0% LEL), prior to any type of burning, welding, or hot work being conducted by the Contractor. (For example, air monitoring will be required around or near any areas which may pose a potential fire or explosion threat from flammable or combustible vapors). • The fire loss and employees injury exposure potential pertinent to hot work activities inside “Existing Facilities” and/or “New Construction” buildings may require the use of welding curtains. Welding curtains screens, barriers, drop cloth, etc. shall be made of flame resistant (cloth, polyethylene, plastic, etc.) materials.
LAUSD School Repair & Construction Site Safety Standards Page 53
Los Angeles Unified School District
23.
CLOTHING/PROFESSIONAL DEMEANOR
Contractors shall require each employee, agent, vendor or Subcontractor to wear appropriate attire acceptable to LAUSD in accordance with the provisions in the LAUSD Projects General Construction Specifications. 23.1
CLOTHING • Employee dress should be neat in appearance. • Clothing contaminated by oily, flammable, toxic or caustic materials should not be worn until properly cleaned. • Shirts and long pants must be worn at all times on the sites. Sleeveless shirts and tank tops are not permitted. • Certain tasks may require the wearing of fire-resistant materials, such as Nomex®. In such circumstances, extremely flammable clothing material such as nylon should be discouraged.
LAUSD School Repair & Construction Site Safety Standards Page 54
Los Angeles Unified School District
24.
CELLULAR TELEPHONE USE ON Emergency
• Personal cellular telephone use is prohibited except during lunch and authorized breaks. • Equipment operators are prohibited from operating their equipment while conducting any (personal or business) cellular telephone conversation. Business cellular telephone use is permitted in those scenarios where visible contact between equipment operations, spotters, flagmen, etc. is limited.
LAUSD School Repair & Construction Site Safety Standards Page 55
Los Angeles Unified School District
25.
COMPRESSED GAS CYLINDERS/BOTTLES
• In order to provide support, protection and stability, gas cylinders shall always be maintained and/or transported in an upright/vertical position and chained or tied to supporting structures, carts, etc. to prevent falling and damage. • Cylinders must never be taken inside tanks, vessels, or confined spaces. • Regulator fittings must be kept free of oil or grease. • Cylinders valves must be turned to the “off” position when left inactive for 30 minutes or longer. • Cylinders, hoses, valves, fittings and gauge connections shall be properly installed and inspected for leaks and damage before each use. • Compressed gas cylinders must be secured in wheeled carts. Cylinders must not be stored in buildings. • Cylinders must be maintained in good repair with appropriate pressure relief, hydrostatic testing and valve assembly • When in storage, oxygen and fuel gas cylinders must be separated at a minimum of 20 ft., or by a 5 ft. high barrier with a 1/2 hour fire rating and placed away from contact that may rupture the tanks. • Valve protection caps maintained (at least hand tight) must be on cylinders when not in use, in storage or when being transported. • Cylinders must be labeled as to the nature of their contents per NFPA standard rules and the OSHA Hazard Communication Standard. • Cylinder storage areas shall have appropriate warning signage posted. • At no time will cylinders be accessible to the public. • Appropriate fire-fighting equipment must be provided for each cylinder storage area. • Torches and hoses shall not be left connected to cylinders overnight. • Torches and hoses shall not be stored in unventilated gang boxes or storage containers. • Flashback arrestors and back flow check valves shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer’s instruction on all oxygen-fuel torch sets.
LAUSD School Repair & Construction Site Safety Standards Page 56
Los Angeles Unified School District
26. 26.1
CONCRETE AND MASONRY
CONCRETE CONSTRUCTION
The creating Contractor must guard all protruding reinforcing steel, vertical conduit, anchor bolts, small diameter steel, etc. to eliminate impalement hazards in accordance with 8 CCR § 1712. 26.2
STRUCTURAL CONCRETE
The Contractor must not remove any forms or shoring until a determination has been made by the testing lab and structural engineer that the concrete has gained sufficient strength to support its own weight and superimposed loads. The Contractor must not place loads on any concrete structure until concrete has reached a compressive strength predetermined by the structural engineer of record. • The Contractor shall be the point of contact for information regarding load bearing reliability. Where concrete shoring/reshoring is employed, a shoring/reshoring plan specific to the site shall be available for review at the site. • Deviations from the shoring/reshoring plan will require the issuance of a new shoring/reshoring plan. o The addition of superimposed loads on the floor (such as equipment and/or materials) not considered in the reshoring plan shall be construed as a deviation from the plan and is prohibited. 26.3
POURING AND PUMPING OPERATIONS • Permanent and temporary power lines shall be identified prior to the start of a concrete pour. Appropriate safeguards shall be implemented for the pumping, pouring and finishing operations. • A site traffic control plan shall be established for concrete truck traffic. Trained spotters and flaggers shall be used as necessary for worker and public safety. • Contractors involved in pouring and finishing activities shall have appropriate personal protection equipment, including gloves, mud boots, high visibility vests and eye protection. • Concrete truck washout areas shall be in an area acceptable to LAUSD, located out of vehicular and pedestrian travel areas and comply with all applicable environmental laws, standards and regulations. • Diapers or the equivalent shall be provided for the pump and concrete trucks when the truck to pump transfer occurs in a public street or other public area.
LAUSD School Repair & Construction Site Safety Standards Page 57
Los Angeles Unified School District
• A site logistics plan reviewed and approved during a job progress pre-planning meeting prior to commencing work shall be prepared for each pump location, and shall include provisions for concrete truck traffic routing and control, and (if applicable) pedestrian traffic routing and control. 26.4
MASONRY CONSTRUCTION • Masonry walls shall be braced and/or supported as required by OSHA and/or local requirements. • A “Clear Zone” may be required. Unauthorized personnel shall be prohibited from entering the work area. Barricading may be required to limited unauthorized access. • LAUSD enforces a 6 foot fall protection rule and does not recognize the blockwall side masonry construction exception as listed in the Cal-OSHA Standard. Contractor may use integrated rebar system or equivalent on blockside of work to facilitate fall protection methods.
26.5
CUTTING, GRINDING AND PROFILING • Dry cutting, grinding, and profiling of concrete or masonry shall be prohibited except in instances where it is determined in a manner consistent with applicable safety and health standards that the use of water in the cutting, grinding or profiling is not feasible. • If it is determined that the use of water is not feasible: o The Contractor shall perform the work off site or use engineering and work practice controls on site to control the dust, such as a vacuum with a high efficiency particulate air filter (HEPA), or other dust control system(s); o If possible, any dry cutting which occurs shall be done in a designated area away from other employees; and o The Contractor shall provide affected employees with appropriate respiratory protection in accordance with applicable Contractor, LAUSD and/or OSHA/NIOSH Standards which includes but not limited to: •
A written respiratory protection program;
•
Physical Examinations for respirator use;
•
Written cartridge change out schedules; and
•
Care, maintenance and disposal process.
LAUSD School Repair & Construction Site Safety Standards Page 58
Los Angeles Unified School District
27.
CONFINED SPACE ENTRY
• OSHA defines a confined space as a space that: o is large enough and so configured that an employee can physically enter and perform assigned work; and o has limited or restricted means for entry or exit (examples may include tanks, vessels, silos, storage bins, hoppers, vaults, pit, subfloor crawl spaces, manhole systems, etc.); and o Is not designed for continuous employee occupancy. o Has the potential to contain a hazardous atmosphere/ or other hazards. • Any areas defined as confined space will require special precautions. Before any work begins in a confined space a pre-planning meeting will be held to review the exposures associated with work performed and the required controls/countermeasures necessary to prevent injury. • Any violations of confined space protocol creating imminent life threatening hazard exposure(s) shall result in immediate cessation of work until the required safety protocol has been implemented. • The Contractor must abide by the OSHA Standard (8 CCR §5156, 5157 and 5158) for confined space entry and furnish all appropriate personnel, equipment, and support. • Contractors conducting work in utility holes (manholes and vaults) shall comply with the provisions contained in 8 CCR §5156, 5157, and 5158) and the section of LAUSD Safety Standards titled Utility Holes. • Contractor personnel must be trained in the hazards of confined space work, including operating and rescue procedures, the use of respiratory equipment, and instructions as to the hazards they may encounter. Documentation of all required training and/or certification will be maintained on site for review by authorized LAUSD representatives. • Contractor employee(s) who by the required training, with the supporting documentation/certification, which complies with the criteria certifying them as a “Confined Space Competent Person” will be on site throughout any confined space work activities. • The Contractor shall develop a written, understandable confined space operating and rescue procedure which must be made available to all affected employees. • The Contractor is required to provide all necessary entry/rescue equipment required for all entries into confined spaces (tripod, full body harness and lifeline or equivalent, etc.). With approval from LAUSD Safety, wrist straps may be used in designated areas instead of a full body harness.
LAUSD School Repair & Construction Site Safety Standards Page 59
Los Angeles Unified School District
• Prior to entry into a confined space, the Contractor shall ensure all pipe lines which may convey flammable, injurious, or incapacitating substances into the space are disconnected, blinded, or blocked off by other positive means in accordance with applicable Lockout/Tagout regulations. • Prior to entry into confined space, the Contractor shall test the air with an appropriate device or method for: (1) Oxygen content, (2) Flammable gases and vapors, and (3) Potential toxic air contaminants. A written record shall be made and kept at the work site for the duration of the work. • The Contractor shall conduct air testing with such frequency to ensure that the development of dangerous air contamination and/or oxygen deficiency does not occur during the performance of operations. • The confined space shall be emptied, flushed, or otherwise purged of flammable or injurious substances to the extent feasible. • The Contractor is required to provide proper ventilation equipment. • Whenever an atmosphere free of dangerous air contamination and/or oxygen deficiency cannot be ensured, the Contractor shall provide approved respiratory equipment to affected employees, who have been properly trained and are involved in a comprehensive respiratory protection program in accordance with 8 CCR 5144. • The Contractor shall provide a trained standby employee on the outside of the confined space ready to give assistance in case of an emergency. The standby employee shall have appropriate, approved respiratory protective equipment, including an independent source of breathing air conforming with 8 CCR 5144. • The standby employee must have a valid certificate in first aid and CPR training from the American Red Cross, or equivalent training verified by documentary evidence. • Visual contact or two-way radio communication must be available at all times. When required, the Contractor shall provide radios/two way communication. • In order to provide emergency assistance, the Contractor must establish a means of communication with the local emergency service entities. 27.1
PERMIT REQUIRED CONFINED SPACE • A confined space that has one or more of the following characteristics will be considered a permit-required confined space and the applicable regulations/standards will apply: o Contains or has the potential to contain a hazardous atmosphere which includes dangerous air contamination, flammable materials/atmosphere and/or oxygen deficiency. o Contains a material that has the potential for engulfing an entrant.
LAUSD School Repair & Construction Site Safety Standards Page 60
Los Angeles Unified School District
o Has an internal configuration such that an entrant could be trapped or asphyxiated by inwardly converging walls or by a floor which slopes downward/upward and tapers to a smaller cross-section. o Contains any other recognized serious safety or health hazards • Confined spaces classified as “Permit Required Confined Space” shall be labeled as follows: DANGER PERMIT REQUIRED CONFINED SPACE DO NOT ENTER 27.2
UTILITY HOLES (MANHOLES AND VAULTS) • Work in utility holes may expose employees to potential injury due to a lack of oxygen, or the presence of toxic or flammable/combustible gas. Therefore all work activities conducted in utility holes will be considered as confined space work and confined space safety protocol will apply to include, but not limited to, the following: • To remove the utility hole cover: o Use appropriate lifting hooks or bars. o Place feet clear of the cover. o To avoid back injuries, lift using bent knees and keep the back straight. o Place utility hole guard over the opening. • Only trained and qualified employees can test, purge and enter a utility hole. An employee who through training and experience is certified as a Confined Space Competent Person will be on site to supervise and enforce compliance with applicable confined space safety protocol. • Test the utility holes internal atmosphere with a properly calibrated air testing instrument as follows: o Immediately after removing the utility hole cover, lower the air sampling hose to the point where a person’s will be when working in the utility hole. o After entering the hole, test duct entrances, corners and generally throughout the utility hole. o Test when duct plugs are removed. o A log must be kept on air monitoring results. • If continuous air monitoring is not performed, monitoring must be performed: o A minimum of every two hours after making initial tests.
LAUSD School Repair & Construction Site Safety Standards Page 61
Los Angeles Unified School District
o A minimum of every hour if a utility hole tent is used, or if gas is detected during the initial atmosphere test. o At every shift change. • Utility holes must be purged prior to entry to dissipate stagnant or contaminated air, ensure against oxygen deficiency, and provide a complete air change. • Position ventilation blower intake away from exhaust or other emission sources. • Only one 90-degree bend in a ventilation blow hose is permitted while purging. • Continuously ventilate occupied utility holes. Only two 90 degree bends in blow duct are permitted during continuous ventilation. • Employees must immediately exit a hole if the blower stops or has abnormal air flow. • Rescue and emergency equipment must be available in accordance with 8 CCR 5156-58. • Do not take propane or other compressed gases into a utility hole. • Do not permit open flames in a utility hole. • Implement traffic/vehicular control criteria as mandated by the applicable regulatory agency (DOT). • If possible, park the gang truck or utility truck in such a manner to provide a barrier to vehicle traffic. • Where applicable, use a ladder to exit/enter utility holes more than 4 feet deep. Secure and test the ladder for slippage. • Conduct a visual inspection of the utilities for any deterioration that may pose a safety hazard. • Do not move power conductors. Power conductors can only be moved by an authorized representative of the power company. • Employees are not permitted to remain in a utility hole during cable placing or removal operations. • Secure all equipment and replace utility hole cover upon completion of work.
LAUSD School Repair & Construction Site Safety Standards Page 62
Los Angeles Unified School District
27.3
CONNECTIONS TO UTILITIES • Neither the Contractor nor any Subcontractors will be permitted to make any temporary service connections to electrical, water, air or steam utilities without approval of the OAR, IOR or other authorized LAUSD representative. • Temporary connections shall comply with all applicable Federal, State, and local regulations. • Temporary connections shall be inspected on a regular basis. At the discretion of LAUSD documentation of inspection may be required and maintained on site.
LAUSD School Repair & Construction Site Safety Standards Page 63
Los Angeles Unified School District
28. 28.1
CRANES/BOOM TRUCKS AND RIGGING
LAUSD SAFETY REQUIREMENTS
All crane operations conducted on LAUSD Facilities job sites will be considered critical lifts requiring a written lift plan utilizing the LAUSD “Lift Evaluation Form” which, prior to commencing work, will be provided to, reviewed by LAUSD Facilities Construction Safety. The “Instructions” tab on the “Lift Evaluation Form” lists the information required for a complete lift plan submission. Lift plans must be submitted a minimum of two weeks in advance of the lift.
28.2
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
The term crane as used in this section shall include boom trucks and similar truck mounted cranes. • Know the weight of the object to be handled. • Know the capacity of the handling device (crane, forklift, and chain fall, comealong) that is intended for use. • Visually inspect hooks, wire, slings, other attachments etc. for irregularities, damage, weaknesses, etc., before use. • Tag/restraint lines or guide ropes in good condition shall be used to control all loads except where their use presents a greater hazard. • Never raise or swing a load over people. • All hooks except shake out hooks must have a safety latch. Shake out hooks will not have a safety latch (mouse). • Always place a load in the center of a hook and never on the point. • Cranes, hoists or derricks shall not be left unattended while a load is suspended. • Swing radius protection (i.e. barricades) shall be provided where rotating crane superstructure is positioned to operate in areas where persons may be caught between rotating parts and fixed objects or non-rotating crane components. • Crane outriggers must be leveled and fully extended when making a lift. • When required for crane stability, plates, pads or mats shall be used under the outriggers or crawlers. The plates, pads or mats shall be of suitable material and size to support the crane on the surface that it is set up on. • No part of the crane, load, hoist, lines, boom, tag-line, shall come within 15 feet of energized electrical lines. • All slings, chains and rigging equipment must be inspected in accordance with manufacturers’ criteria.
LAUSD School Repair & Construction Site Safety Standards Page 64
Los Angeles Unified School District
• When hand signaling is utilized for communication between the operator and the signalman, only approved hand signals for crane, derrick and boom equipment shall be used. A copy of these hand signals will be posted at the operating position of each piece of equipment. • The manufacturer's specifications and limitations applicable to the operation of any and all cranes and derricks must be complied with. When manufacturer's specifications are not available, the limitations assigned to the equipment shall be based on the determinations of a qualified engineer competent in this field and such determinations, will be appropriately posted, documented, and recorded. Attachments used with cranes shall not exceed the capacity, rating, or scope recommended by the manufacturer. • A competent person shall make a thorough annual inspection of the crane. A record of the dates and results of inspections for each crane must be maintained and available for review. • Wire rope safety factors shall be in accordance with American National Standards Institute B30.5 series. • Certification of a crane operator’s ability to operate safely is required and records of such certifications must be available. The Contractor is responsible for determining the operator’s skill, verifying the certification, and maintaining the records. Operator certification will be maintained on site available for review by LAUSD authorized representatives and/or any inspectors representing governing/regulatory entities.
28.3
DETAILED REQUIREMENTS
Cranes are a vital part of any construction operation. To assure that they handle loads properly, safely and with greatest efficiency, the following guidelines are provided. Mobile Cranes - Setup The operator shall be responsible for: • Performing a daily inspection of the crane. inspection will be maintained on the crane.
Written documentation of this
• The proper placement of the crane in relationship to the load to be handled and the landing area so as to obtain the best rated lift capacity. • Every time a crane is moved/repositioned the crane will be leveled to within 1 degree of level. Recheck the level, a minimum of three times, during an 8-hour work shift. • The proper placement and use of outriggers for all lifts.
LAUSD School Repair & Construction Site Safety Standards Page 65
Los Angeles Unified School District
• The determination of stable or unstable ground and the need for additional floats, cribbing, timbers, and structural members as may be needed. • The installation and maintenance of crane swing radius protection.
28.4
LOAD RATINGS
Determination • The weight of all auxiliary handling devices such as hoist blocks, headache balls, hooks and rigging shall be considered as part of the total load. • Additionally, the weight of all items added to the load at the site must be determined and added to the total weight. • The operator shall be provided with a copy of the Bill of Lading with the item weight clearly legible. This will be used to determine total load weight. • All lifts exceeding 75% of the rated capacity of the crane at the boom angle for which the lift is made, lifts involving two or more cranes/lifting devices or lifts involving high value loads will be considered “critical lifts” (see “Critical Lifts). Prior to any crane lifts a written lift plan, utilizing the LAUSD “Lift Evaluation Form submission package (see Appendix) will be submitted, reviewed and accepted by LAUSD Construction Safety and/or their designated representative.
28.5
CRANE INSPECTION
Contractors shall ensure that a qualified person visually inspects the crane, derrick, or hoist’s controls, rigging and operating mechanisms prior to the first operation of any work shift. Cranes shall be inspected: • After setup and prior to initial lift. • Before each shift. • After every malfunction. Documented daily visual inspections by the operator or other qualified person shall include: • A check of all functional mechanisms for maladjustment causing unsafe operations. • Operation of all limit switches without a load on the hook. • Inspection of lines, tanks, valves, pumps, and other parts of air or hydraulic systems for leaks. • Inspection of hoist or load attachment chains and end connections for excessive wear, twist, and distorted or stretched links. • A check for excessive wear, broken wires/strands, fraying, stretch, kinking, or twisting of ropes, chokers, rope slings and their connections.
LAUSD School Repair & Construction Site Safety Standards Page 66
Los Angeles Unified School District
• Inspection of hooks for deformation and cracks. • All control mechanisms for excessive wear of components and contamination by lubricants or other foreign matter. • All safety devices for malfunction. • Deterioration or leakage in air or hydraulic systems. • Electrical apparatus for malfunctioning, signs of excessive wear, dirt and moisture accumulation. • Tires for proper inflation. Daily inspection documentation shall be maintained by the operator and available for review by LAUSD authorized representatives and/or any inspectors representing governing/ regulatory entities. Adjustments and repairs shall be made only by a qualified person. Adjustments shall be maintained to assure correct functioning of the following: • All Functional Operating Equipment. • Safety Devices • Control Systems; • Power Plants. • Brakes All adjustments and repairs shall be documented and the documentation shall be maintained on the job site for review, upon request, by any authorized LAUSD representatives and/or inspectors representing governing/regulatory entities. Periodic and annual third party inspections shall be performed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and governing regulatory entities and submitted to LAUSD upon request. An approved certifying agent shall re-inspect any crane that is involved in any incident or is damaged during set-up or operation, and a new certificate of inspection issued prior to being returned to service. Record Keeping: • All records pertaining to crane inspections shall be kept on-site with the crane or in the Contractor's site field office. • If during any safety inspection, the operator or supervisor cannot produce the required crane inspection records; the crane shall be shut down and inspected.
LAUSD School Repair & Construction Site Safety Standards Page 67
Los Angeles Unified School District
28.6
OPERATOR QUALIFICATIONS AND OPERATING PROCEDURES
Operator Qualifications Cranes shall only be operated by the following personnel: • Only Employees authorized by the contractor or crane leasing company who are trained, or known to be certified and qualified, in the safe operation of specific cranes or hoisting apparatus shall be permitted to operate such equipment. • Where required, operators shall have valid evidence of current Licensing or Certification in accordance with State and Local requirements. Operators not having such evidence where required shall not be permitted to operate applicable machinery (except under terms and conditions prescribed for Trainees by applicable regulations). • Inspectors certified for crane operation. • When necessary qualified testing and maintenance personnel. No one other than the above personnel shall be in or on the crane during operations. Operating Procedures The operator shall: • Not engage in any practice which may divert his attention while engaged in crane operations; • Not operate his crane if physically or mentally unfit, or taking prescription drugs which may affect judgment; • Not respond to any signal that is unclear or is given by anyone other than appointed signalmen. Exception: The operator shall respond to a stop signal given by anyone. • Have final responsibility and control over the crane operations. Whenever there is any doubt as to safety, the operator shall have the authority to stop and refuse to handle loads until safety has been assured. • Be familiar with the crane and its care, the operators' manual and load charts. He shall be responsible for notifying his supervisor of any needed adjustments or repairs, and for logging his findings in the crane log. • Upon request, demonstrate his ability to determine total load weight and its relationship to the crane load charts. • When loads which are limited to structural competence rather than by stability are to be handled, the operator and supervisor shall concurrently determine that the weight of the load has been determined within plus or minus 5 percent before the load is lifted.
LAUSD School Repair & Construction Site Safety Standards Page 68
Los Angeles Unified School District
Attaching the load: • The load shall be attached to the hook by means of slings or other approved devices. • No open hooks shall be used for lifts. Hooks used for lifts shall have hook safety latches or be safety wired. Moving the load: • The operator shall determine that the crane is level to within one (1) degree and, where necessary, is properly cribbed and blocked. • The operator shall be responsible for determining that the load is properly secured and balanced before making the hoist. • The operator shall position the hook over the load in a manner to prevent load swing. • The operator shall determine that the rope is properly seated on the drum and in the sheaves, the load line is not kinked and multiple part lines are not twisted around each other. 29.7.1 Rigging Requirements All loads shall be rigged by an authorized and qualified rigger. Qualified Riggers shall at a minimum meet the training requirements as recognized by the National Commission for the Certification of Crane Operations (NCCCO). Riggers shall have a certification that identifies the following: •
Date of Training;
•
Name of training and printed name and signature of trainer;
•
Number of hours of classroom training; and
•
Hours of practical training.
The minimum requirements shall be followed: • All rigging equipment shall be inspected prior to each shift and as necessary during the shift to ensure safety. Damaged or defective slings shall be immediately removed from service. • All rigging devices including slings shall have permanently affixed identification stating size, grade, rated capacity, and manufacturer. • Rigging not in use shall be removed from the immediate work area. • Rigging, including slings, shall be hung on a rigging frame so that bends and kinks do not set in.
LAUSD School Repair & Construction Site Safety Standards Page 69
Los Angeles Unified School District
• Slings shall not be left lying on the ground or otherwise exposed to dirt and the elements. • Wire rope slings shall be lubricated as necessary during use. When in storage, slings shall be lubricated no less than every 4 months. • "Shop-made" grabs, hooks, clamps, or other lifting devices shall not be used unless proof-tested to 125 percent of their rated load by an approved-testing agency. Approved devices shall have the capacity permanently affixed. • Eyes in wire rope bridles, slings, or bull wires shall not be formed by wire clips or knots. • Protruding ends of strands in splices on slings bridles shall be covered or blunted. • All rigging equipment in use shall have a safety factor of five. 29.7.1 Slings: Safe Operating Practices • Slings shall not be shortened by knots, bolts, or other make-shift devices. • All slings shall be padded with softeners to protect them from damage due to sharp corners. • Slings used in a basket hitch shall have the loads balanced to prevent slippage. • Loads handled by slings shall be landed on cribbing or dunnage so that slings need not be pulled from under or be crushed by the load. • Slings subjected to shock loading shall be immediately removed from use and destroyed. • Slings shall not be made from wire rope and cable clips. 29.7.3 Sling Inspection A thorough inspection of slings in use shall be made daily or on a regular basis as determined by: • Severity of service conditions. • Frequency of sling use. • Nature of lifts being made. • Experience gained on the service life of slings used in similar use. • Formal inspection periods shall not exceed once in twelve months.
LAUSD School Repair & Construction Site Safety Standards Page 70
Los Angeles Unified School District
29.7.4 RIGGING SLINGS AND HOOKS Hoisting hooks shall be of the safety latch-type. Crane hooks with cracks or with deformation of throat opening more than 15 percent in excess of normal opening or more than 10 degree twist from plane of unbent hook shall be removed from service. Ropes shall be inspected for proper lubrication, excessive wear, broken strands, and proper weaving. In order to determine proper time for replacement, a continuing inspection record shall be maintained for hoisting ropes. Conditions such as the following shall be reason for replacement: • In running ropes, 6 randomly distributed broken wires in one rope lay, or 3 broken wires in one strand in one lay. • Wear of 1/3 the diameter of outside individual wires. • Kinking, crushing, bird caging, or other damage resulting in distortion of the rope structure. • In standing ropes, more than 2 broken wires in one lay in sections beyond end connections or more than one broken wire at an end connection. • Reduction of rope diameter below nominal diameter due to loss of core support, internal or external corrosion, or wear of outside wires. • Inspection documentation shall be available on site for review by authorized LAUSD representatives and/or authorized regulatory agents/inspectors. Fixtures are usually attached to wire rope by wire rope clips. The clips must be attached with the inside curve of the U-bolt against the live, or long end, and flat clip against the dead, or short end of the wire rope. Each day before being used, wire rope slings, alloy steel chain slings, metal mesh slings, and natural and synthetic fiber rope slings, and all fastenings and attachments shall be inspected for damage or defects by a qualified person. Slings shall have permanently affixed durable identification stating the following: •
Manufacturer’s name or trademark
•
Rated capacity
Cranes and derricks exceeding 3 tons rated capacity shall not be used in lifting service until an approved/qualified certifying agent has certified the equipment. Annual and quadrennial inspection certificates shall be maintained on each crane. Cranes that do not have such verification of inspection will not be permitted to operate on LAUSD sites.
LAUSD School Repair & Construction Site Safety Standards Page 71
Los Angeles Unified School District
A durable load chart with clearly legible letters and figures, showing rated load capacity, recommended operating speeds, and special hazard warnings (hand signal diagram and instructions) must be clearly visible to the operator. All mobile cranes having either a maximum rated boom length exceeding 200 feet or a maximum rated capacity exceeding 50 tons shall be equipped with a load indicating device or a load movement device. The indicator shall give a clear visual warning signal before high or low unsafe boom angles are reached. Cranes having a boom exceeding 60 feet in length or a maximum rated capacity exceeding 15 tons shall be provided with an approved boom angle or radius indicator which clearly shows the boom angle in degrees to the operator at all times. Each variable radius boom-type crane shall be equipped with a boom angle or a boom radius indicator and clearly legible load rating chart in clear view from the operator’s position. An effective, audible warning and operating signal device shall be provided on the outside of the crane. The controls shall be in easy reach of the operator. Cranes of such design that the boom could fall over backward shall be equipped with boom stops whenever the main boom is rope supported. The boom-stop shall provide emergency protection against destructive damage and related hazards by opposing any unexpected upward and rearward boom movement beyond the working range. Crane operators exposed to the hazard of falling material or objects shall be protected by a canopy-type guard or cab. All windows shall be safety glass, or equivalent, that introduces no visible distortion that will interfere with the safe operation of the crane. When required by the manufacturer certified agent’s instructions, outriggers shall be set so that wheels within the boundary of the outriggers shall be relieved of all weight by the outrigger jacks or blocking. A fire extinguisher of not less than 10-B:C rating shall be kept in serviceable condition and readily accessible to the operator. Operations shall be conducted and the job controlled in a manner to prevent loads from being passed directly over workers, occupied work spaces, or occupied passageways. A qualified signal person shall be provided when the entire radius of operation is not in full and direct view of the operator unless a signaling or control device is provided. Only one person shall be permitted to give signals to the operator. There shall be conspicuously posted in the vicinity of the hoisting operation, a legible chart depicting and explaining the system of signals used. No employee shall be permitted to ride on loads, hooks, or slings of any derrick, hoist, or crane.
LAUSD School Repair & Construction Site Safety Standards Page 72
Los Angeles Unified School District
Swing radius protection shall be provided where a rotating crane is positioned to operate in areas where persons may be caught between rotating parts. For all power lines, regardless of load/power rating, the minimum clearance between the lines and any part of the crane or load shall be 15 feet. A designated person shall monitor the clearance between crane booms and power lines and alert the operator when necessary. If working within in close proximity to energized power lines taglines, restraint lines, or guide ropes shall be used on all loads and should be protected or insulated to prevent shock. Cranes, hoists, or derricks shall not be left unattended while the load is suspended unless the load is in a barricaded area or is blocked up or otherwise supported. Before leaving the crane unattended, the operator shall: •
Land or properly secure any attached load.
•
Disengage the clutch.
•
Set travel, swing, boom brakes, and other locking devices unless otherwise specified by the certifying agents.
•
Put controls in the “off” position.
•
Stop the engine or motor.
•
Secure the crane against accidental travel.
The load or the boom shall not be lowered below the point where less than two full wraps of rope remain on grooved drums and three full wraps on un-grooved drums. In all operations where the weight of the load being handled is unknown and may approach the rated capacity, a qualified person shall determine the magnitude of the load unless the crane is equipped with a load indicating device. The Contractor shall provide a qualified person to direct the lift. The qualified person shall see that: •
The crane is properly leveled for the work being performed and blocked where necessary.
•
The load is well secured and properly balanced in the sling or lifting device before it is lifted more than a few inches.
28.8
CRITICAL LIFTS (CRANES, BOOM TRUCKS, DERRICKS, ETC.)
All crane lifts on LAUSD construction sites shall be considered critical lifts requiring a written lift plan submission to and acceptance from LAUSD Facilities Construction Safety.
LAUSD School Repair & Construction Site Safety Standards Page 73
Los Angeles Unified School District
A qualified person shall prepare the Critical Lift Plan utilizing the LAUSD “Lift Evaluation Form” package. The qualified person preparing the lift plan may be the crane operator, lift supervisor, or rigger. The crane operator, lift supervisor, and rigger shall participate in the preparation of the plan. The plan shall be documented, and a copy provided to the Contractor and LAUSD Construction Safety. The lift plan shall be reviewed by LAUSD Construction Safety and will be “accepted” or “rejected” contingent on content. No lifts / picks will take place without prior written “acceptance” of the lift plan submission by a LAUSD Construction Safety representative. •
The Lift Plan shall specify the exact size and weight of the load to be lifted and all crane and rigging components that add to the weight. The manufacturer’s maximum load limits for the entire range of the lift as listed in the load charts shall also be specified.
•
Shall specify the lift geometry and procedures, including the crane position, height of the lift, the load radius, and the boom length and angle, for the entire range of the lift.
•
Shall designate the crane operator, lift supervisor, and rigger, and state their qualifications.
•
Will include a rigging plan that shows the lift points and describes rigging procedures and hardware requirements.
•
Will describe the ground conditions, outrigger or crawler track requirements, and, if necessary, the design of mats, necessary to achieve a level, stable foundation of sufficient bearing capacity for the lift.
•
Will list environmental conditions under which lift operations are to be stopped. Prior to commencing crane operations in bad weather (primarily rain and/or high wind conditions) which could have a negative impact on site crane operations approval from the OAR and/or LAUSD Construction Safety and the General Contractor Site Manager/Superintendent will be required.
•
Will specify coordination and communication requirements for the lift operation.
•
For tandem or tailing crane lifts specify the make and model of the cranes, the line, boom and swing speeds, and requirements for an equalizer beam.
•
Shall include any additional information determined by the LAUSD Construction Safety Department to be pertinent to the lift.
LAUSD School Repair & Construction Site Safety Standards Page 74
Los Angeles Unified School District
29.
DEMOLITION
Demolition activities at both New and Existing LAUSD construction site sites shall be reviewed and a demolition plan/schedule shall be developed and implemented prior to commencing demolition work. The pre-planning of demolition activities shall take into consideration the liability exposure potential attributed to demolition work in and/or adjacent to LAUSD facilities when occupied by faculty, students and the public. Contractor shall ensure safe passage of persons around areas of demolition. Conduct operations to prevent damage to adjacent buildings, structures, other facilities, and people. Utility companies shall be notified and all utility service shut off, capped, or otherwise controlled, at the building or curb line before starting demolition. The Contractor is responsible for ensuring that these actions have been taken. The Contractor shall develop an Emergency Call List for all known utility owners prior to the start of demolition activities. A site plan shall be marked up to show the locations of known utilities, and the nearest identified shut-off valves/controls. This plan shall be available in the Contractor’s Site Office. The site LAUSD representative (OAR) and LAUSD Safety shall be provided with a copy. Contractors shall determine if any type of hazardous chemicals, gases, explosives, flammable materials, or similarly dangerous substances have been used in any pipes, tanks, or other equipment on the property. When the presence of hazardous substances is apparent or suspected, testing and purging shall be formed and the hazard eliminated prior to demolition. Adequate dust control measures shall be implemented during demolition stock piling and leading operations. Pipe-covering insulation, steel beam and column fire protection, heating, ventilation and airconditioning duck work shall be surveyed for asbestos. Painted surfaces shall be analyzed for lead content. Lead and/or asbestos removal shall be in accordance with all applicable standards. During demolition, continuing inspections shall be made as the work progresses to detect hazards resulting from weakened or deteriorated floors, walls or loosened materials. The Contractor shall ensure that floor load limits are not exceeded during demolition operations. Disperse demolition equipment throughout structure and remove demolished materials to prevent excessive loads on supporting walls, floors or framing.
LAUSD School Repair & Construction Site Safety Standards Page 75
Los Angeles Unified School District
Perimeter protection shall be utilized around all demolition sites in order to protect the public and reduce the probability of unauthorized site access. Walking across exposed floor joists, steel beams, or girders is prohibited. Provide interior and exterior shoring, bracing, or supports to prevent movement, settlement or collapse of structures to be demolished, and to adjacent facilities. Demolish concrete and masonry in sections. Use bracing and shoring to prevent collapse.
LAUSD School Repair & Construction Site Safety Standards Page 76
Los Angeles Unified School District
30.
ELECTRICAL
All electrical installation shall meet the current NFPA 70 and NFPA 70E and building code requirements. All temporary power panels shall have covers installed at all times. All circuits shall be clearly labeled. Treat all equipment and parts as if they are energized unless determined and verified by testing to be otherwise. Only qualified and authorized electricians utilizing safe work procedures and personal protective equipment are allowed to work on or near exposed energized parts. Safety signs, barricades, and attendants shall be required to prevent accidental contact with live electrical parts and equipment. Cover or guard live parts operating at 50 volts or more. All disconnects for motors, branch circuits, service feeders; etc. must be marked to include what it controls. Extension cords must be a minimum 12 gauge three (3) wire cords. Do not alter electrical plugs (remove ground pins) and receptacles that prevent grounding. Metal/conductive ladders will not be permitted/used on site. Damaged or defective tools and cords shall be removed from service. Electrical equipment used in hazardous locations must be rated and approved for the hazardous location. Do not run extension cords through doors, windows, walls, and over metal objects such as conduit, pipes, and racks. To avoid damage and/or a trip hazard, cords will be hung at least 7 feet above the floor when crossing over passageways, isles/walkways. Per the OSHA “Assured Equipment Grounding” program, all electrical tools and equipment must be inspected quarterly and provided with labels, tags or color coding to indicate an inspection has been conducted. The Contractor is to supply and utilize ground fault circuit interrupters (GFCI) for all temporary electrical wiring, extension cords, and electrical equipment. Ground Fault Circuit Interrupters shall be tested in accordance with manufacturer’s requirements. Logs shall be maintained of all such testing. Ground Fault Circuit Interrupters that have an automatic reset feature are not permitted on LAUSD site. All panel schedules shall remain current identifying the proper disconnects and locations.
LAUSD School Repair & Construction Site Safety Standards Page 77
Los Angeles Unified School District
Do not block or obstruct electrical panels, breakers, switches, etc. All electrical installations shall have adequate working space and panels labeled per NFPA70E for Arc-Flash protection. All new installations shall not be considered complete without proper labeling per NFPA 70E. Absolutely no storage is allowed in electrical vaults. Temporary lights shall not be suspended by their extension/power cords and must be equipped with guards to prevent contact with the bulb. All power tools must be double insulated or grounded properly, and inspected prior to use. The Contractor shall use a foreign voltage detector (FVD) to test for the presence of foreign voltage. See the Foreign Voltage Detectors section in these Standards. The Contractor must properly lockout/tagout any machinery/equipment in accordance with protocol summarized in the lockout/tagout section in these Standards. The General/Prime Contractor shall coordinate instances that require multi-Contractor lockout/tagout activities.
LAUSD School Repair & Construction Site Safety Standards Page 78
Los Angeles Unified School District
31.
E LEVATING WORK PLATFORMS AND AERIAL DEVICES
An elevating work platform is a device designed to elevate a platform in a substantially vertical axis. (Vertical Tower, Scissor-Lift) An aerial device is any vehicle-mounted or self-propelled device with a telescoping extendable or articulating boom, or both, with personal basket which is primarily designed to position personnel. Only authorized and trained personnel shall operate an aerial device or elevating work platform. The manufacturer operating instructions shall be onboard the lift at all times and the lift shall be operated per the manufacturer operating instructions. Lifts may not be modified or altered without express written approval of the manufacturer. Boom, basket and platform load limits specified by the manufacturer shall not be exceeded. Elevating work platforms and aerial devices are designed for use as personnel work platforms and will not be utilized to lift/elevate construction materials. Employees shall not sit or climb on the edge of the basket or platform or use planks, ladders or other devices to gain greater height. Employees shall not work off elevating work platforms or aerial devices when exposed to high winds. “Belting/tieing off” to an adjacent pole, structure, or equipment while working from an aerial device is not permitted. Lift controls shall be tested in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations or instructions prior to use to determine that such controls are in safe working condition. While in an elevated position, aerial baskets or platforms shall not be supported by adjacent structures when workers are on the platform or in the baskets. For fall protection any employees while in an elevated aerial device regardless of type, shall be secured to the boom basket manufacturer installed anchor points through the use of a full body harness and lanyard. LAUSD requires tie-off while using scissor lifts as positioning devices only to keep workers from overreaching from the lift creating a fall hazard. Prior to use all elevating work platforms and aerial devices shall be inspected daily. Items/areas of inspection shall be per the manufacturer’s recommendation/specifications. Documentation verifying inspection will be available on site for review by authorized LAUSD representatives and/or any authorized regulatory agency inspection personnel. The platform guardrails shall be 42 inches high with a midrail at the half-height point.
LAUSD School Repair & Construction Site Safety Standards Page 79
Los Angeles Unified School District
Powered elevating work platforms shall have both upper and lower control devices. Controls shall be plainly marked as to their function and guarded to prevent accidental operation. An emergency stopping device shall be provided at the upper controls of elevating work platforms. Ladders or other objects shall not be placed in the buckets of units to gain greater height.
LAUSD School Repair & Construction Site Safety Standards Page 80
Los Angeles Unified School District
32.
ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROLS
Only LAUSD approved chemicals/materials can be brought onto LAUSD construction sites. All chemical spills (including cutting oil, fuel, solvents, antifreeze, etc.) must be reported immediately to the LAUSD OAR and OEHS All chemical containers must be stored in or have secondary containment. This policy will include cutting equipment (drip pans, sandboxes, etc.). Hazardous material storage facilities will be located away from the public and separated from each other in accordance with all applicable regulatory criteria/standards. All chemical containers must be maintained in good condition, and must be appropriate for the materials stored in them. All chemical containers, including empty containers, must be accurately labeled with their contents and precautions for use. Containers which contain or contained hazardous waste must be affixed with an appropriate hazardous waste label (see LAUSD Reference Guide 4149.0) in addition to a label listing their contents. Schedule dusty, noisy or odorous activities with School Administration and the OAR/IOR in order to avoid disrupting normal school activities and/or alarming the community. Air Pollution: Open burning shall not be allowed unless approved by an authorized LAUSD representative. Control measures must be taken to minimize airborne/fugitive dust. Weekly inspections of chemical containers must be performed in all Contractor controlled areas/laydown areas to assure compliance with this section. The inspection records shall be retained on site for a minimum of three (3) years. Prior to transporting hazardous waste off site, the company/entity transporting the waste must complete the EPA Hazardous Waste Manifest and fax a copy to OEHS at (213) 241-6816 for review and approval. Hazardous waste will be moved only to facilities that are licensed, certified to accept and process that kind of waste. All Contractors are responsible for proper disposal of their wastes, both hazardous and nonhazardous. A copy of the completed Uniform Hazardous Waste Manifest must be provided to the LAUSD Environmental Compliance Manager. Contractors may not dump any contaminants/chemicals into floor drains, sinks, clean-outs, sewer drains or sumps without the prior written approval from the LAUSD Environmental Compliance Manager. Emergency response equipment to include spill kits and fire extinguishers will be provided near storage areas.
LAUSD School Repair & Construction Site Safety Standards Page 81
Los Angeles Unified School District
Chemical storage areas must be kept neat, orderly and clean. All stored chemicals/waste must be kept in labeled, sealed containers. Warning signs will be posted at storage areas. Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) must be available on site for review by LAUSD, representatives and all emergency response personnel and the public. It is Contractor management’s responsibility to inform all their employees (to include their Subcontractor employees) of these environmental requirements.
LAUSD School Repair & Construction Site Safety Standards Page 82
Los Angeles Unified School District
33.
EQUIPMENT/TOOLS
Contractor equipment and tools must be in proper working condition and routinely (i.e. daily or prior to use) inspected for defects. Any defective equipment or tool must be removed from service. Equipment is not to be used with loads that exceed the recommended rated capacity. The Contractor will use only their equipment and tools and not of those other Contractors. Equipment and tools will be used for their designated purpose. Equipment and tools are to be used only by trained and authorized employees. Before use all equipment and power tools must be equipped with all required guards or shields. All guards must be manufactured by and/or approved by the manufacturer for that specific power tool or equipment. The practice of “wedging or pegging” guards on skill saws or other equipment rendering them nonfunctional will not be permitted. No internal combustion engine vehicles, equipment or machinery is to be operated inside buildings unless approved by authorized LAUSD representative(s) and/or proper engineering controls have been implemented to minimize carbon monoxide levels. In such cases where LAUSD approved vehicles or machinery are operated inside structures, scrubbers shall be installed on the exhaust system and/or carbon monoxide levels shall be monitored as often as required to ensure a safe work environment. All motorized material handling equipment must have an audible backup alarm and light(s). Equipment and tools must be properly stored, secured and located away from unauthorized access. For pneumatic power tools, all air hoses exceeding ½ inch inside diameter shall have a safety device (commonly known as an “OSHA valve” or “safety check valve) at the source of air supply or branch line origin (such as a manifold) to reduce pressure in case of hose failure. Pocket knives including Leatherman style tools are prohibited on LAUSD job sites. Utility knives shall be of the automatic retractable style such as spring retractable.
LAUSD School Repair & Construction Site Safety Standards Page 83
Los Angeles Unified School District
34.
EXCAVATIONS
When excavating and trenching activities are performed, Contractors must follow all regulations as outlined in the LAUSD Safety Standards and when required by CalOSHA/OSHA regulations and local requirements. All Contractors performing excavation work shall obtain an activity permit, for excavations five (5) feet or more in depth, from Cal/OSHA in accordance with 8 CCR §341 and §1539. The Contractor(s) will be responsible for identifying the location of any underground utilities (piping, communication cable, electrical lines, etc.). Before beginning any excavation/trench work, the Contractor will contact “Underground Service Alert California (Dig Alert)” to ensure that the owners of underground utilities are notified to mark their utility locations. Reference “LOCATING UNDERGROUND UTILITIES BEFORE EXCAVATING” in these Standards. The Contractor materials utilized for protection of employees to include bracing, shoring, shielding, and trench boxes must be in good condition and of proper dimensions. All excavations/trenches deeper than 5 feet will be sloped, benched, braced, shored, shielded, trench boxed, etc. in accordance with all applicable standards. All Contractors performing trenching/excavation work must have a designated and trained competent person to assure compliance with all applicable regulations and LAUSD requirements. The credentials of the competent person must be available on site for review, upon request, by LAUSD and/or authorized governmental representatives. Excavations/trenches must be inspected each day by the Contractor’s “competent person.” The Contractors “competent person” must determine the soil classification (Type A, B, C, or stable rock) to determine the appropriate type of protective system required for the excavation/trench. Excavated soils, materials or equipment are to be kept at least two feet from the edge of the excavation. The Contractor must provide barricades to protect people from falling into the excavation/trench. Lighted barricades must be provided at night. Ladders extending 3 feet above an excavation 4 ft. or more in depth or other means of egress must be provided by the Contractor for access/egress. Access to a ladder shall not exceed 25 feet in any direction. Excavation/trench work, whenever possible, will be backfilled while work progresses and/or at the end of each shift. Walkways are to be provided over any excavation or trench point that employees and/or the public may need to cross. Walkways must have handrails, midrails, and toeboards, and be constructed with material capable of withstanding at least twice the maximum intended load.
LAUSD School Repair & Construction Site Safety Standards Page 84
Los Angeles Unified School District
• The edges of the walkway shall be tapered to minimize trip hazards. The approach to the walkway shall be tapered with a suitable and durable material or the walkway set into the surface to minimize trip hazards. Any trench or excavation work which creates a potential confined space work environment will be subject to compliance with all applicable LAUSD (reference Confined Space Entry) and/or OSHA confined space safety standards. Rescue equipment must be provided by the Contractor (full body harness and lifeline, breathing apparatus, basket stretcher, etc.) when hazardous atmospheric conditions are expected to exist.
LAUSD School Repair & Construction Site Safety Standards Page 85
Los Angeles Unified School District
35.
FALL PROTECTION
Where a fall hazard exists, efforts must be made to eliminate the hazard; provide protection against the hazard; or establish alternative methods to control/monitor the hazard in accordance with the provisions contained in 8 CCR, Subchapter 4, Construction Safety Orders. Fall protection plans, controlled access zones, safety monitoring systems and controlled decking zones require the approval of the Contractor, OAR and/or LAUSD Safety before their use. 39.1 TRAINING AND RETRAINING Contractors are required to provide training for any employee who might be exposed to a fall hazard prior to the exposure. Training must include an explanation of the Contractor’s fall protection policies and safe work practices with general instructions and precautions; specific instruction where required; hazard identification and correction; selection and proper use of protective devices; and maintenance of equipment. Instruction should also include correct procedures for inspecting, erecting, disassembling, and maintaining fall protection systems used; and the employee’s role in fall safety monitoring. Personnel rescue shall be addressed in the Contractor’s fall protection policy and fall protection training. Documentation of fall protection training/instruction shall be maintained by the Contractor on site for review by LAUSD and/or any authorized governing regulatory representatives. Methods of fall protection include but are not limited to: • Guardrails and toe-boards [8 CCR 1620 and 1621] • Covers for floor opening, pits, trap-door, and temporary floor openings. [8 CCR 1632] • Personal Fall Restraint/Arrest. [8 CCR 1670] • Safety Nets. [8 CCR 1671] • Scaffold Platforms. [8 CCR 1724] • Roof Warning Lines. [8 CCR 1730] • Any deviations/variances from controlled Access and Controlled Decking Zones and Safety Monitoring Systems will require prior written approval from the Contractor, OAR and/or LAUSD Safety. [8 CCR 1671.2] 39.2 PERSONNEL FALL PROTECTION TRIGGER HEIGHT For all work activities exceeding six (6) ft. in height where methods of fall protection (guardrails, hole covers, etc.) are not provided exposed Contractor employees will wear and
LAUSD School Repair & Construction Site Safety Standards Page 86
Los Angeles Unified School District
use a personal fall arrest system (full body harness with a life line, lanyard or deceleration device) secured to approved anchor point(s). All deviations/variance from this fall protection policy will require at a minimum 3 weeks advance written notification from the General Contractor to the OAR and LAUSD Safety for their written approval. When fall protection may create a greater hazard or is otherwise not feasible using conventional fall protection methods, the provisions of Cal-OSHA Title 8, Section 1671.1 may be followed which requires a written plan that includes but not limited to: •
Why conventional fall protection is not feasible;
•
Alternate methods to protect from falls;
•
Training;
•
Identifying personnel authorized to work at heights;
•
Personal monitoring system; and
•
Trained observers.
At the discretion of LAUSD Safety, the OAR and the site Contractor Safety Manager Personnel erecting or dismantling scaffolds under the supervision of the competent person may be excluded from this policy if no approved anchor point(s) are available/feasible
39.3 PERSONNEL FALL ARREST/RESTRAINT In situations where it is either impractical or impossible to protect elevated work areas in excess of 6 feet with standard fall protection, another means of employee fall protection must be utilized. The following are some general requirements concerning the use of safety harness, lanyard(s), life lines, and safety nets. • A safety harness and shock absorbing lanyard must be worn in elevated work areas, more than six (6) feet in height when other means of fall protection are not available or feasible. • Anchorages used for attachment of personal fall arrest equipment: •
shall be independent of any anchorage being used to support or suspend platforms, and
•
capable of supporting at least 5,000 pounds per employee, or
•
Part of a complete personal fall protection system, used under the supervision of a qualified person that maintains a safety factor of at least two (2).
• The only allowable type of body fall arrest system allowed will be a full body harness with a lifeline, lanyard, or deceleration device. Safety/body belts are not permitted on LAUSD sites for fall arrest or restraint.
LAUSD School Repair & Construction Site Safety Standards Page 87
Los Angeles Unified School District
• Lanyards shall be secured to an approved anchor point which includes a substantial member of the structure or to securely rigged lines, using a positive descent control device. • Lifelines and anchorages shall be capable of supporting a minimum dead weight of 5,000 pounds. • Lanyards and vertical lifelines shall have a minimum breaking strength of 5,000 pounds. • Where practical, the anchor end of the lanyard shall be secured at a level not lower than the employee’s waist thereby limiting the fall distance. • In areas where there is not an anchorage to secure a safety lanyard, lifelines must be used. • All personal fall arrest systems shall be labeled as meeting the requirements contained in ANSI A10.14. •
Personal Fall Arrest Systems shall: ⎯
limit the fall distance to a maximum of 6 feet and
⎯ Prohibit/prevent the Employee from contacting a lower level or structural element. • The use of non-locking snap-hooks is prohibited. • The safety harness and lanyard(s) should be inspected before use each work day by the user. Items to look for when inspecting a safety harness and lanyard include: •
Broken, cut or burnt fibers in the harness and lanyard.
•
Cracked or deformed hardware.
•
Loose or bent rivets.
•
Any sharp edges.
•
Loose thimbles at the splice.
•
Discoloration from exposure to chemicals.
•
Loss of elasticity in the harness.
• When a safety lanyard is subjected to the stress of a fall, it must be removed from service and discarded. The harness will also be inspected and discarded if any defects are identified. • Safety harness and lanyards should not be used for lifting materials or any other purpose other than protection against falls. • Safety harness with one D-ring should be worn with the D-ring in the back so that the stomach, not the back, will absorb the shock in the event of a fall.
LAUSD School Repair & Construction Site Safety Standards Page 88
Los Angeles Unified School District
• The safety harness and lanyard should not be stored in tool boxes or on the floor where they could be easily damaged. • Debris nets may be required under certain circumstances and must comply with current applicable laws and regulations. Additional requirements on fall protection can be found in the OSHA Federal Register, Parts 1926.104, 105.
LAUSD School Repair & Construction Site Safety Standards Page 89
Los Angeles Unified School District
36.
FIRE PROTECTION AND PREVENTION – FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
All fire extinguishers must be provided by the Contractor. Travel distance from any point of the protected area to the nearest fire extinguisher shall not exceed 75 feet. [8 CCR 1922(a) (1)] In multi-story buildings, at least one fire extinguisher shall be provided on each floor and located adjacent to the stairway. [8 CCR 1922(a) (1)] Portable fire extinguishers shall be fully charged, inspected monthly and serviced annually. [8 CCR 1922(a) (4)]. A fire extinguisher rated not less than 10 B:C shall be: • Provided for each 3,000 square feet of floor area and fraction thereof. Where the floor area is less than 3, 000 square feet at least one fire extinguisher is required. [8 CCR 1922(a)(1)] • Provided within 50 feet of wherever more than 5 gallons of flammable or combustible liquids are stored. [8 CCR 1922(a)(3)] • Kept near operations where bottled fuel gases are being used. [8 CCR 1743(j)] • Adjacent to any “hot work” to include welding, cutting, and burning work activities. A fire extinguisher, rated not less than 20-B, shall be located outside of, but not more than 10 feet from the door opening of storage rooms. [8 CCR 1933(b)] All portable fire extinguishers shall be readily available for use where temporary heating devices are used. [8 CCR 1693(g)] For roofing work at least two extinguishers must be provided if flammables are present.
LAUSD School Repair & Construction Site Safety Standards Page 90
Los Angeles Unified School District
37.
FLAMMABLES AND COMBUSTIBLES USE AND STORAGE
All Contractors must develop a fire protection program to be followed throughout all phases of construction. [8 CCR 1920(a)] The program will include the most stringent applicable NFPA and/or local Fire Department fire code requirements. Firefighting equipment must be conspicuously located or conspicuously marked. [8 CCR1920(c)] The Contractor is required to supply fire extinguishers, fire blankets, and other sufficient fire protection devices for the immediate work areas where flammable and combustible material is stored, used, and/or “hot work” is performed. All Contractor supplied flammable/combustible liquids must be stored in approved safety containers/cans in accordance with 8 CCR 1930(a) (2). Plastic storage containers are not permitted. All safety containers/cans must have a self closing lid and spout cover that is designed to relieve internal pressure. All containers must be properly labeled as to contents and stored in approved designated areas when not in use. All flammable liquids such as fuels, paint thinner, solvents, etc. must be stored in an area approved by LAUSD. Storage of flammable and combustible materials inside existing LAUSD buildings is prohibited unless approved by LAUSD. All outside storage areas must be at least 35 feet (or if applicable in accordance with NFPA standards) from any building and 50 feet from adjacent properties. Approved flammable enclosures may be used in lieu of distance requirement form adjacent properties. Ensure all flammables/combustibles are a minimum of 35 ft. from “hot work” areas or are covered by a fire blanket. For roofing work: • At least two (2) fire extinguishers must be provided if flammables are present. • No more than a one day supply of flammables may be placed on the roof during working hours. • All flammables must be removed from the roof at the end of each work day by the Contractor. Do not smoke; use open flames, or use spark producing tools/equipment, heaters or any other heat/ignition source around flammable or combustible materials. “No Smoking” signs shall be posted as required by work operations or material storage exposures.
LAUSD School Repair & Construction Site Safety Standards Page 91
Los Angeles Unified School District
LAUSD reserves the right to designate “no smoking” and/or designated “smoking permitted” areas on the job site on a case by case basis. Open fires are not permitted on the job site. All flammable and combustible liquid containers shall be grounded and bonded when dispensing liquid from the containers. Do not block or obstruct fire response equipment (extinguishers, hoses, manual pull alarms, sprinklers, control valves, etc.) Flammable and combustible liquid storage areas must be provided with secondary containment. Storage of more than 25 gallons of flammable liquids or 60 gallons of combustible liquids shall be in cabinets constructed to the requirements of NFPA 30. Not more than 120 gallons of Class I, II, or IIIA liquids may be stored in a storage cabinet. [8 CCR 1930(a) (4) (A) and (a) (5)] The Contractor shall identify non-compatible (could create a chemical reaction if they come in contact) chemicals/materials in advance and, as required, provide for separate storage.
LAUSD School Repair & Construction Site Safety Standards Page 92
Los Angeles Unified School District
38.
FIRST AID
Regardless of the extent of injury all accidents (even first-aid cases) will at a minimum be verbally reported by Contractor management to the LAUSD job site representative (OAR) and LAUSD Safety. At the discretion of or contingent on the severity potential of the first-aid accident or a “near miss” incident, the LAUSD job site representative (OAR) and LAUSD Safety may request a written accident investigation report from the Contractor. Every Contractor shall ensure the availability of a suitable number of appropriately trained persons to render First Aid and CPR. Contractor Supervision and safety representatives (CSM, CSR, SSR) must be trained in First Aid and CPR. Evidence of training must be available on site for review upon request. personnel shall also receive Blood Borne Pathogen training.
First aid trained
The list of first aid trained personnel must be dated and updated as required throughout the duration of the contract period. Each time the list is updated, a copy shall be provided to LAUSD.
Every Contractor working on or furnishing personnel on a LAUSD job site shall provide at least one first-aid kit in a weatherproof container. The first-aid kit shall be inspected regularly to ensure that the expended items are promptly replaced. Eye wash capabilities shall be provided by the exposing Contractor as required by the Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) for products/chemicals used on the job site.
LAUSD School Repair & Construction Site Safety Standards Page 93
Los Angeles Unified School District
39.
FOREIGN VOLTAGE DETECTORS
The Contractor shall use a foreign voltage detector (FVD) to test for the presence of foreign voltage: • Whenever there is reason to suspect damage to any utility (test closures before accessing). •
Un-insulated vertical grounds, electrical power guys, and conduits.
• Street light fixtures attachments.
(ungrounded)
within
20
inches of
communication
• Metal sided buildings, mobile homes and trailers. • Buried metallic closures must always be tested before accessing. Inspect the FVD and grounding cord before each use for cracks, holes, cuts, unauthorized decals or markings. Verify the conductive probe cap is in place. Inspect the grounding cord for loose connections, broken wires and defective clamps. Do not use the FVD if the continuity test fails. Do not use foreign voltage detectors that are out of date. Verify the calibration date is within twelve (12) months of the present date. If calibration is out of date utilize another FVD. When not in use, store the FVD in the appropriate canvas bag or case to protect its dielectric strength.
LAUSD School Repair & Construction Site Safety Standards Page 94
Los Angeles Unified School District
40.
FORKLIFTS (INDUSTRIAL TRUCKS AND TRACTORS)
Only employees trained and certified by the Contractor in the safe operation of industrial trucks (forklifts) shall be permitted to operate forklifts. Certification of an equipment operator’s ability to operate safely is required. The Contractor is responsible for determining the operator’s skill, verifying the certification, and maintaining the records. Documentation of operator training and certification shall be in accordance with 8 CCR §3668 and must be available for review when requested by LAUSD and/or their authorized representatives. All forklifts, industrial trucks and tractors shall be equipped with a back-up light and an audible backup alarm which can be clearly heard from a distance of 200 feet. In congested areas or areas with high noise levels which obscures the audible alarm, a signal person in clear view of the operator shall direct the backing operation. Every forklift, industrial truck and tractor shall be equipped with brakes, a parking brake, and a horn. The rated capacity of all forklifts, industrial trucks and tractors shall be displayed at all times on the vehicle in such a manner that it is readily visible to the operator. Forklifts and industrial trucks shall not be loaded in excess of their rated capacity. Seat belts shall be provided on forklifts, industrial trucks and tractors where rollover protection is installed and shall be utilized by employees when operating the trucks/equipment. No riders shall be permitted on forklifts, industrial tracks and tractors unless provided with approved riding seats. Employees shall not ride on, or be elevated on the forks of lift trucks. When elevating employees using an industrial truck (forklift), the following safety protocol shall be implemented and adhered to: • A platform shall be used of sufficient size, but not less than 24” x 24” with standard guardrails and toeboards. • The platform shall be secured to the forks or mast. • There shall be an operator in the control position on the forklift while employee(s) are elevated. • Never travel with personnel on the work platform. • Protect mast components. • All other applicable standards and manufacturers’ instructions pertaining to the use of personnel platforms will be implemented and enforced. Employees shall not be allowed to stand, pass, or work under the elevated portion of an industrial truck, loaded or empty.
LAUSD School Repair & Construction Site Safety Standards Page 95
Los Angeles Unified School District
All equipment brought on-site will be inspected and tested by the Contractor at the beginning of each shift, and certified on a scheduled basis in accordance with the manufacturer’s criteria, to be in a safe operating condition. Attention shall be given to tires, horn, lights, battery, seat belt(s), controller, brakes, steering mechanism, cooling system, and the lift system (forks, chains, cable and limit switches). Any deficiencies shall be repaired, or defective parts replaced, before continued use. Forklifts and industrial trucks shall not exceed the authorized or safe speed, always maintaining a safe distance from other vehicles, and personnel keeping the truck under positive control at all times. The driver shall slow down and sound the horn at all locations where vision is obstructed. When required a spotter will be provided. An accessible fire extinguisher of CO2 5 lb rating or higher shall be available at all operator stations or cabs of equipment. Feet and arms are not to be outside the envelope of the vehicle. Floor/ground grades shall be ascended or descended slowly. The forks shall always be carried as low as possible, consistent with safe operation. When leaving a forklift unattended, the power shall be shut off, brakes set, the mast brought to the vertical position, and forks left in the down position. Cords and hoses must be secured seven feet overhead in all areas with industrial truck/forklift traffic. In areas absent of industrial truck/forklift traffic, cords and hoses may be secured at floor level but must be protected from possible damage and not create an employee trip/fall hazard. Forklifts/industrial trucks shall be locked out and/or secured/garaged to reduce the probability of unauthorized access and/or use.
LAUSD School Repair & Construction Site Safety Standards Page 96
Los Angeles Unified School District
41.
HEAVY EQUIPMENT-MATERIAL HANDLING/EARTHMOVING
Whenever visibility conditions warrant additional light, all heavy equipment in use shall be equipped with at least two headlights and two taillights in operable condition. If possible, equipment shall not be driven on a roadway at night. All heavy equipment shall have brake lights in operable condition. All heavy equipment shall be equipped with an adequate audible warning device (horn) at the operator’s station. All heavy equipment must have a back-up alarm audible for a distance of 200 feet. In congested areas or areas with high noise levels which obscure the audible alarm a signal person in clear view of the operator shall direct the backing operation. All heavy equipment with cabs shall be equipped with windshields and powered wipers. • Windshields and mirrors shall be kept clear such that vision is not obstructed. • Equipment operating in areas or conditions that causes fogging or frosting of windshields shall be equipped with operable defogging or defrosting devices. • Cracked or broken windshields shall be promptly replaced. When mandated by regulatory criteria, heavy equipment shall be equipped with rollover protection. Seat belts and anchorages shall be installed in all heavy equipment The Contractor shall ensure employee use of seat belts on vehicles and equipment. Trucks with dump bodies shall be equipped with positive means of support, permanently attached, to prevent accidental lowering of the body while maintenance or inspection work is being done. Operating levers controlling hoisting or dumping devices on haulage bodies shall be equipped with a latch or other device which will prevent accidental starting or tripping of the mechanism. Trip handles for tailgates of dump trucks shall be so arranged that, in dumping, the operator will be in the clear. All equipment shall be maintained in good working order and shall be inspected at the beginning of each shift for defects. A competent person shall in accordance with the manufacturers criteria, inspect and/or perform all maintenance of heavy equipment to include: • Bulldozer and scraper blades, end-loader buckets, dump bodies, and similar equipment shall be either fully lowered or blocked when not in use and/or maintenance, repair or inspection work is being performed. All controls shall be in a neutral position, with the motors stopped and brakes set, unless work being performed requires otherwise.
LAUSD School Repair & Construction Site Safety Standards Page 97
Los Angeles Unified School District
• Service brakes, trailer brake connections, parking brake system, and emergency stopping system (brakes). • Tires, horn, steering mechanism, seat belts, operating controls and safety devices. • Lights, reflectors, windshield wipers, defrosters, and fire extinguishers. • All vital parts such as motors, chassis, blades and blade holders, tracks drives, hydraulic and pneumatic mechanisms, and transmissions must be inspected. • All deficiencies shall be repaired or defective parts replaced prior to continued use. • Verification of inspection will be available for review by LAUSD authorized representatives. Before starting a job, the operator shall be given instructions regarding the work to be done. Before starting the motor the operator shall check to make sure that all operating controls are in the neutral position. Before moving, the operator shall walk entirely around the equipment to make sure no other personnel, equipment or material will be struck. Spotters/flaggers must be used when equipment enters exits or uses public roads, during backing and/or the equipment operator’s view is obstructed whether moving forward or backward. Contractors when required shall ensure that operators of heavy equipment wear appropriate hearing protection devices. Operators will wear hard hats in equipment not fully enclosed to include no overhead protection/rollover cages, doors, windows, etc. At no time shall equipment be left unattended while the motor is running, especially if the machine is on an inclined surface or on loose material. Machines shall be operated at safe speeds and in a manner consistent with conditions on the job. No employee other than the operator shall ride on equipment. During refueling operations equipment motors shall be turned off. Smoking is prohibited during refueling. In order to reduce the probability of unauthorized use by students or the public, unattended equipment must be locked out at all times and parked in a secure area. Keys shall be removed from unattended equipment. An accessible functional fire extinguisher of CO2, 5-lb. rating or higher shall be available at all operator stations or cabs of equipment.
LAUSD School Repair & Construction Site Safety Standards Page 98
Los Angeles Unified School District
42.
HAZARD COMMUNICATION
In accordance with the provisions of 29CFR1926.59 and 8 CCR §5194 every Contractor must have a comprehensive written Hazard Communication Program which includes: •
A list of hazardous substances known to be on site.
•
Methods the Contractor will use to inform employees of the hazards of nonroutine tasks.
•
On multi-Contractor job sites, the program shall include the methods Contractors will use to inform other Contractors of any precautionary measures to protect their employees.
•
The methods used to provide other Contractor(s) with access to Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS).
•
The methods the Contractor will use to inform the other Contractor (s) of the labeling system in use.
The Contractor must submit a copy of its Hazard Communication Program to the LAUSD OAR or LAUSD Safety for their review and comments. The Hazard Communication Program will be in a binder maintained on the job site and contain the following information: • A comprehensive written Hazard Communication Policy. • Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS’s) for all hazardous materials used on the site. General/Prime Contractors are responsible for maintaining on the job site in a central location Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) on all chemicals/materials brought on site or used by the General/Prime Contractor and Subcontractors of all tiers. The Contractor shall ensure that all employees have received training in the safe use of hazardous materials; and that employees are able to read and understand the information on Material Safety Data Sheets. At a minimum training shall include: • Methods and observations that may be used to detect the presence or release of a hazardous chemical. • The physical and health hazards of the chemicals used in the work area. • Measures employees can take to protect themselves from the hazards. • Details of the hazard communication program, including the labeling systems and use of MSDS. Documentation of training must be provided, upon request, to LAUSD Safety for their review and comments.
LAUSD School Repair & Construction Site Safety Standards Page 99
Los Angeles Unified School District
The Contractor shall ensure that all containers used on the construction site are properly labeled as to their contents, including gas and diesel fuel containers. LAUSD Safety and/or their authorized representative(s), at their discretion, will determine/ approve the storage location(s), quantity and container volume of all chemicals/hazardous substances stored on site. Note: M and O will follow the OEHS Hazard Communication Program in employed by LAUSD OEHS.
LAUSD School Repair & Construction Site Safety Standards Page 100
Los Angeles Unified School District
43.
PORTABLE HEATERS
All portable heaters brought on-site must be Factory Mutual and/or Underwriters Laboratory approved. Prior to use, the General/Prime Contractor will review and approve all liquid/gas fueled portable heaters brought onto the site. The use of liquid/gas fueled portable heaters inside buildings requires the approval of the General/Prime Contractor, and/or LAUSD authorized representatives. Tent Heater use requirements: • Use only in tents made of fire resistant material. • Avoid contact with heating elements or other hot parts. • Keep flammable materials and clothing away from hot equipment. • Never use heaters in a utility hole or in a tent that covers a utility hole. • Ensure adequate ventilation is provided when using a tent. • Secure a fire extinguisher within the tent in an accessible location.
LAUSD School Repair & Construction Site Safety Standards Page 101
Los Angeles Unified School District
44.
HORIZONTAL BORING/JACKING
(Reference “LOCATING UNDERGROUND UTILITIES BEFORE EXCAVATING” in these Safety Standards for additional safety protocol) • The Contractor shall locate all buried utilities before commencing boring/jacking operations by contacting the “Underground Service Alert California (Dig Alert) to ensure all underground utilities owners in the area of are notified to mark their utility locations. • Open a guide hole (bore slot) over any existing utility that is in line with the bore slot. • Excavate bore slot, bell hole and guide holes as necessary. • If resistance is encountered during the boring/jacking operation, cease the boring operation immediately and excavate at the point of resistance to determine necessary action. • All operators must be qualified and trained in the use of the boring/jacking machinery. • At least two crew members must operate the bore motor at all times. • Stay clear of the rotating bore pipe and rotating head of boring machines. Loose clothing, long hair, or gloves can cause injury if caught in the rotating bore pipe. • Do not hold rotating bore pipe with hands or feet. • Only one crew member shall transmit signals to the operator. • When using to connect or disconnect bore pipe, operate the boring machine only at slow RPM’s.
LAUSD School Repair & Construction Site Safety Standards Page 102
Los Angeles Unified School District
45.
HOUSEKEEPING
[Reference 6.39 page 43 of the General Conditions] • All construction materials must be stored in an orderly manner. • Work areas shall be inspected at the completion of each shift to ensure that the work area is maintained and clean as possible. • All scrap, trash and debris shall be cleaned up as work progresses. • Metal containers with covers must be provided for disposal of rags soaked with flammable/combustible liquids. • All exits to include emergency exits and/or access ways must be kept unobstructed. Panic hardware, where present, must remain unobstructed. • Walkways and sidewalks in or around school facilities must be kept free of construction materials, debris, dirt, tools and extension cords. • Keep all materials, tools, and equipment in a stable position (tied, stacked, or chocked) to prevent rolling or tolling. • Puncture hazards (nails, staples, fasteners, etc.) created by stripped form work (scrap lumber, pallets, shipping materials, etc.) shall be eliminated or controlled by the creating Contractor. • Immediately clean up all chemical or liquid spills. • Where steel plates are used to bridge excavations or other similar type construction activities to provide pedestrian walkways or sidewalks, the leading edges of the steel plates must be feathered with temporary asphalt or other suitable materials to prevent trip hazards. 49.1 TRASH DISPOSAL • Trash bins/dumpsters must be provided on site to dispose of construction debris. • All Contractors are required to provide and maintain their own dumpsters for trash disposal. The Prime/General Contractor will be responsible for coordinating and ensuring that dumpsters are provided for trash disposal. Trash bins/dumpsters shall be replaced/rotated when full to prevent accumulation of trash/debris outside the dumpster or throughout the job site. In compliance with applicable regulatory criteria, trash bins/dumpsters shall be covered while in transport.
LAUSD School Repair & Construction Site Safety Standards Page 103
Los Angeles Unified School District
46.
INCIDENT REPORTING
[Correlate this section with protocol in the General Conditions, Insurance Manual and OAR Manual] • Contractors/Subcontractors shall report all injury/illness; incidents to include Contractor employee, student, faculty, public; serious near misses; environmental incidents vehicle; and fire/property damage accidents/incidents immediately to the LAUSD Owner Authorized Representative (OAR) and/or LAUSD Safety. The investigation of the incident will determine possible cause and identify corrective action required. • A written accident investigation report signed by the Contractor senior site supervisor or their designee describing who, what, where, when, and how must be submitted within twenty-four (24) hours to the Authorized Representative (OAR). Corrective action(s) to prevent recurrence must also be documented on this report. When requested by LAUSD Safety, incident recovery meetings shall be organized by the Contractor’s Safety Manager/Supervisor and shall include the responsible Contractor(s)’ Safety Director, Safety Manager or Safety Representative, and the Contractor’s management representative(s). • At their discretion, LAUSD Safety will participate in the on-site accident/incident investigation process. • Immediate notification of major incidents will be made to the Authorized Representative (OAR). Affected areas will be secured until released by the Authorized Representative (OAR), LAUSD Safety or, if required, emergency response personnel. Major incidents include: fatalities, injury and near miss incidents having the potential to cause a fatality, fires, explosions and environmental incidents such as spills of hazardous materials or release of toxin’s into the air.
LAUSD School Repair & Construction Site Safety Standards Page 104
Los Angeles Unified School District
47.
LADDERS - EXTENSION AND STEPLADDERS
Type II (commercial) and Type III (household) ladders are prohibited. Always face the ladder and use both hands when ascending/descending. Employees must maintain a 3-point contact while ascending/descending ladders. Do not carry tools, materials, equipment up or down a ladder, use a hand line to raise and lower tools, materials, equipment, etc. Only one (1) individual shall be on a ladder at any time. Job-Made ladders shall be constructed in accordance with Cal/OSHA provisions contained in 8 CCR §1676. All types of ladders must be inspected at least daily for: • Cracks, splits, splinters, and decay. • Protruding nails and loose rivets. • Loose, bent or broken rungs, braces, tie rods, guide irons, locks, pulleys and strand hooks. • Broken, worn or defective spurs and pads. When ladders are found to be lacking in any safety device, or are found to be defective in any way, such ladders shall be removed from use immediately, tagged out and supervision notified. Ladders found to be too defective for repairs are to be destroyed. All straight and extension ladders will be equipped with nonskid safety feet/bases. Portable ladder feet shall be placed on a substantial base. The top of straight or extension ladders must extend three (3) feet (36 inches) beyond the supporting object when the ladder is used for access to an elevated work area. To prevent displacement or movement, straight and extension ladders shall be tied off at the top when in use or when left unattended. If tie-off cannot be made, ladders must be held at the foot while in use and taken down when not in use. Contractors shall provide documented employee training in the safe use of ladders. Training and/or retraining shall cover all applicable safe use protocol and hazards associated with ladder usage. Defects in wooden ladders may be concealed by use of paint. For this reason, ladders of this type must not be painted, except for necessary identifying marks. Metal ladders must not be used near or for electrical service. Ladders are not to be used for skids, braces, workbenches, or any other purpose other than climbing.
LAUSD School Repair & Construction Site Safety Standards Page 105
Los Angeles Unified School District
Extension ladders shall have positive stops to ensure safe overlap of the sections. Overlap requirements are: • Ladders up to 32 feet long use a three-foot overlap. • Ladders from 32 to 36 feet use a four-foot overlap. • Ladders from 36 to 48 feet use a five-foot overlap. • Ladders over 48 feet use a six-foot overlap. Extension ladders shall not be taken apart in order to use each section separately. Ladders shall be used at such a pitch that the horizontal distance from the top support to the foot of the ladder is about one-quarter of the working length of the ladder. Stepladders must be fully open, set level and the spreader set to the open and locked position. Do not work off the top two rungs. Standing or sitting on the top platform or straddling a stepladder is prohibited. Do not lean a stepladder against a wall in the unopened position. Stepladders shall not be used as straight ladders. Do not climb on or use the backside of a stepladder. Do not exceed the ladders designated weight capacity. Ladders missing “capacity” labels will be removed from service or from the job site.
LAUSD School Repair & Construction Site Safety Standards Page 106
Los Angeles Unified School District
48.
LEAD
Lead abatement, as defined, is to be performed by Contractors or Subcontractors whose workers are certified by the Department of Public Health (DPH). Lead related construction work may be performed by Contractors’ or Subcontractors’ workers who have been trained in Lead Awareness as described in the District’s Standard Specification Section 13282 – Lead Abatement and Lead Related Construction Work. Evidence of certification and/or training is required to be provided to the District’s Environmental Representative prior to the commencement of work. It is the Contractor’s responsibility to review the Assessment Report addressing the impact to Lead Based materials, Lead Containing materials or coatings, and materials assumed to contain Lead prior commencement of work and take the necessary steps to ensure the safety of students, faculty, Contractor employees, and the general public. Contractor must identify any Lead Based Paint (LBP) or coatings and assumed lead containing coatings in or on the materials to be impacted within the proposed scope of work PRIOR to any construction, remodeling, maintenance, repair or demolition activities. No lead abatement will proceed until the LAUSD’s Environment Representative has given written approval of the Lead Abatement Contractor’s written abatement work plan. No work by Contractors other than the Lead Abatement Contractor will be permitted to work in regulated areas until clearance is provided by the LAUSD Environmental Representative. The Lead Abatement Contractor or General Contractor performing monitoring of lead related construction work will be responsible for characterizing the waste stream (e.g., paint chips, components, etc.) and disposing of waste according to the characterization. Hazardous waste will be transported under a Uniform Hazardous Waste Manifest in accordance with District Standard Specification Section 13282.
LAUSD School Repair & Construction Site Safety Standards Page 107
Los Angeles Unified School District
49.
FIRE/LIFE SAFETY
In operating/occupied LAUSD facilities or where applicable, all exits and emergency exits must be maintained clear of any obstructions at all times and available for use by the public at all times. LAUSD and the local Fire Department will be notified when any Impairments or work activities are conducted on, or that may affect any school fire alarm/protection system(s), must be approved by LAUSD prior to beginning work. All impalements to or work activities conducted on LAUSD fire alarm/protection systems must be approved by the local Fire Department prior to beginning work. Do not block, obstruct or tamper with fire protection and/or alarm systems/equipment to include fire extinguishers/hoses, sprinklers, standpipe, pumps, control valves, manual pull box alarms, alarm panels, panic hardware, etc. without prior approval from LAUSD and/or the local Fire Department. Electrical panel disconnects and other associated electrical equipment must remain unobstructed. Walkways and sidewalks in operating/occupied LAUSD facilities must be kept free of construction materials, debris, dirt, tools, equipment, extension cords, barricades, etc. In the event that any life safety protocol which includes any exit and/or path of travel to any exit in all occupied LAUSD buildings must be compromised for any reason(s) due to construction related activities, LAUSD and/or the local Fire Department will be notified prior to commencing work. Under no circumstances will construction activities take place until alternate life safety measures approved by LAUSD and/or the local Fire Department are implemented by the responsible Contractors.
LAUSD School Repair & Construction Site Safety Standards Page 108
Los Angeles Unified School District
50.
LIQUIDS - CORROSIVE ACIDS AND CAUSTICS
Do not store, handle, apply or use acids or caustics until the proper safe procedure has been established and implemented. Never add water to acid - if dilution is needed, add acid to water. An emergency eyewash station or shower provided and maintained by the responsible Contractor must be immediately available to personnel working with acids or caustics. Proper personal protection must include a face shield, apron, gloves and sleeve lets as well as any other safety equipment, procedures, work processes, etc. deemed necessary in order to provide maximum protection to all exposed personnel. Contractors will be responsible for reviewing the Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) for specific chemical handling and personnel protective equipment requirements.
LAUSD School Repair & Construction Site Safety Standards Page 109
Los Angeles Unified School District
51.
LOCK-OUT/TAG-OUT/BLOCK-OUT
The Contractor must have a written Lock-out/Tag-out/Block-out program that meets or exceeds the OSHA standards contained in 8 CCR §1595, §2320.4, and §3314. During servicing, cleaning, adjusting and maintenance activities all movable parts shall be mechanically blocked or locked out/tagged out as required to ensure equipment/machinery cannot be operated. Locks and tags must be used by all personnel working on or around all equipment/machinery. Basic lockout/tag out steps are as follows: • Locate and identify all energy sources and isolating devices. • Alert the people in the area of the lockout. • Shut down equipment by the normal stopping procedures. • De-energize all energy sources (electrical, hydraulic, pneumatic, steam, gravity, thermal, gravitational) • Physically place locks and tags on energy isolating devices. • Verify a zero energy state. In no case shall work begin before circuits and equipment and/or machinery is tested to ensure that they are, in fact, de-energized. • Perform the work. • Clean area of tools, parts, and personnel. • Remove locks and tags. • Alert the necessary personnel that the equipment will be on line. • Restore energy and resume normal operations. When locks and tags are required, the craft personnel working on that circuit shall notify their appropriate supervisor. The supervisor, or his designee, shall see that appropriate locks and tags are provided. When work is completed, the appropriate supervisor is also to be notified when the lock(s) and tag(s) are removed. Lockout locks, and tags shall not be used for purposes other than lockout activities. Each Contractor employee must affix their own lock(s)/tag(s). The Contractor Safety Manager and OAR must be notified if a Contractor lock and tag must be removed by someone other than the employee who placed the lock/tag. When a lock has been left on a piece of equipment and the employee has left the site, the Contractor will then contact the Construction Manager, his designated representative or the Contractor Safety Manager and OAR. The area will be walked down by Contractor supervision to ensure the area is safe prior to removing the lock/tag.
LAUSD School Repair & Construction Site Safety Standards Page 110
Los Angeles Unified School District
Any employee who removes a tag or lock belonging to another employee or person, or overrides a tag or lock in any way, shall be removed from site.
LAUSD School Repair & Construction Site Safety Standards Page 111
Los Angeles Unified School District
52.
LOCATING UNDERGROUND UTILITIES BEFORE EXCAVATING
The nearest shut off valve or control point for known utilities shall be identified on a site plan to be maintained on site by the responsible Contractor. The performing Contractor will be responsible for locating buried utilities before digging/excavation. No excavation work will take place before verification of the existence and location of or lack of underground utilities. Within a minimum of two days (48 hours) prior to excavation all known owners of underground facilities in the area will be notified by calling the Underground Service Alert California (also known as DigAlert) – phone number: (see below) All underground utility line location(s) identification and marking should be done by a third party via the “Underground Service Alert California (DigAlert) or contracted third-party entity or the utility company. A third-party must be contracted to locate lines on LAUSD private property as DigAlert will only locate up to the property line. Typically a minimum of two (2) days notification is required prior to beginning planned excavation work. This reduces the Contractor’s liability should damage occur due to improper marking of utility line location. The Underground Service Alert California (DigAlert) one call notification system will apply to underground utilities located on both public and private land. Contractor shall check the entire job site for visual signs of substructures. This includes such items as manhole covers, water meter boxes, ditch lines, pavement patches, previous location marks, pole risers, and the obvious absence of overhead utilities. Contractor must expose substructure by hand after locations are determined. Contractor shall be careful not to damage the utility substructure by scraping, hammering or other forms of excavation or locating efforts. Contractors shall be aware of the possibility of joint use by other Contractors of an excavation/trench for power, telephone, gas, fiber optics, cable, etc. UNDERGROUND SERVICE ALERT CALIFORNIA Phone Number: 811. Web Address: http://www.digalert.org/index.asp
LAUSD School Repair & Construction Site Safety Standards Page 112
Los Angeles Unified School District
53.
MOTOR VEHICLES
Contractors will be responsible for claims arising from the operation of Company owned motor vehicles on the construction site. Only vehicles meeting or exceeding LAUSD automobile insurance specifications/coverage limits (refer to the LAUSD Insurance Manual) will be permitted on LAUSD property/construction sites. Every Contractor will be responsible for ensuring their drivers and vehicles meet or exceed any regulatory criteria whether Federal, State or local pertaining to the operation of a motor vehicle. All Contractor employees operating motor vehicles shall have a valid driver’s license for the class vehicle driven. Drivers of vehicles over 26,000 pounds GVW or hauling EPA regulated materials are required by Federal and State Departments of Transportation regulations to possess a Commercial Drivers License (CDL). Drivers of motor vehicles on the site shall obey all street and highway speed, traffic laws and traffic signs. All drivers of Contractor vehicles shall check the mechanical condition of their vehicles at least daily. Drivers are required to observe the “right of way” rule. Yield to other drivers whose driving actions demand the right-of-way. Drive defensively. Anticipate what other driver(s) may do. The job site speed limit is 5 mph. Employees driving and riding in Contractor vehicles must wear seat belts. All passengers on motor vehicles must be seated and within the confines of the vehicle. Contractor’s employees are not allowed to ride in the open bed of a pickup truck. Pedestrians will always have the right of way. Parking shall be in specified and authorized areas only. Do not block entrances and do not park in reserved spaces. Block, chock, or angle vehicle wheels when parking on inclines. All vehicles must be shut off when unoccupied. The Contractor is responsible for the stability of any material being hauled.
LAUSD School Repair & Construction Site Safety Standards Page 113
Los Angeles Unified School District
54.
OVERHEAD UTILITIES
The Contractor will identify all overhead utilities prior to the start of any work. The Contractor shall identify the voltage carried by each power line, and identify the minimum required clearances prior to commencing work in the vicinity of the line. • Identifications of all power lines and minimum clearances shall be documented on a site plan that is made available to all Employees, Subcontractors, vendors and suppliers. • This site plan shall include identification of all power lines that are within 45 feet of the perimeter of the site. • Temporary utilities shall be added to the site plan as required. Proper distances must be maintained from all overhead power lines, such as by the use of a signal person. • A minimum clearance distance of 15 feet shall be maintained by apparatus or equipment from power lines of 50Kva or less. If ongoing work around energized overhead power lines will take place thereby increasing the probability of accidental contact, the Power Company should be requested to temporarily insulate the lines.
LAUSD School Repair & Construction Site Safety Standards Page 114
Los Angeles Unified School District
55.
PERMITS
Unless otherwise relieved via contract provisions, each Contractor shall obtain relevant permits pertinent to the safety of employees, the public and operations. Permits shall be available at the job site for review by LAUSD representatives. Contractors must obtain and post Cal/OSHA Activity Permits for the following construction activities: • Construction of trenches or excavations which are 5 feet or deeper and into which a person is required to descend. • Construction of any building, structure, scaffolding or falsework more than 3 stories high, or the equivalent height (36 feet). • Demolition of any building structure, or dismantling of scaffolding or falsework more than 3 stories high, or the equivalent height (36 feet). • Erection or dismantling of vertical shoring systems more than 3 stories high, or the equivalent height (36 feet). • Use of fixed or mobile tower cranes.
LAUSD School Repair & Construction Site Safety Standards Page 115
Los Angeles Unified School District
56.
PERSONAL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT
Contractors are required to assess the workplace to determine if hazards that require the use of personal protective equipment (PPE) are present or are likely to be present. Contractors will be responsible for supplying all necessary personnel protective equipment (PPE) to all relevant employees. Contractors shall ensure that employees are trained in the proper use, sanitation, maintenance/care, inspection and limitations of each type of personal protective equipment prior to actual use. Contractors must select and have affected employees use/wear properly fitted personal protective equipment (PPE) suitable for protection from existing hazards. Contractors are responsible for enforcing employee compliance with all personal protective equipment (PPE) criteria. Use of Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) will be in accordance with 8 CCR 1514, 1520-22, 3381-82, 5096 and 5144 (Hazard assessment for Personal Protective Equipment).
56.1
HARD HATS
It is required that all employees on the job site shall be protected by NON-METALLIC protective helmets. In order to protect employees against impact and penetration of falling and flying objects, hard hats will be worn 100% of the time while on the job site. The General Contractor, at their discretion, may designate areas on site (break areas, office trailer areas) where hard hat usage is not required. Hard hats shall meet the specifications contained in American National Standards Institute, Z89.1-Safety Requirements for Industrial Head Protection. 57.2
EYE AND FACE PROTECTION
It is required that all employees on the job site shall be protected by proper eye protection. In order to protect employees against impact and flying objects, eye protection will be worn 100% of the time while on the job site (the only exclusion is while inside the jobsite trailer or designated areas outside of the construction zones) The General Contractor, at their discretion, may designate areas on site (break areas, office trailer areas) where eye protection usage is not required. Eye protection shall meet the specifications contained in the American National Standards Institute, ANSI Z87.1 “Practice for Occupational and Educational Eye and Face Protection.” • Employees will be required to wear the proper eye and face protection for all tasks which expose them to recognized eye and face hazards. • Safety glasses with permanently affixed side shields will be considered the minimum type of eye protection worn.
LAUSD School Repair & Construction Site Safety Standards Page 116
Los Angeles Unified School District
• Employees involved in welding operations will be furnished with filter lenses of the proper shade number. • Employees will not wear shaded lens while working indoors unless they are performing task specific work that requires filtered lenses. • Employees exposed to laser beams shall be furnished suitable laser safety goggles which will protect for the specific wavelength of the laser and be of optical density (O.D.) adequate for the energy involved. • The eye protection required for various operations as shown in the OSHA Federal Register, Part 1926.102.
HAND PROTECTION
57.3
57.3.1 GLOVES In order to ensure that all contractor employees working on LAUSD construction sites have suitable hand protection available in the event they are assigned job tasks that create an exposure to hand injuries, all personnel will, at all times, have/carry gloves appropriate for their work activities. When the scope of work performed creates a potential risk of hand injuries, Contractor employees will wear the appropriate hand protection. • Hand protection will also be worn when handling or working with chemical substances such as paint, solvents, acids, etc. • Gloves will not be worn for close work around saws, lathes, drill presses, and similar machinery in which they are likely to become entangled. 57.4
HIGH VISIBILITY SHIRT, VEST, OR JACKET
It is required that all employees on the job site when working outside of buildings, in trenches/excavations, and around mobile equipment and vehicles, wear high visibility shirts, vests, jackets or equivalent. Protection means high visibility materials which are intended to make the user clearly visible by day through the use of high visibility material and in the dark by vehicle or equipment lights through the use of retro-reflective (fluorescent) material. The high visibility clothing should not be worn in a manner that interferes with the safe use of other PPE items (i.e.; fall arrest systems, leather or other fire retardant garments, etc.). For daytime work, flagmen shall be provided with and shall wear the flagger's vest, shirt, or jacket which shall be orange, yellow, yellow-green, or a fluorescent version of these colors. For nighttime work, similar outside garments shall be retro-reflective. The retro-reflective material shall be orange, yellow, white, silver, yellow-green, or a fluorescent version of these colors, and shall be visible at a minimum distance of 1,000 feet. The retro-reflective clothing shall be designed to clearly identify the wearer as a person.
LAUSD School Repair & Construction Site Safety Standards Page 117
Los Angeles Unified School District
56.5
RESPIRATORY PROTECTION
Approved respiratory protection will be provided to and worn by all employees subject to hazardous dust, gases, fumes, mists, or vapors. When respirators are indicated, the employer shall implement a written respiratory protection program which includes: •
A written respiratory protection program and training;
•
Physical Examinations for respirator use;
•
Written cartridge change out schedules; and
•
Care, maintenance and disposal process.
Lack of air monitoring data does not permit/allow the assumption that hazardous air contamination thresholds are not being exceeded therefore respirators are not required. Only Industrial Hygiene air monitoring data will counteract an order given by LAUSD for the use of respiratory protection. Contractor employees who are required to wear respiratory protection must receive a medical assessment of their physical ability to wear the equipment, be properly fit tested, and be trained in the use, care, maintenance, and limitations of the respiratory device. The proper respirator must be selected for the particular type of air contaminant involved. Respiratory protective devices should be approved by the Department of Health and Human Services (DHHS) or National Institute of Occupational Safety and Health (NIOSH). 57.6
HEARING PROTECTION
Hearing protection must be worn by employees who are exposed to excessive noise levels in situations where administrative or engineering controls cannot be utilized to establish acceptable noise levels. Lack of noise monitoring data does not permit/allow the assumption that permissible noise levels are not being exceeded therefore hearing protection is not required. Only approved noise monitoring data will counteract an order given by LAUSD for the use of hearing protection. Hearing protection used to obtain acceptable noise levels will consist of either approved ear plugs, ear muffs, or a combination of both. Plain cotton is not considered an acceptable protective devise and should not be used for hearing protection. The following Table 2 “Permissible Noise Exposures” should be used to determine the duration of exposure permitted for various sound levels. Additional requirements concerning hearing protection can be found in the OSHA Federal Register, Part 1926.101 or Cal OSHA, Title 8, Section 5095.
LAUSD School Repair & Construction Site Safety Standards Page 118
Los Angeles Unified School District
When hearing protection is recommended, employees shall be trained on the proper use of the hearing protection. If the Action Level (AL) of 85 dba, 8 hour-Time Weighted Average is reached based on personal dosimeter monitoring, a written hearing conservation program shall be implemented for effected employees and shall include but not limited to: •
Baseline audiograms;
•
Annual audiograms;
•
Posting of the written program;
•
Warning signs in high noise areas; and
•
Training of employees. Table 2. CAL-OSHA Permissible Exposure Levels
A-weighted .... sound level, .. L (decibel) ... 80............ 81............ 82............ 83............ 84............ 85............ 86............ 87............ 88............ 89............ 90............ 91............ 92............ 93............ 94............ 95............ 96............ 97............ 98............ 99............ 100............ 101............ 102............ 103............ 104............ 105............
57.7
Reference .. Duration ... T (hour) ... 32 ......... 27.9 ....... 24.3 ....... 21.1 ....... 18.4 ....... 16 ......... 13.9 ....... 12.1 ....... 10.6 ....... 9.2 ........ 8 .......... 7.0 ........ 6.1 ........ 5.3 ........ 4.6 ........ 4 .......... 3.5 ........ 3.0 ........ 2.6 ........ 2.3 ........ 2 .......... 1.7 ........ 1.5 ........ 1.3 ........ 1.1 ........ 1
A-weighted .... sound level, .. L (decibel) ... 106............ 107............ 108............ 109............ 110............ 111............ 112............ 113............ 114............ 115............ 116............ 117............ 118............ 119............ 120............ 121............ 122............ 123............ 124............ 125............ 126............ 127............ 128............ 129............ 130............
Reference Duration T (hour) 0.87 0.76 0.66 0.57 0.5 0.44 0.38 0.33 0.29 0.25 0.22 0.19 0.16 0.14 0.125 0.11 0.095 0.082 0.072 0.063 0.054 0.047 0.041 0.036 0.031
FOOT PROTECTION
Contractors will be responsible for insuring that their employees are wearing adequate, sturdy footwear. Footwear worn on the job site should have soles which guard against punctures and slipping and uppers should be such as to protect against expected scraping and scratching from rough building materials. Where there is a frequent possibility of hard objects being dropped on the foot, proper protection should be provided in the form of safety toed (steeltoed or composite-toed) footwear.
LAUSD School Repair & Construction Site Safety Standards Page 119
Los Angeles Unified School District
The footwear soles should be made of slip resistant materials and not worn to the point where slip resistance is compromised. Employees operating paving breakers/jack hammers, jumping jacks, compaction equipment and sand tamps, etc., shall wear metatarsal guards or steel toed safety shoes. Tennis, running, casual street shoes, sandals or shoes made with thin materials are not permitted on the job site. 57.8
PERSONNEL FALL ARREST/PROTECTION
Reference FALL PROTECTION in these Safety Standards CONTRACTORS WILL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR PROVIDING ANY OTHER TYPES OF PERSONAL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT WHICH MAY BE REQUIRED FOR SPECIFIC JOBS. THE PERSONAL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT REQUIRED AND UTILIZED/WORN WILL BE CONTINGENT ON THE EXPOSURE POTENTIAL ASSOCIATED WITH JOB TASK(S) PERFORMED.
LAUSD School Repair & Construction Site Safety Standards Page 120
Los Angeles Unified School District
57.
POSTING REQUIREMENTS
The Contractor shall be required to construct a weatherproof job site bulletin board. Federal and State regulations require Contractors to conspicuously display all required posters at locations where employees report each day. At a minimum, the following items shall be posted: • Industrial Welfare Commission’s Order Regulating Wages, Hours, and Working Conditions. • OSHA “Job Safety and Health Protection”. • Contractor’s “Code of Safe Practices”. (?) • Discrimination in Employment is prohibited by Law. • Sexual Harassment Poster (if required). • Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA). • Notice of Worker Compensation Carrier. • Notice to Employees of Unemployment Insurance and Disability Insurance. • OSHA Operating Rules for Industrial Trucks. •
Emergency Telephone Numbers (yellow/black card).
LAUSD School Repair & Construction Site Safety Standards Page 121
Los Angeles Unified School District
58.
POWDER-ACTUATED TOOLS
Powder-actuated tools must meet or exceed ANSI A10-3 standards. Only trained workers holding a valid operator’s card can use a powder-actuated tool. Containers for powder-actuated tools must be lockable and bear the label, POWDERACTUATED TOOL, on the outside. The container must be kept under lock and key storage. To prevent/protect against accidental activation all power activated tools shall be equipped with a barrel end to surface contact safety device. The following must be provided with each tool: • Operating and service manuals. • Power load chart. • Inspection-Service record. • Repair and servicing tools. Eye or face protection is required for operators and assistants. Tools must be inspected prior to use. Defective tools must not be used. Powder-actuated tools must not be left unattended. Powder-actuated tools must be unloaded if work is interrupted. Tools must not be loaded until ready for use. Unfired cartridges must be under the control of the operator at all times. On misfire, the tool must be held in place for 30 seconds. Misfires shall be placed in a can of water. Different power loads must be kept in separate compartments. Warning signs must be clearly posted within 50 feet of the point of use bearing the words “POWDER-ACTUATED TOOLS IN USE.”
LAUSD School Repair & Construction Site Safety Standards Page 122
Los Angeles Unified School District
59.
ROOFING HAZARDS
During roofing operations unless otherwise specified in the LAUSD Safety Standards the Contractor shall comply with the provisions contained in 8 CCR §1730. Employees shall be protected from falls from roofs by use of one or a combination of the following methods: • Parapets will be a minimum 39 inches high otherwise other means of fall protection will be required. • Personnel fall arrest systems. • Catch platforms. •
Scaffold platforms.
• Eave barriers a minimum of six (6) feet from the roof eave (i.e. Controlled Access Zone). • Standard railings and toeboards • Each rooftop hatch shall be equipped with railing, chains and/or swing gates and a grab bar. New construction will not be considered complete unless these requirements are met. Also reference Fall Protection in these standards.
LAUSD School Repair & Construction Site Safety Standards Page 123
Los Angeles Unified School District
60.
SANITATION
The Contractor must provide in a clean and sanitary condition: • potable water for drinking, • adequate toilet facilities (see below), • hand wash facilities as required by the applicable Federal or State standards • appropriate containers for disposal of garbage, • Any necessary insect and rodent control. A minimum of one separate toilet facility for each sex shall be provided for each 20 employees or fraction thereof. Toilet facilities shall be kept clean, free of graffiti, maintained in good working order, designed and maintained in a manner which will assure privacy and provided with an adequate supply of toilet paper. BREAK AREAS SHALL BE DESIGNATED FOR EATING AND DRINKING PURPOSES. There have been several incidents of workers stepping on plastic bottles and rolling their ankles sustaining injury; therefore LAUSD has implemented the following policy: PLASTIC BOTTLES INCLUDING WATER BOTTLES, SODA OR OTHER SOFT DRINK BOTTLES MUST BE PLASTIC AND HAVE THE LIDS REMOVED AND DISCARDED IN PROPER RECEPTACLES UPON OPENING. ABSOLUTELY NO GLASS CONTAINERS MAY BE USED ON SITE.
LAUSD School Repair & Construction Site Safety Standards Page 124
Los Angeles Unified School District
61.
SCAFFOLDS - ERECTION, INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
Scaffolds utilized by Contractors, unless otherwise specified in the LAUSD Safety Standards and/or the Contractor/Suppliers Safety Standards, shall at a minimum comply with OSHA 29 CFR 1926.1053 and 1926.1060 standards. The following procedures shall govern the erection, dismantling, maintenance, inspection, and use of scaffolds. Note: LAUSD requires a minimum of one stair tower for structures greater than 24 feet. Straight ladders require the use of fall protection devices at heights over 24 feet such as the use of scaffold davits and self-retracting lifelines. Note: A frame scaffolds are strictly prohibited for use on LAUSD sites unless specifically exempted in writing by the LAUSD Construction Safety Director or his/her designee.
Erection and Dismantling: • Scaffolding shall be erected, moved, dismantled or altered only under the supervision and direction of a Competent Person specifically trained and qualified to perform these tasks for the type scaffolding utilized. The Contractor will assure that a Competent Person provides employees assigned to erect, dismantle, move, repair, maintain and inspect the scaffold with the required training and/or supervision to ensure they recognize any hazards associated with the work performed. • All scaffolding must be provided with identification that it has been erected and dismantled by or under the supervision of a Competent Person. • Documentation of Competent Person’s certification shall be available on site for review by authorized LAUSD representatives. • The training shall include the following topics, as applicable: •
the nature of scaffold hazards
•
the correct procedures for erecting, disassembling, moving, operating, repairing, inspecting and maintaining the type of scaffold in question
•
the design criteria, maximum intended load-carrying capacity, and intended use of the scaffold
•
any other pertinent procedures or safety requirements
• When the Contractor has reason to believe that an employee(s) lacks the skill or understanding needed for safe work involving the erection, use or dismantling of scaffolds, the Contractor shall re-train each such employee so that the required proficiency is regained.
LAUSD School Repair & Construction Site Safety Standards Page 125
Los Angeles Unified School District
• The Contractor shall have a Competent Person determine the feasibility and safety of providing fall protection for employees erecting or dismantling supported scaffolds. Fall protection is required for employees erecting or dismantling supported scaffolds over six (6) feet in height where the installation and use of such protection is feasible and does not create a greater hazard. • The Contractor shall have each employee who performs work while on a scaffold trained by a person qualified in the subject matter to recognize the hazards associated with the type of scaffold being used and to understand the procedures to control or minimize those hazards. The training shall include the following topics, as applicable: •
the nature of any electrical hazards, fall hazards, and falling object hazards in the work area,
•
the correct procedures for dealing with electrical hazards
•
the correct procedures for erecting, maintaining, and dismantling the fall protection and falling object protection systems being used
•
the proper use of the scaffold, including the proper handling of materials on the scaffold
•
the maximum intended load and the load-carrying capacities of the scaffold
•
any other pertinent procedures or safety requirements
• The working platform height of a rolling scaffold must not exceed three times the smallest base dimension unless guyed or otherwise stabilized. • All connections, including casters, on rolling scaffolds shall be pinned. • The casters used with rolling scaffolding shall have an ultimate/maximum rolling load capacity/pound rating. When casters are used with scaffolding, this capacity shall be the load limiting factor. • No rolling scaffold is to be moved with anyone on the platform regardless of the height. Care must be exercised in moving these scaffolds to prevent their upsetting. Wheels shall be locked at all times except when scaffolds are being moved. • Scaffolds must be erected level and placed on a firm base. The scaffold platform shall be horizontal as close as the eye can detect. When the scaffold is resting on the ground, bearing plates shall be placed beneath each leaf to prevent the scaffold from settling into the earth. The bearing plate must be a minimum of two inches (2”) by ten inches (10”) timber. • Adjusting screws utilized to level scaffold frame members are to be used with a base plate only. Adjusting screws will not be extended more than 12 inches.
LAUSD School Repair & Construction Site Safety Standards Page 126
Los Angeles Unified School District
Adjusting screws are not to be used in conjunction with casters or on rolling scaffolds. • All scaffolds shall be designed to carry without failure four (4) times the maximum intended load and at no time will any scaffold be overloaded. • Complete toprail, midrail, and toeboards shall be provided on all sides of the working platform of scaffolds six (6) feet or higher. If utilized, wood guardrails shall be two inches by four inches (2” x 4”) or the equivalent, between 39 inches to 45 inches high with a midrail. Supports shall be at intervals not to exceed eight (8) feet. Toe-boards shall be a minimum of four inches (4”) in height. • If the guardrail system is missing or incomplete personnel fall protection is required. • Detachable “X” braces must be fastened securely. Where obstructions prevent the use of “X” braces, other means to secure bracing shall be used. • All scaffolds over two lifts high are to be tied off to an independent structure or guyed securely beginning at the third lift and at every lift thereafter. Such scaffolds which extend horizontally are to be tied into the building every 12 feet. Each lift is to be secured to the lifts above and below it. • Do not use the scaffold rails or braces for climbing. Use the provided ladder access. Ladders, if not an integral part of the scaffold, shall be attached securely to the scaffold so as to provide safe access to the working platform. • A stair tower or built-in stair/ladder system shall be provided for access to all scaffolds four frames or more in height. • Scaffolds will not be placed in front of doors unless the doors are blocked, locked or guarded. • Scaffold planks must extend over their end support not less than six inches (6”) or more than twelve inches (12”). • Scaffold planks, unless they are cleated, are to be wired down securely so they will not shift or tip when under a load. • Scaffolds are not to be bridged between with scaffold plank or stages unless the scaffolds are secured to each other by adequate bracing or tied off to an independent structure. Inspection and Maintenance: • Handrail, midrail and cross bracing shall be inspected for nicks, especially near the center of the span and for indications where a welding arc has been struck. Such pieces shall be removed from use immediately. • No scaffolding member will be altered by welding, burning, cutting, drilling or bending.
LAUSD School Repair & Construction Site Safety Standards Page 127
Los Angeles Unified School District
• Manufactured Frames •
Checks shall be made around the frame weld zone for crack indications and the tubing checked for splitting or cracking at leg ends.
•
The three main areas of inspection are for rust, straightness of members and welds. When rust appears, wall thickness of tubing shall be checked for thinning. All members or parts of all steel scaffold components shall be straight and free from bends, kinks or dents. Any pieces of a scaffold found having any of these defects shall be removed from service immediately.
• Daily scaffold inspection is to be a visual examination supervised and/or conducted, by the designated Competent Person. • All scaffolds must be tagged noting their status whether complete or incomplete. The tag will designate whether the scaffold is safe to use (green tag) or cannot be used (red tag). Prior to scaffold use on each shaft, the Competent Person will sign the inspection tags. 62.1
SUSPENDED SCAFFOLDS
Suspended scaffolds must have adequate anchorage points. Prior to stepping out onto any suspended scaffold, the occupants must be provided with a full body harness, lifeline and deceleration device that must be attached to a separate anchorage point. The set up, maintenance, inspection and use of suspended scaffold will be under the supervision of a Competent Person and will be in compliance with all applicable Federal and State regulatory standards.
LAUSD School Repair & Construction Site Safety Standards Page 128
Los Angeles Unified School District
62.
STEEL ERECTION
Steel erection activities shall comply with all facets of 29CFR1926 Subpart R, except where superseded below: • Steel erection Contractors shall implement a Site-Specific Steel Erection Plan in accordance with the OSHA Steel Erection Standards “Guidelines for Establishing the Components of a Site-Specific Erection Plan. • All site preparation shall comply with Subpart R. LAUSD has extended the site preparation requirement to treat rebar the same as structural steel regarding site preparation, loading and off-loading. • When connecting beams at the periphery or interior of a building or structure where the fall distance is greater than six (6) feet, the Connector shall be provided with and use appropriate personal fall protection equipment in accordance with OSHA requirements and these Standards. • Connector means an employee who, working with hoisting equipment, is placing and connecting beams or other structural members. • When performing work other than connecting, Employees shall be provided and use personal fall protection equipment in accordance with these Standards and Federal OSHA requirements where the fall distance is greater than six (6) feet. • Where applicable erection Contractor employees working in excess of six (6) feet in height shall utilize personnel fall protection equipment tied off to beam clamps, approved anchorage, or other approved anchoring device(s) or work in Mobile Elevated Work Platforms (MEWPs) (i.e., manlifts). • Any deviations from this steel erection fall protection policy will require a minimum three weeks advance written approval from authorized LAUSD Safety representatives prior to commencing work. • Before the commencement of steel erection, the steel erection Contractor must receive written notification that the concrete in the footings, piers, and walls, as well as the mortar in the masonry piers and walls has attained, on the basis of an appropriate ASTM standard test method of field-cured samples, either 75 percent of the intended minimum compressive design strength or sufficient strength to support the loads imposed during steel erection. • No building, structure, or part thereof, or any temporary support shall be loaded in excess of its designed capacity. • The Contractor shall provide an erection plan and procedure prepared by a registered civil engineer for the erection of trusses and beams over 25 feet long. • Trusses and beams shall be braced laterally and progressively during construction to prevent buckling or overturning.
LAUSD School Repair & Construction Site Safety Standards Page 129
Los Angeles Unified School District
• Open web steel joists shall not be placed on any structural steel framework unless such framework is safely bolted or welded. • Permanent Flooring •
Permanent floors shall be installed as soon as practical following the erection of structural members.
•
At no time shall there be more than four floors or 48 feet of unfinished bolting or welding above the foundation or upper most secured floor.
• Temporary Flooring •
Where skeleton steel is being erected, a tightly planked and substantial floor shall be maintained with two stories or 30 feet, whichever is less, below and directly under that portion of each tier of beams on which any work is being performed.
•
The erection floor shall be solidly planked over its entire surface except for access openings. Planking shall not be less than 2 inches thick, full size undressed, and shall be laid tight and secured against movement.
•
On structures not adaptable to temporary floors or static lines, safety nets shall be installed and maintained whenever the potential fall distance exceeds two stories or 25 feet.
•
Employees working above grade or any surface and exposed to protruding reinforcing steel or other similar situations shall be protected against the hazard of impalement by the use of guardrails, or approved fall protection systems, and protective cover SHALL BE PLACED ON ALL IMPALEMENT HAZARDS as specified in 8 CCR §1712.
•
Exposed edges of all temporary planked or temporary metal decked floors at the periphery of the building, or at interior openings, such as stairways and elevator shafts shall be protected by a single 3/8-inch minimum diameter wire rope located between 39 and 45 inches above design finish floor height. The erection Contractor shall install turnbuckles no less that every 100 feet to allow for re-tightening of cables. A midrail and toeboard shall be installed at the completion of the installation of decking.
•
Covers for roof or floor openings shall be capable of supporting, without failure, twice the weight of employees, equipment and materials that may be imposed on the cover at any one time.
•
All covers shall be secured when installed to prevent accidental displacement by wind, equipment or employees.
•
All covers shall be painted with high visibility paint or shall be marked with the word “HOLE” or “COVER” to provide warning of the hazard.
LAUSD School Repair & Construction Site Safety Standards Page 130
Los Angeles Unified School District
63.1
•
Decking gaps around columns shall be protected with wire mesh, exterior plywood, or equivalent to provide protection from objects falling through.
•
Metal decking shall be laid tightly and immediately secured upon placement to prevent accidental movement or displacement.
•
Bundles of decking shall be placed on a minimum of three steel joists.
•
Bundle packaging and strapping shall not be used for hoisting unless designed for that purpose.
•
Loose items such as dunnage, flashing, or other materials, which are placed on the top of metal decking bundles to be hoisted, shall be secured to the bundles.
•
Containers shall be provided for storing or carrying rivets, bolts, and drift pins, and secured against accidental displacement when aloft.
•
When bolts or drift pins are being knocked out, means shall be provided to keep them from falling.
•
Impact wrenches shall be provided with a locking device for retaining the socket.
•
Connections of equipment used in plumbing-up shall be properly secured.
•
Turnbuckles shall be secured to prevent unwinding while under stress.
•
Plumbing-up guys shall be removed only under the supervision of a Competent Person.
•
Openings in metal decking shall not be cut until equipment installation is ready to commence.
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
The crane headache ball, hook, or load shall not be used to transport personnel. During placing of structural members, the load shall not be released from the hoisting line until the members are secured with not less than two bolts drawn up wrench tight. All columns shall be anchored by a minimum of 4 anchor rods (anchor bolts). • Anchor rods (anchor bolts) shall not be repaired, replaced or field modified without the approval of the site Structural Engineer of record and/or in accordance with CDR 1926.755(b). • Prior to the erection of a column, the Prime Contractor or steel fabricators shall provide written notification to the steel erector if there has been any repair, replacement or modification of the anchor rods (anchor bolts) of that column.
LAUSD School Repair & Construction Site Safety Standards Page 131
Los Angeles Unified School District
When loads are being hoisted, avoid walking under the load or permitting an employee to be exposed to the swing of the lift/load. Where applicable, tag line(s) shall be used to control all loads. Secure loose items aloft. All materials, equipment, and tools, which are not in use while aloft, shall be secured against accidental displacement. The steel erecting Contractor shall pre-plan all overhead hoisting operations to ensure that no individual is required to work directly below a suspended load. For protection from falling objects the steel erecting Contractor shall bar other construction activities below steel erection unless overhead protection for the employees below is provided. For additional protection of other crafts on the site, barricades shall be installed around overhead work and signs shall be posted in the erection area, "Danger Men Working Overhead". Material should not be hoisted to a structure unless it is ready to be put into place and secured.
LAUSD School Repair & Construction Site Safety Standards Page 132
Los Angeles Unified School District
63.
TAR AND MELTING POTS
Any melting chamber must be vented and must have a working thermometer. No melting pots or tar kettles may be located on roof surfaces. All melting pots must be on the ground, and a minimum 25 feet from any building. Barricades must be provided when hot liquids are present overhead on a roof or upper floor. Buckets containing hot asphalt or pitch shall not be carried on ladders. Whenever possible, pumps shall be utilized to pump asphalt to the roof. A fire extinguisher shall be kept near each kettle in use. Extinguisher capacity shall be at least: • Less than 150 gallon kettle – 8:B.C. • 150 to 350 gallon kettle – 16:B.C. • Larger than 350 gallon kettle – 20:B.C. For emergency purposes, kettle and tanker pumps shall be provided with a means of stopping the flow of hot asphalt or pitch manually from the rooftop. Pumper pipelines shall be securely fastened at roof top and shall not be supported by ladders used for access. Pipelines shall be adequately braced or supported to prevent collapse.
LAUSD School Repair & Construction Site Safety Standards Page 133
Los Angeles Unified School District
64.
UTILITY HOLES - PUMPING WATER
Contractors shall ensure employee awareness of potential contaminants in utility holes, and water and remediation procedures. Contaminants can enter a utility hole from numerous sources: • Leaking underground storage tanks and pipelines. • Storm water run-off. • Spills, dumping, or migration from the water table. All utility holes must be tested for the presence of gases prior to pumping. Prior to entry, contaminated water or sewage must be removed by an authorized environmental consultant for proper disposal. All utility hole or access points’ work will be subject to compliance with applicable Confined Space safety protocol. All confined spaces shall have permanent marking identifying them as confined spaces. New construction will not be considered complete if confined spaces do not contain appropriate signage or marking,
LAUSD School Repair & Construction Site Safety Standards Page 134
Los Angeles Unified School District
65.
WARNING SIGNS
Signage/traffic control devices shall be maintained in legible condition and cleared, repaired or replaced as necessary to maintain legibility. In accordance with applicable codes and regulations, Contractor(s) shall post site access and warning signage including emergency contact information. Contractor employees will obey all warning signs. In order to protect Contractor employees and the public, traffic warning signs, barricades, cones, lights, etc. will be utilized in accordance with all applicable Federal and State standards and criteria outlined in the “Work Zone Traffic Control” section in these Safety Standards. All Contractor employees will wear high visibility traffic vests when work activities are located adjacent to or on roads. If necessary and/or required, a flagman will be utilized to direct vehicle traffic. All Contractors installed warning signs, signals and barricades must be removed when the hazard no longer exists. The responsible Contractor shall monitor conditions to ensure timely removal of these devices.
LAUSD School Repair & Construction Site Safety Standards Page 135
Los Angeles Unified School District
66.
WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL
Contractors shall establish work area protection zones necessary to protect employees and the public when work is performed in areas where pedestrians or vehicles have access. Traffic control shall be established in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation, Part VI, Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices (MUTCD), State and local traffic control regulations, the WATCH Handbook (where referenced by contract) and/or other contract referenced documents/standards. The responsible Contractor shall establish Work Area Protection in consideration of the location of the worksite, pedestrian and traffic conditions, and the time of day (daylight or dark). All Contractor employees working in areas subject to being struck by vehicular traffic and/or heavy equipment will wear a high visibility reflective garment/vest in accordance with the requirement of the MUTCD and those Safety Standards. When placing or removing Work Area Protection the Contractor shall: • Be consistently alert to traffic conditions. • Face oncoming traffic. • Wear the required personal protection (e.g. traffic warning vest, hard hat, eye protection). Place the initial warning sign (e.g., Construction Ahead) first and remove last. Work sites must be made safe for pedestrians by using: • Rope or vinyl warning tape. • Fencing or other barricades. • Cones and signs. • Pedestrian crossing (designated and painted). • Other appropriate means, methods and devices. All night work requires adequate illumination to light the work area and warn public vehicular traffic. For night work the illumination used to light the work zone shall be aimed such that it does not create glare, or blind, the public driving through the work zone.
LAUSD School Repair & Construction Site Safety Standards Page 136
Los Angeles Unified School District
Flagging operations shall be conducted in accordance with the following unless a more specific standard applies. • The responsible Contractor shall ensure adequate protection to passing vehicles on a roadway by providing a flagger(s) when barricades, signs and signals may be insufficient. • The flagger shall be trained in the proper fundamentals of flagging (signaling) traffic before being assigned as flagger. • The flagger must be protected and the motorist forewarned by use of advance warning signs and cones. • Use cones before the flaggers position to mark the traffic lane. • All flaggers shall be required to wear a high visibility orange/yellow traffic vest. • During the hours of darkness the flaggers shall be outfitted with a reflective garment, and the flagger’s position shall be illuminated. • To Stop Traffic - The flagger shall face traffic and hold the “Stop” paddle in a vertical position at arms length. • When It Is Safe For Traffic To Proceed - The flagger shall stand parallel to the traffic movement, and with the “Slow” paddle held in a vertical position at arms length. • Flags shall be a minimum of 18” x 18” in size, and orange in color.
LAUSD School Repair & Construction Site Safety Standards Page 137
Los Angeles Unified School District
67.
PLATE BRIDGING
Trenches, excavations, or other surface openings or significant depressions must be covered with a bridge plate to permit safe and unobstructed flow of traffic. Bridging plates must be secured from movement by a holding device(s) such as cleats, angles, bolts, tack welding, etc. Bridging plates should be installed to produce a minimum amount of noise. Bridging plates must extend a minimum of one foot beyond the edges, with pavement materials feathering the edges for a reasonably smooth transition. Advance warning signs shall be posted when steel plates are used in a travel path. • Refer to the WATCH Manual (where applicable) for specific requirements.
LAUSD School Repair & Construction Site Safety Standards Page 138
Los Angeles Unified School District
68.
JOB SITE ORIENTATION FOR CONTRACTOR EMPLOYEES
Contractors/Subcontractors shall ensure employees new to the site receive a safety orientation that will address the exposure potential associated with all job tasks(s) performed and the safety procedures required to eliminate or at a minimum reduce the accident/loss potential. The orientation will, at a minimum, review the LAUSD Safety Standards and all other safety standards applicable to their scope of work. All orientations shall be documented. Records shall be maintained on the job site available for review upon request by LAUSD representatives and/or any regulatory entities. Topics may include, but are not limited to: • Explanation of LAUSD’s Safety Philosophy • Contractors’ Safety Rules, Policies and Procedures • LAUSD Safety Standards and any site specific safety rules, policies and procedures. • Site map, including entrances, exits, and parking areas • Emergency procedures • Evacuation procedures • Fire protection and prevention procedures and practices – initial site-specific training • Accident/incident reporting procedures • Near-miss Incident reporting procedures • Procedures to report unsafe acts and/or conditions • Location of First-Aid kits, medical treatment clinic(s) and hospital • Drug and alcohol policy • Location of site Bulletin Board • Day, time and location of Safety Meetings • Personal Protective Equipment requirements, including how, when and where to obtain/replace PPE • Site dress code, site access identification, code of conduct • Hazard Communication training (site-specific) • Fall Protection – initial site-specific training • Confined Spaces – initial site-specific training • Electrical Safety – initial site-specific training
LAUSD School Repair & Construction Site Safety Standards Page 139
Los Angeles Unified School District
• Ladder safety – initial site-specific training • Scaffold safety – initial site-specific training • Hot work safety – initial site-specific training • Control of hazardous energy (including Lockout-Tagout) – initial site-specific training • Site vehicle safety requirements • Housekeeping requirements • Site-Specific Public Safety requirements • MPN Form B Letter
LAUSD School Repair & Construction Site Safety Standards Page 140
Los Angeles Unified School District
69.
PUBLIC PROTECTION PLAN
The protection of students, LAUSD employees, visitors and the public from potential hazards created by construction activities on or adjacent to all LAUSD construction sites is a critical component of the LAUSD Safety Standards. Minimum Public protection shall comply with ANSI/ASSE A10-34-2001 (R2005). The Contractor shall develop a Public Protection Plan prior to the commencement of work. The Public Protection Plan shall be reviewed and revised as necessary throughout the site. • The Plan shall be in writing and available at the job site for review upon request. • For the purposes of this section, “Public” refers to parties not involved in the execution of work related to the construction site.
70.1 CONSIDERATIONS The Public Protection Plan shall consider and include at a minimum the following items as they apply to the site: (NOTE: this is neither intended nor represented to be a complete list.) • Noise • Dust, Fumes, Mists, Smoke, Vapors • Traffic hazards • Pedestrian hazards • Radiation (including lasers, x-rays, and welding rays) • Machinery and vehicles • Falling objects • Wind-borne objects • Security • Utilities • Hazardous Materials and Hazardous Substances (including use and storage) • Response to accidents/incidents involving the public • Accident/Incident reporting and investigation protocol • Public demonstrations or protests • Job site perimeter protection (fencing, barricades, etc.)
70.2 COMPONENTS The Public Protection Plan shall at minimum include the following components: • Policy statement
LAUSD School Repair & Construction Site Safety Standards Page 141
Los Angeles Unified School District
• Assignment of responsibilities • All LAUSD public safety standards/criteria outlined in these Safety Standards and other LAUSD contract documents. • Identification of existing and predictable public concerns • Provisions to monitor and inspect the implementation of the provisions of the Public Protection Plan • Provisions for incident investigation • Hazard abatement procedures
LAUSD School Repair & Construction Site Safety Standards Page 142
Los Angeles Unified School District
The following links include, but are not limited to, a Summary of Federal, State, Local and National Consensus Standards. National Consensus Standards subscriptions or documents are available for purchase through several sources. Federal OSHA Standards General Industry: http://www.osha.gov/pls/oshaweb/owasrch.search_form?p_doc_type=STANDARDS&p_toc_leve l=1&p_keyvalue=1910 Construction: http://www.osha.gov/pls/oshaweb/owasrch.search_form?p_doc_type=STANDARDS&p_toc_leve l=1&p_keyvalue=Construction Environmental: http://www.epa.gov/regulations/ State Standards Cal-OSHA http://www.dir.ca.gov/samples/search/query.htm Cal-EPA http://www.calepa.ca.gov/LawsRegs/ Local Standards LA County: http://portal.lacounty.gov/wps/portal/lac/directory National Consensus Standards Includes but not limited to those found at the following links: http://www.osha.gov/pls/oshaweb/owadisp.show_document?p_table=STANDARDS&p_id=101 25 http://www.osha.gov/pls/oshaweb/owadisp.show_document?p_table=STANDARDS&p_id=109 19 The following national Consensus Standards sites maybe useful for obtaining standards: Techstreet: http://www.techstreet.com/ IHS: http://aec.ihs.com/products/standards/safety-standards-collection.htm ANSI/ASSE: http://www.webstore.ansi.org/RecordDetail.aspx?sku=ANSI%2FASSE+A10+Construction+Pack age
LAUSD School Repair & Construction Site Safety Standards Page 143
Los Angeles Unified School District
THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY
LAUSD School Repair & Construction Site Safety Standards Page 144
~-
•
SECTION 00 7339 SMALL BUSINESS ENTERPRISES (SBE)
SMALL BUSINESS ENTERPRISES (SBE) REQUIREMENTS
1.01 A.
In accordance with the Board of Education of the City of Los Angeles (Board) adoption of a twenty-five percent (25%) participation goal for Small Business Enterprises (SBE), per contract, of the overall dollar amount of funds allocated to the schoolconstruction and modernization program, the OWNER requires bidders to submit SBE information as set forth in this section. The twenty-five percent SBE participation goal \Vill be included in each construction contract entered into related to school construction or modernization.
B.
Prior to award, listing of SBE contractors/suppliers that will be used as part ofthe project shall be submitted within five (5) days from the date of OWNER request. SBE certifications must be submitted for all listed contractors/suppliers used as part of the project. If the twenty-five percent SBE participation goal is not attained, bidder must provide documentation of good faith efforts of outreach to SBE firms. TheSBE listing form will be provided by the OWNER after bid opening. Failure to submit the SBE listing form and certifications within five (5) days from OWNER request may render the bid non-responsive.
•
•
c.
To identify or become a certified SBE participant, you may consult with the Small Business Administration website at www.sba.gov or www.pro-net.sba.gov or by contacting their office at (800)-U-ASK-SBA or by visiting the Los Angeles Unified School District Small Business Outreach Program website at www.laschools.orwfcs/sbo/.
D.
Owner advises bidders that the SBE participation percentages submitted by the bidder becomes the goal of record. The SBE participation submitted bythe bidder is an enforceable goal and OWNER reserves the right to terminate a contract for failure to adhere to the Board-mandated SBE requirements or failure to demonstrate good faith efforts to comply with such requirements.
E.
Pursuant to Public Contract Code Section 2002, the Los Angeles Unified School District Board of Education has revised its SBE policy to inClude a bid preference provision for certified SBE contractors on low bid construction contracts valued up to one million dollars ($1,000,000.00) based on the OWNER's pre-bid estimate. The preference is five percent (5%) of the lowest responsible bidder meeting specifications. This preference is used only to determine the winning bid, and does not change the actual bid or contract award amounts. Eligible bidders seeking this preference must include a copy of their current and valid SBE certificate with each bid submittal.
END OF SECTION
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR& P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
·--·-- ---- ----·--.. . .
~
...
-~-----
REVISED 01/05/2012 SMALL BUSINESS ENTERPRISES (SBE) 00 7339-1
·------ .......,.. ____ .. _._.,. _____. -··--------·""I-----·-;---:-- _________ ,......_. _____ .....
~--
. . ---:------------- ______ ':"'__ _,.._ ---------
•
SECTION 00 7349 PROJECT STABILIZATION AGREEMENT (PSA) 1.01
RELATED DOCUMENTS: ·A. B.
•
Amendment ofthe LAUSD Project Stabilization Agreement (10/01/2008) Project Stabilization Agreement (10/01/2003)
END OF SECTION
CORWINTHEATERREPAIR&P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
--~-~-·-"'"·-·-------
--~------------_..,.
____________
__.._ ______.,....._
ORIGINALLY ISSUED 10/01/2003 PROJECT STABILIZATION AGREEMENT (PSA) 00 7349-1
____ ________ .... _____..........,_ __________ ..;.
~
--------
------~
Los Angeles Unified School District FACILITIES SERVICES DIVISION
Project Stabilization Agreement
New School Construction and Major Rehabilitation For Project Work Awarded Through December 31, 2023
•
SECTION 00 9110 PRE-BID CLARIFICATION 1.01
GENERAL A.
1.02
This section addresses requests for clarifications of the Bidding Documents.
SPECIFIC A.
Each request for clarification shall be submitted in writing to only the person and/or firm designated in Section 00 3148 -Project Directory, Item E. ·
B.
Clarifications, interpretations, corrections, and changes to the Bidding Documents will be made by Addendum as provided in Section 00 9113. Clarifications, interpretations, corrections, and changes to the Bidding Documents made in any other manner shall not be binding and bidder shall not rely upon them.
C.
Each transmitted request shall contain the name of the person and/or firm filing the request, address, telephone and fax number, Specifications and/or Drawing number. Bidder is responsible for the legibility of hand written requests. Pre-bid clarification requests shall be filed a minimum of seven (7) days prior to bid opening. Requests received less than seven (7) days before bid opening shall not be considered or responded to. A written response to timely pre-bid clarifications requests will be made by Addendum issued by Facilities Construction Contracts not less than seventy-two (72) hours prior to bid opening. · DATE: _ _ _ _ _ __ PROJECT NAME:
•
LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES CONTRACTNUMBER: ____________
PROJECT NUMBER: 23.11659 TO: RICHMOND CARLTON EMAIL:
[email protected]
FROM:_~-----------------------~---ADDRESS: _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __ TELEPHONE & FAX NUMBER:-,--------------------------------------------DOCUMENT/DIVISION NUMBER: ----------~ORAWING NUMBER: __________ REQUESTED CLARIFICATION:_____________________________________
•
Attach additional numbered sheets as necessary, however, only one ( 1) request shall be contained on each submitted form.
END OF SECTION
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
REVISED 07/30/2014 PRE-BID CLARIFICATION 00 9110-1
DOCUMENT QO 9113
•
ADDENDA GENERAL 1.01
The
followin~
sets forth the format for issued Revision.
REVISION NO.1, dated 7/25/2017
RE:
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR& P.O.T. UPGRADES OWNER PROJECT NO.: 10367253 AT LOS ANGELES fiTGH SCHOOL located at 4650 West Olympic Blvd., Los Angeles, CA 90019
FROM: OWNER: LOS ANGELES UNIFIED SCHOOL DISTRICT FACILITIES CONSTRUCTION CONTRACTS 333 S. Beaudry Ave., 28°' Fl. Los Angeles, CA 90017
TO:
ALL PROSPECTIVE BIDDERS:
This Revision fmms a part of the Contract Documents and modifies the Bidding Documents elated 4126(20 17, as noted below. Acknowledge receipt of the Revision in the space provided on Document 00 4100- Bid and Acceptance Form. Failure to do so may result iri the bid being deemed non-responsive.
•
l,'he Revision consists of 0 pages, and the attached 7 drawings, Sheet No. as noted below, with the revised date of 7/25/2017. A.
CHANGES TO BIDDING REQillREMENTS TABLE OF CONTENTS: None.
B.
CHANGES TO PRIOR ADDENDUM: None. Add the following statement: OAR/Regional Director certification on impact ofDSA review on revision awaiting DSA approval:
"The DSA review of this .revision is not expected to result in a material change to the contract"·
Signature
YEG MINASSIAN Yeghishe Minassian
C.
•
'
CHANGES TO BIDDING DOCUMENTS None .
mVISION NO. I CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS 1\.NQELES HIGH SCHOOL
REVISED 11/16/2015 REVISION 00 -91 13- I
•
D:
CHANGES TO CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT: None .
1~-:.
CHANGES TO SPECIFICATIONS: None.
F.
CHANGES TO DRAWINGS (see drawings for actual revisions):
•
l.
T001 Title Sheet: At the 'Index to Drawings' added to the description of sheet number A201 to include ceiling demolition plan to this sheet. At jCodes/Standards' we removed section 3308 qS that section is not applicable to the project.
4.
A201 Corwin Theater Demolition Plan: Added additional demolition notes 28, 31, and 32 to clarify the extent of demolition at the ceiling. Revised demolition key note 7 to clarify that the existing fire sprinkler piping is to remain. Added a 'Limit of Work' line at the demolition floor plan, detaii2/A201. The 'limit of work' line clarifies the area of work at Corwin Theater. Added a new overall ceiling demolition plan, detail 3/A201.
3.
A701 Details: Added a galvanized flashing drip edge to detail 8, where the sloped plaster ceiling meets the wall tile.
4.
E101 Electrical Power and Lighting Demolition Plan: Revised demolition key notes 1 through 6 to remove existing conduit and wiring back to the 181 J-Boxwithin '10FT of conduit limit line (scope of work line}'.
5~
E201 Electrical Power Renovation Plan: Revised key notes 1 and 2 to remove existing conduit and wiring back to the 1st J-Box within '10FT of conduit limit line (scope of work line)'.
6~
FP001 Fire Protection General Notes: At 'Fire Protection Notes', removed notes 13, 14, and 15 as they are not applicable to this project. These notes are for a new fire sprinkler system and do not apply to this project as the Corwin Theater has an existing fire sprinkler system . The only change at Corwin Theater is to replace sprinkler heads due to the ceiling replacement. At 'Fire Protection Piping Bracing & Anchorage', removed notes 3 and 4 as the fire sprinkler is an existing system.
7; FP202 Fire Protection Floor Plan: Revise key note 1 to remove the last sentence 'Provide adequate support bracing at piping.'. At Corwin Theater we are using the existing approved fire sprinkler piping and not adding any new piping, so the note does not apply to this project.
G.
CHANGE TO OWNER'S DESIGN CONSULTANT: None.
H.
OTHER CHANGES AS SET FORTH: None.
I.
Clarifi~ation or any other notice of a change in the Bidding Documents will be issued only by th~ OWNER office of Facilities Construction Contracts and only in the fotm ofa written Addendum, transmitted by fax or e-mail to all who are known by the issuing office to have recejved a complete set of Bidding Documents. Any other purported Addenda are vojd and unenforceable.
END OF REVISION NO. I
,.EVlSION NO. l CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
REVISED I l/16/2015 REVISION 00 91J3c2
111001
•
SECTION 01 1100 SUMMARY OF WORK PART 1- GENERAL SECTION INCLUDES
1.01
•
A.
The furnishing of all labor, materials, equipment, services, and incidentals necessary for Work of Corwin Theater Repair & P.O.T. Upgrades at Los Angeles High School located at 4650 West Olympic Blvd, Los Angeles, California 90019, as set forth in the Construction Documents which include, but are not limited to, the Drawings, Addenda and Specifications.
B.
Special Conditions and specific scope of work Contractor to include in Bid I Contract: 1) All abatement work shall be performed by this Contractor in accordance with specification sections 02 8213, 02 8216, 02 8333 and FETU Phase I and Phase II reports (referenced as "attachment A" in these sections). If the Contractor cannot isolate this work from the public (staff/students) during the construction phase, this contractor shall perform this work school hours at no additional cost to the Owner. Capping of existing ductwork in off abatement areas from adjacent operating areas and classrooms is the responsibility of this Contractor. Contractor shall submit 10 day AQMD notification prior to start of work. 2) The CONTRACTOR shall maintain code compliant access and egress to the buildings and structures adjacent to all work/construction areas. All areas of work to be properly fenced. 3) Contractor must work all Saturdays for all construction phases and shall be identified as a work day on the Contractor's baseline schedule. 4) This project is phased in a manner so that contractor's work is isolated and shall not interrupt or interferes with required staff and student access to the work areas, adjacent buildings and classrooms during this Contractor's work. Contractor at all times shall not impact school access and operation. 5) Each construction phase must be substantially complete 14 calendar days ahead of the designated milestone date unless indicated otherwise in specification sections 0 1_1219 Appendix "A and B" to allow OAR, AOR, lOR and OEHS walk thru and issuance of beneficial occupancy for each phase .
•
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR& P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 SUMMARY OF WORK 01 1100-1
111001
•
6) Provide electronic pdfs for all submittals and shop drawings (Blue Beam). Hard copies may be considered for special circumstances. Due to expedited phasing schedule, provide submittals in an expedited manner to maintain construction phasing schedule. 7) Prior to allowing site access, Contractor shall provide the OAR with a copy of the OCIP enrollment and safety prequalification per article 1O.C for each subcontractor and sub:..tiers. 8) Site security and safety is the responsibility of the Contractor from NTP to Close-out. 9) Contractor to maintain the fire access road throughout the duration of the project per fire code. 10) Contractor is responsible for submitting as-built/record drawings as a condition of substantial completion and are subject to liquidated damages as listed in Spec 1219 Appendix A. Redline drawings will be reviewed weekly during construction and are also a condition of payment
•
11) Contractor is responsible for all temporary construction required to execute his work such as temporary barricades and sound barriers. As well as the opening and restoration of walls and ceilings (not necessarily shown on the plans but required for his work) . 12) At no point in time during the construction work in any given phase, contractor shall interrupt power to existing facilities, classrooms, offices and gym lockers throughout the campus. 13) Contractor to remove and replace exterior walls at Corwin Theater, roofing at (2) hallways and over stagecraft/changing room. All ADA Exterior Upgrades are to be completed as well. 14) Stagecraft/ Changing Room and restrooms to shut down for the entire duration due to ceiling, flooring, and wall work in (2) hallways. Contractor to provide a bin for storage. Relocation after construction is completely the responsibility of the Contractor. 15) Administration Lobby and Entrance Door hardware to be removed and replaced. New automatic door opener to be added. New ID and exit signage to be installed by contractor. Existing counters at Lobby and waiting area to be replaced and installed per ADA requirements. 16) Testing and Balancing:
•
a) At the start of the Project and no later than 15 days from Project NTP, Contractor shall conduct a field survey and perform a complete air balancing test to identify to the OAR and AE team all non-working registers, dampers, volume dampers, diffusers CORWIN THEATER REPAIR& P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011
SUMMARY OF WORK 01 1100-2
111001
•
(scheduled to remain) at Corwin Theater. Provide report to OAR and design submittal for evaluation. This activity shall be identified on the Construction baseline schedule with proper durations for submittal, review and approval. b) At the end of construction Phase 1 and prior to beneficial occupancy of such phase, Contractor shall perform testing and balancing for area of work and the areas affected by his work (for each controlled zone). Contractor is responsible for balancing each zone and shall include the adjustment of, repair and or replacement of all system components including but not limited to diffusers, dampers, registers and volume dampers. Contractor to provide Testing and Air Balance report for review and approval. 17) Plumbing: a) The removal of existing storm and overflow drain piping above ceiling at Corwin Theater and the connection with 4" storm and overflow to existing per P201 and P202. b) The removal of existing sanitary sewer piping above floor to below floor at Corwin Theater and the connection with 4" sanitary sewer to existing per P20 1 and P202.
•
c) Completion of all required work for renovation of changing room and lobby restroom per P204 . 18) Electrical: At no point in time during the construction work in any given phase, contractor shall interrupt power to existing facilities, classrooms, offices, gym lockers and classrooms throughout the campus. a) Prior to the start of the electrical work, Contractor shall survey and as-built the existing electrical service (structure (mains, boards, panels, breakers, etc.), power feed and tie-ins shown on the single line diagram and panel schedules (Refer to E-001, E002, E003, E004, E100, E101, E201, E301, E401, E402) for accuracy. Contractor shall use a licensed electrical Subcontractor to trace all power feeds I breakers from and to these panels/ boards and switchboards and identify on a plan: 1) Any discrepancy between existing and what is shown as existing on the plan, 2) Any electrical feed and ties to adjacent buildings not listed on the Single Line diagram. b) Contractor to confirm that the construction phasing as specified in 01 1219 Appendix "A, B" shall not interrupt and service or power to existing buildings and equipment(s) on campus .
•
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR& P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 SUMMARY OF WORK 01 1100-3
111001
•
c) All electrical work such as installation of all new panels, terminations at these panels, disconnects and cut-over or termination at the main boards must be completed in Construction Phase 1 (Refer to specification section 01 1219 Appendix "A, B" with the exception of the (new) equipment hook-up (Final connection only), final connections to be done at each construction phase. d) Cutover to existing service shall be done off school hours and on overtime. e) Provide all temporary power required for temporary heating, cooling and ventilation referenced above. f) Electrical phasing, cutover, energizing, testing and commissioning for each phase shall be itemized and identified on the construction baseline schedule.
g) Contractors work shall include, but not be limited to, demolishing existing electrical receptacles, lighting switches, emergency lighting fixtures, occupancy sensors, conduit and wiring back to the first J-Box within 10 feet of conduit limit line (refer to sheet E101 Add#1). Existing Source panels 'W1LC', 'W1HC' and 'W1LEB' located in storage room 11 7.
•
h) Contractors work shall include, but not be limited to, providing new conduit and wiring using same circuit to existing electrical panel for new exhaust fan EF-8 and EF -9 (refer to sheet E20 1 Add# 1) i) Contractor to confirm that the construction phasing as specified in 01 1219 Appendix B, shall not interrupt service or power to existing buildings and equipment(s) on campus. j) All required work to complete scope as shown on sheets E101, E201, E301, E401 and E402.
19) Mechanical: a) Contractors work shall include, but not be limited to, the removal and replacement of exhaust fan EF-8 rated 1120 HP, 115V, 1 Phase (refer to mechanical drawings for exact location) b) Contractors work shall include, but not be limited to, the removal and replacement of exhaust fan EF-9 rated 1/8 HP, 115V, 1 Phase (refer to mechanical drawings for exact location) c) Above work shall be completed to ensure affected rooms attain at least 12 air changes per hour in ventilation. This will ensure compliance with 2013 CMC .
•
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/0112011 SUMMARY OF WORK 01 1100-4
111001
•
d) All required work to complete scope as shown on sheets MO.Ol, M0.02, M0.03, M2.04, M2.05, M2.06 and M3.01 20) Fire Sprinkler and Fire Alarm System: The existing building is equipped with an existing fire alarm consisting of Notifier fire alarm control panel. The new system devices shall be an addressable and comply with current building and fire codes, and ADA requirement. New system devices shall be approved by local fire authority. Installation work scope includes but not necessarily limited to the following:
•
a)
Contractor is responsible for all required fire alarm work including testing of 10% of campus, programing and reprograming to achieve NFPA 72 certification. Contractor shall provide all required fire-watch during his operation. This work shall be done after hours and on weekends and shall not interfere with school operations and after hour school events.
b)
The current fire alarm work is based on an existing certified Notifier system. If contractor elects to use an alternate system devices other than Notifier, contractor have the cost of changing the entire campus system and responsible for included design cost including DSA approval (i.e. CCD-A without impacting project milestone.
c)
No later than (10) days of Contractor's start of work; Contractor shall notify the OAR of any existing system malfunction or trouble calls for assessment and repair. Contractor to trouble shoot the existing FA system to identify the malfunctions and scope to repair these malfunctions. Contractor's notification after 10 days is contractor's responsibility.
d) All fire protection systems work shall be under a contract by a licensed C 16 contractor. e) Contactor shall complete all work to comply with the latest California building code, California fire codes, NFPA 13, 24, 72, 75 and 101, California State Fire Marshall and applicable local codes, amendments and requirements. f) Contractor shall notify the building engineer prior to each and every draining or recharging of the sprinkler system.
g) Prior to any shutdown of the fire system, the contractor shall coordinate this activity with the Owner and Los Angeles Fire Department. Contractor to issue a 30 day notice prior to start date for frre system shutdown.
•
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR& P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 SUMMARY OF WORK 01 1100-5
111001
•
h) Contractor is to disregard notes 13, 14 and 15 under Fire Protection Notes on sheet FPOO 1 as these have been deleted per Addendum # 1. i) Contractor is to disregard notes 3 and 4 under Fire Protection Piping Bracing & Anchorage on sheet FPOO 1 as these have been deleted per Addendum # 1. 21) Other: Contractor to include all required demolition and reconstruction of work areas (ceilings, walls, etc.) needed to be demolished by Contractor to access and install work shown on all mechanical, plumbing and electrical plans (whether shown on the plans .or not). Contractor to take into account the existing conditions of the ceilings and walls and limit the demolition as not to impact a code upgrade to the existing walls and ceilings. Contractor can submit a plan to the OAR and AE team for review (only) if his demolition and reconstruction would trigger a code upgrade or not. The District and the AE team are not responsible for Contractor's means and methods.
1.02
RELATED REQUIREMENTS:
•
1.
Section 01 1216: Phasing of the Work.
2.
Section 01 3113: Project Coordination.
3.
Section 01 3213: Construction Schedule.
4.
Section 01 7123: Field Engineering.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not used) PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01
USE OF PREMISES A.
•
CONTRACTOR shall coordinate Work of all trades, Subcontractors, utility service providers, with OWNER and/or Separate Work Contract. CONTRACTOR shall sequence, coordinate, and perform the Work to impose minimum hardship on the operation and use of the existing facilities and/or Project site. CONTRACTOR shall install all necessary protection for existing improvements, Project site, property, and new Work against dust, dirt, weather, damage, vandalism, and maintain and relocate all protection to accommodate progression of the Work.
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 SUMMARY OF WORK 01 1100-6
Ill 001
•
•
•
B.
CONTRACTOR shall confine entrance and exiting to the Project site and/or facilities to routes designated by the OAR.
C.
Within existing facilities, OWNER will remove portable equipment, furniture, and supplies from Work areas prior to the start of Work. CONTRACTOR shall cover and protect remaining items in areas of the Work.
D.
CONTRACTOR is advised school WILL be in session during performance of the Work. CONTRACTOR shall utilize all available means to prevent generation of unnecessary noise and maintain noise levels to a minimum. When required by the OAR, CONTRACTOR shall immediately discontinue noise-generating activities and/or provide alternative methods to minimize noise generation. CONTRACTOR shall install and maintain air compressors, tractors, cranes, hoists, vehicles, and other internal combustion engine equipment with mufflers, including unloading cycle of compressors. CONTRACTOR shall discontinue operation of equipment producing objectionable noise as required by the OAR.
E.
CONTRACTOR shall furnish, install, and maintain adequate supports, shoring, and bracing to preserve structural integrity and prevent collapse of existing improvements and/or Work modified and/or altered as part of the Work.
F.
CONTRACTOR shall secure building entrances, exits, and Work areas with locking devices as required by the OAR.
G.
CONTRACTOR assumes custody and control of OWNER property, both fixed and portable, remaining in existing facilities vacated during the Work.
H
CONTRACTOR shall cover and protect surfaces of rooms and spaces in existing facilities turned over for the Work, including OWNER property remaining within as required to prevent soiling or damage from dust, dirt, water, and/or fumes. CONTRACTOR shall protect areas adjacent to the Work in a similar manner. Prior to OWNER occupancy, CONTRACTOR shall clean all surfaces including OWNER property.
I.
CONTRACTOR shall not use or allow anyone other than OWNER employees to use facility telephones and/or other equipment, except in an emergency. CONTRACTOR shall reimburse OWNER for telephone toll charges originating from the facility except those arising from emergencies or use by OWNER employees.
J.
CONTRACTOR shall protect all surfaces, coverings, materials, and finished Work from damage. Mobile equipment shall be provided with pneumatic tires.
K.
CONTRACTOR is advised OWNER will award Separate Work Contracts at this Project site .
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR& P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/0112011 SUMMARY OF WORK 01 1100-7
111001
•
L.
CONTRACTOR shall not permit the use of portable and/or fixed radio's or other types of sound producing devices including walkmans and similar devices. PROPERTY INVENTORY
3.02 A.
Property, OWNER intends to remove; will be removed by OWNER before a room or space is vacated for the Work. Before performing Work in each room or space, OAR and CONTRACTOR shall prepare a detailed initial written inventory of OWNER property remaining within, including equipment and telephone instruments and the condition thereof. OAR and CONTRACTOR shall retain a signed copy of the inventory dated and signed by both parties. Prior to subsequent OWNER occupancy of each such room or space, OAR and CONTRACTOR shall perform a final inventory of OWNER property and all discrepancies between the initial inventory and final inventory shall be the responsibility of CONTRACTOR.
END OF SECTION
•
•
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 SUMMARY OF WORK 01 1100-8
SECTION 01 1216 PHASING OF THE WORK
PART 1- GENERAL 1.01
SECTION INCLUDES A.
1.02
Requirements for phasing of Work include logistics, phasing, and completion of designated phases prior to commencement of subsequent phases. RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
Section 01 1100: Summary of Work.
B.
Section 01 1219: Phasing of Work - Appendix A.
C.
Section 01 3300: Submittal Procedures.
D.
Section 0 1 3113: Project Coordination.
E.
Section 01 3213: Construction Schedule.
F.
Section 01 7700: Contract Closeout.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not used) PART 3- EXECUTION SUBMITTALS
3.01 A.
CONTRACTOR shall submit a Project site logistics plans in accordance with and as required by this Section. LOGISTICS
3.02 A.
Prior to commencement of Work, CONTRACTOR shall prepare and submit to OAR, a detailed Project site logistic plan, in same size and scale of Drawings, setting forth CONTRACTOR plan of Work relative to following, but not limited to, items: 1
Hauling route shall be in accordance with local ordinances a truck access route to and from Project site.
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR& P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/0112011 PHASING OF THE WORK 01 1216-1
2.
The identification of any overhead wue restrictions for power, street lighting, signal or cable.
3.
Local sidewalk access and street closure requirements.
4.
Protection of sidewalk pedestrians and vehicular traffic.
5.
Project site fencing and access gate locations.
6.
Construction parking.
7.
Material staging or delivery areas.
8.
Material storage areas.
9.
Temporary trailer locations.
10.
Temporary service location and proposed routing of all temporary utilities.
11.
Location of temporary or accessible fire protection.
12.
Trash removal and location of dumpsters.
13.
Concrete pumping locations.
14.
Crane locations.
15.
Location of portable sanitary facilities.
16.
Mixer truck wash out locations.
17.
Traffic control signage.
18.
Perimeter and site lighting.
19.
Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan- SWPPP.
20.
Stockpile or lay down areas.
21.
Security lighting
B.
Revised Project site logistic plan may be required by OAR for separately identified phases of Work as set forth in this Section.
C.
CONTRACTOR is responsible for securing and/or obtaining all approvals and permits from authorities having jurisdiction relative to any activities set forth in Article 3.02.A.
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR& P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/0112011
PHASING OF THE WORK 01 1216-2
PHASING OF THE WORK
3.03 A.
Project will be constructed in separate Milestone increments, as identified or as described in this Section or Contract Documents. Phasing will also delineate Work to be completed in each designated phase. Unless otherwise approved or directed by OWNER, each phase shall be completed according to approved Baseline Schedule prior to commencement of next subsequent phase. CONTRACTOR shall incorporate and coordinate Work of Separate Work Contracts relative to this Project into the Phasing and Construction Schedule.
B.
CONTRACTOR shall install all necessary Work for, but not limited to, power, lighting, signal, HVAC, drainage, and plumbing systems in phased Work before completion of designated phase. All valves, pull boxes, stub outs, temporary capping, and other Work necessary for phased completion and operation of all necessary systems shall be provided whether or not such Work is specifically identified in Contract Documents. PHASING OF THE WORK- GENERAL
3.04 A.
CONTRACTOR shall prepare Construction Schedule in order to complete Work and related activities in accordance with phasing plan as established in Appendix "A". CONTRACTOR shall include all costs to complete all Work within Milestones or Contract Time.
B.
OWNER will be seriously damaged by not having all Work completed within Milestones or Contract Time. It is mandatory Work be complete within Milestones or Contract Time. PHASING OF THE WORK- SPECIFIC
3.05 A.
B.
CONTRACTOR shall prepare Construction Schedule, and shall complete following, but not limited to Milestones, as shown in Section 01 1219 - Appendix A and within designated phases in accordance with following: 1.
Phase 1 Mobilization- 15 calendar days: Milestones 3.
2.
Phase 2 Construction- 365 calendar days: Milestones 3, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11 and 12
3.
Phase 3 Administrative Closeout- 30 calendar days: Milestone 13.
The Contract Time shall be a total of 395 calendar days from date of commencement of Contract Time. END OF SECTION
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR& P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 PHASING OF THE WORK 01 1216-3
•
•
IIIOOI •
01 1219- PHASING OF THE WORK APPENDIX A- MILESTONES CONTRACTOR shall commence performance of the Contract upon the date specified in the Notice to Proceed and shall furnish sufficient forces, facilities and materials, work such hours, including extra shifts and overtime operations, so as to fully perform the Work in accordance with the following Milestones. • •
Referenced plans here-in gives the Contractor a guideline of work areas for each phase. Contractor to coordinate other disciplines not listed here-in. Scope of work noted here-in do not necessarily include the entire Scope of Work. Contractor to detail the entire scope of work for each phase in the baseline schedule.
Description
Milestone
Schedule
Liquidated Damages Amount Per Calendar Day
No.1
Notice to Proceed: Is established in accordance with Articles 1.34 and 2.2 of the As determined in the NTP. General Conditions.
No.2
Critical ShoQ Drawings & Submittals ComQlete: Is defined as CONTRACTOR 30 calendar days $ 750.00/day prepared Shop Drawings and Submittals that are either critical or near critical to the after the effective overall Substantial Completion of the Project. Milestones may include, but not be date of the NTP. limited to, mechanical and electrical/fire alarm equipment or any long lead fabrication/procurement item requiring Shop Drawings. -
----
*Milestone date to be determined by CONTRACTOR during development of the Construction Schedule and submitted to the OAR for approval.
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR& P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/0 I /20 II PHASING OF THE WORK APPENDIX A..__ OI I2I9-l
111001
Milestone No.3
•
•
•
Liquidated Damages Amount Per Description Schedule Calendar Day Completion of Mobilization activities: Is defined as CONTRACTOR mobilization 15 calendar days I $ 750 ·00 /day completed, logistics plan submittal and approval (access, gates, parking, trailer after the effective locations, signage), site fencing complete, temporary offices complete (trailers- fully date of the NTP. functional with furniture, office equipment, network connection and office supplies., storage bins, dumpsters), temporary Utilities complete (water, electric, phone, sanitation~ fire protection), Project signage complete, obtain all required permits, implementation of Storm Water Pollution Prevention measures, submission of CONTRACTOR Safety Plan as per OCIP, submission of CONTRACTOR Hazard Communication Plan as per OCIP.
I
I
No.4
Baseline Schedule Complete: Is defined as an OAR approved baseline schedule that 30 calendar days meets all the requirements outlined in Division 01 Sections 01 3213 and 01 1216. after the effective date of the NTP.
No.5
Construction Phase 1: All work at Corwin Theater as defined in the Contract documents and shown diagrammatically on Appendix B. Work is to include, but not necessarily be limited to, the removal and replacement of exterior walls at Hallways 113 and 114. The removal of tile and plaster roofing down to existing metal roof deck at Hallways 113, 114 and down to existing concrete topping (over metal roof deck) at stagecraft/dressing rooms. Then the replacement of quarry tile roofing over specified waterproof system at same. Perform demolition and replace flooring, wall and ceiling finishes at both Hallways as well as at stagecraft/dressing rooms. Remodel changing rooms and restrooms per A204 to make accessible. Perform all fire alarm scope per sheets FA001, FA002, FA101 and FA201. Complete fire sprinkler work per FP001, FP101, FP201 and FP202. Complete all required work to attain NFP 13 F.S. and F.A. certification.
1
$ 750.00/day
190 calendar I $ 75 0.00/day days after the effective date of the NTP.
*Milestone date to be determined by CONTRACTOR during development of the Construction Schedule and submitted to the OAR for approval.
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/20 II PHASING OF THE WORK APPENDIX A 01 1219-2
....
111001
Milestone
No.6
No.7
No.8
No.9
No. 10
No. 11
•
•
•
Liquidated Damages Amount Per Description Schedule Calendar Day Beneficial OccuQancy for Construction Phase 1: OAR, lOR, OEHS and AOR walk 190 calendar $ 750.00/day for Punch-list and occupancy. days after the NTP. Construction Phase 2: Work includes, but is not limited to, removal of existing 250 calendar $ 750.00/day entrance hardware and replacing with automatic door opener with interior/exterior days after the wall switches per A205. Complete corresponding electrical work. Install accessible NTP and shall counters at lobby and main office. Replace closer and panic bar at east and south not start prior to sides of lobby. Install new steel posts under trophy case and exit signage. completion of Milestone 6 $ 750.00/day Beneficial OccuQancy for Construction Phase 2: OAR, lOR, OEHS and AOR walk 250 calendar for Punch-list and occupancy. days after the NTP $ 750.00/day Construction Phase 3A: All of the exterior ADA work including parking. Work at 250 calendar sloped walkway to entry gates is to include the removal of paving and installation of days after the an accessible ramp. Removal and replacement of the detectable warning surface NTP area. See A102 and A103 for additional scope. Contractor shall be ready for punchlist walk and OAR acceptance prior to issuing Substantial Completion. $ 750.00/day Beneficial OccuQancy for Construction Phase 3A: OAR, lOR, OEHS and AOR walk 250 calendar days after the for Punch-list and occupancy. NTP
Construction Phase 3B: Remove and replace handrails and install new handrails as 365 well as stair striping at main stairs leading to administration building. Work includes days the removal of pavers and installation of an accessible ramp. Also, the removal and NTP
calendar after the - -
---
-
*Milestone date to be determined by CONTRACTOR during development of the Construction Schedule and submitted to the OAR for approval.
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 PHASING OF THE WORK APPENDIX A 01 1219-3
111001
Milestone
No. 12
No. 13
•
•
•
Description replacement of gate hardware. Installation of new quarry tiles where indicated. Additional work includes saw cutting and removal of existing tile/concrete paving, removal of existing tree, removal/relocation of existing yard box, removal of existing partial height site wall and removal of existing turf for new accessible walk (see A105). Adjust existing cleanout, provide new concrete paving and all signage as shown on A105. Contractor shall be ready for punchlist walk and OAR acceptance prior to issuing Substantial Completion.
Liquidated Damages Amount Per Calendar Day
Schedule
$ 750.00/day Substantial Completion: Is established in accordance with Article 14.13-14 of the 365 calendar General Conditions. days after the effective date of the NTP. $ 750.00/day Contract Completion: Is established in accordance with Article 14.20 of the General 395 calendar days after the Conditions. effective date of the NTP. ---
-
---
I
-
END OF SECTION
* Milestone date to be determined by CONTRACTOR during development of the Construction Schedule and submitted to the OAR for approval. CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 PHASING OF THE WORK APPENDIX A 01 1219-4
•.)
•
..
~ .,.~
LOS ANGELES UNIFIED SCHOOL DISTRICT ·M&O·AIE SERVICES FACILITIES SERVICES DIVISION 333 S. BEAUDRY AVEtruE. ZZND FLOOR
..
Los Angelos High School
calendar days duration- (START 11/23/17- FINISH 6/1/18) AFTER HOURS
lf _
H "
11
. REMOVE AND REPLACE EXTERIOR WALLS AT (2) HALLWAYS REMOVE AND REPLACE ROOFING AT (2) HALLWAYS AND OVER ECRAFT/CHANGING ROOM. . PLACE FLOORING, WALL AND CEILING FINISHES AT (2) HALLWAYS. ~~PAINT STAGECRAFTS WALLS AND CEILING. 4. REMODEL CHANGING ROOMS AND RESTROOMS TO MAKE ACCESSIBLE
60 calendar days duration (START 6/2118- FINISH 8/1/18) REGULAR HOURS ~' ·--· ------.. -·~; A l ; : j 1 . ALL OF THE EXTERIOR ADA WORK INCLUDING PARKING AND SIGNAGE. PHASE 38 174 calendar days duration (START 6/2118- FINISH 11/23/18) AFTER HOURS " • 1ST ... ,.0 n.. ARCADE , ., , , • 1. AT MAIN STAIRS LEADING TO ADMIN BUILDING REMOVE AND REPLACE HANDRAILS AND INSTALL NEW. PROVIDE STAIR STRIPING . .._ . REMOVAL OF PAVERS AND INSTALLATION OF AN ACCESSIBLE RAMP. REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT OF GATE HARDWARE. INSTALLATION OF NEW QUARRY TILES WHERE INDICATED. SAW CUTIING/REMOVAL OF EXISTING TILE AND REPLACING WITH CONCRETE PAVING. REMOVAURELOCATION OF EXISTING YARD BOX. REMOVAL OF EXISTING PARTIAL HEIGHT SITE WALL AND EXISTING TURF FOR NEW ACCESSIBLE WALK.
-~~~
Phasing of the Work- Appendix 8
.
)J
DATES DEPENDENT UPON 11/23/17 NTP
111001
•
SECTION 01 2513 PRODUCT SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01
SECTION INCLUDES A.
1.02
•
This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for handling requests for substitutions submitted 60 days after the date established in the Notice of Award and pursuant to Article 6.14 ofthe General Conditions. RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
Section 01 3239: Project Forms.
B.
Section 01 3300: Submittal Procedures.
C.
Section 01 6000: Product Requirements.
D.
Section 01 7700: Contract Closeout.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS (Not used) PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01
APPLICATION A.
3.02
•
CONTRACTOR proposed changes in products or materials required by the Contract Documents 60 days or more after the Notice of Award are considered to be requests for substitutions. OAR will consider requests for substitution if a product is no longer manufactured or the OAR and ARCHITECT, after a diligent search have verified that product or material is not available to CONTRACTOR. The following are not considered to be valid requests for substitutions: 1.
Revisions to the Contract Documents requested by OAR or ARCHITECT.
2.
Specified options of products included in the Contract Documents.
3.
Substitutions requested on a "or equal" basis.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Transmit submittals as described m related Sections for each request for substitution.
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 PRODUCT SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES 01 2513-1
Ill 001
•
•
•
1.
Identify the product to be replaced in each request. Include related Specification Section and Drawing number.
2.
Provide complete documentation denoting compliance with the requirements for substitutions, and the following information, as appropriate. a.
A detailed comparison of significant qualities of the proposed substitution with those specified in the Contract Documents. Significant qualities may include elements, such as performance, weight, size, durability, and visual effect.
b.
Product Data, including Drawings, descriptions of products, fabrication, and installation procedures.
c.
Samples, where applicable or requested.
d.
CONTRACTOR certification the proposed substitution conforms to requirements of the Contract Documents in every respect and is appropriate for the applications indicated.
e.
CONTRACTOR waiver of rights to an increase in the Contract Amount, Milestones and/or Contract Time that may subsequently become necessary because of the failure of the substitution to adequately perform.
3.
If required, ARCHITECT will request additional information or documentation for evaluation. OAR will notify CONTRACTOR of acceptance or rejection of the substitution.
4.
ARCHITECT will review and consider request for substitution and provide a recommendation to OAR
5.
Where a proposed substitution involves and/or affects more than one Subcontractor, CONTRACTOR shall ensure each Subcontractor cooperates with the other Subcontractor involved to coordinate the Work, provide uniformity and consistency, and assure compatibility of all products.
6.
CONTRACTOR submittal and ARCHITECT review of Shop Drawings, Product Data, material lists or Samples do not constitute an acceptable or valid request for substitution. END OF SECTION
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR& P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 PRODUCT SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES 01 2513-2
111001
•
SECTION 01 2613 REQUEST FOR CLARIFICATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01
SECTION INCLUDES A.
1.02
•
•
Procedure for requesting clarification of the intent of the Contract Documents. RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
Section 01 1100: Summary of Work.
B.
Section 01 3113: Project Coordination.
C.
Section 01 3213: Construction Schedule.
D.
Section 01 3239: Project Forms.
E.
Section 01 7700: Contract Closeout.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS (Not used) PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01
PROCEDURE A.
CONTRACTOR shall prepare a Request for Clarification on the form provided in Section 01 3239. CONTRACTOR shall transmit the Request for Clarification to ARCHITECT with a concurrent copy to the OAR.
B.
ARCHITECT response is a clarification of the intent of the Contract Documents and does not authorize changes in the Contract Amount, Milestones and/or Contract Time.
C.
A Request for Clarification may be returned with a stamp or notation "Not Reviewed," if:
D.
1.
The requested clarification is ambiguous or unclear.
2.
The requested clarification is equally available to the requesting party by researching and/or examining the Contract Documents.
3.
CONTRACTOR has not reviewed the Request for Clarification pnor to submittal.
Allow a minimum of nine days for review and response time, after receipt by ARCHITECT and OAR. CONTRACTOR shall verify and is responsible in verifying ARCHITECT and OAR receipt ofa Request for Clarification.
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR& P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 REQUEST FOR CLARIFICATION 01 2613 -1
111001
•
E.
Changes or alterations to the approved drawings or specifications shall be made by means of addenda or change orders as per section 4-338 of the California Building Standards Commission's, California Administrative Code. END OF SECTION
•
•
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 REQUEST FOR CLARIFICATION 01 2613 -2
120117
•
SECTION 01 2973 SCHEDULE OF VALUES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01
SECTION INCLUDES A.
Procedure for submission of a certified Schedule of Values for review and approval by the OAR. RELATED REQUIREMENTS
1.02
•
A.
Section 01 2100: Allowances.
B.
Section 01 2300: Alternates (Bid Items).
C.
Section 01 2976: Progress Payment Procedures.
D.
Section 01 3113: Project Coordination.
E.
Section 01 3213: Construction Schedule.
E.
Section 01 3229: Project Forms.
F.
Section 01 3300: Submittal Procedures.
PART 2- PRODUCTS (Not used)
PART 3- EXECUTION PREPARATION
3.01
•
A.
Upon receipt of the Notice of Intent to Award, CONTRACTOR shall commence preparation of a Schedule of Values in accordance with the form included in Section 01 3229.
B.
CONTRACTOR shall coordinate the preparation of a Schedule of Values with preparation of the Construction Schedule as set forth in Section 3213. The .. corresponding values from the specification division totals on cost loaded schedule shall match with the approved Schedule of Values.
C.
Include the following Project identification on a certified Schedule ofValues:
or
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
01117/2013 SCHEDULE OF VALUES 01 2973-1
120117
• D.
•
•
1.
Project name and location.
2.
Project Number.
3.
Contract#.
4.
CONTRACTOR name.
5.
Date of Submittal.
The Schedule of Values shall be in tabular form with separate columns and shall include the following items: 1.
Related Specification Section and Division.
2.
Description of Work.
3.
Name of Subcontractor, manufacturer or supplier.
4.
Dollar value, quantity and unit of measure of each line item.
5.
Percentage of Contract amount to nearest one-hundredth percent, adjusted to total 100 percent.
E.
Round amounts to the nearest whole dollar; the total shall equal the Contract Amount.
F.
Provide a breakdown of the Contract Amount in enough detail acceptable to OAR to facilitate continued evaluation of Application for Payment and progress reports. Coordinate with the Project Manual table of content and Schedule of Values form under Section 01 3229. Provide line items for subcontract amounts, where appropriate.
G.
Provide separate line items for items in the Schedule of Values for total installed value of that part of the Work.
H.
Provide separate line item for labor and material when required by the OAR.
I.
Each item in the Schedule of Values and Applications for Payment shall be complete. Include total cost and proportionate share of general overhead and profit for each item except the amounts shown as separate line items as indicated under Schedule of Values form under Section 01 3229.
J.
Temporary facilities and other cost items that are not direct cost of actual work-inplace shall be shown as separate line items as indicated under Schedule of Values form under Section 01 3229.
K.
An approved certified Schedule of Values shall serve as the basis for the monthly certified Application for Payment.
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
01/17/2013 SCHEDULE OF VALUES 01 2973-2
120117
•
L.
3.02
•
If at any time, OWNER determines, in its reasonable discretion, that the schedule of Values does not approximate the actual cost being incurred by CONTRACTOR to perform the Work, CONTRACTOR shall prepare, for OAR approval, a revised Schedule of Values, which then shall be used as the basis for future progress payments. Without changing the Contract Amount, OWNER reserves the right to require CONTRACTOR: 1.
To increase or decrease amounts within the line items in the Schedule of Values; and,
2.
To conform the price breakdown to OWNER accounting practice.
SUBMITTAL
A.
CONTRACTOR shall submit five certified copies of a Schedule of Values for review and approval by the OAR at least 14 days before the first Application for Payment.
B.
OAR will review and if necessary, return the submitted Schedule of Values with summary comments noting items not in compliance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. CONTRACTOR shall revise the submitted Schedule of Values and return five copies within three days of receipt of summary comments.
C.
Signature by OAR shall constitute acceptance ofthe submitted Schedule of Values.
D.
An approved copy of the Schedule of Values by OAR will be transmitted to CONTRACTOR, and Inspector.
END OF SECTION
•
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR& P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
01/17/2013 SCHEDULE OF VALUES 01 2973-3
120727
•
SECTION 01 2976 PROGRESSPAYMENTPROCEDURES PART 1- GENERAL SECTION INCLUDES:
1.01 A.
This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for a certified Application for Payment. 1.
'1.02
•
Coordinate the certified Schedule of Values and certified Application for Payment with, but not limited to, the Construction Schedule, submittal log, and list of Subcontractors.
RELATED REQUIREMENTS: A.
Section 01 2100: Allowances.
B.
Section 01 2300: Alternates (Bid Items).
C.
Section 01 2973: Schedule of Values.
D.
Section 01 3213: Construction Schedule.
E.
Section 01 3229: Project Forms.
F.
Section 01 7700: Contract Closeout.
PART 2- PRODUCTS (Not used) PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01
APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT A.
Each certified Application for Payment shall be consistent with previous applications and payments as reviewed by OAR, paid for by OWNER, and: 1.
B.
•
The initial Application for Payment and Final Application for Payment at time of Substantial Completion involve additional requirements.
Payment Application Times: The period of Work covered by each Application for Payment is payment date for each progress payment as specified in the General Conditions. The period covered by each Application for Payment is previous month.
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR& P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
07/27/2012 PROGRESS PAYMENT PROCEDURES 01 2976-1
120727
•
C.
Payment Application Forms: Use OWNER provided forms for the Application for Payment.
D.
Application Preparation: Complete every entry on the form. Include execution by a person authorized to sign legal documents on behalf of CONTRACTOR. OAR will return incomplete applications without action.
E.
Transmittal: Submit a minimum of four signed and original copies of each certified Application for Payment to OAR. All copies shall be complete, including releases and similar attachments. 1.
F.
•
•
Transmit each copy with a transmittal form listing attachments and recording appropriate information related to the application, in a manner acceptable to OAR.
Initial Application for Payment within 60 days of issuance of Notice to Proceed: Administrative actions and submittals, that must precede or coincide with submittal for first certified Application for Payment include, but are not limited to, the following: 1.
Certified Schedule of Values.
2.
Performance and payment bonds.
3.
List of principal suppliers and fabricators.
4.
Worker Compensation certificates, if applicable.
5.
Auto Insurance, if applicable.
6.
Hazardous Material Insurance Certificates, if applicable.
7.
Construction Schedule.
8.
Submittal Schedule.
9.
Emergency Contact List.
10.
Copies of authorizations and licenses from govemmg authorities for performance of Work.
11.
Certified Payroll (Submitted directly to Labor Compliance in electronic format as specified by OWNER including hard copy).
12.
Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan (SWPPP).
13 .
Certification of Compliance with CEQA Mitigations.
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
07/27/2012 PROGRESS PAYMENT PROCEDURES 01 2976-2
120727
•
G.
H.
•
Applications for Payment: Administrative actions and submittals that must precede or coincide with submittal of Progress Applications for Payment include, but are not limited to, the following: 1.
Certified Payroll (submitted directly to Labor Compliance in electronic format as specified by OWNER including hard copy).
2.
Updated and current Project Record Drawings (as-built).
3.
Monthly Construction Schedule (updated, submitted and approved).
4.
Approved Schedule ofValues.
5.
List of Subcontractors (Payments Summary).
6.
Storm Water Pollution Prevention (SWPP)- Site Monitoring Report.
7.
Certification of Compliance with CEQA Mitigations.
Final Application for Payment at Substantial Completion: Following OAR issuance. of certificate of Substantial Completion, submit an Application for Payment: 1.
Administrative actions, submittals and/or Work that shall precede or coincide with this application include: a.
Occupancy permits and similar approvals by authorities having legal jurisdiction over Work..
b.
Removal of temporary facilities and services.
c.
Testing, adjusting and balance records.
d.
Removal of surplus materials, rubbish, and similar elements.
e.
Meter readings.
f.
Start-up performance reports.
g.
OWNER training and orientations .
. _ h.
•
Operating and maintenance instruction manuals.
1.
Preliminary Warranties, guarantees and maintenance agreements.
J.
Delivery of extra materials, products and or stock.
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
07/27/2012 PROGRESS PAYMENT PROCEDURES 01 2976-3
120727
•
•
k.
Change over information related to OWNER occupancy, use, operation, and maintenance.
1.
Final cleaning.
m.
Ensure that Work is completed.
n.
Advise on shifting insurance coverage.
o.
List of defective Work, recognized as exceptions to certificate of Substantial Completion.
p.
Change of door locks, including keys, to OWNER system.
q.
Certified Payroll (submitted directly to Labor Compliance m electronic format as specified by the OWNER including hard copy).
r.
Certification that all benefit contributions due and owing to appropriate union trusts has been paid by CONTRACTOR and Subcontractors, as specified by the Project Stabilization Agreement (PSA) and Article 6.49 of the General Conditions.
s.
Storm Water Pollution Prevention - Site Monitoring Reports, SWPP revlSlons, compliance certifications, and Notice of Termination (NOT) (see Section 01 7416).
t.
Certification of Compliance with CEQA Mitigations.
u.
Waivers and releases for CONTRACTOR.
END OF SECTION
•
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
07/27/2012 PROGRESS PAYMENT PROCEDURES 01 2976-4
111001
•
SECTION 01 3113 PROJECT COORDINATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01
SECTION INCLUDES A.
1.02.
•
This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements necessary for coordinating Work operations including, but not limited to, the following: 1.
General coordination procedures.
2.
Coordination drawings.
RELATED REQUIREMENTS A.
Section 01 1216: Phasing of the Work.
B.
Section 01 3213: Construction Schedule.
C.
Section 01 3300: Submittal Procedures.
D.
Section 01 4523: Test and Inspection.
E
Section 01 4525: Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC.
F.
Section 01 7700: Contract Closeout.
PART 2- PRODUCTS (Not used) PART 3- EXECUTION COORDINATION
3.01 A.
CONTRACTOR shall coordinate operations included in various sections of Contract Documents to assure efficient and orderly installation of each part of Work. Coordinate Work operations included under related sections of Contract Documents that depend on each other for proper installation, connection, and operation of Work, including but not limited to: 1.
•
Schedule construction operations in sequence required where installation of one part of Work depends on installation of other components, before or after its own installation .
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 PROJECT COORDINATION 01 3113-1
Ill 00 l
• B.
2.
Coordinate installation of different components to assure max1mum accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair.
3.
Provide provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation.
4.
Prepare and administer provisions for coordination drawings.
Where necessary, prepare memoranda for distribution to each party involved, outlining special procedures required for coordination. Include such items as required in notices, reports, attendance at meetings, and: 1.
C.
• D.
Administrative Procedures: Coordinate scheduling and tlmmg of required administrative procedures with other construction activities to avoid conflicts and assure orderly progress of Work. Such administrative activities include, but are not limited to, following: 1.
Preparation of schedules.
2.
Installation, relocation, and removal of temporary facilities.
3.
Delivery and processing of submittals .
4.
Progress meetings.
5.
Project closeout activities.
Conservation: Coordinate Work operations to assure operations are carried out with consideration given to conservation of energy, water, materials, and: 1.
3.02
Salvage materials and equipment involved in performance of, but not actually incorporated into Work.
SUBMITTALS A.
•
Prepare similar memoranda for OAR and Separate Work Contract where coordination of their Work is required.
Coordination Drawings: CONTRACTOR shall prepare coordination drawings to coordinate the installation of products and materials fabricated, furnished and installed by separate entities, under different parts of the Contract. CONTRACTOR shall notify OAR and ARCHITECT of all major conflicts in writing in a timely manner so that the design team can respond without construction delays. Coordination drawings shall address the following at a mm1mum:
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR& P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 PROJECT COORDINATION 013113-2
111001
•
•
•
B.
1.
Limitations in available space for installation or service. CONTRACTOR shall overlay plans of each trade and verify space requirements and conflicts between trades. Minor changes and adjustments that do not affect design intent shall be made by CONTRACTOR and shall be highlighted for ARCHITECT'S review.
2.
Incompatibility between items provided under different trades (such as difference in voltage between equipment specified under Divisions 22 and 23 and electrical power provided under Division 26.)
3.
Inconsistencies between drawings, specifications and codes (between trades and within each trade).
4.
Additional items required for existing facilities construction projects shall be designed and prepared from available as-built drawings that are verified through non-invasive and non-destructive, visual observation only. CONTRACTOR shall field verify actual existing conditions during and upon completion of demolition work and incorporate findings into preparation of co-ordination drawings. Minor changes and adjustments that do not affect design intent shall be made by Sub-Contractor and shall be highlighted for OAR and ARCHITECT'S reviews.
Prepare coordination drawings in CAD with each trade on a separate layer, in specified color and scale. CONTRACTOR and each Subcontractor shall provide and forward reproducible copies and CAD drawing files in the order described here: 1.
Structural shop drawings shall indicate location and sizes of columns, beams and other structural members, as well as wall, roof and slab penetrations, and will be provided to mechanical, electrical, low voltage and plumbing Sub-contractors for co-ordination. Structural items shall be indicated using black lines.
2.
HV AC Subcontractor will indicate all ductwork, piping and equipment complete with installation and dimensioned service clearances, duct and pipe sizes, fitting types and sizes, top or bottom of duct and pipe elevations, distances of ducts, pipes and equipment from building reference points and hanger and support locations. Minor changes and adjustments that do not affect design intent shall be made by Subcontractor and shall be highlighted for OAR and ARCHITECT'S reviews. Forward drawings to plumbing Subcontractor for further coordination. HVAC items shall be indicated using orange lines.
3.
Plumbing Subcontractor will indicate all plumbing lines, and equipment complete with installation and dimensioned service clearances, pipe sizes,
CORWINTHEATERREPAIR& P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/0112011 PROJECT COORDINATION 013113-3
111001
•
fitting types and sizes, top or bottom of pipe elevations, distances of pipes and equipment from building reference points and hanger/support locations Co-ordinate with HV AC Subcontractor. Minor changes and adjustments that do not affect design intent shall be made by Subcontractor and shall be highlighted for OAR and ARCHITECT'S reviews. Upon completion drawings shall be forwarded to Fire Sprinkler Subcontractor for further co-ordination. All Plumbing items shall be indicated using blue lines. 4.
Fire sprinkler Subcontractor will indicate fire sprinkler p1pmg and equipment complete with installation and dimensioned service clearances, pipe sizes, fitting types and sizes, top or bottom of pipe elevations, distances of pipes and equipment from building reference points and hanger or support locations. Co-ordinate with Plumbing and HV AC Subcontractors. Minor changes and adjustments that do not affect design intent shall be made by sub-contractors and shall be highlighted for OAR and ARCHITECT'S reviews. Upon completion drawings shall be forwarded to Electrical CONTRACTOR for further co-ordination. Fire sprinkler equipment shall be indicated using red lines.
5.
Electrical and Low Voltage Subcontractors will indicate service and feeder conduit runs and other electrical equipment complete, including low voltage with installation and dimensioned service clearances, sizes, top or bottom of conduit and rack elevations, distances of conduits and equipment from building reference points and hanger and support locations. Co-ordinate with Fire Sprinkler, Plumbing and HV AC Subcontractors. Minor changes and adjustments that do not affect design intent shall be made by sub-contractors and shall be highlighted for OAR and ARCHITECT'S reviews. Upon completion drawings shall be forwarded to CONTRACTOR for further co-ordination. Electrical work shall be indicated in dark green lines. Low voltage work shall be indicated in light green lines.
6.
CONTRACTOR will be responsible for the overall coordination review. As each coordination drawing is completed, CONTRACTOR will meet with OAR to review and resolve all conflicts on coordination drawings.
7.
Coordination meetings will be held in Project field office of CONTRACTOR. CONTRACTOR is required to distribute Shop Drawings, cut sheets and submittals to Subcontractors where appropriate. Reviewed coordination drawings will be maintained in Project field office of CONTRACTOR. Meeting minutes shall be developed by CONTRACTOR and submitted to OAR within 5 days.
•
•
.U1
~vnv 10/01/2011
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR& P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
PROJECT COORDINATION 01 3113-4
111001
•
SECTION013119 PROJECT MEETINGS PART 1- GENERAL SECTION INCLUDES
1.01 A.
1.02
•
This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for Project meetings, including but not limited to, the following: 1.
Job start meeting.
2.
Pre-installation conferences.
3.
Progress meetings.
4.
Meetings as required by OAR.
RELATED REQUIREMENTS A.
Section 01 1216: Phasing of the Work.
B.
Section 01 3113: Project Coordination.
C.
Section 01 3213: Construction Schedule.
D.
Section 01 3239: Project Forms.
E.
Section 01 3300: Submittal Procedures.
PART 2- PRODUCTS (Not used) PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01
•
JOB START MEETING A.
In accordance with General Conditions Article 2.6, OAR will schedule a job start meeting before starting the Work, at a time and date determined by OAR. Meeting shall be held at the Project site or another location as determined by OAR. Meeting will be held in order to review responsibilities, procedures, and other administrative requirements contained within the Contract Documents.
B.
Authorized representatives of OWNER, INSPECTOR, ARCHITECT, CONTRACTOR and other parties shall attend the meeting. All participants at the
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR& P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 PROJECT MEETINGS 01 3119-1
IIIOOI
•
•
•
meeting shall be familiar with the Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work. C.
Agenda items shall include significant items which could affect progress of the Work, including, but not limited to the following: 1.
Preliminary Construction Schedule.
2.
Critical work sequencing.
3.
Designation of responsible personnel.
4.
Identification of OAR.
5.
Procedures for processing field decisions.
6.
Request for Proposal.
7.
Request for Clarification.
8.
Construction Directive and Change Order.
9.
Procedures for processing Applications for Payment.
10.
Prevailing wages.
11.
Submittal and review of Shop Drawings, Product Data, material lists, and Samples.
12.
Preparation of project record documents.
13.
Use of the Project site and/or premises.
14.
Parking availability.
15.
Office, work, and storage areas.
16.
Equipment deliveries and priorities.
17.
Safety procedures.
18.
First Aid.
19.
Security.
20.
Housekeeping.
21.
Working hours. I 0/01/20 II
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR& P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
PROJECT MEETINGS 013119-2
111001
• D.
Contract Compliance Officer.
23.
Insurance Services including OCIP.
24.
Environmental Health and Safety.
25.
Substantial Completion, Administrative Completion requirements and procedures.
26.
Procedures for Mandatory Dispute and Claim Resolution.
27.
Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan (SWPPP).
28.
CEQA Compliance.
Closeout
and
Contract
OAR shall prepare and issue meeting minutes to attendees and interested parties no later than five calendar days after the meeting date. PRE-INSTALLATION CONFERENCES
3.02
•
22.
A.
CONTRACTOR shall coordinate and conduct pre-installation conferences at the Project site as required by related Sections of the Contract Documents.
B.
CONTRACTOR, manufacturers, and fabricators involved in or affected by the installation and its coordination or integration with other pre-ceding and/or subsequent installations of Work shall attend the meeting. CONTRACTOR shall advise OAR, INSPECTOR, and ARCHITECT of scheduled meeting dates in order to secure their attendance. 1.
CONTRACTOR shall review the progress of construction activities and preparations for the particular activity under consideration at each preinstallation conference, including requirements for the following: a.
Contract Documents.
b.
Options.
c.
Related Construction Directives and Change Orders.
d.
Purchases.
e.
Deliveries.
f.
Shop Drawings, Product Data, and quality-control samples.
g.
Review of mockups.
h.
Possible conflicts.
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR& P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 PROJECT MEETINGS 01 3119-3
111001
•
• 2.
Compatibility problems.
J.
Time schedules.
k.
Weather limitations.
1.
Manufacturer's recommendations.
m.
Warranty requirements.
n.
Compatibility of materials.
0.
Acceptability of substrates.
p.
Temporary facilities.
q.
Space and access limitations.
r.
Governing regulations.
s.
Safety.
t.
Inspecting and testing requirements.
u.
Required performance results.
v.
Recording requirements.
w.
Protection.
CONTRACTOR shall record significant discussions and directives received from each conference. CONTRACTOR shall, within three (3) calendar days after the meeting date, distribute the minutes of the meeting to all concerned parties, including but not limited to, OAR, INSPECTOR, and ARCHITECT.
PROGRESS MEETINGS
3.03
•
1.
A.
Progress meetings will be held at the Project site at regular intervals, typically weekly, as determined by the OAR.
B.
In addition to representatives of CONTRACTOR, OWNER, and ARCHITECT, each Subcontractor, supplier, or other entity concerned with current progress or involved in planning, coordination, or performance of the Work shall, if requested by OAR, be represented at these meetings. All participants at the conference shall be familiar with the Project and authorized to conclude all matters relating to the Work.
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR& P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 PROJECT MEETINGS 01 3119-4
111001
•
•
•
C.
Failure of CONTRACTOR to be so represented at any progress meeting which is held at a mutually agreed time or for which a written notice is given, shall not relieve CONTRACTOR from abiding by any and all OAR determinations or directives issued at such meeting.
D.
OAR will review and correct or approve minutes of the previous progress meeting and will review other significant items affecting progress. Topics for discussion as appropriate to the status of the Project include but are not limited to: 1.
Interface requirements.
2.
Construction Schedule.
3.
Sequence and coordination.
4.
Status of submittals I RFCs.
5.
Deliveries.
6.
Off-site fabrication.
7.
Access.
8.
Site utilization.
9.
Temporary Construction Facilities and Controls.
10.
Hours ofwork.
11.
Hazards and risks.
12.
Housekeeping.
13.
Quality of materials, fabrication, and execution.
14.
Unforeseen conditions.
15.
Testing and Inspection.
16.
Defective Work.
17.
Construction Directive.
18.
Request for Proposal.
19.
Change Order Proposals and Change Orders .
20.
Documentation of information for payment requests.
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 PROJECT MEETINGS 013119-5
111001
• E.
21.
Application for Payment.
22.
Other items as required or as brought forth ..
23.
Initial Notice of Start of Issue, Event, Condition, Circumstance, or Cause of Perceived Delay, Disruption, Interference, Hindrance, Acceleration. (Article 12.2.1 ofthe General Conditions).
24.
Final Notice of End of Issue, Event, Condition, Circumstance, or Cause of Perceived Delay, Disruption, Interference, Hindrance, Acceleration (Article 12.2.2 ofthe General Conditions).
25.
Storm Water Pollution Prevention.
26.
CEQA Compliance.
No later than three (3) calendar days after each progress meeting, OAR will prepare and distribute minutes of the meeting to each present and absent party. Include a brief summary, in narrative form, of progress, decisions, directives, actions taken, and all other issues since the previous meeting and report. 1.
•
Schedule Updating: CONTRACTOR shall revise the Construction Schedule after each progress meeting where revisions to the schedule have been made or recognized, and issue the revised schedule at the next scheduled progress meeting.
ADDITIONAL MEETINGS
3.04 A.
OAR, upon giving notice to the intended parties and without further obligation, may require additional meetings to discuss Work and/or Project related activities. OWNER'S RIGHT TO RECORD
3.05 A.
CONTRACTOR agrees on behalf of itself and all its subcontractors that the OWNER may audiotape or videotape any meetings, training and any work at any time during the Project END OF SECTION
•
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/0112011 PROJECT MEETINGS 01 3119-6
160418
•
SECTION 01 3213 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE PART 1 - GENERAL SECTION INCLUDES
1.01 A.
1.02
•
Required procedures, preparation, submittals, reviews, updates, and revisions to the cost/schedule integrated construction schedule. The purpose of this section is to: 1.
Ensure adequate planning and execution ofthe Work by CONTRACTOR.
2.
Establish a standard against which satisfactory completion of the Project can be measured by OWNER.
3.
Assist CONTRACTOR and OAR in monitoring progress.
4.
Aid in assessing the impact of any changes to the Contract.
5.
Provide justification for progress payments.
RELATED REQUIREMENTS A.
Section 01 1100: Summary of Work.
B.
Section 01 1216: Phasing of the Work.
C.
Section 01 2300: Alternates (Bid Items).
D.
Section 01 2973: Schedule of Values.
E.
Section 01 2976: Progress Payment Procedures.
F.
Section 01 3113: Project Coordination.
G.
Section 01 3300: Submittal Procedures.
H.
Section 01 4523: Testing and Inspection.
I.
Section 01 4525: Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HV AC.
J.
Section 01 5000: Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls.
K.
Section 01 7700: Contract Closeout.
L.
Section 01 7836: Warranties.
PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01
SCHEDULING SOFTWARE A.
•
CONTRACTOR shall utilize the latest version of Primavera Scheduling Software (P6) to employ the Critical Path Method (CPM) in the development and maintenance of the construction schedule. If the version of Primavera Scheduling Software (P6) used is greater than Version 15.1, the CONTRACTOR shall save &
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
4118/2016 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE 01 3213-1
160418
•
export schedules in Version 15.1 before submitting to OWNER for review. The scheduling software shall be capable of being resource loaded with manpower, costs and materials. It shall also be capable of generating time-scaled logic diagrams, resource histograms and profiles, bar charts, layouts and reports with any and/or all activity detail. B.
All schedule calculation rules, auto cost rules and resource calculation rules shall be in a format acceptable to OAR. When schedule calculations are performed, the "Retained Logic" setting shall be used. CONTRACTOR shall use the zero "Decimal Places" setting.
PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01
SUBMITTALS A.
CONTRACTOR shall retain a construction scheduler to work in enough capacity to perform all of the requirements outlined in this Section. CONTRACTOR shall submit a resume of the proposed Scheduler for review and acceptance prior to the preparation of any Schedule. The resume shall demonstrate the proposed scheduler's capability to plan, coordinate, execute, and monitor a cost/resource loaded CPM schedule as required for this Project and have a minimum of five years direct experience using Primavera Project Planner. Scheduler will cooperate with OAR and shall be available on site for monitoring, maintaining and updating schedules in a timely manner. OAR has the right to refuse to accept the Scheduler based upon a lack of experience as required by this Section or based on lack of onsite performance and timeliness of schedule submittals. If OAR does not accept the proposed Scheduler, CONTRACTOR shall within one week of disapproval, propose another scheduler who meets the experience requirements stated above.
B.
CONTRACTOR shall submit two color originals and three copies of all bar charts, reports and/or other required schedule data as outlined in this Section. CONTRACTOR shall electronically deliver the schedule file in its original format at the time of submittal.
c.
CONTRACTOR shall attend a pre-construction scheduling conference with OAR within 7 days after Notice of Award. Contractor shall then develop and submit the Preliminary Construction Schedule within 14 days after Notice of Award..
D.
CONTRACTOR shall submit the Proposed Baseline Schedule no later than thirty days from the Notice to Proceed (or as stipulated in the milestones under Section 01 1219 Phasing ofthe Work Appendix A).
E.
CONTRACTOR shall submit the Monthly Schedule Updates, Four-Week Rolling Schedules, and Recovery Schedules as required.
•
PRELIMINARY CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE
3.02
•
A.
The purpose of the cost-loaded Preliminary Construction Schedule is to provide a interim mechanism in which to measure performance on individual activities and
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
4/18/2016 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE 01 3213-2
160418
•
to validate the CONTRACTOR'S monthly Application for Payment on work performed (starting with month one) during the first three months of the job until the complete Baseline Schedule is approved by the OAR.
•
B.
CONTRACTOR shall develop and submit a cost loaded Preliminary Construction Schedule as required by this Section. It shall be submitted in computer generated network format and shall be organized by Activity Codes representing the CONTRACTOR'S intended sequencing of the Work. The Preliminary Construction Schedule shall include activities for the first 90 calendar days following the NTP such as mobilization, preparation of submittals, specified review periods, procurement items, fabrication items, milestones, and detailed construction activities.
C.
Upon OAR'S acceptance of the Preliminary Construction Schedule, CONTRACTOR shall update the accepted Preliminary Construction Schedule each month (beginning with month 1) and submit these updates until CONTRACTOR'S Baseline Schedule is fully developed and accepted. Since updates to Preliminary Construction Schedule are the basis for payment to CONTRACTOR during the first three-month period, submittal and acceptance of such updates shall be a condition precedent to making of monthly payment, as referenced in General Conditions.
D.
Provide a written narrative describing CONTRACTOR'S approach to mobilization, procurement, and construction during the first 90 calendar days including crew sizes, equipment and material delivery, site access, submittals, and permits.
E.
Submit Bar Charts, Tabular Reports, a Cost flow Histogram, Electronic Data, and Plots in accordance with Article 3.04-L.
F.
If the project is of a short duration and it would be more beneficial for the CONTRACTOR to forego the preliminary 90 day schedule, then upon CONTRACTOR request and OAR written Approval, the CONTRACTOR may go straight into development of the Baseline Schedule for the entire project. This will need to be implemented expeditiously in order to not impede the processing of the monthly pay applications. Approval of the Baseline schedule and first monthly update is precedent of the monthly pay application. SCHEDULE OF VALUES
3.03 A.
CONTRACTOR shall cost load activities in the Construction Baseline Schedule allocate costs to the cost accounts of all activities. The cost accounts shall match the CSI sections listed in the Table Of Contents of the Specifications. The format shall be coordinated with Specification Section 01 2973 (Schedule of Valmis);-Specification Section 0·1 3229 (Project Forms), and Specification Section 01 2976 (Progress Payment Procedures). ~nd
B.
•
Submit a computer generated report from the Construction Baseline Schedule using the P3/P6 scheduling software. The report shall contain the following data for each activity: Cost Account Number (by CSI section), Cost Account Description, Cost
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR& P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
4/18/2016 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE 01 3213-3
160418
•
Account Budget, Cost to Date, Cost this Period, and Cost to complete. Total costs shall be organized and totaled by CSI section. This report shall be the source of the data CONTRACTOR reports on the Schedule of Values. C.
BASELINE SCHEDULE CPM NETWORK
3.04
•
•
The cost loading associated with the activities shall be based on CONTRACTOR estimates of costs that CONTRACTOR will incur performing the specific activities. If OAR determines that the costs are front loaded and/or the distribution of costs is umeasonable, CONTRACTOR shall revise accordingly and resubmit the Schedule of Values within five (5) days for OAR review.
A.
No later than thirty days from the Notice to Proceed (or as stipulated in the milestones under Section 01 1219 Phasing of the Work Appendix A), CONTRACTOR shall submit a detailed Proposed Baseline Schedule that covers the entire duration of the Project. This schedule shall convey CONTRACTOR'S plan for organizing, managing, and executing the Work.
B.
The Proposed Baseline Schedule shall include activity descriptions, sequencing, logic relationships, duration estimates, cost loading by CSI section in accordance with Article 3.03, resource loading of manpower, and other information as set forth in this Section. 1.
The Proposed Baseline Schedule shall include all Milestones stipulated in Specification Section 01 1219, Phasing ofthe Work, Appendix A, as well as all activities required to achieve timely completion of the Milestones.
2.
The Proposed Baseline Schedule shall include activities for: all construction activities, the NTP, Milestones, submittals, coordination drawings, re-submittals, procurement of materials and equipment, manufacturing, fabrication & delivery, owner furnished contractor installed items (OFCI), access restrictions, work restrictions, phased occupancy, testing, start-up, and contract closeout activities. The Proposed Baseline Schedule shall allow a period for OAR and ARCHITECT to review each submittal, as required by Section 01 3300 and other sections which require additional time for OWNER reviews and deferred submittal reviews by Division of the State Architect (DSA).
3.
The ProposedBaseline Schedule shall include start and completion dates for: temporary facilities, construction of mock-ups, prototypes, samples, punch list, OWNER interfaces and furnishing of items, separate work contracts, regulatory agency approvals, and permits required for performance of the Work.
4.
The Proposed Baseline Schedule shall allow for all foreseeable factors and risks which affect performance of the Work. Include allowances for weather conditions in accordance with Article 3.04-J, applicable laws, transportation, traffic, air quality, noise, or any other applicable regulatory
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR& P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
4/18/2016 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE 01 3213-4
160418
•
requirements, regulations or collective bargaining agreements pertaining to labor.
•
5.
The Proposed Baseline Schedule shall include an activity with a minimum review period of one hundred days for all Deferred Approvals required by DSA. In addition, as a predecessor to this activity, a separate 18 day OWNER review period shall be included in the Proposed Baseline Schedule.
6.
CONTRACTOR shall not use any float suppression techniques such as preferential sequencing or logic, special hidden lag time between activities or milestones, float absorption activities, or unjustifiable over-estimating of activity durations in preparing the Proposed Baseline Schedule. Finish Milestones should be constrained to either a "Finish No Later Than" constraint or a "Finish on or before" constraint. . No "Zero Free Float" constraints, No "Early" Constraints, and No "Mandatory Finish" constraints shall be utilized.
7.
The Proposed Baseline Schedule shall include activity durations based on the crew sizes and equipment utilization that CONTRACTOR will maintain during the Project. No activity durations shall exceed fifteen (15) working days unless approved by the OAR. Non-construction activities such as procurement, delivery, or submittal activities are exempted. CONTRACTOR will need to perform their due-diligence to make sure that the activity man-power loading and activity durations are directly integrated.
8.
CONTRACTOR shall include with the Proposed Baseline Schedule a written narrative report sufficiently comprehensive to explain the rationale behind CONTRACTOR'S approach to the Work including but not limited to: activity durations, manpower flow, average crew sizes (by trade), equipment requirements, anticipated production rates, constraints, holidays and other non-work days, potential problem areas, permits, coordination with regulatory authorities, utilities, separate work contracts and other parties, and long lead delivery items requiring more than thirty days from the date of order to delivery to the Project site.
C.
At the OAR'S request, furnish a detailed written explanation of CONTRACTOR'S basis for specific durations, logic, phasing, or other information. Such an explanation shall include CONTRACTOR'S rationale for selecting the number of crews, crew composition, number of shifts per day, number of hours in a shift, number of work days per week, construction equipment, and similar factors.
D.
The Proposed Baseline Schedule activities shall contain the following data: 1.
•
Activity ID numbers shall consist of no more than eight alphanumeric characters. Following OAR acceptance of the Baseline Schedule, Activity ID numbers shall not be changed .
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR& P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
4118/2016 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE 01 3213-5
160418
•
•
2.
Activity Descriptions shall provide adequate information that readily identifies each activity, work scope, and location.
3.
At a minimum, activity codes specified in Article 3.04-G shall be applied to each activity. This is at the activity level and is different than WBS coding structure.
4.
Cost accounts (in CSI MasterFormat) and Resource accounts shall be applied to each activity. They shall include lump sum costs, and manhours/man-days (where applicable).
E.
At OAR'S request, furnish a written explanation for each lead or lag relationship and each constrained date. Unjustifiable leads, lags, and constraints will result in OAR'S rejection of the Proposed Baseline Schedule.
F.
Calendar Identification: In the scheduling software, identify all activities that will require overtime shifts, double shifts, and work on weekends or holidays. Identify non-work days and holidays in the schedule calendar. All milestones stipulated in Specification Section 01 1219, Phasing ofthe Work, Appendix A, shall be placed on a calendar with seven days per week. No holiday or non-work-day restrictions are permitted on this calendar. Within the schedule software, the CONTRACTOR shall not use Primavera Global Calendars from past projects, but rather shall use project specific calendars created for this specific contract. The Calendar coding shall be transferable and compatible with the OWNER calendars as to not distort any start/finish dates and "total float" values upon schedule re-calculation .
G.
Activity Codes: As a minimum, the Activity Codes shown in the Table 1 below shall be assigned to each activity. Table 1 Name
Length
TYPE
2
AREA
2
STAG
2
SBST
2
RESP SPEC
7 5
1.
•
Description Type of activity (for example: mobilization, submittals, procurement/fabrication, construction, milestones, etcetera.) Area or Building (for example: Bldg. A, Building B, Courtyard, Athletic Fields, Street Work, etcetera.) Stage (for example: Foundations, Superstructure, Exterior, Interior, Roof, Floor Number etcetera.) Substage (a specific area within a stage such as: main electrical room, kitchen, room number, etcetera.) Responsible Party (subcontractor and/or trade) CSI section number
OAR may require additional coding of activities. The mandatory activity code requirements listed in Table 1 are not to be construed as setting limits on CONTRACTOR'S management and coordination responsibilities, but are intended to guide CONTRACTOR in the administration of its contractual responsibilities. 4118/2016
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE 01 3213-6
160418
•
H.
•
Milestones: are designated dates as set forth in Specification Section 01 1219, Phasing of the Work, Appendix A, in which Work or portions thereof are required to start and complete in accordance with the Contract Documents. 1.
Where the term completion or similar terms are used in regards to a Milestone, it shall be construed to mean all portions of the Work in the indicated phase, area, and zone are complete and acceptable to OAR. Where the term start or similar terms are used in the designation of a Milestone, it shall be construed to mean a portion of the Work in the indicated phase, area, or zone is required to be commenced.
2.
A Proposed Baseline Schedule extending beyond the Milestones or Contract Time will not be acceptable.
3.
Finish Milestones shall be constrained with Late Finish ("Finish No Later Than") type constraints or "Finish on or before" type constraints in accordance with the dates stipulated in Specification Section 01 1219, Phasing of the Work, Appendix A.
4.
In the scheduling software, under the Project Overview command, assign the "Project Must Finish By" date to match the Contract Completion Milestone date stipulated in Specification Section 01 1219, Phasing ofthe Work, Appendix A.
5.
A Proposed Baseline Schedule indicating Work completed in less time than the Milestones and/or Contract Time will not be acceptable. Rather, CONTRACTOR shall show any unused contract time as float available to the project.
6.
Milestones shall be placed on a calendar with seven days per week. No Holiday or non-work-day restrictions are permitted on this calendar.
I.
The Critical Path shall be clearly indicated on all schedules submitted. An activity is defined as critical when it is shown to be on the longest path from beginning to end.
J.
CONTRACTOR shall allow for inclement weather in the Proposed Baseline Schedule by incorporating an activity titled "Rain Day Impact Allowance" as the last activity prior to the Substantial Completion Milestone. No other activities may be concurrent with it. The duration of the Rain Day Impact Allowance activity will be based on Table #2 below, and will be calculated from the Notice to Proceed until the original date of Substantial Completion.
Table 2: Cumulative Calendar Days "Rain Day Impact Allowance":
•
January February March April
6 5 5 4
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR& P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
July August September October
0 0
1 1 4/18/2016 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE 01 3213-7
160418
•
May June
•
0
November December
3 5
1.
When inclement weather at the Project site impacts Critical Path activities, CONTRACTOR may provide the OAR with a written request for a weather impact day describing the inclement weather delay on the Critical Path activities. The inclement weather delay must be clearly indicated by a 70 percent decrease in the field labor workforce hours on Critical Path activities on the day in question as indicated by CONTRACTOR'S Daily reports from the day in question and the scheduled work days prior to the day in question. Upon OAR'S independent confirmation of the amount of rainfall and impact, OAR will authorize CONTRACTOR to reduce the duration of the Rain Day Impact Allowance by one day.
2.
Inclement weather on non-scheduled workdays shall not be granted as weather impact days. If CONTRACTOR asks to work a specific weekend or holiday and gives OAR advanced, written notification of critical path work to be performed and a substantial amount of precipitation occurs that prevents the work from being performed, then that day can be claimed as a weather impact day. If the effects of inclement weather from a nonscheduled work day carry forward to a scheduled work day and impacts the Critical Path as noted above, then the scheduled work day will be considered impacted by weather. Any unused rain day allowance at the end of the project will be shown as available float to the Substantial Completion Milestone. Excusable, non-compensable time extensions will be granted for inclement weather to Substantial Completion milestone only after the weather impact area affecting the critical path work has exhausted the allotted cumulative Rain Day Impact Allowance. On projects that have multiple phases with defined start & finish dates, the cumulative rain impact allowance may be split up (pro-rated) into their designated phases upon OAR Approval.
• K.
1
Cost loaded Activities: 1.
Each activity included in the Proposed Baseline Schedule shall be assigned the cost CONTRACTOR estimates it will incur performing that activity. Each activity's assigned cost will be inclusive of overhead and profit so CONTRACTOR'S total overhead and profit is distributed over all activities on a pro rata basis. The sum of the costs assigned to activities shall equal the total contract value. No activity costs shall be assigned to manufacturing or delivery activities unless approved by OAR. If OAR finds that the costs are front loaded and the distribution of costs is unreasonable, CONTRACTOR shall re-distribute the costs and resubmit the revised Schedule ofValues within five days for OAR backcheck.
2.
CONTRACTOR shall cost load activities in the Proposed Baseline Schedule and allocate costs to related resource/cost accounts associated with each activity. The cost accounts shall match the CSI sections listed in
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
4/18/2016 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE 01 3213-8
160418
•
the Table of Contents of the Specifications. The format shall be coordinated with Specification Section 01 2973 (Schedule of Values), Specification Section 01 3229 (Project Forms), and Specification Section 01 2976 (Progress Payment Procedures). All cost-loaded activities shall roll-up to their designated CSI sections and shall be the basis for the data reported in the Schedule ofValues (Section 01 2973), Project Forms (Section 01 3239), and Progress Payment Procedures (Section 01 2976).
L.
•
3.
Submit computer generated reports using the scheduling software which will be the basis for the approved Schedule of Values. The reports shall contain the following data for each activity: Cost/Resource Account Number (by CSI section), Cost/Resource Account Description, Cost/Resource Account Budget, Cost to Date, Cost this Period, and Cost at Completion. Total Costs shall be organized and totaled by CSI section.
4.
Submit a Cost Flow Histogram in accordance with Article 3.04.L.3.
CONTRACTOR shall submit computer generated reports and plots with the Proposed Baseline Schedule submittal package. Format shall display the following columns: Activity ID, Activity Description, Original Duration, Remaining Duration, Percent Complete, Early Start, Early Finish, Late Start, Late Finish, and Total Float. Unless otherwise noted, bar charts and reports shall be on 8 Yz by 11 paper and bound. 1.
2.
3.
•
Color Bar charts shall be generated separately for: a.
Milestones only.
b.
All Activities sorted by Early Start date and organized by Project, Area, Stage, and Substage. (The network shall be organized to show continuous flow of all activities from left to right). CONTRACTOR is reminded that during the monthly schedule update process, even the activities that have already been completed need to be shown in this "all activities" bar chart report.
c.
Activities sorted by Responsibility.
d.
Summary level of all activities sorted by craft/trade and area.
e.
Critical Path (Longest Path). The network shall be organized to show continuous flow of all critical activities on the longest path from left to right (sorted by early start).
Reports: a.
Total Float sorted low to high.
b.
Predecessors and Successors sorted by Activity ID.
Cost Flow Histogram a. Using the costs assigned to each activity, develop a Histogram that projects the estimated invoice amounts by month for the Project duration. The histogram shall be produced from the scheduling
CORWIN THEATERREPAIR&P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
. 4/18/2016 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE 01 3213-9
160418
• 4.
software on 11" by 17" paper (landscape mode). It shall contain both a monthly bar histogram and a cumulative cost curve on the same graph. The Total Costs shall be based on the Early Dates option. Man Power Histogram a.
•
•
3.05
Submit a planned man-power graphic bar histogram produced from the scheduling software on 11" by 17" paper (landscape mode) that displays total man-hours based on Early Dates. Show both a weekly bar histogram and a cumulative curve on same graph. In addition, provide a summary excel table of average crew sizes and peak crew sizes broken down by trade/subcontractor. CONTRACTOR will need to perform their due-diligence to make sure that the activity man-power loading is realistic and adequate based on material/labor cost estimates.
5.
Provide a written narrative as required by Article 3.04.B.8.
6.
Electronic data: Provide an electronic file in its original format of the Schedule. The electronic P6 files shall be saved in "XER" type format.(version 6.1)
7.
Plots: Produce a color bar chart onE-size paper (30 by 42-inch) organized (at a minimum) by project, area, stage, and substage .
M.
OAR will notify CONTRACTOR of any adjustments that are required for the Proposed Baseline Schedule to be accepted. CONTRACTOR shall perform any required adjustments to the Proppsed Baseline Schedule and resubmit it for acceptance certifying in writing that all information contained therein complies with the Contract Documents. OAR will review the Proposed Baseline Schedule for accuracy, reasonableness, and conformance with the Contract Documents and shall provide comments within ten days of receipt. Within five days after receiving OAR comments, CONTRACTOR shall both incorporate changes to address OAR concerns and resubmit the Proposed Baseline Schedule for OAR backcheck. This process will continue until the Proposed Baseline Schedule is accepted as the Baseline Schedule. Once accepted by OAR, the Baseline Schedule will be the basis upon which CONTRACTOR shall prepare updates that record and report actual performance and progress. The accepted Baseline Schedule and subsequent Monthly Updates (reference Articles 3.04 and 3.05 respectively) shall be the basis for consideration and analysis of requests for time extensions and CONTRACTOR progress payments.
N.
OAR acceptance of the Baseline Schedule or CONTRACTOR'S failure to identify or include an element of the Contract, shall not release CONTRACTOR'S obligation to complete all required Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. REQUIREMENTS FOR MONTHLY/WEEKLY SCHEDULE UPDATING
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
4/18/2016 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE 01 3213-10
160418
•
A.
Once the Baseline Schedule is accepted by OAR, CONTRACTOR shall copy the Approved Baseline file to a new name, status the activities with actual as-built data through the end of the month & submit Monthly Schedule Updates beginning with month No. 1. The current month's schedule update cannot be accepted until the previous Monthly Schedule Update has been accepted by OAR. Each Monthly Schedule Update shall be submitted con-currently with the Monthly Pay Application no later than the fifth day of the succeeding month in accordance with Article 14 of the General Conditions.
B.
Monthly Schedule Update Format. 1.
Initially, the contractor shall status a current Monthly Schedule Update with actual Work progress only. No logic ties shall be modified. Status all Actual Start and Finish dates, adjust Remaining Durations where needed, and update Percent Completion of cost and resource loaded activities. No activity Original Durations or Logic shall be changed unless authorized by OAR. No new activities shall be added (except for the addition of new activities for every re-submittal and re-review required) or unless authorized by the OAR.
2.
Once the schedule is statused in accordance with Article 3.05-Bl, CONTRACTOR shall print (and submit with Monthly Schedule Update) a report of "out-of-sequence" logic that results from the updating process. CONTRACTOR shall then correct all "out-of-sequence" logic to reflect CONTRACTOR'S actual Work sequence. Prior to submission of the Monthly Schedule Update, CONTRACTOR shall review and validate that all remaining activities along with their schedule relationships .are still accurate based on the actual work flow in the field. If CONTRACTOR chooses to modify logic or add activities (other than out-of-sequence corrections), it shall be done in accordance with Article 3.07 for OAR Review & Approval. CONTRACTOR shall also submit a comparison report between the previous monthly schedule update and the current monthly update that will document the over-all changes (i.e. comparison software such as "Digger", or "Schedule Analyzer", etc.,).
3.
During construction, CONTRACTOR may desire to break down specific activities into greater detail. If greater detail is necessary, then CONTRACTOR shall identify expanded activities such that the Baseline Schedule activities that the expanded activities originated from are readily apparent. CONTRACTOR shall not allow the aggregate duration of the expanded activities to exceed the duration assigned to the Baseline Schedule activity unless permitted by OAR in writing.
4.
Autocost rules and calculation rules shall link Remaining Duration and Percent Complete.
5.
The Data Date for the Monthly Schedule Updates shall be the last day of the month. At a minimum, three days prior to the submission of the Monthly Schedule Update, CONTRACTOR shall meet in person with OAR
•
•
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR& P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
4/18/2016 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE 01 3213-11
160418
•
to present the proposed Percentages of Completion and Actual Start and Actual Finish dates. Once percentages of completion and actual dates have been agreed to, they shall be the basis of the Monthly Schedule Update. 6.
CONTRACTOR shall submit a Cost Histogram that overlays the planned cost curve from the Baseline Schedule, against the monthly cumulative "cost to date" curve, and against the remaining activities planned curve from the current Monthly Schedule Update.
7.
Written Narrative Report: CONTRACTOR shall include a written report to explain the Monthly Schedule Update. The narrative shall, at a minimum include the following headings with appropriate discussions of each topic:
•
C.
•
a.
Introduction.
b.
A Summary of Work which was on-going (This Pay Period).
c.
Problem Areas and Proposed Solutions.
d.
Critical Path.
e.
Current and Anticipated Delays.
f.
Coordination of Work with Others.
g.
Milestone Status.
h.
Revisions: the standard schedule comparison report that compares the current update to the previous update shall be submitted to help document any variances/changes. However this comparison report will not be accepted by OWNER in lieu of the above written narrative requirements outline above.
8.
In updating the Schedule, CONTRACTOR shall not modify Activity ID numbers, schedule calculation rules/criteria, or the Activity Coding Structure required.
9.
Submit bar charts, reports, a cost flow histogram, man-power histogram, written narrative, electronic data, and plots in accordance with Article 3.04L.
10.
Submit a cost-loaded report (progressed monthly) produced from the scheduling software that displays all of the activities organized by the CSI section cost/resource accounts. This report shall be in compliance with Article 3.04-K, Section 01 2973 (Schedule of Values), Section 01 3229 (Project Forms), and Section 01 2976 (Progress Payment Procedures).
Four-Week Rolling Schedule: At each Weekly Progress Meeting, CONTRACTOR shall present a Four-Week Schedule in Bar Chart format. It shall show one (1) week of actual and three (3) weeks of forecasted progress. The Four-Week Rolling Schedule shall be used as a basis for discussing progress and work planned during the three (3) weeks .
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR& P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
4/18/2016 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE 01 3213-12
160418
•
•
The Four-Week Rolling Schedule shall be based on the most recent OAR Accepted Monthly Schedule Update. It shall include weekly updates to all construction, submittal, fabrication and procurement, and separate work contract activities. CONTRACTOR shall ensure that it accurately reflects the current progress of the Work.
2.
CONTRACTOR shall discuss at the weekly Progress meeting the actual dates and any variances to critical or near critical activities.
3.
Upon request by OAR, CONTRACTOR shall provide the Four-Week Rolling Schedule in electronic format.
4.
If the Four-Week Rolling Schedule indicates activities are behind schedule, CONTRACTOR shall provide a Recovery Schedule in accordance with Article 3.06. ·
5.
If the CONTRACTOR chooses to provide a Four-Week Rolling Schedule in a greater level of detail (by trade/subcontractor) outside of the monthly contractual P3/P6 schedule database, then upon CONTRACTOR REQUEST and OAR written approval, the CONTRACTOR may proceed as long as the detailed activities roll-up to the contractual P3/P6 monthly schedule updates. These detailed activities will need to be linked to the overall Substantial Completion date as to properly forecast whether the project is ahead or behind schedule during the weekly Progress Meetings. The Four-Week Rolling Schedule must accurately reflect the work that is going on during the current week and must accurately reflect what will happen in the next three weeks.
RECOVERY SCHEDULES
3.06
•
1.
A.
If a Monthly Schedule Update indicates negative float greater than ten (1 0) days on a critical path as result of events not predicated by Articles 10 and 12 of the General Conditions CONTRACTOR shall prepare a Proposed Recovery Schedule demonstrating CONTRACTOR'S plan to regain the time lost. The Recovery Schedule shall be submitted either in advance of or concurrent with the Monthly Schedule Update and CONTRACTOR progress request. Both the Monthly Schedule Update and the Proposed Recovery Schedule shall be based on the same percentages of completion and actual dates accepted by OAR under Article 3.05 B.
B.
The Proposed Recovery Schedule shall be based on a copy of the Monthly Schedule Update for the calendar month during which the negative float first appears.
c.
The Proposed Recovery Schedule shall include a written narrative that identifies the causes of the negative float on the critical path and provides CONTRACTOR'S proposed corrective action to ensure timely completion of all Milestones and the Substantial Completion Date. CONTRACTOR'S corrective actions shall include ~ut are not limited to increasing concurrent operations, increasing labor, adding multiple shifts in a 24-hour period, and adding overtime .
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
4/18/2016 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE 01 3213-13
160418
•
D.
During any period of time wheri CONTRACTOR is found to be behind schedule by OAR, the Monthly Schedule Update described above shall become a weekly requirement (at no additional cost to OWNER) to provide a greater degree of focus on the timely completion of the Work. These Updates shall be submitted to OAR every Monday morning. When CONTRACTOR is deemed by OAR to be back on schedule, CONTRACTOR may revert to submitting the schedule monthly.
E.
CONTRACTOR'S progress payment may not be processed until OAR accepts the Proposed Recovery Schedule. Following such an acceptance, the Proposed Recovery Schedule will be known as the Recovery Schedule and future Work will be performed by CONTRACTOR in accordance with it.
3.07
FRAGNETS AND TIME EXTENSION REQUESTS A.
•
Float is not for exclusive use or benefit of either OWNER or CONTRACTOR but is an expiring resource available to both parties on a non-discriminatory basis. If required to meet specified Milestones, either party may utilize float. Adjustments to Milestones or Contract Time will only be authorized by Change Order and only to the extent the claimed adjustments exceed total float along the most critical path of the current Monthly Schedule Update in effect at the time of the claimed adjustments. The claimed adjustments to the Milestones and/or Contract Time must also cause the Substantial Completion Date to exceed that currently indicated in the Monthly Schedule Update. No time extensions will be granted nor delay damages paid under contract until all available float is used and the CONTRACTOR obtains a Time Extension Request approval from the OAR in accordance with Article 3.07 in its entirety. CONTRACTOR claimed adjustments to an existing negative float path will not receive consideration until the activity with the highest negative float is driven even further negative. 1.
•
Claimed adjustments to the Milestones or Contract Time will be administered in conjunction with those set forth in the General Conditions.
B.
Pursuant to the float sharing requirements of this Section, the use of float suppression techniques such as preferential sequencing or logic, special lead or lag logic restraints, and extended activity times or durations are prohibited. The use of float time disclosed or implied by the use of alternate float suppression techniques shall be proportionally shared to benefit OWNER and CONTRACTOR. The use of any technique solely for the purpose of suppressing float will result in OWNER rejection of the submitted Monthly Schedule Update.
C.
In the event CONTRACTOR believes the Project has suffered an adverse impact arising from events predicated by Articles 10 and 12 of the General Conditions, CONTRACTOR may prepare a Time Extension Request by submitting a Schedule Fragnet and a written narrative outlining the detail of the impact. A Schedule Fragnet must demonstrate a critical path delay. Such a delay must adversely impact the Substantial Completion Date for CONTRACTOR to receive a time extension. To demonstrate such an impact successfully, CONTRACTOR shall prepare a Schedule Fragnet based on a copy of OWNER accepted Monthly Schedule Update
CORWIN THEATERREPA1R& P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
4/18/2016 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE 01 3213-14
160418
•
•
•
for the calendar month during which the adverse impact occurred. This "copy" of the OWNER accepted Monthly Schedule Update shall however first be updated (by OWNER and CONTRACTOR jointly) with both Percentages of Completion and Actual Dates up to the day the delay commenced. This process will provide the "pre-delay" project status. Once OWNER and CONTRACTOR have agreed to the "pre-delay" project status, CONTRACTOR should make a copy of this "pre-delay" schedule and this copy is to be the starting point for CONTRACTOR'S Schedule Fragnet development. OWNER will evaluate the activities, logic, durations, etcetera, in the Schedule Fragnet and will evaluate if the adverse impact arose from events described by Articles 10 and 12 ofthe General Conditions. The Fragnet shall also include CONTRACTOR-caused delays that affect the critical or near critical path in the network and should be accounted for in the Time Impact Analysis if overlapped at any point in time with OWNER-caused delay; If rain impact days were granted between the Start and Finish of OWNER-caused delay period, they should be accounted for in the Time Impact Analysis as well. Provided OWNER determines such an impact occurred, CONTRACTOR may be due a time extension equal to the number of proportioned days of variance/delay that resulted to the Substantial Completion Date. D.
Activities added into a Schedule Fragnet to demonstrate the impact of adverse event shall be assigned a unique activity code. The Schedule shall be organized by this unique activity code .
E.
The Schedule Fragnet shall incorporate logic that accurately ties reflective of the adverse event to pre-event predecessor activities and post event successor activities.
F.
The format and components of a Schedule Fragnet submittal shall be in accordance with this Section and Articles 10 and 12 ofthe General Conditions. It is crucial for the Fragnet to be submitted within the same month of discovery so it can be resolved during the monthly schedule update review. The notice shall be transmitted to OAR within the stipulations outlined in Article 12 of the General Conditions.
G.
If OWNER accepts CONTRACTOR'S Schedule Fragnet and an extension is granted, a Change Order will be prepared. OWNER will advise what change order number the time extension will become. When CONTRACTOR receives this Change .Order number, all the activities added to the Schedule Fragnet shall be given Activity Identification Numbers that corresponds with the Change Order number. CONTRACTOR shall cost load and resource-load the activities if required by OWNER. If resource loading is required, the resource loading shall include a breakdown of labor, material, and equipment quantities.
H.
If OWNER rejects CONTRACTOR'S Schedule Fragnet in part based on improper forecast logic or activity tasks then it shall be revised accordingly to conform to OWNER'S review comments and resubmitted. If the forecast logic and activity tasks cannot be agreed to then the pre-delay schedule outlined ~n Article 3.07-C shall be compared to the actual as-built data in the succeeding month of the encountering issue, event, condition, circumstance, and/or cause. The variance to
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P .0. T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
4118/2016 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE 01 3213-15
160418
•
the project between the pre-delay and post delay schedules shall be discussed in CONTRACTOR'S written narrative and proportioned between the different parties involved in the delay.
I.
PAYMENTFORSCHEDULlliG
3.08 A.
The Work of this Section will be included as part of the bid price.
B.
Preparation, revising, maintenance, and compliance with this Section and Section 01 2973 is an integral part of the Contract Documents and is specified to have a minimum value equal to 2 percent of the original Contract Amount or $150,000, whichever is less. This amount shall be proportionally cost loaded into two activities in both the Proposed Baseline Schedule and the Schedule of Values described in Section 01 2973. One activity for the "Baseline Schedule" and the other activity for the "Monthly Schedule Update Process" as follows:
•
1.
CONTRACTOR may allocate twenty percent (20 percent) of the total cost and place in the "Baseline Schedule" activity. It can then be billed against when the OAR accepts the Proposed Baseline Schedule as the Baseline Schedule .
2.
The remaining eighty percent (80 percent) may be cost loaded into the "Monthly Schedule Update Process" activity. This amount may be billed in equal monthly increments. The amount of those increments is determined by dividing the remaining cost by the total number of months in the Contract Time. Payment of these incremental amounts is contingent upon OAR acceptance of CONTRACTOR Monthly Schedule Updates, Recovery Schedules, Four-Week Rolling Schedules, Fragnets, Time Impact Analysis, and the updated Log of Required Submittals.
3.
The CONTRACTOR shall anticipate in their base contract scope that numerous Fragnets and written time impact analyses will be required during the duration of the project with the Monthly Schedule Updates. Requests for extra scheduling services will not be considered until the CONTRACTOR demonstrates that all of the costs stipulated in Article 3.08-B has been expended.
F AlLURE TO COMPLY WITH REQUIREMENTS
3.09 A.
•
If OWNER rejects CONTRACTOR'S Schedule Fragnet in whole then CONTRACTOR may follow the procedures set forth in Article 16 of the General Conditions.
At any time during the project if CONTRACTOR fails to comply with the specified requirements, OWNER reserves the right to engage independent estimating and Upon notice to scheduling consultants to fulfill these requirements. CONTRACTOR, OWNER shall assess against CONTRACTOR, incurred costs for these additional services .
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
4/18/2016 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE 01 3213-16
160418
B.
In such an event, OWNER will require, and CONTRACTOR shall participate and provide requested information to ensure the resulting Milestones Schedule accurately reflects CONTRACTOR's plan to execute the Work in compliance with the Contract Documents. If it becomes necessary for OWNER to recommend logic or duration revisions as a result of CONTRACTOR failure to furnish acceptable data, and if CONTRACTOR has objections to the recommendations, CONTRACTOR shall provide notice to OWNER within three days and CONTRACTOR shall provide an acceptable alternate plan. If CONTRACTOR fails to so note any objections and provide an acceptable alternate plan, or if CONTRACTOR implements the recommendations of OWNER without so noting any objections, CONTRACTOR will be deemed to have waived all objections and concurred with the recommended logic/duration revisions provided by ARCHITECT and/or OWNER.
C.
Submittal of any Monthly Schedule Updates are subject to review and acceptance by OWNER. OWNER retains the right, including, but not limited to Article 14 of the General Condition~, to withhold progress payments in whole or part until CONTRACTOR submits a Monthly Schedule Update acceptable to OWNER. If a Monthly Schedule Update is "Rejected" due to the OWNER not receiving a satisfactory schedule that accurately reflects the on-going work activities, the OWNER will mandate a separate meeting with the CONTRACTOR and approved Scheduler to remedy the non-conformance. If after the 2nd consecutive month the OWNER still has to "Reject" the monthly Schedule update due to nonconformance, then the CONTRACTOR'S Scheduler will need to be replaced at no additional cost to the OWNER. CONTRACTOR shall within one week of disapproval, propose another Scheduler who meets the experience requirements stated in this Section.
•
CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITY
3.10 A.
Nothing in this Section shall be construed to be a usurpation of CONTRACTOR authority, responsibility, and obligation to plan and schedule Work as CONTRACTOR deems necessary, subject to all other requirements of the Contract Documents.
B.
CONTRACTOR shall involve the subcontractors, manufacturers, and suppliers in the development and periodic updating of the schedule. RECORD DOCUMENTS I FINAL AS-BUILT SCHEDULE
3.11 A.
•
Prior to Contract Completion of the Work, CONTRACTOR shall submit a final asbuilt schedule, and a time-scaled network diagram reflecting the actual dates of all activities. This shall be submitted prior to the final application of payment and prior to the request to release retention. END OF SECTION
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
4118/2016 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE 01 3213-17
111001
SECTION 01 3229
•
PROJECT FORMS PART 1 - GENERAL SECTION INCLUDES
1.01 A.
The following, but not limited to, administrative forms and documents listed in this Section are to be utilized in the administration of the Work. Upon CONTRACTOR request, OAR may approve the use of alternate forms. Electronic versions of these forms are available on the LAUSD website.
B.
From time to time, OWNER may release new revisions and new Project Forms. At any time during the Project, if requested by OAR, CONTRACTOR shall use the newly released Project Forms. RELATED REQUIREMENTS
1.02 A.
Division 01: General Requirements.
PART 2- PRODUCTS (Not used)
•
•
PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01
FORMS A.
1
The following examples of forms are contained within this Section: 1.
Allowance Disbursement Authorization.
2.
Application for Payment (2 pages) 1•
3.
Certification of Compliance with Project Stabilization Agreement and Labor Compliance.
4.
Certification of Compliance with CEQA Mitigations.
5.
Certificate of Substantial Completion.
6.
Change Order.
7.
Change Order Proposal.
8.
Change Order Proposal- Compensable Delay Costs.
9.
Change Order Proposal Detail Sheet.
Application for Payment (Multiple Projects Form) is available from the OAR.
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/11 PROJECT FORMS 01 3229-1
111001
•
•
•
10.
Change Order Proposal Guidelines.
11.
Change Order Proposal - Labor Rate Calculation Form (Request for Rate Higher Than Fully burdened Labor Rates).
12.
Conditional Waiver and Release- Final Payment.
13.
Construction Directive.
14.
Correction Notice.
15.
Daily Construction Report.
16.
Daily Time and Material Record.
17.
Initial Notice of start of Issue. Event, Condition, Circumstance, or Cause of Perceived or Actual Delay, Disruption, Interference, Condition, Circumstance, or Cause of Perceived Delay, Disruption, Interference, Hindrance, Acceleration.
18.
Final Notice of End of Issue, Event, Condition, Circumstance, or Cause of Perceived or Actual Delay, Disruption, Interference, Condition, Circumstance, or Cause of Perceived Delay, Disruption, Interference, Hindrance, Acceleration.
19 .
Five Day Notice.
20.
List of Subcontractors.
21.
Notice of Completion.
22.
Notice ofPartial Use or Occupancy.
23.
Notice ofTermination.
24.
Notice to Proceed.
25.
"Or Equal" Request.
26.
OWNER Assessment Summary.
27.
Property Inventory.
28.
Request for Certification of Substantial Completion.
29.
Request for Clarification.
30.
Request for Proposal.
31.
Request for Reduction of Retention.
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR& P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/11 PROJECT FORMS 01 3229-2
111001
• 3.02
Schedule ofValues.
33 .
Storm Water Pollution Prevention- Site Monitoring Report.
34.
Submittal Log.
35.
Substitution Request.
36.
Survey ofExisting Site Conditions.
37.
Transmittal.
PROCEDURES A.
Allowance Disbursement Authorization: This form is used for the request and approval of Contract allowances.
B.
Application for Payment: This form is used in requesting a progress payment.
C.
Application for Payment (Multiple Projects): Alternate progress payment request form for contracts comprising more then one project.
D.
Certification of Compliance with Project Stabilization Agreement and Labor Compliance Code Section 1776: This form is used to certify that all contributions due and owing to appropriate trust funds have been paid by CONTRACTOR and all Subcontractors, as specified by the Project Stabilization Agreement (PSA) and General Conditions Article 6.49. This form is also used to certify that CONTRACTOR has submitted all certified payroll records mandated by Labor Code 1776, and General Conditions Article 6.49.
E.
Certification of Compliance with CEQA Mitigations: This form is used to certify that all CEQA requirements were complied with by CONTRACTOR.
F.
Certificate of Substantial Completion: This form is used according to Article 14 of the General Conditions.
G.
Change Order: This form is used to adjust the Contract Amount, Milestones or Contract Time.
H.
Change Order Proposal: This form is used to communicate proposed adjustments to the Contract Amount, Milestones or Contract Time.
I.
Construction Directive: This form is used to issue a Construction Directive.
J.
Correction Notice:-This form is used toprovide notice of defective Work.
K.
Daily Construction Report: This form is used to report daily Work activities and manpower levels of CONTRACTOR or Subcontractor.
•
•
32.
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/11 PROJECT FORMS 01 3229-3
111001
•
•
•
L.
Daily Time and Material Record: This form is used to provide daily records as set forth in Article 11.11 of the General Conditions .
M.
Initial Notice of Start of Issue, Event, Condition, Circumstance, or Cause of Perceived Delay, Disruption, Interference, Hindrance, Acceleration: This form is used to provide notice as set forth in Article 12.2.1 of the General Conditions.
N.
Final Notice of End of Issue, Event, Condition, Circumstance, or Cause of Perceived Delay, Disruption, Interference, Hindrance, Acceleration: This form is used to provide notice as set forth in Article 12.2.2 of the General Conditions.
0.
Five Day Notice: This notice is used according to Article 15.3.2 of the General Conditions.
P.
List of Subcontractors: This form is used according to Article 14.2 of the General Conditions.
Q.
Notice of Completion: This form is used according to Article 14.17 of the General Conditions.
R.
Notice of Partial Use or Occupancy: This form is used according to Article 14.15 of General Conditions.
S.
Notice of Termination: Contractor shall submit a Notice of Termination (NOT) to the Los Angeles Regional Water Quality Control Board, LARWQCB. Provide a copy ofNOT to OAR (See Section 01 7416) .
T.
Notice To Proceed: This form is used to establish the date of Contract Time commencement and the date Contractor is authorized to commence performance of Contractor obligations.
U.
"Or Equal" Request: This form is used to submit a list of proposed "or equal" substitutions.
V.
Owner Assessment Summary: This form is used for all assessments or withholds by the Owner, permitted under the Contract or required by law, including without limitation, stop notices, prevailing wage violations, liquidated damages, additional consultant services, OCIP premiums, etc.
W.
Property Inventory: This form is used to establish Owner property in a space.
X.
"Request for Certification of Substantial Completion": according to Article 14 of the General Conditions
Y.
Request for Clarification: This form is to be used for clarification of the intent of the Contract Documents.
z.
Request for Proposal: This form is used to request a proposed adjustment in the Contract Amount, Milestones or Contract Time in response to the Work contained within the Request for Proposal.
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
This form is used
10/01/11 PROJECT FORMS 01 3229-4
111001
•
AA.
Request of Reduction of Retention: This form is used according to Article 14.8 of the General Conditions .
BB.
Schedule of Values: This form 1s used to establish the basis of the certified Application for Payment.
CC.
Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan (SWPPP): Site Monitoring Reports: These forms are used to certify that construction activities are in compliance with SWPPP (see Section 01 7416).
DD.
Submittal Log: This form is a format for the listing of the required submittals.
EE.
Substitution Request: This form is used to submit proposed substitutions of materials or equipment no longer manufactured or which cannot be acquired from existing inventories.
FF.
Transmittal: This form is used for transmission of items related to the Contract. END OF SECTION
•
•
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/I 1 PROJECT FORMS 01 3229-5
Ill 00 I
•
SECTION 01 3300 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES PART 1- GENERAL SECTION INCLUDES
1.01 A.
Administrative and procedural requirements for submittals required for the Work, including but not limited to; Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, material lists, and quality control items.
B.
Throughout the Contract Documents, the minimum acceptable quality of materials, fabrication, and execution have been defined by the name and catalog number of a manufacturer and by reference of recognized industry standards.
c.
To ensure that specified products are furnished and installed in accordance with the design intent, procedures have been established for submittal of design data and for its review by ARCHITECT, OAR and others.
1.02
•
•
RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. B.
Section 01 1216: Phasing of the Work. . Section012513: Product Substitution Procedures .
C.
Section 01 2973: Schedule ofValues.
D.
Section 01 2976: Progress Payment Procedures.
E.
Section 01 3113: Project Coordination.
F.
Section 01 3213: Construction Schedule.
G.
Section 01 3239: Project Forms.
H.
Section 01 4523: Testing and Inspection.
I.
Section 01 4525: Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC.
J.
Section 01 5000: Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls.
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR& P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/0112011 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 3300-1
111001
•
K.
Section 01 7123: Field Engineering.
I
L.
Section 01 7329: Cutting and Patching.
M.
Section 01 7416: Storm Water Pollution Prevention.
N.
Section 01 7700: Contract Closeout.
0.
Section 01 7836: Warranties.
PART 2- PRODUCTS (Not used) PART 3- EXECUTION PROCEDURES
3.01 A.
•
•
CONTRACTOR is required to review and approve every submittal and shop drawing prior to transmittal and delivery to ARCHITECT. Should CONTRACTOR determine a submittal contains errors, or does not meet the requirements of the contract, CONTRACTOR shall immediately return the submittals and shop drawings to the producer and expedite the corrections prior to transmitting the submittal to ARCHITECT. Submittals shall not be used by CONTRACTOR to request clarifications or submit questions. CONTRACTOR will affix stamp to each submittal certifying CONTRACTOR has performed, at minimum, the following: 1.
Verified the submittal is complete in all respects and follows the requirements of the Contract Documents without variance.
2.
Confirmed that no substitutions have been included. If substitutions are included, CONTRACTOR shall eliminate them from the submittal and process them in accordance with Section 00 7000 General Conditions Article 6.14.
3.
Identified any variances from the requirements of the Contract Documents and confirmed that the identified variance meets, but does not exceed the allowable limitations or tolerances as defined in these specifications.
4.
Verified that all submitted materials, dimensions and tolerances are compatible with existing or planned conditions of the Work in order to erect, fabricate, or install the submitted assembly in conformance with the requirements of the Contract Documents .
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR& P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 3300-2
Ill 00 I
•
•
5.
Coordinated and verified that the dimensions match CONTRACTOR measured field or installation conditions.
6.
Coordinated and verified that the products of separate manufacturers required within any field produced assembly are compatible in all respects for such assembly.
7.
Packaged together all related submittals or shop drawings where such is necessary for a comprehensive ARCHITECT review.
B.
CONTRACTOR shall package each submittal appropriately for transmittal and handling. Transmittal format shall be as required by OWNER. CONTRACTOR shall transmit and deliver six sets of each submittal or re-submittal to ARCHITECT, two of which shall be returned to CONTRACTOR. Some specifications may require additional copies be provided. CONTRACTOR shall provide the OWNER additional copies as specified or as requested by OAR. ARCHITECT will not accept submittals received from sources other than from CONTRACTOR.
c.
After ARCHITECT'S review, ARCHITECT will transmit submittals to OAR and OAR shall further distribute to CONTRACTOR, INSPECTOR and others as required. Work shall not commence, unless otherwise approved by OAR, until approved submittals are transmitted to CONTRACTOR.
D.
CONTRACTOR shall clearly identifY any deviations from the Contract Documents on each submittal. Any deviation not so noted even though stamped reviewed is not acceptable.
E.
CONTRACTOR shall coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other submittals, and related activities requiring sequential activity.
F.
Timing of Submittals: 1.
In accordance with General Conditions, CONTRACTOR shall submit to ARCHITECT, with copy oftransmittal to the OAR, those Shop Drawings, Product Data, diagrams, materials lists, Samples and other submittals required by the Contract Documents.
2.
The scheduling of submittals shall be sequenced to support the progress of the Work, and shall be: a.
•
Submitted sufficiently in advance of construction, fabrication or installation in order to allow time for transmittal, review, modification, correction, (and resubmission and re-review when required.)
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 3300-3
111001
•
b.
3.
CONTRACTOR shall coordinate submittal of related items and ARCHITECT reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring coordination with other submittals until all related submittals are received by ARCHITECT.
4.
CONTRACTOR shall revise, update and submit submittal schedule to ARCHITECT and OAR on the first of each month, or as required by OAR.
5.
CONTRACTOR shall allow in the Construction Schedule, at least sixteen days for ARCHITECT review following ARCHITECT receipt of submittal. For mechanical, plumbing, electrical, low voltage, fire sprinklers, door and hardware, and other submittals requiring joint review with OAR, CONTRACTOR shall allow a minimum of eighteen days following ARCHITECT receipt of submittal. Deferred approval items shall be allowed additional time for DSA review.
6.
No adjustments to the Contract Time or Milestones will be authorized because of a failure to transmit submittals to ARCHITECT sufficiently in advance of the Work to permit review and processing or where CONTRACTOR fails to provide ARCHITECT submittals on related items.
7.
In case of product substitution, Shop Drawing preparation shall not commence until such time as 0 WNER accepts or rejects the proposed substitution in accordance with the procedures described in the General Conditions.
• G.
If required, resubmit submittals in a timely manner. Resubmit as specified for initial submittal but identify as such. Review times for re-submitted items shall be as per the time frames for initial submittal review.
H.
Shop Drawing preparation shall not commence until such time as CONTRACTOR receives Product Data acceptance.
I.
ARCHITECT will stamp each submittal with a uniform, action stamp. ARCHITECT will mark the stamp appropriately to indicate the action taken, as follows: 1.
•
Phased with adequate time between submittals in order to allow for proper review by the ARCHITECT without negative impact to the Milestones Schedule.
Final Unrestricted Release: When ARCHITECT marks a submittal "Reviewed" the Work covered by the submittal may proceed provided it
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR& P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/0112011 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 3300-4
111001
•
•
•
complies with requirements of the Contract Documents. Final payment depends on that compliance.
2.
Final-But-Restricted Release: When ARCHITECT, or authorized agent, marks a submittal "Reviewed as Noted," the Work covered by the submittal may proceed provided it complies with notations or corrections on the submittal and requirements of the Contract Documents. Final payment depends on that compliance.
3.
Returned for Re-submittal: When ARCHITECT, or authorized agent, marks a submittal "Rejected, Revise and Resubmit," do not proceed with Work covered by the submittal, including purchasing, fabrication, delivery, or other activity. Revise or prepare a new submittal according to the notations; resubmit without delay. Repeat as necessary to obtain different action mark. In case of multiple submittals covering same items of Work, CONTRACTOR is responsible for any time delays, schedule disruptions, out of sequence Work, or additional costs due to multiple submissions of the same submittal item. Do not use, or allow others to use, submittals marked "Rejected, Revise and Resubmit" at the Project site or elsewhere where Work is in progress.
4.
Other Action: Where a submittal is for information or record purposes or special processing or other activity, ARCHITECT, or authorized agent, will return the submittal marked "Action Not Required".
SHOP DRAWINGS
3.02
A.
Shop Drawings are original drawings prepared by CONTRACTOR, Subcontractor, supplier, or distributor illustrating some portion of Work by showing fabrication, layout, setting, or erection and shall not be based on reproduced Contract Documents or copied standard information.
B.
Produce Shop Drawings to an accurate scale that is large enough to indicate all pertinent features and methods. Except for templates, patterns, and similar full-size drawings, submit Shop Drawings on sheets at least 8-1/2 by 11 inches but no larger than 24 by 36 inches.
C.
Shop Drawings shall include fabrication and installation drawings, setting diagrams, schedules, patterns, templates, and similar drawings. Include the following information: 1.
Dimensions.
2.
Identification of products and materials included by sheet and detail number.
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 3300-5
111001
• D.
•
3.
Compliance with specified standards.
4.
Notation of coordination requirements.
5.
Notation of dimensions established by field measurement.
Provide a space of approximately 4 by 5 inches on the label or beside the title block on Shop Drawings to record CONTRACTOR and ARCHITECT review, and the action taken. Include the following information on the label for processing and recording action taken: 1.
Project name.
2.
Date.
3.
Name and address of ARCHITECT.
4.
Name and address of CONTRACTOR.
5.
Name and address of Subcontractor.
6.
Name and address of supplier.
7.
Name and address of manufacturer.
8. 9. E.
Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate.
Unless otherwise agreed to or indicated in individual Specification sections, submit a sufficient number of sets to allow for adequate distribution to CONTRACTOR, Sub-Contractor, supplier, manufacturer and fabricators plus four (4) sets (two sets to be retained by ARCHITECT, one set to the INSPECTOR and one set to OAR). PRODUCT DATA
3.03 A.
•
. Name and title of appropriate Specification section.
Collect Product Data into a single submittal for each element of Work or system. Product Data includes printed information, such as manufacturer's installation instructions, catalog cuts, standard color charts, roughing-in diagrams and templates, wiring diagrams, schedules, illustrations, or performance curves .
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P .0. T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
I 0/01/2011 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 3300-6
111001
•
1.
• 2.
C. 3.04
Mark each copy to show or delineate pertinent materials, products, models, applicable choices, or options. Where Product Data includes information on several products that are not required, clearly mark copies to indicate the applicable information. Include the following information: a.
Manufacturer's printed recommendations.
b.
Compliance with trade association standards.
c.
Compliance with recognized testing agency standards.
d.
Application of testing agency labels and seals.
e.
Notation of dimensions verified by field measurement.
f.
Notation of coordination requirements.
g.
Notation of dimensions and required clearances.
h.
Indicate performance characteristics and capacities.
1.
Indicate wiring diagrams and controls.
Do not submit Product Data until compliance with requirements of the Contract Documents has been confirmed by CONTRACTOR.
Required Copies and Distribution: Same as denoted in Article 3.02.E. SAMPLES
A.
Procedure: 1.
Submit Samples of sufficient size, quantity, cured and finished and physically identical to the proposed product or material. Samples include partial or full sections or range of manufactured or fabricated components, cuts or containers of materials, color range sets, and swatches denoting color, texture, and/or pattern. a.
•
Mount or display Samples in the manner to facilitate review of qualities indicated. Include the following: 1)
Specification section number and reference.
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR& P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 3300-7
111001
• 2.
•
B.
•
2)
Generic description of the Sample.
3)
Sampling source.
4)
Product name or name of manufacturer.
5)
Compliance with recognized standards.
6)
Availability and delivery time.
Submit Samples for review of size, kind, color, pattern, and texture. Submit Samples for a final check of these characteristics with other elements and a comparison of these characteristics between the final submittal and the actual component as delivered and installed. a.
Where variations in color, pattern, texture, or other characteristic is inherent in the material or product represented, submit at least three (3) multiple units that show the approximate limits of the variations.
b.
Refer to other Specification sections for requirements for Samples that illustrate materials, fabrication techniques, assembly details, connections, operation, and similar construction characteristics .
c.
Refer to other sections for Samples to be returned to CONTRACTOR for incorporation into the Work. Such Samples must be undamaged at time of installation. On the transmittal indicate special requests regarding disposition of Sample submittals.
d.
Samples not incorporated into the Work, or otherwise not designated as Owner property, remain the property of CONTRACTOR and shall be removed from the Project site prior to Substantial Completion.
3.
Color and Pattern: Whenever a choice of color or pattern is available in a specified product, submit accurate color chips and pattern charts to OAR for review and selection.
4.
Number Required: Submit six, minimum, of each. Two will be returned to CONTRACTOR.
When specified, erect field Samples and mock-ups at the Project site to illustrate products, materials, fabrications, or execution and to establish standards by which completed Work shall be judged .
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 3300-8
Ill 001
•
C.
QUALITY CONTROL SUBMITTALS
3.05
•
•
Maintain sets of Samples, as returned, at the Project site, for quality comparisons throughout the course of the Work. Sample sets may be used to obtain final acceptance of the Work associated with each set.
A.
Submit quality control submittals, including design data, certifications, manufacturer's field reports, and other quality control submittals as required under other sections of the Contract Documents.
B.
When other sections of the Contract Documents reqmre manufacturer's certification of a product, material, or installation complies with specified requirements, submit a notarized certification from the manufacturer certifying compliance with specified requirements.
C.
Certification shall be signed by an officer of the manufacturer or other individual authorized to sign documents on behalf of the represented company.
D.
Requirements for submittal of inspection and test reports are specified in other sections of the Contract Documents. END OF SECTION
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 3300-9
•
SECTION 01 3546 INDOOR AIR QUALITY PROCEDURES
PART 1- GENERAL SUMMARY
1.01 A.
•
B.
C.
•
D.
Section includes: 1.
CONTRACTOR's requirements and actions to ensure that the building and the mechanical system are free of Volatile Organic Compounds (VOCs), moisture, dust, mold, and microbes prior to achieving Substantial Completion.
2.
CONTRACTOR requirements for temporary construction ventilation, dust protection, preconditioning of materials, protection of materials, sequencing, and duct protection.
Related Requirements: 1.
Division 01 -General Requirements.
2.
Section 01 1216 - Phasing of the Work.
3.
Section 01 4525- Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC.
4.
SeCtion 01 5000- Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls.
5.
Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
6.
Section 23 3000- Air Distribution.
7.
Section 23 8000 - Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning Equipment.
Referenced Standards: 1.
ASHRAE 62.1,_ Ventilation for Acceptable Indoor Air Quality.
2.
ASHRAE 52.2, Method of Testing General Ventilation Air-Cleaning Devices for Removal Efficiency by Particle Size.
VOC-Emitting Materials. Related Sections: 1.
Section 06 1736- Metal Web Wood Joists.
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR& P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
03/28/2017 INDOOR AIR QUALITY PROCEDURES 01 3546-1
• E.
2.
Section 06 2000- Finish Carpentry.
3.
Section 06 4000 - Architectural Woodwork.
4.
Section 07 9200- Joint Sealants.
5.
Section 09 2900 - Gypsum Board.
6.
Section 09 6513 - Rubber Base.
7.
Section 09 6516 - Resilient Sheet Flooring.
8.
Section 09 6519 - Vinyl Composition Tile.
9.
Section 09 9000 - Painting and Coating.
VOC-Emitting Furnishings and Equipment. Related Sections: 1.
F.
• 1.02
Section 06 4000 - Architectural Woodwork.
Porous and Fibrous Materials. Related Sections: 1.
Section 07 21 00 - Thermal Insulation .
2.
Section 09 5113 - Acoustical Panel Ceilings.
3.
Section 09 6816 - Carpeting.
SUBMITTALS A.
CONTRACTOR shall develop and submit to the OAR for review and approval a Construction Indoor Air Quality (IAQ) Plan using the blank form provided after the end of this Section. Plan shall be submitted within 120 days of Notice to Proceed (NTP). Implementation of the approved IAQ Plan shall be included in the project Construction Schedule.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3- EXECUTION (Not Used) 3.01
•
QUALITY CONTROL A.
CONTRACTOR shall conduct inspections to confirm that measures proposed in the Construction IAQ Plan are followed during construction and shall report on the
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR& P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
03/28/2017 INDOOR AIR QUALITY PROCEDURES 01 3546-2
•
progress of the Plan during the progress meetings described in Section 01 3119: Project Meetings. PROJECT CONDITIONS
3.02
A.
During construction, prior to Substantial Completion and Building Flush Out, systems designed with particle filters shall not be operated at any time without filters in place. Filters used during construction shall have a minimum rating of MERV 8. Following construction completion, replace filters per Section 23 8000, Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning Equipment.
B.
Following completion of building envelope maintain continuous Temporary Construction Ventilation of interior areas where VOC-Emitting Materials and VOC-Emitting Furnishings and Equipment, identified in Paragraphs l.Ol.D and l.Ol.E ofthis Section, areas are installed.
1.
••
•
C.
Temporary Construction Ventilation may be supplied via the building's HV AC system and shall comply with the following requirements: a.
Return air grilles shall be sealed or temporary MERV 8 air filters shall be installed .
b.
Provide MERV 8 air filters to filter the outside air.
c.
Provide a minimum of three air changes per hour of outside air while maintaining the building interior temperature between 60 degrees F and 85 degrees F with the ~elative humidity not to exceed 60 percent.
2.
The Temporary Construction Ventilation specified requirements for building interior temperature and/or relative humidity may be exceeded only when the building HV AC unit is operating at 100 percent capacity.
3.
Temporary Construction Ventilation may be supplied via temporary ducts and fans, sufficient to provide no less than three air changes per hour, and exhausted directly to the outside/outdoors while maintaining the building interior temperature between 60 degrees F and 85 degrees F with the relative humidity not to exceed 60 percent.
4.
Maintain continuous Temporary Construction Ventilation for a minimum period of 72 hours after installation of the VOC-Emitting Materials unless otherwise indicated elsewhere in these Specifications.
Temporary Construction Ventilation shall be provided for post-building-flushout, post-occupancy touch-up, or punch list activities involving VOC-Emitting
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
03/28/2017 INDOOR AIR QUALITY PROCEDURES 01 3546-3
•
materials. Touch-up activities involving VOC-Emitting Materials shall not occur when students or staff are present. D.
3.03
Prior to installation, allow VOC-Emitting Furnishings and Equipment, identified in Paragraph l.Ol.E of this Section, to off-gas in dry, well-ventilated space for 14 calendar days. 1.
Remove containers and packaging to maximize off-gassing ofVOCs.
2.
Precondition products in ventilated warehouse or other ventilated building. Preconditioning at the project site is acceptable, provided that Temporary Construction Ventilation and Sequencing measures are taken as described in Paragraph 3.02.B and Article 3.03 of this Section.
3.
Products requiring preconditioning include, at a minimum, VOC-Emitting Furnishings and Equipment that contain vinyl or other flexible plastics, resins, adhesives, foam rubber, and fiberboards with urea-formaldehyde binders. Products bearing CHPS-approval as low- emitting materials GREENGUARD Certification, Indoor Advantage Gold Certification, Green Label Plus Certification, or other OWNER-approved certification shall be excluded from this preconditioning requirement.
SEQUENCING A.
Where VOC-Emitting Materials identified in Paragraph l.Ol.D ofthis Section are applied on-site, apply the VOC-Emitting Materials prior to installation of any Porous and Fibrous Materials identified in Paragraph l.Ol.F of this Section. Maintain the continuous Temporary Construction Ventilation requirements described above for a period of 72 hours before installation of porous and fibrous materials. 1.
B.
Completion: Complete interior finish material installation pnor To Building Flush-Out as described in Paragraph 3.05.C of this Section. PROTECTION
3.04
•
Where this sequencing requirement is not possible, protect porous materials with polyethylene vapor retarders. Tape polyethylene edges to insure a complete seal. Maintain continuous ventilation per temporary construction ventilation requirements described above for a period of 72 hours before removing polyethylene.
A.
Moisture Protection:
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
03/28/2017 INDOOR AIR QUALITY PROCEDURES 01 3546-4
•
B.
•• 3.05
•
1.
Protect materials specified in Paragraphs l.Ol.D, l.Ol.E and l.Ol.F of this Section from water intrusion or penetration.
2.
Weatherproof enclosures shall be temporarily constructed to store and protect the materials from moisture sources.
3.
Materials shall be covered to protect them from rain and other moisture sources and, if resting on the ground, shall use spacers to allow air to circulate between the ground and the materials.
4.
Materials including porous or fibrous materials with visible mold and microbial growth shall not be installed. a.
Non-porous materials with minor visible mold and microbial growth shall be decontaminated.
b.
Structural lumber showing visible signs of mold shall be removed from the project site or be decontaminated, per specification Section 06 1000 - Rough Carpentry, prior to installation.
Duct Protection: 1.
Seal ducts during transportation and delivery, per Section 23 3000, Air Distribution.
2.
Seal ducts during construction to prevent accumulation of dust and debris. If seals must be removed for temporary construction ventilation purposes, they shall be resealed upon conclusion of the required ventilation period. Remove seals prior to HV AC system start-up.
3.
During dust producing activities in enclosed buildings, such as drywall installation and finishing, sanding, cutting, or grinding, CONTRACTOR shall turn HV AC ventilation system off and protect HV AC system supply and return openings from dust infiltration. Separate dust-producing activities from the rest of the construction area using plastic sheathing. Provide temporary ventilation.
CLEANING A.
Just prior to Substantial Completion, vacuum carpeted and soft surfaces with a Green Label certified vacuum.
B.
Duct Cleanliness: 1.
Before shipment to site ensure ducts are clean and duct openings protected with a self-adhering film, as specified On Section 23 3000, Air Distribution.
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR& P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
03/28/2017 INDOOR AIR QUALITY PROCEDURES 01 3546-5
•
•
2.
C.
Just prior to Substantial Completion and prior to using any ducts to circulate air, ensure that the ducts are free of dust and dirt.
Building Flush-Out: 1.
Building Flush-Out procedures of this Section supersede those described those of Section 01 4525: Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing ofHVAC.
2.
At construction completion, prior to occupancy and with all interior finishes installed, replace filtration media with new per HV AC equipment schedule and perform a building flush-out. Flush-out shall supply a total air volume of 14,000 cubic feet of outdoor air per square foot of floor area while maintaining an internal temperature of at least 60 degrees Fahrenheit and relative humidity no higher than 60%.
3.
If OWNER elects to partially use and/or occupy the Work prior to completion of the flush-out, the space may be occupied following delivery of a minimum of 3,500 cubic feet of outdoor air per square foot of floor area. Once the space is occupied, it shall be ventilated at a minimum rate of 0.30 cubic feet per minute (cfm) per square foot of outside air. During each day of the flush-out period, ventilation shall begin a minimum of 3 hours prior to occupancy and continue during occupancy. These conditions shall be maintained until a total of 14,000 cubic feet per square foot of outside air has been delivered to the space.
4.
During building flush-out, when required to perform touch-up or punch list activities involving VOC-Emitting Materials as described in Article 1.01 of this Section, extend Building Flush-Out by a minimum of four days continuously after the touch-up or punch list activities at the maximum tempered outside air rate for 24 hours per day in the space where the touch-up or punch list activities occurred.
5.
If Continuous Construction Ventilation is not possible, non-continuous flush-out shall total an equivalent of air as described in Paragraph 3.05C.2 above.
6.
Return ventilation system to normal operation following flush-out period to minimize energy consumption.
END OF SECTION
•
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR& P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
03/28/2017 INDOOR AIR QUALITY PROCEDURES 01 3546-6
•
CONSTRUCTION INDOOR AIRQUALITY (IAQ) PLAN Contractor shall complete and submit this Plan to the OAR no later than one hundred twenty (120) days after receipt ofNotice to Proceed. GENERAL CONTRACTOR: Name: ------------------------------- Title: -----------------------------Telephone: Fax: ______________________________ Email: ----------------------------------------------------------------! have read and understood and will implement the following Construction IAQ Plan. Signature: I.
Date:
CONSTRUCTION VENTILATION (Per paragraphs 3.02.A through C)
List project materials requiring Construction Ventilation per Part 1 of this Section. Attach additional sheet if necessary .
•
•
Circle the following Temporary Construction Ventilation approach to be used. Ventilation will be supplied via building's HVAC system. • ___ Return air grilles are sealed. Exhaust is provided via open windows or doors. OR: 3.02.B • Return air grilles are used for exhaust. HVAC will provide a minimum 35 percent outside air. Air filters with a minimum MERV rating of 8 will be provided at return air grilles. ._ • Building HV AC will be turned off during dust generating activities. Ventilation will be accomplished via open windows, temporary ducts, and temporary fans ducted directly to the outdoors. 3.02.B.3 • Supply air diffusers, return air grilles, and/or open ducts will be sealed. Make-up air will be provided through open windows or doors or other transfer air devices. • HVAC system will provide make-up air. Return air grilles will be sealed.
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR& P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
09/30/2016 INDOOR AIR QUALITY PROCEDURES 01 3546-10
•
• • Required •
II.
Ventilation will provide no less than three air changes per hour. Ventilation will be continuous for a period no less than 72 hours after completion of installation of VOC-emitting materials. Filters used during Construction Ventilation will be replaced prior to Substantial Completion
PRECONDITIONING (Per paragraph 3.02.D)
List project materials requiring Preconditioning per Part 1 of this Section. Attach additional sheet if necessary .
•
Circle the following Preconditioning approach to be used. A
•
Preconditioning will occur in dry and well-ventilated offsite location. offsite location?
Where is the
B
Preconditioning will occur onsite. Check the applicable approach. D Ventilation will be supplied via building's HVAC system. See paragraph 3.02.B above. D Ventilation will be accomplished v1a open windows, temporary ducts, and temporary fans. See paragraph 3.02.B.3 above.
Required
• •
Containers and packaging will be removed prior to Preconditioning. Preconditioning will occur for fourteen (14) continuous days prior to installation
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O. T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
09/30/2016 INDOOR AIR QUALITY PROCEDURES 01 3546-11
•
III.
SEQUENCING (Per Article 3.03)
List project porous and fibrous materials requiring Sequencing consideration per Part 1 of this Section. Attach additional sheet if necessary.
• Required
•
•
•
Previously installed Porous or Fibrous Materials located in a room where VOCEmitting Materials are to be installed will be protected with polyethylene vapor retarder. Polyethylene will not be removed until completion of a 72-hour ventilation period. Installation of interior finish materials will complete fourteen (14) days prior to Substantial Completion
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
09/30/2016 INDOOR AIR QUALITY PROCEDURES 01 3546-12
•
IV.
PROTECTION (Per Article 3.04)
List project materials requiring Protection per Part 1 of this Section. Attach additional sheet if necessary .
•
•
• Required
•
•
•
Weatherproof enclosures shall be temporarily constructed to store and protect the materials from moisture sources. Materials shall be covered from rain and other moisture sources and if resting on the ground, use spacers to allow air to circulate between the ground and the materials. Materials including porous or Fibrous Materials with visible microbial growth shall not be installed. Materials that are not defined as Porous or Fibrous with visible microbial growth shall be decontaminated prior to installation. Lumber exhibiting a minor amount of "lumberyard mold" need not be discarded. Temporary ventilation shall be provided during dust producing activities. See Item I Construction Ventilation above. Supply air diffusers and return air grilles shall be covered. Ducts shall be sealed during transportation, delivery, and construction.
END OF CONSTRUCTION INDOOR AIR QUALITY PLAN
••
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR& P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
09/30/2016 INDOOR AIR QUALITY PROCEDURES 01 3546-13
170328
SECTION 01 4213
•
ABBREVIATIONS, SYMBOLS AND ACRONYMS
PART 1- GENERAL 1.01
SECTION INCLUDES A.
List of abbreviations, symbols, and acronyms of societies, institutes, and associations generally appearing in the Contract Documents. RELATED REQUIREMENTS
1.02 A.
Division 01 - General Requirements
PART 2- PRODUCTS (Not applicable) PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01
•
ABBREVIATIONS ac AFF
Alternating current Above Finish Floor
amp
ampere
BOOTP
Bootstrap Protocol
BTU
British thermal unit
c
Degrees Centigrade, Celsius _)
Cat6
Category 6, unshielded twisted pair cabling
CFC
Chlorofluorocarbon
cfh cfm em Co. COP Corp.
•
d db. DB de
(
Cubic feet per hour Cubic feet per minute Centimeter Company Coefficient of performance Corporation Penny Decibel Dry bulb Direct current
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR& P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
03/28/2017 ABBREVIATIONS, SYMBOLS AND ACRONYMS 01 4213-1
170328
•
•
•
EER
Energy efficiency ratio
F fpm
ft GA
Degrees Fahrenheit Feet per minute Foot or feet Gage
gph gpm
Gallons per hour Gallons per minute
HP HVAC Hz ID
Horsepower Heating, ventilating and air conditioning Hertz Inside Diameter
Inc. IR light
Incorporated Infrared light
Kbps
Kilobits per Second
KHz Kip Ksf Ksi Kv KVA KW KWH
Kilohertz thousand pounds Thousand pounds per square foot Thousand pounds per square inch Kilovolt Kilovolt amperes Kilowatt Kilowatt hour
LF Lb(s) LCD Lux Max
Linear foot Pound(s) Liquid Crystal Display A standard unit of illumination measurement Maximum
MBH MHz mil Min mm mph NA NIC
1000 BTU s per hour Mega hertz Thousandth of an inch Minimum Millimeter Miles per hour Not Applicable Not in Contract On Center Outside Dimension
oc OD
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR& P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
03/28/2017 ABBREVIATIONS, SYMBOLS AND ACRONYMS 01 4213-2
170328
•
oz .
Ounce
PCF pH psf ps1 psig PVC
Pounds per cubic foot Acidity-alkalinity balance Pounds per square foot Pounds per square inch Pounds per square inch, gage Polyvinylchloride
RF rpm
Radio frequency Revolutions per minute
SF
Square foot
ss
Stainless Steel Square yard
SY
•
v w
Volts
WB
Wet bulb
3.02
SYMBOLS # II
% 0
Number or pound Foot or feet Inch(es) Percent Degree (Angle or Temperature) ACRONYMS
3.03
•
Watts
AA AABC AAMA AASHTO AATCC ABMA ACI -· ADA ADAAG AEC AGA AGC
The Aluminum Association, Inc Associated Air Balance Council American Architectural Manufacturers Association American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials American Association of Textile Chemists and Colorists American Boiler Manufacturers Association American Concrete Institute --Americans with Disabilities Act Americans with Disabilities Act Accessibility Guidelines Automatic Echo Cancellation American Gas Association Automatic Gain Control
CORWIN THEATER REPA1R & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
03/28/2017 ABBREVlA TIONS, SYMBOLS AND ACRONYMS 01 4213-3
170328
•
•
•
AGCIH AI AlA AISC AISI AITC AMCA
American Conference of Governmental Industrial Hygienists Asphalt Institute American Institute of Architects American Institute of Steel Construction American Iron and Steel Institute American Institute of Timber Construction Air Movement and Control Association, Inc.
ANI ANSI APA API ARI
Automatic Number Identification American National Standards Institute AP A - The Engineered Wood Association Application Programming Interface Air-Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute
ARS ARP
Automated Route Selection Address Resolution Protocol
ATSC ASHRAE ASME ASTM ATBCB AWl AWPA AWPI AWS AWWA BBS BGP
Advanced Television Systems Committee American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and Air Conditioning Engineers American Society of Mechanical Engineers American Society for Testing and Materials Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board Architectural Woodwork Institute American Wood Preservers Association American Wood Preservers Institute American Welding Society American Water Works Association Backbone Switch Border Gateway Protocol
BHMA BIA BICSI
Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association Brick Institute of America Building Industry Consulting Services, International
BRI
Basic Rate Interface
CAL/OSHA CAC CAS CAT5e CBC CCR CCK
California Occupational Safety and Health Administration Call Admission Control Channel Associated Signaling Category 5e California Building Code California Code of Regulations Complementary Code Keying
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
03/28/2017 ABBREVIATIONS, SYMBOLS AND ACRONYMS 014213-4
170328
•
CDR CEC CESM CFR CIF CIS PI CLFMI CLI CLID CMAS CMC CNG CNID CQC Co dec
CTIOA CTI DHCP
Call Detail Record California Electrical Code Compact Edge Switch-Managed Code of Federal Regulations Common Intermediate Format Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute Chain Link Fence Manufacturers Institute Command Line Interface Calling Line Identification California Multiple Award Schedule California Mechanical Code Comfort Noise Generation Calling Party Name Identification California Quality Control (CMA Standards) Coder/Decoder Class of Service California Plumbing Code California Redwood Association Carpet and Rug Institute Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute Commercial Standards, U.S. Department of Commerce Communications Server California State Fire Marshal Construction Specifications Institute Ceramic Tile Institute of America Cooling Tower Institute Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol
DHI
Door and Hardware Institute
DNS DSA DTV DSS DTMF DVD EIA EIS ESM E&M FAT
Domain Name System Division of the State Architect Digital Television Direct Station Selection Dual Tone Multiple Frequency Digital Video Disc Electronic Industries Alliance Electronic Image Stabilization Edge Switch-Managed Ear and Mouth Field Acceptance Testing
cos
•
•
CPC CRA CRI CRSI
cs cs CSFM
csi
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR& P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
03/28/2017 ABBREVIATIONS, SYMBOLS AND ACRONYMS 01 4213-5
170328
•
•
•
FEP FEP FPS FTP FXS
Front End Processor Fluorinated Ethylene Propylene Frames per Second File Transfer Protocol Foreign Exchange Station
EPA ETL FCC FDA FECC FM FPS FS FXO FXS
Environmental Protection Agency ETL Testing Laboratories Federal Communication Commission Food and Drug Administration Far End Camera Control Factory Mutual Frames per Second Federal Specifications Foreign Exchange Office Foreign Exchange Station
GA GANA GBIC GUI GigE
Gypsum Association Glass Association ofNorth America Gigabit Interface Converter Graphical User Interface Gigabit Ethernet
HMMA HPVA HTTP HTTPS HVAC
Hollow Metal Manufacturer's Association Hardwood Plywood & Veneer Association Hypertext Transfer Protocol Hypertext Transfer Protocol over SSL Heating, Ventilation, and Air Conditioning
lACS lAMPO IC ICBO ICEA ICMP ID IDF IEEE IEC IES IMI lOR
International Annealed Copper Standards International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials Intercom International Conference of Building Officials Insulated Cable Engineers Association Internet Control and Message Protocol Identifier Intermediate Distribution Frame Institute of Electrical & Electronic Engineers, Inc. International Electro technical Commission Illuminating Engineering Society International Masonry Institute Inspector of Record
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
03/28/2017 ABBREVIATIONS, SYMBOLS AND ACRONYMS 01 4213-6
170328
•
•
•
IP IP Router IPVC IPX IRI ISDN ISO ISA ISDN ISM ISP lTD ITU IVR JPEG Kbps LAN LCD LDC LDF LED LIU MAC MAN MBR MCU MDF MDF-BBS MIB MIC MLD
Internet Protocol Internet Protocol Router Internet Protocol Video Conferencing Internetwork Packet Exchange Industrial Risk Insurers Integrated Services Digital Network International Organization for Standardization Industry Standard Architecture Integrated Services Digital Network Intermediate Switch-Managed (Fiber Switch) Internet Service Provider OWNER, Information Technology Division International Telecommunication Union Interactive Voice Response Joint Photographic Experts Group (image format) Kilobits per Second Local Area Network Liquid Crystal Display Local Distribution - Cabinet Local Distribution Frame Light Emitting Diode Light Interconnection Unit Media Access Control Metropolitan Area Network Maximum Bit Rate Multipoint Conference Unit Main Distribution Frame Main Distribution Frame Backbone Switch Management Information Base Message Integrity Check Multicast Listener Discovery
MLSFA MPOE MPEG MP-BGP MOS MSS
Metal Lath/Steel Framing Association Main Point of Entry Moving Picture Experts Group Multi-Protocol Border Gateway Protocol Mean Opinion Scale Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve & Fittings Industry .
NAAMM
National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
03/28/2017 ABBREVIATIONS, SYMBOLS AND ACRONYMS 01 4213-7
170328
•
•
•
NAT
Network Address Translation
NAT-PT
NAT Protocol Translation
NAS NBFU NBS NCMA NEBB NEBS NEC NEMA NEC NFPA NFPA NIC NIOSH NIST NOFMA NPCA NPDES NRCA NSF NTP NTMA NTSC NUSIG NWMA
Network Attached Storage National Board ofFire Underwriters National Bureau of Standards National Concrete Masonry Association National Environmental Balancing Bureau Network Equipment Building System National Electrical Code National Electrical Manufacturers Association National Electrical Code National Fire Protection Association National Forest Products Association Network Interface Card National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health National Institute of Standards and Technology National Oak Flooring Manufacturers Association National Paint and Coatings Association National Pollutant Discharge Elimination System National Roofing Contractors Association National Sanitation Foundation Network Time Protocol National Terrazzo & Mosaic Association National Television System Committee National Uniform Seismic Installation Guidelines National Woodwork Manufacturers Association
OAR
OWNER Authorized Representative
OC-3
Optical Carrier Level-3 (~ 15 5 Mbps)
OEHS
Office of Environmental Health and Safety (LAUSD's)
OFNR
Optical Fiber Non-Conductive Riser
OFNP
Optical Fiber Non-Conductive Plenum
OlD
Object Identifier
OPX
Off Premise Extension
OSHA
Occupational Safety & Health Administrations
OSI
Open Systems Interconnection
OSPF
Open Shortest Path First
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
03/28/2017 ABBREVIATIONS, SYMBOLS AND ACRONYMS 01 4213-8
170328
•
•
•
OTDR OWAN OWNER
Optical Time Domain Reflectometer. OWNER's Wide Area Network Los Angeles Unified School District
PA
Public Address
PABX
Private Auxiliary Branch Exchange
PA/IC
Public Address/Intercommunications
PAL
Phase Alternating Line
PAT
Port Address Translation
PBX
Private Branch Exchange
PCA PCI PCM PDI PEl PHB PIC PIM PING PINX PIP PMO PoE POP POTS PRI PS PSIP PSTN PZM QCIF QoS QSIG RADIUS
Portland Cement Association Precast/Prestressed Concrete Institute Pulse Code Modulation Plumbing and Drainage Institute Porcelain Enamel Institute Per Hop Behavior (DiffServ) PBX Integration Card Protocol-Independent Multicast Packet Internet Groper Private Integrated Services Network Exchange Picture in Picture Project Management Office Power-over-Ethernet Point of Presence Plain Old Telephone System Primary Rate Interface Product Standard, U.S. Department of Commerce Program and System Information Protocol Public Switched Telephone Network Pressure Zone Microphone Quarter CIF - See CIF Quality of Service Q-Signaling Remote Access Dial-In User Service
RIP
Routing Information Protocol
RIPng
Routing Information Protocol Next Generation
RIS
Redwood Inspection Service
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR& P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
03/28/2017 ABBREVIATIONS, SYMBOLS AND ACRONYMS 01 4213-9
170328
•
•
•
RMON
Remote Network Monitoring
RMON2
Remote Network Monitoring Version 2
SAN
Storage Area Network
SCAQMD
South Coast Air Quality Management District
SCSI SDEI SDI SFM SFP SFP+ SFPA SIF SIP SIGMA SJI SLC SMACNA SMDI SMI SMTP SMPTE SNA SNMP SSH SSID SSL SSPC SIP DIF SWI TEHO
Small Computer System Interface Steel Deck Institute Steel Door Institute State Fire Marshal Small Form-factor Pluggable transceiver Enhanced Small Form-factor Pluggable transceiver Southern Forest Products Association Source input format (NTSC) Session Initiation Protocol Sealed Insulating Glass Manufacturers Association Steel Joist Institute Small Learning Community Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association Simple Message Desk Interface Structure of Management Information Simple Mail Transfer Protocol Society of Motion Picture and Television Engineers Systems Network Architecture Simple Network Management Protocol Secure Shell Service Set Identifier Secure Socket Layer Steel Structures Painting Council Sony/Philips Digital InterFace Steel Window Institute Tail End Hop Off
TCA
Tile Council of America
TCP
Transmission Control Protocol
TFTP
Trivial File Transfer Protocol
TIA,
Telecommunications Industry Association
TKIP
Temporal Key Integrity Protocol
TLS
Transport Layer Security
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
03/28/2017 ABBREVIATIONS, SYMBOLS AND ACRONYMS 01 4213-10
170328
•
•
TOS
Type of Service
UBPPA UCI UFAS UL UM UPS UPnP URL USDA UTC UTP VAD VBR VLAN VM VMS VoD VoiP VFD VTC WAN WLAN WDR
Uni-Bell PVC Pipe Association Uniform Construction Index Uniform Federal Accessibility Standards Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. Unified Messaging Uninterruptible Power Supply Universal Plug and Play Uniform Resource Locator United State Department of Agriculture Coordinated Universal Time Unshielded Twisted Pair Voice Activity Detection Variable Bit Rate Virtual Local Area Network Voice Mail Video Management System Video on Demand Voice over Internet Protocol Vacuum Fluorescent Display Video Teleconference Wide Area Network Wireless Local Area Network Wide dynamic range
WCLIB WDMA WWPA
West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau Window and Door Manufacturers Association Western Wood Products Association END OF SECTION
•
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
03/28/2017 ABBREVIATIONS, SYMBOLS AND ACRONYMS 014213-11
120727
•
SECTION 01 4523 TESTING AND INSPECTION PART 1 - GENERAL SECTION INCLUDES
1.01
A.
Testing and inspection services to meet requirements of the California .Building Code (CBC).
C.
Tests of materials are required by a DSA certified testing agency as set forth in Section 4-335 of the California Building Standards Commission's, California Administrative Code. RELATED REQUIREMENTS
1.02
•
A.
Section 01 3113: Project Coordination
B.
Section 01 3213: Construction Schedule
C.
Section 01 3229 -Project Forms
D.
Section 01 3300: Submittal Procedures
E.
Section 01 4525- Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC
F.
Section 01 5000- Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls
G.
Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements
H.
Section 01 7329- Cutting and Patching
I.
Section 01 7700- Contract Closeout
J.
Section 01 7836- Warranties
PART 2- PRODUCTS (Not used) PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01
TESTS A.
•
OWNER will select and provide an independent DSA certified testing agency (the agency) to conduct tests, sampling, and testing of materials. Selection of material to be tested shall be by the agency and not by CONTRACTOR.
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
07/27/2012 TESTING AND INSPECTION 01 4523-1
120727
•
B.
Any material shipped from the source of supply prior to having satisfactorily passed such testing and inspection, or prior to the receipt of notice from PI such testing and inspection is not required, shall not be incorporated into the Work.
C.
OWNER will select, and directly reimburse, the agency for costs of all DSA required tests and inspections; however, the agency but may be reimbursed by CONTRACTOR for such costs as specified or noted in related sections of the Contract Documents.
D.
The independent testing agency is not authorized to release, revoke, alter, or enlarge requirements of the Contract Documents or approve or accept any portion ofthe Work.
E.
The agency shall not perform any duties of CONTRACTOR.
F.
CONTRACTOR shall provide an insulated curing box with the capacity for twenty concrete cylinders and will relocate said box and cylinders as rapidly as required in order to provide for progress of the Work. TEST REPORTS
3.02 A.
•
VERIFICATION OF TEST REPORTS
3.03 A.
Each testing agency shall submit to the Division of the State Architect, in duplicate, a verified report covering all tests required to be performed by that agency during the progress of the Work. Such report, covering all required tests, shall be furnished prior to Substantial Completion and/or, when construction on the Work is suspended, covering all tests up to the time of Work suspension. INSPECTION BY OWNER
3.04
•
Test reports shall include all tests performed, regardless of whether such tests indicate the material is satisfactory or unsatisfactory. Samples taken but not tested shall also be reported. Records of special sampling operations, when and as required, shall also be reported. Reports shall indicate the material (or materials) was sampled and tested in accordance with requirements of CBC, Title 24, Parts 1 and 2, as indicated on the Drawings. Test reports shall indicate specified design strength and specifically state whether or not the material (or materials) tested comply with the specified requirements.
A.
OWNER, and its representatives, shall have access, for purposes of inspection, at all times to all parts of the Work and to all shops wherein the Work is in preparation. CONTRACTOR shall, at all times, maintain proper facilities and provide safe access for such inspection.
B.
OAR shall have the right to reject materials and/or workmanship deemed defective Work and to require correction. Defective workmanship shall be corrected in a satisfactory manner and defective materials shall be removed from
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR& P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
07/27/2012 TESTING AND INSPECTION 01 4523-2
120727
•
the premises and legally disposed of without charge to OWNER. If CONTRACTOR does not correct such defective Work within a reasonable time, fixed by written notice and in accordance with the terms and conditions of the Contract Documents, OWNER may correct such defective Work and proceed in accordance with related Articles of the Contract Documents. C.
PROJECT INSPECTOR
3.05
•
CONTRACTOR is responsible for compliance to all applicable local, state, and federal regulations regarding codes, regulations, ordinances, restrictions, and requirements.
A.
A Project Inspector shall be employed by OWNER in accordance with requirements of Title 24 of the California Code of Regulations with their duties specifically defined therein. Additional DSA certified inspectors may be employed and assigned to the Work by OWNER in accordance with the requirements of California Building Standards Commission's, California Administrative Code with their duties as specifically defined in Section 4-333(b).
B.
Inspection of Work shall not relieve CONTRACTOR from any obligation to fulfill all terms and conditions of the Contract Documents.
C.
CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for scheduling times of inspection, tests, sample taking, and similar activities of the Work. TESTS AND INSPECTIONS
3.06
The following tests and inspections do not limit inspection of the Work but are required by DSA, other agencies, or are required in related Sections of the Contract Documents. A.
Excavations, Foundations and Retaining Walls- CBC, Chapter 18A: 1.
B.
a.
Inspection of Driven Pile Installation 181 OA.4.12
b.
Inspection of Caissons
1810A.4.12
Concrete- CBC, Chapter 19A: 1.
•
Inspection:
Materials:
a.
Test of Materials
1903A.1-ACI 318
b.
Portland Cement Tests
1916A.1-ASTM C 150
c.
Concrete Aggregate
1903A.5 -ACI 318
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR& P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
07/27/2012 TESTING AND INSPECTION 01 4523-3
120727
• 2.
•
3.
C.
Shotcrete Aggregate
1913A.3
e.
Reinforcing Bars
1916A.2
f.
Prestressing Steel & Anchorage
1916A.3
g.
Structural Steel, Steel Pipe or Tubing 1906A.3
h.
Admixtures
1904A.4
Quality: a.
Proportions of Concrete
1905A.2
b.
Mixing and Placing
1905A.8 to; 1905A.12;
c.
Concrete Testing
1905A.6.3 to 1905A6.5
d.
Test of Shotcrete
1913A.5; 1913A.10; 1916A.5
e.
Composite Construction Cores
1916A.4
f.
Gypsum Concrete Strength Tests
1916A.6
Inspection: a.
Project Site Inspection
1905A.l
b.
Batch Plant or Weigh-master Inspection
c.
Pre-stressed Concrete Inspection
1704A.4.4
d.
Shotcrete Inspection
1704A
e.
Reinforcing Bar Welding Inspection 1704A.3.1.4
1704A.4.2
Lightweight Metal - CBC, Chapter 22A: 1.
2.
•
d.
Materials: a.
Alloys
2210A.l
b.
Identification
2210A.l
Inspection: a.
Welding
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
2211A.2.3
07/27/2012 TESTING AND INSPECTION 01 4523-4
120727
•
D.
Masonry- CBC, Chapter 21A: 1.
2.
•
3.
E.
Materials: a.
Masonry Units
2103A.1,2,3,4,5,6,7
b.
Portland Cement
2103A.10.1; 2103A.10.2
c.
Mortar & Grout Aggregates
2103A.12.3
d.
Reinforcing Bars
2103A.l3
Quality: a.
Portland Cement Tests
2105A.2.2
b.
Mortar & Grout Tests
21 05A.2.2.1.4
c.
Masonry Prism Tests
21 05A.2.2.2; 21 05A.2.2.3
d.
Masonry Core Tests
2105A.4
e.
Reinforcing Bars
2103A.13
Inspection: 1704A.5
a.
Reinforced Masonry
b.
Reinforcing Bar Welding Inspection 1704A.3 .1.3
Steel - CBC, Chapters 17A & 22A: 1.
2.
Materials: a.
Structural Steel
2205A.1
b.
Material Identification
2203.A.1
Inspection and Tests: a.
Test of Structural Steel
1704A.3
Table 1704A.3.
•
b.
Tests of High Strength Bolts,
1704A.3.3; 2212.A.1
c.
Tests ofEnd Welded Studs
2212A.2
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
07/27/2012 TESTING AND INSPECTION 01 4523-5
120727
• F.
2.
G.
Shop Fabrication Inspection
1704A.3.1.4
e.
Welding Inspection
1704A.3.1.4
f.
High Strength Bolt Inspection
1704A.3.3
g.
Steel Joist Load Tests
1703A.3.2.1
h.
Spray applied fire resistance materials
Materials: a.
Lumber and Plywood Grading
2303.1
b.
Glue- Laminated Members
2303.1.3
Inspection: a.
Glue - Laminated Fabrication
2303.1.3- ASTM D 3737
b.
Timber Connectors
2304.9
c.
Manufactured Trusses
2303.4
Exterior Wall Coverings- CBC, Chapter 14A, 25A: 1.
Materials: a.
2.
Portland Cement Plaster
2512
Inspection: a.
I.
1704A.12
Wood- CBC, Chapter 23A: 1.
•
d.
Veneer Inspection
1409
Clay or Concrete Roof Tile- CBC Chapter 15A: 1.
Materials: a.
2.
Clay or concrete tile
1507.3
Inspection:
1511
END OF SECTION
•
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
07/27/2012 TESTING AND INSPECTION 01 4523-6
• Attachment "A" DSA 103 Number of Pages 5 Including this Cover Sheet= 6
•
• .
~
_.
...
·- ----
---·
--
·--- ________. ---- -.
-~---
------ -·---
.....
~
.... · ..
___ ..,.
_____
~-
--
--~·-
------
. ___,...........-----------......
7 ----
-·
.... ----~----~_,_··------
-----.
..__;_..,.:,.. .._
..
!.-
~-~
" ...~_.:_,,_~~-~~----...:......:::. ..-.::-=-.....::...~-:· ------- _..__.-
'~---
..... -- .. ·-..:_-,_·...l,..:_ -: .;._
~..,(,.-.;
_.:..::_-_...:__·_.
__ .
,,. -,~.:...--·-.:..
~----
__
Page 1 of 5
. ""'::! .
t \\:)\:\
r j
_:_.f:I:I:,P~§A·s 0 E"P ART MEN l" 0-F·· G_.t:·N ERA l
E.R-\11·C) S
\DSA'-103
INCREMENT# rev;9/7/2016
t:isting/ofStructura~- Tests & Special ln~pections - 2013 CBC
_!ko~i'An9:~1~s ,Hi~h~SGJ19QT,.. -
I·
DSA File No.:
!
Application No.:
l
t
I
.
I
r
IMPORTANT: This form is only a summary listof structural tests and some of the special inspections required for the project. Generally, the structural tests and special inspections noted on this form are those that will be performed by the Geotechnical Engineer of Record, Laboratory of Record, or Special Inspector. The actual complete test and inspection program must be performed as detailed on the DSA approved documents. The. appendix at the bottom of this form identifies work NOT subject to DSAorequiremerts for special inspection or structural testing. The project inspector is re~ponsible for providing inspection of all facets of. construction, including but not limited to, spe,cial inspections not listed on this form such as structural wood framing, high-load wood diaphragms, cold-formed steel framing, _anchorage of non-structural components, etc., -per Title'24, Part 2, Chapter 17A. NOTE: This form is also available for projects submitted for review under the 2007 and 2010
INSTRUCTIONS: Click a plus sign(+) before any category or subcategory to reveal additional tests _and special inspections. A shaded box indicates a test or special inspection that may be required, depending on the scope of the construction and other issues. A shaded box can be clicked indicating your selection of that test. Note: A minus (-) on a category or subcategory heading indicates that it can be collapsed. However, any selections you may have made will be cleared. Click on the "COMPILE" button to show only the tests and inspections finally selected. For more information on use of this form, see DSA-1 03.1NSTR.
i l '.,
j
}
'
: l. :j :l 'l
Note: References are.to the 2013 edition of the California Building Code (CBC) unless otherwise noted.
I
\. DSA-103 (rev 9-7-16)
•
•
•
+In the CODE REFERENCE AND NOTES column, it indicates DSA-SS/CC sections that may be used by community colleges, per 2013 CBC Sec. 1.9.2.2.
,._
--·-.J.,. :...,..,.·_
.;__,
-'-·
·_.,.__
..,.
__....:.,_;
·.-:..,
T
;.:
.... ---~ ~ .... - •••·• · ' - . ~ ._: .•
--.....:..;:·..,;. •....;.;;......J"
... ~. ·_,
- ~-.;,.._
P_age 2 of 5
... /:D.S"A··
•
'}\
; :'
·
:
1
i
i
.
.•
'
.
DIVISiaN·a~.THESTA~ARCHITECT
DEPARTM.ENT, OF
GENERAl
SERVICES
DSAi103
____
;
~,.. •.,_'j_...;.-0..:.i'""*--=-·~--··:.:.:: .z..~- :.;c.._:{:....- ___ .:-~··-- -
Us,ting .of~Structural Tests & Special hispectior.as - 2013 CBC
.,: __:
I·
·~'~·
rev 917/2016
__
DSA File No.: Application No.:
·f
Date Submitted:
e. Verify and document steel fabrication per DSA approved construction documents.
j
l
'
DSA IR 17-3.
j
'
!
i
1
l
!
l
l
lj I
i
•
DSA-103 (rev 9-7-16)
•
+In the CODE REFERENCE AND NOTES column, it indicates DSA-SS/CC sections that may be used by community colleges, per 2013 CBC Sec. 1.9.2.2.
.:
.._
-·! -.:.:::~···
'--..~-·\ -~· ..... ~~~-:::..-·---·---·~ #~·::..- ...
··-'"--~~-- -~~;~-·
___
_..
___ .
·----~..,;.·
l· Page 3 of 5
.....;~ ·~
.DSA-103
INCREMENT#
rev; 917/2016
DSA File No.:
· l:Js.ting:ot::s.tructural Tests & Sp~cial ln~pections
- 201.3 CBC
Date Submitted:
'' -~
List of required verified report(s):
;. i ··-
,l
.1
All Structural Testing: Laboratory Verified Report- Form DSA-291
2
Shop Welding Inspection: Laboratory Verified Report- Form DSA-291, or, for independently contracting Sl, Special Inspection Verified Report- Form DSA-292
3
Field. Welding Inspection: Laboratory. verified Report- Form DSA-291, or, for independently contracting Sl, Special Inspection Verified Report- Form DSA-292
., .;
. '
;-
GE- Indicates that the special inspection is to be performed by a registered geotechnical engineer or his or her
J
LOR- Indicates that the test or inspection is to be performed by a testing laboratory accepted in the DSA t:aboratory Evaluation and Acceptance (LEA) Program.·see section 4-335, 2013 CCR Title.24, Part 1.
Sl- Indicates that the special inspection is to be performed by a special inspector
·'''i
l
Anthony Wu Name ofArchitect or Engineer in general responsible charge
Name of Structural Engineer (When structural design has been delegated)
Signature of Architect or Structural Engineer
=
:.M:=:
: ru-
I· •t
·,,
DSA-103 (rev 9-7-16)
•
•
+In the CODE REFERENCE AND NOTES column, it indicates DSA-SS/CC sections tliat may be used by community colleges, per 2013 CBC Sec. 1.9.2.2.
L I
·,,"0. .....
"--~
-'
... ...,.._._ • ., ...
. 1• ..:
.:.."""
._
,L,
-
~--· :~,:·.:i_ -~~L~~ ~..--~··__ _
-..__:__-~
__
_.._:
___ -
~-
:.... ·-
••. ·._...
- - -.... -~~ ..... -· ~
~- -·
.. t-;
_
.
,--
-.:....--...
_;.
_____
~
I
.....1·-·D·:;S·---A·-· _...,_ .,
' 'D E·P
A~~
·
TM
Ci
.••
DMSION·~~THESTA~ARCHITECT'. e"N E;_R A L:S E R v:.·c E S
(t/J··o:F~G
·'DSA~1 03
INCREMENT# rev·S/7/2016
DSA File No.: Application No.:
Listing:of~Str:uctural Tests & Special ln~-pections ·- 2013 CBC
Date submitted:
lru~~~~IID
Appendix: Work Exempt from DSA Requirements for Special Inspection or Structurai.Testing Exempt items given in IR A-22 or the 2013 CBC (including DSA amendments) and those items identified below with an "X" by the design professional are NOT subject to DSA requirements for structural tests and special i_nspections. The project inspector shall verify all construction complies with the approved construction documents.
Soils: ~111.
Deep foundations acting as a cantilever-footing designed•based on ··· minimum allowable pressures per 2013 CBC Table 1806A2 and. having no geotechnical report for the following types of:structures: free standing sign, , ;-~ . ~. scrolling message sign, sco_reboard, covered walkway or shade .structure with ,, . ··, dead load less than 5 psf and other light-weight structures of which the apex is less than 8' above the highest adjacent grade.
; ·x·.:
1
' ":- ;;:;112. Shallow foundations meeting the exception item #1 criteria specified in ; '·, :· 2013 CBC Section 1803A.2.
''.X:c (Optional) List details for applicable exempt items:
Concrete/Masonry: 1. Post-tnstalled anchors for the loliowtng: 1) exempt non-structural . ; components (e.g., mechanical, electrical, plumbing equipment) given in ASCE ·. ·'. 7-10, Section 13.1.4 (and modified by CBC Section 1616A 1. 18) or 2) interior .. · \ nonstructuralwall partitions meeting criteria listed in exempt item 3 for .:x~: "Welding." 2. Concrete-batch plant inspection is not re_quired for the following, provided they are identified on the approved construction documents and the licensed · weighmaster and batch ticket requirements of Section ·1705A3.3 are ·; implemented: 1) site flatwork, 2) unenclosed-site structures, including but not ·, limited to lunch or car shelters, bleachers, solar structures, flag or light poles, , . ~.: or retaining walls less than 4'-0" above the top of foundation not supporting a · surcharge and free standing nonbearing non-shear walls up to 6'-0'.' above adjacent grade, 3) controlled low-strength material backfill, 4) single-story --X jrelocatable buildings less than 2,160 square'feet. ~-~
DSA-103 (rev 9-7-16)
•
•
__ ____.........:.,,_. _..
......
Page 4 of 5
.:;9'
l.
-
•
+In the CODE REFERENCE AND NOTES column, it indicates DSA-SS/CC sections that may be used by community colleges, per 2013 CBC Sec. 1.9.2.2.
.,
•I
. _..; - ; :_ ...i:_L. . -:.~. ~--·--....L~-::.__ ~:......·:.~.__i.:}_ ~~ . ___ ~_... ___;__-. - .__....:.-. __, . .' ~ .... _.. -- ~--::
·"··
- - ~ .... -
-··~..: ....
- · - - _ _ .;..:
...... -.~·.... _... _
_._.;:::_,;_..:....-.:;.;~.;. __.-_;;._..t.,..;;;;,._ _
__ :._._.,.........
}( ............<..---"""""'*-}-..-:.·
Page 5 of 5
-g;I,:D·SA ·
DMSIDN OF.THESTATEARCHITECT 0 EPA R T M E N T U F G E rJ E R A L. S (R v I C E S
DSA~103
INCREMENT#
rev 9/7/2016
Usting:.of'"Structural Tests & Specia~ Inspections - 2013 CBC
~~f~ii~lll
DSA File No.:
-\"·.
.~
Application No.:
support for exempt non-structural components given in ASCE 7-10, Section .13.1.4 (and 'd by CBC Section 1616A.1.18) meeting the following: 1) when supported on a floor/roof, and resulting composite center of mass (including component's center of mass) <= 4' above ing floor/roof, 2) when hung from a wall or roof/floor, <20# for discrete units or <5 plf for istributed systems.
. Masonry retaining walls less than 4'-0" above the top of foundation not ng a surcharge and free standing nonbearing non-shear masonry to 6'-0" above adjacent grade do not require mortar or masonry core _ r DSA special inspection. For non-bearing non-shear.masonry walls exceed ina total wall height of 12' above wall base, mortar test shall be limited to those at the beginning of masonry work for each mix sampling· and testing is not required for non-bearing noncshear not exceeding total wall height of 12' above wall base, built o'nn'o-'IVYthe hollow unit concrete maso~ry that attaches opposite face webs cast as single unit, when designed using an fm not 1,500 psi (10.34 MPa).
X (Optional) List details for applicable exempt items:
.~ .
,~
:·' i
DSA-103 (rev 9-7-16)
•
•
+In the CODE REFERENCE AND NOTES column, it indicates DSA-SS/CC sections that rriay be used by community colleges, per 2013 CBC Sec. 1.9.2.2.
~
170418
•
SECTION 01 5000 CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS PART 1 - GENERAL SECTION INCLUDES
1.01 A.
Temporary utilities, construction facilities and temporary controls to be provided, maintained, relocated, and removed by CONTRACTOR.
B.
Temporary office furnishings and office equipment.
C.
Project signage. QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.02 A.
•
1.03
•
CONTRACTOR shall comply with applicable laws and regulations of authorities having jurisdiction including, but not limited to, the following: 1.
Building Code requirements.
2.
Division of the State Architect.
3.
Health and safety regulations.
4.
Utility company regulations.
5.
Police, fire department and rescue squad requirements.
6.
Environmental protection regulations.
B.
CONTRACTOR shall arrange for the inspection and testing of each temporary utility prior to use. Obtain required certifications and permits and transmit to OAR.
C.
CONTRACTOR provided facilities are to be in place and available for OWNER use and occupancy within (Insert Number of Days) calendar days following the date of issue of the No_tice to Proceed and shall remain in place and available for OWNER use and occupancy throughout the full term of the Contract. SUBMITTALS
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
04/18/2017 CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS 01 5000-1
170418
•
A.
Temporary Utilities: Submit to OAR reports of tests, inspections, meter readings, certifications, permits and similar procedures performed on temporaryutilities .
B.
Project Signage I Banner: Submit to OAR for review and approval.
1.04
1.
Shop Drawings: Elevation showing the text, OWNER sign and color of project signage, jointing, fittings and location of grommets.
2.
Certification: Submit certification attesting fabric is certified as flame retardant, in accordance to NFPA 701, Standard Methods of Fire Tests for Flame Propagation of Textiles and Films.
PROJECT IDENTIFICATION SIGNAGE I BANNER A.
• B.
CONTRACTOR shall furnish and install two Project Signs I Banners on the Project site at a location established by OAR. For graphical layout refer to Appendix A. OAR will provide the information to be posted on the sign. A draft of the proposed sign shall be submitted to OAR for review before fabrication. 1.
Sign Size: Ten feet wide by four feet high, tie wire grommets to fence I barricade.
2.
The following shall be listed on the sign: OWNER: Los Angeles Unified School District.
b.
Los Angeles High School
c.
John Storie- LAUSD School Superintendent.
d.
Dr. George J McKenna III- Board Member-BD-1
e.
Anthony Wu - Architect/Engineer.
f.
TBD -Name of Contractor
g.
Board District Number 1
Products of the following manufacturers form the basis for design and quality intended: 3M, MACtac North America, or equal, and shall meet the following requirements: 1.
•
a.
Flame retardant, heavy duty durable vinyl material, super smooth, minimum 16 ounces per layer .
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR& P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
04/18/2017 CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS 01 5000-2
170418
•
•
•
2.
Banners shall be cut with accurate angles and straight edges. Edges of banner shall be heat welded on four sides without causing fabric separation or otherwise damaging the work.
3.
Banners shall have on both sides a clear, permanent, anti-graffiti coating that shall be durable and last a minimum of two years. Cleaning or removal of graffiti shall not cause damage to the anti-graffiti coating or image, or cause it to flake, yellow, bubble, peel or fade.
4.
Ink used in the printing process shall be of the highest quality OEM inks, and have integral UV protective components.
5.
Banners shall be provided with Yz inch diameter grommets along the top and the bottom edges, spaced not more than 30 inches on center. Grommets shall be 4 inches, minimum, from the edges ofthe banner.
C.
No other signs shall be displayed without approval of OAR. At CONTRACTOR'S expense and without limitation remove and/or relocate Project signage and related facilities as rapidly as required in order to provide for progress ofthe Work.
D.
CONTRACTOR shall remove Project Signage I Banner at Substantial Completion ofthe Work . TEMPORARY UTILITIES
1.05 A.
CONTRACTOR shall coordinate with the appropriate utility company to install temporary services. Where the utility company provides only partial service, CONTRACTOR shall provide and install the remainder with matching compatible materials and equipment.
B.
CONTRACTOR shall furnish, install and pay for all necessary permits, inspections, move ins/out, temporary lines, connections and fees, extensions and distribution, metering devices and use charges, deliveries/pickups, rentals, storage, transportation, taxes, labor, insurance, bonds, material, equipment and all other miscellaneous items for the temporary utility systems. CONTRACTOR shall pay to utility companies for the consumption of the following temporary utility services: 1.
Temporary Water service.
2.
Temporary Electrical service.
3.
Temporary Gas service.
4.
Temporary Telephone and Data.
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
04/18/2017 CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS 01 5000-3
170418
C.
•
• D.
1.
Water distribution piping and outlet devices shall be of the size and required flow rates in order to provide service to all areas of the Project site.
2.
Furnish, install, maintain, extend and distribute temporary electric area distribution boxes, so located that individual trades can obtain adequate power and artificial lighting, at all points required for the Work, for inspection and for safety. a.
Provide 20 foot candles minimum lighting levels inside building(s) and 5 foot candles outside for safety and security.
b.
Ensure welding equipment is supplied by electrical generators.
3.
Provide temporary Heating, Ventilation and Air Conditioning. OWNER will not accept utilization of the permanent HVAC system for temporary HV AC until Substantial Completion. CONTRACTOR shall maintain manufacturer required levels of room and/or space temperature, humidity and ventilation necessary to install products, materials and/or systems, cure materials, disperse humidity, remove fumes, and prevent accumulation of dust, irritants, or gases .
4.
Provide temporary phone, data service and distribution to Project site temporary offices.
Upon Substantial Completion of the Work, remove temporary systems, devices and appurtenances. TEMPORARY OFFICES
1.06 A.
•
Maintain, extend and/or relocate temporary utility systems as rapidly as required in order to provide for progress of the Work.
CONTRACTOR shall provide Project Site temporary office facilities for his own use, and in addition shall provide and maintain a minimum of one construction trailer on the Project site for use by OWNER for the duration of the Work. Construction trailer shall be accessible by OWNER and/or INSPECTOR on a 7 day a week 24-hour basis. CONTRACTOR shall provide the necessary materials and labor to provide the trailer with access for disabled persons on request by the OAR. Trailer shall include, at a minimum, the following: 1.
Conference room with a table and adequate seating for twelve.
2.
One bathroom.
3.
An open work area with devising partitions as required by OWNER.
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
04118/2017 CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS 01 5000-4
170418
•
4.
•
•
Two enclosed, separate offices with windows and lockable doors .
B.
Trailer shall be furnished with two exterior entrance doors with one located in a separate office. Each door shall be furnished with 'Smart Key' technology on both the dead bolt and cylinder lock. Provide six keys for each locking device. Exterior doors and windows shall be provided with exterior mounted burglar bars. Windows shall be provided with operable window shades. Security of trailer and contents is a continuous obligation of CONTRACTOR and shall be equipped with local sounding security system.
C.
Trailer shall have ample headroom, 8-foot minimum, and shall be lighted, heated, ventilated, and air-conditioned. Provide an electrically chilled bottled water fountain of 5-gallon capacity. Purified water shall be supplied in 5-gallon containers, delivered weekly, with four spares on hand after each re-supply visit. As an option, CONTRACTOR may maintain a minimum of two 24 500ml bottles cases of purified water in owner trailer throughout the duration of the project.
D.
The separate offices shall each be approximately 120 square feet in size and shall be furnished with a minimum of four 120 volt single phase convenience outlets with one 4' long multi-outlet power strip (such as Legrand Model #PM48C) at each outlet location as well as one telephone jack and one data/LAN outlet. The conference room shall be approximately 200 square feet in size and shall be furnished with a minimum of eight 120 Volt single phase convenience outlets with one telephone jack and one data/LAN outlet.
E.
CONTRACTOR shall coordinate floor plan and location of electrical, telephone, data outlets with OAR prior to ordering and delivering the trailer.
F.
At CONTRACTOR'S expense and without limitation remove and/or relocate temporary office(s) and related facilities as rapidly as required in order to provide for progress of the Work.
G.
CONTRACTOR shall remove waste bin trash from OAR'S trailer, vacuum OAR'S trailer floors and/or mop OAR'S trailer floors once per week. Provide trailer with bathroom paper goods, soap, broom, mop and doormats.
H.
Trailer shall remain property of CONTRACTOR. CONTRACTOR shall remove such property upon Substantial Completion of Work or as otherwise determined in writing by OAR.
1.07
FURNISHINGS (not used)
1.08
TELEPHONE & DATA AND TRANSMISSION LINES (not used)
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
04/18/2017 CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS 01 5000-5
170418
•
4.
•
Two enclosed, separate offices with windows and lockable doors .
B.
Trailer shall be furnished with two exterior entrance doors with one located in a separate office. Each door shall be furnished with 'Smart Key' technology on both the dead bolt and cylinder lock. Provide six keys for each locking device. Exterior doors and windows shall be provided with exterior mounted burglar bars. Windows shall be provided with operable window shades. Security of trailer and contents is a continuous obligation of CONTRACTOR and shall be equipped with local sounding security system.
C.
Trailer shall have ample headroom, 8-foot minimum, and shall be lighted, heated, ventilated, and air-conditioned. Provide an electrically chilled bottled water fountain of 5-gallon capacity. Purified water shall be supplied in 5-gallon containers, delivered weekly, with four spares on hand after each re-supply visit. As an option, CONTRACTOR may maintain a minimum of two 24 500ml bottles cases of purified water in owner trailer throughout the duration of the project.
D.
The separate offices shall each be approximately 120 square feet in size and shall be furnished with a minimum of four 120 volt single phase convenience outlets with one 4' long multi-outlet power strip (such as Legrand Model #PM48C) at each outlet location as well as one telephone jack and one data/LAN outlet. The conference room shall be approximately 200 square feet in size and shall be furnished with a minimum of eight 120 Volt single phase convenience outlets with one telephone jack and one data!LAN outlet.
E.
CONTRACTOR shall coordinate floor plan and location of electrical, telephone, data outlets with OAR prior to ordering and delivering the trailer. At CONTRACTOR'S expense and without limitation remove and/or relocate temporary office(s) and related facilities as rapidly as required in order to provide for progress of the Work.
•
G.
CONTRACTOR shall remove waste bin trash from OAR'S trailer, vacuum OAR'S trailer floors and/or mop OAR'S trailer floors once per week. Provide trailer with bathroom paper goods, soap, broom, mop and doormats.
H.
Trailer shall remain property of CONTRACTOR. CONTRACTOR shall remove such property upon Substantial Completion of Work or as otherwise determined in writing by OAR.
1.07
FURNISHINGS (not used)
1.08
TELEPHONE & DATA AND TRANSMISSION LINES (not used)
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR& P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
04/18/2017 . CONSTRUCTION FAC1LITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS 01 5000-5
170418
•
•
•
1.09
TEMPORARY STORAGE UNITS A.
CONTRACTOR shall provide secure and waterproof storage units for the temporary storage of furniture, equipment and other items requiring protection.
B.
Walls, roof and doors shall be a minimum of 16-gauge steel with floors of 1 inch tongue and groove hardwood or % inch minimum exterior type plywood. The undercarriage shall be designed to accommodate forklift blades 42-inch to 60-inch long. There shall be doublewide swing out lockable doors at one end equipped with waterproof gaskets.
C.
CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for delivery charges and will install the storage unit in an appropriate area.
D.
CONTRACTOR shall remove the storage unit from the Project site when the storage unit is no longer required for the Work or upon Substantial Completion of the Work.
E.
CONTRACTOR shall at their expense and without limitation remove and/ or relocate storage units as rapidly as required in order to provide for progress of the Work.
1.10
TEMPORARY SANITARY FACILITIES A.
CONTRACTOR shall provide portable chemical toilet facilities. Quantity of portable chemical toilet facilities shall be based on total number of workers and shall be in accordance with CALIOSHA standards.
B.
Portable chemical toilet facilities shall be maintained with adequate supplies and in a clean and sanitary condition and shall be removed from the Project site upon Substantial Completion of the Work. CONTRACTOR shall keep both OWNER chemical toilet facilities and OWNER trailer restroom clean and operational at all times.
C.
CONTRACTOR employees shall not use school toilet facilities.
D.
At CONTRACTOR'S expense and without limitation remove and/or relocate portable chemical toilet facilities as rapidly as required in order to provide for progress of the Work.
E.
CONTRACTOR will contain their breaks and lunch periods to the areas designated by OAR or any public area outside the Project site. CONTRACTOR shall provide a suitable container within the break/lunch area for the placement of trash. Areas used for break/lunch must be maintained clean and orderly. Once
CORWIN THEATER REP AIR & P.O. T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
04/18/2017 CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS 01 5000-6
170418
•
•
•
finish flooring has been installed in a particular area, no food or beverages will be permitted in that area . TEMPORARY SECURITY FENCE I BARRICADE
1.11 A.
CONTRACTOR shall install temporary Project site security barricade(s) indicated on Drawings or as required for safety and as specified herein. New or used material may be furnished. Security of Project site and contents is a continuous obligation of CONTRACTOR.
B.
Unless otherwise indicated or specified, security fence shall be constructed of 8foot high chain link fencing with an 8-foot high windscreen. Space posts not to exceed ten feet on centers. Posts shall be of following nominal pipe dimensions: terminal, corner, and gatepost 2 lf2-inch, line posts 2-inch. Chain link fence shall be not less than #13 gauge, 2-inch mesh, and in one width. Posts, fence and accessories shall be galvanized and as follows: 1.
Shall be set in the earth a depth of 24-inch with soil firmly compacted around post, unless required otherwise in writing by OAR.
2.
Fence fabric shall be attached to posts with #14 gauge tie wire at 16 inches on center. A #6 gauge steel tension wire with turnbuckles shall be installed at top and bottom of barricade fencing. Wire tie fabric to tension wires at 18" centers.
3.
Windscreen shall be attached to fence fabric and steel tension wires at 18inch centers with a minimum of # 14 gauge tie wire. Windscreen shall be maintained and all rips, tears, missing sections shall be corrected upon notification by OAR.
4.
Chain link fencing shall be free from barbs, icicles or other projections resulting from galvanizing process. Fence having such defects will be replaced even if it has been installed.
5.
Gates shall be fabricated of steel pipe with welded comers, and bracing as required. Fence and fabric to be attached to frame at 12-inch centers. Provide all gate hardware of a strength and quality to perform satisfactorily until barricade is removed upon Substantial Completion of the Work. Each gate shall have a chain and padlock. Provide two gate keys to OAR. At Substantial Completion of the Work, remove barricade from Project site, backfill and compact fence footing holes. Existing surface paving that is cut into or removed shall be patched and sealed to match surrounding areas .
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HJGH SCHOOL
04/18/2017 CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS 01 5000-7
170418
•
6.
1.12
OTHER TEMPORARY ENCLOSURES AND BARRICADES A.
Provide lockable, temporary weather-tight enclosures at openings in exterior walls to create acceptable working conditions, to allow for temporary heating and for security.
B.
Provide protective barriers around trees, plants and other improvements designated to remain.
C.
Temporary partitions shall be installed at all openings where additions connect to existing buildings, and where to protect areas, spaces, property, personnel, students and faculty and to separate and control dust, debris, noise, access, sight, fire areas, safety and security. Temporary partitions shall be as designated on the Drawings or as specified by ARCHITECT. At CONTRACTOR'S expense and without limitation remove and/or relocate enclosures, barriers and temporary partitions as rapidly as required in order to provide for progress of the Work.
D.
Since the Work of this Project may be immediately adjacent to existing occupied structures and vehicular and pedestrian right of ways, CONTRACTOR shall, in his sole judgment and in accordance with applicable safety standards, provide temporary facilities, additional barricades, protection and care to protect existing structures, occupants, property, pedestrians and vehicular traffic. CONTRACTOR is responsible for any damage, which may occur to the property and occupants of the property of OWNER or adjacent private or public properties which in any way results from the acts or neglect of CONTRACTOR.
E.
CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for cleaning up all areas adjacent to the construction site which have been affected by the construction; and for restoring them to at least their original condition- including landscaping; planting of trees, sod, and shrubs damaged by construction; and raking and disposal of debris such as roofing shingles, paper, nails, glass sheet metal, bricks, and waste concrete. Construction debris shall be removed and properly disposed of. Culverts and drainage ditches with sediment from the construction area shall be cleared routinely to maintain proper drainage and re-cleaned prior to completion of the contract.
F.
CONTRACTOR shall ensure sediment does not block storm drains. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for cleaning storm drains blocked due to erosion or sediment from the work area.
•
•
1.13
At CONTRACTOR'S expense and without limitation remove or relocate fencing, fabric and barricades or other security and protection facilities as rapidly as required in order to provide for progress of the Work.
TEMPORARY STORAGE YARDS
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR& P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES IDGH SCHOOL
04118/2017 CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS 01 5000-8
170418
•
•
•
A.
CONTRACTOR shall fence and maintain storage yards in an orderly manner.
B.
Provide storage units for materials that cannot be stored outside.
C.
At CONTRACTOR'S expense and without limitation remove and/or relocate storage yards and units as rapidly as required in order to provide for progress of the Work.
1.14
TEMPORARY DE-WATERING FACILITIES AND DRAINAGE (not used)
1.15
TEMPORARY PROTECTION FACILITIES INSTALLATION A.
GONTRACTOR shall not change over from using temporary facilities and controls to permanent facilities until Substantial Completion, except as permitted by OAR.
B.
Until permanent fire protection needs are supplied and approved by authorities having jurisdiction, CONTRACTOR shall provide, install and maintain temporary fire protection facilities of the types needed in order to adequately protect against fire loss. CONTRACTOR shall adequately supervise welding operations, combustion type temporary heating and similar sources of fire ignition.
C.
CONTRACTOR shall provide, install and maintain substantial temporary enclosures of partially completed areas of construction. Provide locking entrances to prevent unauthorized entrance, vandalism, theft and similar violations of security. Where materials, tools and equipment are stored within the Work area, CONTRACTOR shall provide secure lock up to protect against vandalism, theft and similar violations of security. OWNER accepts no financial responsibility for loss, damage, vandalism or theft.
D.
CONTRACTOR operations shall not block, hinder, impede or otherwise inhibit the use of required exits and/or emergency exits to the public way, except as approved by OAR. CONTACTOR shall maintain unobstructed access to fire extinguishers, fire hydrants, temporary fire protection facilities, stairways and other access routes for firefighting equipment and/or personnel.
E.
With approval of OAR and at the earliest feasible date in each area of the Work, complete installation of the permanent fire protection facilities including connected services and place into operation and use. Instruct OWNER personnel in u_se of permanent_fir~ _protectiol! fa~ilities.
F.
In the event of an emergency drill or an actual emergency, designated by the sounding of the fire alarm and/or other sounding device, all construction activities must cease. CONTRACTOR shall evacuate the Work area and remain outside the
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR& P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
04/18/2017 CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS 01 5000-9
170418
•
•
•
Work area until permitted to return. No Work shall be conducted during the evacuation of a building or during an emergency. TEMPORARY SECURITY AND SAFETY MEASURES
1.16 A.
During performance of the Work in existing facilities and/or on a Project Site occupied by students, CONTRACTOR shall provide, install and maintain substantial temporary barriers and/or partitions separating all Work areas from areas occupied by students, faculty and/or administrative staff.
B.
During performance of the Work in existing facilities or on a Project site occupied by students and where temporary barriers or partitions are not physically feasible, CONTRACTOR shall provide an employee meeting the requirements of Education Code Section 45125 .2.(2) to continually supervise and monitor all employees of CONTRACTOR and Subcontractor. For the purposes of this Section, CONTRACTOR employee shall be someone whom the Department of Justice has ascertained has not been convicted of a violent or serious felony as listed in Penal Code Section 667.5(c) and/or Penal Code Section 1192.7(c). To comply with this Section, CONTRACTOR shall have his employee submit his or her fingerprints to the Department of Justice pursuant to Education Code Section 45125.l(a).
C.
Penal Code Sections 290 and 290.4 commonly known as "Megan's Law", require, among other things, individuals convicted of sexually oriented crimes, to register with the chief of police where the convicted individual resides or with a county sheriff or other law enforcement officials. CONTRACTOR shall check its own employees and require each Subcontractor to check its employees and report to CONTRACTOR if any such employees are registered sex offenders. CONTRACTOR shall check monthly during the life of the Contract to ascertain this information and report same to OAR. Before starting the Work, and monthly thereafter during the life of Contract, CONTRACTOR shall notify OWNER in writing if any of its employees and/or if any Subcontractor's employees is a registered sex offender. If so, CONTRACTOR shall proceed in accordance with paragraph B above.
D.
CONTRACTOR shall employ and maintain sufficient security and safety measures to effectively prevent vandalism, vagrancy, theft, arson, and all other such negative impacts to the Work. Any impacts to the progress of the Work of CONTRACTOR, OWNER, or OWNER'S forces, due to loss from inadequate security, will be the responsibility of CONTRACTOR.
E.
Until Substantial Completion of the Work, CONTRACTOR shall employ appropriate means to remove all graffiti from buildings, equipment, fences and all other temporary and/or permanent improvements on the Project site within
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
04118/2017 CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS 01 5000-10
170418
•
twenty-four (24) hours from the date of report or forty-eight (48) hours of each occurrence. TEMPORARY ACCESS ROADS AND STAGING AREAS
1.17
•
A.
Due to the limited amount of on and off Project site space for the parking of staff and school visitor's vehicles there will be no parking of CONTRACTOR vehicles in areas designated for school use only. CONTRACTOR shall provide legal access to and maintain CONTRACTOR designated areas for the legal parking, loading, off-loading and delivery of all vehicles associated with the Work. CONTRACTOR shall be solely responsible for providing and maintaining these requirements whether on or off the Project site. CONTRACTOR shall provide and maintain ample on-site parking spaces designated for the exclusive use of OWNER. CONTRACTOR shall erect signs as required by OWNER each of these spaces and prevent all unauthorized vehicles from parking in the OWNERreserved spaces.
B.
Temporary access roads are to be installed and maintained by CONTRACTOR to all areas ofthe Project site.
C.
CONTRACTOR will be permitted to utilize existing facility campus roads as designated by OAR. CONTRACTOR shall only utilize those entrances and exits as designated by OAR and CONTRACTOR shall observe all traffic regulations of OWNER.
D.
CONTRACTOR shall maintain roads and walkways in a clean condition including removal of debris and/or other deleterious material on a daily basis.
1.18
DIRECTIONAL SIGNAGE AND ADVERTISEMENT POSTING A.
•
CONTRACTOR shall provide and install signage to provide directional, identification, and contact information to construction personnel and visitors as follows and as reviewed by OAR. 1.
For construction traffic control/flow at entrances/exits, and as designated by OAR.
2.
To direct visitors.
3.
For construction parking.
4.
To direct deliveries.
5.
For Warning Signs as required.
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR& P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
04118/2017 CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS 01 5000-11
170418
• B.
•
In accordance with CALIOSHA standards as necessary .
7.
For trailer identification and Project site address.
8.
For "No Smoking" safe work site at designated locations.
9.
Emergency contact information and phone number of CONTRACTOR.
10.
Emergency contact information and phone number of local police, fire, and emergency personnel.
11.
For Labor Compliance Program (LCP) as required under the General Conditions (Prevailing wage rates and Notice ofLCP)
12.
Employee benefits payments paid to trust funds are required under the General Conditions.
OWNER has established a program authorizing vendors to post advertisements and billboards along the perimeter of project site. CONTRACTOR shall provide access and shall allow advertising signage to be placed on top of temporary, perimeter, security barricade and/or fences.
1.19
TRENCHES (not used)
1.20
DUST CONTROL A.
CONTRACTOR is responsible for dust control on and off the Project site. When Work operations produce dust the Project site and/or streets shall be sprinkled with water to minimize the generation of dust. CONTRACTOR shall clean all soils and debris from construction vehicles and cover both earth and debris loads prior to leaving the Project site. CONTRACTOR shall, on a daily basis, clean all streets and/or public improvements within the right of way of any and all debris, dirt, mud and/or other materials attributable to operations of CONTRACTOR. WASHOUT
1.21 A.
•
6.
CONTRACTOR shall provide and maintain a minimum of four (4) wash out boxes of sufficient size and strength to provide for concrete mixer wash out. CONTRACTOR shall locate and relocate both the wash out boxes and wash out areas in order to accommodate the progression of the Work. The wash out area shall be located as to minimize the amount of potential run off onto adjacent private and/or public property. CONTRACTOR shall legally dispose of the contents of the wash out boxes and area on an as needed basis or as required by OAR.
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
04/18/2017 CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS 01 5000-12
170418
•
WASTE DISPOSAL
1.22 A.
ADVERSE WEATHER CONDITIONS
1.23 A.
Should warnings of adverse weather conditions such as heavy rain and/or high winds be forecasted, CONTRACTOR shall provide every practical precaution to prevent damage to the Work, Project site and adjacent property. CONTRACTOR precautions shall include, but not be limited to, enclosing all openings, removing and/or securing loose materials, tools, equipment and scaffolding.
B.
CONTRACTOR shall provide and maintain drainage away from buildings and structures.
C.
CONTRACTOR shall implement all required storm water mitigation measures as required under related Division 01 Sections. DAILY AND MONTHLY REPORTS
1.24
•
•
CONTRACTOR shall provide and maintain trash bins on the Project site. Trash bins shall be serviced on an as needed basis and CONTRACTOR is responsible for the transportation of and the legal disposal of all contents.
A.
CONTRACTOR shall provide and maintain in the Project site office of CONTRACTOR, a daily sign in sheet for use by all employees of CONTRACTOR and all Subcontractors at whatever tier. At the beginning of each work day, the foreman, project manager, superintendent of CONTRACTOR and/or Subcontractors shall visit the site office of CONTRACTOR and shall enter onto the daily sign in sheet: all employee names; trade classification; and represented company. The completed sign in sheet shall serve as the basis of and shall be submitted with the daily construction report as set forth in Paragraph B below.
B.
By the end of each workday, CONTRACTOR shall submit to OAR and INSPECTOR a daily construction report denoting the daily manpower counts and a brief description/location of the workday activities. Manpower shall be broken down by trade classification such as foreman, journeyman or apprentice. The report shall also note the date, day of the week, weather conditions, deliveries, equipment on the Project site whether active and/or idle, visitors, inspections, accidents and unusual events, meetings, stoppages, losses, delays, shortages, strikes, orders and requests of governing agencies, Construction Directive and/or Change Orders received and implemented, services disconnected and/or connected, equipment start up or tests and partial use and/or occupancies. CONTRACTOR shall also include on the daily construction report the above information for all Subcontractors at whatever tier.
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
04/18/2017 CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS 01 5000-13
170418
•
C.
1.25
FIELD OFFICE SUPPLIES A.
CONTRACTOR shall provide the initial supply of field office supplies to OAR in the quantities listed as set forth below in Table A. If specified in Section 01 2100 - Allowances, CONTRACTOR shall provide additional supplies as required by OAR. CONTRACTOR shall not deduct the costs of the Initial Field Office Supplies (as shown in Table A) from the Allowance for the monthly replenishment of 0 WNER field office supplies listed in Section 01 21 00 Allowances. CONTRACTOR shall deliver all of the initial field office supplies to OWNER Field Offices within fourteen days from the date established in the Notice to Proceed.
B.
CONTRACTOR may utilize different suppliers as the specified information is only to establish the required quantities and minimum levels of quality.
C.
Replenishment of Field Office Supplies: If an Allowance is identified in Section 01 2100 - Allowances for the periodic replenishment of OWNER field office supplies. OWNER shall submit requests for replenishment of field office supplies to CONTRACTOR from those listed in Table 'A' below. CONTRACTOR shall provide a monthly accounting of items being requested, cumulative cost of replenishment of Field Office supplies previously ordered, and balance of allowance remammg. Upon Substantial Completion of the Work, CONTRACTOR shall file a Change Order Proposal crediting OWNER for any remaining balance or unspent portion of the Allowance. This Allowance specifically excludes the initial supplies listed in Table 'A' below and is to be used exclusively for the monthly replenishment of OWNER field office supplies. Supplies are to be delivered to OWNER'S trailer within twenty-four hours of OWNER'S request.
D.
Postage and Delivery Costs: CONTRACTOR shall provide postage and delivery services for OWNER generated materials in quantities and/or frequencies as requested by OWNER. The cost for these services shall be deducted from the Allowance identified in Section 01 2100 - Allowances for the periodic replenishment of OWNER field office supplies. This allowance is for the OWNER'S use only. Postage and delivery costs for CONTRACTOR generated materials are the responsibility ofthe CONTRACTOR and shall not be charged to this allowance, regardless of whether the postage and/or delivery of CONTRACTOR generated materials resulted from a request and/or direction fromOWNER. .
•
•
CONTRACTOR shall submit on a monthly basis the forms found in Sections 01 3239 and 01 7416 certifying CEQA Mitigations and Storm Water Pollution Prevention (SWPP) compliances.
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR& P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
04/18/2017 CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS 01 5000-14
170418
•
E.
Other expendable field office support items specified elsewhere, including, but not limited to, furnishing toner cartridges, equipment maintenance, and bottled water, are to be supplied and paid for by CONTRACTOR. These costs are not to be deducted from the Allowance for the periodic replenishment of OWNER field office supplies identified in Section 01 2100. Table A
•
•
ITEM Three Ring Binders- 3-inch Three Ring Binders- 2-inch Three Hole Punch Two Hole Punch File Organizer Calculator Flash Drive Wastebasket Digital Camera Camera Flash Memory with reader for computer Camera Batteries and Rechargeable Batteries with charger Cordless Phone with Answering Machine Surge Suppressors Flashlight Batteries Clipboard 8-inch Cast Iron Shears First Aid Kit Journal Pens (blue, green and red) Pencils Pencil Sharpener Mouse Pad Date Received Stamp Colored Pencils Markers Telephone Message Book Wall Calendar Steno Pad Legal Pad Post Its File Folders- 8-1/2 by 11 File Folders- 8-1/2 by 14 Tape I Dispenser Highlighters Rubber Bands Push Pins Dry Erase Board
DESCRIPTION N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A Canon WS-1400H 2GB N/A 5 megapixel 5GB
UNIT Each Each Each Each Each Each 2 Each Each Each
QUANTITY 3 3
Appropriate to Camera
Each
none
AT&T Dect 6.0
Each
none
Staples I 1148831
N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A 1900 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A PM233-28 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A S537
Each Each 4/Lot 3/Lot Each Each Each 12/Lot 48/Lot 1 Each Each 12/Lot 12/Lot Each Each 12/Lot 12/Lot 12/Lot 50/Lot 50/Lot Each 12/Lot Each Each Each
none none
Staples I IM1RA1696 Staples I 222397 Staples I 318956-54 Staples I 450422-54 Staples I 421040-54 Staples I 503979-54 Staples I 217695-54 Staples I 441884-64 Staples I 711382-54 Staples I 330250-54 Staples I 382955-64 Staples I 920274-54 Staples I 317297-54 Staples I 932675 Staples I 194506 Staples I 527861-54 Staples I 163485-64 Staples I 163865-64 Staples I 130005-64 Staples I 831099-54 Staples I 831057-54 Staples I 211540-54 Staples I 167031 Staples I 808634 Staples I 480118-54 Staples I 518928-54
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR& P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
1
none none none none 1
SUPPLIER/ITEM NUMBER Staples I 823526-54 Staples I 816199-54 Staples I 893844 Staples I 506261-54 Staples I 120162-54 Staples I 342763 Staples I 125039-54
none none
1 1 1 1 1 1
none none none none 1
none none none none none none 1 1
none none none none 1
04/18/2017 CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS 01 5000-15
,)
170418
;) Binder Clip - Medium
•
•
Binder Clip - Large Stapler 3 Pocket Wall File Heavy Duty Stapler Heavy Duty Staples Hanging File Folder Hanging File Folder File Folder Labels Fax Notes Paper Clips Paper Clips Poster Kit - State Poster Kit- Federal Broom Fire Extinguisher Copy Paper Copy Paper Copy Paper Hardhats Safety Glasses Safety Vests, Zipper Front
NIA NIA
241Lot
1
Staples I 831602-54
1 1
First Alert 8-112x11 8-1/2 X 14 11 X 17 White
121Lot Each Each Each Each 25/Lot 25/Lot 750/Lot 121Lot Each Each Each Each Each Each 50001Case 500/Ream 500/Ream Each
5
Clear and/or Tinted Hi Vis Lime Yellow
Each Each
5 5
Staples I 831610-54 Staples I 504308 Staples I 730523-54 St~es I 386312-54 Staples I 504191-54 Staples I 116806-54 Staples I 163352-54 St~es I 287292-54 Staples I 210625-64 Staples I 480108-54 Staples I 480109-54 Staples I 1183148 Staples I 935983-54 Staples I 256600 Staples I 238774-54 St!i£les I 122374-69 St!i£1es I 122598-69 Staples I 238105-69 Fiber Metal Model E-2 Ratchet knob full range size adjustment Crews Storm Series Aramak Wearguard Item DEF1085
818
NIA 415 SWI-35312 8-112 X 11 8-112xl4 5266
NIA NIA NIA CA
us
NIA
none 1
1
none none none none 1
none 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
PART 2- PRODUCTS- Not Used PART 3- EXECUTION- Not Used
END OF SECTION
•
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O. T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
04/1812017 CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS 01 5000-16
l'(J
•
•
•
oo C/J;;o
-...l 0
..,.
s;~
00
~-l
l'J:
mm
C/J> ~--l
atn
:r:;;o C/JG; n'"O :r:;:r..
ooi"l l'Ro '"0
LAUSD Color· Logo Dimensions 18ih.:x 18 in.
0
~
~ a
~
tTl C/J
I Lettering height: 8in. tall, left ?lign
~
6 .ft.··
u 0
'"rj
>-
""ij "'1j
~
u
~
>-
Lettering height'S in: tall, left align Font Anail Narrow ·aofd;.Title case lettering c·alor: Black tetteringheiglit:·61n.tall,leftalign ] .FOnt:' A~al Na·rrow Bold,.Titl(CaseLette~ng • Color. Blue - Pai\tone' 2B6'CV. (or;equivalent)
t~~enng ~eigh): J}n:,Je~ allg~·
'~orit:i·Aiial BOid~Title"Case'Lettering,
Color:.:Biack • Usfoiher.Board Members in
ALPHABETICAl ORDER
~n
2.in. white border on all four sides
Font: Aria! Narrow Bold, iitle Case Lettering ·lns:ert Name of School Project Here } [ Color: Blue .• Pantone 286 CV (or equivalent) Lettering neight:. 8 in: tall, lett align Foni: Aria! Narrow Bold, Tille Case Lettering ·· Los Angeles Unified School District} [ Color: Black
{LAU$0 Board Member: {Name of:Board Member . {B.oa·rd'District:Number: # '{,tAUSDIBoara:Merribers: . · Otliei,Boaril:Meriiber;Name .• Other. Board:Mem~er Nan)e . Other Boa~d,MemberName · Other:Board,Member,Name· othef.Boaid Mem~er Naine . . ·Y
Qth.ei .Bo~r~.· Ma· ·m,ti,~fc'Na.ri e
LAUSD Superintendent: } Name of Superintendent} Architect: Name of Architectural Firm General Contractor: Name of General Contractor
Bo'n.d funds at Work
00 -lZ
t'I1C/J ~--l
'"0~ On
S:::J
;;oo -
oo>o
-zn:£: ~--lt=;x;
o;;o---oo--lN
!..L'trl:= -...l C/J C/J -...l
10ft.
l~[
lettering, height: s:in. tall, left align, . Font: Aria! Narrow. Bold, Title Case· Lettering Colo'r: Black lettering height: 6 in .. tall, left· align Font:. Aria! Narrow Bold, Title Case'Lettering Color: Blue .. Pantone 286 CV (or equivalent) Lettering. height:. notto.exceed'4 i.n., left align . Font: final Bold, Title Case Lettenng Color. Black
}~ [ Letterin·g hejght 5in. tall, center a!Jgn
font: firia!Biack,',Tlt!eCaseLettiiring Color: Blue- Pantone:286 CV (or equivalent)
> ~ ~
trJ
~ ~ ~
~
>
170418
•
SECTION 01 5719 CEQA MITIGATIONS PART 1- GENERAL 1.01
SECTION INCLUDES A.
RELATED SECTIONS
1.02 A.
Section 01 3546- Indoor Air Quality Procedures.
B.
Section 01 5000- Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls.
C.
Section 01 7419- Construction Demolition and Waste Management. SUBMITTALS
1.03 A.
•
•
Mitigation procedures to minimize environmental impact.
1.04
CONTRACTOR shall submit on a monthly basis the form "Certification of Compliance with CEQA Mitigations", found in Section 01 3229, certifying compliance to CEQA mitigations. CEQA MITIGATIONS
A.
SC-AE-7: Following installation of exterior lighting CONTRACTOR shall adjust light fixtures to reduce the lighting intensity from the new sources on adjacent residences to no more than two foot-candles, measured at the property line.
B.
SC-AQ.2: CONTRACTOR shall ensure that construction equipment is properly tuned and maintained in accordance with manufacturer's specifications, to ensure that excessive emissions are not generated by unmaintained equipment.
C.
SC-AQ.3: CONTRACTOR shall comply with the following requirements: 1.
Maintain slow speeds with all vehicles.
2.
Load impacted soil directly into transportation trucks to minimize soil handling.
3.
Water/mist soil as it is being excavated and loaded onto the transportation trucks.
4.
Water/mist and/or apply surfactants to soil placed in transportation trucks prior to exiting the site.
5.
Minimize soil drop height into transportation trucks or stockpiles during dumping.
6.
During transport, cover or enclose trucks transporting soils, increase freeboard requirements, and repair trucks exhibiting spillage due to leaks .
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR& P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
04/18/2017 CEQA MITIGATIONS 01 5719-1
170418
• D.
7.
Cover the bottom of the excavated area with polyethylene sheeting when work is not being performed.
8.
Place stockpiled soil on polyethylene sheeting and cover with similar material.
9.
Place stockpiled soil in areas shielded from prevailing winds.
SC-AQ.4: When using large, heavy or noisy construction equipment CONTRACTOR shall implement all feasible measures to reduce air emissions below the South Coast Air Quality Management District's (SCAQMD) regional and localized significance thresholds 1.
•
Exhaust Emissions: a.
Schedule construction activities that affect traffic flow to off-peak hours (e.g. between 10:00 AM and 3:00PM).
b.
Consolidate truck deliveries and/or limit the number of haul trips per day.
c.
Route construction trucks off congested streets.
d.
Employ high pressure fuel injection systems or engme timing retardation.
e.
Utilize ultra-low sulfur diesel fuel, containing 15 ppm sulfur or less (ULSD) in all diesel construction equipment.
f.
Use construction equipment rated by the United States Environmental Protection Agency as having Tier 3 (model year 2006 or newer) or Tier 4 (model year 2008 or newer) emission limits for engines between 50 and 750 horsepower.
g.
Restrict non-essential diesel engine idle time, to not more than five consecutive minutes.
h.
Utilize electrical power rather than internal combustion engine power generators as soon as feasible during construction.
1.
Utilize electric or alternatively fueled equipment, if feasible.
J.
Utilize construction equipment with the minimum practical engine SlZe.
2.
k.
Utilize low-emission on-road construction fleet vehicles.
1.
Ensure construction equipment is properly serviced and maintained to the manufacturer's standards.
Fugitive Dust: a.
•
Apply non-toxic soil stabilizers according to manufacturers' specification to all inactive construction areas (previously graded areas inactive for ten days or more) .
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
04/18/2017 CEQA MITIGATIONS 01 5719-2
170418
•
• 3.
•
b.
Replace ground cover in disturbed areas as quickly as possible.
c.
Sweep streets at the end of the day if visible soil material is carried onto adjacent public paved roads (recommend water sweepers with reclaimed water).
d.
Install wheel washers where vehicles enter and exit unpaved roads onto paved roads, or wash off trucks and any equipment leaving the site each trip. ·
e.
Pave construction roads that have a traffic volume of more than 50 daily trips by construction equipment, and/or 150 daily trips for all vehicles.
f.
Pave all construction access roads for at least 100 feet from the main road to the project site.
g.
Water the disturbed areas of the active construction site at least three times per day, except during periods of rainfall.
h.
Enclose, cover, water twice daily, or apply non-toxic soil binders according to manufacturers' specifications to exposed piles (i.e., gravel, dirt, and sand) with a five percent or greater silt content.
1.
Suspend all excavating and grading operations when wind speeds (as instantaneous gusts) exceed 25 miles per hour (mph) .
J.
Apply water at least three times daily, except during periods of rainfall, to all unpaved road surfaces.
k.
Limit traffic speeds on unpaved road to 15 mph or less.
1.
Prohibit high emission causing fugitive dust activities on days where violations of the ambient air quality standard have been forecast by SCAQMD.
m.
Tarp and/or maintain a minimum of24 inches of freeboard on trucks hauling dirt, sand, soil, or other loose materials.
n.
Limit the amount of daily soil and/or demolition debris loaded and hauled per day.
General Construction: a.
Utilize ultra-low VOC or zero-VOC surface coatings.
b.
Phase construction activities to emissions.
c.
Configure construction parking to minimize traffic interference.
d.
Provide temporary traffic control during construction activities to improve traffic flow (e.g., flag person).
e.
Develop a trip reduction plan for construction employees .
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR& P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
minimi~e_m'!:~imllll! ~aily
04/18/2017 CEQA MITIGATIONS 01 5719-3
170418
•
Implement a shuttle service to and from retail services and food establishments during lunch hours.
g.
Increase distance between emission sources to reduce near-field emission impacts.
h.
Require construction contractors to document compliance with the identified mitigation measures.
E.
SC-N-5: CONTRACTOR shall consult and coordinate with the OAR and school principal, prior to construction to schedule high noise or vibration producing activities to minimize disruption. Coordination shall continue on an as-needed basis throughout the construction phase of the project to reduce school and other noise sensitive land use disruptions.
F.
SC-N-9: Specific noise reduction measures include, but are not limited to, those listed below. 1.
• 2.
•
f.
Source Controls: a.
Time Constraints: It is prohibited work during nighttime hours.
b.
Scheduling: Perform noisy work during less sensitive time periods (on operating campus: delay the loudest noise generation until class instruction at the nearest classrooms has ended; residential: only between 7:00AM and 7:00PM) .
c.
Equipment Restrictions: Restrict the type of equipment used.
d.
Noise Restrictions: Specifying stringent noise limits.
e.
Substitute Methods: Use quieter methods and/or equipment.
f.
Exhaust Mufflers: Ensure equipment have quality mufflers installed.
g.
Lubrication & Maintenance: Well-maintained equipment is quieter.
h.
Reduced Power Operation: Use only necessary size and power.
1.
Limit Equipment On-Site: Only have necessary equipment on-site.
J.
Noise Compliance Monitoring: Technician on site shall ensure compliance.
k.
Quieter Backup Alarms: Manually-adjustable or ambient sensitive types.
Path Controls: a.
Noise Barriers: Semi-permanent or portable wooden or concrete barriers.
b.
Noise Curtains: Flexible intervening curtain systems hung from supports.
c.
Enclosures: Encase localized and stationary noise sources .
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O. T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
04/18/2017 CEQA MITIGATIONS 01 5719-4
170418
•
•
d.
3.
G.
Increased Distance: Perform noisy activities farther away from receptors, including operation of portable equipment,' storage and maintenance of equipment.
Receptor Controls: a.
Window Treatments: capability.
Reinforce the building's noise reduction
b.
Community Participation- open dialog to involve affected residents
c.
Noise Complaint Process: CONTRACTOR shall log and respond to noise complaints. Advance notice of the start of construction shall be delivered to all noise sensitive receptors adjacent to the project area. The notice shall state specifically where and when construction activities will occur, and provide contact information for filing noise complaints with the CONTRACTOR and the OWNER. In the event of noise complaints, the OWNER will monitor noise from the construction activity to ensure that construction noise does not exceed limits specified in the noise ordinance.
d.
Temporary Relocation: In extreme otherwise un-mitigatable cases, temporarily move residents or students to facilities away from the construction activity.
SC-T-4: Construction Equipment for Use on Public Roadways: CONTRACTOR shall submit a construction worksite traffic control plan to the LADOT for review prior to construction. The plan shall show the location of haul routes, hours of operation, protective devices, warning signs, and access to abutting properties OWNER encourages CONTRACTOR to limit construction-related trucks to offpeak commute periods. As required by Caltrans, applicable transportation related safety measures shall be implemented during construction.
PART 2- PRODUCTS- Not Used PART 3- EXECUTION- Not Used END OF SECTION
•
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
04/18/2017 CEQA MITIGATIONS 01 5719-5
•
Los Angeles Unified School District Office of Environmental Health and Safety
MICHELLE KING
Superintendent of Schools
TI!ELMA MELENDEZ, PH.D. Chief executive Officer, Office of Educotiona/ Service>·
ROBERT LAUGHTON Director, Environmental Health and Safety
CARLOS A. TORRES Deputy Director, Environmental Health and Safety
NOTICE OF EXEMPTION ~,
PLACE "FILED" STICKER
I ;
!
HERE I·-~ To:
PLACE
ORtGtNAL FILED
"POSTED"
JUN 1 3 2017
STICKER f--IERE
LOS ANGELES, COUN1Y CLERK County Clerk and Registrar-Recorder County of Los Angeles 12400 Imperial Highway Norwalk, CA 90650
From: LAUSD OEHS 333 South Beaudry Avenue 21st Floor Los Angeles, CA 90017
~roject Title: os Angeles High School Corwin Theater Repair and New Accessible Sanitary Building Project
Project Location- Specific: The Los Angeles High School (HS) Corwin Theater Repair and New Accessible Sanitary Building project (Project) will be located on the 18.6-acre Los Angeles HS campus. Los Angeles HS is located at 4650 West Olympic Boulevard, Los Angeles, California. The campus is bound by West Olympic Blvd to the north, West Blvd to the east, an unnamed alley to the south, and South Rimpau to the west. The school is in a residential neighborhood, with commercial uses three blocks to the north along Wilshire Blvd and three blocks to the south along Pico Boulevard. The Corwin Theater Repair project will occur in the school's Corwin Theater, a part of the Administration and Classroom Building, which is in the northwest portion of the campus. The New Accessible Sanitary Building will be located in a vacant area adjacent to the basketball courts on the eastern portion of the Los Angeles High School campus and will be part of the Girls Academy Leadership Academy (GALA). · Project Location - City: Los Angeles
Project Location -County: Los Angeles
Description ofNature,.Purpose, and Beneficiaries ofProject: The Corwin Theater Repair component of the Project entails replacing the damaged and deteriorated metal stud framing of the Corwin Theater hallway and replacing exterior tiles, HVAC ducts, sprinklers, light fixtures, smoke detectors, the frre alarm, and fire alarm pull boxes in the Corwin Theater. The New Accessible Sanitary Building component of the Project will consist of the addition of a new 12-foot by 40-foot sanitary building. The new building will require site preparation, installation of a building pad, foundation and utility .onnections. Approximately 1,000 square feet of turf and 180 linear feet of curb will be demolished to widen the fire 333 South Beaudry Avenue, 21" Floor, Los Angeles, CA 90017 • Telephone (213) 241-3199 • Fax (213) 241-6816 Our Mission: To ensure a safe and healthy environment for students to learn, teachers to teach, and employees to work. Our Vision: To eliminate all environmental, health, and safety risks at schools.
PLACE "FILED" STICKER
•
HERE
lane to a minimum of 20 feet in accordance with the requirements of the City of Los Angeles. 1 The building will be delivered to the campus preassembled. The new sanitary building will comply with the Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA). 2 The Project will be constructed per Division of State Architect approved design specifications. The Project will be implemented per all applicable local and State regulations, as well as all District Standards and Specifications; such as those provided in LAUSD's Program Environmental Impact Report for the School Upgrade Program, which was completed in compliance with the California Environmental Quality Act (CEQA). 3 The beneficiaries of this Project include the District's students and staff as well as families, school supporters, and the community at large who may request access to the facilities and grounds pursuant to the Civic Center Act (CA Ed. Code §§38130-38139). Name of Public Agency Approving the Project: Los Angeles Unified School District Name of Person or Agency Carrying Out Project: Los Angeles Unified School District Exempt Status: (check one below) D Ministerial [Public Resources Code (PRC) Section 21080(b)(l); CEQA Guidelines Section 152684]: 0 Declared Emergency [PRC Section 21080(b)(3); CEQA Guidelines Section 15269(a)]: D Emergency Project [PRC Section 21080(b)(4); CEQA Guidelines Section 15269(b)(c)]: [g) Categorical Exemption (PRC Section 21084; CEQA Guidelines Sections 15300 -15333): • ~ CEQA Guidelines Section 15301- Existing Facilities CEQA Guidelines Section 15302- Replacement or Reconstruction CEQA Guidelines Section 15314 - Minor Ad.ditions to Schools D Statutory Exemption: Reasons why project is exempt: Section 15301 -Existing Facilities Class 1 consists of the operation, repair, maintenance, permitting, leasing, licensing, or minor alteration of existing public or private structures, facilities, mechanical equipment, or topographical features involving negligible or no expansion of use beyond that existing at the time of the lead agency's determination. The Corwin Theater Repair component of the Project entails replacing the damaged and deteriorated metal stud framing of the Corwin Theater hallway and replacing exterior tiles, HV AC ducts, sprinklers, light fixtures, smoke detectors, the fire alarm, and fire alarm pull boxes within the existing Corwin Theater. The New Accessible Sanitary Building component of the Project will include the addition of a new sanitary building to the existing GALA site and the widening of the existing fire lane. No permanent buildings or structures will be installed or removed as a part of the Project. The Project will be installed completely within the boundaries of the existing campus and wiii not require or result in the expansion of use beyond the campus. Therefore, the Project fulfills the requirements for a Class 1 Categorical Exemption. 1
City of Los Angeles Municipal Code, Section 57.503.1.6. Easements. US Department of Justice Civil Rights Division. Americans with Disabilities Act of 1990. 42 U.S.C. 12101 et seq. https:/ /www.ada.gov /. Accessed May 2017 . 3 LAUSD OEHS, "School Upgrade Program Final Environmental Im.pact Report," http://achieve.lausd.net/ ceqa, Adopted by the Board of Education on ovember 10,2015. CEQA Guidelines can be found at California Code of Regulations Tide 14, Chapter 3, Section 15000 -Section 15387.
2
••
333 Soutb Beaudry Avenue, 21" Floor, Los Angeles, CA 90017 • Telephone (213) 241-3199 o Fax (213) 241-6816
Our Mission: To ensure a safe and healthy environment for students to learn, teachers to teach. and employees to work. Our Vision: To eliminate a/1 environmental, health. and safety risks at schools.
Page 2 of4
7
PLACE ''FILED'' STICKER
•
HERE
Section 15302- Replacement or Reconstruction Class 2 consists of replacement or reconstruction of existing structures and facilit~es where the new structure will be located on the same site as the structure replaced and will have substantially the same purpose and capacity as the structure replaced. The Corwin Theater Repair component of the Project entails replacing the damaged and deteriorated metal stud framing of the Corwin Theater hallway and replacing exterior tiles, IN AC ducts, sprinklers, light fixtures, smoke detectors, ftre alarm, and fire alarm pull boxes within Corwin Theater. The Project will not change the purpose or capacity of the Corwin Theater. Therefore, the Corwin Theater Repair component of the Project fulfills the requirements for a Class 2 Categorical Exemption. S.ection 15314- Minor Additions to Schools Class 14 consists of minor additions to existing schools within existing school grounds where the addition does not increase original student capacity by more than 25% or ten classrooms, whiche\;'er is less. The addition of a portable building is included in this exemption. The New Accessible Sanitary Building component of the Project will entail the addition of a new building on an existing school campus. The sanitary building is designed to accommodate the current student enrollment at GALA and will not increase the student population. The sanitary building will arrive to the campus preassembled and the addition of the new building will not require major construction activities or demolition. The Project will require site preparation, installation of a building pad, foundation, and utility connections. The Project will not result in an increase in the student &ulation and does not entail the addition of any classrooms. Therefore, the New Accessible Sanitary Building ~mponent of the Project constitutes minor alterations to existing schools and fulfills the requirements for a Class 14 Categorical Exemption. Section 15300.2 ---:Exceptions Section 15300.2 of the CEQA Guidelines, Exceptions, provides conditions under which categorical exemptions are inapplicable. Review of the Project indicates that it will not violate any of the exceptions, as described in the following section.
1.
The project will occur in certain specified sensitive environments or locations; This exception only applies when claiming a categorical exemption under Class 3, 4, 5, 6, or 11. As the Project is only claiming Classes 1, 2, and 14, this exception does not apply.
2.
Cumulative impacts will be considerable because successive projects of the same type will occur at the same place over time; Although other successive projects are planned for the Los Angeles HS campus, the nature and scale of successive projects planned for the campus are minor and the effects of the successive projects would be limited to other portions of the campus. Therefore, the Project, when considered with successive projects, would not result in considerable cumulative impacts.
There is a reasonable possibility that the activity will have a significant effect on the environment due to unusual circumstances;
•
There are no known unusual circumstances associated with the Project that will have a significant effect on the environment. There will be minor ground-disturbing activities associated with the Project. Construction or earthmoving activities that require import or export of soils a:nd materials will require oversight by LAUSD's Office of Environmental Health & Safety (OEHS) to ensure that these activities are conducted in compliance with the requirements of District Specification 01 4524 and the applicable environmental agency rules and 333 South Beaudry Avenue, 21" Floor, Los Angeles, CA 90017 • Telephone (213) 241-3199 o Fax (213) 241-6816 Our Mission: To ensure a safe and healthy environment for students to learn, teachers to teach, and employees to work. Our Vision: To eliminate all environmental, health, and sqfety risks at schools.
Page 3 of4
• 4.
PLACE ''FILED'' ST1CKER HERJ; requirements. 5 LAUSD will ensure that all construction related activities comply with the applicable LAUSD Standard Conditions of Approval which include but are not limited to: SC-USS-1, which requires that any construction waste will be recycled to the maximum extent feasible. 6 Furthermore, as set forth in SC-CUL-13, SC-CUL-15, SC-CUL-18 and SC-CUL-19 of the Program EIR, construction activities must be stopped immediately and OEHS notified upon discovery of subsurface features, such as buried resources (i.e., paleontological resources, archaeological resources), tanks, seepage pits, or stained/odoriferous soils. 7 Therefore, no reasonable possibility exists that the Project will have a significant effect on the environment due to unusual circumstan,ces. The project may result in damage to scenic resources, including but not limited to trees, historic buildings, rock outcroppings, or similar resources within a highway officially designated as a scenic highway;
The Los Angeles HS campus is located approximately 13.9 miles southwest of State Route 2 (SR 2), the nearest officially designated State scenic highway. 8 The campus is not visible from and does not provide views to SR2. Therefore, the Project will not result in damage to scenic resources or similar resources within a highway that is officially designated as a State scenic highway. 5.
The project is located on a site which is included on any list compiled pursuant to Section 65962.5 of the Government Code; or
The Project will ocaur on an existing school campus which is not included on any list compiled pursuant to Section 65962.5 of the Government Code.9 Therefore, the Project will not have an impact related to being located on a hazardous waste' site. •
The project may cause a substantial adverse change in the significance ofa historic resource.
Los Angeles High School opened in 1917. The oldest building on the current campus is the Flammable Storage #1 that was constructed in 1953. The core buildings on the campus were constructed between 1964 and 1978. The campus was determined to be ineligible as a historic resource. 10 Therefore, the Project would have no impact to a historic resource. Prepared By:
Phone and Email:
Will Meade, LEED AP Environmental Planning Specialist
(213) 241-3432
[email protected]
Signed by:
Date:
Robert Laughton, CEQA Officer ofthe Los An~eles Unified School District
5 LAUSD.
Specification 01 4524: Available at: http://www.laschools.org/documents/file?file_id=219798234&show_all_versions_p=t LAUSD. 2015. School Upgrade Program Final Environmental Impact Report, http:/ /achieve.lausd.net/ceqa. Adopted by the Board of Education on November 10, 2015. 7 Ibid. 8 California Department of Transportation. Californ.i;t Scenic Highway Mapping System. AvaiJable at: http://www.dot.ca.gov /hq/LandAr<:h/16_livability/ scenic_highways/index.htm. Accessed May 2017 . aliforn.ia Department of Toxic Substances Control. DTSC Databases .. Available at: http://www.dtsc.ca.gov I database/. Accessed May 2017. LAUSD. 2017. Historic Resource Inventory Database. Los Angeles, CA.
6
•
333 South Beaudry Avenue, 21" Floor, Los Angeles, CA 90017 o Telephone (213) 241-3199 o Fax (213) 241-6816 Our Mission: To ensure a safe and healthy environment for students to learn, teachers to teach, and employees to work. Our Vision: To eliminate all environmental, health, and safety risks at schools.
Page 4 of4
120727
•
SECTION 01 6000 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS PART 1- GENERAL SECTION INCLUDES
1.01 A.
1.02
•
This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements govemmg selection of products for incorporation into the Work. RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
Section 01 3229- Project Forms.
B.
Section 01 3113 - Project Coordination.
c.
Section 01 3300- Submittal Procedures.
D.
Section 01 3213- Construction Schedule.
E.
Section 01 4523 -Testing and Inspection.
F.
Section 01 2513- Product Substitution Procedures.
G.
Section 01 7836- Warranties. DEFINITIONS
1.03 A.
Definitions used in this Section are not intended to change the meaning of other terms used in the Contract Documents, such as "specialties," "systems," "structure," "finishes," "accessories," and other similar terms. Such terms are self-explanatory and have well-recognized meanings in the construction industry. 1.
•
"Products" are items purchased for incorporation into the Work, whether purchased for the Work or taken from previously purchased stock. The term "product" includes the terms "material" and "equipment" and terms of similar intent. a.
"Named Products," are items identified by the manufacturer's product name, including make, model number or other designation, shown or listed in the manufacturer's published product literature, current as of the date of the Contract.
b.
"Foreign Products," as distinguished from "domestic products," are items substantially manufactured (50 percent or more of value)
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR& P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
07/27/2012 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01 6000-1
120727
•
outside the or supplied by persons States and products.
1.04
2.
"Materials," are products substantially shaped, cut, worked, mixed, finished, refined or otherwise fabricated, processed, or installed to form a part of the Work.
3.
"Equipment," is a product with operational parts, whether motorized or manually operated, that requires service connections, such as wiring or p1pmg.
SUBMITTALS
A.
•
Material list: Prepare a list in tabular form acceptable to ARCHITECT and/or OAR showing proposed products. Include generic names. Include the manufacturer's name and proprietary names for each item listed. 1.
Coordinate material list with the Construction Schedule and the submittal schedule .
2.
Form: Prepare material list with information on each item tabulated under the following column headings.
3.
•
United States and its possessions. Products produced by entities substantially owned (more than 50 percent) who are not citizens of, nor living within, the United its possessions are also considered to be foreign
a.
Related Specification Section number.
b.
Generic name used in Contract Documents.
c.
Proprietary name, model number, and similar designations.
d.
Manufacturer's name and address.
e.
Supplier's name and address.
f.
Installer's name and address.
g.
Projected delivery date or time span of delivery period.
Initial Submittal: Within ten days after execution of each subcontract agreement, as set forth in General Conditions Article 6.23, submit three copies_ of an initial material list to the ARCHITECT with a copy to the OAR. Provide a written explanation for omissions of data and for known variations from the Contract Documents .
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR& P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
07/27/2012 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01 6000-2
120727
•
4.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.05 A.
Source Limitations: To the fullest extent possible, provide products of the same kind from a single source. 1.
•
CONTRACTOR is to verify necessary lead times for all materials; however, when specified products are available only from sources that do not, or cannot, produce a quality adequate to complete Work in a timely manner, consult with the ARCHITECT to determine the most important product qualities before proceeding. Qualities may include attributes, such as visual appearance, strength, durability, or compatibility. When a determination has been made, select products from sources producing these qualities, to the fullest extent possible .
B.
Compatibility of Options: When the CONTRACTOR is given the option of selecting between two or more products for use in the Work, the product selected shall be compatible with products previously selected, even if previously selected products were also options.
C.
Foreign Product Limitations: Except under one or more of the following conditions, provide domestic products, not foreign products, for inclusion into the Work:
D.
1.
No available domestic product complies with the Contract Documents.
2.
Domestic products that comply with the Contract Documents are available only at prices or terms substantially higher than foreign products that comply with the Contract Documents.
Nameplates: Except for required labels and operating data, do not attach or imprint manufacturers or producer's nameplates- -or -trademarks --on- exposed surfaces of products that will be exposed in view in ocGupied -spaces or on the exterior. 1.
•
ARCHITECT Action: ARCHITECT will respond in wntmg to OAR within fourteen days and OAR will forward response to CONTRACTOR within sixteen days of receipt of the completed material list. No response outside this period constitutes no objection to listed items but does not constitute a waiver of the requirement that selected items comply with the Contract Documents. ARCHITECT response will include a list of unacceptable item selections, containing a brief explanation of reasons for this action.
Labels: Locate required product labels and stamps on concealed surfaces or, where required for observation after installation, on accessible surfaces that are not conspicuous .
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR& P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
07/27/2012 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01 6000-3
120727
•
2.
A.
•
a.
Name of product and manufacturer.
b.
Model and serial number.
c.
Capacity.
d.
Speed.
e.
Ratings.
PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
1.06
•
Equipment Nameplates: Provide a permanent nameplate on each item of service-connected or power-operated equipment. Locate on an easily accessible surface that is inconspicuous in occupied spaces. The nameplate shall contain the following information and other essential operating data:
Deliver, store, and handle products according to the manufacturer's recommendations, using means and methods that will prevent damage, deterioration, and loss, including theft. 1.
Schedule delivery to minimize long-term storage at the Project site and to prevent overcrowding of Work spaces.
2.
Coordinate delivery with installation time to assure minimum holding time for items that are flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration, theft, and other losses.
3.
Deliver products to the Project site in an undamaged condition in the manufacturer's original sealed container or other packaging system, complete with labels and instructions for handling, storing, unpacking, protecting, and installing.
4.
Inspect products upon delivery to ensure compliance with the Contract Documents and to ensure that products are undamaged and properly protected.
5.
Store products at the Project site in a manner that will facilitate inspection and measurement of quantity or counting of units.
6.
Store heavy materials away from structures in a manner that will not endanger the structure's supporting construction.
7.
Store products subject to damage by the elements above ground, under cover in a weather-tight enclosure, with ventilation adequate to prevent
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR& P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
07/27/2012 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01 6000-4
120727
•
condensation. Maintain temperature and humidity within range required by manufacturer's instructions. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01
MATERIAL SELECTION A.
B.
•
General Product Requirements: Provide products that comply with the Contract Documents, that are undamaged and, unless otherwise indicated, new at the time of installation. 1.
Provide products complete with accessories, trim, finish, safety guards, and other devices and details needed for a complete installation and the intended use and effect.
2.
Standard Products: Where available, provide standard products of types that have been produced and used successfully in similar situations on other Projects.
Product Selection Procedures: The Contract Documents and governmg regulations govern product selection. Procedures governing product selection include the following: 1.
Proprietary Specification Requirements: Where Specifications name only a single material or manufacturer, provide the product indicated. No substitutions will be permitted.
2.
Semi-proprietary Specification Requirements: Where Specifications name two or more products or manufacturers, provide one of the products indicated. No substitutions will be permitted. a.
•
Where Specifications specify products or manufacturers by name, accompanied by the term "or equal" comply with General Conditions Article 6.14 to obtain approval for use of an unnamed product.
3.
Descriptive Specification Requirements: Where Specifications describe a product or assembly, list exact characteristics required, with or without use of a brand or trade name, provide a product or assembly that provides the characteristics and otherwise complies with the Contract Documents.
4.
Performance Specification Requirements: Where Specifications require compliance with performance requirements, provide products that comply with these requirements and are recommended by the manufacturer for the application indicated .
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
07/27/2012 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01 6000-5
120727
•
a.
Manufacturer's recommendations may be contained in published material literature or by the manufacturer's certification of performance.
5.
Compliance with Standards, Codes, and Regulations: Where Specifications only require compliance with an imposed code, standard or regulation, select a product that complies with the standards, codes, or regulations specified.
6.
Visual Matching: Where Specifications require matching an established Sample, decision of the ARCHITECT will be final on whether a proposed product matches satisfactorily.
7.
Visual Selection: Where specified product requirements include the phrase " ... as selected from manufacturer's standard or premium colors, patterns, textures ... " or a similar phrase, select a product and manufacturer that complies with other specified requirements. The ARCHITECT will select the color, pattern, and texture from the product line selected.
PART 3- EXECUTION
•
INSTALLATION OF PRODUCTS
3.01 A.
Comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for installation of products in the applications indicated. Anchor each product securely in place, accurately located, and aligned with other Work.
B.
Clean exposed surfaces and protect as necessary to ensure freedom from damage and deterioration until Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION
•
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR& P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
07/27/2012 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01 6000-6
111001
•
SECTION 01 7123 FIELD ENGINEERING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01
SUMMARY A.
•
B.
1.02
•
1.03
Section Includes: 1.
Layout of the work
2.
Verification of work a.
OWNER reserves the right to verify any work that INSPECTOR deems necessary.
b.
Other sections that require Surveyor to verify or measure installed work and related item. Surveyor shall perform such verifications or measurements at CONTRACTOR'S expense. CONTRACTOR shall furnish a certification, signed by both Surveyor and CONTRACTOR, to INSPECTOR.
Related Requirements: 1.
Section 01 1100- Summary of Work.
2.
Section 01 3113 - Project Coordination.
3.
Section 01 3213- Construction Schedule.
4.
Section 01 3300- Submittal Procedures.
5.
Section 01 7700- Contract Closeout.
SURVEY CONTROLS A.
Vertical Control shall use same benchmark used in the preparation of topographic survey. When Work consists of both on-site and off-site and benchmarks differ, an equation shall be indicated on Drawings.
B.
Horizontal control for existing structures shall be the property line. LAYOUT OF WORK
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR& P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 FIELD ENGINEERING 01 7123-1
Ill 00 I
•
A.
All work related to staking shall be by a Land Surveyor, or Civil engineer, registered with the State of California to perform land surveying and employed by CONTRACTOR.
B.
Before commencement of Work, surveyor shall locate all reference points and benchmarks to be used for vertical and horizontal control.
C.
Surveyor shall lay out entire Work, set grades, lines, levels, control points, elevations, grids and positions.
1.04
•
•
RECORD DOCUMENTS A.
Maintain complete and accurate log of all control and survey documentation as work progresses.
B.
Record, by coordinates, all utilities onsite with top of pipe elevations, at major grade and alignment changes, rim, grate or top of curb and flow line elevations of all drainage structures and sewer manholes.
C.
Indicate reference and control points on record drawings. The basis of elevation shall be one of the established benchmarks.
D.
Upon Substantial Completion, obtain and pay for reproducible plans. Deliver plans to OAR. Clearly indicate all differences between original drawings and completed work within specified tolerances. SUBMITTALS
1.05
A.
Surveyor: Shall submit name, address and license number to OWNER, including any changes as they occur.
B.
Field notes: Upon request by OAR, submit copies of cut sheets, coordinate plots, data collector printouts, marked-up construction staking plans and other documentation as available to verify accuracy of field engineering work during and at completion of project. Submittals to OWNER must be signed and sealed by Surveyor and countersigned by CONTRACTOR
C.
Statement of Compliance: CONTRACTOR shall submit a statement of certification signed and sealed by Surveyor, counter-signed by CONTRACTOR indicating compliance with grades and alignment of construction plans at rough grade, fine grade and top of rock stages. INSPECTOR shall approve survey submittals for each stage of construction prior to proceeding with work
D.
Upon Substantial Completion, CONTRACTOR shall obtain and pay for reproducible survey drawings (or "As Built") .
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR& P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 FIELD ENGINEERING 01 7123-2
111001
•
E.
Completed record drawings shall be signed and certified as correct and within specified tolerances by licensed surveyor. Originals and two sets ofblueprints shall be submitted to OWNER.
PART 2-PRODUCTS- NOT USED PART 3-EXECUTION 3.01
•
•
PREPARATION A.
Pre-mark areas of excavation in accordance with the requirements of "Dig-Alert". Request locators 2 days before commencing excavation.
B.
Before commencing Work, establish all horizontal and vertical reference points used in Contract Documents according to existing field conditions.
C.
Preserve established reference lines and benchmarks.
D.
Differentiate school and city datum as applicable.
E.
Relocate bench marks that may interfere with Work.
F.
Reset and re-establish reference marks damaged or lost during construction. SURVEY REQUIREMENTS GENERAL
3.02 A.
Establish a minimum of two permanent horizontal and vertical control points on Project site, remote from construction area, referenced to data established by control points.
B.
Indicate reference points, relative to benchmark elevation, on record drawings.
C.
Provide grade stakes and elevations to construct over excavation and re-compaction, rough and final grades, paved areas, curbs, gutters, sidewalks, building pads, landscaped areas, and other areas as required.
D.
Calculate and layout proposed finished elevations and intermediate controls as required to provi~e smooth transiti~ns bet:v_een spot elevations indicated on Drawings.
H.
Provide stakes and elevations for grading, fill, and topsoil plac-ement.
F.
Provide adequate horizontal and vertical control to locate utility lines, including but not limited to, storm, sewers, water mains, gas, electric and signal and provide vertical control in proportion to the slope of the line as required for accurate construction. Dry utilities will be based upon adequate horizontal and vertical control layout. Prior to
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 FIELD ENGINEERING 01 7123-3
111001
•
•
•
trench closure, survey and record invert and flow line elevations. Survey and record top of curb and flow line elevations on finished concrete or asphaltic concrete (AC) surfaces at key locations such as beginning-of-curve (BC), end-of-curve (EC), grade breaks, comers or angle points in sufficient number to demonstrate the Work complies with the intent of the Contract Documents. G.
Provide horizontal and vertical control for batter boards for drainage, utility, and other on-site structures as required.
H.
Furnish building comer offsets as required to adequately locate building pads. Provide cut and fill stakes within the building pad perimeter adequate to control both over excavation and re-compaction and the final sub-grade elevation of the building pad.
I.
Submit a certification signed by the surveyor confirming the elevations and locations of improvements are in conformance with the Contract Documents. The statement shall include survey notes for the finish floor and building pad, showing the actual measured elevations on the completed sub-grade, recorded to the nearest 0.01 of a foot. Building pad tolerance will be plus or minus 0.1 of a foot.
J.
Establish a minimum of two permanent horizontal and vertical control points on Project site, remote from building area, referenced to data established by survey control points .
K.
Mark boundaries for rights-of-way dedications and easements for utilities prior to · making location of buildings and utilities.
L.
Layout all lines, elevations and measurements needed for construction or installation of buildings, grading, paving utilities according to the following: 1.
Identify site boundary, property lines.
2.
Provide working benchmarks.
3.
Set stakes for Bottom of Excavated Plane (B.E.P.).
4.
Set gridlines, radii, working points etcetera, for foundation.
5.
Set and verify building pad elevations.
6.
Set finish floor elevations.
7.
Stake location and elevations for exterior ramps and stairs.
8.
Set gridlines, radii, working points, etcetera, for all floors of multi-story buildings .
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR& P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 FIELD ENGINEERING 01 7123-4
I I 1001
• 3.03
Set storm drain and sanitary sewer inverts and other utilities as needed at 5-foot off-set from building lines.
10.
For new facilities, establish permanent onsite Benchmark with 2-inch diameter brass disk. Location of Benchmark to be determined by OWNER.
SURVEY REQUIREMENTS FOR GRADING A.
• B.
Provide grade stakes and elevations as follows: 1.
Removal limits (cut lines).
2.
Rough grade staking: 60-foot maximum grid plus additional stakes at grade changes and pertinent locations. Flag all grade changes including ridges, flow lines and grade breaks.
3.
Fine grade for top of dirt: 30-foot maximum grid plus additional stakes at grade changes and pertinent locations. Flag all grade changes including ridges, flow lines and grade breaks.
4.
Verify fine grade for top of rock: 30-foot maximum grid plus additional stakes at grade changes and pertinent locations. Flag all grade changes including ridges, flow lines and grade breaks .
5.
Finish grade marks on all buildings, structures and at pertinent locations
6.
Finish grades and offsets for all concrete work, utilities, landscape areas, and structures.
7.
Provide controls and baselines for playground striping.
8.
Offsite improvements: set grades and provide grade sheets as required by local authorities.
Provide a minimum of two permanent horizontal and vertical control points onsite, remote from building area, referenced to data established by survey control points. SURVEY REQUIREMENTS FOR UTILITIES
3.04
•
9.
A.
Locate "wet" utility lines and provide vertical control proportionate to slope of line as required for accurate construction. "Dry" utilities shall have adequate horizontal and vertical control layout supplied by others.
B.
Prior to back-filling trench, survey and record invert and flow line elevations. Survey and record top of curb and flow line elevations on finished surfaces at key locations
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 FIELD ENGINEERING 01 7123-5
111001
•
(such as Back of Curbs, grade breaks, comers or angle points) in sufficient number to demonstrate Work complies with intent of Contract Documents. C.
Provide horizontal and vertical control for batter boards for drainage, utility, and other on-site structures as required. 1.
D.
•
Leave all trenches open until required inspection is completed.
SURVEY REQUIREMENTS FOR STRUCTURES
3.05
•
Set grades for vaults one inch higher than adjacent surrounding design grades, unless noted otherwise.
A.
Furnish building comer offsets as required to adequately locate building pads. Provide cut and fill stakes within building pad perimeter adequate to control both over excavation and re-compaction and final sub-grade elevation of building pad.
B.
Submit a certification signed by surveyor confirming elevations and locations of improvements are in conformance with Contract Documents. Statel)lent shall include survey notes for finish floor and building pad, showing actual measured elevations on completed sub-grade, recorded to nearest 0.01 of a foot. Building pad tolerance will be plus or minus 0.1 of a foot.
END OF SECTION
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR& P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 FIELD ENGINEERING 01 7123-6
120727
•
SECTION 01 7329 CUTTING AND PATCHING PART 1- GENERAL 1.01
SECTION INCLUDES A.
1.02
•
RELATED REQUIREMENTS A.
Section 01 2973- Schedule ofValues.
B.
Section 01 3113 - Project Coordination.
C.
Section 01 3119 - Project Meetings.
D.
Section 01 3213- Construction Schedule.
E.
Section 01 3300- Submittal Procedures.
F.
Section 01 7123 - Field Engineering.
G.
Section 01 7836- Warranties.
H.
Section 01 4525- Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing ofHVAC. SUBMITTALS
1.03
•
This Section specifies procedural requirements for cutting and patching.
A.
The word "cutting" as used in the Contract Documents includes, but is not limited to, cutting, drilling, chopping, and other similar operations and the word "patching" includes, but is not limited to, patching, rebuilding, reinforcing, repairing, refurbishing, restoring, replacing, or other similar operations.
B.
Cutting and Patching Proposal: CONTRACTOR shall submit a proposal describing procedures well in advance of the time cutting and patching will be performed if the Contract Documents requires approval of these procedures before proceeding. Include the following information, as applicable, in the proposal:
CORWIN THEATER REP AIR & P.O. T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
07/27/2012 CUTTING AND PATCHING 01 7329-1
120727
•
•
1.
Describe the extent of cutting and patching required. Denote how it will be performed and indicate why it cannot be avoided.
2.
Describe anticipated results in terms of changes to existing construction. Include changes to structural elements and operating components as well as changes in the building's appearance or other significant visual elements.
3.
List products to be used and firms or entities that will perform this Work.
4.
Indicate dates when cutting and patching will be performed.
5.
Utilities: List utilities that cutting and patching operations will disturb or affect. List utilities to be relocated and those that will be temporarily outof-service. Indicate how long service will be disrupted.
6.
Where cutting and patching involves adding reinforcement to structural elements, submit details and engineering calculations showing integration of reinforcement with the original structure.
7.
Review by ARCHITECT and DSA prior to proceeding with cutting and patching does not waive ARCHITECT right to later require complete removal and replacement of defective Work .
QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.04 A.
Requirements for structural Work: Do not cut and patch structural elements in a manner that would change their load-carrying capacity or load-deflection ratio. 1.
•
Obtain approval from ARCHITECT and DSA of the cutting and patching proposal before cutting and patching the following structural elements: a.
Foundation construction.
b.
Bearing and retaining walls.
c.
Structural concrete.
d.
Structural steel.
e.
Lintels.
f.
Timber and primary wood framing.
g.
Structural decking.
h.
Stair systems .
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR& P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
07/27/2012 CUTTING AND PATCHING 01 7329-2
120727
• B.
C.
•
Miscellaneous structural metals.
J.
Exterior curtain-wall construction.
k.
Equipment supports.
1.
Piping, ductwork, vessels, and equipment.
m.
Structural systems of special construction in Division 13 Sections.
Operational Limitations: Do not cut and patch operating elements or related components in a manner that would result in reducing their capacity to perform as intended. Do not cut and patch operating elements or related components in a manner that would result in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safely. 1.
•
1.
Obtain review of the cutting and patching proposal before cutting and patching the following operating elements or safety related systems: a.
Primary operational systems and equipment.
b.
Air or smoke barriers.
c.
Water, moisture, or vapor barriers.
d.
Membranes and flashings.
e.
Fire protection systems.
f.
Noise and vibration control elements and systems.
g.
Control systems.
h.
Communication and/or data systems.
1.
Conveying systems.
J.
Electrical wiring systems.
k.
Operating systems of special construction in Division 13 Sections.
_Yisu~LB-~q!!irem~nts:
_QQ _n_g!_Cl11 @Q patch construct_ion ~?'posed on the exterior or in occupied spaces in a manner that would, in the opinion of ARCHITECT, reduce the building's aesthetic qualities. Do not cut and patch construction in a manner that would result in visual evidence of cutting and patching. Remove and replace Work cut and patched in a visually unsatisfactory manner.
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR& P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
07/27/2012 CUTTING AND PATCHING 01 7329-3
120727
•
1.
•
If possible, retain the original installer or fabricator to cut and patch the exposed Work listed below. If it is impossible to engage the original installer or fabricator, engage another recognized experienced and specialized firm. a.
Firestopping.
b.
Acoustical ceilings.
c.
Acoustical panels.
d.
Finished wood flooring.
e.
Synthetic sports flooring.
f.
Carpeting.
g.
HV AC enclosures, cabinets, or covers.
h.
Ceramic and quarry tile.
1.
Gypsum board.
J.
Masonry (exterior and interior where exposed).
k.
Tack boards.
1.
Casework.
m.
Finish carpentry.
WARRANTY
1.05 A.
Existing Warranties: Replace, patch, and repair material and surfaces cut or damaged by methods and with materials in such a manner as not to void any warranties required or existing.
PART 2- PRODUCTS (Not applicable) PART 3- EXECUTION INSPECTION
3.01
•
A.
Examine surfaces to be cut and patched and conditions under which cutting and patching is to be performed before cutting. If unsafe or unsatisfactory conditions are encountered, take corrective action before proceeding.
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
07/27/2012 CUTTING AND PATCHING 01 7329-4
120727
•
1.
3.02
•
•
Before proceeding, meet at the Project site with parties involved in cutting and patching, including mechanical and electrical trades. Review areas of potential interference and conflict. Coordinate procedures and resolve potential conflicts before proceeding.
PREPARATION
A.
Temporary support: Provide adequate improvements or Work to be cut.
B.
Protection: Protect existing improvements and Work during cutting and patching to prevent damage. Provide protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of existing improvements or Work that might be exposed during cutting and patching operations.
C.
A void interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption of free passage to adjoining areas.
D.
Where the Work requires sandblasting of existing surfaces in order to receive new materials secured by cementitious, adhesive or chemical bond, completely remove existing finishes, stains, oil, grease, bitumen, mastic and adhesives or other substances deleterious to the new bonding or fastening of new Work. Utilize wet sand blasting for interior surfaces and for exterior surfaces where necessary to prevent objectionable production of dust.
temporary
support
of
existing
PERFORMANCE
3.03
A.
General: Employ skilled workmen to perform cutting and patching. Proceed with cutting and patching at the earliest feasible time and complete without delay. Carefully remove existing Work to be salvaged and/or reinstalled. Protect and store for reuse into the Work. Verify compatibility and suitability of existing substrates before starting the Work.
B.
Cutting: Cut existing construction using methods least likely to damage elements retained or adjoining Work. Where possible, review proposed procedures with the original installer; comply with the original installer's recommendations. 1.
In general, where cutting, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering and chopping. Cut holes and slots as small as possible, neatly to size required, and with minimum disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings when not in use.
2.
To avoid marring existing finished surfaces, cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces.
3.
Cut through concrete and masonry using a cutting machine, such as a carborundum saw or a diamond-core drill. Saw cut reinforcing bars and
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR& P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
07/27/2012 CUTTING AND PATCHING 01 7329-5
120727
•
paint ends with bituminous paint except where bonded into new concrete or masonry.
• C.
•
4.
Comply with requirements of applicable Sections of Divisions 31, 32, and 33 where cutting and patching requires excavating, backfill, and recompaction.
5.
Woodwork: Cut and or remove to a panel or joint line.
6.
Sheet Metal: Remove back to joint, lap, or connection. Secure loose or unfastened ends or edges and seal watertight
7.
Glass: Remove cracked, broken, or damaged glass and clean rebates and stops of setting materials.
8.
Plaster: Cut back to sound plaster on straight lines, and back bevel edges of remaining plaster. Trim existing lath and prepare for new lath.
9.
Gypsum Wallboard: Cut back on straight lines to undamaged surfaces with at least two opposite cut edges centered on supports.
10.
Acoustical ceilings: Remove hanger wires and related appurtenances where ceilings are not scheduled to be installed .
11.
Tile: Cut back to sound tile and backing on joint lines.
12.
Flooring: Completely remove flooring and clean backing of prior adhesive. Carefully remove wood flooring for patching and repairing of existing wood flooring scheduled to remain.
Patching: Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. Comply with required tolerances. 1.
Where feasible, inspect and test patched areas to demonstrate integrity of the installation. Verify conditions of existing substrates prior to executing Work.
2.
Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish restoration into retaining adjoining construction in a manner that will eliminate all evidence of patching and refinishing.
3.
Concrete: Maintain cut edges in a moist condition for twenty four hours prior to the placement of new concrete. In lieu of this an epoxy adhesive may be provided. Finish placed concrete to match existing unless noted otherwise. Concrete shall have a compressive strength of 3,000 psi where installed to repair and match existing improvements, unless noted otherwise.
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
07/27/2012 CUTTING AND PATCHING 01 7329-6
120727
•
• 3.04
4.
Metal Fabrications: Items to remain exposed shall have their edges cut and ground smooth and rounded.
5.
Sheet Metal: Replace removed or damaged sheet metal items for new Work.
6.
Glass: Install matching glass and re-seal exterior window assemblies.
7.
Lath and Plaster: Install new lath materials to match existing and fasten to supports at 6-inch centers. Provide a 6-inch lap where new lath to adjoins existing lath. Fasten new lath as required for new Work. Restore paper backings as required. Apply a bonding agent on cut edges of existing plaster. Apply three coat plaster of the type, thickness, finish, texture, and color to match existing.
8.
Gypsum Wallboard: Fasten cut edges ofwallboard. Install patches with at least two opposite edges centered on supports and secure at 6-inch centers. Tape and finish joints and fastener heads. Patching shall be non-apparent when painted or finished.
9.
Acoustical Ceilings: Comply with the requirements for new Work specified in related sections of the Contract Documents .
10.
Resilient Flooring: Completely remove flooring and prepare substrate for new material.
11.
Painting: Prepare areas to be patched, patch and paint as specified under related sections of the Contract Documents.
CLEANING A.
Clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching are performed. Completely remove paint, mortar, oils, putty, and similar items. Thoroughly clean piping, conduit, and similar features before applying paint or other finishing materials. Restore damaged coverings to their original condition. END OF SECTION
•
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR& P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
07/27/2012 CUTTING AND PATCHING 01 7329-7
131209
•
SECTION 01 7418
WATER POLLUTION CONTROL PART 1- GENERAL
1.01
SUMMARY A.
Section Includes: 1.
B.
1.02
Related Requirements:
1.
Division 01- General Requirements.
2.
Division 32 1216- Asphalt Paving
3.
Division 32 1313- Site Concrete Work
ACRONYMS AND DEFINITIONS
• 1.03
BMP
Best Management Practice.
CAN
Corrective Action Notice.
CASQA
California Stormwater Quality Association.
CGP
NPDES General Permit for Storm Water Discharges Associated with Construction Activities.
DWQ
Division of Water Quality.
LARWQCB
Los Angeles Regional Water Quality Control Board.
NPDES
National Pollutant Discharge Elimination System.
OEHS
LAUSD Office of Environmental Health and Safety.
SWPPP
Storm Water Pollution Prevention.
SWRCB
State Water Resources Control Board.
REQUIREMENTS- - ---A.
•
Control runoff and pollutants from the site during construction activities.
CONTRACTOR shall: 1.
Implement Good Site Management "Housekeeping".
2.
Install and maintain BMPs. Insure that BMPs are designed to protect all exposed portions of the site, including:
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR& P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
12/09/2013 WATER POLLUTION CONTROL 01 7418-1
131209
•
B.
•
1.04
Erosion, Sediment, Tracking, and Wind Erosion Control BMPs.
b.
Non--storm Water Control BMPs.
c.
Waste Management BMPs.
3.
Incorporate BMP activities into the Project Schedule.
4.
Inform CONTRACTOR and Subcontractors personnel on the BMP procedures to prevent pollutants from entering the storm drain system, before the start of construction activities. Keep personnel informed of the BMP implementation process and of changes to the procedures. Provide record to OAR of Storm Water Topics discussed.
5.
Pay fines and penalties from regulatory agencies against OWNER due to CONTRACTOR'S non-compliance with storm water regulations. OWNER shall recover costs of fines and penalties by appropriate OWNER assessment. Review of the BMPs by OAR shall not relieve CONTRACTOR from liabilities arising from non-compliance of storm water pollution regulations.
Project Inspector and OEHS Inspector will conduct inspection and examination of site storm water regulation compliance. SUBMITTALS
A. 1.05
BMP material quality, grade, type as specified in the CASCA BMP Handbook. QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
1.06
Regulatory Requirements: Comply with the following requirements: 1.
National Pollutant Discharge Elimination System (NPDES) General Permit for Storm Water Discharges Associated with Construction and Lands Disturbance Activities; ORDER NO. 2009-0009-DWQ; NPDES NO. CAS000002, adopted by the State Water Resources Control Board.
2.
Regulations of the California Environmental Protection Agency, State Water Resources Control Board; Los Angeles Regional Water Control Board, and local ordinances.
3.
CASQA Stormwater Best Management Practice Handbook Construction Activity (BMP Handbook) current adopted edition.
for
STORAGE AND PROTECTION A.
•
a.
Provide proper storage of materials and equipment to prevent rain and storm water runoff to come in contact with pollutants, such as soil stabilizers, paint or fluids from vehicles .
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR& P.O.T. UPGRADES, LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
12/09/2013 WATER POLLUTION CONTROL 01 7418-2
131209
•
PART 2- PRODUCTS PART 3 -EXECUTION
IMPLEMENTATION
3.01
•
A.
Install perimeter controls prior to starting Work at the Project site.
B.
Implement BMP plan to contain on-site storm water on the Project site. Provide storm drain inlet protection. Do not drain on-site water directly into the storm drain without proper BMP in place.
C.
Prevent pollutant discharges into the storm drain system. Prevent storm water from coming into contact with pollutants, such as sediment, material spills, or leakage from storage tanks, waste containers or transfer areas. In the event contamination is found CONTRACTOR shall immediately notify OAR who will contact the OEHS.
D.
Protect exposed dirt, such as stockpiles, landscaping areas, and hillsides.
E.
Properly manage non-storm water discharges such as ground water, _broken utility lines and fire hydrant testing per BMP Implementation Plan.
F.
Adjust BMP's locations and layouts in accordance to construction progress to assure compliance to regulations.
G.
Conduct inspections of pollution prevention controls and provide Site Monitoring Report to OAR immediately if pollutants are discharged into the site runoff. CONTRACTOR shall remediate contaminated water.
H.
Upon Substantial Completion: Maintain and leave post-construction storm water pollution prevention controls in place and remove those that are not needed as determined by the OAR.
3.02
CLOSEOUT A.
•
NOT USED
Verify the following prior to Substantial Completion: 1.
Final stabilization of site has been demonstrated.
2.
There is no potential for construction related storm water pollutants to be discharged into site runoff.
3.
Construction related equipment and temporary BMP have been removed from site.
4.
Rubbish, debris, and waste materials have been removed and legally disposed of off the Project site.
5.
OEHS CAN items have been closed and signed-off.
etJD ~ ~moJ CORWIN THEATER REPAIR& P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
12/09/2013 WATER POLLUTION CONTROL 01 7418-3
111001
•
SECTION 01 7419 CONSTRUCTION AND DEMOLITION WASTE MANAGEMENT PART 1- GENERAL 1.01
SUMMARY A.
B.
1.
Section 01 3300- Submittal Procedures.
2.
Section 01 5000- Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls.
3.
Section 01 7700- Contract Closeout.
A.
California Integrated Waste Management Act of 1989 (AB 939).
B.
California Code ofRegulations Title 14, Section 18700 et seq.
C.
California Green Building Standards Code.
1.03
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A.
Collection and separation of all C&D waste materials generated on-site, reuse or recycling on-site, transportation to approved recyclers or reuse organizations, or transportation to legally designated landfills, for the purpose of recycling salvaging and reusing a minimum of75 percent of the C&D waste generated.
1.04
SUBMITTALS A.
•
Related Requirements
REFERENCES
1.02
•
· Section Includes: Preparation and implementation, including reporting and documentation, of a Waste Management Plan for reusing, recycling, salvage or disposal of non-hazardous waste materials generated during demolition and new construction (Construction and Demolition (C&D) Waste), to foster material recovery and re-use and to minimize disposal in land fills.
C&D Waste Management Plan (Exhibit 1): Within 10 calendar days after the Notice to Proceed and prior to any waste removal, submit the following to the OAR for review and approval. Update quarterly. Include: 1.
Materials to be recycled, reused, or salvaged, either onsite or offsite.
2.
Estimates of C&D waste quantity (in tons) by type of material. (If waste is measured by volume, give factors for conversion to weight in tons.)
3.
Procedures for recycling and reuse program.
4.
Permit or license and location of Project waste-disposal areas .
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR& P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 CONSTRUCTION & DEMOLITION WASTE MANAGEMENT 01 7419-1
111001
5.
•
B.
C.
Site plan for placement of waste containers .
C&D Waste Management Monthly Progress Report (Exhibit 2): Summary of waste generated by Project, monthly with Application for Payment. Include: 1.
Firms accepting the recovered or waste materials.
2.
Type and location of accepting facilities (landfill, recovery facility, used materials yard, etcetera). If materials are reused or recycled on the Project site, location should be designated as "on-site reuse and recycling".
3.
Type of materials and net weight (tons) of each.
4.
Value ofthe materials or disposal fee paid.
5.
Attach weigh bills and other documentation confirming amount and disposal location of waste materials.
C&D Waste Management Final Compliance Report: Final update of Waste Management Plan to provide summary of total waste generated by Project.
PART 2- PRODUCTS (Not Used)
•
PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01
IMPLEMENTATION A.
Implement approved Waste Management Plan including collecting, segregating, storing, transporting and documenting each type of waste material generated, recycled or reused, or disposed in landfills.
B.
Designate an on-site person to be responsible for instructing workers and overseeing the sorting and recording of waste/ recyclable materials.
C.
Include waste management and recycling in worker orientation and as an agenda item for regular Project meetings.
D.
Recyclable and waste bin areas shall be limited to areas approved on the Waste Management Plan. Keep recycling and waste bins neat and clearly marked to avoid contamination of materials. ATTACHMENTS
3.02
•
A.
Exhibit 1: Waste Management Plan
B.
Exhibit 2: Waste Management Monthly Progress Report.
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 CONSTRUCTION & DEMOLITION WASTE MANAGEMENT 01 7419-2
111001
EXHIBIT 1 WASTE MANAGEMENT PLAN CONSTRUCTION/ MAINTENANCE/ALTERATION & DEMOLITION PROJECTS PROJECT NAME: PROJECT NO: NAME OF COMPANY: CONTACT PERSON: TELEPHONE: PROJECT SITE LOCATION: PROJECT TYPE:
<
D D
NEW CONSTRUCTION 0 DEMOLITION MAINTENANCE/ALTERATION PROJECTS
PROJECT SIZE (SQ. FT.): DATE & ESTIMATED PERIOD (I)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
Material Type
Tons Estimated Recycle
Tons Estimated Reuse
Tons Estimated Salvage
Tons Estimated Landfill
Proposed Disposal or Recycling Facility (e.g~, Onsite, Name of Facility)
• Total
=
Diversion Rate: Columns [(2)+(3)+( 4)] I [ (2)+(3)+(4)+(5)] Signature
•
I Title
I Date
Column 1
"Material Types"- Enter type of materials targeted for recycling, reuse, and/or salvage, either on- or offsite, and include a category for waste mat~rials requiring disposal.
Columns 2 thru 4
"Estim~tec! Generation"..:: Enter estimated ql,lflntiti_es (t_on~)J>fr(!~yclable, r~wmb]\:!, pr t>'!lv_ag~ble waste materials anticipated to be generated and state number of salvageable items.
Column 5
"Estimated Landfill"- Enter quantities (tons) of materials to be disposed in landfill.
Column4
"Disposal Location" -Enter end-destination of recycled, salvaged, and disposed materials.
General:
(I) Attach proposed Recycling and Waste Bin Location Plan.
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/0112011 CONSTRUCTION & DEMOLITION WASTE MANAGEMENT 01 7419-3
111001 (2) Attach name and contact data for each recycling or disposal destination to be used .
•
•
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 CONSTRUCTION & DEMOLITION WASTE MANAGEMENT 01 7419-4
111001
•
EXHIBIT 2 WASTE MANAGEMENT PROGRESS REPORT CONSTRUCTION/ MAINTENANCE/ALTERATION & DEMOLITION PROJECTS PROJECT NAME: PROJECT NO: NAME OF COMPANY: CONTACT PERSON: TELEPHONE: PROJECT SITE LOCATION: PROJECT TYPE:
<
NEW CONSTRUCTION 0 DEMOLITION MAINTENANCE/ALTERATION PROJECTS
0
0 PROJECT SIZE (SQ. FT.): PERIOD
to (1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
Material Type
Tons Actual Recycle
Tons Actual Reuse
Tons Actual Salvage
Tons Actual Landfill
Disposal or Recycling Facility (e.g., Onsite, Name of Facility)
• Total
=
Diversion Rate: Columns [(2)+(3)+(4)] I [(2)+(3)+( 4)+(5)] Signature
•
I Title
Date
Column I
"Material Types"- Enter type of materials targeted for recycling, reuse, and/or salvage, either on- or offsite, and include a category for waste materials requiring disposal.
Columns 2 thru 4
"Estimated Generation"- Enter estimated quantities (tons) of recyclable, reusable, or salvageable waste materials anticipated to be generated and state number of salvageable items.
Column 5
"Estimated Landfill" -Enter quantities (tons) of materials disposed.
Column 4
"Disposal Location" -Enter end-destination of recycled, salvaged, and disposed materials.
General:
(1) Attach proposed Recycling and Waste Bin Location Plan.
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR& P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
I 0/0112011 CONSTRUCTION & DEMOLITION WASTE MANAGEMENT 01 7419-5
111001
•
(2) Attach name and contact data for each recycling or disposal destination to be used.
END OF SECTION
•
•
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR& P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 CONSTRUCTION & DEMOLITION WASTE MANAGEMENT 01 7419-6
120727
•
SECTION 01 7700 CONTRACT CLOSEOUT PART 1- GENERAL 1.01
SECTION INCLUDES A.
•
1.02
This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for Contract Closeout, including but not limited to, the following: 1.
Inspection procedures.
2.
Project record documents submittal.
3.
Operation and maintenance manual submittal.
4.
OWNER orientation and instruction.
5.
Final cleaning.
RELATED REQUIREMENTS: 1.
Section 01 2976- Progress Payment Procedures.
2.
Section 01 3213- Construction Schedule.
3.
Section 01 3229- Project Forms.
4.
Section 01 3300- Submittal Procedures.
5.
Section 01 4525- Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of HV AC.
6.
Section 01 5000- Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls.
7.
Section 01 7836- Warranties.
PART 2- PRODUCTS (Not used)
PART 3- EXECUTION
•
3.01
SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION
CORWINTHEATERREPAIR&P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
07/27/2012 CONTRACT CLOSEOUT 01 7700-1
120727
•
A.
3.02
1.
If after inspection of the Work, OAR does not consider the -Work substantially complete, OAR will notify CONTRACTOR.
2.
If after inspection, OAR considers the Work substantially complete, INSPECTOR shall prepare a comprehensive Punch List of items to be corrected. a.
INSPECTOR may repeat inspection to assure the Work 1s corrected.
b.
Results of the completed inspection will form a partial basis of the requirements for Release of Retention.
ADMINISTRATIVE CLOSEOUT A.
•
Re-inspection Procedures: INSPECTOR, OAR, CONTRACTOR and ARCHITECT may inspect the Work upon notice, including final inspection of Punch List items from earlier inspections, has been corrected, except for items whose completion is delayed under circumstances acceptable to OAR. 1.
OWNER has the right to preclude CONTRACTOR from Punch List correction and documents submittals after the Contract Completion date; unless OWNER elects to authorize CONTRACTOR to extend Administrative Contract duration. CONTRACTOR will be assessed actual cost for the unsettled items. Withholds amounts exceeding actual costs to correct or to obtain deliverable will be released.
2.
If allowed by the OAR, re-inspection will be repeated, but may be assessed against CONTRACTOR if OWNER is subject to additional professional service and or additional costs of inspection.
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENT SUBMITTAL
3.03
•
Inspection Procedures: On receipt of the Request For Certificate of Substantial Completion, OAR will authorize commencement of inspection. INSPECTOR, OAR, CONTRACTOR and ARCHITECT will inspect the Work.
A.
General: Do not use project record documents for construction purposes. Protect record documents from deterioration and loss. Provide access to record documents for ARCHITECT, INSPECTOR and OAR reference during normal working hours. Project record document shalL be updated on a weekly basis. Prior to submitting each application for payment, secure INSPECTOR and ARCHITECT approval of project record documents.
B.
Record Drawings: Maintain a clean, undamaged set of prints of Drawings and Shop Drawings. Mark the set to show the actual installation where the installation varies substantially from the Work as originally shown. Mark the Drawing that is
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
07/27/2012 CONTRACT CLOSEOUT 01 7700-2
120727
•
most capable of showing conditions fully and accurately. Where Shop Drawings are used, record a cross-reference at the corresponding location on the Drawings. Provide detailed and accurate field dimensions for concealed elements that would be difficult to measure and record at a later date.
• C.
•
1.
Mark record sets with red erasable pencil. Use other colors to distinguish between variations in separate categories of the Work. Date and number entries in the same format as submitted. Call attention to entry by a "cloud" around the affected areas.
2.
Mark new information important to OWNER but was not shown on Drawings or Shop Drawings.
3.
Utility location and depth below finished grade and above ceilings and attic spaces shall be fully dimensioned and indicated on record drawings. Dimensions shall be measured from building lines or permanent landmarks and shall be triangulated to those features.
4.
Note related Change Order or Construction Directive numbers where applicable. RFC submissions shall be referenced on each affected sheet, Drawing and Shop Drawing.
5.
Organize record drawing sheets into manageable sets. Bind sets with durable-paper cover sheets; print suitable titles, dates, and other identification on the cover of each set.
6.
Prior to Contract Completion of the Work, review of the project record drawings by ARCHITECT; prepare a final set of project record drawings using reproducible vellum. Submit final set of transparencies to ARCHITECT.
Record Specifications: Maintain two complete copies of the Specifications, including Addenda. Include with the Specifications two copies of other written Contract Documents, such as Change Orders or Construction Directives issued during construction. 1.
Mark these record documents to show substantial variations in actual Work performed in comparison with the text of the Specifications and modifications .
- - 2.
. Give particular attention to substitutions and selection of .options and information on concealed Work that cannot otherwise be readily discerned later by direct observation.
3.
Note related record document information with Product Data.
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
07/27/2012 CONTRACT CLOSEOUT 01 7700-3
120727
•
•
•
4. D.
Prior to Contract Completion of the Work, submit record Specifications to ARCHITECT for OWNER records.
Record Product Data: Maintain two copies of each Product Data submittal. Note related Change Orders and Construction Directives and mark-up of record drawings and Specifications. 1.
Mark these documents to illustrate significant variations in actual Work performed in comparison with information submitted. Include variations in products delivered to the Project site and from the manufacturer's installation instructions and recommendations.
2.
Provide detailed and accurate information regarding concealed products and portions of Work that cannot otherwise be readily discerned later by direct observation.
3.
Prior to Contract Completion, submit complete set of record Product Data to ARCHITECT for OWNER records.
E.
Record Samples: Immediately prior to Substantial Completion, CONTRACTOR shall meet with ARCHITECT and OAR at the Project site to determine which Samples are to be transmitted to OWNER for record purposes. Comply with OAR instructions regarding delivery to OWNER storage area .
F.
Miscellaneous Records: Refer to other Specification sections for requirements of miscellaneous record keeping and submittals in connection with actual performance of the Work. Prior to the date of Contract Completion, complete and compile miscellaneous records and place in good order. Identify miscellaneous records properly and bind or file, ready for continued use and reference. Submit to Architect for OWNER records.
G.
Maintenance Manuals: Prior to Substantial Completion, organize operation and maintenance data into suitable two sets of manageable size. Bind properly indexed data in individual, heavy-duty, two to three-inch 3-ring, vinyl-covered binders, with pocket folders for folded sheet information. Mark appropriate identification on front and spine of each binder. Submit to ARCHITECT for OWNER records. Include the following types of information. 1.
Emergency instructions.
2.
Spare parts list.
3.
Copies ofwarranties.
4.
Wiring diagrams .
5.
Recommended "turn-around" cycles.
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR& P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
07/27/2012 CONTRACT CLOSEOUT 01 7700-4
120727
• H.
3.04
Inspection procedures.
7.
Shop Drawings and Product Data.
8.
Fixture lamping schedule.
Verified Reports: Construction progress of the Work shall be reported to DSA via a duly verified report as per Title 24, Part 1, Sections 4-336 and 4-343.c of the California Building Standards Commission's, California Administrative Code. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE:
A.
•
B.
•
6.
Operation and Maintenance Instructions: Prior to Substantial Completion, arrange for each installer of equipment that requires regular operation and maintenance to meet with designated OWNER personnel to provide instruction in proper operation and maintenance. Provide instruction by manufacturer's representatives if installers are not experienced in operation and maintenance procedures. Include a detailed review of the following items: 1.
Maintenance manuals.
2.
Spare parts and materials.
3.
Tools.
4.
Lubricants.
5.
Fuels.
6.
Identification systems.
7.
Control sequences.
8.
Hazards.
9.
Cleaning.
10.
Warranties and bonds.
11.
Maintenance agreements and similar continuing commitments.
As part of instruction for operating equipment, demonstrate the following procedures: 1.
Start-up.
2.
Shutdown.
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
07/27/2012 CONTRACT CLOSEOUT 01 7700-5
120727
• C.
•
Emergency operations.
4.
Noise and vibration adjustments.
5.
Safety procedures.
6.
Economy and efficiency adjustments.
7.
Effective energy utilization.
Notice of Termination: CONTRACTOR shall submit a Notice of Termination (NOT) to the local Regional Water Quality Control Board, RWQCB. Provide a copy of NOT to OAR. FINAL CLEANING
3.05
•
3.
A.
General: Related sections of the Contract Documents specify general cleaning during performance of the Work. General cleaning is included in Division 01 Section "Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls".
B.
Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each surface or unit to the condition expected in a normal, commercial building cleaning and maintenance program. Comply with manufacturer's instructions . 1.
Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for a certificate of Substantial Completion. a.
Remove labels that are not permanent labels.
b.
Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and windows. Remove glazing compounds and other substances that are noticeable vision-obscuring materials. Replace chipped or broken glass and other damaged transparent materials.
c.
Clean exposed exterior and interior hard-surfaced finished to a dust-free condition, free of stains, films, and similar foreign substances. Restore reflective surfaces to their original condition. Leave concrete floors broom clean. Vacuum carpeted surfaces.
d.
Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment. Remove excess lubrication and other substances. Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition. Clean light fixtures and lamps.
e.
Clean the Project site, including landscape development areas, of rubbish, litter, and other foreign substances. Sweep paved areas broom clean; remove stains, spills, and other foreign deposits .
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR& P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
07/27/2012 CONTRACT CLOSEOUT 01 7700-6
120727
•
Rake grounds that are neither paved nor planted to a smooth, eventextured surface. END OF SECTION
•
•
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O. T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
07/27/2012 CONTRACT CLOSEOUT 01 7700-7
111001
•
SECTION 01 7836 WARRANTIES PART 1 - GENERAL SECTION INCLUDES
1.01 A.
This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for warranties, including manufacturers and installer's standard warranties on products and special product warranties. 1.
1.02
•
Refer to the General Conditions for terms of the guarantee period for the Work.
RELATED REQUIREMENTS A.
Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
B.
Section 01 7329- Cutting and Patching.
c.
Section 01 7700 - Contract Closeout.
PART 2- PRODUCTS (Not applicable) PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01
•
WARRANTY REQUIREMENTS A.
Disclaimers and Limitations: Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on product warranties shall not relieve CONTACTOR of the warranty of the Work incorporating such materials, products, and equipment. Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on warranties do not relieve suppliers, manufacturers, installers, and Subcontractors of the requirement to countersign special warranties with CONTRACTOR.
B.
Standard warranties are preprinted written warranties published by individual manufacturers for particular products and-- are specifically endorsed by the manufacturer to OWNER.
C.
Special warranties are written warranties required by or incorporated in the Contract Documents, either to extend time limits provided by standard warranties or to provide greater rights for OWNER.
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR& P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 WARRANTIES 01 7836-1
111001
•
•
D.
Related Damages and Losses: When correcting failed or defective warranted Work, remove and replace Work that has been damaged as a result of such failure or which must be removed and replaced to provide access for correction of warranted Work.
E.
Reinstatement of Warranty: When Work covered by a warranty has failed and been corrected by replacement or rebuilding, reinstate the warranty by written endorsement with the reinstated warranty equal to the original warranty.
F.
Replacement Cost: Upon determination the Work covered by a warranty has failed and/or is defective, replace or rebuild the Work to an acceptable condition complying with requirements of the Contract Documents. CONTRACTOR is responsible for the cost of replacing or rebuilding defective Work regardless of whether OWNER has benefited from use of the Work through a portion of its anticipated useful service life.
G.
OWNER Recourse: Expressed warranties made to OWNER are in addition to implied warranties and shall not limit the duties, obligations, rights, and remedies otherwise available under the law. Expressed warranty periods shall 'not be interpreted as limitations on the time in which OWNER can enforce such other duties, obligations, rights, or remedies.
H.
Rejection of Warranties: OAR reserves the right to reject warranties and to limit selection to products with warranties not in conflict with requirements of the Contract Documents.
I.
Where the Contract Documents require a special warranty, or similar commitment on the Work or part of the Work, OAR reserves the right to refuse to accept the Work until CONTRACTOR presents evidence the entities required to countersign such commitments have done so. SUBMITTALS
3.02 A.
Submit written preliminary warranties prior to Substantial Completion and final warranties prior to Contract Completion. If the certificate of Substantial Completion designates a commencement date for warranties other than the date of Substantial Completion for the Work, submit written warranties as set forth in the certificate of Substantial Completion. 1.
•
B.
When a designated portion of the Work is partially used and/or occupied by OWNER, submit properly executed warranties to ARCHITECT within fifteen days of the Partial Use or Occupancy of the designated portion of the Work.
When the Contract Documents require CONTRACTOR, or CONTRACTOR and a Subcontractor, installer, supplier or manufacturer to execute a special warranty,
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR& P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 WARRANTIES 01 7836-2
Ill 001
•
prepare a written document containing appropriate terms and identification, ready for execution by the required parties. Submit a draft to OAR, through the ARCHITECT, for approval prior to final execution. 1.
•
Refer to Divisions 02 through 49 for specific content requirements and particular requirements for submitting special warranties.
C.
Form of Submittal: Prior to Contract Completion, compile two copies of each required final warranty properly executed by CONTRACTOR, or by CONTRACTOR and Subcontractor, installer, supplier, or manufacturer. Organize the warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the Specifications.
D.
Bind warranties and bonds in heavy-duty, commercial-quality, durable three ring, vinyl-covered loose-leaf binders, thickness as necessary to accommodate contents, and sized to receive 8Y2 by 11 paper. 1.
Provide heavy paper dividers with celluloid covered tabs for each separate warranty. Mark the tab to identify the item or installation. Provide a typed description of the product or installation, including the name of the product, and the name, address, and telephone number of the installer.
2.
Identify each binder on the front and spine with the typed or printed title "WARRANTIES," Project title and/or name, and name of CONTRACTOR.
3.
When warranted Work requires operation and maintenance manuals, provide additional copies of each required warranty, as necessary, for inclusion in each required manual.
END OF SECTION
•
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 WARRANTIES 01 7836-3
111001
SECTION 01 7900
•
MAINTENANCE AND OPERATIONS STAFF DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING
PART 1 -GENERAL SECTION INCLUDES
1.01 A.
1.
Demonstration of operations of systems, subsystems and equipment.
2.
Training in operation and maintenance of systems, subsystems, and equipment.
RELATED REQUIREMENTS
1.02
•
Administrative and procedural requirements for training District personnel including, but not limited to:
A.
Project Commissioning Plan (CxP).
B.
CHPS Best Practices Manual.
c.
CALIOSHA Minimum Ventilation Standard, Title 8, Section 5142.
D.
California Building Code, Chapter 12.
E.
Division 01 -General Requirements.
F.
Division 22 and 23 Specifications.
G.
Division 26 and 27 Specifications. SUBMITTALS
1.03 A.
Submittals, including training modules, require the Commissioning Agent's (CxA's) review and OAR acceptance prior to implementation.
B.
Instruction Program: 1.
•
Ninety days prior to Startup and Testing, submit a draft outline of the instructional program for demonstration and training, including the training module objectives and outline for each training module, schedule of proposed training dates, training times, length of instruction time and instructors' names for each training module. Submittal(s) shall be on a CD-ROM in a MS Word 2010 format file. CxA, AOR and INSPECTOR shall review and OAR accept, based on their recommendation, Contractor's proposed Instruction Program or
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR& P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 MAINTENANCE AND OPERATIONS STAFF DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING 01 7900-1
111001
comment and return to Contractor for revision and incorporation of comments within 30 days of receipt.
• C.
• D.
•
2.
Revise and resubmit finalized Instruction Program 45 days prior to Startup and Testing. CxA, AOR and INSPECTOR shall review Contractor's revised Instruction Program and OAR, based on their recommendation, accept or return for further revision and incorporation of unaddressed revisions and/or comments or unacceptable revisions within five days of receipt.
3.
Revise and incorporate comments and resubmit to OAR within five days of receipt. CxA, AOR and INSPECTOR shall review Contractor's revised Instruction Program and OAR, based on their recommendation, accept the revised Instruction Program within five days of receipt or require Contractor to meet with OAR and CxA within five days of receipt to revise and incorporate unaddressed revisions and/or comments. Contractor shall be assessed reasonable fees and expenses incurred by CxA for these meetings.
Upon completion of training, submit two complete training manuals for District's use and one CD-ROM including materials in the complete training manual in the Adobe PDF format. Each manual shall contain specific training and instruction manuals and hand-outs for the following designated end-users: 1.
School Faculty and Administration .
2.
School Plant Manager.
3.
District Maintenance and Operations Personnel.
Qualification Data: Three weeks prior to start of training, Contractor shall submit Letters of Qualifications and Project Lists for persons and firms providing instruction including: 1.
Training Facilitator Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in training or educating maintenance personnel and end-users in training program similar to that required for this Project, and who has record of successful training performance.
2.
Training Instructor Qualifications: Instructor shall be factory-authorized service representative, experienced in operation and maintenance procedures and training for each system, subsystem or piece of equipment.
3.
References: The name of owner and the name and telephone number of the plant manager and maintenance supervisor on three similar projects for reference .
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR& P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 MAINTENANCE AND OPERATIONS STAFF DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING 01 7900-2
111001
•
E.
Attendance Record: For each training module, submit the proposed list of participants, sign in sheets and length of instruction time a minimum of 15 days prior to start of training of the module.
F.
Evaluations: For each participant and for each training module, submit results and documentation of performance-based tests a minimum of seven days following completion of training of each module.
G.
Demonstration and Training Video: Contractor shall video record each classroom training and demonstration session and submit a copy on CD-ROM or DVD in a format compatible with MS Windows Media Player at end of each training module. Contractor shall include a copy of any manufacturer training video materials presented during training and demonstration session. COORDINATION
1.04
•
A.
Coordinate instruction schedule with the OAR, CxA, and District's O&M personnel. Adjust schedule as required to reasonably accommodate the schedules of participants and to minimize disrupting District operations.
B.
Coordinate with instructors, including providing notification of scheduled dates, times, length of instruction time and course content.
c.
Coordinate content of training modules with content of approved Emergency Manual and Operations and Maintenance Manual. Do not submit instruction program until manual has been reviewed and accepted by the OAR.
PART 2- PRODUCTS INSTRUCTION PROGRAM
2.01
•
A.
Program Structure: Develop instruction program that includes individual demonstration and training modules for the operation, maintenance, minor repair (completion in under two hours) and calibration of systems and components in the system as required by Section 01 9113, Divisions 22 and 23 and Division 26 and as specified in Pai13 of this Section, "DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING".
B.
Training Modules: Develop learning objective and teaching outline for each module, specific and as applicable, for the following District personnel: 1.-
School Faculty and Administration.
2.
School Plant Manager.
3.
District Operations and Maintenance Personnel.
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 MAINTENANCE AND OPERATIONS STAFF DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING 01 7900-3
111001
•
•
C.
Include description of specific skills and knowledge that participant is expected to master.
D.
For each module, include instruction for the following: 1.
2.
3.
Basis of System Design (for District Operations and Maintenance Personnel), Operational Requirements and Criteria, including, but not limited to: a.
System, subsystem and equipment descriptions.
b.
Performance and design criteria if Contractor is delegated design responsibility.
c.
Operating standards.
d.
Regulatory requirements.
e.
Equipment function.
f.
Operating characteristics.
g.
Limiting conditions.
h.
Performance curves.
Documentation (for District Operations and Maintenance Personnel and School Plant Manager): Review in detail the following documentation: a.
Emergency manuals.
b.
Operations manuals.
c.
Maintenance manuals.
d.
Project Record Documents.
e.
Identification systems.
f.
Warranties.
g.
Maintenance service agreements and similar continuing commitments.
Emergencies (for District Operations and Maintenance Personnel and School Plant Manager): Review, without limitation, the following, as applicable: a.
•
Instructions on meaning of warnings, trouble indications, and error messages .
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR& P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 MAINTENANCE AND OPERATIONS STAFF DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING 01 7900-4
111001
• 4.
• 5.
•
b.
Instructions on stopping .
c.
Shutdown instructions for each type of emergency.
d.
Operating instructions for conditions outside of normal operating limits.
e.
Sequences for electric or electronic systems.
f.
Special operating instructions and procedures.
Operations (for District Operations and Maintenance Personnel and School Plant Manager): Review, without limitation, the following as applicable: a.
Startup procedures.
b.
Equipment or system break-in procedures.
c.
Routine and normal operating instructions.
d.
Regulation and control procedures.
e.
Control sequences.
f.
Safety procedures.
g.
Instructions on stopping.
h.
Normal shutdown instructions.
1.
Operating procedures for system, subsystem or equipment failure.
J.
Seasonal and weekend operating instructions.
k.
Required sequences for electric or electronic systems.
1.
Special operating instructions and procedures.
Adjustments (for District O&M Personnel): Review, without limitation, the following as applicable: a.
Alignments.
b.
Checking adjustments.
c.
Noise and vibration adjustments.
d.
Economy and efficiency adjustments.
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR& P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 MAINTENANCE AND OPERATIONS STAFF DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING 01 7900-5
111001
•
6.
7.
•
8.
9.
•
Troubleshooting (for District Operations and Maintenance Personnel): Review, without limitation, the following as applicable: a.
Diagnostic instructions.
b.
Test and inspection procedures.
Maintenance (for District Operations and Maintenance Personnel and Plant Manager): Review, without limitation, the following, as applicable: a.
Inspection procedures.
b.
Types of cleaning agents to be used and methods of cleaning.
c.
List of cleaning agents and methods of cleaning detrimental to product.
d.
Procedures for routine cleaning.
e.
Procedures for preventative maintenance.
f.
Procedures for routine maintenance.
g.
Instruction on use of special tools.
Repairs (for District Operations and Maintenance Personnel): Review, without limitation, the following as applicable: a.
Diagnostic instructions.
b.
Repair instructions.
c.
Disassembly; component removal, repair and replacement and reassembly instructions.
d.
Instructions for identifying parts and components.
e.
Review of parts needed for operation and maintenance.
Faculty Member Training a.
Manual for the basic operation/control of the HVAC room sensor/thermostat and lighting controls.
b.
Organizational chart structure, to be completed by District, for any repair or emergency requests for the systems including contact information of the Plant Manager.
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR& P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 MAINTENANCE AND OPERATIONS STAFF DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING 01 7900-6
111001
•
•
PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01
PREPARATION A.
Training Facilitator: Engage qualified training facilitator no later than 120 days prior to start of training to prepare instruction program and training modules, to coordinate instructors, and to coordinate between Contractor, OAR and CxA for number of participants, instruction times and location.
B.
Training Instructor: Engage qualified training instructors to instruct District's personnel to adjust, operate and maintain systems, subsystems and equipment not part of a system no later than 30 days prior to start of training of assigned modules.
C.
Scheduling: Provide instruction at mutually agreed on times. 1.
Schedule training with District, through OAR, with at least two weeks advance notice.
2.
Schedule training to conform to personnel availability at Site and be conducted after the Pre-functional Equipment Checklist (PEC) is completed but prior to Functional Performance Test (PFT) of the equipment and system.
3.
Base duration of training on hours specified in the applicable specifications or minimums defined in Article 3.03 .
D.
Evaluation: At conclusion of each training module, assess and document each participant's mastery of module by use of oral, written, demonstration, or combination of oral, written, and demonstration based testing.
E.
Demonstration and Training Video: Record each training module separately. Include classroom instructions and demonstrations, board diagrams and other visual aids, excluding attendee practice or testing. 1.
Make demonstration and testing videos at Site to ensure video is representative of installed system. a.
2.
F.
As part of training, devote one lesson plan to reviewing of video to allow new employees to view the video recordings at their own convenience and be able to operate the video system without need for instructor attendance.
At the beginning of each video recording for the training module, incorporate a chart presenting the learning objective and lesson outline.
In addition to technical training, attendees shall be trained on how to provide future training for new employees.
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR& P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 MAINTENANCE AND OPERATIONS STAFF DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING 01 7900-7
111001
•
G.
Familiarize district staffregarding CALIOSHA Title 8, section 5142 Requirements .
H.
Cleanup: Collect excess copies of educational materials and give to OAR. Remove instruction equipment. Restore systems and equipment to condition existing just before commencing training. OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
3.02 A.
Contractor shall direct Subcontractors to compile and prepare O&M Manuals and other required documentation for the equipment and systems that are provided and/or installed per their scope of work for submittal to OAR prior to project closeout.
B.
The OAR shall receive a copy of the Operations and Maintenance manuals in prior to initiation of all demonstration and training for review and acceptance or rejection.
C.
Operations and Maintenance manuals shall meet the respective requirements of Divisions 22 and 23, Division 26, and Section 01 7700; and comply with the following: 1.
Quantity: 2.
2.
Format: 8 Yz by 11 loose leaf binders. Each binder shall be clearly labeled on the spine and meet the requirements of Section 01 7700. Dividers shall be made of card stock with permanently marked index tabs to separate each section and sub section. Tab labels shall not be handwritten. Binders will meet other formatting requirements as outlined in DIVISIONS 02 to 49, as applicable.
3.
Contents: There shall be a title page and table of contents at the beginning of each binder. The table of contents will be an outline that identifies the equipment or systems documentation included in the binder and references the specification sections relating to the equipment and systems that are being included in each part of the binder. Each part ofthe binder will contain the information described below, in the following order.
•
•
a.
Contractor. The first page shall contain the name, address, and telephone number of the manufacturer and installing Contractor, as well as the 24-hour number for emergency service for each piece of equipment identified in this section.
b.
Preventive Maintenance Instructions. This section lists the location of preventative maintenance instructions. The list shows the piece of equipment, the Operations and Maintenance document name, and the O&M document page number that contains the instructions .
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR& P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 MAINTENANCE AND OPERATIONS STAFF DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING 01 7900-8
111001
•
c.
Submittal and Product Data. This section shall include product data not covered by manufacturer's Operations and Maintenance instructions and associated shop drawings.
d.
Warranty and Service Contracts. This section shall include the following for each piece of equipment, as applicable:
e.
•
•
1)
Copy of the equipment warranty information provided as part of Section 01 7836.
2)
Additional Warranties in accordance with Warranty requirements in DIVISIONS 02 to 49, as applicable. Equipment Warranties shall clearly list requirements to maintain the Warranty in effect, conditions or acts that would invalidate or void the Warranty, and Warranty expiration date.
3)
Service contracts issued. Contracts shall clearly indicate contract dates and scope of work included.
Operation and Maintenance Instructions. These shall be the written manufacturer's maintenance and operating instructions with the model number and features of the installed equipment or system clearly identified. This section shall include applicable data on the following: 1)
Installation, startup, and break-in instructions.
2)
Starting, normal shutdown, emergency shutdown, manual operation, seasonal changeover and normal operating procedures and data, including any special limitations.
3)
Operations and Maintenance and installation instructions that were shipped with the unit.
4)
Preventative maintenance and service procedures and schedules.
5)
Troubleshooting procedures.
6)
A parts list, edited to omit reference to items which do not apply to this installation.
7)
A list of any special tools required to service or maintain the equipment.
8)
Performance data, ratings, and curves.
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR& P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 MAINTENANCE AND OPERATIONS STAFF DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING 01 7900-9
Ill 00 I
f.
• D.
Division 23 Special Water and Air Balance Documentation. The Balancing Contractor will compile and submit the following with other documentation that may be specified elsewhere in the Project Specifications. 1.
Final report containing an explanation of the methodology, assumptions, test conditions, and the results in a clear format with designations of all uncommon abbreviations and column headings.
2.
The TAB Subcontractor shall mark on the drawings where all traverse and other critical measurements were taken and cross reference the location in the TAB report.
DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING SCHEDULE
3.03 A.
•
The following applies to the minimum duration of demonstration and training provided District Maintenance and Operations Personnel. 1.
2.
••
Control Drawings. This section contains controls drawings and the final sequence of operations, set points, and schedules as set during the Commissioning Process. If shop drawings, portions ofthe project manual, or record drawings clearly show this information, a copy of this information may be inserted. Otherwise, original drawings must be generated and included in this section.
Heat Generation: a.
Boilers: Minimum six hours demonstration and training
b.
Feedwater Equipment: Minimum four hours
c.
Pumps: Minimum four hours
d.
Steam Distribution Piping: Minimum two hours
e.
Water Distribution Piping: Minimum two hours
Refrigerant Systems: a.
Chillers: Minimum six hours
b.
Cooling Towers: Minimum six hours
c.
Condensers: Minimum four hours
d.
Pumps: Minimum four hours
e.
Distribution Piping: Minimum two hours
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
I 0/01/20 II MAINTENANCE AND OPERATIONS STAFF DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING 01 7900-10
111001
•
3.
HVAC Systems:
a.
Air-Handling Equipment: Minimum six hours
b.
Air Distribution Systems: Minimum four hours
c.
Terminal Equipment and Devices: Minimum six hours
4.
HV AC Instrumentation and Controls: Minimum sixteen hours
5.
Lighting Systems and Controls: Minimum four hours
END OF SECTION
•
•
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O. T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 MAINTENANCE AND OPERATIONS STAFF DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING 01 7900-11
111001
. SECTION 02 2600
•
ABATEMENT OF HAZARDOUS MATERIALS
PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01
SUMMARY A.
Section Includes: 1.
•
B.
C.
•
Abatement of hazardous materials identified in the Hazardous Materials Phase I Assessment Report, except for underground storage tanks, contaminated soil or groundwater. Furnish labor, materials, supplies, and incidentals required, protect Project site personnel and the surrounding public from exposure to potentially hazardous substances, and prevent the spread of potentially contaminated or hazardous substances.
2.
The furnishing of labor, supervision, materials, equipment, tools, permits, manifesting, and services required in the characterization, transportation, and disposal of identified or suspected hazardous substances. The suspect substance may be in drums, containers, stockpiled, or may exist as debris piles on the Project site.
3.
Attachment "A" FETU Report Phase I & Phase II .
Related Requirements: 1.
Section 00 3126 - Existing Hazardous Materials Information.
2.
Division 01 -General Requirements.
3.
Section 02 4116 - Demolition
4.
Section 02 8213 - Asbestos Abatement
5.
Section 02 8333- Lead Abatement and Lead Related Construction Work.
Regulatory Requirements shall include, but not be limited to: Comply wi'th laws, ordinances, codes, rules, and regulations of the Federal, State and local authorities having jurisdiction over any of the Work specified herein. Comply with federal EPA and state Department-of Transportation regulations for shipping of hazardous substances to offsite disposal facilities. Comply with any regulatory requirements imposed by the treatment, storage, and disposal facility. Regulations pertaining to the transport and disposal of hazardous substances/materials include, but are not limited to, the following: 1.
Department of Transportation 49 CFR 172 through 179.
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/0112011 ABATEMENT OF HAZARDOUS MATERIALS 02 2600-1
111001
•
Department of Transportation 49 CFR 387 (46 FR 30974, 47073).
3.
Department of Transportation DOT-E 8876 .
4.
Environmental Protection Agency 40 CFR 136 (41 FR 52779).
5.
Environmental Protection Agency 40 CFR 261, 262 and 761.
6.
Resource Conservation and Recovery Act (RCRA).
D.
Any transporter of hazardous substances shall be licensed in the state in which handling and transportation will take place in accordance with applicable regulations.
E.
Comply with OSHA (Occupational Safety and Health Administration) Standards and Regulations contained in Title 29 Code of Federal Regulations, Part 1910.120 "Hazardous Waste Operations and Emergency Response."
F.
Where reference is made to one of the above standards, the revision in effect at the time of bid opening shall apply.
1.02
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
•
2.
The Work of this Section shall be performed by an entity possessing the following minimum qualifications: 1.
Contractors License in the state where the Work is performed, supplemented by a Hazardous Waste specialty license, where applicable · (i.e., California).
2.
MCS 90 Endorsement on Liability Insurance.
3.
Pollution Liability Insurance in the amount of$2,000,000 occurrence.
4.
Forty-hour OSHA Training and site-specific health and safety plan for its employees proposed to work at the Project site as defined in 29 CFR 19iO.l20.
5.
A Comprehensive Quality Assurance Plan on file with the California Environmental.Protection Agency.
6.
Project site personnel shall wear personal protective equipment and protective clothing consistent with the levels of protection required for this Work as specified by OSHA (29 CFR Part 1910.120).
PART 2- PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01
ABATEMENT OF HAZARDOUS MATERIALS
CORWIN.THEATERREPAIR& P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/0112011 ABATEMENT OF HAZARDOUS MATERIALS 02 2600-2
111001
•
A.
Abate hazardous materials including hazardous materials identified in the Phase I Assessment Report .
B.
The Work of this section does not include the removal of underground storage tanks, contaminatedsoil or groundwater, unless specifically authorized in writing by the OAR.·
3.02
CONTAINMENT OF RELEASED SUBSTANCES A.
If a hazardous material appears to be leaking or otherwise spreading, contain the ·. release of the material. Provide measures to prevent the release of the material to the environment and protect Project site personnel, adjacent properties and occupants, and the general public from potential exposure.
B.
During the course of substance containment or evacuation of Project site personnel, protect personnel (onsite workers, non-workers, or the general public) from contact with or exposure to the released substances.
C.
The abatement or evaluation of any suspected hazardous material shall only be performed by properly trained and/or certified personnel.
3.03
•
HEALTH AND SAFETY A.
In an emergency or imminent hazard situation the health and safety of personnel on or near the Project site are the responsibility ofthe Work ofthis section. Immediately notify the Owner office of Environmental Health and Safety (OEHS) and the OAR designated representative of the Owner Consultant. Owner representatives will notify Federal, State and Local regulatory authorities, if required:
B.
Project site personnel or members of the general public who have been exposed to or have come in contact with any hazardous materials or chemicals shall be immediately transported to the nearest hospital.
3.04
•
TESTING; TRANSPORT, AND DISPOSAL OF HAZARDOUS SUBSTANCES A.
Collect one composite sample from each media type (solid, liquid, or sludge) of potentially hazardous substance stored in drums, stockpiled, or otherwise identified at the Project site for the purposes of obtaining approvals for proper transport and disposal of the suspect materials. Submit analytical results to a representative of the Owner Consultant, as designated by the OAR.
B.
If required, overpack any leaking or deteriorated drums to prevent leaks or spills, and pack small 5-gallon containers into larger new 55-gallon drums. Cover solid waste materials and stockpiled soils with an HDPE liner to prevent storm water runoff from contaminating surrounding areas.
C.
Prepare manifests, material profiles, and submit l~b analysis for drums/containers and any other dociunentation required by the .receiving facility for signature by a representative of the Owner Consultant and/or Owner, as designated by the OAR.
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 ABATEMENT OF HAZARDOUS MATERIALS 02 2600-3
111001
•
•
Copies of waste profiles, manifests, and disposal documentation shall be submitted to the OAR designated representative of the Owner, prior to disposal and/or transporting ofhazardous substances . D.
Coordinate waste sampling and analysis requirements with the disposal facility and properly complete profiling and transport documents prior to loading and transport.
E.
A State registered "Hazardous Waste Hauler" shall transport the waste to a lawfully permitted and Owner approved facility.
F.
Prior to transport, a copy of the hazardous waste manifest shall be transmitted by facsimile, through the Project site Owner Consultant, to the Owner Office of Environmental Health and Safety (OEHS) for review and approval.· The manifests shall list the generator's name as "Los Angeles Unified School District" and the mailing address as "1449 S. San Pedro Street, Los Angeles,CA 90015". The OAR designated representative of the Owner Consultant shall provide the Project site specific generator's EPA ID # which shall be included on the manifest. Attach the land disposal restriction (LDR) form to the manifest prior to submission to the Owner office of OEHS. The blue and yellow manifest copies and a copy of the LDR form shall be mailed to the Owner office of OEHS at 1449 S. San Pedro Street, Los Angeles CA 90015. Other copies of the manifest and LDR shall be submitted to the waste transporter.
G.
Load, handle, and transport 55-gallon drums and other waste containers to the appropriate disposal facility in accordance with Federal and State regulations.
H.
Transport documentation from the receiving facility verifying acceptance and receipt of drums/containers at the facility and sampling and associated test results shall be submitted to the representative of the Owner Consultant, as designated by the OAR, within fifteen days following receipt ofhazardous substances to the disposal facility.
I.
Materials identified as hazardous wastes under RCRA are not permitted to remain at the Project site more than 30 days after being deemed to be a hazardous waste. During this period of Project site storage, provide precautions to contain and prevent the release of hazardous or potentially hazardous materials to the environment. END OF SECTION
•
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR& P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/0112011 ABATEMENT OF HAZARDOUS MATERIALS 02 2600-4
-·
• Attachment "A" FETU Phase 1 and Phase II Reports Number of Pages Including this Cover Sheet= 144
•
• ------
_
__ -.---·---·---- -------------- ·-----~·
_...,..
.
.
'
.
. .·,
-·-
'
~
··-------~--
----'---
-----~--·-·
----
~--~
s
ENVIRONMENTAL, INC ..
To: Mr. Noel Escobar Los Angeles Unified School District Facilities Environmental Technical Unit 1240 South Naomi A venue Los Angeles, California 90021 Mr. Dave Montes Los Angeles Unified School District Facilities Environmental Technical Unit 1240 South Naomi A venue Los Angeles, California 90021 ASBESTOS ENGINEERING ASSESSMENT Los Angeles High School #8736 4650 West Olympic Boulevard Los Angeles, California 90019 Repair of Corwin Theater Building (0 19CCT) Colin#: 10367253 Contract#: 4400002050 (1390016) CNS Environmental Project Number: 17-005 Date Prepared: January 16, 2017 PART I OF II
Edward D. Spinney, CAC #00-2795
650 North Rose Drive, Suite 616 Placentia, California 92870
Matthew Harvey, CSST #16-5638
Phone#: (714) 525-5115 Fax#: (714) 526-5445 02 2600-6
~s
ENVIRONMENTAL, INC.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Section
Title
Page
i.
FETU Approval Letter ......................................................................................................... 2
ii.
List of Acronyms ................................................................................................................. 3
iii.
List of Definitions ................................................................................................................ 4
I. II. III. IV. V. VI. VII.
Executive Summary, Introduction, Purpose, and Scope of Services ................................... 5 Scope of Work ..................................................................................................................... 6 Visual Survey, Sampling Methodology, and Analytical Procedures ................................... 7 Discussion of Survey Findings and Recommendations ....................................................... 8 General Recommendations and Notes ............................................................................... 1 I Lead Related Construction I Impact to Coated Surfaces ................................................... 12 Confidentiality and Limitations ......................................................................................... 15
Appendices Appendix A
Analytical Results from Samples
Appendix B
Asbestos Survey Form A
Appendix C
Consultant's Certifications
Appendix D
Scope of Work
Page 1 of 15 02 2600-7
Los Angeles Unified School District Facilities Services Division
l~AAI)("Ir~O'Ifl(>d$(h.'lo;ll~[ll(t
FACILmf.S SfrtVlCES OIVI510N
OFFICE OF THE SUPERINTENDENT
FACILITIES SERVICES DIVISION
April 5, 2017
Mr. Ed Spinney CNS Environmental, Inc. 650 North Rose Drive, Suite 616 Placentia, California 92870
RE: PHASE -"'-I_ REVIEW AND APPROVAL FOR ASBESTOS ___x_ and/or LEAD
The Facilities Environmental Technical Unit (FETU) has reviewed and approved your Phase _ document(s) for the project listed below. Date of Report:
0-!A~p=ri"-l"'-5,,_,2,_,0'--'1'"""'"7_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
_ ! _ __
FETU Access No. N/A
School: Los Angeles High School
School (Code # 8736)
Project: Repair of Corwin Theater
Colin No. 10366484
If you have any questions regarding this approval, please call the FETU at (213) 745-1450. Sincerely,
Noel Escobar Senior Asbestos Abatement Worker Facilities Environmental Technical Unit
c:
S. Ghebremichael FETU Analyst File
Facilities Environmental Technical Unit, 1240 South Naomi Avenue, Los Angeles, CA 90021 -Telephone: (213) 745-1450 Fax: (213) 745-1488 Exhibit F) FETU BLANK Review & Approval Letter to Consultant Revised July 29, 20 II PHI =40.40.10 PHII = 40.60.10 02 2600-8
Los Angeles High School #8736 Repair of Corwin Theatre Building (019CCT) Colin#: 10367253
CNS Project #17-005 January 16, 2017
LIST OF ACRONYMS for Asbestos
ACM
Asbestos-Containing Material
ACBM
Asbestos-Containing Building Material
ACCM
Asbestos-Containing Construction Material (California only)
AHERA
Asbestos Hazard Emergency Response Act
CAC
California Asbestos Consultant
Cai/OSHA
California Division of Occupational Safety and Health
CCR
California Code of Regulations
CSST
California Site Surveillance Technician
CFR
Code of Federal Regulations
EPA
Environmental Protection Agency
FETU
Facilities Environmental Technical Unit (LAUSD)
HEPA
High Efficiency Particulate Air
HVAC
Heating, Ventilation, and Air Conditioning
LAUSD
Los Angeles Unified School District
NEA
Negative Exposure Assessment
NESHAP
National Emission Standards for Hazardous Air Pollutants
OEHS
Office of Environmental Health & Safety (LAUSD)
PEL
Permissible Exposure Limit
PLM
Polarized Light Microscopy
RACM
Regulated Asbestos-Containing Material
SCAQMD
South Coast Air Quality Management District
Page 3 of 15 02 2600-9
Los Angeles High School #8736 Repair of Corwin Theatre Building (019CCT) Colin#: 10367253
CNS Project #17-005 January 16, 2017
LIST OF DEFINITIONS for Asbestos
Abatement: Control/elimination of asbestos through operations and maintenance, repair, enclosure, encapsulation, or removal. Amended Water: Water to which a surfactant (wetting agent) has been added to increase the ability of the liquid to penetrate ACM. Asbestos: Asbestiform varieties of Chrysotile (serpentine), crocidolite (riebeckite), amosite (cummingtonitegrunerite ), anthophyllite tremolite, and actinolite. Asbestos-Containing Material (ACM): Material or product containing more than one percent (1%) asbestos Asbestos-Containing Building Material (ACBM): Surfacing ACM, thermal system insulation ACM, or miscellaneous ACM that is found in or on interior structural members or other parts of a school building. Asbestos-Containing Construction Material (ACCM): For California only. Manufactured construction material that contains more than one-tenth of one percent (0.1 %) asbestos by weight. Building ID Number or Code: Six-digit alphanumeric identification code assigned to each building on a site; sometimes referred to as the insurance code, ID number, or other similar terms. District: The Los Angeles Unified School District and its representatives. Friable: Used in reference to a school building material which, when dry, may be crumbled, pulverized, or reduced to powder by hand pressure. High Efficiency Particulate Air (HEPA): Filter or system capable of removing particulates of 0.3 microns or larger from air at 99.97 percent or greater efficiency. Nonfriable: Used in reference to a school building material which, when dry, may not be crumbled, pulverized, or reduced to powder by hand pressure. Plasticize: To cover floors, ceilings, and walls with plastic (polyethylene) sheeting. Regulated Area: Area established by the employer (abatement contractor) to demarcate where asbestos work is conducted, and by the adjoining area where debris and waste from such asbestos work accumulate; a work area within which airborne concentrations of asbestos exceed or may exceed (with reasonable possibility) the permissible exposure limit.
Page 4 of 15 02 2600-10
Los Angeles High School #8736 · Repair of Corwin Theatre Building (019CCT) Colin#: 10367253
I.
CNS Project #17-005 January 16, 2017
Executive Summary, Introduction, Purpose, and Scope of Services
This Asbestos Engineering Assessment Report has been prepared by CNS Environmental, Inc., (CNS) for the upcoming Repair of Corwin Theatre Building project at the Los Angeles High School #8736, Administrative & Classroom Building (019CCT), located at 4650 West Olympic Boulevard, Los Angeles, California 90019. The building was erroneously marked as 002DON on the NTP. The Asbestos Engineering Assessment Report was requested by Mr. Noel Escobar of the Los Angeles Unified School District (LAUSD) Facilities Environmental Technical Unit on January 4, 2017. The Asbestos Engineering Assessment was performed on January I 0, 2017 by Mr. Matthew Harvey, a California Division of Occupational Safety and Health, Certified Site Surveillance Technician, (# 16-5638). Purpose: CNS was contacted to review the project addressed in this report to determine the impact the project will have on asbestos and lead containing materials during the demolition, renovation, and construction activities. This report addresses these impacts and provides recommendation for appropriate handling and abatement (where required) of these materials. Scope of Services: CNS reviewed the Scope of Work as well as Drawings and Specification (where provided) to identify the extent of the project including, but not limited to, the buildings, rooms, and spaces in or on the buildings, and surfaces and materials to be impacted. The Asbestos Management Plan for the site was reviewed to determine if the existing buildings, rooms, spaces, and materials had been tested and if these contained asbestos. A field inspection was conducted to determine the condition of the asbestos-containing building materials and to verify that all materials to be impacted were identified in the Asbestos Management Plan. When materials to be impacted were identified on site but not included in the Asbestos Management Plan and material in the Asbestos Management Plan were assumed to be asbestos-containing or if the materials listed as non-ACBM could not be substantiated by sample results in the Plan or the FETU files, then additional samples were collected and the results are incorporated in this report. Recommendations are also provided for the appropriate handling and abatement (where required) ofthe impacted ACBM.
Page 5 of 15 02 2600-11
Los Angeles High School #8736 Repair of Corwin Theatre Building (019CCT) Colin#: 10367253
CNS Project #17-005 January 16, 2017
II. Scope of Work The asbestos engineering assessment performed was limited only to the areas involved in, and building materials impacted by the scope of work for the above referenced project. The following buildings are impacted by the scope of work: Administrative & Classroom Building (019CCT) Adult School Area, Men's and Women's Changing Rooms with Restrooms, Men's and Women's Restrooms in Little Theater Lobby, Attic and Ceiling Space, Lobby of Little Theater, Lobby of Main Office, Stagecraft Room, and Waiting Area of Main Office. The project will involve the renovation of the Corwin Theater in the Administrative & Classroom Building (019CCT). Renovations to building 019CCT will include renovating the restrooms and changing rooms, including adding ducting, removing doors in main office area (lobby), replacing doors and frames in bathrooms in Men's and Women's Changing Rooms connected to their associated Restrooms, installing new counter's in Main Office Lobby, Painting Stagecraft walls and ceilings, and Modifying counter in Main Office Waiting Area.
Page 6 of 15 02 2600-12
Los Angeles High School #8736 Repair of Corwin Theatre Building (019CCT) Colin#:10367253
CNS Project #17-005 January 16, 2017
III. Visual Survey, Sampling Methodology, and Analytical Procedures VISUAL SURVEY: A visual survey consisting of a walkthrough and visual inspection of the project area was conducted to determine the presence of suspect materials that were accessible and/or exposed in the areas that may be disturbed during the project. This included the identification of suspect asbestos containing building components and the determination of the condition of those components. SAMPLING METHODOLOGY: Samples were collected under the superv1s1on of a California Certified Asbestos Consultant following AHERA protocol. Selected samples of exposed and/or accessible materials were identified as suspect materials that are commonly found to contain asbestos, which include Surfacing Materials, Thermal System Insulation, and Miscellaneous Materials. The EPA 3-5-7 Rule was used when sampling Surfacing Materials and three samples were taken from each suspect Thermal System Insulation and Miscellaneous Material that might be affected by the proposed work to be performed. Suspect materials were grouped into homogenous sampling areas, which were limited in area to within a structure as defined by the six-digit building identification code. At the time of sampling, the location and condition (friable or non-friable) of the material was noted. Where wood substrates exist in the building, sampling will include the coring of said floor to determine if any hidden suspect asbestos containing layers are present. ANALYTICAL PROCEDURES: The bulk samples were analyzed by Polarized Light Microscopy (PLM), with dispersion staining as described by the interim method of the determination of asbestos in bulk insulation, Federal Register, Volume 47, No. 103, May 27, 1982. This is a standard method of analysis in optical mineralogy and the currently accepted method for the determination of asbestos in bulk samples. A suspect material is immersed in a solution of known refractive index and subjected to illumination by polarized light. The characteristic color display results enable mineral identification. It should be noted that some asbestos containing materials might not be accurately identified and/or quantified by PLM. As an example, the original fabrication of vinyl floor tiles routinely involved milling of asbestos fibers to extremely small sizes. As a result, these fibers may go undetected under the standard polarized light microscopy method. Transmission Electron Microscopy (TEM) may be necessary for a more definitive analysis of these materials. A material is considered to be asbestos-containing if at least one sample collected from the area shows asbestos present in an amount greater than one-tenth of one percent by weight (>0.1 %). Asbestos-containing materials are regulated by federal, state, and local agencies. The EPA National Emission Standards for Hazardous Air Pollutants (NESHAP) requires an inspection for asbestos be done on facilities which are to undergo demolition or renovation work. Materials found to contain asbestos may need to be removed prior to the start of such demolition/renovation work.
Page 7 of 15 02 2600-13
Los Angeles High School #8736 Repair of Corwin Theatre Building (019CCT) Colin#: 10367253
CNS Project #17-005 January 16, 2017
IV. Discussion of Survey Findings and Recommendations Asbestos containing materials were found in the building. The tables below include materials that are anticipated to be impacted during the project.
CNS Environmental's findings are as follows:
Page 8 of 15 02 2600-14
Los Angeles High School #8736 Repair of Corwin Theatre Building (019CCT) Colin#: 10367253
A.
CNS Project #17-005 January 16, 2017
Administrative & Classroom Building (019CCT) 1. Asbestos-Containing Materials (ACM > 1%) and Asbestos-Containing Construction Materials (ACCM >0.1%) anticipated to be disturbed during the project:
MATERIALS
LOCATION
SAMPLE NO.
a. Non-ACM 12"xl2" Brown Floor Tile with Associated ACM Mastic (ACM)
Men's and Women's Changing Rooms Scope of Impact: Removal of door and Frame will disturb small quantities of flooring
264-277 2/11/98
2. Non-Asbestos-Containing Materials (Non-ACM) anticipated to be disturbed during the project:
MATERIALS
LOCATION
SAMPLE NO.
a. Drywall Walls with Tape and Mud
Adult School, Main Office Lobby, Waiting Room of Main Office, and Main Office Hallways Scope of Impact: Replacement of metal casework Adult School Scope of Impact: Replacement of metal casework Little Theater Lobby, Little Theater Men's and Women's Restrooms, and Men's and Women's Changing Rooms with Restrooms Scope of Impact: Smoke detector replacement, HV AC fan replacement, and lighting replacement.
240-253 2/11/98
b. 2'x4' Pinhole Ceiling Tiles (Laid-In) c. Smooth Plaster Ceilings
d. Drywall Ceilings -No Tape and Mud
e. Plaster Debris
f.
Smooth Plaster Walls -
Little Theater Lobby, Little Theater Men's and Women's Restrooms, and Men's and Women's Changing Rooms with Restrooms Scope of Impact: Smoke detector replacement, HV AC fan replacement, and lighting replacement. Attic and Ceiling Space above Lobby Theater, Restrooms, and Men and Women's Changing Rooms with Restrooms Scope of Impact: HV AC fan replacement and new ducting Throughout Little Theater Scope of Impact: Restroom renovations and Men's and Women's Changing Room with Restrooms renovations
1701-0437-39 1/10/17 CLPL-014-1- 7 1/31/01 0806-1291 -93 6/13/08 1701-0415 - 21 1/10/17 1701-0422-24 1110/17
1701-0425 - 27 1/10/17 947113- 18 2112/93
Page 9 of 15 02 2600-15
:
Los Angeles High School #8736 Repair of Corwin Theatre Building (019CCT) Colin#:10367253 g. Sprayed on Fireproofing h. Fiberglass Duct and Pipe Insulation I.
Duct Seam Seal Tape
J.
4" Brown Cove Base with Adhesive
k. 12"x12" Light Blue Floor Tile with Adhesive on concrete 1. 4" Black Cove Base with Adhesive m. Wall Barrier Paper
CNS Project #17-005 January 16, 2017 Attic and Ceiling Spaces Scope of Impact: New ducting insulation Throughout attic and ceiling spaces Scope of Impact: Minor duct removal On ducting in attic and ceiling spaces Scope of Impact: Minor duct removal Men's and Women's Changing Rooms Scope oflmpact: Removal of Door and Frame Adult Office Scope of Impact: Removal of metal casework Adult Office Scope of Impact: Removal of metal casework Behind smooth plaster walls in little theater hallway, restrooms, and lobby Scope oflmpact: Hallway remodel, restroom remodel, and Men's and Women's Changing Rooms with Restrooms Remodel
937600-06 12/23/91
Non-Suspect 1701-0428 - 30 1110/17 1701-0434 - 36 1110117
New Non-Suspect New Non-Suspect 1701-0431 - 33 1110117
3. Recommendations for handling ACM and/or ACCM: a. Black Mastic Associated with 12"x12" Brown/Rust Floor Tile next to door frame to be removed. 1) Minor ~isturbances that are 3 square feet or 3 linear feet or less per impact area and not to disturb 100 square feet or greater cumulatively on any one project can be performed by AHERA 16 Hour 0 & M trained personnel. These disturbances shall be in accordance with LAUSD Specification Section 02 8213- Asbestos Abatement and Asbestos Related Disturbance. 4. General Notes: a) Attics are cleared for entry by CNS on 1/10/17 b) No crawl spaces in the building will be disturbed. c) Ceiling space is cleared for entry. d) Wall cavities are clear for entry.
Page 10 of15 02 2600-16
Los Angeles High School #8736 Repair of Corwin Theatre Building (019CCT) Colin#: 10367253
CNS Project #17-005 January 16, 2017
V. General Recommendations and Notes All suspect construction materials not identified above are presumed asbestos-containing. All attics and crawl spaces not specified herein as clear for normal access and ceiling spaces not inspected and identified as absent of contamination are to be considered asbestos-contaminated areas. If materials not identified in this report will be disturbed or if attics, crawl spaces or ceiling spaces not identified in this report as clear of contamination are to be accessed during construction, notify IOR or OAR. They will contact the Facilities Environmental Technical Unit for further direction prior to disturbance of these materials or access of the contaminated spaces. If any additional known, presumed, or suspected asbestos-containing materials are discovered during construction. The Contractor shall immediately stop all work and then contact the FETU and the project Environmental Consultant to determine the proper course of action. The Contractor shall take care when demolishing materials which will open wall cavities, sealed ceiling areas, covered trenches, and in general, areas which were inaccessible during the limited asbestos inspection. If any additional known, presumed, or suspected asbestos-containing materials are discovered during the renovation, the Contractor shall immediately stop all work and then contact the FETU and the project Environmental Consultant to determine the proper course of action.
Page 11 of 15 02 2600-17
CNS Project #17-005 January 16, 2017
Los Angeles High School #8736 Repair of Corwin Theatre Building (019CCT) Colin#: 10367253
VI. Lead Related Construction I Impact to Coated Surfaces A. The buildings and grounds involved with this project were built: 019CCT- Built 1973 B. Renovation, repair or painting work performed on buildings constructed prior to 1978 require special handling and environmental monitoring when coated surfaces including, but not limited to, painted, varnished, and glazed surfaces are impacted. Coated surfaces applied prior to 1978 are assumed to be lead-based. All work shall be performed in compliance with Facilities Standard Specification, Section 02 8333, "Lead Abatement and Lead Related Construction Work." XRF testing methodology is not acceptable in determining negative for lead content for Cai/OSHA compliance purposes, except for notification requirements. XRF may be used in determining lead-based paint for compliance with the U.S.E.P.A. Renovator, Repair, and Painting Rule. Di~turbance of coated surfaces by contractors will be monitored by qualified District staff or Environmental Consultant sufficient to ensure that proper training and work procedures, cleanup, and waste handling are employed. C. Loose or flaky paint that will be disturbed during the work of this project or in close proximity of the work area shall be stabilized by removing the loose or flaky paint and leaving only paint in stable condition. D. It should be noted that any coated surfaces and building materials not listed above are to be considered to be lead-based and asbestos-containing respectively. Should the project require the disturbance of these surfaces and building materials, the FETU shall be notified. If any changes occur in the scope of work, notify the Consultant or the FETU immediately before further commencement of work. This report may not be changed, modified or include additions without the express written permission from the FETU. If you have any questions regarding this report, contact the FETU at (213) 745-1450. Signatures below certify that the information contained herein has been proofread and is technically accurate.
Edward D. Spinney, CAC #00-2795
Matthew Harvey, CSST #16-5638
Page 12 of 15 02 2600-18
Los Angeles High School #8736 Repair of Corwin Theatre Building (019CCT) Colin#: 10367253
CNS Project #17-005 January 16, 2017
VII. Confidentiality and Limitations CNS's findings, conclusions and recommendations found in this report are based on the information that was made available to CNS on January I 0, 2017. The information in this report is relevant to the date of the site visit and should not be relied on to represent conditions at any later date. The opinions and conclusions expressed in this report are based on information obtained during our assessment and on our experience and current standards of technical practice. CNS makes no other warranties, either express or implied, concerning the completeness of the data furnished to us. CNS cannot be responsible for conditions or consequences arising from relevant facts that were concealed, withheld, or not fully disclosed at the time our assessment was undertaken. CNS is neither responsible nor liable for work, testing or recommendations performed or provided by others. This Asbestos Engineering Assessment Report is not and should not be construed as a warranty or guarantee about the presence or absence of environmental hazards or contaminants that may affect the subject site. Facts, conditions, and acceptable risk factors change with time; accordingly, this report should be viewed within this context.
Page 13 of 15 02 2600-19
APPENDIX A: Analytical Results from Samples
02 2600-20
w-
if
~ j:<•
!i'
ll
~\ ~~~·t
~Ml QP
~~~·7"
.
OF=~I~
"I=F=te£
hl _,_ .. I'"'""
3~
.:;;.IC6r~ ~
q'·8 u
jRtR I HAU.
w '
V"l
0;::
Nt.Jnses 0FFtc.e_
~
l"(;
em"" RM.I~P 4 .i. .~
OO}> __. m o.. CD Ul 3
0 (f) - · 4-" ~ --. ::J I j --loill[l 0 ::J 0
~OCTbl!~ ~~ Ofnc.E.
lN14aTi!'la.14~GA
3
7:1"
OJ
c
0.. ::J tO
NCl 'PA
\~
2.. 7 ~
qu
~
IU\ . 1"-1
L
B
of:r=
0..
Ai l~
\-"'
-{0
-1
::}:-
I
ro
ID
!I
7-3 '5 ff 1'-l.fj ~ rfl ~ &
~
\!,.._
~ ...,_ r~
~
0 N
\7-.
N Ol 0
0
~ ~
'tO I
"'
31 '-7n
S2'-0."
18'-0" . . . •I
((3'-2n
I I '-7''
-~
0
i~
0
~
~
(~
+ ln
F--·
-
~
tn ~
-"
LOCAT I01\! 8736
LOS ANGELES SCHOOL DISTRICT DIAGRAM OF BUILDING AREAS SCHOO!..:
LOS ANG:::LES HIGH SCHOOL
ADDR::SS:
4550 WEST OL YM~ I C BOULEVARD LOS ANG:::LES. CA 90019
APPLICATION NO. 22/ DRAWING LOLOIFIS
BU: LD: r\)G
FIRST FLOOR SOUTH
DISTRICT: LOS ANGEL:::S UNIFIED SCHOOL DISTRICT
Admin and Classroom Building 019CCT
•
1.12 '-o•
Z/ \ 1
0
I
~~:----~------~
\
I
ll'l '
"" I
\
I
\ I
t\1 r1l
\\ .I
u A
~j -• en -
Fl~C.JP.f;;Je./
j
0
.
.
I
I
,., Ill
\
I
\
\
\
Jl'l I
I
-0
\ \ \
Cl
"'
\
•
"' I
J
I
•0 I
t
... -"' I
CXI N
I
1.0
~.'
--
....
•
t
•
OUl
<~9'-JD
,
73•-a·
u:o
Cou tJ s~L 1l\l& C9FFtGE...) 02 2600-22
')
LOS ANGELES SCHOOL DISTRICT
LOCATION 8736 APPLICATION NO.
DIAGRAM OF BUILDING AREAS
22/
DRAWING LOLOIFIW
SCHOOL:
LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
ADDRESS:
4650 WEST OLYMPIC BOULEVARD LOS ANGELES, CA 90019
BUILDfNG I FIRST FLOOR WEST
DISTRICT: LOS ANGELES UNIFIED SCHOOL DISTRICT
Admin and Classroom Building 019CCT
74'-5" 10'-3"
49'-3"
S '-I"
12"x 12" Brown/ Rust Floor Tile with Mastic Men's and Women's Changing Rooms
~
• 0 I
&' 1-
: 0 I
:
-0I
~
,_ DJ
-I
I 0 '-I" ,
49'-3"
5'-1"
PLOT SCALE: I "=.20 '-0" AUTHOR)ZED AGENT LOS ANGELES UNIFIED SCHOOL DISTRICT
OATE: I 0/ I 0/89 SHEET 9 OF I04SHEETS
02 2600-23
<-!
~-I
~cHooL Los ANet~k; v ;tion Code
g I IfI
Page ___L of
ASBESTOS INSPECTION FORM
fH
j I£;
. _Lj2
· Maintenance Area
~
List each building and room inspectedo Where asbestos is found, circle the room and indicate the condition of the material and the sample number. Use several lines if necessary. If material is damaged or easily accessible to students/staff, fill out a condition report and take samples. · ------------~-------------------------------------~---------------------------------------------
"Bldg• I.D. #
Building Name
Room/Space Description
Material
\ l
Description
\ \
t ~
~:.
\ \
\
''
\ \
\
I\
'
'' I
\
t
·.
'
\
'
:
"
\
\
\
I\
\
\· l ·~ ...
I
\ I
\
\\ '
\ t
{f
\
!
I
' 0J~5)·.~t
I\
tl
I
t 1
,,
'
II
'
~:
11
:
~·.
'
. I; .
,
l
~
l
,,
!
~
\
'\
;.
.
'I
\..
..
~
~
I
~
1-F? ;·\ .\
~:
Samples
,l
I
\
I I
\
\
i
'
-
' i f .·
(_~c..i_.~ 4 .. 0 \,r;·
rI
.'
r
~..
....,) \
/'..-~
·.
tj \ ( ,.
;'-
·J.
' \. t I) ·..... .--., ;
·i 02 2600-24
ilj
h,)
CHOOL
Page_ :;- of
·'
'"')
·'·:
\
i'-·~ ,<..) ( Sl.
r;
Q..
S
, ; ASBESTOS INSPECTION FORM
~
~ ~~~~~~------~~~
....: J '
\'
'-..)
tion Code
8' I
J...; j IJ..;
Maintenance Area
t
ist each building and room inspected. Where asbestos is found, circle the room and indicate he condition of the material and the sample number. Use several lines if necessary. f material is damaged or easily accessible to students/staff, fill out a condition report nd take samples. ..., . ..... .,;. .
____ _____ ______________________________
--------· ___________________ _________________ uildin$1; Name 4~
......
'I
J{
'i
Bldg. I. D. fl
I
~~- 7 ~.S<; I
/"":.
i'-\
Room/Space Description
} 1C- I
u
.~!.....e ~
...,
---i/
~
.!
.~
Samples
I !
'-'"'J~i·,
T-~1.
("->
,J__
.'
E-···
• t.....\.cc...
Description
C/..u;.;v
\~~-\
r2_7
il
Material
.fr ·c_1.
~\1
"-~'--V ('.
.
i\
I
.
£\ ' ?. ,. rl
/)-
r
I
~
I
-----
i
f
/
'
'
'
/
I
'
{
t
{
~
..,
'•
'
()'."', Dl'oJ".
~
~}
I\
~\
•"'
l'
k,-.._s
I
i ,
;
.,
'~·
!
.,' .
~
IJ '
:I •
·~ ~~- (·'
:~
(·
\
\
:
JI
)
,
'-!
~
..'
·D '\'-...M
J
:,...;
I
\
i'.J .l t) Q;:
.
' I
'2, ~ \ . ' -{_,.
'
t
\
\ \1 I
'
! I
:
' ;l
i
-, ..
-... __ ....., i--l.-'-..., '
__,
h. .;, ; I .,...._' ! ;.-.,
'- \...·
}
~
.
i1'"' t '""
/.
V""
1,
.I
;·
" t_u
r\
.. '
·' '
'
_,'
,:
..
/
...,
.
;:?. ) :.J .tj <
' ......:\:_ ,.
ft.'il ',:Q.'\}~.11 /
'
'.(\·._x~i. '>]I"J.,o]<-
·:,..
;
-
" ."',.,..: f
..
·.
~
-~
:\;
.
·. ., .Ur ··- ~:
./I
?... \ '\
..-:'
1-i7 1 I\._1 l ~\~
~
--
._!
; \.~
i}
1 -~ r ....>..-:.., ',r...
,.
:. <
(
I r
....
;.
C{-C.c{l;J·· ··
.... -, '•"-.--·
. -· ..
'
•"
·.
..
':'.
T
'.
\\
' !
L ....._. 02 2600-25 \./
)
-,
Q.ft ,..)
~0'2_ ·
0
. A:.~ ,,
,,,_.,d.
(i
\
,\
J
1-·-'·?- ·:4}l/2Dq .,J./!..,··J .
.rLo .,
i ~ ,-....., !, .!._ '-' ·.l
J ... •
r
- Lf
l
l.. o:):L-O) .I
7 '2.-.l._),) ,"·x
' J
.. ........
\}
0 ~·
l!V
I '
o:.OR
1/!1 ~
)
\
,
J/)(j)
/-..'-V
I
·\
I
cr.
I
;
I
:Q
~! ·~~
'\:-:l \
;,"'!7t\~3
'dka_vV\~
l
'
~
;
'
L-AJ<; v c~,,
/~' . .._:_.. -'! -.J
·'
---.
1~f(. fl{kc v..t.. .·x:r~v.JJ.
:
....•. :-
\
I
t-r..';,}'
J-
·.{·d ..~ 11 (' I ...,_ : ! A~ (_) '-'::
1
t:~'t-,t-~
)
\l
'v
.....!_!
·.~
'{"
:~.__Y....
!
\
tv\
t""'()·,,s.
~
.-
I
:. ·)
'
\ .! :f.
i
'!
.'
\·
..) \.I ~ r-· i / \
1
.\\...;.~\_..
-:c
~.v
&
'
(!)
::J,,.-:"':/'~ r
\=-~-0
'
I
I
!
(•
'
/.
J:L_ of
Page
ASBESTOS INSPECTION FORM
~
Maintenance Area .ist each building and room inspectedv Where asbestos is found, circle the room and indicate he condition of the material and the sample number·.- Use several lines if n·ecessary. :f material is damaged or easily accessible to students/staff, fill out a condition report nd take samples. ·--------------------------------------~---;----------------.
.
uilding Name
t.Do
Bldg.
Room/Space De~cription
IJ
.....
--------..-----------------.
-·
Material
Description
Samples
1b-N
-
~
fri' :_' .:::. -.~.:.__.·. {i0 . ""·. ,_ ~ --
·.
l '-
!'
I
-t
i • . ;..
l). J
'Tt;. V•"
\
I
'
.
\
(
'\ l \
)
\
\
. c,v
'.
'
\Lv.....,.
,
,:1, .r-·.' .: \ -; ..._ . r-.•
Ib-N
i
~~
A
.:. . .•..)
'\. I I
l I
f\ !J.
_/,· .. ~ ;:
' .
.·
c.~
l
'
)l~....::.u t , , •• ,f( ·- .-.
·.
\
I.
L' J·'
l! .._,,_,-
l \
) l
.\ t
'
\
I
t
'
I
t '
\
l
t
I l
~
\
/'~:.---
'·
\____
\
0 ,. --~j (!.tQ -~
<:..~
-.
\
t
! ·'
,., ..... ~
_
02 2600-26
,i,
•.
Page ASBESTOS INSPECTION FORM Maintenance Area
(5
!)_.of /D
)!
.ist each building and room inspectedo Where asbestos is found, circle the room and indicate :he condition of the material and the sample number. Use several lines if necessary. [f material is damaged or easily accessible to students/staff, fill out a condition report md take samples. ·----------------------------------------------~-------------------------·----------~-----------· iui lding
Bldg. I.D. II
Name
Room/Space Description
Description
Material
\
Samples
\
'-· I
! \
:
!
'·' .
I
~
I
LI
I
[ ~
!
! l
I
l
I
I
~
i 1
l ..,
''
I 1
l
l
I
)
Lo d.LoJ)
I I
(\0lt,
l )
I'
n \ I
I' \
Lv.Pr
\ \ .:>
l J
l
) )
·.
\_ '
~ .'.
'·
11-J L ,A
)CHOOL
HI
I
.tion Code
_f I
ASBESTOS INSPECTION FORM I
1J ~lir.J ·
Maintenance Area
.12!/-
,ist each building and room inspected. Where asbestos is found, circle the room and indicate :he ·condition of the material and the sample number. Use several lines if necessary. [f material is damaged or easily accessible to students/staff, fill out a condition report 1hd take samples. · ----------------------------------------------~------------------~-----------------------------
luilding Name
'·
9 \/
IV\
I
r:
.\
+ -< "\ ·'I
Bldg. I.D. IJ
(~C- t
I
I
Room/Space Description
V,'
i 1 1: V\r'
/' '_....
.J..; .,•.._.
J
I
••. --·{
l;
.•
.
·~
.
~.
' .2.
'
G~.; ,~ ·---~-
~
f.
'
Description
!
1 •
-·
~~!
Material
. ' \/ • • \ ... , ~
\. \
", l ' i' t
t-r~\. ~I·,·.:·.·!<. -·I .c.\<'~.=· •
1
i
1-
• ··A .. ·-
_. <..
-·-
I
\ f
I (
tr I\ "
.c.t:)L D
!l l!
..
i !
1) l,l i\ 1-;: ::_ ' t'l ! .- ' -
...... ...:.; "..;\
•..::::r· ' .
...
-
II
\\
l
/I
'
t, . ..
I I
JI
02 2600~28
Samples
-Ji. I ''
..z:.}-+-1 .I.: ./-'~;·'--~f....:-r....::1_· - - - .... ...., '< (, ,rion Code J{ I Ll lL_/J!!/
':f
Page
ASBESTOS INSPECTION FORM
,
1
~
of
SCHOOL .
.
Maintenance Area
t
List each building and room inspected. Where asbestos is found, circle the room and indicate the condition of the material and the sample number. Use several lines if necessary. If material is dsmaged or easily accessible to students/staff, fill out a condition report ~nd take samples. -----------------~--------------------------------~---------------------~----------~---------~-~uilding
.:- !,'_...... t•:
~
Room/Space Descr:i~tion
Bldg. I. D. #
Name
7D - .A/
D
~·,
i .., !._J
!
~/}11/
It>
A-.s
,
tl l~.
J;>
I
~ ~ ... -d.
SJI/)D
M£.--tA L.
Q
.
I
·t~v
!_LV
_CON/)
i? ...-
+-
cuc.·r
Ir
\
..
) /) IJ I
SHOP
.,
) :._:~ _r· ~ ~ i·j ;.l.
'
v
f:? L~-r: p·IJr: o •'-'>!"- '-
1_/
I
,
~ '.~' ~
: ',-, 'V,;'
!
I\;
-p
/'If-) 1f
£/jl• !
!
·.!'
£ ;'
116-12
'
t
1'}
JJ
y,.·.:~. ' / I' ! /
'I
·r
;?Jt:?K'
•'
..
~
?~.....
/4N)<
s_lt/E.JLI )\
•'
lb.lh'-\ ::::,. r,·--: • ..'
II
II
II
I\
1i
~
f.'! j-;/ ' . . .. f.
'
'f"'
•.
~~
-··
11'
ff! I'.)/!'.~.<"'·.
'v . .
, ....,;J
' J ;.~-~ /.;•. I
•
"'\
..- --~-~~ /
'
i
•· < ..
,)...?.' .·!
p ___. /') <"' ,1, .-"' '::'.> ! -~-- ··~ ·-"'
!"
~/' ,•'.,_
A ,-'1 i' i~
.,;' /L<·'·'
DAl0A.c...,.f-
q
~
I ;\/;1
r.- "' l . Jl!!!.:
;.j. {.,....f.....-·/--,_)~
,.
.J
"'"
.
_,,
... ,.
·:,.
..
_,
..
~
·. .
..
.. ..
,.,11/5 u~·
c.LFAN
~~
.-~~-f. iy -~--'
• .. •
•j
, .
. .. .~ ............ - ,
u
/? .V\'
..
.
..... i £A-))
:~A
"\
./""
f
!
-1 .... "
/<~~~ ~
(/ :!-r"-l ~~ ~
'>
I!\ . ·•!' .. /.I, . ..z: f..... t.- t':: .. ::.·-'\..-:."") .-· t~£
-;f)&
1 •.
·r. ~)p ),j. F/<.AY ~~~ -- /)
J
._-;
'
{__/-r--
PJ?t:r J/VS.!J{! 1 . 00 ll .f,!JNP I
·-·
' .I
I
&·A
~, . t?'.-/1~. -~.
l_l).j.qJ.../
..
~
A-~A;.,..- f/IJ 5
6}./ . }
1
;;-:!_[) ;
~b tJ ?J
.
c.v ~
.. --.r .;;
~ -·~ -~·t· ') ..:;., ,..., .t1-~ t~--- ~Jl l. _5
-~
t-l"f -KJ
r: u r ~d/~1.
Samples
ll
;.;;· /1:
/::. ,.·
Description
_c_LCA:N
/'S:J.~! f'.! ~J ~
IP
! I
' b_.,, t-c~
I
Material
..
·-
..
~
I
02 2600-29
\
'
SCHOOL ---"-'·....:·:..::·,_···-...:?_;·.~_._i--~--
.tion Code
_2 I
7I
Page~ of JJ2
ASBESTOS INSPECTION FORM
-~_jbJ.
'
Maintenance Area /) ;.;
·~
~
List each building and room inspected. Where asbestos is found, circle the room and indicate the condition of the material and the sample number. Use several lines if necessary. If material-is damaged or easily accessible to students/staff, fill out a condition report ind take samples. --------------------------------------------------------------------~---~---------------------~uildinp;
Name
Bldg. I.D. tl
Room/Space Description
DescriF~ion
Material
Samples
.AI !::· {)j I / L / LAl O)_L,_lJ. 7 f.. [)
PJPLS
/S{J -~ (\ D}
I/.
};> .J"" .,_,.. . .
("'- _ I\. ..c:r i..-1 A L
.'
'l
t
I';.,.~: ..... )
;./ /'·' {_ .'
I ..
••
~
_,
j
--
; .
c:'""'
.-
.( /
t
~ ;I' .....
----·-----+--------l---------------:-1-------------+----
~
.' ...... t
·,
--'
\\ _.J
-
\. 4·.. I
.
....-::
;}-...
/ '
-_
>;-. '
/
i .
.. -
.
.
;
_
~
:-
~
;"
I
oi2too-3o
/.
E.P.A~· Interim
..
'; ... · ~
Methba
1981
· Polarized Light. Microscropy : Analy)9ia of. Bulk·~· A:soostos Samples •
·-use
·:
'
:,
J
1.•
. ··:·(·,.,,·:..
,:;.~
:'
'
,!'i
o4
·FA
SAMPLE LOO·: REMOVAL MATERIJI..YS
. ~In:
(...o$. ~~~ ~ 0
-+e
1
-
•
;·.
th'ia,)or·~:~~~ly .for samples from materials which will be_removed.
'].'ake thr.ee samples typical· of the job. I If the job.invoi'v'es·:several types of installation (e.~. pipe insu!'ation, boiler laR~ing and duct 1ns~lat1on) take: typical)umples:'Jrom e·ach type. You may have more th~n three ·samples for one job. Take only enouRh mate~iAl (aboui:_:'f/2/founc:e)- to lllllOW for lab analysjg • / . · ·:;i~~~:\;/;·P::·i~·~~\.::;.;~~~ :;:·t/~~.::.~.·~·: .,.. Uu :,•·on~ ~:ofiJthes e\:a hee t s for e aeh separate job. Clearly label each sample bottle to match this lo~. •'
~
. SPACF.(S)_·\_5oL~~ _,___
at~ach copy c f
'F-f'-1
DATES ~
JOB!/
contract "Scope of. Work")
-1-'el
----------------~--~------~------------~-
,
..,, ..
)· ·.,.·
::,
~ J:--'
.l
. : ··-~:·.. :\· ..' A me -·, j
~-
., ...
·.-So,~
~)
on
on
fLI3aw
'·~l\1\.1.~ · LHJ.(t'
ioa t e
Analys!'s
/IM:.'I.S(. . •...•
l<
~~~~;;;
,.
~u..~
-:...
Cj 0.,
~~~-v...)
~~f..l~ ~l~
Ll!U~
LliU~
.& 7
c,H-..l.f/,) ... '
';.
"lo"a.~
-·~·J·
.. ,
lf'M.::•' .. /
~t- •
'1();:
Jsr
liM 2.. y, C:>;."'· .·
'-r3·.!'? c.J·Jr?
''•''!.
....
'
.[
·.··.:
i~:;.h {-.~-~._.:·
..
f ·.
..
. ...
-~-
'
.d.
i)
Micro- . MATERIAL .ab scpat SOURCE
, ae;v
8
q
65 5" A-
/
(Note: Standard atatiatica~ error:
~
'.· ..
..
CONDITION
'
E fllou~e a fO·'t}· . Bt·~tL
._ht"eo.0'??~
t/fo
·
.1
( aJ.,%.,
G)) c...
.,.,;;,&..-_,...,
.r; ·J·l" . f:,.1, g.;~.. ..e.!
.
~- .11 I..Of'!I(GWJ /f.J.
Cfoc·£f.f~w
.' 1/1fl c~:li t:!f. &~~e.
•.
% ..
~
··~PU_j
,•
qD/ ~ .V~()! MGetY lf.J G>r · t? 1t1~k. Zc;&r R~ B G·3·Ei 9o•ieg.,.., .. . ~P&4_f;Ci e~e... · . . ' p:.f:.-, { _,;,.. -
,. · f .. E,
Chr
.-.
019
P.l.
., qof
Stereomicroocopy
~t/1 ' 1e ("f/r)
'
0-10% asbestos ~ +50% ;m)ll% asbestos ~
± 25%)
MATERIAL
l.Of /ff'lltftft If.. . /11a;~t . &;!uR111, .
6·J·~~
')py/EPA METHOD 1981)
(. PQ-lari.zed Light Micr
.l..J)-IU.~"":
.
(/t.~
~
.
-
a?/e; ~717i I. ,
wf.,fe7
~~ ~~k¢ow
,
c(;t?/-o t~
era/!?&
:t
. 17-l'~o~r -
'"'
%
%
P-57. '~i.
-
:t·
%
-· k
%
.D (a. f.IO~~f c(J'~~ ,ee~~ "
Yo/_ ~
Nonft'brous ·
Fibrous
Nonfibroua-
Fibrous
~-
..,..
~/~~~···
·..... Ftt'ro~
,.
{a~, .e/'if'·:~t,/ ,.
Noni;:]
~.c~_,
VI·;
rlrr1~''7f}
Ulhfoi
.
POLARIZED LIGHT MICROSCOPY Tot Am Other Backgrou~d % % "I Fibrous
p:cl.t"".t
V.o; f .
c)-
_ ...
r
..
Jcct . .e,-;1'41e.r-
Y.o/.
9''r¥j>C ~"\ ' '
{.
...
·"
%
%
X
~
Fibrous
Nonfibrous
%
%
%
:t
Fibrous
Nonfibrous
",":'!
'
.,
.. >
..
• .•
.:.
•I
;
•'
.. ..
·~··
..
•'\
..,
'•
.. ..
.•
.,
..
. .
. . ..
I
:.~;
;t
.... ·0 ;f'->
...
·~
...
0
' .·
'? w
-~ '
.
_,.· .•...:. >·. ~ ··.
f'.)
1.
''
~
:t
%
Fibrous
"
Nonfibroue ..
·{''
I . I
f
~~
'
..·
J
'<7'>
'•
caT.....
~;:JaL&;:li
_.,ow ...........
....
.A.Io:I~-.·_I:U!.IIlpJ;Il:S'
.•Q
....._.
_,Keep one copy 'of .. this for 'Area ·f:Ueeo' •' ' :_
., ·.· .. '· :_
,·
~
•'1:
wnen the previous
......
Inspector · ST fC VAN V ~~
-ASBESTOS 'INSPECTION:..;;·SAMPL'e. LOG : ....
.
"':.;,.~
.
~.~~
... ,_,.
nave·
YQU
samples wera leso t.han 5%' . ·
........
•..
---
------------~--~--------
Maint. Area. .
Give one·· copy to the Safety,'sectiono
'i
.
()j('
. .
:·;
Results of Lab Test
.SAMPLE .NUMB Elf ' · Bldg '#. - Sjice--;;;; I •.
.:BuiLDING
;;~
SCHOOL
. .- LOC -
.DESCRIPTION
ANALYSIS
DA'lE
··. ,,.
' . l - - t.
;~ft~?';::,·',.~~~:~',l~} . ·.. -·· ··~.-· .. j_-:\:~-,':--.•'.
.•. ·-
_ . -··: .....,..._· -
<•;~::'\:'·f:. '~~;;t,;~.~::f?~-.~~;,;.;:
-
-
)_,
.· _ ::::_;>
·-
_l ·I
-
_
I·.~
.
>
..
•\);;;,:j~i!~(Y:f?.fv
·
r
c -.- _
:
I
....
., ""';"
_J :
i
.:~;;.:~:~~:;;~~~
-
,..'
...
.l
.1
-
·r
1'II1
It .
:
::
: ..
I
1(-
.I . I
t
'
.. •
u
.
··--
·· I
•
_
-
·
... ·..
0
N
·'
·-:·_§:-, -w.· '-!' . ..
..,. .. -~
~
.::..-,... ..... -~
.
~
''
.... '·"
jl, I ····-·
.... :;_ ,..,...,,_
v.n&;A.a> ~f-:l
.;:);\
usa thiS fol'.·3amples you-lmve .f samples vere leu than S%; •
VL'JiJI·;
~..... ~~~~-»
..
t,. """"t .
-------=~
of
.
ST 1Cf ru,\1 (! ~
'·
~
Ma:V.nt o Area ~
this . for ·Area :files ..'
Give
CUllS. .
. S..oo>~ . ~'liMBER: .' .. Loc ... B~dg · "I - S!a£-!_;:_ #,
..·:_ ··-. :~ . ~ -~ _::~~~/:.~~-:-< ~ <··w:-~~-~;~:i·;:?;:.:::-
·~=:·
copy to the Safety.,·saetion •. . .
.- : .
.
~
·.:
Inspector
~
;ASBESTOS .INSPECTIO.Nt. S~~.
,q . Keep one .copy .
·.. _,:.
t\ when the previous
. :Result~ of Lab
SCHOOL •
•
0
! ..
·t . .
DE~C1t!PTION
t I··
DATE
\
T~s t
ANALYSIS
- ~
--·
w~
..... .
·. ~
~~~i , •..0>···· . .
0 o·
..
w· ~.
..· ..
·~
.:;.-....,
·!;, ..r:~;>:
~;~:;·.--;;:!"y-~ ,'{·;'::i.~~ !;:~-;.-~ '·;" ~ :• . ;~ ~ ··~-~-··
v :.
·•.•..,.
Jl.
~~ FA
SAMPl'.E LOG: REMOVAL MATERIALS
ASBESTOS
s rn:_L /1.__ff;i~
OY._
D
. Use this form only for samples from materials which will be removed. Take three samples typical of the job. If the job involves s~yeral types of installation ·(e.g. pipe instllation, bo il e r I a g g i n g <1 n d · d u c t ! n s u I <~ ti on ) t 't k P ty~fcal samples from each type. You may have mcire than three samples for one .ioh. Take only pnough nvJteri;ll (about 1/2 ounce) to allow for lab analysis. Clearly label eac·h sample bottle to match this lol~·
Use one of these sheets for each separate job. . ~UIL!:iiNG.
&~.
SPACE(S)
&1lt'/'. lf'm
1
COST S
DATES
JOB/I
JOB·DESCRIPTION (or attach copv of contract "Scope of Work") '
.•.
I.
'
('~ ,..,. ~ .. ·.~ t··· :. ' '...JU.l..i /t.)
----------------------------------------··----------------------------------------------··-------------·---------
ISnmple
I
II
Aprox1-~ntc
. fj
.ocnt1on
I
l.t\11 l'Sf {);-,'!.\'
/\n;Jtysi~
Pitt•·
-+--~-,-;-'-P-e.--+-----....:...._C/6)--=-o-Ei.-£L---+ITI5~-AM·- ---~--LJJJ;- ·-~·
.,!, ,
,
?/
I //
// II
to'to C+\ ·
fJ
-.
I
--- ·1I
18to
1
--r1
<:?13
.·;:.·'?t·
/t
I
r(
----·-·---------1
--·--·-----··--·- --- --
0
1\) 1\) 0)
I
I
~----r
0
0
w 01
...·.
.1\.
e·
-r --· -· . .
ASBESTOS INSPECTION: SM!PLE U
Haint. Area
Keep one copy of this for Area files,
""<"<" -:s:~
.,~
...... \
.D._'--{
Give one·'copy to the. Safety Section.
Results of Lab Test ANALYSIS
982
It
-, ,......,. l
ll•fli'''--..JI
A
... ..
VJ?r'f
c
I
Y"'-'~v
,-,I
•
ft._
..
! I '·f lv!T.!pv;.,.(,..J/V r. ·rz ' .
~t-(6tJ ,.l.
.·
-4·
_,' •.
'.
~----~_L ..
I ------
;t
' :•. ', .•.
L
.
~
..
0
"i O"l 0 0
w O"l
··------
'
;.~
"'
----------
I L __ _ .. I
.. ···'
I___ L _:_~ ______ . ___________ I 1 _____· _____ ... I ~- _ J
_Ll__ . · I II ·· I f
.,I.
____..L;,.~-• • • . •
ASBESTOS INBPECTION: .SANPLE L_
)j!'\
.1!../(
1:-!aint. Area Keep one copy of this for Area files.
-·
Give one··copy to the' Safety. Section.
Results of Lab ~est
SAHPLE NUMBER Lac - Bldg
U-
SCHOOL Spac~
DESCRIPTION
BUILDING
DATE
ANALYSIS
- #
I
lj'' 1.
L(V'el·M .. '7 . .. .
. .. -J9e,·l. .· . ..
.
-
a
__ __
ij II LL'
_ __r
I
81.. I1/:l P11111 ,._ I'"WL___lc
!:f. J ,
./b
.1
II
~-·------
_
_ _ _ ___,/f.L$A MfUI)
_.._I -~--
· I -~----=-'-"'l!Z-4z-"'"__,[?:....._,J-...3_ _ ___,_,________.. I .:
'
.
I
I ··
·
I·
I
....
L u_ __~----------~---------L~--~---~---------~-----~----------I
~~
___- 1
J. ____
...
--
_I
_ ____ j
I
._l
I
_
.....
II
_ll
_
I
~.
II · tI
__ _l _I
.·"":.",..
I .. l . _~--L~--
0
"' .... en
.!
"' 0 0
w -.J
· ·· ·
_
__ J I ·.
I
I __________
I .. I
L ___ ___
I
. I _ __ _ ______....__...L....~..--_..._L__ ___________ __:.L___
----~
_
·I
_l.L_ __ · . I
I I
__ j j ·· _L JL. __ · _ _L
•
--~-
.II.
''"':'-"•:0.
· E.PaAo: ::cJ, .. A:im.Methoo 1981
Polarized [.,ightMicroscropy Aabeatos Samples
SAMPCiE LOO·: REMOVAL
~a.J.ysi.s.~f·aulk
o4 --
·FA
MATERI~S
· ~ l T~ {...o'$. ~~~ -
""z'p#
•
~\--;
--
Take th~ee samples typical· of the Job. I I! the.job.lnvolves·u6veral typea of installAtion (e.~. pip~ ins~latfon, boiler laRRing and duct insulation) take: _typicaLeampliu.'hom each q•pe. You may have m<:ite th"n three_ samples for one job. Take only enou~h mate!i~l
-~~s~·thls form o~ly for samples from materials wh1ch wfll be
removed.
: (ibout'',l/2..'0UflCS). to &llOIJ for lab analysh • ·: _:· ~. :_, . .· ~ .. \'f·:' b · .: Uu one'of_-·the.lie-,sheets for aac:h separate job. --Clearly label each sample bottle to match this lo~. : . ',, .·
• II
..
~:-~- ~
-· .
.;, ·• '
.
. .BUI:L~1~9~ ~~ ... ;:·....
.
,:f ·.. ~- .:~:>~~1 ··.~~-.:,:."(- ::.j:'..,._, :· ~ .. ·'~·.::.--
SPACf.(~) ~tL.~ ~N
: Joa ·j)f;'scix"P:tio~~((or':at tach' copy •. ·
of cent r~c :t
~(~<'0~~ITI~}j~~~;.~,::_r::?1.n .
··scope
JOB II
~
OATES
COST S
_. 1-e1
.. .,_ -
of. "'{orl<")
~
--------------------~--~----------------------~---
~.
,......~~~
---------~-·
·'',,._ :' q .. -·
~J;~,,.~~:~.;,;~~\i;~f-L . --~.a~,;.
c
•• C$.,1t'llll2 wn•-----·-= .................. - ........... _.,. __
·yf~~t~~~:g:!·§:qtl
.~:.
.f.: ne
,,
on
on
'.
1'1-CI
Boll ~
-
- ...~ \1c::r:'
-
~
jO~a,_~ --. -
. «a..f.\&rv...) --
''n...
6 .... '10
. \.;)()\I
'
\+'~·t\ Nt\
~it.J.'t ~t~
L4 ~ct'
..:·
'·
Analysis .. ,
· /IM::.lf.J (. ·: e-H' l-J"7.)
..
/rM .::-tsr
Llt\Jii
· /rM
c\ 1\J,cal
z.
'C • J·)!. 7
' '
llo'/.
.
loa t e .,
'to'/·: · '
": 3· ~? t"·J·JJ!'?
--. ~ -"
l~~:ij~;;; ' ' :::::.;;;:·.J-~
'
·.·
..
,.. ' . ,.
... :., .....~ .:.:
~:
..., . ':·
-.. ·.
,\
\\ ..
,,
.. ··~.·
.. .....· ~
... .
,.
····'•
····::·:.
,:
..,..
,..
,.,.. ~.,!.,::;_.,•,., .,,, ::
.1l.
---, ......
.,.·-·.-·--- --·-·-
--'MicrO""
NATERIAL
~ab
SOURCE
acpst
I
qg(
'
a&)
!)S'
G,.J.rt'J
/II
4-
q
,,
G t"
v·
~
i
,..
. '
'
#f'~li.1!..ti-ka.. . '.. p.:t .
f/tlqt#,lf();/u R11
'6$ (' ' !
·:~.Cj;o,· EfJ'(')w
.. ,
i
-.,
-~· :~-'
..
.. ...
··...
. f/$puj
Jr,-e4'G
.
L~~ drf(r~l w~fo, .· 'S!:r~&
I
...
\
,.
---
-~-
,.
!"
•••
.·.:'
.
·.~. •. ".>:
..
••.
-
:t
%
. '9.
/).'57
%
X
1fon1 i br OUB
Fibrous
Dla. -lo#r/_
-
Yo):
%
%
c~~ ~ ··"
,
~-...;~-~:
J• ·•••
Fibrous
Nonfi brous j) rc-{?~1M .t
Fft'ro~
'It>'/
~
a:~·
/.
·~-
-
..
JCCi" . R;;~¢,
Y~/ •
[1;:1o'~·
:t
%
X
%
Fibrous
Nonfibroua.
%
X
t
:t .
Fibrous
Non fib iOUii'"
... . . ·.
..
'
.:
.
I
..
. '
.. ..
--
-
·,
,.
·····
'·'
.·
X
.
.'
c:(,·q/-o.t.ur .
-~·:
·1: ···.:·:.• ··
.
r~~/
~ ~cY, ~ tfik<¥~
YI;
..
.
'
Nonfibrous
·~--
..•.
.. .
.
_!
%
.·.
.' -: ·~.. , ~· :: . '~ . - ' .
~-
~
(e;llb' e/tyrytf · W/e-ilt!-, .
..
..
?~
'li
H-tf"'otA:.r
····:. . ,
·.,-
'·
-
t,l !" ~<
____..,....a..-...
.
-
-~·-
·._.-
..
:t
:t
Background Fibrous
.
·-.:· .·.·
I
X
Tot
~
'
.
'.
-
Am Other
,.-
.
... , ..
!
-
~
·;
POLARIZED LIGHT MICROSCOPY Chr %
..
~1)/t ;(e ,
.± 25%)
·--
S te reooicroa copy
,~
..• .
:.
I
I
-
MATERIAL
~~P~ .. ~;J·ll /It~.ali~ 14w~ ~/:. . f t.. {a/IV!M' ~rrJ·'::JJ ~
~
$cr&f'RH!
··~·~. II..O!J#IG/Ut(I{J
q 1/ I
H#G_etf.f HJ
tt(QJ~
&·3·Ei .9o.~'ii~,;.,
I
'
p, e.
~0!
Clt;
·.
.
··---······" •
0-10%-'a.abeatos "'+50% ; .. >ll:t asbestos ..
l. Of l#'ilP_lZ!Tf ~/Heuif :&,l/v RH~ I(~~ /4~ ~'ls(L
....,_._ ·-
(Note: Standard statistical error:
CONDITION
9t~~· Efllow
---·-o··-~·
1:
' % .·
X
Fibrous
..
'
Nonfibroue
..
:·
C!)
N
.
"'?en
'
...
'
··: '; .'·.....: ">:·
.':
(;.)
>0
'
..
;~
··
.
..
•,
•.
~
'·"
~
I
I
"' 8
.II.
,·" •,,
. .r
ASBf. . ..:OS BULK SAMPLE LOG.
siTE: Lo.S PROJECT:
An~ e~e.s ·.... .:· H,S. AHl?R ~
.,
J
0
l"l~
rl!l;-t~"~ ·:~t"~~£Aiam BY:DoY1g.l d
La,. ;,;l,Jau
/Ji<>"b"
MAINT. AREA: A T \4 - I '3
Fill in all information Legibly and Precisely. DO NOT USE PENCIL One copy for Area files (if applicable), one copy to Technical Supervisor, original to Safety with samples. Sample # ILab s amole#
18
l
Notes
937596
I 937597
I
I 937598
I
21
22..
I 937599
l
l
937600
I 9376o1
25 L 2~
937602
I
937603
25 z[p
I
I 937 604 I I 937605
I
l 937606 I I 937607 I I 937soe I I 9376os
I
I 93761o I ........... I 9 37 611
0 N N
I,.
en 0 0
.1>.
0
NOTE:
.
Analysis report to be attached to this sheet and returned to Asbestos Technical Supervisor
"'
L.A.U.S.D. Environmental Health and Safety Drench 1425 S. San Pedro St. Rm. 215 CA 90015 Los Angeles
ASBESTOS BU!.K SAMPLE ANALYSIS LABORATORY REPORT LOS ANGELES HS CIP
NVLAP # 1505
Pnge 1
6739
(2i3) 742-7371 LAUSO
Date
Lab #
Submitted
937596
01/02/92
Hie
Date
pst
Analyzed
NI
01/17/92
Oth
Tot
Material Description
Chr %
%
X
%
18 C-T RM. 360 S/W SPRAY FIREPROOFING.
GREY/YELLOW LUMPY POWDERY MASS FRIABLE NON-HOMOGENEOUS
0
0
0
0
Material
Source
Am
Material Background
CELLULOSE 20% VERMICULITE GYPSUM BINDER
937597
01/02/92
NI
01/17/92
16 C-T RM. 350 S/E SPRAY FIREPROOFING
GREY/YELLOW LUMPY DRY POWDER FRIABLE NON-HOMOGENEOUS
0
0
0
0
CELLULOSE 25% VERMICULITE PAINT BINDER
937596
01/02/92
NI
01/17/92
16 C-T RM. 351 N/E SPRAY FIREPROOFING
GREY/YELLOW LUMPY FRIABLE NON-HOMOGENEOUS
0
0
0
0
·cELLULOSE 15% VERMICULITE PAINT .BINDER TALC
937599
01/02/92
Nl
01/17/92
18 C-T RM. 374 S/W SPRAY FIREPROOFING
GREY/YELLOW LUMPY FRIABLE NON-HCMJGENEOUS
0
0
0
0
CELLULOSE 30% VERMICULITE BINDER TALC
937600
01/02/92.
NI
01/17/92
19 C-T RM. 216 N/E SPRAY FIREPROOFING
GREY/YELLOW LUMPY FRIABLE
0
0
0
0
NON-HOMOGENEOUS 937601
01/02/92.
NI
01/17/92
19 C-T RM. 220 N/W SPRAY FIREPROOFING
937602
01/02/92
NI
01/17/92
937603
01/02/92
NI
01/17/92
937604
01/02/92
NI
01/17/92
GREY/YELLOW LUMPY FRIABLE NON-HOMOGENEOUS
01/02/92
NI
01/17/92
"'"""" of Lob '"P",;'"""
30%
0
0
0
0
CELLULOSE 25% VERMICULITE BINDER TALC
19 C-T RH, 223 CTR/E ·GREY LUMPY W/POWDER SPRAY FIREPROOFING FRIABLE NON-HCMJGENEOUS
0
0
0
0
CELLULOSE 20% VERMICULITE BINDER PAINT TALC
19 C-T RM. 2.01 CTR/W SPRAY FIREPROOFING
GREY LUMPY W/POWDER
0
0
0
0
CELLULOSE 25%
19 C-T RH. 200 S/E SPRAY FIREPRoOFING
GREY LUMPY W/POWDER FRIABLE
FRIABLE NON-HOMOGENEOUS
VERMICULITE BINDER PAINT TALC 0
0
0
0
19 C-T RH. 212 N/W SPRAY FIREPROOFING
~~i.....L
GREY LUMPY W/POWDER
FRIABLE NON-HOMOGENEOUS
CELLULOSE 15%
VERMICULITE
.NON-HOMOGENEOUS 937605
CELLU~OSE
VERMICULITE BINDER TALC
BINDER PAINT TALC 0
0
0
0
CELLULOSE 30% VERMICULITE BINDER PAINT TALC
'"""'""" """'""' ~ i:k~
NOTE: OX : No Asbestos Detected; 1% . Asbestos Detected Above OX and Below or Equal to 1%. This report relates to only the material tested. This report is not used by the LAUSD/EIISB to claim prodt~ct endorsement by NVLAP or eny agency or the U.S. government.
02 2600-41
L.A.U.S.D. Environments~
Health and Safety Branch
1425 S. San Pedro St. Rm. 215 Los Ange~es CA 90015 (213) 742-7371 LAUSD Lab 11
Date Submitted
Mic pst
Date Analyzed
937606
01/02/92
NI
01/17/92
937607
01/02/92
NI
01/17/92
NVLAP If 1505
ASBESTOS BULK SAMPLE ANALYSIS LABORATORY REPORT LOS ANGELES HS CIP 8739
Chr Materia~
Source
Material Description
Am
%
X
Oth
Tot
X
X
Material Background
19 C-T RM. 214 N/W SPRAY FIREPROOFING
GREY LUMPY W/POWDER FRIABLE NON-HOMOGENEOUS
0
0
0
0
10-N N/W HARRIS HALL
GREY/BRN GRANULAR W/ POWDER NON-FRIABLE NON-Hct10GENEOUS
0
3
0
3
PLASTER CEILING
Page 2
CELLULOSE 25% VERMICULITE BINDER PAINT TALC CELLULOSE 3% VERMICULITE CALCITE BINDER PAINT TALC
937608
01/02/92
Nl
01/17/92
1D-N CTR HARRIS HALL PLASTER CEILING
BRN COAT GRANULAR NON-FRIABLE NON-Hct10GENEOUS
0
5
0
5
CELLULOSE 3% VERMICULITE CALCITE BINDER PAINT QUARTZ
937609
01/02/92
NI
01/17/92
1D-N N/E HARRIS HALL PLASTER CEILING
BRN COAT GRANULAR NON-FRIABLE NON-HOMOGENEOUS
0
4
0
4
CELLULOSE 5% VERMICULITE CALCITE BINDER PAINT QUARTZ
937610
01/02/92
NI
01/17/92
10-N S/E HARRIS HALL
BRN COAT GRANULAR
0
5
0
5
CELLULOSE 3X
PLASTER CEILING
NON-FRIABLE NON-HOMOGENEOUS
lD-N CTR HARRIS HALL PLASTER CEILING
BRN COAT GRANULAR W/ POWOER NON-FRIABLE NON-HOMOGENEOUS
937611
01/02/92
NI
01/17/92
''•noCu
Elr~ '1~
VERMICULITE CALCITE BINDER PAINT QUARTZ· 3
2
0
5
CELLULOSE ZX VERMICULITE CALCITE BINDER QUARTZ
Signature of Analyst:
NOTE: 0% : No Asbestos Detected; 1% : Asbestos Detected Above OX and Below or Equal to lX. This report relates to only the material used. This report is not used by the LAUSD/EHSB to claim product endorsement by NVLAP or any agency of the U.S. government.
02 2600-42
~-JI.#--·
. . ;- ---- ._....
·----·- .
-~---
4
--·
PROJECT:
•••
• •••
~tft:i?f!t
--:y.
.&..r~.:a:".l:l&.,.
-
J:.I.L •
,-=::,
~
,_
,...... ...-~
,_
.. -
Fill in all information Legibly and Precisely. DO NOT USE _PENCIL One copy for Area files (if applicable), one copy to Technical Supervisor, original to Safety with samples. Sample
t1=
/II M
ILab Sample# I Building
I 947113i 1
-
I
rr3
! 947115/
I
vi!L.I:!"2J!,J,I!QOI
~
.
:·
.
I
I
. -
I
.
1
1
:
1
1
I
947118!
I
I I I
..y
I
\
I I L I I I
I
1 !':
I ][_ I _________L __ I
II
-
I 1
_
_I_
I
I
1
1
!'~'}r-~
•
I I
1__
_j______ _ _
j___
I
I
.
RlsAblL]
I 5oJJh ~ ~~ I 1
I
W'
I
___ j______ _ I I I I I
!
___ I
I
l
______ !
I
I I I I .I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I
_ _ _____J_ _ _ _ ___,__ _ _ _ _ _ _
-~-
m
~TE: w
+
Notes
.
"'f
l
./
I
.
S1~
I SL~ I I • I I I
I
I I I I I I I !_____ I I I I I I I . _ j ____·~· ___ ! .I · · ·· -_ ,.-~--- ' . ·1 I I I -I · ' ·_ -, · -.. :1 . -~-I______ _ _ I I I I I .I I _~.__ l L I I I I I I ___.___ _ _--'--- - - - ' - - - - - ,___ _ _ _ _ _ : I L I I I I I I I _________ I ____ L I_·__ I I I I I · I I _ ___.,__ _ _.......__ _- - - ' - - - - - - " - - - - - - · _.1___~-- ... I I I I I I I _ L - - -_ _ _ _ _ _
I
.
~
..-
1
1
!
•
1 947117'.
47116
I
~
.
I Avd. I s;~
_V.J-----+-1
~
.
I
--g-r---+: ~ it'.~
I Location in Rm/Ar I Application I Condition I
:
1---
/32
.
I 947114-,
rr (.. I ...
It '
I Room/Area
Analysis report to be attached to this sheet and returned to Asbestos,Technical Supervisor (!
\
\
7doivttb
d--/"V17...,
oJu.
L.A.U.S.D. Environmental Health and Safety Branch 1425 S. San Pedro st. Rm. 215 CA 90015 Los Angeles (213) 71,2-7371 LAUSD Lab I
947113
Date Submitted
Mic pst
02/12/93 ·CH
Date Analyzed
02/16/93
ASBESTOS BULK SAMPLE ANALYSIS LABORATORY REPORT LOS ANGELES !:IS CIP 8739
Chr Material
Source
ADM CONTROL BOOTH NE
02/12/93
CH
02/16/93
91,7116
02/12/93
02/12/93
LPH
CH
02/16/93
02/16/93
HOMOGENEOUS CEMENT GREY NON-FRIABLE
0
ADM CONTROL BOOTH SE PLASTER
HOMOGENEOUS CEMENT GREY NON-FRIABLE
0
ADM & CLRM AUD S/E
HOMOGENEOUS CEMENT GREY NON-FRIABLE
0
19C-T AUD S/CTR WALL PLASTER
HOMOGENEOUS CEMENT GREY NON-FRIABLE
0
19C-T AUD S/W PLASTER
HOMOGENEOUS CEMENT GREY NON-FRIABLE
0
ADM CONTROL BOOTH W
PLASTER
947117
J47118
02/12/93
02/12/93
CH
CH
02/16/93
02/16/93
Signature of Lab Supervisor: ~OTE:
X
0
PLASTER
947115
Material Description
HOMOGENEOUS CEMENT GREY NON-FRIABLE
PLASTER
947111,
NVLAP # 1505
WALL
Atri X
0
Oth X
0
Tot %
Page 1
Material Background
0
QUARTZ CALCITE BLUE PIGMENT 0
0
0 QUARTZ CALCITE
0
0
0 QUARTZ CALCITE BLUE PIGMENT
0
0
0 QUARTZ CALCITE
0
0
0 QUARTZ
"'"''uro o£ " ' " " " ' '
0
0
CALCITE
0 QUARTZ CALCITE
~'
OX : No Asbestos Detected; Detected Above OX and Below or Equal to 1%. This report relates to only the material used. This report is not used by the LAUSD/EHSB to claim product endorsement by NVLAP or any agency of the U.S. government.
02 2600-44
\
. ---:2:
i
EMSL Analytical, Inc&
159 Pasadena Ave South Pasadena, CA 91030 Phone: (213) 254-9960
Fax: (213) 254-9982
Attn.: Robert Clark
los Angeles Unified School District
Wednesday, February 11,
1240 South Naomi Avenue Los Angeles, CA 90021
Ref Number:
PS98369
POLARIZED liGHT MICROSCOPY {PlM) Performed by EPA 600/R-93/116 Method* Project: 0198-014- Los Angeles High School
SAIVJPLE
APPEARANCE
LOCATION Backstage- East
239
Black
stairs
Building
SAMPLE TREATMENT Dissolved
ASBESTOS
%
TYPE
2% Chrysotile
NONASBESTOS %
FIBROUS
%
NONFIBROUS
93% Matrix
5% Cellulose
Non-Fibrous Homogeneous
Drama Bldg Admin-West
Room
Mtlcode
IT
Mtl desc
Black flooring mastic
DSR Room 91- North
240
White
None Detected
Crushed
40% Cellulose
45% Gypsum 15% Ca Carbonate
Fibrous Heterogeneous
~----------~------~~----~------------~--------------~----------------~--L-----------------------~-~---------Mtl code IH Building Admin-Cfassrm-WesU1 C-T MU desc White drywalf composite
Room DSR Room 93- South
241
White
None Detected
Teased
30% Cellulose
55% Gyps(Jm 15% Ca Carbonate
Fibrous Heterogeneous
Building
Admin-Ciassrm-Westt1 C-T
Room
Mtlcode
IH
Mtl desc
White drywall composite
DSR
:omments: For an obviously heterogeneous samples easily separated into subsamples, and for layered samples, each component is analyzed separately. Aiso, "#of .ayers" refers to number of separable subsamples. NY samples also analyzed by ELAP 198-1 Method
John Lopez Analyst
Approved Signatory
Disclaimers: PLM has been known to miss asbestos in a small percentage of samples which contain asbestos. Thus negative PLM results cannot be guaranteed, Samples reported as <1% or none detected should be tested with either SEM orTEM. The above test report relates only to the Items tested. This report may only be reproduced in part with written approval by EMSL. The abow. test must not be used by the client to claim product endorsement by NVLAP nor any agency of the United States Government. All "'NVLAP" reports with NVLAP logo must contain at least one signature to be valid. Laboratory is not responsible for the accuracy of results When requested to physically s~parate and analyze layered samples. Analysis performed by EMSL Pasadena (NVLAP Air and Bulk #200232-0, CA ELAP 2283)
02 2600-46
49
EMSL Analytical, Inc0
159 Pasadena Ave South Pasadena, CA 91030 Phone: (213) 254-9960
Fax: (213) 254-9982
Attn.: Robert Clark
los Angeles Unified School District 1240 South Naomi Avenue Los Angeles, CA 90021
Wednesday, February 11, R~Numbm:
PS98369
POlARIZED UGHT MICROSCOPY (PlM) Performed by EPA 600/R-93/116 Method* Project: 0198-014- los Angeles High School
SAMPLE ~42
APPEARANCE
LOCATION Hallway 25- East
White
SAMPLE TREATMENT
ASBESTOS TYPE
%
None Detected
Teased
NONASBESTOS
%
FIBROUS
%
40% Cellulose
50% Gypsum
10% Ca Carbonate
Fibrous Heterogeneous Building
NONFIBROUS
Mtl code
Admin-Ciassrm-WesU1 C- T
IH
Mtl desc White drywall composite
Room
DSR •43
Hallway 6 by Men's Bathroom- South
Building
White
None Detected
Teased
25% Cellulose
60% Gypsum 15% Ca Carbonate
Fibrous Heterogeneous Mtlcode
Admln-Ciassrm-WesU1 C-T
">
IH
Mtl desc White drywall composite
Room
DSR Lobby 1- East
44
White
None Detected
Teased
25% Cellulose
60%Gypsum 15% Ca Carbonate
Fibrous Heterogeneous Building
Admin-Classrm-WesU1 C-t
Mtl cOde
IH
Mtl desc White drywall composite
Room
DSR
Dmments: For all obviously heterogeneous samples easily separated into subsamples, and for layered samples, each component is analyzed separately. Also, "# of IYers" refers to number of separable subsamples.
W samples also analyzed by ELAP 198-1
Method
John Lopez Analyst
Approved Signatory
Disclaimers: PLM has been known to miss ~sbestos in a small percentage of samples which contain asbestos, Thus negative PLM results cannot be guaranteed. Samples reported as <1% or none detected should be tested with e~her SEM or TEM. Tile above test report relates only to the items tested. This report may only be reproduced in part with written approval by EMSL. The above test must not be used by the client to claim product endorsement by NVLAP nor any agency of the United States Government. AII"NVLAP" reports with NVLAP logo must contain at least one signature to be valid. Laboratory is not responsible for the accuracy of results when requested to physically separate and analyze layered samples.
Analysis perlormed by EMSL Pasadena (NV LAP Air and Bulk #200232-0, CA ELAP 2283)
02 2600-47
50
EMSL Analytical, /nee
159 Pasadena Ave South Pasadena, CA 91030 Phone: (213) 254-9960
Fax: (213) 254-9982
Attn.: Robert Clark Los Angeles Unified School District 1240 South Naomi Avenue Los Angeles, CA 90021
Wednesday, February 11 , Ref Number:
PS98369
POLARIZED LIGHT MICROSCOPY (PLM) Performed by EPA 600/R-93/116 Method*
Project: 0198-014 - los Angeles High School
SAMPLE
245
APPEARANCE
LOCATION 2nd Floor, Room 214- South
White
SAMPLE TREATMENT
ASBESTOS
%
TYPE None Detected
Teased
NONASBESTOS %
FIBROUS
%
10% Cellulose
NONFIBROUS
70% Gypsum 20% Ca Carbonate
Fibrous Heterogeneous _
Building
Admin-Ciassrm-WesU1 C-T
Room
Mtl code
IH
Mtl desc
White drywall composite
DSR 2nd Floor. Room 200-North
Building
White
None Detected
Teased_
10% Cellulose
70% Gypsum 20% Ca Carbonate
Fibrous Heterogeneous Mtl code
Admin-Ciassrm-WesU1 C-T
IH
Mtf desc White drywall composite
Room DSR Room 91- North
247
White
None Detected
Ashed
None Detected
100% Ca Carbonate
Non-Fibrous Homogeneous
Building
Admin-Ciassrm-WesU1 C"T
Mil code
II
Mtl desc White mud
Room DSR
Comments: For all obviously heterogeneous samples easily separated into subsamples, and for layered samples, each component is analyzed separately. Also, "#of Layers" refers to number of separable subsamples_ • NY samples also analyzed by ELAP 198-1 Method
John Lopez Analyst
Approved Signatory
Disclaimers: PLM has been known to miss asbestos in a small percentage of samples which contain asbestos_ Thus negative PLM results cannot be guaranteed. Samples reported as <1% or none ·detected should be tested wi!h either SEM or TEM. The above test report relates only to the Items tested_ This report may only be reproduced in part with written approval by EMSL. The above test must not be used by the client to claim product endorsement by NV LAP nor any agency of the United States Government. All "NVLAP" reports with NVLAP fogo. mu~t contain at least one signature to be valid. Laboratory is not responsible lor the accuracy ot results when requested to physically separate and analy:>e layered samples.
51
EMSL Analytical, /nco
159 Pasadena Ave South Pasadena, CA 91030 Fax: (213) 254-9982 Phone: (213) 254-9960
Attn.: Robert Clark Wednesday, February 11,
Los Angeles Unified School District 1240 South Naomi Avenue Los Angeles, CA 90021
Ref Number:
PS98369
POlARIZED liGHT MICROSCOPY (PlM) Performed by EPA 600/R-93/116 Method* Project: 0198-014 - Los Angeles High School
SAMPLE
248
APPEARANCE
LOCATION Room 93- South
White
SAMPLE TREATMENT
ASBESTOS
%
TYPE None Detected
Ashed
NONASBESTOS %
%
FIBROUS
NONFIBROUS
None Detected
100% Ca Carbonate
None Detected
100% Ca Carbonate
Non-Fibrous Homogeneous
Building
Admin-Ciassrm-West/1 C-T
Room
Mtlcode
II
Mtl desc
White mud
DSR
249
Hallway 25- East
White
None Detected
Ashed
Non-Fibrous Homogeneous ~
Building
Admin-Ciassrm-West/1 C-T
Room
Mil code
II
Mtldesc
While mud
DSR
2so
Hallway 6 by Men's Bathroom- South
White
None Detected
Crushed
None Detected
100% Matrix
Non-Fibrous Homogeneous
Building
Admin-Ciassrm-West/1 C-T
Room
Mtl code
II
Mil desc
White mud
DSR
~omments: For all obviously heterogeneous samples easily separated into subsamples, and for layered samples, each component is analyzed separately. Also, .E.yFrs~·
refers to number of separable subsamples.
• NY samples also analyzed by ElAP 198-1 Method
James Louis Ill Jackson Analyst
Approved Signatory
Disclaimers: PLM has been known to miss asbestos in a small percentage of samples which contain asbestos. Thus negative PLM results cannot be guaranteed. Samples reported as <1% or none detected should be tested with either SEM or TEM. The abDYe test report relates only to the Items tested. This report may only be reproduced in part with written approval by EMSL. The above test must not be used by the client lo claim product endorsement by NV LAP nor any agency of the United States Government. All "NVLAP:· reports with NVLAP logo must contain at least one signature to be valid. Laboratory is not responsible for the accuracy of results when requested to physically separate and analyze layered samples. Analysis performed by EMSL Pasadena (NVLAP Air and Bulk #200232-0, CA ELAP 2283)
02 2600-49
52
"# of
EMSL Analytical, Inc0
159 Pasadena Ave South Pasadena, CA 91030 Phone: (213) 254-9960
Fax: (213) 254-9982
Attn.: Robert Clark Los Angeles Unified School District 1240 South Naomi Avenue Los Angeles, CA 90021
Wednesday, February 11,
Ref Number:
PS98369
POLARIZED LIGHT MICROSCOPY (PLM) Performed by EPA 600/R-93/116 Method* Project: 0198-014- Los Angeles High School
SAMPLE
Lobby 1- East
51
APPEARANCE
LOCATION
White
SAMPLE TREATMENT
ASBESTOS TYPE
%
None Detected
Crushed
NONASBESTOS
%
%
FIBROUS
NONFJBROUS
None Detected
100% Matrix
None Detected
100% Matrix
Non-Fibrous Homogeneous Building
Mtl code II
Admin-Ciassrm-West/1 C-T
Mtl desc White mud
Room DSR 2nd Floor, Room 214- South
52
White
None Detected
Crushed
Non-Fibrous Homogeneous
Building
Admin-Ciassrm-West/1 C-T
Room
Mtl code
II
Mtl desc
White mud
"~
DSR 2nd Floor, Room 200- North
53
Building
White
None Detected
Crushed
None Detected
100% Matrix
Non-Fibrous Homogeneous
Admin-Ciassrm-West/1 C-T
Mtl code
II
Mtl desc White mud
Room DSR
Jmments: For all obviously heterogeneous samples easily separated into subsamples, and for layered samples, each component is analyzed separately. Also. "# of 1yers" refers to number of separable subsamples. -.JY samples also analyzed by ELAP 198-1 Method
lames Louis Ill Jackson Analyst
Approved Signatory
Disclaimers: PLM has been known to miss asbestos in a small percentage of samples which contain ;;~sbestos. Thus negative PLM results cannot be guaranteed. Samples reported as <1% or none detected s~ould be tested with either SEM orTEM. The above test report relates only to the items tested. This report may only be reproduced in part with written approval by EMSL. The above test must not be used by the client to claim product endorsement by NVLAP nor any agency ot the United States Government AII"NVLAP" reports with NVLAP logo must contain a! least one signature to be valid. Laboratory is not responsible for the accuracy of results when requested to physically separate and analyze layered samples. Analysis performed by EMSL Pasadena (NV LAP A1r and Bulk #200232-0, CA ELAP 2263)
02 2600-50
53
EMSL Analytical, Inc.,
159 Pasadena Ave South Pasadena, CA 91030 Phone: (213) 254-9960
Fax: (213) 254-9982
Attn.: Robert Clark los Angeles Unified School District 1240 South Naomi Avenue Los Angeles, CA 90021
Wednesday, February 11, Ref Number:
PS98369
POLARIZED LiGHT MICROSCOPY (PlM) Performed by EPA 600/R-93"!116 Method* Project: 0198-014- los Angeles High School
SAMPLE 54
LOCATION Office 93 by Instrument- South
Building
APPEARANCE Brown
SAMPLE TREATMENT
ASBESTOS
%
TYPE None Detected
Dissolved
NONASBESTOS
%
FIBROUS
%
NONFJBROUS
35% Synthetic 35% Cellulose
Fibrous Homogeneous
30% Min. Wool
Admin-Ciassrm-Westl1 C- t
Mtlcode
IZ
Mtl desc Wht 2x2 rand. acoustic CT
Room DSR Boy's Waiting Room83
55
BroWn
None D"etected
Dissolved
35% Synthetic 35% Cellulose
Fibrous Homogeneous
30% Min. Wool ~::;·
BuOding
Mtl code
Admin-Ciassrm-West/1 C-T
IZ
Mil desc Wht 2x2 rand. acoustic CT
Room DSR
56
Waiting 11 by door
Brown
None Detected
Dissolved
Building
Admin-Ciassrm-West/1 C-T
Room
35% Synthetic 35% Cellulose
Fibrous Homogeneous
30% Min. Wool Mtl code
IZ
Mtl desc
Wht 2x2 rand. acoustic CT
DSR
1mments: For all obviously heterogeneous samples easily separated into subsamples, and for layered samples, each component is analyzed separately. Also, "#of -yers" refers }o number of separable subsamples.
lY samples also analyzed by ELAP 198-1 Method
James Louis 111 Jackson Analyst
Approved Signatory
Disclaimers: PLM has been known to miss asbestos .n a small percentage o! samples which contain asbestos. Thus negative PLM results cannot be guaranteed. Samples reported as <1% or none detected should be tested with either SEM or TEM. The above test report relates only to the items tested. This report m~y only be reproduced in part With wntten approval by EMSL. The above test must not be used by the client to claim product endorsement by NV LAP nor any agency of the Unlte.d States Government. All "NVLAP'" reports with NVLAP logo must contain at least one signature to be valid. Laboratory is not responsible for the accuracy of results when requested to physically separate and analyze layered samples.
.
02 2600-51
54
EMSL Analytical, Inc$
159 Pasadena Ave South Pasadena, CA 91030 Phone: (213) 254-9960
Fax: (213) 254-9982
Attn.: Robert Clark los Angeles Unified Schooi District 1240 South Naomi Avenue Los Angeles, CA 90021
Wednesday, February 11, Ref Number:
PS98369
POLARIZED LIGHT MICROSCOPY (PlM) Performed by EPA 600/R-93/116 Method* Project: 0198-014- Los Angeles High School
SAMPLE
257
Wa~ing
Building
APPEARANCE
LOCATION 25- North
Brown
SAMPLE TREATMENT
ASBESTOS TYPE
%
None Detected
Dissolved
NONASBESTOS
%
FIBROUS
Fibrous Homogeneous
30% Min. Wool
Room
NONFIBROUS
35% Synthetic 35% Cellulose
Admin-Ciassrm-West/1 C-T
%
Mtlcode
IZ
Mtl desc
Wht 2x2 rand. acoustic CT
DSR
258
2nd Floor, Room 200- East
Brown
None Detected
Dissolved
35% Synthetic
Fibrous
35% Cellulose
Homogeneous
30% Min. Wool ~~~:-
Building . Admin-Ciassrm-West/1 C-T
Mtl code
IZ
Room
Mtl desc
Wht 2x2 rand. acoustic CT
DSR ~59
2nd Floor, Room
· 203- North
Building
Brown
None Detected
Dissolved
35% Synthetic
Fibrous
35% Cellulose
Homogeneous
30% Min. Wool
Admln-Ciassrm-West/1 C-T
Room
Mtl code
IZ
Mtl desc
Wht 2x2 rand. acoustic CT
DSR
:omments: For all obviously heterogeneous samples easily separated into subsarnples, and for laye_red samples, each component is analyzed separately. Also, "# of .ayers" refers to f!_umber of separable subsamples. NY.samples also analyzed by ELAP198"1 Method
James Louis Ill Jackson Analyst
Approved Signatory
Disclaimers: PLM has been known to miss asbestos in a small percentage of samples which contain asbestos. Thus negative PLM results cannot be guaranteed. Samples reported as <1% or none detected should be tested with either SEM or TEM. The above test report relates only to the items tested. This report may only be reproduced in part with written apprOV
02 2600-52
55
EMSL Analytical, /nee
159 Pasadena Ave South Pasadena, CA 91030 Phone: (213) 254-9960
Fax: (213) 254-9982
Attn.: Robert Clark los Angeles Unified School District 1240 South Naomi Avenue Los Angeles, CA 90021
Wednesday, February 11, Ref Number:
PS98369
POLARIZED liGHT MICROSCOPY {PLM} Performed by EPA 600/R-93/116 Method* Project: 0198-014 - los Angeles High School
SAMPLE
260
LOCATION 2nd Floor, Room 201- North
Building
APPEARANCE Brown
SAMPLE TREATMENT
ASBESTOS TYPE
%
None Detected
Dissolved
NONASBESTOS %
FIBROUS
%
NONFIBROUS
35% Synthetic 35% Cellulose
Fibrous Homogeneous
30% Min. Wool
Admin-Classrm-West/1 C-T
Room
Mtl code
lZ
Mil desc
Wht 2x2 rand. acoustic CT
DSR Waiting 11 by door
261
Brown
None Detected
Dissolved
Building
35% Synthetic 35% Cellulose
Fibrous Homogeneous
30% Min. Wool
Admin-Ciassrm-West/1 C-T
Room
?0
Mtlcode
IZ
Mtl desc
Offwht text. spray-on ACT
DSR Waiting 23- Middle
62
Brown
None Detected
Dissolved
35% Cellulose
Fibrous Homogeneous Building
Admin-Ciassrm-West/1 C-T
Room
35% Synthetic 30% Min. Wool
Mil code
IZ
Mtl desc
Offwht text. spray-on ACT
DSR
,mments: For all obviously heterogeneous samples easily separated Into subsamples, and for layered samples, each component is analyzed separately. Also, "#of yers" refers to numb~! of separable subsamples_ IY sam~$ also analyzed by ELAP 198-1 Method
James Louis Ill Jackson Analyst
Approved Signatory
Disclaimers; PLM has been known to miss asbestos in a small percentage of samples which contain asbestos. Thus negative PLM results cannot be guaranteed. Samples reported as <1% or none detected should be tested with either SEM or TEM. The above test report relates only to the ~ems tested. This report may only be reproduced in part with written approval by EMSL. The above test must not be used by the client to claim product endorsement by NV LAP nor any agency of the United States Government. All "NVLAP" reports with NVLAP logo must contain at least one signature to be valid. Laboratory is not responsible for the accuracy of results when requested to physically separate and analyze layered samjlles.
56
EMSL Analytical, I nee
!59 Pasadena Ave South Pasadena, CA 91030 Phone: (213) 254-9960
Attn.: Robert Clark Los Angeles Unified School District 1240 South Naomi Avenue Los Angeles, CA 90021
Fax: (213) 254-9982
Wednesday, February 11, 1998 Ref Number:
PS98369
POLARIZED LIGHT MICROSCOPY (PLM) Performed by EPA 600/R-93/116 Method*
Project: 0198-014- los Angeles High School
SAMPLE
LOCATION Waiting 23- Middle
Building
APPEARANCE Brown
SAMPLE TREATMENT
ASBESTOS TYPE
%
NONASBESTOS %
None Detected
Dissolved
FIBROUS
Fibrous
35% Cellulose 30% Min. Wool
Room
NONFIBROUS
35% Synthetic
Homogeneous Admln-Ciassim-West/1·C-T
%
Mtl code
IZ
Mtl desc
Offwht text. spray-on ACT
DSR Boy's Waiting 83North
64
Brown
Teased
Trace Chrysotile
None Detected
100% Matrix
Non-Fibrous Homogeneous
...
~
Building
Admln-Ciassrm-West/1 C-T
Room
Mtl code
IR
Mtl desc
Brown 12x12 vinyl tile
DSR Room 91 by Instrument- North
35
Brown
Teased
Trace Chrysotile
100% Matrix
None Detected
Non-Fibrous Homogeneous
Building
Admin-Ciassrm-West/1 C-T
Room
Mtlcode
IR
Mtl desc
Brown 12><12 vinyl tile
DSR
)mments: For all obviously heterogeneous samples easily separated into subsamples, and for layered samples, each component is analyzed separately. Also,"# of tyers" refers to number of _separa~le subsamples. i/Y samP.Ies ~-;o analyzed by ELAP 198-1 Method
!ames Louis Ill Jackson Analyst
Approved Signatory
Disclaimers: PLM has been known to miss asbestos m a small percentage of samples which contain asbestos_ Th!Js negdtive PLM results cannot
be guaranteed. Samples reported as -<1% or none detecled should be tested with either SEM orTEM. The above test report relates only to the items tested. This report may only be reproduced in part With wntten appro"" I by EMSL. The above test must not be used by the client to claim product endorsement by NV LAP nor any agency of the United Slates Government. All ""NV LAP" reports with NVLAP logo must contain at least one signature to be valid. Laboratory is not responsible for the accuracy of results when requested to physically separate and analyze layered samples.
02 2600-54.
57
EMSL Analytical, Inc.
159 Pasadena Ave South Pasadena, CA 91030
Fax: (213) 254-9982
Phone: (213) 254-9960
Attn.: Robert Clark los Angele$ Unified School District 1240 South Naomi Avenue Los Angeles, CA 90021
Wednesday, February 11, Ref Number:
PS98369
POLARIZED LIGHT MICROSCOPY CPLM) Performed by EPA 600/R-93/116 Method* Project: 0198-014- Los Angeles High School
SAMPLE ~66
APPEARANCE
LOCATION Ticket Booth- West
Brown
SAMPLE TREATMENT Teased
ASBESTOS
TYpE
%
NONASBESTOS %
Trace Chrysotile
%
FIBROUS
NONFIBROUS
None Detected
100% Matrix
None Detected
100% Matrix
Non-Fibrous Homogeneous Building
Admin-Ciassrm-West/1 C· T
Room
Mtlcode
IR
Mtl desc
Brown 12x12 vinyl tile
DSR 2nd Floor corridor 202- East
!67
Brown
Teased
Trace Chrysotile
Non-Fibrous Homogeneous ~~
Building
Admin-Ciassrm-West/1 C-T
Room
Mtl code
IR
Mtl desc
Brown 12x12 vinyl tile
DSR
138
2nd Floor corridor 202- NE
Building
Brown
Teased
Trace Chrysotile
None Detected
100% Matrix
Non-Fibrous Homogeneous
Admin-Ciassrm-West/1 C-T
Mtl code
IR
Mil desc Brown 12x12 vinyl tile
Room DSR
omments: For all obviously heterogeneous samples easily separated into subsamples, and for layered samples, each component Is analyzed separately. Also, "# of ayers" refers to number of sep~rable subsamples. NY samples als~nalyzed by ELAP 198-1 Method
James Louis Ill Jackson Analyst
Approved Signatory
Disclaimers: PLM has been known to miss asbestos in a small percent>ge of samples which contain asbestos. Thus negative PLM results cannot be guaranteed. Samples reported as <1% or none detected should be tested with either SEM orTEM. The above test report relates only to the items tested. This report may only be reproduced in part with Volfi!ten approval by EMSL The above test must not be used by the client 1o claim product endorsement by NY LAP nor any agency of the United States Government. All "NVLAP" reports with NVLAP logo must contain at least one signawre to be valid. laboratory is not responsible for the accuracy of results when requested to physicatly separate and analyze layered samples.
02 2600-55
58
EMSL Analytical, I nee
159 Pasadena Ave South Pasadena, CA 91030 Phone: (213) 254-9960
Fax: (213) 254-9982
Attn.: Robert Clark Los Angeles Unified School District 1240 South Naomi Avenue Los Angeles, CA 90021
Wednesday, February 111 1998 Ref Number:
PS98369
POlARIZED liGHT MICROSCOPY CPLM} Performed by EPA 600/R-93/116 Method* Project: 0198-014- Los Angeles High School
SAMPLE
269
APPEARANCE
LOCATION 2nd Floor corridor 201-South
Brown
SAMPLE TREATMENT Teased
TYPE
NOJIJASBESTOS
%
Trace Chrysolite
%
RBR9US
NONRBROUS
None Detected
100% Matrix
None Detected
100% Matrix
Non-Fibrous Homogeneous
Admin-Ciassrm-West/1 C-T
Building
ASBESTOS %
Room
Mtlcode
IR
Mtl desc
Brown 12x12 vinyl tile
DSR !70
-
2nd Floor corridor 201- South
Brown
Teased
Trace Chrysotile
Non-Fibrous Homogeneous
------------~--------~--~--------------~--------------~------------------~------------------------~~J---------
Building
Admin-Ciassrm-West/1C-T
Room
Mil code
IR
Mtl desc
Brown 12x12 vinyl tile
DSR Boy's Waiting 83North
71
Building
Brown
None Detected
Teased
None Detected
100% Matrix
Non-Fibrous Homogeneous
Admin-Ciassrm-West/1 C-T
Mtlcode IT Mtl desc
Room
Black nooring mastic
DSR
>mments: For all obviously heterogeneous samples easily separated into subsamples, and for layered samples, each component is analyzed separately. Also, "# of yers• refers to number of separable subsamples. ·
N samples also analyzed by ELAFr 196-1 Method
....
James Louis Ill Jackson Analyst
Approved Signatory
Disclaimers: PLM has been known to miss asbestos in a small percentage of samples which contain asbestos. Thus negative PLM results cannot be guaranteed. Samples reported as -<1% or none detected should be tested with either SEM or TEM. The above test report relates only to the items tested. This report may only be reproduced in part with written approval by EMSL. The above test must not be used by the client to claim product endorsement by NVLAP nor any agency of the United States Government All "NVLAP" reports with NVLAP logo must contain at least one signature to be valid. Laboratory is not responsible ror the accuracy of results when requested to physically separate and analyze layered samples.
'
l
59
EMSL Analytical, I nee
159 Pasadena Ave South Pasadena, CA 91030 Phone: (213) 254-9960
Fax: (213)
~J~I-Y~faL-.a
Attn.: Robert Clark los Angeles Unified School District 1240 South Naomi Avenue Los Angeles, CA 90021
Ref Number:
PS98369
POlARIZED liGHT MICROSCOPY (PlM} Performed by EPA 600/R-93/116 Method* Project: 0198-014 - los Angeles High School
SAMPLE
272
LOCATION Room 91 by Instrument North
Building
APPEARANCE Brown
SAMPLE TREATMENT
ASBESTOS
%
TYPE None Detected
Teased
NONASBESTOS
%
FIBROUS
%
NONFJBROUS
None Detected
100% Matrix
None Detected
100% Matrix
Non-Fibrous Homogeneous
Admin-Ciassrm-West/1 C-T
Room
Mtl code
IT
Mtl desc
Black flooring mastic
DSR Ticket Booth West
Brown
Teased
Trace Chrysotile
Non-Fibrous Homogeneous ~--------~------------~----------~------------~---------------L--------------------~~.-------1
Building
Admin-Ciassrm-West/1 C-T
Room
Mtlcode
IT
Mtl desc
Black flooring mastic
DSR 2nd Floor corridor 202- East
274
Bu,lding
Black
Dissolved
6% Chrysotile
None Detected
94% Matrix
Non-Fibrous Homogeneous
Admin-Ciassrm-West/1 C-T
Room DSR
Mtl code
IT
Mtl desc
Black flooring mastic
Comments: For all obviously heterogeneous samples easily separated into subsamples, and for layered samples, each component is analyzed separately. Also,"# of Layers" refers to number of separable subsamples.
...
• NY samples also analyzed by ELAP 1'::l8c1 Method
James Louis Ill Jackson Analyst
Approved Signatory
Disclaimers: PLM has been known to miss asbestos in a small percentage of samples which contain asbestos. Thus negative PLM results cannot be guaranteed. Samples reported as <1% or none detected should be tested with either SEM or TEM. The above test report relates only to the items tested. This report may only be reproduced in i>•rt with written approval by EMSL. The above test must not be used by the client to claim product endorsement by NVLAP nor any agency of the Unrted States Government. All "NVLAP" re~or1s with NVLAP logo must contain at least one signature to be valid. Laboratory is not responsible for the accuracy of results when requested to physically separate and analyze layered samples. ·
02 2600-57
60
EMSL Analytical, /nco
159 Pasadena Ave South Pasadena, CA 91030
Fax: (213) 254-9
Phone: (213) 254-9960 Attn.: Robert Clark los Angeles Unified School District 1240 South Naomi Avenue Los Angeles, CA 90021
Wednesday, February 11, 1998 Ref Number:
PS98369
POlARIZED LIGHT MICROSCOPY (PlM) Performed by EPA 600/R-93/116 Method* Project: 0198-014- Los Angeles High School
SAMPLE
275
LOCATION 2nd Floor corridor 202- NE
Building
APPEARANCE Black
SAMPLE TREATMENT Dissolved
ASBESTOS
TYPE
%
6% Chrysotile
NONASBESTOS %
FIBROUS
%
NONFIBROUS
None Detected
94% Matrix
None Detected
100% Matrix
Non-Fibrous Homogeneous
Admin-Ciassrm-West/1 C-T
Room
Mtlcode
IT
Mtl desc
Black flooring mastic
·DSR
276
2nd Floor corridor 201-South
Black
Dissolved
Trace Chrysotile
Non-Fibrous Homogeneous
------------~------------~--------------~--------------~-------------------L------------------------~~---------~ Mtl code IT Building Admin-Ciassrm-West/1 C-T
Mtl desc
Room
Black flooring mastic
DSR
2nd Floor corridor 201-South
Black
Dissolved
2% Chrysotile
None Detected
98% Matrix
Non-Fibrous Homogeneous
Building
Admin-Ciassrm-West/1 C-T
Mtlcode IT Mil desc
Room
Black flooring mastic
DSR
'mments: For all obviously heterogeneous samples easily separated into subsamples. and for layered samples, each component is analyzed separately.. Aiso, "#or iyers·· rerers to number of separable subsamples. ~y
samples also analyzed by ElAP 196-1 Method
James Louis Ill Jackson Analyst Disclaim~rs:
Approved Signatory PLM has been known to miss asbestos in a small percentage of samples which contain asbestos. Thus negative PLM resurts cannpt
be guaronteed. Samples reported as <1% or none detected should be tested with either SEM or TEM. The above test report relates only to the items tested. This report may only be reproduced in part with written approval by EMSL. The above test must not be used by the client to claim product endorsement by NVLAP nor any agency ol the United States Government All "NVLAP' reports with NVLAP logo must contain at least one signature to be valid. Laboratory is not responsible for the accuracy of results when requested to physically separate and analyze layered samples.
02 2600-58
61
EMSL Analytical, IncQ
159 Pasadena Ave South Pasadena, CA 91030 Phone: (213) 254-9960
Attn.: Robert Clark
los Angeles Unified School District
Wednesday, February 11, 1998
1240 South Naomi Avenue Los Angeles, CA 90021
Ref Number:
PS98369
POLARIZED LIGHT MICROSCOPY (PlM) Performed by EPA 600/R-93/116
Method~
Project: 0198-0 14 - los Angeles High School
SAMPLE
LOCATION
APPEARANCE
Boy's Waiting 83
SAMPLE TREATMENT
ASBESTOS TYPE
%
NONASBESTOS %
None Detected
Brown
FIBROUS
%
None Detected
100% Other
None Detected
100% Other
None Detected
100% Other
Non-Fibrous Homogeneous Building
Admin-Ciassrm-WesU1 C-T
Room
Mtl code
ID
Mtl desc
3" brown base mold/cove
DSR
279
By entry 11
Brown
None Detected
Teased
Non-Fibrous Homogeneous Building
Admin-Ciassrm-West/1 C-T
Room
Mtlcode
ID
Mtl desc
3" brown base mold/cove
DSR ~80
Floor corridor byRoom212
Building
Brown
None Detected
Teased
Non-Fibrous Homogeneous
Admin-Ciassrm-West/1 C-T
Room
Mtl code
ID
Mtl desc
3" brown base mold/cove
DSR
lmments: For all obviously heterogeneous samples easily separated into subsamples, and for layered samples, each component Is analyzed separately. Also, "#of yers" refers to number of separable subsamples.
N samples also analyzed by ELA P 198-1 MethG::l · ~
James Louis Ill Jackson Analyst
Approved Signatory
Disclaimers: PLM has been known to miss asbestos in a smaU percentage of samples which contain asbestos_ Thus negative PLM results cannot be guaranteed. Samples reported as <1% or none detected should be tested with eilher SEM or TEM. The above test report relates only to the items tested. This report may only be reproduced in part with written approval by EMSL. The above test must not be used by the.client to claim product endorsement by NVLAP nor any agency of the United States Government. All "'NVLAP'" reports with NVLAP logo must contain at least one signature to be valid. Laboratory is not responsible for the accuracy of results when requested to physically separate and analyze layered samples.
62
EMSL Analytical, Inc@
159 Pasadena Ave South Pasadena, CA 91030 Phone;· (213) 254-9960
Fax: (213)
~J••·7;~o-'«~~
Attn.: Robert Clark Los Angeles Unified School District 1240 South Naomi Avenue Los Angeles, CA 90021
Wednesday, February 11,
Ref Number:
PS98369
POlARIZED LiGHT MICROSCOPY· (PLM) Performed by EPA 600/R-93/116 Method* Project: 0198-0 14 - Los Angeles High School
SAMPLE
LOCATION · Boy's Waiting 83
281
APPEARANCE Brown
SAMPLE TREATMENT
ASBESTOS
NONASBESTOS
TYPE
%
%
None Detected
Teased
FIBROUS
NONFIBROUS
%
None Detected
100% Other
None Detected
100% Other
Non-Fibrous Homogeneous Building
Admin-Ciassrm-WesU1 C-T
Room
Mil code
IE
Mtf desc
Tan base mold glue
DSR By entry 11
'282
Brown
None Detected
Teased
Non-Fibrous Homogeneous
I
I
Building· Admin-Ciassrm-West/1 C-T
Mtl code
IE
Room
Mtfdesc
Tan base mold glue
·::;:
DSR 2nd Floor corridor 202 by Room 212
283
Building
Brown
None Detected
Teased
None Detected
100% Other
Non-Fibrous Homogeneous
Admin-Ciassrm-West/1 C-T
Room
Mtl code
IE
Mtl desc
Tan base mold glue
DSR
omments: For all obvio.usly heterogeneous samples easily separated into subsamples, and for layered samples, each component is analyzed separately. Also,"# of 1yers" refers to number of separable subsamples. \IY sam pies also analyzed by E LAP 198-1 Method
"""'·
James Louis Ill Jackson Analyst
Approved Signatory
Disdaimers: PLM has been knO'Nn to miss asbestos m a small percentage of samples which contain asbestos. ThUs negative PLM results cannot be guaranteed. Samples reported as <1% or none detected should be tested with either SEM or TEM. The above test report relates only to the ~ems tested. This report may only be reproduced in part with written approval by EMSL. The above test must not be used by the client to claim product endorsement by NV LAP nor any agency of the United States Government. All "NVLAP" reports w~h NVLAP logo must contain at least one signature to be valid. Laboratory is not responsible for the accuracy of results when requested to physically separate and analyze layered samples.
63
EMSL Analytical, Inc&
159 PasadenaAve South Pasadena, CA 91030 Phone: (213) 254-9960
Fax: (213)
~J·'I-YYll"!!?ll!
Attn.: Robert Clark los Angeles Unified School District 1240 South Naomi Avenue Los Angeles, CA 90021
Wednesday, February 11,
Ref Number:· PS98369
POLARIZED LIGHT MICROSCOPY (PlM} Performed by EPA 600/R-93/116 Method* Project: 0198-014- Los Angeles High School
SAMPLE
LOCATION 2nd Floor corridor 202- East
284
Building
APPEARANCE Blue
SAMPLE TREATMENT
ASBESTOS
TYPE
%
None Detected
Teased
NONASBESTOS
%
%
ABROUS
NONRBROUS
None Detected
100% Matrix
None Detected
100% Matrix
Non-Fibrous Homogeneous
Admin-Ciassrm-West/1 C-T
Room
Mil code
IR
Mtl desc
Blue 12x12 vinyl tile
DSR 2nd Floor corridor
285
201- North
Blue
None Detected
Teased
Non-Fibrous Homogeneous
~-----'----~---'--------'---------'------------'-----------~,··-----!
Building
Admin-Ciassrm-West/1 C-T
Room
Mtlcode
IR
Mtl desc
Blue 12x12 vinyl tile
DSR 2nd Floor corridor 201- South
Building
Blue
None Detected
Teased
None Detected
100% Matrix
Non-Fibrous Homogeneous
Admin-Ciassrm-West/1 C-T
Room
Mil code
IR
Mtl desc
Blue 12x12 vinyl tile
DSR
:omments; For all obviously heterogeneous samples easily separated into subsamp!es, and for layered samples, each component is analyzed separately. Also, "# of ayers" refers to number of separable subsamples. · NY samples also analyzed by ELAP 198-1 Method
James Louis Ill Jackson Analyst
Approved Signatory
Disclaimers: PLM has been known to miss asbestos rna sman percentage of samples which contain asbestos. Thus negative PLM results cannot be guar,.nteed. Samples reported as <1% or none detected should be tested with either SEM orTEM. The above test report relates only to the items tested. This report may only be reproduced in part with wntten approval by EMSL. The above test must not be used by the client to claim product endorsement by NVLAP nor any agency of the Unrted States Government AII"NVLAP" reports with NVLAp logo must contain at least one signature to be valid. Laboratory is not responsible for the accuracy of results when requested to physically separate and analyze layered samples.
02 2600-61
-.J.•.~ -.)._. _ _
64
EMSL Analytical, I nco
159 Pasadena Ave SouthPasi:ldena, CA 91030 Phone: (213) 254-9960
Fax: (213)
Attn.: Robert Clark
los Angeles Unified School District 1240 South Naomi Avenue Los Angeles, CA 90021
Wednesday, February 11, Ref Number:
PS98369
POLARIZED liGHT MICROSCOPY (PlM) Performed by EPA 600/R-931116 Method* Project: 0198-014- Los Angeles High School
LOCATION
SAMPLE
2nd Floor corridor 202- East
287
Building
APPEARANCE
SAMPLE TREATMENT Dissolved
Black
ASBESTOS
%
TYPE
5% Chrysotile
NONASBESTOS %
%
FJBR.OUS
NONFIBROUS
None Detected
95% Matrix
None Detected
95% Matrix
Non-Fibrous Homogeneous
Admin-Ciassrm-West/1 C-T
Room
Mil code
IT
Mil desc
Black flooring mastic
DSR 2nd Floor corridor 201- North
Black
Dissolved
5% Chrysotile
Non-Fibrous Homogeneous
~--------~~------------~--------------~--------------~------------------~----------------------~?---------1 Mtl code IT Building Admin-Ciassrm-West/1 C-T Mtl desc
Room
Black flooring mastic
DSR 2nd Floor corridor 201- South
Black
Dissolved
5% Chrysotile
None Detected
95% Matrix
Non~ Fibrous
Homogeneous
Building
Admin-Ciassmi-West/1 C-T
Room
Mtl code
IT
Mtl desc
Black flooring mastic
DSR
omments: For all obviously heterogeneous samples easily separated into subsamples, and for layered samples, each component is ana~ed separately. Also,"# of 1yers" refers to number of separable subsamples. \JY samples also analyzed by ELAP 198-1 Method
......
James Louis Ill Jackson Analyst
Approved Signatory
Disclaimers: PLM has been known to miss a•be•tos in a •mall percentage of samples which contain asbestos. Thus negative PLM results cannot be guaranteed. Sample• reported as <1% or none detected should be tested with either SEM or TEM. The above test report relates only to !he items .tested. This report may only be reproduced in part with written appr<)val by EMSL. The above le•t must not be used by the client to claim product endorsement by NVLAP nor any agency of the United States Government. All "NVLAP" reports with NVLAP logo must contain at least one •ignature to be valid. Laboratory is not responsible for !he accuracy of results wt>en requested to physically separate and analyze layered samples.
02 2600-62
) ...
65
EMSL Analytical, Inca
159 Pasadena Ave South Pasadena, CA 91030 Phone: (213) 254-9960
Attn.: Robert Clark Los Angeles Unified School District 1240 South Naomi Avenue Los Angeles, CA 90021
Wednesday, February 11, Ref Number:
PS98369
POLARIZED LIGHT MICROSCOPY (PLM) Performed by EPA 600/R-93/116 Method* Project: 0198-014- Los Angeles High School
SAMPLE
290
LOCATION 2nd Floor corridor 202- East
APPEARANCE White
SAMPLE TREATMENT
ASBESTOS
%
TYPE None Detected
Teased
NONASBESTOS %
FIBROUS
%
NONFJBROUS
None Detected
100% Matrix
None Detected
100%Matrix
Non-Fibrous Homogeneous
Building
Admin-Ciassnn-Weslf1 C-T
Room
Mtlcode
IR
Mtl desc
Beige 12><12 vinyl tile
DSR 2nd Floor corridor 201- West
291
White
None Detected
Teased
Non-Fibrous Homogeneous
------------~--------------~------------~--------------~--------------------L-----------------------~~~-------1
Building
Mtrcode
Admin-Ciassnn-West/1 C-T
IR
Mtl desc. Beige 12x12vinyl tile
Room DSR ~92
2nd Floor corridor 201- North
Bun ding
White
None Detected
Teased
None Detected
100%Matrix
Non-Fibrous Homogeneous
Admin-Classrm-West/1 C-T
Room
Mtl code
IR
Mtl desc
Beige 12><12 vinyl tile
DSR
:~mments: For all obviously heterogeneous samples easily separa!ed into subsamples, and for layered samples, each component is analyzeq separately. Also, ··#of 1yers" refers to number of separable subsamples.
IJY samples also analyzed by ELAP 198-1 Method
James louis Ill Jackson
Analyst
Approved Signatory
Disclaimers: PLM has been known to miss asbestos in a small percentage of samples Which contain asbestos. Thus negative PLM results cannot be guaranteed. Samples reported as <1% or none detected should be tested with either SEM or TEM. The above test report relates only to tile items tested. This report may only be reproduced in part with written approval by EMSL. The above test must not be used by the client lo claim product endorsement by NVLAP nor any agency of the United States Government. All "NV LAP" reports with NVLAP logo must contain at least one signature to be valid. Laboratory is not responsible for the accuracy of results when requested to physically separate and analyze layered samples.
02 2600-63
66
159 Pasadena Ave South Pasadena, CA 91030
EMSL Analytical, Inc.
Phone: (213) 254-9960
Fax: (213)
25<~-YYO.J.iQJ
Attn.: Robert Clark Los Angeles Unified School District 1240 South Naomi Avenue Los Angeles, CA 90021
Wednesday, February 11, Ref Number:
PS98369
POLARIZED liGHT MICROSCOPY (PLM} Performed by EPA 600/R-93/116 Method* Project: 0198-014- Los Angeles High School
SAMPLE
293
LOCATION 2nd Floor corridor 201- West
Building
APPEARANCE White
SAMPLE TREATMENT
ASBESTOS
%
TYPE None Detected
Teased
NONASBESTOS %
FIBROUS
%
NONFJBROUS
None Detected
100% Matrix
None Detected
100% Matrix
Non-Fibrous Homogeneous
Admin-Ciassrm-West/1 C-T
Room
Mtlcode
IR
Mtr desc
Beige 12X12 vinyl tile
DSR 2nd Floor corridor 201- West
White
None Detected
Dissolved
Non-Fibrous Homogeneous
----------~--------------~--------------~------------~~------------------~----------------------~·0·--------~ Mtl code IR Building Admin-Ciassrm-West/1 T
t-
Mtl desc
Room
Beige 12x12 vinyl tile
DSR
295
2nd Floor corridor 201- East
White
None Detected
Dissolved
None Detected
100% Matrix
Non-Fibrous Homogeneous
Building
Mll code
Admin-Ciassrm-West/1 C-T
IR
Mtl desc . Beige 12x12 vinyl tile
Room DSR
omments: For all obviously heterogeneous samples easily separated into subsamples, and for layered samples, each component is analyzed separately. Also, "#of 3yers" refers to number of separable subsamples. NY samples also analyzed by ElAP 198-1 Method
James Louis Ill Jackson Analyst
.~
.
Approved Signatory
Disclaimers: PLM has been known to miss asbestos m a small percentage of samples which contain asbestos. Thus negative PLM results cannot be guaranteed. Samples reported as <1% or none detected should be tested with either SEM or TEM. The above test report relates only to the items tested. This report may only be reproduced in part with wnnen approval by EMS~. The above test must not be used by the client to claim product endorsement by NVLAP nor any agency of the Umted States. Government. All "NVLAP" repOrts with NV LAP logo must contain at least one signature to be valid. Laboratory is not responsrble for the accuracy of results when requested to ph~ically separate and analyze layered samples.
02 2600-64
67
EMSL Analytical, Inc.,
159 Pasadena Ave South Pasadena, CA 91030 Phone: (213) 254-9960
Fax: (213) 254-9
Attn.: Robert Clark Los Angeles Unified School District 1240 South Naomi Avenue . Los Angeles, CA 90021
Wednesday, February 11, Ref Number:
PS98369
POLARIZED LIGHT MICROSCOPY {PlM) Performed by EPA 600/R-93/116 Method* Project: 0198-014 - los Angeles High School
SAMPLE SAMPLE
LOCATION 2nd Floor corridor
296
201- South
Building
APPEARANCE White
TREATMENT
ASBESTOS TYPE
%
None Detected
Dissolved
%
NONASBESTOS RBROUS % NONRBROUS None Detected
100% Matrix
None Detected
97% Matrix
Non-Fibrous Homogeneous
Admin-Ciassrm-WesV1 C- T
Room
Mil code
IR
Mtl desc
Beige 12x12 vinyl tile
DSR 2nd Froor corridor
202- East
Black
Dissolved
3% Chrysotile
Non-Fibrous Homogeneous
------------~------------~--------------~--------------~-------------------L------------~--------~-~--------~ Mtlcode IT Building Admin-Ciassrm-West/1 C-T Mtl desc
Room
Black flooring mastic
DSR 2nd Floor corridor 201- West
298
Building
Black
Dissolved
3% Chrysotile
None Detected
97% Matrix
Non-Fibrous Homogeneous
Admin-Classrm-Wesl/1 C-T
Room
MU code
IT
Mil desc
Black flooring mastic
DSR
:omments: For all obviously heterogeneous samples easily separated Into subsamples, and for layered samples, each component is analyzed separately. Also, "# of ayers" refers to number of separable subsamples. NY samples also analyzed by ELAP 198-1 Method
James Louis lll Jackson Analyst
Approved Signatory
Disclaimers: PLM has been known to miss asbestos in a small percentage of samples which contain asbestos. Thus negative PLM results cannot be guaranteed. Samples reported as <1% or none detected should be tested with either SEM or TEM. The above "test report relates only to the items tested. This report may only be reproduced in part with written approval by EMSL. The above test must not be used cy the client to claim product endorsement by NVLAP rior any agency of the United Stales Government. All ·NV LAP" reports with NVLAP logo must contain at least one signature to be valid. Laboratory is not responsible for the accuracy of results when requested to physically separate and analyze layered samples.
02 2600-65
68
EMSL Analytical, Inc@
159 Pasadena Ave South Pasadena, CA 91030 Phone: (213) 254-9960
Fax: (213) 254-
Attn.: Robert Clark Los Angeles Unified School District 1240 Sou~h Naomi Avenue Los Angeles, CA 90021
Wednesday, February 11, Ref Number:
PS98369
POLARIZED LIGHT MICROSCOPY (PLM) Performed by EPA 600/R-93/116 Method*
Project: 0198-014- los Angeles High School
SAMPLE
299
LOCATION 2nd Floor corridor 201- North
APPEARANCE Black
SAMPLE TREATMENT Dissolved
ASBESTOS
%
NONASBESTOS
TYPE
%
3% Chrysotile
%
FIBROUS
NONFIBROUS
None Detected
97% Matrix
None Detected
97% Matrix
Non-Fibrous Homogeneous
Building
Admin-Classrm-West/1 C-T
Room
Mtlcode
IT
Mtl desc
Black flooring mastic
DSR
2nd Floor corridor 201- West
300
Black
Dissolved
3% Chrysotile
Non-Fibrous Homogeneous
---~--------~--------------~--------------~--------------~------------------~------------------------~;~·--------~ Building
Admin-Ciassrm-Westf1 C-T
Room
Mtlcode
It
Mtl desc
Black flooring mastic
DSR 2nd Floor corridor 201- West
!301
Black
Dissolved
3% Chrysotile
None Detected
97% Matrix
Non-Fibrous Homogeneous
Building
Adrhin-Classrm-West/1 C-T
Room
Mtl code
IT
Mtl desc
Black flooring mastic
DSR
~omments: For all obviously heterogeneous samples easily separated into subsamples, and for layered samples, each component is analyzed separately. Also,"# of
.ayers" refers to number of separable subsamples.
·
-
NY samples also analyzed by ELAP 198-1 Method ·~.
James Louis ,Ill Jackson Analyst
Approved Signatory
Disclaimers: PLM has been known to miss asbestos in a small percentage of samples which contain asbestos. Thus negative PLM results cannot be guaranteed. Samples reported as <1% or none detected should be tested with either SEM or TEM. The above test report relates only to the items tested. This report may only be reproduced in part with written apprOIIlll by EMSL The above test must not be used by the client to claim product endorsement by NVLAP not any agency of the United States Government All "NVLAP" reports with NVLAP logo must conlain at least one signature to be valid. Laboratory is not responsible for the accuracy of results when requested to physically separate and analyze layered samples.
02 2600-66
69
EMSL Analytical, Inc.
159 Pasadena Ave South Pasadena, CA 91030 Phone: (213) 254-9960 Fax: (213) 254-9982
Attn.: Robert Clark los Angeles Unified School District 1240 South Naomi Avenue Los Angeles, CA 90021
Wednesday, February 11, Ref Number:
PS98369
POlARIZED liGHT MICROSCOPY (PLM} Performed by EPA 600/R-93/116 Metho-d* Project: 0198-014 - los Angeles High School
SAMPLE
302
LOCATION
APPEARANCE
SAMPLE TREATMENT
2nd Floor corridor 201- East
Building
NONASBESTOS
ASBESTOS
%
TYPE
%
%
FIBROUS
NONFJBROUS
Not Analyzed
Admin-Ciassrrn-WesV1 C-T
Room
Mtl code
IT
Mtl desc
Black flooring mastic
DSR
303
2nd Floor corridor 201- South
Black
Dissolved
3% Chrysotile
None Detected
97% Matrix
Non-Fibrous Homogeneous
Building
Admin-Ciassrm-WesU1 C-T
Mtlcode Mtl desc
Room
IT Black flooring mastic
DSR
lmments: For all obviously heterogeneous samples easily separated into subsamples, and for layered samples, each component is analyzed separately. Also, ''#of yers" refers to number of separable subsamples. ~Y
samples also analyzed by ELAP 198-1 Method
James Louis Ill Jackson Analyst
Approved Signatory
Disclaimers: PLM has been known to miss asbestos in a small percentage of samples which contain asbestos. Thus negative PLM results cannot be guaranteed. Samples reported as <1% or none detected should be tested with either SEM or TEM. The above test report relates only to the Items tested. This report may only be reproduced in part with written approval by EMSL The above test must not be used by the client to claim product endorsement by NVLAP_ nor any agency of the United States Government All "NVlAP'' reports with NVLAP logo must contain at least one si~nature to be valid. Laboratory is not responsible for the accuracy of results when requested to physically separate and analyze layered samples.
02 2600-67
70
EMSL Analytical, /nee
159 Pasadena Ave South Pasadena, CA 91030 Phone: (213) 254-9960
Fax: (213) ... ..J .. -77'"......,
Attn.: los Angeles Unified School District 1240 South Naomi Avenue Los Angeles, CA 90021
Wednesday, February 11, 1998 Ref Number:
PS98390
POLARIZED LIGHT MICROSCOPY (PLM) Performed by EPA 600/R-93/116 Method* Project: 0198-014 - los Angeles High School
::omments: For all obviously heterogeneous samples easily separated into subsamples, and for layered samples,· each component is analyzed separately. Also, "# of .ayers" refers to number of separable sub-:;amples. · NY samples also analyzed ~ ELAP 198-1 Method
James Louis Ill Jackson Analyst
Approved Signatory
Disclaimers: PLM has been known to miss asbestos in a small percentage of samples which contain asbestos. Thus negative PLM results cannot b.! guaranteed. Samples reported as <1% or none detected sMould be tested with either SEM or TEM. The above test report relates only to the items tasted. This report may only be reprQI!uced in part with written approval by EMSL The above test must not be used by the client to claim product endorsement by NVLAP nor any agency of the United States Government. AU "'NVLAP"' reports with NVLAP logo must contain at least one signature to be valid. Laboratory is not responsible for the accuracy of results when requested to physically separate and analyze layered samples.
30
EMSL Analytical, /nco
159 Pasadena Ave South Pasadena, CA 91030 Phone: (213) 254-9960
Attn.: los Angeles Unified School District 1240 South Naomi Avenue Los Angeles, CA 90021
Fax: (213) 254-9
Wednesday, February 11, 1998 Ref Number:
PS98390
POlARIZED UGHT MICROSCOPY (PLM) Performed by EPA 600/R-93/116 Method*
Project: 0198-014- los Angeles High School
SAMPLE
394
LOCATION
APPEARANCE
2nd Floor Walkway Eastside
Building
Tan
SAMPLE TREATMENT
ASBESTOS
TYPE
%
NONASBESTOS
%
None Detected
Crushed
FIBROUS
%
NONFIBROUS
None Detected
100% Matrix
None Detected
100% Matrix
Non-Fibrous Homogeneous
Admin. & Classroom West! #1 C-T
Room
Mtl code
EJ
Mil desc
Ceiling stucco composite
DSR 2nd Floor Walkway East side
395
Tan
None Defected
Crushed
Non-Fibrous Homogeneous ~·
Building
Admin. & Classroom West/#1C-T
Room
Mtl code
EJ
Mil desc
Ceiling stucco composite
DSR 2nd Floor Walkway East side
396
Building
Tan
Crushed
None Detected
None Detected
100% Matrix
Non-Fibrous Homogeneous
Admin. & Classroom West1#1C-T
Mtl code ·EJ
Mtl desc Ceiling stucco composite
Room
DSR
omments: For all obviously heterogeneous samples easily separated into subsamples, and for layered samples, each component is analyzed separately. Also, ~·# of 1yers" refers to number of separable subsamples. NY samples also analyzed by
EL~r.>
James Louis Ill Jackson Analyst
198-1 Method
Approved Signatory
Disclaimers: PLM has been known to miss asbestos In a small percentage ot samples which contain asbeslos. Thus negative PLM results cannot be guaranteed. Samples reported as
31
EMSL Analytical, /nco
159 Pasadena Ave South Pasadena, CA 91030 Phone: (213) 254-9960
Fax: (213) 254-9982
Attn.: Wednesday, February 11,
Los Angeles Unified School District 1240 South Naomi Avenue Los Angeles, CA 90021
Ref Number:
P$98390
POlARIZED LIGHT MICROSCOPY (PlM) Performed by EPA 600/R-93/116 Method* Project: 0198-014 - Los Angeles High School
·SAMPLE
LOCATION
APPEARANCE
2nd Floor Walkway Tan By Bridge Non-Fibrous Homogeneous Building
Admin. & Classroom WesU #1 C-T
Rqom
SAMPLE TREATMENT
NONASBESTOS
ASBESTOS
%
TYPE
%
None Detected
Crushed
Mtlcode
EJ
Mtl desc
Ceiling stucco composite
FIBROUS
%
None Detected
NONFIBROUS
100% Matrix
DSR
omments: For all obviously heterogeneous samples easily separated into subsamples, and for layered samples, each component is analyzed separately. Also, "# of 3yers" refers to number of separable subsamples ..NY samples also analyzed by ELAP 1"8'3-1 Method
James Louis Ill Jackson Analyst
Approved Signatory
Disclaimers: PLM has been known to miss asbestos in a small percentage of samples which contain asbestos. Thus negative PLM results cannot be guaranteed. Samples reported as <1% or none detected should be tested with either SEM or TEM. The ab test report relates only to the items tested. This report may only be reproduced in part with written approval by EMSL. The above test must not be used by the client to claim product endorsement by NVLAP nor any agency of the United States Government. All "NVlAP'' reports with NVlAP logo must contain at least one signature to be valid. Laboratory is not responsible for the accuracy of results when requested to physically separate and analyze layered samples.
32
Asbestos Engineering Assessment for Interior and Exterior Painting ProjeCt Los Angeles High School 4650 \1\fest Olympic Bl:vd., Los Angeles, CA 90019 SCA Project No.: l-4459, LAUSD Project No.: EM000793
Building
Throughout
Laboratory Results ND
Throughout
ND
ND
Smooth plaster walls.
Rooms I I, 25, 83, 93,200, 20I, and 203. Entrance, Stage Area, Hallway Little Theater
ND
Smooth plaster ceilings.
Little Theater
ND
3" high brown baseboard and associated glues. Sprayed-on fireproofing.
Rooms I l, 83, and 221
ND
·Throughout
ND
Material Description
Administration Steel ceilings. & Classroom Building (019CCT) Gypsum wallboard walls, ta:pe, and joint compound.
2' x 2' laid-in, random ceiling tiles. 2' x 2' laid-in fissured tiles.
Exterior Concrete and Masonry Concrete walls and ceilings. 12" x 12" white fissured ceiling tiles.
Bungalow BB-142 (Z0142S)
Location (s)
Page 25·
Throughout Fan and Hopper Rooms Band Room
ND
Non-suspect Material Non-suspect material Assumedasbestoscontaining bySCA NDby point counting
Exterior Stucco
Arcade
Acoustical Ceiling Plaster (ceiling stucco).
Arcade (Ceiling, Overhangs)
Gypsum wallboard walls, tape, and joint compound. Wood ceilings. Brown base molding.
Throughout Throughout Classroom
ND ND
Black base molding.
Classroom
ND
2' x 4' fissmed ceiling tiles. 2' x 4' random ceiling tiles. Exterior stucco.
Classroom
ND
Classroom
ND
Throughout Exterior
ND
0.1% CH by point counting (i.e. trace) 2%CH
J.AN 3 1 2001
SCA Sample ID Non-suspect Materials
247,248,249,250,251, 252, and253 [Mud] (LAUSD, 1998) 240,241,242,243,244, 245, and 246 [Gypsum] (LAUSD, 1998) 254,255,256,257,258, 259, and 260 (LAUSD, 1998) LAUSD (3 samples) 947113 through 947118 (LAUSD, 1993) CLPL-014-1 to 14-7 (SCA, 2001) 278,279,280,281,282, and 283 (LAUSD, 1998) 937600 through 9370606 (LAUSD, 1991) Not applicable.
..
I
Not appljcable. Not applicable
69886-STUCC0-015-1 69886-STUCC0-015-2 69886-STUCC0-015-3 (SCA, 2001) 69910-CLPL-024-1 69910-CLPL-024-2 6991 0-CLPL-024-3 (SCA, 2001) 81, 82, 83, 84,_ 85, 86, and 87
(LAUSD, 1998) Non-suspect Material 64, 65, and 66 (LAUSD, 1998) 67, 68, and 69 (LAUSD, 1998) 70, 71, and 72 (LAUSD, 1998) 76, 77, 78, 79, and 80 (LAUSD, 1998) 88, 89, 90, 91, 92, 93, and 94 (LAUSD, 1998)
02 2600-71
ASBESTOS BUll(~, ... JIPLESUBMITTAL SITE
NAME:~ AY\.1-f/les J./;.
CODE:
0!1Wicl l?>eiY\kocl'\
DEPT.:
SAMPLEDBY:
~73C. /ir-eq- E.
TEL.N0.:(!1~)J...Z9·5"~o<:rOATESAMPLED: . ~
S~mpl~r:should fT_lake acopy before submitting to the lab.
Fill in all information legibly and Precisely.
R,.p{t:t.'-~&rp-el ; n 6.f{7c:..~:>
PROJECT:
DO NOT USE PENCil
/0·7-0Z . . (Rav. 41951
Original to EHSB lab with samples. Lab will FAX a copy to ATU with sample numbers. Results sheet to be FAXED to ATU when completed. SAMPLE NUMBER
LAB NUMBER
0210-092.2 I
l
0210-0923
2.
BUILDING~
BU!LmNG
NUMBER \ ~ NAME
ROOM NUMBER AND/OR NAME
()IDJC()~ Flo/ M; II\ i~~.._ ~~h irolvl+ ()-Wic-e~ ~
#•c:. c: s ¥
LOCATION IN ROOM
MATERIAL TYPE (DESCRIBE)
Nor/~ ~ (;Je~ LVe$
FRIABLE
· (CIRCLE)
?:;}··C
Co.t r• p :!J~ ~ r0"
J-
·Ill
f
@
YES
@9?
0210-0924
.3
M.ct: II\
tJorfh~~) f-
YES
~
. 0210-0925
t.f
tJc, r+k Co~ he:("'""' o~~~ . tJer+~ ~ Ee:t ~ t
YES
~
YES
<@)
YES
~
_YES
·@
YES
NO
"YES .
NO
YES
NO
YES
NO
I
I
0210-0926
I
·t:.
0210-0927 \ 0210-0928
I
·s
1
7
\V
0
tL..-
\v
s~s +SOTJ+h - ~s f
'
.
'
,v
CHAIN OF CUSTODY:
~ N
(J)
0 0
~
N
OEPARTMENTIAREA:
TIME:
DATE: to~ 7-o.;t, lb- 8~
oz.
Ar~O\
.Q;e>OfM..
tl:eohM ,
rru-,vwt
,-\.\,M 'J
Vf!IV~ VII'-"
-
e:. .
-~
NO. OF SAMPLES:
?. 7
I I
os Angeles Unified School District nvironmental Health and Safety Branch 449 S. San Pedro St. os Angeles, CA 90015 P'n 742-5086 c
_,so Lab#
l\1IC
Date Analyzed
1-\.~.0J::..-:.l
VL'l DUL.l"').. l..Jl"\..l'V.LJ.
.l.J.lJ ~
"'t..t L1...l
~
u.a.1....1
l'v1ETHODEPN600/R-93/ll6 (MOD) JULY1993
LABORATORY REPORT LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
Date Received: 10/8/0i Page 1 of 1
8736 Ciffi MATERIAL DESCRIPTION
%
AM %
Ol9COT, ADMIN, ADULT OFFC I NW
NON-HOMOGENEOUS, NONFRIABLE, YELLOW, Cl\RPET/MASTIC, FIBROUS/ADHESIVE
0
NON-HOMOGENEOUS, NONFRIABLE, YELLOW, CARPET/MASTIC, FIBROUS/ADHESIVE
BUILDING I AREA SAMPLED
OTR TOTAL
MATERIAL BACKGROUND
%
'%
0
0
.o
10% S\'hlTHETIC, ADHESIVE
0
0
0
0
l 0% SYNTHETIC, ADHESivE
H0-0922
GS
- 10/12/02
tl0-0923
GS
10/12/02
019COT, ADMIN, ADULT OFFC I WEST
~10-0924
GS
10/12/02
019COT, ADMIN, MAIN OFFC./NW
NON-HOMOGENEOUS, NON. FRJABLE, YELLOW, CARPET/MASTIC, FIBROUS/ADHESIVE
0
0
0
0
10% SYNTHETIC, ADHESIVE
H0-0925
GS
10112/02
019COT, ADMIN, MAIN OFFC/NORTH
NONcHOMOGENEOUS, NONFRI.Jl>BLE, YELLOW, CARPET/MASTIC, FIBROUS/ADHESIVE
0
0
0
0
10% SYNTHETIC, ADHESIVE
210-0926
GS
10/12/02
019COT,. ADMIN, COUNSLR. OFC I NE
NON-HOMOGENEOUS, NONFRIABLE, YELLOW, CARPET/MASTIC, · I"IBROUS/ADHESIVE
0
0
0
0
10% SYNTHETIC, ADHESIVE
,.,.. '1-0927
GS
10/12/02
019COT, ADMIN, COUNSLR.OFC/EAST
NON-HOMOGENEOUS, NONFRIABLE, YELLOW, CARPET/MASTIC, 'FIBROUS/ADHESIVE
0
0
0
0
I 0% SYNTHETIC, ADHESIVE
1210-0928
GS
10/12/02
019COT, ADIYDN, COUNSLR. OFC I SE
NON-HOMOGENEOUS, NONFRIABLE, YELLOW, CARPET/MASTIC, FIBROUS/ADHESIVE
0
0
0
0
10% SYNTHETIC, ADi-IESIVE
,.1atureof~ Supervisor:~~
A--- Signature of A n a l y s t : - - - - - - - - - - - , - - - - - - Note: 0%: No Asbestos Detected; <1 %:Asbestos Detected Above 0% and Below or Equal to 1%. "Quantification done by optical estimate" 1 - 5% considered non-quantifiable. This report relates to only the material tested. This report is not used by the LAUSD/EHSB to claim product endorsement by NVLAP or any agency of the U.S. government. This report may not be reproduced except in its entirety. 02 2600-73
,, •·.
ASBESTOS BULK~-SAMPLE SUBMITTAL C¢4WC A 44A
4
LOS ANGELES HIGH· VINCE BROWN
SITE NAME: SAMPLED BY:
FiJI In all Information Legibly and Precisely.
.U+.W
.4
CODE: DEPT.:
MAW
8736 AREA"E 11
Sampler should make a copy before submitting to lab.
IA!!VAL
~=·
QJ;;Z.IW•
PROJECT: TEL NUM.:
REPLACE DETERIORATED FLOORING (213)229·5809 ·- DATE SAMPLED 3/15/2003
(Rev.4/95)
DO NOT USE PENCIL
Original to EHSB lab with samples. Lab will FAX a copy to ATU with sample numbers. Results sheet to be FAXED when completed. LAB - --.
-
SAMPLE ~-
~-
.
--
0303-2562 0303-2563 0303-2564 0303-2565 '
0303-2566 1-
0303-2567
BUILDING ---
--
BUILDING ----
ROOM NUMBER . ---
-
--
--
LOCATION ----
-~
MATERIAL TYPE
VBB·1
019CCT
ADMIN BLDG
HALLWAY
NORTHSIDE
VBB~2·
019CCT
ADMIN BLDG
HALLWAY
SOUTHEAST
VBB-3
019CCT
ADMIN BLDG
HALLWAY
NORTHEAST .
VBB-4
019CCT
ADMIN BLDG
HALLWAY
NORTHSIDE
- ·-·
VB8w5
019CCT
ADMIN BLDG
HALLWAY
SOUTHSIDE
HALLWAY
EASTSIDE
'
VBB~6
019CCT
ADMIN BLDG
FRIABLE " -
--
12 X 12 CREAM FLOOR TILE/ MASTIC 12 X 12 CREAM FLO.dR" YES TILE I MASTIC 12 X 12 CREAM FLOOR YES {NO) TILE I MASTIC 4' BROWN COVE BASE7 YES (NO\ I MASTIC 4' BROWN COVE BASE I ves(NO) MASTIC 4" BROWN COVE BASt I MASTIC YEstNOJ
YES~
tNm
YES NO YES NO YES NO ;
YES NO YES NO \YES NO
'--
CHAIN OF CUSTODY: DEPARTMENT/AREA: AREA11 E" .
0 N N
(j)
0
0
.!.., ..,.
~--
• --o-·-- ------- .. LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
Page 1 of 1
8736
CHR %
AM 0 /o
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
<1% CELLULOSE, BINDER (NO MASTIC)
0
0
0
0
<1% CELLULOSE, BINDER (NO MASTIC)
019CCT, ADMIN, HOMOGENEOUS, NONHALLWY I NORTH SIDE FRIABLE, BROWN, COVE BASE, VINYL
0
0
0
0
<1% CELLULOSE, BINDER
3/19/03
NON-HOMOGENEOUS, NON019CCT, ADMIN, HALLWY /NORTH SIDE FRIABLE, BRN/OFF WJIT, COVE BASE/MASTIC, RESINLIKE
0
0
0
0
<1% CELLULOSE, ADHESIVE
MS
3/19/03
019CCT, ADMIN, HOMOGENEOUS, NONHALLWY I SOUTH SIDE FRiABLE, BROWN, COVE BASE, VINYL
0
0
0
0
MS
3/19/03
019CCT, ADMIN, NON-HOMOGENEOUS, NONHALLWY I SOUTH SIDE FRiABLE, BRNIOFF WJIT, COVE BASE/MASTIC, RESINLIKE
0
0
0
0
019CCT, ADMIN, HALLWY I EAST SIDE
0
USD
BillLDJNG I AREA
.:.ab#
MIC
Date Analyzed
0303-2562A
MS
3/19/03
019CCT, ADMIN,
0303-2562B
MS
3/19/03
NON-HOMOGENEOUS, NON019CCT, ADMIN, HALLWY I NORTH SIDE FRIABLE, BLACK/YELLOW, FLOOR TILE, MASTIC, RESIN-LIKE
0303-2563
MS
3119/03
019CCT, ADM.IN, HALLWY/SE
HOMOGENEOUS, NONFRIABLE, LITE BROWN, FLOOR TILE, VINYL
0303-2564
MS
3/19/03
019CCT, ADMIN, HALLWY /NE
HOMOGENEOUS, NONFRIABLE, LITE BROWN, FLOOR TILE, VINYL
0303-2565A
MS
3/19/03
0303-2565B
MS
0303-2566A
0303-25668
0303-2567
METIIOD EPA/600/R.-93/116 (MOD) JULY 1993 Date Received: 3/18/03
LABORATORY REPORT
Enviromnental Health and Safety Branch 1449 S. San Pedro St. Los Angeles, CA 90015 (213) 742-5086
MS
3119/03
SAMPLED
MATERIAL DESCRIPTION
HOMOGENEOUS, NONHALLWY /NORTH SIDE FRIABLE, LITE BROWN, FLOOR TILE, VINYL
HOMOGENEOUS, NONFRIABLE, BROWN, COVE BASE, VINYL
OTH TOTAL % % 0
MATERIAL BACKGROUND
<1% CELLULOSE, ADHESIVE
<1% CELLULOSE,
ADHESIVE
0
0
0
~ (~Signature
:1ature of Lab Supervisor: of A n a l y s t : - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ,. ,Jte: 0%: No Asbestos Detected; <1 %: Asbestos Detected Above 0% and Below or Equal to 1%. "Quantification done by optical estimate" 1 - 5% ·considered non-quantifiable. This report relates to only the material tested. This report is not used by the LAUSDIEHSB to claim product endorsement by NVLAP or any agency of the U.S. government. This report may not be reproduced except in its entirety.
02 2600-75
(
02 2600-76
/ .•.. ,.,
ASBESTOS BULK··~AMPLE SUBMITTAL SITE NAME: SAMPLED BY:
LOS ANGELES HIGH VINCE BROWN
Fill in all information Legibly and Precisely. ·
CODE: DEPT.:
8736 AREA"E"
Sampler should make a copy before submitting to lab.
PROJECT: TEL NUM.:
DO NOT USE PENCIL
I:::) Ff9._5·· · WATER DAMAGE F'LOOR DATE SAMPLED 6/9/2003 .
(213)229~5809
(Rev.4/95)
Original to EHSB lab with samples. Lab will FAX a copy to ATU withl sample numbers. Results sheet to be FAXED when completed. LAB
SAMPLE ·-
-
~
.-.
.
BUILDING -
~
~
BUILDING ....... ,...
..
W W4
ROOM NUMBER
LOCATION
. ....
•• , .... .__.lilt
_.~
....... ...... ~
03{)6-2531
VBB~1
019CCT
ADMIN BLDG
MUSIC ROOM
SOUTHEAST
U3Uo-2532
VBB~2
019CCT
ADMIN BLDG
MUSIC ROOM
EASTSIDE
0306-2533
VBB-3
019CCT
ADMIN BLDG
MUSIC ROOM
SOUTHSIDE
VBB-4
019CCT
ADMIN BLDG
MUSIC ROOM
SOUTHEAST
VBB-5
019CCT
ADMIN BLDG
MUSIC ROOM
EASTSIDE
VBB-6
019CCT
ADMIN BLDG
MUSIC ROOM
SOUTHSIDE
1-
-
r-. 0306~2534 1-
1-
0306~2535
U:5U6~2536
r-
I
0306-2537
VBB-7
019CCT
ADMIN SLOG
MUSIC ROOM
SOUTHEAST
0306-2538
VBB-8
019CCT
ADMIN BLDG
MUSIC ROOM
EASTSIDE
0306-2539
VBB~9
019CCT
ADMIN BLDG
MUSIC ROOM
SOUTHSIDE
rr1-
MATERIAL TYPE
FRIABLE \._ ,
ROSE CARPET AND MASTIC ROSE CARPET AND MASTIC ROSE CARPET AND MASTIC 12X12 TAN FLOOR TILE AND MASTIC 12X12 TAN FLOOR TILE AND MASTIC 12X12 TAN FLOOR TILE AND MASTIC 4" BROWN BASE WITH MASTIC 4" BROWN BASE WITH . MASTIC 4" BROWN BASE WITH MASTIC
.. ___ YES (NQ) YES~ YES
(N;)
YES(@}
YES~~ OJ~ YES (NQ) YES
YES~) YESQ YES NO
'
YES NO
'
YES NO CHAIN OF CUSTODY: DATE:
DEPARTMENT/AREA:
NAME: PRINT &
6/11/2Q03
~8 ll/t/a.~ I .!.J --.1--------
<;,
}
c;....--r.
F
CY
.
I<_...:~
t./
·Y "fC
AREA"E" ·!\ ";.:)-;?-/ .... / . l r ; / --K.-, ----.v~.7
NO. OF SAMPLES: 9 ··:y
t~-/ ;
'
'
.......
Asbestos B(
Los Angel/ \fled School District Office of 1L .. Jnmcntal Health and Safety 1449 San"l'edro St. ,, Los Angeles, CA 90015 (213) 742-5086
s.
AM
CROC
TREM
%
%
%
%
06111/2003 019CCT: ADMIN. BLD MUSICRM SE
HOMOGENEOUS; NON-FRIABLE; PINK/RED; CARPET; F1BROUS
0
0
0
ST
06/ll/2003 019CCT: ADMIN. BLD MUSICRM SE
NON-HOMOGENEOUS; NON-FRIABLE; BEIGE/ WHITE; MASTIC; GLUE
0
0
2003062532-A
ST
06/11/2003 019CCT: ADMIN. BLD MUSICRM EASTSIDE
HOMOGENEOUS; NON-FRIABLE; PINK/RED; CARPET; FIBROUS
0
2003062532-B
ST
06/ll/2003 019CCT: ADMIN. BLD MUSICRM EASTSIDE
NON-HOMOGENEOUS; NON-FRIABLE; BEIGE/ WHITE; MASTIC; GLUE
2003062533-A
ST
06111/2003 019CCT : ADMIN. BLD MUSICRM SOUTHSrDE
2003062533-B
ST
2003062534~A.
ANTH TOTAL
0
0
0
0
75% SYNTHETIC
0
0
0
0
0
<1% CELLULOSE ADHESIVE
0
0
0
0
0
0
75% SYNTHETIC
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
<1% CELLULOSE ADHESIVE
HOMOGENEOUS; NON-FRIABLE; PINK/RED; CARPET; FIDROUS
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
75% SYNTHETIC
06/1112003 ·ol9CCT: ADMIN. BLD MUSICRM SOUTHSIDE
NON-HOMOGENEOUS; NON-FRIABLE; BEIGFJWHITE; MASTIC; GLUE
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
ST-.-06/11/2003 019CCT: ADMIN. BLD
HOMOGENEOUS; NON-FRIABLE; TAN; FLOOR TILE; . FLAT SOLID NON-HOMOGENEOUS; NON-FRIABLE; BLACK; MASTIC; TARLIKE
<1
0
0
0
0
0
<1
<1% CELLULOSE BINDER, QUARTZ
1
0
0
0
0
0
1
NON-HOMOGENEOUS; NON-FRIABLE; BEIGE/ YELLOW; GLUE; GLUE
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
<1% CELLULOSE APHESIVE
2003062531-A
ST
2003062531-B
BUILDING I AREA SAJ\1PLED
ST
06/11/2003 019CCT: ADMIN. BLD MUSICRM
SE
2003062534-C
MATERIAL BACKGROUND
ACT %
Date Analyzed
ST
06/11/2003 019CCT: ADMIN. BLD MUSICRM SE
0> 0 0
~
0>
~f.:.,..__
Lab SupervisiorSignature and Date: 1 /, I Note: 0%: No Asbestos Detected;< 1 %:Asbestos Detected Above 0% and Below or Equal to 1 % "Quantification done by optical estimate" 1 - 5 %considered non-quantifiable. This report relates to only the material tested. An asterisk'*' indicate~ preliminary results.
/1, b.3
l
06/11/2UO: Page 1 of3
CHR
MIC
2003062534-B
"'"'
Dllte Received:
LOS ANGELES.HIGH SCHOOL 8736 MATERIAL DESCRIPTION
LAUSD Lab#·
MUSICRM SE
0
,!:ample Analysis Report
Labof~;Jry
Signature of Analyst:
%
%
d Asbestos Bf
Los Ange!( \fled School. District Office ofh .. . onmental Healtlt and Safety 1449 S. San Pedro St. Los Angeles, CA 90015 (213) 742-5086 LAUSD Lab#
MIC
2003062535-A
ST
Date Analyzed
BUILDING/AREA SAMPLED
)ample Analysis
Labora 1o.ry Report
06/ll/2CO
· d· 0 ate RecetVe .
LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
8736
p
MATERIAL DESCRIPTION
CHR
AM
CROC
lREM
%
%
%
%
ACT %
ANTH %
TOTAL %
06/11/2003 019CCT: ADMIN. BLD MUSIC RM EAST SIDE
HOMOGENEOUS; NON-FRIABLE;
<1
0
0
0
0
0
<1
<1% CELLULOSE BINDER, QUARTZ
. . 2 f3 age o
MATERIAL BACKGROUND
TAN;
FLOOR TILE;1 FLAT SOLID
2003062535-B
ST
06/ll/2003 019CCT: ADMIN. BLD MUSICRM EAST SIDE
NON-HOMOGENEOUS; NON-FRIABLE; BLACK; MASTIC; TARLIKE
1
0
0
0
0
0
1
2003062535-C
ST
06/11/2003 019CCT: ADMIN. BLD MUSIC RM EAST SIDE
NON-HOMOGENEOUS; NON-FRIABLE; BEIGE/ YELLOW; GLUE· GUJE'
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
<1% CELLULOSE ADHESIVE
2003062536-A
ST
06/1112003 019CCT: ADMIN. BLD MUSIC RM SOUTH SIDE
HOMOGENEOUS; NON-FRIABLE; TAN; FLOOR TILE; FLAT SOLID
<1
0
0
0
0
0
<1
1
0
0
0
0
0
I
<1% CELLULOSE TAR
BINDER, QUARTZ
2003062536-B
ST
06/11/2003 019CCT: ADMIN. BLD MUSIC RM SOUTII SIDE
NON-HOMOGENEOUS; NON-FRIABLE; BLACK; . MASTIC; .
2003062536-C
ST
06/11/2003 Ol9CCT: ADMIN. BLD MUSIC RM SOUTH SIDE
NON-HOMOGENEOUS; NON-FRIABLE; BEIGE/YELLOW; GLUE; GLUE
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
2003062537-A
ST
06/ll/2003 Ol9CCT: ADMIN. BLD MUSIC RM SE
HOMOGENEOUS; NON-FRIABLE; DARK BROWN; COVE BASE; RUBBER W/ADHESNE
0
0
0
0
0
0 .
0
BINDER, MINERAL FILLER
2003062537-B
ST
06/11/2003 019CCT: ADMIN. BLD MUSIC RM SE
NON-HOMOGENEOUS; NON-FRIABLE; WHITE;
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
BINDER, MINERAL FILLER
TARLIKE
GLUE; GLUE 2003062538-A
:;:s
ST
06/1112003 019CCT: ADMIN. BLD MUSIC RM EAST SIDE
HOMOGENEOUS; ·. NON-FRIABLE; DARK BROWN; COVEBASE;
RUBBER W/ADHESIVE
N 0> 0
'? ...., CD
~/
1 Lab Supervisior Signature arid Date: ·.,:..___ 1 d, l. Note: 0%: No Asbestos Detected; < 1 %: ASbestos Detected Above 0% and Below or Equal to 1 % "Quantification done by optical estimate" 1 - 5 % considered non-quantifiable. This report relates to only the material tested. An asterisk '*' indicates preliminary results.
1/ I b --.5
I
Signature of Analyst:
Asbestos Bt:,
Los Angel( tied School District Office ofEi\.,.. ,mmentnl Health a;~d Safety 1449 S. San Pedro St. Los Angeles, CA 90015 (213) 742-5086 LAUSD Lab#
MIC
2003062538-B
ST
2003062539-A
2003062539-B
ST
ST
.ample Analysis
Labora.ory Report
Page 3 of3
AM %
CROC
0
0
MATERIAL DESCruPTION
CHR
06/11/2003 OI9CCT: ADMlN. BLD MlJSICRM EASTSIDE
NON-HOMOGENEOUS; NON-FRIABLE; WIDTE; GLUE; GLUE
0
06/ll/2003 019CCT: ADMIN. BLD MUSICRM SOUTIISIDE
~OMOGENEOUS;
0
0
0
0
0
06/1112003 019CCT: ADMIN. BLD MUSICRM SOUTIISIDE
NON-HOMOGENEOUS; NON-FRlABLE;
0
0
0
0
0
Date Analyzed
HUILDING I AREA SAMPLED
%
ON-FRIABLE; DARK BROWN; COVE BASE; RUBBER W/ADHESIVE
WHITE;
06/11/201)3
Date Received:
LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL 8736
%
1\'IATERIAL BACKGROUND
TREM %
ACT %
ANTII %
TOTAL %
0
0
0
0
<1% CELLULOSE
0
0
BINDER, MINERAL FILLER
0
0
<1% CELLULOSE ADHESIVE
ADHESIVE
GLUE; GLUE
0 I'V I'V Ol
0 0
a, 0
~,.,__
b If r' o3
LabSupervisiorSignatureandDate: I I Note: 0%: No Asbestos Detected; < 1 %: Asbestos Detected Above 00/o and Below or Equal to 1 % "Quantification done by optical estimate" l - 5 % considered non-quantifiable. This report relates to only the material tested. An asterisk '*'indicates preliminary results.
I
Signature of Analyst: _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
VJJ.'Jl':A.'V~ 'VJJ.' :aJil:,"T.:a:nVl'.'UY.L:Cil'I·J:~. ;[J:ri.tl.L.l'fi .&t"(.:U .,1U,~.i'J.··x·
CHAIN-OF;.CUSTOii'"''''\rOR BULK ANALYSIS;;:
HI &J.r
SITE NAME: .Lo,S .4z...%L:ti.S
Jkorr:
SAMPLED BY: /{p&.t&llf
CODE:
8' ).3 b
DEPT I CONSULTANT: . f!lttrJ I
&_~. 4111
PROJECT:
r
~6
;/o .··::--
~
TEL. NO.(j'L3)s-~ -.J.c;:,l. r
DATE SAMPLED: Y-1~'~.~
Fill in all information legibly and precisely. Sampler should make a copy befbre submitting samples to the lab.· USE BLACK/BLUE INK ONLY. Original to OEHS lab With samples; Results arid a copy of the Chain of Custody with sample numbers will be submitted to ATU wheti completed.
SAMPLE
LAB !"~·
.. ULI..oi.IJIA~
.·
0704-0758 ; h·· .................. ----· ·,
~·
....
···--·,.
L. lr 1--
0704-0760 ~;
L I}- .3.
BUILDING
....-·•··--·' ot9ecr
Lit.,
0704-0759. _______ ......... . . .:
-
.
J
"v
BUILDING
.......... _
fii>N,_J,
-t:
C..{/f.ssJCSSI'I, .
ROOM·NUMBERAND/OR ...
fl.. ~1'1.
J
,v
--··-·
LOCATION IN .
-- --···
;JDR..rl~ t...;SiftL
;)_/I
J
J
- -·....·-- .
/.,t,..Jol..£-~rl """
N~r;c...
I.
. . .v
-......v
._J/
MATERIAL TYPE
(/
..
--•
..,
-.,
"
···-·
........ ····· ~·
DATE: L;- I~ -o2
'i-- 18·01 t\) t\)
.•. en
TIME: NAME {PRINT &'SIGN): . I o !3o h>. lf>'t-J,.sf_17.f -S"=z:;r~ £,'.. lO P, l'-1- MC
Bond Funded: Yes
1!!7
0
'? 00
..
.
_..J4. .. _ '~
DEPT/AREA/CONSULTANT:
YES
®
YES
(@..
YES
@
YES
NO
YES
NO
. YES
NO
YES
NO
YES
NO
YES
NO
YES
NO
YES
NO
L_')'ES
NO
NO. OF SAMPLES:
f!/1-t~C- 4e£k 63
'·
FRIABLE
3
f)e.._tb·
3
Other Than Bond Describe
Type ofBond: - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Maintenance & Operations:------------
Job C o s t # : - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Deferred Maintenance:--------------
~
Other: bulk samplerbmiffa!. 4/9/04.mm
LAJ~
AngeLeS
UfilUl'f•··~'··!lUOl
1449 S. San
Pedro~'
Asbestos. Bulk Saqp)J.!! Analysis
UlS[rlct
Health and Safety
.Office of Environd
Laboraton(
.
(213)745-l 138
LAUSDLab# 20Q7040758-A
......·
.
LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL 8736
Los Angeles, CA 90015
.
NYLAP LAB# 101505-0 ·~)July 1993 Method EPA/600/R~93/ll6(" Date Rece. . 04/18/2007
\!.tl
MIC NU
Date Analyzed
BUILDING/AREA SAMPLED
04/1912007
O.l9CGT : A.bMlN/CLSRM. RM.211 NORTH WALL
2007040:758-B
NLI
04/.191200 7
0 19CCT : ADMIN/CLSRM. RM.2!1 NORTH WALL
2007040759"A
NLl
04/19/2007
Ql9CCT: ADMIN/CLSRM. RM.2ll NORTH WALL
2007040159-B.
NLI
04/19/2007
0 19CCT: ADMIN/CLSRM. RM.211 NORTH WALL
g 2007040760"A
NLE
04/19/2007
· 019CCT: ADMIN/CLSRM. RM.211 NORTHWALL
2007040760-B
NLi
04/19/2007
0 !9CCT: ADMIN/CLSRM. RM.2ll NORTH WALL
MATERIAL DESCRIPTION
TREM
ACf
ANTH
.%
%
%
0
CROC % ·0
0
0
0
TOTAL MATERIAL BACKGROUND % BINDER, CASO, PIGMENT 0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
10% CELLULOSE, 5% SYNU!ET.IC ADHESIVE, DEBRIS
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
BINDER, CASO, PIGMENT
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
10% CELLULOSE, 5% SYNTHETIC ADHESNE, DEBRIS
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
BINDER, CASO,
0
0
0
0
0
0
·o
IO%CELWLOSE, 5% SYNTHETIC ADHESNE, DEBRIS
CHR
NON-HOMOGENEOUS; NON-FRIABLE; BEIGEl YELLOW; LINOLEUM; PLIABLE SOLID NON-HOMOGENEOUS: NON-FRIABLE; YELLOW; FELT PAPER; .GLUE WITH PAPER NON-HOMOGENEOUS;· NON•FR!ABLE; BEIGE/ YELLOW; LINOLEUM; PLIABLE SOLID NON-HOMOGENEOUS; NON-FRIABLE; YELLOW; FELT PAPER; GLUE .WITH PAPER . NON"HOMOGENEOUS; NON-FRIABLE; BEIGEl YELLOW; LINOLEUM; . PLIABLE SOLID NON-HOMOGENEOUS; NON-ffiiABLE; YELLOW; FELT PAPER; GLUE WITH PAPER
Page 1
%
AM %
0
l
P~GMENT
0 N N
Ol 0 0
ex, N
LabSupervisorSignatureandDate: Note:
0%~
<=-:===< ~;___
I
o/ tJ-31 D ·7
No Asbestos Detected;
I
Si~of~~t ~ ~~ This report is not used by LAUSD t
' ..
• · - ._ • "'-"
fJ~ r:..:-;:L,.·
?~ 7
.:-
~ ~
,,
t?AAlM..of~U~~QOY· fl~~la"n,.K ANALtYSlS
~.,
cw
SITE NAtiiH~:
;t.,~. 'A~~; II.~-~ , ' SAMPI,.~ BY:_.,laena Se~~,;
,.
OQOE~ ... ' 'B1J (... ,DATtHiAMPt.e));
.
'
f.IR.O.JE!CTl
a·
;L-~v-o.1-
.F.JY". 'tf,'t;.~
.
.
.AJ..r.&,. . Q~PT.IOQNSut.TANT~.~o;~. ::.. 1'EJ;;.NO!j,,!'t/,lt 1
. FBI \o ~~ inform~ lion l~ibly ami preCisely. f?ilmpl~r .shu·ulu make _II til~ D.afunu;uhml1ing ~~pi~ to the· lab. Uii! BU\GK/allli: INK Ofi!l.. V Original ib OOH$ lab With $amj:i!e$.. RISl;llt~ ilnd a· Ct'tfiY. C)f~ ~ham·ot CllS\bdy'o~jjt)t a(i~~ nurnll\!rtrwUI im·fillll~ to. AW·~he~rt r;ompre.teu". f;lU)lDl~G
LOCA'TtO.I\tl~
'
R.OO!il,
.. ··'·
~.
866-ll!JS
,l ..." '
~
I
YEIJI ..
0~0.12!12
.
..
,
. 0896~129.3
08~- '
0~1295
: .
19 ~t
·'
. L__ ~
" _.
.
...
'
'"
'
• ~
'
:
•.
'-~ •• ·',
•·
.
'• .·
..
. '
.
.
·.,.
~·
.
•
.
'I
•
••
•
•
'.·
(
..
•
.
..-.i-,~oo~~"""!.~
.. :;""'•.,
•
. . ... .
• ,.
•' '
·'·"'·
.I . :"ris. r
tV ·
~.
.. Q~rred~~J.!ntemm~
. ,'·
.
,
. I. ·
- 0\fu!r 1'h~11 ftondDBi!~'t.le ·~lilt#,l'i-.noe 5! Op81'1tVcns:· ---.-.,...._..,._ __,_______
_.
_/:;;t_ ~.S. Y,(,.
. r:·:· . '•
'
_..... ....,_~~·-···.
. . ·--- ·
-.
~ .-~~~ L ~
· __ ~-~---~--tf.~ '-".~!~ L~IV·~ ~,.,.
---"-~~··--·~ ···--
eo.nd FUnd~d(9 !f~.Jo ~B Type ef'Eiiond: . . 3~JQb0ost~: ~ CO'\! WJ,. 5
.~.1-
~
... . ·
:
-
~
.'tl;S 1.
· ....
~ ~- . .
..
-~
l
;.
•
• o. •"
...
I
'
~·
'"'
•
..,•
•
o
o •:
~o
Point Count Report
Report No:
122184
I") ate:
July 3, 2008
Page 1 of 1
Client:
LAUSD 1240 S. Naomi Ave Los Angeles, CA 90021
Jate Analyzed:
July 2. 2008 .
Date Sampled:
6/13/08 by James Spencer
Attention:
Reference:
Jairo Lopez: Los Angeles H.S.; Code: 8736; Fire Alarm - 29002
Subject:
Polarized Light Microscopy Analysis for Asbestos
Methodology:
"Method for Determination of Asbestos in Bulk Building Materials." EPA 600/R-93/116 M
Accredited:
National Institute of Standards and Technology (NVLAP) #101218
Certified:
California Department of Health Services Environmental Testing Laboratory ELAP 1119 County Sanitation Districts of Los Ange_les County, Lab ID No. 10120
9
Samples {1000 Point Count)
Quality Control Sample (SRM 1866 Glass Fibers as the blank): None Detected LAUSD ID NUMBER SAMPLE ID NUMBER
%REDUCTION
TOTAL ASBESTOS
30%
LESS THAN 0.1%
0806-1285 0806-1286
2
28%
LESS THAN 0.1%
0806-1287
3
38%
LESS THAN 0.1%
0806-1288
4
37%
LESS l'HAN 0.1%
0806-1289
5
24%
LESS THAN 0.1%
0806-1290
6
19%
LESS THAN 0.1%
0806-1294
10
52%
LESS THAN 0.1%
0806-1295
11
32%
LESS THAN 0.1%
0806-1296
12
56%
LESS THAN 0.1%
*Gravimetric analysis. Samples ashed and acid dissolution. Analytical Sensitivity: 0.1%
S.M.
Kolk, Laboratory Director
The EPA method Is a semi-quantitative procedure. The detection limit is between 0.1 - 1% by area and is dependent upon the size of the asbestos fibers, the means of sampling and the matrix of the sampled malarial. · The test results reported are for the sample(s) delivered to us and may not represent the enUre material from which the samples was taken. The EPA recommends three samples or more be taken from a "homogenous sampling area" before friable material is considered non-asbestos-containing. - Negative. noor tne samples may contain significant amounts (>1 %) of very thin asbestos fibers whl<;:/1 cannot be detected by PLM. Confii!Tiation by XRD or TEM is recommended by '"<;>EPA (Federal Register Vol. 59, Na. 146).
. . :s report, from a NIST-accredited laboratory through NVLAP, must not be used by the client to claim product endorsement by NVLAP or any agency of the U.S. government. This • . •~port sha II not be reproduced, except in full, without the written approval of EMS Laboratories.
~ EMS LABORATORIES
117 West Bellevue Drive I Pasadena CA. 9110,5-2503 /626-568-4065
· SITE NAME:
• ~.1
LOS ANGELES U~IFIED SCHOOL DISTRICT FACILITIES SERVICES DIVISION CHAIN-OF-CUSTODY FOR BULK ANALYSIS
.Q
SAMPLED BY: THOMAS A GORDON
\ .,_
DATE SAMPLED: 01-19-10
;.I·
-~
f"1 (l.r;p
l.\y 2 /(1LfC:1
DOOR REPLACEMENT PROJECT DESC:._ ___;_ _ _ __
CODE: 8736
LOS A'.NGELES SH
.. rr. .. - - - '-•
~·;!~ ~
"\
)PIC PROJ.#:
DEPT./CONSULTANT: pAINT-FLOOR
TEL. NO:
--549-202
Fill in all information legibly and precisely. Sampler should make a copy before submitting samples to the lab. USE BLACK/BLUE INK ONLY Original to FSD lab with samples. Results and a copy of the Chain of Custody with sample numbers will be submitted to ATU when completed. LAB ...
SAMPLE ....
1001-0727 1-
f-
1001-0728 1001-0729
~
--
---
--
BUILDING --
-··
·BUILDING
--
019CCT
081 OS2
-·-
.. -.
ADMIN & CLASSROOM
--
MATERIAL TYPE -
OUTSIDE WALL-TOP
YES
I~
YES
~~-
ADMIN & CLASSROOM
019CCT
ADMIN
CLASSROOM
SCHOOL POLICE
1001-0731.
182
019CCT
ADMIN & CLASSROOM
1001-0732
IS3
019CCT
01-19-10
I - Z? -1 o
10:00AM .] : (':i, (' 1'-1
NAME (PRINT_& SIGN~ .. .THOMAS A GORDON
YES
I
SCHOOL POLICE
YES
I~
SCHOOL POLICE
INSIDE WALL-BOTTOM SANDED STUCCO- TAJi
YES
I~
YES
I
NO
YES
I
NO
YES
I
NO
YES
I
NO
YES
I
NO
YES
I
NO
I I/\ I .1 A. ~
1.. NUIJL!=
f __ .<_
QlD3
SANDED STUCCO-TAl INSIDE WALL-TOP INSIDE WALL-MIDDLE SANDED STUCCO-TAN
1-
TIME:
I
ISl
DATE:
---·-
YES
019CCT
ADMlN & CLASSROOM
--
SCHOOL POLICE_ OUTSIDE WALL-MIDDLE SANDED STUCCO-TA~ SCHOOL POLICE OUTSIDE WALL-BOTTOM SANDED STUCCO-TA~
&;
FRIABLE
------
SANDED STUCCO-TAN
1001-0730
f-.
LOCATION IN
----
ADMIN & CLASSROOM . SCHOOL POLICE
019CCT
083
ROOM NUMBER
------
~
DEPARTMENT/AREA/CONSULTANT; PAINT & FLOOR-M&O 3
F sp
LA 13
NO. OF SAMPLES 06
'
0 N N
en 0 0
Co 01
Work order number with valid job ticket number is required for sample analysis. Please complete before submitting.
AWMS Work Order#: 6453444 Project Type (check one):
~ Maintenance
0 Deferred Maintenance
0 Bond (specify BB,K,R,Y, or Q) _._
0 Other (Describe) Rev. 912410!1
Los Angeles l}. ___ .I School District
L§boratory Report
1449 S. San Pedro St. Los Angeles, CA 90015
LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
(213)745-1138
LAUSD Lab# 2010010727
NVLAP LAB# 101505-( Method EPA/6001R:93/116(MOD) July 199: Dlitc Received: 01126/201(
Asbestos Bulb.>.iln(!le Analysis
J?acilities Services Division Laborato1"y
8736
d MIC ST
Date Analyzed
BUILDING/AREA SAMPLED
MATERIAL DESCRIPTION
01/27/0!010
019CCT: ADMTN/CLSRM.' SCHOOL POLICE OUTSIDE WALUfOP
HOMOGENEOUS; NON-FRlABLE; TAN;
2010010728
ST
01127/2010
019CCT: ADMIN/CLSRM. SCHOOL POLICE OUTSIDE WALUMIDDLE
2010010729
ST
01/27/2010
0!9CCT: ADMIN/CLSRM. SCHOOL POLICE OUTSIDE WAWBOTTOM
2010010730
ST·
01/27/2010
019CCT: ADMIN/CLSRM. SCHOOL POLICE INSIDE WAilJTOP
2010010731
ST
01/27/2010
0 19CCT : ADMIN/CLSRM. SCHOOL POLICE INSIDE WALUMIDDLE
2010010732
ST
01127/2010
019CCT: ADMIN/CLSRM. SCHOOL POLICE INSIDE W ALUBOTTOM
Page 1 of 1
CHR % 0
% 0
CROC % 0
ANTH % 0
TOTAL MATERIAL BACKGROUND %
0
ACT % 0
0
BINDER, CARBONATES, ORG.MATERlAL, PAINT, ROCK, SAND
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
BINDER, CARBONATES, ORG.MATERIAL, PAINT, ROCK, SAND
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
BINDER, CARBONATES, ORG.MATERlAL, PAINT, ROCK, SAND
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
BINDER, CARBONATES, ORG.MATERIAL, PAINT, ROCK, SAND
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
BINDER, CARBONATES, ORG.MATERlAL, PAINT, ROCK, SAND
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
BINDER, CARBONATES, ORG.MATERlAL, PAINT, ROCK, SAND
AM
TREM
•;.
srucco;
GRANULAR HOMOGENEOUS; NON-FRIABLE; TAN; STUCCO; GRANULAR HOMOGENEOUS; NON-FRlABLE; TAN; STUCCO; GRANULAR HOMOGENEOUS; NON-FRIABLE; TAN; STUCCO; GRANULAR HOMOGENEOUS; NON-FRIABLE; TAN; STUCCO; GRANULAR HOMOGENEOUS; NON-FRIABLE; TAN; STUCCO; GRANULAR
0 N N 0> 0
0
Co
0>
Lab SupCIVisor Signature and Date:
Note:
~
I
fJ.;2~ ll>
0%: No Asbestos Detected; < l %: Asbestos Detected Above 0% and Below or Equal to I% NA: Not Applicable. "Quantification done by optical estimate" I - 5 %considered non-quantifiable. This report relates to only the material tested. An asterisk '*' indicates preliminary results.
Signature of Analyst:_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __ This report is not used by LAUSD to claim product endorsement by NVLAP or any agency of the U.S. Government. This report mav not be renrodur.t"'.rl f':xr.~nt in it.;: Pntir"""'
LOS ANGELES UNIFiED SCHOOL DISTfUCT FACILiTIES SERVICES DIVISION CHAIN-OF-CUSTODY FOR BULK ANALYS!S
-;:;
-c 9-?-·t:·
' ) ..•• • <..J
SITE
N~ME'
SAMPLED BY·
I ...J
_.!-<'t. t::l~:f-~~ s__ U)'p_.Ss:l~l cooE: _[1:~-- PROJECT DESC:____,_J?~~f.. ~ :c__~[C.4r:~~ :rJ:kft:rkc/21~.- couN tt: J!E.(;71.?.3 ~--ii~;.{(dtb~M';/-~~'5£....~~.:~.; . DATE SAMPLED: Ol_/_1 () /2~1.7.:_ DEPT. I CONSULTANT: _____(A/
Fill in all information legibly and precisely .. Original must be submitted with the samples. Mni
LAB
SAMPLE
BUILDING
BUII,DING ROOM NUMBER NAME AND/OR NAME :'tJJ•:rlr¢1)-::_-~- -~~~- ·--~ _....
d~.rf.(r111>"'1..
LOCATION IN ROOM
MATERIAL TYPE
FRIABLE
~ ~\J~:1l4Jl~L__s'~-~~--
~·-o·J,..
_ __ ...,k_ , ____tJor:_~: __J_ . __ ... -·-- l.\. ~~J~~-53:-- ... , ~ c__ ~£--·-· --. ..I
. :;::~;:~: --J-:~-~. . l. ·-·.~· .,. - . .-. .
-
-.~:Jl~1-R~L-. vv~~ .~- ,----~'t¥1~-~....J . S' c
~- . --. . . . . .
1701-0421 - --~1:
_ 1701-0422..
L
m
--'
-r-~•-.- --·--· -I 1
~. -- ·--·--····-··--~~-~-·-·- . ··----_L _j_~_j
~.~-----·-·- - - - -~-j_ __ --\ -·-· . .Jo\~\~- . . . .cevkr:. Wt!.S+ ..-.... ...... .. . . ~= . _______j__,,.__\i'_.. .· ~---. _. ~).;.;j--~-·_-S.o..ih..~-~-· -·~"-'~1/(..~~..k'!\- I
-~~l~_L __
,-~~::~::~L_g: _ 1.__, ., -
.......
.---· . . -_J
·.·.· ••.·
~~~~~.--~ ~ ----~- -~={---==r~-=1 'I I
"""
.. . ",
,ooo>O'O"''""'"••••••••h• • • •. • •
• • .. ""'•' • • •
• •
(;~~~::28~--' · • '!.-~-(PRINT~-1=- ~~~~~ lit~~~-=r~·-=±:'~~~::~'~:". J it oA·
TIME:
NAME
JIGN):
m
- - •·'o•o'O•O•'·'" _ _ , _ _ , , ••, , _ . _••••
DEPARTME.NT I AREA I CONSULTANT:
..
l!tll.L7:_ _____fj_:c..il~.- ..J!Attit. . . .tf~~~!:i . ~~../~4L~~~;.~. : ~--;,_~ __CfV S...~.E.~.':C:.J:e::c;. · -·-.- .. -·-··-·-..---_. !_.LL~[L1. _J.J__.~ZtL - .. - .. t'-1 ·~r&i'-t:'t~:z:---t-E~"· .· -·----.-------~~]?__ l,t~-----------··~-----. ... ·······-... -····-·····-··-----
..
..- ....:.
·-~----·-·--·-···~.-.,.,..~,, -.~------------~----,...,.,..
---···-··-~----·--;-:············---
. . . _,_._
..........-......-
~
Maximo Work Order NumbAr:
0 0
_2k~.Q;!fi9___,_.
·~_//LV.....:!1.-.-·--·~
J'Z.
--·-------~-----------·----~---·--:~--···~·-·1r.<
-~~f2~~~~~~~~-~~:~e4.£i~/f~~:~~- ~·, ~ -~ & --.1 FETU REVIEW DATE:
... !'?-
-------.-----~-
0
1\:)
#OF SAMPLES
·
,. .
Project Type:
D
Mahten~,,~ (MA)
,R,~~~~~~--:~. ;~· ·- -· ~·· = ,, ,, .,... :~·;;~~:L:., POINT COUNT?0
Y~~ 0
No
.,.
[] Deferred Maio~'?."
PT. CT. RUSH?0
0
Bond :specify: K,R, Y,Q!
c- ...... , .,., -·
Yes
0
No
~~ -- -~-
- .-
c?o;;,er:
~ ·- ..-.,
.• -
APPROVAL: _ _ - - - . f!IJ!i
;:-_1,'1.'
Los :\ngelcs t;nified School Di~trict Facilities Scn·iccs Di"ision Laboratory 1449 S. San Pedro St. Los Angeles, CA 90015. (213)745-1!38 LAUSD Lab#
MIC
20i"7oTo4TS:A"·~----=·'~~S
Asbestos Bulk 1:)am1Jie
Anal.t,~j~
NVLAP LAB# 101505-0 Met nod EPA'600/R-93/116(!\'10D) July 1993 [)otc Received: 01/12/2017
ld.h..!!D!!!.lx:,:..Beum:.~ LOS ANCELES HIGH SCHOOL
8136
Date Annfyzed
.,.0!11312017
MATIW.IAL DESCRIPTION
CHR %
AM %
CROC
019CCT:ADMlN/CLSRM.
~EOU!;; •.. NON-FRtABLE; LITE 13ROWN;
0
il
II
o
{l
.HOMOGENEous;·~·..~--.~0
(I
LOBBY t.nTLE THEATRE SOUTH
20170i04(5:s""·-~-~·. ···M's''""""'oi"fi3i2"Qj:=j·~--·
Page 1 of 4
BUILDING/AREA SAMPLED
.0l9CCT: A:DMIN/CLSRM. LOBBY UTI'LE THEATRE
SOUTH
PAINT; PAINT MATERtAL !-lo1\ioCiE'i~TEous;--NON-FRIABLE; OFF WHITE;
~
TREM %
ACT
ANTH
TOTAL
MATERIAL BACKGROUND ... .. PAIN'r
%
%
%
0
0
0
0
'O___._,,...~·c'ARBON ATES
0
(f"--~~B'iNorR. ROCK
...
"''"''='""''-"'---=--=·--_.,.,. ...,..,-----~
tl
~---,~~~
COATING; 201701041 S-C
MS
Ol!t3i2iiT7~""m·~oi9CCT: ADMIN!CLSRM. LOBBY LITTLE THEATRE
SOUTH
GRANULAR
--~·a~--·---~-·o=·~"--
·~,)
NON-FRIABLE; LITE BROWN;
PlASTER;
wi7'iilo416:A ·
.1\·iS
ol/l3/2oi7"-···~~~9ccf: A:oMiN/cL<;RM.
LOBBY LITTLE THEATRE NORTH
GRANULAR !·ibMOGENEo(is;···-~-NON-FRIABLE;
()
p
"(j
(I
!)
0
(}
0'
:6"
ll
-·--0
'"[""~''-'.-~mQ~:
...fr·----~···,_--
fJ
P.i)irv-r
--~--
..-..~·-
LITE BROWN; PAINT;
....~------
20i1oto4T6~B
MS
=::::;-c=~~P-::A~IN":-T:::'MATER.lAL oul312ot7-~0i9fcY;AoMrN/cr.sRM. HoMoaEN"EotJs; LOBBY LITTLETHEATRE NON-FRIABLE;
·"·----··~1S
·2() i'-101 0416-D----~····
01/!312017
';'{f·m·--·alii.3no 1i
()
(]
{!
CARBONATES-·"·----
~
.1)
(f
BrNDER':"ROCK
OFF WHITE; COATING;
NORTH
20!70I04i6:{;-
··-·o·,····-..--". --.6'-
019Cc=-f''A5MIN}CLSRM. LOBBY LITTLE THEATRE NORTH
0 l 9CcT~=,\i)M fN.;"(;I.S Rf\.L' LOBBY L!TfLE THEATRE NORTH
GRANULAR HOfviOGENEo~·
.....5""'=·-··"'1):
NON-FRIABLE~
LITE BROWN; PLASTER;
GRANULAR
HOMOGENEOUS;~-~'""""'"
......
--·~o~····
...
~··o----·0-·--·--rt""---"·······'"n·---~
oo% cEcCut.:os·i·.. ·~---
NON-FRIABLE; BROWN;
PAPER; FIBROUS l0170!0416-E
MS ....-.OlllJ/2017
o19CCT: ADMrNICLSR.,\1. LOBBY LITTLE THEATRE
NORTH . 0 N N
.io"i'7oT0'4'i'7:A
(J)
0 0
=·--·--ii~--
·---~~
-~·.
Lab Supervisor Siz~antr.:.. and Date: ___________ Y~..
. . . . ---··13
b
=---~"()"=--~
li
2%ri'TH::Ji.GTASs GYPSUM
0 t7Fi72oTf""··-o l9CCT: ADMIN/CLSRM:'='"j~'()]iJooENEOUS;
(f
''if . . ...
~-..,i}----!'}~-"""'~"'(f""''
)').AfN'T·-·--···"'"......,.,.
NON-FRIABLE;
LITE BROWN;
CD
Note:
..
CHALKY
MS.
LOBBY MENS RR SE
00
HOMOGEN-EOUS: . NON-FRIABLE; OFF WHITE; DRYWALL;
~~..
PAINT; PAINT MATERlAL
13 /__..,..'7 . _. _. . . . . . . . . . . ___I_!.J___ __1
0%: No Asbcsto~ Detected: <1%: A.>bcslos Detected AboveO% a~d Be!Ciw or Eqt~al to 1% NA: Not ApplicaiJle. "Quantificntion !lone by optical estimate" I .. 5% consider~d non-quantifiable.. TI1is report reh\tes to cmly the material testt>.d. An asterisk ·•· indicates preliminary re~ults.
.......
"··=--.,- ..
/5-~-·--~--~..
~-
Signature of An:Jlyst: .. _. _____:_~...J ..... _._____-
..
. .. .
..------····
lliis report is nnt llS
l!nifi~tl
School District Divfsi(li1. L.abor:'ltory 1449 S. San Pedro St.
Asbestos Bnl!' SnruoJ.~LUh _l,uh.!!r?JQ.n:..E.£ll!lll
Los Ang<.>l(•s, CA 90015
LOS '"''IGELES HIGH SCHOOL 8736
Los Angeles
Fadliri~s S~rviC'es
(213)745-1138
LAUSD Lab#
MIC
Date Analywl
-~-----,.-,---
20!7010417-B
MS
01113/2017
BUILDING/AREA SAMPLED
MATERIAL DESCRIPTION
0!9CCT:ADM!NICLSRM. LOBBY MENS RR SE
H0\10GENEOUS; NON-FRIABLE; OFF WHITE:
nm %
~.1crhocl
Page 1 <•f 4
CROC
A(l;&
.
NVLAP LAB# 101505-0 EPtV600!n-93!1!6(MOD) July 1993 Dale Received: 01/12/2017
•ya.
%
--o-~--· lr·~·,.·~·"··
. · · ·cr. . ,. .
ACT: %
TREM %
o
ANTll %
o
TOTAL %
MATERIAL BACI
.... ---- o
o
o
·sTr\foEifR.ocK
0
0
~··---;:;-~~=-
o
. ·~·c'A'R:"80,~1:T'Es-···~~·-····.~··---
COATING;
26i 7o i o4t7 ~c-~~--.. MS"oliT312oT7~~-~o!9CCT": ADM IN/CLSRM. LOBBY MENS RR SE
:
.... . .
i"oi'7
20170104!8-B
MS
GRANULAR
HOMOGENEOUS;
()
o~-~u-·--·~-·
NON-FRIABLE; LITE BROWN; PLASTER;
GRANULAR HOMOGENEOUS;
WOMENS RR LOBBY
NON-FRIABLE:
NE
LITE BROWN; PAINT; PAINT MATERL".L
.. ..
o-~ ~~"·-o-··~-"-·cr···-··--
o
0 I 9CCT': ADr:-1!N/cl.SR'M:--" HOMOCJENi::'E:::;O~u:i·s=-;----;;0------;0:="'-·-··o·=-·~·.,·~()"''·"""-....·y··~ WOMENS RR LOBBY NON-FRIABLE;
01113/20!7
''"''"()"''""'-~"''l'AfN-f-""~-·~.-~--.--
0
0
··cX"f86NX'fE$~--
OFFWHITE~
NE
COATING; 2017016418-C
MS
oT9ccT:A.of\1TN!cl.s'RM:"
01113i20!7
WOMI:"NS RR LOBBY
NE 2017010419-A
MS
GRANULAR
HOMOGENEOUS; NON-FRIABLE;
{!
~0
0
(j
-o·
()
LITE BROWN; . PLASTER;
0tiT372of'i--~'- '"oi 9cc'i": ADM!NfCLSRM. 7
WOMENS CHANGING RM
WEST
GRANULAR
IIOMOGENEOUs:--~---·iJ""-·~·-~··u
..
[)
··a -
---·~r-
·-o______. . . . .-.. . . .i:f'...
BINDER, ROCK
!)
NON-FRIABLE; UTE BRO\\'N;
PAINT;
20·17o ai4i~:8-·
PAINT MATERIAL
MS
0 1113!2017
oI9cCT: A.oMINiCITRM.'"""'.fio:Yfocr:.NE<.Iu:>: WOMENS CHANGING RJvl WEST
·-·!t";~~-~-=-···o~-
COATING;
io i 70 I o4(9".:c"""'--·--- ~iS
GRANULAR
01113/2017
ot9CCT: ADM!N;ci:SR.M. · .~'Ho;v'iC5'GEN'Eous; WOMEN$ CHANGf1'.'G Rlv! WEST
0
rv rv
en
2017010420-A·-·'"'
"'f;_1's"""""'"'"'oT/f3/2'of7"..........0 I9CCT : ADM IN/CLS!Uv!. ~1ENS
0 0
SE
Co
CHANGING RM
0
-·0----~·tr··~··'·"·~··
(l
CARBONATES~~--·~··"·"--~--
NON·fRlAFlLE; OFF WHITE; ·or.~-,~-~~iJ.
. __. _
()
.o
n
()
- a
~--~-·i.r
BL'i"DER.ROCK .
NON-FRIABLE; LITE BROWN; PLASTER;
GRANULAR
'Yio}:roaE"Nious;
(J
--·ir"·-····........
.-
Tr--~.-
. _ . __\_1-BTND-E!(.iioCiC
·---~(r_,_
NON-FRIABLE; LITE BROWN; PLASTER; GRA..NULA.~R~------~~
<0
=~er.·=~:::::·:::~·=~·:~~:-~ __.c/~-----··-·-~ -~--t~·-~-J!}_J~_l -~·i:::~~-~fAn3f)'St: ~_(:3{~~:~·-·__
---~~--
Note:
0%: No Ashestos Ocwcted; .
..--.. -.
-~
This report is not used by L\USD to c!nim prod
This report moy not be. reprorluc{~d except in lts entire!)'.
Los Angclc; IJnified Schoo! District Facilities Scrvkcs Dh'ision l,ahorotory 1449 S. San P~r!ro St. Lo~ i\ngelcs, CA 90015 (213)745-1138
LAUSD Lab#
Mi('
Asbestos Bull< Sarr:m!£_Ji!lJ!!U!.§ Lal1.!.!.Gl.t!1rX.F.£RQ.r.! LOS ANGELES HIGl-1 SCHOOL 8736
Date
IWILDINGfAREA SAMPLED
Analy~ed
20 I 70 l 0420-B
.
•··~--·O.•"-""'-''···,-."'-·'-'"·"·-'·''w'"""-'-''""'·'''"'"'-""''"''''"'''"'·"'"·_,..·.,·'•~-,..,., ..,.,.r..
tli.IS
2oT7(J"!042o:c
MS
NVl.AP LAB# 101505·0 Method IWA/600/R-93/l16(M00) .July 1993 Date RN·ei\·cd: 01/12/2017
.
019CCt: ADMlNfC[.S\'l.M. MENS CHANGING RM SE
0111312017
MATERIAL DESCRIPTION ·
CHR ~'•
Page3 of4 CROC %
~-......_.,•""""-....::"'""""'""'""'.r<.''''W!~'""''"''....:¥i"""'.,.,.,~..._..,.....,..._~.N...,.
HOMOGENEOUS; NON-FRIABLE:
.
{)
il
.
0
TREM
IH,. {1
ACT ANTB TOTAL % % '}~l () .................-0-"-"·'=""()
MATERIAL BACKGROUND I 00% CELLULOSE
BROWN;
PAPER: FIBROUS of9ccr~'i\15NiiNicLSR~ HOMOGENEOUS: MENS CHANGING RM NON-FRL4BLE: SE OFF WHITE;
01/13/2017
AM %
·~---·----0...-
i)
. ,~.-0.
I)
ir. . . .
...............
~~~
u
-2% rrs!ilfCiLA'sS"·· . . ~,.-- oyrsuM
DRYWALL;
2oTioro42t-A
MS
Ol/13i20t7"""'~"-oT9cC'f;AbMIN/CLS~M.
THEATRE LOBBY CTRJWEST
a --
NON-fRIABLE; OFF WHITE; COATfNG; GRANULAR
THF..ATRE LOBBY CTRIWEST
·rvrs. . .., o m372o, 1
Ol9CCT.:AD~11N/CL$R.M.
THEATRE LOBBY SOUTH
0
"~"a-·-·=··~·"T
u
0
····-~·lr·····
··-a-.'___n___6_........,.,.. .,'ir···
ot9ccr: ..:o~1iNici:SR1::r-..'"'HoMoGENcous;
-··· . ·-~1i""'-·orit3i2ol7
0
LITE BROWN:
ot9ccr: ADMii\/7cL.s·Rt::c..,.,.iioM60ENEous: THEATRE LOBBY CTRJWEST
20 ,-,,o 1o4i2.:"A' ......"~· ..., ...
HOMOGENEOU~C~-~.,...........~..ij,_~= ~fl.
NON-FRIABLE; PAINT; Pli!NT MA:~T:,:E~R.:::lA~L;:_____~=
201101 0421-B ..~-...~.......M.s..... .,....oTli'3/2017'·
20 t 7010421-C
CHALKY
'""o~··-·
....·-a--·--· cARsoN'A-r"Es"·····....,.. ··-~-
(l
ri"i'NDER, ROC!(
0
NON-FRIABLE;. LITE BROWN;
PLASTER; GRANULAR
Hor.ro6ENious; '"""-·--"'·ir
(l
I}
Q
0-··
(}
~}
t}
--~="j}'~'-'""
. . 100% CELLULOSE ......................,."....
NON·fRIABLE; BROWN;
PAPER: 2(iT7oTii42I~s
MS
FIBRO;;;.U:;;,S""""'"'="'",...--~~-
- 0 i'/i 3!2017"''
.0 t9CCT : ADMINfCLS~RM~.·~Hm10GENEOUS; THEATRE LOBBY SOUTH
20 t?o to423:A .
MS
~-
. ··-"'·=··""'o··-
GYPSUM
NON-FRIABLE: OFF WHITE:
DRYWALL; CHAI.KY
. . .Q'="·"'"'"'"·o---··--..--..0~~-·--.....
oT9ccT'~'"';\Q.\1'i'N~/-C-LS_R_M __.-~i-l:.:;O.r~fQ(i['R'Eous·;--·-·· ----o-=~~
o1113120 l7
MENS RR LOBBY
SE
o:··---···'""-'2% FIDCRGLASS __.,,....,.,......
o
(J
(l
..............IQo-o/~·cELLULOSE·-··---·--··
NON .. fR!ABLE; BROWN; PAPER;
0 N N
FIBROUS
2oT7riio423=s
MS
o1i13/2017 ~..... ~or9cci'--~""AoM fN/CLSR.•~c="f-!o'M'oGriN'£oos; ---o·~·-···,. ·=er··"~··--·{i------~~Ci....,.. . . . -~---o--· MENs RR LOBBY
(J)
0 0
SE
cb 0
. .-.....,. ir~~···-~rrflwP.'o!:Ass·..,....·--.-.--
i:f~~
NON-FRIABLE: OFF WHfrE;
GYPSUM
DRYWALL; ---~~~·=·~---·~-
Lab
Snp<~rvisor Signature and Date:.
Note:
. .-.. .,. .
'"''~'"'""'"·"'
,;7<(!!!:::::> · ......
CHALKY
.........
:~ 'S:..J. . . _.________,..,....·.. L __l__r__'.l:__t2__,__
0%: No Asbestos Detected; < l %: A.sbe.stos Det.~rd Above 0% and B.elo1v or Equal to l% NA: Not Applicilb!e. "Quantifi,,~t:on done by optical r.stimate" I - 5 %considered non-quantifiable. ·ntis reron relates to only rite matcrial.test<)O. An asterisk ·•· rmfic<;tes preliminary results.
1
~·-·"·
. . . . . . . . .- . ,
·' ) .
~--J
Signature of Analyst:_.....
-~~""""'~""'"~
·-'-"'""·-·---···,~----
-,?~~. -'· .
This report is not. used by LAUSD to claim product endorsement by NV LAP or ~ny agr:·n~y ofthe U.-S. Government. This report m~y not be rcprod11cect except in its emimty.
Los Angeles linificc! School District F~~ilitirs Services ()ivision Labor
Asbesto~Ji!!lk~1nwle Anah·s-1>
f;JU)n~:atQ.P::..Rm
1449 S. San Pedro St. Los Angclc.s, CA 90015
.1\UC
Date
BIJII.. DING/AREA
MATERIAL Df:SCIUPTION
SAMPLED
o19ccr : AoMINJcl..sRiVt···-H"m115·c;~-EN~'-Eo_u_s_;_,·~-·
·--~isr···--·oT/13120i 1
WOMENS CHANGING RM WEST
20 170 1o4i4:6··~--~---..,~;1S
0 I 9cg; .ADMIN/Cl.SRM.
0 l/13120 17
WOMENS CH ..O.NGJNG RM
WEST
2017010425
O~te
Rcr.civttd: 01112/1017
8736 Analyzed
2017010424-A
EP:V61Hl/R-9J!ll6(:1JOD) .July 199.3
LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
(213)745·1138 LAUSD Labll
NVLAP LAB# WIS05-0 M~rhad
o19ccr ~A'6~1'iR17Ct..sRM
·~·rr.:.;~-~·---o i/131201 7
LOBBY THEATRE SOUTH
2iii 7oi·ii~----'""&fs'"~ iliil.:ii20I7'"
Page 4 of 4
CHR
% n·~-
AM.
. ,. ,. . , . -cr·% ··
CROC
'!'REM
ACT
Ai'XT!l
TOTAL
%
o· ·~,·-····o'""' . . . . ~o
%
%
%
~ f)· ········· ······roo~;:r<:E"Ct:uwsE
u
o
n
FrBROUS HOMOGE.::::i'Eous;"" NON-FRIABLE; OFF WHITE;
u
I}
·
--~o----~
o
2% fisE"R.GE.i\ss GYPSUM
DRYWALL; CHALKY
HoMoaEN"EiousT=·
·-~~a~··
Q-"
6
0
__1}_ .....~·'·'"'"'~'"'""~~-· ()
cARBo"NA:r€s""···.,~--~---~
NON-FRLA.DLE; OFF WHITE;
o
o ,___,,_.,CARBONATEs·
NON-FRIABLE;
OFF WlUTE; Pl.ASTER.DEBR!S; GRANULAR
-~~~~,~-------·
0 N N C!l 0 0
cb ~
,__;_~
"-..,&::>·
•.-.•. ..!~(.;....,,_
lab Sup;,;;;r·vt5or Si,b''TI;lturr; and Date:,·-····· . N<.>te:
... ~",,.L.....
-
NON-FRIABLE; BROWN; PAPER;
PLASTER DEBRIS; GRANULAR oi"9cc1'~;.·o'M~iN~/c~LS-R_M_.-;;.lr~10ciENEoUs;··---r-····~···o··~""'m'.~T---(l____.....~......ij.....................
MENS RRJN LOBBY SE
i\<1ATERIAL BACKGROUND
... . ..,,)...!.___~
!Lt.!!.....~..J
0%: No Asbestos Detecred;
.
..
..S:::":::s::: ...¢., ___........... ______,_ . .
Siffo1ahrre of Analyst: ........
This n:port is not used by LAUSD to c.lnim product cnd•)rscmt•nt by NVLAP or any ogency of the .U.S. Gnv~mment.
This rt:port m:1y not he reprnQuct:d except in [ts entirety.
LOS A!\!GEL.ES UNIFIED SCHOOl DfSTR!CT FACILITIES SERViCES D!ViSlON CHAIN-OF-CUSTODY FOR BULK Af\JJi.LYSJS
J/
SITE NAME:
SAMPLED BY:
.
L:_
..,. _,
;;;ct l.-
---~4i.:..~JI;"!_~~-DATE SAM~:: ~;+,~;;;-=:::~~E~~:::~L~~r_§5~~~!~
I 10
Fill in all information legibly and precisely. Original must be submitted with the samples. Make a copy befo;e subrnitting samples. Results and a c;opy of the Chain of Custody (COG) with sample numb
LAB
___ ...
SAMPLE
BUILDING
NU~l(l,3~~---· -· ~:!\~~8ER -~--- Nl_Jf~1BER
_ 1701-0427
J __
l j+:p---
Bl)ILDING
ROOM NUMBER
_NAME; _-~-'"~----~N~iORf
LOCATION IN
NAJ\11£"·-,.---rTf RQ~'--- _______,_..___,
1 ____ j_ _ l?}~cc.r__ti;.;;;Ot!-~~---J~.:i~t-~?-
___t__
. _ _ _ :(:I (d'd~l.~.,~:::_ . .
FRIABLE
MATERIAL TYPE
__ .. _.··~ (YE?. or.J'-'OL
_j_P-ESCRIBE)
_Pk::kcD-bf!s.::c~·''~?.g"gJ ... ~~-__!
-~-~-~-~=-~~~~~J~~-.-
1-:;;:;:: ~--B -~ ~-+
_.
-L~~':; -~-- ~.;zt __j_f>w-!!!>--2r~ ~~- __, -~
__
1701-0433~=~-_g- -~t~j=~-~-=:---- iJ:Z.=:- . ~;.~ -t=- ~r~-=-:;:~0434J_J~~L_______ -------. . · : . . . . ~ -ffi~ ~~ -~--3;~;t____ •..,~~--~-*'~1~- -----11 _j ~.&,__ c -I- . - T-v--
l~;:;~;:;7 -~~--_1,,----1 ~l.
0435 __
t
--
--·---------~----~ -·"~
1701-043S-
·
DATE
1
'\}
~~t I }- 12
_ z '1_ ___ l_____ .___ _ j_____~--=·----·--+ ek:ef =
s
f'::
.
-
-2;,¥~~1£~~-~fxJ-->~S I L j J
DEP.L\RTMENT I AREA I CONSULTANT:
____L!_I_~_t_tl:____ /L ts__~----- ___tf!?:Jilf(L.:_~~c_/_!!(>!'.::·~::::;t·~.·.,.._,:·~~~::-'"'·· . ~---(~ e~~~--------~c ~-.. . ~ \1 ~ t b __u_;__z, I) . _______....1Y1 _· '.: .. 0~ t"ll?7 _. . . .J.:;.·--"-·-· , ~--· . .. ·'··~·:--------·--------~ A-:
;---T ... J f_j_j_~.J.2_
"'
0
~ 0
cb N
.-._,._
___ ....................
____ -·------------- ..........,........ ---·- ........... ,,.., .........__ -----..--.---.
Maximo Work Order Number:
·;;EruuS'EQ'iiii:·----
~
_}-::___(a{ef)(L_'/__7!_9_____
'"·£i.· --- ·-
·-----~~
"· ··· .. --;:-. ---
F_E_ruRE'vJEwEo BY. -~l-·~"'~~.J..,..l::!':_'i"_,_--·~·.::t.L_ FEI U REVIEW DATE: --~4_1;,._//.2::______ f ;
;/
~ ~"~f.JL-··------·---~ ··----- ___lL
NAME (PRINT & SIGN):
VlE;
0
-·-----~--
.
,......--~. -~ .....~.,.,....., ~......,..... --
Project Type;
·-·"·---·-··..--...
---"'"-~---
_
_ __________
v
___ . . ____________ _
--------------~---
#OF SAMPLES
___________ " .... __ . _ .. _........ ____ ..... _ _
.. ---~.-.----.-------......_, _______ _,... ,.-
.......,,_, ..
__
,,.
___ ____ .
_.,
___LL r;c' -· "'
..............
0 Mointc.~;mce (MAJ [] Deferred M;,inte~B~ce 0 Bond (specify: K.R. Y,Ql ~tiler. __'" ____ ~~ ----·---- ---~ ---- ----.--· • ---------
-~"" ·----·~-...,--...,..="""'"=~--~----~
RUSH?O ves
~a
POINT COUNT?0 Ye> 0 No
fl.PPROVAL: ______ ·---..-------PT. CT. RUSH?0 Yes
0
No
_____ _
APPROVAL: ""~·~ it. 1 I~
Los Angeles Unifierl Sdwnl Di~trict FacHiti(~S S,ervkf'"i Division L~bor:rtory 1449 S. Sau P~dro St. Los 1\ngelcs, CA 90015 (113)745-1 1.38
LAlj$0 Lab#
6J!lest()~Jl.!J1k
Si!mn!e An.alr.ill
NV LAP LAB# 101505-0 Method EPAI600/R-93!!16('f00) July 1993 nar.c: R<:cd1·od: 01/12/2017
Laborator·y llcport .· ...
LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL 8736
Oate BUILDING/AREA MATERIAL Analy.,.•rf • --SAMPLED ()[:SCRfPT!O:>c' ~ 7:::-::::::::-----:-. :::.-:-----:~::-:::-::-:-::c---o:ctc79ccr-:-·;.;:oM·iN72i:sn:M:-·--· ..Fiot;;roo~·Neous;· '2017010427 01/UUUII MS
1\llC
AM ~ %
CHR
% 0
~
()
o
Pagel of3
CROC
TREM
ACT
%
%
%
ANTI'! %
TOTAL
WOMENS CHANGING RM CLG. SPACEiCTR
2oT7oYa;r2-ii'"..,............. ·· i\(!;
NON-FR!ABLE; OFF WHITE; PLASTER DEBRIS; GRANULAR ot9ccr: Ao~m~icGsR.M':"""~. iio~-:ma'Et:iEous; WOMENS RRIN LOBBY NON-FRIABLE; ATrlC NORTH OFF WHITE;
OI/13/20 17
o
....
-~- r·--·-'·~·"·-,r-·~-
·eo·
o
•g,
1\-lATERIAL BACK.GROU:-10
0
CARBONATES
o
·· · · 90% arr:m::os·€·-------· BINDER
DUCT TAPE;
20 l 70 I0429 ... ·=~.........,.,.~.MS-...-•.oTI'iJJ2o\7"""'""'"''"'"6'J9ccr ,·ADM !N.'CLSR.t'-'1. THEATRE LOBBY ATTIC NORTH
20 110 1()43o
.........~oT!T372o rr~
··----·~···-"··"Ms
~1s········o'i7i3/2'oT7'
l~O~iOGENEOUs;"'""''""'-'o·-~-
0
f}
(I
BINDER
'OFF WHITE; DUCT TAPE; COATED/ CLOTH
1-toMooERiious;
LITTLE THEATRE
NON-FRIABLE; OFF WHITE; DUCT TAPE;
II
(J
''()
·-·~
...~""""(j~····--~-- 0
0 J9CCT: ADMIN!CI~~fu'VL .. iioMirm::xEOUS; MENS RR IN LOBBY NON-FRIABLE;
0
-=o---·0--.. .
(I
:-..is·--·-· o JrJ37ioT?'"'"'"''"'oT9Ccf, AbMIN/cL'>RM.
2oboto433
..........
~·""'"''"'"~'""'.""""''~'
... ,.,.,.,...
2017010434-A
NON·FR!ABLE; BLACK; BARRIER PAPER; TAR-LIKE, PAPER · HoMOGENEous;-~·-·
WOMENS CHANGING RM
NON-FRIABLE;
NW
BLACK;
BARRIER PAPER; TAR-LIKE, PAPER
MS
ovnno 17~··-~oT9cc'f':·:;:-&'"MrN!cl.sRM: . HOMOGENEOUS; MENS CHANGING RM WEST
JJ"'~~
.......
f)~"·"-
. 70% CELLULOSE · · -.......~-----TAR
M's-···-·--
0
BLACK;
BARRIER PAPER; TAR-LIKE, PAPER
2017010432
a ....~~--~AA'9ifo/~-cETJ::-uThsE
(\
B!NDER
-....-,::-:-o-::-:::-::::--=-=-=-=""',....,."""""~"""C""O""'.A~T.EDI_C..,LO~T...,.H~~--;--• SOUTH
. 90% CELL[;'D)s£······~·-,.···
(l
NON-FRlABLE:
0 l9CCT: ADMIN/CLSRM.
ATTIC NORTH
2017010431
COATED/ CLOTK
·o
0
. . ··
····o='~"'· ~·o
"'
0
()
0
-~
............"if"'~''"
.
70% CELLULOSE ..~.... - ..... . TAR
70% CELLULOS·E·-··-·..........-....-
T,'.,R
............ Q
··~
0
. H ···--........ ,,.0~·-~--·
.(I
Q--~'''"""'"'{j'-·'"••··..···~BiNDER__ . -··..=·""""·""·-·"'""~....-
NON-FRIABLE;
BROWN; COVE BA$E;
0 N N
20170 10434-B -~···""""~{§""""''b lll3/20l7
())
0 0
cb w
RUBBERY OI9CCT: ADKHN;;c;;:::sR:M~··· rrOM\A .. t:N~.:uu~; MENS CHANGING RM NON-FR!AtJLfi; WEST . DARK BROWN; ADHESIVE;
··-:z::y·····-..·~-
Lab Supe-rcisor Signature and Dale: ...
:O.ote:
(--~
-:-=:~·~~-
SOLID
-
------..
·~·a··~-
''"''"'"'""'~···-:'"·'-'""'"~·'""''~"""""""'"'"'···
·~.f.J..~~--~-~7.-- ...
.f
0%: No Asbr.stns Detected; to or.!ythe mat,)rial te.ste.d. An asterisk '*' indicates preliminary re-;ults.
0
tr . ...,..-.....!)"··
0
a ..--.. . . . . Tr ~-
.~ ....--_..._~,·....,=---'"'''''''''·......,....... - - : " - - - =
Siii-n:;tureof Anal)st: ___
~-· ~~-:-·...
.. - . -.. - - -
AOIH;~;JviC'""'"'-
____ ..............----------·-
l11is report is not used by LAUSD to da.im pwdtrcl ~dcrscrnem by NVLAP or any agency of the U.S. (.iovcm:_mnt. Th-is rcp(lrt m;ty n0t he reproduced except in ils entirety.
Angel~s Unified School Oi.strict F~ciJ!tics Service; Divhion Litbor,tory
Los
~5.!J~_tos
Bulk Sample""'<~..nalnis
LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
(213)745-IBS
87J6
LAlJSD Lab#
MIC
Oa(e
Btl!LDING/AREA SAMPLED
Analyzed ··---~is""'····a·l-ii
20170!0434-C
3120! 1
ME~S
CHANGING RM
DESCRIPTION HOMOGENEOUS; ..
Page 2 of 3 C!f.R %
AM:
CROC
%1.
%
TREM %
ACT %
ANTH %
TOTAL
MATERIAL
%
PACKGROUND
-····o·"·a····· ....... ··a-·--.i-l_ _ ......{;= '·'•""'''i}""''"--·---·o·--·---o~····"·~.,~AINDER~.,. -~·-----
NON-FRIABLE; OFF WHITE; COATING; COATED MA T.ERIAL
···· Ms·- ····avl3;2o 11
20110 t 043s:A.~
MATERIAL
o19cc:r·: A-m1r:"7:'ci::sR:\1:~· WEST
···a·.
~·"·-·----·~o· \l-·~-ll ...............~-"'i:;·~-----i-1---""~'!'i""'"'·"····--~ 019CCT: ADMlNlCLs-RM. --H-OMOGENEOUS: BINDER MENS CHANGI'l'\G R.l\1 NO!>I-FRIABLE; EAST BROWN: COVE BASE; RUBBERY MS-Ot/!"3/.2o'ff""""· 0!9CCT: ADMIN!CL.<;RM .........HoK'fu""oc::,EN:':-=E-:-O""US"'";~.,.._-,0-""'·~"' II . 0 {!:-- .........~.-·o"···~~"" 0 'A'i5fiES'fVE-·---MENS CHANGING RM NON-I"RIABLF.; l;iAST DARK BROWN; ADHES!VE; SOLID ~·-·~·.-o------o-~~---····&"'""~··~·-·..-u .(1 ~--'"""""(j'-""'"-··-~-BrNDER .....~.'-"'""''"·~-~Olli3120i"-J"""-·o"i9ccT: ADMIN/CLSRM. '"''f[(5~1QiJf.NEdUS; MS MENS CHANGING RM NON,FRIABLE; EAST OfF WHITE;
(}
ioT7oi'il'435~B
2
NVl-AP LAB# 101505-0 Method EPA/61}0/R-93/116(MOD) July 1993 On!~ Rec~.iwd: 01112/2017
Laboratorx...R£J1Q~:!
1449 S. San Pedro St. Los Angeles, CA 90015
oi7ol"o4·3s:-c-·-·
-,r·.
COATING;
COATED MATERIAL
2oT7oTo43·6::x
MS
o17T372o'iT"'" o19CCT : ADMINici.SR:M~·--i-ror;;roat:NEous; · WOMENS CHANGING RM SW
•
c
0
(}
0
()
BfNDER''""'''"''"-·-.----.-·.
NON-FRlABLE; BROWN;
COVE BASE; 20170 I 0436.11'~''""'""'"' . MS
2017010436-C
RUBBERY ot/13t2ol7~"'--~·---or9ccf":··A"""'o""!i.'f""IN"".'""'c=-=.r.-=.s-=ru""M=-' .._~·- Hm16GDI;:::,.,E=-~o"'t"'Js"";~· WOMEN$ CHANGING RM NON-FRlABLE; SW DARK BROWN; ADHESfVE; SOt.JD Oi9c'cT :~A.-=o"'"M.,.,IN'"'·;.,-:c,..,.r.-=s·~RM""'····"'".~~~rO'M'oaENEous:
....... ,...,,,,Ms~- 0111312017
WOMENS CHANGING RM SW
2017010437-A
.............., . "..~1&''""'-o J/131201 7
· .... ·o~----~=tf ·
oJ'9ccFA."5'i\1iNICLSRM ADULT SCHOOL OFC. SOUTH
· · · o-·~..........
o
o
. . . . . ir-·---·-· o
T-.............-0:~
o
. . ._. . . . :o
--~r·-
·-··u··---~---
()
,., f!Tff:~:\·~E--~.
err::l'f.l"ER,. . _.......
NON-FRIABLE; OFF WHITE; COATING; .• (;OA.If;;Ql,!~Tf:;R!AL H0\10GENP.OUS;
. """'"'''~'""'"----· --~"=""'''"-"'~"~··----..-----·-.~-~........_
0
fi
0
il
.....~...~-.--------~·,. ..,,...._ 1J D {I 0
ll
(!
Q
0
0
··- PXiNT""
FRIABLE; OFFWHffE:
PAINT; 0
"'
"'
20 17oTo437'~i3---·------~iS'-
Ol
ol9CCT :A5'Ml'N7cisRi:ii. ADUI..:r SCHOOL OFC.
0 0
SOUTH
l.ah
____,,..,..,,... ~--
Supr;rvi~r.r
Note:
---~"'"'' ~~-·-·
--~·--- -------~-L.LJ-~§__t_!!.~_____~
Sft;na:ure ru~d Date:
0%: No .... sbestos D('t<":t,x!; <:I%;
....._...,........,...,_•...._,.
I'A!NT MATf~.~~L-...-
HOMOGENEOUS; FRIABLE; OFF WHITE; CEILING TILE: FIBROUS
Asb.~>hi>
Detca
NA: Not Applbible. TI1is ICpOtl rdates to only the material tested. An asterisk·~· indkates preliminary results.
0
· 4oo/;'cE'L'f:uws E';2o% FIBERGLASS PERLITE
..
Q?E~~,s·-w--~- -~----,.
S ir,'1'1ature of Analyst:
. . . --. -
~--
·--·····---· This r~.port is not use<) by LA T.JSD to claim product .:md!lrsem<'!nt by NVLAP or any agency of the U.S. Gove-rnm~~nt. TIJis report may nor be r~.produced exce-pt in its entirety.
. . . ., . .,. . .-.-
Los A"!I
Asbestos Bun,
8736 Ml·C
Date Analyzed
MS
0 IIi 312017 -~·(iT9ccT:ADMiN/CLSIU!I.
_,.......,._._.......,_,.._,__.,.,..,_.,.==----:-:--..-~.·,--·
20170 I 0438-A
BUILDING/AREA
SAMPLED TICKET RM NW
2017010438-8
NVLAP LABIIIOISOS-0 ~lNhoct EP ....!600!R-93!1 i6(~10D) July 1993 Date Recerved: 01/12/2017
A!l.!!!.l:lli
LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
(213)745-1138
LAUSD Lab#
~ample
~r:yRepQ!!
MS
01/13/2017
Page 3 of3
nm
[)E~)CRfPTJON
•;,
AM
HOMOGEN'i:iou{; .
(I
il
MATERIAL
FRIABLB; OFF WHITE: PAINT; PAINT MATERIAL
~619CCT:ADMINfCI~<;R.M:='HO'MoGENE0::;:1;.;.;JS;;;:~-~--::o.· TICKET RM NW .
%
CROC
TRL\f
ACT
ANT II
%
% 0
~~
~~Q
0 ··--·····-'''i)~·.--.·.-
-~0~---~-·-
-~
o
G ...
·'"1)
TOTAL ";~.
MATERIAL BACKGROUND
0
p,'.\i;JT""~"'~~----
Q-~'~% CELLULOSE.20% ~,~~
F!BERGLASS PERLITE
FRIABLE; OFF WHl'fE;
CEILING TILE;
·-------~--.-· .~,-~ .
-~-~~-..
FJS_Ro.u.;:.;;.s--,.--c-...,_-~.·---·--·=-~--~-.-------~-·=-~~="··~....
·~"·"==~...~ ...-.-..·.-·~-~---
0 N N
en 0 0
cb 01 .
Note:
""~-/~
-~
u4f..:..,; 1 n 17 Lab Supervisor Signam>c and Date:____ ~:::::=-_>..~....t.·-------~---~ . . _!. __,__ /_;;;>_;____ ..... 1 0%: No Ashesros DcH;cwl;
Si&'11ature of
Analyst:~_~:S...,..........,...,....__ _
This report is not usc
o:- any <:gC!1CY of the U.S. Qovemmenr. '111is.mport mny not be r<~prod;rccd except in its entirety.
LOS ANGELES lJNIFIEO SCHOOL DISTRICT FACILITIES SERVICES DIVISION FOR BULK ANALYSIS
CHAIN~OF-CUSTODY
..,.~ r:~~;;;-;j~
SITE NAME:
SAMPLEDBY:
-~/,~_t!.~::_~}e$_~~--?._<;l~r:lo{ CODE: /37}Ct> __ PROJECT DESC:~~ lr..__!?_f_ C ""-~~~!-' 71_"-l!
Fill in all information legibly and precisely. Original must be submitted with the samp:es. Make a copy before submitting samples. Results and a copy of the Chain of Custo
LAB
_ .l!_t,JJ\11_J!~~~
1701-0
SAMPLE
BUILDING
.... t-:f(,L!YIJ:3ER __ .
-
NUMBE~
-
BUILDING
-'2.1-.
ROOM NUMBER
~A~~---
o:'\"'1.'¥<'
A#'
AND/OR NAME
LOCATION IN .
.
MATERIAL TYPE
_B_()_Q~-----
___ .....L~~_-...-_,.":",-_ .....,..",~J!?.~C~IB,E!
•
"-lo
<:.; K
f;.J
FRIABLE
.
1
____
(YES
1
01'
NO)---~
'
= El _··--·=t__:__=· ~~t-·~-~---····- - ·--'·=--=~----0'·~-~-----=~-~=[====--~~~~-t~==-~t·~~:~~-~--r=.:~~~=E~=====---_____ --_ _ ~ =~=t~~ -------=--·~~:~-:~-, I I [ ----•----
· - .- -
f
.
DATE:
.
..
I
...... ~·••··•·•~t--"·=-----···-···~-~---~--
---~··"·•=··
.
--..,.~~"'"""" .." .:~....,.,.,._,_~;, ..<.w•"'''''''"'""'""O'"'"""''''"''...,.w·•"''" ·~-~--··'"''1""'"',.,....r-•.•:o;.-·-·---
.
N/\ME (PRINT & SIGN):
TIME:
-·- •·····~··''"'·--···· ··
i
... , ... ,, ..·.:.,·,: .•.·, ..... ;. --·-···········-....,•---···•·-·----·····-·····-···-'"j
DEPARTMENT I AREA I CONSULTANT:
~7;;1;~ j/:.r;; .~r;;::~rk:r: ~~~~-~~=----~-----,.·-------·--
0 .__,. .........,.....,.,...._----~---
.
--"-'.~---~~--
..----.---···--"·'''"·'""•"·--·--·· ,.,.,.._,,.,.,.............,. •"·'-·~"'·'
....~...... ,.... ..,.,...,,,_...,lf-'."""="'=''''''''•,..._.,...-....-............- - - - - - - -
., .. ..-....•.. ·.. ... ,.. ~
~
-----
#OF SAMPLES
__:1::__.
. . .L
_______________ -.......--.
..,...,...·-·-~-.,
--·-·
-.......... --~-.
t\.l ~-----------
-----·-·------·•"'·--·-~-·-~-·~----~-~,..~ ...•.7•-·w·------·--·----·~--
·
~ Maximo Work Order Number:
__
2._f~ 00f...:t:~.----------~-----·
m-_F£-_1'U_U~f_O_Ni3: -~- ~ ~-!:517)}- /;;J~---\_,_,
F ETU REVIEWED BY: ...#... ::,r:':~: l . , ~ ..
FETU REVIEW DATE: __
-·~-·~~ ·:~--··::::::::':::--~!...
i!ti~il. 'l---: ___. ~-• ·~ . \ .
F
.
Project Type:
- - · - - · - - - - -..._ ...... ,,,~.m·•·•--·c-----------C .............-
0
Mair.!erance (MAl.
........ _.~-~---------.......... ----.~-----
0 D~lerred Ma;nter"'n'e 0
_,_ _ _, . ,. . . . -----;;-...,.,. "'~~,..--- ---- "'""~'"" ,., RUSH?
0
Yes [ . No
POJNTCOUNT?0Ye!0 No
--<
Bond (specify: K,R,Y,QJ ~--
..
[::!{-;~
- - - - - - - - · - - -··
-w- ~
APPROVAL.: ----··-----···"""---· _____ ----------------·---------------------·--PT. CT. RUSH?[Jves
0
No
;~PROVAL: - - - - - - - - r(~~·
lli:,j,l';
Los Angeles Unified Schooll)jsrdct
ruhe1!9.lJ!.~fuu:nul£,.,:).JU!!.Ysis t, ahQr!U!!!.rJ~.$P. or.!
Fadlitics Scrvkcs Di,·ision L:
l..AUSD Lab#
MJC
26"170I0439:s
MS
E.PAJGI)0lR-93il16(MOD) .July 1993 !)ate Heccin•d: 01112i2017
LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
8736
Date Analyzed
2o""i'75!"o4'f9:;:·-·----~--.,~;-s-·-·-o-rh-3;;2o
NVLAP LAB# 101505-0 ~1attwc1
u··
Page 1 of I
AM
CHR
DJ\:SCRIPTION
%
LOBBY
Holl1oo'ENE'oii!r"w~·--· FRiABLE;
WEST
OFF WHITE~
019CCT: ADMr.\'!ClSRM,
Ol9CCT:
Oi/13/2017
MATERIAL
BUILDING/AREA SAMPLED
····ir·----.. -
CROC'
%
o
PAINT; PAINT MATERIAL-~-~....,----;::-~-
ADMINtcLs'ii\1~-~-~r-io\fooE"Nf.ous:
LOBBY WEST
o
<1
--
TREI\1
%
%
(l
()
ACt'
ANT!l
TOTAL
M." TERIAL
%
%
%
BACKGR,OUND
o
n
'i!--"·-..-~--···o·-- . ,..... ~6·~-,-·-.,.·---p:i\i~'r
'(r··~""'"'"~·o~~-"'"'""'0-.--·
FRIABLE; OFF WHITE:;
·------
•. cE;u.:uLosE. 2o%
---~-4oo/
l'!DERGLASS
PERLlTE
CEILING TILE: ----~-
-·-·----·-·"'•'·'·'<"··--~·
.
.
FIBROUS
..
'''"'''"~"-'""'"''"'"''"''·"'---·-··---~--
'''--~·"'~'"'''"'"'·. '""'"~"
"'·'·'"·'"'' ¥,,,..,.-: ....,-·.··--.--....-~
0 N N
Ol 0
0
.....~
V- <~..?
L•.b Supervisor Sign,ture and Date: _______ )lot-::
-/1
'7
-·~-~--~---~---. -·_L}___J_-::__1___ ...
0%: No Asl.>,:stos l),,recrr.d; <1 %: Asbesros Detected Above 0% and Below or Equal to I% ~A: Not Applica\lle. "Qunntification done by optical r.stimatt~" I - S% considered non-quantifiable. ll1is rep<1!1. relate-s to only the material !1'$\ed. An asret·isk '*' indicat
~--. .0
Si~-n3tureof Analyst:.,., __ ~~~~~:S:__d¥--;-'·A·· This report is not used by LAUSD to clnim pro~uc.r endt•t;;emmt by NVLAP or any ngencyofthelJS. Ga•·emment. 111is report m.1~{ not he. r entirety,
1:\ 1 j' ;
02 2600-98
L.J_
'I' ....:;J
j?} vcf. tfC"-t:S/9
i' f
.. o:-.o£1 --.,c_;:..::~----~~-~---:,"'-~--:+:-~s[ ~'"J~o-~~-'!i-·-~···
71 ,
i
,...,~ I'
=-i ----~---------~r,~. ~
,f j iI
.
------...;·
i
I
\-- Jtr.? ~c:- /1'0;::~~~: ~! II'I~:•
. i~.
'
'
-----··-·"'"-·------~~···•············~
.s: t•
t-;
,~
.
I
'
02 2600-99
l
APPENDIX B: Asbestos Survey Form A
02 2600-100
P~GE . ASBESTOS SURVEY FORM A Reinspection Survey
s'ch~ol Name:
L0 s
AN G..€. L( S'
s c<-'.
Loc. Code:1_-..:!..~....t.l..u.3~(i2"---:------
APt-A\ r.l\ S\~A\'\I)E: At-lD Building Name: G LAs .f ((.oo M. e.~....o~ .
. Building
~qu~re
:Suilding Number:.~-0~\-~~c:..::c...=--..:..·'_ _
Q 0/_ _ _ _ _~.H~ight of,~ypical Room:_--......{}0 _ _' Feet:. _ _I\P=-~.L,-,rJ-l..!.lk~·::..., __
l~s·~-~~tor: _ 'R,o6£~T.t;>"T_e.A DA
... _.~umber:
Si
:-·:,"~~3--·\
\. -.- . • •
_;.
· .. t
Req. # . Type of Suspected Material
Specific Location
ofSampl~s
Asbestos Present
5T££L A. PJastef' Ceilings D~~wALL
B. Plaster·Walls
' f
'
D.
·---------=---
E.
II
2 .'1-l
If
~ t-1 DQV\. . ·
F. CC\ L• 1\.\C:.\ Tl\.£.5
H.·
---+-----., ., ..... •·J
I. "' .·~·
. \~·.,,·
..
\·
J.
"'"'
... -~."'{.;_t/ PopcoR.tJ
K.
... L~
·c£\L.~
t-.1&. \\L£S
F-1-lT~AtJC£.
~e>tt[)ff<
TD iLOC::. . 1
cf M.A\NOffllt·
·3
iz.''¥. Q.'''f'tS!ti ~ CE:...'\ L\ 1-.\Gt -(,L£_
Inspector's
Signature:_._J<~. . .J~bu±!ol:l'...::· . ~z~-~=;:.::·"'-~"""'r::..:.----Date: ·
Nf:G. . 2- u-'18
(. 'ft644f!cmed DL\
-OZ. -0\
02 2600-101
. Req. # Specific Location of Sa~ pies l U: ~ 2Ji2... fL. . tv\£N ' f"AC.. ~/,R •I ~OM£r-..1 (' E A C. 'f e._ •1L• TTI..£.1)\~~=·-·-'-------
Type of Suspected Material SMooT\-\ ·
M;,.
p ~1\$"'\C.!C.. Ct:~L..~~~
N.
SMOCTH ?LA5"\£( wAllS
5A"-..D
.
o/H PLA~T£e..wl1u..5
\\-\tJ-ou\ LhTLfT\\EAT(t€. l--\ c 'P \'£2., ~opMS i ~ rAN ~OM.5 \~ 1 Z.'L 1 3~
·eo.
M . ?.10 '(\ LN RDoM Tt:£1\.l C\..\!o-ltc R.Lt ~
SAND Q,
H~ALT\-\ Off~Ct...
LA T€.<2.. CE: \~, N .5
R.Je..
C!Yft14i.H;lfd
L...\ \TL.£ T.t\€Att~ Nottn-1 ~ 5;0\>'t"\-1 · f"A-S'.)AC\£ wA~>
R.
l
.
SPttA'-t£0 OM
~ £Gi. tl--Z3-1 {
S. f\·e.E..?\i.oofi. ~G\
. T. -·
Acol>S'T\.c.A.L PLAST£ (t C£\LI 1\.\G.
c4dMM91Rtd
Fi a t:R.Gtu\SS U. \) 0 c l 'Lt-.1 $l7L.AT~OI\l
l
v.
2-IZ..-9.)
C?i~d
'K
f L.A rT€..12... C(\ L', tJ 6$,
N£G.
Crt~d.''
f'LC0~1 £MT~ W£fT.
St~tNP
P.
Asbestos Pr-esent
N/A
,l
, , ,,
fl '3 f:e!.~LAS5 3,5 ,1
N/A
W. P\ PE:. 1:1\l SULAii.o~
x.,
Dvc:T
SE"AM
icALTA?£. 3~5 ·; 10 ·; 12."FiB£lt&lASS Y. P\ Pf. t. ~LSOw INS'lJL-"1\oN.
r ':
\f i BR..ATiol\1 Z.
'Ke:: DVC£ RS
2.~FLOO«. fAtJ ~M. _ __ \ 'IT At-1 \) 2 foUL fw:lOR. f' AN R.oof\i\ s .
N. /A
_.. \( \ \_'"-\.s AA. (A.D. ALP\~E T..t\\C.,)
88. STuc.c_o C£\UNq
·RooM 2.'2..0 (?- £-Ac_t\). \u-, z. ~ ,3 u.f\.. ST~i!twt.u..J
C ~SS Ovt:R.. LAI\l Pi tJ~ 5 ,_ £:-i.TEil.\ oil. fe>e.Tic.oS .
5 Inspector's Signature: _ _
N £.(?.
I
2~\ \-~g
---l1(~oltJ=-loo'-·-><..:;;=__;:~::;...:-=·=;..;:;:;::,:::..-__Date:_..::::O~Ij.l.-..:-O=·=l.--O.::....l..t_ 02 2600-102
\",:}Gt
2.
oP
3
. ASBESTOS SURVEY FORM A ReiJispection Survey School Name: .
.
:.
.
Los
A~&riLEs Sf. ..
Loc. Code::----.,..._..~~..8'..:...7>L3::£.(p--'-----
AOM\1\l\S'\eATi\JC At-.10
- Building Number: . 0\ ~ C.C T o' _ _ Height of Typical Room:_~o:-
\-B.uUding,Nanie: CLA r>R.cotv\· 6LDG..Building Square Feet:
.~nspector: .
(eS
1
\(eO '
Ro_B~~["L S''l~A-DA
Req. # of Samples
i
Specific Location
Type of Suspected Material _
Asbestos ··Present
R.M.'l..l\ 1 \\C:K€..\Boo\1-\ .
W/Jcr.
D((."'.WALL "A.ir Plash~t Ceilings
•
Number: _ _Bc..:::I.~_-_,_\=S'_,?'l-=L.::.J.)_ _ _ __
-AU exeept Rated belew
B. _ _ _ _ __
..
·C. l
.
~---------------~
0R.'-l~A~~ WALL~/
1-u
~ YohlT Co'lv\fout.lD 1 tAP£
R.M
G,
E\..£vA'T'6Q...
L
'rlA\ \wA~
-----
TO L\\TL.£.. --u\t:'ATll£STA Go.£. A~E:.A .
3
1l oFf\J\-\in:. . wjDfAt.lG..E.
. \\\ £~.
2 -l \-98 ·- ...(·;
......
N £:~. 2.~\ \-1!
11
fLoo e \1L£.. _
I
,I
tv..A«.~S ·
\2 )1.\'Z.. ~~owN. Rus\ _
tt
t-\orrc.~
T\-\(A\~£. E.ASIC~!Zlb{)()t .
tz_- ''
rl
rL.
\-\A I\ wA '{ TO \..lTTL€.
*"\\.
\2'~
~
af:C:ft:,CA\.. f.l\<\ ._ , . f{M. 2.2.0 \<.'l\....N· ~M •
\ 2'"f.-1~' O{tA N6.£ . :E.-··.· f\..ob@; £ ..
F.
'z.!~Sl
rl-b oR. "\\ L€:..
\-\A\ 11..0A "l ~\)$'1C:.._ \"t.AC.\\C.€:. ~OM~ 1
\\C.\(£\6ooT~.J &o~S ~ ~\g,\..S t>c.£SS'\Nt:\~M J
\-\A\\\.\} A'{ t.IU! fl..· Sb~i" 1-\
~jd,U/nted
· Pos . 2-\ \-1K
1_
ll..M , "2.1\ ~ \) A12. '4 (toomS I
I.
2IZ. 1 Z.t3 ,Z\I..\ 1 21t, 1 2?..0-
wj s-roll.€.-ltMS, T~~rJ. c:Uw\L 'PA't'\CI'I\IitMS •J_\-\E:.A\.:iH Offii£. ~ P.A'l\-tr-.\T R.ocMSJ Coufi.IS(L~'-lr:s_ S'LS tcoM. 1
J,
R.£-coR l> Rc.oM
.
L.
,,
,,
1
~1\G...t£.1
orfice:s- So~t~t.lS off\c€.5 . .
\'2.. 'i\'2.... OK· €,\..\)£.. f'L.Oo!Z \\LE..
J<~oW~-=~~~~~IAoO.-~---D.ate:
Inspector's Signature:----'-_.....
Ol( - 02..-0 I
02 2600-103
PAr.c::"
:2.
l ..
Asbestos Present
Pos. 2-\\-~~
___ -·
C5twPm~d
11.!.' ~C. .D
12 '\c
.. o: ."fL6o(Z Tk..£ t2 '''It ti.,/ PI 1\1 K ~~twJ@ ~ ;~.t.\.1':.. • .' 1y.10 qi
12"~ t'2..."5
·
rl
0
~- \'2.. · _DLU E: ft...-oo~ Ti..L£
.' \2. . ·'
. t~ ~~,
II. 't.
'~- ·12.... s~c
RooMS 20\ S ZDL
i G.E:
~..-cooN'\ 20\
.f"LOC>f'L 'TiL~
.- .12'~-i-. 12....11: LT. C~£A IV\
',.
t ·,- ,
1 ·
. (J. ,,:::£Htl2.\'tt-1G! I, AA~l'lv
4'' Bttov-:>t-l.. J
v, c_ov £.. f?dt s t: w
.
m11s11 c.
·
IV\. A i N f.; I'J T:R.A 1\\CC.
...
f(oo~·~\l..~ WlMI\'~11~
TA '-t fh.DC~
w.
?os. Z-t 1-92'
3
.f"Loo~ Ti.L£..
R;
-..
3
fLoo~ \t_Lr
P.
\-\-A l \·vJ A'{ .
Roo~-2l\ RooMS 2~ 1 2;c_\ '.?--D'?/-03 1
3
Pas. 2-tl-'18
3·
?os . 2.. -\\-~~
3
-:- fo~_ ?:-.'?~9.3
3
.
.
-.1-'S .. ':'~
N~.
Y { 2.05 1'4:v;t I v&:sr ·~ 1 i Z.OG:. 1 2.01' 2.0 5'. 2.0'\ • Z.IO '2.1 I ~ - - - 0Ait~ ~~ •J J ~~3, '2.14 1
U
2.tl.
I
2..1~-, 2.2.0w/~TO«£ Ito\\{.~ \(:.1.-N_ ({ooM' 22.\ f Z.22. I 2..23 J - - - - 2Z.Y 1 tV\Ahl F-t.IT'i'.AIIIC(.. PoqCfZ.1 . H.A\\ 1 MAiN offic£. 1 A SST'." ? It; t.l c·, -~ 1\-L off l CE:. , f~\lllCi f~~;:,.:._\- - OfficE:..._, WOlle.. ttM., C.s1Jf' . 1
------~-------
.. \.:
\.x.:.-. ··. ,._
. ~M., P.011LT)C\-\04L W\Ai~ ·of~;cc. Of(\CEf AIS'O · So61'-. g_t\1\·~ waR:\£...' ltll-\. J
S
. Y.
\C£tJ CLi N:i <.. ~ \' ATif:t-\I~N'-1
z.
l-\(A L!H llfFi ce:: 'rA'UC\llef"'.-"$;..,.:,..,.__ _
Al\£rJDAt..IC£ offic.£S"
CoutJS'cU~G ofF;cff1 Um£:
AA. BB.
"H\£A'f2£ tJ\~tGalll£"r off'[ c£
...lf 4'' Bl..A c K..
'·- cc. cov_C. ...~.
' '. \
DE:A-11.1.$ - - - -
8tH~
~~"""·~==;_;_;·~~~=-~----·Date:._.......:0~4.\_-~0::::.....!:=2..'--o=.. . . ~\_
Inspector's Signature: _ _
02 2600-104
Pf4C£ 3
3
oP.
.ASBESTOS SURVEY FORM A Reinspection Survey
Los
SchoolName:
At-.!G-£.LE:.£ SrL.
At>M.'\ "'l'•~TitAT11JE:.. A~D BuildingName:'C\...ASSeooM. Bt...OC::\.
Co ~ 1 \teO
Building Square Feet:
. Loc. Code:._---1<(7.1..-!...!:3:::...~=-----
Ro ?,C:l2..T £.5TR,AQA
Inspe(!tor:
Building Number:
0\ <)\ CC T .
I
·R
Height of Typical Room:
Specific Location
A. Plaster Ceilings
All except noted below
B. Plaster Walls
All except noted below
.
B~- \S~Z.J
Number:
Type of Suspected Material
1
Req._ # of Samples
Asbestos Present
C. Ceiling Tiles
D.
3 . E.
R.co~S
3'' BR-ow 1\.\ C.oV C.. G' AS£
,,
\\i~3 1 Z\L
.
Be..ow~ w)ADriES"\VE3 AS'£. f./\ oLD_
~OOM I Col\\ f£'1te:~C£:. ~oM+--~ At>I)L\{C\-\OOL Ml\\1>1 o~c.£. ~,6fto cCS ALro Boo\( f,oM { wOR, 'L ttloM • ATIElo\.PAtJC.=£:.___ __
I'A~5Tlc...
H.
1
'R.coF'· ~"\~t..LD
CO\'~~ WjM~G
Rose L •. c-~ (i ·Pb-T
IJ;J /
· Ne:~. 2.-\ \-'\f 10-1-oc.. NEG-. . ,l . '
3"
-
4'1 Btow~ K.
N~. z.-t\-9~
of'f\ c(s· , c.ou~ s.cc.~...~~ Of"R C£5 1 LiTTL£. ·n-lCI\ie£ 1 MllS'\C. ttooM5.
I. J.
3__
£7 A GJ, £. __ \'11\A\t..l o~~iCE: , AS~T. ?f.ll\.\c·, f~Lofnc.£ 1 wOtiC.
7
F •. &eow N (:A:R'(E:.\
G.
3·
3
rmq S71 e-
1
J<..j....:.lo,~n1W=.r::;;;x~· :::::.::::~~~==·-==----Date:
Inspector's Signature:, _ _
OL\
~oz.-o \ 02 2600-105
......
-
.-
. Req. # of Samples
Type of Suspected Material
rz. x '"L.
M.
.,-&oq IV
Fl.Poil. \IL.G'
wf,.,.~s7'1<'
N.
·o. ·
·St"l4
ceo.
~tA-t.L
(
~2.. ;1JL V2..'g .LT~ ~E.-·
.
rwo~n~ ~/Aj_r!Gi~'ff:. .
.
·1'-~h..tS(C.
ollt3·;,.~ ~
Pgv-4.
of.'!~~~
_U~I~t'J.~$) ...
•t_g.
N~G-.
C.(fl!U\1\fa... ~ V\.)lll!t~.J(.~ ~ c.oet~·
)
'(1..oOr11
~u-ioo'<= ~60 ~~
;
Asbestos Present
D-J9-=iO
W\)t-) :?~.>?acr
·
~ evJ ·2-.0 i\
o
P. Q.
R. ...
s: T.
u.
.v;· .l
w. X. \,
Y.
z. AA. .. :... ;
-..··.
..
'.'
.
::; ~--: . ~
. ~--
.. ·,I
88.
cc. Inspector's
Signature:._·-----~---------Date:. _ _ _ _ _ __ 02 2600-106
APPENDIX C: CNS Environmental's Certifications
02 2600-107
s
ENVIRONIVIENTAL, INC.
'
State of California Division ot Occt.tpafionaf SaJ€lty and Heaf~h CertifiEicl Site Surveillance Technician
650 North Rose Drive, Suite #616, Placentia, CA. 92870 Phone: (714) 525-5115, Fax: (714) 526-5445
www.cnsenvironmental.com
• 02 2600-108
s
ENVIRONMENTAL, INC.
State of CC)Iifornia Divisi.on of Occupational Safety and H~alth C~rtified Asbest()s Gonsultailt
650 N. Rose Drive, Suite 616, Placentia, California 92870-7513 Phone; (714) 525-5115, Fax: (714) 526-5445
V.'Ww.cnsenvironmental. com 02 2600-109
I
APPENDIX D: Scope of Work
02 2600-110
PROJECT DIRECTORY mu: I '""''
""""""
"'""" (310)
"'
::p:m~~/1:
-
Corwin Theater Repair & P.O.T. Upgrades
CMl~EER
Tn.EI'HONENlll!lER:
OOIF'lNIEI'ICINEEFil!IC,ItiC. (310) ~lJ-39'03 wolhom~o!QO..,!plor>-eiiC)ineet"'l.CQ'TI
CAAYCIWIG
LOS ANGELES UNIFIED SCHOOL DISTRICT LAUSD Location Code: 8736 Colin ID #10367253
SlRUCTUtw. lNGINEIR
CONPANTrw!E:
CENlVRYSTRVCTURA.t.ti'IQNEERlltCCO,INC
Tn.EPHONEN\.Io!BDI·
(310)315-osaJ
E-.W..,IDORESS:
901)'-'0cngOc""turyM.com
mu: I
~
PBSENGINITRS,ItiC. (615)E50-0l50
l
SYMBOLS DESCRIPTION
fA--- OEIAIL "~~BEll
~0
TITU/POSIOON:
YECHANIC.o.LENG\I£ER
COt.IPANY~.
PBSEtGNEIRS,INC.
1ll.£I'HONE MLIIIBER E-.W...O.OORESS·
(52~) 5~-0:!M
~SHEETNUUBER
&---- OEI~lfLEVNU~BER
nportjliaOI>~.com
·--
·SIT!: I -' :;. ·~· ; . . t.-.;}; .......
·--
i ...., ....
I
i "
~:~
}
. · ....
~
SCOPEOFWORKSUMMARY
I
~t2~~~ad:~ 1~~CJ'idiiOOS) ~~~T=-~~~~rl&.·~~r ~~Ew~..==>~MHc~R~InfFt1!Y ,llll)ll(t!WfOI.CtF1l::lolLS,w.f'O)
L::;.,...
"'"
~SERIU"UMBER
~
~EIMSTUOW~Ll
CABI~TOEP1H CABI~THIOHT
PAR1'10
CABtNETWIOTH
~~/:::~i:'"~~~C&lJri~t:iw.COOECOOMOl) ~t2~~~~~w~A\IOOI£NTS)
PAR1'12201J~R£ITRE1«::DS1NOIJIDSCOOC.mu:HC.CR.
~CEILI-~OHEtGHT
Jf1'.\1J.oi}1'CIMTC~SYSI!MS(~IfoVUII)2013IIIIICll
lfl'A14
El1511NGWALLTO
SEREMOV!D
SINIOPf'EsYSTEIIS 201JEil11'11'JN DR'I'OIOIOI..EX1l«::..SHHMCSYSIOIS 2013Eil1TlON
NEWWO.LL\WPID MRGW8A1RE511ro0US CiW!IA1 All OlHER!roOWSilP
ffl'A20 Jf1'.\ 2~
GYF'S~BOARO.CEV
GROUT, PLASTER
ST.o.nctW!'1'PIIIP.i PllWITE FIRE WINS
2013Etm:tl 201l Ell100II
ti'PA~ CMICJlfWIN(IflU);
AEI'EIOCECta:SECilONf'ORifi'ASfN«WWIS-201JCOC(SF'Iol)l5CM.1 l!!jl Qf ft!KNPE
ff1'lfBil
II
FCWI.O.CC£SSUIL£DESDI(APf'ENlXXACE28CfRPAR'I36)
FllEWUYOO~=~MO~
RO.ItM: Nfl RE?IJrC£ OOUIIOR WAU..S AT (2) tw..L'Il'ATS. RDICM 00 J!El't.I>CE fiOOI'liC AT (2) IW..l.WA.I'S AI() CMR Sl.lo:UFWT/OWIGVIC ROOIIS.
2.
EXIStliCSTmi'OSTS,II£AMS.AI()Wtl.o.LftOOF'OECKN:TO~.
J!El't.I>CEI'I.OCI!IMG.'Il'.OU,/MICCL.ff:lAIC1Si£SAT(2)HAU.'Il'AI'S
P....,.;T
l.
REliOVE:/O,'()J!El't.I>CELJCHTFOOURES,PI.IAIEI:NCflXT1..RES,»((IoiODIFYRll: ,ll,AIW Nf) INN: S'I'ST£1o1S AT (2) IWJ._WA.YS, OWIQMC ROCNS, 00
COII!RiaOR SHill REioi(HE .1110
CXIIiTRACWR Slilll\'£Rf"1' AT f£lO ll£ EXID/1 Of W0R11: WHOl t.l,l.l OR OCIIID1CATIDBYCI.OUOSONTl1EORA1W'IGS.
6.
STOfi.AGE"Mlltfl[l(J$TtCI!UI..Ilf1CSCf"PAMS,~OROTl£RHmRDOUS t.~,~.rrRAL.S SWUNOT EXCWl (}.JNITJ11ES AS UN1F£!l II T.oaE .307.1{1) AND
NMt!§!fW!OHI!l.nJll!C R£WCM:Nf)REf'L.Ir(:£(Hl'li.IJ.a:OOORS.
t6TAL.Lt£'11'Bllt.Dt~t0.
SICIW:ENIOO:USICN.OG[.
1. &.
6,
t6TAL1ACC£SSI!LEOO.I'ITERAT t.DIIBY.
7
WOOF'I'COUHTERATWNTING.\REATOIW([ACCESSftL
CE AI..LCONS'1llJCflCJI OElf!IS OfT gf[_
4,
5.
[ISPQSE
9.
OWIGE:SlOM:N'PR
A'OSA(;(Rff£{ri'RCI.fXTr61'£C1'01101PID'ltDBYTHEcxsmcT(~OO lt£DUTES~Il£1NSPECTOR.IREOEflN(lltl
BEr'«EENCOf!'ll'fl11iOOUIAI'IOioiUSICBI.ILD~.RDICM:PA'<£WEI(TNIO
liSTAI..L.O.CCESSft.ERAI.If', 12. AT 'NUli.'.Y SOIJTI1 '$ COf!Wr;
....... _....,...,,"""""""'"'"'
JJuu~--.,.,._....-.. :~'r:."~::..:
2J
S-1
..
CEIOIL tiOfES t!< tlOCX
=
:
~=~ ~=
~6
s-•
SE:clXlNS~OO.U.S
27
5_5
SECTKll'fS~OCf.o.l.S
28
5_,
SITTIOI'ISAI()DET.o.l.S
? _E'£::E:!:'..: E~.;'~:_: ·~~~'?2=.. M!l.02
Jl
WO.OJ
24719 Narbonne Ave. Lomita, CA 90717 Tel (310) 325-0883
RESTROOw
2100 East Route 66, Ste 101 Glendora, CA 91740
Tel 0010
«~ REWOOEI.t
Tel
k
EtECTR:CAI.
:;,:.,.~~_!.,~~.:..:....":S.':"'~-!105~'.:..:!..'"''"""'""'
36
E001
~;;i"',.:.-~:.=:.".~~=~-::::.:::;; ...~-.
::::_~~EEr:'~'=-""l~:£U:E.. W"u~'~""~..:':!-::....,,_•..,"",_.;...."'sm...~m_ ==~...:=.::;."'::.":.:,::;::,/'.::;:;,·;:.-:..::.:...::--....-"'"· ~V:~"'=""'....:::.."'.::::-"-:..::.~=~-:...~!:t~
.uro... ~smo.
.
12.ADSAACC£J'TEI115lJIGL080Roi.TORYIXR£Cll.yEYPUll'EllB'rli£SCHOCJ..EIWUI
'MATER. ROIOYEOO RD'UCE PAYEWOO
==~~OTB,SMUSUSTMO~~
37
£002
l!l ;,g
EOOJ £004
El..Ectooll nxTUR£ som.t.E MD P#IEL S0£0Ut..E TITL.E24C£RI'I'ICATEOfa:M'I.IONC((U!'tOONDITIOI£DSP.oa.)
40
E005
El.ECl»CALElo£JIG01CYECRSSPHOTOIIORICCI
41
(100
:
::
:==~=~P!)Ii
44
001
ElECTIICJll.n{TtfGRE1«)VA00Nf\.NI
PlJI'.o.CcrSSIBI..EROUTEHOIES"~A!01.
S£t!Dilll!l
:m.:..:::-.:.~:-=::..~=..---..-.-lm..l.._......., _ _ _ ,.,.......,. ___ ,. __ .. • =';,·~ -=:: . :·:---'::. ~~~~~--~-o.·-•~-
I!EQ.IIJ.110N5,A~
OWIGE IXIC\JioiENt (cal), OR A SEJ>,W.TE SET CE I'I.NIS AI() 5PECflC.ATOIS, OETMM: Nfl SPEOf'I'IHG Tt£ R{OI.Ffll WORK St\IU BE SI.BimiD TO AI() ~llln£DriiSIIJNCETH!S1ATEAROfTECTB£RH:~W1lHlt£
. ._,., __
CIWJHCI'I.NIS.DPMW::E~.RGIDOO.r.cccs:sfi£~00 ~lt)JJ}lcot!SilERATlONSSIW.lCOIFLY'IIffiiAL.LlOCAL
IG . .OU.ITEII'SREUCMillOHIIo'EWAi.LOO/ORFUXIl~PATCH£0ANO FIHSI£lTOIIATOi~S1JRf.ocES
PREVIOUSDSAA#OFBUILDINGS AND ACCESS COMPONENTS
OfltiCl.JII()'ISfORioltw.IHPlJ,N
lJCI.Z~-...--
..
fA001 F.<002
FA100
:
~::
s1
r.o.JO•
62
F.o.J02
'II£ST8UlllR'IC
019COT
5J
FAJm FA401
m
O.SAf OR
A-~28
r:._~;::.::-..=.~"!'"'.::5::?.!:..:::::
ID-11111J
......... ., .. _ . , . . _
ro-1120<1
'I
DESCR1f"'l0tt
11973~EIU\JltiiG 12001111>'ACUPCRAO£ 2007fft~
loi~IZATIOH
~~~
flREAI.AAW
F1R£~tut:IW.MOTES.W'N08.EC«ES
64
OI\'1SICNOf1HESl,o.1E,o.ROiJ1ECl llOOlflC.o.TlOHS!~
DV. OF' TN£ STATE IIROITECr
I
'I[S.cmnnroON9/XI/201•
:
:::
6&
W2C1 f'P202
69
I
~
•
F1R£~S'rloi9Cl.UST.SEMHCEOFOI'ffi.I.TOISNiO'IIIR:SCim.U
====:. ~
~ .lllll~
F1RS fl.OORI'LNI F1!E
DJSTINCPNUW..fl!E.IURIICCMROI.PNIELOORDIOTEf>OtrERSI.f'!'\.l
f'Nmllff!E~~CIACRAW
ARENNN.OCTM.S
Fl~fi"'OlECIIO~
TES,C£FmnroON1/~/11l14
1"'---flL._"---1
~~~·~"'~~~~~~·=d
I
TITLE SHEET, INDEX TO DRAWINGS, AND GENERAL NOTES
M>.lf.CT""'S006
ClOSED 00 cmmEll ( Y £ 5 / J o i O ) - -
t
,_,,_
FlU: NO. 19-H16
f'Nmllff!EJIU/GlSIJti'!.Ni
" ·~, ""'-"'""'
ootollo....c-..
----Ooo!M<~
57
:ill
Bl.II..DfiGIOf
:::~=::.:-..::::.-::...-:;.,-;-:-·--·-"- ~-=:~~=:.:~ =~-"""""'0.~-~==.---;.--
P401
lll.a.DINCJWoiE
llOII.l1lototo""'"*"*'tlllo__,., _ _,.....,.., _ _ _ ....,.,..,... a..sa, S£tlDIJJ07
"""""""
~1
P201
I
CEI€JIJI.. HOrrs, u:CEHo CODES" SHm 11100: 011
:.f:~::::;:~~;~~::~~-k ~
........ --.....,_.,,. _ _ _ """""'_ 00-e.t"""'•ttw- ....... -•,_..
.
~S!AlfiiCEATG.o.TE.
POOl
,~ onn~
"'""--oiiiiL .!ltU _ _ .., _ _ ...,Ior _ _ k _ _ _ _ _ _ _ JCJ ;~~===:-..::::=::.:..:..-::- ~~~:!:~....':.,_~~:=.~·-"'SoctiooiOOJNco- ~
!!:-."'"';:.::.=-..:~.:- - : : : . : : . : . ' : " l : O . - -
1J.AT.CEPA'oOo£NTTOB(l.ESS~ ~SLOP£_ I£STRI'[.O.CCES:SIIl.EFW!I>JHCNIOREI'I.I.CEDET£CTA&.E
48
00
=: :::=-? ==--·--"""'----OOitoo.-lot"DII.._ol
(310) 523-3993
STAI.IPS/SEALS
EUCfRICAl~f1W_NOTES.GCMl!WIGCOOCS,SCOKOf~
. ::::::::.. ~=:=~:;;::.=·~=ili~~~·=a~~=~i:~:~~~~=======l
!!::·!,.~............,--=:·::::::1'..":.":"..,"";::."::'"~....;.u;:
!:~o.~.::.::::--..:::::::=.;...,sv-..,::':..::",!-~ -.,10.11'11_.,....,_,_~~
1
(625) 650-0350
Uniplan Engineering, Inc. 550 E. Corson Plozo Drive, Ste 116 Corson, CA 90746
~ :~·: :or~:;s
:;•.::.;-:-:.;'"..":::!:'"'.= .:..!.,..~ ~-- ._.,_, ... - -
-
Century Structural Engineering
PBS Engineers, Inc.
. E-::"7.:::::=:~ :.:;:- : ::.: ~OCW::~ .. ..,....-..
,
Government Services
1-,"'""''"'"'"""'"' '- - - - - - - - - j
wo.o 1 YECIW«.AA.GOlEP.o.I.NOTES YECKIHC.ll. l.EGOlO .oliO SHEtliNOCX WECKIHC.li.S0£0LU
.))
I
370 Crenshaw Blvd, Ste. £104 Torrance, CA 90503 Tel (310) 783-5129
FllANI'IC FUN
~~ :~': , _ , ... - - . .... -
~ SIRUCTUR.o.l ORA'InNGS
West Olympic Boutvard
Los AA9eles, CA 90019
uww1c 41 zg
~%:.:;'.,.~..:::-..:::==::~r':..'(~='.."'~t
=:';
SIRLIClUAAl
=~~~= :~~1~- r_!~~~-i;_-=-===--=--=- ..::~-- ~;: =:~~~~1\AAFUW~OflJRGEDPOOS ~~=.:::::::::..-.. ::e::.:::::..::·:.-...;..,. ____ u::::.-::.·.::::::::::·:..:....""" """"""'"' o.oc.u.-~c...
1l. CONIIW:lOR SWU PIIOYilE lDof'OP.Oin' El:HT(8) fEET tiGH CHAtllH< FENCE 8I.RR1CIO(S wt£REVER MECESSNn' TO loi.'.MAIIA wt: ~.
15.
,.._~.u':'apoot.. od,_.ttotl"'~
:=':' r.r. _ , _ " ~ ri> So<..., 106 .,. ..,.. ,.,.""'-"""' ~:.:.a::..:.:=..:;=:::-..==·~·""""'
~~:...,-:,ue-
~~m:
~-.;._.,.-
!4. ROIOYEOO RfPl.I.CE TOW-A'Il'AY sal AT ENTRN«:E TO PARXIiG lOT.
~ - - ,..,_..."' v.. ._,."' ~~v.. ...-""' ..-...
~~ 01'"':"""--=:,~,:::'l:::Z.::'~~==•.::::-..:""'..
~~::"'::
ll.llJilXMGStW..Lt\'.VEITS~NC.IN-STliUCTUIW_EIDI[I(l"SSED.f!ED
SIW..LCCJOJCI'AI.lTl1EfiEO..IILIUITEST.IIIO~SFtiRTt£PRO.fil.
11.
. ~ ~·.:;:;,:.:;,;:::::,.."';.,........~,,:-'~o;:'...:.O:::':':";'~:..:,
~600
Al>r'HtTFn BOA
~
~=-~ ~--'"""''''"""O
•
OCTNI.S
a.."""~
~;=
10.~~1NSPECTOR'I1ffi!O...O.SS(J)ctRTf'ICATlOMISREtlln!EDfl)ITIIS
FU!StW
10. ~~c:"TE A/'10 .IDWIMlSTRA.TION lii.I1.DiiC ENTRAI.c£. flSTAI..L
A703
""..-_'""'"""'""'"""""-"''_..,..,.,..,~ o1" .. , ...
~~==:::::_-:--..
~~~~~~--==~~~~-=== -.··.""' """---"'*"
TITLE24,CCR).
AT Sl.OI'ED WIUWAY TO EHTTfr GATES· ROIOYE p,<.,WIG 00 INS1ALl .
21
otf>o ....... al
~~~~~~~~-~.: :::~~::::~~~~~~=--:.:~t="=t'~='j:~=~=.~=="'=~=====================i 1 .:::=:.:.:::::."'..::.-"'_::. ::,:,::::
SECTao'4-J.42,CAL.f'ORNA!lJI1llliCS1ANDNlD'S~T1VECOOE(PAR'I1,
Jr((:(SSft.EIWIP,ROIOYENI0~(1)P~OfGATESII'fTHAN
.. ,... =:.::,;....~.::'!;~~:,':,~::-;:: t"'~~"~"i""~·~~==:==:=======~ lJQil•r.,..,.._....,..n.,,.,P'........,_... ..,......,...., .. ,,. .... __ ........... _.. -.. .. _.. ..... oolhlh~ rt...-., .... ::=:::::::...""':"';:..:: t"=t:::'-='·'E""""'=="'"~·"'~"'~·:::""=:"'::"'=======j .1JOIIJ1.....,..t.-...,al._-,........;...,..,a~r.. P'"""""'oq~..-.t-•
Los Angeles High School
•
--
IMSI'ECTlOMOFlHEWORK.
""""'-""' REPI..ACEfWIOt'WLNiliNSTAI.ltEW~flSTIUST~STRf'liC
=·:..:~-..:-~~~.:!,':.,_-'""- ......... dd"...... ~2-
I
···~
ocr~...
AL.LCCtiSTRIICTDN£XJSTH:(E}I..M.ESSNOTEDN£W(N).
NOT
APPilCMIIB'rli£DMSIOH~TH£S1ATEAROfl[C1'SlW..LI"'KMlECOOI1Kt.OJ5
4.ATWo.JNSLW!Sl£AOHGlOA[)I,IHSlliA.TION~:A!:IIO¥'EAI'I0
....................... IN•.....un .................. ~AN ~ 0
OCTAILS
J07.1(2)CE201lCAt.IFORNII.IU1.WIC
~o~,~.y
100£101.0R CONS1R.CilON OW<:£ OO::UWOO, cal, N'PRCMll BY 111E D'IISIOH CE Tl£ SfAIE NIOITECT, AS REOUREQ 8't SCCTlON 4-JJII. P.o.RT 1, 1m£ 24, CCR. 9.
.... _
lJOJ.II.illoi.I""""'"'_.,.,.._~~~;,--..,V..CU«M
J.COIIlRACTOIISt\IUPROTECTAI.lSU'IfAC£SOOI~ON51TEFROII
ED«ll:.ow.GED!lliRtiG!XlNS1RI.ICf10N.
""""""" s
COI'ITIW:lORStW.I.VERFYAI..Lit£0IMDIS10/iSNfJCQtOllOIISATTl1EJal!m: PRIORTOsr.oATCE'II'ORK. AIOtrrtTNCl0'11'1£11'5N.IlHCili2EOR£PRESOO'ATM: (cwt)S!W..LOCNOrntlCEI«<~
ST.IG:ECIWT'Il'AUSNClCEI.JNG.
__ . _.. __ __,"'"'=-.. -.-.__
~:"""""""""~-,..,_,.,--.., .._
fiW,U.TDMS{CCII).
Corwin Theater Repair & P.O.T. Upgrades
INTERIOR ElEVATIONS .o.NO DETAILS
• .,. """''
~l
201J~WCOOE
E!I.'V~OONS
A701
PAVJ.'IO
I
AfiOI
EL£V~TIONS
CCIRWfl THEATER EXTERIOR
CCIRWJITHE.I.T[RW.oti.SEr::noHS
18
~_....,.._ __~..,:..:Jfi~z:=u.
QXl£5 N!Q SI.uf>e!!Q5·
.IJIERO/'IS IIIT1i OISI.8lJT£S NX {.IJ».), Tin.£ L f'OR TITLE I· .IJ». STNilWIOS ASPHO.lTICCOTICREl£
17
ol!IOI
19
..
~~
Jf1'.\71IW\ONI.LFH:.II.ARW:COOE{t:AIJllllleAA110«11)201l~
f'.,,,.,,,j
~""':":.::::;-;::~":. =~~~=::...~=•'="~"':~~<>4
~~-=-:::=:.:.n:.~·~..:.."Oiopl"~
tfl>A17ai'IETCI£I.IICALS1'S!DIS201J~
,O.~()PTO
16
CORm THf.,I,T£11 £XITRIOR
...... ~ ..... ll
_,_,.,.,_._., ...
I'ARIW!!STOCAFfi"W'rSJ.Y:(W!ns·
GENERAL NOTES
"""'-"""'
2
FA!\:(213)21.(-1.868
QJI..CliNC Fl.OOR F't.NIS
:;-·Pr-==~•'"...=:"~:r::::::: r:.':::":.~""~'::;:~
.JJOII~...,._..-n..r
PAA1' 11 2013CILf'OIN.o.CRWIIlUII.JliMGSTROUIDSIXIDE,TITU24C.C.lt
LOBBY-ROOWW.WE
OM
_~.....,.,-
2013~1MRC'rctt£.1ln.E2~C.C.lt
J.,----------------~·-----------------l• l.mtl ~ IM _ _ _,,. ~--~~---"' ............. .....-------~oollofoF1'0.141•_..,kr_oot_....,. 1. ..UWORKSt\IUCOMF'CRIIl011lHillii1CfiTITLE24,C,i.UfORMII.COOECE 1.
TEL·(213)21.1-3952
CORm THE.\TER WJJlCED Fl.OOflF'lNIS
CORWtiTHfATLRREf'LEClEOCElU.GPI.NlS
so:TION JJOe
~alll'llln~........,_.........
~~l~~=J~:fo{'C.CR: PARTG CASEWORKOESIG~SERn[[I)Sn
~ROOWO
-
l~.p.-....
REVISIONCI.OUO Ai'IOOELU
0
El1$11~WOOOOR
,:
c::::J
~
-·
.,__...
c::==:::J
?~ fo;-~:.-::;:;:~ = ..,. -= ., ~ =
i
/ ;:---i;J' ._...... ' ·:
,.
~·
.
.
~ 20139JlDINCSIMQIROS.Illi,IINIST!WM:COOE,Tnl..E24CC.R. (20121NTERW.Jl()NALMI»>GCCil(t!
DESCRIPTION
0
~SitEElNUMBER
E .. \ :1 ... ·~-. = ~ ~
\J·c""·PROJECT, _'",
sa
~SECT'ON~UYBER
u~----.~ l ~~~--~~~j
CODES/STANDARDS
'""""
~S>tEETNU~BU
VICINITY MAP
'.
LOS ANGELES. CALIFORNIA 90017
COOWlN THfArffi ROOF" f'lAII ..OM~STAATION
POSlTlON·
CONPA.NY~E·
£-IU.l.AOO!!ESS·
£.:
333 S. BEAUDRY AVENUE. l2ND FLOOR
C
CORWtiTHfATERREfl£C1IOC£l~CPI.NI
ID..EPHON!:NIJIIBE!I:
i ' .·l
M&O -AlE SERVICES FACILITIES SERVICES DIVISION
~1k£.o.!UIOEIIOUOOI'If'L.OORPLNI
~0
"""""fW:IIlUI.
LOS ANGELES UNIFIED SCHOOL DISTRICT
ENlAAG[l)SIT'Ef'LNI-STAIRAllo()I,ONISTAATION8U1IDNG EM.AAGEDSITEPLNI-N:CESSIIl.EWALK.IIIOPEIJ(Sl'RIIoNG.o.TE
E-IW...IOO!ltSS.
tw.IE:
mu: 1 pagnoN
DESCRIPTION
4600 West Olympic Boulevard Los Angeles, CA 90019
78J-~129
cnUIOrly.•~-qs.com
WlJ..LI..Mt.IEN002A
~0
..~I-..,.-
Tin.E9llJ,INOO:lOORAWII'IGS.ANDGENERALNOl[S
~-00\IERtHoi!:NTSElMCES
CONP.o.NYw.w£:
'"'"i&\ •~-~t·"
INDEX TO DRAWINGS
LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
ANTHONYJ.WU
POSITION:
~::~~cca:sNIO!Hlltm,_,
ODIQJll()NfllEP!!O'IU:11JNFUXIlf"'...,n
m[PROTECOOnnoCRFUN
:
--
-~
I
-
T001
•
• """'11/11,/2016
• !Ktt
IT
02 2600-111
HARDWARE SCHEDULE
ACCESSORY SCHEDULE
El ~~~B~~T ~~. ~ 6~~~~SS 8 ~:~~T ~~w~ i;~~-ss
STEEL
LOCKSET DOOR ClOSER, 180-0EGREES, OEI.AYED ACTION INTERIOR FLOOIHIOUNTED DOOR STOP !HR£SHOLD KICKAN!5110P PLATES
srm.
BPIPEINSIJI..,t.,TION
D
1B"•J6"ST.STLf"RAt.!EDt.IIRROR.o.BOIIElA~ATORY.
SPECNn
.II.
SPECNO. SPEC NO. SPEC NO. SP£C NO. SPEC NO.
17 51
~~J tot~~:.
El
75 84
4ll"xJ6" STAINLESS STm. fl'WAED lliRROR. ~
SEE 10/A702.
0
r:-:"JSANrrARYNAPKINOISPCSAl.SURfACE~NTED. TOl.ETPAPEfiOISPENSER. SURFACE MOUNTED, OWNEfl fi.JRMS
NONE SPECNO. 84 SPEC NO. 100
~~~s~~~N~~orr~ ~';:R. ~~"'itd~~
HEADING 5- EXISTING EXIT DOOR EDC£-t.IOUNT CONTINUOUS HING£ EXIT DEVICE- SINGt£ OOOR DOORCLOS£R,180-0CGREES,DELAYEDACTION Fl.OOR-WOUNTED OOOR STOP THRESHOLD KICK AND ~OP PLATES
DUAL HEIGHT WHITE PORCELAIN.
ACCESSIBL.E.SEE5/A104.
(ill
lA~ATORY,
WALL WOUNTEO. PROVIDE BACKING PI.ATE,SEE6/A702. I..A~ATORY. WALL t.IOUNTEO, AT ACCESSIBLE HEIGHT. PRO\IIOEBACKINCPlATE.SEE6/A702.
~WATERO..OSET.fLOORJ.IOUNTED.
HEADING 6- EXIT DOOR
~ ~:Jff:r.ClOSET, fLOOR llOUNTED, AT ACCESSU:ll..£
fULll.IORTISE'SWINGCt.fAR'HtNGE HAGER COW'NIY
PROVIDE SAI:KING PlATE. SE£ 6/A702.
7
f.O.C.
fACEOfCONCRErE
~)
n.
""
OA
c.c.
""'· """"" """'· "on.
:<•l O.F.
'" "'· "mcr. ""· "" " o.s.
EXP.JJ.
m
"""
AH.
f.H.
FINISH FIN!SHR.OOR FINISIISURFACE FIR£ EXriNWSt£11 AR£H'I'lliWIT
M.
"""'
FD.
FLOOR OR.IJN
F.F. f.S
f.E.
~""""" CEY£11T~CRETE
CA.
""-"'
"GY!'.BO.
""' """""
"""""""' "'""-
"""""
CIL~.
CICE(CI.UCE) OCV.oltZED
""'
Gl?SUIIWAU.OOII!O
'"""
""""'
""' """""" ""'"" """"' """'
"'""""""" """"
ABBREVIATIONS
n
~
27P 51
NO. I
"" "'· "·
•.
INFO
IMF"CAIIIITICfl
1.0.
ltfSllEOIAYETER
IIIIX.
MANUF.
COLOR/MODEL NO
t.IECH.
""~
~
""·
"""""""
{N)Ft.OOR, WALL. .
(N)fl.DCII.WAU..
N.TS NO/#
SPEC NO. SPEC NO. SPECNO.
8 27P 51
SPECNO. SPECNO. SPECNO.
64 75 84
SPEC NO. SPECNO
:f T~.a.:...,ga::~ OUW!RY
SUPRESISTANTAT~Tl.[COI'
w~~~.
=IO~l~~~PJ<~T~~ ~TEO
NO!WoiEt
DOOR DESCRIPTION
@1
64 75
SPECNO.
84
01 0 0 0
Is m<><
"' ""·
...'"" ~.P.
""· "'-
::' FT.
sro sn.
""""·
TOHQJE .lr CIDM:
"""' ~f"I'INFUD
''"""'
'
~-0:~
(N)PDI'I.JJE
ill:
.
370 Crenshow Blvd, Ste. E104 Torrance, CA 90503 Tel (.310) 783~5129
Century Structural Engineering 24719 Narbonne Ave. Lomita, CA 90717
...
.,~
~
Tel
(310)
325~0883
PBS Engineers, Inc. 2100 East Route 66, Ste 101 Glendora, CA 91740 Tel (625) 650-0350
@FtuSH
Uniplan Engineering, Inc. 550
E. Corson
Plaza Drive, Ste 116 Corson, CA 90746
Tel
FRAME
i
II
~
z u
~
z
z
(i:
(310) 523-3993
LOCATION AND REMARKS
B IHMIT..(J'INJ'IHN"I o
"""' """"""""' """
·-
=
I
~~~~
reo
reo
lED I PT
NONE
~~~NI
reo I reo
lEO I PT
NONE
I
I ~~E~~~CE
HM
Cl·r:t' 7'·0" H/4"
2
PT
HM
~ ~c;N ~~ 1
~1
PT
~~N.
UNISEXRESTROOM115
HM
0-r:t'
7'·r:t' H14"
2
PT
HM
~ ~~N i~ 1 i~ 1
%
PT
~~N.
UNISEXRESTROOM116
B
HM
6'..(1'
7'..(1' HJ4"
4
PT
HM
~ ;~ i~1
~
%1
PT
NONE
HALL110
@
A
HM
0-r:t'
7'..(1' H/4"
2
PT
HM
~ ~~ i~ 1
~~ 1
i~ 1
PT
~N.
MEN'SCRESSING 118
(j)
A
HM
O·r:t'
7'·r:t' 1·[t4"
2
PT
HM
~ ~~N i~ 1
~~ 1
%1 PT
~N.
Y\OMEN'SffiESSING120
HM
~ ~c;N i~ 1
1
~1
NONE I MEN'SRESTROOM11D
~ ~~N i~ 1 i~ 1
i~ 1
0
A
01
A
O·
HM
@1
B
fi..(J'IT·r:t'l1-04"1 4
HM~PLAN~
@1
A IHMID·r:t'
HM
U·O" 7'·0" 1-CI4"
1
PT
~sEE
PT
B
5'·8"17'..(J'IH14"16
DOOR SCHEDULE
PT
WD-INOOD PT· PAINTED
1
~1
% 1
Vto"Vo"'
~SEE
PT
1NONE
I !Eo I reo I PT
NONE
reo
HM I lEO
I~E.;Nf
!EO f rEO f !ED f PT f NONE f !ED
NO 19-H16
00''"-----
PT
~~~!"NI
SEE
APPOJFlLE
I<._FtS~SS-
lED
lEO !PLAN
l!l£NTIF1CAOONST.-IJF
ON.CS:Tl£ S1MENIC!tf£CT
PT I NONE
.~J::%~
HM ~PLAN
.
..
_.--"/<' ~~~~""" ~ ~
LceBY 102. lE(()(X)R. REP1.ACE
HAR!JAIARE?ERHEAOINGO
A
SC ·SOLID INOOD CORE HM- HOLLOW METAL
I4
lED
(i:
:I:
A
@1
~
:I:
HM I reo
SP£CI'ICATlON(S)
sr.~.t~I.£SSSTEEL
...,~
PT
U-r:t' 17'..fJ' 11-04"1 5
"'""'"'"'
1
z
B I HM INJ'IT-r:t')HN"I 0
''"" '""
"'""'no
~c£0ARc.y _.
$~()'
z
i~ I~ I~
~
ROOF
""""
WATEAIIEIER ~.
STORilDRAIN
z
~I 27? 51
"~""
.f600 West O!ympic Bwl•ord Los M~elcs, CA 90019
STA.MPS/SEALS
SPECNO. SPECNO.
PROI'[Rf'1"UIIE I'ASSENCERLOADINC1Ct£ POINT OF" CONTACT
(N)PI!LIIIOR
13
MATERIAL SCHEDULE
V.T.R.
~.sn.
PROOOECONT>VoSTINCCOLORSTRIPINCF"OR"IliE VISUAI..LY ... PAI':(QASJ
27 51
SP[C NO. SPEC NO.
eA
"· '"· ""·
r
~
AT EACH
WftLCOilPOSIT10NTIL£ 12'•12"
EXISTING
NOTtlCONTRACT NOTTDSCN..E MJt.IE£R
Los Angeles High School
REMARKS
@A.usH
EXISTING EXISTING
OC.crO/CONctNTEII OD. OIJISIOC QW.IEIER
""""· "'
Corwin Theater Repair & P.O.T. Upgrades
lTPICAl~~ll£110011..
[)(lSI"'
IOSTURERESISTNfl Gl'PSUIIIII.IU.BCIIJ!D
~C.(S)
..,~
(N) fLOOR, ..ALL. AND CEUIC fNSI£S. TlPICALOITJIE ROOII.
BOA Government Services
SPEC NO.
SQ.
loiUIIo!VII IIEOW«:Al.
"' "'
:5:5:5 S. BEAUDRY AVENUE. 22ND FLOOR LOS ANGELES. CALIFORNIA 90017 TEL· {21~) 21.1-3952 FAX:(21:5)21.1-I.S06
PAINTOillllt:IIOOil
EXISTING
....o.
"·
(H)Ft.OOR, ..ALL...
EXISliNG
•I
lT.WT.
PATOti.NilRO'AIIFtOOR, ..AIJ..C(UICASR[O'D.
(0
M&O -AlE SERVICES FACILITIES SERVICES DIVISION
I2
MATERIAL
NOT USED
P.O.C.
OOIJQ..ASFIR
DOWNSPOUT
EXISTING SPECNO. SPECNO.
HARDWARE SCHEDULE
(0
<0
1/2""-'JlHEIGifT.OOI.OI'lTO...._TCHDOS"lii'IC.
EXIT DEVICE - P.AJR WOCO OR HOU..OW ldETAL DOORS DOOR CLOSER, 180-0ECREES, DELAYED ACTION flOOR-t.IOUNTED DOOR STOP
FIXTURE AND ACCESSORY SCHEDULE
(")fUlOR.....OU. ANDCEUIGFN51£S.TY!'PCALEN11AEROOII.
[)(Jsm:;
THRESHOLD KICKANDt.IOPPLATES
.
LihE_ LihE_
T375,5"HINGEFOR~EE£X;EOOORS
~UR1NAL.WAI..LriUNCATACCESSrEIL£HEICHT.
{N)fl.DCII..,ALL...
(0
~;-21 ~rn;_;;j;·~'CL!lSS.
FIXTURE SCHEDULE
~ OAINKINC fOUNTAIN,
(")fl.DCII. ...OU..
(0
ROOM SCHEDULE
EDGE-J.IOUNTCONTINUOUSHINCE EXIT OfVICE - PAIR WOOD OR HOtlOW I.
SEE SECTION 22 1000- PLU1.1BJNG
(E)
8 13 51 6J
HEADING 4 - EXIT DOOR
C"Jl01LETPAP(fiDISPENSER,SEMI-RECESSEO,
U
THRESHCtD KICKAMJWOPPLATES ADHESlVE SMOKE SEAlS - FIRE RATED WET& OOORS
EDGE-MOUNT CONTINUOUS HINGE EXIT DEVICE - PAIR WOOD OR HOLLOW METAl. DOORS DOORCLOSER,180-0ECREES.OELAYEDACTJON flOOR-WOUNTED DOOR STOP THRESHOLD KICKANDii!OPP\ATES
QPROV1DE6ACKINCFORATTACH1.1ENT,SEE10/A702.
El
SPEC NO. SPEC NO. SPECNO. SPEC NO.
HEADING D· EXISTING EXIT DOOR
10/A702.
liW> ~
EDGE l.IOUNT CONTINUOUS HINGE UJCKSET D00RO.OSER,180-0£GREES.DELAYEDACTION FlOOfHIOUNTED OOOR STOP
LOS ANGELES UNIFIED SCHOOL DISTRICT
(0
HEADING 2-20 MIN. DOOR
El g:~~~e:c~cc~~:tiMENT, 8 ~~~co~W~~~~r~Hs.PROYIDE 8 ~~i ~K~ip~~IT~~~~. ~~~~A702. 8 ~~DES~C;I~O~S=~~~~E~,R~~EE 1~~~~J:· 8 ::s~~= ~:f~r::ACilH~E~DSEE
~"'""'"<'
I RB
63
0PROVIOEBACKINCfORATT,O,CHr..ENT,SEE10/n02. 24"•60"STAINlESSSTEEl.rRAI.!EDr..IRROR,F1JU. L£NGTH.NEXTTOACCESS18L£8ENCH PROVIDE BACKING fOR ATTACHMENT. SEE 10/A702.
-~
REMARKS
SEE SECTION 10 281J- TOIL£T ACCESSORIES
I
!ED
NONE
ENTRY 41. IE~. REPLACE HAR!JNARE PER HEADING 5
I
SCHEDULES AND ABBREVIATIONS
~~R~=EARo'rNG~E LOBBY1. ~COOORAT!RCXXlR FRAME. PROVIOE'SV\1NGQ.EAR' Hlt«?.ES PER HEKIING 6
Gl- GLASS
J1
A002 11/07/2016
02 2600-112
~
--4---
(N) PATH OFTRAVCL
(B](E)t.1EN"SR~,RO.IOD£1.£DATCHO.NGINCR00t.l
(!I
{E) WOMEN'S R£STROOI.I. R[),jQOO.EO AT ~GINC ROOM
@)
{E) WEN"S RESl'l!OOt.l. REWOOQ.ED INTO Nl ...CCESSIBLE l.fiiSO. Rt51"ROOt.l
(IJ
(E)El.EVATORSERWIGTHEST....cEL!VEl..v(lOWIQtiGFIOOWS
~(E)~OFTICE,WOOinEDCOJNTERTOP
ACCESSIBLE ROUTE NOTES: 1• ...ccESS8..E PATH OF TRAin ....S INDICAITO ON PlJ..N IS A B..mER-FREE o\CC£SSROIJ'fEWil'IO.JlNff~l.Ml.~G(SEXCEEill'IG1/2'1r
llr'o'EL£0 AT 1·2 \WI SLOPE. Gl ~ I..£VD.. 0\.lliGES NOT OCEEBI'IG 1/4' IWI. NIO AT t!AST 4!.' ~ fiiOTH.
2.SURf...cEISSTABI.!,flfD,I.ANDSUPRESISTNIT.
LOS ANGELES UNIFIED SCHOOL DISTRICT M&O ·AlE SERVICES FACILITIES SERVICES DIVISION JJJ S. BEAUORY AVENUE. ZZND FLOOR
LOS ANGELES.
CALIFORNIA 90017
TEt.:(21J)Zl.I-:39S2 F.t.11:(21:3}ZI.I-1.868
l. CROSS Sl1lPE DOCS 00"1 EXCEED 7% NIO SlOPE INn£ DIRECTION or TRAVEL IS L£SS I'I-WI ~.utll£SSOTHERW1SE INOICATE!I.
•· .o.ccESS8..E PATH or TRAVEl. St\IU BE WINT.o.lt£D mEL Of OVERIWIGING OBSTRUCTlONSTOI!CJ'W'IIIIIM,NIOPROTR1JOitiCC8J(CTSCR[Al(R~
•· F'f!CUECT!ON Fl'IOUW.O.U.NIO .I.IJO',£ 27'AND LESS TIWI !.0'. ~-THE
COtHlUCTOR SHAIJ.'o{Rn' THAT
""""'-
tH(RE
6.DESICNPROFrSS1Clf'loOINIV1EftALR£'SPONSI:BLEOfAAGESTATEMENT:
n,.,
PO.T.O:IentJ;m;,\llnt~tlftSII'UC~doeu~Mntliscompli
currmtopplieii!.ypto•....,•la< pat~~l-tro.e ~Is !0< otttt"Otions, oe14;~, and struclurcl repairs. Mpart<-A ll>ede,q,ot ll"dprojeet.111eP.O.T. ·~e.......,edot>do"J rlnglllemintocornplionctftasDftninclu-•;thinllltocoptolths po-oj«t"o•orle
PARKING TABULATION:
Corwin Theater Repair & P.O.T. Upgrades
AAE JiO B.lAA£RS IN THE F'I\TH
bJ
,:::::;: ~=!::%,"':.,"';,.::.!.,"'!,~.or ..,recsr.>o04e IIO'dlllop are so
Los Angeles High School 4600 We~t Olympic BouM>rd Lo•Ati<}OIH.C.0.90019
BOA Government Services 370 Crenshaw Blvd, Ste. E104 Torronce, CA 90503 Tel (310) 783-5129
l).r,nge~o!P.O.T.ikmswothiftthcKOII
roasotlllt>le coonstruct..., tolero~es. they shOII w t>rouo;~t into cornpklnce part of tnis pro 1ect by m'"""t of c censtruction c11<1r19•
;;::....,u:.,cac o• a
OEMOLtT!ON LEGEND
~
2100 East Route 66, Ste 101 Glendora, CA 91740 Tel (625) 550-0350
TO BE REMOVED
""
PA'o'INC
24719 Narbonne Ave. Lomita, CA 90717 Tel (310) 325-0883
PBS Engineers, Inc.
(E)ACPAVINGOA
CONCR£"1EPA'o'ING
Uniplan Engineering, Inc.
DEMOLITION NOTES
G ~~~~ 0
Century Structural Engineering
G ~~Ep~~N~RJJ!
550 E. Corson Plozo Drive, Ste 115 Corson, CA 90745 Tel (310) 523-3993
REI.IOVETURffORNEWACCESSIBlEWALK
RENOVATION LEGEND
1:/::~.i.:~). ><:::l ~~~~NCRETE
{N)ASPHALT f>A'o'ING
RENOVATION NOTES ADMINISTRATION AND C[ASSROOM BUll DING BLD. N 019 COT O.L.A. N 1 O.S.A. N A-35928
(WEST BUILDING)
0
~~~~~~ ~~~~~~ s;~o1.
"i
/'::--..
RE?l..-cE TOW-A.WA.Y SICN AT (E) LOCAl!ON SIT OETAlL 1J/A104.
<8>
(N) AC PAVING PER Pt..AN.
{N) CONCRETE PAvtNC PE"R PLAN.
Ol\IISON Of" THE STATE ARCHITECT
I)ENTifiCATIOHSTNo!P CIV.OtMSTATEAROflECT
.o.PPOJFlt.E NO. 19-HliS
M:._Fl.S_SS_
SITE PLAN
A101 11/07/2016
02 2600-113
•
~OfE!).Cl' LOS ANGELES UNIFIED SCHOOL DISTRICT M&O ·AlE SERVICES FACILITIES SERVICES DIVISION
;.,? I'
~~~
S. BEAUDRY AVENUE. 22ND FLOOR LOS ANGELES. CALIFORNIA 90017
"
TEL: (2m21.1-~9S2 F.llt (21~) 21.1-48¢8
Corwin Theater Repair & P.O.T. Upgrades Los Angeles High School 4600 Weol Olympic Be><.o'-onl Los.-lt"l<)elu, CA90019
DEMOLITION AND RENOVATION LEGEND
J'-6"±VIF
II u
3'-0"± {4'-0' r.tAX..)
=======
I
(E) TO BE REr.tO'>m
BOA Government Services 370 Crenshaw Blvd. Ste. [1 04 Torrance, CA 90503 Tel (310) 783-5129
Century Structural Engineering 24719 Narbonne Ave. Lomite, CA 90717 Tel (310) 325-0883
!JOill· 1. SE£ SPECif!Ct,.TIONS FOR RAIL ANI) POST FINISH.
2.GRINDSMOOTli.O.U.WELOS. J. HOT-DIP GAlVANIZE RAIL AfTER F.o.BRICATIOI'I.
DEMOL1T10N NOTES
PBS Engineers, Inc.
OREI.IOVEHANDftt.IL
15
NOT USED
I
SCALE:
HANDRAIL ELEVATION
.3/4~"'1'-0"
1-1/2" NOM. (1.900")
o.o. sro
srt:El
wt
//
~I &!
lj
(E)PA
,_
,_
c-
~
,_
'~
SCALE: 3"=1'-0"
~
cvJk
AT EXTERIOR STAIRS: UPPER
APPROACH AND All TREADS.
8.1NSTAU.E01N(N}CONCRETECURB. C. INSTAU.EO .lT (E} WAI.L F'ROVIOE B.t.CKING P\AT£ .l1 (E) WAll AND P.lTC!i WAL.l.. TIU TO IU.TC!i(E}.
R
mfAOS
(N) WAANING STRIPING OF CL£1\RLY COJ'ITRASTING COLOR PER CBC SECnoN
RENOVATION NOTES
~ (N}.._c:;.~~z~~AIR~~~~~ REQ'O.
0(N)TIL£TOIAATCH(E)COL.ORANDSIZE.
TYP.~
114
Unlplan Engineering, Inc. 550 E. Carson Plaza Drive, Ste 116 Carson, CA 90746 Tel (310) 523-3993
~~ ;~ET~~R~~~i
""'""'"'-
;q'i.
- -~"' -
--· -~
-"
.;;
IO[NnflC.lTIONSl"AioiP IW.Cfll£Sl"~TE~fiiTECT
Af'f'OJF1LEN0.19-H16
flt._rLS_ss_
"''"-------
TYP.AT(6} LOCATIONS FOR
RE!.IOVEANOREPLOoCE(E)TILEAL.ONGSTAIR NOSING.TILETOBECQNTRASTlNGCO!..OR AND SUP RESISTANT.
EA. HANDRAIL ON9RISERS 0 5.'25":!: E.\.
THESTRlPESHALLEXTENDTHEfVlLWIDTH
OFTHESTEPOFIUPPERAPPRO.oll:H
cv-f
,_
,_
,_ j--J-
Ldi!'oo~<~
~-'
STAIR STRIPING
REMOVE
/.),. "'V"INTDIIORSTAIRS·SITDETAIL8/.l702.
TYP.AT(6)
LOCATIONS FOR
118-504.4.1,
FOR NEW STI:EL
~N~~LE[R~~ METAL r>!OSING STRIP
0.145' W"'-1. THICKNESS
POST AT lHSLAB
0 ~~~~~~~ ~v;7g~~U 8 r,-j ~ :o~~;~~~~~~g. 8
2100 East Route 66, Ste 101 Glendora. CA 91740 Tel (625) 650-0350
scAt.L 1"=1'-o· 110[
EXT. STAIR RENOVATION PLAN
'~
I
I
I
~
ENLARGED SITE PLAN • STAIR AT ADMINISTRATION BUILDING ""'"'-6006
12'-o" 6 TREADS 0 1e"± EA.
EXT. STAIR DEMOLITION PLAN
SCALE: 1/4"=1'-0"
KEY PLAN
KEY PLAN AND NOTES
NORTH:)
A102 11/07/2016
02 2600-114
4'-2 )f," TO
~·-1
l}z ..,.«
1>"
- IA~MDTI<~AA,ES) ~-
CONTINUOUS I'W«)AAIL. SEE 4/A10~
~,.
LOS ANGELES UNIFIED SCHOOL DISTRICT M&O -AlE SERVICES FACILITIES SERVICES DIVISION (()TURF AREA
:5:5:5 S. BEAUDRY AVENUE. 22ND Fl.OOR LOS ANGELES. CALIFORNIA 90017 TEL: {21:5) 2L.I-:59S2 F.u..:{21:5)2l..l-l..B08
~-~=FACE
Corwin Theater Repair & P.O.T. Upgrades Los Angeles High School POUR CONC. AIWNST UNDISTURBED NATURAL SOIL {OR APPROVED CO~PACTED SOIL)
PIPE SLEEVE AND HANDRAIL
____
_J~(E)
scALE' 1-1/2"=1'-o" 120
I
RAMP SECTION
scAt£, 3/<'=1'-0" 1121
~600 Weot Olympic Boui>ron:l Lo• ""'9ell•, "" ~0()1Q
RAMP HANDRAIL
SCALE; 1/2"=1'-0"
I4
BOA Government Services 370 Crenshaw Blvd, Ste. E1 04 Torronce, CA 90503 Tel (310) 783-5129
BUILDING DEMOLITION NOTES
0 0 (N)GI-l..V.HANOfWL.
RE~OVEO:!STINGGATE~OHINGES rc:~ ~~~~~OVE
Century Structural Engineering
EX15nNG nLE AND
0R£M!M:EX!STltfGTR£E.
PBS Engineers, Inc.
(N) CONCRETE CURB
@ @
RO.«lVEANORElOCATEEXtSTJNGYARO
BOX.
~ ;.~mD RE~OVE EXISTING PARTIAL
G RE~OVE
HEICHT
T1JRf" FOR NEW ACCESSIBLE WAIJ(.
2100 East Route 66, Ste 101 Glendora, CA 91740 Tel (625) 650-0350
Uniplan Engineering, Inc. 550 E. Corson Plaza Drive, Ste 116 Corson, CA 90746 Te! (310) 523-3993
INTERWEOIATE
DASHED UNE DENOTES (N) ACCESSIBLE RAMP
24719 Narbonne Ave. Lomite, CA 90717 Tel (310} 325-0883
LANCING
RENOVATION NOTES
RAMP ELEVATION
SCALE: 1/4"=1'-0"
<3>
~~~z;::D s;;r~~~~~A~ ~~~-
(N)A. REO'O B.INSTAI.LEOIN(N)CONCR£TECURS. C. INSTALLED AT (E) WALL PROVIDE BACKING PLATE AT (E) WALL NID PATCH WALl. T1LE TO
W..TCH{E).
i_,Q~.,7
,/,;:..... (N)
'V/
ACCESSIBLE F'EOESTRWI CIITE. stE DETAIL
11/A701.
0(N)CONCRETEPAVINGPEl'IPI.N-!.
~~:..~HT
/,Qm£w~'7
0(E)YAROB0liRaOCATED.
'
~ST~~INC~OUT
TO BE fUISH W/ (N)
DENTiflC"J.TIONSTNoiP DV. 0# TH[ STATE .IROf!Ecr
~~~~~~~~~]
APPO~-
FIL.E NO. \9-H16
" ' - - ns__ " - -
26'-9"RAMP
~
stE SHEET C-1 FOR Fl/-IISH£0 SUf!fACE El.EVATJOI'(S, TYP. N01t;
ENLARGED SITE PLAN ACCESSIBLE WALK AND PEDESTRIAN GATE
/,o~·~7
""""'"'""-'6006
:)N NEW RAMP AND PEDESTRIAN GATE
SCALE: 1/4"=1'-0"
KEY PLAN
KEY PLAN AND NOTES
NORTH:)
A103 11/07/2016
02 2600-115
·~
~ SIR.FN;W/ADJ. 0.2"HIGH~fUJSH •·coNC. '"·__.., .·· •• ·.•..
'
~o•·ii>P' LOS ANGELES UNIFIED SCHOOL DISTRICT
(E) WHEEL STOP, TYP.
CAST-tt-PI.ACE REPLACOOLEOffiCTJBI..E
M&O - AlE SERVICES FACILITIES SERVICES DIVISION
• ·~·I "=" ~'0
WARNING TIL£S
4" ~IN. OF CONC. BEIWEENDOI.IES ANOA/CAAEJ\S
@
@
0
@
@
@
:5:5:5 S. BEAUDRY AVENUE. 22NO FLOOR LOS ANGELES. CALIFORNIA 90017 TEL{21:5)241-:S9S2 FAl\:(21:5)241-4866
2.AT(E)ACPAVINGTOREIMIN. SLURRY SEAl PRIOR TO RE-STRIPING.
~~
~i
@
Corwin Theater Repair & P.O.T. Upgrades
o.6ATTOP
PIAN
Los Angeles"High School
0.9!1BASE
4600 lf~t OlympC Boulv
DETECTABLE WARNING SURFACE
SOU: 3"•1'-0"116
~
BOA Government Services 370 Crenshaw Blvd, Ste. E1 04 Torrance, CA 90503 Tel (310) 783-5129
,_,,,.
2-I5COOT. RlllARS TOP Of
, . ·£ li= :.,
! ----- 15
1
SECTION --~~
OEMOLITION NOTES
G ~~~~PAVING 0
PAVEMENT
~~~p~N~
REBAR.
IB"LONG
u ...,.m>.
""
PBS Engineers, Inc.
!Q><
~
flAVIN/
PRE-CAST
CONCRETE
(N)CONCRETE PA\IlNG
Uniplan Engineering, Inc. 550 E. Corson Plaza Drive, Ste 116 Corson, CA 90746 Tel (310) 523-3993
{H) ASPHAlT
"""'
PLAN
CONCRETE WHEEL STOP
24719 Narbonne Ave. Lomite, CA 90717 Tel (310) 325-0883
2100 Eost Route 66, Ste 101 Glendora, CA 91740 Tel (625) 650-0350
RENOVATION LEGEND
~~~~~ M0
~{
Century Structural Engineering
SCALE: 1"•1'-0"
115
J'-o"
I!
RENOVATION NOTES
7" WOC W1-llfE STRIPltiC
.r
... r
1=42COATS(TYP.)
8LUEBACt«;ROUN02
0
~~~ ~ft~~~~ s;;=o1.
<8>
(N) AC.
PA~G
P(R PlNI
~(N)CONCREl"EPA\fiNCPERPLAN.
COATS{TYP.)
1-1/2" WIDE wtm STRIPriGwttEllilWII
SYI.I8(J.2COATS,TYP. SEEOCTAl.1/A703fOR
OIVISIONOflHESTATEAROilrECT
""""-"""""""'
IO£Nllf"ICATIONSTN.!P DIV.OfTHES!ATEAACHTECT
(E)0 1JILDING
:f~.,!;,~~•.~
l>f'POJ-
FllE NO. 19-H16
14
PARKING ISA SYMBOL
K._Fl..S_ss__
SIGN: R1008 (Co.). 2+"~24" WIN.
90ROER&LEGEND·BLACK BACKGflOI.tlO:W111TE (RETROR£fUC1M) TAMPERPROOfKIRDWAAE;FOR Ol.OINUHK fENCE HOC RriGED 0
E.t.CHOORNER,TYP
~~
{E)CIWNI..li«F"ENCE
:)N
::.~
.'"
.,~
TOW-AWAY SIGN
ENLARGED SITE PLANPARKING AND DETAILS
\_''''"""'"\
t.IIN.I"HIGHLETTERING
sou. ,•• ,._,. 113
I
ACCESSIBLE PARKING SPACES
"""'' ,,, .• ,._,. 1 5
KEY PLAN
I
KEY PLAN AND NOTES
NORTH!)
A104 11/07/2016
02 2600-116
. .,." ·~ ~
LOS ANGELES UNIFIED SCHOOL DISTRICT M&O- AlE SERVICES FACILITIES SERVICES DIVISION 333 S. BEAUDRY AVENUE. ZZND FLOOR
@-------
LOS ANGELES. CALIFORNIA Q0017
TEt,:(Za:5)Zt.I-:S9SZ
Fu:(ZI!i)ZI.I-1..868
~~--,,
REWJN TYP
~-':'>~[~OS~PO~ ~,1.., TOR(W.IN,
®-----
Corwin Theater Repair & P.O.T. Upgrades
DEMOLITION LEGEND (E) fO BE RE~OVED ~(E)t.!ETALST\JOWALLTOREMA.IN
.
'
Los Angeles"High School ~600
(E) 1-HR METAL STUD WALl. TO
West Ol1mp;c Boutvcrd
l0t"""9•'*&.CA90019
AEWJN
, ··:·
.•. ••
(E) CONCR£TE WAll TO R£I,WN
BOA Government Services 370 Crenshaw Blvd, Ste. E104
~
f' \_/
I
(E) PI..U1.181NG FIXTURE TO BE REMOVEO,CAf'Uf'IESOREXTENDTO (N} PLUMBING fiHURE .0.S R[Q'O.
~
(E)M:.P"VINGOR
Torrance, CA 90503 Tel (310) 783-5129
Century Structural Engineering
CONCRETEP"w-IG TOBEREJ.IOVED
24719 Narbonne Ave. Lomita, CA 90717
Tel (310) 325-0883
PBS Engineers, Inc.
DEMOLITION NOTES
2100 East Route 66, Ste 101
G ~!~~ ?~~~~~
Glendora, CA 91740
Tel (625) 650-0350
Uniplan Engineering, Inc.
0Rft.IOVEtw
0
~~SO:~:! ~~7g~
FOR NEW STID.
550 E. Carson Plaza Drive, Ste 116 Corson, CA 90746 Tel (310) 523-3993
0ROIOVEEXTUIIORW"'-LANDFINISHES.
THEFOU.OW1NG1Tti.ISTOR£NAIN U.N.O. (SEE STRUCT. PI.NIS): -CONCRETE STE~ WAJ..L
-ST£.EL
CQLU~NS
-SlEELROOFBE:..o.MS -UET~
RQQF
DECK
8~~~~R
8 0 0
~~~Q~~~DWAR£ ro~~~~:c~
foS
D.ISllNG llLE
~~G rgN~~~
~D
.<.T WALL DOWN TO
0REt.IOVEH.<.NDR.<.ILAADSAV£FORREINSl.<.u..,o,JlON.
G)
~,J~~~o:·a7t~~ u:~;?~~~~NtNG TYPIO.l "T '-LL .
-----@
DV. fT 11£
ST.<.l! NlOITECT
,t,PPOJFILE NO. \9-H16
AC_n.s_ss_
CORWIN THEATER DEMOLITION FLOOR PLAN ~-6006
:)" CORWIN THEA TIER DEMOLITION FLOOR PLAN
'c"" •;,.• ,._,. I
KEY PLAN
2
I KEY NOnES AND LEGEND
NORTH~
A201 11/07/2016
02 2600-117
LOS ANGELES UNIFIED SCHOOL DISTRICT M&O -AlE SERVICES FACILITIES SERVICES DIVISION SS3 S. BEAUDRY AVENUE. 2ZND FLOOR
----€)
LOS ANGELES. CALIFORNIA 90017 TEL (.21S) .21..1-395.2 FAX(.213)ZI..I-1..868
RENOVATION LEGEND (E) METAL STUD WALL TO R[I.IAIN,
~~~~HR METAL STUD WAlL TO , ·
-----@
~·
• •,
:zz:z=::z:zz:
(E) CONCRET£ WALL TO REMAIN. (N) INTERIOR METAL STUD WALL. SEE PLIINS FOR SIZE. SEE 12/A70J AND 15/A703FORFfWJINC0ETAILS.
~ ~~L to~~~~N~Ia:.~~~E~~s~~
~ w~IS~~ ~~~/~0~ ~:: ~- ~Tis~ER
~-,~~~~~ ~ >>.>~-~ ~~~ ~~NEJE p~NG,
~
Corwin Theater Repair & P.O.T. Upgrades Los Angeles High School ~600
West Ol~mp;c 80<.11v
BOA Government Services 370 Crenshaw Blvd, Ste. E104 Tarrance, CA 90503 Tel (310) 783-5129
Century Structural Engineering 24719 Narbonne Ave. Lomita, CA 90717 Tel (310) 325-0883
PBS Engineers, Inc. RENOVATION NOTES
~ACC£SSI8LfPATH-0F-TRAVEL.SEE
"V"
2100 East Route 66, Ste 101 Glendora, CA 91740 Tel (625) 650-0350
'ACCESSI8LEROUTENOTES'ONA101.
/.'.._ (N) ROO~ OR SUILOING 1.0. SIGNAGE. SEEDETAIL10/A703.
'V/
0(N)EXITSICNAGE.SEE0ETAIL6/A703.
0
(N)A.~~~~z~D ~~~~~~~A~~~~- REO'O
<3>
~~~NR~~; ~~O~~~R1 ~~~~-G.
Uniplan Engineering, Inc. 550 E. Corson Plaza Drive, Ste 116 Corson, CA 90746 Tel (310) 523-3993
8.1NSTALLEDIN(N)CONCRETECURB. C. INSTALLED AT (E) WALL PROV10E BACKING PLAT£ AT (E) W.O.LL .41'10 P...TC!-1 WALL TILE TO
MA.TCH(E)
INTERIORSTAIRS:SEEDETAIL8/A702.
-0
(N)CONCRITEPAVINGPERPL.AN.
~ (N) DOOR HARDWARE AT (E) DOOR. SEE DOOR
V"
SCHEDULE 1/AOOl.
0(E}HANDRAILREINSTALLEOI\T(N)EXT£R10RWALL
llENTlFICATIONSTA!.(P DIV.OfnlESTAIEARCHTECT APPOJ-
-----@
FIL£ NO. 19-H16
N:._FtS_SS_
CORWIN THEATER RENOVATION FLOOR PLAN
- -------8
:)N CORWIN TiiEATER RENOVATION FLOOR PLAN
""~' ,,,.", -o· I 2
KEY PLAN
I
KEY NOTES AND LEGEND
NORTH~
A202 11/07/2016
02 2600-118
rtr
LOS ANGELES UNIFIED SCHOOL DISTRICT M&O ·AlE SERVICES FACILITIES SERVICES DIVISION ~3~
-----@
S. BEAUDRY AVENUE. 22ND FLOOR
LOS ANGELES. CALIFORNIA 90017
TEL:(21:5)241·:5952 F.~ox:(213)2l.l·l.868
Corwin Theater Repair & P.O.T. Upgrades
DEMOLITION NOTES
G ~~~ T~':r~~'Y'S:~ROOflNG
DOWN TO
""TROOfCM:RSTAGE:CRAfl"A.NDDRESSING
e
Los Angeles High School
R001.4S, RE:~OVE TILE AND Pl.J\Sl"ER ROOFlNG DOWN TO EXISTING CONCRETE TOPPING OVER U[TAI.R00f0[0(.
~~~~~~~G ...?:.UST
fAN.
EXISTING CURB
4600 Wut Olympic Boul•crd Lo~ Mo;elu, CA 90019
BOA Government Services 370 Crenshaw Blvd, Ste. E104 Torronce, CA 90503
Tel (310) 783-5129
Century Structural Engineering 24719 Narbonne Ave.
~
Lomita, CA 90717 Tel (310) 325-0883 RENOVATION NOTES ~ (N) QUARRY '\,/'
PBS Engineers, Inc.
nL£
ROOFING CII/ER SPECIFIED WAITRPROOFSYS!EMOVER(£)METALOECKAND ROOF FRAMING. 'ATROOFOVERSTAGECRArTANDDRESSINC ROOMS. (N) QUARRY TILE ROOFING OVER SPECIFIED WATERPROOF SYSTEM OVER (E) CONCRffi TOPPUlG.
Glendora, CA 91740
Tel (625) 650-0350
Uniplan Engineering, Inc. 550 E. Corson Plaza Drive, Ste 1 15 Corson, CA 90746
<§>(H) GUTIER.
<8>
2100 East Reule 66, Ste 101
Tel (310) 523-3993
(N) OQWNSPOUT.
0{N)(XKI.USTF.\N,INST.-IU.PERSHEETM2.015
@------
II·~
--=-------,11
!=
==-Jt=
-=¢lt6=
==-----@
'
-1@------- - - -
CORWIN THEATER ROOF PLAN
+
1---t i
OIVISICI'la"
~~~
-------@
~ESTATE
ARCHITECT
IOOOflC.ATXltiSTALIP
Or\'. Of n£ STATE AACHITCT APPO::!-
FILE NO. 19-Hl!i
"'--- ns__ ss..._
"'"'-----
t
CORWIN THEATER ROOF PLAN
- ------0
:)N 'em •;e·-··-o· I 2
KEY PLAN
I
KEY NOTES AND LEGEND
NORTH!)
A203 11/07/20115
02 2600-119
•
OEMOllnON AND RENOVATION LEGEND
~
j'\
{E) Pl.JJUS:NC flXTURE TO SE
REMOVED. CAP LINtS OR EX"IDIO TO {N)PIJJWBINGmTUR:EASREO'O.
)
'./
~~-<'
(E)TOBERE!o!OVEO
LOS ANGELES UNIFIED SCHOOL DISTRICT
(E) lolETA!. STUD WALL TO REMAIN
@---
{E) 1-HR I.!ETAL STUD WALL TO
M&O - AlE SERVICES FACILITIES SERVICES DIVISION
REt.WN . ···:·
.• •.
(E) CONCRETE WALL TO RGIAIN.
{1'1) INTERIOR
loi[TAl.
STl.JD WAll, SEE
~Pl»>SrORSI2LS££12/A70JNIIl 15/A703FORF1Wolll'IGDETA1\.S. ~
(N) 1-HR ltfTERKlR r.IETAL STUD WALL.
3:5:5 S. BEAUDRY AVENUE. ZlND FLOOR LOS ANGELES. CALIFORNIA 90017 TEL:(213)Zl..1-3952 F.~ox:(21:S)ll..1-l..86S
U.L DESIGN NO. U465, SEE 6/1<501.
~ ~~J~~·. ~~~~~~ ~~ ~- E~6~~(R ST~
0 0 0 0 0
~1
=..a:o~~~
Los Angeles High School
1.0. SICMCE.
4600 W~d Olympic Boulvacd
los
(N)RESTROOI.ISIGN.I.CE.SEEDETM.9/A703.
~c:ss~~~J~ .fs~~Rl~~l.£VATIONS A601 INT. El..£VS AND 7/A002 FIXTURE SCHEDUlE.
SEE-'SOIINT!RIOREl.EVATIONSANO
0
:)N
CHANGING ROOM RENOVATION PLAN
'""',,, .• ,._..I 5
24719 Noroonne Ave. Lomita, CA 90717 Tel (310) 325-0883
~J-A:~~~~~N.COUNITR.
PBS Engineers, Inc.
SU: ?l..A:'I FOR
2100 East Route 66, Ste 101 Glendora, CA 91740 Tel (625) 650-0350
~ {N)~.jfLSTUDWAll.INFlU..SEEWAU.SrloiBOL '\,/tLGEND. W.TCH{E)..ru.t.crNTFlNISHEA.SIOE.
A
{N)C.o.BINE'TW/POI.EANOSHU.f.SEE?I..ANFOR
Uniplan Engineering, Inc.
"0"'CASEWORKOE:SlalSERiES(CDS)Nlli.IBERANO SlZ£. SCRlBE TO Ml.IACENT WAI..L, TY?.
I
LOBBY RESTROOM RENOVATION PLAN
sco.u:: 1/'t"-1'-o· I
3
370 Crenshaw Blvd, Ste. E104 Torrance, CA 90503 Tel (310) 783-5129
Century Structural Engineering
~~~ ~! ~~6:'io:c~~~~i~~o~,
0(N)ACCESS18LEBENCH,SEEOE'TAA.J.4/A702.
:)N
CA. 90019
~:-~N~LUP~~~ ~~00~~~~ ~ REQ'O.
7/NJ02FlXTURESCHEDIA.E.
TOBETHEOPPOSITECOIOCROfTHE DlSTlNCORESSINCNIDRESTROO!o!S.
Moe~s.
BOA Government Services
7/P<002ACCESSORYSCHEOUL£.
~~ ~~?u:i~M:~~~/{Q~~U~TBI~~N~~~
0 ~ ~~~~~~EN~~~Roo~r~ae=fr~~c
Corwin Theater Repair & P.O.T. Upgrades
RENOVATION NOTES
DEMOLITION NOTES
0
~~.t~~~~6R=~S~~~~R ~~O~ISH AND/OR
?LU~BING REPl.ACE~ENT
WORK.
550 E. Corson Plozo Drive, Ste 1 16 Carson, CA 90746 Tel (310) 523-3993
PATCH.
REPAIR. AND/OR PAINT TO !.lATCH (E) ADJ. SURFCE.. 0REI.IOVEPI..WBtNGflXTURE.
@---
i
0REI.Kl'VEEXTERIORWALLANOnNISHES. THEFOI..LOWtNGITEI.ISTOROWN
S~E {MOWCJII
r:;-..,
=
~~~~~gKsc~ALL?I..ANs):
0
:~JE~
G) ~~~~R
~~s
R[UQVERE."""""
G ~~N~~LIT
\.:...:.)ACCESSORY
0 0 0
,,,
~~~O~~~AROWARE
~~N~~~
AS
~AC~~:·~ U:d:c~s:trii~HING
TY?Ic-L.ATAU..oRE.ISTOBEREI.IOOELED REIJO\IEftOORFINISH.
IOENnF'ICI.rlOOSTA!.IP
OIV.OF"THESTAIEAACHIITCT
..v>PO:JflLE NO. 19-H15
ST~
W:._FlS_ss_
"'"'-----
,,,
,~-
:)N CHANGING ROOM DEMOUTION PLAN
"""'' ,,,•• ,._..I 4
..............
I
LOBBY RESTROOM DEMOUTION PLAN
CORWIN THEATER ENLARGED FLOOR PLANS
:)N """'' ,,,.,,._,. I 2
KEY PLAN
I
KEY NOTES AND LEGEND
NORTH:)
A204 11/07/2016
02 2600-120
C? LOS ANGELES UNIFIED SCHOOL DISTRICT
---@
M&O ·AlE SERVICES FACILITIES SERVICES DIVISION 333 S. BEAUDRY AVENUE. ZZND FLOOR LOS ANGELES. CALIFORNIA 90017
I
TEl.: (213) 21.1-:5952 FAJ\:{213)2£.1-4868
y
'IL
E
HEA~ICE
Corwin Theater Repair & P.O.T. Upgrades
MAILROOM
II
Los Angeles High School
'NAITING ROOM
=
4600 Wul Olympic 8oulvan:l LosAnseles.CA90019
~"'I - 1
ENTRY
=
BOA Government Services 370 Crenshaw Blvd, Ste. E104 Torrance, CA 90503 Tel (310) 783-5129
~ J'-10"
£
DEMOLITION NOTES
Y-10"
~I J'-7"
Century Structural Engineering 24719 Narbonne Ave. Lomita, CA 90717 Tel (310) 325-0883
GREIAOVECASEWORK.
f.:\ ~:~Rr.~~~C~E VroREMAIN
--------8
=
STUDENT GOVERNMENT
PBS Engineers, Inc.
f.':\ REt.!OVE DOOR HARDWARE AS \.:.:JNOT£DONPlAN.
2100 East Route 66, Ste 101 Glendorc, CA 91740 Tel (525) 650-0350
~N
ENlRY HALL FLOOR PLAN
SCN..E: 1/4"-1'-0"
Uniplan Engineering, Inc. 550 E. Carson Plaza Drive, Ste 116 Carson, CA 90746 Tel {310) 523-3993
I 3 RENOVATION NOTES
cp
~
0 0
~~~~~~ ~A~O~~~~ $~01. ~~ ~~LO~O;:;~~G
0(N)EXlTSIGNAGE.
10. SIGNAGE
SEEDEfAIL6/A70J.
0
~J-AJ''ECL~~~N.COWH"ER,
A
(N)G}J..V.STL.NON-STRUCfURALPOSTBUOW
SEE PLAN FOR
"7(E)'IIAL.L-~0UNTEDCABINET,S£EOETAIL3/A602 ~{N)OOORHAAOWAREAT(E)OOOR,SEEDOOR
'V
SCHEDULE 1/A002.
IOOmflCATON STAMP ON. OF THE STATE ARCHITECT APP03F1LE NO. 19-H16
N:._FLS_ss_
LOBBY
=
ADMINISlRATION BUILDING FLOOR PLANS -.n:'f""'6006
KEY PLAN
LOBBY FLOOR PLAN
ADMINISlRA TION BUILDING FLOOR PLAN
"'"'' , .• , -o· I 2 I KEY NOTES AND LEGEND
NORTH:)
A205 11/07/2016
02 2600-121
f!.."'"'rn"~\
~,,
~-~~q ·~"'"""'<-":
I_
~-~
<~~~~:~>,
,.. , ........
i
·•:·\.~,-.,
..
.~
.: .
..: .
I
i J\1
I
II II II II II II II
1'1
I
I
LOS ANGELES UNIFIED SCHOOL DISTRICT M&O -AlE SERVICES FACILITIES SERVICES DIVISION 333 S. BEAUDRY AVENUE. Z2NO FLOOR
I
LOS ANGELES. CAliFORNIA 90017 TEt.:{213)2£.1·39'52 FA11:{213)2l.l-l.8()8
Ill
", ',
', ',
'f,
KEY PLAN
',~:~,~~~~~~~~~-r
Corwin Theater Repair & P.O.T. Upgrades
'~ ~
;:;:;:/
Los Angeles High School
NORTH:>
•&OO West Olympic BouM>nl ......
~ ....
Co\90019
BOA Government Services 370 Crenshaw Blvd, Ste. El 04
Torrance, CA 90503 Tel (310) 783-5129
Century Structural Engineering
I~ !IF
y;,
ff
II
II
24719 Narbonne Ave. Lomita, CA 90717
MEN"~SING I [[I (E) GWEl CEIUNG
II
0,
;-9'-0" n-v
Tel (310) 325-0883 I I
PBS Engineers, Inc.
II
DEMOLITION NOTES
!v
I
c"&:J
{N) CWB CEJUNG TB'-7"W..TCH(E}
NOCtWIGEfO(E)
UC-~----~·· Ul _j 19
Ill - - - - - ~~~------
t(t--
;ill--
.
•
27
A70I
m
"<:/PLANS.
~OARclt/,-
$~<).'
"
~~
CEIUNG OPENING
FRAMING L.......L_
I
NOTE: SEE (L[CffiiCAL RENO\I.O.TION PLAN 001 ANDFIREAI.ARIJPLANFA201FOR
I
FIXTURES AND .oDOinOI'W. INfORW.TION
--II
""-
'
I
~
J---8-,;-DIVISICl'IOF"THESlATEARCHITECT (l[NilFlCATIOI'ISTN.tP
CN.Of"THESTATEAACHT'ECT .o.PP03F'IL£ NO. 19-H16
I
~ns_ss_
i
'"'~"ll
L~
L "· •• ~~','/," 1(
2
---------------~------------------------ST~KET
'"'-
0,
I
o..
I
Tel (310) 523-3993 STAt.eF'S/SEALS
,..0...(N}CEIUNCACCESSHATCH.SEEEL£CTRICAL
0(N)UGI(ffl:tnJRE.SEEEL£CTRICALPI.H
~~==~~=~ ~-------il_~
I
Uniplan Engineering, Inc. 550 E. Corson Plaza Drive, Ste 116 Corson, CA 90746
,----
"11
--
Glendora, CA 91740
Tel {625) 650-0350
RENOVATION NOTES
~
COUNC AND FllmJRES
I ~~~::::::::::::::::::::::::~:
2100 East Route 65, Ste 101
R(t,jOV(lJGHTflxnJRL
0,
I
=
DRAMA STUDIO
{N) GW8 CElUNG
+8'-7" W.TD-1 {E)
0
----
16 CORWIN THEATER REFLECTED CEILING PLAN
NOC~TO(E) CEJuNG AND nxtuRES
---
----:::::z.,
...,..CT..,,6006
:)N
~-!': -~~-:-i··~/'!' ...;:. ' ' CORWIN THEATER REFLECTED CEILING PLAN
sCAt£:
1/4"-t'-o~T 1
A301 OO.TL
11/07/1016
02 2600-122
~
@-
~
•
DEMOLITION NOTES
~"'"""'"
0RE~o~OVEUGHTFIXTURE.
LOS ANGELES UNIFIED SCHOOL DISTRICT M&O - AlE SERVICES FACILITIES SERVICES DIVISION
RENOVATION NOTES
.3.3.3 S. BEAuDRY AVENUE. 22NO FLOOR
A(N)C£1UNC...CCESSHoO.TCH.StE£t£CTRICAl
'\,/PlANS.
LOS ANGELES. CALIFORNIA
90~17
l£L·(21.3)2l.t-.39S2 0(1'1)UGHTFIXTURE,SEE£LECTRICALPlN
FAJ\:(21.3)21..1-£.868
Corwin Theater Repair & P.O.T. Upgrades NOTE:SEEfl...ECTRICALRENCNATIONPLANEJOI ANDfiREI
KEY PLAN
"
Los Angeles High School
NORTH:)
FIXTURES AND AOOHIONAI. INFORMATION
4600 We•t ~ 7 mpic BO
Lot""'l•lu,CA90019
@--
BOA Government Services 370 Crenshaw Blvd, Ste. E104 Torrance, CA 90503 Tel (310) 783-5129
KEY PLAN AND NOTES
Century Structural Engineering 24719 Narbonne Ave. Lomita, CA 90717 Tel (310) 325-0883
PBS Engineers, Inc. 2100 East Route 56, Ste 101 Glendora, CA 91740 Tel (525) 650-0350
Uniplan Engineering, Inc. 550 E. Corson Plaza Drive, Ste 116 Corson, CA 90746 Tel (310) 523-3993
======z
=
>======
.................
STORAGE
___ .................
...................
NO CfiANGE TO (E) CEIUNG AND FIXTURES
...................
~~~c:.~~:~.ous :~~c~~~~--t.......................
1
_
--- .......... --
___ ........ --- .........................
. . ...... __
r-=--=-1~ DOltlf"l:AOONSfAAIP l:fV. Of THE SI~TE ARCH"IECT
APPOJ-
CONTROL
I'll£ NO. 19-H16
c~~~~r ~~rJ~~s
N:._rt.S_SS_
=
~ NO CI"WICE TO (E) CEIUNCANOflXTURES
,.-f~~~~
""'-----~
I I I I 1; I I I I I I I I 1 I 11
I'IOCIWICETO(E)
CEIUNC AND FIXTURES
U.N.O.
~ NO CHNiCE
ro
CORWIN THEATER REFLECTED CEILING PLANS
(E)
CEILING AND fiXTURES
A302 CORWIN THEATER REFLECTED CEIUNG PLAN
SCALE: 1/... -~,·-o·
I 1
11/07/2016
02 2600-123
..;.., 130'-0" (E) T,O. CONC. WAll.
"f"
I
I
-~ Q'"FJ).C.$'
LOS ANGELES UNIFIED SCHOOL DISTRICT
(E} CONCRETE WAU. TO REWlN, T'fP.
M&O ·_ /VE SERVICES FACILITIES SERVICES DIVISION ~33
S. BEAUDRY AVENUE. 2ZND FLOOR
LOS ANGELES. CALIFORNIA 90017
TEL·(21:5J2'-1-:S9S2 Fu:(213)21.1-4868 .J..,119'--Q"
~E) ROOF TO WALL
Corwin Theater Repair & P.O.T. Upgrades
"
Los Angeles High School
..;.., 112'-0"
'f \~:;.a:
(E) WEATHERPROOF FIRE
4600 Wul Olymp;c 80<..Ii•crd
AI..ARMt;QRN,REINSTA.L.l...EO .O.T (E) LOCATION, SEE FA201
Lo•M,..eleo,CA90019
..;.., 107'-6" \.f"(E)EAV£
BOA Government Services
UNE OF' (E) cr.cu W.OU1NFORECROU~~
370 Crenshaw Blvd, Ste. E104
Torrance, CA 90503 Tel (310) 783-5129
..;.., 100'-6"
\:('.(E) T.O. CONC. W.OU
Century Structural Engineering
.J..,97'-6"
"i""(E/HALL
24719 Narbonne Ave. Lomita, CA 90717
Tel (310) 325-0883
PBS Engineers, Inc .
.J..,91'-2" \:('(E) OIWM LEVEL
2100 East Route 55, Ste 101 Glendora, CA 91740
Tel {625} 650-0350
Uniplan Engineering, Inc.
I
CORWIN THEATER· SOUTH ELEVATION
SCIILE: J/HI'•l'-o'
LIN(
I 211
550 E. Corson Plaza Drive, Ste 116 Corson, CA 90746
Tel (310) 523-3993
OF {E) BUILDING
""'"' ;:r;.~~ CONC.
119'-0'
(E) ROOF TO
WAlL
w.ou
~ (~
$
IIDI,.,SICJ-1
= II $
,,·-o·
~~
$
~~r~~
$
a=-
THE
STATE . .RCHITECT IOOinFICATX)N ST...w>
CW.OI'IHESTME~HITECT
I
RC£ ;;;:"';,_,,
l l . _ F1.S_
ss____
"
(E) CONC. WALL
;~·;.~~ CONC. \ _ (0 " "HORN, " " ' " 'REINSTAU£0 "" "" A1..ARN ,a.T(E)LOCATION,SEEFA201
WALL
$
~:;-::u
$
~~-~~L£VEL
$
CORWIN THEATER EXTERIOR ELEVATIONS
-.o:f""-'6006
WEEPSCREEO,TY?.
A401 CORWIN TliEATER- WEST ELEVATION
SCA.L..E: .3/16·~,·-o·
l 1
11/07/2016
02 2600-124
LOS ANGELES UNIFIED SCHOOL DISTRICT M&O - AlE SERVICES FACILITIES SERVICES DIVISION 333 S. BEAUDRY AVENUE. ZZND FLOOR LOS ANGELES. CALIFORNIA 90017
lEL·(213)2l.l·3952 FAI\:(213)241·£.868 PROJECTTITLEANOSCHOOLLOCATION
Corwin Theater Repair & P.O.T. Upgrades m
Los Angeles High School 4&:10 Wut Olymplc B""IY<1rd
lo'An9¢lu, 0.90019
BOA Government Services 370 Crenshaw Blva, Ste. E104
Torrance, CA 90503 Tel (310) 783-5129
Century Structural Engineering 24719 Narbonne Ave. Lomita. CA 90717
Tel (310) 325-0883
PBS Engineers, Inc. 2100 East Route 66, Ste 101 Glendora, CA 91740
Tel (625) 650-0350
Uniplan Engineering, Inc. 550 E. Corson Plaza Drive, Ste 116 Corson, CA 90746 Tel (310} 523-3993
NOT USED
16
I"
r
.J...t30'-o" -..,-(E)T.O.CONC.WALI.
;g·~F
TO WAll $ IDDinflCATlOH STAIM'
011/,Cf'THESTATE~HITU:T
APPOJf'IL( NO. 19-H16
"
~~-;~
'I'
~~rEA~E
$
/lt._FLS_ss_ 0.,1(__ _ __
(() Cr.IU WALL
~:;-~
$ $
~~;-~~lf'J(L
$
~~-;~· CONC.
WAil
CORWIN THEATER EXTERIOR ELEVATIONS
--6006
A402 CORWIN THEATER- NORTH ELEVATION
SCALE: Jf\6'-t'-0'
I
1
11/07/201e
02 2600-125
.z
~~U..S5 ~06.2016
,...,.,..,,gWolfloti'wj•11fl
(N) QUAARY TILE
~
~
(N)OUARRYTILE OVERSPECifiEO
~~~~~lA
WATERPROOF' SYSTEIA ...., (E) ROOF TO WALL
~107'-6"
~107'-S"
'f'(E)EAVE
'f'-(EfEi.VE
.. .,.«
LOS ANGELES UNIFIED SCHOOL DISTRICT
J.-112'-o"
;._ 111'-0" ~OOf-TOWALL
M&O- AlE SERVICES FACILITIES SERVICES DIVISION 333 S. BEAUDRY AVENUE. llNO FLOOR LOS ANGELES. CAliFORNIA 90017
1.flJXIIAHil!llMG~·(Nct!ilw:.ti)-Oinla~loericatedhnmi'I~M$ -·-fi"DD«teds!OI!I,riloi4th1o~•Jtud.U...,1hm111-1/411.lollo)leqs,ctlodledtoloar
TEt.:{ll3)li.I-395Z FAI!.:{ZI3)ll.l-1.8b8
~~oil!IICII.....-.Hii.OC11141.
lSTm.Sli.OS-Cbcmd~lctritGI«c:i#.
Corwin Theater Repair & P.O.T. Upgrades
J.SATn.oHIILWolltpor!_.y
~
4CrP9..1MBOIIlfl'-5/8"0..1h.o:k,411...,._ott......,tolloolltuilo..,..&....,..ceinjhd<-.ilh1il.b..g. T)PeSm.!ICieoo~!II.O.C.I»Ctt<
"'""loted...-ycllds\ogg
~g7'-6"
;._ 97'-6"
MATIOIIAt.CYI'SliiC0-5/6itttllci
"(E) HALl.
'f'-(E)HAU..
Los Angeles High School
. ;.J '...,...,J
4600 We•! Otyrnp;c BOtJI•<>r'd Lo~ M~•~•.
5.00TT.oKAifCC!lf'OJND-V..~,aryorpr«nl>edi>inl~nd,
l>tods; ~ t~. 2 "- .000. embedded"' mt lo,.- or com~
,.,ts.
At"' allemole, nomiool 3/Ji. .klioll <11d j:>llt arn~d ""'1 be orn•lted"""' ~ll*-"" bo
(E) CONC. fOUNDATION
io.lhi<:kg)!l,..,...,..,.ploll
rMI..-eed. P~
to,.
••til
'8anujtii
(E)CONC.FOIJNOATION
~91'-2"
~91'-2"
"P'Wug~
-_,(E) DRAMA
CA 90019
BOA Government Services 370 Crenshaw Blvd, Ste. [104 Torrance, CA 90503 Tel (310) 783-5129
STUDIO LEVEL
Century Structural Engineering
U.L DESIGN NO. U465- 1 HR
""'' "" 1 5
I
WALL SECTION
SCAlE: t/4" .. 1'-o"
WALL SECTION AT EXT. DOOR
SCALE: 1/4".. 1'-o"l
4
24719 Narbonne Ave. Lomita, CA 90717 Tel (310) 325-0883
T
7
T $''~'"'·_,. (E)T.O.CONC.
~1JO'-O"
"f"~k_Z·O. CONC.
•'"-
I
7
T
PBS Engineers, Inc. 2100 East Route 66, Ste 101 Glendora, CA 91740 Tel (625) 650-0350
Uniplan Engineering, Inc. 550 E. Corson Plaza Drive, Ste 1 1 6
~Do·-o·
"i"(Efl.o--:-PARAPET
Corson, CA 907 46 Tel (310) 523-3993
~
{N) OIJAARY nLE OVER SPECifiED
\ll,t,TEflPROQF'sYSTEJ,I
;._ 119'-o"
'"f' (E)
ROO( TO WALL
;._ 117'-0"
'f'(Ef8.o. WAll ~115'-0"
(N)OUARRYTILE OVERSP£CifiED
WATERPROOF
~115'-0"
'-r(E) r.o. WAl-L
SYSTEJ.j
~112·~o·
~112'-o·
~OOF'TO
"f"~uoorro
~~~WALl. ~107'-6"
~107'-S"
'f'{t)EAVE
~VE
[)r{.
/OPEN
WAI.l..SEEI/S-6~
~100'-s·
-:
r.. 100'-6"
"f"~~~:owAl-L
"f"~k_i-0. CONC. ~g]·-~·
~101'-11"
'r\EfT:o.
ffi_/JI'!i•----~~-==----------,.
STEELOECI<
'eVII I I I
"P'(E)HALL
.... ·,;
g
~91'-2"
~91'-2"
"f"~~~L
M~R.
v..oM~R.R
I I
""~~~EVE!.
M:_ftS_ss_
(E)10" CONC. W.OU
AITI\CHEDTO{E)cotiC.
-:.,
APPOJ-
STAGECIW'TBE'I'ON7
(N)STt.C~NElHD.DER
IOENnfiCATIOHSTAioiP Of Tl£ STATE ARCttltCT fiLE NO. 1g-Hl6
TO
$\\Lg~~:,~~
I
.
!Ill
CORWIN THEATER WALL SECTIONS AND DETAILS
!
I[ 1'10il.£'10Cl..ij()OG
A501 WALL SECTION
"'""'" v•--•·-o·
I 3
I
WALL SECTION
sCAt..£:
1/4·-~·~o·
WALL SECTION
SCALE: 1/4-.. t·-a·
I 1
11/07/2011!i
02 2600-126
LOS ANGELES UNIFIED SCHOOL DISTRICT M&O- AlE SERVICES FACILITIES SERVICES DIVISION :5:5:5 S. BEAUDRY AVENVE. 22NO FI..OOR I..OS ANGEI..ES. CAI..IFORNIA 90017 lEL(21::S)241·39S2 F~11· (213) 2!.1-!.868
D·SOUTH
l!Oill' 1. ALL
FIXTURES, ACCESSORIES, AND FINISHES AT UNISEX RESTROOM 116 ARE NEW. 2. SEE DETAIL >t/A702 FOR ACCESSORY MOUNTING HEIGHTS,
J.
SEE DETAIL 1/A702 FOR ACCESSIBLE WATER CLOS£T ~OUNTINC HEIGHTS.
Corwin Theater Repair & P.O.T. Upgrades o<
ACCESSIBLE UNISEX RESTROOM 116
Los Angeles High School ~00 Wnl.
Olympi<: 901Jiv
BOA Government Services 370 Crenshaw Blvd, Ste. (104 Torrance, CA 90503 Tel (310) 783-5129
Century Structural Engineering 24719 Narbonne Ave. Lomita, CA 90717
Tel (310) 325-0883
PBS Engineers, Inc.
0-SOUTH
=·
2100 East Route 66, Ste 101 Glendora, CA 91740
l.All.FIXTURES,,O,CCESSDRIES,ANOflNISHESATUE.N"SRESTROOUII'ilAR(NE"II. SEE F"IXTURE AND ACCESSORY SCHEDULE 7/N:Xl2 FOO ElACl
UNISEX RESTROOM 115
SCALE:
![
SCRIBE TO WALL (N}CABIN£T
fiB Sr.AS 0 12" O.C TOS.O..CKINCPlATE
1/~"-1'-0"
Tel (625) 650-0350
MEN'S RESTROOM 119
5!11DWAII
Uniplan Engineering, Inc. Corson, CA 90746
Tel (310) 523-3993
r-------.------~~w~F
!
'l
~
PATCH W.O.U. AIID PAINT
iii'~
(~
..; TYP.Of(J)
D·SOUTH
A·'NEST
@r.o,e•NfiAI M!J
3
SCALE: 1/.$'•1'-o'
ROIOVE WAll fiNISH .0.S R[Q'D TO INST.AJ..l BACKING PLAT£.
I
550 E. Corson Plaza Drive, Ste 1 16
7
G§'J"'
~
.:-\A ~
B· NORTH
TO WITCH (E)ADJ.OCENTSURI".o.cE.TTP.
IDENni1CAllOHSTAMP Dri.OF"fi£STATEAACHTECT
WOMEN'S DRESSING ROOM 120
ru:~AU.l1l" .::·: . ;._ (N)CABINET :~::: ....:~·· ~ :,
of
• ;·:,. _'• . .
SCALE: 1/4"•1'-Q"
I
2
~.~~rr~-~~RK
APPOJFIL£ NO. 19-H16
N:._FlS_SS_
OVER J' -6" HIGH • SII.I?SON Jfe" TITEN 110 0 12" D.C. W/ 2.7!!1" ... IN. (MB(Oioi(NT IN 4" i.jiN. CONC SLAB,CALV.FINISH,ICC-ESRI271J
C!)cAANQ•TCQNC WAll
"l
6i\ (~
110~2· fV,T HEAD WOOD SCREWS 0 16" D.C
/
INTERIOR ELEVATIONS AND DETAILS
m>,
Of (J)
VCT D/ CONC. SLA£1,
P~TCH
NIDREPAIRASREQ'D
~-\.UD
...
112•2" FV.T HEAD WOOD SCREWS 0 16" OC
~
D·SOUTH
.......:rt"""'6006
A601 CABINET ATTACHMENT DETAILS
=
H/''•!'--0'
I 9
I
MEN'S DRESSING ROOM 118
SCAI..£:1/4"•1'-0"11
11/07/2016
02 2600-127
tt.t..CAR f'UU ~DRTlSE SWINGCI.EARHINCES,
(E) WINDOW---
r '''""
TJ75, (J) PER DOOR
II
(E}WAU-MOUNTED
{f
{f
{f
{f
{f
{f
{f
{f
~
D
-
D
~
i:2a~~~-MOIJNTEO
F=-=-
If\! \
.z
'"""""'"' ~~- 's~~-1/2"
~OfE\).d'.(>
LOS ANGELES UNIFIED SCHOOL DISTRICT
1/4"THICKCA.LV
STLPU.TET&B
M&O -AlE SERVICES FACILITIES SERVICES DIVISION
L,___ l"xJ"• 0.120"
1-
GALV.STEELTUBE
:S:S:S S. BEAUDRY AVENUE. Z2NO FLOOR LOS ANGELES. CAliFORNIA 90017 TE1..· (ZI3) Z41-:S9S2 FAJI·(ZI:S)Z£.1-4868
\ I
IJ=----
~ ;,
~
\ ~L-(E)PTO.CYP.OO.WAU. A-WEST
ADMINISTRATION BLDG.- DOOR JAMB =u. ,._,._,·112
Corwin Theater Repair & P.O.T. Upgrades
I (E) DOOR
~--
t-
41:;;.. ...>•_ "' : ' . .d
POSTS BELOW OBINET. TYP. OF (~)
(E)RUBBER~EATWALL
.
Los Angeles High School
J-~~(2)SU.. PSONJja"nTENHOW/2.75"
~
ADMINISTRATION BUILDING -WAITING ROOM 23
4600 We•! CMympic Boul•crd l
MIN. EMBEO!.IENT IN 4" IIIN, CONC Sl.AB,GALV.FlNISH,ICC-ESRI271J
\_(N)NON-STRl.ICTUR.Al.
A· SECTlON DETAIL
"""lelu, CA 90019
BOA Government Services 370 Crenshaw Blvd, Ste. E1 04 Tarrance, CA 90503 Tel {310) 783-5129
seAL£: 1/2"·1·-o·ls 1"•3"•0.120" GALV.STEUTUBE
Century Structural Engineering
J/16"!\_
-~"1v '"'
24719 Narbonne Ave. Lomita, CA 90717 Tel (310) 325-0883
1/4"THICKAJ6
CALV.STEElPlATE W/ B£VELED EDCES
PBS Engineers, Inc.
s
!
~(Qw~ P-Wt S.O.Ct
J/•" PLYWOOD Wf
""'""""'"""""
PLAsnC LANIN.to.TE AU EXPOSED SURFACES
~::::· __,..
REO'O CLEAR KNE£ SPACE. 27" KOGHT • 17" Q[FTH
REO'OCI..EN'IKNEESP.O.CE, 27"HEIGHTx11"0EPTH
~T
WAlliNG
ROOW 23 ONLT)~
(E)VCTFLOO~
(E)VCTf'I..OORtNC"""'\.
HOO
wooo
ATTACH2..Jl"OCONC.SI.AB W/ HILTI '118-TZ' J2" O.C.
l
1'-7"±
{f-5" NIN. DEPTH)
...
l \_'~Of(N}
CABINET BEYOND
'l
I I I I I
(lot~.
2-3/4"EMBEDNENT
2-;l/4" OlllEDt.IOIT
Uniplan Engineering 1 Inc. 550 E. Corson Plaza Drive, Ste 116 Corson, CA 90746 Tel (310) 523-3993
>c.,LDMtcJi,"
"l '
~'>-'
jrr
ACC£SSIBL.£CAiliNET
~
~
•
0
-r
:,. ,
!:!
I
j
~
''\~~~ ~Or Cloo\.\~
~
2 PER c:.o.BIHET). lf/
(WIN. 2 PER CABINET), W/
,-.,·.o·l 3
STAUPS/SEALS
,,,,.,._., ....oc ,woorvo '=../''/ 1-7"± ~~AC~n2~~~z~~J~2S· ~ 'I (1'-5" MIN. DEPTH)
SCREWS 0 16"
'"""'
COUmERTQP A!
~:=.::T~
rur
POST DETAIL AT WALL CABINET '\._____ Cl..£AR KNEE SPACE
(N) P-LW
(E) HEIGHT AND DEPTH
f12x2"
~~
I
tOUNTEfiTOP
2100 Ecst Route 66, Ste 101 Glendora, CA 91740 Tel (625) 650-0350
CIB~ET
B ·PLAN DETAIL
AXED PNia., W.lCH (£)WOOD flNISii------.......
OASHE:D LINE DENOTES
SCRE'WS016'0.C.-
SE:EOETAIL'A'FORATT~I.!ENTTO
(E) CONC. S!.AEI NIO lo!Df
A-EAST OIVlSIONG"THESTATEAROiiTECT
"""'' ,.• ,._,·1111
ACCESSIBLE CABINET AT WALL
ACCESSIBLE CABINET
..s f
I
ADMIN. BLDG.- WAITING ROOM 23
S£EF~01
(N) STROBE ON OPPOSITE W-"1...1.\
/J<:
I "-
/II~
I/
U
~
·-~·-''" ..'.' . . -.,,_.
'
"""". v,·.,·-o·l
5
I
"""'''"••'-<>Jjl
ADMINISTRATION BUILDING- LOBBY 1
llW.~:w~~ .af'POJFlt.£ NO. 19-H16
(N)STROOE.SEE
/
FOR
N.!~fl.S~SS~
--,
\
~(N)PTO.CTP.BO
(II)PTO.CYP.BD.~
~
II
~ /
. ·:.-:.:::. ·:. :·.:.·~--~·:· :.:•
.; _;·-~:·. ·<: ~<: ~-··· ;~ ~~~C~f~STEIJ -:--..... ·...
R\JBBERBASE.TYP.""""\
1'\
::_· ~·:-
~~""
I
I
INTERIOR ELEVATIONS AND DETAILS
··.:.·:: :<.·:;·~-.::·.-: :. .: ;__ W-"1...1. loiOUNTED twoiOfWl, R~t.IOVE AND REINST-"U.AS
(
·.
8
SHEETFA201l
II
. ·:·.· ·:: ::·>.:.:.··;:·:·:. ~>-
"""'-'• ,._,._,. 1
~~D~~EJCT£RIOA
···....:·
·;:>·">··:.) ·.·
~6006
(E) COt+CR£1"£ STDI W"'-1. TO REIIWN
HALL 114
"""' v•·-,·-o·l
4 I VESTIBULE 122
SC\1.£:
1/4"a1'-0~ 1..
I
A602 1(,
11/07/2016
02 2600-128
======-
~
l).L!XK(Sf'Kt().IJ):
TILE ROOf FINISH CMR 'l.JITICf!ETE' S'l'SlEW, S£E 2/A701
J) l!ll.IWI1LI>JL6 '
I..EVERIWIDtEEACHSID£
(E} METALBEAI.I0fC,,. {E) STL
K-8XW~.el'KE£0C'(I'IC.
SCHlAGEL-9070-05N,OREQUAI. PANIC &RON PUSH SID£ CORBIN RUSSW1N E04200, OR [QU&
4)MEUitti.GES.: E!ARRELHING[S-7"
..
2)1l!Kl!!....Q..Q(SPEC.N0.51)· l8Q-OCGREE,IE.A\'£DACTIOO LC.N. .W~1;NOOTONPR7~0REOIJAL
m 4.
a
LOS ANGELES UNIFIED SCHOOL DISTRICT M&O ·AlE SERVICES FACILITIES SERVICES DIVISION
EHilR£ASSOOll.YTOe£HOI[If'I'[[)GII.YANIZEDIJ1El
355 S. BEAUDRY AVENUE. ZZND FLOOR
C.SEESf'EOFlCA1lONSECOON08-7100DOOil~FOIISP£C.NO.IlNI051.
LOS ANGELES. CALIFORNIA 90017 TEL(ZI5)Zi.I-59SZ FA.It(ZI5)ll.i-l.868
····~
~V.SECURirYSTEEJ..PlATEIO"
GI.TEOOX
•WIDTHa-GAITFRAI.IE•16GA.
~:,,~:::
="..t•,~::"'<>'h":' II IIIII I·
NOTE: SEE STRUCTUIW.. PI..IINS "'-t'IO DETAIL 7/S-'!J FOR STRUCTIJRALr.IEWBERSIZESANDATTAD1M£JlTOCT.t.ILS,TYP.
BAARELHINGES,WELOTO
sc.au:J".. l'-0"
1------------------~ I..EVERI-WIOLI&:WCRRSELOCK (E)STLPOST~ L
CEILING AT CONC. WALL
SCALE:J"•I'-0"
Los Angeles"High School -4600 Weot Olympic Boulvor
CfiPUI.iS!DE,P,INICHAAOII'AR£ AT PliSH SIDE Of CAT[, S([
---~---='1'7
Corwin Theater Repair & P.O.T. Upgrades
Lo•An9'1U.CA!Xl019
'<>-rr Hllli1NARr. ------1f
BOA Government Services
10"HIGHxGATEW!Oll1x16
370 Crenshaw Blvd, Ste. E104 Torronce, CA 90503 Tel (310) 783-5129
CA.STLKICKPLATE(ONEA SIOE),'IrllilEOTOGATEf11AME
(N) nNISHEO SURfACE
i
AT"'""'LE"'TE
r
-;::tj~&,
'II~ Century Structural Engineering 24719 Narbonne Ave. Lomita, CA 90717 Tel (310) 325-0883
PBS Engineers, Inc.
l
l
,._,·~.
lg:~~-~2.31
OPENING FRAMING
_j
~r-"
I 19
CEILING OPENING FRAMING
600S1:6ti~
2100 Eost Route 66, Ste 101 Glendora, CA 91740 Tel (625) 650-0350
A· TYP. CONNECTION
~
~ SOLE: v~·=~·-o·
Uniplan Engineering, Inc. 550 E. Corson Plaza Drive, Ste 116 Corson, CA 90746 Tel (310) 523-3993
ACCESSIBLE GATE
JEA. SIDE
~~~~::.:_o~~
CERA.WICTil£0/
~{8~.R~RSI~B
SOlEDIA.EDDOORDOORf"R,_MEBEYOND
~LV~E~~~~DC~ING
~
"~~Sr1Hr~~\
EA. SIDE AN02"
E"A.ENol/B
g?R~,_T ~c~E
~
,_PP!WVEDEOUAL
(E)VCTF"L.OCRNU_ P,o,TC1i..WOREP-'!R
..sREo'D
16GA 3-5/8"
~~~OSTYP.
{N)rnJNSEl
Tlt.EfLOOR1NC
!6--
~
Til£ ROOf FINISH OVER 'LATICRETE' STSTEiol. SEE 2/,701
I
'!>/8" PTD. GWB
DEHflflCAOOIIST~P
DOOR OPENING FRAMING
INT. DOOR THRESHOLD
CIV.OF"THESI"IEAAOITECT APPOJFil£ NO. 19-H16
N:._ n.s_ ss____
"'·'"-----~
~~ !~ ~~
FR.<\MEANCHORS,TYP.
SEEDET.10/A703 AND SPEOflCAT10N SCCTIQNOl!-1113, HOU.OW MET"'- DOORS ANOFlW.IES
DETAILS
illR~(
~~ ~~~~~~~nY:-
srcTION0.!!-1113.
~O!fl~g"'-
DOORS
A701 DOOR ANCHORAGE
SCALE: 1/2",.1'--Q"
117
EXT. DOOR THRESHOLD
11/07/2016
02 2600-129
•
(N) WAAtliNG STRIPING OF ct.EARlYCONTRASTINGCOt..OR
~
'..,
~~~
:!
TUBE
•
~(l)Slt.IPSONJ/B"TITEN
BACKCf!OUND COLO~' BLUE EQUAl.. TO COLOR NO
D-BASEPLAN SCALE• J"-1'-0"
~EXISTING
SICN SH.'U BE INSTA.LLID ON THE FENCE OR WAU. AQ.JACENT TO THE LATCH SlOE Of rHE OOOR. SICN SHALL COWF't.Y '111TH
~ ~-[D _____ il~"
•
;,.g
INTERIOR STAIR STRIPING
I
I I
I
I
I
I
L
JO"
4
~~~R
AT
A -
~
ELEVATION
wooo sruos.
~
EXT£NDI.DIGTH
~::~~~OR
P!lOJECTS24"
Ls"L
]i:
INCRE.\5£
1. ~~~~R~KING PLATE FOR THE FOLLOWING ACCESSORIES liND FIXTURES•
BWCHES SHALl BE ...rfiXEO TO TH[ WALL OR n..OOR. AL.LOW.lBLE STRESSES SHA.l.L NOT BE EXCEEDED FOR WATERIALS USEOWHEN A VERTICAL OR HORIZONTAL FORCE Of 250 POUNDS IS ,tJ>f>UEO AT NO' POINT ON THE SEAT, FASTENER, t.IOUNTING Drne[. OR SUf>PORTING STRUCTURE.
'/W.rrL
SO.CKINCF\..IITE
(2)f10x2" SCREVf.if.A.
""''
Century Structural Engineering 24719 Narbonne Ave. Lomita, CA 90717
UTL STUDS PER PLAN
-IJI.VATORY
~
=~~~t~=£RS
WALL TILE W11[RE OCCURS
2100 East Route 66, Ste 101 Glendora, CA 91740 Tel (625) 650-0350
I!L--'.....>---1-1/2" [M.., 12 Cot.. Plf'E
Uniplan Engineering, Inc.
GIWle.o.RWITI1FlANCE.SEE N!KNE.FORTYP.NOTES
550 E. Corson Plo2o Drive, Ste 116 Carson, CA 907 46
SNAP-FlANGE COVER
Tel {310) 523-3993
MOUNTING FLANGE
/
A-.
2.S£E w..NUFACTUREfiiNFORUATION FOR REO"O -'TlACHUENT LOCAilONS
PBS Engineers, Inc.
STEELIW:i
t:
I.PROVlDEBACKINGPI.ATEFORTHE FOLLOWING FIXTURES AND -'CCESSORIES
-CRAB BARS
-PAPER TOW£!. DISPENSERS
2. WHERE INSTw.ED IN WET LOCA.nONS, THE SURFoiCE OF THE SEAT SH.ll..L BE SUP RESISTNtT mil SHAU. NOT ACCUUULATE WATER.
Tel (310) 783-5129
Tel (310) 325-0883 t.!IN.(4)SCREWS ...TU..CH STUD. fiOSUS-'Tt.!ETAI..
SCR£WS
OBJECT
OR lo!ORE,
370 Crenshaw Blvd, Ste. E104 Torrance, CA 90503
3.GIWlBARSAAETOBEIIADEOFST.>.iNL£SSSTEEL'111TH,O,.PEEI"l"EOSURfACE FJ.ID SI>W' f\ANGE COVERS
I.'I
"""'
51"--IPS/SEA.LS
(3)f14•2-1/2"STAlNlESSSTEEl SHEET I.IITAI.. SCREWS PER fl...o\NCE
-~~o":.c..,._,~').'
NET~STUDSPERPI.AN
-SURFACEI.IOI.JNTEOTOIL£TPAP£RDISPENS£RS
'~
r*
2. SEE w.NUFACTVRER INFORUATION FOR REO"D ATTACHIIENT LOO.TIONS.
'=•" """ 1141
•
No.C2J-«
<1'~~-t~
'""' •-•n····-o·110 I BACKING PLATE AT WALL
BACKING FOR R.R. ACCESSORIES
SCALE'
1-t/2"~1'-o"
I 6
I GRAB BAR
SCALE' J"•t'-0"1
2
("
0~ C.._\.\~ 0
5'-D" NIN. CUt
~"""~ -'CCESSIB
o•
2. GIWI BARS ARE TO RESIST 250 POUNOS OF OOWNWARD FORCE Al>ID TORSION.
I.'I
~~riNG
I I
ACCESSIBLE BENCH
.
Los Angeles High School
BOA Government Services
1. THE DIAMETER OR WIDTH OF rHE GRIPPING SURFACE IS REQUIRED TO BE 1-1/2 INCHES 0.0., OR THE SI-W'E IS TO PROVIDE AN EOUIV"LENT GRIPPING SURF,o,.CE. IF GRAB BARS 1\RE WOUNTED ,o,J),JACENT TO-' WAlL THE SP.O.CE BETWEEN THE: WALl. AND THE GIWI BAAS IS TO BE 1-1/2 INCHES.
J6"x4B"
1.
SCALE. 1/2"•1'-0"1
=-=·
li.8"w..x.
(,1' WIN.
STUDS AND 110 WOOD
L _ _ _ _ _ J__j
SCAI...E:l/2"•1'-0"
RESTROOM ACCESSORY MOUNTING HEIGHTS
1:1
~~~OLR :;.:~s ,+.N0/00
If WALL OR
I
,·.,·-ol8 I
Corwin Theater Repair & P.O.T. Upgrades
GA. 0 16' D.C .
I
SPACE7 I
.;
'""'
.'cl.""l;:'"'
PROVIOEBACKINCPIJI.f((S)FORATTACHEWENTWHEAEREOUIRED 8Y MANUFACTURER. SEE DETAIL 10/A702 FDA 8ACKINC PIJI.TE.
WAU. STU0S PER PlAN NET~ STUDS WIN. 4-" • 20
• 0
I
JO"x4B'
eu<. F"LOOR I 4fl" t.IIJ'I.
'""'' •-'12'·•·-o· 1121
"~
1
L
>,
~~
l
~
PROVIOEHOf!IZONTA1..6"xl-l/2' xNIN.I2CA.I.iETAI..Tf!ACK,BENO LEGSUPTOffiovtRF"CEOF
B ·ELEVATION SCAL£: 1/2"•1'-0"
A -PLAN
fl.OOf!UNE
201J SECTION 118-70J.7.2.1.
90017
TEL(21:5)21.1·:5952 Fn:(2L5)2l.l-l.868
We•t Olympic Bou"'qrd Loa.....-.get..,CI.90019
'-"\._ocr.c
~ ~
CBC
Q Moe
LOS ANGELES. CALIFORNIA
"'1jo~S
~600
"'0'"-''
>JI'
~:5:5 S. BEAUDRY AVENUE. 22ND FLOOR
2.
ISA SIGN
WALL
M&O - AJE SERVICES FACILITIES SERVICES DIVISION
·~ ~
15090 Prn
l.
EWBEOI.IENTIN4"1otiN.
CONC. ~- ICC-ESRf271J
oo-
ftDERALSfANOAAD59~.
HD W/ 2.7'5" MtN.
C-BASE SCALE J"-1'-0"
g
~"'""'
LOS ANGELES UNIFIED SCHOOL DISTRICT
~
~
"'""' I.
~
~ ! ~! ~ ~~ LJ--u--w-Er
~,1;
RINGED 0 EACH CORNER, TYP
10C.O.UGEPTD.srEEL
sn.
BWE BACKGROUND
~
n [f.Sl
AT CONCRETE SLA8; RUBBER S!f>..IR TREADS AND RISEf!S W/ 'tEXTURED STRIPE OF CONTRASTINGCOLOR. TilE STA:IPEStw.LEXTENDTHEf\AJ.. WIOTHOFTH(STEP.
REFLECTORIZEOOARK
CtwN lmK FENCE HOG
•-•l•·o.o.m.ru"·'""~· fl..ANGE, WELD TO
_
~~
.oJ>PROAC!1ANDLOWEATREAO, INCLUDINCINTERMEDl.o.R'!'l.ANDINC
1/4"RADIUS
;,~~r ± ·~""'""""' . . . . . ,. SIGN
K
tf
PER CBC SECTION 118-504.4.1 • .O.T INTERIOR STAIRS: UPPE~
5'"""'"~"EU>
r
=· I I I
_ _ _j A·PtAN
CRE:A.TERTHM'5LBS.
2.~~DEPTH·SH.o\U.BE6-1/21NCHESDEEP
3.1NSULATESUPf>LY,o,NOORAINPIP[STO PREVENT CONT,o,.CT. NO SHARP OR ...aAASM: SURfA.CESUNDERtAVATORIES.
E ~
•
'
;j ~
1.
<~-2"LONG
~
12" I.IAX.
~
Q
I
~
2
GR.t.fl
BA~ ·Ar ~t"o€:
1
WALL
MIN.36" STAINLESS
STEEL
.~o ~:4·
<:>.;t~;
,
'-
..........
L __
__
1'-\---"-~--.f~~
c:;:::::=~=::!t:5r-:t-'4
~~a·
N"POJM;_FI..S_SS_
""-~~tl=~~~~~ §
~
g
'~r--~~rk~T
~
Tat..ET
FINISIIEO FLOOR
~~~-L~--~-+
.....
K
DETAILS
B- FRONT ELEVATION
!Jif'~H
H"CL.R. 0 EXT.
¢::J
I
["""""'"'
COUNTERDE:f>THUPT020"
I
A • E• K •
NOTE,SE.EOET.t/,0,.702.o.N013j,o,.702 fOR TYP. ldOUNTING INFORW.TION
""""""'-'
...CULT EI..EMENTARY(noluted) KINDERGAATEN (not uoed)
~ A •
17"-19' ACE IJ+
~ 19"WIN.~\J+
"""""""'[ A•
T""-'6{)()6
A702
8- Sla: ELEVATION
ACCESSIBLE LAVATORY
OEN'llfi::AllONSTAIIP
IW.Of"THESTA.TENIOifECT
TOilET
CI..E..'.PANCE
LJ
~...S~AA
F!LE NO. 19-Hlll
/1
.......
CL.R 0 INT.,
\I
OIMENSION'l"
a:~~
.>.CCf:SSIBLE l.f>..V,O,.TORY
\
IIIING~6~~0ACH:
~~ •a• w..x. o
.........
I LA~~-~~ l'T''-""-"'"'--.1
27" MIN . .o.GE 12+
COUNTER OEf>TH 20" TO 25"
I
L.,:::::~
...CULT ELEMENTARY (~ot us~~} KINOERCARTEN(noluoed)
AGE 13+ •
/
~
"""'"'·
•••AGE ll+ • ·H" W..X. 0
l~
~
y_;~-~~
3-*"ldAX.-"GE12+
~~ ~-=L..,+oi.---+--1.-~
2"-D" NIN.
~~"~"'",-
!!J.--
UIN
"""""""
J~~~~·.,
J6"LONG--..
tw-~O....o?EAATEO
IIETERlNG f.WCETS SHALL flOWN OPEN FOR 10 5E:CONOS NINII
~~s ~ ~~~~- ~'g~~L a ~o~ECH-'NISU A
I
GfWle.o.R, MIN
1. f,O,.UCET CONTROL AND OPEJU,TING IIECiiiiJ'liSMS SHAU. BE: Of'£AABLE: WfTH ONE H-\NDANOSHALLNOTREOUIREllGt« GRI.SJ>ING, PINCitlNG. OR lWISnNG OF THE WRIST. THEJ.CTIV,O,.TII'fGF"ORC[SHALLBENO
""'-'• V2"·•·-o·l13l
ACC. SINGLE ACCOMODATION R.R.
=cr. •n·.,·-o·l 9
I
ACCESSIBLE WATER CLOSET
SC.OU::J"aJ'-0"11
11/07/2015
02 2600-130
~."''""'"~%
1/4"1Wl1US ~J-m~- W"'-L COV£FHNG PER I"1....IH
POWDER DRIVEN SHOT PINS
110 SCREWS AT 12" O.C. EACHSIOE,TYP.
#10SCRfi'012"0.C
CONT. 16 Ql... UNP\JNCHED TRACK W/ HILTI 0.157" • X-W POWOER OR.IVEN SHOT PINS 0 2•" O.C. (PER ESR-2269)
FliSHSEEtiT.n&.
~
The olk>woblo k>acl>h..- '' leoo. Re!or to A.SCE 7-10 Sec U4.!i lor onot P"' <~~otoooo " owe- otool. Ouo~l.:tlloiHt ror """ ol ol po~or o>ctuot"" tcl!fo>joctin.,..ctoo".
"'.,.ct
rl•
l ~\ ;;'llliEREOCCURS:.._r-l- \t;~~~oz-
AT NIN. 4" CONC. Sl.AS: J/8"' HLTI "KB-T7' WEDGE No!CttOfl W/ 2-J/4" MIN. EloWE£11,100 (ESR-1917). WHERE SLAB IS LESS TliAN 4". USE J/8",THRUBOLTS.
-1-
tiOO
IH~o>g
~ l
Ol , . fonl 10 lutonor onotauat>ono
SEE BELOW. VISUAL SICW..CE NOTESITEI.4S1-7. SEEPI..ANfORACTIJALSICNT"EXT.
tn~og.testall
,.... Of
til
(20)
n.e
IOOCI
WlirTE
tl"""
eono«>o~"
c.~T:::~
~
Fu.:(Z13)241-1.868
t
......
DSIGN"M'E
'P.O.T.-r"
SCALE: J"•1'-0"[12
Ia
SHOT PIN NOTES
Corwin Theater Repair & P.O.T. Upgrades
Los Angeles"High School
E.SlGtllYP( "NOAAROW"
(N)Il!LSWOS
/f-C ''"=· k_· ~ ~El.£11.
/' (E)Illl...SIUJ _/
ROOI.4 tw.tE: J/4" T..U. l.E11UIING, RAISED 1/J2', CE.NTERONTHESIGN
012"0.C. '"'COOC WAt.1.
;if:Q,.
R001.4 NUMBER: 1" TAU.
i;!
l.(TT(RSjNUMERAl.S, RAISED 1/32", C£NTER ON THE SIGN
~
MTL Sl\JD FRAMING DETAILS
"i:z:-
8
~~~
SCALE: 3"•1'-0" 115
~
,.
9"NtN.
C • FRAMING ADJACENT TO CONC. WALL
I~
11
~
{~
ESSIBI..E
EXIT
-TTPE'B'
TY?E'A"
flELDI/ERrFT DIRECTION OF ARROW PRIOR TOFAI!RlCATION
4.
1/4"RAOIUS
==~E,:w~MWITH
~~~
201J ~ 11!l-70J.~t fiNISH...,.,D CONTRAST. Clloro::t...-. and me.r I>OCIOek<]rcuncr with e,\11.,. 10ghtcllarocte.-.onadorl
5.
I" HIGH WHITE TACTILE LETIERS, TYP.
~~~~~RIOR
6
FORI.INIUFACTURE
AREA
STUD GAGE
SSMA
SIZE
DESIGNATION
,.
,. ,.
(in2)
MOMENT OF lNERTIAix
SECTION MODULUS Sx
(in 3)
(in•)
Fy (ksi)
4005162-54
0.443
1.098
0.549
50
16
6005162-54
0.556
2.860
0.953
50
16
600S200-54
0.613
3.319
1.106
50
••
AREA
SIZE
DESIGNATION
2 (in )
4'
116
400T150-54
0.396
MOMENT OF INERTIA Ix 4
I MODULUS SECTION Sx 3
(in )
(in )
1.025
Fy {ksi)
0.489
50
4"
I
16
4001200-54
0.452
1.268
0.604
50
6"
116
600T150-54
0.509
2.611
I
0.843
50
6"
116
600T200-54
0.565
3.145
I
1.01s
50
2.
~Rl~TI~ ~H6~ ~~~ciFGAAPHics
•• 4.!1" MAX • .o.£10\f( FINISHED FLOOR OR GROUND SURFACE, MEASURED FROM H1E B...S(UNE OF THE LOWEST BRAILLE CEtl..S
CONTRIICTED'MTHCAUFORNtACOW~T
SPACEING.COPTHElGHT:SEEEL£\IATION. WHITE ENGRA.VING MATRLAL. t/J2" lliiCK. TY?EFACE:STONESo>.NS(SANSSERif'). MOUNT FLUSH TO WAlL EDGE or SIGN TO 8E LOCATED MIN. OF 4" NolO NAX. OF 12" FROM ~~=~EONSTRlKESID£. HE!GKt:
rK'I~ c10 I ',, ... '
SEE DETAIL 1/~70J FOR TACTILE S1CNAGE NOTES .o.N0 loKlUNTING ct.£,t./W'ICE. 6. AT CV.ZED SUBSTRATE, PRCMD£ "l:!I..ANK" SIGN .._TOPPOSrTErACEOFGI.AZING. 1. PROVIDE Is.\ S'ri.IOOt. WHERE NOTED PER PI.JoN SEE 12/A701 FOR !SA SIGN ~BOL 5.
I>~·
/
!).
f5 7.
SCAlE: 1-1/2"-1·-o·l
Greater lll
6
~
(¢i£ rr
I I I I
~;:~:-::o~·-·.. ·~·· m•"""'
~ k!!
:~~~~.~:~~-gt:;:~2~:r.:· NOTE: L
~;~::~~~!~a·
~
,rr; .~t-11-""
A- BfSlE!l!)A
WAll
S!GNA!'i"
NOTTOSCA\.£
~ -r!f! "
OSI~
\
D ..__I
0,1 8 - RfSJRQQ!,! POOR SWAG[ NOT!OSCAI...E
restraam Miry.
"'""ED
>1.---L _
\llilSElLllR
1.
Lett..-s and rwmrala ore ra!ud I/J2" and are accompanied ~y Grade 2 BraOie. Cheroeters are minimum 5/B" MkJh and a maximum of 2" 111911.
2.
All restroom sq.s lhoU ho...., a brushed dluminum fnish.
J
Si9n on door to b< 1/0" minimum ~~:"~s.;::;: : : : . ta COO"traat .. -.arly
rSUAfAC£ -4,
S••1/A70Jfarad.dotlonolnotn.
'""' ,.,,._,j 9 I
Uniplan Engineering, Inc.
I
550
Drive,
Ste 116
Corson. CA 90746
f-~"'---t,:-,-,-~-,:-,.-,:-:,/:-,:-.,:-,-~-,,:-,~c-,"CI,
0
"'"'
E. Corson Plozo
Tel (310) 523-3993 STAWPS/SEALS
~.;~oArfc~,.~"·
'*
j~~-
,._,._,·1
2
\18-70J.2.1 DEPTH. Rai•ed characters Sha• be 1/32 inch mir>""um above their background. t1B-70) 2.2 CASE. Charactoo .. ohaK ~· uppercase. 11B-70J2.JSTTLE. Choractef11shallbe.ans•enf. Choracteroshallnotbeitallc, ot>lique. •cropt. highly dee<>rotive. ar al ct~er ~nusue 5/8 incn m.nimum and 2 inchu ma•imum based on me heio;M aftheuppero:oscletle \5 percent mox/mum al me /"leoght o1 Ule d"lorrxter. ·7. 118-7032.7 CI1ARACTER SPACING. Ctoaracte< IPQCinQ st\01 be measured between the two clos..t P<>•ntt al adjacent rcosed cnaracter.. uclu<:l.ng ward space<~. Where ehoroclel$ hoveotnercrauoectlono.spacingbetw..niflke •idth mo>omum ot tht 101) at the crau sectoeno. Characters shall be tepardted from rCfate linu af characters •ithon o musoge $11QU be IJ5 percent minimum and 170 perc~\ maximum a! the cnaracterneitsinth•secandul. Dottsha!lt>eraiM4a minomum ot 1/40 inch dllCW: th< D
IF DOOR IS EQUIPPED WITH BOTH A LATCH
6.
0
flN19iEOSURFACE
RESTROOM SIGNAGE
WOMEN"S RR
180 inchn2 inci>H plus 1/8 onch per loot al andgr110ter ...... inq<1istanceaver180inches
r*( ~•. C23"~
~~~~~
1.
~·o~~rcfloN
~PROVIOf!"-O"MIN
ANODOORCOLORSHALLBE 01' CONTRASTING COLORS.
~
6.
;;;·,:,:;::.1
:O!
1/4" THICK TAIN<~GI..E 0/
<
!!;
~
PBS Engineers, inc. 2100 Eost Route 66. Ste 101 Glendora, CA 91740 Tel (625) 550-0350
5/8incn
DIRECTIONAL SIGNAGE
~-~~E--fl.--~G~i
'""'~"'·""· ~~scorg~~~~oR
8;;~
24719 Narbonne Ave. lomita, CA 90717 Tel (310) 325-0883
vic .. onqdootanceover21feet
~;
'; ·m:.f
Century Structural Engineering
HOR!20NTAt. V1EW1NG OISTN'!C£
''"'"'~""'~"WI
SCAI..E: 1/2"•1"-Q"! 10
1/8" MIN. RADIUS AT CORNERS
0
TACTILE SIGNAGE NOTES
ll'"'
14 I ROOM i.D. SIGNAGE
th~ ~PP"'•o••
of lortt.,.. ~~~ ~~~~~~~· 10 percent m•nlmum and 20 percent ma•imum af the heiqht of the
lc•sthonor
'
I METAL Sl\JD PROPERTIES
370 Crenshaw Blvd. Ste. E104 Torrence, CA 90503 Tel (310) 783-5129
5/8 inch plus 1/8 inch per fool al•i
COPY HEIGHT: 1", WrlrTE ENGRAVING loiATERIAL, 1/J2" THICK. TYPEFACE: STONE So\NS(SN1SSERIF} MOUNT FLUSH TO WAI.L £DC[ OF SIGN TO BE LOCATED !.liN. OF 4" ANO !.lAX. OF 12" F"R01.4 THE DOOR FRAUE ON THE STRIKE SIDE HEIGHT SHALL BE 60' FROM CENTER OF SIGN TO fiNISHED FLOOR. SEE DETAIL 1/A702 FOR TACTILE SIGN NOTES A.ND loiOUNTING CLEARANCE
EXIT SIGNAGE
BOA Government Services
20\J CBC \\B-70J.5.B CHARACTER SPACING. Ctlordcler s;l(lcing Shall ~c mca!ured l>etweenthetwaciOses1paintsafadJOCentcharactero.<>cludingwardtpacet Sr><>••"'l Wt•lln ondivid~cl charade"' $hal be 10 percent minimum ond JS percent ma•imum ol Chetween the basefines of teparate liflu of ¢t~oroo.tel'l within a mesta~Je srtaa be 1J5 perunt m.nimum and t70 percent ma•imvm of uoe character heigllt. 201JC8Cfable118-703.5.SCHAAACTERH£1CHT-V.suoiCharocterHu)l!t·
40oncneotaleootnanar equalta70onches
NOTES: 1/8"THICKCLfAANON..Q..NI:EACRYUCPA.NELPA.INTEOSUBSURFACE. COLOR:D.o\RKGRA.TWITHWHITEGR.O.PHICS.o.l'IOTEXT. FAEIRM:AOON METHOD: !NOSED GR.\PHICS ~~INbROONOEO) BRAIU£, GFWlE 2 CONTRACTED 'MfH CAUFORN\ol.
RASTER
METHOO (ROUNDED) BRAIUL. GR/.OE 2
~~·~•;n~B7'~·~~~o~~5~~e s~~~ ~~~~~~Erso.•••~:r:k~ ~~c~ss 1
HEIGHT TO FINISH FLOOR ORGROUNDfROiol BASEI.JNEOFCH.oi.RACTER
•60"1.1AX . .IOOVEFINISHEDFLOOROACROUNDSURrACE,I.4EASUREDFROIA THE B...SEUNE OF THE HIGHEST UNE Or R~ISED CHARACTERS
48" MIN. ABOVE FIN Fl.R. OR GROur'lD SURFACE, MEASURED FROM THE BASEUNE OF THE LOWEST BRAILLE CEU.S.
NOTES: 1. t/4"THICKCI..£ARNON--Cl..AR£....C:RYUCP...,.,Et PAINTEDSUBSURFACE. COLDR:D.o\RKGRA.T
SSMA
7
CAUFORNIIICONTAACTED GAADE2BRII!LL£.TYF'. ~IGN,.!'!.O!!':IllNG HElGtfi•
~E ~Eu~Fo/\-':.;E ~GHfsr ~~NgF s:~~\=T~. FROt.l
16
TRACK! GAGE
4600 West Olympic Saulvord Lo1A.ngeles.CA90019
VISUAL SIGNAGE NOTES
(N)fNSHPER
"'"""\
BEAUDRY AVENUE. 22NO FLOOR
LOS ANGELES. CALIFORNIA 90017 TEL·(21:5)2L.!-39S2
poa.U.cn.........,II>Oirlil.,ltnt.nQfr........,q-.
(Thnoo.-._c..,.n,.oretab< notocloniiiOplono
__LfiNISHfDSURF.OO:E
PARTITION BASE FRAMING
~:5:5 S.
A.~.r~---
"'""'· ~~es_ra.~ ....
8 - BASE 0 ROUGH OPENINGS lESS THAN 8'-0" WIOE
S- PERPENDICULAR WALL FRAMING
M&O ·AlE SERVICES FACILITIES SERVICES DIVISION
~
\..C~tl>< l>e -e~ t<""';,""" 0 maln<1"GO r•>t teopolono;tendencyoltl><.......,.tte-noto~
;! q
LOS ANGELES UNIFIED SCHOOL DISTRICT
6"HICHWHITEI$I.I'1C"IUCRAM
""* ·' ·.....
'
~"'""'$-i
~ER,SITSPEC.10-1400
ThOJ""'YIHI~ood;ntcnS>CfOtao•ppOf!looOol<'"
muotha.oiCCE.d-....R•"""-'Dr"'olypoeioJ.Sho!p'"o""''""' b< ... d,concntecurboa<.,..,_'J'.
~? U:'"'"''"""""'""" c""'"'M·"" I
POWDER QRIYEN SHOT PINS
Sno!..,.omG)'IHiusedlor""-IOOdo.
~•
T.WPERPROOF HARDWARE; FOR CHAIN UNK FENCE HOG RINGED AT EACH CORNER, AT W"'-1. FASTEN W/ fAUPERPROOf ROUNO H00 SCREWS NtO PlASTIC N'ICHORS AT EACH
If=.~ ~'-,~~o·~;J':~"it"':.:"d,!...!'1:.,:-!c~~~:!;:~.t'c:..,;or;:Ot'';~:;.;l<:.
A - TYI'K:AI... INTERIOR
A- CORNER FRAMING
,.._ •
D
~:: :E:E~ING.
~H~OE- _j
~E~NSI.OPE~r
DETAILS
TACTILE SlGNAGE MOUNTING CLEARANCE SCALE:1/2•,.1·-o·
l!QIES·
1. I-WID-ACTIVATED DOOR HARDWARE 5HAU. BE EASY T0"'cAASP WITH ONE HHID ...,.,0 OOES NOT REQUIRE nGHT GRASPING. PINCHING, OR TWISTING OF" THE WRIST
·~-'---' ""'~"'
TOOPERATE. OPE.NINGFORCESHAU.BENONORETHAN5LBS. OPERA.BLE PARTS OF THE HARDWARE SI-W.J.. BE MOUNTED BE:T'oiEEN 34" ANO 42" AFF. 2. HAND-ACTNATEO t.AiCHING mD LOCKING OOOAS SHo1.U. BE OPERo\BLE BT 1.£VER-TTP£ HAR!l'
'""' w·•·-o-_1_ 5
Af'POJ-
Fit.£ NO. 19-H16 At._fi.S_S"S_
bet•""
• THERE Stw.L BE NO PROJECTIONS INTO THE 32" !.!IN Cl.EAA OPENING WIDTH LOWER TlWI J4" Aff. PROJECTIONS tHO THE CLEAR OPENING WIDTH BETWEE.N J4" N'ID 80" WT SHALL NOT EXCEED 4". OOOR CLOSERS ANO DClCIR STOPS SliALLBEPERMiffiD78"!.!1NIMUMABOVEfiNISHFUXIRORGROUNO
ACCESSIBLE DOOR CLEARANCE
ODffiflCI,OOHSTNoiP CIV.IYTHESTAIEAAOITECT
,~~· I~
~1..::.1
OOOR oPEN AT
""" -
"''"
FLOORCLEAAANCESPACE~SICN " ow
I
TACTILE SIGNAGE NOTES
t,SIGNSHAU.8ELDCATEDSO THATACLE.\RFLOORSPACEOF MIN. 18"x1B", CENT£AEO ON THE TACTtl£CHARACTERS,IS PROVIDEOBEYONDTHEAA.COr
~S~~~: ~~~THE OEGAEE OPEN POSITION. 2. TYPICAL 06STRUCTIONS INCLUDE DOORS, CASEWORK. F\IRNITURE. W"'-L FIXTURES, PLANTS, ETC.
SCALE:
Nr:_T 1
A703 11/07/20!6
02 2600-131
CONSTRUCTION NOTES
DETAIL
.)
I"!Cii I"'V(Ioi[N.
LOS ANGELES UNIFIED SCHOOL DISTRICT
~.,.,.~
{!)SAWCI.IT OCISriNC CC. Po\VO.IENT AND JOIN NEW C.C. s.t..OOTHLY PER DETAil@.
PREPARE AND COWPACT NEW a.-.5( PER SSPWC SECTION 301-1.1 TO
1.".
COI.IPACT
NEW BASE TO 90'1: RELATNE COI.IPACTION, WATCH EXISTING PAVEWENT SECTION.
78.80TC
G£[_29~ 1.£C~ ..J29c2_8C:CGC ~ ~ ~ L.?~O~ccC_: _5~:!3~GS:: ~ 1_2CCGC ~ ~ ..J · 3
'I=BRICK WALK ' 79 22
'-79.24 79.24
'-79 07CCGC '-79.24 79.24
~79.09CCGC
WVFf \:"79.25CCGC
NEW CURB PER ARCHIT£CTURAL PLAN O[TAil 4/AlOJ.
Q} CONSTRUCT
NEW HANORAIL PER ARCHIT£CTURAl PLAN OfTAIL 3/AIOJ.
@
I ''"" I PAVEWENT
t --~~~-~<.U :.::· .. :-_..._. ~·- ~~·-
(V COHSTRUCT
~----
PROT£CT EXISTING ANGLED WAU AND ASSOCIATED FOOTING.
r.
I _,, .......
I """''
~1$
M&O - AlE SERVICES FACILITIES SERVICES DIVISION JJJ S. BEAUDRY AVENUE. ZZNO FLOOR LOS ANGELES, CALIFORNIA 90017
I
TEL:(Z!3)21.1·3952 FAX: {213) 21.1-1.868
["g {79.40BSW
"79.22 79.22 ""'"79.24 '-79.24 "79.19 '79.19
"""79.24 /~
80.83TW '-f
C.C. JOINT DETAIL
LEGEND RE~
CK WALK
O:ISTING C.C PAV£U(NT AND CONSTRUCT NEW
NOT TO SCALE --
~
--
~
Corwin Theater Repair
\C-1.0
COlORED C.C. PAV£1.1ENT WITH A BROOt.l FlNISH. USE
Los Angeles High School CONSTRUCT NEW C.C. CURB PER ARCHITECTURAl PLAN
4500 West O.ymplc Bou.....,n:l
LoaMgelea,CA90019
OETA.IL 4/AlOJ. LISE 520-C-2500 CEt.IENT CONCRETE.
BOA Government Services J70 Crenshaw Blvd, Ste. E1 04 Torrance, CA 90503 Tel {.310) 78.3-5129
Century Structural Engineering 24719 Narbonne Ave. Lomita, CA 90717 Tel (.310) .325-088.3
PBS Engineering 2100 East Route 66, Ste 101 Glendora, CA 91740 Tel (625) 650-0.350
/(83.1
rs3.6
Uniplan Engineering, INC.
BENCH MARK:
BM= CHIS '0' TBS 0 SW COR 100' W/0 SE COR WALL S/0 SHOP BLDG.
I~
ELEVATION
=
550 E. Corson Plaza Drive, Ste 116 Corson, CA 90746 Tel (310) 523-.399.3
1 76.03'
NOTE· ADD 100.00' TO ALL ELEVATIONS ON PLAN TO ARRIVE AT SCHOOL DAtUM SURVEY DATE: 14-FEB-2011
g;:
10' H. IRON FENCE 10
i
n:NifCAOONSTAioP IW.Of'THESTATEARCHTECT APPOJ-
SCAlE: 1"•10'
cc
;cc
nt.E
NO.
N:_fl.S_SS~
<( Q_
cc
"':::::====
GRADING PLAN
GRADING PLAN, NOTES, AND DETAILS
.,.-=-:---;:-,,.-::-:---,-,.. I"'®d dSer,;ce Alert Col: TOlL f'REE 1-800
227-2600 ':.-;~
'I:.T'I
ANi UNDERGROUND UTIUTIESOR STRI..CTURES SHQ\MII ON THESE PLANS WERE PLOlTED FROM RE.'SONABLE REVIEW Of AVAILASLE RECORDS PROVIDED BY CLIENT AND DILIGENT INQUIRIES NO AODITIONALUTILITYORSUBSTRUCTURERESEARCHHASBEEN PERFORMED THE CONTRACTOR SHo\LLOETERMINETHEEXISTENCEi\NOTHETRUEHORIZONfALANDVERTICALLOCATIONANDSIZE OF ANY UNOERGROI..t40 UTILITIES OR STRUCTURES f
-sq.,oo
I.........,JPonollo
NORTH
C-1.0
CDKEY __MAP 9/29/2016
1wm
1
-.
_1_
02 2600-132
•
~
GENERAL NOTES:
1. IT SHALL BE THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE GENERAL CONTRACTOR TO ENSURE THAT ALL WORK COVERED BY THESE DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS SHALL BE PERFORMED IN COMPLIANCE WITH THE SAFETY ORDERS OF THE STATE OF CALIFORNIA, BUILDING CODES, AND THE RULES, REGUlATIONS, ORDERS AND LAWS OF ALL PUBLIC AUTHORITIES.
2. CONTRACTOR SHALL VERIFY All DIMENSIONS AND CONDITIONS IN THE FIELD BEFORE COMMENCING ANY PORTION OF THE WORK, AND SHALL NOTIFY THE ENGINEER AND OWNER IN WRITING IMMEOIATELY IF THERE ARE ANY DISCREPANCIES AND I OR SPECIFICATIONS WHICH IN FACT EXIST OR WHICH MAY BE REQUIRED IN ORDER TO ACCOMMODATE EXISTING CONDITIONS: COMMENCEMENT OF WORK SHALL CONSTITUTE FULL ACCEPTANCE OF SITE CONDITIONS. 3. ALL OMISSIONS OR DISCREPANCIES BETWEEN THE VARIOUS ELEMENTS OF WORKING DRAWINGS AND I OR SPECIFICATIONS WHICH MAY REQUIRE CLARIFICATION OR ADDITIONAL DETAILS SHALL BE BROUGHT TO THE IMMEDIATE ATTENTION OF THE ENGINEER IN WRITING BEFORE PROCEEDING 'MTH ANY WORK SO INVOLVED. IF THE CONTRACTOR PROCEEDS TO COMPLETE THE WORK ON HIS OWN, HE SHALL ASSUME FULl RESPONSIBILITY FOR SUCH WORK. 4. 00 NOT SCAlE DRAWINGS. 5. THESE PLANS HAVE BEEN PREPARED SPECIFICALLY FOR THE WORK SHOWN ON THEM. CONTRACTOR SHALL BE RESPONSIBlE FOR ALL TEMPORARY SHORING AND BRACING SYSTEMS AS WELl AS BARRICADE REQUIRED TO PERFORM THE WORK ON THESE PLANS AND OBTAIN STRUCTURAL CALCULATIONS FOR THESE BRACING OR SHORING SYSTEMS.
ANCHORS TO CONCRETE: 13.. A SEPARATE PERMIT WILL BE SECURED FOR ALL ELECTRICAL PLUMBING AND HEATING-VENTILATING WORK.
'HIL Tl' KB-TZ ANCHORS: PER ESR-1917
14. ONE FOURTH OF ALL GROUTED BOLTS SHALL BE TESTED BY A REGISTERED DEPUTY BUILDING INSPECTOR.
CONTRACTOR MUST FOLLOW ALL INSTRUCTIONS AND RECOMMENDATION OF THE FABRICATOR AS WELl AS ESR-1917, AND ALL REQUIREMENTS OF THE EARTHQUAKE SAFETY GUIDE LINES.
15. PLAN AND DETAILS WERE DEVELOPED AND BASED UPON AS BUILT DRAWINGS PROVIDED TO US BY LAUSD AND A FIELD INVESTIGATION BY THE RESPONSIBLE ENGINEER AND REFLECT THE ACTUAL CONDITIONS OF THE EXISTING STRUCTURES AS OBSERVED.
16. REPAIR TO ORIGINAL CONDITION ALL WALLS AND CEILINGS ETC. DAMAGED DURING ANY INSPECTIONS OR TESTS NEEDED. 17. ALL SECTIONS & DETAILS ETC. SHOWN ON THIS SET MAYBE COVERED
BY CEILING, WALL COVERING ETC. NEW MEMBER AND CONNECTIONS & REVISIONS MAYBE NEEDED. CONTRACTOR MUST FIELD VERIFY EXISTING AS-BUllT CONDITION PRIOR TO BIDDING & CONSTRUCTION. 18. WHERE INSTAlUNG NEW ANCHORS, REMOVE EXISTING ANCHORS TO AVOID INTERFERENCE. 19. WHERE NEW ANCHOR STRENGTH Wlll BE COMPROMISED BY EXISTING FIELD CONDITION CONTRACTOR MUST NOTIFY THE ENGINEER TO REVIEW THE CONDITION AND DETAIL.
21. STRUCTURAL OBSERVATION BY A LICENSED ARCHITECT OR STRUCTURAL ENGINEER, AS REQUIRED BY DSA.
7. NOT ALL INFORMATION SHOWN ON DRAWINGS ARE ACCURATE. SOME OF THEM ARE ESTIMATIONS. CONTRACTOR SHALL VERIFY FIELD CONDITIONS PRIOR TO BIDDING AND CONSTRUCTION. 8. DETAIL CHANGES WHICH ARE REQUIRED BY THE CONTRACTOR AS RESULT OF INCONSISTENCIES OR CONFLICTS IN JOB SITE CONDITIONS OR DETAIL CHANGES WHICH ARE REQUIRED BY THE CONTRACTOR TO REDUCE THE SCOPE OF WORK. EITHER LABOR OR MATERIAL, WILL BE CHARGED FOR ON AN HOURLY BASIS. PRIOR TO BIDDING CONTRACTORS SHOULD REQUEST FEE INFORMATION FROM THE ENGINEER. 9. ALL INFORMATION SHOWN ON THE DRAWINGS RELATIVE TO EXISTING CONDITIONS IS GIVEN AS THE BEST PRESENT KNOWLEDGE, BUT WITHOUT GUARANTEE OF ACCURACY. WHERE ACTUAL CONDITIONS CONFLICT WITH THE DRAWINGS THEY SHALL BE REPORTED TO THE LAUSD INSPECTOR AND THE ENGINEER SO THAT PROPER REVISIONS MAY BE MADE. MODIFICATIONS OF DETAILS OF CONSTRUCTION SHALL NOT BE MADE WITHOUT PRIOR WRITTEN APPROVAL OF THE LAUSO INSPECTOR AND THE ENGINEER.
BUILDING SHALL COMPLY WITH THE 2013 EDITION CALIFORNIA CODE OF REGULATIONS TITLE 24 PART 2, VOL. 2 OF 2
MATERIALS:
2. ALL STRUCTURAL STEEL SHAPES AND PLATES SHALL CONFORM TO ASTM A38 SPECIFICATIONS. 3. BOLTS FOR STRUCTURAL STEEL CONNECTIONS SHALL BE FABRICATED FROM ASTM A307 STEEL AND COME COMPLETE WITH HEAVY HEX HEAD, HEAVY HEX NlfT AND STANDARD WASHERS. NO THREAD BEARING ALLOWED.
GENERAl NOTES & INDEX OF STRUCTURAl DRAWINGS
S-2
DRAMA- FLOOR PLAN
S·3
DRAMA- LOWER ROOF FRAMING PLAN
EPOXY FOR CONCRETE: SIMPSON SET·XP, ESR-2508 (RR25744)
1. SEE LAUSD SPECIFICATION FOR STRUCTURAL METAL STUD FRAME SECTION OS. 4110. 2. ALL WELDING SHALl BE DONE BY CERTIFIED WELDERS IN AN APPROVED FABRICATIONS SHOP. ALL FIELD WELDING REQUIRES CONTINUOUS INSPECTIONS BY A REGISTERED DEPUTY INSPECTOR. 3. WELDING SHALL BE DONE WITH THE SHIELDED ELECTRIC ARC PROCESS USING E-70XX ELECTRODES. All SHOP WELDING SHOWN MAY NEED TO USE FILED WELD INSTEAD OR VISE-VERSA.
~
:5:5:5 S. BEAUDRY AVENUE, ZZND FLOOR LOS ANGELES, CALIFORNIA 9Cl017 T£L:(ZIJ)Z41·:595Z F,lt{ZI:S)Z41·4868
SECTIONS AND DETAILS
LEGENDS:
A.B.
MFR. N.S. N.T.S. D.C. SQ. FT. E.N. E.O. jE)S.B. E.W. F.F.
F.N. U.N.O. V.I.F.
NEW F.O.S. EXISTING F.S. ANCHOR BOLT GA. ALTERNATE GALV. AT BLDG. MANUFACTURER BLK'G. NEAR SIDE B.N. NOT TO SCALE CL ON CENTER CLR. PLATE EA. SQUARE FOOT E.F. EDGE NAIL T.W EQUAL OR EQUNALENT TYP EXISTING STEEL BEAM WI EACHWAY W/0 FINISH FLOOR FIELD NAILING UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE VERIFY IN FIELD
~ = CONCRETE WALL
t==:::=t' "' 0
4. WHERE CONNECTIONS USE SCREWS MAY CHANGE TO APPROVED WELDS OR VISA VERSA.
~OF~,s
M&O ·AlE SERVICES FACILITIES SERVICES DIVISION
SECTIONS AND DETAILS
PL
~
~
LOS ANGELES UNIFIED SCHOOL DISTRICT
SECTIONS AND DETAILS S·S
@
EPOXY:
STRUCTURAL STEEL 1. ALL STRUCTURAL STEEL SHALL BE FABRICATED AND ERECTED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE LATEST EDITION OF THE AISC MANUAL FOR STEEL CONSTRUCTION AND OF CODE OF STANDARD PRACTICE.
S-1
ALT
20. DEPUTY INSPECTION IS REQUIRED FOR All ANCHOR BOLTS AND FIELD WELDING.
BUILDING CODE:
6. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL VISIT THE JOB SITE AS MANY TIMES AS NECESSARY IN ORDER TO FAMILIARIZE HIMSELF WITH THE EXISTING JOB SITE CONDITIONS UNDER WHICH THE WORK WILL BE PERFORMED. CONTRACTOR SHALL VERIFY ALL CONDITIONS AND GRADES PRIOR TO MAKING A BID. THE CONTRACTOR'S BID WILL REFLECT HIS JOB SITE OBSERVATIONS AND WILL NOTE ANY INCONSISTENCIES OR CONFLICTS. ANY QUESTIONS REGARDING THESE DOCUMENTS SHALL BE DISCUSSED WITH THE ENGINEER PRIOR TO BIDDING.
SPECIAL INSPECTION: PERIODIC SPECIAL INSPECTION IS REQUIRED. THE SPECIAL INSPECTOR MUST MAKE PERIODIC INSPECTIONS DURING ANCHOR INSTALLATION TO VERIFY ANCHOR TYPE, ANCHOR DIMENSIONS, CONCRETE TYPE. CONCRETE COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH, ANCHOR SPACING. EDGE DISTANCES, CONCRETE MEMBER THICKNESS, TIGHTENING TORQUE, HOLE DIMENSIONS, ANCHOR EMBEDMENT AND ADHERENCE TO THE MANUFACTURER'S PRINTED INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS. THE SPECIAL INSPECTOR MUST BE PRESENT AS OFTEN AS REQUIRED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE 'STATEMENT OF SPECIAL INSPECTION.' UNDER THE IBC, ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS AS SET FORTH IN SECTIONS 1705, 1706 AND 1707 MUST BE OBSERVED, WHERE APPUCABLE.
~
INDEX OF STRUCTURAl DRAWINGS:
"'''""'"'
:
STUDS WALL (E) STEEL PIPE COLUMN
,. ,. ., ,. ., • ,.
FACE OF STUD FARSIDE GAUGE GALVANIZED BUILDING BLOCKING BOUNDARY = CENTERLINE " CLEAR = EACH " EACHFACE " TOPOFWALL : TYPICAL •
WlTH
= WITHOUT
Corwin Theater Repair Los Angeles High School
~~~~ BOA Government Services 370 Crenshaw Blvd, Ste. E104 Torrance, CA 90503 Tel (310) 783-~129
Century Structural Engineering 2•119 Narbonne Ave. lomita, CA 90717 Tel (310) 325-0883
PBS Engineering 2100 East Route 66, Ste 101 Glendora, CA 9174-0 Tel (625) 650-0350
Unlplan Engineering, INC. SCOPE OF STRUCTURAL WORK: AT THE CORIMN THEATER, REMOVE AND REPLACE EXTERIOR METAL STUD WALl FRAMING AND CEILING FRAMING AT THE NORTH AND SOUTH HALLWAYS. EXISTING STEEL POSTS, BEAMS, AND ROOF DECKING TO BE CLEANED AND TO REMAIN, WITH REPAIRS AS NOTED IN PLANS. SAW CUT CONCRETE WALL AT DRESSING ROOM AREA PER PLAN.
550 E. Corson Plaza Drive, Ste 116 Corson, CA 907•6 Tel (310) 523-3993 STAAtPSjSEoll.S.
4. ALL PIPE SHALL CONFORM TO ASTM A53 GRADE B SPECIFICATION. 5. ALL WELDING SHALL BE DONE BY CERTIFIED WELDERS IN AN APPROVED FABRICATIONS SHOP. ALL FIELD WELDING REQUIRES CONTINUOUS INSPECTIONS BY A REGISTERED DEPUTY INSPECTOR. 6. WELDING SHALL BE DONE WITH TiiE SHIELDED ELECTRIC ARC PROCESS USING E-70XX ELECTRODES. ALL SHOP WELDING SHOWN MAY NEED TO USE FIELD WELD INSTEAD OR VISEVERSA.
10 IN AS MUCH AS THE REMODELING I REHABILITATION OF AN EXISTING BUILDING REQUIRES THAT CERTAIN ASSUMPTIONS BE MADE REGARDING EXISTING CONDITIONS AND BECAUSE SOME OF THESE ASSUMPTIONS CANNOT BE VERIFIED WITHOUT EXPENDING GREAT SUMS OF ADDITIONAL MONEY, OR DESTROYING OTHERWISE ADEQUATE OR SERVICEABLE PORTIONS OF THE BUILDING. THE CLIENT RECOGNIZES THE INHERENT RISKS CONNECTED WITH CONSTRUCTION AND THAT ADDITIONAL COSTS MAY ARISE DURING THE CONSTRUCTION.
7. NO HOLES OTHER THAN THOSE SPECIFICAUY DETAILED SHALL BE ALLOWED THROUGH STRUCTURAL STEEL MEMBERS. NO CUTTING OR BURNING OF STEEL WILl BE PERMITTED.
11. BUILDING SHALL NOT BE OCCUPIED DURING REMODEL WORK WHERE:
9. A LICENSED FABRICATOR IS REQUIRED FOR ALL OFF SITE CONSTRUCTION OF CONNECTION HARDWARE, MISCELLANEOUS METALS AND STRUCTURAL STEEL
.,,.,_
8. ALL STRUCTURAL STEEL SHALL BE PAINTED WITH A RUST INHIBITIVE PAINT. TOUCH~ ALL BLEMISHES.
flU: NO. ~~;_ns_ss_
a. THE BUILDING STRENGTH IS SUBSTANTIALLY WEAKENED AT ANY POINT DURING THE REMODEL WORK. b. REQUIRED EXITS ARE NOT AVAILABLE OR ARE OBSTRUCTED. c. REQUIRED FIRE SAFETY DEVICES, SUCH AS SPRINKLERS, STANDPIPES AND ALARM SYSTEMS ARE NOT OPERATIONAL 12. WHERE DEEMED AS NEEDED BY THE LOS ANGELES UNIFIED SCHOOL DISTRICT OR LOS ANGELES BUILDING DEPARTMENT, THE NECESSARY PERMITS FROM PUBLIC WORKS WILL BE SECURED AND THAT THE NECESSARY BARRICADES, PROTECTION FENCES AND/OR CANOPIES WILL BE ERECTED.
"'0:::====
10. CONTRACTOR MUST SUBMIT SHOP DRAWINGS FOR APPROVAL PRIOR TO FABRICATION AND CONSTRUCTION. 11. ALL STEEL TO STEEL CONNECTIONS TO BE FULLY WELDED WITH,\' FILLET WELD FOR FULL LENGTH OF CONTACT TYP, UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. 12. GALV. ALL WALL ANCHOR PLATES, ANCHOR RODS AND STEEL STRAPS. 13. CAULK ANNULAR SPACE AROUND ANCHOR ROD AND POSITIVELY WATERPROOF HOLES THROUGH WALLS.
GENERAL NOTES & INDEX OF STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS
S-1 11/8/2016
02 2600-133
rr
cp
~ 9J3.
cp
t8
~.~.~
crcr
~OF~~~
LOS ANGELES UNIFIED SCHOOL DISTRICT
T-0"
----@
M&O ·AlE SERVICES FACILITIES SERVICES DIVISION 333 S. BEAUDRY AVENUE, 22ND FLOOR LOS ANGELES, CALIFORNIA
TEL:(21J)241-J952 F.u:{ZIJ)ZL.I-4868
Corwin Theater Repair
•
Los Angeles High School
~~~=I
BOA Government Services
I
370 Crenshaw Blvd, Sta. E1 04 Torrance, CA 90503
I
Tel (310) 783--5129
I
Century Structural Engineering
I
24719 Narbonne Ave. lomita, CA 90717 Tel {310) 325-0883
PBS Engineering 2100 East Route 66, Ste 101 Glendora, CA 91740
Tel {625) 650-0350
Unlplan Engineering, INC. ~
E. Car'$0n Plaza Drive, Ste 116 Corson, CA 90746
Tel (310) 523-3993
~;~~ IOOI'IIf'CATIOI(ST~
DN.OFMSTAITARCHlfCT
K;_ru_ss_
I
"''"-----
I
I
I
I
I I
I
~ ~
~
I
I
I
I
6
~0.
I
I I
~~
DRAMA· FLOOR PLAN
FLOOR PLAN
SHOWING STRUCTURAl WAllS & COLUMNS SCALE: 1/8' • 1'.0'
S-2 11/8/2016
02 2600-134
,urn,,,
i
RENOVATION
0
•~
FOR All TYPE 1' ROOF: 11/2' ROBERTSON$ 3-16 STEEL DECKING TO REMAIN 1) THE ROUGHLY CLEAN (E) DECK
2) INSPECT THE (E) DECKING CONDITION
cp
cr
r
r
--------@
:~
' LOS ANGELES UNIFIED SCHOOL DISTRICT OF
alP'
REMOVE (E) RIGID INSULATION AS WELL AS {E) QUARRY TILE AND REPLACE THEM WITH (N) Pl Y'WOOO AND (N) QUARRY TILE, SEE ARCHITECTURAL DETAILS.
M&O ·AlE SERVICES FACIUTIES SERVICES DMSION
DECK WELDING: END WELDS: 2 • 314'C PUDDLE WELDS PECK DECK. SEAM ATTACHMENT: BUTTON PUNCH @24"0.C. MAX. WHEN ALL CONDITIONS ARE MET, REPlACE DECK WITH ANTI-RUST PAINT.
LOS ANGELES, CALIFORNIA 90017 TEI.:(Z13JZI.I-395Z FAX·(ZI3)Z41·4868
INSPECTOR OF RECORD (lOR) MUST· CHECK AND VERIFY IN FIELD, TO ASSURE THAT ANGLES AND BOLTS ARE CLEANED & STRUCTURALLY SOUND AND ALL SOL TS ARE TIGHTENED.
0
~
~
NOTES:
TYPE 1r ROOF TO REMAIN, NO {N) STRUCTURAL WORK
TYPE 11' STEEL DECK ROOF: 2112" LT. WT. CONC. FILL (110/CU.FT.)WIOXO #10 W. W.F. 314" DOWN FROM TOP OF CONC. OVER ROBERTSON QL 21·20 STI DECKING TYP. @DRAMA BUILDING ROOF.
10:
#10
553 S. BEAUDRY AVENUE, ZZND FLOOR
.
Corwin Theater Repair Los Angeles High School
~'=-.~.=" BOA Government Services 370 Crenshaw Blvd, Ste. E1 04 Torrance, CA 90503 Tel {310) 783-5129
Century Structural Engineering 24719 Narbonne Ave. Lomita, CA 90717 Tel (310) 325-0883
PBS Engineering REMOVE ALL (E) STEEL STUDS, TRACKS, ETC. UNDER LOW ROOF,
SEEL.L\&W&ffi \§7 \§7 \§7
2100 East Route 66, Ste 101 Glendaro, CA 91740 Tel (625) 650-0350
Unlplan Engineering, INC. 550 E. Carson Plaza Drive, Ste 116 Carson, CA 90746 Tel (310) 523-3993
~I ~I ~
A==
'jft=
=4
II
~
=4=
'--------@
CONTRACTOR MUST REMOVE ROOF COVER AND VERIFY THE ROOf DECK CONDITION IN THIS AREA. REPORT TO ARCHITECT AND ENGINEER IF FINO ANY RUSTED AREA OR UNSOUND STRUCTURAL CONDITION. THEN, THEY NEED TO BE REMOVED AND REPLACED.
h<2l'Y,~~_,'300F FRAMING PLAN
~~~~ ON.
m'llfiCATJC»jSTAJI' Of n£ STATEAADIT[Cl
"""""
fllE NO.
"'-"'--"--
"'':=====
C) DRAMA- LOWER ROOF FRAMING PLAN
S-3 11/8/2016
02 2600-135
n ,_,,.rn.,,
k_
t===J
1
S2
I
~
-....-
r
I j
*
5" 16GA BENT PL. 8" LONG@ [(E) ROOF DECK 24" O.C., REMOVE AND NOT SHOWN REPLACE DAMAGED (E) PLATE FOR CLARITY
~
~T<>A,.,vT" -,
~ ;r;
:;:
g
~~~~~~~~v;;·
~...
!E) 2-3/4"0 PUDDLE WELD ------.., PER 1G DECKING
~
~-
#10 SCREWS BOTH WAYS ~TYPE 1' ROOF MAX. MUST HAVE GONE THROUGH METAL DECK
~,;;,.p-''
·
:~
LOS ANGELES UNIFIED SCHOOL DISTRICT
EVERYSTUDTO TRACKTYP.
M&O ·AlE SERVICES FACIUTIES SERVICES DMSION :5:5:5 S. BEAUDRY AVENUE. Z2ND FLOOR LOS ANGELES, CALIFORNIA (!10017 TEL: (21!1) Z4t-!19SZ
FAX: (ZIJ) 241-4868
(E)J" 0 STO PIPE COL TO REMAIN
Corwin Theater Repair
.
AT STRAIGHT OR CORNERED WALL
ELEVATION SECTION
Los Angeles High School
TYP .. ::~~~ATION SECTION0)
TYP. DETAIL· SHOWS ONLY BENT PLATE AT TOP OF FOR CLARITY
ScALe:·r-,12" = ,·~-
SCALE: 1 .
~~~=-
~
BOA Government Services 370 Crenshaw Blvd, ste. E104 Torrance, CA 90503 Tel (310) 783-!5129
Century Structural Engineering 24719 Narbonne Ave. Lomita, CA 90717 Tel (310) 325-0883
.I
4
~
<'l
fJ
4
.
~
4 )
4
(E) CONCRETE WAll
2100 East Route 66, Ste 101 Glendora, CA 91740 Tel (625) 650--0350
STUDS (Hl GA) @12"0.C.
TRACK TYP.
REMAIN
ct. OF COL&
Unlplan Engineering, INC.
(E)S"CONC. WALL TO REMAIN
(E)S"CONC. WALL TO
CLEAN AND TIGHTEN ALL LOOSE HEAD.INSPECTTHEADEOUACYOF (E)DRYPACK UNDER BASE PlATE REPLACE All STRUCTURAL UNSOUND GROUT. IF LOOSE BOLT IS FOUND, NOTIFY THE ARCHITECT/ENGINEER IMMEDIATELY
<'l
PBS Engineering
(N) METAL
1 #10 SCREWS EA. SIDE FOR EVERY STUD TO
s:;o E. Corson P'tozo Drive, Ste 116 carson, CA 90746
Tel (310) 523-3993
BASE PlATE
DETAIL
~~;,;:;.o~ATION SECTION®
SCALE: 1112"::1'-0"
(5\
fJ~~,.C:S~UMN CONN.
u
C9
METAL STUD CONN. SCAlE: 112"" 1'-0"
9
~c~
NOTES:
• FOR All (E) STEEL BEAMS, STEEL POSTS AND All STRUCTURAL CONNECTIONS: 1. CLEAN STEEL BEAMS AND COLUMNS & STRUCTURAL SHAPES WITH SAND BLASTING. CLEAN TO SHINE. DO NOT DAMAGE METAL 2. ALL (E) MEMBERS TO BE INSPECTED BY A 'INSPECTOR OF RECORD (lOR)' AND MAKE SURE THEY ARE STRUCTUALL Y SOUND. A REPORT FROM THE INSPECTOR IS NEEDED.
SCREW@~"O.C, STAGG RED
J14"PLYWOOD WAllSHEATING
#10SC~RS @ 12'0.C.
314"PLYWOOD WAll SHEATING
lll00lf1C,\.OONSTAWP DN.OF'TI£STATE.I.RCH1ECI
~LE~Q.
3. ALL STRUCTURALLY SOUND ITEM TO REMAIN AFTER BEING CLEANED.
N;~F\.S_ss_
• FOR (E) STEEL STUDS WALLS ON LINES
@ & @AND CONTINUED PORTION ON BOTH ENDS;
600S200-54@
Pl YWD BElWEEN SPLICES TYP.
Pl YWD SPLICE TYP. 1. REMOVE ALL (E) STEEL STUDS WALL INCLUDING ALL WALL FINISHES. 2. REPLACED AND REBUILD STUDS WALL & BRACES PER APPROVED STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS.
PLAN DETAIL AT PLYWOOD SPLICE
@
PLAN DETAIL AT PLYWOOD BETWEEN SPLICES
3. FOR NEW STUDS. USE 6" WIDE GALV. 600S125-54 FOR STUDS AND UNPUNCHED 600T125-54 FOR TRACKS. 4. TRACK ANCHORAGE TO TOP OF (E) CONCRETE WAlL;
""=====
600S162-54@
g~~~~;~ PLYWOOD PLAN DETAIL
®
v
(QC\88
PLAN DETAIL
lai\\gA
AT PLYWOOD SPLICE~
PLAN DETAIL AT PLYWOOD BETWEEN SPLICE
~g~;~f~YeWOOD DETAIL
C9
loO\gs v::.J SECTIONS & DETAILS
• FOR ROOF: 1. CONTRACTOR TO REMOVE ALL ROOF COVERING. (SEE ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS FOR AREA) AND ALL AREA TO BE INSPECTED BY 'INSPECTOR OF RECORD (lOR)' & MAKE SURE ALL DECKING AND PARTS ARE STRUCTURALLY SOUND OR THEY HAVE TO BE REPLACED WITH SAME DECKING AND PARTS OR APPROVED EQUAL .. 2. NOTIFY ARCHITECT AND ENGINEER FOR FINDINGS.
S-4 11/8/2016
02 2600-136
'1}'\fiiD.~
f.~E
A RooF
qv
0p
STEE~
OF
a:t-C~~
LOS ANGELES UNIFIED SCHOOL DISTRICT M&O ·AlE SERVICES FACILITIES SERVICES DIVISION
(E) CONC. WALL
:5:5:5 S. BEAUDRY AVENUE, ZlND FLOOR LOS ANGELES, CALIFORNIA 90017 TEL:(Z!:5)241-J952 FAX·(21:5)Z41·4868
TYP. (E) TYPE 1T ROOF
(EJlO"c~:~c't.":. ~;11
/TYPETROoF0 Corwin Theater Repair
1
,_,:"~. ::.!""-
(E) STEEL BEAM SEE PlAN
Los Angeles High School
WI 314"0 BOLTS@ 2'-6" TYP. AT All DECKING
NOTE: CLEAN All STEEL BEAMS AND CONNECTIONS AND PAINT W/
~'=-.'*'tt
PERIMETERS.
="
BOA Government Services
ANTI-RUST PAINT
370 Crenshaw Blvd, Ste. E1 04
~Ji'i"f12~e.LL SECTION
C9
NEW WALL SECTION
SCALE:t~·
Torrance, CA 90500 Tel (310) 783-5129
(4\
u
Century Structural Engineering 24719 Narbonne Ave. Lomita, CA. 90717 Tel (310) 325-0883
TYPET ROOF
WAL~~.~CTION@ METAL STUDS SCALE: 1-~
C)
PBS Engineering #10 SCREWS BOTii WAYS MAX. MUST HAVE GONE THROUGH METAl DECK SMS TO PENETRATE
1#10 SCREWS BOTH W A Y S \ \ MAX. MUST HAVE GONE THROUGH METAL DECK
DECK FUJTE TUP. TYP.
2- 1/2"0 PUDDLE WELD PER 16 GA. MTl. BACKING
2100 East Route 66, Ste 101 G$endara, CA. 91740 Tel (625) 650-0350
6" LONG. 4" TRACK 16 GA W/2-ANCHORS TO {E)CONC. WALL
~
(E)8810
Unlplan Engineering, INC. 550 E. Carson Plaza Drive, Ste 116 (E)CONC. WALL
4001200-54 CUT OFF FLANGE TO ~AVOID INTERFERING THE (E) BEAM FLANGE BOTH ENDS
BE TIGHT CKWEB
CLG. STUDS 400 5162-54@ 12" O.C. BRACING@ MID SPAN NOT SHOWN
SECTION S-CALE: 11/2"•1'-0"
ea,.on, CA. 90746 Tel (310) 523-3993
SECTION AT !NI STUDS WAll SCALE: 1112'=1'..1)"
6
~~f,~!~~-
(7
(~:J~ IDEh'!lfDTIOI'ISlAI.IP
...,,_
Or.'. OF n£ SlATE .1.'!0-t"li:CT FILENO. ~e_n.s_ss_
'"'CONT. 4001200-54 TRACK W/2-ANCHORS
TO (E)CONC. WALL (E) 6" CONC. SLAB
tte•Vtt/2"
SECTIONS & DETAJLS
CEILING JOIST
400S162-54@12"0.C.
SECTION SCALE: 1 112" • 1'-0"
~!~;.~.;CTION@ PIPE COLUMN ( 2
f8\
u
S-5 11/8/2016
02 2600-137
f~~~E (E) 8" CONC. WALL
~
W/2-HILTl 318"0 KBTZ SOLTS W/3"MIN. EMBEDMENT INTO (E) CONC WALL (2-#tOSMSTOBB--2
BB-2 .;
?c~!~~~~-
~
ALL112"0'HILTI'KBTZBOLT WITH 3 114" MIN. EFFECTIVE EMBEDMENT TYP. EDGE OF OPENING
1"·0"
(
~OFEiJ.;O'.._,S
L 3x3l<.16GA3112" LONG
C8•11.51f(E)6"THKCONC.
?c~!~~~~-
2
1".0"
(
LOS ANGELES UNIFIED SCHOOL DISTRICT M&O -AlE SERVICES FACILITIES SERVICES DIVISION
MUST ORILL HOLE PRIOR TO CUT. DO NOT OVER CUT CONC.
S. BEAUDRY AVENUE, 22ND FLOOR LOS ANGELES, CALIFORNIA 90017 TEL: (213) 241·3952 fA)(; (213) 241·4868
33~
SECTION
3
(4\
u
SCALE:1112"=1'..{)"
Corwin Theater Repair
.
Los Angeles High School
CONTRACTOR TO V,I,F, MAY NEED {N) DETAIL
~'=--.~~
TYPE 'I' ROOF #10 SCREWS BOTH WAYS MAX. MUST HAVE GONE \ THROUGH METAL DECK 2-1/2"0PUDDLEWELD ~ PER 16 GA. MTL. BACKING
1
BOA Government Services
.
370 Crenshaw Blvd, Ste. E1 04 Torrance, CA 90503 Tel (310) 783-5129
\
~~ L3x3l<.16GA BOTH SIDES AT BB-2 (E)CONC. WALL
Century Structural Engineering 24719 Narbonne Ave. lomlto, CA 90717 Tel (310) 325-0883
PBS Engineering BE TIGHT CKWEB
~~~"¥!JJ£?E~Aff# OPENING SCALE: 112"= 1'-0"
m
2100 East Route 66, Ste 101 Glendora, CA 91740 Tel (625) 650-0350
Unlplan Engineering, INC. 550 E.
u
CLG. STUDS 400 S162-54 @ 12" O.C. BRACING @ MID SPAN NOT SHOWN
Plozo Drive, Ste 116 Carson, CA 90746 Te( (310) 523-3993
Co~n
~~~!"!"!?.N SECTION DETAIL ( 5 400T150-54 TOP TRACK WELD BOTH ENDS TO (E) ROOF STEEL BEAM
(E) EXTERIOR
r
STUDS WALL
1!{:1~
600T150-54 TYP.~ 18 • 2•12
,'
,'
~
~~~:f BOTH ENDS WELDING SEE 19
®
TYP
VERT. BOX STUDS (WALL END) COL SEE§
~
600S162-54
IODmnCAHON STAI.IP DIV.OFTHESTAT£AACHIT£CT APP03nLE NO.
\_DOORHDR H-1
w;_n.s_ss_ "'"-----
600TI50-54
~¥cf1~1~2~,.DETAIL( 8 SECTIONS & DETAILS
~~T:L~TE~TS~;~,L~~~ND 400T/5).54
TYP ..:.:~~ATION SECTION SCALE:1 ··-
C9
"=. 400T/5J.-54
~~;~ 1~~,s:noN
(1o
g_600S162·54 TYP. BOX COL (JAMBSIM.) SCALE:11/2"=1'..{)"
S-6 11/8/2016
02 2600-138
c !!:!I-
0
•
/
....1
0
;;;
~~ ~!d u<> :;)~ 11)!2 ~~ ~~ we tn> .......... w"' wo <~ \ "}~... ~·~ (.!)0 'VJ z:c Ow
!
.,. "'
z
u ~
8
_g
-~
u
~
"~ ~·; t- Q.
"'"' ;:
~~
"'E
. e F '"'* €tE.i <. • :; < D
·~6
E
0
u
~ 0
s: 8'i 0
-'
"0
~
Ill
g>
rn
~ 0
Ei ~
::c. s: s:
w
1!
il
5
"'
~
~ u
~
<..i
.t -
(f)"
I
~co~
;t
eo.~~ wj"
:g,
L0
~
:Z:
-i~
Q>
-
~
illl! . I")
10\
z
~·"
:15
.~ '. s~ ..,~
~
g~~ ~" ~.
0
~-~
JIW
s: 0. '2
~
'
-'
<(_,
Jj J.
~O'i:fl
<(W>-
::<:ZO uwz w
:;
:::>
I
("')
~
II """ ~ 0
8.
;.I
:E
1!1
"'w
00
'D N N
.5 o "-
~
lot
cc
Q
0
~
w .... Ill
1.1.
<1. <1.
(,)
(,)
0
w
< (,) :::;
<1.
0
en
<
z
0
"'~ Q Q
z <(
i=S: <(..,j >Z
ceo w tllZ
zo
8!3
...en
~=
~
zZ
Ill
<( (,)
:::;
<1. <1.
<(
>:::)
cc"' wen wO
.u
~~
oCw 'Otz
Nee wO
-
.......... i=
..."'w 0
z
.... <( cc
!:lw!
~
CUG!(If'l
wdzt·t-9LO~''i0 1=>0
:.JOin
D"P'LOOn\Jdn\OO-QfO-IHOZ\9LOl\:d
MECHANICAL LEGEND
'~""
-~ = c:::::m:::::::J I
,..,..,..,= UP
'''
{ORDN)
SOUAREORRECTANCiULARDUCT
J---M----1 1------
DUCT WI1H ACOUSTIC UNER (IN ADDITION TO 'MiERE SPECIFIED)
J----£>1-< ~~
DUCT SLOPE DIRECTION
I
EXISTINGDUCTOREOUIPI.IENTTOBEREWOVE:D
~~
RECTANGULAR/SOUAREDUCT1HROATELBOWYIITHVANES(*F1G.2-2)1
~
SQUARE 45 DEGREE ENTRY BRANCH CONNECTION(* FIG. 2-8)
~
ROUND DUCT W"TE F1T11NG (*FIG. J-5)
~
b
RECTANGULAR DUCTPARALLElFLOWBIU.NCH(*FIG. 2-7)
~~~0"-+~ lri:::h"'~
SCMEOULES
DUCT TAKE-OfF FROM BOTTOM
ROOF REI.IOOEL PLAN PRESSURE REDUCING VALVE FLOW CONTROl VALVE (NON-WOTORIZED)
I
""tt;OF~~
LOS ANGELES UNIFIED SCHOOL DISTRICT M&O- AlE SERVICES FACILITIES SERVICES DIVISION :533 S. BEAUDRY AVENUE, ZZND FLOOR LOS ANGELES. CALIFORNIA 90017 TEL: (213)2:41-:5952 fAX:(2:1:5)2:41..L.868
Corwin Theater Repair
PIPING EXPANSION JOINT
0+-i
Los Angeles High School
DUCT TAKE-OFF FROM TOP
<-+--<-i==!=j I.I.V.D.
IUANUAL
4600 Wut Olymplo Boulvord
f---9-----f
FIRE DAWPER
~t:::::t::j~~~FIREDAWPER,I'SioiOI
~LIME DAI.IP£R
looAI\geles.CA90019
~
,_....,.,H
BOA Government Services
1---+--f
~~
IUOTORIZEDDANP£R
~
PIPING FlEX!BU: CONNECTION
.f---4---1
t:::::!=tl
I BARQI.IETRIC OAWPER
~
lHERIIOiotETER WELL
CEiliNG REGISTER
(RETURN OR OUTSIDE AIR)
CEIUNGDifflJSER
(SUPPLY)
,........:r_..,
0 0 B I:Oiim 1!!"':1
370 Crenshaw Blvd, Ste. El 04 Torrance, CA 9050.3 Tel (.310) 783-5129
..1::--<
CEIUNGREGISTER(EXH.AUSTAlR)
Century Structural Engineering
C8:J
24719 Narbonne Ave. Lomita, CA 90717
RETURNORDUTS!OEAlRDUCTSECTICN
Tel (310) 325-0883
e
r---1
RETURN OROUTSIDE AlR DUCT UP THRU FLOOR OR ROOF"
~-
EXHAUST AlR DUCT UP THRU FlOOR OR ROOF"
DL
POINT OF CONNECTION
.D)\.
II;,G~E~ ;ooo,_._.._,_,., ,_.............,,_
---
-0.01loO
'"""k•l'k"'"""''"""'''""""''"'"''" ..1011rto.:ID11-ru8-00
THERI.IOSTAT Yllll-1 ZONE NUWBER WOUNTED AT 46• AFF ¥11TH .30.X48" CLEAR F"lOOR SPACE FOR ACCESS
Il ___ 4
-to-
.§ PROJECTTITLEAADSCHOOI..LOCATIOr!
PRESSURE RWEF VALVE 'MTH DISCHARGE TO F"lOOR SINK OR OUTSIDE
~
THRQATSIZEONRECTANGULARDUCTS?UT
I!H:J""o'f.
I.IECHA~CAL
W"TE STRAINER WITH ORAlN VALVE
RADUS ElBOW (*fiG. 2-2)
'-'::±<"",.......C, ~ I >-f:-<,.,__.I...
WECHANICAI. GENERAL NOTES I.IECH.I.NICALU:GENDANDSHEETINDEX
~
-&:J.,RV-i
~ ,.._.,_
GATEVALVE(SHUTOFFVALVE)
J---M----1 FLEXIBLEROUNDOUCT
·}- -:>--
r-T--i f::::::t::::tl
SHEET INDEX DESCR!Pli()N
Uniplan Engineering, INC. 550 E. Carson Plaza Drive, Ste 116 Corson, CA 90746 Tel (310) 523-3993
I DOOR lOUVER AND SIZE
DOWN THROUGH ROOF
STAMPS/SEALS
UP THROUGH FlOOR UNDERCUT DOOR J/4 "
....ill.
EOUIPI.tENT NUWBER '
"'
ROUND(OIAI.IETER)
J-(NANEH
R:E:FRIGERANTLIQVID
'-{NAI.IE}---J Y.h~/T·/~
INBETWEENBEAI.ISPACE wjO..G. F.D.I*lli CEILING FIRE CAliPER
.
EXISTING PIPING, EOUIPI.tENTS AND DEVICES TO BE REWOVED
1--HWS----j"
,.......
--;
1--CDS----j" CUBICFEETPERI.IINUTE
1--CDR----f 1--CHS----f
CUBIC FEET PER loltNUTE OF SUPPLY AIR
~~~
_..,..,.--; ,_..,__,
1--ATV---f
•
1-+-=-H
IDENTlf"ICAnONSlAUP Orlf.~THESTM£AACHIJ[CT
PITCHOFPIPE,RISE(R):OROP(D)
e s
,..,, I*
""" ""·' ,,, DUCT DETECTOR
REFERS TO "SioiACNA" HVAC DUCT CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS. NETAL &: FlEXIBLE (lATEST EDITION}
;
1 ~
~~
APPOJFILENO.
"'--- n.s__ " - - -
! --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
MECHANICAL LEGEND AND SHEET INDEX
M0.02 10/05/2016
02 2600-140
... ~"1"'?<,
>u.t
"!1.
~-) ~o,~u..o-
LOS ANGELES UNIFIED SCHOOL DISTRICT
CEILING DIFFUSER/RETURN I EXHAUST/ TRANSFER GRILLE SCHEDULE SUPPI.Y CSI
I
~BER ~fr(!) r~~ R~ ~~~~) - : ~::~~y~:y :.~:-~;)
RETURN (R)/[KH.WST (E)
0
G-1
< 100
6"XS"
11"'X11"
e·:a·
TYxtJ" tot-200
0.10
~
18
14
13
!i
o-w
RANCE
~~ro.Hf~ ~l~VC
< 90
w:cx
0.0~
25
ITRAHSI'ER {l}l
cru
RANCE
BASIS CT DESIQIIIS TllU$
5\y~R r~ ~~~~
~
2s
111
us
12
,, 160
o.~
25
< ao
IO"X10"!5""X15"201·2
0.10
2!:1
31
24
22
15
161-260
0.05
25
81130
G-4
12"X12" 1rx11• 281•4
0.10
25
J7
28
lJ
18
2&1-~
0.05
25
lll-190
RUER TO SPECIFICAtiONS SECllON 2J 3700 FOR A
H"X14" 19"x19" 401-4
J9
J0
28
19
C-5
G-6
t&"xu.·
G-7
18"X111"
~
.
----
-
~g: ~~..C:~~~ ~
0.10
25
-"1-420
0.05
25
19\-270
=~ ~~:,.g~S
451-&
D.IO
25
421-4!10
005
25
211-~
z:'~~':'J:frs.OF
641-80(
0,10
25
481-~
0.05
25
351-<1!10
-·
--· .. ---
---
...
333 S. BEAUDRY AVENUE. ZZND FLOOR
..
o.to
C-3
e-2
M&O ·AlE SERVICES FACIUTIES SERVICES DIVISION
fOR RETURN/EXHAUST GRl.LE
LOS ANGELES, CALIFORNIA 90017 TEL:(ZI3)ZI..I-3952 fAX·(213)Z41-4868 PRo...ECT 111\..E ANO-SCHOCI.. LOCATIOI'I
Corwin Theater Repair
~
{!)UNLESSOTH£R'IIIISE NOTED ON ORA'MNCS
~""""''"'
@COORDINATE 'MTH ARCHITEClURAlORAWINCS fOR CE:IUHGCRIO AND BORDER TYPE.
Q)
APPUCABL.£ fOR GYP BO.o.RO C[IUNC ONLY. fOR t-BAR CEIUNG, F"Act CJWENSION SHALL BE 24"X24".
41500 West Olympic Scut.ar
""
@PRO'<'IDEOUCl TO NECK TRANSillOfll ASREOUIR[O.
@All.
Los Angeles High School
DAYP£RS. EOUAUllNC CRIOS. DUCT SURFAC£S. AND OTHER ACCESSORIES VISIBLr THROUGH AIR OUTlETS SHAll BE FlAT Bt.ACK FlNISH.
BOA Government Services 370 Crenshaw Blvd, Ste. [1 04 Torrance, CA 90503 Tel {310} 783-5129
EXHAUST FAN SCHEDULE
~~
~~~I ~:-~LW:J.R
~
rn
REWARKS
Cfll
ACE-0
0~~~~
Acc?-o
jtl~\!c~~J. .~~..~~l~l
COO<
G)rHtRMAl.
OVI:RI.OAO WOTOR.
IEl~, I H20
FAN RPMHP.!RPN
~OTOR f
0-07 11314 1!;20115501
ROOF"
I
CENTRlFUCAL
(DBACK DRAFT OA.IIPER.
Fl.AI -
V-ti-HZ
I'tt::/~~ISONfSI DRIVE rf>M FP~
1115-1-60
I 15~ I D.l I12115I1/6I1~DI- 111~-1-150
0
EF-6 AND EF-51
TO
AP~r
Century Siructural Engineering ANCHORAGE:
24719 Narbonne Ave. Lomita, CA 90717 Tel (310} 325-0883
DE:lAn.
CBS.
~ ~.l.gl
~ ~.l.~
C!:X!XD C!:X!XD
II:.G~~ ,.,........,,.......u>U _ _ _ .,.,....,_ ... ...,,.,
OPERAT£ DURINC BUILOINC OPERATION HOURS
-to•n..
...... ~.·~·"~~ ........ I<~"'"'''"'"'" .loONo.:llliHla--00
Unlplan Engineering, INC. 550 E. Corson Plo2o Drive, Ste 116 Corson, CA 907 46 Tel (310} 523-3993 STAWPSr.;o.,L.S
LOW PRESSURE DUCT SIZING SCHEDULE DOCT SIZ£ (IN.) UP TO 100
~ ~ ~ 12X10 OR 12"t1
15M TO 890
16X100RI4"t
900 TO 1200
22X10 OR 16"1
1210 TO 1J.50
24X10
13150T01600
24.12 J0X12 36X12
NOTES< 1. O.EAR IHSIO[ DINEHSIONS 01" DUCT SIZED AT 0.08" /100 H W.U.. 2. ANY CHANe£ IN DUCT SIZ£S PERTH( PLAN IS SU!l.£CT 10 E.HCINEER'S
~~~~.~ i£ •
;
~ c-o~*l:
\,:!....-c@ ~ e.o.~' --.::
o,-
OIVISIONOI'TH£STAT£ARCHITECT
APPROV~
[W.
IOOfTJlCI,lJCWS!Mi' r::£ n£ S!ATE ARCHITECT APPOJFILE NO
" ' - - n s _ "----
""'=====
l
MECHANICAL SCHEDULE
~
~
NOLC1""'1.<6006
~
~
~~~----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------~
M0.03 10/0~/2016
02 2600-141
·i.,.itfl"'~"~ 111
GENERAL NOTES
WCMS~SS!NG
®--
r
~o,""'"~,6
1. COORIXNATE REIIOOEL V()RK '6HH All RELATED IXSOPUNES INC.UDING ElECTRICAl AND PWLIBING.
i
2. PROVIDE ClEANING fOR INTERIOR Cf EXHAUST OUCl
LOS ANGELES UNIFIED SCHOOL DISTRICT
1 PRO\'IDE \QUill[ CALIPERS fOR All EXHAUST GUlES..
M&O ·AlE SERVICES FACILmES SERVICES DIVISION
=
STORAGE
:5:1:1 S. BEAUDRY AVENUE. 2ZND FLOOR
~14•10EXHAUST CFI~.
'V!GRUE. J70
E
LOS ANGELES, CALIFORNIA 90017
DEMOLITION GENERAL NOTES
INSTALL MANUAL
VOI.UUC OMIPER
TEL: {21J) 241·3952
FAX: (213) 2l.l·48b8 OEt.Klt..mON StW.L aE PERI'ORYtO AS NEATlY.ASPIIACTICAt,ANOWITHr.IINIIoiAL DISRuPTION TO THE Sl.ti.OWC ACTMTY.
F>
PROJECT THU AND SCH(iQ.. LOCATI()'>
Corwin Theater
REIIOVE All txrSTINC KAHCC:RS AND SIJI>PORTS ASSOOA.TED WW1 THE
Repair
DEUOUTlONWORI<.
STA~FT
COORDINATE OOIOtmON WORK WITH AU RELATEDDISCIPUNESINCLUOtNCELECTRICAL
Los Angeles High School
ANDPI.Ur.IBING.
~'
-~-
CONTRACTORSHALI.f1ELDVERIFYEXACT LOCATION 0( ALL E»lMJST DUC1 AND REGISTERS.
4600 Wert Olympic Boulvard
lolMgei..,CA90019
BOA Government Services
15
370 Crenshaw Blvd, Ste. E104
KEYNOTES
Torrance, CA 90503
Tel (310) 783-5129
0PROVID£EXHAUST!RitlE.
0
@-------
Century Structural Engineering
CONTRACTOR TO FllD VERIFY THE EXN:T LOCATION Of EXIStlNG VAIN [XHAU5T OOCi AND PQINT Of CONNECTKlN FOR NEW DUCT WORK. CONNECT 8x6 OOCI TO EXISTlt«>
24719 Narbonne Ave.
Lomita, CA 90717
DUCT,
0
:)N CHANGING ROOM RENOVATION PLAN
""'-" ,,••,,,_,.
4
:)N ~' , •.• ,,_,.
LOBBY RESTROOM RENOVATION PLAN
2
i
I
®--
II:,G~~ ..................... _"''""'
TRAl'f.if[R AIR TO COUE fROW LOBB'f 103 SPACE.
/.'\.PROVIDE OOOR UNDERCUT AT LOCATION SHOWN ON PlAN. 'V' TRANSF!R AIR TO COW£ FROt.l BIJfS/ GIRLS DRESSING
---
...... ...... .,,.,,,r,,.,..,., ~-·~~·~
""'"''
,.,~
....
....... :Oli-OllHIO
Unlplan Engineering, INC.
PROVIDE 2 SO.FT. OOOR LOI.IVER. LtM ,..PERS,
550 E. Corson Plaza Drive, Ste 116 Corson, CA 90746 Tel (310) 523-3993
<1>
~
®
Tel (310) 325-0883 PIKMDE IXlOR UNDERCUT AT LOCAOON SHOWN ON Pl.AN.
DEMOLITION KEY NOTES G)REYOIIE (t) E:XHAUSTCRILL£5.
G)RENO'o'E(E)DUCT.HAHGERS.AHOSUPPORTS.
0 0
'·::
(E) DUCT TO REWAIN IN PLACL RDIO\'£ (E) OUCT SPUTER.
G)RDIOIIE (E) 12-!i CUCT .\NO CAP OFT EXlSliNG 12•11.
~
DR
NG
/
i
~
2
1 ~...,.,.~·-~u~l
~~
~ ~
~]
UP
@------
I I
I 1
I
I
t~ [J-;~~~.,.~fj~ i; ~~·~
15
l
~
~--------;6
I
~
~=""
I 1
L_J ___JlJ-~ I
:)N
:)N
KEY PLAN
111-141
IOCNmCATIONSTAUP ON.Cf"Tl£STATrAACHr!ECT ,.tfiPQJFll..E NO.
" - - "'-- " - -
"''L-====
CHANGING ROOM & LOBBY RESTROOM DEMO AND REMODELING -..r
NORTH:)
~·~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~------------------------------------------~~~~~====~~~~~~~---------------------------------t~~~::~~~~~----------~~i KEY PLAN AND NOTES 1 ~! CHANGING ROOM DEMOLITION PLAN '"'-" ,,•. _,,_,. 3 LOBBY RESTROOM DEMOLITION PLAN '""'' ,1 •• _,,_,. 1
M2.04 10/05/2016
02 2600-142
"'\fltD~
tRill"'
GENERAL NOTES
~-~ E ~.
0EioiOU1lON SHALL BE PERFORMED AS NEATLY. AS PRACTICAL. .o.N0 'IIlli WIIWAL OISRUPTlOH TO TH( BULOINO ACTIVITY.
"'tt)OF•JJ.:O'·"S
REioiOVEAU.EX!S11NCHANCERSAND SUPPORTS ASSOOATED 'MTli THE DEioK>UTION WORI<
3.
LOS ANGELES UNIFIED SCHOOL DISTRICT
COORDINATE OEUOU'OON WORK 'Mlli All R[LAT£0 OISCIPI..JHES INil.UDING ElECTRICAL CONTRACTOR TO RELD II'ER'f'Y THE EXACT LOCAliONS Of' r.IECHANICAL EJOIAUST FAN,
M&O • AlE SERVICES FACILITIES SERVICES DIVISION
DUCTWORK AND CONTROLS.
~~~
S. BEAUDRY AVENUE. 22NO FLOOR
LOS ANGELES. CALIFORNIA 90017
TEL:(21J)241-J952
FAX:(21J)241-4868 f>R0JECrTITL£ANOSCHOCX..LOCA-TION
@}------
r
-----~-
f
I
Corwin Theater Repair
I
f
Los Angeles High School
KEY NOTES
4600 We:Jt Olympic &ul•ord
0
:r~O"'E~ ~~sio6~ir~~gr :!;:'CAL.
L<>•An9flla,CA9001g
AND CON1ROLS.
BOA Government Services
- -r----@
370 Crenshaw Bl.,.d, Ste. [104 Torrance, CA 90503 Tel (310) 783-5129
Century Structural Engineering 24719 Narbonne Ave. lomita, CA 90717 Tel (310) 325-0883
®----
.;,G~E~ ,,..,, __ ,...,.,., -"'"''"
----@
....-•.-.....-........ ~ ...... ~ .... ~ .. !
,,~
............
M11&.2n1H)8-I)(I
Uniplan Engineering, INC. 550 E. Carson Plaza Drive, Ste 116 Corson, CA 90746 Tel (31 0) 523-3993
.......,.
::::re....
r--;:------- -::6 L
~~
1
'
Q=
~
I ·~
IC(NTR;A.TIONS!AUP
u~l
e : ; •"t =-
•
&
.,._,.
~
KEY PLAN
1/8" •
1'
· ,. ,. ,. . . I &....,
1
llN.CfTI£S1ATEAAOIITECT APPOJFil£ NO.
" - - ns.__ " - -
[JI:W
I=~[]-:::!.. I ~ LJ"-- _r=] ~-~. I I
~) ~~0~ ~~MOLITION PLAN
~
~·1 ~!
·-~·
~~I ·-~:E
1
KEY PLAN AND NOTES
~li.UNI
IIIHU
I I
ROOF DEMOLITION PLANS
II.IUliNC
NORTH~
~
I
M2.05 10/05/2016
02 2600-143
,_;.\tltD!o,.
-~
GENERAL NOTES 1. CONTRACTOR SHAlL COORDINATE 'MTH All SUBCONTRACTOR FOR AU
OISOPUHE WlRK.
~OFUJ$>''\'1.$
2. SIJBCONTR.O.CTOR SHAU. ~- AU IW' ORAIIIUIICS F"OR THEIR BIDS.. 3.CON1R.O.CTORSHAll.~ALL(XISTINGCONOITIONSAHO
LOS ANGELES UNIFIED SCHOOL DISTRICT
LOCATIONS PRICft TO BIOS.
4, SOME OF PU.IWBING AND ElECTRICAL 'M)RK DESCRIPTION IS INDICA ltD ON MECHANICAL ORAIIINCS AND EACH DISOPUNE IS ALLDRAIIIINCS
RE~SIBLE
TO REVIEW
M&O ·AlE SERVICES FACILITIES SERVICES DIVISION :533 S. BEAOORY AVENUE, Z2ND FLOOR LOS ANGELES, CALIFORNIA qoot7 TEL:(2:13)21.1-3952
fAX:(213)21.1-4868 PROJECflllU~b-SC!iOO...tOCATION
III
I
~- -----~-
Corwin Theater
I
Repair Los Angeles High School
KEY NOTES
0
- --r----- - ---@
4600 West
Olym~c
BouiYard
Loo~.CA~QOig
INSTAU EXHAUST FAN, B.lO
PRO\IIOE AOAPTER CURB FOR NEW FNl AS REOURtD •.
"
BOA Government Services 370 Crenshaw Blvd, Ste. E104 Torrance, CA 90503 Tel (310) 783-5129
Century Structural Engineering 24719 Narbonne Ave. Lamito, CA 90717 Tel (310) 325-0883
®---
-
_
11;,G~E~ ........ ....... ,., ....,..
- ---------@
---
~-· ............. ................ ........ ,................ . ~
.IOt""-201!-(IJIHIO
Unlplan Engineering, INC. 550 E. Corson Plozo Drive, Ste 116 Corson, CA 90746 Tel (310) 523-3993
olo o oi1J I ~. I' F =
""' I
:::::::::::::=:1
==-+L=
~ =----@
.....u>
~
r--;::------ --::6
I
L
~ I·-~
IOENTflO,.OONSTAiof'
~.Cf"ll£S1AtEAACltiTECT
lr~l
APPOJnLE NO.
~~~I
~~;_ns_ss__
"~====
~~~~~
~~ []-~~~ fj~ i; F-l"lb
I
i
~)
ROOF REMODEL PLAN
~
t
• .i
~·I ~~
co..-lS
~
~
... 1<13
~JW'
t
ROOF REMODEL PLANS
~--~~~~-:Ql I
KEY PLAN
, . ".
1/B' • 1' ,..._,...
3,.
••. '
1I
KEY PLAN AND NOTES
I
NORTH~
11
-.aT..o.;
I
506!1
M2.06 10/~/2016
02 2600-144
DUCT- SEE PLANS
CO\CR
FOR SIZE (N) AO.-.F'lER CURB
~orUJ.-o-.._'4
LOS ANGELES UNIFIED SCHOOL DISTRICT
SECURE DUCT TO
CURB Y>ITH flO
-§•
su.s
loiiN (2)EAC!iSIOE
M&O • AlE SERVICES FACIUTIES SERVICES DIVISION 333 S. BEAOORY AVENUE. 2ZNO FLOOR LOS ANGELES, CALIFORNIA 90017 TEL: {213) 241-3952
f.I.X:(213)241-481>8
Corwin Theater Repair CEIUNCUNE\
Los Angeles High School (E} DHAUST DUCT RIS[R
=
PROWl£ TRANSITION AS
REQUIRED TO CONNECT TO Q,~,MP[RTRAYOP(NIHC
[tUNC OIFTUSER OR REGISltR ,REFER TO SPEC'S t.IFR & I.IODEL
"'"'"
f.
NEW AD ... PTEF! CURS AND SECURE 'Mll1 EXlSnNG CURB.
4(10(1West0tymplcl!out.crd loll Mgelea, Cl. 90019
BOA Government Services 370 Crenshaw Blvd, Ste. E104
NOT USED
"""" """
7
RECT. DUCT CONNECTION TO CD/CR
NOT TO
"""
Torrance, CA 90503 Tel (310) 783-5129
4
ROOF MOUNTED EXHAUST FAN DETAIL Century Structural Engineering 24719 Narbonne Ave.
Lomita, CA 90717
Tel (310) 325-0883
11;,G~E~ '""foot_ .......... _ .... ,..
RICIO DUCT TYPICAL
......... .......,,<*••"'""''"''" ~-'·-·-- ........ Z016-
Unlplan Engineering, INC. 550 E. Corson Plozo Drive, Ste 115 Corson, CA 90745 Tel (310) 523-3993 CEUNGJ
SQUAR£, ROUND Ofl
CONNECT Pl.OIUW TO COUNC DifFUSER Willi S.I.IS •. RE!'ERTOfiGUR£ 2-1 "S.W.A..C.N.A." OR APPRQIIEO EOUAL.
~~~ARr~~n:
NOTE:
TYPICAL FOR RETURN AND EXHAUST DUCT
NOT USED
.""",.
8
AIR DISTRIBUTION DETAIL (RIGID DUCT)
NOT TO
""'
NOT USED
5
BOOt..I
IDENTlflCATIONST.IJ.IF'
tt!>V++60HZ I I I
ON.C1"n£SmE.oJ!CH!T!CT APPCJfiLE NO.
I I I
"--"'-"--
"'~====
1 1\CIRCUIT
I I I
r-'BREAI
I
I
I ;--··-··-------------""\ '----: OCcuPANcY S'MTOI
: r---1
I.IANU-'1. COJITROI..
l
"----------------~
~
!
•~
t
ot:
MECHANICAL DETAILS
""'""'"""' Er-a Er-9
...
'"""[XHAUSTFANS
~.O.URUNJOI.I~Ul(SAFTERL.ASTSICNA.I.
fRON OCOJPNICY SOISOR.
~i~--------------------------------------------------~~.-~+------------------------------------,~~,-~+-------------------------------~~~--~ ~! NOT USED NOT USED EXHAUST FAN WIRING DIAGRAM
M3.01 10/~/~016
02 2600-145
;
I
' l ill
~
•~ •~~
Cl
0
u C) z
i)
i ~ I! 5~h i~5~ ~!~§ 51 I ~ ! ~ J dJ § c ! ag
hi
~ !~~
I m i".~ ~·"~ e•
~
i i·" ,a~ i !g
~
~
g
; i8
•
~~~
8~~ ~:iii
~s;
ui 3~~
I'·~~~~ '~
;
~ ~ ~
~~
·~
i
·§ e
~~g
~~~
~
~ ~
~ ~
~ ~
5 ~
~
!~
~~
i¥
I ~
l
~
@
i
~
~~ ~
~
I h••
~~
11
"&
o-
~
w~~~~~ ge ~3
~ ~~ o6
ffi
~
•
•
~0
ffi[~~!s~ H ~~···~·~ ~5 ~~a~~~~~ tiS m~·~§~ "" 82 -~ i•
~~
5§ 5~
~~
~~~ ;:~~- ~~ ~0<> ~ ~to ~~ ~
I H ~- I h ~~~~i~~~ §~
~0
£ ~ 8
H
.~ ;
~~
~~ ~i~~
~~
=~ ~~
·~
-~ ~5
"§ • ~~ • • '§
9~
~
§
~g
~~ ~·
~h 5w!S ~~
~
~
h ~; I§~ ..~~
f
~
u
~
~! §. ~· ~5
~ ~
~
C)
~~~
•.• g -5
il•
ii
I !! ~
.I
~a ~~
~ •• • • •" • i ~~~~~iii H ~
" "
"
;~t~ .~ oi
•
'
~
!ffi
·- .
n! Ii..
w
a.~
§
~ ~
~ ~
z0::
e~
•• I " ~~ ; ~ [ ~ ~ ~~ ~ ~ ~ ~~ ~ ~t e ! ~ ~ ~~ ·i ~- ~~ ~5 ~i ~~ ~~ ~
nq •
w
g
I
~
"
:2:!~!<1~~2~
~; ~0
o§
" 0::
0
;;: u.
0
w
[l_
0
u
u
w
~~ ;~ ~!
5i
.,n~~ ~ffi ~~
00:: ~~ ~~ ~~ [l_
~~ §~
.~
.. ~ 8
~§~<11~.:
i§
e ·~~~~§~ ~ •••• ~§ !'" '. ;;§ 1o~·:m d ~· ~~.h~~
~· ~~ ~! ~-~~~!~
a
I i ~~·~
~~
um~·~~
~
~ _3. z
~il ~--~~.8 • 5 ~~! 3• ~···~~ ~ ~~~-~ l il ~ ~~~ Hai• ~ ~~ ~ ~ l 8• ~· 'h"~\t .~ rJ ~ ~• g " I ~" ""! .. ::1=• !~~~~ (: .. a ~ ae ~~= §i ~g ~§~ § g I i~:J~~ 0 liU a~ • ~ ~ ~ ~·~~ ~ ·I~ ~~- 5~·-·-~ q~! ~ ~ I i 8 2 ~~ ~~~ ·~ -~~~3~~ iH ~~! ~~ m~~~~ ~ 3~~ ~ ~ ~ I •~ "F ·~~ ~~~ .c a~~ ,.. ~a a ~§~ ;· ~ ( s ~ i ~~ s·~ ~~ al ~ ~ I Jg ~~~ ~~ Uh~li ~ ~~~ 8~ ~ 8 ffi
~ ~
~
~ ~
~
I
••
••• • • ' ~
0
I
.
~
0
~
,; ;
~
:;1
:;1 a.
:;~ffo
15~
j:
" • •"
o.._,l;z
ii'
w
6z
~
w z
w G
wdz:L~-9LOZ'<;O l>()
11'-"'!1>1'1 :JaO 6ap·LOOJ\3d"\OO-Qf0-9L0<:\9LOZ\ "d
"'~
z z
g
,, I
H
N 0 0
:::; 0 ::;; w
c
. i §
n~~B~ "g~wc§ ~~ H
~~
~m~~ <~~2~w
~g
~~~~g~
~
•~p p
.~
"~
~~
00
1!1
~"~m" ~wg~ m~J (f)
i
p~,g~
~ ~ h ~~
~i~sg~ !i§~5e ~"~"§ ~·~~I"
~i
z
0
~
> w
..
t;;:g
z~~g~~~~~~~~ ~~~~i~~~~~~~~~g~.;g~~-~~lie
0:: fD fD
<(
~~~
~~ gHm
l-
j
g~· ~~~
a ,_w
w
i >I
[]
.,e
-
DB f
1f I I
(f)
~
z z
0
i= :::; 0
:::;
w
0
wdSt=t-910~''00 PO
""n
o""lft'l'l ~"P"l:OOJ\3d"\OO-&r0-9lOZ\910Z\'d
~-~~~ ~~
~~
I (EX 1ST IN G) P N L 'W 1 H
t.IOUNTINCl;SURFACE VOLTAGE:277/460V.JI?J.4W
NORUAL BRANCH
c·
VOLT-AI.IPERES 0A 08 OC 1 I TOILETS,CUSTODIAN STORAGE SPARE
2200
20 ld21 30 13!1 20 IJI•
DESCRIPTION
7.5 HP HYD.PLATi=-ORU 2880 2880
tiH-¥o
2860
7 5 HP HYD.-PLATFORM
2960
301311
2880 288(1
2860
1120 20 211 1120 20 1
6000
131• 20 I~ 1 20 111 211
I 1 I
S"Pi"RE
11120 211
1 I
SP".iiCE S'P'A'CE
2122 20
13 1-c:::-:f.±H.C*
6700
I
I
SPACE 20 HP ELEVATOR
6700 6700 1120 I Jjl
SPACE SPACE SPACE TRANSFROMEA "WXB'
5000
1 1
VA
+OTHER•~VA TOTALLOAD•~VA
1180T6TI-/T(zoh/d20i 1
~-~~~Ito!~~ I:
R----u-toJ.l04.106 RI.I.I02,103.104.117
FOLLOW SPOTS-RA-1.104 HYD.PLATFORI.I PJT
96AUPS
M&O - AlE SERVICES FACIUTIES SERVICES DIVISION
ORAt.IASTUD!O ~ ~
33:5 S. BEAUDRY AVENUE. 22ND FLOOR LOS ANGELES, CALIFORNIA 90017 TEL: (21:5) 21.1-~952 FAX·(213)21.1-48b8
LOBB'ITHiiT
811440
a
~
filnoTa 1l3]15lllh.I15IJI1
...
1 1
li20j11)2ol2.0)1
SOUND RACK ~ LECTURE-WALL WASHERS LECTURE-WALL WASHERS I.IOTORIZEO SCREEN I.IOTORIZEO SCREEN
1-20nJ•20 I 20 l!:li 2011 I I 20JTJi20 I I I 20 J1 •o 20 L
CATWALK SPARE SPARE VAPERPHASE)5245jssasl7545 CONTINUOUS LOAD 15600
Xl25 19500
Corwin Theater Repair
Rt.l.105,107 ~
m
ljLECTURE·WALLWASH~--
5000 1746017460 17-460 VA!l'ER-PHASE 28540 25940 25240 TOTAL VA PER PHASE 79720 !TOTAL CONNECTED VA NOTES EXISTING LOADS
VA PER-PHASEI11060 I 6460 17780 0
oc
Rl.l.107.106.118 RLI.107.120
1 1
~~
LOS ANGELES UNIFIED SCHOOL DISTRICT
DESCRIPTION
VOLT-AI.IPERES
"lfO'fSi>RESS&TOILET GIRLS DRESS & TOILET fTHAi.L&.PIANO ~- HALL & STORAGE 1 LOBBY(WALLWASHERS) I LOBBY(WALLWASHERS) I JI4HPFOLDING OR
5000 1120 1•11421
X1.2.~
LOCATION: CUSTODIAN Rt.l,117 t.IAINLUGS ONLY
SPARE
4900
CONTINUOUS LOAD
l "W ILC"
SPARE
5600 SPACE SPACE SPACE ~ ~ SPARE
(EXISTING) PN NORI.IALBRANCH
08
2680
2880 SPARE ~ SPARE ~ SPACE SPACE PANEL"WIHB'
400A·3P UAIN CB
VOLT·At.IPERES
~ 1 I 7.5 HP HYD.PLATFORM
t.IOUNTING·SURFACE VOLTAGE.12.01208V,J0,4W
LOCATION: CUSTODIAN Rt.l.117 400At.IPBUS
10.000 AIC SYU
~ ~
•
5785 5085 4825 VA PER PHASE 11030 10670 12.370 TOTAL VA PER PHASE TOTAL CONNECTED VA
VA
fDTHEA:~VA TOTALLOAD:~VA
d5A~PS
Los Angeles High School 4600 West Olympic Bout.ord
LoaMqei .... CA'l00\9
BOA Government Services 370 Crenshaw Blvd, Ste. El 04 Torrance, CA 90503 Tel (310) 783-5129
Century Structural Engineering
XISfiNG LOADS
24719 Narbonne Ave. Lomita, CA 90717 Tel (310) 325-0883
_
~~~G~~ ......... _.._ .... ,., ..... ,.. t ............ , ............ .........
,~
---
..... ~ .... ~ .. 1<...... , ... ,. .. ,
,..M.ZOii-
NEW LIGHTING FIXTURE SCHEDULE
(EXIST ltl G) ?N L "W 1 LE B.
t.IOUNTING:SURFACE
LAMP(S) I BAI..LAST WATTAGl: VOlTAGf.)APPUCATIONI
MAf«JFACn.IIWit.NO
~~,~·-·~-
l'U'~ ... l\10
VOLTAGE: 120/209V.31i;1.4W
EMERGENCY BRANCH
I,Btmi'DRWElLOCO.ID'I
ltO.OI:IalAOilVAIO
DESCRIPTION
VOLT-AMPERES "A 06 OC
I' I' I' I' T
c
S
L
LOCATION: CU S TOO IAN A 1.1.117
1!1.000 AIC SYU
L
100 AJ,IP BUS
I~ I~ I~
100A-3P MAIN CB
Uniplan Engineering, INC. 550
E. Corson Ploza Drive, Ste 116 Corson, CA 907 46 Tel (310) 523-3993
I :~LT -~~PER~~ J
DESCRIPTION
STAWPS/SEAlS
E p
G- 1 '"'~Cf'.FREEliDLQf!SClUICE l'ml-IBATnR'o'IIA.OilP (0(1.......-E(I:;JC;o.~
G-2 ..... Nf'EHO,(:EFR!l;:LIDLOITSD.R:e !LOWL!.Y!W ~
K1
10eoj_
DIMMER-AISLE I I -DIMMER-AISLE DIMMER-AISLE LOBBY AND EXIT LTS 1 I EXIT LTS STUDIO 1 I HALL AND STUDIO
IREBSIDM!HORYAIQO.L-TA'Il
ti20III2120II 1 I 2 o I ~ I 41 2 o I 1 1I20I5I5I2CI! 1IZOIJ!ai20IJI1 1)20
900 90015 1800 1080 108016
'S"iiA1iE SPARE SPARE SPARE
1
201nl•z! 20 l1~lu! lO It I 120 hshe\20 It /l/20 111ezo t 19 zo lO
L-H-rm"IO VA PER PHASE I 28SO I 1S80 t 1S80
K2
,REU'$SEO .. ~lER;:IRVAIQO.LfeiSTAt
-
CONTINUOUS LOAD 10220
FE
~=~~==::::::=
~
TOTALLOAO;~VA ~~
-~
•»~
DIMMER-AISLE 900
11401
DIMMER-AISLE 900 I OIMI.JER.AISLE l(f). i.5 HPSUMP PUMPS
1140 1140 21500
500
EUVATOR SHAFT AU ELEVATOR SHAFT AU
SPARE SPARE 2720]2540I2040IVAPERI'HASE 56001452014020 \TOTAL VA PER PHASE ITO TAL CONNECTED VA 14140
VA
-,-OTHER•~VA
Al\.toltf.NfiO.IilHl
w~
Xt25 12775
611080
46AIJPS
NOTES -E):::iSTING LOADS
CEILING OUTLETS• 56 CONY. OUTLETS• I UISC.OUTLETS• 1
'"""
i t ~!
0
~~~-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------J
IDDITFICJillONST.o.uf'
1W.Q"TI£SI-'TE.o.'IO!rriD Af'P{lJFIL£ NO.
" ' - - n s _ "----
""'=====
ELECTRICAL FIXTURE SCHEDULE AND PANEL SCHEDULE
E003 10/05/2016
ISH
"''
02 2600-148
•
SECTION 02 4116 DEMOLITION
PART 1- GENERAL 1.01
SUMMARY A.
B.
•
1.
Protection of existing improvements to remain.
2.
Cleaning existing improvements to remain.
3.
Disconnecting and capping utilities.
4.
Removing debris, waste materials, and equipment.
5.
Removal of items for performance of the Work.
6.
Salvageable items to be retained by the Owner.
Related Requirements: 1.
Division 01 - General Requirements.
2.
Section 0 1 II 00 - Summary of Work.
3.
Section 0 I 5000- Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls.
4.
Section 01 7329 - Cutting and Patching.
5.
Section 0 I 74I9- Construction and Demolition Waste Management.
SUBMITTALS
1.02 A.
Shop Drawings: Submit Shop Drawings indicating the extent of items and systems to be removed. Indicate items to be salvaged or items to be protected during demolition. Indicate locations of utility terminations and the extent of abandoned lines to be removed. Include details indicating methods and location of utility terminations. QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.03
•
Section Includes: Furnishing labor, materials and equipment necessary for demolition, dismantling, cutting and alterations as indicated, specified, or required for completion ofthe Work. Includes items such as the following:
A.
Perform the Work of this section by workers skilled in the demolition of buildings and structures. Perform the Work of this section under direct superintendence at all times.
B.
Prior to commencement of Work, schedule a walkthrough with the OAR, to confirm Owner property items have been removed from scheduled Work areas. Identify and mark remaining property items and schedule their removal. 10/0112011
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
DEMOLITION 02 4116-1
•
C.
Coordinate demolition for the correct sequence, limits, and methods. Schedule demolition Work to create least possible inconvenience to the public and facility operations.
D.
Related Standard: ANSIIASSE A10.6. PROJECT CONDITIONS
1.04
A.
Drawings may not indicate in detail all demolition Work to be performed. Examine existing conditions to determine the full extent of required demolition.
B.
Repair damage to existing improvements or damage due to excessive demolition.
c.
Provide all measures to avoid excessive damage from inadequate or improper means and methods, improper shoring, bracing or support.
D.
If conditions are encountered that varies from those indicated, promptly notify the Architect for clarification before proceeding.
PART 2- PRODUCTS HANDLING OF MATERIALS
2.01
•
A.
Items scheduled for salvage by the Owner shall be delivered to a location designated by the OAR. Items shall be cleaned, packaged and labeled for storage.
B.
Items scheduled for reuse shall be stored on the Project site and protected from damage, theft and other deleterious conditions .
PART 3- EXECUTION GENERAL
3.01 A.
B.
1.
Do not commence demolition until safety partitions, barricades, warning signs and other forms of protection are installed. Refer to Section 01 5000 Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls.
2.
Provide safeguards, including warning signs, lights and barricades, for protection of workers, occupants, and the public.
If safety of existing construction appears to be endangered, take immediate measures to correct such conditions; cease operations and immediately notify the OAR. DEMOLITION
3.02
•
Protection:
A.
Do not throw or drop materials. Furnish ramps or chutes as required by the Work.
B.
Remove existing construction only to extent necessary for proper installation of Work and interfacing with existing construction. Cut back finished surfaces to straight, plumb or level lines as required for a smooth transition .
8736 CORWINTHEATERREPAIR&P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/0 l/2011 DEMOLITION 024116-2
•
c. 3.03
CUTTING EXISTING CONCRETE
A.
Cutting of existing concrete shall be performed by skilled workers familiar with the requirements and space necessary for placing concrete. Perform concrete cutting with concrete cutting wheels and hand chisels. Do not damage concrete intended to remain.
B.
Extent of cutting of structural concrete shall be as indicated on Drawings. Cutting of non-structural concrete shall be as indicated on Drawings or as reviewed by the Architect or structural engineer. Replace concrete demolished in excess of amounts indicated.
c.
Prior to cutting or coring concrete, determine locations of hidden utilities or other existing improvements and provide necessary measures to protect them from damage.
3.04
REMOVAL OF EXISTING PLUMBING AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT AND SERVICES A.
3.05
•
•
Where openings are cut oversize or in improper locations, replace or repair to required condition .
Remove existing plumbing and electrical equipment fixtures and services not indicated for reuse and not necessary for completion of the Work. Remove abandoned lines and cap unused portions of existing lines. REMOVAL OF OTHER MATERIALS
A.
Masonry: Cut back to joint lines and remove mortar without damaging units to remain. Allow space for repairs to backing where applicable .
B.
Woodwork: Cut or remove to a joint or panel line.
C.
Roofing: Remove as required, including accessory components such as insulation and flashings. At penetrations through existing roofing, trim cut edges back to sound roofing with openings restricted to the minimum size necessary to receive Work.
D.
Sheet Metal: Remove back to joint, lap, or connection. Secure loose and unfastened ends or edges and provide a watertight condition. Re-seal as required.
E.
Glass: Remove broken or damaged glass and clean rebates and stops of glazing channels.
F.
Modular materials such as acoustical ceiling panels, resilient tile, or ceramic tile: Remove to a natural joint without leaving damaged or defective Work where joining new Work. After flooring removal, clean substrates to remove setting materials and adhesives.
G.
Gypsum Board: Remove to a panel joint line on a stud or support line.
H.
Plaster: Saw cut plaster on straight lines, leaving a minimum 2-inch width of firmly attached metal lath for installing new lath and plaster.
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 DEMOLITION 02 4116-3
•
I.
PATCHING
3.06 A.
•
Patch or repair materials to remain when damaged by the performance of the Work of this section. Finish material and appearance of patch and/or repair Work shall match existing. CLEANING
3.07
•
Remove existing improvements not specifically indicated or required but necessary to perform Work. Cut to clean lines, allowing for installation of Work .
A.
Clean existing materials to remain with appropriate tools and equipment.
B.
Protect existing improvements during cleaning operations.
c.
Debris shall be dampened by fog water spray prior to transporting by truck.
D.
Debris pick-up area shall be kept broom-clean and shall be washed daily with clean water.
E.
Remove waste and debris, other than items to be salvaged. Turn over salvaged items to Owner, or store and protect for reuse where required. Continuously clean up and remove items as demolition Work progresses.
F. site .
Remove rubbish, debris, and waste materials and legally dispose of off the Project
END OF SECTION
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/0112011 DEMOLITION 02 4116-4
140922
•
SECTION 02 8213 ASBESTOS ABATEMENT AND ASBESTOS RELATED DISTURBANCE PART I-GENERAL SUMMARY
1.01 A.
B.
•
1.
Abatement of building and/or structure related Asbestos.
2.
Removal of building and/or structure related Asbestos.
3.
Disturbance ofbuilding and/or structure related Asbestos.
4.
Refer to Section 02 2600 Attachment "A" for FETU Report Phase I & Phase II
Related Requirements: 1.
Section 00 3126 - Existing Hazardous Material Information
2.
Division 01 -General Requirements .
3.
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency Regulations for Asbestos (Title 40, Code of Federal Regulations, Part 61, Subparts A and B, and Part 763, Subpart E.)
4.
Title 8, Article 4, California Code of Regulations Construction Industry Safety Orders, Section 1529 "Asbestos" or current revised California regulations.
5.
South Coast Air Quality Management District (SCAQMD) Rule 1403.
SECTION DEFINITIONS AND ACRONYMS
1.02
•
Section Includes:
A.
Abatement - Procedures to. control fiber release from Asbestos Containing Materials or Asbestos Containing Construction Materials. Includes Removal, Encapsulation, Enclosures, Repair, Demolition, and Renovation activities but does not include Asbestos Related Disturbance.
B.
AHERA- Asbestos Hazard Emergency Response Act, 40 CFR, Part 763, Subpart E, and subsequent amendments.
c.
Air Filtration and Ventilation System - A portable exhaust system, equipped with HEP A filtration, and capable of maintaining a constant air flow into a Regulated Area from adjacent areas and exhausted outside the Regulated Area .
09/22/2014 ASBESTOS ABATEMENT AND ASBESTOS RELATED DISTURBANCE 02 8213-1
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
-
,,_
,.
·-
~
"'
'
........
--~-
'"~
~--
..
'
... .......... :. . ..... . ~
-,
~
-.
140922
•
•
•
D.
Amended Water - Water to which a surfactant (wetting agent) has been added .
E.
ANSI- American National Standards Institute.
F.
Asbestos - Means the asbestiform varieties of chrysotile (Serpentine); crocidolite (Riebecktite); amosite (cummingtonitegrunerite); anthophyllite; tremolite; and actinolite.
G.
Asbestos Containing Construction Material (ACCM) . .:. Means any manufactured construction material which contains more than one tenth of one percent (0.1 percent) Asbestos by weight.
H.
Asbestos Containing Material (ACM)- Means any material containing more than onepercent (1 percent) Asbestos.
I.
Asbestos Containing Waste (Non-hazardous)- Non-Friable Asbestos Containing Material including, but not limited to, floor covering, roofing materials and cementitious materials requiring disposal.
J.
Asbestos Containing Waste (Hazardous)- Friable Asbestos Containing Materials and Asbestos contaminated objects and debris requiring disposal.
K.
Asbestos Related Disturbance- is the drilling, coring, removal or similar disturbance of ACCM or ACM not to exceed three square feet in any one opening and not to disturb 100 square feet or greater cumulatively on any one project (contract) .
L.
ASTM - American Society for Testing and Materials.
M.
Building ID Number or Code - A six digit alphanumeric identification code assigned to each building on an Owner site, also referred to as the insurance code, ID number or similar terms.
N.
Bulk Samples- Samples of building or other materials collected for analysis to determine the presence and quantities of Asbestos.
0.
Class I, II, III, and IV asbestos work has the meaning as defined in California Code of Regulations Title 8, Section 1529.
P.
Clean Room - An uncontaminated area or room, which is a part of the worker Decontamination Enclosure System with provisions for storage of worker's street clothes and clean protective equipment.
Q.
Competent Person - Has the same meaning as defined in the California Code of Regulations Title 8, as it relates to, "Competent Person."
R.
Controlled Disturbance - An activity by which a contractor disturbs an asbestos containing material or an asbestos containing construction material using the work practices allowed for in this Specification and in compliance with regulatory limitations .
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
09/22/2014 ASBESTOS ABATEMENT AND ASBESTOS RELATED DISTURBANCE 02 8213-2
140922
•
•
•
S.
Curtained Doorway - A device to allow ingress and egress from one room to another while permitting minimal air movement between the rooms, .typically constructed by placing two overlapping sheets of plastic over an exiting or temporarily framed doorway, securing each along the top ofthe doorway, securing the vertical edge of one sheet along . one vertical side of the doorway and securing the vertical edge of the other sheet along the opposite vertical side of the doorway. Other effective designs may be submitted for review.
T.
Decontamination- The process of eliminating Asbestos contamination from building surfaces, objects, and property, by cloths, mops, or other utensils dampened with water and disposed of afterwards as Asbestos contaminated waste.
U.
Decontamination Enclosure System- Means an enclosed area, which is adjacent and connected to the Regulated Area, consisting of an Equipment Room, Shower Room, and Clean Room for the Decontamination of workers, materials, and equipment contaminated with Asbestos.
V.
Demolition - The wrecking or taking out of any load supporting structural member of a facility together with any related handling operations.
W.
DOSH - Division of Occupational Safety & Health or Cal/OSHA.
X.
DOT - Department of Transportation.
Y.
DTSC- Department of Toxic Substances Control.
Z.
Encapsulating Material - A liquid material applied to Asbestos Containing Materials which controls the possible release of Asbestos fibers from the material either by creating a membrane over the surface (bridging agent) or by penetrating .into the material and binding its components together (penetrating Encapsulating Material).
AA.
Encapsulation - The application of an Encapsulating Material to Asbestos Containing Materials to prevent the release of Asbestos fibers into the air.
BB.
Enclosure - The construction or application of an airtight, impermeable, permanent barrier around Asbestos Containing Material to control the release of Asbestos fibers into the air.
CC.
Equipment Room - A room within the worker Decontamination Enclosure System with provisions for storage of used clothing and equipment and for controlled transfer of materials and equipment into and out of the regulated area.
DD.
Facility Component- Means any part of a facility including equipment.
EE.
FETU- Facilities Environmental Technical Unit.
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
09/22/2014 ASBESTOS ABATEMENT AND ASBESTOS RELATED DISTURBANCE 02 8213-3 -·-
..>;::·--
•
•
·•••• -~·
...... - -
140922
•
•
•
FF.
Fixed Object- A piece of equipment, furniture, or improvement in the Work area, which cannot be removed from the Work area .
GG.
Friable Asbestos - Asbestos Containing Material. which, when dry, can be crumbled, pulverized or reduced to a powder by hand pressure or as defined by current regulations.
HH.
Glove Bag Technique -.A method with limited applications for removing small amounts of Asbestos Containing Material from short piping runs, valves, joints, elbows, and other non-planar surfaces in a Work area. The glove bag assembly is a manufactured or fabricated device consisting of a glove bag (typically constructed of 6 mil transparent polyethylene or polyvinyl chloride plastic), two inward projecting long sleeves gloves, an internal tool pouch, and labeled for Asbestos waste. The glove bag is constructed and installed in such a manner that it surrounds the object or material to be removed and contains asbestos fibers released during the process. Workers who are permitted to perform the Glove Bag Technique shall be thoroughly trained, experienced, and skilled in this method.
II.
Hazardous Waste- Means Friable Asbestos generated and prepared for waste disposal. Does not include non-friable material or materials containing one-percent or less of Asbestos as determined by PLM and/or the point counting method.
JJ.
HEPA Filter- Means a filtering system capable oftrapping and retaining at least 99.97 percent of mono-dispersed particles 0.3 microns in diameter or larger. For respiratorS this shall include NIOSH rated P-100 cartridges only .
KK.
HEP A Vacuum - A vacuum system furnished with HEPA filtration. ·
LL.
High Volume Vacuum - A vacuum system with the capacity to collect material through a · four inch diameter hose a minimum distance of 150 feet. This system shall be furnished with HEP A Filter at the air exhaust port and water applicators within the hopper.
MM.
HV AC - Heating, Ventilation, and Air Conditioning System.
NN.
Location Code - Refers to a unique four digit numeric code assigned by the Owner to each of its Project sites.
00.
Lockdown Coat- A material applied to surfaces where Asbestos has been completely removed. The. manufacturer shall determine the concentration of this material.
PP.
Member- A component part of a structure complete in itself.
QQ.
Movable Object- A portable piece of equipment or furniture in the Work area, which can be removed from the Work area.
RR.
NESHAP- National Emission Standards for Hazardous Air Pollutants (40 CFR Part 61 ) .
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
09/22/2014 ASBESTOS ABATEMENT AND ASBESTOS RELATED DISTURBANCE 02 8213-4
140922
•
SS.
NIOSH- National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health .
TT.
Outside Air - Air outside· of buildings and structures.
UU.
Owner Consultant (OC)- Refers to the firm, company or individual designated by the Owner.
VV.
PCM - Phase Contrast Microscopy as it relates to clearance air, personnel exposure assessment, and ambient air monitoring. This procedure must follow the NIOSH Method 7400, Asbestos Fibers by PCM.
WW. PLM -Polarized Light Microscopy used for bulk sample analysis with dispersion staining for the determination and quantifying of Asbestos in Bulk Samples building materials.
•
XX.
Regulated Area - Designated rooms, spaces or areas of the Project in which asbestos Abatement actions are to be performed or which may become contaminated as a result of Abatement activities. A contained Work area is a Work area, which has been sealed and furnished with a Decontamination Enclosure System. A non-contained Work area is an isolated or controlled access Work area, which has not been sealed or furnished with a Decontamination Enclosure System.
YY.
Removal - Means operations where ACM and/or PACM is removed or stripped from structures or substrates including Demolition.
ZZ .
Renovation- Means the modifying of any existing structure, facility, or portion thereof.
AAA. SCAQMD- South Coast Air Quality Management District. BBB. Shower Room- A room between the Clean Room and the Equipment Room in the worker Decontamination Enclosure System furnished with hot and cold running water controllable at the tap, and suitably arranged for complete showering during Decontamination. CCC. Small Scale Short Duration- Such work not to exceed amounts greater than those which can be contained in a single glove bag or may not exceed amounts which can be contained in a single prefabricated mini-enclosure. Such an enclosure shall conform spatially and geometrically to the localized work area, in order to perform its intended containment function, and as completely defined in 40CFR, 763, Subpart E, Appendix C. DDD. Staging Area- Areas near the Waste Transfer Airlock where containerized Asbestos waste is temporarily placed prior to permanent removal from the Work area. EEE.
•
Surfactant- A chemical wetting agent added to water .
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
09/22/2014 ASBESTOSABATEMENTAND ASBESTOS RELATED DISTURBANCE 02 8213-5
140922
FFF.
•
TEM - Transmission Electron Microscopy as defined for Asbestos clearance air monitoring within AHERA. This procedure must follow the NIOSH Method 7402, Asbestos Fibers by TEM.
GGG. TSI- Thermal System Insulation as defined in AHERA .. HHH. USEP A or EPA~ United States Environmental Protection Agency. III.
Visible Emissions - Any emissions from a known or suspected Asbestos Containing Material that is visually discernible.
JJJ.
Waste Transfer Airlock - A Decontamination system provided for transferring containerized waste from inside to outside of the Work area.
1.03
•
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES A.
The Owner has a zero tolerance policy for uncontrolled Asbestos releases during construction or Abatement Work. Ari Asbestos release requiring an emergency response is any uncontrolled release of Asbestos Containing Construction Materials. The Owner shall be immediately notified of such uncontrolled releases.
B.
Pre-qualified Asbestos Abatement Subcontractors are not permitted to subcontract any Abatement work to a lower tier Subcontractor without the prior written approval of the Owner.
C.
Where ACM is damaged or disturbed, except during Controlled Disturbance or Abatement, Work in that room shall. cease, the room be vacated immediately, the Owner Consultant notified of the disturbance with corrective action provided as required by the Owner Consultant.
1.04
ROLES AND RESPONSIBILITIES A.
•
1.05
Roles and Functions: 1.
Coordinate the Work of this section directly with the Owner and/or Owner Consultant.
2.
Work under this section shall be performed in strict accordance with applicable Federal, State, and Local regulations, standards, and codes governing asbestos Abatement and any other Work performed in conjunction with the Asbestos Abatement Work.
3.
The most recent edition of any relevant regulation, standard, document, or code is in effect. Where conflict among the requirements or with this Specification exists, the most stringent requirement shall be provided.
SITE SECURITY
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
09/22/2014 ASBESTOS ABATEMENT AND ASBESTOS RELATED DISTURBANCE 02 8213-6
140922
•
A.
The Work area shall be restricted to authorized, trained, and protected personnel. A list of authorized personnel shall be established by the Owner Consultant prior to commencement of the Work and posted at the entrance of the Regulated Area.
B.
Report to the Owner Consultant any unauthorized entry into the Regulated Area. Following notification, a written report of the incident shall be provided to the Owner Consultant.
C.
A logbook shall be maintained at the entrance of the Regulated Area. Persons entering the Regulated area shall record their name, company affiliation, time in, and time out for each entry and exit.
D.·
Access to the contained area shall be through the worker Decontamination Enclosure System or other room established when worker Decontamination Enclosure System is not required. Other means of access shall be blocked or locked to prevent entry to or exit from the Work area. The only exceptions are the waste pass-out airlock, which shall be sealed except during the Removal of containerized Asbestos waste from the Work area, and emergency exits in case of fire or accident. Emergency exits shall be operable from inside the Work area; however they shall be sealed with polyethylene sheeting and tape.
E.
Maintain Regulated Area security during Abatement Work. Regulated Areas and ancillary equipment accessible to non-authorized personnel shall be protected from unauthorized access by constructing a minimum barrier of3/8 inch CDX plywood supported by 2 by 4 studs, 16 inches on center. Height shall be as required to safely access Regulated Area . An access door shall be provided with hasp and padlock sufficient to .prevent unauthorized entry. A key shall be provided to the Owner and Owner Consultant. Required barriers within an occupied building shall be furnished with sheathing as required by state and local fire protection regulations.
F.
The protective barrier for a High Volume Vacuum shall be a minimum of eight feet in height. Barriers for these systems may be constructed of chain link type fencing instead of the specified barriers. Such fencing, if provided, shall be covered with an opaque covering resistant to environmental conditions. This barrier system shall be maintained at times · while the enclosed equipment is on the Project site.
G.
Unless otherwise specified, remove barriers upon completion of the Work ofthis section. Repair and/or replace to original condition, damage resulting from installation, use, and removal of the barriers.
•
\
1.06
•
EMERGENCY PLANNING
A.
Emergency planning and procedures shall be developed, submitted, reviewed, and agreed to by the Owner prior to the commencement of Abatement Work.
B.
Emergency procedures shall be provided in the written languages understood by employees working on the Project and shall be prominently posted at the entrance ofthe
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
09/22/2014 ASBESTOS ABATEMENT AND ASBESTOS RELATED DISTURBANCE 02 8213-7
140922
Decontamination Enclosure System. Prior to entering the Work area, parties must read . . and sign these procedures to acknowledge. receipt and understanding of the Work site layout, location of emergency exits, and emergency procedures.
•
•
C.
Emergency planning shall consider the effects of fire, explosion, toxic atmospheres, electrical hazards, slips~ trips and falls, confined spaces, and heat related injury. Develop and provide written procedures and training to employees.
D.
Employees shall be trained irt evacuation procedures in the event of workplace emergencies.
E.
In the event of non-life threatening situations requiring medical treatment, injured or otherwise incapacitated employees shall decontaminate following normal procedures with assistance from fellow workers if necessary, before exiting the Work area.
F.
In the event of life threatening injury or illness requiring immediate medical treatment, worker Decontamination shall be given minimum priority. Provide measures to stabilize the injured worker, remove them from the Work area and secure proper medical treatment.
G.
Telephone numbers of emergency response personnel shall be prominently posted at the entrance of the Decontamination Enclosure System along with the location ofthe nearest telephone. In addition to the 911 emergency number, post the address and telephone number of the nearest emergency medical services provider.
H.
Provide at least one employee on the Project site at times during progress ofAbatement work that is trained and certified in first aid and cardiopulmonary resuscitation (CPR). This employee shall be identified by name and proof of training shall be provided to the Owner Consultant prior to the commencement of the Work of this section.
I.
Provide at least one 4A/60BC dry chemical extinguisher in the Equipment Room and one at each corner of contained areas in excess of 1, 000 square feet. Workers shall be trained in the proper operation of fire extinguishers.
J.
Emergency exits shall be provided and clearly marked with arrows or other clearly visible markings to permit easy identification from anywhere within the Work area. Exits shall be secured to prevent access from uncontaminated areas while still permitting emergency egress. Exits shall be properly sealed with polyethylene sheeting, which can be cut to permit emergency egress. Emergency exits may lead through the worker Decontamination Enclosure, the waste removal airlock or other alternative exits as required by fire officials.
1.07
LICENSING
A.
•
The Work of this section shall be performed by an entity duly licensed in the State of California in accordance with the provisions of Chapter 9 of Division 3 of the Business
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
09/22/2014 . ASBESTOS ABATEMENT AND ASBESTOS RELATED DISTURBANCE 02 8213-8
140922
and Professions Code, as amended. The Abatement work of this section shall be . performed by an entity holding a license with an "ABS" Asbestos Certification as issued by the Contractors State License Board.
•
B.
ASBESTOS RELATED REQUIREMENTS
1.08
A.
•
•
The entity performing the Work of this section, other than Asbestos Related Disturbance involving less than 100 square feet shall be registered with the Department oflndustrial Relations in accordance with the provisions of Section 6501.5 of the California Labor Code.
B.
Qualifications: 1.
Comply with the provisions of the California Labor Code, Division 5, Part 1, as it pertainsto safety in employment and the applicable provisions of Title 8, Chapter 4, Subchapters 1 through21, California Code of Regulations (CCR) as it pertains to Occupational Safety and Health, and Subchapter 7, Section 5208 Article 4, and Section 1529, Asbestos regulations.
2.
Where Electrical Work is required in a Regulated Area this work shall be · performed as required in Division 16 and personnel who enter a Contained and Regulated Class I and II Asbestos work area are required to possess a current EPA certification as an Asbestos worker. Personnel who enter a Class III Asbestos Related Disturbance work area shall require personnel trained in accordance with AHERA Operations and Maintenance training requirements.
Abatement Activities: 1.
The Asbestos Abatement work shall be performed by persons who comply with applicable Federal, State, and local regulations including AHERA certified training.
2.
Supply labor, materials, ser-Vices, insurance, permits, and equipment necessary to perform the Work in accordance with applicable Federal, State; and Local regulations and this Specification.
3.
· For Class I asbestos work, collect pre-Abatement air samples. Results shall be submitted prior to commencement of the Work of this section. Include location of Samples, name of air sampling professional, equipment, and methods utilized for sampling and analysis.
4.
Submit weekly job progress reports detailing Abatement activities for Projects with schedules that exceed thirty days of Abatement work. Include review of progress with respect to previously established Milestones and schedules, major problems and action taken, injury reports, equipment breakdown, and air sampling results .
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
09/22/2014 ASBESTOS ABATEMENT AND . ASBESTOS RELATED DISTURBANCE 02 8213-9
140922
•
•
C.
Within five workdays of transport and/or disposal, submit copies of transport manifests, disposal receipts, and weight certificates for Asbestos waste removed from the Work area during the Abatementprocess. Weight certificates shall indicate in pounds the net Weight of waste disposed from the Project site as indicated on the manifest.
6.
Submit copies on a daily basis of the Work site entry logbooks.
7.
Submit logs on a weekly basis documenting filter changes on respirators, HEP A Vacuums, HEP A Filtered ventilation units, water filtration units, and other approved engineering controls.
8.
Submit results of materials testing conducted during Asbestos Abatement work for purposes of utilization during such activities. (i.e., depth test, substitution materials, etcetera).
9.
Where Decontamination Enclosure System is required, post at the·entrance a list containing the names, addresses, and telephone. numbers of the entity performing the Work of this section, designated Competent Person, the Owner and/or Owner Consultant, the testing laboratory and any other personnel who may be required to access the Work area or perform services during the Abatement Work.
10 .
For employee review, post at the entry of the Work area a copy of the scope of Work, special conditions, the current standard Specifications, and the applicable prevailing wage. . .
'
Asbestos Related Disturbance: 1.
The Asbestos Related Disturbance Work shall be performed by persons who comply with applicable Federal, State, and local regulations including AHERA certified training.
2.
Within ten days of analysis, submit results of air sampling data collected for Cal/OSHA compliance air monitoring during the course of the Asbestos Related Disturbance (Class III asbestos work). If this data is used to discontinue use of employee protective equipment then the data shall be provided before discontinuing use of protective equipment.
3.
Within five workdays oftransport and/or disposal of Asbestos Containing Waste, submit copies of transport manifests and/or disposal receipts.
SUBMITTALS
1.09
A.
•
5.
Provide in accordance with Division 01 and this section.
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
09/22/2014 ASBESTOS ABATEMENT AND ASBESTOS RELATED DISTURBANCE 02 8213-10
140922
•
•
•
B.
Prior to commencement of the Asbestos Abatement work of this section, submit the following notices, documentation, Shop Drawings, and Product Data: 1.
For Projects involving Asbestos Containing Materials 100 square feet or more, provide a typed written notification in accordance with Rule 1403 of SCAQMD and 40 CFR Part 61.146 of Subpart M to the SCAQMD, and to and in accordance with the Division of Occupational Safety and Health prior to start of the Work. For Projects within the geographical limits of Los Angeles City, provide an additional copy of the SCAQMD notice to the Los Angeles City Fire Department, marked "COURTESY COPY."
2.
Submit to the Owner, satisfactory proof the required permits, site location, and arrangements for transport and disposal of Asbestos Containing Waste materials have been completed in accordance with California Health and Safety Code, Section 25143.7. Obtain and submit a copy of handling procedures and a list of protective equipment utilized for Asbestos disposal at the landfill.
3.
Submit to the Owner satisfactory documentation that employees, including foremen, supervisors, and any other company personnel or agents who may be exposed to airborne Asbestos fibers or who may be responsible for any aspects of Asbestos Abatement work or Asbestos Related Disturbance have received · adequate training that includes, at a minimum, information as described within this section and as required by AHERA .
4.
Prior to commencement of Abatement Work, personnel required to construct and enter the Work area or handle containerized Asbestos Containing Materials shall have received adequate training, in accordance with the requirements of this Specification and by 40 CFR, Part 763, Subpart E (AHERA) and Title 8, Section 1529, of the California Code of Regulations applies.
5.
Special Project site training for equipment and procedures unique to this Project site shall be provided as required.
6.
Training in emergency response and evacuation procedures shall be provided to personnel performing Asbestos Abatement work of this section.
7.
Submit documentation from a physician certifying that employees are medically monitored and are physically capable of working while wearing the required respiratory protection without suffering adverse health effects as required by California D.O.S.H regulations. Where such documentation is required,the certification shall state that the employee or agent is approved to work with Asbestos and wear a respiratory protection without restrictions. Provide information to the examining physician about unusual conditions in the workplace environment that may impact on the employee's ability to perform Abatement Work activities .
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR& P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
09/22/2014 ASBESTOSABATEMENTAND ASBESTOS RELATED DISTURBANCE 02 8213-11 '
...
-,.
140922
•
• C.
Submit Shop Drawings for layout and construction of Decontamination Enclosure Systems and barriers for isolation of the contained Asbestos Abatement work area as detailed in this Specification and required by ·applicable regulations. .
9.
When used, submit manufacturer's certification that HEP A Vacuums, air · filtration units, and other local exhaust ventilation equipment complies with ANSIZ9.2.
10.
Submit Product Data verifying that air filtration devices (i.e., air filtration units and vacuums) for use on this project havebeen registered or certified, as applicable, in compliance with the SCAQMD Rules.
11.
If rental equipment is to be furnished in Abatement Work areas or to transport Asbestos contaminated waste, written notification concerning the intended use of the rental equipment shall be provided to the rental agency with a copy submitted to the Owner.
12.
Document NIOSHapprovals for respiratory protective devices furnished as required by the Work. Include manufacturer certification of HEP A filtration capabilities for cartridges and filters.
13.
·Submit documentation of respirator fit testing for employees and agents entering the Abatement work area or areas where respiratory protection is required. This fit testing shall be performed in accordance with DOSH regulations. ·
14.
Submit a Sample of forms to be used in documenting required items to be submitted and/or reviewed.
Provide other required submittals specified as part of the Work of this section. PRE-ABATEMENT MEETING
1.10
•
8.
A.
Attend a meeting to be held prior to the commencement of Abatement Work. Attending . this meeting shall be representatives of the Owner, the Owner Consultant if applicable, and the testing/monitoring personnel who shall actually participate in the testing/monitoring program; Secure the attendance of the individual who will be the Project site Competent Person for the Abatement Work.
B.
Included in the general preconstruction meeting will be a discussion of requirements and submittals for Asbestos Related Disturbance, where such applies.
C.
At this meeting provide required submittals except for those to be submitted during progress of the Work. In addition, provide detailed information concerning:
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
09/22/2014 ASBESTOS ABATEMENT AND ASBESTOS RELATED DISTURBANCE 02 8213-12
140922
•
• 1.11
Preparation of Work area and Shop Drawings. (Abatement Only) .
2.
Personal protective equipment, including respiratory protection and protective clothing. (Abatement, and Asbestos Related Disturbance if required).
3.
Employees who will participate in the Project, including delineation of experience, training, and assigned responsibilities during the Work. (Abatement and Asbestos Related Disturbance).
4.
Decontamination procedures for personnel, Work area, and equipment. (Abatement and Asbestos Related Disturbance).
5.
Abatement methods and procedures to be provided. (Abatement Only).
6.
Required air monitoring procedures (pre-Abatement and SCAQMD requirement [Abatement Only], and Cal/OSHA mandatory [Abatement and Asbestos Related Disturbance]).
7.
Procedures for handling and disposing of waste materials, including disposal facility. (Abatement and Asbestos Related Disturbance).
8.
Procedures for final Decontamination and cleanup. (Abatement Only).
9.
A sequence of Work activities and performance schedule. (Abatement Only) .
10.
Procedures for dealing with heat stress. (Abatement Only) ..
11.
Emergency procedures. (Abatement Only).
CLOSE OUT DOCUMENTATION A.
•
1.
Provide the following close out documentation: L
Filter change logs for air filtration units, water filtration units and respirators. (Abatement Only).
2.
Foreman's daily job reports. (Abatement Only).
3.
Employee entry/exit logs for containment. (Abatement Only).
4.
Visitor entry/exit logs for containment. (Abatement Only).
5.
Manometer printout reports for applicable containment. (Abatement Only).
6.
Air sample results for personnel (Abatement and Asbestos Related Disturbance).
7.
Air Samples for Abatement Work areas and air filtration units. (Abatement Only) .
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR& P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
09/22/2014 ASBESTOS ABATEMENT AND ASBESTOS RELATED DISTURBANCE 02 8213-13
140922
• B.
8.
Copies of hazardous and non-Hazardous Waste manifests. (Abatement and Asbestos Related Disturbance) .
9.
Hazardous Waste weight tickets. (Abatement Only).
10.
Signed Daily Personnel Report Forms. (Abatement Only).
11.
Signed code of conduct form from each employee working on a Project. (Abatement Only).
12.
Signed asbestos Abatement Project Personnel Logs~ (Abatement Only).
Receipt of the last workday attendance log and the daily personal monitoring results shall be submitted within two days upon completion of the Abatement Work of this section.
PART 2- PRODUCTS Materials and Equipment:
2.01 A.
Materials
1.
•
•
Products: The following products have been specifically approved for use as encapsulants/lock-down or bridging agents for Owner asbestos abatement and asbestos related construction projects and lead abatement and lead related construction projects. Products not approved by the Owner shall not be used . a.
Asbestos Removal Encapsulant: Foster 32-60 blue by Foster Products Corporation; removal, lock down or penetrating with dilution.
b.
Asbestos Bridging Encapsulant: Foster 32-80 by Foster Products Corporation; for pipe covering and boiler lagging.
c.
A-B-C Fiberspray 6410 and 6422SP by Fiberlock Technologies, Inc.; for coring, small jobs and gloves bags.
d.
A-B-C Asbestos Binding Compound 6421, 6422 and 6423 byFiberlock Technologies, Inc.; for general use, removal, lock down, penetrating and bridging; good for soils.
e.
FibersetPM 7475 clear by Fiberlock Technologies, Inc.; compatible with flooring.
f.
Fiberset PM 7470 white by Fiberlock Technologies, Inc.; compatible with flooring.
g.
Lag-Kote by Fiberlock Technologies, Inc.; multi-use product including fireproofing and thermal system insulation.
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
09/22/2014 ASBESTOS ABATEMENT AND ASBESTOS RELATED DISTURBANCE 02 8213-14
140922
•
h.
2.
3.
•
Lag-Klothe by Fiberlock Technologies, Inc.;water activated repair cloth for pipes, boilers and breaching .
General: a.
Deliver materials in the original sealed packages, containers, or bundles . bearing the name of the manufacturer and brand name.
b.
Store materials subject to damage off the ground, away from wet or damp surfaces, and under cover sufficient enough to prevent damage or contamination. Replacement materials shall be stored outside of the Abatement Work area until area is cleared for normal occupancy.
c.
Damaged, deteriorating or previously used materials shall not be furnished and shall be removed from the Project site and legally disposed of.
d.
A sufficient supply of disposable mops, rags, and sponges for Abatement Work area Decontamination shall be provided.
e.
Unless otherwise specified, the Owner will provide water and power for construction purposes. Connect to existing system as required.
Asbestos Related: a.
Plastic, polyethylene sheeting or visqueen shall be a fire retardant type. Provide documentation from the manufacturer verifying compliance with this requirement.
b.
Where a contained work area is required for Abatement Work, a minimum of two layers of 4-mil polyethylene sheeting shall be installed for walls. For floors and other installations, polyethylene sheeting of at least 6-mil thickness shall be furnished in sufficient widths to minimize the frequency of joints.
c.
Method of attaching polyethylene sheeting shall be reviewed prior to installation and/or commencement of Abatement Work. Method of attaching polyethylene sheeting shall not cause damage to equipment, finish surfaces, or other property.
d.
Polyethylene sheeting furnished for the Decontamination Enclosure System shall be opaque white or black in color and shall be a minimum of 6-mil thick.
e.
Disposal bags shall be of 6-mil polyethylene, with the outer bag preprinted with labels as required by SCAQMD and applicable Cal/OSHA and DOT requirements at a minimum .
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
' ; ;.-. :"'· .
09/22/2014 ASBESTOS ABATEMENT AND ASBESTOS RELATED DISTURBANCE 02 8213-15
140922
• B.
Apply labels as per SCAQMD, Cal/OSHA, and DOT requirements for disposal containers. ·
g.
Provide warning signs as required by CALIOSHA.
h.
Surfactant (wetting agent) shall be a material that, when tested, demonstrates a surface tension of 29 dynes/em as tested iii its properly mixed concentration, using ASTM method Dl331 - Surface and Interfacial Tension of Solutions of Surface Active Agents. Where Work area temperature may cause freezing of the Amended Water solution, the addition of approved antifreeze in a manufacturer recommended amount is permitted.
Equipment 1. ·
• 2.
•
f.
General: a.
Equipment delivered to the Project site shall be free of Asbestos and/or fibrous debris. No equipment with Asbestos and/or fibrous debris in or on it is permitted on Owner properties. ·
b.
Provide sufficient lighting to illuminate the Work area for safe visual working conditions and to clearly examine surfaces.
c.
Provide a sufficient supply of scaffolds, ladders, lifts, and hand tools that meet applicable Federal, State, and local regulations.
d.
Provide non-metallic dustpans, squeegees, and shovels for cleanup.
Asbestos Related: a.
A sufficient quantity of air filtration ventilation units furnished with HEP A filtration and operated in accordance with ANSI Z9 .2-79 and EPA guidance documents shall be furnished to provide one workplace air change every 15 minutes creating -0.02 column inches of water pressure differential everywhere within the contained area when compared to the pressure outside the area. For small Enclosures and glove bags, a HEP A Filtered vacuum system may be furnished to provide the pressure differential. A log documenting the filter change history of each unit is required before use. Any unit without this log shall have filters changed and the unit decontaminated.
b.
Provide a printable manometer for determining and recording the pressure ·differential within the isolated Work area as compared with the ambient environment. A printed record is required for the duration of the Project.
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR& P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
-
j'
- , -.......... - --
09/22/2014 ASBESTOS ABATEMENT AND ASBESTOS RELATED DISTURBANCE 02 8213-16 : - ...... _
--·-·-·
•
•
~
~
• ....,..
'·
·-.
• _,,
.. .:.
~
., ~
140922
The manometer shall operate 24 hours per day with a printed differential reading not to exceed fifteen minute intervals. ·
•
•
High volume vacuum equipment shall be provided during soil Removal operations unless otherwise specified.
d. ·
Provide sprayers with pumps in a quantity capable of providing Amended Water in sufficient quantities to adequately wet materials during Asbestos Abatement activities. Provide spray bottles or adequate equipment necessary to keep materials impacted by Asbestos Related Disturbance adequately wet.
e.
Non-skid footwear shall be worn by Abatement workers. Disposable clothing shall be adequately sealed to the footwear to prevent body contamination.
f.
Provide other required safety equipment to workers and authorized visitors.
g.
When roll-off disposal containers are delivered to a Project site, four wheels of each container shall be moved and rested upon a sheet of plywood no smaller than four-foot by four-foot by% inch minimum.
EMPLOYEE PERSONAL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT
2.02 A.
B.
Respiratory Protection: 1.
Where respirators are required these shall be provided for protection from particulate contaminants as required by the National Institute of Occupational Safety and Health.
2.
The respirators provided shall furnish a protection factor as required by CCR Title 8, Section 1529 for the fiber concentration in the work area. When powered air purifying respirators are provided, a sufficient supply of charged replacement batteries, filters, and a flow test meter shall be provided in the Clean Room area. Air purifying respirators with dual HEP A Filters may be provided during Work area preparation activities.
3.
Provide spectacle kits and eyeglasses for employees who wear glasses and must wear full-face respirators.
Fit Testing: 1.
•
c.
Workers must perform positive and negative air pressure fit tests each time a respirator is donned, whenever the respirator design so permits. Powered air .
09/22/2014 ASBESTOS ABATEMENT AND ASBESTOS RELATED DISTURBANCE 02 8213-17
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
r •
.
_, : .• ;-... <.-:..·.-•• ,• ..,
_.
•
_ •'-.:.
.
..,_-.,.w • :-,.._.-,
., . ,..
140922·
purifying respirators shall be tested for adequate flow as specified by the manufacturer.
• C.
•
2.
· Workers shall be undergo a qualitative fit test in accordance with procedures detailed in the D.O.S.H. requirements for respirators provided to comply with the requirements of this Project. An appropriately administered quantitative fit test may be substituted for the qualitative fit test.
3.
Where respirators are required, documentation of adequate respirator fit must be provided to the Owner Consultant.
4.
No one wearing a beard shall be permitted to don a respirator and enter the Work area.
5.
Where respirators are required, a minimum of two additional respirators of each type and training on their donning and use must be provided at the Work site for authorized visitors required to enter the Work area.
Protective Clothing: 1.
Where protective clothing is required, full body disposable protective clothing, including head, body, and foot coverings, shall be provided to workers and authorized visitors in sizes adequate to accommodate movement without tearing.
2.
Disposable clothing including head, foot, and full body protection shall be provided in sufficient quantities and adequate sizes for workers and authorized visitors.
3.
A new suit shall be donned upon each entry to the Abatement Work area or area where the permissible exposure level will be exceeded.
4.
Hard hats, protective eye wear, gloves, rubber boots and/or other footwear shall be provided as required for workers and authorized visitors. Safety shoes may be . required and shall be provided.
PART 3- EXECUTION ABATEMENT PROCEDURES AND WORK AREA PREPARATION
3.01 A.
Work Area Preparation 1.
•
For Class I and II asbestos work, shut down and lock out heating, cooling and air conditioning system (HV AC) components that are located in, supply, or pass through the Work area. Seal intakes and exhaust vents in the Work area with tape and 6-mil polyethylene. Seal seams in any system components that pass through the Work area.
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
09/22/2014 ASBESTOS ABATEMENT AND ASBESTOS RELATED DISTURBANCE 02 8213-18
140922
•
•
• '
-
2.
Provide and post signs at locations and approaches to the Regulated Area. The signs shall comply with Cal/OSHA regulations .
3.
In conjunction with the Owner, shut down and lock out/tag out electric power to Class I and II asbestos work areas. Provide equipment for temporary power with ground fault interrupters and lighting sources. Temporary power sources and equipment shall comply with applicable electrical code requirements and Cal/OSHA requirements for temporary electrical systems. The Owner shall perform electrical connections of electrical cable and equipment provided as part of the Work of this section to existing Owner systems. The Owner shall pay for the costs of electric power consumed during performance of the Work of this section, unless otherwise noted.
4.
For Class I and II asbestos work, clean and seal off windows, doorways, elevator openings, corridor entrances, drains, ducts, grills, grates, diffusers, skylights, and any other openings between the Abatement Work area and areas outside of the Abatement Work area with 6-mil polyethylene sheeting and tape prior to proceeding with required cleaning.
5.
Clean Movable Objects within the Abatement Work area with a HEPA Filtered vacuum and wet cleaning methods. After cleaning, these objects shall be removed from the Abatement work area and carefully stored in a location designated by the Owner.
6.
Clean Fixed Objects in the Abatement Work area with a HEP A Filtered vacuums and wet cleaning methods. Careful attention shall be givento machinery behind grills or gratings where access may be difficult but contamination is present. Cleaning of walls, floors, and ceilings behind fixed items is required. After cleaning, enclose Fixed Objects in 6-mil polyethylene sheeting and seal securely · in place with durable tape.
7.
Clean surfaces in the Abatement Work area with a HEP A Filtered vacuums and wet cleaning methods. Do not utilize any methods, such as dry sweeping or vacuuming, with equipment not furnished with HEP A Filters thereby creating airborne dust and particulates. Do not disturb Asbestos Containing Materials during this cleaning phase.
8.
For Class I and II asbestos work, floors shall be covered with two layers of6-mil (minimum) polyethylene sheeting. Additional layers of sheeting may be furnished as drop cloths for cleanup of bulk materials.
9.
Polyethylene sheeting shall be sized and installed to minimize seams. If the floor area to be covered requires seaming, seams on successive layers of polyethylene sheeting shall be staggered a minimum of six feet between each seam to reduce the potential for water penetration into the existing flooring. Do not install seams at the junction between a wall and floor .
.
.
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR& P;O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
~.,
•
•
."
¥.
.:
·~·
•
•
'·'
!<.--
09/22/2014 ASBESTOS ABATEMENT AND ASBESTOS RELATED DISTURBANCE 02 8213-19 '·'
·-~·2
140922
•
•
•
10.
Polyethylene sheeting installed on a floor shall extend at least 12 inches up the sidewalls of the Abatement Work area .
11.
Polyethylene sheeting shall be installed so as to prevent slippage between successive layers of installed material.
12.
For Class I and II asbestos work, walls shall be covered with two layers of 4-mil minimum thickness polyethylene sheeting.
13.
Polyethylene sheeting installed on a wall shall overlap floor sheeting by at least 12 inches beyond the wall/floor joint to provide a seal against water damage.
14.
Polyethylene sheeting installed on a wall shall be adequately fastened to prevent it from falling away from the walls. Provide additional support/attachment when air filtration ventilation systems are provided.
15.
For Class I and II asbestos workwith porous, dropped, or perforated ceilings, those ceilings shall be covered with one layer 4-mil minimum thickness polyethylene sheeting.
16.
Polyethylene sheeting installed on ceilings shall be adequately fastened to prevent it from falling away from the ceiling.
17.
Provide one layer of 3-mil maximum, polyethylene sheeting (non-fire retardant type) for isolation of fire sprinkler devices. Installed taping shall not impede the normal function of the fire sprinkler device. Approved wire sprinkler guards shall be furnished in conjunction with isolation.
18.
Where required, install and operate air filtration equipment to provide one air change in the Abatement Work area every 15 minutes. Openings made in the Enclosure System to accommodate these units shall be made airtight with durable tape and/or caulking as needed. If more than one unit is installed, they shall be turned on one at a time, checking the integrity of barriers. after each unit is started. Insure that adequate power supply is available to satisfy the requirements of the air filtration units. Exhaust from these units shall be directed to the outside of the building whenever feasible. They shall not be exhausted into occupied areas of the buildings. Exhaust duct shall be extended from the Abatement Work area to the outside as required. Careful installation and daily inspections shall be performed to verify the exhaust ducts do not discharge into any areas of the building.
19.
Once the Enclosure system is constructed and reinforced with air filtration units in operation as required, test the Enclosure for leakage utilizing smoke tubes. Repair, replace or reconstruct as required.
20.
Following completion of the construction of polyethylene barriers and Decontamination Enclosure System, operate the air filtration units overnight to
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
09/22/2014 ASBESTOS ABATEMENT AND ASBESTOS RELATED DISTURBANCE 02 8213-20
140922
.insure the barriers will remain intact and secured to walls and fixtures before beginning actual Abatement Work.
•
•
•
21.
Commencement of the Work of this section shall not occur until: a.
The entire containment system has been constructed and inspected by Owner Consultant in accordance with the required Shop Drawings.
b.
Air filtration units are functioning within the requirements of this section.
c.
Air filtration units are functioning within the requirements of this section.
d:
Pre-Abatement submittals, notifications, postings, and permits have been provided and reviewed by the Owner Consultant.
e.
Equipment for Abatement, Decontamination, and disposal are on the Project site.
f.
Worker training, respirator fit testing, and medical surveillance has been provided and reviewed by the Owner Consultant.
g.
A Notice to Proceed is transmitted by the Owner.
ASBESTOS RELATED DISTURBANCE WORK PRACTICES (Small-Scale, Short . Duration- SSSD)
3.02
A.
For Class III work, shut off air handling equipment to rooms work will occur in.
B.
Provide and post signs at the entrance to the work area affected. The signs shall comply with Cal/OSHA regulations.
C.
For Class III work clean the area immediately under the location to be disturbed.
D.
For Class III work move any moveable furniture or objectsfrom immediately beneath the area to be disturbed.
E.
Provide an enclosure around the area of disturbance. This may include, but is n:ot limited to: 1.
Mini-enclosure where not more than two persons may occupy for the purpose cutting holes up to three square feet in walls or ceilings.
2.
For drilling, coring, sawing or similar disturbance, an enclosure shall be placed over the area of disturbance of sufficient size to cover that area and contain the tools used. This can include drilling with a shroud, through a wet sponge, through a plastic enclosure, or similar designs which will ensure control of Asbestos fibers
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
09/22/2014 ASBESTOS ABATEMENT AND ASBESTOS RELATED DISTURBANCE 02 8213-21 '. ·~ ,-· .
140922
and other dust. Drilling or coring with the use of a vacuum collection device shall be equipped with aHEPAfiltered vacuum .
•
F.
Class III work performed without a HEP A vacuum collection device shall have surfaces of disturbance adequately wet to control fiber release.
G.
Clean by wet method the surfaces disturbed, the enclosure device and/or materials used, . and any tools used during the disturbance operation. ·
H.
·Clean up by wet method and/or HEP A vacuum any debris that may have escaped outside the enclosure required by this section. DECONTAMINATION ENCLOSURE SYSTEM FOR ABATEMENT WORK
3.03
•
•
A.
Decontamination Enclosure Systems shall be provided at locations where workers will enter or exit the Abatement Work area of Class I and II asbestos work prior to any other set up. Only one system at a single location for each Regulated Area is required. At least one individual shall be stationed at the entrance of each system at times Abatement Work is in progress.
B.
These systems may consist of existing rooms outside of the Abatement Work area, if the layout permits, and that can be enclosed in polyethylene sheeting, and are accessible from the Abatement Work area. If this intended layout is not feasible, given existing site conditions, Enclosure systems may be constructed out of metal, wood, or plastic support as required.
C.
Decontamination Enclosure Systems constructed at the Project site shall be furnished with 6-mil opaque white or black polyethylene sheeting or other approved materials for privacy. Detailed descriptions of portable, prefabricated units, if furnished, shall be submitted for review. Shop Drawings must include floor plan with dimensions, materials, size, thickness, plumbing, and electrical utilities.
D.
Decontamination Enclosure System shall consist of at least a Clean Room, a Shower Room, and an equipment room, each separated from the other, from the Abatement Work area and from the non-,Work area by "Z-flaps" at a minimum. The system shall be furnished with, at a minimum, two layers of 6,.mil polyethylene sheeting on the floors, walls, and ceiling.
E.
Clean room shall be of adequate size to accommodate the Abatement crew. Clean work clothes, clean disposable clothing, replacement filters for respirators, disposable towels, and other necessary items shall be provided for in adequate supply adjacent to the Clean Room. A location for posting notices shall also be provided adjacent to this area. When required, a lockable door shall be furnished to control access into the Clean Room from outside the Abatement Work area. Comfort lighting, heat, and electricity shall be provided as required. The Clean Room shall not be used for storage oftools, equipment, materials, or as office space .
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR& P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
09/22/2014 ASBESTOS ABATEMENT AND ASBESTOS RELATED DISTURBANCE 02 8213-22
140922
•
F.
Shower room shall contain one or more showers as required to adequately accommodate workers. Each showerhead shall be supplied with hot and cold water adjustable at the tap . The shower Enclosure shall be constructed to ensure against any kind ofleakage. Provide an adequate supply of soap, shampoo, and disposable towels, available at times. Shower water shall be drained, collected, and progressively filtered through asystem achieving a maximum particle size of 1.0 microns.
G.
The Equipment Room shall be used for storage of equipment and tools at the end of a shift. These shall have been cleaned using a HEP A Filtered vacuum and wet cleaning methods. A container lined with a labeled 6-mil polyethylene bag for collection of disposable clothing shall be located in this room. Reusable footwear shall be stored in this area after being cleaned.
3.04
•
WASTE CONTAINER REMOVAL AIRLOCK AND EMERGENCY EXITS A.
The waste container pass-out airlock shall be constructed away from the Decontamination Enclosure System. This· airlock shall be in a location that provides direct access from Abatement Work area to the outside of the building if possible.
B.
This system shall consist of an airlock, container Staging Area, and another airlock providing access to outside Abatement Work area.
C.
The waste container airlock shall be constructed in similar fashion with similar materials as the Decontamination Enclosure System .
D.
This airlock system shall not be used to enter or exit the Abatement Work area. ALTERNATIVE PROCEDURES
3.05 A.
•
Soil Removal 1.
Required Asbestos Abatement shall be performed prior to soil Removal.
2.
If soil Removal is specified, debris within or upon the soil shall be considered part of the soil and shall be removed as a contaminated waste. Debris includes, but is not limited to, fabric, paper, and other fibrous or porous materials.
3.
It is not the intention of this section to require the Removal of large rocks, abandoned lion-Asbestos-containing pipe, lumber, and similar debris. If these conditions are encountered, clean and encapsulate these materials instead of removing them as a contaminated waste, provided Asbestos contamination is not ingrained within and/or affixed to them. Any such materials remaining shall be stacked to one side to allow for access to the soil below for removal purposes .
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
,,
.... ·,.;.
09/22/2014 ASBESTOS ABATEMENT AND ASBESTOS RELATED DISTURBANCE 02 8213-23 • '-<'\
'.
-·
-
....... : •• ; '
• •• '~-
140922
• B.
•
Unless otherwise specified, soil shall be removed with a High Volume Vacuum system. Soil shall be removed to the hard pan unless otherwise specified or required.
5.
After soil Removal has been completed, the Owner Consultant shall inspect the Work. Approval of the Removal Work is required prior to lock down and Encapsulation.
6.
Soil requires Encapsulation following Asbestos Removal, including but not limited to, High Volume Vacuum removal. Apply a continuous even coat of encapsulating material at the rate. of no more than fifty square feet per gallon. Other structural surfaces shall receive an evenly applied coat of lock down material.
Other: 1.
· High Volume Vacuum systems shall be provided with an Enclosure constructed at the waste . discharge port. This Enclosure shall be of sufficient size to accommodate the workers and disposal containers necessary for the Project. The Enclosure shall be constructed of one layer, 6-mil minimum, of polyethylene sheeting. An air filtration unit shall be furnished during operation of the High Volume Vacuum.
2.
Where pipe insulation is to be removed in acrawl space and/or attic space a single layer of 6-mil polyethylene sheeting with a minimum width of four feet shall be placed centered under the Removal surfaces.
3.
If specified procedures cannot be furnished, a written request shall be provided to the Owner outlining details of the problem encountered and recommended alternative solutions.
4.
Alternative procedures shall provide equivalent or greater protection than the specified and/or required procedures.
5.
Any alternative procedure requires the written approval of the Owner prior to implementation.
WORKPLACE ENTRY AND EXIT PROCEDURES
3.06 A.
•
4.
Before entering the Regulated Area personnel shall read and be familiar with posted regulations, personal protection requirements, and emergency procedures. A signature sheet shall be posted for signatory acknowledgement these have been reviewed and understood by personnel prior to entry .
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
09/22/2014 ASBESTOS ABATEMENT AND ASBESTOS RELATED DISTURBANCE 02 8213-24 .·..:--:',,
·._
'
~
140922
•
B.
Workers and other authorized personnel shall enter the Abatement Work area through the Decontamination Enclosure System or other room required when Decontamination Enclosure System is not required.
C.
Personnel who enter or exit the Regulated Area shall sign the entry and exit log located adjacent to the Clean Room.
D.
Personnel shall proceed first to the Clean Room, don respirator, and washable and/or disposable clothing.
E.
General construction area equipment including, but not limited to, hard hats, eye protection, and gloves shall also be provided as required. Clean respirator and cartridges, and protective clothing shall be provided and utilized by each person for each separate entry into the Regulated Area.
F.
Before leaving the Regulated Area for Class I and II asbestos work personnel shall remove gross contamination from the outside of respirators and protective clothing by vacuuming and/or wet wiping methods. Each person shall clean protective footwear just prior to entering the Equipment Room.
• G.
Personnel shall proceed to Equipment Room where they remove protective equipment except respirators. Deposit disposable clothing into appropriately labeled containers .
2.
Still wearing respirator, personnel shall proceed to the shower area, clean the outside of the respirators and the exposed face area under running water prior to removal of respirator then shower and shampoo to remove residual Asbestos contamination. Various types of respirators will require slight modification of these procedures. A powered air purifying respirator face piece will have to be disconnected from the filter/power pack assembly when such is not waterproof, upon entering the shower. A dual cartridge respirator may be worn into the shower and cartridges shall be replaced for each new entry into the Work area.
3.
After showering and drying off, proceed to the Clean Room and don clean clothing.
At no time shall any personnel exit an Abatement Work area into a space occupied by staff or students without being completely dressed. Any violation ofthis requirement will result in the permanent removal ofthe person from the Project site. REMOVAL PROCEDURES
3.07 A.
•
1.
Brushes furnished for removing loose Asbestos Containing Material during detail cleaning of substrate shall be furnished with nylon or fiber bristles. Metal or wire brushes are not permitted. Brushes used during this process shall be disposed as contaminated waste when use of the brush for this work is completed.
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
09/22/2014 ASBESTOS ABATEMENT AND ASBESTOS RELATED DISTURBANCE 02 8213-25
140922
•
•
•
B.
A sufficient supply ofHEP A Filtered vacuum systems shall be provided during cleanup of Abatement Work. Brush attachments are not permitted for use with vacuum systems .
C.
Barriers constructed to isolate the Regulated Area from other areas shall be inspected at least three times per shift; prior to the start of Abatement activities; halfway into the shift; and following the completion of the Abatement activities at the end of the shift. Inspect and document observations in the daily Project log.
D.
Damage and defects in the Enclosure system shall be repaired immediately upon discovery.
E.
At any time during Abatement Work, following barrier installation, if visible debris is observed outside of the Regulated Area or damage occurs to the barriers, stop Work immediately. Repairs shall be performed to the barriers and debris/residue shall be cleaned up with appropriate HEP A Vacuuming and wet wiping methods. These incidents shall be recorded in the daily Project log.
F.
If air samples collected outside of the Work area during Abatement Work indicate airborne fiber concentrations greater than 0.01 flee or the pre-measured background levels (whichever is lower) Work shall stop immediately. An inspection and repair of barriers shall be performed as required. Surface cleaning with HEP A Vacuums and wet wiping methods of areas outside of the Work area may be required by the Owner. Findings, observations, and corrective actions shall be documented in the daily Project log . ENCAPSULATION AND BRIDGING AGENTS
3.08 A.
Clean and isolate the Work area in accordance with "Work Area Preparation" of this Section.
B.
. Repair damaged and missing areas of existing materials with non-Asbestos containing substitutes. Material shall adhere adequately to existing surfaces and provide an adequate base for application of Encapsulating Material. Filler material shall be installed in accordance with manufacturers recommended specifications.
C.
Remove loose or hanging Asbestos Containing Materials m accordance with the requirements of "Removal Procedures" in this Section.
D.
Lockdown and Encapsulating Material, and bridging agents shall be reviewed by the Owner Consultant prior to the commencement of the Work of this section.
E.
Encapsulating Material shall be sprayed applied with airless spray equipment. Nozzle pressure shall be adjustable within a range of 400 to 1500 PSI.
F.
Lock down coat shall be spray applied with low pressure providing a continuous even coat .
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL.
09/22/2014 ASBESTOS ABATEMENT AND ASBESTOS RELATED DISTURBANCE 02 8213-26 .,
,. .....•
140922
•
G.
Bridging agents shall be a palm or brush grade .
H.
Colodess lock down materials, Encapsulating Material, and bridging agents shall be furnished with a compatible color additive. A different color shall be furnished for each separate coat of applied material.
I.
Install penetrating type Encapsulating Material to penetrate existing sprayed applied Asbestos Containing Materials to a depth as required.
J.
During installation of the penetrating type Encapsulating Material; remove selected random core samples of the Asbestos Containing Materials in the presence of the Owner Consultant to verify depth of penetration.
K.
Lock down coating and Encapsulating Material for installation on hot water, steam, or any other high temperature equipment shall be manufactured and recommended for installation on high temperature systems. CLEAN UP PROCEDURES
3.09 A.
•
•
Asbestos Clean Up Procedures: 1.
Unless decontaminated daily, reusable footwear and kneepads shall be stored in the Equipment Room when not in the Work area. Upon completion of Abatement . Work, these shall be disposed of as Asbestos contaminated waste or may be decontaminated a~ the completion of Abatement Work.
2.
Remove and containerize visible accumulations of Asbestos Containing Material and Asbestos contaminated debris with rubber dustpans and rubber squeegees. Do not use metal shovels to pick up or move accumulated waste. Special care shall be taken to minimize damage to flooring materials.
3.
Remove containerized waste from the Abatement Work area and the waste container airlock.
4.
Wet wipe surfaces in the Regulated Area with clean rags, mops, and sponges as appropriate.
5.
After cleaning remove the top layer of polyethylene sheeting from walls and floors.
6.
Clean the second layer of polyethylene sheeting by wet wipe and HEP A Vacuuming. Windows, doors, HVAC system vents, and other critical seals shall remain sealed until the Abatement Work area passes final clearance. The air filtration units shall remain in continuous operation and the Decontamination Enclosure System shall reinain in place and be utilized .
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR& P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
09/22/2014 ASBESTOS ABATEMENT AND ASBESTOS RELATED DISTURBANCE 02 8213-27 .,
···•.
140922
•
•
•
3.10
7.
Decontaminate tools and equipment and remove at the appropriate time in the cleaning process. ·
8.
Provide notification to the Owner at least one day in advance when Abatement Work will be completed and ready for final visual inspection. If, upon inspection, Abatement Work is not completed or the area does not pass final visual inspection, finish or correct the Abatement Work as required before notifying the Owner. Subsequent inspections shall commence not later than one day following notice.
9.
.The Owner Consultant shall inspect the Work area for visible residue. If residue is observed, it shall be deemed to contain Asbestos and the cleaning process shall be repeated. The lock down coat shall be applied only after inspection by the Owner Consultant and during non-school hours.
10.
The second layer of isolation shall only be removed after the Owner Consultant inspects the lock down coat or installed Encapsulation, but in no case prior to overnight drying of lock down coat or Encapsulation.
11.
Following completion of air clearance monitoring the remaining barriers shall be removed and properly disposed of. A final visual inspection by the Owner Consultant shall be performed to verify that no contamination remains in the Abatement Work area. Unsatisfactory conditions mayrequire additional cleaning and air monitoring .
WASTE HANDLING AND TRANSPORTATION A.
Asbestos Waste Handling 1.
As the Work progresses, to prevent exceeding available storage capacity on the Project site, sealed and labeled containers ofAsbestos Containing Waste shall be removed and transported to the prearranged disposal location.
2.
Waste disposal shall occur at an authorized site in accordance with regulatory requirements ofNESHAP and applicable State and Local regulations.
3.
Once the drums, bags, and/or wrapped components have been removed from the Work area, they shall be loaded into an enclosed truck for transportation.
4.
Waste shall not be transported from the work are to the storage container or waste hauler's vehicle while students or staff are present in the path oftravel. Where a path of travel cannot be cordoned off the movement of waste must be completed prior to or after the presence on site of students and staff.
09/22/2014 ASBESTOS ABATEMENT AND ASBESTOS RELATED DISTURBANCE 02 8213-28
CORWINTHEATERREPAIR& P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
..
-~-~
_--.
..
-
.-~
140922
•
5.
TRANSPORTATION OF NONHAZARDOUS WASTE
3.11
A.
Waste shall be containerized, labeled, and transported in accordance with federal, state, and local regulations.
B.
Waste shall be transported under cover a non-Hazardous Waste manifest.
C.
Containers shall be enclosed during transportation. TRANSPORTATION OF HAZARDOUS WASTE
3.12
•
A.
Dump receipts; trip tickets, transportation manifests, weight certificates or .other documentation of disposal shall be delivered to the Owner Consultant within 48 hours of disposaL As the material and responsibility for the material changes hands, the generator or designee, the transporter(s), and the Disposal Site Operator shall sign the Uniform Hazardous Waste Manifest. If a separate waste hauler is employed, the name, address, U.S.E.P.A. ID number, and signature ofthe transporter shall also be affixed onto the manifest.
B.
The enclosed cargo area of trucks or containers shall be free of debris and lined with 6 mil polyethylene sheeting to prevent contaminationfrom leaking or spilled containers. Floor sheeting shall be installed first and extend up the sidewalls. Wall sheeting shall be overlapped and taped into place.
C.
Drums shall be placed on level surfaces in the cargo area and packed tightly together to prevent shifting and tipping. Large structural components shall be secured to prevent shifting, with bags placed on top.
D.
Access openings on large metal containers, which are used for storing or transporting Asbestos waste, shall have doors and tops that can be closed and locked. Materials not properly bagged shall not be placed in these containers nor shall these containers be used for non-Asbestos waste or nonhazardous asbestos waste. Bags shall be placed, not thrown, into these containers to avoid damage. MONITORING
3.13
A.
Abatement Project Management and Inspection: 1.
•
Personnel loading Asbestos waste shall be protected with disposable clothing and at a minimum half-face, air purifying, dual cartridge respirators furnished with HEP A Filters.
Owner has the right to perform air and performance monitoring at any time .
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
09/22/2014 ASBESTOS ABATEMENT AND ASBESTOS RELATED DISTURBANCE 02 8213-29
140922
2.
•
B.
Work Area Monitoring: 1.
C.
•
Provide air monitoring as required California Code of Regulations, Title 8, Section 1529. Results shall be provided to the Owner Consultant within ten working days of sampling. Negative Exposure Assessments utilizing prior project monitoring require submittal of applicable data for approval before work proceeds.
Clearance Air Monitoring: 1.
Fallowing the completion of Abatement Work and clean up operations, lock down coat application, and visual inspection by the Owner, clearance air monitoring shall be performed by the Owner Consultant.
2.
The Owner Consultant shall arrange for sampling of the air in the Abatement Work area for airborne fiber concentrations. Unauthorized interference or tampering with air sampling equipment may result in termination of the Contract and/or removal of the Abatement Contractor from the List of Prequalified Abatement Contractors.
3.
If air-sampling results are within the limits of 40 CFR, Part 763, Subpart E (AHERA), the Abatement Work area shall be released for occupancy.
4.
Areas failing clearance monitoring shall be cleaned as required in article 3.09, CLEAN UP PROCEDURES, and tested until satisfactory levels are provided in accordance with this Specification where required.
RE-ESTABLISHMENTOF THE WORK AREA AND SYSTEMS
3.14
••
Visual inspections and air testing may be performed at any time during the progress of the Abatement Work. Provide corrective measures as required to maintain the Work area in compliance with this Specification and regulatory requirements. ·
Contractor's Employee- Personal Air Monitoring: 1.
D.
The Owner has unlimited access to the regulated and surrounding areas at times during progress of the Work, including, but not limited to, use of ladders, scaffolds, and other equipment required to gain access to the Work surfaces.
A.
Reestablishment of the Work area shall only occur following the completion of final inspection and clearance air monitoring.
B.
Critical barriers shall be removed at this time.
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
09/22/2014 ASBESTOS ABATEMENT AND ASBESTOS RELATED DISTURBANCE 02 8213-30
. : ..,
140922
•
•
•
C.
Accompanied by the Owner Consultant, visually inspect the Abatement Work area for any remaining visible residue. Evidence of contamination will require additional cleaning requirements.
D.
Install and secure Moveable Objects.
E.
Relocate Moveable Objects that were removed to temporary locations back to their original positions.
F.
Reestablish HV AC, mechanical, and electrical systems to the condition prior to commencement of the Work of this section.
G.
Repair areas of damage deemed to be a result of the Abatement Work.
H.
Restore the Work area and auxiliary areas utilized during the Abatement to conditions equal to or better than original. Any damage caused during the performance of Abatement Work, including, but not limited to, damage caused by tape, adhesive, staples, nails, water, Encapsulating Material, or any other material shall be repaired as required.
I.
Prior to occupancy of a space following clearance monitoring, HV AC systems filters associated with the Work area shall be removed and disposed of as Asbestos waste. Decontaminate filter assembly and surrounding area with HEP A Vacuums and wet cleaning methods .
END OF SECTION
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
- . .... -~
09/22/2014 ASBESTOS ABATEMENT AND ASBESTOS RELATED DISTURBANCE 02 8213-31 ·--'
.....
~
140922
•
SECTION 02 8216 ASBESTOS ABATEMENT OF NON-FRIABLE FLOOR TILE
PART I-GENERAL SUMMARY
1.01
•
A.
Provisions of the General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 apply to this section.
B.
Section Includes:
C.
Abatement of building and/or structure related Asbestos.
2.
Disturbance of building and/or structure related Asbestos.
3.
Attachment "A" FETU Report Phase I & Phase II.
Regulatory Requirements shall include, but not be limited to: 1.
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency Regulations for Asbestos (Title 40, Code of Federal Regulations, Part 61, Subpart M, and Part 763, Subpart E.)
2.
Title 8, Article 4, California Code of Regulations Construction Industry Safety Orders, Section 1529 "Asbestos" or current revised California regulations.
3.
South Coast Air Quality Management District (SCAQMD) Rule 1403.
SECTION DEFINITIONS AND ACRONYMS
1.02
•
1.
A.
Abatement - Procedures to control fiber release from Asbestos Containing Materials or Asbestos Containing Construction Materials. Includes Remoyal, Encapsulation, Enclosures, Repair, Demolition, and Renovation a£tivities but does not include Asbestos Related Disturbance.
B.
AHERA - Asbestos Hazard Emergency Response Act, 40 CFR, Part 763, Subpart E, and subsequent amendments .
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
09/22/2014 ASBESTOS ABATEMENT OF NON-FRIABLE FLOOR TILE 02 8216-1
140922
•
•
•
C.
Air Filtration and Ventilation System - A portable exhaust system, equipped with HEP A filtration, and capable of maintaining a constant air flow into a Regulated Area from adjacent areas and exhausted outside the Regulated Area.
D.
Amended Water- Water to which a surfactant (wetting agent) has been added.
E.
ANSI - American National Standards Institute.
F.
Asbestos - Means the asbestiform varieties of chrysotile (Serpentine); crocidolite (Riebecktite); amosite (cummingtonitegrunerite); anthophyllite; tremolite; and actinolite.
G.
Asbestos Containing Construction Material (ACCM) - Means any manufactured construction material which contains more than one tenth of one percent (0.1 percent) Asbestos by weight.
H.
Asbestos Containing Material (ACM)- Means any material containing more than one-percent (1 percent) Asbestos.
I.
Asbestos Containing Waste (Non-hazardous) -Non-Friable Asbestos Containing Material including, but not limited to, floor covering, roofing materials and cementitious materials requiring disposal.
J.
Asbestos Containing Waste (Hazardous) - Friable Asbestos Containing Materials and Asbestos contaminated objects and debris requiring disposal.
K.
Asbestos Related Disturbance - Is the drilling, coring, removal or similar disturbance of ACCM or ACM not to exceed three square feet in any one opening and not to disturb 100 square feet or greater cumulatively on any one project (contract).
L.
ASTM- American Society for Testing and Materials.
M.
Building ID Numbe~ or Code - A six digit alphanumeric identification code assigned to each building on an Owner site, also referred to as the insurance code, ID number or similar terms.
N.
Bulk Samples - Samples of building or other materials collected for analysis to determine the presence and quantities of Asbestos.
0.
Class I, II, III, and IV asbestos work has the meaning as defined in
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR& P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
09/22/2014 ASBESTOS ABATEMENT OF NON-FRIABLE FLOOR TILE 02 8216-2
140922
•
•
•
California Code of Regulations Title 8, Section 1529. P.
Clean Room - An uncontaminated area or room, which is a part of the worker Decontamination Enclosure System with provisions for storage of worker's street clothes and clean protective equipment.
Q.
Competent Person - Has the same meaning as defined in the California Code of Regulations Title 8, as it relates to, "Competent Person."
R.
Controlled Disturbance- An activity by which a contractor disturbs an asbestos containing material or an asbestos containing construction material using the work practices allowed for in this specification and in compliance with regulatory limitations.
S.
Curtained Doorway - A device to allow ingress and egress from one room to another while permitting minimal air movement between the rooms, typically constructed by placing two overlapping sheets of plastic over an existing or temporarily framed doorway, securing each along the top of the doorway, securing the vertical edge of one sheet along one vertical side of the doorway and securing the vertical edge of the other sheet along the opposite vertical side of the doorway. Other effective designs may be submitted for review .
T.
Decontamination - The process of eliminating Asbestos contamination from building surfaces, objects, and property, by cloths, mops, or other utensils dampened with water and disposed of afterwards as Asbestos contaminated waste.
U.
Decontamination Enclosure System- Means an enclosed area, which is adjacent and connected to the Regulated Area, consisting of an Equipment Room, Shower Room, and Clean Room for the Decontamination of workers, materials, and equipment contaminated with Asbestos.
V.
Demolition - The wrecking or taking out of any load supporting structural member of a facility together with any related handling operations.
W.
DOSH- Division of Occupational Safety and Health or Cal/OSHA.
X.
DOT- Department of Transportation.
Y.
DTSC- Department of Toxic Substances Control.
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR& P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
09/22/2014 ASBESTOS ABATEMENT OF NON-FRIABLE FLOOR TILE 02 8216-3
140922
•
•
•
z.
Encapsulating Material - A liquid material applied to Asbestos Containing Materials which controls the possible release of Asbestos fibers from the material either by creating a membrane over the surface (bridging agent) or by penetrating into the material and binding its components together (penetrating Encapsulating Material).
AA.
Encapsulation - The application of an Encapsulating Material to Asbestos Containing Materials to prevent the release of Asbestos fibers into the air.
BB.
Enclosure - The construction or application of an airtight, impermeable, permanent barrier around Asbestos Containing Material to control the release of Asbestos fibers into the air.
CC.
Equipment Room - A room within the worker Decontamination Enclosure System with provisions for storage of used clothing and equipment and for controlled transfer of materials and equipment into and out of the regulated area.
DD.
Facility Component - Means any part of a facility including equipment.
EE .
FETU- Facilities Environmental Technical Unit.
FF.
Fixed Object - A piece of equipment, furniture, or improvement in the Work area, which cannot be removed from the Work area.
GG.
Friable Asbestos- Asbestos Containing Material which, when dry, can be crumbled, pulverized or reduced to a powder by hand pressure or as defined by current regulations.
HH.
Glove Bag Technique - A method with limited applications for removing small amounts of Asbestos Containing Material from short piping runs, valves, joints, elbows, and other non-planar surfaces in a Work area. The glove bag assembly is a manufactured or fabricated device consisting of a glove bag (typically constructed of 6 mil transparent polyethylene or polyvinyl chloride plastic), two inward projecting long sleeves gloves, an internal tool pouch, and labeled for Asbestos waste. The glove bag is constructed and installed in such a manner that it surrounds the object or material to be removed and contains all Asbestos fibers released during the process. All workers who are permitted to perform the Glove Bag Technique shall be thoroughly trained, experienced, and skilled in this method .
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR& P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
09/22/2014 ASBESTOS ABATEMENT OF NON-FRIABLE FLOOR TILE 02 8216-4
140922
•
•
•
II.
Hazardous Waste- Means Friable Asbestos generated and prepared for waste disposal. Does not include non-friable material or materials containing one-percent or less of Asbestos as determined by PLM and/or the point counting method.
JJ.
HEPA Filter - Means a filtering system capable of trapping and retaining at least 99.97 percent of all mono-dispersed particles 0.3 microns in diameter or larger. For respirators this shall include NIOSH rated P-1 00 cartridges only.
KK.
HEP A Vacuum - A vacuum system furnished with HEP A filtration.
LL.
High Volume Vacuum- A vacuum system with the capacity to collect material through a four inch diameter hose a minimum distance of 150 feet. This system shall be furnished with HEP A Filter at the air exhaust port and water applicators within the hopper.
MM.
HV AC -Heating, Ventilation, and Air Conditioning System.
NN.
Location Code - Refers to a unique four digit numeric code assigned by the Owner to each of its Project sites.
00.
Lockdown Coat- A material applied to surfaces where Asbestos has been completely removed. The manufacturer shall determine the concentration of this material.
PP.
Member - A component part of a structure complete in itself.
QQ.
Movable Object - A portable piece of equipment or furniture in the Work area, which can be removed from the Work area.
RR.
NESHAP - National Emission Standards for Hazardous Air Pollutants (40 CFR Part 61).
SS.
NIOSH- National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health.
TT.
Outside Air- Air outside of buildings and structures.
UU.
Owner Consultant (OC) - Refers to the firm, company or individual designated by the Owner.
VV.
PCM - Phase Contrast Microscopy as it relates to clearance air, personnel exposure assessment, and ambient air monitoring. This procedure must follow the NIOSH Method 7400, Asbestos Fibers by
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR& P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
09/22/2014 ASBESTOS ABATEMENT OF NON-FRIABLE FLOOR TILE 02 8216-5
140922
•
PCM. WW. PLM- Polarized Light Microscopy used for bulk sample analysis with dispersion staining for the determination and quantifying of Asbestos in Bulk Samples building materials.
•
XX.
Regulated Area - Designated rooms, spaces or areas of the Project in which asbestos Abatement actions are to be performed or which may become contaminated as a result of Abatement activities. A contained Work area is a Work area, which has been sealed and furnished with a Decontamination Enclosure System. A non-contained Work area is an isolated or controlled access Work area, which has not been sealed or furnished with a Decontamination Enclosure System.
YY.
Removal - Means all operations where all ACM and/or PACM is removed or stripped from structures or substrates including Demolition.
ZZ.
Renovation- Means the modifying of any existing structure, facility, or portion thereof.
AAA. SCAQMD - South Coast Air Quality Management District. BBB. Shower Room - A room between the Clean Room and the Equipment Room in the worker Decontamination Enclosure System furnished with hot and cold running water controllable at the tap, and suitably arranged for complete showering during Decontamination. CCC. Small Scale Short Duration- Such work not to exceed amounts greater than those which can be contained in a single glove bag or may not exceed amounts greater than those which can be contained in a single prefabricated mini-enclosure. Such an enclosure shall conform spatially and geometrically to the localized work area, in order to perform its intended containment function, and as completely defined in 40CFR, 763, Subpart E, Appendix C, Asbestos Model Accreditation Plan, section 8, a thruj. DDD. Staging Area - Areas near the Waste Transfer Airlock where containerized Asbestos waste is. temporarily placed prior to permanent removal from the Work area.
•
EEE.
Surfactant - A chemical wetting agent added to water.
FFF.
TEM - Transmission Electron Microscopy as defined for Asbestos
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR& P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
09/22/2014 ASBESTOS ABATEMENT OF NON-FRIABLE FLOOR TILE 02 8216-6
140922
•
clearance air monitoring within AHERA. This procedure must follow the NIOSH Method 7402, Asbestos Fibers by TEM. GGG. TSI- Thermal System Insulation as defined in AHERA. HHH. US EPA or EPA- United States Environmental Protection Agency. III.
Visible Emissions - Any emissions from a known or suspected Asbestos Containing Material that is visually discernible.
JJJ.
Waste Transfer Airlock - A Decontamination system provided for transferring containerized waste from inside to outside of the Work area. POLICIES AND PROCEDURES
1.03
•
•
A.
The Owner has a zero tolerance policy for uncontrolled Asbestos releases during construction or Abatement Work. An Asbestos release requiring an emergency response is any uncontrolled release of Asbestos Containing Construction Materials. The Owner shall be immediately notified of all such uncontrolled releases.
B.
Pre-qualified Asbestos Abatement Subcontractors are not permitted to subcontract any Abatement work to a lower tier Subcontractor without the prior written approval of the Owner.
C.
Where ACM is damaged or disturbed, except during Controlled Disturbance or Abatement, all Work in that room shall cease, the room be vacated immediately, the Owner Consultant notified of the disturbance with corrective action provided as required by the Owner Consultant.
D.
The following requirements shall be a part of the contract in conformance with Rule 1403 of the South Coast Air Quality Management District and Title 8, of the California Code of Regulations.
E.
The asbestos-containing floor tile materials located in areas identified in the scope of work of thi~. contract have been sampled, tested, and found to be a Class I non-friable asbestos-containing material under the provisions of Rule 1403, and contain greater than 0.1 percent asbestos as defined in the California Code of Regulations.
F.
The following requirements apply to the notification, certification,
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
09/22/2014 ASBESTOS ABATEMENT OF NON-FRIABLE FLOOR TILE 02 8216-7
140922
•
work area preparation, removal, transportation, disposal, cleanup and clearance monitoring of non-friable asbestos-containing floor tile materials. The language herein shall not be construed to conflict with, or supersede any regulatory requirements in the law. ROLES AND RESPONSIBILITIES
1.04 A.
•
1.05
1.
Coordinate the Work of this section directly with the Owner and/or Owner Consultant.
2.
All Work under this section shall be performed in strict accordance with all applicable Federal, State, and Local regulations, standards, and codes governing asbestos Abatement and any other Work performed in conjunction with the Asbestos Abatement Work.
3.
The most recent edition of any relevant regulation, standard, document, or code is in effect. Where conflict among the requirements or with this Specification exists, the most stringent requirement shall be provided.
NOTIFICATION A.
1.06
•
Roles and Functions:
Contractor shall be responsible for notifying AQMD as required by Rule 1403, and notice to the Division of Occupational Safety and Health and pay any related fees as required. A copy of these notifications shall be provided to the District prior to the start of work. If the site involved in this contract is located within the city limits of Los Angeles, a copy of the notification shall be sent to the Los Angeles City Fire Department (LAFD), marked courtesy copy. No fees to the LAFD are required for LAUSD projects. CERTIFICATION
A.
All employees involved in the removal of asbestos-containing materials in schools, whether friable or non-friable, shall be accredited a~ required by AHERA (40CFR, Part 763, Subpart E).
B.
Each worker is required to have, at a minimum, a current certificate documenting asbestos worker accreditation .
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
09/22/2014 ASBESTOS ABATEMENT OF NON-FRIABLE FLOOR TILE 02 8216-8
140922
•
C.
The lead/competent person shall be designated by name, be on the site at all times during the abatement process, and shall have a certificate documenting contractor/supervisor accreditation.
D.
The lead/competent person shall be responsible for ensuring all regulations, procedures, and contractual requirements pertaining to asbestos-containing material removal are strictly adhered to while performing the work required by this contract.
E.
If more than one shift will be worked and more than one lead/competent person will work on this project, all shall be designated by name, and at least one of these shall be on the site at all times during the abatement process. PERSONAL PROTECTION
1.07
•
A.
All persons entering the work area shall be required to wear, at a minimum, protective clothing and respiratory protection.
B.
Respiratory protection shall be sufficient to protect employees from the determined concentration of asbestos in the work area as required by Title 8 of the California Code of Regulations, but never less than a half-face negative pressure respirator with dual P-1 00 HEP A filtered cartridges.
C.
Hand and eye protection shall be worn when activities warrant it, including, but not limited to removal of "pop-ups" from the concrete. WORK AREA PREPARATION
1.08
•
A.
Shut off all air handling systems, where possible, within or affecting the area of containment, without disrupting use of other occupied areas of the building, or modify the system so as to restrict any source of air movement into or out of the work area through the air handling system.
B.
Remove from the work area all objects not fastened to the structure prior to the commencement of area isolation. This includes, but is not limited to, items hanging from ceilings or walls. Boxes, equipment, etc., removed from th~ W()t:k
C.
Unless otherwise specified, all baseboards, base shoe or toe kick covering floor tile shall be removed. Care shall be taken to prevent damage to the base. Fasteners shall be removed from the base. Base
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
09/22/2014 ASBESTOS ABATEMENT OF NON-FRIABLE FLOOR TILE 02 8216-9
140922
•
removed shall be marked with the room number and wall from which it was removed, and stored in a secure location as directed by the District representative. Upon clearance and tear down of isolation all base listed above shall be returned to the room from which these were removed.
•
D.
Clean and cover with an airtight seal all porous, dropped, or perforated ceilings, stationary objects, doors, windows, vents, air circulating units, and registers (where the air handling system is turned off), in the work area, with 6-mil polyethylene sheeting, sealed around all edges. This does not include the opening for ingress and egress of the isolated work space.
E.
Cover all wall surfaces six (6) feet from the floor down to a maximum of two inches above the floor. Wall coverings shall be, at a minimum, one layer of 4-mil minimum thickness polyethylene sheeting. The integrity of the sheeting and the seals shall be maintained at all times until clearance is given to remove isolation.
F.
Construct a dual chamber mini-enclosure with weighted flaps made of polyethylene sheeting at each passage opening including the separation in the center. The mini-enclosure shall be of at least sufficient size for comfortable changing of clothing without disrupting the flap seal.
G.
Seal the mini-enclosure to the entrance sheeting in such a manner that the wall covering in the work area can be taken down at a later time without disturbing the seal of the mini-enclosure.
H.
Enclosure installation shall not interfere with the closing and securing of any door. The door(s) shall be locked at the end of the workday. REMOVAL
1.09
•
A.
Adequately wet the surface area to be removed with amended water initially and continually during the entire removal and waste packaging process. This shall be applied with an airless sprayer at a low pressure setting.
B.
Only manual pry bars, scrapers, and chisels or similar tools shall be used to remove these materials. Every effort shall be made to loosen the flooring material with the least breakage or chipping possible. If excessive breakage is unavoidable, the tile may be heated with electric
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR& P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
09/22/2014 ASBESTOS ABATEMENT OF NON-FRIABLE FLOOR TILE 02 8216-10
140922
•
heat guns to facilitate removal with limited breakage. Ground fault interrupters shall be used with electrical devices.
•
C.
Combustible products including, but not limited to, adhesive removing chemicals or solvents shall not be permitted within a school building for use on this type of work.
D.
Flooring shall be removed in small manageable sections and debris shall be cleaned and containerized before proceeding with the next section. A manageable section in this requirement is defined as an abatement area that can be cleaned and containerized as removal occurs. All containers shall be removed from the work area to the storage facility by the end of the shift.
E.
All excess material, backing, and/or adhesive on the floor surface shall be scraped off while applying amended water. Bonded residues from the adhesive may remain but all three dimensional ridges and accumulations shall be removed. No petroleum or citrus-based materials shall be applied to the floor for any purpose.
F.
"Pop-ups" (rock explosions) and raised concrete on floors shall be removed by hammering while applying amended water. Do NOT sand, grind, shot peen or sandblast adhesive or mastic. Do NOT dry scrape.
G.
The use of mechanical systems including, but not limited to, bead blasters are not permitted without written approval by the Facilities Environmental Technical Unit. CLEANING AND CLEARANCE
1.10
•
A.
Gather remaining water and debris on the floor surface using a floor squeegee or similar tool. Do NOT use tools that can cause fibers to be rendered airborne, such as brooms, blowers, etc.
B.
Place the debris in clear 6-mil polyethylene bags. Seal all bags by "goose-neck" twisting and taping. All waste bags shall be labeled as required by SCAQMD, Rule 1403.
C.
Clean all surfaces within the work area by HEP A vacuuming, wet mopping, or wiping with amended water.
D.
Dustpans, squeegees, shovels, etc., shall be non-metallic. No brooms shall be permitted for abatement purposes .
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
09/22/2014 ASBESTOS ABATEMENT OF NON-FRIABLE FLOOR TILE 02 8216-11
140922
•
•
E.
Once the area is cleaned, that is, there is no visible residue or debris as determined by the authorized District representative, a continuous coat of post removal lock-down material shall be applied to the removal substrate. It is the responsibility of the contractor to ensure the compatibility of the lock-down material with the replacement material to be applied on the substrate.
F.
All over spray on walls, floor base, molding, etc. shall be removed while the lock-down material is wet.
G.
After the lock-down material settles and dries, the wall sheeting shall be removed, placed in 6-mil waste bags labeled in accordance with current local, State and Federal regulations and transported to the storage or waste container. Clean any residual debris that may exist from surfaces under the sheeting by wet wipe and HEP A vacuuming. The District shall be notified when this has been accomplished.
H.
An inspection of the work area by the authorized District representative shall be performed. If the area fails to pass the visual inspection the contractor shall be required to re-clean the work area and, at the discretion of the authorized District representative, apply an additional lock-down coat in the work area .
I.
The contractor shall be responsible for costs incurred by the District for additional inspections and clearance air monitoring resulting from a failure or failures to pass the clearance air testing.
J.
Only after clearance is provided by the District's authorized representative may the critical barrier sheeting and mini-enclosure be removed, sealed in 6-mil polyethylene waste bags, and placed in the disposal container. TRANSPORTING AND DISPOSAL
1.11
•
A.
The storage/transportation container for the waste generated from floor removal shall be lockable and fully enclosed.
B.
Contractor shall transport the waste material from the work area to the disposal bin or waste container in an enclosed container (drum, carboy, plastic bags, etc.). At no time shall the Contractor transport the waste to the container while students and staff are occupying the route to the container.
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR& P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
09/22/2014 ASBESTOS ABATEMENT OF NON-FRIABLE FLOOR TILE 02 8216-12
140922
•
•
•
C.
The contractor shall comply with regulations of the Department of Transportation, Department of Health Services and all other regulatory agencies as it pertains to labeling, transporting and disposal of friable and non-friable asbestos-containing waste.
D.
The floor tile waste shall be disposed of as a non-friable/nonhazardous asbestos-containing waste at a landfill approved to accept such waste. Before waste is removed from the District site, the contractor shall notify the District of the landfill to be used, indicating the name and address. The contractor shall comply with all requirements and regulations enforced or imposed by the landfill in the course of disposing waste generated from a District site.
E.
The contractor shall provide and complete the NON-hazardous waste manifest for transporting this waste.
F.
Waste, including used personal protective equipment and isolation materials, shall be disposed of as hazardous waste. A hazardous waste manifest shall be submitted to the District upon transport and disposal of this waste. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
1.12 A.
Licensing and Registration: The contractor shall provide the District with written proof of asbestos certification as required by the Contractor State License Board and registration with the Division of Occupational Safety and Health.
B.
Product Compatibility: Provide written approval from the manufacturer of replacement materials indicating its compatibility with the encapsulating material to be used. A list of encapsulating materials that have been tested and approved for use on District projects, and have been approved for compatible use by floor covering adhesives manufacturers, is attached.
C.
Training Certification: Certificates documenting current AHERA accreditation for all workers and competent/lead persons shall be provided to the District prior to the start of any work. Contractor shall provide a copy of each certificate for all workers arriving on sites for the purpose of working on setup, removal or cleanup of the floor tile removal project. Any worker arriving without a certificate will be denied access to work on the project until a current certificate is provided. Each certificate shall require review and approval by the
I
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
09/22/2014 ASBESTOS ABATEMENT OF NON-FRIABLE FLOOR TILE 02 8216-13
140922
•
•
District before the individual employees of the contractor are permitted to work on a District project. D.
Medical and Respiratory Clearance: All persons entering the work area are required to have been medically tested and approved to wear respiratory protection and to work in an asbestos contaminated environment. Documentation of this approval is required prior to entry into the work area.
E.
Fit Testing: All persons required to wear respiratory protection shall be fit tested as required by the Title 8 CCR. Documentation of fit testing shall be provided prior to entry into the work area.
F.
Plastic Sheeting Requirements: All polyethylene sheeting, plastic or visqueen to be used in the performance of this contract shall be virgin grade (with no holes) and a fire retardant type. Abatement contractor shall provide documentation from the manufacturer verifying this requirement.
G.
First Aid and CPR: At least one employee of the Contractor trained and certified in first-aid and CPR is required to be on the site for the duration of the project.
H.
Maintenance of Working Area: The contractor shall keep the working area sufficiently clear of equipment, material, and implements of service to prevent endangering persons and damage to District property and to avoid an unsightly condition. Removal of such items shall be performed promptly upon completion of work. The contractor shall not use District facilities for disposal of debris and waste material, whether hazardous or non-hazardous, or asbestos-containing or nonasbestos-containing.
I.
Storage of Materials: The contractor shall confine the storage of material and equipment on site to the area designated by the District representative.
J.
Safety and Security: 1.
•
Comply with all laws, ordinances, rules and regulations applicable to the work.
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
09/22/2014 ASBESTOS ABATEMENT OF NON-FRIABLE FLOOR TILE 02 8216-14
140922
•
•
•
2.
Provide adequate protection for all persons and all District property within the working area or approaches thereto, and shall furnish and erect temporary barricades where necessary.
3.
Upon entering a school site with a vehicle, the contractor, contractor's employees, subcontractors or their agents shall not drive on school premises while children are present, shall have a guide employed by the contractor to walk ahead of the vehicle in the path of the vehicle while the vehicle moves at a slow and careful speed to ensure no injury or damage occurs, and the guide shall remain with the vehicle until the motor has been turned off and the parking brake has been set.
K.
Work Schedules and Coordination: The contractor shall plan a schedule of work with the District representative to provide vacated areas while work is in progress. Care shall be exercised by the contractor to minimize the inconvenience and danger to students and personnel.
L.
Access: The contractor, its employees, subcontractors, or other representatives, have no tenancy and shall be admitted to the grounds only for the proper execution of the work under this contract.
M.
Workmanship and Labor: All employees of the contractor, subcontractors or other representatives, shall be skilled in the type of work for which they are employed on this project and shall work under direction of competent superintendent. Should the District deem anyone employed in the work incompetent or unfit for their duties, the contractor shall remove such employee from the work and shall not reemploy them on work within the District on this project or any other project without written permission from the District.
N.
Fees, Permits, Licenses, Patents, Royalties and Payment Thereof: The contractor and contractor's employees and agents shall secure and maintain in force such licenses and permits as are required by law and shall conform to all Federal, State, and local laws, ordinances, and regulations covering the work under the contract. All operations and materials shall be in accordance with applicable laws, ordinances, and regulations.
0.
Billing: All work performed under this contract shall be invoiced in triplicate and delivered to the project manager .
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
09/22/2014 ASBESTOS ABATEMENT OF NON-FRIABLE FLOOR TILE 02 8216-15
140922
•
•
•
P.
1.13
Definitions: 1.
For purposes of this contract, amended water is water with the addition of a surfactant, or wetting agent that provides a surface tension of 29 dynes/em as tested using ASTM method D 1331, Standard Test Methods for Surface and Interfacial Tension of Solutions of Surface-Active Agents. All such wetting agents shall be approved by the District before application. Supply technical data sheets and material safety data sheets.
2.
Authorized District representative are the person or persons under whose direction the service shall be performed shall be the General Manager, Facilities Services Division of the Los Angeles Unified School District and assigned agents including the Asbestos Technical Supervisor.
3.
Unless indicated otherwise m these documents, regular working hours for performance of any work under this contract shall be Monday through Friday, 7:00 A. M. To 5:00 P. M., excluding holidays.
CLOSE-OUT DOCUMENTS A.
Provide the following close out documentation: 1.
Filter change logs for all air filtration units (where applicable), water filtration units, and respirators.
2.
Foreman's daily job reports.
3.
Employee entry/exit logs for all containments.
4.
Visitor entry/exit logs for all containments.
5.
Manometer printout reports for all applicable containments.
6.
Air sample results for personal monitoring or workers.
7.
Air Samples for Abatement Work areas, and air filtration units (where applicable).·
8.
Copies of all Hazardous and Non-Hazardous Waste Manifests.
9.
All Hazardous Waste weight tickets .
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
09/22/2014 ASBESTOS ABATEMENT OF NON-FRIABLE FLOOR TILE 02 8216-16
140922
• B.
1.14
10.
All signed Daily Personnel Report Forms.
11.
Signed code of conduct form from each employee working on a Project.
12.
Signed asbestos Abatement Project Personnel Logs.
Receipt of the last workday attendance log and the daily personal monitoring results shall be submitted within two days upon completion of the Abatement Work of this section. LEAD RELATED DISTURBANCE
A.
"Renovation, repair or painting work performed on buildings constructed prior to 1978 require special handling and environmental monitoring when coated surfaces including, but not limited to, painted, varnished, and glazed surfaces are impacted. Coated surfaces applied prior to 1978 are assumed to be lead-based. All work shall be performed in compliance with Facilities Standard Specification, Section 02 8333, "Lead Abatement and Lead Related Construction Work." XRF testing methodology is not acceptable in determining negative for lead content for Cal/OSHA compliance purposes, except for notification requirements. XRF may be used in determining leadbased paint for compliance with the U.S.E.P.A. Renovator, Repair, and Painting Rule. Disturbance of coated surfaces by contractors will be monitored by qualified District staff or Environmental Consultant sufficient to ensure that proper training and work procedures, cleanup, and waste handling are employed."
B.
All loose and flaky paint or coating that will or may be disturbed in the course of completing the scope of work shall be stabilized prior to abatement setup.
•
PART 2- PRODUCTS LOCK-DOWN PRODUCTS
2.01 A.
The following products have been approved for use as an encapsulant/lock-down material on Distrjct projects, as well as compatible with replacement materials. 1.
•
Fiberset PM 7475 clear by Fiberlock Technologies, Inc., compatible with flooring .
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR& P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
09/22/2014 ASBESTOS ABATEMENT OF NON-FRJABLE FLOOR TILE 02 8216-17
140922
•
2.
Fiberset PM 7470 white by Fiberlock Technologies, Inc., compatible with flooring.
PART 3- EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION
•
•
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
09/22/2014 ASBESTOS ABATEMENT OF NON-FRIABLE FLOOR TILE 02 8216-18
160617
SECTION 02 8333
•
LEAD ABATEMENT AND LEAD RELATED CONSTRUCTION WORK
PART 1- GENERAL SUMMARY
1.01 A.
B.
• 1.02
1.
Abatement, Lead Related Construction Work or painting of lead-containing materials and/or Lead Based Paint.
2.
Transportation and disposal oflead-containing materials and/or Lead Based Paint.
3.
Attachment "A" FETU Report Phase I & Phase II.
Related Requirements: 1.
Section 00 3126 - Existing Hazardous Materials Information.
2.
Division 01 -General Requirements.
3.
Cal/OSHA Title 8, California Code of Regulations (CCR).
4.
California Air Resources Board Ambient Air Quality Standard, Title 24 CCR.
5.
California Department of Public Health, Title 17, CCR.
6.
Cal/EPA, Title 22 CCR.
7.
California Labor Code, Division 5, Part 1, as it pertains to safety in employment and with the applicable provisions of the Title 8, CCR as it pertains to Occupational Safety and Health in the work place.
8.
Environmental Protection Agency, 40CFR, Part 745.
9.
UD- Title X, Residential Lead-Based Paint Hazard Reduction Act of 1992.
10.
Los Angeles County Public Health Code (Chapter 11 ).
DEFINITIONS AND -ACRONYMS A.
•
Section Includes:
AAS - Atomic Absorption Spectrophotometry used for lead paint chip and dust wipe sample analysis .
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
06117/2016 LEAD ABATEMENT AND LEAD RELATED CONSTRUCTION WORK 02 8333-1
160617
•
•
•
B.
Abatement - Any set of measures designed to reduce or eliminate lead hazards or Lead Based Paint for public and residential buildings, but does not include containment or cleaning.
C.
Action Level - Means the Action Level as defined in Title 8, California Code of Regulations, Section 1532.1.
D.
ANSI- American National Standards Institute.
E.
ASTM -American Society for Testing and Materials.
F.
Building ID number or code (Maximo) - A six digit alphanumeric identification code assigned to each building on an Owner site, also referred to as the insurance code, ID number or similar terms.
G.
Certificate - Means the document issued by CDPH to an individual meeting the certification requirements as described in CCR Title 17, Sections 35083, 35085, 35087, 35089, or 35091.
H.
Clean Room - An uncontaminated area or room which is a part of the worker Decontamination Enclosure System with provisions for storage of worker's street clothes and clean protective equipment.
I.
Clearance Inspection - Means visual examination and, as applicable, collection of environmental samples upon completion of the Work of this section.
J.
Component - Means a structural element or fixture, including but not limited to, walls, floors, ceilings, doors, window molding, trim, trestles, tanks, stairs, railings, cabinets, gutters, or downspouts.
K.
Curtained doorway - A device to allow ingress and egress from one room to another while permitting minimal air movement between the rooms, typically constructed by placing two overlapping sheets of plastic over an exiting or temporarily framed doorway, securing each along the top of the doorway, securing the vertical edge of one sheet along one vertical side of the doorway and securing the vertical edge of the other sheet along the opposite vertical side of the doorway. Other effective designs may be submitted for rev1ew.
L.
Decontamination- The process of eliminating lead contamination from building surfaces, and property by cloths, mops, or other utensils dampened with water and disposed of as lead contaminated waste.
M.
Decontamination Enclosure System - A minimum a two-stage Decontamination unit consisting of a compartment for Decontamination, and a Clean Room. Unless otherwise specified, it shall be adjacent to the Abatement area.
N.
Demolition - The wrecking or taking out of any load supporting structural member of a facility together with any related handling operations .
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
06/17/2016 LEAD ABATEMENT AND LEAD RELATED CONSTRUCTION WORK 02 8333-2
160617
•
•
•
0.
Deteriorated Lead Based Paint - Means Lead Based Paint or a surface coating that is cracking, chalking, flaking, chipping, peeling, non-intact, failed, or otherwise separating from the substrate to which it is applied to.
P.
CDPH- California Department of Public Health.
Q.
CDPH-Approved Course - Means any lead construction course that satisfies the requirements specified in CCR Title 17, Sections 35056, 35061, 35066, or 35067 as determined by CDPH pursuant to Sections 35076 and 35078.
R.
DOSH- California Division of Occupational Safety & Health or Cal/OSHA.
S.
DOT - Department of Transportation.
T.
DTSC -California Department of Toxic Substances Control.
U.
Encapsulating Material- Are coatings or rigid materials adhesively applied to Lead Based Painted surfaces in the Encapsulation process.
v.
Encapsulation - The application of an Encapsulating Material to Lead Based Paint to provide a barrier between the Lead Based Paint and the environment.
w.
Enclosure - A rigid durable barrier mechanically attached to building Component, with edges and seams sealed with caulk or other sealant.
X.
EPA; Renovation, Repair and Painting (RRP)- Means a lead-related construction course that satisfies the requirements specified in 40 CPR, Part 745, Section 745.90 .
Y.
FETU- Facilities Environmental Technical Unit.
z.
Firm- Means a company, partnership, corporation, sole proprietorship or individual doing business, association, or other business entity; a Federal, State, Tribal, or local government agency; or a nonprofit organization and satisfies the requirements specified in 40 CPR, Part 745, Section 745.89.
AA.
Fixed Object- A piece of equipment, furniture, or improvement in the Work Area, which cannot be removed from the Work Area.
BB.
Hazardous Waste- Means any waste stream determined by an Owner approved laboratory to exceed the regulatory thresholds for lead hazardous waste.
CC.
HEP A Filter- Means a filtering system capable of trapping and retaining at least 99.97 percent of mono-dispersed particles 0.3 micrometers in diameter or larger.
DD.
HEPA Vacuum- A vacuum system furnished with HEPA filtration.
EE.
HUD -United States Department of Housing and Urban Development
FF.
HV AC - Heating, Ventilation, and Air Conditioning system .
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
06/17/2016 LEAD ABATEMENT AND LEAD RELATED CONSTRUCTION WORK 02 8333-3
160617
•
•
GG.
ICP-AES- Means Inductively Coupled Plasma-Atomic Emission Spectroscopy used for heavy metal analysis, including lead .
HH.
Lead Based Paint - Means paint or other surface coatings that contain an amount oflead equal to or greater than 0.7 milligrams per square centimeter (0.7 mg/cm2) or equal to or greater than 0.5 percent by weight.
II.
Lead Containing Paint - Means paint or other surface coatings that contain lead in an amount equal to or greater than 0.06 percent lead dry weight (600 ppm) but does not meet the definition of Lead Based Paint. In the absence of paint chip or surface coating bulk sample results, any surface coating shall be assumed to be above 0.06 percent lead dry weight (600 ppm) until surface coating samples are collected and analyzed that indicate otherwise. Lead concentration shall be determined by a method that has an accuracy of not less than plus or minus 25 percent at 0.06 percent lead dry weight, to a confidence level of 95 percent.
JJ.
Lead Contaminated Dust- Means dustthat contains an amount oflead equal to, or greater than, forty micrograms per square foot (40 !-lg/ft2 ) for interior floor surfaces; two hundred and fifty micrograms per square foot (250 !-lg/ft2 ) for interior horizontal window surfaces; and eight hundred micrograms per square foot (800 !-lg/ft2 ) for exterior floor and exterior horizontal window surfaces.
KK.
Lead Contaminated Soil - Means bare soil that contains an amount of lead equal to, or greater than, four hundred parts per million (400ppm).
LL.
Lead Hazard - Means deteriorated Lead Based Paint, Lead Contaminated Dust, Lead Contaminated Soil, the disturbance of Lead Based Paint or Presumed Lead Based Paint without containment, or any other operation that may result in persistent and quantifiable lead exposure.
MM.
Lead Inspection- Means a surface by surface investigation to determine the presence of Lead Based Paint as described in Chapter 7: Lead Based Paint Inspection, " Guidelines for the Evaluation and Control of Lead Based Paint Hazards in Housing," U.S. Department of Housing and Urban Development, 1997 Revision.
NN.
Lead Related Construction Work - Means any construction, alteration, painting, Demolition, salvage, Renovation, repair, or maintenance of any residential or public building, including preparation and cleanup that, by using or disturbing lead-containing material or soil, may result in significant exposure of adults or children to lead.
00.
Lead Safe Schools Program- Means the training program for lead safe working practices as developed by the Labor Occupational Health Program at U.C. Berkley.
PP.
Location Code (Maximo) - Refers to a unique four digit numeric code assigned by the Owner to each of its Project sites.
QQ.
Member- A Component part of a structure complete in itself.
RR.
Movable Object- A piece of portable equipment or furniture in the Work Area, which can be removed from the Work Area .
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR& P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
06/17/2016 LEAD ABATEMENT AND LEAD RELATED CONSTRUCTION WORK 02 8333-4
160617
•
SS.
NESHAP- The National Emission Standards for Hazardous Air Pollutants (40 CFR Part 50.12) .
TT.
NIOSH- The National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health.
UU.
Owner Consultant (OC)- Refers to the firm, company or individual designated by the Owner.
VV.
Painting Contract-For purposes of this section, a painting contract is a Contract with the Owner to perform painting on existing facilities where Lead Based Paint, Lead Containing Paint, Presumed Lead Based or Presumed Lead Containing Paint will be disturbed or abated.
WW. P.E.L. -Means permissible exposure limits as defined in Title 8, California Code of Regulations, Section 1532.1. XX.
Plasticize - To cover floors, walls, and equipment with plastic sheeting as specified herein.
YY.
Portable Mechanical Ventilation System - A portable exhaust system furnished with HEP A filtration and capable of providing a constant air flow into regulated Work Area from adjacent areas and exhausted outside the regulated area.
ZZ.
Presumed Lead Based Paint- Means paint or surface coating affixed to a Component in or on a structure, excluding paint or surface coating affixed to a Component in or on a residential dwelling constructed on or after January 1, 1979, or a school constructed on or after January 1, 1993.
AAA. Removal - Means operations where Lead Based Paint is removed or stripped from structures or substrates including Demolition. BBB. Renovation- Means the modifying of any existing structure, facility, or portion thereof. CCC. Replacement- Means Removal of an entire building Component coated with Lead Based Paint and replacing it with a lead free Component. DDD. SCAQMD- South Coast Air Quality Management District. EEE.
STLC- Means Soluble Threshold Limit Concentration used in the State of California in conjunction with TTLC to determine lead hazardous waste limits. If the STLC result is equal to or exceeds 5 mg/L the waste is deemed to be hazardous.
FFF.
Surfactant - A chemical wetting agent added to water.
GGG. TCLP :-Means Toxicity Characteristic Leaching Procedure used to determine the federal Resources Conservation Recovery Act (RCRA) lead hazardous waste limits. If the results equal or exceed 5 mg/L the waste is deemed to be hazardous.
•
HHH. TTLC- Means Total Threshold Limit Concentration used in the State of California in conjunction with STLC to determine lead hazardous waste limits. If the results are equal to or exceeds 1000 mg/kg, the waste is deemed to be hazardous . CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
06/17/2016 LEAD ABATEMENT AND LEAD RELATED CONSTRUCTION WORK 02 8333-5
160617
•
III.
Visible Emissions- Any emissions from a known or suspected lead-containing material that is visually discernible .
JJJ.
Wet Cleaning - The process of eliminating lead contamination from building surfaces and/or objects by cloths, mops, or other utensils dampened with amended water and afterwards being disposed of as hazardous waste.
KKK. Work Area- Means an area where known or Presumed Lead Based Paint is disturbed or Abatement is conducted. LLL.
1.03
•
X-Ray Fl uorescense (XRF) Analyzer- Means a direct reading instrument that determines the lead content of the surface coatings in milligrams per square centimeter (mg/cm2 ) using the principle of x-ray fluorescence. POLICIES AND PROCEDURES
A.
The Owner has a zero-tolerance policy for uncontrolled lead releases during Lead Related Construction Work, Lead Containing Paint disturbance, or Abatement activities. A lead release requiring an emergency response is any disturbance resulting in the uncontrolled release of lead containing materials. Upon observation of any visual emissions, immediately stop the Work, vacate the Work Area, and provide written notification to the Owner Consultant.
B.
Pre-qualified Abatement Subcontractors are not permitted to subcontract any Abatement Work to a lower tier Subcontractor without the prior written approval of the Owner.
C.
Do not furnish a reduced pressurization and filtration system in violation of, or in infringement upon, any patent.
D.
Owner Consultant shall provide oversight for Projects that have the potential to disturb lead containing or Lead Based Paint. Prior to the commencement of such Work, provide written notification to the Owner Consultant.
E.
The following paragraph regarding impacts to coated surfaces shall be part of the contract: 1.
•
1.04
"Renovation, repair or painting work performed on buildings constructed prior to 1978 require special handling and environmental monitoring when coated surfaces including, but not limited to, painted, varnished, and glazed surfaces are impacted. Coated surfaces applied prior to 1978 are assumed to be leadbased. All work shall be performed in compliance with Specification; Section 02 8333, "Lead Abatement and Lead Related Construction Work." XRF testing methodology is not acceptable in determining negative for lead content for Cal/OSHA compliance purposes, except for notification requirements. XRF may be used in determining lead-based paint for compliance with the U.S.E.P.A. Renovator, Repair, and Painting Rule. Disturbance of coated surfaces by contractors will be monitored by qualified District staff or Environmental Consultant sufficient to ensure that proper training and work procedures, cleanup, and waste handling are employed."
COORDINATION
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR& P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
06/17/2016 LEAD ABATEMENT AND LEAD RELATED CONSTRUCTION WORK 02 8333-6
160617
•
A.
SITE SECURITY
1.05
•
A.
The Work Area is restricted to authorized, trained, and protected personnel. A list of authorized personnel shall be established and posted at the entrance of the Work Area by the Owner Consultant prior to commencement of the Work.
B.
Report to the Owner Consultant any unauthorized entry into the Work Area. Following notification, a written report of the incident shall be provided to the Owner Consultant.
C.
A logbook shall be maintained at the entrance of the Work Area. Persons entering the Work Area shall record name, company affiliation, time in, and time out for each entry and exit.
D.
Access to the Abatement Work Area shall be through the Decontamination Enclosure System only. Other means of access shall be blocked or locked so as to prevent entry to or exit from the Work Area. Emergency exits shall be operable from inside the Work Area.
E.
Maintain Work Area security during Abatement and/or Lead Related Construction Work. Work Areas and ancillary equipment accessible to non-authorized personnel shall be protected from unauthorized access by constructing a minimum barrier of 3/8 inch CDX plywood supported by 2 by 4 studs, 16 inches on center. An access door shall be provided with hasp and padlock sufficient to prevent unauthorized entry. A key shall be provided to the Owner and Owner Consultant. Required barriers within an occupied building shall be furnished with sheathing as required by state and local fire protection regulations.
F.
Remove barriers upon the completion of the Work of this section and unless otherwise specified, repair and/or replace to its original condition, damage resulting from installation, use, and removal of the barriers. EMERGENCY PLANNING
1.06
•
Coordinate the Work of this section directly with the Owner and/or Owner Consultant.
A.
Emergency planning and procedures shall be developed, submitted, reviewed, and agreed to by the Owner Consultant prior to the commencement of lead-related construction and/or Abatement Work.
B.
Emergency procedures shall be provided in the written languages understood by employees working on the Project and shall be prominently posted at the entrance of the Decontamination Enclosure System. Prior to entering the Work Area, parties must read and sign these procedures to acknowledge receipt and understanding of the Work Area layout, location of emergency exits, and emergency procedures.
C.
Emergency planning shall consider the effects of fire, explosion, toxic atmospheres, electrical hazards, slips, trips and falls, confined spaces, and heat related injury. Develop and provide written procedures and training to employees.
D.
Employees shall be trained in evacuation procedures in the event of workplace emergencies .
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
06/17/2016 LEAD ABATEMENT AND LEAD RELATED CONSTRUCTION WORK 02 8333-7
160617
•
•
E.
In the event of non-life threatening situations requiring medical treatment, injured or otherwise incapacitated employees shall decontaminate following normal procedures with assistance from fellow workers if necessary, before exiting the Work Area.
F.
In the event of life threatening injury or illness requiring immediate medical treatment, worker Decontamination shall be given minimum priority. Provide measures to stabilize the injured worker remove them from the Work Area and secure proper medical treatment.
G.
Telephone numbers of emergency response personnel shall be prominently posted at the entrance of the Decontamination Enclosure System along with the location of the nearest telephone. In addition to the 911 emergency number, post the address and telephone number of the nearest emergency medical services provider.
H.
Provide at least one employee on the Project site at times during progress of the Work that is trained and certified in first aid and cardiopulmonary resuscitation (CPR). This employee shall be identified by name and proof of training shall be provided to the Owner Consultant prior to the commencement of the Work of this section.
I.
Provide at least one 4A/60BC dry chemical extinguisher in the Decontamination compartment. Workers shall be trained in the proper operation of fire extinguishers.
J.
Emergency exits shall be provided and clearly marked with arrows or other clearly visible markings to permit easy identification from anywhere within the Work Area. Exits shall be secured to prevent access from uncontaminated areas while still permitting emergency egress. Exits shall be properly sealed with polyethylene sheeting, which can be cut to permit emergency egress. Emergency exits may lead through the Decontamination Enclosure System or other alternative exits as required by fire officials.
1.07
LICENSING A.
QUALIFICATIONS
1.08
•
The Work of this section shall be performed by an entity duly licensed in the State of California in accordance with the provisions of Chapter 9 of Division 3 of the Business and Professions Code, as amended.
A.
Only safety pre-qualified bidders on the pre-approved bidders list are qualified to be awarded an Abatement Contract or Painting Contract be listed as a Subcontractor for lead Abatement Work or Painting Contract.
B.
Where the scope of the Work includes the painting and/or refinishing of existing surfaces, only safety pre-qualified bidders on the pre-approved bidders list are qualified to be awarded a painting Contract or be listed as a Subcontractor for painting Work.
C.
Before any workers perform Abatement Work or Work of this section where the P .E.L. is exceeded, submit proof of CDPH training and certification. NoWork shall be performed until the Owner Consultant has reviewed and approved CDPH training and certifications .
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
06117/2016 LEAD ABATEMENT AND LEAD RELATED CONSTRUCTION WORK 02 8333-8
160617
•
D.
Workers shall be in personal possession of a wallet CDPH certification card at times while they are performing Abatement Work on the Project site .
E.
Workers performing lead Abatement, Lead Related Construction Work, or disturbance of Lead Containing Paint where the exposure level exceeds the P .E.L., shall possess current CDPH certification and at least one CDPH Certified supervisor shall be available as required by Title 17, CCR subsection 36100. TRAINING
1.09 A.
•
1.
The Lead Related Construction Work, specified herein, shall be performed by individuals trained and qualified in the techniques of lead-related construction, handling, disposal of lead-based and Lead Containing Paint, and the subsequent cleaning of contaminated areas. These individuals must comply with the applicable Environmental Protection Agency (EPA), Renovation, Repair and Painting (RRP) programs lead-related construction course that satisfies the requirements specified in 40 CFR, Part 745, Section 745., and must be capable of and willing to perform the Work of this section.
2.
The Lead Related Construction Work, specified herein, shall be performed by a company, partnership, corporation, sole proprietorship or individual doing business, association, or other business entity; a Federal, State, Tribal, or local government agency; or a nonprofit organization, shall satisfy the requirements specified in 40 CFR, Part 745, Section 745.89, as a Lead-Safe Certified Firm.
3.
Lead Abatement Work, specified herein, shall be performed by individuals trained and qualified in the techniques of lead abatement and will receive CDPH accredited training and certification, and must be capable of and willing to perform the Work of this section.
2.
Training specific to the performance ofLead Related Construction Work shall be provided to employees prior to performing the Work of this section.
3.
Training specific to the operation and use of fire extinguishers.
EXPOSURE ASSESSMENT
1.10
•
Lead Related Construction Work shall be performed by personnel with the following training, as applicable:
A.
Disturbance of Lead Containing Paint, as defined in this Specification, disturbed by tasks not included in Title 8, CCR Section 1532.1, Subsection (d)(2), shall require workerexposure monitoring upon initiation of the Work. The workers performing these tasks shall be trained in accordance with the Hazard Communications Standard, Section 5194, including but not limited to, the requirements concerning warning signs and labels, Safety Data Sheets (SDS), and employee information and training.
B.
Provide an exposure assessment where the workers are performing Lead Related Construction Work. If historical data, collected within the 12 months prior to the Work performed, indicates worker exposure is below the P .E.L. , and the Work being performed
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR& P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
06/17/2016 LEAD ABATEMENT AND LEAD RELATED CONSTRUCTION WORK 02 8333-9
160617
closely resembles the process, type of material, control methods, work practices, and environmental conditions, additional exposure assessment is not required .
•
•
C.
For Lead Related Construction Work where there is objective data or an exposure assessment demonstrating that the Lead Based Paint, or a specific process, operation or activity other than Abatement involving lead cannot result in employee exposure to lead at or above the P .E.L. during the specific process or handling, employees trained as required by Title 8, CCR Section 1532.1, including the training topics of the Lead-Safe Schools Program, may perform the Lead Related Construction Work.
D.
Where Work being performed indicates an exposure above the Action Level, each employee is required to have current blood lead level and Zinc Protoporphorin testing, medical clearance for negative pressure respirator use, and respirator fit testing.
E.
If there is no objective data or a negative exposure assessment fulfilling the above requirements, Lead Related Construction Work identified as a trigger task by Title 8, CCR 1532.1 shall be performed by workers who have received training as required by Title 8 CCR, Section 1532.1. This training shall, at a minimum, include the training topics of the Lead Safe Schools Program. An exposure assessment is required to be performed upon initiation of Work.
F.
The required exposure assessment shall not exceed 12 months from the date the samples were collected to the date the Lead Related Construction Work or disturbance of Lead Containing Paint is performed.
G.
The submission and review by the Owner Consultant of the objective data or exposure assessment is required prior to performing Lead Related Construction Work.
1.11
SUBMITTALS A.
Provide in accordance with Division 01 and this section.
B.
Prior to performing the Work of this section, submit the following procedures to the Owner Consultant: 1.
•
An abatement plan including, but not limited to: a.
A detailed written description of the measures and management procedures, including the containment that will be utilized during Abatement to prevent exposure to lead hazards. Shop Drawings shall indicate the containment locations.
b.
A detailed written description of the Abatement, including methods of Abatement, locations of rooms and building Component where Abatement is planned.
2.
Required air monitoring procedures (Cal/OSHA mandatory and SCAQMD permits for air filtering equipment).
3.
Decontamination procedures for personnel, Work Area, and equipment.
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR& P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
06117/2016 LEAD ABATEMENT AND LEAD RELATED CONSTRUCTION WORK 02 8333-10
160617
• C.
D.
•
E.
F.
•
4.
Procedures for handling and disposing of waste materials, including disposal facility .
5.
Provide the procedures to be used for capturing debris while disturbing overhead materials.
6.
Procedures for final Decontamination and cleanup.
7.
Procedures for dealing with heat stress during Abatement.
8.
Emergency procedures during Abatement.
Prior to performing Abatement Work of this section, submit the following Shop Drawings to the Owner Consultant: 1.
Preparation of Work Area.
2.
Layout and construction of Decontamination Enclosure System and barriers for isolation of the Work Area described in this Specification and required by applicable regulations.
Prior to performing the Work of this section, submit the following Product Data to the Owner Consultant: 1.
Product Data relative to personal protective equipment including respiratory protection and protective clothing .
2.
Material safety data sheets and technical specifications for proposed materials.
Prior to performing the Work of this section, submit the following notifications to the Owner Consultant: 1.
Evidence of notification to Cal/OSHA as required by Title 8 CCR, Section 1532.1, where applicable. ·
2.
Notify CDPHno less than five days in advance of Abatement by submitting an Abatement ofLead Hazard Notification, CDPHForm 8551.
Prior to performing the Work of this section, submit the following documentation to the Owner Consultant: 1.
A list of employees who will participate in the Project, including delineation of experience, training, and assigned responsibilities during the Project.
2.
Submit proof satisfac.tory to the Owner Co11sult.ant that required permits, site location, and arrangements for transport and disposal oflead containing waste has been performed in accordance with Federal, State, and local regulations.
3.
Submit proof of training for each worker who will perform Abatement or Lead Related Construction Work.
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
06/17/2016 LEAD ABATEMENT AND LEAD RELATED CONSTRUCTION WORK 02 8333-11
160617
• G.
4.
Submit manufacturer's certification that HEP A Vacuums, air filtration units and . other local exhaust ventilation equipment conform to ANSI Z9 .2, as applicable .
5.
When HEP A Vacuums are utilized on the Project, provide the maintenance and filter change log for these before they are brought onto the Project site.
6.
Provide the current SCAQMD permit for each HEP A Vacuum and Portable Mechanical Ventilation System before they are brought onto the Project site.
7.
Where biological monitoring is required, submit test result documentation verifying employees have completed blood lead level and Zinc Protoporphorin tests in accordance with Title 8 CCR, Section 1532.1.
8.
Workers are required to submit a signed Code of Conduct form.
Prior to performing the Work of this section, submit the following Samples to the Owner Consultant: 1.
H.
Prior to performing the Work of this section, submit the following schedule to the Owner Consultant: 1.
•
•
Submit a Sample of forms to be used in documenting the Work of this section.
An intended sequence of Work and construction schedule. Coordinate both the sequence and durations with the Owner.
I.
Prior to performing the Work of this section, submit other required items to the Owner Consultant.
J.
During the performance of the Work of this section, submit the following documentation to the Owner Consultant: 1.
Submit documentation from a physician certifying that employees who wear a negative pressure respirator are medically cleared to do so without suffering adverse health effects as required by DOSH regulations. The certification shall state that the employee or agent may perform Lead Related Construction Work and wear a negative pressure respirator without restrictions. Provide information to the examining physician about unusual conditions in the workplace environment that may impact the employee's ability to perform Work activities.
2.
During the performance of the Work of this section, and before additional supervisors or workers are permitted to perform the Work of this section, submit proof of CDPHtraining and certification, where applicable. No additional supervisors or workers are permitted upon the Project site until the Owner Consultant has approved the CDPHtraining_and certifications, when required.
3.
Submit weekly job progress reports detailing Abatement and Lead Related Construction Work activities for Projects that will exceed thirty days. Include review of progress with respect to previously established Milestones and schedules, major problems and action taken, injury reports, equipment breakdown, and air and/or wipe sampling results .
CORWIN THEATERREPA1R& P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
06117/2016 LEAD ABATEMENT AND LEAD RELATED CONSTRUCTION WORK 02 8333-12
160617
• K.
•
Within five workdays of transport and disposal, submit copies of transport manifests, disposal receipts, analytical data, and weight certificates for hazardous waste removed from the Work Area during the Lead Related Construction Work and/or Abatement Work. Weight certificates shall indicate by' pounds the net weight of waste disposed of from the Project site as indicated on the associated manifest.
5.
Submit daily, copies of Abatement Work site entry logbooks with information on worker and visitor access.
6.
Submit logs on a weekly basis documenting filter changes on respirators, HEP A vacuums, HEP A filtered ventilation units, water filtration units, and other approved engineering controls, as applicable.
7.
Submit results of air and/or wipe sampling data (as applicable) collected during the course of the Abatement and Lead Related Construction Work including DOSH compliance air monitoring results.
During the performance of the Work of this section, submit other required items. PRE-ABATEMENT MEETING
1.12
•
4.
A.
Attend a meeting to be held prior to the commencement of the Work of this section. Attending this meeting shall be representatives of the Owner, the Owner Consultant if applicable, and the testing and monitoring personnel who shall actually participate in the testing and monitoring program. Secure the attendance of the individual who will be the Project site competent person for the Abatement Work.
B.
At this meeting provide required submittals except for those to be submitted during progress of the Work. In addition, provide detailed information concerning: 1.
Preparation of Work Area and Shop Drawings.
2.
Personal protective equipment, including respiratory protection and protective clothing.
3.
Employees who will partiCipate in the Project, including delineation of experience, training, and assigned responsibilities during the Work.
4.
Decontamination procedures for personnel, Work Area, and equipment.
5.
Abatement methods and procedures to be provided.
6.
Required air monitoring procedures (pre-Abatement, Cal/OSHA mandatory, and SCAQMD requirement).
7.
Procedures for handling and disposing of waste materials, including disposal facility.
8.
Procedures for final Decontamination and cleanup .
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR& P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
06/17/2016 LEAD ABATEMENT AND LEAD RELATED CONSTRUCTION WORK 02 8333-13
160617
•
9.
A sequence of Work activities and performance schedule .
10.
Procedures for dealing with heat stress.
11.
Emergency procedures.
PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01
MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT A.
Products: The following products have been specifically approved for use ass encapsulants/lock-down or bridging agents for Owner asbestos abatement and asbestos related construction projects and lead abatement and lead abatement related construction projects. Products not approved by the Owner shall not be used. 1.
B.
•
•
L-B-C Lead Barrier Compound 5400 be Fiberlock Technologies, Inc.; coating encapsulant.
Materials:
1.
Deliver materials in the original sealed packages, containers, or bundles bearing the name of the manufacturer and brand name.
2.
Store materials, subject to damage off the ground, away from wet or damp surfaces, and under cover sufficient enough to prevent damage or contamination. Replacement materials shall be stored outside of the Work Area until area is cleared for normal occupancy.
3.
Damaged, deteriorating, or previously used materials shall not be furnished and shall be removed from the Project site and legally disposed of.
4.
A sufficient supply of disposable mops, rags, and sponges for Work Area Decontamination shall be provided.
5.
Unless otherwise specified, the Owner will provide water for construction purposes. Connect to existing system as required.
6.
Products brought onto the Project site shall be accompanied by their respective Material Safety Data Sheet, which shall be maintained on the Project site.
7.
Plastic, polyethylene sheeting or visqueen shall be a fire retardant type. Provide documentation from the manufacturer verifYing compliance with this requirement.
8.
Polyethylene sheeting furnished for the Decontamination Enclosure System shall be opaque white or black in color and shall be a minimum of 6-mil thick.
9.
Surfactant (wetting agent) shall be a material that, when tested, demonstrates a surface tension of29 dynes/em as tested in its properly mixed concentration, using ASTM method D1331-56-"Surface and Interfacial Tension of Solutions of Surface Active Agents." Where Work Area temperature may cause freezing of the
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR& P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
06/17/2016 LEAD ABATEMENT AND LEAD RELATED CONSTRUCTION WORK 02 8333-14
160617
•
Amended Water solution, the addition of approved antifreeze in a manufacturer recommended amount is permitted . B.
Equipment: 1.
Disposal bags shall be of 6-mil polyethylene, pre-printed with labels as required by applicable Cal/OSHA and DOT requirements.
2.
Provide labels as per DOT requirements for disposal containers.
3.
Provide warning signs as required by Cal/OSHA.
4.
Disposal containers shall meet requirements of Title 22, CCR.
5.
Provide a sufficient supply of scaffolds, ladders, lifts, and hand tools, as needed to complete the Work.
6.
Provide sprayers with pumps capable of providing amended water in sufficient quantity to adequately wet the material to be abated or for Lead Related Construction Work.
7.
Provide a sufficient supply of HEP A filtered vacuums to maintain a clean environment in compliance with this section.
8.
When an enclosure requiring negative pressure is specified, a sufficient quantity of air-filtration ventilation units furnished with HEP A filtration and operated in accordance with ANSI Z9 .2and EPA guidance documents shall be utilized to provide one workplace air change every 15 minutes and creating a pressure differential of -0.02 inches of water everywhere within the enclosure when compared to the area outside the enclosure. A log documenting the filter change history of each unit shall be required before use, and any unit without this log shall have filters changed and the unit decontaminated.
9.
When rental equipment is to be used in Abatement areas or to transport lead contaminated waste, a written notification concerning the intended use of the rental equipment shall be provided to the rental agency with a copy submitted to the Owner.
10.
When performing chemical Removal, provide portable eyewash station(s) that meet ANSI standards and are accessible to workers within 10 seconds.
11.
Additional safety equipment, as necessary, shall be provided to workers and authorized visitors.
12.
Equipment delivered to the .Project site shall _be free. of debris suspect of containing lead. No equipment with suspect debris in or on it shall be permitted on Owner properties and/or the Project site.
13.
When roll-off disposal containers are delivered to a Project site, four wheels of each container shall be moved and rested upon a minimum size sheet of plywood of 4-foot by 4-foot by% inch .
•
•
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
06/17/2016 LEAD ABATEMENT AND LEAD RELATED CONSTRUCTION WORK 02 8333-15
160617
•
14.
2.02
EMPLOYEE PERSONAL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT A.
•
B.
C.
•
Lighting shall be provided in an amount sufficient to illuminate the Work Area for the purpose of safe visual working conditions and to permit examination of surfaces where Work is performed.
Respiratory Protection: 1.
Submit NIOSH approvals for respiratory protective devices utilized on the Project site. Include manufacturer certification of HEP A filtration capabilities for cartridges and filters. Filter cartridges shall be furnished with the NIOSH P-1 00 designation.
2.
Provide respiratory protection to employees in compliance with CCR Title 8, Sections 1532.1 and 5144, as determined by the employee exposure assessment.
3.
In the absence of an exposure assessment, base respiratory protection on the requirements of Title 8, CCR Section 1532.1, specifically subsection (d).
4.
In addition to P-1 00 filters, provide the appropriate respirator filter cartridges for exposure to other airborne contaminants generated during the Abatement process.
5.
Provide authorized visitors with a respirator and cartridges sufficient to protect individuals from exposure to hazardous environments generated during the Abatement activity.
Fit Testing: 1.
Perform fit testing in accordance with Title 8 CCR, Section 5144.
2.
Submit documentation of respirator fit testing for individuals entering the Work Area.
3.
Maintain and submit to the Owner a copy of the written respiratory protection program.
Personal Protective Clothing and Equipment: 1.
Provide eye protection to employees sufficient to protect employees from debris during work progress when full-face respirators are not being utilized.
2.
Provide and require the use of eye protection when employees are working with a material that may splash or fragment, as specified by the Material Safety Data Sheet for a given product, or as required by Title 8, CCR.
3.
Spectacle kits and eyeglasses must be provided for employees who wear glasses and who must wear full-face piece respirators. Provide respirators that have been tested and approved by the National Institute of Occupational Safety and Health for use in lead-contaminated atmospheres .
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
06/17/2016 LEAD ABATEMENT AND LEAD RELATED CONSTRUCTION WORK 02 8333-16
160617
•
•
Provide full-body disposable protective clothing, including head, body, and foot coverings to workers and authorized visitors who enter the Work Area, in sizes adequate to accommodate movement without tearing. A new suit shall be provided and donned for each separate entry.
5.
If washable clothing is to be worn underneath disposable protective clothing, it shall be provided to Abatement workers.
6.
Provide a clean staging area for workers and others to store street clothes and personal protective equipment.
7.
Disposal suits shall be collected in an appropriate disposal container at the entrance of the Abatement Work Area.
8.
Abatement workers are required to wear nonskid footwear sufficient to protect them from workplace hazards. Disposable clothing shall be adequately sealed to the footwear to prevent body contamination.
9.
Hand protection shall be provided, and workers shall be required to use lotion sufficient quantities to protect the worker when chemicals or other physical hazards exist.
10.
As required by the Work site and applicable safety regulations, provide head protection and require the use thereof.
11.
Worker pro,tection equipment shall be ANSI approved .
PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01
LEAD RELATED CONSTRUCTION WORK A.
•
4.
Work Area Preparation and Work Practices: 1.
Where exposure monitoring indicates Worker exposure is below the P.E.L., comply with the requirements of this section and the "Monitoring" section of this Specification.
2.
Disturbance of lead containing materials shall be performed using wet methods.
3.
Work requiring overhead disturbances shall require a means of capturing debris, thus preventing an uncontrolled release on the worker or the surfaces below.
4.
For disturbances utilizing local exhaust dust collection devices the equipment shall be designed and furnished with a HEPA filtered vacuum attachment approved by the manufacturer.
5.
Where Components are to be removed, loose Lead Based Paint and Lead Containing Paint shall be removed by manual means using wet methods .
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
06/17/2016 LEAD ABATEMENT AND LEAD RELATED CONSTRUCTION WORK 02 8333-17
160617
• B.
•
Where a Component is attached and painted onto another surface and the Component is to be removed from the adjoining surface the paint shall be cut with a razor knife to reduce the potential of paint chip debris during Component removal.
7.
If a Component being removed will be disposed of rather than reinstalled, manually cut the Component into manageable sections for disposal using wet methods or mechanically cut using a manufactured approved HEP A filtered local exhaust dust collector.
8.
If a Component is to be reused, loose paint or rough edges may require scraping or sanding. Scraping or sanding must be performed manually using wet methods or mechanically with a manufactured approved HEP A filtered local exhaust attachment.
9.
For solid core surfaces where penetration or welding are required the lead containing material shall be removed from the area impacted using wet methods. Layers of Paint shall be removed before impact to the surface commences.
Clean Up Procedures: 1.
During the entire process of Lead Related Construction Work, clean debris generated using wet methods and/or HEP A Vacuuming.
2.
At the completion of the Lead Related Construction Work, clean surfaces within the impacted Work Area .
3.
When HEP A filtered Vacuums are utilized, vacuum from the area of impact to the outer perimeter of the polyethylene sheeting to remove visible debris. If vacuuming cannot remove visible debris, wet wiping will also be required.
4.
When wet wiping the Work Area, wipe from the area of impact to the outer perimeter of the polyethylene sheeting to remove visible debris.
5.
Tools and equipment utilized in the Work Area shall be wet wiped to remove visible debris.
ABATEMENT
3.02 A.
•
6.
Work Area Preparation: 1.
Clean areas to be isolated by HEP A Vacuum prior to installation of polyethylene sheeting.
- 2.
Seal the Work Area with a layer of 6 mil thick polyethylene sheeting prior to any Lead Based or Lead Containing Paint Removal or disturbance by covering vents, windows, door openings, and any non-Moveable Objects such as lockers, etcetera.
3.
Install a minimum of two layers of 6 mil thick polyethylene sheets on floors, fastened by waterproof tape and other means as necessary to secure the sheeting .
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
06/17/2016 LEAD ABATEMENT AND LEAD RELATED CONSTRUCTION WORK 02 8333-18
160617
•
4. B.
C.
• D.
E.
•
The covering on windows, exterior doors, and vents shall be installed from the outside to facilitate Work on them from the inside .
Decontamination Enclosure System: 1.
At a minimum a two-stage Decontamination Enclosure System consisting of a compartment for Decontamination and a Clean Room shall be constructed and used.
2.
Unless otherwise specified, the Decontamination Enclosure System shall be adjacent to the Abatement area.
3.
Other enclosure methods may be used if submitted and approved by the Owner Consultant.
Removal and Replacement Substrates with Lead Based Paint: 1.
Except as noted in the Specifications and Drawings, replace substrate with material of the same or better quality. Substrates include, but are not limited to doors, windows, moldings, casements, mantels, trims, skirting, baseboards, and associated hardware and fasteners.
2.
Areas adjacent to substrate removal shall be protected from damage. Damages shall be repaired or replaced to original condition.
4.
Substrates that are removed for replacement shall be wrapped and stored for disposal. Disposal shall be in accordance with the applicable codes and sections ofthis Specification.
5.
After removal, the areas disturbed shall be cleaned and a Clearance Inspection performed in accordance with the procedures described in this Specification.
Abrasive Removers- Machine Sanders: 1.
Machine sanders shall be furnished with a HEPA Vacuum system approved by the manufacturer.
2.
Sanding shall only be performed on flat surfaces that allow the HEP A Vacuum dust collection attachment to come into tight contact with the surface being sanded.
3.
Remove Lead Based Paint down to the bare substrate surface. If the pigment cannot be removed without damaging the substrate, submit a Request for Clarification to the Owner Consultant.
4.
Protect adjacent surfaces from damage from machine sanding. Repair and/or replace damaged surfaces.
Chemical Removal-On-Site Chemical Removal:
CORWfN THEATER REPAIR& P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
06/17/2016 LEAD ABATEMENT AND LEAD RELATED CONSTRUCTION WORK 02 8333-19
160617
•
F.
•
•
1.
No chemical Removal shall be performed on interior surfaces unless specifically called for and designed in the Specifications or the Abatement plan of the Project.
2.
Owner approved chemical removers shall be compatible with and harmless to the substrate. On masonry surfaces chemical removers shall contain anti-stain formulation that inhibits discoloration.
3.
Chemical Removal Agent Neutralizer: Use chemical Removal agent neutralizers on exterior surfaces only. Neutralizers shall be compatible with and not harmful to the substrate. Neutralizers shall be compatible with the Removal agent that has been applied to the surface substrate.
4.
Apply chemical Removal agents and neutralizers in accordance with the recommendations of the manufacturer and the following: a.
Adhere to health and safety regulations and other Specification section requirements. Stripping agents shall not be allowed to penetrate wood or other fibrous substrates.
b.
Remove the softened paint by scraping or wire brushing.
c.
Protect adjacent areas from damage from Removal agent during the course of Work.
Chemical Removal- Off-Site Chemical Removal- Structures ofHistorical Significance Only: 1.
Remove and transport Lead Based Painted Component in accordance with this Specification. Transport the Component to an off-site location. Remove Lead Based Paint by chemical Removal. Neutralize and clean the Component. Return Component to the Project site free of lead-containing materials and reinstall.
2.
Take extreme care in removing component to be taken off-site, to prevent damage. In addition: a.
Component shall be marked and identified using an inconspicuous engraving, to insure reinstallation in original location.
b.
Hardware associated with a component shall be bagged and marked.
c.
If required, hardware shall be chemically stripped, cleaned, or reconditioned.
d.
Dispose of hazardous waste generated by the off-site stripping of Lead Based Paint as required by federal, state, andlocal regulations.
e.
Do not transport hazardous waste to Owner properties and/or facilities.
f.
Protect the component and the adjacent areas from which component are removed from damage by the removal and reinstallation procedures .
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR& P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
06/17/2016 LEAD ABATEMENT AND LEAD RELATED CONSTRUCTION WORK 02 8333-20
160617
•
G.
H.
Water Jet Washing: 1.
The purpose of the Water Jet Washing process is to remove Lead-Based and Lead Containing Paint from exterior masonry substrate.
2.
If this procedure is selected, submit a Work plan to the Owner Consultant which includes, but is not limited to, interim controls, paint stabilization, and capture of waste water.
Encapsulation - Interior and Exterior - Coated Sealer System: 1.
Materials: - Elastic acrylic coating shall be heavy bodied and warranted by the manufacturer to be compatible with the substrate. Elastic acrylic coating shall be long lasting and resist cracking, peeling, algae, and fungus.
2.
Submittal: - Submit two Samples, 5 material to the Owner Consultant.
3.
Encapsulation coatings shall be applied in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and the following conditions:
• I.
by 8-inch of the encapsulation
a.
Remove surface dust and debris by scrubbing with a non-residue detergent solution, and rinsing. Remove loose paint until a sound, intact edge is achieved. Remove and replace loose plaster prior to the coating application. Proper safety procedures and lead dust control method in this Specification must be utilized .
b.
Apply Encapsulation coatings to the substrate in a continuous coat to seal the surface being coated. The number of coats required and coverage rates shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.
c.
Repair materials that lift and peel after the application of the Encapsulation coating by scraping until a sound surface is obtained. The edges shall be feathered, and a reapplication of an Encapsulation coating shall be applied.
d.
Remove, or cover as directed, existing fixtures located on surface to be coated, including but not limited to, electrical receptacles, switches, exhaust fans, and hardware.
e.
Protect adjacent surfaces and existing fixtures from damage by coating system. Damages to adjacent surfaces and existing fixtures due to lack of protection or improperly applied protection shall be repaired and/or replaced.
Encapsulatiou- Interior and Exterior- Flexible Wall Covering: 1.
•
~-inch
Materials: Wall covering shall be a reinforced fiber type that forms a secure bond with the substrate, resistant to peeling and formation of mold. The wall covering system shall form a seal over the substrate to which it is applied and not allow the passage of substrate dust into the environment.
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR& P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
06/17/2016 LEAD ABATEMENT AND LEAD RELATED CONSTRUCTION WORK 02 8333-21
160617
• J.
•
K.
2.
Submittal: Prior to the start of Work, submit to the Owner Consultant for approval, manufacturer's descriptive literature, and two 5 ~-inch by 8-inch Samples of each wall covering system.
3.
Install Encapsulation covering in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions and the following provisions:
•
Remove foreign material by washing surfaces with a detergent solution. Remove loose plaster, loose paint, and loose wallpaper. Utilize dust control methods described in this Specification.
b.
Repair larger damaged areas flush with surrounding wall surfaces prior to installation of wall covering system.
Enclosure Procedures- Gypsum Wallboard (interior surfaces only), plywood paneling, other enclosures of exterior substrate: I.
Surface preparation: Remove foreign material by wash-down with a non-residue detergent solution. Remove loose plaster, loose paint, and loose wallpaper in accordance with this Specification to stabilize the painted surfaces.
2.
Affix warning labels stating surface contains "LEAD-BASED PAINT" to the surface prior to being enclosed. Labels shall be 3-inch by 5-inch and placed four feet apart at approximately five foot high on the surface being enclosed.
3.
Install selected enclosure material in accordance with the relevant section of the Specification. Any disturbance to Lead Based Paint in the execution of this section shall comply with the Lead Related Construction Work section of this Specification.
Soil Abatement: 1.
L.
a.
Surface Contamination: a.
Remove Lead Contaminated Soil from the locations and to a depth specified in the scope of Work.
b.
In the absence of a specified depth of soil removal identified in the scope of Work, submit, prior to the bid, a Request for Clarification regarding the quantity of soil to be removed.
c.
Submit a written soil abatement plan prior to initiation of the Project.
d.
No soil abatement shall proceed until the Work plan has written approval by the Owner Consultant.
e.
Refer to the waste handling and transportation section ofthis Specification for the handling, characterization, and disposal of waste.
Alternate Procedures:
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
06/17/2016 LEAD ABATEMENT AND LEAD RELATED CONSTRUCTION WORK 02 8333-22
160617
• M.
•
•
1.
If specified procedures cannot be utilized, a request must be made in writing to the Owner Consultant establishing details of the problem encountered and recommended alternatives.
2.
Alternate procedures shall provide equivalent or greater protection than procedures that they replace.
3.
Prior to implementation, alternative procedures shall be submitted and approved in writing by the Owner Consultant.
Clean Up Procedures 1.
During the entire process of the Work ofthis section, perform continuous cleaning of debris generated using wet methods and/or HEP A filtered vacuuming.
2.
At the completion of the Work of this section, clean surfaces within the impacted Work Area, including but not limited to, tools, equipment, and polyethylene sheeting to remove visible debris from the Work Area.
3.
Tools and equipment utilized in the Work Area shall be thoroughly cleaned. Nonelectrical tools and equipment shall be cleaned monthly and before Removal from the Work Area by HEP A vacuuming and washing using a lead specific detergent or other suitable cleaning agent.
4.
Electrical tools and equipment shall be HEP A vacuumed and cleaned by wet wiping limiting the amount of water used to avoid electrical hazards .
5.
Remove polyethylene sheeting, except for critical barriers, by folding it into itself beginning with the higher level polyethylene first.
6.
Following Removal of polyethylene sheeting a final cleaning of surfaces in the Abatement wo*space shall be performed by HEP A vacuuming, wet wiping, and a final HEP A vacuuming.
7.
When HEP A vacuums are utilized, vacuuming shall be performed from the top down and from the area of impact to the outer edge ofthe polyethylene sheeting.
8.
Apply no less than one continuous coat of approved paint or primer to abated surfaces, where applicable.
9.
At the completion of the final clean up, the CDPHcertified supervisor shall inspect the Work Area for visible debris. If debris is identified, repeat the final cleaning process.
10.
. Wet wiping, washing, and cleaning required by this section shall include the Removal of visible debris by cleaning with a lead specific detergent or other suitable cleaning agent in clean water followed by a rinsing with clean water and clean rags, following the same sequence of cleaning as the vacuuming.
11.
Refer to the waste handling and transportation section of this Specification for disposal of waste generated by this process .
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
06/17/2016 LEAD ABATEMENT AND LEAD RELATED CONSTRUCTION WORK 02 8333-23
160617
•
•
WASTE HANDLING AND TRANSPORTATION
3.03
A.
Characterization of Waste: 1.
Until analytical results are available, waste materials (including water containing paint chips) shall be treated as hazardous. Visible paint chips shall be separated from waste water before characterization. Following removal of solids the waste water shall be characterized to determine disposal requirements. The paint chips removed from the waste water may be disposed of as assumed RCRA hazardous waste or characterized to determine disposal requirements.
2.
Characterize waste streams as follows:
3.
a.
Collect a representative sample of the waste material.
b.
For a pile of waste take one sample of a proportionate combination of Component in the pile. If a large quantity of waste is generated no less than four samples may be required.
c.
For large wood Component, such as windows, doors, etcetera, a representative sample of each Component of similar characteristics, paint history, etcetera, shall be collected and tested. A full depth core sample, not less than one inch diameter, of the Component is to be collected. The core sample shall include the substrate and paint coatings on both sides of the Component, as applicable .
Analysis for the waste characterization samples shall be performed as follows: a.
Waste generated by chemical stripping shall, in addition to the requirements for determining the solid and soluble lead concentrations, shall be tested for corrosiveness and other contaminants, as applicable, resulting from the chemical stripping process.
b.
Analyze samples for Total Threshold Limit Concentration (TTLC):
c.
1)
If results are less than 50 mg/kg (milligrams/kilogram) the waste is not hazardous and shall be disposed as general construction waste.
2)
If sample results are 50 mg/kg or greater, the waste shall be tested for Soluble Threshold Limit Concentration (STLC).
Where waste is required to be tested for STLC the following shall apply: 1)
•
Ifthe STLC result is less than 5 mg/L (milligrams/liter) the material shall be disposed at a Class II waste landfill. Evidence of such results of the STLC testing will be required by the landfill before waste is accepted. No further testing is required .
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR& P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
06/17/2016 LEAD ABATEMENT AND LEAD RELATED CONSTRUCTION WORK 02 8333-24
160617
2)
•
d.
e.
• B.
•
If the STLC results are 5 mg/L or greater, the waste is a California regulated waste and the material shall be tested using the federally mandated Toxicity Characterization Leaching Procedure (TCLP).
Where waste is required to be tested by TCLP the following shall apply: 1)
If the TCLP is less than 5 mg/L, the waste is a California regulated hazardous solid waste (non-RCRA). This material shall be disposed in a Class I hazardous waste landfill.
2)
If the TCLP is equal to or greater than 5 mg/L, the waste is a federally regulated hazardous waste solid (RCRA). The waste shall then be disposed in a Class I hazardous waste landfill.
Personal and commercial wash water with lead contamination shall be handled as follows: 1)
Filter the waste water through cheesecloth, or other similar filtering media, to remove the gross debris. Separate the waste streams and characterize these in compliance with this Specification.
2)
If the waste water is identified as a RCRA or California regulated hazardous waste (Non-RCRA) by STLC and TCLP, filter the waste water by power pumping it through a 20 micron pore size filter. The filtered water shall be tested as described for waste in this Specification.
3)
If test results categorize the filtered water as non-hazardous, it may be disposed of in the sewer system.
4)
Wastewater, filtered or otherwise, shall not be discharged in storm drains, gutters or allowed to sheet flow over the surface of the ground.
Waste Handling: 1.
Waste, hazardous and non-hazardous, shall be disposed of at an authorized site in accordance with provisions of this Specification and applicable Federal, State, and local laws.
2.
Any waste determined to be hazardous, through analytical testing, shall be kept in a secured area or lockable container that is inaccessible to persons other than authorized personnel working on the Project. Hazardous waste containers shall be labeled "Hazardous-Waste - Contains Lead" and labeled with the date waste collection commenced .
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
06117/2016 LEAD ABATEMENT AND LEAD RELATED CONSTRUCTION WORK 02 8333-25
160617
•
• C.
3.
Hazardous waste shall not remain on the Project site beyond 90 days of the date it was generated. It shall be removed from the Project site and transported to an approved landfill before the 90 days has elapsed.
4.
Waste shall not be transported from the work are to the storage container or waste hauler's vehicle while students or staff are present in the path of travel. Where a path of travel cannot be cordoned off the transportation of waste must be completed prior to of after students and staff are not on site.
5.
Once hazardous waste is removed from the Project site, ensure it is disposed of in an approved landfill within 6 days. The waste shall not be transported to another site for commingling of waste from a source other than the site of original generation. This requirement shall be documented by the proper execution of a Uniform Hazardous Waste Manifest signed by the landfill operator.
6.
Hazardous and non-hazardous waste shall be kept in different containers and stored in separate locations. Commingling of waste is not permitted.
7.
As the Work progresses, to prevent exceeding available storage capacity on the Project site, sealed and labeled containers oflead waste shall be removed and transported to the prearranged disposal location.
8.
Containers used for hazardous waste shall meet the requirements of EPA and DOT for hazardous waste storage and transport. At a minimum, disposal packaging of Lead Based Paint fragments, dust, and debris shall be in 6-mil polyethylene (plastic) bags that are airtight and puncture resistant .
9.
Any debris or residue observed on containers or surfaces outside of the Work Area resulting from clean up or disposal activities shall immediately be cleaned using HEP A filtered vacuum equipment and/or wet methods as appropriate.
10.
Materials not contained in bags or other appropriate disposal containers shall not be placed in lead waste storage containers, nor shall storage containers be used for non-lead waste. To avoid damage, packaged waste shall be placed, not thrown, into the storage containers.
11.
Lead Contaminated Soil shall be transported in plastic lined containers.
Transportation ofNon-Hazardous Waste: 1.
•
D.
Receipts from the disposal facility, trip tickets, transportation manifests, weight certificates or other documentation of disposal shall be delivered to the Owner Consultant within 48 hours of disposal. The waste manifest shall be signed by the generator, the transporter(s), and the disposal site operator each time the responsibility for the waste material is transferred. If a separate hauler is employed, the name, address, and signature of the transporter shall also appear on the manifest.
Transportation of Hazardous Waste:
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
06/17/2016 LEAD ABATEMENT AND LEAD RELATED CONSTRUCTION WORK 02 8333-26
160617
•
•
Hazardous waste shall be transported by a RCRA/DOT/EPA certified hazardous waste transporter. Provide evidence that the hazardous waste transporter meets the requirements of this Specification.
2.
The Work of this section includes responsibility for actions of the hazardous waste transporter as it pertains to waste Removal and disposal related to the Work of this Specification.
3.
Identify the facility to which the waste generated by this Specification will be taken. Evidence shall be provided verifying the facility is licensed/permitted to receive and handle non-hazardous lead containing waste and/or hazardous lead containing waste as applicable.
4.
Waste disposed as hazardous shall be transported under a Uniform Hazardous Waste Manifest. The generator copy of this manifest shall be submitted to the Owner Consultant within five days oftransport.
5.
Dump receipts, trip tickets, transportation manifests, weight certificates or other documentation of disposal shall be delivered to the Owner Consultant within 48 hours of disposal. The Uniform Hazardous Waste Manifest shall be signed by the generator (or designee), the transporter(s), and the disposal site operator each time the responsibility for the waste material is transferred. If a separate hauler is employed, the name, address, U.S.E.P.A. ID number and signature of the transporter shall also appear on the manifest.
6.
The enclosed cargo area of trucks or containers shall be :free of debris and lined with 6-mil polyethylene sheeting to prevent contamination from leaking or spilled containers. Floor sheeting shall be installed first and extend up the walls. Wall sheeting shall be overlapped and taped into place.
7.
During transport, drums and other containers shall be placed on level surfaces in the cargo area and packed tightly together to prevent shifting and tipping. Large structural Component shall be secured to prevent shifting and bags placed on top.
MONITORING
3.04 A.
•
1.
B.
Project Management and Inspection: 1.
Owner has the right to perform air, wipe, and visual monitoring at any time.
2.
Owner shall proceed in accordance with the terms and conditions of the Contract Documents whenever the Work or protective measures are not in compliance with applicable governmental regulations, Contract requirements, and/or threatens the adjoining environment with lead contamination.
3.
Where exposure monitoring indicates exposure is at or above the P.E.L. comply with Title 8, CCR Section 1532.1 (e) through (n).
Employee - Personal Air Monitoring:
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
06/17/2016 LEAD ABATEMENT AND LEAD RELATED CONSTRUCTION WORK 02 8333-27
160617
1.
•
C.
Clearance Inspection: 1.
2.
•
Provide air monitoring as required by Title 8 CCR, Section 1532.1. Results shall be provided within ten working days of sampling. If the intent is to utilize such as exposure assessment documentation, and Work is to commence earlier than ten working days, submit results 24 hours in advance of the start of Work.
Clearance Inspection for Lead Related Construction Work shall include: a.
A visual inspection of the Work Area by the Owner Consultant prior to occupancy for normal activity.
b.
Do not remove barriers designating a regulated Work Area until a written release from the Owner Consultant is provided.
c.
The Owner Consultant has the right to collect wipe samples as part of the Clearance Inspection.
Clearance Inspection for Abatement shall include: a.
A visual inspection of the Work Area by the Owner Consultant prior to collection of environmental samples (dust, wipe, and/or soil samples, as applicable).
b.
Owner Consultant shall collect environmental samples.
c.
Results of samples shall comply with Title 17, CCR before the Work Area is released for normal occupancy.
d.
Where samples fail to meet regulated clearance levels of Title 17, CCR, clean the Work Area as required for final cleaning in the Clean Up Procedures section of this Specification.
e.
3.05
••
Following cleaning, the visual inspection and environmental sampling will be repeated as described above. This process shall continue until the clearance level of Title 17, CCR is provided.
RE-ESTABLISHMENT OF THE WORK AREA AND SYSTEMS A.
Re-establishment of the Work Area shall only occur following the completion of clean-up procedures and after a Clearance Inspection has been performed and documented to the satisfaction of the Owner Consultant.
B.
Re-secure Moveable Objects removed from their former positions during area preparation activities.
C.
Relocate Moveable Objects that were removed to temporary locations back to their original positions.
D.
Reestablish HVAC, mechanical and electrical systems to the condition prior to commencement of the Project.
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR& P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
06/17/2016 LEAD ABATEMENT AND LEAD RELATED CONSTRUCTION WORK 02 8333-28
160617
•
E.
PROJECT COMPLETION DOCUMENTATION
3.06 A.
B.
~·
Repair areas of damage that occurred as a result of Abatement or Lead Related Construction Work .
Provide to the Owner Consultant of the following close-out documentation: 1.
Filter change logs for air filtration units, water filtration units and respirators
2.
Foreman's daily job reports
3.
Employee entry and exit logs for Work Areas
4.
Visitor entry and exit logs for Work Area
5.
Air sample results for personnel
6.
Copies of hazardous and non-hazardous waste manifest
7.
Hazardous waste weight tickets
8.
Analytical data and chain of custody for waste characterization
9.
Signed Daily Personnel Report Forms
Provide Owner Consultant with as-built drawings identifying surfaces where Lead Based Paint has been encapsulated or enclosed.
END OF SECTION
•
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR& P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
06117/2016 LEAD ABATEMENT AND LEAD RELATED CONSTRUCTION WORK 02 8333-29
•
SECTION 03 1000 CONCRETE FORMING AND ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL SUMMARY
1.01 A.
B.
I.
Formwork for cast-in-place concrete as indicated.
2.
Installation of items to be embedded in concrete, such as anchor bolts, inserts, embeds, and sleeves.
Related Requirements: I.
Division 0 I - General Requirements.
2.
Section 03 2000: Concrete Reinforcing.
3.
Section 03 3000: Cast-In-Place Concrete.
REFERENCES
1.02
•
Section Includes:
A.
B.
American Concrete Institute (ACI) Publication: 1.
ACI 318 - Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete, Chapter 6, Formwork, Embedded Pipes, and Construction Joints.
2.
ACI 347- Guide to Formwork for Concrete.
American Plywood Association (APA): I.
C.
National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST): I.
1.03
1.04
Form No. V345- Concrete Forming Design/Construction Guide.
NIST Voluntary Product Standard PS 1. SUBMITTALS
B.
Shop Drawings: Submit Shop Drawings indicating locations of forms, construction and expansion joints, embedded items, and accessories.
c.
Product Data: Submit manufacturer's Product Data for form materials and accessories. REGULA TORY REQUIREMENTS
A. California Building Code (CBC), Chapter 19A.
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 CONCRETE FORMING AND ACCESSORIES 03 1000-1
•
B.
California Code of Regulations, Title 8, Division 1, Chapter 4, Subchapter 4, Construction Safety Orders, Article 6, Excavations, Sections 1713 and 171 7 . DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
1.05
A.
Storage shall prevent damage and permit access to materials for inspection and identification.
PART 2- PRODUCTS GENERAL
2.01
•
•
A.
Form materials may be reused during progress of the Work provided they are completely cleaned and reconditioned, recoated for each use, capable of producing formwork of required quality, and are structurally sound.
B.
Form Lumber: WCLIB Construction Grade or Better, WWPA No.1 or Better.
c.
Plywood: NIST Voluntary Product Standard PS 1, Group 1, Exterior Grade B-B Plyform or better, minimum 5-ply and 3/4 inch thick for exposed locations and at least 5/8 inch thick for unexposed locations, grade marked, not mill oiled. Furnished plywood with medium or high density overlay is permitted.
D.
Coated Form Plywood: For exposed painted concrete, plastic overlaid plywood of grade specified above, factory coated with a form coating and release agent Noxcrete", or equal.
E.
Tube Forms: Sonoco "Seamless Sonotubes," Ceme-Tube, Quik-Tube, or equal, of the type leaving no marks in concrete, one-piece lengths for required heights.
F.
Joist Forms: Code recognized steel or molded plastic types as required.
G.
Special Forms: For exposed integrally-colored concrete, plywood as above with high density overlay, plywood with integral structural hardboard facing or fibrous glass reinforced plastic facing, providing specified finish.
H.
For Exposed Concrete Finish: 1.
Plywood: New, waterproof, synthetic resin bonded, exterior type Douglas fir or Southern pine plywood manufactured especially for concrete formwork and conforming to NIST Voluntary Product Standard PS 1, Grade B-B grade, Class I.
2.
Glass-Fiber-Fabric Reinforced Plastic Forms: Matched, tight fitting, stiffened to support weight of concrete without deflection detrimental to structural tolerances and appearance of finished concrete surfaces.
3.
Steel: Minimum 16 gage sheet, well matched, tight fitting, stiffened to support weight of concrete, without deflection detrimental to tolerances and appearances of finished concrete surfaces.
4.
Plywood: "Finland Form," "Combi Form" by North American Plywood Corporation, "Plyform" by Roy 0. Martin, "ProForm" by Pacific Wood
8736 CORWIN TIIEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/0112011 CONCRETE FORMING AND ACCESSORIES 03 1000-2
Laminates, or equal. The material shall be furnished with hard smooth birch face veneers with phenolic resin thermally fused onto panel sides. Edges shall be factory sealed.
•
I.
Form Ties: Prefabricated rod, flat band, wire, internally threaded disconnecting type, not leaving metal within I l/2-inch of concrete surface.
J.
Form Coating: Non-staining clear coating free from oil, silicone, wax, not grainraising, "Formshield" by A.C. Horn, Inc., "Release" by Edoco/Dayton Superior, "CastOff' by Sonneborn/BASF Building Systems or equal. Where form liners are furnished, provide form coatings recommended by form liner manufacturer.
K.
Form Liner: Rigid or resilient type by L.M. Scofield, Symons, Greenstreak, or equal.
L.
Void Forms: Manufactured by SureVoid Products, Inc., Sonotube, Void Form International, or equal. Forms shall be "WaiiVoid" for temporary support of concrete walls and grade beams spanning between supports, and "SlabVoid" for creating gaps between concrete slabs or steps and underlying soils. Void forms shall be fabricated of corrugated paper with moisture resistant exterior, and shall be capable of withstanding working load of 1,500 psf. Provide accessories as required.
PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01
•
GENERAL A.
Forms shall be constructed so as to shape final concrete structure conforming to shape, lines and dimensions of members required by Drawings and Specifications, and shall be sufficiently tight to prevent leakage of mortar. They shall be properly braced or tied together to maintain position and shape. Forms and their supports shall be designed so that previously placed structures will not be damaged.
B.
Use form coating at all surfaces in contact with concrete.
3.02
TOLERANCES A.
Permitted abrupt or gradual irregularities in formed surfaces as measured within a 5 feet length with a straightedge shall per ACI 34 7, Table 3.1:
Class of Surface A
B
c
D
1/8 inch
1/4 inch
1/2 inch
I inch
Edit Note: Edit tolerances indicated below for project specifics .
•
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 CONCRETE FORMING AND ACCESSORIES 03 1000-3
1. Class A: Use for concrete surfaces prominently exposed to public view .
•
3.
Class C: Use as a general standard for permanently exposed surfaces where other finishes are not specified.
4.
Class D: Use for surfaces where roughness is not objectionable and will be permanently concealed.
A.
Plywood shall be installed with horizontal joints level, vertical joints plumb and with joints tight. Back joints by studs or solid blocking, and fill where necessary for smoothness. Reused plywood shall be thoroughly cleaned, damaged edges or surfaces repaired and both sides and edges oiled with colorless form oil. Nail plywood along edges, and to intermediate supports, with common wire nails spaced as necessary to maintain alignment and prevent warping.
B.
Openings for Cleaning: Provide temporary openings at points in formwork to facilitate cleaning and inspection. At base of walls and wide piers, bottom form board on one face for entire length shall be omitted until form has been cleaned and inspected.
C.
Chamfers: Provide 3/4 inch by 3/4 inch chamfer strips for all exposed concrete corners and edges unless otherwise indicated .
D.
Reglets and Rebates: As specified in Section 03 3000: Cast-In-Place Concrete. REMOVAL OF FORMS
3.04 A.
Forms shall not be removed until concrete has sufficiently hydrated to maintain its integrity and not be damaged by form removal operations. Unless noted otherwise and/or permitted by the Architect, columns and wall forms shall not be removed in less than five days, floor slabs in less than seven days, beams and girders in less than 15 days, pan forms for joists may be removed after three days, but joist centering shall not be removed until after 15 days, and ramp, landing, steps and floor slabs shall not be removed in less than seven days. Shoring shall not be removed until member has acquired sufficient strength to support its weight, load upon it, and added load of construction.
B.
Compressive strength of in-place concrete shall be determined by testing field-cured specimens representative of concrete location or members, as specified in Section 03 3000: Cast-In-Place Concrete. PROTECTION
3.4 A.
Protect the Work of this section until Substantial Completion. CLEAN UP
3.05
•
Class B: Use for coarse-textured concrete-formed surfaces intended to receive plaster, stucco or wainscoting.
ERECTION
3.03
•
2.
A.
Remove rubbish, debris and waste materials and legally dispose of off the Project site .
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/0112011 CONCRETE FORMJNG AND ACCESSORIES 03 1000-4
•
SECTION 03 2000 CONCRETE REINFORCING PART I - GENERAL SUMMARY
1.0 I A.
Section Includes: I.
B.
A.
•
Related Requirements: I.
Division 0 I - General Requirements.
2.
Section 01 4523: Testing and Inspection.
3.
Section 03 1000: Concrete Forming.
4.
Section 03 3000: Cast-In-Place Concrete.
REGULA TORY REQUIREMENTS
1.02
•
Concrete steel reinforcement.
Fabrication and placement of reinforcing shall be in accordance with requirements of CBC, Chapter I9A . REFERENCES:
1.03 A.
American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): 1.
ASTM A82 - Standard Specification for Steel Wire, Plain, for Concrete Reinforcement.
2.
ASTM A184 ~ Standard Specification for Fabricated Deformed Steel Bar Mats for Concrete Reinforcement.
3.
ASTM A185- Standard Specification for Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement, Plain, for Concrete.
4.
ASTM A496 - Standard Specification for Steel Wire, Deformed, for Concrete Reinforcement.
5.
ASTM A497 - Standard Specification for Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement, Deformed, for Concrete.
6.
ASTM A615 - Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Carbon-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement.
7.
ASTM A 706 - Standard Specification for Low-Alloy Steel Deformed and Plain Bars for Concrete Reinforcement.
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HJGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 CONCRETE REINFORCING 03 2000-1
B.
•
C.
American Concrete Institute (ACI) Publication:
I.
ACI SP-66- ACI Detailing Manual.
2.
ACI 318 - Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete, as modified by CBC Sections 1903A and 1908A.
American Welding Society (AWS): 1.
1.04
SUBMITTALS A.
Shop Drawings: Submit steel reinforcement Shop Drawings in accordance with ACI 315. Include assembly diagrams, bending charts and slab plans. Indicate lengths and location of splices, size and lengths of reinforcing steel.
B.
Closeout Submittals: Drawings.
Record exact locations of reinforcing that vary from Shop
QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.05 A.
• B.
C.
•
A WS D 1.4 - Structural Welding Code - Reinforcing Steel.
Comply with the following as a minimum requirement: I.
Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (CRSI) Manual of Standard Practice.
2.
American Welding Society (AWS) .
3.
American Concrete Institute (ACI).
4.
CBC, Chapter 19A, Concrete.
Source Quality Control: Refer to Division 0 I Sections for general requirements and to the following paragraphs for specific procedures. Testing laboratory retained by the Owner shall select test Samples of bars, ties, and stirrups from the material at the Project Site or from the place of distribution, with each Sample consisting of not less than two 18 inch long pieces, and perform the following tests according to ASTM A615, or ASTM A 706, as applicable: 1.
Identified Bars: If Samples are obtained from bundles as delivered from the mill, identified as to heat number, accompanied by mill analyses and mill test reports, and properly tagged with the identification certificate so as to be readily identified, perform one tensile and one bend test for each 10 tons or fraction thereof of each size of bars. Submit mill reports when Samples are selected.
2.
Unidentified Bars: When positive identification of reinforcing bars cannot be performed and when random Samples are obtained; perform tests for each 2.5 tons or fraction thereof, one tensile and one bend test from each size of bars.
Certification of Welders: Shop and Project site welding shall be performed by welding operators certified by A WS .
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HJGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 CONCRETE REINFORCING 03 2000-2
•
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
1.06 A.
A void exposure to dirt, moisture or conditions harmful to reinforcing.
B.
Reinforcing steel bars, wire, and wire fabric shall be stored on the Project site to permit easy access for examination and identification of each shipment. Material of each shipment shall be separated for size and shape.
PART 2- PRODUCTS GENERAL
2.01 A.
MATERIALS
2.02
•
2.03
Provide reinforcing of sizes, gages and lengths indicated, bent to indicated shapes.
A.
Steel Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A615, or ASTM A706 deformed grade 60 billet steel unless otherwise specified or indicated.
B.
Bars or Rod Mats: ASTM A 184.
c.
Welded Wire Fabric for Reinforcement: ASTM Al85.
D.
Tie Wire: ASTM A82, fully annealed, copper-bearing steel wire, 16 gage minimum.
E.
Chairs, Spacers, Supports, and Other Accessories: Standard manufacture conforming to ACI 315 fabricated from steel wire of required types and sizes. For reinforcement supported from grade, provide properly sized dense precast blocks of concrete .
FABRICATION OF REINFORCING BARS: A.
Comply with CRSI Manual of Standard Practice for Reinforced Concrete Construction for fabrication of reinforcing steel.
B.
Bending and Forming: Fabricate bars of the indicated sizes and bend and form to required shapes and lengths by methods not injurious to materials. Do not heat reinforcement for bending. Bend bars No. 6 size and larger in the shop only. Bars with unscheduled kinks or bends are not permitted. Provide only tested and permitted bar materials.
PART 3- EXECUTION INSTALLATION
3.01
•
A.
Bars shall be bent cold. Bars partially embedded in concrete shall not be field bent except as indicated on reviewed Shop Drawings.
B.
Before installation and just prior to placing concrete, clean reinforcing of loose scale, rust, oil, dirt and any coating that could reduce bond.
C.
Accurately position, install, and secure reinforcing to prevent displacement during the placement of concrete .
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES 1-ITGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 CONCRETE REINFORCING 03 2000-3
•
D.
Provide metal chairs to hold reinforcement the required distance above form bottoms. In beams and slab construction, provide chairs under top slab reinforcement as well as under bottom reinforcement. Space chairs so that reinforcement will not be displaced during installation. Provide metal spacers to secure proper spacing. Stirrups shall be accurately and securely wired to bars at both top and bottom. At slabs, footings, and beams in contact with earth, provide concrete blocks to support reinforcement at required distance above grade.
E.
Install and secure reinforcement to maintain required clearance between parallel bars and between bars and forms. Lapped splices shall be installed wherever possible in a manner to provide required clearance between sets of bars. Stagger lapped splices. Dowels and bars extending through construction joints shall be secured in position against displacement before concrete is installed and subsequently cleaned of concrete encrustations while they are still soft.
F.
Do not install reinforcing in supported slabs and beams until walls and columns have been installed to underside of slabs and beams or until constructionjoints have been thoroughly cleaned. Reinforcing shall be inspected before placement of concrete and cleaned as required.
G.
Use deformed bars unless otherwise indicated, except for spiral reinforcement.
3.02
CLEANUP A.
•
Remove rubbish, debris and waste materials and legally dispose of off the Project site. PROTECTION
3.3 A.
Protect the Work of this section until Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION
•
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HJGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 CONCRETE REINFORCING 03 2000-4
•
SECTION 03 3000 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
PART 1- GENERAL SUMMARY
1.01 A.
Section Includes: 1. Cast-in-place normal weight and lightweight concrete, placement and finishing.
B.
1.02
•
1.
Division 01 -General Requirements.
2.
Section 32 1313: Site Concrete Work.
3.
Section 03 1000: Concrete Forming and Accessories.
4.
Section 03 2000: Concrete Reinforcing.
REFERENCES A.
B.
•
Related Requirements:
American Concrete Institute (ACI) Publication: 1.
ACI 117 - Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials.
2.
ACI 301 - Specifications for Structural Concrete.
3.
ACI 302.1R- Guide for Concrete Floor and Slab Construction.
4.
ACI 305R- Specification for Hot Weather Concreting.
4.
ACI 306.1 - Standard Specification for Cold Weather Concreting.
5.
ACI 318 -Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete, as modified by CBC Sections 1903A and 1908A.
American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) Standards: 1.
ASTM C31 - Standard Specification for Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Field.
2.
ASTM C33 - Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates.
3.
ASTM C39 - Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens .
8736 CORWIN THEATER REP AIR & P .0. T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
02/01/2011 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 3000-1
•
•
•
4.
ASTM C42 - Standard Test Method for Obtaining and Testing Drilled Cores and Sawed Beams of Concrete .
5.
ASTM C88 - Standard Test Method for Soundness of Aggregates by use of Sodium Sulphate or Magnesium Sulphate.
6.
ASTM C94 - Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete.
7.
ASTM Cl43- Standard Test Method for Slump of Hydraulic Cement Concrete.
8.
ASTM C 150 - Standard Specification for Portland Cement.
9.
ASTM C 171 - Standard Specification for Sheet Materials for Curing Concrete.
10.
ASTM C 172 - Standard Practice for Sampling Freshly Mixed Concrete.
11.
ASTM C 173 - Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Volumetric Method.
12.
ASTM C260 Concrete.
13.
ASTM C289 - Standard Test Method for Potential Alkali-Silica Reactivity of Aggregates (Chemical Method).
14.
ASTM C309 - Standard Specification for Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete .
15.
ASTM C330 - Standard Specification for Lightweight Aggregates for Structural Concrete.
16.
ASTM C494 - Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete.
17.
ASTM C567 - Standard Test Method for Determining Density of Structural Lightweight Concrete.
18.
ASTM C618 - Standard Specification for Coal Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural Pozzolan for Use in Concrete.
19.
ASTM C845 - Standard Specification for Expansive Hydraulic Cement
20.
ASTM C989 - Standard Specification for Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag for Use in Concrete and Mortars.
21.
ASTM C1107- Standard Specification for Packaged Dry, Hydraulic-Cement Grout (Nonshrink).
22.
ASTM C 1064 - Standard Test Method for Temperature of Freshly Mixed Hydraulic-Cement Concrete
23.
ASTM C 1240 - Standard Specification for Silica Fume Used in Cementitious Mixtures
Standard Specification for Air-Entraining Admixtures for
02101/2011
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 3000-2
•
24.
ASTM C 1567 - Standard Test Method for Determining the Potential AlkaliSilica Reactivity of Combinations of Cementitious Materials and Aggregate (Accelerated Mortar-Bar Method).
25.
ASTM D 1751 - Standard Test Method for Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction (Non-extruding and Resilient Bituminous Types).
26.
ASTM E96 - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials.
27.
ASTM Ell 55 - Standard Test Method for Determining FF Floor Flatness and FL Floor Levelness Numbers.
•
ASTM El643 - Standard Practice for Selection, Design, Installation, and Inspection of Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with Earth or Granular Fill Under Concrete Slabs.
29.
ASTM E1745 - Standard Specification for Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with Soil or Granular Fill under Concrete Slabs.
SUBMITTALS
1.03
•
28.
A.
Shop Drawings: Submit Shop Drawings indicating locations of cast-in-place concrete Work and accessory items such as vapor barriers. Include details and locations of reinforcing, embedded items, and interfacing with other Work.
B.
Mix Design Data: Submit concrete mix designs as specified herein and in Article 2.02. 1.
Submit name, address and telephone number of the concrete production facility which the contractor intends to engage to design the concrete mixes. Submit name and qualifications of the proposed concrete technologist.
2.
Mix Design: Submit a concrete mix design for each strength and type of concrete indicated in the drawings or specified. Include water/cement ratio, source, size and amount of coarse aggregate and admixtures. Predict minimum compressive strength, maximum slump and air content percentage. Clearly indicate locations where each mix design will be used.
3.
Test Reports: Submit ·copies of test reports showing that the proposed mixes produce concrete with the strengths and properties specified. Include tests for cement, aggregates and admixtures. Provide gradation analysis.
C.
Material Samples: Submit Samples illustrating concrete finishes and hardeners, minimum 12-inch by 12-inch.
D.
Certificates: Submit certification that each of the following conforms to the standards indicated: 1.
Portland cement: ASTM C150.
2.
Normal weight concrete aggregates: ASTM C33 .
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HJGH SCHOOL
02/01/2011 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 3000-3
• E.
4.
Aggregates: Submit evidence that the aggregate is not reactive in the presence of cement alkalis. In the absence of evidence, aggregate shall be tested per ASTM C289. If results of test are other than innocuous, aggregates shall be tested per ASTM C1567 as reported per ACI 318 as modified by CBC, Section 1903A.3.
5.
Curing materials: ASTM Cl71.
Admixtures: Submit product data for proposed concrete admixtures.
A.
Continuous inspection shall be provided at the batch plant and for transit-mixed concrete to run check sieve analysis of aggregate, check moisture content of fine aggregate, check design of mix, check cement being used with test reports, check loading of mixer trucks, and certify to quantities of materials placed in each mixer truck.
B.
Inspection shall be performed by a representative of a testing laboratory selected by the Owner. Owner will pay for inspection costs. Notify the laboratory 24 hours in advance of time concrete is to be mixed. Notify the laboratory of postponement or cancellation of mixing within at least 24 hours of scheduling time.
c.
Contractor shall assist the testing laboratory in obtaining and handling samples at the project site and at the source of materials.
D.
Continuous batch plant inspection requirement may be waived in accordance with CBC Section 1705A.3.3. When continuous batch plant inspection is waived, the following requirements shall apply:
E.
1.05
1.
Qualified technician of the testing laboratory shall check the first batch at the start ofthe day.
2.
Licensed weightmaster to positively identify materials as to quantity and certify to each load by a batch ticket.
3.
Batch tickets, including material quantities and weights shall accompany the load, shall be transmitted to the Inspector of record by a truck driver with load identified thereon. The load shall not be placed without a batch ticket identifying the mix. The inspector will keep a daily record of placements, identifying each truck, its load, and time of receipt, and approximate location of deposit in the structure and will transmit a copy of the daily record to the enforcement agency ..
Special Inspections and Tests shall be in accordance with CBC Chapter 17A, Reinforcement and Anchor testing per CBC Section 1913A, and Specification Section 01 4523. DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A.
•
Lightweight concrete aggregates: ASTM C330 .
QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.04
•
3.
Store cement and aggregate materials so as to prevent their deterioration or intrusion by foreign matter. Deteriorated or contaminated materials shall not be furnished .
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
02/01/20 II CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 3000-4
•
B.
Packaged materials shall bear the manufacturers and brand name label, and shall be stored in their original unbroken package in a weather tight place until ready for use in the work. PROJECT CONDITIONS
1.06 A.
Cold Weather Requirements: Batching, mixing, delivering and placing of concrete in cold weather shall comply with the applicable requirements of ACI 306.1.
B.
Hot Weather Requirements: Batching, mixing, delivering and placing of concrete in hot weather shall comply with the applicable requirements of ACI 305R.
c.
Concrete temperature of freshly mixed concrete shall be determined per ASTM C 1064.
PART 2- PRODUCTS MATERIALS
2.01 A.
Cement: ASTM C 150. Portland Cement.
B.
Aggregates: Conform to the following standards:
•
1.
Normal weight concrete: ASTM C33.
2.
Lightweight concrete: ASTM C330, with fine aggregates per ASTM C33.
3.
Aggregate shall be tested for Potential Alkali Reactivity of Cement-Aggregate Combinations per ASTM C289 .
4.
Nominal maximum size of coarse aggregate shall be no larger than: a.
115 the narrowest dimension between sides of forms, nor
b.
1/3 the depth of slabs, nor
c.
3/4 the clear spacing between individual reinforcing bars or wires, bundles of bars, individual tendons, or ducts.
d..
Contractor may request the Architect and DSA waiver of the above limitations reported per ACI 318 as modified per CBC Section 1903A.3, provided that the workability and methods of consolidation are such that the concrete can be placed without honeycombs or voids.
I
C.
Water: \Yater for concrete mixes, curing and cleaning shall be potable and free from deleterio~s matter.
D.
Admixtures: Shall be shown capable of maintaining essentially the same composition and performance throughout the work as the product used in establishing concrete proportio~s in accordance with ACI 318, Section 3.6.
I
I I
•
1.
A(jmixtures containing chlorides or sulfides are not permitted.
2.
Air-entraining admixtures shall comply with ASTM C260. Air-entrained admixtures shall not be used for floor slabs to receive steel trowel finish. I I I
!
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES I LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHPOL
02/0l/2011 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 3000-5
3.
•
Admixtures for water reduction and setting time modification shall conform to ASTMC494 . I
4.
Admixtures for producing flowing concrete shall conform to ASTM C 1017.
5.
Admi~tures containing ASTM C845 expansive cements shall be compatible with
I
the ce,ment and produce no deleterious effects. 6.
Silica. fumes used as an admixture shall conform to ASTM C 1240. I
E.
ReinforcemeAt Fibers: Chop strands of alkali-resistant polypropylene or nylon fibers added to the concrete mix for protection against shrinkage cracks.
F.
Expansion Joint Fillers: Preformed strips, non-extruding and resilient bituminous type, of thickness indi,cated, conforming to ASTM 01751.
G.
Curing Paper: Shall conform to ASTM C 171 and consist of two sheets of kraft paper cemented together with a bituminous material in which are embedded cords or strands of fiber running in both directions. The paper shall be light in color, shall be free of visible defec~s, with uniform appearance.
H.
Floor Harde*r: Water soluble, inorganic, silicate-based curing, hardening, sealing and dustproofing 'compound. Aquaseal W20 by Monopole Inc., Kure-N-Harden by BASF, Chern Hard by L&M, Liqui-Hard by W. R. Meadows, or equal.
I.
Underlayment: Two component latex underlayment for filling low spots in concrete for both interior and exterior applications, from featheredge to a maximum of 3/8 inch in thickness. U~derlayment shall be non-shrink and suitable for repairing exposed concrete surfaces and for underlayment of carpet, resilient, tile and quarry floor coverings. La-0Tex by TexRite, Underlay C, RS by Mer-Krete Systems, Underlayment 962 by C-Cure, or equal. :
i
'
1
•
I
J.
Vapor Barrier: Polyolefin-based 15 mils minimum thickness, meeting or exceeding ASTM El7415, 10 feet minimum width. Permeance shall be less than 0.01 perms [grains/(ft2 *hr*inHg)] as determined by ASTM E96 or ASTM F1249 and after mandatory c~mditioning tests per ASTM E 154 Sections 8, 11, 12, & 13. Include accessories ihcluding tape and/or mastic. Stego Wrap by Stego Industries LLC, Perminator by W.R. Meadows, Ecoshield-E by Epro, or equal. !
K.
Stair Strips arid Nosing: I I
1.
Fabricated from 6063-T5 extruded aluminum, mill finish. Anti-slip filler shall contain at least 60 percent virgin grain aluminum oxide abrasive. Binder shall be fully tured resilient type epoxy, with binder-to-filler ratio of 13 percent. The epoxy-abrasive filler shall extend over the curved front edge of the nosing and shall 9e securely bonded to the extruded aluminum base.
2.
Manufactured by Wooster Products Inc., American Safety Tread Co. Inc., Balco, Inc., 9r equal.
3.
•
Nosirig and strips for concrete casting shall be provided with Sure-Hold anchors, chevr~m shaped continuous full length of nosing or strip. I I
i 8736 CORWIN THEATER REP.f..IR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOEI
02/01/2011 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 3000-6
I
•
4.
Npsings and anchors for attachment to hydrated concrete stairs and wood stairs shall be similar to those specified below, except they shall be provided with countersunk holes for screws and fasteners. I
5.
Colors: As selected by Architect to contrast with stair color. Colors shall extend m1iformly through the filler.
6.
Strip and Nosing Types:
I I
I
Nosings for sloped riser steel pan stairs: Type WP4J, 4-1116 inches wide, 3/8 inch thick. '
b.l
Nosings for new concrete stairs: Type WP4C, 4-1116 inches wide, 3/8 inch thick, nose projects down 1/4 inch.
c.;
Nosings for square edged steel pan stairs: Type WP4SP, 4-1116 inches wide, 3/8 inch thick nose.
I
d.!
Strips for recessing into concrete stairs: Type WP1A, except 2-1/4 inches wide, 3/8 inch thick. American Safety Tread Co., Type 24, or equal.
e.!
Strips for adhering to existing or hydrated concrete: Flex-Tred antisafety strips, minimum 2-1/4 inches wide. Cut from rolls and round corners .
f.[
Strips for anchoring into wood or stone: American Safety Tread Co., Type T-24H, or equal, with holes for fasteners, 2-1/4 inches wide.
I
•
I
L.
Grout: ASTM C1107, non-shrink type, pre-mixed compound consisting of nonmetallic ~ggregate, cement, water reducing and plasticizing additives, capable of developiqg a minimum compressive strength of 7,000 psi at 7 days; of consistency suitable fbr application and a 30 minute working time. I
I
2.02
CONCRETE MIX ! I
A.
Mix shalllbe signed and sealed by a Civil or Structural Engineer currently registered in the State bf California.
B.
Strength qf Concrete: Strengths and types of concretes shall be as indicated in the Drawings! Unless otherwise indicated or specified, concrete shall be provided with minimumj28-day strength of3,000 psi (fc).
c.
The requJed strength and durability of concrete shall be determined by compliance with the proportioning, testing, mixing and placing provisions of CBC Sections 1905A.1 through 1905A.l3. Concrete mix shall meet the durability requirements of ACI 318, :chapter 4.
i
I
I I
•
I
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHbOL I
02/01/2011 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 3000-7
•
'
D.
Concrete proportioning shall be determined on the basis of field experience and/or trial mixtures shall in accordance with ACI 318, Section 5.3. Proportions of materials shall provide 1workability and consistency to permit concrete to be placed readily into forms and around reinforcement under conditions of placement to be employed, without segregation or excessive bleeding.
E.
Ready-Mixed Concrete: Mix and deliver in accordance with requirements of ASTM C94. I .
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.01
GENERAL
A.
Surfaces to receive concrete shall be free of debris, standing water, and any other deleterious substances before start of concrete placing.
B.
Time of Placing: Do not place concrete until reinforcement, conduits, outlet boxes, anchors, hangers, sleeves, bolts, and other embedded materials are securely fastened in place. Contact the Inspector at least 24 hours before placing concrete; do not place concrete until:. inspected by the lOR.
I
'
c.
•
Pouring Recqrd: A record shall be kept on the Project site of time and date of placing concrete in each portion of structure. Such record shall be maintained on the Project site until Substantial Completion and shall be available for examination by the Architect and DSA. : !
3.02
TOLERANCES A.
Concrete construction tolerances shall be as specified in ACI 117 and as modified herein.
B.
Floor Flatness (FF) and Floor Levelness (FL) shall be as indicated below:
I !
i I I
Specified Overall Value
Minimum Local Value
!
FF
FL
FF
FL
20
15
15
10
25
20
17
15
35
25
24
17
20
15
N/A
N/A
25
20
N/A
N/A
;
Slabs on gro~nd: mechanical and electrical rooms, parking structures and mortar bed set tile and quarry flooring. Slab on grourd: carpet. '
Slab on ground: thinset tile and resilient flooring. Suspended sJabs: mechanical and electrical rooms, parking structures and mortar bed set tile and quatiY flooring. Suspended slabs: carpet. I
•
I
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL I
02/01/2011 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 3000-8
Suspended slabs: thinset tile and resilient flooring .
•
20
N/A
NIA
c.
Refer to ACI 302.1R, Tables 8.1 and 8.2 Slab on Ground and Suspended Flatness/Levelness Construction Guide, for recommended concrete placing and finishing methods.
D.
Floor Flatness and Floor Levelness shall be tested in accordance to ASTM Ell 55. Floor measurements shall be made within 48 hours after slab installation, and shall precede removal of shores and forms. PREPARATION
3.03
A.
Vapor Barrier: Before installation of screeds and slab reinforcement, install vapor barrier under slabs on grade, as indicated in the drawings. 1.
Install in accordance to ASTM El643.
2.
Place vapor retarder sheeting with the longest dimension parallel with the direction ofthe concrete pour.
3.
Laps or seams shall be overlapped 6 inches, or as recommended by manufacturer. Las and penetrations shall be sealed with the manufacturer's recommended tape and/or mastic.
4.
Inspector will inspect and mark areas of damage and insufficient installation of the vapor barrier sufficiently in advance of concrete placement.
• B.
•
35
a)
Deficiencies shall be corrected before concrete is placed.
b)
Patch damaged areas with vapor barrier overlapping four sides 6 inches and adhering with tape.
Reglets and Rebates: 1.
Form reglets and rebates in concrete to receive flashing, frames and other equipment as detailed and required. Coordinate dimensions and locations required with other related Work.
2.
If concrete slabs on grade adjoin a wall or other perpendicular concrete surface, form a reglet in wall to receive and carry horizontal concrete Work. Reglet shall be full thickness of the slab and shall be 3/4 inch wide, unless otherwise indicated. Requirement does not apply to exterior walks, unless specifically indicated.
C.
Anchor Slots: Embedded anchor slots in concrete walls to receive masonry veneer shall be set vertically in forms, 24 inches maximum on centers measured horizontally. Anchor slots shall be No. 24 gage galvanized sheet steel with removable fiber filler to prevent seepage of cement in slot.
D.
Screeds: Install screeds accurately and maintain at required grade or slab elevations after steel reinforcement has been installed, but before starting to place concrete. Install screeds adjacent to walls and in parallel rows not to exceed 8 feet on centers .
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
02/01/2011 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 3000-9
•
3.04
INSTALLATION A.
• B.
•
C.
Conveying and Placing: 1.
Concrete shall be placed only under direct observation of the IOR. Do not place concrete outside of regular working hours, unless the Inspector has been notified at least 48 hours in advance.
2.
Concrete shall be conveyed from mixer to location of final placement by methods that will prevent separation or loss of materials.
3.
Concrete shall be placed as nearly as practicable to its final position to avoid segregation due to re-handling or flowing. No concrete that has partially hydrated or has been contaminated by foreign materials shall be placed, nor shall retempered concrete or concrete which has been remixed after initial set be placed.
4.
[n placing concrete in columns, walls or thin sections, provide openings in forms, elephant trunks, tremies or other recognized devices, to prevent segregation and accumulation of partially hydrated concrete on forms or metal reinforcement above level of concrete being placed. Such devices shall be installed so that concrete will be dropped vertically. Unconfined vertical drop of concrete from end of such devices to final placement surface shall not exceed 6 feet.
5.
Concrete shall be placed as a continuous operation until placing of panel or section is completed. Top surfaces of vertically formed lifts shall be level.
6.
Concrete shall be thoroughly consolidated by suitable means during placement, and shall be thoroughly worked around reinforcement and embedded fixtures and into comers of forms.
7.
Where conditions make consolidation difficult or where reinforcement IS congested, batches of mortar containing same proportions of cement, sand, and water as provided in the concrete, shall first be deposited in the forms to a depth of at least one inch.
Cold Weather: I.
Provide adequate equipment for heating concrete materials and protecting concrete during freezing or near-freezing weather. All ground with which concrete is to come in contact shall be free from frost. No frozen materials or materials containing ice shall be used.
2.
The temperature of concrete at the time of placement shall not be below the minimum temperatures given in Table 3.1 of ACI 306.1.
3.
Concrete shall be maintained at a temperature of at least 50° F. for not less than 72 hours after placing or until it has thoroughly hardened. Cover concrete and provide sufficient heat as required. When necessary, aggregates shall be heated before mixing. Special precautions shall be taken for protection of transit-mixed concrete.
Hot Weather:
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
02/0l/2011 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 3000-10
• D.
E.
•
•
1.
Concrete to be placed during hot weather shall comply with the requirements of ACI 318, Section 5.13 .
2.
Maintain concrete temperatures indicated in Table 2.1.5 of ACI 305R to prevent the evaporation rate from exceeding 0.2 pound of water per square feet of exposed concrete per hour.
3.
Cool concrete using methods indicated in ACI 305R Appendix B.
4.
Place and cure concrete as specified in ACI 305R Chapter 4.
Compaction and Screeding:
1.
Tamp freshly placed concrete with a heavy tamper until at least 3/8 inch of mortar is brought to surface. Concrete shall then be tamped with a light tamper and screeded with a heavy straightedge until depressions and irregularities are eliminated, and surface is true to finish grades or elevations. Remove excess water and debris.
2.
Where slabs are to receive separate cement finish or mortar setting bed, continued tamping to raise mortar to surface is not performed. Laitance shall be removed by brushing with a stiff brush or by light sandblasting to expose clean top surface of coarse aggregate.
Floating and Troweling: 1.
When concrete has hydrated sufficiently, it shall be floated to a compact and smooth surface. After floating, wait until concrete has reached proper consistency before troweling. Top surfaces shall receive at least 2 troweling operations with steel hand trowel. Prior to and during final troweling, apply a fine mist of water frequently with an atomizing type fog sprayer. Omit troweling for slabs to receive a separate cement finish.
2.
For interior finish slabs, final troweling shall provide a hard, impervious, and nonslip surfaces, free from defects and blemishes. Finished surface shall be within tolerances indicated in Article 3.02. Avoid burnishing. Do not add cement or sand to absorb excess moisture. a.
Floor of Walk-In Refrigerator: Finish as specified above, to a smooth finish.
b.
Floor of Gymnasium Locker Rooms: After floating, and while the surface is still plastic, provide a fine textured finish by drawing a fine fiber bristle broom uniformly over the surface in one direction only. Floors sloped for drainage should be brushed in the direction of flow.
3.
Exterior Paving and Cement Walks: Finish as specified above, except surface shall be given a non-slip broom finish to match Sample reviewed by the Architect.
4.
Vertical concrete surfaces shall be finished smooth and free from marks or other surface defects .
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
02/01/2011 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 3000-11
F.
•
G.
• H.
3.05
Curing: I.
Length of time, temperature and moisture conditions for curing concrete shall be in accordance with ACI 318, Section 5.11.
2.
Forms containing concrete, top of concrete between forms, and exposed concrete surfaces after removal of forms shall be maintained in a thoroughly wet condition for at least 7 consecutive days after placing.
3.
If weather is hot or surface has dried out, spray surface of concrete slabs and paving with fine mist of water, starting not later than 2 hours after final troweling and continuing until sunset. Surface of finish shall be kept continuously wet until curing medium has been installed.
4.
Immediately after finishing, monolithic floor slabs shall be covered with curing paper. Paper shall be lapped 4 inches at joints and sealed with waterproof sealer. Edges shall be cemented to finish. Repair or replace paper damaged during construction operations.
Filling, Leveling and Patching: 1.
Concrete slabs exhibiting high or low spots and indicated to receive resilient floor covering or soft floor covering, shall have surfaces repaired. High spots shall be honed, or ground with power-driven machines to required tolerances. Low spots shall be filled with latex underlayment, installed in strict accordance with manufacturer's written recommendations.
2.
Holes resulting from form ties or sleeve nuts shall be solidly packed, through exterior walls, by pressure grouting with cement grout, as specified. Grouted holes on exposed surfaces shall be screeded flush and finished to match adjoining surfaces.
Cement Base: Cement base shall be of the height, thickness, and shape detailed. Base shall be reinforced with one inch mesh, 18 gage, zinc-coated wire fabric. Base finish mixture shall be one part Portland cement, 2 parts of fine aggregate and one part pea gravel. Colored cement base shall include a chemically inert mineral oxide pigment in the mix. FINISHING
A.
Soda and Acid Wash: Concrete surfaces to receive plaster, paint or other finish, and which have been formed by oil coated forms, shall be scrubbed with a solution of 1-1/2 pounds of caustic soda to one gallon of water. Surfaces where smooth wood or waste molds have been furnished shall be scrubbed with a solution of 20 percent muriatic acid. Wash with clean water after scrubbing.
B.
Sacking: Exposed concrete curbs, walls, and other surfaces shall be sacked by an application of Portland cement grout, floated, and rubbed. Sacking shall not be performed until patching and filling of holes has been completed. Entire sacking operation for any continuous area shall be started and completed within the same day. I.
•
Mix one part Portland cement and 1-1/2 parts fine sand with sufficient water to produce a grout having consistency of thick paint. Wet surface of concrete
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
02/0112011 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 3000-12
sufficiently to prevent absorption of water from grout. Apply grout uniformly with a brush or spray gun, then immediately float surface with a cork or other suitable float, scouring wall vigorously.
•
2.
•
C.
Sandblasting: Exterior concrete surfaces to receive stucco dash coat finish, where plywood or other smooth forms have been furnished, shall be uniformly sand-blasted with sharp quartz sand under sufficient air pressure to remove dirt, form oil and other foreign materials, and roughen surface to provide a proper bond. Such surfaces shall be thoroughly washed with clean water after sandblasting.
D.
Abrasive: Concrete stair treads, landings, ramps and steps on interior and exterior of buildings, and interior exposed concrete floors in shop buildings shall receive an abrasive finish.
E.
Floor Hardener: Exposed interior concrete floors throughout shall be treated with floor hardener. 1.
Protect adjacent surfaces. Clean surfaces to receive treatment in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, ensuring that all stains, oil, grease, form release agents, laitance, dust and dirt are removed prior to application.
2.
Apply hardener in accordance with manufacturer's instructions as soon as concrete is firm enough to work on after final troweling .
F.
Cement Grout and Dry-Pack Concrete: Cement grout shall be mixed at the Project site and shall be composed of one volume of Portland cement and 2-1/2 volumes of fine aggregate. Materials shall be mixed dry with sufficient water added to make mixture flow under its own weight. When grout is used as a dry pack concrete, add sufficient water to provide a stiff mixture, which can be molded into a sphere.
G.
Broom Finish: Exterior stair treads and landings shall be provided with a non-slip broom finish in addition to abrasive finish specified.
H.
Abrasive Stair Nosing: Nosing shall be installed according to manufacturers written recommendations. EXPANSION AND CONSTRUCTION JOINTS
3.06 A.
•
While grout is still plastic, finish surface with a sponge-rubber float, removing excess grout. Allow surface to dry thoroughly, then rub vigorously with dry burlap to completely remove dried grout. No visible film or grout shall remain after rubbing with burlap.
Construction Joints: Details and proposed location of construction joints shall be as indicated on the Drawings, located to least impair strength of structure, in accordance with the following: 1.
Thoroughly clean contact surface by sand blasting entire surface not earlier than 5 days after initial placement.
2.
A mix containing same proportion of sand and cement provided in concrete plus a maximum of 50 percent of coarse aggregate shall be placed to a depth of at least
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
02/01/2011 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 3000-13
•
one inch on horizontal joints. Vertical joints shall be wetted and coated with a neat cement grout immediately before placing of new concrete . 3.
B.
Expansion Joints: Provide expansion joints where indicated in walks and exterior slabs. Space approximately 20 feet apart, unless otherwise indicated. Joints shall extend entirely through slab with joint filler in one piece for width of walk or slab. Joint filler shall be 3/8 inch thick, unless otherwise indicated.
C.
Tooled Joints: Slabs, walks and paving shall be marked into areas as indicated with markings made with a V -grooving tool. Marks shall be round-edged, free from burrs or obstructions, with clean cut angles and shall be straight and true. Walks, if not indicated, shall be marked off into rectangles of not more than 12 square feet and shall have a center marking where more than 5 feet wide. TESTING
3.07 A.
• B.
C.
•
Should contact surface become coated with earth, sawdust, or deleterious material of any kind after being cleaned, entire surface shall be re-cleaned before applying mix.
Molded Cylinder Tests: l.
Inspector or testing lab personnel will prepare cylinders and perform slump tests. Samples for concrete strength shall be taken in accordance to ASTM C 172. Each cylinder shall be dated, given a number, point in structure from which sample was obtained, mix design number, mix design strength and result of accompanying slump test noted .
2.
Separate tests of molded concrete cylinders obtained at same place and time shall be made at age of three days, seven days, and 28 days. A strength test shall be the average of the compressive strength of two cylinders, obtained from the same sample of concrete and tested at 28 days or at test age designated for determination of fc.
3.
Test cylinders shall be prepared at the Project site and stored in testing laboratory in accordance with ASTM C31, and tested in accordance with ASTM C39.
Core Test: At request of the Architect, cores of hardened concrete shall be cut from portions of hydrated structures for testing, in accordance with CBC and ASTM C42. I.
Provide 4 inch diameter cores at representative places throughout the structure as designated by the Architect.
2.
In general, provide sufficient cores to represent concrete placed with at least one core for each 4,000 square feet of building area, and at least 3 cores total for each Project.
3.
Where cores have been removed, fill voids with drypack, and patch the finish to match the adjacent existing surfaces.
Concrete Consistency: Measure consistency according to ASTM Cl43. Test twice each day or partial day's run of the mixer.
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
02/01/2011 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 3000-14
•
D.
Adjustment of Mix: If the strength of any grade of concrete for any portion of Work, as indicated by molded test cylinders, falls below minimum 28 days compressive strength specified or indicated, adjust mix design for remaining portion of construction so that resulting concrete meets minimum strength requirements.
E.
Air Content Testing: Measure in accordance to ASTM Cl73 or ASTM C231, for each composite sample taken in accordance to ASTM C 172.
F.
G.
•
Defective Concrete:
I.
Should strength of any grade of concrete, for any portion of Work indicated by tests of molded cylinders and core tests, fall below minimum 28 days strength specified or indicated, concrete will be deemed defective Work and shall be replaced or adequately strengthened in a manner acceptable to the Architect and DSA.
2.
Concrete Work that is not formed as indicated, is not true within 1/250 of span, not true to intended alignment, not plumb or level where so intended, not true to intended grades and levels, contains sawdust shavings, wood or embedded debris, or does not fully conform to Contract provisions, shall be deemed to be defective Work and shall be removed and replaced.
Concrete for Equipment Pads, Mechanical and Electrical Work: Unless otherwise indicated, strength shall have a minimum f c = 3,000 psi. Exposed concrete shall be provided with a hand trowel finish with radius comers and edges. Form and place concrete where necessary as described in Section 03 1000 Concrete Forming and Accessories, and reinforced as described in Section 03 2000 Concrete Reinforcing. Calcium chloride shall not be furnished in any concrete mix provided for the installation of underground electrical conduits. For concrete encasement of more than one conduit, furnish 3/4 inch maximum aggregate. CLEANUP
3.08 A.
Remove rubbish, debris and waste materials and legally dispose of off the Project site. PROTECTION
3.09 A.
Protect the Work of this section until Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION
•
02/0 l/20 11
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HJGH SCHOOL
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 3000-15
121107
•
SECTION 05 1200 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING
PART 1- GENERAL SUMMARY
1.01 A.
B.
•
1.02
Section Includes: 1.
Structural steel.
2.
Architecturally exposed structural steel.
Related Requirements: 1.
Division 0 I - General Requirements.
2.
Section 0 I 4523 - Testing and Inspection.
3.
Section 03 3000- Cast-In-Place Concrete.
4.
Section 05 3000 - Metal Decking.
5.
Section 05 5000- Metal Fabrications.
6.
Section 09 9000 - Paints and Coatings.
REFERENCES A.
CBC Chapter 22A.
B.
American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC): 1.
C.
a.
AISC 360 Specifications for Structural Steel Buildings.
b.
AISC Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges.
c.
RCSC Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts.
2.
AISC 341 - Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, including Supplements.
3.
AISC 358 - Prequalified Connections for Special and Intermediate Steel Moment Frames for Seismic Applications.
American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): 1.
•
AISC- Steel Construction Manual:
ASTM A36 - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel.
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
I 1107/2012 STRUCTURALSTEELFRANITNG 05 1200-1
121107
•
•
•
2.
ASTM A53 - Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-:-Coated, Welded and Seamless .
3.
ASTM A108- Standard Specification for Steel Bar, Carbon and Alloy, ColdFinished.
4.
ASTM A123 - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dipped Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products.
5.
ASTM A153- Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware.
6.
ASTM A307- Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60000 PSI Tensile Strength.
7.
ASTM A325 - Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated, 120/105 Ksi Minimum Tensile Strength.
8.
ASTM A435 - Standard Specification for Examination of Steel Plates.
9.
ASTM A490 - Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated, 120/105 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength.
10.
ASTM A500- Standard Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Round and Shapes.
11.
ASTM A501 - Standard Specification for Hot-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing .
12.
ASTM A572 - Standard Specification for High-Strength Low-Alloy Columbium-Vanadium Structural Steel.
13.
ASTM A653 - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process.
14.
ASTM A673 - Standard Specification for Sampling Procedure for Impact Testing of Structural Steel,
15.
ASTM A 780- Standard Practice for Repair of Damaged and Uncoated Areas of Hot-Dip Galvanized Coatings.
16.
ASTM A992- Standard Specification for Structural Steel Shapes.
17.
ASTM Cl107- Standard Specification for Packaged Dry, Hydraulic-Cement Grout (Non-Shrink).
18.
ASTM E23 - Standard Test Methods for Notched Bar Impact Testing of Metallic Materials.
19.
ASTM E 112 - Standard Test Methods for Determining Average Grain Size.
20.
ASTM F436- Standard Specification for Hardened Steel Washers .
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
Straight-Beam Ultrasonic
ll/07/2012 STRUCTURALSTEELFRANITNG 05 1200-2
121107
• D.
E.
•
1.03
21.
ASTM F959 - Standard Specification for Compressible-Washer-Type Direct Tension Indicators for Use with Structural Fasteners .
22.
ASTM Fl554 - Standard Specification for Anchor Bolts, Steel, 36, 55 and 105-Ksi Yield Strength.
23.
ASTM Fl852- Standard Specification for "Twist Off' Type Tension Control Structural Bolt/Nut/Washer Assemblies, Steel, Heat Treated, 120/105 ksi Minimum Tension Strength.
American Welding Society (AWS): 1.
A WS D 1.1 - Structural Welding Code - Steel.
2.
AWS D1.8- Structural Welding Code- Seismic Supplement.
2.
A WS A2.4 - Standard Symbols for Welding, Brazing, and Nondestructive Examination.
3.
AWS B2.1 Qualification.
SSPC- Steel Structures Painting Council: 1.
SP-2 - Hand Tool Cleaning.
2.
PA-l -Paint Application Specification No. 1.
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A.
Structural steel shall conform to CBC requirements, except that steel manufactured by acid Bessemer process is not permitted for structural purposes.
B.
Sheet and strip steel other than those listed in CBC, if provided for structural purpose, shall comply with DSA requirements.
1.04
SUBMITTALS A.
Shop Drawings: 1.
Submit Shop Drawings, including complete details and schedules for fabrication and shop assembly of members, and details, schedules, procedures and diagrams showing the sequence of erection. Fully detail minor connections and fastenings not shown or specified in the Contract Documents to meet required conditions using similar detailing as shown in the Contract Documents. Include a fully detailed, well controlled sequence and-technique plan for shop and field welding that minimizes locked in stresses and distortion; submit sequence and technique plan for review by the Architect. a.
•
Specifications for Welding Procedures and Performance
Include details of cuts, connections, camber, and holes in accordance with Figure 4.5 of A WS D 1.1 or AISC Chapter J, weld position plan and other pertinent data. Indicate welds by standard A WS symbols, and show size, length and type of each weld .
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
11107/2012 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 05 1200-3
121107
• B.
•
•
Erection and Bracing Plan and Erection Procedure: Submit an erection and framing plan, including columns, beams, and girders, signed and sealed by a Structural or Civil Engineer registered in the State of California in accordance with Title 8 California Code of Regulations, Section 1710, Erection of Structures. Maintain a copy at the Project site as required by the California Division oflndustrial Safety.
d.
Submit a list of steel items to be galvanized.
e.
Include identification and details of Architecturally Exposed Structural Steel (AESS) members, if applicable.
Submit copies of fabricator's specifications and installation instructions for the following products. Include laboratory test reports and other data required demonstrating compliance with these Specifications: a.
Structural steel, each type; including certified copies of mill reports covering chemical and physical properties.
b.
Welding electrodes.
c.
Welding gas.
d.
Unfinished bolts and nuts.
e.
Structural steel primer paint.
f.
High-strength bolts, including nuts and washers.
Submit, certifying that products meet or exceed specified requirements.
Mill Test Reports: 1.
E.
c.
Manufacturer's Mill Certificate: 1.
D.
Provide setting drawings, templates, and directions for installation of anchor bolts and other anchorages to be installed for Work specified in other sections.
Product Data: 1.
C.
b.
Submit manufacturer's certificates, indicating structural yield and tensile strength, destructive and non-destructive test analysis.
Welding Procedure Specifications (WPS): Submit weld procedures for all welding on project to Owner's testing laboratory for approval. After approval by testing laboratory, submit to Architect for record. Weld procedures shall be qualified as described in AWS Dl.5, AISC 341 and AISC 358, as applicable. Weld procedures shall indicate joints details and tolerances, preheat and interpass temperature, postheat treatment, single or multiple stringer passes, peening of stringer passes for groove welds except for the first and the last pass, electrode type and size, welding current, polarity and amperes and root treatment. The welding variables for each stringer pass shall be recorded and averaged; from these averages the weld heat input shall be calculated. Submit the manufacturer's product data sheet for all welding material used .
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
11107/2012 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 05 1200-4
121107
•
F.
Welder's Certificates: Field welders shall be Project certified in accordance with A WS D 1.1. Shop welders shall be Project certified for FCA W in accordance with A WS Dl.l.
G.
Test Reports: Submit reports of tests conducted on shop and field welded and bolted connections. Include data on type oftest conducted and test results. QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.05 A.
Comply with the following as a minimum requirement, except as otherwise indicated: 1.
American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC) "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges, modified as follows: a.
Replace "Structural Design Drawings" with "Contract Documents' throughout the document.
b.
Paragraph 3.2 is hereby modified in it's entirety as follows: "Contract Documents including but not limited to architectural, mechanical, plumbing, electrical, civil and kitchen design drawings and specifications shall be used as supplement to the structural plans to define configurations and construction information."
•
c.
Delete Paragraph 3.3.
d.
In Paragraph 4.4, delete the following sentence: "These drawings shall be returned to the Fabricator within 14 calendar days."
e.
Delete Paragraph 4.4.1.(a) in its entirety.
f.
Paragraph 4.4.2 is hereby modified in it's entirety as follows: "No review action, implicit or explicit, shall be interpreted to authorize changes in the Contract Documents."
2.
B.
Shop fabrication shall be inspected in accordance with CBC.
c.
Erect mock-up panel of fabricated structural steel meeting Architecturally Exposed Structural Steel (AESS) tolerances for exposed areas. Approval by Architect is required. Mock-up to remain for comparison but may not be left as part of the work. DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
1.06
•
Perform welding m accordance with A WS Standards, A WS D I. l, and California Building Code Section 2004A.l and approved Weld Procedure Specifications (WPS).
A.
Store structural steel above grade on platforms, skids or other supports.
B.
Protect steel from corrosion.
c.
Store welding electrodes in accordance with A WS D 12.1.
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
I 1/07/2012 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 05 1200-5
121107
•
D.
PART 2- PRODUCTS GENERAL
2.01 A.
Stock Materials: Provide exact materials, sections, shapes, thickness, sizes, weights, and details of construction indicated on Drawings. Changes because of material stock or shop practices will be considered if net area of shape or section is not reduced thereby, if material and structural properties are at least equivalent, and if overall dimensions are not exceeded.
B.
Shapes, bars, plates, tubes and pipes shall be made of materials with at least 16 percent recycled content if produced from Basic Oxygen Furnace (BOF) or at least 67 percent recycled content if produced from Electric Arc Furnace (EAF). MATERIALS
2.02
•
A.
Structural Steel: All wide flange shapes shall conform to ASTM A992 grade 50. Other steel shall conform to ASTM A36.
B.
Unfinished Threaded Fasteners: ASTM A307, Grade A, regular low carbon bolts and nuts.
c.
High-Strength Threaded Fasteners: ASTM A325, ASTM A490 ASTM F959 or ASTM F1852 quenched and tempered, steel bolts, nuts and washers .
D.
Primers: Lead-free metal primer: 1.
SSPC-Paint 20, Zinc-Rich Primer.
2.
SSPC-Paint 23, Latex Primer.
3.
SSPC-Paint 25 Zinc Oxide Primer.
E.
Steel Pipe: ASTM A53, Type E or S, Grade B.
F.
Structural Tubing:
G.
•
Store other materials in a weather-tight and dry place until installed into the Work .
1.
Hot-formed, ASTM A501.
2.
Cold-formed, ASTM A500, Grade B.
Galvanizing: ASTM Al23.
H.
Shear stud connectors: ASTM A 108, Grade 1015 forged steel, headed, uncoated, granular flux filled shear connector or anchor studs by Nelson Stud Welding Division, or equal.
J.
Grout: AS TM C 11 07, non-shrink type, pre-mixed compound consisting of nonmetallic aggregate, cement, water reducing and plasticizing additives, capable of developing a minimum compressive strength of 7,000 psi at seven days; of consistency suitable for application and a 30 minute working time .
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
11107/2012 STRUCTURALSTEELFRANITNG 05 1200-6
121107
•
•
•
2.03
FABRICATION A.
Cleaning and Straightening Materials: Materials being fabricated shall be thoroughly cleaned of scale and rust, and straightened before fabrication. Cleaning and straightening methods shall not damage material. After punching or fabrication of component parts of a member, twists or bends shall be removed before parts are assembled.
B.
Cutting, Punching, Drilling and Tapping: Unless otherwise indicated or specified, structural steel fabricator shall perform the cutting, punching, drilling and tapping of Work so that Work of other trades will properly connect to steel Work.
C.
Milling: Compression joints depending on contact bearing shall be furnished with bearing surfaces prepared to a common plane by milling.
D.
Use of Burning Torch: Oxygen cutting of members shall be performed by machine. Gouges greater than 3/16 inch that remain from cutting shall be removed by grinding. Reentrant corners shall be shaped notch free to a radius of at least 1/2 inch. Gas cutting of holes for bolts or rivets is not permitted.
E.
Galvanizing: After fabrication, items indicated or specified to be galvanized shall be galvanized in largest practical sizes. Fabrication includes operations of shearing, punching, bending, forming, assembling or welding. Galvanized items shall be free from projections, barbs, or icicles resulting from the galvanizing process.
F.
Welding: I.
Type of steel furnished in welded structures shall provide chemical properties suitable for welding as determined by chemical analysis. Welds shall conform to the verification and inspection requirements of CBC Chapter I 7A. Conform to A WS D I .1, and CBC Chapter 22A.
2.
Materials and workmanship shall conform to the requirements specified herein and to CBC requirements, modified as follows: a.
No welded splices shall be permitted except those indicated on Drawings unless specifically reviewed by the Architect.
b.
Drawings will designate joints in which it is important that welding sequence and technique be controlled to minimize shrinkage stresses and distortion.
3.
Welding shall be performed in accordance with requirements of the AWS Structural Welding Code.
4.
Architecturally Exposed Structural Steel: Verify that weld sizes, fabrication sequence, and equipment used for Architecturally Exposed Structural Steel will limit distortions to allowable tolerances. Prevent surface bleeding of back-side welding on exposed steel surfaces. Grind smooth exposed fillet welds ~ inch and larger. Grind flush butt welds. Dress exposed welds.
5.
Remove erection bolts on welded, Architecturally Exposed Structural Steel; fill holes with plug welds; and grind smooth at exposed surfaces .
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR& P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
11/07/2012 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 05 1200-7
121107
G.
•
Shop Finish: 1.
Notify the Project Inspector when Work is ready to receive shop prime coat. Work shall be inspected by the Project Inspector before installation of primer.
2.
Structural steel and fittings shall receive a coat of primer, except:
3.
Surfaces that will be galvanized.
b.
Surfaces that will be fireproofed.
c.
Surfaces that will be field welded.
d.
Surfaces in contact with concrete.
e.
Surfaces high strength bolted.
The primer specified shall be spray applied, filling joints and comers and covering surfaces with a smooth unbroken film. The minimum dry film thickness of the primer shall be 2.0 mils.
H.
Comply with fabrication tolerance limits of AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges" for structural steel.
I
Fabricate Architecturally Exposed Structural Steel with exposed surfaces smooth, square, and free of surfaces blemishes, including pitting, rust and scale seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, and roughness.
• J.
1.
Remove blemishes by filling, grinding, or by welding and grinding, prior to cleaning, treating and shop priming .
2.
Comply with fabrication requirements, including tolerance limits of AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges" for Architecturally Exposed Structural Steel. .
Architecturally Exposed Structural Steel: use special care in unloading, handling and ·erecting the steel to avoid marking or distorting the steel members. Minimize damage to any shop paint when temporary braces or erection clips are used. A void unsightly surfaces upon removal. Grind smooth tack welds and holes filled with weld metal or body solder. Plan and execute all operations in such a manner that the close fit and neat appearance of the structure will not be impaired. SHOP AND FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
2.04
•
a.
A.
A special inspector, approved by DSA to inspect the Work of this section, shall inspect high-strength bolted connections. The Owner will provide a DSA approved independent testing laboratory to perform tests and prepare test reports in accordance with CBC 1704A.3.3. The Project Inspector shall be responsible for monitoring the work of the special inspector and testing laboratories to ensure that the testing program is satisfactorily completed.
B.
An A WS CWI certified special inspector, approved by DSA to inspect the Work of this section, shall inspect welded connections in accordance with CBC 1704A.3.1. The Owner will provide a DSA approved independent testing laboratory to perform tests and prepare test reports. The Project Inspector shall be responsible for
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
11/07/2012 STRUCTURALSTEELFRANITNG 05 1200-8
121107
•
•
•
monitoring the work of the special inspector and testing laboratories to ensure that the testing program is satisfactorily completed .
c.
The independent testing laboratory shall conduct and interpret test and state in each report whether test specimens comply with requirements, and specifically state any deviations there from.
D.
Provide access to all places where structural steel Work is being fabricated or produced so required inspection and testing can be performed.
E.
The independent testing laboratory may inspect or test structural steel at plant before shipment; however, Architect reserves the right at any time before Contract Completion to deem materials not in compliance with the specified requirements as defective Work.
F.
Correct defects in structural Work when inspections and laboratory test reports indicate noncompliance with specified requirements. Perform additional tests as may be required to reconfirm noncompliance of original Work, and as may be required to show demonstrate compliance of corrected Work.
G.
Inspection of Structural Tube Steel/Hollow Structural Sections (HSS): Structural tube steel members (round, square, rectangular), disregarding steel origin, will be inspected during shop fabrication per DSA Bulletin 07-03. Inspector will perform a visual examination of the seam weld area for visible discontinuities. When defects are suspected, non-destructive testing will be considered.
H.
Welding: Inspect and test during fabrication and erection of structural steel assemblies as follows: I.
Certify welders and conduct inspections and tests as required. Record types and locations of defects found in the Work. Record Work required and performed to correct deficiencies.
2.
Inspect welds. Welds shall be visually inspected before performing any nondestructive testing. Groove weld shall be inspected by ultrasonic or other approved non-destructive test methods. Testing shall be performed to A WS D 1.1 Table 6.3 cyclically loaded non-tubular connections.
3.
Ultrasonic testing shall be performed by a specially trained and qualified technician who shall operate the equipment, examine welds, and maintain a record of welds examined, defects found, and disposition of each defect. Repair and test defective welds.
4.
Rate of Testing: Completed welds contained in joints and splices shall be tested 100 percent either by ultrasonic testing or by radiography.
5.
Welds, when installed in column splices, shall be tested by either ultrasonic testing or radiography.
6.
Base metal thicker than I 'li-inch, when subjected to through-thickness weld shrinkage strains, shall be ultrasonically inspected by shear wave methods for discontinuities directly behind such welds. Tests shall be performed at least 48 hours after completed joint has cooled down to ambient air temperature .
8736 CORWIN THEATERREPAIR&P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
11/07/2012 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 05 1200-9
121107
•
•
7.
Material discontinuities shall be reviewed based on the defect rating in accordance with the criteria of A WS D 1.1 table 6.3 by the Architect and DSA .
8.
Other method of non-destructive testing and inspection, for example, liquid dye penetrate testing, magnetic particle inspection or radiographic inspection may be performed on weld if required.
9.
Lamellar Tearing: Lamellar-tearing resulting from welding is a crack (with zero tolerance) and shall be repaired in accordance with A WS Dl.l.
10.
Lamination: The rejection criteria shall be based on ASTM A435.
11.
Where testing reveals lamination or conditions of lamellar tearing in base metal, the steel fabricator shall submit a proposed method of repair for review by the Architect. Test repaired areas as required.
12.
Magnetic Particle Testing: Magnetic particle testing when required shall be provided in accordance with A WS D 1.1 for procedure and technique. The standards of acceptance shall be in accordance with A WS D 1.1 Qualification.
I.
Lamellar Tearing: Prior to welding plates 1 to 1 Yi-inch thick and greater and rolled shapes within the distance from 6 inches above the top of the joint to 6 inches below the bottom of the joint shall be checked by ultrasonic testing for laminations in base metal which may interfere with the inspection of the completed joint. Should these defects occur, members will be reviewed by the Architect and DSA. Welding procedure specifications in sub-section 1.5G specify welding practices to minimize lamellar tearing .
J.
Prior Testing of Base Material: Test material before fabrication.
K.
Lines and levels of erected steel shall be certified by a State of California licensed surveyor as set forth in related Division 01 section.
L.
Welded studs shall be tested and inspected by the special inspector in accordance with requirements of A WS D 1.1 - Stud Welding.
M.
Record Drawings: After steel has been erected, correct or revise Shop Drawings and erection diagrams to correspond with reviewed changes performed in the field.
PART 3- EXECUTION PREPARATION
3.01 A.
B.
•
Verify governing dimensions and conditions of the Work before commencing erection Work. 1.
Report discrepancies between drawings and field dimensions to Architect before commencing work.
2.
Beginning of installation means erector accepts existing conditions and surfaces underlying or adjacent to work of this section.
Provide temporary shoring and bracing, and other support during performance of the Work. Remove after steel is in place and connected, and after cast-in-place concrete has reached its design strength .
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
ll/07/2012 STRUCTURALSTEELFRANITNG 05 1200-10
121107
•
C. 3.02
Coordinate prime coat repair and application with requirements of Section 09 9000. ERECTION
A.
Install structural steel accurately in locations, to elevations indicated, and according to AISC specifications and CBC requirements.
B.
Clean surfaces of base plates and bearing plates.
C.
1.
Install base and bearing plates for structural members on wedges, shims, or setting nuts as required.
2.
Tighten anchor bolts after supported members have been positioned and plumbed. Do not remove wedges or shims; cut off flush with edge of base or bearing plate before packing with grout.
Maintain erection tolerances of structural steel within AISC Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges. 1.
D.
•
Align and adjust various members forming part of complete frame or structure before permanently fastening. Before assembly, clean bearing surfaces and other surfaces that will be in permanent contact after assembly. Perform necessary adjustments to compensate for discrepancies in elevations and alignment. 1.
Level and plumb individual members of structure.
E.
Do not permit thermal cutting during erection of structural steel.
F.
Where indicated for field connections, provide standard bolts complying with ASTM A307.
G.
Install high strength steel bolts at locations indicated. Assembly and installation shall be in accordance with CBC requirements.
H.
•
Architecturally Exposed Structural Steel members and components, plumbed, leveled and aligned to a tolerance not to exceed one-half the amount permitted for structural steel. Contractor to provide adjustable connections between Architecturally Exposed Structural Steel and the structural steel frame or the masonry or concrete supports, in order to provide the erector with means for adjustment.
1.
Allowable hole sizes: I I 16 inch larger than bolt size.
2.
Use friction type connection with standard hardened steel circular, square or rectangular washer under bolt nut.
3.
Thoroughly clean area under bolt head, nut and washer. Remove all paint, lacquer, oil or other coatings except organic zinc-rich paints in accordance with SSPC, SP-2.
4.
Tighten bolts by power torque wrench or hand wrench until twist-off.
Contractor shall be responsible for correcting detailing and fabrication errors and for correct fitting of all members and components .
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
11107/2012 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 05 1200-11
121107
•
I.
Erect structural steel plumb and level and to proper tolerances as set forth in the AISC Manual. Provide temporary bracing, supports or connections required for complete safety of structure until final permanent connections are installed.
J.
Install column bases within a tolerance of 118 inch of detailed centerlines, level at proper elevations. Support bases on double nuts and solidly fill spaces under bases with cement grout.
K.
Provide anchor bolts with templates and diagrams. Contractor shall be responsible for proper location and installation of bolts. Correct deficiencies and errors.
L.
Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply galvanizing repair paint according to ASTM A 780. FITTING
3.03 A.
Closely fit members, finished true to line and in precise position required to allow accurate erection and proper joining in the field.
B.
Drilling to enlarge unfair holes will not be allowed. Allow only enough drifting during assembly to bring parts into position, but not enough to enlarge holes or distort the metal. Do not heat rolled sections, unless approved by Architect. PUNCHING AND DRILLING
3.04
•
A.
Punch material l/16 inch larger than nominal diameter of bolt, wherever thickness of metal is equal to or less than the diameter of the bolt plus 118 inch.
B.
Drill or sub-punch and ream where metal is equal to or more than the diameter of the bolt plus 118 inch. Make diameter for sub-punched and sub-drilled holes 1116 inch larger than nominal diameter of bolt.
C.
Precisely locate holes to ensure passage of bolt through assembled materials without drifting. Enlarge holes when necessary to receive bolts by reaming; flame cutting to enlarge holes is not acceptable. Structural Steel members with poorly matched holes will be rejected. FINISHING
3.05 A.
After erection, spots or surfaces where paint has been removed, damaged, or burned off, and field rivets, bolts, and other field connections shall be cleaned of dirt, oil, grease, and burned paint and furnished with a spot coat of the same primer installed during shop priming.
B.
Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint. Install paint to exposed areas with the same material installed during shop painting. Install by brush or spray to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 1.5 mils. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
3.06
•
A.
Owner will provide a special inspector and independent testing laboratory to perform field inspections and tests and to prepare test reports.
B.
Correct deficiencies in or remove and replace structural steel that inspections and test reports indicate do not comply with specified requirements .
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HJGH SCHOOL
11/07/2012 STRUCTURALSTEELFRANITNG 05 1200-12
121107
•
3.07
CLEANUP
A. 3.08
Remove rubbish, debris and waste materials and legally dispose of off the Project Site. PROTECTION
A.
3.09
Protect the Work ofthis section until Substantial Completion. HANDLING
A.
Both in shop and in the field, transport, handle and erect to prevent damage or overstressing of any component.
END OF SECTION
•
•
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
11/07/2012 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 05 1200-13
111001
•
SECTION 05 3000 METAL DECKING
PART 1- GENERAL SUMMARY
1.01 A.
B.
•
1.02
1.
Metal decking.
2.
Shear connectors.
Related Requirements: 1.
Division 01 - General Requirements.
2.
Section 01 4523 - Testing and Inspection.
3.
Section 05 1200 - Structural Steel Framing.
4.
Section 07 6000 - Flashing and Sheet Metal.
REFERENCES A.
ASTM A108 - Standard Specification for Steel Bar, Carbon and Alloy, ColdFinished.
B.
ASTM A653 - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process.
C.
ASTM D746 - Standard Test Method for Brittleness Temperature of Plastics and Elastomers by Impact.
D.
ASTM D 1056 - Standard Specification for Flexible Cellular Materials-Sponge or Expanded Rubber.
E.
A WS D 1.3 - Structural Welding Code Sheet- Steel.
F.
AISI- Specifications for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members. PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
1.03
•
Section Includes:
A.
Compute properties of deck sections on basis of effective design width as limited by provisions of the AISI specifications. Provide no less than deck section properties specified, including section modulus and moment of inertia per foot of width.
B.
Regulatory Requirements:
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/0112011 METAL DECKING 05 3000-1
111001
•
c. 1.04
Requirements of Regulatory Agencies: DSA and Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL) approval for the decking when installed as a part of an assembly indicated on Drawings in which fire resistive construction ratings are required.
2.
Work of this section shall be in accordance with CBC.
Manufacturers shall be members of Steel Deck Institute (SDI). SUBMITTALS
A.
Shop Drawings: Drawings, sections and details indicate type of decking, location, finish, gage of metal, arrangement of sheets, necessary fabrication to incorporate decking into the Work, and relationship to openings and flashing. QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.05
•
I.
A.
General: Metal decking steel shall conform to requirements of strengths and properties of standards specified.
B.
Qualifications of Welders: Properly certified for the type of Work involved in compliance with CBC requirements.
C.
Continuous inspection of welding will be performed by a special inspector, approved by DSA to inspect the Work of this section. Refer to Section 01 4523 -Testing and Inspection. The Project Inspector shall be responsible for monitoring the work of the special inspector to ensure that the inspection program is satisfactorily completed.
D.
Identification of metal decking steel shall conform to the standards specified in Section 01 4523 - Testing and Inspection. I.
Fabricator shall furnish sufficient evidence to the Architect attesting compliance with specified requirements.
2.
Conform to CBC requirements. Unclassified or unidentified decking is not permitted. Furnish deck manufacturer's certified mill analyses and test reports for each heat covering decking having a minimum Fy of 33 Ksi. In addition, for decking having Fy greater than 33 Ksi, testing laboratory shall perform one tension and elongation test and one bend or flattening test for each gage.
E.
Unidentifiable Steel: Steel which is not readily identifiable as to grade from markings and test records is not permitted to be provided as part of the Work of this section.
F.
Payment For Tests and Inspections: I.
Owner shall pay inspection and testing costs of identifiable steel.
PART 2- PRODUCTS ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
2.01
•
A.
ASC Steel Deck.
B.
Verco Manufacturing Co.
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
I 0/01120 II METAL DECKING 05 3000-2
111001
•
C.
Epic Metals Corporation .
D.
Equal. MATERIALS
2.02 A.
Metal Decking: coating. I.
B.
Section properties shall conform to applicable provisions of latest edition of AISI - Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members.
Flexible Closure Strips for Deck: Vulcanized, closed-cell, expanded chloroprene elastomer, complying with ASTM D 1056, Grade SCE #41. 1.
Brittleness Temperature: Minus 40 degrees F, ASTM D746.
2.
Flammability Resistance: Self-extinguishing,
C.
Metal Flashing and Closures: coating.
D.
Shear Connectors: Headed stud type, ASTM Al08 Grade 1015, cold-finished carbon steel complying with AISC specifications.
22 gage minimum, with ASTM A653, G90 zinc
FABRICATION
2.03
•
Roll-formed sheets conforming to ASTM A653, with G90 zinc
A.
Corrugated sheets or sections shall be designed to support required live load between supporting members.
B.
Provide decking in lengths to span over three or more supports.
C.
Except as detailed otherwise, provide decking with interlocking side laps, 2 1i-inch minimum end bearing, and I 1i-inch minimum side bearing.
D.
Welding: Provide materials and methods in accordance with recommendations of steel decking manufacturer and reviewed submittals. Hold decking tight to the supporting elements with screws or other means for proper welding or crimping of the decking edges. Conform to A WS D 1.3, and to the patterns and weld types indicated, with welds free from sharp edges and protrusions. Field coat welds and abraded surfaces at completion with an anodic type galvanizing repair paint. Omit the field paint coating where welds or abrasions are covered by concrete fill or sprayed fireproofing.
PART 3- EXECUTION OPENINGS
3.01
•
A.
Cut and reinforce units to provide openings which are located and dimensioned on the structural and mechanical Drawings.
B.
Provide openings, or other Work not indicated on the Drawings.
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 METAL DECKING 05 3000-3
111001
•
INSTALLATION
3.02 A.
Install metal decking in accordance with decking manufacturers' recommendations, requirements of Drawings, Shop Drawings, and Specifications.
B.
Install metal decking on supporting steel framework and adjust to final position before permanently fastening in place. Install each unit to proper bearing on supports.
2.
Install units in straight alignment for entire length of run of cells with close registration of cells of one unit with those of abutting unit.
c.
Fasten decking to steel framework at ends of units and at intermediate supports. Welding shall be as indicated on Drawings.
D.
Fasten side laps between supports as indicated on Drawings.
E.
Perform field cutting parallel with cells in area between cells, leaving sufficient horizontal material to permit welding to support steel.
F.
Weld shear connectors to supports thru decking units as required by Drawings. Weld only on clean, dry surfaces. Do not weld shear connectors thru two layers of decking units. METAL FLASHINGS AND CLOSURES
3.03
•
I.
A.
Furnish, install, and weld in position, sheet metal closure flashing, closure angles, closure plates, profile plates, and shear plates.
B.
Close open ends of cell runs at columns, openings, walls, similar interruptions and termination. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
3.04 A.
Inspection: Install steel decking under continuous inspection according to CBC Chapter 1704A.3. 1.
Welding inspection for steel deck diaphragms shall conform to CBC Section 2204A.l.
CLEAN UP
3.05 A.
Remove rubbish, debris, and waste materials and legally dispose of off the Project site. PROTECTION
3.06 A.
Protect the Work of this section until Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION
•
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 METAL DECKING 05 3000-4
111001
•
SECTION 05 4100 STRUCTURAL METAL STUD FRAMING PART l - GENERAL SUMMARY
1.01 A.
Section Includes: 1.
B.
1.02
•
Related Requirements: 1.
Division 0 I - General Requirements.
2.
Section 0 I 4523 - Testing and Inspection.
3.
Section 05 I200 - Structural Steel Framing.
4.
Section 09 22I6- Non-Structural Metal Framing.
SUBMITTALS A.
Shop Drawings: Submit drawings showing framing, connection details, accessories and anchorage. Indicate location of assemblies, size and spacing of framing components .
B.
Product Data: Submit manufacturer's catalog data for each item proposed for installation.
c.
Certificates: Furnish manufacturer's certification that materials meet or exceed Specification requirements. QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.03 A.
•
Load-bearing metal stud systems.
Comply with following as a minimum requirement: I.
AISI - Specifications for Design of Cold Formed Steel Structural Members.
2.
Welds shall be performed by A WS certified welders. Welding shall be performed in accordance with requirements of American Welding Society (AWS) Structural Welding Code-Steel Dl.1 and Dl.3. Structural welding Code-Sheet Steel.
3.
Welding shall be inspected by a special inspector, approved by DSA to inspect Work of this section. The Project Inspector shall be responsible for monitoring work of special inspector to ensure that inspection program is satisfactorily completed.
4.
ASTM A653 - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy Coated (Galvannealed) by Hot Dip Process .
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR& P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES IDGH SCHOOL
I 0/01120 II STRUCTURAL METAL STIJD FRAMING 05 4100-1
111001
•
•
B.
1.04
5.
ASTM A924 - Standard Specification for General Requirements for Steel Sheet Metallic-Coated by Hot-Dip Process .
6.
ASTM A I 003 - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Carbon, Metallic- and Nonmetallic-Coated for Cold-Formed Framing Members.
7.
ASTM A1008- Standard Specification for Steel Sheet and Strip, Hot-Rolled, Carbon, Structural High-Strength Low-Alloy, and High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability.
8.
ASTM C954 - Standard Specification for Load-Bearing (Transverse and Axial) Steel Studs, Runners (Tracks) and Bracing or Bridging for Screw Application of Gypsum Panel Products and Plaster Bases.
9.
ASTM C955 - Standard Specification for Load-Bearing (Transverse and Axial) Steel Studs, Runners (Tracks), and Bracing or Bridging for Screw Application of Gypsum Panel Products and Metal Plaster Bases.
10.
ASTM C 1007- Standard Specification for Installation of Structural (Axial and Transverse) Steel Framing Members and Accessories.
11.
ASTM E488 - Standard Test Methods of Strength Anchors in Concrete and Masonry.
12.
ASTM Ell90 - Standard Test Methods for Strength of Power-Actuated Fasteners Installed in Structural Members.
13 .
Manufacturer shall be a member of the Steel Stud Manufacturers Association (SSMA).
Tolerances: Install walls and partitions on straight lines, plumb, free of twists or other defects, and contacting a I 0-foot straight edge for its entire length at any location within a 118 inch tolerance. Install horizontal framing level within a tolerance of 118 inch in 12 feet in any direction. DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A.
Materials shall be delivered in their original unopened packages and stored protected from damage. Do not store material directly on grade. Provide adequate support to prevent bowing of material prior to installation.
B.
Store welding electrodes in accordance with A WS D 12.1.
PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01
MANUFACTURERS A.
Provide studs, tracks, joists, header, and accessones manufactured by one of following: 1.
•
ClarkWestern Building Systems .
I 0/01120 II
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
STRUCTURAL METAL STUD FRAMING 05 4100-2
Ill 001
• B.
Dietrich Industries, Inc .
3.
Marino/WARE.
4
Cemco.
5.
Equal.
Special Connection Accessories: Products manufactured by The Steel Network, Inc., or equal. MATERIALS
2.02 A.
•
2.
Light Gage Metal Framing: 1.
Metal framing shall be formed from corrosion resistant-steel conforming to requirements of ASTM A653, 50 ksi minimum.
2.
Metal framing shall be zinc coated in conformance to requirements of ASTM A926, G60.
3.
Metal framing shall be manufactured in conformance to ASTM C955.
4.
Install metal framing per ASTM C1007, Standard Specification for Installation of Load-Bearing (Transverse and Axial) Steel Studs and Related Accessories.
B.
Gages and properties of studs shall be as indicated on Drawings .
c.
Mechanical anchors to concrete and masonry shall be metal cinch at least 3/8 inch in diameter threaded bolt head type. Anchor bolts to be installed in concrete shall be hook type 'li inch diameter or more. Unless otherwise indicated.
D.
Mechanical anchors to metal framing shall be No. 10 self-tapping and self-drilling wafer-head screws.
E.
Accessories: Special top tracks, angles, fasteners, and strips of gypsum wallboard, as required for fire rating assembly required at each condition.
F.
Mineral Wool Safing Insulation: 4.0 pcf density. Thermafiber, Fibrex, or equal.
PART 3- EXECUTION INSTALLATION
3.01
•
A.
Install plumb and true. Install necessary accessories for proper installation.
B.
Anchor top and bottom runner track to ceiling or roof structure overhead and to floor structure below .
8736 CORWINTHEATERREPAIR&P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 STRUCTURAL METAL STUD FRAMING 05 4100-3
111001
•
•
C.
Install studs squarely in top and bottom runner track with firm abutment against track webs .
D.
Align and plumb studs, and fasten to flanges of both top and bottom runner tracks.
E.
Provide three studs minimum at corners of stud walls. Locate so as to provide surfaces for attachment of interior and exterior facing materials.
F.
Members not indicated to be welded together shall be attached with manufacturer recommended screws with minimum one screw at each flange of stud to top and bottom track. Wire tying of framing members is not permitted.
G.
Provide lateral bracing and bridging in accordance with manufacturer's written recommendations or as required by CBC.
H.
Intersecting walls and partitions, whether load-bearing or not, shall be connected.
I.
Splices in axially loaded studs are not permitted.
J.
Splice or butt weld butt joints in runner tracks. No splices are permitted in tracks over lintels, diaphragm sheathing, or diagonal bracing.
K.
Weld connections by fillet welds or plug welds m accordance with AWS recommended procedures and practices.
L.
Touch-up field abrasions and welds with galvanizing touch-up material.
M.
Studs that frame door openings shall be clipped to floor with 14 gage angle clips. Each clip to have two fasteners into studs and two fasteners into floor.
N.
Provide additional joists or blocking adjacent to exterior and interior walls, openings and elsewhere as required to provide support for indicated ceiling construction.
0.
Provide an additional joist under parallel partitions where partition length exceeds Y:z joist span and around floor and roof openings which interrupt one or more spanning members.
3.02
•
CONNECTIONS TO METAL DECKING
A.
Provide premolded neoprene filler strips matching flute profile for non-fire-rated walls and partitions covered on one or both sides up to metal decking.
B.
Top runner track of fire-rated partitions shall be a minimum of 36 mils (20 gage), unless noted otherwise, and attached to metal deck with required fasteners at spacing required for fire rating, but in no case over 16 inches on center. Areas above runner shall be friction fit with a minimum depth of 2 Y:z inches of 4 pounds per cubic foot density mineral wool insulation. A minimum of Y:z inch of firestopping compound shall be installed to each side of mineral wool insulation for a one-hour system, and one inch of firestopping for a two-hour system. Install required special tracks, angles, fasteners and strips of gypsum wallboard to provide required fire resistance rating .
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
I 0/01/20 II STRUCTURAL METAL STUD FRAMING 05 4100-4
111001
•
c.
Fire-rated top tracks shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and fire rating approval requirements . QUALITY CONTROL
3.03 A.
Welding Inspection: 1.
Inspection of field welding operations shall be performed by special inspector.
2.
The special inspector shall inspect material, equipment, procedures, welds, and welder qualifications.
CLEANUP
3.04 A.
Remove rubbish, debris, and waste materials and legally dispose of off Project site. PROTECTION
3.05 A.
Protect Work of this section until Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION
•
•
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 STRUCTURAL METAL STUD FRAMING 05 4100-5
•
SECTION 05 5000 METAL FABRlCATIONS
PART 1- GENERAL 1.01
SUMMARY A.
B.
Section Includes: Metal fabrications: 1.
Steel pipe.
2.
Square and rectangular steel tubing.
3.
Pipe columns.
4.
Steel Gates.
5.
Miscellaneous fabrications, as indicated on the Drawings.
Related Requirements: I.
•
SUBMITTALS
1.02 A.
Shop Drawings: Submit Shop Drawings indicating provided materials, dimensions, anchoring detail, and details of termination or connection to adjacent construction. Indicate items that are purchased from a manufacturer and items that are shop fabricated. Indicate component parts requiring Project site fabrication or assembly.
B.
Product Data: Submit Product Data for manufactured items. Submit Product Data for primers and finishes.
c.
Material Samples: Submit Samples of primers and finishes on fabricated items.
D.
Installation Instructions: Submit installation instructions for manufactured items. QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.03 A.
B. 1.04
•
Division 01 -General Requirements.
Comply with the following as a minimum requirement: I.
Design, fabricate, and install miscellaneous metals in accordance with AISC Design, Fabrication, and Erection of Structural Steel for Buildings.
2.
AWS D-1.1 Code- Welding in Building Construction.
Coordinate installation of accessory items required for metal fabrications. DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
8736 CORWIN THEATERREPAIR&P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 METAL FABRICATIONS 05 5000-1
•
A.
Store miscellaneous metal items above grade on platforms, skids, or other required supports .
B.
Protect from corrosion or damage.
PART 2- PRODUCTS MATERIALS
2.01 A.
Structural Steel Shapes: ASTM A36.
B.
Steel Pipe:
C.
1.
Steel pipe for pipe columns and other structural purposes shall conform to ASTM A53, Type E or S, Grade B, as required.
2.
Steel pipe other than pipe furnished for structural purposes shall conform to ASTMA53.
Square and Rectangular Steel Tubing: 1.
•
D.
Cast Steel: ASTM A27, Grade 65-35.
E.
Steel Bolts: ASTM A307, Grade A, with bolt head and nut dimensions conforming to ANSI B 18.2.1.
F.
Rolled Steel Plates and Shapes: 1.
Shapes and plates shall conform to ASTM A36, except for plates to be bent or cold-formed.
2.
Plates to be bent or cold-formed shall conform to ASTM A283, Grade C.
G.
Chain: Chain shall be 4/0 double loop pattern coil chain.
H.
Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C1107. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for interior and exterior applications"Rapid set Cement". FABRICATION
2.02 A.
•
Steel tubing other than tubing furnished for structural purposes shall be hot or cold rolled carbon steel electric welded tubing.
General: 1.
For fabrication of Work exposed to view, provide only materials smooth and free of blemishes. Remove blemishes by grinding or by welding and grinding, before cleaning, treating, and installation of surface finishes including zinc coatings.
2.
Ease exposed edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch, unless otherwise indicated or specified.
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 METAL FABRICATIONS 05 5000-2
•
B.
C.
D.
• E.
•
Folding Steel Gates: Furnish and install folding steel gates, complete, where indicated. Gates shall be provided with hinged bottom track and shall allow for padlocking in both open and closed positions. Manufactured by Acorn Wire and Iron Works, American Woven Wire Corporation, King Wire Partitions, Inc., or equal. I.
Vertical bars shall consist of pairs of steel channels 3/4 inch by 3/8 inch by 1/8 inch minimum, approximately 6 inches on center with 5/8 inch by 3/16"inch steel lattice bars.
2.
Gate leaves extending more than 8 feet shall be provided with over head tracks and hangers. Gates shall have casters unless over-head tracks are furnished and shall be hot dip galvanized or powder coat finish.
Welding: I.
Weld connections unless otherwise indicated.
2.
Weld comers and seams continuously and in accordance with requirements of A WS Code. Welds shall be inspected as required in Section 05 1200: Structural Steel Framing.
3.
Grind exposed welds smooth and flush to match and blend with adjoining surfaces.
Galvanizing: I.
ASTM Al23, ASTM Al53, or ASTM A386, as applicable, hot dip with 2.0 ounces per square foot on actual surface and 1.8 ounces per square foot minimum on any specimen, and as specified herein.
2.
Galvanizing Repair Material: DRY GAL V as manufactured by the American Solder and Flux Company, Galvalloy, Galvion, or equal. Hot applied repair material, or anodic zinc- rich galvanizing repair paint conforming to Mil Spec 000-P-21035.
3.
Items to be galvanized shall be hot-dip galvanized in sections as large as possible.
Shop Finish: I.
Metal fabrications shall be provided with a coat of primer, except those indicated to be completed with exposed galvanized finish.
2.
Primers: a.
Universal Shop Primer: Fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal modified-alkyd primer complying with MPI#79 and compatible with Use primer containing pigments that make it easily topcoat. distinguishable from zinc-rich primer.
b.
Epoxy Zinc-Rich Primer: Complying with MPI#20 and compatible with topcoat.
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HJGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 METAL FABRICATIONS 05 5000-3
c.
•
Minimum dry film thickness of primer shall be 2.0 mils .
3.
Preparation for Primer Painting: Miscellaneous ferrous metal, except items specified galvanized, shall be thoroughly cleaned and prepared for painting, including removal of shipping oils or protective coatings, mill scale, grease, dirt and rust. Prepare in accordance with SSPC recommendations. Deliver to Project site primed or galvanized as indicated, and ready to receive Project site applied finishes.
4.
Galvanized Metal Work to receive Paint: Clean oil, grease and other foreign materials from surfaces. Apply vinyl wash pretreatment coating. Follow manufacturer's instructions for drying time, and then prime with one coat of metal primer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION INSTALLATION
3.01 A.
•
Gratings, Frames and Covers: 1.
Over areas indicated, provide steel gratings and grating frames as detailed. Frames shall have mitered and welded comers, and be fitted with anchors.
2.
Provide steel checkered plate covers and steel frames for sumps, grease traps, and sand traps, and other covers for access where indicated. Frames shall be provided with mitered and welded comers and be fitted with anchors as detailed. Cover shall be perforated. Each section of access cover shall be furnished with steel pull rings and tool operated fastening device. Screws to fasten covers shall be brass.
ADJUSTING
3.02 A.
Touch Up Damaged Surfaces: 1. 2
Shop Painted Finishes: Comply with SSPC-PA-1 for touch-up; apply with brush to produce a minimum 2.0 mil dry film thickness. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, connections and damaged areas. Repair galvanized finishes in accord with ASTM A 780.
CLEANUP
3.03 A.
Remove rubbish, debris, and waste materials and legally dispose of off the Project site. PROTECTION
3.04 A.
Protect the Work of this section until Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION
•
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/201 I METAL FABRICATIONS 05 5000-4
•
SECTION 06 2000 FINISH CARPENTRY
PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes: 1.
B.
1.02
I.
Division 01 - General Requirements.
2.
Section 09 2900: Gypsum Board.
Shop Drawings: Submit Shop Drawings of each item of finish carpentry and millwork, indicating materials, dimensions, construction, and anchorage details. QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.03 A.
B.
1.04
Comply with the following as a minimum requirement: I.
Douglas fir finish lumber shall be manufactured and graded in accordance with WCLIB- Standard Grading and Dressing Rule No. I 7.
2.
Redwood finish lumber shall be manufactured and graded in accordance with RIS - Standard Specifications for Grades of California Redwood Lumber.
3.
Hardwood finish lumber shall be manufactured and graded in accordance with NHLA - Rules for the Measurement and Inspection of Hardwood and Cypress Lumber.
4.
Softwood Plywood: Plywood shall comply with APA - Product Standard PS I. Plywood shall be grade marked by APA.
Finish lumber shall be kiln-dried according to recognized methods for the thickness and species. Lumber one inch thick or less shall be dried to an average moisture content of not more than I 5 percent. Lumber I- I /4 inches to 2 inches in thickness shall be dried to an average moisture content of not more than I 9 percent. DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A.
•
Related Requirements:
SUBMITTALS A.
•
Finish carpentry.
Materials shall be delivered to the Project site in undamaged condition, stored in fully covered, well ventilated areas, and protected from extreme changes in temperature and humidity .
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/20 II FINISH CARPENTRY 06 2000-1
•
B.
PART 2- PRODUCTS MATERIALS
2.01
•
Interior millwork and finish carpentry shall not be installed unless interior building temperature and humidity levels are within the ranges recommended by the manufacturer and/or recognized standards.
A.
Douglas Fir: Interior trim, solid lumber shelves, partitions, door frames and other concealed members of interior finish; A WI Economy Grade.
B.
Hardwood: Birch, maple firsts and seconds. 1.
Birch: A WI Custom Grade.
2.
Maple: A WI Custom Grade.
C.
Softwood Plywood: Except where otherwise specified, A WI Custom Grade, Douglas fir unless otherwise indicated.
D.
Hardwood Plywood: A WI Premium Grade, species as indicated.
E.
Redwood: Exterior millwork, except framing lumber, shall be clear heartwood redwood. Where installed in direct contact with earth or provided for exterior storage units, install Foundation Grade.
F.
Perforated Hardboard Panels: Panels shall be 1/4 inch thick tempered hardboard, SIS with 114 inch diameter holes spaced one inch on center. FABRICATION
2.02 A.
General: I.
The means of fastening various parts together· shall be concealed in finished Work. Work, which is curved, shall be fabricated from solid stock, or if veneered, shall be bent to a uniform radius.
PART 3- EXECUTION GENERAL
3.01
A.
•
Interior and exterior wood, millwork, blocking, and lumber shall be installed level, plumb, and true to line. Members shall be neatly and accurately scribed in place, maintaining full widths of end members, wherever possible. Trim shall be installed in full lengths, without piecing, except where use of single lengths is not required. Butt joints, if necessary, shall be beveled. Exterior angles shall be mitered, and interior angles of molding parts coped. Nails shall be set for putty. Grain and color of adjoining interior finish shall match adjacent finishes. Where Work specified in this section adjoins other Work, provide a neat tight joint.
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR& P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 FINISH CARPENTRY 06 2000-2
•
B.
Interior and exterior finish carpentry and other fixed wooden equipment having hammer marks or other visible damage will be deemed defective Work .
c.
Staff or brick moulds of exterior wood doorframes shall be attached to frames after frames have been set and caulked. Moulds shall be mitered at corners and coped to sills, accurately secured in place with finish nails, and nails set.
3.02
•
INSTALLATION A.
Install Work of this section as specified in the A WI Architectural Woodwork Standards.
B.
Wood shoe base shall be fitted and temporarily tacked in place until floor covering is installed. Provide and install corner fillets, same contour and materials as shoe base, in corners where shoe base is installed.
c.
Platform Front: Plywood at platform front and adjoining steps in Multi-Purpose Building shall be provided with face veneers of unselect birch. Trim and frames shall match face veneer of panels. Joints shall be V -shaped where indicated.
D.
Door Frames: Frames shall be installed plumb and true, solidly blocked, reinforced for butts and hardware, and shall be fastened to structural frame with 16d set finish nails at not more than 24 inches on centers. Nails securing exterior door and window frames shall be cement coated. Doorframes shall be dadoed together at the head.
E.
Sealing of Joints: Joints between exterior frames and adjoining surfaces shall be primed before sealing .
3.03
CLEANUP A.
3.04
Remove debris, rubbish and waste material and legally dispose of off the Project site. PROTECTION
A.
Protect the Work ofthis section until Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION
•
8736 CORWIN TiffiATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 FINlSH CARPENTRY 06 2000-3
111001
•
SECTION 06 4000 ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK PART 1 -GENERAL SUMMARY
1.01 A.
Section Includes: 1.
B.
A.
1.
Division 0 l - General Requirements.
2.
Section 06 2000: Finish Carpentry.
3.
Section 09 9000: Painting and Coating.
"Sustainably managed" is defined as "forests that are being managed through a professionally administered forestry management plan in which timber growth equals or exceeds harvesting rates in both quantity and quality, protecting rivers and streams from degradation, minimizing damage to the forest when harvesting and promoting biodiversity". SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
1.03 A.
Design Requirements: Provide wood products from certified sustainably harvested sources. SUBMITTALS
1.04
•
Related Requirements:
DEFINITIONS
1.02
•
Architectural woodwork, casework, trim, hardware, countertops, and shelving as indicated on Drawings.
A.
Shop Drawings: Submit Shop Drawings of casework indicating materials and hardware, details of construction, dimensions, methods of fastening and installation details. Shop Drawings shall bear a A WI Certified Compliance Label indicating that Shop Drawings fully meet requirements of A WI Architectural Woodwork Standards (A WS) grade specified. Shop Drawings shall indicate grounds, backing, blocking, sleepers and other items required for installation of casework, which are to be provided and installed as part of the Work.
B.
Certificates: Provide A WI Certified Compliance Certificate certifying that materials, fabrication and installation will comply with the specified requirements .
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/0112011 ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06 4000-1
111001
•
C.
Material Samples: Submit 2-inch by 3-inch plastic laminate and solid surfaces color Samples of manufacturer's entire color range .
D.
Submit manufacturer's product data for adhesives and finishes. Indicate VOC limits of the product. Submit MSDS highlighting VOC limits.
E.
Forest Stewardship Council (FSC): Provide letter of certification signed by lumber supplier. Indicate compliance with FSC "Principles for Natural Forest Management" and identify certifying organization.
F.
Closeout Submittals: Provide a A WI Certified Compliance Certificate for Installation. QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.05
•
A.
Comply with AWl Architectural Woodwork Standards (AWS), latest edition, published jointly by the Architectural Woodwork Institute, the Architectural Woodwork Manufacturer's Association of Canada, and the Woodwork Institute of California, grades as specified herein.
B.
Each elevation of casework shall bear A WI Certified Compliance Label indicating that casework fully meets requirements of A WI grade specified.
C.
Each plastic laminate countertop shall bear A WI Certified Compliance Label indicating tops fully meet requirements of A WI grade specified.
D.
Mock-ups: When required by the Architect, submit a full-scale base cabinet, countertop, and wall-hung cabinet, illustrating joinery and plastic laminate finish. Base cabinet shall incorporate a drawer, an adjustable shelf, and a door. Wall-hung cabinet shall incorporate two doors, one adjustable shelf and finished end, including required hardware. DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
1.06 A.
Materials shall be delivered to the Project site in undamaged condition, stored in fully covered, well ventilated areas, and protected from extreme changes in humidity and temperature. Refer to A WI Architectural Woodwork Standards for recommended care and storage.
B.
In event of damage immediately furnish necessary repairs or replacements. PROJECT CONDITIONS
1.07 A.
•
Store indoors, in ventilated areas with constant but mm1mum temperature of 60 degrees F. and maximum relative humidity of 25 percent to 55 percent. At least seven days before installation, maintain temperature of 70 degrees F. and relative humidity of 50 percent to 55 percent. Acclimatize materials to the installation temperature and humidity for at least 72 hours prior to installation. Maintain conditions until Substantial Completion .
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HJGH SCHOOL
10/0112011 ARCHJTECTURAL WOODWORK 06 4000-2
Ill 001
•
PART 2- PRODUCTS MATERIALS
2.01 A.
•
B.
Plastic Laminate Faced Cabinets: 1.
Plastic laminate: High pressure plastic laminate conforming to NEMA standard LD-3; 0.050 inches at horizontal surfaces, 0.028 inches at exposed vertical surfaces and edge bands, and 0.042 inch minimum for post-formed countertops.
2.
Particle Board Core Material: 45 lb. density, conforming to ANSI A208.1, Table 1, Grade l-M-2.
3.
Solid Lumber: Solid lumber for exposed members, drawers, trays and special details shall be Clear birch or maple.
b.
Unexposed solid lumber for concealed webs or structural members shall be of Douglas Fir., alder or birch.
4.
Softwood Plywood: Rotary cut exterior type A-C grade softwood plywood complying with PS 1.
5.
Hardboard: Factory finished pressure sealed hardboard conforming to the requirements of PS 58. Oil tempered hardboard shall conform to CS 251.
6.
Cabinet Liner: Semi-exposed surfaces shall be finished with 0.020 inch highpressure laminate cabinet liner, conforming to NEMA Standard LD-3.
7.
Edge Banding: a.
T-type extruded tenite-butyrate 1/16 inch m1mmum thickness, with serrated leg 3/8 inch in length. Use only when matching existing.
b.
0.028 inch minimum thickness plastic laminate.
8.
Adhesive: Type II water-resistant, rigid type glue of formula conforming to PS 51.
9.
Sealer: Thompson Water SeallOl, Watco Oil, Zinsser, or equal.
10.
Base: Cover toe spaces with typical wall base unless otherwise indicated.
Wood Casework: 1.
•
a.
Sheets:
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/0112011 ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06 4000-3
111001
• C.
D.
•
2.02
a.
Medium Density Fiberboard (MDF): ANSI A208.2 .
b.
Medium Density Overlay (MDO): APA PS-1.
c.
Hardwood Plywood: ANSI/HPV A- HP-I.
Countertops: I.
3/4 inch l-M-2 grade particleboard, ANSI A208.I.
2.
Medium Density Fiberboard (MDF): ANSI A208.2.
Hardware: I.
Shelf Standards and Brackets: K & V No. 255 x 256, line bored holes for pins as approved by A WI Standards Stanley No. 798 x 799, steel zinc plated, or equal.
2.
Hanger Rods: I-1/I6 inches minimum diameter metal tubing, aluminum or stainless steel clad, KV660; heavy wall steel tubing KV770, Stanley, or equal.
3.
Hanger Rod Flanges: KV757, or flanges KV734, KV735; Ronther Reiss R4455;orequal.
4.
Hardware Finish: With exception of finish hardware items which have finishes specified, hardware shall be furnished with dull chrome US 26D or dull stainless steel US 32D finish.
FABRICATION A.
Plastic Laminated Casework: Construction of plastic laminated casework shall conform to the material and construction requirements for A WI Architectural Woodwork Standards Custom grade flush overlay construction, except, modified as follows: I.
Panels and Doors: All components shall be 3 ply laminate construction consisting of plastic laminate or cabinet liner with particle board and a balancing sheet, bonded together' under pressure with adhesive. Total nominal thickness of panels and doors shall be 0. 75 inch unless otherwise indicated.
2.
Exposed surfaces shall be High Pressure Decorative Laminate. a.
3.
•
Edge Band: PVC I mm. for cabinet body and 3 mm. at doors and drawer fronts.
Exposed bottoms of wall-hung cabinets shall be furnished with plastic laminate finish .
8736 CORWINTI-IEATERREPAIR& P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
I 0/01/20 II ARCillTECTURAL WOODWORK 06 4000-4
111001
•
•
•
4.
Exposed Interiors: Interior surfaces of open cabinets shall be laminated to match exteriors. Cabinets with glass doors shall use cabinet liner .
5.
Semi-exposed Surfaces: Shall be cabinet liner and edges of panels shall be edge banded per 2.01 A.
6.
Webs: Stiles, rails and muntins of web frame shall be tongue and grooved at joints and glued. Top and bottom rails shall be continuous. Use of 8 mm wooden dowels, screws or biscuits shall be in accordance with A WI Standards.
7.
Cabinet bases may be integral or separate. Bases shall be 3/4 inch thick plywood securely jointed at four corners to a supporting block I 'lS-inch thick.
8.
Ends: Cabinet ends shall be minimum 3/4 inch thick, lock-jointed, doweled, or screwed to webs or top and bottom of the cabinet. All joints shall be securely glued.
9.
Backs shall be 114 inch thick plywood or 114 inch thick particle board, and shall be plowed into sides and top (except countertops) glued and nailed on 4 inch centers. Back shall be braced with horizontal 3/4 inch by 3 'lS-inch backing strips on 3 feet centers maximum. Cabinets with exposed finish backs shall have 3/4 inch backs of laminate construction. Where exposed finished cabinet end and back form an external corner, plastic laminates shall meet at corner .
l 0.
Adjustable shelving shall be 3/4 inch thickness particleboard for spans up to 25 inches and one inch thickness for spans over 25 inches up to 34 inches. Adjustable shelving over 34 inches in span shall be one inch thick plywood core with 0.020 inch cabinet liner both sides. Shelving hardware shall be adjustable to one inch centers. Faces of shelving shall be finished with 0.020 inch thickness cabinet liner both sides.
11.
Back Priming: Seal unfinished materials installed for backs, bases, self-edge backing, stripping and other concealed portions with a water-repellent sealer.
12.
Banding: a.
Exposed edges of interior and exterior laminates shall be edge banded.
b.
Edge banding shall be accurately fitted. Where edge bandjoins plastic surfaces, there shall be no open spaces, voids, or chipping of plastic laminate surface.
c.
Exposed cabinet surfaces shall be flush, and any protruding edges of banding shall be machined or trimmed to provide a flat smooth corner at intersection of banding and adjoining surfaces. Plastic laminate edge banding shall be installed on tops, webs, bottoms, ends, and inside
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR& P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/0112011 ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06 4000-5
111001
•
partitions. T banding may only be installed on drawer fronts and door edges and when required to match existing . B.
C.
•
•
Wood Casework: Manufacture in accordance with A WI Architectural Woodwork Standards, Custom Grade, except, modified as follows: 1.
Casework bodies shall be 3/4 inch thick.
2.
Exposed surfaces for transparent finish shall be plain sliced select white birch.
3.
Exposed Interiors: surfaces at the interiors of open cabinets and cabinets with glass doors shall be of the same species and grade as exposed portions.
4.
Semi-exposed surfaces shall be natural birch.
5.
Edge banding shall be wood edge bands of same species as adjacent exposed faces.
6.
Cabinet doors shall be particleboard core a minimum of 3/4 inch thickness, unless otherwise noted. Interior faces of cabinet doors shall be same species and grade as exposed surfaces. Cabinet doors shall be flush overlay.
Countertops: I.
Plastic Laminate Tops: Each plastic laminate countertop shall bear the A WI Certified Compliance Label. a.
Laminated plastic countertops shall be self-edged, except that plastic countertops containing sink cutouts shall have a no-drip tilt-front edge. Edge shall rise 1/8 inch above counter surface and back and return splashes shall be 6 inches high measured from exposed countertop surface, unless otherwise indicated.
b.
Cove and roll front sticking, for plastic laminate back-up, shall be kiln dried clear sugar pine glued to core material. Cove sticking shall be secured in each direction with 2 Vl-inch long wood screws, 3 inches from each end and I 0 inches on center.
c.
Square butt splashes, including end splashes tops shall be Deck Mount. Splashes shall be end applied and be set in mastic and secured to top with screws 8 inches on centers. Splash edges shall be self-edged and scribed to wall.
d.
Joints shall be splined and fastened with screw clip fasteners on at least 8 inch centers. Water resisting mastic or glue shall be applied in joints. Joints shall not occur at sink cutouts. Sink cutouts shall be sealed .
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR& P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
I 0/0 l/20 II ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06 4000-6
111001
• A.
•
Core material for counters and splashes shall be 3/4 inch thick l-M-2 grade particleboard .
f.
Metal sink moldings shall be stainless steel, Hudee, Kin trim T-Type, Chromedge Sink-Lok, or equal, with bolts and lugs.
g.
Mastic: Metal trim shall have a continuous layer of mastic in voids between metal and plywood and sink. Counter cutout edge shall be waterproofed to prevent delamination of countertop. Metal trim shall be applied over finished plastic surfaces without kerfing or routing of molding.
h.
Installation of plastic laminate shall be in accordance with published specifications and recommended practices of the plastic laminate manufacturer.
FINISHING
2.03
•
e.
Wood casework and wood components of laminated plastic casework shall be factory finished. Exposed surfaces shall be finished with one coat of lacquer sealer and 2 coats of finish lacquer. Unexposed materials such as backs, webs, back of tops, and the like, shall be sealed with one oil base prime coat. Semi-exposed wood surfaces such as drawers shall be finished with one coat of sanding sealer and one coat of clear gloss lacquer .
PART 3- EXECUTION INSTALLATION
3.01 A.
Install Work of this section as specified m the A WI Architectural Woodwork Standards.
B.
Cabinets: Install cabinets level, plumb, and secure to walls. Exposed screws shall have finish washers.
C.
End Panels and Fillers: Furnish to match exposed surfaces and accurately scribe to walls and neatly and securely fit to cabinets.
D.
Completion: Upon completion of installation, cabinets including drawers and shelves shall be cleaned. Doors and drawers shall operate easily and freely.
E.
Scribe plastic laminated cabinets to walls. Installation of surface-applied moldings is not permitted.
F.
Coordinate sink and penetration locations with 22 I 000 Plumbing.
G.
Install solid surface countertops per A WI custom grade .
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/0112011 ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06 4000-7
111001
•
3.02
CLEAN UP
A.
Remove debris, rubbish and waste material and legally dispose of off the Project site. PROTECTION
3.03 A.
Protect the Work of this section until Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION
•
•
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR& P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06 4000-8
SECTION 07 1800
•
LATICRETE TILE WATERPROOFING
PART 1- GENERAL SUMMARY
1.01 A.
Section Includes: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
B.
Related Requirements: 1.
A. B. C. D.
E. F.
G.
H.
Submit shop drawings and manufacturers' product data under provisions of Section 01 3300 Submit samples of each type/style/finish/size/color of ceramic tile, mosaic, paver, trim unit or threshold under provisions of Section 01 3300 . Submit manufacturers' installation instructions under provisions of Section 01 3300. Submit manufacturer's certification under provisions of Section 01 3300 that the materials supplied conform to ANSI A 13 7.1. Submit proof of warranty. Submit sample of installation system demonstrating compatibility /functional relationships between adhesives, mortars, grouts and other components under provision of Section 01 3300. Submit proof from tile or stone manufacturer or supplier verifying suitability of tile or stone for specific application and use; including dimensional stability, water absorption, freeze/thaw resistance (if applicable), resistance to thermal cycling, and other characteristics that the may project may require. These characteristics must be reviewed and approved by the project design professional(s). Submit list from manufacturer of installation system/adhesive/mortar/grout identifying a minimum of three (3) similar projects, each with a minimum often (10) years service. For alternate materials, at least thirty (30) days before bid date submit independent laboratory test results confirming compliance with specifications listed in Part 2 - Products.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.03 A.
•
Division 0 1 - General Requirements.
SUBMITTALS
1.02
•
Quarry tile pavers and trim units (glazed or unglazed). Installation Products; adhesives, mortars, grouts and sealants. Waterproofing membranes for ceramic tile work. Anti-fracture membranes for ceramic tile work. Sound control underlayments. Thresholds, trim, cementitious backer units and other accessories specified herein.
Qualifications oflnstaller: The Work of this section shall be installed by a firm which has been in the business of installing similar materials for at least five consecutive years; and can
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 LA TIC RETE TILE WATERPROOFING 07 1800-1
show evidence of satisfactory completion of five projects of similar size and scope. Installer shall have applicators trained and approved by manufacturer for performing this Work. •
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
1.04 A.
B. C.
D. 1.05
C.
•
Provide ventilation and protection of environment as recommended by manufacturer. Prevent carbon dioxide damage to ceramic tile, mosaics, pavers, trim, thresholds, as well as adhesives, mortars, grouts and other installation materials, by venting temporary heaters to the exterior. Maintain ambient temperatures not less than 50°F (1 0°C) or more than 100°F (38°C) during installation and for a minimum of seven (7) days after completion. Setting of portland cement is retarded by low temperatures. Protect work for extended period of time and from damage by other trades. Installation with latex portland cement mortars requires substrate, ambient and material temperatures at least 37°F (3°C). There should be no ice in slab. Freezing after installation will not damage latex portland cement mortars. Protect portland cement based mortars and grouts from direct sunlight, radiant heat, forced ventilation (heat & cold) and drafts until cured to prevent premature evaporation of moisture. Epoxy mortars and grouts require surface temperatures between 60°F ( l6°C) and 90°F (32°C) at time of installation. It is the General Contractor's responsibility to maintain temperature control.
SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. B.
1.07
Coordinate installation of tile work with related work. Proceed with tile work only after curbs, vents, drains, piping, and other projections through substrate have been installed and when substrate construction and framing of openings have been completed. WARRANTY
A.
•
Store portland cement mortars and grouts in a dry location.
PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS A. B.
1.06
Acceptance at Site: deliver and store packaged materials in original containers with seals unbroken and labels, including grade seal, intact until time of use, in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Store ceramic tile and installation system materials in a dry location; handle in a manner to prevent chipping, breakage, and contamination. Protect latex additives, organic adhesives, epoxy adhesives and sealants from freezing or overheating in accordance with manufacturer's instructions; store at room temperature when possible.
Manufacturer: For exterior facades over steel or wood framing, the manufacturer of adhesives, mortars, grouts and other installation materials shall provide a written fifteen (15) year warranty, which covers replacement ofLATICRETE products only -reference LA TICRETE Warranty Data Sheet 230.15 for complete details and requirements .
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR& P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/201 I LA TICRETE TILE WATERPROOFING 07 1800-2
B. •
1.08
MAINTENANCE A.
1.09
Installer: two year installation/application warranty.
Submit maintenance data under provisions of Section 01 73 00. Include cleaning methods, cleaning solutions recommended, stain removal methods, as well as polishes and waxes recommended.
EXTRA MATERIALS STOCK B.
Upon completion of the work ofthis Section, deliver to the Owner 2% minimum additional tile and trim shape of each type, color, pattern and size used in the Work, as well as extra stock of adhesives, mortars, grouts and other installation materials for the Owner's use in replacement and maintenance. Extra stock is to be from same production run or batch as original tile and installation materials.
PART 2- PRODUCTS GENERAL
2.01 A.
MANUFACTURERS
2.02
•
Furnish the products of only one manufacturer unless otherwise required, sealant colors as selected to match the adjoining surfaces.
A.
LATICRETE International, Inc., 1 Laticrete Park North, Bethany, CT 06524-3423 USA Phone 800-243-4 788, (203) 393-0010 [email protected]; www.laticrete.com; www.laticrete.com/green MATERIALS- TILE INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES
2.03 A.
Waterproofing Membrane: LATICRETE® Hydro Ban'E'** as manufactured by LATICRETE International, Inc. MATERIALS- TILE INSTALLATION MATERIALS
2.04 A. B.
C.
Latex Portland Cement Thin Bed Mortar: LATICRETE 254 Platinum** as manufactured by LATICRETE International, Inc. Expansion and Control Joint Sealant: LATICRETE Latasil™ as manufactured for LATICRETE International, Inc. RoofDeck: LATICRETE Plaza & Deck System as manufactured by LATICRETE International, Inc.
PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01
SUBSTRATE EXAMINATION A.
•
Verify that surfaces to be covered with ceramic tile, mosaics, pavers, brick, masonry veneer, stone, trim or waterproofing are:
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 LATICRETE TILE WATERPROOFING 07 1800-3
•
•
•
1.
Sound, rigid and conform to good design/engineering practices;
2.
Systems, including the framing system and panels, over which tile or stone will be installed shall be in conformance with the International Residential Code (IRC) for residential applications, the International Building Code (IBC) for commercial applications, or applicable building codes. The project design should include the intended use and necessary allowances for the expected live load, concentrated load, impact load, and dead load including the weight of the finish and installation materials. In addition to deflection considerations, above-ground installations are inherently more susceptible to vibration. Consult grout, mortar, and membrane manufacturer to determine appropriate installation materials for above-ground installations. A crack isolation membrane and higher quality setting materials can increase the performance capabilities of above-ground applications. However, the upgraded materials cannot mitigate structural deficiencies including floors not meeting code requirements and/or over loading or other abuse of the installation in excess of design parameters. Maximum allowable floor member live load and concentrated load deflection shall not exceed L/360 for tile, or, L/480 for stone, where L is the clear span length of the supporting member per applicable building code. For exterior vertical installations over framed construction, the substrate deflection under all live, dead, wind, and impact loads, including concentrated loads, must not exceed L/600 where L=span length (except where local building codes specify more stringent deflection requirements);
3.
The actual weight of materials and construction assemblies, including concentrated dead loads of fixed service and other equipment, shall be utilized as prescribed by state and local building codes to estimate dead loads for the purpose of structural design;
4.
For thin-bed ceramic tile installations when a cementitious bonding material will be used, including medium bed mortar: maximum allowable variation in the tile substrate- for tiles with edges shorter than 15" (3 75mm), maximum allowable variation is 1/4" in 10' (6mm in 3m) from the required plane, with no more than 1116" variation in 12" ( 1. 5mm variation in 3OOmm) when measured from the high points in the surface. For tiles with at least one edge 15" (375mm) in length, maximum allowable variation is 1/8" in 10' (3mm in 3m) from the required plane, with no more than 1116" variation in 24" (1.5mm variation in 600mm) when measured from the high points in the surface. For modular substrate units, such as exterior glue plywood panels or adjacent concrete masonry units, adjacent edges cannot exceed 1/32" (0.8mm) difference in height. Should the architect/designer require a more stringent finish tolerance (e.g. 1/8" in 10' [3mm in 3m]), the subsurface specification must reflect that tolerance, or the tile specification must include a specific and separate requirement to bring the subsurface tolerance into compliance with the desired tolerance. For thick bed (mortar bed) ceramic and stone tile installations and self-leveling methods: maximum allowable variation in the installation substrate to be W' in 10' (6mm in 3m);
8736 COR WIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 LA TIC RETE TILE WATERPROOFING 07 1800-4
•
• 3.02
5.
Lateral and other bracing must be constructed as prescribed by code and/or engineered wood manufacturers' literature to achieve specified design deflection values;
6.
Clean and free from dust, dirt, oil, grease, sealers, curing compounds, laitance, efflorescence, form oil, loose plaster, paint, and scale;
7.
Not leveled with gypsum or asphalt based compounds; For substrates scheduled to receive a waterproofing and/or crack isolation membrane, maximum amount of moisture in the concrete/mortar bed substrate should not exceed 5 lbs./1 ,000 ft2 I 24 hours (283 f.Lg/s•m 2) per ASTM F1869 or 75% relative humidity as measured with moisture probes per ASTM F2170. Consult with finish materials manufacturer to determine the maximum allowable moisture content for substrates under their finished material.
8.
Dry as per American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) D4263 "Standard Test for Determining Moisture in Concrete by the Plastic Sheet Method."
B.
Concrete surfaces shall also be: 1. Cured a minimum of 28 days at 70°F (21 °C), including an initial seven (7) day period of wet curing; 2. Wood float finished, or better, if the installation is to be done by the thin bed method;
C.
Advise General Contractor and Architect of any surface or substrate conditions requiring correction before tile work commences. Beginning of work constitutes acceptance of substrate or surface conditions.
SURFACE PREPARATION
A. CEMENTITIOUS BACKER UNIT (CBU) OVER STEEL FRAMING 1. All designs, specifications and construction practices shall be in accordance with industry standards. Refer to latest editions of: American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI) "Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members" [www.steel.org]; Steel Stud Manufacturers Association (SSMA) "Product Technical Information" and "ICBO Evaluation Service, Inc. Report ER-4943P" [www.ssma.com]; Metal Lath/Steel Framing Association "Steel Framing Systems Manual." 2. Prior to commencing work, installer must submit to Architect/Structural Engineer for approval, shop drawings showing wall/fa9ade construction and attachment details. All attachments must be designed to prevent transfer of building or structural movement to the wall/fa9ade.
•
3. Construct all framing with galvanized or other rust resistant steel studs and channels; minimum requirements:
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 LATICRETE TILE WATERPROOFING 07 1800-5
Stud Gauge: 16 gauge (1.5mm); Stud Steel: conforming to ASTM A570 -latest edition with a minimum yield point of 50 ksi; Stud Spacing: not to exceed 16" (400mm) on center; Stud Width: 6" (150mm); Horizontal Bridging: Not to exceed 4' (1.2m) on center; 16 gauge CR channel typical or as specified by structural engineer.
•
4. Studs shall be seated squarely in the channel tracks with the stud web and flange abutting the track web, plumbed or aligned, and securely attached to the flanges or web of both the upper and lower tracks by welding. Similarly connect horizontal bridging/purlins and anti-racking diagonal bracing as determined by structural engineer. Grind welds smooth and paint with rust inhibiting paint. Finished frame and components must be properly aligned, square and true. 5. Provide adequate support of framing elements during erection to prevent racking, twisting or bowing. Lay out the CBU/Fiber Cement Underlayment installation so all board edges are supported by metal framing (studs vertically and purlins horizontally). Cut/fit the CBU and add additional framing elements as required to support board edges. Stagger boards in courses to prevent continuous vertical joints and allow 1/s-3/16" (3 - 5mm) between sheets. 6. Fasten the CBU/Fiber Cement Underlayment with 7/8" (22mm) minimum length, non-rusting, self-imbedding screws for metal studs (BUILDEX° Catalog item 10-24 17/16 Wafer T3Z or equivalent). Fasten the boards every 6" (150mm) at the edges and every 8" (200mm) in the field. Stagger placement of screws at seams. Place screws no less than %" (9mm), and no more than 1" (25mm), from board edges .
•
7. Tape all the board joints with the alkali resistant 2" (50mm) wide reinforcing mesh provided by the CBU/Fiber Cement Underlayment manufacturer imbedded in the same mortar used to install the ceramic tile, mosaic, pavers, brick or stone. 8. Compliance with design criteria and state and local building codes must approved and certified by a qualified structural engineer. Use more stringent design criteria when necessary to comply with state and local building code stiffness requirements for thin veneers. 3.03
INSTALLATION- TILE, BRICK, MASONRY VENEER, & STONE
A. General: Install in accordance with current versions of American National Standards Institute, Inc. (ANSI) "A1 08 American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile" and TCNA "Handbook for Ceramic, Glass, and Stone Tile Installation" Cut and fit ceramic tile, glass tile, masonry veneer, brick or stone neatly around comers, fittings, and obstructions. Perimeter pieces to be minimum half tile, brick or stone. Chipped, cracked, split pieces and edges are not acceptable. Make joints even, straight, plumb and ofuniform width to tolerance+/- 1/16" over 8' (1.5mm in 2.4m). Install divider strips at junction of flooring and dissimilar materials. When glass tile is used, consult glass tile manufacturer for membrane options and recommendations. Where installation will be subjected to freeze/thaw cycles, snow and ice accumulation, and/or snow melting chemicals, degradation can occur over time .
•
8736 COR WIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
I 0/01120 II LATICRETE TILE WATERPROOFING 07 1800-6
B. Waterproofing:
•
•
•
1.
Install the waterproofing membrane in compliance with current revisions of ANSI Al08.1 (2.7 Waterproofing) and ANSI A108.13. Review the installation and plan the application sequence. Pre-cut LATICRETE® Waterproofing/Anti-Fracture Fabric (if required), allowing 2" (50mm) for overlap at ends and sides to fit the areas as required. Roll up the pieces for easy handling and placement. Shake or stir LATICRETE Hydro Ban® before using.
2.
Pre-Treat Cracks and Joints - Fill all substrate cracks, cold joints and control joints to a smooth finish using a LA TICRETE latex-fortified thin-set. Alternatively, a liberal coat* ofLATICRETE Hydro Ban applied with a paint brush or trowel may be used to fill in non-structural joints and cracks. Apply a liberal coat* of LATICRETE Hydro Ban approximately 8" (200mm) wide over substrate cracks, cold joints, and control joints using a paint brush or heavy napped paint roller.
3.
Pre-Treat Coves and Floor/Wall Intersections - Fill all substrate coves and floor/wall transitions to a smooth finish and changes in plane using a LATICRETE® latex-fortified thin-set. Alternatively, a liberal coat* of LATICRETE Hydro Ban® applied with a paint brush or trowel may be used to fill in cove joints and floor/wall transitions <118" (3mm) in width. Apply a liberal coat* ofLATICRETE Hydro Ban™ approximately 8" (200mm) wide over substrate cracks, cold joints, and control joints using a paint brush or heavy napped paint roller.
4.
Pre-Treat Penetrations - Allow for a minimum 1/8" (3mm) space between drains, pipes, lights, or other penetrations and surrounding ceramic tile, stone or brick. Pack any gaps around pipes, lights or other penetrations with a LA TICRETE latexfortified thin-set. Apply a liberal coat* ofLATICRETE Hydro Ban around penetration opening. Cover the first coat with a second liberal coat* of LATICRETE Hydro Ban. Bring LATICRETE Hydro Ban up to level of tile or stone. When LATICRETE Hydro Ban has dried to the touch seal with LA TICRETE Latasil.
5.
Main Application - Allow any pre-treated areas to dry to the touch. Apply a liberal coat* ofLATICRETE Hydro Ban with a paint brush or heavy napped roller over substrate including pre-treated areas and allow to dry to the touch. Install another liberal coat* ofLATICRETE Hydro Ban over the first coat. Let the top coat of LATICRETE Hydro Ban dry to the touch approximately 1-2 hours at 70°F (21 °C) and 50% RH. When the top coat has dried to the touch inspect the surface for pinholes, voids, thin spots or other defects. LATICRETE Hydro Ban will dry to an olive green color when fully cured. Use additional LATICRETE Hydro Ban to seal any defects.
6.
Movement Joints- Apply a liberal coat* ofLATICRETE Hydro Ban, approximately 8" (200mm) wide over the areas. Then embed and loop the 6"
8736 COR WIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O. T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/201 I LA TIC RETE TILE WATERPROOFING 07 1800-7
(150mm) wide LATICRETE Waterproofing/Anti-Fracture Fabric and allow the LA TICRETE Hydro Ban liquid to bleed through. Immediately apply a second coat ofLATICRETE Hydro Ban .
•
•
a.
*Dry coat thickness is 20- 30 mil (0.02- 0.03" or 0.5- 0.8mm); consumption per coat is approximately 0.01 gal/ft2 (approx. 0.4 L/m2); coverage is approximately 100 ft 2 /gal (approx. 2.5 m2/ L). LATICRETE Waterproofing/Anti-Fracture Fabric can be used to pre-treat cracks, joints, curves, comers, drains, and penetrations with LA TICRETE Hydro Ban. Use a wet film gauge to determine thickness of membrane coat.
7.
Protection- Provide protection for newly installed membrane, even if covered with a thin-bed ceramic tile, stone, masonry veneer, or brick installation against exposure to rain or other water for a minimum of 2 hours after final cure at 70°F (21 °C) and 50% RH. For temperatures between 45°F and 69°F (7°C to 21 °C) allow a minimum 24 hour cure period.
8.
Flood Testing- Allow membrane to cure fully before flood testing, typically a minimum 2 hours after final cure at 70°F (21 °C) and 50% RH. Cold conditions will require a longer curing time. For temperatures between 50°F and 69°F (10°C to 21 °C) allow a minimum 24 hour cure period prior to flood testing. Please refer to LATICRETE TDS 169 "Flood Testing Procedures", available at www.laticrete.com for flood testing requirements and procedures.
C. Thin Bed Method: Install latex portland cement mortar in compliance with current revisions of ANSI A108.02 (3.11), A108.1B and ANSI A108.5. Use the appropriate trowel notch size to ensure proper bedding of the tile, brick or stone selected. Work the latex portland cement mortar into good contact with the substrate and comb with notched side oftrowel. Spread only as much latex portland cement mortar as can be covered while the mortar surface is still wet and tacky. When installing large format (>8" x 8"/200mm x 200mm) tile/stone, rib/button/lug back tiles, pavers or sheet mounted ceramics/mosaics, spread latex portland cement mortar onto the back of (i.e. 'back-butter') each piece/sheet in addition to trowelling latex portland cement mortar over the substrate. Beat each piece/sheet into the latex portland cement mortar with a beating block or rubber mallet to insure full bedding and flatness. Allow installation to set until firm. Clean excess latex portland cement mortar from tile or stone face and joints between pieces. D. Grouting or Pointing:
•
1. Polymer Fortified Cement Grout (ANSI A118. 7): Allow ceramic tile, mosaics, pavers, brick or stone installation to cure a minimum of 24 hours @ 70° F (21 °C). D Verify grout joints are free of dirt, debris or tile spacers. Sponge or wipe dust/dirt off veneer face and remove any water standing in joints. Apply grout release to face of absorptive, abrasive, non-slip or rough textured ceramic tile, pavers, bricks, or trim units that are not hot paraffin coated to facilitate cleaning. Surface temperature must be between 40-90° F (4-32°C). Pour approximately 64 oz. (1.9 L) of clean, potable water into a clean mixing container. Add a 25 lb. (11.3 kg) bag ofLATICRETE
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 LATICRETE TILE WATERPROOFING 07 1800-8
•
•
•
PermaColor™ Grout to the container while mixing. Mix by hand or with a slow speed mixer to a smooth, stiff consistency. Install latex fortified cement grout in compliance with current revisions of ANSI A108.1A (7.0 Grouting oftile), ANSI A108.02 (4.5 Cleaning tile) and ANSI A108.10 . Dampen dry surfaces with clean water. Spread using a sharp edged, hard rubber float and work grout into joints. Using diagonal (at 45° angle to direction of grout line) strokes, pack joints full and free of voids/pits. Hold float face at a 90° angle to grouted surface and use float edge to "squeegee" off excess grout, stroking diagonally to reduce pulling grout out of filled joints. Initial cleaning can begin as soon as grout has become firm, typically 15-20 minutes after grouting@ 70° F (21 °C). Higher temperatures may require faster time to initial cleaning; wider joints or lower temperatures may require a longer time to initial cleaning. Begin initial cleaning by lightly dampening the entire grouted area with a damp sponge. Then wash clean the entire area with a damp (not wet) sponge. Drag a clean towel, dampened with water, or wipe a clean, dampened sponge, diagonally over the veneer face to remove any grout haze left after "squeegeeing." Rinse towel/sponge frequently and change rinse water at least every 200 ft 2 (19m 2). Repeat this cleaning sequence again if grout haze is still present. Allow grout joints to become firm. Buff surface of grout with clean coarse cloth. Inspect joint for pinholes/voids and repair them with freshly mixed grout. Within 24 hours, check for remaining haze and remove it with warm soapy water and a nylon scrubbing pad, using a circular motion, to lightly scrub surfaces and dissolve haze/film. Do not use acid cleaners on latex portland cement grout less than 10 days old. a.
latex-portland cement sanded floor grout for joint widths 2:1/16"(1.5mm) and ::::;1/2" (12mm);
b.
latex-portland cement unsanded grout for soft glazed tiles and soft/polished stone with joints widths ::::;1/8" (3mm) .
E. Expansion and Control Joints: Provide control or expansion joints as located in contract drawings and in full conformity, especially in width and depth, with architectural details. 1.
Substrate joints must carry through, full width, to surface of tile, brick, masonry veneer; or stone.
2.
Install expansion joints in tile, brick, masonry veneer, or stone work over construction/cold joints or control joints in substrates.
3.
Install expansion joints where tile, brick, masonry veneer, or stone abut restraining surfaces (such as perimeter walls, curbs, columns), changes in plane and comers.
4.
Joint width and spacing depends on application- follow TCNA "Handbook for Ceramic, Glass, and Stone Tile Installation" Detail "EJ-171 Expansion Joints" or consult sealant manufacturer for recommendation based on project parameters.
5.
Joint width: 2: Ys" (3mm) and::::; 1" (25mm).
6.
Joint width: depth
~2:1
but joint depth must be 2: Ys'' (3mm) and::::; W' (12mm).
8736 CORWINTHEATER REPAIR& P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/0112011 LA TIC RETE TILE WATERPROOFING 07 1800-9
7.
•
Layout (field defined by joints): 1:1 length: width is optimum but must be~ 2:1. Remove all contaminants and foreign material from joint spaces/surfaces, such as dirt, dust, oil, water, frost, setting/grouting materials, sealers and old sealant/backer. Use LATICRETE Latasil™ 9118 Primer for underwater and permanent wet area applications, or for porous stone (e.g. limestone, sandstone etc ... ) installations. Install appropriate Backing Material (e.g. closed cell backer rod) based on expansion joint design and as specified in §07 92 00. Apply masking tape to face of tile, brick or stone veneer. Use caulking gun, or other applicator, to completely fill joints with sealant. Within 5-10 minutes of filling joint, 'tool' sealant surface to a smooth finish. Remove masking tape immediately after tooling joint. Wipe smears or excess sealant off the face of non-glazed tile, brick, stone or other absorptive surfaces immediately.
F. Weeps/Pressure Equalization Vents: Install weeps and/or vent tubes through movement joints, conforming to the size, type and composition specified and as per weep/vent manufacturer's recommendations, on 2ft. (600mm) centers minimum, and at all locations indicated in shop drawings, plans and details. Ensure that all weeps and/or equalization tubes are properly placed to reach the waterproofing membrane and/or cavity they are designed to drain/vent, and are clear of dirt, debris, sealant or other obstructions. G. Vapor Barrier: Install vapor barrier, conforming to the type and composition specified and as per vapor barrier manufacturer's recommendations, on the side of wall cavity insulation that will be "warm in winter." Complete vapor barrier within two (2) weeks after enclosure of the building.
•
H. Adjusting: Correction of defective work for a period of one (1) year following substantial completion, return to job and correct all defective work. Defective work includes, without limitation, tiles broken in normal abuse due to deficiencies in setting bed, loose tiles or grout, and all other defects which may develop as a result of poor workmanship. 3.04
CLEANING Clean excess mortar/latex portland cement mortar from veneer surfaces with water before they harden and as work progresses. Do not contaminate open grout/caulk joints while cleaning. Sponge and wash veneers diagonally across joints. Do not use acids for cleaning. Polish with clean dry cloth. Remove surplus materials and leave premises broom clean.
3.05
PROTECTION
A. Protect finished installation under provisions of §01 50 00 and §01 56 00. To avoid damage to
•
finished tile work, schedule floor installations to begin only after all structural work, building enclosure, and overhead finishing work are completed. Keep all traffic off finished tile floors until they have fully cured. Builder shall provide up to%" (19mm) thick plywood or OSB protection over non-staining Kraft® paper to protect floors after installation materials have cured. Covering the floor with polyethylene or plywood in direct contact with the floor may adversely affect the
8736 CORWfN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/20 II LATICRETE TILE WATERPROOFING 07 1800-10
•
curing process of grout and latex/polymer fortified portland cement mortar. Keep traffic off horizontal portland cement thick bed mortar installations for at least 72 hours at 70°F (21 °C) . B. Keep floors installed with epoxy adhesive closed to foot traffic for 24 hours@ 70°F (21 °C), and to heavy traffic for 48 hours @ 70°F (21 °C) unless instructed differently by manufacturer. Use kneeling boards, or equivalent, to walk/work on newly tiled floors. Cure tile work in swimming pools, fountains and other continuous immersion applications for 10 days @ 70°F (21 °C) for epoxy based grout and 14 days @ 70°F (21 °C) for latex portland cement based grout before flood testing or filling installation with water. Extend period of protection of tile work at lower temperatures, below 60°F (15°C), and at high relative humidity (>70% RH) due to retarded set times of mortar/adhesives. Replace or restore work of other trades damaged or soiled by work under this section.
END OF SECTION
•
•
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 LATICRETE TILE WATERPROOFING . 07 1800-11
150312
SECTION 07 2100
•
THERMAL INSULATION PART 1 - GENERAL SUMMARY
1.01 A.
B.
• A.
•
1.
Thermal batt insulation for exterior walls and under roof decks.
2.
Continuous insulation at exterior walls.
Related Requirements: 1.
Division 01 -General Requirements.
2.
Section 05 3000- Metal Decking.
3.
Section 05 4100 - Structural Metal Stud Framing.
4.
Section 07 1326 - Self-Adhering Sheet Waterproofing.
5.
Section 07 1800 -Cementitious Waterproofing for Plywood.
6.
Section 09 2216- Non-Structural Metal Framing.
SUBMITTALS
1.02
1.03
Section Includes:
Product Data: 1.
Material List: Provide a list of materials for installation under this section.
2.
Provide manufacturer's printed Product Data for each type insulation and accessory.
B.
Manufacturer's Instructions: Submit manufacturer's printed installation instructions.
C.
Certification: Provide certification that insulation materials conform to requirements of CBC Chapter 26.
D.
Recycled Content: Provide certification that insulation materials contain a minimum 30 percent recycled materials. QUALITY ASSURANCE
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
03112/2015 THERMAL INSULATION 07 2100-1
150312
•
A.
Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread rating shall not exceed 25 and smoke density shall not exceed 50 when tested in accordance with ASTM E84 .
B.
Combustion Characteristics: Rated as non-combustible when tested in accordance with ASTM El36.
C.
Comply with following as a minimum requirement:
• D.
I.
ASTM C209- Standard Test Methods for Cellulosic Fiber Insulating Board.
2.
ASTM C553: Specification for Mineral Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Commercial and Industrial Applications.
3.
ASTM C578: Specification for Rigid, Cellular Polystyrene Thermal Insulation.
4.
ASTM C 1363 - Standard Test Method for Thermal Performance of Building Materials and Envelope Assemblies by Means of a Hot Box Apparatus.
5.
ASTM D1621 -Standard Test Method for Compressive Properties of Rigid Cellular Plastics.
6.
ASTM D 1622 - Standard Test Method for Apparent Density of Rigid Cellular Plastics.
7.
ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials .
8.
ASTM E 136- Standard Test Method for Behavior of Materials in a Vertical Tube Furnace at 750 degrees C.
CHP Low-Emitting Materials Table: Materials submitted for building insulation must be listed as low emitting on the CHPS website, www.CHPS.net, or must be tested by an independent laboratory to meet CHPS requirements. Components of an assembly must meet CHPS requirements individually or in an assembly. DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
1.04 A.
Deliver materials to Project site and store in a safe, dry place, with labels intact and legible at time of installation.
B.
Protect building insulation materials from damage. PROJECT CONDITIONS
1.05 A.
A void exposure to humidity and moisture. Protect from exposure to sunlight.
PART 2- PRODUCTS
•
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
03!12/2015 THERMAL INSULATION 07 2100-2
150312
•
2.01
MANUFACTURERS A.
Owens Coming.
B.
Johns Manville.
c.
CertainTeed Corporation.
D.
The DOW Chemical Company.
E.
DiversiF oam Products.
F.
Equal.
2.02
MATERIALS A.
•
•
B.
General: 1.
Provide Unfaced, friction-fit batt insulation where both sides of installation are enclosed.
2.
Provide batt insulation with integral vapor barrier when one side of installation will be unenclosed.
3.
Provide batt insulation with integral vapor barrier where at least one side of installation will be exposed to high humidity, such as showers .
4.
Recycled content shall be a minimum of 30 percent.
Mineral Fiber Batt Insulation: l.
Unfaced Mineral Fiber Batt Insulation: Provide friction-fit, unfaced mineral fiber batts. Insulation shall consist of mineral fibers, glass or slag, and thermosetting resins complying with ASTM C665, Type I.
2.
Faced Mineral Fiber Batt Insulation: Provide mineral fiber batts with vapor barrier consisting of mineral fibers, glass or slag, and thermosetting resins complying with ASTM C665, Type III, Class A, with vapor-retardant membrane facing.
3.
Fasteners for Attaching Insulation to Wood Framing: a.
For faced batt insulation provide one of following types of staples: Stainless steel, monel, or copper-coated steel, size as required by manufacturer or applicable code.
b.
For unfaced batt insulation provide 18 gage, minimum, galvanized steel wire where required to maintain proper insulation placement.
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
03/12/2015 THERMAL INSULATION 07 2100-3
150312
4.
• C.
a.
Spindle Anchors: Stic-Klip Mfg. Co., Type A orB as required, with Type S adhesive; Miracle Adhesives Corp. "Miracle StukUps" with Type HT994 adhesive; or Goodloe E. Moore Gemco or Tuff-Weld with G-P Improved or Tuff-Bond Quik-Set Type Adhesive as applicable; or equal. Provide adhesives of correct type for substrates and type of anchor.
b.
String Wires: Minimum 18 gage galvanized steel wire.
Extruded-Polystyrene (XPS) Board Insulation: ASTM C578, Type X, thickness as indicated on drawings. 1.
2.
•
Fasteners for Attaching Insulation to Underside of Metal Roof Decks:
Manufacturers: a.
DiversiFoam Products, Certifoam.
b.
Dow Chemical Company, Thermax.
c.
Owens Coming, Foamular.
d.
Equal.
Physical Properties: a.
Density, ASTM D 1622: Not less than 1.35 pounds per cubic foot.
b.
Surface Burning Characteristics, ASTM E84: Flame spread less than 25, smoke developed no greater than 50.
c.
Compressive Strength, ASTM D1621: 25 psi minimum.
d.
Thermal Resistance, ASTM C1363: R 5 minimum per inch of thickness.
e.
Water Vapor Transmission, ASTM E96: Less than 0.03 perms.
f.
Water Absorption by Volume, ASTM C209: Maximum 0.10 percent.
PART 3- EXECUTION EXAMINATION
3.01 A.
3.02
•
Examine Work to verify suitability to receive insulation. unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
Do not proceed until
INSTALLATION
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR& P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
03112/2015 THERMAL INSULATION 07 2100-4
150312
•
A.
General: 1.
Fit batt insulation, of R-value indicated on Drawings, snugly between framing members.
2.
Maintain total insulation integrity over entire area to be insulated, including areas between closely spaced members.
3.
Extend full thickness insulation over entire area to be insulated. Furnish manufacturer's recommended clips to tightly fit batts at joints.
4.
Cut and fit batt insulation tightly around pipes, conduits and penetrations.
5.
Do not compress batt insulation in excess of 10 percent (R-19 may be installed in 2 by 6 stud walls).
6.
Prevent batt insulation from sagging during and after installation by installing adequate wire.
7.
Metal door and window frames in acoustically insulated walls shall be filled with insulation, unless otherwise indicated.
8.
Where vapor barrier is provided, install with vapor barrier facing room.
•
•
9.
a.
Batts in Metal Framing: Provide friction-fit batts tightly fitted to stud webs and to metal furring .
b.
Batts under Metal Roof Decks where underside of insulation will be exposed install foil-faced flanged-type insulation batts and staple flanges together at maximum 4-inch centers and seal joints at abutting vertical surfaces with a pressure-sensitive plastic tape. Where underside of insulation will be inaccessible, install secure with spindle anchors. Provide 18 gage galvanized string wires under batts wherever necessary to prevent sagging. Stretch wire taut.
c.
Batts in Horizontal or Sloped Applications: Provide tightly stretched string wires along center of horizontal or sloping batts where support spacing exceed 16 inch on centers.
d.
Batts in Ceiling Framing: Install batts between joists, so top of insulation is level with top of framing members. Do not install insulation over recessed lighting fixtures, speakers, or other heat producing elements in ceilings. At junction boxes, access panels, and other items requiring access from above or below ceiling, cut insulation on each side to fit item and install loosely on top. Fit insulation snugly around ducts, conduits, pipes, and other items projecting through ceiling construction.
Install polystyrene board as required by Section 07 1326 .
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR& P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
03/12/2015 THERMAL INSULATION 07 2100-5
150312
B.
•
•
Continuous Insulation:
EDIT NOTE: PARAGRAPH BELOW IS FOR THE INSTALLATION OF INSULATION TO THE FRAMING ONLY. SECTION 09 2423, CEMENT PLASTER AND METAL LATH, SPECIFIES THE FASTENERS FOR THE ATTACHMENT OF METAL LATH TO THE STUD FRAMING (THROUGH THE CONTINUOUS INSULATION).
3.03
1.
Continuous insulation shall be installed in accordance to manufacturer instructions. Fasten the insulation board to the exterior face of the steel stud wall framing using preassembled screw/stress plate fasteners, of type and length as recommended by the manufacturer. Fastener pacing shall be 12" on center at the board perimeter and 16" on center in the field of the board.
2.
Bottom row of insulation panels shall be mounted on foundation casing "J" mold, refer to Section 09 2423, Cement Plaster and Metal Lath. Fasten insulation boards with corrosion resistant fasteners through sheathing into studs. Use 3/8 inch head roofing nails for wood studs, and self-drilling tapping screws for metal studs, or to "Z" channels, as applicable. Fastener penetration into studs shall be not less than 3/4 inch.
3.
Stagger vertical joints at least one stud from adjacent courses.
PROTECTION A.
Protect Work of this section until Substantial Completion. CLEANUP
3.04 A.
Remove rubbish, debris, and waste materials and legally dispose of off Project site.
END OF SECTION
•
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
03112/2015 THERMAL INSULATION 07 2100-6
111001
•
SECTION 07 6000 FLASHING AND SHEET METAL
PART 1 - GENERAL SUMMARY
1.01 A.
• B.
•
Section Includes: 1.
Sheet metal flashings in connection with roofing.
2.
Reglet and counter flashing assemblies.
3.
Miscellaneous metal flashing and counter flashing as required, except where provided under Divisions 22, Plumbing, 23, HVAC, or 26, Electrical.
4.
Coping caps.
5.
Gravel stops and metal edging.
6.
Gutters and downspouts.
8.
Splash pans where downspouts empty onto roofing.
7.
Conductor heads.
8.
Drip flashings.
9.
Sheet metal covering at outside storage units.
10.
Sheet metal wall coverings.
II.
Roof pipe flashings.
12.
Roof expansion joint covers.
13.
Other sheet metal items, not necessarily specified herein or in other sections, but required to prevent penetration of water into building.
Related Requirements: 1.
Division 01 - General Requirements.
2.
Section 05 3000- Metal Decking.
3.
Section 07 I 800- Cementitious Waterproofing for Plywood.
4.
Section 07 9200 - Joint Sealants.
5.
Division 22- Plumbing.
6.
Division 23 - HV AC.
7.
Division 26- Electrical.
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 FLASHING AND SHEET METAL 07 6000-1
111001
•
SUBMITTALS
1.02 A.
Shop Drawings: Submit for fabricated sheet metal indicating shapes, details, methods of joining, anchoring and fastening, thicknesses and gages of metals, concealed reinforcement, expansion joint details, sections, and profiles.
B.
Samples: Submit Samples for materials or assemblies as requested.
c.
Product Data: Submit brochures of manufactured items. QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.03 A.
Drawings and requirements specified govern. Provide the Work of this section in conformance with the Architectural Sheet Metal Manual published by SMACNA for conditions not indicated or specified and for general fabrication of sheet metal items.
B.
Materials shall conform to following standards:
c.
•
I.
ASTM Al67 - Stainless and Heat-Resisting Chromium-Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet and Strip.
2.
ASTM A653 - Sheet Steel, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron AlloyCoated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process.
3.
ASTM B370- Copper Sheet and Strip for Building Construction.
Pre-installation Meetings: Refer to Division 07 roofing sections as appropriate. Attend the pre-installation and inspection meetings for roofing Work. DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
1.04 A.
Do not install bent or otherwise damaged materials.
PART 2- PRODUCTS MATERIALS
2.01 A.
Galvanized Sheet Steel: ASTM A653, coating designation G90, hot-dip galvanized.
B.
Copper Plate, Sheet and Strip: ASTM B370, cold-rolled, tempered. Copper sheet and strip shall be cold-rolled-temper.
C.
Stainless Steel: Plate, sheet and strip shall conform to ASTM Al67, Type 304 or Type 316, No. 4 finish on exposed surfaces and No. 2 finish on concealed surfaces unless otherwise specified or indicated. Furnish Type 304 for general applications and Type 316 where exposed to acidic or alkaline conditions.
D.
Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209, alloy as standard with manufacturer for finish required, with temper as required to suit forming operations and performance required; with smooth, flat surface. I.
E.
•
As-Milled Finish: [Mill] [One-side bright mill] [Standard one-side bright] [Standard two-side bright].
Fastenings:
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR& P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 FLASHING AND SHEET METAL 07 6000-2
111001
•
1.
Galvanized Steel: Nails, rivets, and other fastenings furnished in connection with galvanized sheet steel Work shall be sealed with rust resistive coating . Rivets shall be tinned. Nails and other fastenings shall be zinc-coated.
2.
Copper: Nails, rivets, and other fastenings furnished in connection with copper sheet metal Work, shall be manufactured from hard-temper copper or hard brass.
3.
Stainless Steel: Nails, rivets and other fastenings furnished in connection with stainless steel Work, shall be 300 series alloy to match alloy of stainless steel being fastened.
F.
Soldering Flux: Raw muriatic acid for galvanized steel; rosin for tin, lead and tinned copper; non-corrosive soldering salts for uncoated copper and acid-type flux formulated for soldering stainless steel.
G.
Solder: ASTM B32, Grade 5A, composed of 95-5 tin-antimony. Name of product manufacturer and grade designation shall be labeled, stamped or cast onto each coil or bar.
2.02
FABRICATION
A.
• B.
General: 1.
Accurately form sheet metal Work to dimensions and shapes indicated and required. Cope finish molded and brake metal shapes with true, straight, sharp lines and angles and, where intersecting each other, to a precise fit. Unless otherwise specified, all galvanized sheet steel shall be 22 gage. Exposed edges of sheet metal shall have a Y2 inch minimum hemmed edge .
2.
Soldering of sheet steel or copper shall be performed with well-heated copper soldering iron or soldering torch, joints full flowing, neat and consistent. Fill joint completely with solder. Clean materials at joints before soldering, and tin coppers before soldering. Exposed soldering on finished surfaces shall be scraped smooth. Lock seam work shall be fabricated flat and true to line and soldered along its entire length. Acid-fluxed Work shall be neutralized after fabrication.
3.
Form and install sheet metal Work to provide proper allowances for expansion and contraction, without causing undue stresses in any part of completed Work. Installation shall be water and weathertight.
Gutters and Downspouts: I.
•
Gutters: Fabricate from 22 gage galvanized steel to match existing size and design unless otherwise indicated. Maximum length of gutter shall be 40 feet between end or expansion joints unless the system is specially designed to accommodate the greater expansion, the larger flow and the need for special supports. Drain gutter towards nearest downspout and provide an expansion joint at mid-point between downspout outlets, but not to exceed 40 feet on center. Gutters shall not pond water. Rivet joints and ends with a minimum of 6 rivets per joint or maximum rivet spacing not to exceed 1 Yl-inch on center and Y2 inch from the edge of the metal, consisting of 3-inch overlap. Sweat solder from inside of gutter and in horizontal position where possible. Neatly
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/201 I FLASHING AND SHEET METAL 07 6000-3
111001
fit downspouts to gutter using a slip joint. Provide expansion joints, consisting of 3-inch lap joints at not over feet.
•
C.
2.
Form and install sheet metal Work to provide allowance for expansion and contraction without causing undue stresses in the completed Work.
3.
Downspouts: Fabricate downspouts from 3-inch round, or 3-inch by 4-inch rectangular shapes, 16 gage steel tubing with butt joints and mitered elbows, sized as indicated. Downspouts shall be constructed with conductor heads every 40 feet to admit air and prevent vacuum. Keep downspouts offsets to a maximum of 10 feet. Downspout shall be fabricated with elbows at bottom discharge or connected to drains as indicated. Joints, except expansion joints shall be sealed with a continuous weld. Galvanize downspouts after fabrication.
4.
Outlets: Fabricate outlets of 22 gage galvanized sheet steel with a 1/4 inch rolled flanged soldered continuously to gutter. Outside diameter shall be 1/8 inch less than the inside diameter of the downspout and extend into downspout 4 inches. Install a removable wire "bulb type" strainer to outlet opening. Strainer shall be fabricated of 22 gage galvanized steel and Y2 inch hardware cloth.
Conductor Heads: 1.
•
•
Fabricate conductor heads and outlets from 22 gage galvanized sheet steel. Cover tops of the conductor heads with 22 gage galvanized 14 inch wire mesh soldered securely to separately fabricated frame and mechanically fastened to top conductor head with a minimum of two fasteners .
D.
Gravel Stops: Provide 24 gage galvanized sheet steel gravel stops wherever roof area drops to a lower level; at the eaves and rake of roof, where roof comes to an abrupt edge, and where indicated. Stops shall be of height indicated and shall be fabricated with two flanges. Horizontal flange shall be not less than 4 inches wide, and vertical flange shall extend down over vertical surfaces of trim or gutter. Gravel stops shall lap 4 inches at ends and corners, and shall be fabricated by notching and interlocking vertical face flanges. Contact surfaces of lapped flanges, including raised areas, vertical face and corners, shall be completely covered with flashing compound. Fabricate lap joints so that they will be in the direction of water flow. Where flanges are over five inches wide, provide 20 gage continuous cleats fastened at 24 inches on center.
E.
Overflow Outlets: Provide galvanized sheet steel overflow outlets at locations and of sizes indicated. Outlets shall extend through full thickness of wall in one continuous piece and completely line the opening. On outside face of wall, top and sides of outlet shall finish 1/2 inch on surface of wall. Bottom of outlet shall project 1 Y:z inches beyond face of wall, and shall be bent down slightly. Outlets shall be sealed on the surface of the building. On inside face, side and bottom flanges shall extend not less than 8 inches beyond edge of opening, and not less than 6 inches at top. Outlets shall be installed at time roof is being installed.
F.
Reglet Type Counterflashing: Where roof comes in contact with vertical surfaces, provide counterflashing. Set top of counter flashing 8 inches above roof deck unless otherwise indicated, and extend down at least 5 inches or to top of cant strip.
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR& P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 FLASHING AND SHEET METAL 07 6000-4
Ill 00 I
Counterflashing and reglet shall be 22 gage galvanized sheet steel. Lap counter flashing and reglet 3 inches minimum at splices and miter at angles, or supply special metal corner fittings. Reglet and method of securing flashing shall be so constructed that flashing is firmly locked in place, but may be readily removed for replacement.
•
G.
Splash Pans: Provide splash pans for all downspouts, which empty onto lower roofs. Pans shall be galvanized sheet steel 12-inch by 18-inch, unless otherwise indicated, and turned up 2 inches on at least three sides.
H.
Roof Expansion Joint Covers: Fabricate of 22 gage galvanized sheet steel, as detailed. One side of joint shall be zee shaped, with 3-inch standing leg extended over the joint and turned down. The other side shall be box shaped, fabricated to extend over the joint, over the standing leg, and turn down to form a water barrier. Prefabricated bellows type joint covers are not permitted.
I.
Miscellaneous Flashing: Unless otherwise indicated, miscellaneous flashing shall be fabricated of galvanized steel. Exterior doors and windows, unless covered by overhangs shall be provided with 22 gage galvanized steel drip flashing as detailed. At wood construction, nail flashing to framing before paper backed lath is installed.
J.
Roof Pipe Flashings: flashings.
Provide PVC flashings or prefabricated welded or seamless
PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01
PREPARATION A.
•
•
3.02
Concrete and masonry materials in contact with sheet metal shall be painted with alkali resistant coating, such as heavy-bodied bituminous paint. Wood in contact with sheet metal shall be painted with two coats of aluminum paint or one coat of heavybodied bituminous paint. INSTALLATION
A.
General: Coordinate with installation of underlayment indicated in the Drawings and specified in Section 09 2423.
B.
Gutters and Downspouts: I.
Anchor gutters to structure with 10 gage steel straps, galvanized after fabricating. Secure straps with galvanized fasteners at 3 feet on center. Drill pilot holes and use 12 by 2-inch pan head screws.
2.
Install 1/4 inch galvanized wire mesh continuous cover on gutter.
3.
Secure downspouts to walls with 1/8 inch by 2-inch galvanized steel straps. Straps shall be located at top, bottom, and at not over 10 feet on center. Block downspouts out 12 inch from the finish wall surfaces and 1 inch from the bottom of downspout grade. Secure straps to wall framing with I /4 inch by 2inch long galvanized anchors. Expansion type anchors shall be provided when anchoring to concrete and masonry. Provide toggle bolts for attachment to masonry or plaster. At steel columns, provide fasteners as indicated. Plastic anchors are not permitted.
4.
Anchor conductor heads to walls with l/4 inch diameter by 2 12-inch long galvanized lag screws or 114 inch expansion type anchors.
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HJGH SCHOOL
10/01/20 II FLASHING AND SHEET METAL 07 6000-5
IIIOOI
•
c.
Reglets: Install reglets at constant height above cant or as indicated. minimum 3-inch lap at end splices of reg lets. Seal laps watertight.
D.
Counterflashing:
E.
Provide
1.
Install at constant horizontal elevation across roof slope and slope at constant height above cant or as indicated.
2.
Provide minimum 3-inch lap at all end splices of counterflashing.
Galvanized sheet steel parapet coping and flashing shall be continuous over top of parapet to form a watertight cap, with waterproof seams at approximately 10 feet on center, or as indicated. Anchor coping to outside of wall with a continuous cleat face nailed at 24 inch centers. Coping shall be fastened on inside wall with hex head screws and bonded sealing washers through oversized holes in the back of the coping. Corners and angles shall be lapped and soldered; do not install joint sealant. TESTING
3.03
A. Perform field water testing to demonstrate installation is watertight. Continue testing with a continuous hose stream applied at base of installation for at least 30 minutes. If leaking is observed, discontinue test and repair installation, then test until satisfactory results are obtained.
3.04
PROTECTION A.
•
•
Protect the Work of this section until Substantial Completion. CLEANING
3.05 A.
Remove rubbish, debris, and waste materials and legally dispose of off the Project site.
END OF SECTION
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HJGH SCHOOL
I 0/0 I/20 I I FLASHING AND SHEET METAL 07 6000-6
•
SECTION 07 8413 PENETRATION FIRES TOPPING
PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01
SUMMARY A.
B.
• 1.02
1.
Penetrations for the passage of duct, cable, cable tray, conduit, piping, electrical busways and raceways through fire-rated vertical barriers (walls and partitions), horizontal barriers (floor/ceiling assemblies), and vertical service shaft walls and partitions.
2.
Mineral fiber insulation, fire sating, and sating edge of floor slabs and curtain walls.
3.
Damming material, clips, and closures.
4.
Gaps between the top of walls and ceilings or roof assemblies.
5.
Expansion joints in walls and floors.
Related Requirements: 1.
Division 01 - General Requirements.
2.
Section 03 3000 - Cast-in-Place Concrete.
3.
Section 07 9200 - Joint Sealants.
4.
Section 09 2900 - Gypsum Board.
5.
Division 22 - Plumbing.
6.
Division 23 - HVAC.
7.
Division 26 - Electrical.
REFERENCES A.
•
Section Includes:
ASTM Standards: 1.
ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
2.
ASTM E119- Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests ofBuilding Construction and Materials .
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 PENETRATION FIRES TOPPING 07 8413-1
• B.
C.
•
•
ASTM E814- Standard Test Method for Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Fire Stops .
4.
ASTM El399- Standard Test Method for Cyclic Movement and Measuring Minimum and Maximum Joint Widths on Architectural Joint Systems.
5.
ASTM El966- Standard Test Methods for Fire-Resistive Joint Systems.
Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. 1.
UL 263- Standard for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials.
2.
UL 723 - Standard for Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
3.
UL 1479- Fire Tests of Through Penetration Firestops.
4.
UL 2079- Test for Fire Resistance of Building Joint Systems.
5.
UL Fire Resistance Directory.
Testing Services: I.
Intertek ES SAT.
2.
Southwest Research Institute.
3.
Underwriters Laboratories .
D.
International Firestop Council Guidelines for Evaluating Firestop Systems Engineering Judgments.
E.
California Building Code, Chapter 7 Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Fire Stops.
F.
Firestop Contractors International Association (FICA) Manual of Practice. SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
1.03
1.04
3.
A.
Provide fire stops and smoke seals to prevent the passage of fire, smoke, toxic gasses or water from one floor or area to another. Seal openings in floors, fire rated walls and permanent partitions penetrated by pipes, ducts, conduits and other items as shown, specified, and as required for the type of construction.
B.
Mineral fiber insulation installed as fire sating at non-rated penetrations not containing pipes, ducts, conduits, and other items in floor slabs, wall partitions, construction-joint conditions between slabs and adjacent construction and where indicated or required.
C.
Provide damming material, clips, and closures as required for support and containment of dams, and other insulation materials required for tested and rated fire stop systems. QUALITY ASSURANCE
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/0112011 PENETRATION FIRES TOPPING 07 8413-2
A.
•
•
1.
Provide materials and Work to conform to source quality control criteria specified herein and CBC requirements in fire resistant wall and floor assemblies to prevent the passage of fire, smoke, and toxic gases.
2.
Installed fire stops shall be of sufficient thickness, width, and density to provide a fire resistance rating at least equal to the floor, wall, or partition construction into which it is installed.
B.
Comply with CBC requirements for fire rated construction.
C.
Qualifications of Manufacturer: Products furnished for fire stopping and smoke seals shall be manufactured by a firm which has been continuously and regularly employed in the manufacture of these materials for a period of at least 5 years; and which can provide evidence ofthese materials being satisfactorily installed on at least 5 projects of similar size and type within such period.
D.
Qualifications oflnstaller: The Work of this section shall be installed by a firm which has been in the business of installing similar materials for at least 5 consecutive years; and can provide evidence of satisfactory completion of 5 projects of similar size and scope. Installer shall have applicators trained and certified by manufacturer for performing this Work. Comply with requirements ofFICA Manual of Practice.
E.
For those firestop applications that exist for which no UL tested system is available through a manufacturer, an engineering judgment derived from similar UL system designs or other tests will be submitted to local authorities having jurisdiction for their review and approval prior to installation. Engineering judgment drawings must follow requirements set forth by the International Firestop Council.
1.05
SUBMITTALS A.
•
Performance Criteria:
Product Data: I.
Submit manufacturer's Product Data for each type of fire stop and smoke seal material proposed for installation. Indicate product characteristics, typical installations, performance, and limitation criteria and test data.
2.
Submit manufacturer's printed installation instructions for each type of product, system, and construction required for the Work. Indicate fire resistance rating of each installation.
3.
Submit fire test reports from independent testing agency indicating the following: a
Fire test report of fire stop material installed to substrate and penetration materials similar to the Work of this section. Test to indicate both Fire Resistance (F) and Temperature (T) Ratings.
b
Test reports of products to be installed shall indicate conformance to ASTM E814, UL rating with UL classified system description, and UL classified system detail.
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/0112011 PENETRATION FIRES TOPPING 07 8413-3
c.
•
B.
1.
Apply one Sample of fire stop material for each different penetration and related fire rating required for the Work.
2.
Sample areas shall comply with thickness, fire resistance ratings, and finished appearance.
Manufacturer's Qualifications: requirements specified above.
D.
Installer's Qualifications: Submit evidence of conformance with qualification requirements specified above.
Submit evidence of conformance with qualification
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A.
Deliver products to the Project site in manufacturer's original, unopened containers bearing correct UL labeling.
B.
Fire stop material shall be stored above grade in an area protected from detrimental weather and moisture conditions and in compliance with manufacturer's requirements, including temperature restrictions.
c.
Fire stop and seal materials shall be installed before expiration of shelf life.
PART 2- PRODUCTS MANUFACTURERS
2.01 A.
•
Field Samples: No less than 10 days before commencing the Work of this section, provide field installed Samples offire stop materials and systems.
C.
1.06
•
Test reports of products to be installed shall indicate conformance to systems included in the Intertek Directory .
Unless otherwise noted, products of this section shall be as manufactured by: 1.
3M Fire Protection Products.
2.
Hilti, Inc.
3.
Nelson Firestop Products.
4.
Tremco, Inc.
5.
Equal.
B.
Provide materials and systems of specified manufacturers to suit penetration and substrate as determined by various conditions of installation.
C.
Provide firestopping composed of components that are compatible with the substrates forming openings and the items penetrating the firestop, under conditions of service and
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HJGH SCHOOL
10/0112011 PENETRATION FIRES TOPPING 07 8413-4
•
application, as demonstrated by the fire stopping manufacturer based on testing and field experience . 2.02
MATERIALS A.
Firestop Sealant: Smoke, gas and water resistant. For use in horizontal or vertical, concrete, masonry or gypsum wall assemblies. UL System No. W-L-1001. I.
B.
a)
3M: CP-25WB+, IC-15WB+, 3000WT.
b)
Hilti: FS ONE.
c)
Tremco: TREMstop IA+ or FyreCaulk.
d)
Nelson Firestop Products: ES 1399.
e)
Equal.
Supplemental Material: Provide supplementary materials required for complete, fire rated, installation. SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
2.03
•
Two or single component intumescent system for protection of combustible and non-combustible pipe, conduit and cable penetrations.
A.
Fire stop and smoke seal material shall be tested by an independent testing agency for conformance to Flame (F) and Temperature (T) requirements of ASTM E814/UL 1479 .
B.
Conform to UL Fire Hazard Classification Requirements. Material shall be classified as a fill, void, or cavity material and system for UL Through Penetration Firestop System.
C.
Material shall be tested and shall display Flame Spread Index of 25 or less, and Smoke Developed Index of 450 or less when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.
PART 3- EXECUTION APPLICATION REQUIREMENTS
3.01
A.
B.
•
Provide single component fire stop sealant or putty: I.
Within penetrations subject to movement including conduit, cable bundles, buss duct, and noncombustible pipe.
2.
As a sealant or caulking for smoke barrier construction, fire, and smoke dampers, mechanical/electrical framed elements in masonry and gypsum board partition systems, and other conditions.
Provide mineral fiber insulation for fire safing at joints and openings through floor slabs, walls, and partitions not indicated to be grouted, gaskets, sealed or otherwise made sound or air tight in this or other sections. Fire safing shall be packed and wedged solidly from
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES IDGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 PENETRATION FIRES TOPPING 07 8413-5
•
both sides of walls and partitions, and from both top and bottom sides of slabs with noncombustible mineral fiber insulation . PREPARATION
3.02
A.
Examine the areas and conditions where fire stops and smoke seals are to be installed for conditions detrimental to the proper completion of the Work. Do not proceed with the Work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected for rated fire protection.
B.
Surface to receive fire stops or smoke seals shall be free of dirt, dust, grease, form release agents, or other matter that would impair the bond of the fire stop material to the substrate or penetrating items. Substrate shall be frost free and when required, dry.
c.
Voids and cracks in substrate shall be filled and unnecessary projections removed before installation of fire stops.
D.
Assure that all pipes, conduit, cable, and other items, which penetrate fire rated construction, have been permanently installed before installation of fire stops. Schedule and sequence the Work to assure that partitions and other construction, which would conceal penetrations, are not installed before the installation of fire stops and smoke seals.
E.
Comply with manufacturer's recommendations for temperature and humidity conditions before, during, and after installation of fire stops and smoke seals. INSTALLATION
3.03
•
A.
General: Provide installation in accordance with manufacturer's installation procedures, as required. Install fire stops in accordance with fire test reports, UL Fire Resistance Directory, Intertek Testing Services Directory or SpecDirect, and reviewed Sample installations.
B.
Installation of Single Component Fire Stop Sealant: Provide noncombustible insulation as required to achieve fire resistance rating.
2.
Install with manual or powered sealant gun. For up to 3 hour rating, install to the thickness required by the Listed System Designs as directed for wall and floor applications.
3.
Surface of gun grade fire stop sealant shall be tooled with clean potable water.
4.
Remove excess materials from adjacent surfaces within 10 minutes, with either water or other material compatible with sealant and recommended by sealant manufacturer, leaving the Work in a neat, clean condition.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
3.04
•
1.
A.
Examine sealed penetration areas to ensure proper installation before concealing or enclosing areas.
B.
Repair damaged areas and restore integrity of assembly.
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 PENETRATION FIRES TOPPING 07 8413-6
•
c. 3.05
Keep areas of work accessible until inspection by authorities having jurisdiction. PROTECTION
A.
Protect the Work of this section until Substantial Completion. CLEANUP
3.06 A.
Clean surfaces adjacent to sealed openings and joints and remove excess of firestopping materials.
B.
Remove rubbish, debris, and waste materials and legally dispose of off the Project site.
END OF SECTION
•
•
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 PENETRATION FIRES TOPPING 07 8413-7
•
SECTION 07 9200 JOINT SEALANTS
PART 1 -GENERAL SUMMARY
1.01 A.
B.
Joint sealants.
2.
Preparation for application of sealants.
Related Requirements: 1.
Division 01 - General Requirements.
2.
Division 08- Openings.
3.
Division 09- Finishes.
A.
Shop Drawings: Submit Shop Drawings indicating sealant joint locations, with full-size sealant joint details .
B.
Product Data: Submit manufacturer's literature for each sealant material.
C.
Material Samples: Submit Samples indicating color range available for each sealant material intended for installation in exposed locations.
D.
Certifications: Submit manufacturer's certification materials comply with requirements specified.
E.
Site Samples: At locations required, provide a Sample of sealant for each typical installation, approximately 24 inches long, including joint preparation, backing, sealant and tooling. Allow backing to extend 6 inches beyond end of sealant for inspection of substrate.
F.
Test Reports: Submit manufacturer's adhesion compatibility test reports according to ASTM C794 for each substrate.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.03 A.
•
I.
SUBMITTALS
1.02
•
Section Includes:
Qualifications oflnstaller: The Work of this section shall be installed by a firm which has been in the business of installing similar materials for at least five consecutive years; and can show evidence of satisfactory completion of five projects of similar size and
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR& P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES I-ITGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 JOINT SEALANTS 07 9200-1
•
scope. Installer shall have applicators trained and approved by manufacturer for performing this Work . DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
1.04 A.
Store in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Provide a uniform ambient temperature between 60 and 80 degrees F. WARRANTY
1.05 A.
Manufacturer: five year material warranty.
B.
Installer: two year installation/application warranty.
PART 2- PRODUCTS GENERAL
2.0I A.
•
B.
Furnish sealants meeting following in-service requirements: I.
Normal curing schedules are permitted.
2.
Non-staining, color fastness (resistance to color change), and durability when subjected to intense actinic (ultraviolet) radiation are required.
Furnish the products of only one manufacturer unless otherwise required, sealant colors as selected to match the adjoining surfaces . MANUFACTURERS
2.02 A.
2.03
Sealants must be approved by LAUSD's Office of Environmental Health and Safety (OEHS). Check OEHS website for approved products. Not all products by a manufacturer are approved by OEHS. MATERIALS
A.
Sealants: l.
2.
Sealant I: Acrylic latex, one-part, non-sag, mildew resistant acrylic emulsion compound complying with ASTM C834, Type S, Grade NS, formulated to be paintable. a.
Tremco Inc., Acrylic Latex Caulk.
b.
Pecora Corporation, AC-20.
c.
Equal.
Sealant 2: Butyl sealant, one-part, non-sag, solvent-release-curing sealant complying with ASTM C 1311, gun grade and formulated with a minimum of 75 percent solids. a.
•
Tremco Inc., Tremco Butyl Sealant.
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR& P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HJGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 JOINT SEALANTS 07 9200-2
•
3.
4.
5.
•
6.
7.
•
b.
Pecora Corp., BC-158 .
c.
Equal.
Sealant 3: Silicone sealant, one-part non-acid-curing silicone sealant complying with ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25. a.
Dow Corning Corp., Dow Corning 790, 791, 795.
b.
General Electric Co., Silpruf.
c.
Tremco, Inc., Spectrem I.
d.
Pecora Corp., 864.
e.
Equal.
Sealant 4: One-part mildew-resistant silicone sealant, complying with ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25. a.
Dow Corning Corp., Dow Corning 786.
b.
General Electric Co., Sanitary 1700.
c.
Tremco, Inc., Proglaze White.
d.
Equal.
Sealant 5: One-part non-sag urethane sealant, complying with ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25. a.
Sika Corporation, Sikaflex -221 e.
b.
Equal.
Sealant 6: Multi-part pouring urethane sealant, complying with ASTM C920, Type M, Grade P, Class 25. a.
Sika Corporation, Sikaflex 2C NS/SL.
b.
Equal.
Sealant 7: Acoustical sealant, non-drying, non-hardening permanently flexible conforming to ASTM D217. a.
Pecora Corp., BA-98 Acoustical Sealant.
b.
Equal.
B.
See 07 8413- Penetration Firestopping for rated sealants.
C.
Joint Backing: ASTM Dl056; round, closed cell Polyethylene Foam Rod; oversized 30 to 50 percent larger than joint width, reticulated polyolefin foam.
D.
Primer: Non-Staining Type. Provide primer as required and shall be product of manufacturer of installed sealant.
E.
Bond Breaker: Pressure sensitive tape recommended by sealant manufacturer.
F.
Sealants shall have normal curing schedules, shall be nonstaining, color fast and shall resist deterioration due to ultraviolet radiation .
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 JOINT SEALANTS 07 9200-3
•
PART 3- EXECUTION EXAMINATION
3.01 A.
SURFACE PREPARATION
3.02
•
A.
Joints and spaces to be sealed shall be completely cleaned of all dirt, dust, mortar, oil, and other foreign materials which might adversely affect sealing Work. Where necessary, degrease with a solvent or commercial degreasing agent. Surfaces shall be thoroughly dry before application of sealants.
B.
If recommended by manufacturer, remove paint and other protective coatings from surfaces to be sealed before priming and installation of sealants.
c.
Preparation of surfaces to receive sealant shall conform to the sealant manufacturer's specifications. Provide air pressure or other methods to achieve required results. Provide masking tape to keep sealants off surfaces that will be exposed in finished Work.
D.
Etch concrete or masonry surfaces to remove excess alkalinity, unless sealant manufacturer's printed instructions indicate that alkalinity does not interfere with sealant bond and performance. Etch with 5 percent solution of muriatic acid; neutralize with dilute ammonia solution, rinse thoroughly with water and allow to dry before sealant installation.
E.
Perform preparation in accordance with ASTM C804 for solvent release sealants, and ASTM C962 for elastomeric sealants.
F.
Protect elements surrounding Work of this section from damage or disfiguration. SEALANT APPLICATION SCHEDULE
3.03
•
Verify that joint openings are ready to receive Work and field tolerances are within the guidelines recommended by sealant manufacturer.
Location
Type
Color
A.
Exterior and Interior joints in horizontal surfaces of concrete; between metal and concrete masonry and mortar.
Sealant 6
To match adjacent material
B.
Exterior door, entrance and window Sealant 3 or 5 frames. Exterior and interior vertical joints in concrete and masonry metal flashing.
To match adjacent material
C.
Joints within glazed curtain wall system. Skylight framing system. Aluminum entrance system glass and glazing .
Translucent or Black
8736 CORWIN THEATER REP AIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
Sealant 3
10/0 l/20 11 JOINT SEALANTS 07 9200-4
•
D.
Interior joints in ceramic tile and at plumbing fixtures.
Sealant 4
Translucent or White
E.
Under thresholds.
Sealant 2
Black
F.
All interior joints not otherwise scheduled
Sealant I
To Match Adjacent Surfaces
G.
Heads and sills, perimeters of frames and other openings in insulated partitions
Sealant 7
Match Adjacent Surfaces
APPLICATION
3.04
•
•
A.
Provide sealant around all openings in exterior walls, and any other locations indicated or required for structure weatherproofing and/or waterproofing.
B.
Sealants shall be installed by experienced mechanics using specified materials and proper tools. Preparatory Work (cleaning, etc.) and installation of sealant shall be as specified and in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions and recommendations.
c.
Concrete, masonry, and other porous surfaces, and any other surfaces if recommended by manufacturer, shall be primed before installing sealants. Primer shall be installed with a brush that will reach all parts of joints to be filled with sealant.
D.
Sealants shall be stored and installed at temperatures as recommended by manufacturer. Sealants shall not be installed when they become too jelled to be discharged in a continuous flow from gun. Modification of sealants by addition of liquids, solvents, or powders is not permitted.
E.
Sealants shall be installed with guns furnished with proper size nozzles. Sufficient pressure shall be furnished to fill all voids and joints solid. In sealing around openings, include entire perimeter of each opening, unless indicated or specified otherwise. Where gun installation is impracticable, suitable hand tools shall be provided.
F.
Sealed joints shall be neatly pointed on flush surfaces with beading tool, and internal corners with a special tool. Excess material shall be cleanly removed. Sealant, where exposed, shall be free of wrinkles and uniformly smooth. Sealing shall be complete before final coats of paint are installed.
G.
Comply with sealant manufacturer's printed instructions except where more stringent requirements are indicated on Drawings or specified.
H.
Partially fill joints with joint backing material, furnishing only compatible materials, until joint depth does not exceed 112 inch joint width. Minimum joint width for metal to metal
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
l 0/0 l/20 ll JOINT SEALANTS 07 9200-5
joints shall be I /4 inch. Joint depth, shall be not less than I /4 inch and not greater than I /2 inch .
•
I.
Install sealant under sufficient pressure to completely fill voids. Finish exposed joints smooth, flush with surfaces or recessed as indicated. Install non-tracking sealant to concrete expansion joints subject to foot or vehicular traffic.
J.
Where joint depth prevents installation of standard bond breaker backing rod, furnish non-adhering tape covering to prevent bonding of sealant to back of joint. Under no circumstances shall sealant depth exceed I /2 inch maximum, unless specifically indicated on Drawings.
K.
Prime porous surfaces after cleaning. Pack joints deeper than 3/4 inch with joint backing to within 3/4 inch of surface. Completely fill joints and spaces with gun applied compound, forming a neat, smooth bead.
3.05
•
MISCELLANEOUS WORK
A.
Sealing shall be provided wherever required to prevent light leakage as well as moisture leakage. Refer to Drawings for condition and related parts of Work.
B.
Install sealants to depths as indicated or, if not indicated, as recommended by sealant manufacturer but within following general limitations: 1.
For joints in concrete walks, slab and paving subject to traffic, fill joints to a depth equal to 75 percent of joint width, but not more than 3/4 inch deep or less than 3/8 inch deep, depending on joint width .
2.
For buildingjoints, fill joints to a depth equal to 50 percent of joint width, but not more than I /2 inch deep or less than I /4 inch deep.
CLEANING
3.06 A.
Remove rubbish, debris, and waste materials and legally dispose of off the Project site. CURING
3.07 A.
Sealants shall cure in accordance with manufacturer's printed recommendations. Do not disturb seal until completely cured. · PROTECTION
3.08 A.
Protect the Work of this section until Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION
•
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HJGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 JOINT SEALANTS 07 9200-6
•
SECTION 08 1113 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES PART 1 - GENERAL SUMMARY
1.01
A.
B.
•
1.
Hollow metal doors and frames or hollow metal doors as indicated.
2.
Hollow metal window frames or hollow metal door and window frames.
Related Requirements: 1.
Division 01 - General Requirements.
2.
Section 07 9200 - Joint Sealants.
3.
Section 08 1416- Flush Wood Doors.
4.
Section 08 7100 - Door Hardware.
6.
Section 09 9000 - Painting and Coating .
DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
1.02 A.
Door-and-frame assemblies or frames shall include reinforcing and provisions for hardware as shown and specified. Drawings indicate profile and general details of steel frame fabrication and installation. SUBMITTALS
1.03
•
Section Includes:
A.
Shop Drawings: Submit composite Shop Drawings indicating detailed relationships of installation including Work of adjacent construction, finish hardware, security, fire and life safety devices, glazing, sealing, and requirements for field installation. Include elevations of each hollow metal door type, details of each frame type, location schedule of doors and frames indicating same reference for details and openings as indicated on Drawings, conditions of openings of various wall sections and materials, typical and special details of construction, methods of assembling sections, location and installation requirements for hardware, material size, shape, and thickness, and joints and connections.
B.
Product Data: Submit manufacturer's Product Data indicating compositiOn and construction for each fabricated item including louvers, coatings, finishes, and other components demonstrating compliance with referenced standards . 10/0112011
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HJGH SCHOOL
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 08 1113-1
•
C.
Certification: Submit certification of compliance with referenced standards and specified criteria, including but not limited to fire ratings in accordance with UL 1OC, Physical Endurance in accordance with ANSI A250.4 and Prime Paint performance in accordance with ANSI A250.1 0 ..
D.
Samples:
1.04
•
•
1.
Hollow Metal Frame: Corner section of typical exterior and interior frame, of sufficient composite size to illustrate corner joint construction, hinge reinforcement, closer re-enforcement, floor anchor, dust cover, and jamb anchors, and showing galvanizing and prime coat finishes.
2.
Hollow Metal Door: Section of typical interior door of sufficient composite size to illustrate edge, top, bottom, and core construction, hinge reinforcement and face stiffening, closer reinforcement and kick plate reinforcement, and corner of vision opening construction with glazing beads.
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
Manufacturer Qualifications: years in work ofthis section.
Minimum documented experience of more than five
B.
Installer Qualifications: Minimum documented experience of more than five years in work of this section
c.
Coordinate with hardware supplier for fabrication of doors and frames to recetve hardware items.
D.
Coordinate with intrusion alarm supplier for fabrication of doors and frames to receive intrusion detection devices.
E.
References: Work shall comply with physical and performance requirements of following standards, including standards referenced in them, except for more stringent provisions specified herein or required by regulatory agencies: 1.
ANSIISDI A250.8, SDI 100 Recommended Specifications for Standard Steel Doors and Fames.
2.
ANSI/NFPA 252, Fire Tests of Door Assemblies.
3.
ANSIIUL lOB, Fire Tests ofDoor Assemblies.
4.
ANSI/UL I OC, Positive-Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies.
5.
ANSI/NFPA 80, Fire Doors and Fire Windows
6.
HMMA, Guide Specifications for Commercial Hollow Metal Doors & Frames (Standard ofNational Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers) .
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/0112011 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 08 1113-2
• F.
•
ANSI/SDI A250.4, Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Physical Endurance for Steel Doors, Frames, Frame Anchors and Hardware Reinforcings.
8.
ANSI A250.1 0, Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Prime Painted Steel Doors and Frames.
9.
ANSI A250.6, Recommended Practice for Hardware Reinforcing on Standard Steel Doors and Frames.
Standards ofFabrication and Installation: 1.
Finished Work shall be of uniform profile, accurately fabricated, rigid and strong, square and true, neat in appearance, smooth and free from dents, waves, warps, buckles, open joints, tool marks and/or other defects.
2.
Steel sheet shall be clean with smooth surfaces free of scale, pitting or other defects.
3.
Construction joints shall be flush, tight and welded their full length, ground flush and smooth on exposed surfaces.
4.
Frame and door reinforcing and hardware provisions shall be performed in fabrication shop. Provide cuts, welds, and other fabrications before galvanizing or shop priming .
5.
Lines and molded members shall be straight and true with angles as sharp as practical for thickness involved, surfaces flat, and fastenings concealed.
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
1.05 A.
Frames: Before shipment, install temporary spreaders at bottom of bucks and do not remove until frames are installed.
B.
Doors: Provide protection as required to protect doors during shipping and storage. Damaged, doors will be rejected.
c.
Inspect hollow metal Work upon delivery for damage. Remove and replace damaged items with new Work as required.
D.
Store doors and frames in an upright position at Project Site under cover and protected from weather-related elements. Store units on minimum 4-inch high wood blocking with Y2 inch air spaces between stacked doors to provide circulation. Do not store doors and frames under plastic or canvas shelters that can create a humidity chamber. If shipping packaging becomes wet, immediately remove packaging. WARRANTY
1.06
•
7.
A.
Manufacturer shall provide a five year material warranty .
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 08 1113-3
•
B.
PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01
•
MANUFACTURERS A.
Doors and frames shall be products of a single manufacturer.
B.
The following are acceptable manufacturers, as are others that can demonstrate their products are equivalent in quality, performance and compliance with these specifications.
c. 2.02
I.
Security Metal Products Corp.
2.
Curries Manufacturing, Inc.
3.
Steel craft.
4.
Amweld Metal Doors and Frames.
5.
Stiles Custom Metal, Inc.
6.
Door Components Inc.
7.
CECO Door.
8.
Equal.
Materials, fabrication and installation must comply with requirements of standards referenced in Section 1.04, Quality Assurance. MATERIALS
A.
•
Installer shall provide a two year fabrication and installation warranty .
Steel: 1.
Exterior Doors and Frames: Galvanized Carbon Sheet Steel, Commercial Quality, A60 zinc coating (0.30 ounces per square foot per side), ASTM A653.
2.
Interior Doors and Frames: Cold-Rolled Steel Sheets, Commercial Quality Carbon Steel, ASTM A I 008.
3.
Steel shall be free of scale, pitting, coil breaks or other surface blemishes, and free of buckles, waves or other defects.
4.
Steel thicknesses expressed in steel gages (MSG) is for reference only. Actual steel thicknesses must meet minimum requirements of ASTM standards and as described in ANSIISDI A250.8 .
8736 CORWIN THEATER REP AIR & P .0. T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 08 1113-4
•
•
B.
Supports and Anchors: Fabricate from a minimum 16 gauge galvanized sheet steel unless noted otherwise .
c.
Fasteners: Provide as shown on Drawings and to suit conditions of secure installations. Furnish 304 Grade stainless steel types at exterior doors.
D.
Door Louvers: Louver free air flow shall be 50% free area.
2.
Louvers for exterior doors shall be galvanized and furnished with not less than 12 gage frame and security grille welded to 18 gage steel blades, fully galvanized, with removable galvanized or bronze insect screen on inside. Install louver with tamperproof-head through-bolts. Anemostat PLSL, Air Louvers Inc. Model 1500-A, L & L Louvers, or equal.
3.
Fusible link louvers: Listed by State Fire Marshal, UL labeled and installed with tamperproof fasteners.
4.
Lightproof louvers (at dark rooms): DRDL by Anemostat, Air Louver Model 1000, L & L Louvers, or equal.
5.
Louvers shall be comply with SDI 111C and be furnished with factory primer.
E.
Vision panels: Manufacturer's standard, U.L. approved, finished flush with door face, with no visible fasteners on either door face .
F.
Shop Paint: 1.
Conform to Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC) for steel components.
2.
Pretreatment/priming coatings shall be compatible with Project site finish painting system in accordance with Section 09 9000.
3.
At frames to be grouted, surfaces that are inaccessible after installation shall be coated with bituminous or asphaltic base paint.
FABRICATION GENERAL
2.03 A.
•
1.
General: Fabricate hollow metal units to be rigid, neat in appearance, and free from defects including warp or buckle. 1.
Accurately form metal to required sizes and profiles. Fit and assemble units in manufacturer's plant. Where practical, factory or shop fit and assemble units for shipment.
2.
Weld joints continuously; grind, dress, and make smooth, flush, and invisible. Filler to conceal manufacturing defects or damage is not permitted .
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 08 1113-5
•
Comer Joints: Finish comer joints by mitering, or coping and butting, or a combination of both. Trim and backbend shall be continuous around comer.
4.
Continuously weld joints for full depth and width of frame, trim, and backbends.
5.
Clearances for Fire-Rated Doors: As required by NFPA 80.
FRAMES
2.04
•
3.
A.
General: Provide fully welded steel frames with integral stops and trim for doors, transoms, sidelights, borrowed lights, and other openings, and with details indicated for type and profile. Use concealed fastenings, unless otherwise indicated.
B.
Metal Thickness of Frames (minimum):
C.
I.
Interior hollow metal frames up to 4-foot wide
16 gage
2.
Interior hollow metal frames wider than 4-foot
14 gage
3.
Exterior hollow metal frames
14 gage
4.
Borrowed lights up to 4-foot wide
16 gage
Supports and Anchors: Fabricate from at least 16-gage, galvanized steel sheet. Frame anchors shall comply with fire rated label requirements of opening . 1.
2.
•
Floor Anchors: a.
Minimum thickness: 12 gage galvanized steel sheet or bent steel plate, securely fastened inside each jamb, with two holes in anchor at each jamb for 3/8 inch floor anchorage fasteners. For preframed wood stud walls provide and additional wood stud anchor located as close to the bottom of the jamb as is practical.
b.
Where required at sloping and uneven floor conditions, or to coordinate adjustments for trim alignments, provide adjustable floor anchors, providing at least 2-inch height adjustments.
Jamb Anchors: a.
Locate anchors near top and bottom and at intermediate points not to exceed 24 inches on center. Provide two anchors per head for openings up to 48 inches wide; over 48 inches wide provide anchors at 24 inches on center maximum.
b.
Anchors in masonry construction: Provide manufacturers standard jamb anchors. Steel wire complying with ASTM A51 0, 0.177 inch in diameter, may be furnished .
8736 COR WIN THEATER REP AIR & P .0. T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 08 1113-6
•
Anchors in Stud Partitions: Provide steel anchors, 16 gage minimum sheet steel, of design to suit partition construction, securely welded inside each jamb.
d.
Through-Frame Anchors: At frames indicated to be anchored with bolts through frame, provide countersunk holes for bolts with 16 gauge minimum sheet steel stiffeners full thickness of frame, and securely welded inside each frame at each hole.
D.
Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Provide manufacturer's standard units. Where zinccoated items are to be built into exterior walls, comply with ASTM A153 Class CorD as required.
E.
Head Reinforcing: Refer to Detail #2 of this section. Reinforcing shall not act as lintel or load-carrying member and shall comply with fire rating requirements. Provide at frames regardless of whether a closer is called for.
F.
Hardware Reinforcement and Accessories:
•
•
c.
1.
Butt Hinge: 7 gage minimum.
2.
Continuous hinge: 14 gage continuous strip reinforcing.
3.
Head assemblies: Reinforced internally with, full length, 10 gage angles on each side of frame and bar at bottom of stop for closer reinforcement in frames as shown in Detail #2 of this section.
4.
Reinforcing for other items of finish hardware shall be accomplished according to ANSI A250.6.
5.
Plaster Guards: Provide 26 gage galvanized steel plaster guards or dust cover boxes, welded to frame, at back of finish hardware cutouts where mortar or other materials might obstruct hardware operation and to close off interior of openings.
G.
Mullion and Transom bars: Furnished and fabricated as specified for frames.
H.
Glazed Openings: Applied stops with mitered or butted corners, of minimum 18 gage galvanized steel, one-piece lengths, secured within 3" of ends and at 12" centers with oval head countersunk tamper resistant screws. Corner joints shall be furnished with contact edges closed tight, with trim faces mitered and continuously welded. Frames for multiple openings shall be provided with mullion and/or rail members, fabricated of closed tubular shapes with no visible seams or joints. Joints between faces of abutting members shall be securely welded and finished smooth. Provide condensate weeps 4 inches on centers, maximum .
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/0112011 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 081113-7
•
I.
Door Silencers: Except for exterior doors, drill and punch frames for three silencers at lock jamb of single swing doors or in double doors with astragal and one silencer per leaf in heads of doubled door frames.
J.
Where frames are installed in walls sitting on a concrete curb, provide a closure plate or extend backbends to provide closure where frame abuts concrete curb.
2.05
DOORS A.
•
General: Custom-made, flush-panel "seamless type" with one-piece face panels; continuous weld, seamless edge construction with no visible seams or joints on faces or on vertical edges. I.
Provide type and size of doors shown with louvers and openings for glazing where indicated.
2.
Door thickness: I % inches.
3.
Face Sheet Minimum Gage: 16 gage.
4.
Stiffeners: Stiffen door face sheets with continuous vertical-formed steel (rib) sections or back to back hat sections, minimum 20 gage, full thickness of interior space between door faces, spaced 6" on center maximum, and spot welded to both faces 4" on center maximum .
5.
Acoustical Insulation: Provide sound deadening and insulating material through entire core of door (full height, width, and thickness of door). Provide STC ratings where indicated on Drawings, scheduled, or for partition ratings indicated on Drawings. a.
•
Doors shall have a minimum STC of 28 as tested under ASTM E90 and ASTM E413, unless noted otherwise ..
6.
Thermal Insulation: Exterior doors shall be insulated to R values scheduled or indicated on drawings.
7.
Labeled Doors: Where fire-rated openings and conditions are indicated. a.
Labeled doors shall be provided with fire-resistance rating indicated and shall be constructed as tested and approved by Underwriters' Laboratories (UL) for installation in labeled frame and door assemblies.
b.
Gaskets: Gaskets are supplied under Section 08 7100 - Door Hardware. Gaskets and installation shall conform to requirements of NFPA 105, "Installation of Smoke and Draft Control Door Assemblies."
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
I 0/0112011 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 08 1113-8
• 8.
c.
Fabricate labeled doors with same finished appearance as specified for non-labeled hollow metal doors; with welded door edges, filled and ground smooth; with label affixed to door.
d.
Where fire labels are required and continuous hinge is specified, install label on top of door within 6" of hinge side of door.
Door Edges: Join door face sheets at vertical edges of door with continuous weld full height of door. Grind, fill, and dress welds smooth to provide invisible seam with smooth, flush surface. a.
Close ends of doors with continuous recessed channels, 16 gage steel minimum, spot welded to both face sheets. Close top and bottom edges of doors with a internal steel channel, screw attached into top and bottom of door. Channel shall be galvanized at exterior doors. No screws are allowed on visible faces of door. Provide openings in bottom closure of exterior doors to permit escape of entrapped moisture.
b.
Profile of Door Edges:
•
•
Single-acting swing doors: Bevel both vertical edges 118" in 2".
2) .
Pairs of single-acting swing doors: Bevel hinge edge 118" in 2". Provide surface mounted astragals for labeled or unlabeled doors unless otherwise shown on Drawings or required.
3).
Double-acting swing doors: Round both vertical edges on 2" minimum radius.
9.
Door Louvers: Install according to manufacturers recommendations.
I 0.
Glass Stops:
1 I. K.
1.)
a.
Furnish fixed stops integral with and welded at security side of door.
b.
Finish: Factory primer.
Transom: Fabricate to requirements specified for flush doors.
Hardware Reinforcement and Accessories: l.
Provide sheet steel or plate reinforcement for finish hardware items wherever necessary. Mortise, drill and tap to template requirements for mortise type hardware.
2.
Butt reinforcing: 7 gage minimum, of length 4" longer than length of butt. Minimum 3 spot welds at top and bottom .
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/0112011 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 081113-9
• 2.06
3.
Door closer reinforcement: 14 gage minimum steel channel, 6" high on each side of door.,. Reinforcement to extend full width of door in accordance with Detail # 1 of this section.
4.
Other Hardware Requirements: Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap doors and frames for other hardware, including energy management switches or contacts and security devices, in accordance with furnished hardware templates for accessory items. Thickness and size of reinforcement shall be as required by ANSI A250.6.
SHOP PRIMING A.
Exposed and concealed metal surfaces of hollow metal doors, frames and other hollow metal Work of this Section shall be bonderized and then shop primed.
B.
Exposed surfaces of doors, frames and accessories shall be filled, sanded smooth and cleaned before painting.
c.
Exposed surfaces shall be shop primed after assembly.
PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01
•
FRAME INSTALLATION
A.
Install steel frames accurately in location, perfect alignment, plumb, straight and true. Brace frames to prevent displacement.
B.
Anchor frames in concrete and concrete unit masonry with galvanized anchor bolts; 3/8 inch diameter, counter-sunk at 24 inches on center at head and jamb unless noted otherwise.
C.
Anchor frames in steel and wood frame partitions with manufacturer recommended anchors.
D.
Install frame at fire rated openings in accordance with NFPA Standard No. 80.
E.
Furnish filler for anchor attachment screws, and sand smooth.
3.02
•
DOOR INSTALLATION A.
Install steel doors in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and as indicated on Drawings and in Finish Hardware Specifications. Coordinate with Work of other trades.
B.
Ensure that door and jamb clearances comply with requirements of ANSI/NFPA 80. When wood doors are being installed in metal frames constructed pursuant to this section, allowable door and jamb clearances shall be as specified in Specification Section 08 1416 .
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES I-UGH SCHOOL
10/0112011 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 08 1113-10
•
C.
Adjust operable parts for correct function .
D.
Remove hardware, except primer-coated items, tag, box and install after finish painting has been completed. PRIME COAT TOUCH-UP
3.03 A.
CLEANUP
3.04 A. 3.05 A.
Immediately after installation, remove rust, repair damaged surfaces to new condition, sand smooth, and install touch-up primer.
Remove rubbish, debris and waste materials and legally dispose of off Project site. PROTECTION
Protect Work of this section until Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION
•
•
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR& P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/0112011 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 081113-11
•
DETAIL
#1
- DOOR REINFORCEMENT
ELEVATION DOOR CLOSER--~ REINFORCEMENT PLATE 11 10 HIGH FUll WIDTH I 10 GAGE STEEL
DOOR STIFFENERS, TYP. -1-----i+-~..... ~ AT 6 INCHES ON CENTER
DOOR KICKPLATf----+--..u
•
REI NFORC EMENT PLATE 10D HIGH FULl WIDTH 610 GAGE STEEL
0ETAIL
#1
- DOOR HARDWARE REINFORCEMENT
DOOR CLOSER REINFORCEMENT FOR All STEEl DOOR FRAMES FULL LENGTH, 10 GAGE STEEL-------. ANGLES WELDED TO EACH SIDE OF FP.AME ~~EADER SECTION FRAME HEADER SECTION -----~-...JI 16 GI\GE STEEl ~~==it' FULL LENGTH. i 0 GAGE STEEL-------' BAR W£tDED INTO STOP
•
8736 CORWfN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 08 1113-12
•
#3
DETAIL
- CONGREli WALl CONDITION
DETAIL FOR EXliERIOR DOOR WHERE RAIN DRIP IS :REQUIRED. EXTERIOR SIDE WITH 22 GAGE GLAVANIZED SHEET METAL OR PAINT LOCK RAJ N DRIP WELDED IN PLACE.
SPOl WELD TO FRAME AT 3 'INCHES ON CENTER,
WITH WELDS W11HIN ONE INCH OF EACH ENO.
FRAME
HEADER
16 GAGE STEEL
•
DETAIL
# 3A
sEcnoN~_,..,_......,.-~~L . . •.
- PLASTER WALL CONDITION
D£TAIL FOR EX"fTERIOR DOOR WHERE RAIN DRIP IS REQUIRED. EXTERIOR SIDE WITH 22 GAGE GLAVANIZED SHEET METAL OR PAINT LOCK RAJ N DRIP WELDED IN PLACE. SPOT WELD TO FRAME AT 3
~INCHES
ON CENTER,
WiTH WELDS WITHIN ONE I'NC H OF EACH ENO.
FRAME HEADER 16 GAGE STEEL
•
sEcnoN--o-t~L
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR& P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/0112011 HOLLOW l\.1ETAL DOORS AND FRAJ\.1ES 081113-13
•
SECTION 08 1416 FLUSH WOOD DOORS
PART 1- GENERAL SUMMARY
1.01 A.
Section Includes: 1.
B.
1.
Division 01 - General Requirements.
2.
Section 06 2000- Finish Carpentry.
3.
Section 08 71 00 - Door Hardware.
4.
Section 09 9000 - Painting and Coating.
A.
Drawings indicate sizes, locations and general details of wood door construction and installation .
B.
Regulatory Requirements:
1.03
•
Related Requirements:
DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
1.02
•
Wood doors.
1.
Fire rated doors shall be listed by a nationally recognized. testing and certification agency in accordance with local building codes and acceptable to the authorities having jurisdiction. The listed doors shall meet or exceed the requirements of ULIOB, NFPA 252 and NFPA 80. All door requiring firerating shall carry either a UL or ITS (Intertek Testing Services-Warnock Hersey) label.
2.
ASTM E2074 - Standard Test Method for Fire Tests of Door Assemblies, Including Positive Pressure on Side-Hinged and Pivoted Swinging Door Assemblies.
SUBMITTALS A.
Shop Drawings: Submit schedules, plans, elevations and details indicating door construction details, opening identification symbols, sizes, door type and grade, fire classification, swing, light and louver cutout size and locations, and undercuts.
B.
Product Data: Submit manufacturers technical data for each specified door type, including details of wood species, design and construction, factory finishing specifications and installation instructions .
8736 CORWfN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08 1416-1
•
c.
Construction Samples: Submit samples of not less than 6-inch by 6-inch for each type of door to be furnished, showing face, edge and core construction .
D.
Color/finish Samples: Submit samples of not less than 4-inch by 6-inch on representative door finish and samples of 3-inch by 8-inch for the exposed edges. Each sample shall bear a label identifying the job name, Architect, Contractor and the Woodwork Insitute finish system number.
E.
Certificates:
2.
Submit certification that fire rated doors comply with CBC Section 715 or UL lOB.
A.
Wood doors construction, manufacture, and fabrication shall conform to ANSIIWDMA I.S. 1-A, custom grade, extra heavy duty grade including the latest revisions, and special requirements specified.
B.
Doors shall be fabricated, hardware factory fitted and machined, and factory finished, unless noted otherwise.
c.
Wood Door Finishes shall comply with the Architectural Woodwork Institute Standards .
D.
Doors shall be products of one manufacturer.
E.
Door modifications are not permitted, unless reviewed by the OAR. DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
1.05 A.
Deliver materials in manufacturers original, unopened, undamaged containers with identification labels intact.
B.
Deliver doors to the Project site only after building has been provided with design temperature and humidity.
c.
Store and handle in accordance with ANSIIWDMA I.S.l-A. Store doors protected from exposure to harmful conditions and at temperature and humidity conditions recommended by the manufacturer. PROJECT CONDITIONS
1.06
A.
Do not install doors until building is enclosed and ambient conditions are within the temperature and humidity range recommended by door manufacturer. WARRANTY
1.07 A.
•
Submit Certificate that solid core doors comply with all requirements of ANSIIWDMA I.S. 1-A.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.04
•
1.
Manufacturer shall provide a two year material warranty for exterior doors.
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08 1416-2
•
B.
Manufacturer shall provide a life time material warranty for interior doors .
C.
Installer shall provide a two year fabrication and installation warranty for all doors.
PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01
MANUFACTURERS A.
2.02
•
Provide products manufactured by one of the following:
I.
Algoma Hardwood Inc.
2.
Brentwood Manufacturing.
3.
Eggers Industries.
4.
Mohawk Flush Door, Inc
5.
VT Industries, Inc.
6.
Western Oregon Door.
7.
Equal.
DOOR CONSTRUCTION A.
Exterior Flush Doors: 1.
a.
Transparent Finished (Stained): Custom grade, extra heavy duty grade, solid wood core, 5 ply, veneer faces, fully bonded to core.
b.
Opaque Finished (Painted): Custom grade extra heavy duty grade, solid wood core, 5 ply, medium density overlay faces, bonded to core.
2.
Staved Lumber Core shall be low density, thoroughly kiln-dried wood blocks not more than 2 lh-inches wide, with joints staggered, and random lengths.
3.
Edge strips: Shall be kiln-dried birch or maple
4.
•
Exterior doors shall be furnished as follows:
a.
Transparent Finished Doors: Same species as face veneer or similar in overall color, grain, character and contrast as the face veneer.
b.
Opaque Finished Doors: Close grain hardwood.
Full stile edge strip shall be not less that 2 inches wide. Stiles shall be fully bonded to the core. The outer face stiles shall be full length % inch birch or maple. The inner back stile shall be I 14-inch, 2 ply of similar species which may have four finger joints well staggered or be full lengths .
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
I 0/01/20 II FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08 1416-3
•
5.
Top rail shall be a minimum of 2 inches with a maximum of three plies. Bottom rail shall be a minimum of 5 inches with a maximum of 6 plies. The outer rail faces shall be full length 7/8 inch of same species as edge strips. The inner rails shall be full length of similar species. Rails shall be fully bonded to core.
6.
Crossbanding: Doors shall be furnished with full width crossbanding of properly dried hardwood, l/I6 inch thick, with a density of 52 pounds or higher per cubic foot.
7.
Opaque Finished Doors: Custom grade medium density overlay hardboard.
8.
Adhesive and Bonding: Bonding between veneer plies of wood face panels, and between door faces, frame and core unit shall be fabricated with type I waterproof cross-linking emulsion PVA adhesive.
9.
Openings: Openings for lights, louvers and grilles, shall be fabricated by manufacturer, or in a certified door service mill in accordance with manufacturer's details, and in compliance with approved testing agency.
I 0.
Louvers:
• B.
a.
Louvers for exterior doors shall be furnished with at least I2 gage frame and security grill welded to 18 gage steel blades, fully galvanized, with removable galvanized or bronze insect screen on inside. Install louver with tamperproof-head through-bolts: Anemostat PLSL, Air Louvers Inc. Model 1500-A, L & L Louvers, or equal.
b.
Light-proof louvers (at Dark Rooms): Type DRDL by Anemostat, Air Louver Model I 000, L & L Louvers, or equal.
c.
Louvers shall be furnished with factory primer.
II.
Vision Panels: Vision panels in exterior doors shall be framed with Security Grille Glass Stop: Anemostat Sl-IS, Air Louvers Inc. VLF-SG, L & L Louvers, or equal. Install vision panels with tamperproof-head through bolts. Security Grille shall be supplied with manufacturer's standard baked-on enamel finish.
I2.
Security Grilles: Refer to Section 08 5656.
Interior Flush Doors: I.
Interior doors shall be furnished as follows: a.
2.
I
Opaque Finished (Painted): Custom grade. MDO hardboard face, fully bonded to core.
Solid wood core, 5 ply,
Structural-Composite-Lumber-Core Doors: a.
Structural Composite Lumber: WDMA I.S.IO.
b.
Screw Withdrawal, Face: 700 pound-feet.
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08 1416-4
•
c. 3.
C.
Opaque Finished Doors: Close grain hardwood.
4.
Full stile edge strip shall be not less that 1 Y2 inches wide, two ply stile. Stiles shall be fully bonded to the core. The outer face stile shall be full length % inch birch or maple. The inner back stile shall be % inch of similar species which may have two finger joints fully bonded to core.
5.
Top and bottom edge rails shall be full length and may be of glued up stock of similar species as edge strip, white fir or douglas fir, minimum density 24.33 pounds or higher per cubic foot. Top rail shall be minimum of 2 inches. Bottom rail shall be minimum of 5 inches fully bonded to core.
6.
Crossbanding: Doors shall be furnished with full width crossbanding of properly dried hardwood or engineered fiber composite material, 1116 inch thick, with a density of 52 pounds or higher per cubic foot.
7.
Opaque Finished Doors: Custom grade medium density overlay hardboard.
8.
Adhesive and Bonding: Bonding between veneer plies of wood face panel, and between door faces, frame and core unit shall be fabricated with type I or II waterproof adhesives for interior doors.
9.
Openings: Openings for lights, louvers and grilles shall be performed by the manufacturer, or in a certified door service mill in accordance with manufacturer's details, and in compliance with testing agency requirements.
I 0.
Louvers:
11.
•
Edge strips: Kiln-dried birch, maple or other material as indicated. a.
•
Screw Withdrawal, Edge: 400 pound-feet.
a.
Louvers for interior doors shall be furnished with at least 12 gage cold rolled steel frames and security grill welded to 18 gage blades: Anemostat PLSL, Air Louvers Inc. Model 1500-A, L & L Louvers, or equal.
b.
For fire rated doors: Anemostat FLDL-UL-SG2, Air Louvers Inc. Model 1900-ASG, L & L Louvers, or equal.
c.
Light Proof Louvers (at Dark Rooms): Anemostat Model DRDL, Air Louvers Inc. Model I 000, L & L Louvers, or equal.
d.
Install louvers with tamperproof-head through bolts.
Vision Panels: Vision panels in fire labeled doors shall be framed with FGS75 Fire Glass Stop by Anemostat, Air Louvers Inc. Model VLF, or equal and shall be State Fire Marshall listed. Frame shall be supplied with manufacturer's standard baked-on enamel finish. Install with tamperproofhead through bolts.
Fire Rated Doors:
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/0112011 FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08 1416-5
•
1.
Fire doors must meet the requirements of recognized fire door tests and bear certifying labels of an approved independent testing agency .
2.
With exception to the requirements that would adversely affect the fire rating, rated doors shall meet the specifications listed in this section.
3.
Door shall be constructed that when installed as an assembly and tested it will pass ASTM E2074 "Standard Test Method for Fire Test of Door Assemblies Including Positive Pressure Testing of Side-Hinged and Pivoted Swinging Door Assemblies," and can be rated as required.
4.
Reinforcement Blocking: Provide hardware reinforcement blocking of size as required to secure specified hardware. Reinforcement blocking shall be in compliance with the manufacturer's labeling requirements and shall not be of mineral material.
FINISHING:
2.03 A.
• B.
FACTORY FINISHING: I.
Factory finishing shall be A WI Custom Grade and include all necessary preparation, materials and labor to provide an [Opaque] [Clear Transparent] [Stained Transparent] finish.
2.
Finish faces, all four edges, edges of cutouts, and mortises. Stains and fillers may be omitted on top and bottom edges, edges of cutouts, and mortises.
3.
Finish: [System 5, conversion varnish] [System 9, UV curable, acrylated epoxy, polyester, or urethane] [System 10, UV curable, water based] [or] [System II, catalyzed polyurethane].
4.
Staining: [Match Architect's sample] [As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range] [None required].
5.
Effect: [Open-grain finish] [Filled finish] [Semifilled finish, produced by applying an additional finish coat to partially fill the wood pores].
6.
Sheen: [Satin] [Semigloss].
JOB SITE FINISHING: 1.
Doors indicated to be job site finished shall be factory back primed. a.
2.
Doors Scheduled for Opaque Paint finish: Prime with one coat of wood primer indicated on Section 09 9000 - Painting and Coating.
Door Finish: Per Section 09 9000- Painting and Coating.
PART 3- EXECUTION 3.0I
I
INSTALLATION
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES IDGH SCHOOL
I 0/01120 II
FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08 1416-6
•
A.
Install Work of this section as specified in ANSIIWDMA I.S. 1-A. Install fire doors in accordance with NFPA 80.
B.
Provide each door accurately cut, trimmed, and fitted to its frame and hardware. Clearance at lock and hanging stile and at top shall be 1/8 inch, and bottom shall not exceed 114 inch except where otherwise indicated. Arises shall be rounded to a 1116 inch radius, and lock rail edges shall be slightly beveled. Screws for hardware shall not be driven but screwed into pre-drilled holes.
C.
Doors shall operate freely, but not loosely, without sticking or binding, without hingebind conditions and with hardware properly adjusted and functioning.
3.02
CLEANUP A.
Remove rubbish, waste and debris and legally dispose of off the Project site. PROTECTION
3.03
A.
Protect the Work of this section until Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION
•
•
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/0112011 FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08 1416-7
•
SECTION 08 7100 DOOR HARDWARE
PART 1- GENERAL SUMMARY
1.01 A.
B.
D.
•
Section Includes: I.
Door hardware.
2.
Door Hardware Schedule.
3.
Fire Department Key Vault.
Related Requirements: 1.
Division 01 - General Requirements.
2.
Section 08 1113 - Hollow Metal Doors and Frames.
Items listed in other sections and not included herein as "Door Hardware" 1.
Cabinet hardware, except keying.
2.
Bath accessories, excepting keying.
3.
Nameplates, room numbers exit signs.
4.
Disabled access signs.
5.
Roll-up door hardware, except cylinders and padlocks.
6.
Smoke detectors, 120VAC power, wiring, and conduit.
7.
Door position switches.
8.
Access panels, except padlocks.
9.
Gate hardware, except locking devices.
10.
Local alarms and annunciators.
DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
1.02 A.
Design Requirements:
8t!Pc:ORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGHSCHOOL
10/0112011 DOOR HARDWARE 08 7100-1
• B.
•
1.03
1.
Exit doors, including each leaf of a pair of doors, shall always be operable from the inside by the simple turn of a lever or by pushing an exit device without the use of a key or any special knowledge or effort; this includes doors of toilet and storage rooms.
2.
Unless otherwise specified, hand activated door opening hardware shall be located 36 inches above the finish floor.
3.
Dead bolts are not permitted unless operable with a single effort by a lever type hardware.
4.
The force applied to operate exit hardware shall not require more than 15 lbs. applied in the direction oftravel.
Regulatory Requirements: l.
Comply with CBC requirements.
2.
Hardware for fire doors shall conform to requirements of UL - Fire Protection and Accident Hazard Equipment and the California State Fire Marshal listing, NFPA- 80 and CBC requirements for positive pressure testing.
3.
Hardware shall meet the requirements ofCBC, Chapter liB.
SUBMITTALS A.
Shop Drawings: l.
B.
Wiring Diagrams: Submit diagrams, templates, instruction, and installation manuals, for electrical and electronic hardware.
Product Data: Finish Hardware Schedule: I.
Submit schedule including recap sheet: a.
Include manufacturer's name, catalog number, relevant dimensions, fasteners, location of item in Work, door index number, frame material, door material, door size and thickness, door type, handing, fire-rating (if any), and sound-rating (if any).
b.
Hardware shall be listed by "Headings" in following manner: l)
HEADING NO.1 l SINGLE/PAIR OF DOORS NO. (Room and Number) from/to (Room and Number)
•
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HlGH SCHOOL
10/01/20 II DOOR HARDWARE 08 7100-2
1 SINGLE/PAIR OF DOORS NO. (Room and Number) from/to (Room and Number)
•
SPEC. NO. List the appropriate numbers from the specified LIST OF FINISH HARDWARE List of finish hardware 2)
c.
Material Samples: Submit Samples of door hardware as required by Architect.
D.
Submittal Review Time: In lieu of what is specified in Section 01 3000, allow at least twenty-eight days in the Milestones Schedule for Architect and OAR review following receipt of submittal. QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.04
•
A.
Each type of finish hardware furnished for the Work shall be of same make or manufacture, unless otherwise specified. Where existing items are being supplemented with new items, match existing items, subject to current code requirements and accessibility recommendations.
B.
Coordinate and deliver templates or physical Samples of finish hardware items to manufacturer of interfacing items, such as doors and frames, in a timely manner to insure orderly progress of Work.
C.
Comply with the following as a minimum requirement:
A.
•
1.
Conform to Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association (BHMA) Finish Code, latest edition.
2.
DHI WDHS.3: Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Wood Flush Doors
3.
DHI WDHS.4: Recommended Hardware Reinforcement Locations for Mineral Core Wood Flush Doors.
4.
HMMA 831: Recommended Hardware Locations for Custom Hollow Metal Doors and Frames
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
1.05
1.06
HEADING NO. 2, etc.
Package each item of hardware and each lockset individually, complete with necessary installation instructions, screws and fastenings, and installation templates; marked with item number corresponding to number on Finish Hardware Schedule. WARRANTY
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/0l/2011 DOOR HARDWARE 08 7100-3
•
A.
1.07
Manufacturer shall provide a minimum two year material warranty except as follows: 1.
Provide a ten year manufacturer's material warranty for door closers.
2.
Provide a five year manufacturer's material warranty for locksets and exit devices.
MAINTENANCE MATERIALS A.
Extra Materials: 1.
Provide five percent or a minimum or one, whichever is greater, of the following hardware: locksets, exit devices, closers, fire rated smoke seals, seals, and electric or electronic hardware. Transmit to OAR before Substantial Completion.
PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01
MATERIALS A.
•
•
Butts and Hinges: I.
Width of hinges shall be of sufficient size to clear trim. Where provided with magnetic holders, hinge width shall be of sufficient size to ensure door is parallel to wall when magnetic holders are engaged.
2.
Furnish one pair of hinges for door leaves up to 5-foot high. Furnish one additional hinge for every additional 30 inches or fraction thereof.
3.
Butts for doors shall be non-rising, loose pins, with button tip.
4.
Exterior and interior out-swinging doors with butt hinges shall be furnished with hinges furnished with a setscrew in hinge barrel to make pin non-removable (NRP); exterior and interior out-swinging doors hinges shall have continuous hinges furnished with hospital tips. Butt hinges at exterior out-swinging doors shall have stainless steel pins and bearings.
5.
Hinges installed on painted doors shall be BHMA 600 finishes. Hinges installed on stained and varnished doors shall be BHMA 626 for bronze/brass base metals and BHMA 652 for steel base metal. Exterior doors shall have non-ferrous hinges. Firerated doors shall have steel or stainless steel hinges.
6.
Following doors shall be furnished with Grade barrel type hinges with hospital tip: a.
Student Dining Exit.
b.
Student Multi-Occupancy Toilet.
c.
Gymnasium Exit.
8736 CORWIN THEATER REP AIR & P .0. T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
full-length continuous pin and
10/01/2011 DOOR HARDWARE 08 7100-4
•
•
B.
c.
D.
•
d.
42-inch Wide or Wider Doors .
e.
Corridor Doors Opening to the Exterior.
Locksets and Trim: I.
Unless otherwise specified, locks shall be of mortise type, complying with ANSI Al56.13, grade I.
2.
Unless otherwise specified, escutcheons shall be 7 Yz-inch by 2 1/4-inch wide by 0.050 thick minimum.
3.
Levers shall be cast, and shall return to within Y2 inch of face of door.
4.
Outside lever shall be pinned. Inside lever shall be by "Allen Head Set Screw" or by "Spanner Ring Nut".
5.
Lock strikes shall be curved lip type, with exposed edges and comers rounded, of sufficient length to protect jamb and trim, and shall not extend more than 1/8 inch beyond trim, jambs or face of doors in pairs. At out-swinging pairs with overlapping as tragal, strike shall have a 7/8 inch lip-to-center dimension. Dust box shall be provided for door locks.
6.
Locksets throughout shall be lever type of same manufacture.
Exit Devices: I.
Unless otherwise specified, exterior doors shall be furnished with rim touch bar device; right hand reverse active leaf- night latch function by cylinder by hardened cylinder ring by flush pull by sex nut and bolt. Left-hand reverse inactive leaf- exit only by flush pull by sex nut and bolt.
2.
Unless otherwise specified, interior doors shall be furnished with rim touch bar device; right hand reverse active leaf-lever handle by cylinder, left hand reverse inactive leaf; exit only.
3.
Fire labeled exit devices shall conform to UL label requirements and be listed by the California State Fire Marshal.
4.
Exit devices throughout shall be touch bar types of same manufacture. Exit devices shall meet ANSI BHMA, A 15 3.3 Grade 1.
5.
Lever design shall match lock levers.
6.
Exit devices shall be furnished sized for the specific door width and height.
Door Closers:
8736 CORWINTHEATERREPAIR&P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 DOOR HARDWARE 08 7100-5
•
1.
Door closers shall conform to ANSI A156.4, Grade I, CBC 1133B.2.5 .
2.
Door closers shall be heavy duty, rigid parallel arm; provide regular arm for regular bevel doors.
3.
Door closer shall be full rack and pinion type, adjustable back check, and sweep and latch speed with key regulating screws.
4.
Door closer shall have full fitted cover of plastic or stainless steel, attached to door closer body with tamperproof screws.
5.
Provide spacer block or support bracket for securing fifth screw on closer arm shoe. Provide special brackets, shoes, or other attachment devices as required.
6.
Maximum pressure to operate doors shall not exceed following:
6.
• E.
•
Fire rated doors: The authority having jurisdiction may determine the maximum force, not to exceed 15.0 pounds to operate fire doors to achieve positive latching.
b.
Exterior doors: 5.0 pounds.
c.
Interior doors: 5.0 pounds.
Door closers shall be installed at the following:
a.
Exterior doors.
b.
Fire rated doors.
c.
Corridor doors.
d.
Toilet doors.
Protection Plates: Furnish kick plates of 10-inch high by 2-inch less door width on single doors, 10-inch high by I inch less door width on pairs of doors. Provide one plate for push side of closer-equipped doors. Furnish mop plates 4-inch high by I inch less door width on doors swinging into toilet rooms. 1.
F.
a.
Kick and mop plates shall be a minimum 0.050 inch thick; Type 304 stainless steel, with finished beveled edges (B4E).
Stops: 1.
Floor stops shall be mounted to protect door and trim.
2.
Furnish stop of appropriate height, minimum o/4 inch above undercut of door.
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HJGH SCHOOL
10/0!/2011 DOOR HARDWARE 08 7100-6
3.
•
G.
1.
Install gaskets and intumescent seals on fire rated doors and frames.
2.
Unless otherwise specified, install weather stripping on doors from air-conditioned spaces to the exterior: fastener-applied frame seals, nylon-brush door sweeps, and, at pairs, astragals.
Thresholds: Unless otherwise specified, thresholds shall conform to CBC Chapter liB accessibility standards and ADAAG.
I.
Push Plates: Plates shall be 0.050 thick, 6-inch by 16-inch minimum, with beveled edges.
K.
1.
Door Pulls: Pulls shall have protective plate mounted under pull, 0.050 inches thick, 4-inch by 16-inch beveled on four edges.
2.
Hardware Cutouts: Pull plates and push plates installed over locking hardware shall have cylinder and turn lever cutouts as required.
Automatic Flush Bolts: l.
Strike plates for automatic bolts shall be provided for active door.
2.
Provide dust proof strikes for bottom bolts.
Coordinators: 1.
Provide brackets as required for items fastened to coordinators.
2.
Provide door strike plates for both doors with coordinators.
L.
Smoke Detectors and Magnetic Holders: Coordinate electrical devices with Division 26 and the Drawings.
M.
Fasteners: Shall match finish of hardware. Provide fasteners for all hardware at toilet rooms, custodian rooms, kitchen doors, and exterior doors: stainless steel for chrome, aluminum, or stainless finish hardware; brass or bronze for brass or bronze finish hardware. FINISH
2.02 A.
•
Weather stripping/Gasketing:
H.
J.
•
Where the specified floor stop cannot be installed or would present a pedestrian hazard, omit and furnish a heavy-duty overhead stop (626 finish); if closer is specified, furnish closer with integral spring-cushion stop arm.
Unless otherwise specified, finish of hardware shall be dull chromium-plated BHMA 652 for steel-based metals, BHMA 626 for brass-based metals, except for kickplate, escutcheons, push plates, continuous hinges, lock strike plates, and exit device touch bars, which shall be BHMA 630. Levers for locksets and exit devices shall be BHMA 626 .
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 DOOR HARDWARE 08 7100-7
•
B.
2.03
Unless otherwise specified, overhead door closers and brackets shall be BHMA 689, to match other finish hardware in same room or space . CYLINDERS AND KEYING
A.
Project shall be keyed in accordance with keying schedule, prepared and furnished by the OAR.
B.
Provide a cylinder security collar (SPEC. NO. 87) at each exterior door cylinder. Provide cylinder collars and spacers at all cylinders as needed to provide a neat, tight and secure fit of the cylinder to the locking hardware.
c.
Permanent Cylinders: 1.
• D.
•
Permanent cylinders shall be standard core type, 7-pins maximum. a.
Permanent cylinders as manufactured by shall be Owner furnished. The Work of this section includes obtaining the permanent cylinders from the Owner, and pinning, stamping, and installing.
b.
Provide to the OAR an approved hardware schedule and floor plans. OAR shall return with keying added to the approved hardware schedule, bitting chart, and a complete sample set of permanent keys. OAR will provide notification when the cylinders are available for pick-up at the District's Central Lock Shop located at 1240 Naomi Street, Los Angeles .
2.
Permanent cylinders shall be pinned with third-party (e.g., "LAB") 0.005 inch increment pins.
3.
Pin cylinders according to OAR-furnished sample set of permanent keys, OARfurnished bitting chart and OAR-furnished key schedule.
4.
Change keys and master keys shall operate inside and outside cylinder on two cylinder locks, unless otherwise indicated.
5.
Provide the set number of change key only stamped on cylinder faces.
Key Control: 1.
Permanent cylinders and sample set of permanent keys shall be not used during the construction phase of the Project. Temporary construction cylinders and keys used for securing the Work is included as part of the Work of this section and will not be provided by the Owner.
2.
Upon Substantial Completion of the Work, sample set of original keys shall be returned to the OAR. Duplication of Owner keys, or retaining keys, is not permitted .
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
I 0/01/20 II DOOR HARDWARE 08 7100-8
3.
•
Provide four unstamped, uncut nickel silver key blanks per cylinder to the OAR prior to Substantial Completion. Key blanks shall be by the permanent cylinder manufacturer and of the same keyway as the sample set of permanent keys or keyway designated by Owner.
PART 3- EXECUTION INSTALLATION
3.01 A.
•
Finish hardware shall be installed as specified in Finish Hardware Schedule. 1.
Placement of Hardware: Finish hardware shall be installed as indicated on hardware placement sheets attached to end of this section.
2.
Provide necessary screws, bolts, anchors, and fastenings, of required sizes and type for proper installation of hardware. Exposed screws shall have Phillips heads, and wood screws shall be fully threaded.
3.
Fitting: Hardware shall be accurately fitted and, with exception of prime-coated butt or continuous hinges, bar-type coordinators, and flat astragals, shall be removed before finish painting is installed. Upon completion of finish painting and/or sealing, permanently install the hardware.
4.
Anchorage of Hardware: Hardware fastened to concrete, masonry, or gunite construction shall be provided with drop-in expansion anchors by "Red Head Multi Set II", "Rawl Steel", or as otherwise required by hardware manufacturer. Pilot holes of suitably lesser diameter shall be drilled prior to the insertion of wood and sheet metal screws.
5.
Door escutcheons and push plates shall be installed with stainless steel or bronze, oval, "Phillips Head", fully threaded screws, not less than 3/4 inch- No.6.
6.
Exit devices shall be mounted with non-ferrous sex nuts and fully threaded machine screws, except where through bolts engage outside trim of locking case.
7.
Mullion strike shall be installed with fully threaded machine screws.
8.
Door closer shall be installed for maximum degree of opening of each door.
9.
Following shall be installed with sex nuts and fully threaded machine screws.
10.
•
a.
Door closers.
b.
Door pulls.
Install exterior doorstops as required. On new concrete, stops shall be installed with 114-20 screws. On asphalt concrete, stops shall be installed with 114-20 screws to an
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HJGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 DOOR HARDWARE 08 7100-9
anchor plate set in a concrete monument. Anchor plate shall be Trimco 1268, or equal. Floor stops shall not be located in the path of travel and shall be located no more than 4 inches from walls.
•
•
11.
3.02
Kickplates shall be installed with screws at each comer, and screws evenly spaced along each side not more than 3 inches apart on centers.
b.
Except on wood doors, screws shall be undercut pan head.
12.
Thresholds shall be installed with 114-20 screws, set in Pour-Roc or mastic per section 07 9200, and coped to trim.
13.
Sound Seals and Weather stripping I Gasketing: a.
A mounting screw shall be installed within 2 inches of cuts or comers of weather stripping and/or gasketing.
b.
Sound seals and weather stripping and/or gasketing shall be installed with No. 8 - 3/4 inch Tek Phillips pan head screws.
14.
Exterior doors not otherwise specified shall be provided with SPECS. 8, 27, 28, 31, 51, 64, 75, 81, 84, 87, 93, 98, 101.
15.
Interior doors not otherwise specified shall be provided with SPECS. 3, 29, 51, 63, 84, 88, 100.
A.
Before Substantial Completion, hardware shall be cleaned and inspected. Where hardware is deemed defective, repair or replace as required.
B.
Door Closers: Final adjustments shall be performed before Substantial Completion, with mechanical system balanced and in operation. EXAMINATION
A.
Upon completion of installation, verify correct installation of hardware, according to reviewed Hardware Schedule and Keying Schedule. Verify that finish hardware is m optimum working condition. PROTECTION
3.04 A.
•
a.
ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
3.03
3.05
Kickplate:
Protect the Work of this section until Substantial Completion. LIST OF FINISH HARDWARE
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGHSCHOOL
10/01/2011 DOOR HARDWARE 08 7100-10
•
A.
Following items designated by "SPEC NO." comprise the list of Finish Hardware, from which hardware shall be furnished as specified and required to complete the Work: 1.
HINGES
SPEC. NO. 1--Not Utilized SPEC. NO. 2 --Full Mortise Hinges --Non-Ferrous -- For Exterior Reverse Bevel Doors Ball or oilite bearings, 4 1/2-inch by 4-inch, or as required to clear projections, primed or plated as required. Furnish with security studs. Furnish with stainless steel non-removable pins and bearings. Hager BB 1191-NRP-SH BB1199-NRP-SH
Reg. Wt.Heavy Wt.-
Bommer BB5001-A BB5005--A
Reg. Wt.Heavy Wt.
Stanley FBB191-NRP-Sec. St. FBB 199-NRP-Sec. St.
Me Kinney TA2314-NRP-SSF T4A3386-NRP-SSF
Ives 5BB1 NRP/SS 5BB1HW NRP/SS
PBB BB21-NRP 4B21-NRP
SPEC. NO. 3 -- Full Mortise -- General Interior Doors Steel, ball or oilite bearings, 4 1/2-inch by 4-inch, or as required to clear projections, primed or plated as required. Furnish with non-removable pins at outswinging doors.
••
Bommer BB5000
Hager BB-1279
Me Kinney TA-2714
Stanley FBB-1 79
Ives 5BB 1
PBB BB81
SPEC. NO.s 4 to 7- Not Used SPEC. NO. 8--Edge Mount Continuous Hinge -- High Frequency Interior and Exterior Use, Stainless Steel Pin and Barrel Type with non-removable Stainless Steel Pin. McKinney Markar Stanley PBB Hager MCK-FM-300 CH51 651 FM-300 790-900 SPEC. NO. 9- Edge Mount Continuous Hinge-- Medium Frequency Interior Use, Steel Pin and Barrel Type with non-removable Stainless Steel Pin. Hager 790-900
Markar FM-200
McKinney MCK-FM-300
Stanley 641
PBB CH81
SPEC. NO 10- Aluminum Continuous Hinge- High Frequency Interior or Exterior at Non Rated Openings. Select
Hager/Rotan
Stanley
PBB SL24HD CL
780-224HD
662HD
Hager/Raton
Stanley
CH31
At Rated Openings Select PBB
•
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 DOOR HARDWARE 08 7100-11
•
SL24HD CL F
780-224HD-HT-FP
662HD-FP
CG31L-F
SPEC. NO. 11 and 12 Not Utilized 2.
LOCKSETS
SPEC. NO. 13 --Lock-- Interior Doors One cylinder: Key in cylinder locks or unlocks outside lever, inside lever always free. Protected front and deadlocking latch. Corbin/Russwin ML2055NSM
Sargent 8237LW1L
Schlage L-9070-06N
Marks LA 118J
SPEC. NO. 14 -- Lock -- Classroom Security Two cylinders: Key in inside cylinder locks or unlocks outside lever, key in outside cylinder retracts latch, inside lever always free. Protected front and deadlocking latch. Corbin/Russwin ML2052NSM
Sargent 8238LWIL
Schlage L-9071-06N
Marks LA 118GG
SPEC. NO. 15 --Lock-- Cylinder Both Sides Two cylinders: Dead bolt operated by key in either cylinder, latch bolt retracted by lever from either side. Protected front. Do not install at exit doors.
•
Corbin/Russwin ML2022NSM
Sargent 8226L W 1L
Schlage L-9466-06N
Marks LA I 18C
SPEC. NO. 16 -- Latchset Latch bolt retracted by lever from either side. Protected front. Corbin/Russwin ML2010NSM
Sargent 8215LW1L
Schlage L-90 I 0-06N
Marks LA 118N
SPEC. NO. 17 -- Lock-- Private Toilet-- with Emergency Key Latch bolt retracted by lever from either side, except when deadbolt is projected by turn inside, turning inside lever retracts both deadbolt and latch bolt simultaneously. In emergency, bolt can be operated by emergency key from outside. Turn shall be oval shaped minimum 1 3/4-inch by 1 inch at center with 1 1/4-inch projection. Corbin/Russwin ML2030NSM
Sargent 8265L WI L
Schlage L-9040-06N -XL 11-761
Marks LA118LF
SPEC. NO. 18 --Lock-- Special Rooms One cylinder: Key in cylinder retracts latch bolt. Outside lever always rigid, inside lever always free. Protected front and deadlocking latch. Corbin/Russwin ML2057NSM
Sargent 8204LWIL
Schlage L-9080-06N
Marks LA118EW
SPEC. NO. 19 --Lock-- Single Occupancy Faculty Toilets
•
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 DOOR HARDWARE 08 7100-12
•
Latch set contains a lever handle on each side with an oval shaped privacy bolt and latch on the inside. In an emergency, the lockset must open for the exterior with a key that overrides the privacy latch mechanism. From the interior, the occupant may open the door by activating the door lever which releases the privacy latch and door simultaneously. Sargent 8250LW1L
Corbin/Russwin ML2029NSM
Schlage L-9486-06N by L538-375
Marks LA118LH
SPEC. NO. 20-- Lock-- Connecting Room Lock Two cylinders: Key in cylinder locks or unlocks both levers. Protected front and deadlocking latch. Do not install at exit doors. Sargent Marks Corbin/Russwin ML2042-404F90-8-NSM 8237 by DBL CYL by 82-3093LWIL LA118JC Locking Hub Rollback kit Schlage L-9066-06N-XLII-897
SPEC. NO. 21 -- Lock-- Special Gate Lock Two cylinders: Latchbolt by key from either. Both levers always rigid. Auxiliary latch deadlocks latchbolt. Do not install at exit gates. Corbin/Russwin ML2032 NSM
•
Sargent 8217LW1L
Schlage L-9082-06N
Marks LA118WW
SPEC. NO. 22 -- Lock- Hold Back Function One cylinder: Key in cylinder locks or unlocks outside lever, inside lever always free. Latchbolt can be held in a retracted position by key, or released by key. Protected front and deadlocking latch. Install on non-rated doors Corbin/Russwin ML2056NSM
Sargent 8289LW1L
Schalge L9076-06N
Marks LA118JR
SPEC. NO. 23 -- Lock- Hold Back Function One cylinder: Key in cylinder locks retracts latch, inside lever always free. Latchbolt can be held in a retracted position by key, or released by key. Protected front and deadlocking latch. No exterior lever trim. To be used in conjunction with Spec. No. 93. Install on non-rated doors Corbin/Russwin ML 2056 NSM-M30
Sargent 8291LW1L
Schalge L9076 LLL-06N
Marks LA118JM-F5
SPEC. NO. - 24- Electronic Lock- Single Occupancy Faculty Toilets Lock is standalone, operable by keypad or HID Corp 1000 35 bit card. Keypad or HID card unlocks lever. Privacy deadbolt projected by turn inside a minimum 1 %" x 1" at center with I W' projection. HID or keypad is disabled when deadbolt is activated. Shall include small format interchangeable core (SFIC Best/Falcon type) less core .
•
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 DOOR HARDWARE 08 7100-13
•
Stanley-Omni Lock OP2000-L9453-06-A-L-KOS-MDL-OMEM-M-PDV-B-W
3.
PANIC HARDWARE AND FIRE LABELED HARDWARE SPEC. NO. 25 -- Exit Device -- Single Door- Aluminum Store Front Door Exit device shall be rim night latch function with a 3/4 inch latch bolt, dead latch, dogging device and a stainless steel touch pad. Furnish standard Allen-type dogging key with suitable hole for key ring. Furnish with offset pull (see SPEC. NO. 96). Corbin Russwin ED4200 X K157
Precision 2403
Sargent 8504
Von Duprin 35A-NL-OP
Dorm a 5303 X JP03
Detex 4003 X CBK SPEC. NO. 26 --Exit Device-- Pair Doors- Aluminum Storefront Doors Exit device shall be rim rod night latch function by exit only function with a 3/4 inch latch bolt, dead latch, dogging device and a stainless steel touch pad. Furnish standard Allen-type dogging key with suitable hole for key ring. Furnish with offset pull (see SPEC. NO. 96)
•
Corbin Russwin Active Door ED4200 X K157 Inactive Door ED4200
Precision
Sargent
Von Duprin
Dorma
2403
8504
35A-NL-OP
5303
2401
8510
35A-EO
5303
X
JP03
SPEC. NO. 27 -- Exit Device -- Single Door Exit device shall be rim night latch function with a 3/4 inch latch bolt, dead latch, dogging device and a stainless steel touch pad. Furnish standard Allen-type dogging key with suitable hole for key ring. Int. Ext.
Corbin/Russwin ED5200xN955 ED5200xK157
Precision Dorma 2108 X V4908A 9300 X YR08 2103 9300 X HRT03
Sargent Von Duprin Int. 8813-743-8ETL 98L-996L-06 Ext. 8804X Less Pull 98NL-OP Adams Rite 8800 Series at aluminum doors.
Detex 1008DA 1003 X CBK
SPEC. NO. 27P- Exit Devices- Interior Pair Wood or Hollow Metal Doors devices shall be surface-vertical rod types less bottom rods, ANSI 08 function, key locks and unlocks lever by exit only function.
Active Door Inactive Door
•
Corbin Russwin ED 54 70xN955xM55 ED5470xM55
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
Precision 2208xV 4908AxLBR 2201xLBR
Detex 2108 DA 2101 10/0l/2011 DOOR HARDWARE 08 7100-14
•
Sargent 8713-743ETL-LBR 8710-LBR
Active Door Inactive Door
Von Duprin 9827L-994L-06-LBR 9827EO-LBR
Dorma 9400 LB 9400 LB
X
YR08
SPEC. NO. 28 -- Exit Device -- Exit Only -- Single Door Exit device shall be rim exit only function with 3/4 inch latches bolt, dogging device and a stainless steel touch pad. Furnish standard Allen-type dogging key with suitable hole for key ring. Precision 2101
Corbin/Russwin ED5200
Sargent 8810
Von Duprin 98EO
Dorma Detex 9300 I 001
SPEC. NO. 29 -- Fire Rated Exit Device -- Single Door Exit device shall be ANSI 08 function, key locks and unlocks lever. Corbin/Russwin ED5200AxN955
Precision FL2108 x V4908A
Detex F1008 DA
Sargent 12-8813-743-8ETL
Von Duprin 98LF-994L-06
Dorm a F9300 X YR08
SPEC. NO. 30 --Fire Rated Exit Device-- Single Door Exit device shall be self-latching, with exit only function, less dogging feature.
•
Corbin/Russwin ED5200A
Precision FL2101
Detex F1001
Sargent 12-8810
Von Duprin 98EO-F
Dorm a F9300
SPEC. NO. 30P -Interior Fire Rated Pair Wood or Hollow Metal Doors Exit devices shall be surface-vertical rod types less bottom rods, ANSI 08 function, key locks and unlocks lever by exit only function. Exit devices shall be self latching, less dogging feature. Corbin Russwin Precision Active Door ED5470B/FxN955xM55 FL2208xV4908AxLBR Inactive Door ED 54 70B/FxM55 FL220 1xLBR
Active Door Inactive Door
Sargent 12-8713-743ETL-LBR 12-871 0-LBR
Von Duprin 982 7LF994 L-06-LBR 9827EO-F-LBR
Detex F2108 LD F21 01 LD Dorma F9400 LB F9400 LB
X
YR08
SPEC. NO. 30DE- Exit Devices- Interior Fire Rated Double Egress Pair Wood or Hollow Metal Doors
•
Exit devices shall be surface-vertical rod type less bottom rods, exit only function. Exit devices shall be self-latching, less dogging feature. Furnish two exit devices per double egress pair .
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/0l/2011 DOOR HARDWARE 08 7100-15
•
Corbin Russwin ED 54 70B/FxM55
Dorm a F9400 LB
Von Duprin 9827EO-FxLBR
Detex F2101 LD
Precision FL220lxLBR
Sargent 12-8710-LBR
SPEC. NO. 31 -- Removable Mullion Non-labeled -- Pairs of Doors with Exit Devices 14 gage steel, approximately 2-inch by 3-inch. Furnish complete with soffit and sill fittings and fastenings as required. Precision Corbin/Russwin 707 A (7') 708A (8') 822
Detex 90KR
Dorm a 1330
Von Duprin 4954
Sargent 980
SPEC. NO. 32 -- Removable Mullion Labeled -- Pairs of Doors Exit Devices Listed as Fire Exit Hardware. fastenings as required.
Furnish complete with soffit and sill fittings and
Corbin/Russwin Precision 707 A (7') 708A (8') FL822
Sargent 12-980
Dorma FI300
Von Duprin 9954
Detex F90KR
SPEC. NO. 33- Not Utilized SPEC. NO. 34 --Automatic Flush Bolts-- Labeled and Non-labeled Doors
•
Complete with necessary strikes and screws. Furnish 2 each inactive leaf. Wood or Composite Hollow Metal · ·
Door Controls 942 NH X 80 842 NH X 80
Ives FB40P FB30P
X X
Rockwood 1942NHx80 1842NHx80
DP2 DP2
SPEC. NO. 35 --Coordinator-- Labeled and Non-labeled Doors Bar-type, complete with necessary strikes, bars, brackets, and screws. Door Controls 600 Series
Ives COR Series
Rockwood 1600
Dorm a TS 93 GSR
SPEC. NO.s 36 -40- Not Utilized 4.
AUXILIARY LOCKS SPEC. NO. 41 -- Padlock Bronze or brass case, hardened steel shackle, length to fit condition; plated, brass chain, master-keyed. Furnish by same manufacturer as lock cylinder key system. SPEC. No.s 42-48- Not Utilized
5.
•
DOOR CLOSERS SPEC. NO. 49 --Door Closer-- 180 Degree, Non-Hold Open Arm
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/0112011 DOOR HARDWARE 08 7100-16
•
Out swing In-swing
L.C.N. Stanley 4041 EDA D4550EDA 4041 (to 120°) I 4041 T-Top Jamb (past 120°) D4550/51
Out swing In swing
Norton PR7500 x Torx 7500 x Torx less 1618
Sargent 281 PlO x Torx 281-0 x Torx
Dorm a 8916 SPA 8916 AF
SPEC. NO. 50-- Door Closer-- 180 Degree, Hold Open Arm Out swing In-swing
L.C.N. Stanley 4041-H-EDA D-4550HEDA 4041-H (to l20°)/4041T-H-Top Jamb (past 120°) D-4550H/51H
Out swing In-swing
Norton PR7500H xTorx 7500 x Torx less 1618
Sargent 281 PHIO x Torx 281-H x Torx
Dorma 8916 SP8T 8916 PH
SPEC. NO. 51 -- Door Closer -- 180 Degree, Delayed Action
•
Dorm a 8916 DA AF 8916 DA SPA
Out-swing In-swing
L.C.N. 4041 DAEDA N/A for 180°
Out-swing In-swing
Norton Sargent 281 P10-DA x Torx PR7500DA x Torx 7500DA x Torx less 1618 281-DA x Torx
Stanley D-4550DAEDA D-4550DA/51 DA
SPEC. NO. 52 -Electromechanical Door Closer- Maximum 170° Electronic Hold Open For use on fire rated doors requiring hold open. At pairs, furnish a slave unit without smoke detector on one leaf tied into a master detector unit (types below) on the other leaf. Outswing Ins wing
LCN 4410ME-B80 N/A for 170°
Outswing Ins wing
Norton 7220/7230MPS 7210MPS
Sargent 12-80-2990 12-80-2960
Dorm a 8916 EMF PT 8916 EMF T
SPEC. NO.s 53- 60- Not Utilized 6.
DOOR STOPS AND HOLDERS
SPEC. NO. 61 -- Door Type Holder Cast bronze made to . template, secured to door with oval head bronze machine screws and washers; when door has kickplate, mount sex bolts under kick plate. Provide strike of recommended height; install short strike whenever possible .
•
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/201 I DOOR HARDWARE 08 7100-17
Ives FS40 Series
•
Rockwood 491 Series x Floor Strike
Trim co 1260-SeriesxFioor Strike
SPEC. NO. 62- Not Utilized SPEC. NO. 63 -Interior Floor-Mounted Door Stop 1-3/4 inches high, secured rubber. Don-Jo 1448
Trim co 1214
Rockwood 481
SPEC. NO. 64- Exterior Floor-Mounted Door Stop Cast bronze, 2-114 inches high, secured rubber. Trim co 1214CK
Rockwood 481H x Trox
SPEC. NO.s 65-69- Not Utilized SPEC. NO. 70 -- Overhead Stop and Holder, Surface Mounted, 85 to 110 degree Swing At doors with closers, coordinate installation with closer installation. Special closer accessories and template may be required. Glynn-Johnson Fire-Rated Doors
•
Rixson 90S 90H
Dorma 9-Series (stop only 9-Series (MULTI)
900SNon-Rated 900H
Doors
SPEC. NO. 71 -- Overhead Door Holder, 180° Swing (max.), no stop feature. Provide auxiliary floor stop. L.C.N. PAH60
Norton No.2
SPEC. NO. 72 -Overhead Stop & Holder, Concealed, 85 to 110 degree Swing At doors with closers, coordinate installation with closer installation. Special closer accessories and template may be required. Glynn-Johnson Fire-Rated Doors Non-Rated Doors 7.
IOOS lOOH
Rixson !-Series (stop only) 1-Series (MULTI)
Dorma 910S 910H
THRESHOLDS
SPEC. NO. 73 -- Aluminum Threshold -- Interior Door Width 4-inch, height 112 inch. Full width of opening and coped to trim. N.G.P. 424A
•
Pemko 170A
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
Reese S-204A
10/01/2011 DOOR HARDWARE 08 7100-18
SPEC. NO. 74- Not Utilized
•
SPEC. NO. 75 -- Aluminum Threshold -- Exterior Door Half-saddle, height 112 inch. Threshold shall have one full-length bearing. Full width of opening, and coped to trim. For 114 inch rise. N.G.P. 653
Pemko 158A
SPEC. NO. 76 -- Aluminum Threshold Strip -- Interior Door or Opening Where cork, vinyl composition tile and other floor coverings terminate, except at raised cement thresholds, or where other thresholds are specified. Width 1 inch to 1 3/8-inch, height 114 inch with 118 inch offset. N.G.P. 432
Pemko N/A
Reese T040A
SPEC. NO. 77 -- Aluminum Threshold -- Interior Door or Opening Width 2 114-inch or 2 'h-inch, height 3/16 inch or 114 inch. N.G.P. 410A
Pemko 173A
Reese S-225A
SPEC. NO.s 78- 83- Not Used
•
8.
MISC. AUXILIARY HARDWARE
SPEC. NO. 84- Kick and Mop Plates lves 8400
Trim co K0050/KM0050
Don-Jo 90
Rockwood Kl050
SPEC. NO. 85- Lock Guard 9 'h to 10-inch by 1 'h to 2 118-inch with lugs to receive flat Phillips head throughbolts. Markar M-930LG
Don-Jo NLP-110
Trim co 5000
Rockwood 321 x630
SPEC. NO. 86 -- Astragal Stainless steel, 2 inches by height of door, secured by Phillips flat head throughbolts. N.G.P. 139SS
Pemko 357SS
Reese 183SS
Anemostat FBA X ss
SPEC. NO. 87 -- Cylinder Guard Ring Manufactured of hardened materials to resist removal by wrenches and other devices. Furnish of sufficient length for cylinder. Provide appropriate filler rings as
•
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 DOOR HARDWARE 08 7100-19
•
required. Furnish plated versions only. Install with all cylinders exposed to the exterior of the building, but not necessarily limited to that application . Corbin/Russwin 416F39
Major CG/CGL
Keedex K-24/K-24L
SPEC. NO. 88 -Automatic Door Bottom At exterior doors with surface applied walk off mats in lieu of Spec 10 I door sweep. To ensure ADA 5 pound door pressure opening. Semi-mortise Wood Full-mortise Wood Hollow Metal
Pemko 430MRL 411RL 420PKL
NGP 421NA 335N 320N
Reese 521C 370A 372A
SPEC. NO. 89- Not Utilized SPEC. NO. 90 -- Push Plate Provide cutout for cylinder or turn lever as required. Provide beveled on all four edges. Ives 8311-54xl6
Trim co 1010-3
Don-Jo 7110
Rockwood 132-70C
SPEC. NO. 92- Not Utilized
•
SPEC. NO. 93 --Anti-Vandal Pull Stainless steel or bronze, 5-inch by 5-nch by I inch. Provide with attached lugs for through bolting from inside. Furnish vandal-resistant screws. Furnish without cylinder cutout for exit only doors. Trimco Rockwood 1111 C3-black coating at wood doors BF94- black coating at wood doors 1096 - RC - SP at single metal outswinging doors I 097 - RC - SP at pair's metal out swinging doors and at single or pair in-swing doors Ives VR900 - at single metal out swinging doors VR900LLP - at pairs metal outswinging doors and at single or pair inswing doors SPEC. NO. 94-- Coat and Hat Hook Cast aluminum, Two prong, I I /8-inch inches projection, suitable for behind door application. Furnish three for teacher's wardrobes. Furnish quantities as indicated at other locations. Ives 582
•
Don-Jo 302
Rockwood 796
SPEC. NO. 95 -- Cane Bolt
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/0 l/20 ll DOOR HARDWARE 08 7100-20
•
Steel, zinc-plated, 18 inches, with padlock eyes welded to bolt to lock in closed position. Two strikes each bolt to hold gate in open or closed position . Stanley 1009
Richards-Wilcox 524-P21
Hager 1408
SPEC. NO. 96- Offset Tube Door Pull For installation on aluminum storefront doors with exit devices. Pulls shall be satin stainless steel (BHMA 630) and be mounted with spanner-screw through-bolts. Don-Jo 1158
F orms+Surfaces DT1021-12"
Trimco 1191-4
Rockwood BF158
SPEC. NO. 97- Wall-mounted Electro-magnetic Door Holder For installation on fire-rated doors requiring hold-open LCN SEM7850
Rixson FM998
Norton R6933
Dorma EM-F24120
RSG DH1224 Series
SPEC. NO. 98- Meeting Stile Astragals- Fire-rated Pairs with Vertical Rod Exit Devices Pemko 351Cx351CS
N.G.P. 140PA (set)
Reese 95Cx95CP
SPEC. NO. 99- Adhesive Smoke Seals- Fire-rated Metal Doors
•
Pemko S88D
N.G.P. 5050B
Reese 797B
SPEC. NO. 100- Adhesive Intumescent Seals- Fire-rated Wood Doors At single doors, furnish frame seals only. At pairs, furnish both frame seals and astragal seal. Frame Astragal
N.G.P. 9440B 9500B X 2525B
Pemko HSS2000 X S88D HSS2000 X S77D
Reese GIS X 797B GIS X 798B
SPEC. NO. 101 -Exterior Door Seals. Furnish frame seals and door sweeps at exterior doors. At pairs, furnish astragal in addition to frame seals and door sweep. Furnish factory-cut for narrow frames where occurs. Furnish exterior door seals with stainless steel fasteners. Frame Seals Door Sweep/Drip As tragal
N.G.P. 700SA C627A 140PA (SET)
Pemko 2891AS 3452CNB 351C X 351CS
Reese 755A 354C 95C X 95CP
SPEC. NO. 102 --Padlock Hasp Steel, zinc plated, secured with galvanized bolts, nuts, and washers, 6 inches, 3 Y2inch for lead-lined cabinet doors.
•
Hager WS-1941
Stanley SP-941
8736 CORWINTHEATERREPAIR&P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/0112011 DOOR HARDWARE 08 7100-21
SPEC. NO. 103-- Padlock Eyes Steel, zinc plated.
•
Stanley 1245
SPEC. NO. 104 -- Key Tags Furnish one fiber marker for each new file key, marked, attached, and placed as required. Aladdin
OG
Ke-Master K9002
Lund C-1507
Telkee 2GF
FINISH HARDWARE SCHEDULE A.
See sheet A002 for hardware schedule .
•
•
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
l0/0l/20ll DOOR HARDWARE 08 7100-22
•
HARDWARE PLACEMENT MORTISE LOCKSET (HP-ML) NOTES: Lock Strikes: Strikes shall be boxed, with curved lip of sufficient length to protect the trim and jamb. Hinges
Reinforcement of steel doors and frames shall be per Specification Section 08110.
All Frames
Head shall have door closer reinforcement, full length of head, whether or not closers are called for. Reinforcement shall be per Specification Section 08 1113. No mutes or mute holes.
Door Closer
Install according to manufacturers' template. With closer installed, doors shall have maximum swing possible, 90 degrees minimum.
Doorstop
Unless otherwise directed, doorstop or spike shall be mounted within 4 inches ofthe wall.
1 Equal
•
l"'"''~~~lro1 ~ter Line of Lever I
~
l1~ Equal
-+
36"
IExterior Floor h.L_
•
l
___..L_
10"
L.--------J
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
__l
10/01/2011 DOOR HARDWARE 08 7100-23
•
HARDWARE PLACEMENT EXIT DEVICE (HP-ED)
NOTES: Kickplate
Where specified 10 inches height, width 1 inch less than total width of door between stops. Secured with flat head undercut, full thread screws
Hinges
Reinforcement of steel doors and frames shall be per Specification Section 08 1113.
All Frames
Head shall have door closer reinforcement full length of head, whether or not closers are called for. Reinforcement shall be per Specification Section 08 1113. No mutes or mute holes.
Door Closer
Install according to manufacturers' template. With closer installed, doors shall have maximum swing possible, 90 degrees minimum.
Door stop
Unless otherwise directed, doorstop or spike shall be mounted within 4 inches of the wall.
1
•
Equal
l------+<-1.-----.
1
Center Line Of Touch Bar Exit Device
Equal
36"
-+
10"
IFinish Floor h...____..___ ._______....~ _j_ [
•
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/0112011 DOOR HARDWARE 08 7100-24
•
HARDWARE PLACEMENT FLUSH PULL (HP-FP)
NOTES: Hinges
Reinforcement of steel doors and frames shall be per Specification Section 08 1113.
All Frames
Head shall have door closer reinforcement full length of head, whether or not closers are called for. Reinforcement shall be per Specification Section 08 1113. No mutes or mute· holes.
Door Closer
Install according to manufacturers' template. With closer installed, doors shall have maximum swing possible, 90 degrees minimum.
Doorstop
Unless otherwise directed, doorstop or spike shall be mounted within 4" of the wall.
r - - - - - - - - - - . --.--
t
Equal
••
Center Line ofj Flush Pull 1~--+--.,-----l
!
l1+---------+H Equal
36"
j
-+
10"
IExterior Floor h_.___ _.__ ~-----------~ _j_
•
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/0l/2011 DOOR HARDWARE 08 7100-25
•
HARDWARE PLACEMENT AUXILIARY HARDWARE (HP-AUX)
NOTES: Kickplate
Where specified I 0 inches height, width I inch less than total width of door between stops. Secured with countersunk head, full thread screws.
Hinges
Reinforcement of steel doors and frames shall be per Specification Section 08 1113.
All Frames
Head shall have door closer reinforcement, full length of head, whether or not closers are called for. Reinforcement shall be per specification Section 08 1113. No mutes or mute holes.
Door Closer
Install according to manufacturers' template. With closer installed, doors shall have maximum swing possible, 90 degrees minimum.
Door stop
Unless otherwise required doorstop or spike shall be mounted within 4 inches of the wall.
HIGH SCHOOL MIDDLE SCHOOL ELEMENTARY PRIMARY CENTERS.
A = 40 inches X 2 3/4 inches A= 38 inches X 2 3/4 inches A= 36 inches X 2 3/4 inches
•
1 Equal
l
1+-----+<-i
!center Line of !Pull Handle
Equal
I Exterior Floor IKickplate
•
-t ~-::ETj_L!::::==r==l!....l 1/2" :!..1 ~+- 1..
8736 CORWIN THEATER REP AIR & P .0. T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
1
J
_r· ,..
~+-
10/0112011 DOOR HARDWARE 08 7100-26
•
HARDWARE PLACEMENT IDENTIFICATION SYMBOL (HP-RR) NOTES: Hinges
Reinforcement of steel doors and frames shall be per Specification Section 08 1113.
All Frames
Head shall have door closer reinforcement full length of head, whether or not closers are called for. Reinforcement shall be per Specification Section 08 1113. No mutes or mute holes.
Door Closer
Install according to manufacturers' template. With closer installed, doors shall have maximum swing possible, 90 degrees minimum.
Door stop
Unless otherwise required doorstop or spike shall be mounted within 4 inches of the wall.
IDENTIFICATION SYMBOLS- To be installed per CBC Chapter liB.
•
j
Accessibility Sign
-----.----t-----+©l
~t
l 5'
1------++-1 Equal
-+
10"
-'---L...---------1
•
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
_j__
10/0l/20 II DOOR HARDWARE 08 7100-27
•
•
HARDWARE PLACEMENT DEADBOLT (HP-DB)
NOTES: Lock Strike
Strike shall be boxed, to protect the jamb.
Hinges
Reinforcement of steel doors and frames shall be per Specification Section 08 1113.
All Frames
Head shall have door closer reinforcement full length of head, whether or not closers are called for. Reinforcement shall be per Specification Section 08 1113. No mutes or mute holes.
Door Closer
Install according to manufacturers' template. With closer installed, doors shall have maximum swing possible, 90 degrees minimum.
Door stop
Unless otherwise required doorstop or spike shall be mounted within 4 inches of the wall.
lCenter Line of Cylinder
44"
I Exterior Floor
•
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 DOOR HARDWARE 08 7100-28
•
HARDWARE PLACEMENT DUTCH DOOR (HP-DD) NOTES: Lock Strikes: Strikes shall be boxed, with curved lip of sufficient length to protect the trim and jamb. Hinges
Reinforcement of steel doors and frames shall be per Specification Section 08 1113.
All Frames
Head shall have door closer reinforcement full length of head, whether or not closers are called for. Reinforcement shall be per Specification Section 08 1113. No mutes or mute holes.
Door Closer
Install according to manufacturers' template. With closer installed, doors shall have maximum swing possible, 90 degrees minimum.
Door stop
Unless otherwise directed doorstop or spike shall be mounted within 4 inches of the wall..
3"1=
•
o
.-.
,.... Butt Hinges
5"
+5" _.L_
-j Door Stop I
--.,.II
),(
---......- -
II
II
t
II~ t
II
I
SHELF BRACKETS POSITIONED TO MISS LOCKSET
T 7"
_____:L
END OF SECTION
•
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 DOOR HARDWARE 08 7100-29
•
SECTION 09 22I6 NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING
PART I- GENERAL SUMMARY
l.OI
A.
B.
•
1.02
Section Includes: 1.
Non-structural metal framing.
2.
Slotted system for positive attachment of metal studs to fluted steel decks for head ofwall expansion joint movement (cyclic).
Related Requirements: 1.
Division 0 I -General Requirements.
2.
Section 05 4I 00 - Structural Metal Stud Framing.
3.
Section 09 2900 - Gypsum Board.
PROJECT REQUIREMENTS A.
Regulatory Requirements: Comply with DSA and CBC requirements.
B.
Design Requirements:
B.
I.
Metal Studs: Studs for interior partitions shall be roll-formed channel or Cshapes.
2.
Track: Stud track for floor and ceiling anchorage shall be channel configuration, sized to fit studs. Galvanized steel as manufactured for installation with specified metal studs.
3.
Design: Design is based on minimum 5 pounds per square foot load applied perpendicular to walls. Deflection shall not exceed 1/240 under design load.
Performance Requirements: I.
The top track fire-rated assembly shall exhibit the following performance characteristics: a.
•
Cyclic System: When tested for cyclical movement, in accordance with UL 2079. Assembly shall achieve 500 cycles of wall movement at 35 to 40 cycles per minute .
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
I 0/01120 II NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 09 2216-1
•
b.
SUBMITTALS
1.03
1.04
A.
Shop Drawings: Submit drawings showing framing, connection details, accessories and anchorage. Indicate location of assemblies and size and spacing of framing components.
B.
Product Data: Submit manufacturer's catalog data for each item proposed for installation.
C.
Certificates: Furnish manufacturer's certification that materials meet or exceed Specification requirements.
DEFINITIONS A.
B.
•
•
When subsequently tested for 1 and 2 hour fire-resistive rated construction, in accordance with ASTM Ell9 and ASTM E814, assembly shall conform to requirements for hose stream resistance.
Cyclic Anchoring Method: A system which provides for positive attachment (as described in ASTM C754) of studs to upper track, and of track to overhead fluted deck, while permitting up to l-inch of vertical movement. System: The application of the above products in their entirety as tested. There can be no intermixing of components unless specifically outlined in the appropriate test reports. QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.05 A.
Coordinate with related Work to provide blocking for items mounted on finished surfaces and to provide allowances for pipes and other items inside partitions and walls.
B.
Comply with following as a minimum requirement: I.
American Welding Society (A WS): Structural Welding Code Steel (D 1.1 ); and Structural Welding Code Sheet Steel (Dl.3).
2.
ASTM Standards: a.
ASTM A653 - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by Hot-Dip Process.
b.
ASTM AI 003 -Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Carbon, Metallic- and Nonmetallic-Coated for Cold-Formed Framing Members.
c.
ASTM A641 - Standard Specification for Zinc Coated (Galvanized) Carbon Steel Wire.
d.
ASTM C645 - Standard Specification for Non-Structural Steel Framing Members .
8736 CORWIN 11-IEA TER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 09 2216-2
•
ASTM C955 - Standard Specification for Load Bearing (Transverse and Axial) Steel Studs, Runners (Tracks), and Bracing or Bridging, for Screw Application of Gypsum Panel Products and Metal Plaster Bases.
f.
ASTM C954 - Standard Specification for Steel Drill Screws for Application of Gypsum Panel Products or Metal Bases to Steel Studs From 0.033 Inch to 0.112 Inch in Thickness.
g.
ASTM E 1190 - Standard Test Methods for Strength of PowerActuated Fasteners Installed in Structural Members.
c.
Tolerances: Install walls and partitions on straight lines, plumb, free of twists or other defects, and contacting a 10 foot straightedge for its entire length at any location within a I /8 inch tolerance. Install horizontal framing level within a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 12 feet in any direction.
D.
Manufacturers shall be members of Steel Stud Manufacturers Association (SSMA). DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
1.06
•
e.
A.
Materials shall be delivered in their original unopened packages and stored protected from damage. Do not store material directly on grade. Provide adequate support to prevent bowing of material prior to installation.
B.
Store welding electrodes in accordance with A WS D 12. I.
PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A.
Non-structural metal framing: 1.
ClarkDietrich Building Systems, Inc. a. ClarkDietrich C-Sections and Tracks, ICC ESR-1166P.
2.
Ware Industries, Inc. a. Viperstud drywall framing system (Non load-bearing): Viper25, Viper20, Viper18MIL, Viper 27 MIL, Viper 30MIL, Viper 33MIL, ICC ESR-2620.
3.
Cemco a. Cold-formed Steel Framing, ICC ERS-3016.
4. B.
Top Track Systems: 1.
•
Equal.
ProTRAK System by ClarkDietrich Building Systems., Inc. or equal. Downstanding legs shall be nominally 2 1/2-inch and shall be provided with l 1/2inch slots at 1 inch on center.
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 09 2216-3
•
CST System by Cemco, or equal. Down-standing legs shall be nominally 2 1/2-inch and shall be provided with I 1/2-inch slots at 1 inch on center., ICC ESR-2012.
3.
System must provide for minimum tested overall movement of 1 inch: lh inch in each direction.
4.
Track shall be provided in standard widths of 4 and 6 inches and in 16, 18, and 20 gage (54, 43, and 33 mil) sheet steel thickness, as required by Project conditions and detailed.
MATERIALS
2.02 A.
•
2.
B.
C.
Light Gage Metal Framing: 1.
Metal framing shall be formed from corrosion resistant-steel conforming to requirements of ASTM A653, 33 ksi minimum.
2.
Metal framing shall be zinc coated in conformance to requirements of ASTM A924, G60.
3.
Metal framing shall be manufactured in conformance to ASTM C645.
4.
Install metal framing according to ASTM Cl007, Standard Specification for Installation of Load-Bearing (Transverse and Axial) Steel Studs and Related Accessories.
Studs: SSMA, ICC ESR-3064P, minimum yield 33 ksi, hot-dipped galvanized or electro galvanized sheet steel, G-60, C Stud type, punched web (except tracks and joists), C-shaped, sizes required to conform to details and scheduled wall thicknesses. Studs shall be rolled from new steel sheet and shall not be produced from re-rolled steel. Stud flanges shall not be less than 1 5/16-inch wide; track flanges, not less than 1 !J.I-inch wide. I.
Wall Framing and Furring for Gypsum Wallboard: Studs and tracks shall be 20 gage (33 mils) minimum, unless otherwise indicated.
2.
Stud gages indicated on Drawings or specified are the mm1mum. Where required stud height and/or loads exceed code requirements or manufacturer's recommendations, provide heavier gage studs and/or decrease stud spacing as necessary to conform to code requirements.
Framed Ceilings: Framed ceiling framing system shall support finished ceiling, light fixtures, air diffusers, and accessories, as required. Suspension system shall provide a maximum deflection ofL/240. 1.
•
Plaster and Gypsum Wallboard Ceilings: Ceiling joists shall conform to ASTM C645, hot-dip galvanized coated steel, C-shaped, unpunched, 20 gage (30 mil) minimum, unless noted otherwise .
8736 CORWINTHEATERREPAIR&P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES IDGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 09 2216-4
•
•
D.
Framing Accessories: Provide standard related accessories including floor and ceiling tracks, clips, web stiffeners, anchors, and similar items, of same manufacture as each type of stud specified, and as required for a complete installation.
E.
Fasteners: Wafer-head screws, self-drilling type for 20 gage (30 mil) metal and heavier. ASTM C954 self-drilling, self-tapping screws, Type S-12 pan head, lh inch long.
F.
Fire Rated Acoustical Foam Tape: Compressible, closed cell polyvinyl chloride foam with pressure sensitive adhesive, in rolls with protective release liner on non-adhesive face, 6 pounds per cubic foot density, 1 inch wide x not less than 114 inch thick, selfextinguishing, UL 94 recognized, Norseal V740FR, manufactured by Norton Performance Plastics Corporation, or equal.
G.
Acoustical Sealant: Permanently resilient type, non-hardening, as specified in Section 07 9200.
H.
Zinc-Rich Paint: Conform to Fed Spec DOD-P-21035A, Z.R.C. "Cold Galvanizing Compound", manufactured by ZRC Products Company, or equal. Provide for touch-up of galvanized surfaces.
I.
Steel Backing Plates: Provide a minimum 4 inch wide by 16 gage (54 mil) steel, or sections of studs and stud track welded or fastened to web of studs, except as otherwise indicated. Apply shop coat of metal primer.
J.
Anchorage Devices Powder Actuated: Minimum 0.177 inch diameter by 1-7I 16 inch long fasteners in regular concrete and 0.145 inch diameter by I 118-inch long fasteners in lightweight concrete. Allowable shear and tension values as permitted in ICC ES reports shall be reduced to 80 percent.
K.
Anchorage Devices, Drilled Expansion Anchors: Minimum 3/8 inch diameter with 2114 inch embedment. Allowable shear and tension values as permitted in ICC ES reports shall be reduced to 80 percent.
L.
Top Track System Materials: 1.
2.
Forming steel shall be mill certified prime steel: a.
For 0.064 inch sections, conform to ASTM Al011, Grade 50 with a minimum yield point of 50,000 psi.
b.
For 0.048 and 0.036 inch sections, conform to ASTM A1008, Grade C, with a minimum yield point of 33,000 psi.
c.
Formed steel shall be provided with galvanizing in accordance with ASTM A653 for a Class G90 zinc coating.
Fasteners: a.
•
For attachment of steel studs to slotted track or deflection clip, minimum No.8 corrosion resistant by lh inch waferhead screws .
8736 CORWfN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/0l/20 II NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 09 2216-5
b.
•
3.
For attachment of track system to overhead structural element or metal decking, as provided for by the structural details affecting the Work.
Dry Method. a.
Dry mineral wool and sealant system shall use only such products as are represented to have been fully tested and approved under UL 2079 and as specified in Section 07 8413 - Penetration Firestopping.
b.
Mineral wool shall be compressed to the degree as used on approval fire and hose stream test.
c.
The system supplier shall provide a measuring device capable of determining compression to determine compliance with required density.
PART 3- EXECUTION EXAMINATION
3.01 A.
•
•
Verify that overhead or concealed Work is completed, tested, inspected, and finished as required before starting Work of this section. INSTALLATION
3.02
A.
Walls and Partitions: 1.
Fasten floor runners for exterior walls and interior partitions to concrete slab with required power driven fasteners. Spacing of fasteners not to exceed 24 inches on center. Fasten ceiling runners to structure as by top track system manufacturer.
2.
Sound insulated walls and partitions: Embed floor runner tracks in two beads of acoustical sealant or two runs of compressible tape seal. Install top track nested into slotted track system, in same manner for full height of walls. Where wall ends abutting concrete, masonry, or steel set end studs in two beads of acoustical sealant or two tape seals and secure at 4-foot centers vertically.
3.
Space studs not over 16 inch on center unless indicated otherwise. Studs shall be located approximately 2 inches from door frame jambs, abutting partitions and partition comers, except those providing support for door and window openmgs.
4.
Furnish and install manufacturer's standard floor track. Fasten track to floor by means of 1/4 inch by 1 1/4-inch Star "Dryvin" hammer drive anchors or 3/16 inch by 1 inch round head, "Rawi-Drives" one-piece expansion bolts spaced not to exceed 3 feet, and installed in drilled holes in slab, or to wood joist with nails as indicated. Track may be fastened to concrete floor slabs with, powerdriven fasteners .
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/0l/2011 NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 09 2216-6
•
Studs shall be seated squarely in track with stud web and flanges abutting track web, plumbed and securely fastened with sheet metal screws, to flanges or web of both floor and top tracks. Provide 4 screws per stud.
6.
Where there is no suspended ceiling, tops of stud walls shall be provided with track and shoes and be fastened as specified for floors. Welding of studs to ceiling track will not be permitted except where bearing studs are installed.
7.
Over metal doorframes, install a cut-to-length section of runner track, with flanges slit and web-bent to allow flanges to overlap adjacent vertical studs, and securely fasten to studs. At doorjambs, extend studs continuous to structure above.
8.
Bridging, or horizontal bracing of I I/2-inch, cold-rolled channels shall be fastened in a manner to prevent stud rotation. Bridging shall be furnished as follows: walls up to I 0 feet high, one row at mid-height; walls exceeding l 0 feet high, bridging or bracing rows spaced not to exceed 5 feet on center.
9.
Wind bracing shall be fastened where indicated on Drawings. Minimum size of strap shall be as indicated on Drawings. Track where strap terminates shall be anchored as indicated on Drawings.
CLEANING
3.03 A.
•
5.
Remove debris, rubbish, and waste material and legally dispose of off Project site. PROTECTION
3.04 A.
Protect Work of this section until Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION
•
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 NON-STRUCTIJRAL METAL FRAMING 09 2216-7
SECTION 09 2900
•
GYPSUM BOARD PART 1 - GENERAL SUMMARY
1.01 A.
Section Includes: 1.
B.
1.02
•
Related Requirements: 1.
Division 0 1 - General Requirements.
2.
Section 07 9200 - Joint Sealants.
PROJECT REQUIREMENTS A.
Design Requirements: Provide systems capable of resisting deflection as required by CBC and authorities having jurisdiction.
B.
Regulatory Requirements: installation.
Comply with CBC requirements for design and
SUBMITTALS
1.03 A.
Shop Drawings: Submit Shop Drawings indicating complete suspensiOn system including connections, anchorage, and trim features.
B.
Material Samples: Submit 18 inch by 18 inch Samples of the texture coat of gypsum board panels with edges taped.
C.
Product Data: Submit manufacturer's catalog data for each product proposed for installation. QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.04 A
•
Gypsum board, sheathing and tile backer systems and accessory.
Comply with following as a minimum requirement: 1.
ASTM C4 74 - Standard Test Methods for Joint Treatment Materials for Gypsum Board Construction.
2.
ASTM C4 75 - Standard Specification for Joint Compound and Joint Tape for Finishing Gypsum Board.
3.
ASTM C514- Standard Specification for Nails for the Application of Gypsum Board.
4.
ASTM C840 - Standard Specification for Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board .
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P .0. T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HJGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 GYPSUM BOARD 09 2900-1
•
•
•
5.
ASTM C919 Applications .
Standard Practice for Use of Sealants m Acoustical
6.
ASTM C954 - Standard Specification for Steel Drill Screws for the Application of Gypsum Panel Products or Metal Plaster Bases to Steel Studs From 0.033 inch to 0.112 inch in Thickness.
7.
ASTM C I 002 - Standard Specification for Steel Self-Piercing Tapping Screws for the Application of Gypsum Panel Products or Metal Plaster Bases to Wood Studs or Steel Studs.
8.
ASTM Cl047- Standard Specification for Accessories for Gypsum Wallboard and Gypsum Veneer Base.
9.
ASTM C 1177 - Standard Specification for Glass Mat Gypsum Substrate for Use as Sheathing.
10.
ASTM C 1178 - Standard Specification for Coated Glass Mat Water-Resistant Gypsum Backing Panel.
II.
ASTM 1325 - Standard Specification for Non-Asbestos Fiber-Mat Reinforced Cementitious Backer Units.
12.
ASTM Cl396- Standard Specification for Gypsum Board.
13.
ASTM C 1629 - Standard Classification for Abuse-Resistant Non decorated Interior Gypsum Panel Products and Fiber-Reinforced Cement Panels.
14.
ASTM D3273 - Standard Test Method for Resistance to Growth of Mold on the Surface of Interior Coatings in an Environmental Chamber.
15.
ASTM D3274 - Standard Test Method for Evaluating Degree of Surface Disfigurement of Paint Films by Microbial (Fungal or Algal) Growth or Soil and Dirt Accumulation.
16.
ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
17.
ASTM Ell9 - Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials.
18.
ASTM E695 - Standard Method for Measuring Relative Resistance of Wall, Floor, and Roof Construction to Impact Loading.
19.
ASTM G21 - Standard Practice for Determining Resistance of Synthetic Polymeric Materials to Fungi.
20.
Underwriters Laboratories (ULI) requirements and listings for fire-rated materials and products classification.
21.
GA 214 - Gypsum wallboard finish shall conform to requirements of GA 214, Application and Finishing of Gypsum Panel Products, published by the Gypsum Association, and as specified herein .
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 GYPSUM BOARD 09 2900-2
•
23.
American National Standards for the Installation of Ceramic Tile.
24.
ANSI All8.9- Specification for Cementitious Backer Units.
Qualifications: Installer shall have a minimum 5 years experience in installing and finishing gypsum board.
C.
CHPS Low-Emitting Materials table: Materials submitted must meet the CHPS LowEmitting criteria and be listed as Low-Emitting on the following web site: www.CHPS.net. DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A.
Deliver materials in original, factory sealed packages, containers or bundles bearing brand name and name of manufacturer.
B.
Materials shall be kept dry. Gypsum wallboard shall be neatly stacked flat; avoid sagging and damage to edges, ends, and surfaces.
c.
Fire-rated materials shall have fire classifications numbers attached and legible.
D.
Provide all means necessary to protect gypsum board systems before, during, and after installation.
E.
Gypsum wallboard showing any evidence of water damage shall not be installed. Gypsum wallboard showing evidence of water damage after installation shall be removed and replaced.
PART 2- PRODUCTS ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
2.01 A.
Georgia-Pacific, National Gypsum Co., U.S. Gypsum Co., James Hardie, or equal. MATERIALS
2.02 A.
•
GA 600 - Gypsum wallboard shall conform to requirements of GA 600 Fire Resistance Design Manual, published by the Gypsum Association .
B.
1.05
••
22.
Gypsum Board Type X (fire-resistant): 5/8 inch thick, 4-foot wide and up to 16-foot long conforming to ASTM C 1396 with long edges tapered .
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 GYPSUM BOARD 09 2900-3
•
States Gyp. Co.: Sheetrock regular, Firecode Core, or C Core Gypsum s, as required by UL
I Y.-inch Type W
Gypsum Co. Gold Bond regular, ..,. .,11, .... " or Fire-Shield C sum wallboard, as ired by UL design.
B.
•
Impact Resistant Gypsum Board, Type X (fire-resistant): 5/8 inch thick, 4-foot wide and up to 16-foot long complying with one of the following: 1.
Fire resistant rated gypsum core with additives to enhance impact resistance, faced with moisture and mold resistant paper, and complying with ASTM Cl396.
2.
Fire resistant, high density paperless gypsum with reinforcing fiber mesh.
3.
Fire resistant fiberglass-mat faced gypsum board panels
United States Gyp. Co.: 5/8 inch Fiberock VHI Gypsum fiber panels.
Sheetrock paper tape Heavy Duty.
Sheetrock Setting compound.
Georgia-Pacific: 5/8 inch DensArmor Plus Impact Resistant Panels
Glass mesh.
Same as above.
National Gypsum Co.: 5/8 inch Hi-Impact XP gypsum wallboard.
Pro Form joint tape
Proform XP all-purpose joint compound.
C.
•
·Use, ProForm Lite, Ultra, ProForm Joint Tape, · I Y.-inch Type W ,,...,.,"'""""" Multi-Flex Tape ProForm Triple-T, I screws . Topping, or ProForm Fiberglass 1 '/.-inch Type S or SSta-Smooth, StaTape to meet ASTM C 12 drywall screw. ,.,H,uuu• Lite, Sta-Smooth HS oint Compound.
Gypsum Liner, Type X (fire-resistant): 1 inch thick 24-inch wide, up to 14-foot long, conforming to ASTM C1396 or C1658. 1.
Resistance to Mold Growth: Minimum score of "1 0" when tested in accordance to ASTM D3273 and evaluated in accordance with ASTM D3274.
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
I 0/0112011 GYPSUM BOARD 09 2900-4
2.
•
Resistance to Fungi: Maximum score of "0" when tested m accordance to ASTM 021.
United States Gyp. Co.: 5/8 inch Mold Tough Type X Firecode Core, Gypsum panels, % inch Mold Tough Ultracode Core and I inch Mold Tough Liner panels.
5/8 inch ToughRock Fireguard, or ToughRock Fireguard, C gypsum board or DensArmor Plus Fireguard or Fireguard C Interior Panels (Fire-Rated) and 1 inch DensGlass Ultra s.
1 \.4-inch, 1 5 I 8- inch, or 2 \.4-inch Type S or S-12 drywall screw.
Glass Mesh.
1 \.4-inch, 1 5/8-inch, or 2 \.4-inch TypeS or S-12 drywall screw.
Same as above.
Same as above.
ProForm XP all-purpose joint compound.
Same as above.
National Gypsum Co.: 5/8 inch Gold Bond regular, 1 \.4-inch, 1 5/8-inch, or 2 Fire-Shield or Fire-Shield \.4-inch Type S or S-12 gypsum wallboard and 1 drywall screw. inch Gold Bond Fire-Shield Shaftliner.
•
D.
Tile Backer Board, Type X (fire-resistant): 1.
2.
•
Setting-type joint compound rated I 0 when tested in accordance with ASTM D3273 and evaluated in accordance with ASTM D3274.
Water resistant panels, 5/8 inch thick, 4-foot wide and up to 8-foot long conforming to conforming to one of the following requirements: a.
Aggregated Portland cement board with polymer-coated, woven glassfiber mesh embedded in front and back surfaces.
b.
Fiberglass-mat faced gypsum backing board complying with ASTM Cll78.
c.
Cementitious board surfaced with fiberglass reinforcing mesh on front and back and complying with ANSI All8.9 and ASTM Cl325.
Tile backer boards shall meet the following requirements: a.
Resistance to Mold Growth: Minimum score of "1 0" when tested in accordance to ASTM 03273 and evaluated in accordance with ASTM 03274.
b.
Resistance to Fungi: Maximum score of "0" when tested in accordance to ASTM 021.
8736 CORWIN TIIEATERREPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 GYPSUM BOARD 09 2900-5
•
United States Gyp. Co.: 5/8 inch DUROCK Cement Board.
Georgia-Pacific: 5/8 inch DensShield Fireguard Tile Backer.
National Gypsum Co.: 5/8 inch PermaBase Brand Cement Board.
•
•
James Hardie Building Products Inc.: ~ inch or '/., inch Hardibacker 500 Cement Board (for floor and countertop application at · · schools
E.
roofing nails or I I/4-inch 1 5/8 inch, or 2 '!.-inch DUROCK No. 8 wood screws. Steel: 1 1/4-inch or I 5/8 inch DUROCK No. 8
DUROCK glassfiber tape.
roofing nails or 1 5/8 inch Buglehead corrosion resistant, course thread, 2-inch wide fiberglass mesh drywall screws. tape. Steel: 1 I /4-inch Buglehead, corrosion resistant, fine screws. Wood: I ~-inch galvanized roofing nails or I 1/4-inch or I 5/8 inch, PermaBase corrosion resistant screws. Steel: I 114-inch or I 5/8 inch Type S-12 screws. Wood: I ~-inch galvanized roofing nails. Wood and Steel: I I/4-inch No. 8 by 0.375 HD self drilling, coiTosion resistant ribbed wafer head screws.
ANSI A I 36. I Type I: Organic adhesive or ANSI Al18.lacrylic latex modified dry-set mOiiar or ANSI A118.4 Latex Portland cement mortar. ANSI Al36.1 Type I: Organic adhesive or ANSI A118.I acrylic latex modified dry-set mortar or ANSI A 118.4 Latex Portland cement mortar.
PermaBase mesh tape. 2inch wide polymer-coated (alkali resistant) mesh tape for interior applications. 4inch wide polymer coated (alkali resistant) mesh tape for exterior applications.
Treat joints and set facing material with latex-Portland cement mortar or dry-set (thin-set) mortar. Mortars shall comply with ANSI A118.1 or A118.4 standards. Type I organic adhesive meeting ANSI A136.1 for interior use
2-inch Wide High Strength. Coated, alkali-resistant, glass fiber reinforcing tape.
ANSIAl36.l Type I: Organic adhesive or ANSI A118.lacrylic latex modified dry-set mortar or ANSI A118.4 Latex Portland cement mortar .
Sheathing, Type X (fire-resistant): 5/8 inch thick, 4-foot wide and up to 10-foot long fiberglass-mat faced gypsum backing board complying with ASTM C 1177 or ASTM CII78. I.
Resistance to Mold Growth: Minimum score of "10" when tested in accordance to ASTM D3273 and evaluated in accordance with ASTM D3274.
2.
Resistance to Fungi: Maximum score of "0" when tested in accordance to ASTM G21 .
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR& P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 GYPSUM BOARD 09 2900-6
•
United States Gyp. Co.: 5/8 inch Securock GlassMat Sheathing. Georgia-Pacific: 5/8 inch Densglass Gold Type "X"
ACCESSORIES
2.03
•
•
A.
Metal Trim: Paper-faced metal drywall beads and trim meeting ASTM C1047, as manufactured by USG/Beadex, National Gypsum, or equal. Trim units shall be of size and type to fit gypsum board construction and shall include corner beads, casings, edge trim and other shapes indicated and required.
B.
Mold Resistant Joint Compound: As recommended by board manufacturer, OnePass by CTS Cement Manufacturing Co., or equal, meeting the following requirements: 1.
Minimum score of "I 0" when tested in accordance with ASTM D3273 and evaluated in accordance with ASTM D3274.
2.
Shall conform to ASTM C475.
C.
Joint Tapes: Shall conform to ASTM C475.
D.
Finishing Materials: 1.
High solids primer shall be SHEETROCK Brand First Coat manufactured by USG or High-build primer by Sherwin Williams, or equal.
2.
Texture coat finish material shall be manufactured by U.S. Gypsum, Hamilton, or Highland Stucco and Lime Products, Inc., or equal.
E.
Acoustical Sealant: Non-hardening, non-shrinking, for use in conjunction with gypsum board, as recommended by Board Manufacturer and conforming to ASTM C919.
F.
Fasteners: 1.
Self-drilling, self-tapping bugle-head drywall screws; in conformance to ASTM C1002. No.6 TypeS or S12, 1 Yl--inch long for metal framing,
2.
Wood framing: a.
Nails: Hot dip, 0.016 inch diameter galvanized nails with 7/16 inch head and 1 Yl-inch minimum length.
8736 CORWIN THEATERREPAIR&P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 GYPSUM BOARD 09 2900-7
b.
•
3.
INSTALLATION A.
B.
•
Adhesive: as recommended by board manufacturer and in compliance to ASTM C557.
PART 3- EXECUTION 3.0I
•
Screws: Type W I V4-inch m1mmum length for single-layer panels. Screws shall be furnished with a corrosion-resistant treatment.
Metal Trim: I.
Provide corner beads at outside corners and angles, metal casing where gypsum board terminates at uncased openings, metal edge trim where board edges abut horizontal and vertical surfaces of other construction.
2.
Install trim in accordance with manufacturer's directions with appropriate joint compound. Install trim in longest practical pieces.
Gypsum Board: I.
Install gypsum board in conformance with ASTM C840.
2.
Gypsum board shall be cut by scoring and breaking or by sawing, working from face side. Where board meets projecting surfaces it shall be scribed and neatly cut. Unless conditions require otherwise, gypsum board shall be installed first to ceilings, then to walls. End joints shall occur over a support. Install panels of maximum practical length so a minimum number of end joints occur.
3.
End joints shall be staggered and joints on opposite sides of a partition shall be arranged to occur on different studs. Joint layout at openings shall be installed so no end joints will align with edges of openings.
4.
Except where specified otherwise, fasteners shall be spaced not less than 3/8 inch from edges and ends of gypsum board. Do not stagger fasteners at adjoining edges and ends.
5.
Install gypsum board vertically or horizontal as permitted by specific UL Design at walls. Fasten board with drywall screws spaced not to exceed 8 inches on centers around perimeter of boards and 8 inches on centers on intermediate studs. Space screws at 8 inches on centers along top and bottom runners. Screws shall be driven to provide screwhead penetration just below gypsum board surface without breaking surface paper. Where electrical outlet and switch boxes are indicated, provide adjustable attachment brackets between studs.
6.
Install gypsum board to ceiling framing with long dimension at right angles to furring channels, or wood framing members, and fasten with specified drywall screws or nails spaced 6 inches to 7 inches on centers across board. Screws or nails shall be not less than 112 inch from side joints and 3/8 inch from butt end joints. Abutting end joints shall occur over furring channels and end joints of boards shall be staggered. Support cutouts or openings in ceilings with furring channels .
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR& P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/0112011 GYPSUM BOARD 09 2900-8
7.
•
Install access doors, furnished under another section, in correct location, plumb, or level, flush with adjacent construction, and securely fastened to framing .
TOLERANCES
3.02
A.
Install gypsum board flat within 1/8 inch in 10 feet. JOINT TREATMENT AND FINISHING
3.03
'
Joints Tape set in compound
Interior Angles Tape set in joint compound
Accessories
Fastener's
2
Tape set in joint compound and one separate coat of joint compound
Covered by one separate coat of joint compound
Covered by one separate coat of joint compound
3
After taping, cover with two separate coats of joint compound
Tape embedded in joint compound and wiped to leave a thin coat of compound over tape, and one separate coat After taping, cover with one separate coat of joint compound
Covered by 3 separate coats of joint compound
4
After taping, cover with 2 separate coats of joint compound
After taping, cover with one separate coat of joint compound
Covered by 3 separate coats of joint compound
5
After taping, cover with 2 separate coats of joint compound
After taping, cover with one separate coat of joint compound
Covered by 3 separate coats of joint compound
Covered by 2 separate coats of joint compound Covered by 3 separate coats of joint compound Covered by 3 separate coats of joint compound
Level I
•
Si.rrface Tool marks and ridges acceptable Free from excess joint compound. Tool marks and ridges acceptable. Smooth and free oftool marks and ridges*
Smooth and free oftool marks and ridges*
Skim coat of joint compound applied to entire surface. Surface free from tool marks and ridges. *
*At completion of specified taping and finishing, install one coat of high solids primer as specified hereafter
•
B.
Levels: Install tape bedding compound, tape, and finishing cement on joints m wallboard as required for specified levels of finish.
C.
Levels 2 through 5: 1.
Install joint cement and finishing cement over screw heads. Treat all inside corners with joint cement, tape, and finishing cement. Treat outside corners with corner beads and finishing cement.
2.
Provide metal casing beads at all edges of gypsum wallboard, which abut ceiling, wall, or column finish, and elsewhere as required, such as openings, offsets, etc. Install all exposed joints, trims, and attachments non-apparent following installation of paint or other finishes. If joints and fasteners are visibly apparent, correct defects as required.
3.
Seal raw edges of plumbing openings and boards that have been cut to fit with sealing compound brushed on .
8736 CORWIN THEATERREPAIR&P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 GYPSUM BOARD 09 2900-9
4.
•
D.
Levels 3 and 4: Install one coat of high solids primer over entire surface.
E.
Level 5: Install one coat of skim coat over entire surface, followed by one coat of high solids primer over entire surface. REQUIRED LEVELS OF FINISH
3.04
A.
•
When entire installation is completed, correct and repair broken, dented, scratched or damaged wallboard before installation of finish materials by other trades .
3.05
Unless otherwise indicated or specified, levels of finish required shall be as follows: 1.
Level I: Plenum areas above ceilings, insides of shafts, and other concealed areas. Taping to be as required for fire rated assemblies.
2.
Level 2: Water-resistant wallboard backing for high moisture areas to be covered with a water resistant surface other than tile, vinyl or paint, I.e stainless steel cladding etc.
3.
Level 3: Backing for vinyl wall covering and adhered acoustic tile. Also, provide where textured finish is indicated.
4.
Level 4: Exposed painted wallboard in classrooms, utility rooms, and similar spaces not requiring Level 5 finish.
5.
Level 5: Exposed, painted wallboard in offices and corridors.
TEXTURE COAT- MATCH EXISTING ADJACENT SURF ACES A.
Spray install texture coat to interior gypsum board surfaces where indicated on Drawings.
B.
Texture coat shall provide a uniform splatter pattern finish with an 80 percent minimum coverage of surface.
c.
Provide protection from spray for interior surfaces of electrical boxes and wiring.
3.06
CLEAN-UP A.
Remove rubbish, debris, and waste materials and legally dispose of off Project site. PROTECTION
3.07 A.
Protect Work of this section until Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION
•
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
I 0/01/20 II GYPSUM BOARD 09 2900-10
•
SECTION 09 3013 CERAMIC TILING PART 1- GENERAL SUMMARY
1.01 A.
B.
••
1.
Ceramic tile.
2.
Waterproof membrane for tile.
3.
Mortar setting beds for floor and wall tile.
Related Requirements: 1.
Division 0 1 - General Requirements.
2.
Section 03 3000- Cast-In-Place Concrete.
3.
Section 07 9200- Joint Sealants
4.
Section 09 2900 - Gypsum Board .
SUBMITTALS
1.02 A.
Product Data: Manufacturer's data, standard specifications, Material Safety Data Sheets, and other technical information for each product specified.
B.
Material Samples: Manufacturer's standard palette, indicating full range of tile colors, textures, and grout colors.
c.
Mock-Ups: For each type, color, and texture, minimum one foot square or three full tile courses, on Plexiglas to demonstrate proper bond mortar and coverage; grout color, hardness and depth.
D.
Installation Instructions: Manufacturer's preparation and installation instructions.
E.
Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturer certifying that products furnished comply with requirements of this Specification. QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.03 A.
•
Section Includes:
Comply with applicable parts of the following codes or standards as a mmtmum requirement:
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HJGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 CERAMIC TILING 09 3013-1
•
•
•
I.
ANSI A I 08, American National Standard Specifications for the Installation of Ceramic Tile .
2.
ANSI A 118, American National Standard Specifications for Ceramic Tile Installation Materials.
3.
ANSI A 136.1, Standard Specifications for Ceramic Tile.
4.
ASTM Al85 - Standard Specification for Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement, Plain, for Concrete.
5.
ASTM C 185 - Standard Test Method for Air Content of Hydraulic Cement Mortar.
6.
ASTM Cl44- Standard Specification for Aggregate for Masonry Mortar.
7.
ASTM C 150 - Standard Specification for Portland Cement.
8.
ASTM C241 - Standard Test Method for Abrasion Resistance of Stone Subjected to Foot Traffic.
9.
ASTM C206 - Standard Specification for Finishing Hydrated Lime
10.
ASTM C645 - Standard Specification for Nonstructural Steel Framing Members .
II.
ASTM 04551 - Standard Specification for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Flexible Concealed Water-Containment Membrane.
12.
Tile Council of North America (TCNA) "Handbook for Ceramic Tile installation".
13.
CHPS Low-Emitting Materials Table: Materials submitted for tile assemblies must bee listed as low emitting on the CHPS website www.CHPS.net.
Current edition of
B.
Grade Certificate and Labeling: With each delivery of tile, furnish manufacturer's "Master Grade Certificate" to the Project Inspector.
C.
Source of Materials: Provide materials obtained from one source for each type and color of tile, grout, and setting materials.
D.
Consistent Quality: properties.
E.
Comply with requirements of California Building Code and ADAAG.
F.
Qualifications of Tile Manufacturer: Company specializing in ceramic tile, mosaics, pavers, trim units, and thresholds with five years minimum experience .
Products shall be consistent m appearance and physical
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 CERAMJC TILING 09 3013-2
•
G.
Qualification of Installation System Manufacturer: Company specializing in installation systems/ mortars, grouts/ adhesives with ten years minimum experience .
H.
Qualifications of Installer: Company specializing in installation of ceramic tile, mosaics, pavers, trim units and thresholds with five years experience with installations of similar scope, materials, and design.
I.
Pre-Construction Meetings: Prior to start of Work of this section and after approval of submittals, schedule an on-site meeting between Contractor, OAR, Project Inspector, and representatives of the material manufacturer and tile installer to review construction conditions and Drawings for conformance with the requirements of this Specification for each substrate. DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
1.04 A.
Deliver tile and other materials in sealed containers, with manufacturer's labels intact.
B.
Keep all materials clean and dry. MAINTENANCE
1.05 A.
•
Extra Materials: Provide a minimum of five percent of each type and color as the installed tile, in manufacturers' cartons and labeled. WARRANTY
1.06 A.
Manufacturer shall provide a five year material warranty.
B.
Installer shall provide a five year fabrication and installation warranty.
C.
For waterproofing, manufacturer shall provide a 10 year material warranty for waterproofing installation, tile setting, and grouting materials.
PART 2- PRODUCTS MANUFACTURERS
2.01 A.
•
Tile: To establish quality, Specification is based on ANSI A137.1 Standard Grade. Equivalent tile products from the following manufacturers may be provided: 1.
Dal-Tile Corporation.
2.
American Olean Company.
3.
Florida Tile, Inc.
4.
Equal.
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 CERAMIC Tll.,ING 09 3013-3
B.
•
•
1.
Laticrete International, Inc.
2.
Custom Building Products.
3.
Mapei.
4.
Equal.
MATERIALS
2.02
•
Installation Materials: To establish quality for setting and waterproofing materials, Specification is based on ANSI A 13 7.l. Products and methods of the following manufacturers may be provided:
A.
Colors, Textures, and Patterns: Tile shall be from manufacturer's standard product line. 90 percent shall be from "price group 2", and "1 0 percent from price group 3", unless indicated otherwise. Tile trim and accessories shall match adjoining tile. Grout color shall match tile unless otherwise indicated.
B.
Tile sizes: Tile sizes specified are modular dimensions unless otherwise indicated.
c.
Mortar Sand: ASTM C 144.
D.
Portland Cement: ASTM C 50, Type I or II.
E.
Hydrated Lime: ASTM C207, Type S; or ASTM C206 Type S
F.
Portland Cement Mortar: ANSI 118.1
G.
Portland Cement Mortar Bed: Sand-cement mortar mix gauged with Laticrete Acrylic Admix or Custom Building Products Thin-Set Mortar Admix.
H.
Portland Cement Mortar Bed for Shower Areas: Laticrete 226 Thick Bed Mortar Mix Gauged with Laticrete 3 70 I Mortar and Grout Admix or on site mix per ANSI A 108.1 A with Custom Building Products Thin-Set Mortar Admix.
I.
Latex Portland Cement Bond Mortar: Laticrete 317 Floor & Wall Thinset gauged with Laticrete 3701 Admix, or Custom Building Products Master Blend mixed with Thin-Set Mortar Admix.
J.
Waterproof Membrane: Cold-applied, single component liquid with embedded reinforcing fabric where recommended by manufacturer: Laticrete Hydro Ban Waterproof Membrane or Custom Building Products Red Guard Waterproof Membrane.
K.
Reinforcing Wire Fabric: 2-inch by 2-inch, 16 by 16 gage, galvanized electrically welded wire reinforcing, per ASTM A 185 .
8736 CORWIN THEA1ERREPAIR& P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01!2011 CERAMIC TILING 09 3013-4
•
L.
Latex Portland Cement Grout: Laticrete Sanded Grout (1500 Series), Custom Polyblend Sanded Grout or Laticrete Unsanded Grout 1600 Series (for joints smaller than 1/8"), Custom Polyblend Unsanded Grout.
M.
Epoxy Grout for Quarry Tile: Laticrete Spectralock Pro Epoxy Grout for Floors and Walls or Custom 100 percent Solids Epoxy Grout.
N.
Cleavage Membrane and Wall Backing Paper: Cleavage membrane shall be 15-pound asphalt-saturated felt manufactured according to ASTM D226 Standard Specification for Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt Used in Roofing and Waterproofing
0.
Separation Material (for all sealed joints including perimeters and quarry-tile fields of floor mortar beds): Quality Foam, QF 200 white, 3/8 inch wide by 5-inch high.
P.
Backer Rod for sealants (for ceramic mosaic fields): Polyethylene foam, closed-cell, flexible and·compressible, 3/16 inch diameter.
Q.
Cleaner and Sealer:
• R.
•
2.03
1.
Cleaner and sealer shall be from one manufacturer, acceptable to tile and grout manufacturers. To establish quality, the Specification is based on Aqua Mix Inc. Equivalent products from Miracle Sealants Co., Watco Tile and Brick, or equal may be provided.
2.
Cleaner: Aqua Mix Concentrated Tile Cleaner, neutral phosphate-free cleaner, or Custom Building Products Tile Lab Concentrated Tile and Stone Cleaner.
3.
Sealer: Aqua Mix Penetrating Sealer, fungus- and bacteria-resistant, stainresistant, and slip-resistant as specified for tile, Custom Building Products Tile Lab Surface Gard, or equal.
Sealants: 1.
Sealant and primer shall be from one manufacturer, acceptable to tile and grout manufacturers. See Section 07 9200 - Joint Sealants.
2.
Ceramic Mosaic Tile: One-Part, Mildew-Resistant Silicone Sealant: ASTM C 920; Type S; Grade NS; Class 25; Uses NT, G, A, and, as applicable to nonporous joint substrates indicated, 0; formulated with fungicide, intended for sealing interior ceramic tile joints and other nonporous substrates that are subject to in-service exposures of high humidity and extreme temperatures.
3.
Quarry Tile: Multipart, Pourable Urethane Sealant for Use T: ASTM C 920; Type M; Grade P; Class 25; Uses T, M, A, and, as applicable to joint substrates indicated, 0.
TILE
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 CERAMIC TILING 09 3013-5
A.
•
B.
c.
•
Unglazed Ceramic Mosaic Floor Tile: I.
Size: 1 inch by 1 inch or as indicated.
2.
Colors and patterns as selected by Architect from price groups specified.
3.
Slip Resistance: Resistant to slipping appropriate to the installed conditions of use, as required by the California Building Code and ADASAD. a.
As a minimum, the coefficient of friction as measured by ASTM C 1028 shall be 0.6 except ramps shall be 0.8.
b.
For tile in shower and locker areas, incorporate grit into tile to increase slip resistance.
Glazed Wall Tile: 1.
Size: 4-1/4 inch by 4-1/4 inch face dimensions by 5/16 inch thick (ceramic mosaic tile may also be used on walls).
2.
Colors and patterns as selected by Architect from price groups specified.
Trim: 1.
Integral bullnose at external corners.
2.
Provide bullnose where tile projects from jamb.
3.
Mosaic tile base with wall tile above: A340 1.
4.
Mosaic tile base without wall tile above: S3619T (6-inch high sanitary caved base).
5.
Bullnose at wainscot: A4200 and A4402.
PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01
EXAMINATION AND PREPARATION A.
Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with installation requirements. Verify that all penetrations through substrate have been installed. Proceed with Work only after all conditions are in compliance.
B.
Substrates shall be firm; dry; clean and within flatness tolerances required by relevant ANSI A 108 tile installation standards. Prepare surfaces as follows: l.
•
Concrete Floors: Allow concrete floors to cure for 28 days minimum before beginning tile and grout installation. Remove laitance, sand, dust, and loose particles .
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 CERAMIC TILING 09 3013-6
2.
•
•
•
C.
Plywood Subfloors: Before installing mortar setting bed over plywood subfloors, install cleavage membrane over sub-floor. Anchor firmly in place and lap joints 6 inches minimum. Turn membrane up 6 inches at walls and beneath building felt on walls.
Substrates to receive wall tile and base shall be: I.
Scratch coat of cement plaster, as specified in Section 09 2423 - Cement Plaster and Metal Lath (required in student restrooms, showers and locker rooms, and quarry tile bases).
2.
Cementitious backing panels, as specified in Section 09 2900 - Gypsum Board.
D.
Verify that installation of grounds, anchors, recessed frames, electrical and mechanical items of Work, and similar items located in or behind tile has been completed before installing tile.
E.
Verify that joints and cracks in tile substrates are coordinated with caulked-joint locations; if not coordinated, adjust as required by the Architect.
F.
Do not install tile until construction in spaces is completed and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained in compliance with referenced standards and manufacturer's written instructions.
G.
Protect adjacent surfaces during progress of Work ofthis section . TILE INSTALLATION, GENERAL
3.02 A.
Install tile in grid pattern, unless otherwise indicated. Align joints when adjoining tiles on floor, base, walls, and trim are same size. Center the tile fields in both directions for each space or on each wall area. Adjust to minimize tile cutting. Provide uniform joint widths, unless otherwise indicated.
B.
For tile mounted in sheets: Joints between tile sheets shall be the same width as joints within tile sheets.
C.
Extend Work into recesses and under or behind equipment and fixtures to form a complete covering without interruptions, unless otherwise indicated. Terminate Work neatly at obstructions, edges, and corners without disrupting pattern or joint alignments.
D.
Accurately form intersections and returns. Perform cutting and drilling of tile without damaging tile. Carefully grind the cut edges of tile abutting trim, finish, or built-in items. Fit tile closely to electrical outlets, piping, fixtures, and other penetrations so plates, collars, or covers overlap tile.
E.
Locate joints, directly above joints in concrete substrates, at horizontal and vertical changes in plane, or where indicated during installation of mortar beds. In quarry tile floors, provide at 12 feet on center maximum. Provide 3/8-inch wide foam at joints. Do not saw-cut joints after installing tiles .
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
I 0/0 l/20 11 CERAMIC TILING 09 3013-7
•
F.
Prepare and clean joints to be sealed. Apply sealants to comply with requirements of Section 07 9200 - Joint Sealants .
G.
Conform to manufacturers printed instructions, and applicable requirements of ANSI and TCNA Standards. TILE INSTALLATION, FLOOR
3.03
•
•
A.
Install reinforcing and latex Portland-cement mortar setting bed over cured concrete slab or cleavage membrane on plywood floor. Lap reinforcing at least one full mesh, and support or lift so that it is approximately in the middle of mortar bed. Do not abut against vertical surfaces. Install foam separation material at perimeters and expansion joint locations for caulked joints.
B.
Mix setting mortar in accordance with ANSI recommendations.
c.
Once begun, mortar installation must continue until room is completed. Discard any batch not floated and finished within Y:z hour of mixing. Firmly compact before screeding. Screed to true plane and pitch as indicated. Slope mortar bed sufficiently that water flows to drain and no puddling will occur. Slope mortar down to floor drains for proper installation of waterproof membrane. After screeding, firmly rub down with steel or wood float.
D.
Cure mortar bed with a light fog spray of water and cover with 6-mil Visqueen for 72 hours .
E.
Waterproof Membrane: 1.
Install waterproof membrane where indicated and in all kitchen, toilet, shower, and locker areas according to TCNA Standards. Extend membrane up wall mortar or backing board as follows: a.
3 inches above top of curb wall.
b.
6 inches minimum above floor.
c.
In shower rooms, install from floor to ceiling.
2.
Insure that layers of membrane are fully inserted into clamping ring of floor drain. After membrane installation and before tile setting, install pea gravel around sub drain to prevent blockage of weep holes and place mortar to proper level for setting tile.
3.
For tile installations other than slab on grade, before setting tile and after seven days curing, water test membrane by damming drains and doors, filling floor with water to 4-inch minimum depth, and leaving for 24 hours. Correct any leaks and re-test before proceeding. After testing, protect membrane from traffic until tile Work begins .
8736 CORWIN 11-IEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01!2011 CERAMIC TILING 09 3013-8
•
F
Thin Set Method: Confirm substrate is completely clean and free of dust. Cut foam at floor perimeters flush with top of mortar bed. Insure that bond coats do not intrude into joints to be sealed. Install tile over properly cured setting bed or waterproof membrane utilizing "thin-set" method with latex portland cement bond mortar, in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions and ANSI A I 08.5.
G.
Minimum coverage of bond mortar shall be 80 percent except 95 percent in shower areas, for quarry tile, and exterior installations. Place tile into fresh mortar press tile to insure full contact. Before setting proceeds, set and remove three tiles or sheets of tiles to confirm specified coverage of bond mortar. If coverage is insufficient, utilize a larger toothed trowel or back butter tiles until proper coverage is provided.
H.
Install tile on floors with the following joint widths:
I.
•
Ceramic Mosaic Tile: 1/16 to 1/8 inch.
2.
Quarry Tile: 114 to 3/8 inch.
3.
Paver Tile: 3/16 to 3/8 inch.
Install base tile for quarry tile floors on a mortar bed, with joints matching floor. TILE INSTALLATION, WALLS
3.04
•
1.
A.
Install wall mortar beds before floor mortar beds.
B.
On plaster walls, clean scratch coat surface of loose or foreign materials, fog spray with water, and install brown coat mortar bed over scratch coat to a thickness not less than 3/8 inch and not greater than % inch. Once started, wall mortar installation must continue until wall is completely floated. Discard any batch not floated and finished within Yz hour of mixing. As soon as wall mortar is dried to sufficient hardness, but still plastic, firmly rub with wood float.
C.
Cover cure with 40-weight Kraft paper for 72 hours minimum.
D.
Install tile over properly cured setting bed, waterproof membrane, or cementltiOus backing panels utilizing "thin-set" method with latex portland cement bond mortar, in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions and ANSI A I 08.5. Confirm substrate is completely clean and free of dust. Insure that bond coats do not intrude into joints to be caulked.
E.
Minimum coverage of bond mortar shall be 80 percent except 95 percent in shower areas or exterior installations. Set and test as specified for floors.
F.
Lay out Work so tiles will be centered on each wall or section of wall in order to minimize tile cuts. Lay out tile wainscots to next full tile beyond dimensions indicated. Spot setting bed with mortared tile, set plumb and true, accurately indicate plane of finished tile surfaces .
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/0112011 CERAMIC TILING 093013-9
•
G.
2.
Install tile on walls with followingjoint widths:
1. Glazed Wall Tile: 1116 inch. Ceramic Mosaic Tile: 1/16 to 1/8 inch. 3. Quarry Tile: 1/4 to 3/8 inch. 4. H.
Horizontal joints shall be level, vertical joints plumb with surfaces true and plumb, edges of tiles flushed.
I.
Rub exposed cuts smooth with a fine stone; no cut edge shall be set against a fixture or adjoining surface without a 1/16 inch joint to be caulked.
J.
Install access doors where required, furnished under another section, in correct location, plumb or level, flush with adjacent construction, and securely fastened to framing. GROUTING
3.05
•
A.
Prior to starting, ensure that all tile surfaces are clean and excessive bond mortar is scraped and vacuumed from joints (approximately 2/3 depth of tile should be open for grouting). Follow manufacturer's instructions for mixing grout. Once grout Work commences, proceed until complete wall or floor area is finished utilizing one batch of grout.
B.
Latex portland cement grouting: Dampen tile surface and joints with water using sponge, but leaving no puddles in joints. Force grout into joints using sufficient pressure on rubber float so as to fill joints completely, and scrape excess grout off tile surface with rubber float. Smooth or tool grout to uniform joint finish. Do not over water.
c.
Curing latex Portland cement grout: Remove final grout haze with clean soft cloth, and cover with 40-weight Kraft paper to cure. Leave paper in place for protection. Cover wall surfaces with 40-weight Kraft paper for 72 hours.
D.
Epoxy grouting: Do not dampen tile. Follow manufacturer's instructions for mixing grout. Force grout into joints with sufficient pressure on rubber float so as to fill joints completely, and scrape excess grout off tile surface with rubber float. Smooth or tool grout to uniform joint finish. Do not allow grout to harden on face of tile.
E.
Curing epoxy grout: Do not cover floor, but do not allow foot traffic for 72 hours. Then, if grout is not tacky, cover with 40-weight Kraft paper for protection. CLEANING AND SEALING
3.06
•
Special Large Tile: 3/16 to 3/8 inch.
A.
If grout scum is not visible on tile surface after curing, clean tile surface with clear water. Remove and replace cracked, broken or defective Work with proper material.
B.
If, when curing membrane is removed, grout scum is visible on tile surface, use the following cleaning method: I 0/0 l/20 11
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR& P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
CERAMIC TILING 09 3013-10
• c.
Immediately recover floor with paper or felt and allow to continue curing for a minimum of 14 days; uncover floor and maintain entire tile surface saturated with clean cool water for not less than two hours.
2.
Utilize a neutral cleaner acceptable to manufacturers of tile and grout, and follow manufacturer's instruction. Do not provide generic acid cleaners.
3.
Wet tile floors and apply cleaning solution to floor surface, then scrub with a brush. Rinse area several times with clean water to flush solution off floor surface.
Apply penetrating sealer in accordance with manufacturer's instructions utilizing a dense sponge applicator, paint pad, sprayer or brush. A void overlapping, puddling, and rundown. Completely wipe surface dry within 3 to 5 minutes using cotton or paper towels; do not allow sealer to dry on tile. After two hours, test surface by applying water droplets to surface. If water is absorbed, apply a second coat. A void surface traffic for 24 hours. SEALANTS
3.06
•
1.
A.
Insure joints to be sealed are free of setting and grouting materials and construction debris. Do not permit any foot traffic on installed sealants for a minimum of 48 hours or protect with hardboard strips.
B.
Install in accordance with Section 07 9200 - Joint Sealants. PROTECTION
3.07 A.
Admit no traffic where tile is installed until mortar and grout has set for a minimum of 72 hours.
B.
Protect Work of this section until Substantial Completion. CLEANUP
3.08 A.
Remove rubbish, debris, and waste material and legally dispose of off the Project site. END OF SECTION
•
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR& P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/0l/201 I CERAMIC TILING 093013-11
•
SECTION 09 6513 RUBBER BASE PART I - GENERAL SUMMARY
1.01 A.
Section Includes: I.
B.
Related Requirements: 1.
A.
Product Data: Submit manufacturer's published technical data describing materials, construction and recommended installation instructions. Submit technical data and installation instructions for each adhesive material.
B.
Maintenance Instructions: Submit manufacturer's recommendations for maintenance, care and cleaning of base.
c.
Samples: Submit Samples of top set base in each available color. Following color selections, submit Samples, not less than 12 inches long of each selected color and type. Submit pint cans of each type adhesive.
D.
Maintenance Materials: Before Substantial Completion, deliver at least 50 lineal feet and five outside comer units of each color of rubber base installed. Deliver the materials in unopened factory containers or in sealed cartons with labels identifying the contents, matching installed materials. Include unopened cans of adhesives adequate to install the maintenance materials. QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.03
•
Division 01 - General Requirements.
SUBMITTALS
1.02
•
Topset coved rubber base for installation with surface flooring.
A.
Qualifications of Installer: Minimum five years experience in successfully installing the same or similar flooring materials.
B.
Comply with the following as a minimum requirement: 1.
ASTM E84: Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
2.
ASTM F 1861: Standard Specification for Resilient Wall Base.
3.
Comply with current CHPS requirements, www.chps.net.
4.
Chemically based products such as sealers, primers, fillers, adhesives, etc. must be approved by Owner's Office of Environmental Health and Safety (OEHS) .
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 RUBBER BASE 09 6513-1
•
5.
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
1.04 A.
Materials shall be delivered to the Project site in original unopened manufacturer's packaging clearly labeled with manufacturer's name. Store materials at room temperature, but not less than 70 degrees F, for a minimum of 48 hours before installation, unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's printed instructions. PROJECT CONDITIONS
1.05 A.
1.06
Each selected color and configuration shall be from same dye lot and color.
Ventilation and Temperature: Verify areas that are to receive rubber base are ventilated to remove fumes from installation materials, and areas are within temperature range recommended by the various material manufactures for site installation conditions.
WARRANTY A.
Manufacturer shall provide a five year material warranty.
B.
Installer shall provide a two year fabrication and installation warranty.
PART 2- PRODUCTS ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
2.01
•
A.
Burke/Mercer Wall Base.
B.
Rappe, Pinnacle Rubber Base.
c.
Flexco Company, Wallflower Premium Rubber Wall Base.
D.
Equal. MATERIALS
2.02 A.
Rubber base: Conform to ASTM F 861; Group 2, solid (homogeneous); Type I, TS, (thermoset) vulcanized rubber, Style A, 4-inch high unless otherwise indicated, integral colors as selected, non-shrinking, l/8 inch thick, with matching molded outside corners.
B.
Base Adhesive: Water based, low odor type, as recommended by manufacturer of rubber base.
PART 3- EXECUTION COORDINATION
3.01 A.
•
Coordinate the Work of this section with other sections to provide a level, smooth and clean finish surfaces to receive rubber base .
8736 CORWIN TIIEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
I 0/01/20 II RUBBER BASE 09 6513-2
•
3.02
EXAMINATION
A.
Field verify dimensions and other conditions affecting the Work of this section before commencing the Work of this section.
B.
Before Work is started, examine surfaces that are to receive rubber base. Deficiencies shall be corrected before starting the Work of this section.
3.03
PREPARATION
A.
Do not start preparation until adjacent concrete floor slabs are at least 90 days old arid finish flooring is installed.
B.
Install rubber base when ambient temperature is 70 degrees F. or higher. INSTALLATION
3.04
•
A.
Install top set base at hard floors, including resilient flooring, concrete and wood, carpet and other soft floors.
B.
Securely fasten cement base to backing in long lengths in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Lay out lengths so that not less than 18 inches long filler pieces are provided. Assure that top and toe continuously contact the wall and floor, and that all joints are tight. Install matching factory formed external corners at all offsets. Inside corners shall be coped; wrapped corners are not acceptable .
C.
Use of adhesive gun is prohibited. Apply adhesive directly to substrate using the appropriate notched trowel or spreader according to manufacturer's instructions. Maintain l/8 inch gap from top of base to prevent adhesive oozing onto adjacent surfaces.
D.
Base and outside corners shall be rolled with a seam roller before adhesive sets.
3.05
3.06
CLEANING A.
Maintain surfaces of base clean as installation progresses. Clean rubber base when sufficiently seated and remove foreign substances.
B.
Clean adjacent surfaces of adhesive or other defacement. Replace damaged and/or defective Work to the specified condition.
CLEAN UP A.
3.07
PROTECTION A.
•
Remove rubbish, debris and waste materials and legally dispose of off the Project site.
Protect the Work of this section until Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/0 l/20 II RUBBER BASE 09 6513-3
111001
•
SECTION 09 6518 RUBBER FLOORING AND STAIR COVERING PART I - GENERAL SUMMARY
I.OI A.
Section Includes: I.
B.
•
Related Requirements: I.
Division 0 I - General Requirements.
2.
Section 03 3000 - Cast-in-Place Concrete.
3.
Section 09 6513 - Rubber Base.
4.
Section 09 6516 - Resilient Sheet Flooring.
5.
Section 09 65I9- Vinyl Composition Tile.
DEFINITIONS
1.02 A.
Pop-up: A pop-up is defined as any surface deviation or looseness of substrate that is equal to or greater than I /64 (0.0 I5625) inch above the concrete floor level, regardless ofthe size. SUBMITTALS
1.03
•
Rubber stair covering.
A.
Product Data: Submit manufacturer's published technical data describing materials, construction, and recommended installation procedures Submit technical data and installation instructions for each adhesive material. Submit list and Product Data of recommended finish materials.
B.
Maintenance Instructions: Submit manufacturer's recommendations for maintenance, care, cleaning of rubber tile.
C.
Samples: Submit Samples of rubber tile in each available color and pattern. Following color selections, submit full size Samples of each selected color and pattern. Submit pint cans of each type adhesive.
D.
Maintenance Materials: Before Substantial Completion, deliver one unopened container of each color and pattern of rubber tile in each color and pattern installed .
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/0112011 RUBBER FLOORING AND STAIR COVERING 09 6518-1
111001
Label each container indicating locations installed. Include unopened cans of adhesives adequate to install the maintenance materials .
•
E.
Installer's Experience Qualifications: Submit list of not less than five projects, extending over period of not less than five years, indicating installer's experience record. Submit letter from manufacturer indicating manufacturer's approval for installer of the products. QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.04
A.
Qualifications of Installer: Minimum five years experience in successfully installing the same or similar flooring materials.
B.
Comply with the following as a minimum requirement: I.
•
ASTM E84: Class A Flame Spread Rating of 25 or less.
C.
Comply with current CHPS requirements, www.chps.net.
D.
Chemically based products such as sealers, primers, fillers, adhesives, etcetera must be approved by Owner's Office of Environmental Health and Safety (OEHS).
E.
Moisture Testing: ASTM F 1869.
1.05
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A.
Materials shall be delivered to Project site in original unopened manufacturer's packaging clearly labeled with manufacturer's name. Materials shall be stored at not less than 70 degrees F for not less than 48 hours before installation. PROJECT CONDITIONS
1.06
A.
1.07
Ventilation and Temperature: Verify areas that are to receive new flooring are ventilated to remove fumes from installation materials, and areas are within temperature range recommended by the various material manufactures for Project site installation conditions. WARRANTY
A.
Manufacturer shall provide a two year material warranty.
B.
Installer shall provide a two year fabrication and installation warranty.
PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01
•
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A.
Nora Rubber Flooring.
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR& P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/0112011 RUBBER FLOORING AND STAIR COVERING 09 6518-2
111001
•
B.
Johnsonite.
c.
Flexco Corporation.
D.
Roppe Corporation.
E.
Equal. MATERIALS
2.02 A.
•
Stair Covering: I.
Treads: ASTM F2169, Standard Specification for Resilient Stair Treads. Extruded rubber with 2 inch wide minimum flush integral contrasting color abrasive strips designed for installation on stairs of configuration indicated, colors and patterns as selected.
2.
Risers and Skirting: 1/8 inch thick rubber or vinyl in selected colors, with exposed edges factory radius molded.
B.
Crack Filler and Leveling Compound: Cementitious type, Durabond's Webcrete # 95, Ardex SD-F, Armstrong S-194 or equal, as recommended by flooring manufacturer.
C.
Concrete Primer: Non-staining type recommended by manufacturer of rubber tile.
D.
Adhesive: Water based, low odor type formulated specially for use with rubber tile, and manufactured or recommended by manufacturer of rubber tile.
E.
Reducer Strips: Tapered rubber not less than one inch wide, and thickness to match tile.
F.
Floor Finish: Polymer type recommended by manufacturer for rubber flooring, UL rated non-slip.
PART 3- EXECUTION COORDINATION
3.01 A.
EXAMINATION
3.02
•
Coordinate with related Work to assure level, smooth, and clean finish surfaces to receive rubber floor tile and stair covering.
A.
Field verify dimensions and other conditions affecting the Work of this section.
B.
Before Work is commenced, examine surfaces that are to receive rubber tile and stair covering. Repair and/or replace defective Work before starting Work ofthis section .
8736 CORWINTIIEA TER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/0 l/20 II RUBBER FLOORING AND STAIR COVERING 09 6518-3
111001
•
•
•
3.03
PREPARATION A.
Concrete Slabs: I.
Do not start preparation until adjacent concrete floor slabs are at least 90 days old.
2.
Leveling: Check sub-floors for true to level and plane within a tolerance of 118 inch in I 0 feet. Test floor areas both ways with a l 0-foot straightedge and repair high and low areas exceeding allowable tolerance. Pop ups shall be hammered out and floor filled with a cementitious leveling compound. Remove high areas by power sanding, stone rubbing or grinding, chipping off and filling with leveling compound, or equivalent method. Fill low areas with leveling compound. Repair and level the surfaces having abrupt changes in plane, such as trowel marks or ridges, whether or not within the allowable tolerance. Clean areas where repairs are performed.
3.
Cleaning: After leveling, clean substrates of deleterious substances and foreign matter. Fill cracks or depressions with cementitious leveling compound of the type recommended by flooring manufacturer for the specific Work conditions.
4.
Moisture Testing: Test new and old concrete slabs for adequate dryness. Testing shall conform to ASTM F I869 and the following; minimum testing requirements are three calcium chloride tests for the first I ,000 square feet of floor area and one for each additional I ,000 square feet or fraction thereof. Unless more stringent requirements are recommended by flooring manufacturer, maximum allowable moisture release at time of flooring installation shall be three pounds per 24 hours per I ,000 square feet. Provide report of test as specified above. For each test, perform the following steps: a.
Weigh the sealed dish of crystals immediately prior to exposure. Record starting weight, date, and time.
b.
Open kit and set crystal dish on clean concrete surface. Immediately install plastic dome over the dish. Confirm the dome is gasketed to the concrete and is airtight.
c.
Leave test to absorb moisture for 60 to 72 hours. temperature above 55 degrees F. for duration of test.
d.
After exposure, remove and discard housing. Replace dish lid and tape shut. Weigh the sample within one hour of removal from floor.
e.
Compute the vapor emission in pounds, indicate location of test and vapor emission on report .
Maintain room
10/01/2011
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
RUBBER FLOORING AND STAIR COVERING 09 6518-4
111001
f.
•
5.
A.
Stair Treads: Install in one-piece size on each tread, tightly jointed to walls and risers. Install full width landing treads unless otherwise indicated.
B.
Clean or sand back of stair tread skirts for proper adhesion.
c.
Fit the nose of the tread tightly against face of stair nosing.
D.
Secure area to allow stair tread adhesive to dry completely before allowing foot traffic.
E.
Fully bed treads in manufacturer's recommended adhesive.
F.
Cement skirting and risers in place with tight lapped and double cut joints.
G.
Cut contrasting strips to fit, and install at top, bottom and intermediate risers as indicated or as required by regulatory authorities .
H.
Thoroughly roll tread and riser while adhesive is fresh allowing transfer of adhesive to the material for a firm bond. CLEANING, WAXING, AND COMPLETION
3.05 A.
Maintain flooring and stair tread surfaces clean as installation progresses.
B.
Clean flooring and treads when sufficiently seated and remove foreign substances.
c.
Before Substantial Completion, install at least two coats of floor finish on rubber tile flooring, in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Do not buff polymeric floor finish unless specifically recommended by finish manufacturer.
D.
Clean adjacent surfaces of adhesive or other deleterious conditions. CLEANUP
3.06
A.
Remove rubbish, debris and waste material and legally dispose of off the Project site. PROTECTION
3.07
A.
•
Priming: Prime concrete floor slabs on grade; pnme other slabs if recommended by flooring manufacturer.
INSTALLATION OF STAIR TREADS, RISERS AND SKIRTING
3.04
•
Delay application of flooring until sub-floors are sufficiently dry, or perform remedial measures as recommended by flooring materials manufacturer.
Protect the Work ofthis section until Substantial Completion.
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 RUBBER FLOORING AND STAIR COVERING 09 6518-5
111001
•
3.08
INSTRUCTION A.
After Work of this section is complete, flooring manufacture's technical representative shall provide a four hour instruction period to Owner staff in maintenance of flooring. END OF SECTION
•
•
10/01/2011
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
RUBBER FLOORING AND STAIR COVERING 09 6518-6
•
SECTION 09 6519 VINYL COMPOSITION TILE
PART 1- GENERAL SUMMARY
1.01 A.
Section Includes: 1.
B.
A.
•
1.
Division 01 - General Requirements.
2.
Section 03 3000 - Cast-in-Place Concrete.
3.
Section 09 6513 - Rubber Base.
Pop-up: A pop-up is defined as any surface deviation or looseness of substrate that is equal to or greater than 1/64 (0.0 15625) inch above the concrete floor level, regardless ofthe size . SUBMITTALS
1.03
1.04
Related Requirements:
DEFINITIONS
1.02
•
Vinyl composition tile flooring as indicated.
A.
Product Data: Submit manufacturer's published technical data describing materials, construction and recommended installation instructions. Submit technical data and installation instructions for each adhesive material. Submit list and Product Data of recommended finish materials.
B.
Maintenance Instructions: Submit manufacturer's recommendations for maintenance, care, and cleaning of vinyl composition tile.
C.
Samples: Submit Samples of vinyl composition tile and any reducers or transitions in each available color and pattern. Following color selections, submit full size samples of each selected color and pattern. Submit pint cans of each type of adhesive.
D.
Maintenance Materials: Before Substantial Completion, deliver one unopened container of each color and pattern of vinyl composition tile in each color and pattern installed. Label each container indicating locations installed. Include unopened cans of adhesives adequate to install the maintenance materials.
E.
Installer's Experience Qualifications: Submit list of not less than five projects, extending over period of not less than five years, indicating installer's experience record. Submit letter from manufacturer indicating manufacturer's approval for installer of the products. QUALITY ASSURANCE
8736 CORWIN THEATERREPAIR&P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 VINYL COMPOSITION TILE 096519-1
•
A.
Qualifications of Installer: Minimum five years experience in successfully installing the same or similar flooring materials .
B.
Qualifications of Supervising Installer: In addition to the qualifications of the installer listed above, the flooring installer's supervisor shall have a minimum of I 0 hours CalOSHA safety training.
C.
Pre-Installation and Progress meetings: Prior to start of work of this section and after approval of submittals, schedule on-site meetings between Contractor, Supervising Installer, OAR and Project Inspector to review installation and procedures required for project.
D.
Comply with the following as a minimum requirement:
1.05
•
I.
Materials shall be compliant with requirements of CBC Chapter JIB and ADAAG.
2.
ASTM E84: Class A Flame Spread Rating of 25 or less.
3.
Comply with current CHPS requirements, www.chps.net.
4.
Moisture Testing: ASTM Fl869.
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A.
Materials shall be delivered to the Project site in original unopened manufacturer's packaging clearly labeled with manufacturer's name .
B.
Materials shall be stored at room temperature, but not less than 70 degrees F for not less than 48 hours before installation, unless manufacturer's instructions specify otherwise. PROJECT CONDITIONS
1.06 A.
Ventilation and Temperature: Verify areas that are to receive new flooring are ventilated to remove fumes from installation materials. Verity that areas are within temperature range recommended by the various material manufactures for Project site installation conditions. WARRANTY
1.07
A.
Manufacturer shall provide a five year material warranty.
B.
Installer shall provide a two year fabrication and installation warranty.
PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01
•
ACCEPT ABLE MANUFACTURERS A.
Armstrong Contract Interiors.
B.
Mannington Commercial.
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/201 I VINYL COMPOSITION TILE 096519-2
•
C.
Congoleum, standard grade as manufactured by Mohawk .
D.
Or equal. MATERIALS
2.02 A.
Vinyl Composition Tile: Conform to ASTM F 1066, Composition 1, asbestos free, Class 2 (through pattern), 12-inch by 12-inch by minimum 118 inch thick, colors and patterns as indicated on Drawings. 1.
B.
•
Crack Filler and Leveling Compound: 100 percent cementitious binder type (as defined by ASTM C150), shall be approved by Owner's Office of Environmental Health and Safety (OEHS). The following manufacturers are currently listed approved by OEHS: 1.
Webcrete #95 as manufactured by Durabond.
2.
Ardex SD-F.
3.
Armstrong S183 or S184.
4.
Equal, as recommended by flooring manufacturer and approved by OEHS.
5.
Leveling Compound shall meet or exceed 200 pounds when tested in accordance with ASTM C 1583 .
c.
Concrete Primer: Non-staining type recommended by manufacturer of vinyl composition tile. Concrete primer shall be OEHS approved.
D.
Adhesive: Water based, low odor type formulated specially for installation with vinyl composition tile, and recommended by manufacturer.
E.
Reducer Strips: Tapered rubber not less than one inch wide, and thickness to match tile.
F.
Underlayment: Underlayment shall be one of the following. Grade indicated shall be stamped on panels.
G.
1.
Halex (9 mm) flooring underlayment.
2.
Matrix, (9 mm) by Traxx Corporation.
3.
Equal.
Floor Finish: One of the following systems: 1.
•
Tile shall be from same batch and run number for each color.
Neutral cleaner, ACT sealer and Super Polymer 85 finish, manufactured by Maintex .
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 VINYL COMPOSITION TILE 09 6519-3
•
2.
Sundance cleaner and Butcher's Mainstay floor finish, manufactured by Waxie Stationary Supply .
3.
S-485 neutral cleaner, S-495 Floor Sealer and S-480 floor finish by Armstrong.
4.
Equal.
PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01
COORDINATION A.
EXAMINATION
3.02 A. 3.03
•
Coordinate with related Work to assure level, dry, smooth, and clean finish surfaces to receive vinyl composition floor tile.
Field verify and correct deficiencies of conditions affecting Work before commencing Work of this section. PREPARATION OF CONCRETE SLABS
A.
Do not start preparation until underlying concrete floor slabs are at least 90 days old. Any leveling compound under a vapor or moisture barrier shall be warranted to be installed in a wet or moist environment without moisture limitations.
B.
Leveling: Check sub-floors for true to level and plane within the tolerance listed in Manufacturer's installation instructions. Test floor areas both ways with a 10-foot straightedge and repair high and low areas exceeding allowable tolerance. Pop ups shall be hammered out and floor filled with an approved cementitious leveling compound. Remove high areas by power sanding, stone rubbing or grinding, chipping off and filling with an approved leveling compound, or equivalent method. Fill low areas with an approved leveling compound. Repair and level surfaces having abrupt changes in plane, such as trowel marks or ridges, whether or not within allowable tolerance. Clean areas where repairs are performed.
C.
Cracks or Depressions: Fill voids with an approved cementitious leveling compound of the type recommended by flooring manufacturer for the specificWork conditions.
D.
Cleaning: matter.
E.
Moisture Testing: Test new and old concrete slabs for adequate dryness. l.
•
After leveling, clean substrates of deleterious substances and foreign
Testing shall conform to ASTM F 1869, and the following. Minimum testing requirements are three calcium chloride tests for the first 1,000 square feet of floor area, and one for each additional l ,000 square feet or fraction thereof. Unless more stringent requirements are recommended by flooring manufacturer, maximum allowable moisture release at time of flooring installation shall be three pounds per 24 hours per l ,000 square feet, or as recommended by flooring manufacturer. Provide results of moisture test to the OAR .
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 VINYL COMPOSITION TILE 09 6519-4
•
3.
Delay application of flooring until sub-floors are sufficiently dry according to flooring manufacturer's recommendations, or perform remedial measures as recommended by flooring materials manufacturer.
A.
Install underlayment according to manufacturer's instructions.
B.
Sweep floors and vacuum sanding dust. INSTALLATION OF TILE
3.05 A.
Color and pattern: Install tiles in the pattern indicated on Drawings. If no pattern is indicated, tiles shall be installed in a rectangular pattern, in one color.
B.
Special designs and school logo: 1.
Fabricate of sizes and colors indicated on drawings and from electronic file provided by Architect.
2.
Precision cut VCT tiles using either computer aided water-jet or laser technologies to a tolerance of 0.005 inch.
c.
Install vinyl composition floor tile when ambient temperature is 70 degrees F or higher or manufacturer's range.
D.
Install the tile adhesive in a thin film evenly with a notched trowel. Trowel notches shall be as recommended by adhesive manufacturer.
E.
•
Test concrete for alkalinity. An acceptable range is between pH5 to pH9. Excessive alkalinity shall be neutralized, using manufacturer's recommended methods, prior to installation of floor covering.
PREPARATION OF WOOD SUB-FLOORS
3.04
•
2.
1.
Mix adhesive in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
2.
Install adhesive only in area that can be covered by flooring material within the adhesive manufacture's recommended working time. Do not set tile into wet adhesive.
3.
Tile must be set into dry, but still tacky, adhesive film. Remove adhesive that has dried beyond recommended time, or has filmed over and is no longer tacky.
4.
Adhesive application rate shall be as required to avoid telegraphing trowel lines to the surface after maintenance coatings are applied. Adjust tile runoff during installation if necessary.
5.
Immediately remove any excess adhesive from the tile surface using the adhesive manufacturer's recommended cleaner and a damp, not wet, cloth.
Provide reducer where floor covering edges are exposed, such as at center of the door or where floor coverings terminate .
8736 CORWIN THEATERREPAIR&P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 VINYL COMPOSITION TILE 096519-5
•
F.
Install tiles symmetrically about centerlines of areas progressing toward walls. Adjust border tiles as required. Tiles shall be straight and joints close. Tile shall be cut to fit snugly at doorframes, and walls. No slivers at edges.
G.
Mechanically cut flooring material to produce square true edges.
H.
As floor tile is installed and within adhesive's recommended working time, roll with a clean, smooth, 100-pound roller in both directions. As the rolling proceeds, replace any loosened, defective, or damaged tile with new and finish to the specified condition.
I.
Remove dust, debris, and soil with any combination of sweeping, micro-fiber dustmopping with a properly treated, non-oily mop and vacuuming.
3.06
•
•
CLEANING, WAXING, AND COMPLETION A.
Maintain flooring surfaces clean as installation progresses.
B.
Use a sprayer to mist the area to be cleaned with a neutral cleaning solution prepared in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
c.
Gently scrub the floor using red or maroon cleaning, not stripping pads, mounted on a single disc, 175 RPM floor machine; or preferably, with a machine that uses horizontally mounted brushes with a counter-rotating spindle motion. Never allow the machine to remain running stationary.
D.
Remove the resulting slurry with a wet vacuum.
E.
Rinse the floor at least four times, each time using a clean mop and clean rinse water. On the first rinse, apply just enough water to keep the floor wet until the solution is picked-up with a vacuum. The next two rinses should be with a fairly well wrung-out, damp mop. The final rinse should produce virtually clean rinse water. Ensure the rinse water is clean throughout the rinsing process. A void tracking the floor after the final rinse. Check the floor after the final rinse for any missed areas and re-scrub/rinse as needed. Repeat the rinsing process until all signs of the cleaning solution are removed and the floor shows no sign of haziness or dusting when dry. If the Contractor has lightweight "automatic" floor machines capable of achieving the same result as described above, they may be used in-place of this method. Do not flood or excessively dampen floor at any time.
F.
Allow the Work to dry thoroughly.
G.
Finish vinyl composition tile with two coats of sealer, and four coats of finish (wax) applied in accordance with manufacturer's instruction. Each coat shall dry for a period of time recommended by the manufacturer. The last coat of floor wax shall be burnished in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. Take care not to allow any foreign material, including dust and mop fibers to become embedded in any coat of wet sealer or finish.
H.
After the last coat of floor finish has dried sufficiently according to the manufacturer's instructions, burnish work, using high speed equipment, in accordance with
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAJR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
I 0/01120 II VINYL COMPOSITION TILE 096519-6
manufacturer's written instructions to bring the entire surface, including the corners and edges, to high level of luster, free of marks and dust embedded in finish
•
I.
Clean adjacent baseboard and other surfaces of adhesive and other materials. Replace damaged or defective Work to the specified condition. CLEANUP
3.07 A.
Remove rubbish, debris, and waste materials and legally dispose of off Project site. PROTECTION
3.08 A.
Protect the Work of this section until Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION
•
•
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HJGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 VINYL COMPOSITION TILE 09 6519-7
111001
•
SECTION 09 6816 CARPETING PART 1 -GENERAL SUMMARY
1.01 A.
Section Includes: 1.
B.
1.02
•
Related Requirements: I.
Division 0 I - General Requirements.
2.
Section 03 3000 - Cast-In-Place Concrete.
3.
Section 09 6513 - Rubber Base.
SUBMITTALS A.
Shop Drawings: Submit dimensioned layout of carpet seaming and details for binder bars .
B.
Samples:
C.
•
Carpeting as indicated.
D.
I.
Submit three labeled samples from each dye lot of carpet required for the Work. Samples shall be minimum 24-inch square with proper backing.
2.
Trim and accessories: Submit 12-inch long Samples of each type trim proposed for the Work.
Product Data: Submit the following: 1.
Carpet manufacturer's published technical data fully describing carpet materials, construction, and recommended installation directions.
2.
Technical data and installation instructions for each adhesive and sealer material.
3.
Carpet manufacturer's published instructions for maintenance, care, cleaning and repair of carpet.
4.
MSDS on manufacturer's recommended adhesives, seam and edge sealers and pnmers.
Certificate:
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 CARPETING 09 6816-1
IIIOOI
• E.
A.
2.
Submit a manufacturer certification that the Installer manufacture to install the specified product.
IS
approved by the
Installer's/Subcontractor's Experience Qualifications: Submit list of not less than five projects with similar scope of work, extending over period of not less than five years, indicating installer's experience record.
Comply with the following as a minimum requirement: 1.
Materials shall comply with CBC Chapter 11B and ADAAG requirements.
2.
Manufacture's installation instructions.
3.
Comply with current CHPS requirements for low emitting materials, www.chps.net.
4.
Chemically based products such as sealers, primers, fillers, adhesives, etcetera must be approved by LAUSD's Office of the Environmental Health and Safety. (OEHS)
5.
Carpet must be free of Anti-Microbial Protection (Dry Back System).
6.
Comply with ASTM F 1869 for moisture testing.
B.
'Requirements of Regulatory Agencies: Carpeting shall meet requirements of federal, state and local regulatory agencies for flammability, static control, or other properties as specified, with testing documentation from the manufacturer by a third party laboratory.
c.
Carpet Installation: Comply with CRI 104 - Standard for Installation of Textile Floor Covering Materials.
D.
Eachcolor of carpet shall be of the same dye lot.
E.
Pre-Installation and Progress meetings: Prior to start of work of this section and after approval of submittals, schedule an on site Pre-Installation between Contractor, Supervising Installer, OAR and Project Inspector to review construction drawings and installation procedures in accordance with the requirements of this specification. DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
1.04 A
•
Submit a certificate from carpet manufacturer that materials supplied comply with fire hazard resistance standards specified .
QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.03
•
1.
Full or cut rolls of carpeting shall be cut, packaged and identified by the factory. Distributor, dealer, or vendor cutting, re-packaging, and re-labeling is not permitted .
8736 CORWIN 1HEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HJGH SCHOOL
I 0/01120 II CARPETING 09 68I6-2
111001
•
B.
Store material at least 24 hours at room temperature pnor to installation and m accordance to manufacture's instructions .
C.
Deliver fire-rated materials with testing agency labels and required fire classification numbers attached and legible.
1.05
•
JOB CONDITIONS A.
Ventilation and Temperature: Verify areas to be carpeted are ventilated to remove fumes from installation materials, and areas are within temperature range recommended by the various material manufacturers for Project site installation conditions. The temperature of a concrete slab must be stabilized above 65 degrees both 12 hours prior to and after the installation. The following environmental conditions inside the building are critical for proper installation. Temperature must be between 65 degrees F and 95 degrees F and the humidity between 10 percent and 65 percent for at least 72 hours before and 72 hours after installation. In addition, any adhesives, edge sealers and seam sealers should be stored under these conditions for a minimum of 24 hours prior to installation.
B.
Protection: Prohibit traffic on carpet for at least 12 hours after installation. Cover carpet with heavy non-staining Kraft paper in areas where the Work of other trades is to be performed and in traffic and passage areas. Protect carpet from damage or soiling. Maintain protection in place until Substantial Completion. WARRANTY
1.06 A.
Installer shall provide a two year installation warranty.
B.
Manufacturer shall provide a 30 year material warranty as described below:
C.
I.
Delamination Warranty: Carpet will not delaminate for a minimum of 30 years from the date of installation.
2.
Zippering Warranty: Carpet will not zipper or develop continuous pile yarn runners in the body of the carpet for a minimum of 30 years from the date of Substantial Completion.
3.
Edge Ravel: Carpet will not have continuous pile yarn coming out at seams for a minimum of 30 years from the date of Substantial Completion.
Manufacturer shall provide a I 0 year material warranty for colorfastness and texture retention. 1.
••
Texture Retention Warranty: The manufacturer warrants that the carpet will substantially maintain its physical surface texture against crushing, matting and walking out for I 0 years from the date of Substantial Completion .
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HJGH SCHOOL
10/01/20 II CARPETING 09 6816-3
111001
•
2.
Dimensional Stability Warranty: The manufacturer warrants that the carpet will not lose its dimensional stability (i.e., growth or shrinkage with glue-down installations) for the life of the carpet due to normal variations in atmosphere, temperature, or humidity.
3.
Colorfastness to light: Carpet will not fade for l 0 years due to exposure to sunlight.
4.
Colorfastness to atmospheric contaminants: Carpet will not fade for 10 years due to atmospheric contaminants.
5.
Stain and Soil Protection: 10 year stain removal written guaranty.
MAINTENANCE
1.07 A.
Extra Materials: Provide minimum 36 inches in any one dimension of extra materials for each color, pattern, and dye lot of carpet.
PART 2- PRODUCTS MANUFACTURERS AND PRODUCTS
2.01
A.
• B.
I.
Mohawk Industries, Style: Class Act.
2.
Shaw Contract Group, Style: Profile (EPBL) and Deans List III (EPBL).
3.
Mannington Commercial, Style: Centerfield III, Everywear III and The Committee Collection.
4.
Equal products meeting CHPS requirements as a system and that meet or exceed the products and systems listed below.
Adhesives and Primers: As recommended by tile carpeting manufacturer and approved by OEHS. MATERIALS
2.02 A.
•
Carpeting:
Carpet shall meet the following minimum standards: 1.
Pile: ~ inch maximum height level loop no cut pile or cut and loops will be accepted.
2.
Dye Method: 85 percent Solution Dyed Method. 15 percent Yarn Dyed.
3.
Construction: 12-foot Broadloom only. Woven interlock .
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 CARPETING 09 6816-4
Ill 001
•
•
•
4.
Pile I Yarn weight only: Minimum 17 ounces per square yard. This weight excludes backing .
5.
Minimum Density: Not less than 6,800.
6.
Moisture impervious: Carpet shall be unaffected by water and moisture.
7.
Static Protection: The manufacturer warrants that the carpet will not static discharge in excess of 3.5 KV or under when tested under the AATCC Test Method 134 for the life of the carpet.
8.
Carpets shall be able to be installed with 5 pounds hydrostatic pressure or better per 1,000 square feet per 24 hours with a written documentation from manufacturer, per CRJ-1 04.
9.
Fluorochemical Treatment: Minimum of 500 parts per million: per CRJ-1 02; after two hot extractions (AA TCC 171 ), minimum 400 Parts Per Million per CRJ TM-102.
10.
Traffic Classification: Class III -Extra Heavy Commercial Traffic (more than 1,000-foot traffic per day).
11.
GSA Certification: Carpet shall meet or exceed the General Services Administration requirements.
12.
Flammability: a.
Flooring Radiant Panel: Class 1- per ASTM E648.
b.
NBS Smoke Density: Less than 450 per test ASTM E662; NFPA 258
c.
Flame Resistant: Shall pass Methenamine pill test ASTM E662.
d.
Materials shall meet requirements of California Proposition 65. In case of fire, no material shall be used that emit gas and is prohibited by California Proposition 65.
13.
Run Resistant Strength: Not less than 25 pounds, in accordance with the Loop Pile Run Resistance test (TP 155), wet or dry for a minimum of 30 years.
14.
Indoor Air Quality: Carpet shall meet or exceed CRJ and EPA guidelines (green label certified and labeled) and may not contain any VOCs such as: 4 PCH (4 Phenulcyclohexene), PVC (Polyvinyl Chloride) or SBR latex (Styrene Butadiene Rubber).
15.
Recycling of Existing Carpet: If project scope included removal and disposal of existing carpet, contractor is responsible for delivery to a certified recycling center. A recycling certificate must be submitted to OAR, with its name and
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 CARPETING 09 6816-5
111001
address of location of recycling center, date and weight of carpet recycled. Contractor is responsible for costs associated with recycling .
•
B.
Carpets shall be from one dye lot.
C.
Full and cut rolls of carpet shall be cut, packaged, and identified by the factory. Distributors, dealers and vendor cutting, re-packaging, and re-labeling is not permitted.
D.
Carpet Edge Strips: A-600-SH Silver Clamp Down manufactured by Universal Metals, or equal.
E.
Stair Nosing: Universal Moldings # A-544-BA 1 commercial (butt to nosing) type or equal, installed with recommended sized screws.
F.
Adhesive: Water-resistant latex-based adhesive recommended by carpet manufacturer for direct glue-down carpet installation. Where primers or sealers are furnished, verify their compatibility with adhesive.
G.
Patching Compounds: Cementitious type, Ardex SD-F, Durabond's Webcrete #95, or equal, as recommended by carpet manufacturer.
PART 3- EXECUTION
•
EXAMINATION
3.01 A.
Before installation is started, examine surfaces to receive carpet. Deficiencies shall be corrected before starting Work of this section.
B.
Field verify dimensions and other conditions affecting this Work before commencing carpet installation. PREPARATION
3.02 A.
Provide concrete moisture vapor emission and pH testing for concrete specified to be covered with carpet. Includes concrete placed below, on and above grade. For carpet replacement projects, concrete slabs not in direct contact with ground may be excluded from this requirement. Comply with requirements of ASTM Fl869.
B.
Testing shall take place after allowing concrete to dry for a minimum of 90 days. Testing to be scheduled no less than 1 or more than 3 weeks prior to scheduled flooring installation.
C.
Quantification of Concrete Moisture Vapor Emission I.
•
The test site should be maintained at the same temperature and humidity conditions as those anticipated during normal occupancy. These temperature
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 CARPETING 096816-6
111001
and humidity levels should be maintained for 48 hours prior and during test period. If meeting this criteria is not possible, then minimum conditions should be 75 plus or minus I 0 degrees F and 50 plus or minus 10 percent relative humidity. When a building is not under HV AC control, a recording hygrometer or data logger shall be in place recording conditions during the test period. A transcript of this information must be included with the test report.
•
• D.
2.
The number of vapor emission test sites is determined by the square footage of the facility. The minimum number oftests to be placed is equal to three in the first 1,000 square feet and one per each additional 1,000 square feet.
3.
Test sites are to be cleaned of adhesive residue, curing compounds, paints, sealers, floor coverings, etcetera 24 hours prior to the placement of test kits.
4.
Weigh test dish on site prior to start of test. Scale must report weight to 0.1 grams. Record weight and start time.
5.
Expose Calcium Chloride and set dish on concrete surface.
6.
Install test containment dome and allow test to proceed for 72 hours.
7.
Retrieve test dish by carefully cutting through containment dome. Close and reseal test dish.
8.
Weigh test dish on site recording weight and stop time.
9.
Calculate and report results as "pounds of emission per 1,000 square feet per 24 hours".
10.
Moisture vapor emissions must meet manufactures recommendations prior to installation.
Quantifying pH level 1.
•
At each vapor emission test site, after removal of test containment dome, perform pH test. a.
Place several drops of water onto the concrete surface to form a puddle approximately 1 inch in diameter.
b.
Allow the water to set for approximately 60 seconds.
c.
Dip the pH paper into the water and remove immediately, compare color to chart provided by paper supplier to determine pH reading.
d.
Acceptable range is pH 5 to pH 9. Excessive alkalinity shall be neutralized prior to installation of the carpet.
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 CARPETING 09 6816-7
111001
e.
•
•
E.
Cleaning and Drying: Clean concrete floor slabs of oil, grease, waxes, cunng compounds, dust, dirt, debris, paint, and other deleterious substances. Provide a commercial vacuum cleaner to remove dust and dirt. Damp mop to remove dust that may remain after first vacuuming, allow surface to dry, and again vacuum; repeat procedure if necessary to eliminate dust. Do not furnish oiled or chemical treated sawdust or any similar product for dust removal.
F.
Leveling: Verify floor slabs true to level and plane within a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 10 feet. Test floor areas both ways with a 10-foot straightedge and repair high and low areas exceeding allowable tolerance. Pop ups shall be hammered out and floor filled with a cementitious leveling compound. Remove high areas by power sanding, stone rubbing or grinding, chipping off and filling with an approved cementitious leveling compound, or equivalent method. Fill low areas with a cementitious leveling compound. Repair and level the surfaces having abrupt changes in plane, such as trowel marks or ridges, whether or not within the allowable tolerance. Again clean areas where repairs are performed. Do not sand, stone rub grind or power chip floor adhesives that contain asbestos.
G.
Wood subfloors: Clean wood subfloors of oil, grease, waxes, dust, dirt, debris, paint, and other deleterious substances. Do not furnish oiled or chemical treated sawdust or any similar product for dust removal. Sand off projecting ridges. If recommended by carpet manufacturer, seal floors with a recommended wood sealer, compatible with adhesives to be installed .
H.
Conditioning of Materials: Carpet and adhesives shall be conditioned at the Project site at not less than 65 degrees F and relative humidity between 10 percent and 65 percent for 48 hours prior to installation and in accordance to manufacture's instructions. CARPET INSTALLATION
3.03
•
Record and report results .
A.
General: Install carpet in accordance with requirements of CRI 104, except where more stringent requirements are specified herein or recommended by carpet materials manufacturers.
B.
Install carpet rolls in each dye lot in the number sequence as furnished by manufacturer. Roll out carpet in one direction and do not reverse direction at any locations. Align carpet with centerline of room or space, and adjust at edges for wall variations.
C.
Color Control: Install dye lot in the number sequence at locations indicated to prevent shading variations. Install only one dye lot for each area of building unless otherwise reviewed. If more than one dye lot is required, obtain prior review of color match between dye lots and, Owner's written approval.
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 CARPETING 09 6816-8
I I IOOI
•
•
D.
Carpet Runs: Install carpet in one-piece lengths between permanent walls unless otherwise required. Seams are permitted only where shown on the layout Shop Drawings. Install corridor carpet in one-piece sizes for full length and width, cross seaming only where corridors change direction.
E.
Laying and Seaming: Cut carpet for seams between tuft rows and prevent damage to tufts or loops, prevent edge ravels, and preserve uniform tuft row alignment and spacing on both sides and across seams. Install carpet with tuft or loop rows in straight lines both ways, free of offsets, waviness, distortion, or misalignment. Cut seam edges straight and square with backing. Trim carpet at walls, columns, and penetrations for a compressed fit.
F.
Doorways: Extend carpet into doorways without piecing in and seam to the carpet on other side of door under door centerline except where metal thresholds occur; no small filler pieces of carpet will be permitted at doorways.
G.
Adhesive Installation: Do not power stretch carpet during installation. Provide notched trowel as required by adhesive manufacturer. Evenly spread adhesive free of excess or thin areas. Place and roll carpet within open time of adhesive. Roll carpet in both directions with a 75 pounds to 100 pounds towards open seams or edges to expel trapped air and assure that 100 percent of the adhesive transfers to the carpet backing while maintaining full coverage on the floor.
H.
Binder Bars: Provide bars at edges of carpet not abutting walls or other construction, securely fastened in place by using aluminum drive nails. Precisely align splices and tightly miter angles. PROTECTION
3.04 A.
CLEANING
3.05
A.
A.
•
As each carpeted area is completed, clean up dirt and debris, remove spots and soiling with proper cleaner, trim off loose threads with sharp scissors, and vacuum entire area clean. CLEAN-UP
3.06
3.07
Protect the Work of this section until Substantial Completion. Prohibit traffic on carpet for at least 12 hours after installation. Cover carpet with heavy non-staining Kraft paper in areas when the work of other trades is to be performed and in traffic and passage areas. Protect carpet from damage or soiling. Maintain in place until substantial completion.
Remove rubbish, debris, and waste materials and legally dispose of off the Project site. INSTRUCTION
8736 CORWIN TIIEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
IO/OI/20 I I CARPETING 09 68I6-9
Ill 00 I
•
A.
Before Substantial Completion of the Work, provide a four hour Owner instruction period for proper maintenance of carpeting. Instructions shall be provided by technical representative of manufacturer.
END OF SECTION
•
•
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR& P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 CARPETING 09 6816-10
•
SECTION 09 9000 PAINTING AND COATING
PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01
SUMMARY A.
Section Includes: 1.
B.
• 1.02
•
Following items shall not be painted: 1.
Brass valves, chromium or nickel-plated piping and fittings.
2.
Boiler control panels and control systems.
3.
Fabric connections to fans.
4.
Flexible conduit connections to equipment, miscellaneous name plates, stamping, and instruction labels and manufacturer's data.
5.
Mechanical and electrical utility lines, piping and heating and ventilation ductwork in tunnels, under-floor excavated areas or crawl spaces, attic spaces and enclosed utility spaces .
6.
Flag, floodlight, parking light poles and loudspeaker poles, metal stairs, handrails and chain-link fence with a galvanized finish, unless otherwise noted.
7.
Structural and miscellaneous steel, open web steel joists and metal floor decking, which will not be exposed in final construction, shall have no finish other than one coat of shop primer.
8.
Hardboard covering on tops and backs of counters and benches.
9.
Brass, bronze, aluminum, lead, stainless steel and chrome or nickel-plated surfaces.
I 0.
Non-metallic walking surfaces unless specifically shown or specified to be painted.
REGULA TORY REQUIREMENTS A.
1.03
Interior and exterior painting.
Paint materials shall comply with the Food and Drug Administration's (F.D.A.) Lead Law and the current rules and regulations of local, state and federal agencies governing the use of paint materials. SUBMITTALS
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
I 0/0 l/20 II PAINTING AND COATING 09 9000-1
•
A.
List of Materials: Before submittal of samples, submit a complete list of proposed paint materials, identifying each material by distributor's name, manufacturer's name, product name and number, including primers, thinners, and coloring agents, together with manufacturers' catalog data fully describing each material as to contents, recommended installation, and preparation methods. Identify surfaces to receive various paint materials.
B.
Material Samples: Submit manufacturer's standard colors samples for each type of paint specified. Once colors have been selected, submit Samples of each color selected for each type of paint accordingly:
C.
•
Samples of Paint and Enamel must be submitted on standard 8 Yz" x 11" Leneta Opacity-Display Charts. Each display chart shall have the color in full coverage. The sample shall be prepared from the material to be installed on the Work. Identify the school on which the paint is to be installed, the batch number, the color number, the type of material, and the name of the manufacturer.
2.
Elastomeric shall be submitted in duplicate samples of the texture coating. Samples will be not less than 2 Yz by 3 Yz in size and installed upon backing. Finished Work will match the reviewed Sample in texture.
3.
Materials and color samples shall be reviewed before starting any painting.
For transparent and stained finishes, prepare samples on same species and quality of wood to be installed in the Work, with written description of system used. QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.04 A.
Certification of Materials: With every delivery of paint materials, the manufacturer shall provide written certification the materials comply with the requirements of this section.
B.
Coats: The number of coats specified is the minimum number. If full coverage is not obtained with the specified number of coats, install additional coats as required to provide the required finish.
C.
Install coats and undercoats for finishes in strict accordance with the recommendations of the paint manufacturer as reviewed by the Architect.
D.
Paint materials shall comply with the following as a minimum requirement: l.
Materials shall be delivered to Project site in original unbroken containers bearing manufacturer's name, brand number and batch number.
2.
Open and mix ingredients on premises in presence of the Project Inspector.
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
1.05 A.
•
1.
Storage and Mixing of Materials: Store materials and mix only in spaces suitable for such purposes. Maintain spaces clean and provide necessary precautions to prevent fire. Store paint containers so the manufacturer's labels are clearly displayed .
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR& P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/0112011 PAINTING AND COATING 09 9000-2
•
1.06
SITE CONDITIONS
A.
1.07
Temperature: Do not install exterior paint in damp, rainy weather or until surface has thoroughly dried from effects of such weather. Do not install paint, interior, or exterior, when temperature is below 50 degrees F, or above 90 degrees F, or dust conditions are unfavorable for installation. WARRANTY
A.
Manufacturer shall provide a three year material warranty.
B.
Installer shall provide a three year application warranty.
1.08
MAINTENANCE
A.
Provide at least one gallon of each type, color and sheen of paint coating installed. Label containers with color designation indicated on Drawings.
PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01
•
PAINT MATERIALS
A.
Furnish the products of only one paint manufacturer unless otherwise specified or required. Primers, intermediate and finish coats of each painting system must all be the products of the same manufacturer, including thinners and coloring agents, except for materials furnished with shop prime coat by other trades .
B.
Factory mix paint materials to correct color, gloss, and consistency for installation to the maximum extent feasible.
C.
Paint materials to be minimum "Architectural Grade".
D.
Gloss degree standards shall be as follows:
2.02
70 and above
EGGSHELL
30 to 47
SEMI-GLOSS
48 to 69
SATIN
15 to 29
MANUFACTURERS A.
•
HIGH GLOSS
Acceptable manufacturers, unless otherwise noted: I.
Dunn-Edwards Corporation Paints
2.
Frazee Paints and Wall coverings
3.
Vista Paints
4.
Sherwin Williams
5.
ICI Paints
6.
Equal
10/01/2011
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR& P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
PAINTING AND COATING 09 9000-3
PART 3- EXECUTION •
•
•
PREPARATION
3.01 A.
Examine surfaces to receive paint finish. Surfaces which are not properly prepared and cleaned or which are not in condition to receive the finish specified shall be corrected before prime coat is installed.
B.
New woodwork shall be thoroughly cleaned, hand sandpapered, and dusted off. Nail holes, cracks or defects in Work shall be filled. On stained woodwork, fill shall be colored to match stain. Filling shall be performed after the first coat of paint, shellac or varnish has been installed.
C.
Plaster surfaces except veneer plaster shall be allowed to dry at least 3 weeks before painting. Veneer plaster shall be allowed to dry sufficiently to receive paint as determined by moisture meter tests.
D.
Metal surfaces to be painted shall be thoroughly cleaned of rust, corrosion, oil, foreign materials, blisters, and loose paint.
E.
Do not install painting materials to wet, damp, dusty, dirty, finger marked, rough, unfinished or defective surfaces.
F.
Concrete surfaces shall be dry, cleaned of dirt and foreign materials and m proper condition to receive paint. Neutralize spots demonstrating effects of alkali.
G.
Mask off areas where necessary . APPLICATION
3.02 A.
Backpainting: Immediately upon delivery to the Project site, finish lumber and millwork shall be backpainted on surfaces that will be concealed after installation. Items to be painted shall be backpainted with priming coat specified under "Priming".
B.
Priming: New wood and metal surfaces specified to receive paint finish shall be primed. Surfaces of miscellaneous metal and steel not embedded in concrete, and surfaces of unprimed plain sheet metal Work shall be primed immediately upon delivery to the Project site. Galvanized metal Work and interior and exterior woodwork shall be primed immediately after installation. Priming of surfaces and priming coat shall be as follows: 1.
Knots, Pitch and Sap Pockets: Shellac before priming.
2.
Exterior Woodwork and Wood Doors: waterborne emulsion wood primer.
3.
Interior Woodwork: Where indicated to be painted, prime with one coat of waterborne wood primer.
4.
Stain: Woodwork indicated to receive a stain and varnish finish shall be stained to an even color with water borne stain. On open-grained hardwood, mix stain with paste filler and completely fill pores in wood .
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR& P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
Prime with one coat of exterior
10/0112011 PAINTING AND COATING 09 9000-4
•
5.
Galvanized Metal Work: Clean oil, grease and other foreign materials from surfaces. Install vinyl wash pretreatment coating. Follow manufacturer's instructions for drying time, and then prime with one coat of metal primer.
6.
Unprimed Iron, Steel, and Other Uncoated Metals: Where specified to be painted, prime with one coat of metal primer.
7.
Shop Primed Metal Items: Touch up bare and abraded areas with metal primer before installation of second and third coats.
8.
Coats shall be installed evenly and with full coverage. Finished surfaces shall be free of sags, runs and other imperfections.
C.
Allow at least 24 hours between coats of paint.
D.
Rollers shall not be used on wood surfaces.
E.
Each coat of painted woodwork and metal, except last coat, shall be sandpapered smooth when dry. Texture-coated gypsum board shall be sanded lightly to remove surface imperfections after first coat of paint has been installed.
F.
Each coat of paint or enamel shall be a slightly different tint as required. Each coat of paint, enamel, stain, shellac, and varnish will be inspected by the lOR before next coat is applied. Notify the Project Inspector that such Work is ready for inspection. I.
• G.
Do not "paint-out" UL labels, fusible links and identification stamps.
H.
Paint Roller, brush and spray.
I.
•
Tinting Guideline: The first coat, primer/undercoat(s) to be untinted or tinted up to 50 percent lighter or darker (at the discretion of the installer) than the finish coat. The second coat (or third coat if a seal coat and undercoat have been specified) is to be factory tinted in the range of 10 percent to 15 percent lighter or darker (at the discretion of the installer) than the finish coat. The final coat is to be factory tinted to the required color selected. These tinting guidelines shall be provided on all surfaces receiving paint.
I.
Only Paint rollers shall be used on interior plaster, drywall, masonry/plaster and plywood surfaces, nap shall not exceed one half inch in length.
2.
First coat on wood overhang and ceilings shall have material applied by roller and then brushed out in a professional manner to leave surface free of imperfections. Finish coat may be sprayed.
3.
Other surfaces shall have all coatings applied with brushes of proper size.
4.
Spray work is permitted only on radiators, acoustic plaster, masonry and plaster.
Where ceilings are specified to be painted, beams, cornices, coves, ornamental features, plaster grilles, etc. shall be included .
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR& P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/0 l/20 ll PAINTING AND COATING 09 9000-5
•
J.
Ceilings shall be white, including classrooms, storage rooms, offices, arcades, etc. Boiler room and fan room ceiling color shall match adjacent walls . CLEANING
3.03 A.
Remove rubbish, waste, and surplus material and clean woodwork, hardware, floors, and other adjacent Work.
B.
Remove paint, varnish and brush marks from glazing material and, upon completion of painting Work, wash and polish glazing material both sides. Glazing material, which is damaged, shall be removed and replaced with new material.
C.
Clean hardware and other unpainted metal surfaces with recommended cleaner. Do not furnish abrasives or edged tools. SCHEDULE
3.04
A.
Interior: I.
••
2.
3.
4.
5.
•
Woodwork, Painted: 3 coats. a.
First Coat: As specified in this section under Priming.
b.
Second and Third Coats: indicated.
Interior enamel, semi-gloss or gloss as
Woodwork, Stained and Varnished: 4 coats . a.
First Coat: As specified in this section under Priming.
b.
Second, Third and Fourth Coats: Varnish, semi-gloss.
Wood Corridor doors: 4 coats. a.
First Coat: As specified in this section under Priming.
b.
Second, Third, and Fourth Coats: Varnish, gloss.
Other Wood Doors: 4 coats. a.
Varnished or painted as indicated.
b.
If varnished, same finish system as painted woodwork, with semi-gloss or gloss finish to match adjacent wall.
Miscellaneous Woodwork: 4 coats. Wood items including, but not limited to: stair treads and risers, handrails, rolling ladders, wood base and shoe, chair rails, counter tops and locker room benches. a.
First Coat: As specified in this section under Priming.
b.
Second, Third and Fourth: Exterior varnish, gloss . 10/01/2011
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
PAINTING AND COATING 09 9000-6
6.
•
7.
8.
•
9.
10.
11.
B.
a.
First Coat: Waterborne stain.
b.
Second and Third Coats: Satin varnish.
Plaster: 4 coats. a.
First Coats: Pigmented wall sealer.
b.
Second coat: Enamel under coater.
c.
Third and Fourth Coats - Interior enamel, semi-gloss or gloss as indicated.
Gypsum Board: 4 coats. a.
First Coat: Drywall sealer.
b.
Second Coat: Enamel under coater.
c.
Third and Fourth Coats: indicated.
Interior enamel, semi-gloss or gloss as
Concrete: 3 coats. a.
First: Concrete sealer.
b.
Second and Third:. Interior enamel, semi-gloss or gloss as indicated.
Concrete Block: 3 coats. a.
First: Concrete block filler.
b.
Second and Third: Interior enamel, semi-gloss or gloss as indicated.
Metal: Shall be cleaned, pre-treated and painted with 3 coats. Items to be painted include, but are not limited to: exposed structural and miscellaneous steel, metal doors and frames, ladders, table and bench legs. a.
First Coat: Metal primer.
b.
Second and Third Coats: Interior gloss enamel, except metal doors and frames which shall be semi-gloss or gloss to match adjacent wall.
Exterior: 1.
•
Casework: Interior surfaces of casework (except plastic laminate-faced casework) including top, edges and underside of shelving, poles, surfaces of drawers (except fronts), interior surfaces of mailbox pigeonholes, and particle board.
Woodwork: 3 coats .
I 0/0 l/20 II
8736 CORWIN THEATERREPAIR&P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
PAINTING AND COATING 09 9000-7
•
2.
3.
a.
First Coat: As specified in this section under Priming.
b.
Second and Third Coats: Exterior house and trim enamel.
Wood Doors: 3 coats. a.
First Coat: As specified in this section under Priming.
b.
Second and Third Coats: Exterior gloss enamel.
Plaster and Stucco: 2 coats. Flat 100 percent acrylic. a.
4.
5.
6.
• C.
Concrete: 3 coats. Flat 100 percent acrylic. a.
First Coat: Concrete sealer.
b.
Second and Third Coats: Exterior 100 percent acrylic.
Concrete Block: 3 coats. Flat 100 percent acrylic. a.
First Coat: Concrete block filler.
b.
Second and Third Coats: Exterior 100 percent acrylic.
Metal: 3 coats. Shall be cleaned and pre-treated. Items to be painted include, but are not limited to: steel columns and miscellaneous steel items, gravel stops, metal doors and frames, hoods and flashings. a.
First Coat: As specified in this section under Priming.
b.
Second and Third Coats: Exterior gloss enamel.
Mechanical and Electrical Work: 1.
2.
Except where interior mechanical and electrical Work to be painted is specified to receive another paint finish, Work occurring in finished rooms and spaces shall be cleaned, pre-treated, and painted with 3 coats. Items to be painted include, but are not limited to: steel and copper piping, pipes, vents, fittings, ducts, plenums, miscellaneous supports and hangers, electrical conduit, fittings, pull boxes, outlet boxes, unfinished surfaces of plumbing fixtures, miscellaneous metal cabinets, panels, and access doors and panels. a.
First Coat: As specified in this section under Priming.
b.
Second and Third Coats: Interior enamel, semi-gloss or gloss to match adjacent wall or ceiling finish.
Insulation and Taping on Pipes and Ducts: 3 coats. a.
•
Exterior 100 percent acrylic.
Finished Rooms:
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/0l/2011 PAINTING AND COATING 09 9000-8
•
b.
3. D.
•
First Coat: Interior waterborne primer.
2)
Second and Third Coats: Interior semi-gloss or gloss enamel to match adjoining wall or ceiling finish.
Building Exterior: 1)
First Coat: Exterior waterborne primer.
2)
Second and Third Coats: Exterior gloss enamel.
Inside surfaces of ducts, vents, dampers and louvers as far back as visible from room in which they open shall be painted with 2 coats of flat black paint.
Miscellaneous: 1.
3.05
1)
Outside Storage Units (wood or metal): 3 coats. a.
First Coat: As specified in this section under Priming.
b.
Second and Third Coats: Exterior gloss enamel.
2.
Exterior and interior surfaces of storage bins, and potting tables shall have 3 coats of acrylic stain.
3.
Wood compost bins shall be finished with 3 coats of acrylic stain.
PROTECTION
A. 3.06
Protect the Work ofthis section until Substantial Completion. CLEANUP
A.
Remove rubbish, debris, and waste materials and legally dispose of off the Project site.
END OF SECTION
•
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR& P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01120 ll PAINTING AND COATING 09 9000-9
SECTION 09 9013
•
PAINTING OF EXISTING FACILITIES PART 1- GENERAL SUMMARY
1.01 A.
Section Includes: 1.
B.
1.
Division 0 I - General Requirements.
2.
Section 07 9200 - Joint Sealants.
3.
Section 09 2900 - Gypsum Board.
A.
Paint materials shall comply with Food and Drug Administration's (FDA) Lead Law and current rules and regulations of local, state and federal agencies governing use of paint materials.
B.
Paint color requirements for CALOSHA: items be painted as prescribed:
CALOSHA requires the following
1.
Gas Mains and Valves shall be painted "gun metal gray" (medium gray)
2.
Fire Valves and Raisers shall be painted OSHA's "safety red"
SUBMITTALS
1.03 A.
B.
•
Related Requirements:
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
1.02
•
Interior and exterior painting.
Submit in accordance with Section OI 3300: Submittal Procedures. 1.
Submit a complete list of materials to be furnished stating supplier and distributor's names with product recommendations.
2.
Submit manufacturer's standard color samples for each type of paint specified. Once colors have been selected, submit six samples of each color selected for each type of paint, on standard 8 1f2 by II spray-out panel.
3.
Before any coating is applied, submit to lOR samples of each color to be used on contract. If more than one batch of material and color is to be used, samples from each batch shall be submitted.
Paint and Enamel Spray-Outs
8736 CORWIN THEATE REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 PAINTING OF EXISTING FACILITIES 09 9013-1
I.
Samples of Paint and Enamel shall be submitted on standard 8 Y2 by II Leneta Opacity-Display Charts. Each display chart shall have color in full coverage. Sample shall be prepared using material from batch to be used on actual job. Identify school on which paint is to be used, batch number, color number, type of material, name of manufacturer and name of Contractor.
2.
Furnish samples of colors to Project Inspector. Samples shall be kept on the job until painting is completed.
3.
Contractor shall be responsible for finish color on surface to be painted; where different materials of same color are specified to be applied on same, or adjoining surfaces, final color match shall match color sample on those surfaces.
• C.
Elastomeric coating shall be submitted in duplicate samples of texture coating. Samples shall be not less than 2 Yi-inch by 3 Yz-inch in size and on adequate backing.
D.
Materials and color samples shall be approved before a job start meeting will be scheduled. QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.04
•
A.
Certification of Materials: With every delivery of paint materials, manufacturer shall certify, on form supplied by Owner that materials comply with requirements ofthis Section .
B.
Paint materials shall comply with applicable requirements of Food and Drug Administration's (FDA) Lead Law and SCAQMD.
c.
Painters working on Lead related work shall be (DHS) Lead Certified by the State of California. DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
1.05 A.
Materials shall be delivered to project site in original unbroken containers bearing manufacturer's name, brand number, batch number, and MSDS Sheets.
B.
Open and mix ingredients on premises in presence of Project Inspector. Immediately remove rejected materials from premises. METAL STORAGE CONTAINER
1.06 A.
•
Storage and Mixing of Materials: Store materials and mix only in spaces designated for purpose by Project Inspector. Keep such spaces clean and take necessary precautions to prevent fire. Hang out oily rags singly in open atr. Stack paint containers so that manufacturer's labels are clearly displayed .
8736 CORWIN THEATE REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01120 II PAINTING OF EXISTING FACILITIES 09 9013-2
•
B.
Paint, combustible materials, gasoline driven equipment, etcetera shall not be stored or left in any school building overnight.
C.
In event that equipment and material storage sheds must be placed on asphalt pavement less than six months old, each wheel, leg or other supporting member shall be centered on a 4-foot by 8-foot by % inch thick sheet of plywood. Shed shall be set down in such a manner as to prevent damage to pavement. Contractor shall be responsible for any damage to pavement caused by improper placement of shed. ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
1.06
A.
WARRANTY
1.07
•
•
A.
Manufacturer shall provide a three year material warranty from date of Substantial Completion.
B.
Contractor warrants work executed and materials furnished under contract shall be free from defects of materials and application for a period of three years from date of Substantial Completion .
c.
Elastomeric coating shall be warranted for a period of five years from date of Substantial Completion. PROTECTION
1.08
1.09
Temperature: Do not apply exterior paint in damp, rainy weather or until surface has dried from effects of such weather. Do not apply paint, interior or exterior, when temperature is below 50 degrees F., or above manufacturer's stated recommended temperature, or when dust conditions are unfavorable to proper workmanship.
A.
Fire alarm boxes, fire sprinkler heads, smoke detectors and intrusion alarm · systems shall be uncovered and available to perform function that it was designed for each and every night.
B.
Pressure relief grilles with barometric damper leading to a corridor or an exterior shall be masked off before spraying and then uncovered immediately after spraying.
c.
Conspicuously post sufficient "Wet Paint" signs continuously to alert public and school personnel to existing conditions until paint is completely dried.
D.
Provide and maintain barriers, guards, lights, warning signs, etcetera for complete protection and as directed by the Project Inspector.
E.
Do not impede emergency egress. REMOVAL AND REINSTALLATION OF SECURITY GRILLES
8736 CORWIN THEATE REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 PAINTING OF EXISTING FACILITIES 099013-3
•
•
A.
Replace and secure at end of each working day protective security grilles. Every bolt shall be replaced properly using a washer, cut smooth and filed down .
B.
Remove window grilles and anchoring devices prior to painting area behind grille.
C.
Repair or replace grills, anchoring devices, and hardware damaged during removal and replacement process with material of same composition.
D.
Reinstall grilles; anchoring devices and hardware shall be replaced with new hardware of same material. Installation of previously used or damaged hardware and anchoring devices shall not be permitted.
E.
Provide hardware, specialty tools, and labor needed to remove and reinstall window grilles.
F.
Paint security grilles that have graffiti or have been vandalized.
G.
Do not leave any building or classroom unsecured. Grilles shall be reinstalled and rooms properly secured at end of each day.
H.
Patch holes that exist prior to removal of grilles or that are exposed or created during removal.
I.
Removal And Replacement l.
Grille and window sill shall be numbered prior to removal. Grille must be reinstalled to original location. Remove numbers upon reinstallation .
2.
Window grilles may have been anchored in different ways according to building composition and grille type. Following is a list of different types of anchors and methods of removal and installation. (Processes listed are not applicable to every situation. Use appropriate methods as needed, with prior consent of Project Inspector). a.
b.
•
Nail In Anchor: 1)
Removal: Use cold chisel to split aluminum head, pull out steel nail in center, and then pull out aluminum sleeve or grind off aluminum head to reveal nail, them remove nail. Touch up grille with approved spray cold galvanize where galvanize has been damaged from grinding.
2)
Reinstallation: With grille flush to wall, insert anchor flush with mounting tab, and drive nail with hammer until secure. Bent nails will not be accepted.
Threaded Anchors
8736 CORWIN THEATE REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/0112011 PAINTING OF EXISTING FACILITIES 09 9013-4
• c.
d.
• c.
•
I)
Removal: Grind off tack weld only, threaded stud shall remain in wall. Remove nut, washer, and grille. Touch up galvanizing damaged during grinding .
2)
Reinstallation: Install grille without damaging anchor threads. Install new washer and nut, tack weld nut to tab, clean weld, and paint. Do not weld threads.
Carriage Bolts: Note: Extra long carriage bolts are a specialty item. Allow sufficient time to order. I)
Removal: Remove nut and washer and pull out bolt (do not reuse).
2)
Reinstallation: Replace with new bolt of same size and minimum of 1 inch longer than bold removed. Install a new fender washer and nut. Tighten until grill is firmly against wall. Check to make sure window operates correctly. Cut off bolts flush with nut and de-burr bolt.
Lag Type Screws I)
Removal: Remove nut and washer and pull out bolt (do not reuse).
2)
Reinstallation: a)
If existing hole is capable of receiving new screw: Replace with new lag, of same diameter, using 1 inch longer than those removed. Tack weld screws to grille.
b)
If existing hole is damaged or otherwise compromised, a new placement of tab and screw is necessary. Remove existing tab, offset location of tab 2 inches, and drill correct size pilot hole into wood frame to avoid splitting wood. Replace with a new lag, of same length and diameter as removed. Tack weld screws to grill. Welds shall be cleaned and painted with cold galvanized paint.
Tamper Proof Screws 1)
Removal: Remove nut and washer and pull out bolt (do not reuse).
2)
Reinstallation:
I 0/0 I/20 I I
8736 CORWIN TIIEATE REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
PAINTING OF EXISTING FACILITIES 09 90I3-5
• d.
•
If existing hole is capable of receiving new screw: Replace with new screw, of same diameter, using 1 inch longer than those removed .
b)
If existing hole is damaged or otherwise compromised, a new placement of tab and screw is necessary. Remove existing tab, offset location of tab 2 inches, and drill correct size pilot hole into wood frame to avoid splitting wood. Replace with a new screw, of same length and diameter as removed. Welds shall be cleaned and painted with cold galvanized paint.
Pop Rivet-Steel, Aluminum, or Stainless Steel. Note: Extra long pop rivets are a specialty item. Allow sufficient time to order. I)
Removal: Drill out with proper size drill bit, do not increase hole size.
2)
Reinstallation: Replace with new pop rivet, of same diameter and composition as rivet removed.
3.
Grilles reinstalled in exact prior position. Do not use plastic anchors or toggle bolts. Grilles have been installed with expanded metal situated in a consistent directional manner and shall be reinstalled in same manner. Extra or oversized holes shall be repaired. If for any reason anchor will not securely hold, use next bigger size anchor and offset tab 2 inches and re-anchor as per OAR direction.
4.
Repair damage that previously exists prior to removal or is done to existing concrete, brick, wood, or any other surface during removal. If welding is necessary, welder shall protect surfaces from damage and maintain a fire watch during welding and at least Yz hour after completion.
5.
Do not change original type of anchor without prior approval from OAR and Project Inspector.
6.
Comply with applicable lead and asbestos abatement requirements prior to removal of grilles. Only employees properly trained and certified shall be permitted to disturb building materials containing lead or asbestos.
MOVING EQUIPMENT
1.10
A.
•
a)
Perform handling and moving of furniture, equipment, casework, books, and supplies, or items impeding project and re-installing in their original location, except as otherwise directed by OAR. Library books shall be moved and reshelved in same sequence and in same location from which they were removed, unless otherwise directed by OAR .
8736 CORWIN THEATE REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/0 l/20 11 PAINTING OF EXISTING FACILITIES 09 9013-6
MISCELLANEOUS
1.11
•
A.
DEFINITION OF TERMS
1.12
•
Provide and maintain barriers, guards, lights, warning signs, etcetera for complete protection and as directed by the OAR. Provide access to doors and openings. Do not store equipment or material near openings or traffic lanes that could be hazardous during an emergency.
A.
Work shall include labor, material, equipment and scaffolding required for cleaning and preparation of surfaces to receive painters finish and for painting and varnishing, as herein specified. Perform work unless specifically noted otherwise.
B.
Painting shall include complete preparation and finish or refinishing in accordance with requirements specified herein. Drywall shall be treated same as specified for plaster.
C.
Wherever woodwork is specified to be refinished, it will include wood finish member (trim), movable cabinets with doors and center cut doors, windows and sash, screen doors, screens, sash poles, movable and fixed bulletin boards and chalkboards, etcetera.
D.
Plastic, impregnated plywood, hardwood, metal, asbestos board (if painted), and mastic coated wood surfaces shall be treated in same manner as specified for "woodwork".
H.
Whenever "Paint or Enamel" is referred to in these specifications, it shall be taken to mean types of waterborne materials and water reducible materials.
I.
Whenever "edges" are referred to in these specifications, it shall be taken to mean every edges, (which include tops and bottoms).
J.
Work shall be done by skilled and experienced painters in a professional manner. Painters must wear presentable white uniforms consistent with industry standard and personal ID Badges. 1.
1.13
•
Provide ID badges identifying the following: a.
Employee's name
b.
Employee's photo
c.
Company Position (i.e. apprentice, journeyman, foreman)
d.
Company name and logo
e.
Company phone number.
SCAFFOLDING
8736 CORWIN THEATE REPAIR& P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HlGH SCHOOL
10/0112011 PAINTING OF EXISTING FACILITIES 09 9013-7
A.
•
1.14
Scaffolding shall be made available to Owner, without cost, to make repairs. Owner will coordinate its work with that of Contractor's to avoid delays to the work . SCHEDULING OF WORK
A.
Schedule work through the OAR.
PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01
PAINT MATERIALS
A.
Factory mix paint materials to correct color, gloss, and consistency for installation to maximum extent feasible.
B.
Paint materials shall be by one manufacturer.
c.
Paint materials shall be "Premium Architectural Grade".
D.
Acceptable manufacturers, unless otherwise noted:
• E.
I.
Dunn-Edwards Corporation Paints
2.
Vista Paints
3.
Frazee Paints and Wall coverings
4.
Sherwin Williams
5.
ICI Paints
6.
Equal
Gloss degree standards shall be as follows: High Gloss
70 and above
Eggshell
30 to 47
Semi-Gloss
48 to 69
Satin
15 to 29
PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01
•
REMOVE AND REINSTALL A.
Remove coat hooks, name plates, label frames, sash lifts, sash locks, pencil sharpeners, flag brackets, drawer handles and locks, window coverings, switch and receptacle plates, removable bulletin boards, mirrors, maps and thermometer. Reinstall all of the above after painting is completed.
B.
Remove exposed nails, hooks, tacks, screws, staples and pins in surface to be painted and patch holes with a matching material. Remove interior and exterior obsolete screens, grille hangers, fasteners and patch holes .
8736 CORWIN THEATE REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HJGH SCHOOL
10/01/201 I PAINTING OF EXISTING FACILITIES 09 9013-8
•
C.
Remove and reinstall Venetian blinds and channels, insuring security latches are secure. When removed, blinds and channels shall be marked with its location and reinstalled in the same location .
D.
Contractor shall replace map and picture hooks as directed by the Project Inspector.
E.
Paper labels shall be soaked off and glue residue from tape removed.
F.
Remove metal or plastic room numbers, letters, signs, and, after painting complete, clean and reinstall them neatly.
G.
Sash locks shall be reset in accordance with instructions for locking doors and windows each night. REPLACEMENT SCREWS AND HARDWARE
3.03 A.
Hardware shall be replaced using new screws, of same diameter, but one size longer than those removed. Screws used must be of finish design and material to match hardware.
B.
Remove paint from hardware, including paint from previous painting. GENERAL PREPARATION OF EXISTING PAINTED SURFACES
3.04
•
•
IS
A.
Previously painted surfaces will be assumed to contain lead.
B.
Trenching: Before any cleaning or sandblasting operation is started, soil at base of building shall be trenched to a depth of six inches and eight inches wide. After completing painting application and allowing sufficient drying time, trench shall be refilled.
C.
Insure a consistently uniform horizontal, vertical and curved surface, with a maximum deformation of 1/8 inch in a five foot span. Apply a brown scrub coat and a fog coat.
D.
Glass, fiberglass and polycarbonate on exterior shall be traced neat and clean with approximately, but no more than 1116 inch overlay. Paint specks, smears or splatters shall be immediately removed and surface cleaned.
E.
Miscellaneous Exterior Surfaces; Freestanding exterior school signs, windbreaks, baffles, benches, scoreboards, fences and gates (excluding chain link), decorative panels, interior and exterior surfaces of display cases, storage and supply cabinets, including both sides and edges shall be prepared and primed as specified under "Doors." They shall receive number of coats of paint as detailed under "Colors and Number of Paint Coats."
F.
Examine surfaces to receive paint finish. Surfaces which are not properly prepared, and cleaned or which are not in condition to receive finish specified,
8736 CORWIN THEA TE REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 PAINTING OF EXISTING FACILITIES 09 9013-9
shall be corrected before paint is applied. Painting shall not be done on existing painted surfaces until surfaces are approved by the Project Inspector.
•
G.
Remove items fastened to existing painted surfaces and patch holes with a material, and re-fasten in original location upon completion of painting work.
H.
Existing painted surfaces indicated to be painted, shall be prepared as follows: I.
Wood, plaster and metal surfaces shall be washed with TSP (tri-sodium phosphate) substitute to remove dirt, grease and other foreign materials and rinsed with clean water and then sand papered and dusted off. Surfaces shall have wax completely removed before washing, which includes base, shoe base, and concrete base.
2.
a.
Checked, cracked, blistered, scaled, peeling, and alligatored paint on wood and metal surfaces shall have paint removed down to original finished surface, then hand-sanded and dusted clean.
b.
Surfaces shall then be considered as new work.
c.
Woodwork must be hand sanded smooth after each and every coat, except last coat. Coats shall be free from dust, dirt or other imperfections.
d.
Steel sash and aluminum sash to be painted must be steel-wooled and dusted off. Sash putty shall be hand sanded smooth and dusted off.
e.
Remove lint and grease from screens, vents, hoods, etcetera that are to be painted.
• 3.05
OTHER SURFACE PREPARATION REQUIREMENTS A.
•
Existing painted surfaces shall be prepared and made ready to receive new coat of paint or other finish coating materials by any of following methods: I.
H.E.P.A. machine sanding: Checked, cracked, blistered, scaled loose, and alligator paint on wood and metal surfaces on exterior or interior of facilities shall be machine sanded to a smooth solid surface, dusted clean and then painted as specified. Power sanding shall be done with a H.E.P.A. vacuum sander and shall be used only when school is not in session, and students and staff are not on site.
2.
Trenching: Before any cleaning or sandblasting operation is started, soil at base of building shall be trenched to a depth of six inches and eight inches wide. After completing painting application and allowing sufficient drying time, trench shall be refilled .
8736 CORWIN THEATE REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
I 0/01/20 II PAINTING OF EXISTING FACILITIES 09 90I3-IO
3.
•
•
•
Hydro-washing: Exterior masonry and plaster on buildings, bungalows, pavilions, and appurtenances must be washed with a cleaner using hydrowashing equipment, or as directed by Project Inspector, to remove grease, dirt and foreign materials and then rinsed with clean water to remove residue. Surfaces must be allowed to dry for at least five days or as determined by Project Inspector. Care shall be taken to prevent water from entering buildings through vents, etcetera Immediately following hydrowashing, areas surrounding buildings must be rinsed down. a.
Exposed mastic, concrete, and/or plaster surfaces shall be cleaned with a cleaner, using hydro-cleaning equipment. This process is to remove dirt, foreign materials, grease, and oil and rinsed with clean water to remove residues.
b.
Before hydro-washing efflorescence must be brushed off and · surface treated with a 10 percent solution of Muriatic Acid, neutralized with a I 0 percent solution of ammonia water and then rinsed with clean water.
c.
Painted surfaces that will be directly or indirectly impacted by hydro-washing shall have paint stabilized to remove loose, flaky or peeling paint. Wood, metal, and other exterior nonmasonry/stucco surfaces shall be primed where stabilization has occurred prior to application of cleaner and hydro-washing.
d.
Hydro-washing is not intended to remove loose, flaky or peeling paint or paint chips. Water generated from cleaning and hydrowashing process that does not contain visible paint chips shall be directed to soil, such as a planted area, or collected and disposed in the sewer system.
e.
At no time shall water from hydro-washing process be directed to a storm drain, be allowed to flow off Owner property to adjoining public or private property, or to flow across asphalt or cement concrete and allowed to dry.
f.
If, during hydro-washing process, paint chips are generated with waste water work shall stop. Contractor shall install a system under and around area requiring washing sufficient enough to collect waste water generated. Waste water shall be stored in DOT approved barrels and visible paint chips separated from waste water. Paint chips shall be characterized to determine if waste is hazardous or disposed of assuming it is hazardous. Waste water shall be characterized to determine if it is hazardous and disposed of according to code. If water tests non-hazardous, water shall be removed from Owner's property .
8736 CORWIN THEATE REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
I 0/0 l/2011 PAINTING OF EXISTING FACILITIES 09 9013-11
g.
•
•
3.
3.06
Sandblasting: Shall be performed when school is not in session and when students are not present. Premises shall be left in a clean condition and ready for use by occupants by end of any day prior to beginning of school session. Work shall be coordinated with Project Inspector and the OAR. Only wet blasting shall be allowed. Masonry or stucco surfaces shall be sandblasted to remove mastic, paint and other materials to original plaster brown coat or formed concrete surface. Rinse with clean water to remove residue. Adjacent surface, plants and shrubs shall be protected from damage due to sandblasting operations. a.
Immediately upon completion of sandblasting operation, roof, gutters and areas around buildings, etcetera shall be cleaned of sand and debris resulting from sandblasting operation. No sand or debris shall be hosed or swept into drains.
b.
Metal surfaces including decorative metal and fencing requiring sandblasting shall be sandblasted to white metal and primed same day with a metal primer per manufacturer's recommendation.
A.
Voids between wall and ceiling surfaces and wood or metal trim or scribed edges where finish exists or is specified to be applied and including picture molding, must be filled with putty, filler or latex sealing compound.
B.
Areas where finish plaster coat is loose must have that portion removed to a solid surface. Surfaces that are broken, cracked, or damaged and areas where finish plaster coat has been removed must be coated with compatible bonding agent. Surface will then be given a cement plaster finish coat consisting of one-part Plastic Portland Cement to three parts sand to match existing finish. Cracks shall be "V -eed" out, filled, finished flush with and textured to match adjoining surfaces, per Owner Representative's approval.
C.
Neutralize walls showing effects of alkali. FILLER ON SIDING AND WOODWORK
A.
•
this process requires being Hazardous Waste Manifest. completed as required by code . accurately completed and prior
CRACKS AND VOIDS
3.07
3.08
Hazardous waste generated by transported under a Uniform Contractor shall ensure manifest is OAR will sign manifest once it is to transport of waste off site.
Checked and cracked portions of siding and woodwork (after surrounding areas have been prepared as specified above) shall be primed, smoothed with an exterior filling compound and then sanded smooth when dry. Filled areas must be spot primed. Filler shall not be used on handball walls or basketball backstops. SEALING SASH, DOOR FRAMES
8736 CORWIN THEATE REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
l 0/01/2011 PAINTING OF EXISTING FACILITIES 09 9013-12
A.
•
Sealant that will interfere with proper application of waterproof coating shall be removed. Seal around door and window frames, flashing, vents, separations between masonry or plaster and adjoining surfaces, etcetera, with a sealant compound recommended by manufacturer of coating to be used. Sealing and filling shall be done with sufficient pressure to force material to base of opening. MASTIC REPAIR AND ELASTOMERIC REPAIR
3.09 A.
Surface must be clean, firm and free of oil, wax and chalk. Mildew must be killed. Surface must be rinsed and allowed to dry.
B.
Use primers as recommended by manufacturer for each substrate.
c.
May be applied with airless spray equipment, using a 22 to 34 orifice tip and do not apply when surface or air temperature is below 50 degrees F.
D.
Apply elastomeric with a ~ inch to 1 Y:z-inch roller cover or an air-atomized spray texture pump system. Do not over-roll.
E.
Spreading rate: Fine texture: Medium texture:
•
Heavy texture:
F.
•
Approx. Mil thickness
Wet
18 Mils
at 80 square feet per gallon
Dry
9 Mils
Approx. Mil thickness
Wet
18 Mils
at 60 square feet per gallon
Dry
9 Mils
Approx. Mil thickness
Wet
39 Mils
At 40 square feet per gallon
Dry
26 Mils
NOTE:
Coverage will vary depending upon texture desired and surface. Direction will be given by an Owner representative.
Dry time:
To touch:
1 to 1 ~hours
Tore-coat:
24 hours
G.
Finish will be uniform in texture and free of imperfections.
H.
Elastomeric coatings will receive at least two coats of paint.
I.
Hairline cracks: Two coats of elastomeric coating to bridge hairline cracks.
J.
Small to medium cracks and imperfections: elastomeric coating to fill and span cracks up to 1132 inch. Cracks 1/32 inch width or greater shall be treated with an elastomeric sealant (recommended by paint manufacturer) prior to applying elastomeric coating.
K.
Medium to large cracks and imperfections: Cracks from 1132 inch to 118 inch shall be treated with a brush-grade elastomeric sealant applied in a 2-inch wide band; crowned at center and feathered at edges to conceal repair .
8736 CORWIN THEATE REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 PAINTING OF EXISTING FACILITIES 09 9013-13
•
L.
Large cracks: Cracks 118 inch to ~ inch shall receive a urethane sealant (recommended by paint manufacturer), "rake out" crack to conform to manufacturer's specifications and applied as directed for medium to large cracks .
M.
Cracks, holes and damaged spots larger than ~ inches: Damaged areas shall be given a cement plaster finish coat consisting of one-part plastic Portland cement to three-part plaster sand to match existing finish. When finished, it shall be flush with and match existing texture of adjoining surface.
N.
Texture match: Crack repairs shall be finished to match texture of adjoining surfaces, per Project Inspector's approval. Hand held plaster hopper guns may be used. Exercise care to ensure that areas finished by hand held plaster machines match in color, texture and thickness to adjoining surfaces. A compatible bonding agent shall be used. REPAIR OF PLASTER
3.10 A.
•
1.
If existing plaster was a machine applied, dash coat, apply final application of finish coat over patched areas by machine to match existing adjacent machine texture. Use a finish plaster material with a bonding admixture mixed according to manufacturer's recommendation.
2.
Cracks, holes, and damaged spots larger than
~inch,
see 3.09.
B.
Exterior plaster designated to be painted shall receive three coats. First coat shall be sealer. Second and third coats shall 100 percent acrylic gloss enamel unless otherwise indicated.
C.
Interior plaster patching shall receive four coats. First coat shall be pigmented sealer. Second coat shall be enamel undercoat. Third and fourth coats shall gloss or semi-gloss enamel as indicated. REPAIR OF SPALLING CONCRETE
3.11
•
Exterior areas, where finish plaster coat is loose, shall have that portion removed to a solid surface. Surfaces that are broken, cracked, or damaged and areas where finish plaster coat has been removed shall be coated with compatible bonding agent. Surface will then be given a cement plaster finish coat consisting of onepart Plastic Portland Cement to three parts plaster sand to match existing finish. Cracks shall be "veed-out", filled, finished flush with and textured to match adjoining surfaces, per Project Inspector's approval.
A.
Remove surface contamination, broken and spalled concrete to a sound concrete base. Concrete shall be removed to a depth of one-half inch minimum around rebar. Sides of areas to be repaired shall be straight, not tapered or sloped.
B.
Spalled or loose concrete shall be removed using an electric or compressed air chipping hammer.
8736 CORWIN THEATE REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/201 I PAINTING OF EXISTING FACILITIES 09 9013-14
•
C.
Clean exposed rebar by sandblasting, remove debris and dust and treat steel with a sealant compatible to patching materials same day. Project Inspector shall approve sealant application prior to any patching materials being applied .
D.
Repair concrete to match existing concrete surfaces using Sika Top 123 Gel Mortar, DAP Concrete Patch, Quikrete Fast-Setting Concrete, or equal.
E.
Sealant and patching materials shall be applied by qualified applicator. SPRAYING MASONRY /CEMENT PLASTER
3.12
•
•
A.
Masonry/plaster material must be a 100 percent acrylic flat paint, color as directed. Material must be applied in strict conformity to manufacturer's directions. There must be at least 24 hours drying time between first coat which shall be factory tinted 10 percent to 15 percent lighter (or darker) in color than finish coat. Manufacturer shall be acquainted with conditions of surfaces to be refinished and provide written specifications for the job including special primers or additives needed for adhesion sealing of first coat of paint and general performance of materials. Finished surface must be uniform and free of imperfections. Each coat applied to surface must be sprayed using "Cross-Off'' method of application by spraying horizontally with a 50 percent overlap on returns and doubling back with a vertical stroke with a 50 percent overlap on returns.
B.
After painting of masonry/plaster, replace (stencil) security numbers per plot plan. See Owner representative for locations . STAINED AND VARNISHED SURFACES
3.13 A.
Where existing varnish has been removed and woodwork is to be enameled, woodwork shall be primed as specified under "Priming" and then given three coats. First coat of enamel undercoat, second and third coats of gloss or semigloss enamel.
B.
Interior woodwork having a stain and varnish finish shall have areas where painter's finish has been removed, build-up to match adjoining finish with stain, filler for open wood grained wood and varnish. Exposed surfaces of woodwork shall be given two coats of interior gloss varnish, and one coat of interior varnish, semi-gloss finish or as specified herein. Between coats of varnish, surfaces shall be sanded with #220 sandpaper or steel-wool and dusted clean.
C.
Where exterior gloss varnish for finish coat is specified, method of build-up shall be as specified above, however exterior gloss varnish shall be used in lieu of interior varnish. When following items are to receive varnish, three coats of exterior gloss varnish shall be used on: window stools, sash, screens, exterior doors/frames, wood handrails, balustrade caps, chalk rails, toilet stall doors, fixed benches, sash poles, stair treads, risers, bleachers, base and base shoe.
D.
Remove stains from varnished surfaces before refinishing .
8736 CORWIN THEATE REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 PAINTING OF EXISTING FACILITIES 09 9013-15
E.
•
SASH PUTTY
3.14 A.
Loose sash putty must be removed and replaced. Rough, uneven or otherwise deteriorated sash putty shall be sanded smooth or re-puttied.
B.
Sash putty and sealing compound shall be painted with same number of coats as specified for woodwork. PUTTY
3.15 A.
3.16
•
Holes, open joints of siding, woodwork and sash glazing shall, after surrounding areas have been prepared as specified above, be knife puttied. On stained woodwork, putty must be colored to match stain. Puttying shall be done after first coat of paint or varnish has been applied. Latex sealant may be used on open joints and woodwork. Putty and/or sealant shall be spot primed before finish coat is applied. Putty or latex sealant shall not be used on handball walls or basketball backstops. FILLER ON SIDING AND WOODWORK
A.
•
Colored varnish is prohibited.
3.17
Checked and cracked portions of siding and woodwork (after surrounding areas have been prepared as specified above) shall be primed, smoothed with an exterior filling compound and then sanded smooth when dry. Filled areas must be spot primed. Filler shall not be used on handball walls or basketball backstops . MIXING AND APPLICATION
A.
Colors of coatings shall be as directed by Project Inspector.
B.
Three coats of paint shall be applied as follows: 1.
First coat: primer or undercoat, shall be white.
2.
Second coat shall be factory tinted in range of 10 percent to 15 percent lighter or darker than finish coat.
3.
Third coat shall be factory tinted to color selected, but allowing for tint variations in more than one color for application to different surfaces. Color combinations in rooms and for surfaces shall be varied in accordance with color letter.
C.
Any number of colors may be used on any portion of work. Owner reserves right to change colors before work is started in an area or on a particular surface.
D.
Various colors may require additional coats of paint complete coverage. No additional allowances will be made. Contractor is responsible for consulting color letter and knowing color and coverage .
8736 CORWIN THEATE REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES 1-llGH SCHOOL
l 0/0 l /20 ll PAINTING OF EXISTING FACILITIES 09 9013-16
E.
Surfaces to be finished and each coating shall be separately inspected by Project Inspector and checked for mill thickness. The requirements are two mils each coat wet and three mils dry after three coats. Notice that such work is ready for inspection shall be given to Project Inspector. Should such notice not be given before succeeding coat is put on, finish applied shall be removed or an additional coat shall be applied, as directed by Project Inspector. Allow at least one day drying time between coats for exterior work or as directed by Project Inspector for proper drying.
F.
Roof work to be painted Q8-38T Birch Gray.
•
PAINT ROLLERS, BRUSH AND SPRAY
3.18
•
A.
Paint rollers may be used on interior plaster, drywall, masonry, stucco and plywood surfaces, nap not to exceed 1/2 inch in length.
B.
First coat on wood overhang and ceilings must have material applied by roller and then must be brushed out in a professional manner to leave surface free of imperfections. Finish coat may be sprayed.
C.
Other surfaces shall have coatings applied with brushes of proper size.
D.
Spray work shall be permitted only on radiators, acoustic plaster, acoustic tile, fiberboard, wood fiber acoustical units, masonry and plaster or as directed by Project Inspector. PRIMING
3.19 A.
I.
Wood shall be sealed or primed with a non-water borne material on both sides and edges. Wood completely sealed with a non-water borne material shall be top coated with a water borne material as specified herein. Finish material (water borne) shall be compatible with non-water borne primer per manufacturer's recommendations. Hardwood shall be filled and stained to an even color.
2.
Galvanized Metal: Clean oil and foreign material from surfaces. Apply vinyl wash pretreatment coating. Follow manufacturer's instructions for drying time, and then prime with one coat of metal primer.
3.
Ferrous and non-ferrous metal: Use a primer for ferrous and non-ferrous metal.
FIRE AND LIFE SAFETY EQUIPMENT
3.20
A.
•
Surfaces from which paint finish have been removed down to original wood or metal surfaces shall be primed as follows:
Cal-OSHA requires the following equipment be painted as follows:
8736 CORWIN THEATE REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 PAINTING OF EXISTING FACILITIES 09 9013-17
•
3.21
2.
Fire Valves and Raisers shall be painted OSHA's "safety red"
A.
Painted or refinished exterior wood or metal must be finished on both sides and edges with three coats of paint consisting of first coat of primer, second coat and third coat of exterior high gloss enamel.
B.
Where doors open into rooms or spaces having different finishes, communicating doors must have edges finished according to industry standard or as directed by Project Inspector.
3.22
I.
Strike edge of door shall be same color as inside face of door.
2.
Hinged edge of door shall be same finish as outside face of door.
Exterior hardwood doors and frames where varnish finish has been removed shall be built-up to match adjoining finish with stain, filler and one coat of exterior varnish. Then surfaces, including edges must be given specified number of coats of exterior varnish as detailed under "Stain and Varnish Finish." PORCH, STAIRS AND HANDRAILS
A.
Unpainted, painted and mastic coated porch floors, treads, risers and thresholds of building shall be prepared as specified herein and painted with two coats of a nonskid porch and deck paint.
B.
Handrails must be finished same as specified for exterior wood doors using exterior gloss enamel.
3.23
THRESHOLDS
A.
Painted thresholds to be prepared, primed, and receive two coats of a non-skid porch and deck paint.
B.
Natural finished wood thresholds to be prepared and receive three coats of a high gloss varnish.
3.24
INTERIOR WOODWORK A.
Wood surfaces shall be prepared to receive new finish as specified under Preparation of Surfaces, 3.04 and Priming, 3.19 ENAMEL FINISH
3.25
A.
•
Gas Mains and Valves shall be painted "gun metal gray" (medium gray)
DOORS
C.
•
1.
Interior woodwork having an existing enameled finish must have areas where painter's finish has been removed and where spackling has been done in repairing defects in surface, built-up with undercoat. Wood surfaces shall then be given
8736 CORWIN THEA TE REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
I 0/01/20 II PAINTING OF EXISTING FACILITIES 09 9013-18
one coat of undercoat, a second coat and third coat of finish paint to match room finish. Paint shall be applied as specified under "Colors and Number of Coats."
•
B.
Unpainted plaster surfaces to receive an enamel finish, must receive four coats of paint. First coat of pigmented sealer, second coat of enamel undercoat, third and fourth coats of gloss or semi-gloss enamel as specified herein.
c.
Previously painted interior surfaces must have patching and places where painted finish has been removed, built up with one coat of a pigmented sealer. Then entire surface including patching shall be given one coat of an enamel undercoat, a second and third coat of gloss or semi-gloss enamel as specified herein. CABINETS
3.26 A.
Cabinets without doors, cabinets with glass doors and pegboard doors shall have interiors finished to match surrounding or adjacent work, unless interior has a stained finish.
B.
Cabinets having solid panel doors must have exposed parts of cabinet and surfaces of doors finished to match room finish. Shelf edges shall be finished same as room finish. PLYWOOD WALLS
3.27
•
A.
Interior plywood walls having an existing stain finish must have exposed plywood joints machine sanded to remove projecting edges and prepared as follows:
B.
Voids between wall surfaces and wood or metal trim or battens, and nail holes must be filled with putty, sealant, or a exterior filler, sanded smooth when dry and dusted clean.
c.
Interior walls must be sanded smooth, brushed off and finished with three coats of paint. First coat of enamel undercoat, second and third coats of semi-gloss enamel.
D.
Exterior plywood shall be cleaned and finished with three coats. First coat shall be undercoat. Second and third coats shall be gloss enamel. Exterior plywood may be sprayed if it is then back-rolled. INTERIOR PLASTER AND DRYWALL WORK - WALLS, CEILINGS, ETCETERA
3.28
•
A.
Where ceilings are specified to be painted, beams, cornices, coves, ornamental features, staff work, plaster grilles, etcetera shall be included.
B.
Ceilings shall be white, unless otherwise noted. Includes classrooms, storage rooms, offices, arcades, and etcetera. Boiler room and fan room ceiling color shall match adjacent walls .
8736 CORWIN THEATE REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/0112011 PAINTING OF EXISTING FACILITIES 09 9013-19
•
c.
Where walls are specified to be painted, columns, staff work, piers, returns, reveals, soffits of stairs, both sides of stair railings, soffits and reveals of windows and other openings shall be included .
D.
Grease, ink spots and marks of indelible pencils shall be completely removed by use of water and abrasive soap powder without injury to finished surface.
E.
First coat may be thinned per paint manufacturer's recommendation with a thinner prepared specifically for material used. Coats shall be flowed on freely. First coat must be prepared so as to stop suction, and should any dead spots appear, they shall be touched up before next coat is applied. The last coat shall be a uniform surface, free of defects.
3.29
AREAS REQUIRJNG ENAMEL A.
Interior and Exterior Enamel- Gloss Woodwork, walls and ceilings (except acoustic tile or acoustic plaster or as otherwise specified herein) in following areas:
•
B.
1.
Physical Education and Gym Buildings.
2.
Cafeteria: Except student and teachers' dining rooms.
3.
Shops.
4.
Miscellaneous Rooms: Toilet rooms, custodian closets, storerooms, boiler and mechanical rooms.
5.
Kitchen Complex: Color; Eastwind- Fill and seal cracks and voids.
Interior and Exterior Enamel -Semi-Gloss Woodwork, walls and ceilings (except acoustic tile or acoustic plaster or as otherwise specified herein) in following areas:
c.
3.30
•
I.
Administrative offices.
2.
Faculty lounges and auditoriums.
3.
Walls and surfaces in rooms or areas specified to receive an enamel finish and not herein specified to receive a Gloss Enamel finish, shall have a finish coat of Semi-Gloss Enamel.
Interior masonry, brick and concrete surfaces having an existing painter's finish shall be finished same as specified for interior plaster and drywall. Concrete pan ceilings may be sprayed as directed by Project Inspector. UNPAINTED METAL
8736 CORWIN THEATE REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HJGH SCHOOL
10/01/20 II PAINTING OF EXISTING FACILITlES 09 9013-20
A.
•
PAINTED METAL
3.31 A.
Exposed structural steel, miscellaneous/ornamental iron, sheet metal work, guards, steel sash, gates, painted aluminum, basketball rims, and etcetera shall have surfaces cleaned and prepared as specified. The areas from which original painter's finish has been removed shall be spot primed with metal primer to match adjoining surfaces and then surfaces shall be given a prime coat of metal primer, second and third coats as specified. Copper pipe shall be painted with one coat of enamel undercoat per manufacturer's recommendation, a second and third coat of enamel as specified.
B.
Painted ornamental iron rails and gates, metal ceilings (metal decking, etcetera) stairs, pipe columns, and pipe rails shall be prepared and finished as specified herein. Metal decking and metal roll-up doors may be sprayed.
C.
Exterior surfaces (except bottom) of exterior metal storage container, including both sides of door(s) and edges shall be prepared, primed and painted. Exterior metal storage container(s) must be sprayed. METAL COVERED DOORS, RADIATORS
3.32
•
A.
Metal Covered Doors: Bare metal must be primed with a metal primer. Doors and edges shall then be painted with one coat of enamel undercoat, a second coat and third coat of exterior gloss enamel as specified.
B.
Fly screens and hardware cloth of copper, bronze or galvanized wire must be painted with one coat of exterior enamel.
c.
Radiator guards must be removed, painted with three coats of enamel to match adjoining surface and replaced after radiators have been painted LIGHT FIXTURES
3.33
•
Unpainted bronze, brass, copper work, window grilles, stairways, handrails, chain-link fences, stainless steel, open metal shelving, porcelain metal faced cabinets and aluminum will not be painted, unless otherwise specified .
A.
Exterior/interior light fixtures (other than plated or bronzed) and bells to be primed and then painted with two coats of an enamel to match adjoining surface. Bell identification plates must have paint removed and be kept clean.
B.
Metal stacks and kilns must, after preparation, receive two coats of aluminum paint or a heat resistant material. Minimum required heat resistant coating shall be rated to not less than 700 degrees F.
C.
Cafeteria equipment: Metal work in cafeteria, kitchen and serving counters in student and faculty dining rooms having an existing aluminum paint finish must be cleaned as specified and given two coats of an aluminum paint.
8736 CORWIN THEATE REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 PAINTING OF EXISTING FACILITIES 09 9013-21
3.34
•
FLAG AND LIGHT POLES
A.
Clean by wire-brushing and sanding to remove foreign debris, loose paint, rust, etcetera from pole, platform, steps, cage area and mechanical fixtures related to those areas. After removing loose paint, feather-edge sand surrounding areas of existing finish. Remove dust. Exclude electrical fixtures.
B.
Spot-prime with a quick-dry metal primer.
c.
Apply by brushing first and second coat of aluminum paint per manufacturer's time recommendation for re-coating.
E.
Rolling or airless spraying is not permitted on flag and light poles. METAL SHOWERS AND DRESSING ROOMS
3.35 A.
PAPER TOWEL BOXES
3.36 A.
•
Metal boxes for paper towels, toilet paper and metal sanitary boxes, must be enameled with two coats of gloss white enamel. METAL SURFACES
3.37 A.
Clean by wire-brushing and sanding to remove foreign debris, loose paint, rust, and etcetera after removing loose paint, feather-edge sand surrounding areas of existing finish. Remove dust.
B.
Exterior bare metal surfaces shall be primed with a metal primer then painted with a first coat of enamel undercoat, then a second coat and third coat of exterior gloss enamel.
C.
Hardware having a painted finish shall have paint removed. Doors closers shall be finished with a leather brown or aluminum paint. Aluminum paint shall be applied in sanitary areas such as cafeterias, dining rooms and toilet rooms. Leather brown (N-2501) paint shall be used in other areas.
3.38
METAL LOCKER FINISH A.
•
The exterior and interior surfaces of metal shower stalls and dressing rooms in locker and shower rooms to be cleaned of rust, dirt, grease and loose materials. Where painters finish has been removed, area to be built-up with a coat of rust preventive primer and then surfaces shall be given first, second and third coats as specified under "Areas requiring enamel."
Following items in physical education and gymnasium buildings, (including related physical education buildings, such as locker rooms, field houses, etcetera and buildings having lockers or like equipment) must be washed with a silicone wax remover, rinsed and have scratches, marks and defacements "feathered out." Then surfaces must be given one coat of a primer and two finish coats of a gloss
8736 CORWIN THEATE REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 PAINTING OF EXISTING FACILITIES 09 9013-22
metal enamel finish. etcetera
•
l.
Interior and exterior surfaces of faculty and students' metal lockers, metal shelving for drawers of wire baskets and drawer type lockers or as specified.
2.
· Plated hardware, locks, name plates and number tags shall be masked off and adjoining surfaces shall be protected while spraying. If locks are to be removed, they shall be removed and reinstalled by Owner.
PAINTING OF MECHANICAL WORK
3.39 A.
Exposed heating, ventilating, air conditioning, plumbing, electrical equipment, apparatus, piping, ducts, coverings, etcetera shall be cleaned, prepared and painted as specified herein for that item. I.
•
•
Surfaces must be free from sags, runs, over-spray, and
In finished areas, these items must be finished with one coat of primer and two coats of enamel to match adjoining wall or ceiling finish as specified herein.
B.
Radiator branches, risers, returns, radiators, supports and other types of heating equipment in finished spaces shall be finished with three coats of paint to match adjoining finish as specified herein. Gas steam radiators shall be disconnected and reconnected by Owner.
c.
Register faces and grilles, unless plated, must be given three coats of paint to match adjoining finish as specified.
D.
Ventilators and interior sheet metal ducts must be treated and finished as specified for interior metal work.
E.
Coverings on pipes in finished rooms must be finished same as adjoining wall or ceiling surfaces. Do not break surface of any wrapped pipes.
F.
Labels on fire alarm systems, bells, pulls must be covered and kept intact. Fire alarm bells and pulls to be painted red gloss paint.
G.
Covering on boilers, tanks, pipes, etcetera in boiler room and heater room must be primed and then finished with gloss enamel.
H.
Valves, pipe hangers, flanges, unions, drain pipes, soil lines, exposed blow-off pipes, boiler fronts, smoke boxes, breeching, iron boiler bases, metal stacks, water column/pipe connections, damper regulators, manholes, safety valve connections, boiler appurtenances, etcetera, located in boiler room must be painted with two coats of a boiler paint as recommended by paint manufacturer.
I.
Pumps, fans, fan housing, belt guards, including supports, motors, or other equipment, cover plated to sump pump, tank, manhole covers/rings mounted in
8736 CORWIN THEATE REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
I 0/01/20 II PAINTING OF EXISTING FACILITIES 09 9013-23
floors including conduits and piping in boiler or fan rooms must be primed and then finished with two coats of gloss enamel as specified herein .
•
J.
Mechanical work not specifically mentioned must be painted as specified for other work of same character.
K.
Finished bronze, brass fittings, plated work, name plate and fusible links and chains must be cleaned of paint.
L.
Pressure relief grilles with barometric dampers leading to a corridor or to exterior must be masked off before spraying any material.
M.
Automatic sprinkler valves, gas meters and water meters must be painted as specified herein
3.40
ELECTRICAL CABINETS A.
3.41
•
ACOUSTICAL PLASTER, TILE, FIBERBOARD A.
Acoustical plaster shall be cleaned to remove dust before painting.
B.
Acoustical plaster shall be sprayed with One full Coat of Pigmented Sealer and then with two coats of Vinyl Wall paint, using "cross-off' method of spraying horizontally with a 50 percent overlap on each stroke and then doubling back with a vertical application with a 50 percent overlap on each stroke.
c.
Acoustic tile, wood fiber units, and fiberboard shall receive not less than two coats of a fire retardant paint with a flame spread rating of not more than seventyfive feet on acoustical tile as evaluated by a tunnel test and shall be currently recognized by State Fire Marshals Office. Fire retardant shall be applied in strict conformity to manufacturer's directions. The above surfaces shall be sprayed using "cross-off' method. Before fire retardant coating is applied, ceiling shall receive one full coat of pigmented sealer. Kitchens shall receive two coats of gloss finish after receiving one full coat of a pigmented sealer.
3.42
•
Front side of doors and exposed lip around doors to electrical cabinets in finished areas must be finished same as walls.
CORK AND FIBERBOARD TACK BOARDS A.
Unpainted cork board panels used in connection with chalkboards or bulletin boards shall be finished with two coats of vinyl wall paint, factory tinted to match wall color and brushed on. Where cork strips are inset in head trim on chalkboards, cork shall be either varnished or enameled to match wood trim.
B.
Painted cork board and unpainted or painted fiberboard panels shall be finished with two coats of vinyl wall paint.
8736 CORWIN THEATE REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 PAINTING OF EXISTING FACILITIES 09 9013-24
C.
•
•
3.43
CHALKBOARDS A.
Chalkboards (including portable chalkboards) shall be washed with a strong solution of a cleaner as per manufacturer's recommendation, rinsed with clear clean water to remove chalk dust and allowed to dry. Fill joints and repair defects such as cracks and holes with paste wood filler colored with paint to match chalkboard. After filler has hardened sufficiently, repaired spots shall be sanded smooth to level of adjacent surfaces.
B.
Apply two coats of chalkboard paint. Paint shall be liquid slate green as manufactured by Cal-Western, Rust-Oleum, Valspar, or equal. Sand between coats with # 180 wet-or-dry sandpaper. Paint shall be rolled with a Y4 inch nap and brushed out.
C.
After final coat, entire surface must be finished smooth with #400 wet or dry sandpaper.
D.
Finished board must present a surface free of defects and brush marks and shall meet approval of Project Inspector.
E.
Do not paint natural slate chalkboards.
3.44
LETTERING A.
3.45
3.46
Hardware having a painted finish must have paint removed. Doors closers must be finished with a leather brown or aluminum paint. Aluminum paint shall be applied in sanitary areas such as cafeterias, dining rooms, toilet rooms. Leather brown (N-250 1) paint shall be used in other areas. Where both sides of doors are specified to be painted, door closers shall be included. GAS FIRED UNITS
A.
•
Lettering and numerals on glass, fiberglass, plaster, and surfaces to be refinished shall be reproduced in original locations and will be of size, color and design as directed by Project Inspector and OAR. An experienced sign painter shall do lettering. HARDWARE AND AUTOMATIC DOOR CLOSERS
A.
3.47
Where cork or fiberboard has been painted with water-soluble paint, this watersoluble paint shall be washed off and allowed to dry. Surface shall then be painted as described above .
Gas fired units, which need to be disconnected and reconnected, and/or any unit that must be shut down, re-ignited and tested will be done by Owner personnel. CLEANING
8736 CORWIN THEATE REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 PAINTING OF EXISTING FACILITIES 09 9013-25
•
•
A.
Glass, polycarbonate and fiberglass on interior and exterior where painting has been done shall be cleaned of paint and varnish. Glass, fiberglass and polycarbonate that are scratched or damaged by painting work, shall be replaced with material to match original.
B.
Finished bronze, copper, brass fittings, plated work, name plate and fusible links and chains shall be cleaned of paint.
c.
Before applying finish coat of material to exterior sash with security grilles, Contractor shall clean window panes with a cleaner.
D.
Dispose of debris, waste or unused materials, off site. Use of school dumpsters is strictly prohibited.
E.
Remove paint from hardware, including paint from previous painting.
F.
Contractor shall free sash and leave it in an easy operating condition.
G.
Glass, fiberglass and polycarbonate on exterior shall be traced neat and clean with no more than 1116 inch overlay. Paint specks, smears or splatters shall be immediately removed and surface cleaned.
H.
Rooms, Buildings, and Campuses must be cleaned of paint debris, including dust caused by painting project to approval of Project Inspector and OAR.
3.48
POST OCCUPANCY WORK A.
Two months after substantial completion, OAR will arrange a date and time when the Contractor must return to the site to check and free sashes that were painted so they are in proper operating condition.
END OF SECTION
•
8736 CORWIN THEATE REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
I 0/01120 I I PAINTING OF EXISTING FACILITIES 09 9013-26
170131
•
SECTION 10 1400 SIGNAGE PART 1- GENERAL SUMMARY
1.01 A.
B.
•
1.
Interior and exterior accessibility, identification, directional and informational stgns.
2.
Parking signs.
3.
School Name and Address Sign.
Related Requirements: 1.
Division 01: General Requirements.
2.
Section 08 1113: Hollow Metal Doors, Windows and Frames.
3.
Section 08 1416: Wood Doors.
4.
Division 09: Finishes .
5.
Section 32 1313 - Site Concrete Work.
REFERENCES
1.02 A.
ASTM International: 1.
ASTM ASOO - Standard Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes.
2.
ASTM B209 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate.
3.
ASTM B221 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes.
4.
ASTM D4802- Standard Specification for Poly (Methyl Methacrylate) Acrylic Plastic Sheet.
SUBMITTALS
1.03 A.
•
Section Includes:
Product Data: Submit material descriptions, finishes and color charts for each type of stgn .
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES. LOS ANGELES ffiGH SCHOOL
01/31/2017 SIGNAGE I 0 1400-1
170131
•
B.
Shop Drawings: Submit Shop Drawings indicating sign style, lettering, overall dimensions and quantities. Submit floor plans showing locations for each sign .
C.
Material Samples: Submit three samples illustrating full size sample sign, of type, style and color specified.
D.
Manufacturer's installation instructions.
1.04
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
Pre-Installation Conference: Notify OAR when signs are ready for installation. Arrange for conference at site. Do not proceed with installation until ARCHITECT'S approval of specific locations and methods of attachment has been obtained.
B.
Provide signs from one manufacturer. DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
1.05
A.
Deliver products to site and protect from damage. installation.
Store until immediately prior to
PART 2- PRODUCTS
•
2.01
MANUFACTURERS A.
I.
H. Toji and Company.
2.
Karman Ltd., Architectural Signs.
3.
Vomar Products Inc.
4.
ASI-Modulex, Inc.
5.
Mohawk Sign Systems, Inc.
6.
Accent Signage Systems.
7.
The Gruenke Company.
8.
Equal.
MATERIALS AND FABRICATION
2.02
A.
•
Products of following manufacturers are acceptable and are the basis for intended design and quality.
Interior Sign Materials:
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR& P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
01/3112017 SIGNAGE 10 1400-2
170131
1.
•
B.
• c.
a.
Corners shall be radius.
b.
Edges shall be square and eased.
c.
Colors as selected by ARCHITECT from manufacturer's custom color range.
2.
Aluminum Extrusions: In conformance to ASTM B221.
3.
Fasteners: a.
Stainless steel tamper-proof screws and plastic anchors.
b.
Signs mounted on fire-rated doors shall be secured with adhesive. Adhesives and sealants shall comply with the limits for VOC content and shall be approved by LAUSD's Office of Environmental Health Services (OEHS).
Exterior Sign Materials: 1.
Sign: ASTM B209 aluminum sheet, 0.080 inch thick with rounded corners of at least 118 inch radius and eased edges. White figure on a blue background; nonglare, high contrast signs. The blue shall be equal to color number 15090 in Federal Standard 595B.
2.
Post: 2 by 2 inch galvanized steel tubing, weighing minimum of 4.31 pounds per foot and conforming to ASTM A500, Grade B, 3/16 inch thick wall thickness.
3.
Concrete Post Footings: Refer to Section 32 1313, Site Concrete Work.
4.
Fasteners: Stainless steel carriage bolts with tamper resistant nuts.
Characters and Symbols: Computer cut raised characters and graphics shall be cut from 1116 inch integrally colored acrylic. Raised characters and graphics shall be inlaid 1/32 inch minimum into first surface of sign background, secured with adhesive so it cannot be removed without the use of tools. Raised characters and graphics shall have beveled, eased or rounded edges. Non-tactile text and graphics shall be applied to the second surface, and background color shall be applied to the second surface and protected with film or an additional backplate. Pictograms and other symbols including the International Symbol of Accessibility, which are included on signs with raised characters and Braille, are not required to be raised. COMMUNICATION ELEMENTS AND FEATURES
2.03
A.
•
Substrate Panel: 118 inch minimum thick, integrally colored or clear, back foiled and back painted acrylic plastic, or laminated acrylic. Conforming to ASTM D4802; non-glare (matte), UV stable, suitable for interior and exterior use.
Raised Characters Raised characters shall comply with CBC 11B-703.2.
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
01131/2017 SIGNAGE 10 1400-3
170131
• B.
• C.
1.
Character Type: Characters on signs shall be raised I /32 inch minimum above their background and shall be sans serif uppercase characters duplicated in Braille. Characters and Braille shall be in a horizontal format.
2.
Character Height: Character height measured vertically from the baseline of the character shall be 5/8 inch minimum and 2 inch maximum based on the height of the uppercase letter "I".
3.
Character Proportions: Characters shall be selected from fonts where the width of the uppercase letter "0" is 60 percent minimum and 110 percent maximum of the height of the letter "I".
4.
Stroke Thickness: Stroke thickness of the uppercase letter "I" shall be 15 percent maximum of the height of the character.
5.
Character and Line Spacing shall be in conformance to CBC 118-703.2.7 and 11B-703.2.8.
6.
Character Placement: Shall be placed in accordance to Paragraph 2.03, C below.
Visual Characters: Visual characters shall comply with CBC Section 11B-703.5. Characters shall be conventional in form, and shall be uppercase or lowercase or a combination of both, as indicated on the drawings. Characters shall not be italic, oblique, highly decorative, or of other unusual forms.
I.
Finish and Contrast: Characters and their backgrounds shall have a non-glare finish. Characters shall contrast with their background with either light characters on a dark background or a dark characters on a light background .
2.
Character Proportions: Characters shall be selected from fonts where the width of the uppercase letter "0" is 60 percent minimum and II 0 percent maximum of the height of the uppercase of the letter "I".
3.
Character Height: Minimum character height shall comply with CBC Table l1B-703.5.5.
4.
Height from Finish Floor or Ground: Visual characters shall be a 40 inches minimum above the finish floor or ground
5.
Stroke Thickness: Uppercase letter "I" shall be 10 percent minimum and 20 percent maximum of the height of the character.
6.
Character and Line Spacing: Shall be in accordance to CBC II B-703.5.8 and llB-703.5.9.
Braille: Contracted Grade 2 Braille, conforming to CBC 118-703.3. Braille characters shall be inlaid optically correct acrylic Raster beads into computer drilled holes in the panel surface. I.
•
Dimensions and Capitalization: Braille dots shall have a domed or rounded shape and shall comply with CBC Table 11 B-703 .3 .I. The indication of an uppercase letter or letters shall only be used before the first word of sentences,
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
01131/2017 SIGN AGE 10 1400-4
170131
proper nouns and names, individual letters of the alphabet, initials, and acronyms .
•
2.
D.
•
•
Position: Braille shall be positioned below the corresponding text in a horizontal format, flush left or centered. If text is multi-lined, Braille shall be placed below the entire line of text. Braille shall be separated 3/8 inch minimum and 112 maximum from any other tactile characters and 3/8 inch minimum from raised borders and decorative elements.
Pictograms: In conformance to CBC 11B-703.6. Pictograms shall have a field height of 6 inches minimum. Characters and Braille shall not be located in the pictogram field. 1.
Finish and Contrast: Pictograms and their field shall have a non-glare finish. Pictograms shall contrast with their field with either a light pictogram on a dark field or a dark pictogram on a light field.
2.
Text Descriptors: Pictograms shall have text descriptors located directly below the pictogram field, and shall comply with CBC ll B-703 .2, 11 B-703 .3 and 11B-703.4.
E.
International Symbol of Accessibility (ISA): Shall comply with CBC 11B-703.7 and CBC Figure 11B-703.7.2.1. The ISA shall consist of a white figure on a blue background. The blue color shall be approximate to FS. 15090 in Federal Standard 595C.
F.
Mounting Locations and Height: Signs with tactile characters shall be as indicated on the drawings and in conformance to CBC 11B-703.4 . 1.
Mounting Locations: a.
Identification signs for rooms and spaces shall be located on the wall adjacent to the latch side of the door, as one enters the room or space.
b.
Signs that identify exits shall be located at the exit door when approached in the direction of egress travel.
c.
Signs containing tactile characters shall be located so that a clear floor space 18 inches minimum by 18 inches minimum, centered on the tactile characters, is provided beyond the arc of any door swing between the closed position and 45 degree open position.
d.
Where a tactile sign is provided at a door, the sign shall be located alongside the door at the latch side.
e.
Where a tactile sign is provided at double doors with one active leaf, the sign shall be located at the inactive leaf.
f.
Where a tactile sign is provided at double doors with two active leafs, the sign shall be located to the right of the right hand door .
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
01/31/2017 SIGNAGE 10 1400-5
170131
g.
•
2.
A.
2.05
B.
Room Identification Sign Types: 1.
Room Identification Sign with Changeable Insert: 7 inches high by 9 inches wide, minimum, with 4 inches high by 9 inches wide window for name and title removable insert. Locate room name immediately below window, and centered above room number. Room name shall be raised characters 3/4 inches high minimum, and room number I inch minimum; and shall be accompanied with Braille indicators.
2.
Room Identification Sign with Room Name and Room Number: 7 inches high by 9 inches wide, minimum. Room name shall be raised characters 3/4 inches high minimum, and room number I inch minimum; and shall be accompanied with Braille indicators.
3.
Room Number Sign: 7 inches wide by 4 inches high; room number, 1 inch high minimum, raised character, accompanied by Braille indicator immediately bellow.
Room Identification Sign Requirements: I.
Finish and Contrast: Refer to paragraph 2.03.B.
2.
Raised Characters and Proportions: Refer to paragraph 2.03.A.
3.
Braille: Refer to paragraph 2.03.C.
4.
Mounting Location and Height: Refer to paragraph 2.03.F.
RESTROOM SIGNAGE A.
Multiple-Occupancy restrooms shall be provided with geometric symbols and wall mounted pictograms with text descriptors.
B.
Geometric Symbols: I.
•
Mounting height above finish floor or ground: Tactile characters on signs shall be located 48 inches minimum above the finish floor or ground surface, measured from the baseline of the lowest Braille cells and 60 inches maximum above the finish floor or ground surface, measured from the baseline of the highest line of raised characters.
ROOM IDENTIFICATION SIGNS
2.04
•
Where there is no wall space at the latch side of a single door or at the right side of double doors, signs shall be located on the nearest adjacent wall.
Doorways leading to toilet rooms shall be identified by a geometric symbol complying with CBC Section IIB-703.7.2.6 .
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
01/31/2017 SIGN AGE 10 1400-6
170131
•
2.
"All Gender" Restroom Door Sign (Single occupancy restrooms): 1/4 inch thick circle, 12-inch diameter with a 114 inch thick equilateral triangle with the vertex pointing upward superimposed on the circle and within the 12-inch diameter. Triangle and circle shall be of contrasting colors; the circle symbol shall contrast with the door. A female and male silhouettes shall appear within the equilateral triangle in contrasting color to it, and the word "restroom" shall appear on the bottom part of the circle in contrasting color to it.
3.
Edges and Vertices on Geometric Symbols: Shall be eased or rounded at 1116 inch minimum, or chamfered at 118 inch maximum. Vertices shall be radiused between 118 minimum and 14 inch maximum.
4.
Location and Mounting Height: Symbols shall be mounted at 58 inches minimum and 60 inches maximum above the finish floor or ground surface measured from the centerline of the symbol. Where a door is provided the symbol shall be mounted within one inch of the vertical centerline of the door. a.
•
C.
Room Identification for Single-Occupancy Restrooms: Provide a 16 inch long by 6 inch tall room identification sign, including a pictogram of the International Symbol of Accessibility on a side. Text descriptor shall be "All Gender Restroom". Characters, Braille, pictograms and mounting locations and height shall be in conformance to Article 2.03 .
D.
Room Identification for Non-Accessible Single-Occupancy Restrooms: Provide an 8 inch long by 3 inch tall room identification sign. Text descriptor shall be "All Gender Restroom". Characters, Braille, and mounting locations and height shall be in conformance to Article 2.03. RAISED CHARACTER AND BRAILLE EXIT SIGNS
2.06 A.
•
At locations with no restroom doors, locate sign adjacent to the opening. Tactile room name accompanied by Braille shall be located on symbol sign.
Tactile Exit Sign Types: 1.
"EXIT".
2.
"EXIT STAIR DOWN".
3.
"EXIT RAMP DOWN".
4.
"EXIT STAIR UP".
5.
"EXIT RAMP UP".
6.
"EXIT ROUTE".
7.
"TO EXIT".
8.
"EXIT WITH ALARM", on exit doors with an alarm .
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
01/31/2017 SIGNAGE 10 1400-7
170131
9.
•
B.
2.07
Finish and Contrast: Refer to paragraph 2.03.B.
2.
Raised Characters and Proportions: Refer to paragraph 2.03.A.
3.
Braille: Refer to paragraph 2.03.C.
4.
Mounting Location and Height: Refer to paragraph 2.03.F.
At exits serving a required accessible space but not providing an approved accessible means of egress, at elevator landings and within areas of refuge, provide signage indicating the location of accessible means of egress. 1.
Finish and Contrast: Refer to paragraph 2.03.B.
2.
Character Height and Proportions: Refer to paragraph 2.03.B.
3.
Symbol of Accessibility: Refer to paragraph 2.03.E.
A.
Entrance Sign: Provide at each building entrance an International Symbol of Accessibility sign. Signs shall be visible to persons along approaching pedestrian ways.
B.
Directional Signs: Provide where indicated on the drawings with arrow indicators and International Symbol of Accessibility.
C.
Signs shall be mounted on wall with lower edge between 48 inches and 60 inches above ground surface or finish floor. Pole mounted, overhead and projecting signs shall have the lower edge at least 80 inches from the ground surface or finish floor.
D.
Sign shall comply with the following requirements.
E.
•
1.
ACCESSIBILITY ENTRANCE SIGNS AND PATH OF TRAVEL DIRECTIONAL SIGNS
2.08
2.09
Sign Requirements:
DIRECTIONAL EXIT SIGNAGE A.
•
"EXIT ONLY" or "EXIT STAIR ONLY", on exit doors and stair exit doors which lock from outside and does not allow a return .
1.
Directional Signs: Refer to paragraph 2.03.B.
2.
Symbol of Accessibility: Refer to paragraph 2.03.E.
No Smoking Sign: Provide at each building entrance. Reverse cut white vinyl sign with 4 1/2-inch high no smoking symbol, mounted on glass entry doors. Under No Smoking symbol, place words "No Smoking", 1h inch high minimum, San Serif upper and lower case characters. PARKING SIGNS
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
01131/2017 SIGN AGE 10 1400-8
170131
•
•
A.
Tow-Away Sign: 18 inches by 24 inches with rounded corners. Black graphics on white background, with lettering not less than 1 inch high. Sign to read: "UNAUTHORIZED VEHICLES PARKED IN DESIGNA TED ACCESSIBLE SPACES NOT DISPLAYING DISTINGUISHING PLACARDS OR SPECIAL LICENSE PLATES ISSUED FOR PERSONS WITH DISABILITIES WILL BE TOWED AWAY AT THE OWNER'S EXPENSE. TOWED VEHICLES MAY BE RECLAIMED AT LAUSD SCHOOL POLICE OR BY TELEPHONING (213) 625-6631".
B.
Parking Space Identification Sign: 12-inch by 18-inch with rounded corners. White reflectorized graphic on dark blue background, and shall display an 8-inch high International Symbol of Accessibility per paragraph 2.03.E. Additional language or an additional sign below the International Symbol of Accessibility shall state I "Minimum Fine $250".
2.
Signs identifying van accessible parking spaces shall contain additional language or an additional sign with the designation "Van Accessible".
C.
Signs. shall be mounted on posts at head of each accessible parking with lower edge 80 inches minimum above ground surface, or mounted on walls at a minimum height of 60 inches from ground surface.
D.
Headroom Signs: On parking structures provide signs indicating headroom clearance height at entries and at any point of a vehicular path where entry clearance height is reduced. Minimum character height shall be 3 inches.
PART 3- EXECUTION EXAMINATION
3.01 A.
Verify that surfaces are ready to receive work.
B.
Beginning of installation means installer accepts condition of existing surfaces. METHODS OF INSTALLATION
3.02 A.
B.
•
1.
Interior Identification Signs and Interior Directional Signs: 1.
Fasten to wall with four tamper-proof round-head screws, one at each corner of sign. Furnish plastic anchors.
2.
When concealed installation is specified, install backplate to wall as above. Fasten sign to backplate with very high-bond double-faced tape.
3.
For installation on glass, fasten sign to glass with very high bond double faced tape. On opposite side of glass, anchor matching backplate to glass with very high-bond double-faced tape.
Geometric Signs: Geometric toilet room signs shall be fastened to doors with three tamper-proof oval-head counter-sunk screws .
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
01/31/2017 SIGNAGE 10 1400-9
170131
•
C.
Exterior Post Mounted Directional Signs: Size of required footing shall be as indicated on the drawings. Fasten sign with tamperproof stainless steel bolts .
D.
Exterior Wall Mounted Identification Signs and Directional Signs: I.
2. E.
•
3.03
Aluminum signs: Fasten to wall with 4 tamper-proof round-head screws, one at each corner of sign. Furnish plastic anchors. a.
Cement Plaster, Brick, or Masonry: Provide plastic anchors. For signs greater than 640 square inches use Leadwood Screw Anchors, concrete fasteners I WSA I 0 II2, or equal.
b.
Chain Link Fence: Fasten with 9 gage hog rings, King Hughes Fasteners 5150DG50, or equal, with 11/16 inch opening at each corner of sign.
c.
Wrought Iron Fence: Install at each corner with 3/16 inch stainless steel rivets.
Acrylic signs: Install backplate to wall as indicated above. backplate with high-bond double-faced tape and silicone.
Fasten sign to
Exterior Building Sign: I.
Each letter shall be furnished with a minimum of three cast mounting lugs on backside, drilled and tapped to receive installation bolts.
2.
Letters shall be installed according to manufacturer's method PMC-1. Letters shall be installed% inch away from wall surface, by an aluminum sleeve spacer.
CLEANUP A.
3.04
Remove rubbish, debris, and waste materials and legally dispose of off Project site. PROTECTION
A.
Protect Work of this section until Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION
•
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
0113112017 SIGNAGE 10 1400-10
•
SECTION 10 2813 TOILET ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL SUMMARY
1.01 A.
Section Includes: 1.
B.
Related Requirements: 1.
Division 01 - General Requirements.
2.
Section 10 2113- Plastic Toilet Compartments.
REGULA TORY REQUIREMENTS
1.02 A.
Comply with CBC Chapter liB requirements and ADAAG recommendations for accessibility. SUBMITTALS
1.03
•
Toilet accessories.
A.
Shop Drawings: Submit a schedule of accessories and Shop Drawings indicating installation methods and fasteners. QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.04 A.
Coordinate related Work as required to ensure proper and adequate provision in framing of backing and wall finish for installation of accessories.
B.
Coordinate requirements of Section 10 2113 - Plastic Toilet Compartments to ensure that correct openings are provided in partitions for toilet accessories where required. DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
1.05 A.
Protect accessories from damage.
PART 2- PRODUCTS GENERAL
2.01 A.
2.02
•
Accessories shall be provided with necessary anchoring devices and fasteners appropriate for surfaces on which items are to be fastened. MATERIALS
8736 CORWIN TIIEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/0l/2011 TOILET ACCESSORJES 10 2813-1
•
A.
Liquid Soap Dispenser: 20 gage stainless steel, 40-ounce. capacity, tamper-proof cap and concealed vandal-proof mounting. Continental V 444SS, ASI 0347, Bobrick B2111, or equal.
B.
Toilet Paper Boxes:
1.
2.
•
•
3.
For Student and Public Restrooms: a.
Non-accessible toilet compartments: Surface mounted, Owner Furnished, Contractor Installed.
b.
Accessible adult toilet rooms or compartments: semi-recessed Bobrick B-3888, ASI-0031, Bradley 5412 (double roll tissue holder without paper roll spindle stops), or equal.
c.
Accessible elementary or kindergarten toilet rooms or compartments: semi-recessed Bradley 5105 (double roll tissue holder without paper roll spindle stops), or equal
For Faculty and StaffRestrooms: a.
Non-accessible toilet compartments: ASI 0264-IA2, Bobrick B-27460 (double roll tissue holder), Bradley, or equal.
b.
Accessible toilet rooms or compartments: semi-recessed Bobrick 84388 or 3888, ASI 0031, Bradley 5412 (double roll tissue holder without paper roll spindle stops), or equal
For Accessible Kindergarten Restrooms: a.
Dual roll toilet tissue dispenser, Bradley 5124, Bobrick B-697, ASI74022, or equal.
C.
Paper Towel Boxes: Surface mounted, Type 304 stainless steel, satin finish. Door with tumbler lock and piano hinge ASI 0245-SS, Bobrick B-263, Crown Zellerbach, or equal.
D.
Grab Bars: 1-1/4 inches diameter by 18 gage stainless steel tubing, of size and configuration indicated. Ends shall be screwed to 11 gage stainless steel wall plate, with snaplock cover flanges. Grab bars over 36 inches in length shall be furnished with stainless steel support at mid point. Exposed stainless steel to be 180 grit satin finish. ASI 3 700 series, Tubular Specialties Manufacturing, Inc. series Q-CS-1, Bobrick, or equal.
E.
Mirrors: Framed mirror, with one piece roll-formed 3/4 inch by 3/4 inch Type 304 stainless steel angle frame, with satin finish. Corners shall be heliarc welded, ground and polished smooth. Glass shall be No. 1 quality 1/4 inch float glass, electrolytically copper-plated. Frame shall be furnished with a continuous integral stiffener on sides. Back of mirror shall be protected by 1/8 inch thick, waterproof, shock-absorbing polyethylene padding and 20 gage galvanized steel back attached to frame with concealed screws. Mirror shall be provided with a 20 gage wall hanger. ASI 0600, Bobrick B-290 series, Bradley, or equal. Size as indicated on Drawings .
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/0 l/2011 TOILET ACCESSORIES 10 2813-2
•
F.
Toilet Seat Cover Dispensers (Faculty and Staff Toilet Rooms only): Surface-mounted, Type 304 stainless steel, satin finish. ASI 0477SM, Bobrick B-221, Bradley, or equal.
G.
Sanitary Napkin Vendors and Disposals 1.
Vendors (In Nurse's Office Restrooms only): Surface mounted, Type 304 stainless steel, satin finish, tumbler lock, single 25 cent coin operation. ASI 0864, Bobrick B-2800, Bradley, napkin/tampon dispenser, or equal.
2.
Disposals in non-accessible toilet compartments Surface-mounted, Type 304 stainless steel, satin finish, ASI 0473-A, Bobrick B-270, Bradley, or equal.
3.
Disposals in accessible toilet rooms or compartments: recessed, semi-recessed or 3-inch maximum projection from wall surface; Bobrick B 353 (recessed), ASI 0473 (recessed), Bradley, or equal.
PART 3- EXECUTION EXAMINATION
3.01
•
•
A.
Check openings in substrates to receive accessories. Verify openings are correctly located and sized to receive accessories, and that locations will comply with disability access requirements. Confirm that blocking, backing or support is properly located and adequate for the accessory installation.
B.
Verify spacing of plumbing fixtures and toilet partitions. Confirm spacing and locations are compatible with proposed accessory locations and will allow compliance with disability access requirements. INSTALLATION
3.02
A.
Install toilet accessories in accordance with manufacturer's written recommendations and accessibility requirements. Fasten components firmly in place.
B.
Drill holes to correct size and application that is concealed by item with 1!4 inch tolerance.
C.
Install recessed accessories into wall openings with sheet metal screws into metal frames.
D.
Install surface-mounted accessories to backing plates with machine screws, plumb, and aligned.
E.
Grab Bars: 1.
Fasten to toilet partition with 3-inch diameter stainless steel back plates with studs, couplings, and stainless steel machine screws.
2.
At wood stud walls, fasten wood blocking with threaded stainless steel wood screws of sufficient length to penetrate blocking 1 1!4-inch minimum .
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
I 0/01/20 II TOILET ACCESSORIES 10 2813-3
•
4.
At concrete or masonry walls, install bars with sheet metal screws and expansion anchors.
5.
At plaster or gypsum board walls, provide spacers of same thickness as wall material to prevent crushing of wall material.
Mirrors: Install mirror on manufacturer supplied concealed wall hanger and fasten with two theft-resistant locking screws.
G.
Before Substantial Completion, deliver keys and maintenance instructions and product data to OAR. ADJUSTING AND CLEANUP
A.
Adjust accessories for proper operation.
B.
Remove rubbish, debris, and waste material and legally dispose of off the Project site. PROTECTION
3.04
A.
•
At metal stud walls, provide 118 inch cold-rolled steel plate, drilled and tapped for machine screws, or 16 gage cold-rolled steel plate complete with threaded sleeves for stainless steel machine screws. Weld plates to studs.
F.
3.03
•
3.
Protect the Work of this section until Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
I 0/0 l/2011 TOILET ACCESSORIES 10 2813-4
•
SECTION 10 2815 HAND DRYERS PART 1 - GENERAL SUMMARY
1.01 A.
Section Includes: 1.
B.
1.02
•
Related Requirements: 1.
Division 01 - General Requirements.
2.
Section 09 2216- Non-Structural Metal Framing.
3.
Section 09 3013 - Ceramic Tiling.
4.
Division 26 - Electrical.
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A.
Comply with CBC Chapter 11B requirements and ADAAG recommendations for accessibility .
B.
UL 499 - UL Standard for Electric Heating Appliances. SUBMITTALS
1.03 A.
Shop Drawings: Drawings indicating locations, dimensions, clearances, mounting heights, fasteners and wiring.
B.
Product Data: Submit for product data and installation instructions.
c.
Certificates: Provide documentation indicating compliance to UL 499.
D.
Samples: Submit finish samples for each specified product.
E.
Maintenance Data. QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.04
•
Warm air, high speed, energy efficient, self-contained electric hand dryers.
A.
Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing electric hand and hair dryers with ten years minimum experience.
B.
Quality Standards: Dryers shall comply with UL 499, Standard for Electric Heating Appliances .
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
03/28/2014 HAND DRYERS 10 2815-1
C.
• 1.05
Coordination:
I.
Coordinate related Work as required to ensure proper and adequate provision in framing of backing and wall finish for installation of dryers.
2.
Coordinate junction box location with electrical work of Section 26 0513, Basic Electrical Materials and Methods.
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A.
Deliver dryers and components in manufacturer's original, unopened, undamaged containers with identification labels intact.
B.
Store dryers as recommended by manufacturer.
1.06
WARRANTY A.
Manufacturer shall provide a 10 year material warranty against defects in factory workmanship and materials. Motors shall be warranted for three years and sensors for five years.
PART 2- PRODUCTS
•
•
2.01
HIGH VELOCITY HAND DRYERS A.
General: 1.
Electrically operated dryer designed for heavy duty operation, internally grounded. Unit shall be UL listed.
2.
Operation: Automatic sensing. Dryer shall start automatically when hands are placed underneath nozzle and stop automatically when hands are removed.
3.
Sound Level: Adjustable up to a maximum of 83 dB.
4.
Air Velocity: Adjustable 20,000 to 10,000 LFM.
5.
Drying Cycle: 10 to 12 seconds.
6.
Maximum Operation Time: 35 seconds, failsafe feature will shut off dryer if it runs longer.
7.
Vandal Resistant: a.
Use tamperprooffasteners to secure cover.
b.
Motor and heater shall be inaccessible.
c.
Air intake shall be shielded .
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HJGH SCHOOL
03/28/2014 HAND DRYERS 10 2815-2
•
•
B.
Mounting: Surface or semi-recessed mounted, provided projection of unit from wall is less than four inches along pedestrian circulation. Provide standard manufacturer recess kit for semi-recessed units.
C.
Cover: One piece, die-cast aluminum or cold rolled steel, with white epoxy paint. Operating instruction information shall be graphically noted on front. Mount dryer cover with recessed tamper proof fasteners to a heavy steel or cast aluminum wall plate which in turn is to be fastened to wall with concealed mounting bolts. Bolts shall be inserted through rubber grommets to reduce noise and wall vibration.
D.
Nozzle: Units with an external nozzle shall be furnished with a nozzle. Nozzle shall be fixed to blow air in a down position only.
E.
Mechanism: Motor shall be of a universal or of an induction design with permanently lubricated bronze bushing or bearings. Unit shall be of universal voltage or suitable for installation on standard 115, 208, or 220 volt, single phase AC supply, as indicated on Drawings.
2.
Dryer shall operate within a range of 1500 watt to 2300 watt.
3.
Fan shall be furnished with a large single inlet and be centrifugal type, constructed of welded and plated steel or of molded RIC (QMFZ2) polypropylene rated at a minimum 94 hb. Fan shall be mounted directly on motor shaft. All parts shall be easy to service and replace.
4.
Heating element shall be spiral wound Nichrome wire mounted directly on fan housing. Element shall produce an air temperature of 135 degrees F. at a 72 degrees F. ambient room. Motor and heating element shall be protected by an automatic resetting device.
MANUFACTURERS
2.02 A.
•
1.
High Velocity Hand Dryers:
MANUFACTURER
SURFACE MOUNTED
SEMI-RECESSED
1.
American Dryer
GXT Series
GXT Series+ ADA-RK
2.
Excel Dryer Inc.
XL-l.lN
XL-I.IN + 40502
3.
World Dryer Co.
SMARTdri
SMARTdri +recess kit
4.
Equal
Equal
Equal
8736 CORWINTHEATERREPAIR&P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
03/28/2014 HAND DRYERS 10 2815-3
•
PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01
EXAMJNA TION A.
Verify spacing of plumbing fixtures and toilet partitions. Confirm spacing and locations are compatible with proposed dryer locations and will allow compliance with disability access requirements.
B.
Check surfaces and openings in substrates to receive dryers. Verify openings are correctly located and sized to receive dryers, and that locations and dimensions will comply with disability access requirements. Confirm that blocking, backing or support is properly located and adequate for the accessory installation.
C.
Coordinate location and requirements for power supply, conduit, disconnect switches and wiring. INSTALLATION
3.02
•
A.
Install dryers in accordance with manufacturer's written recommendations and m conformance to CBC, Chapter llB requirements.
B.
Install dryers level, plumb and firmly anchored in place to backing at locations and heights indicated.
C.
At locations indicated by Architect adjust dryer velocity to reduce noise level.
D.
Apply bead of caulk around edges of cover to wall.
3.03
ADJUSTING AND CLEANUP A.
Remove rubbish, debris, and waste material and legally dispose of off the Project site. PROTECTION
3.04
A.
Protect the Work of this section until Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION
•
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
03/28/2014 HAND DRYERS 10 2815-4
111001
•
SECTION 21 1313 FIRE-SUPPRESSION SPRINKLER SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL SUMMARY
1.01 A.
C.
•
1.
Fire sprinkler system for protection of buildings.
2.
Sstandpipe system.
Related Requirements: The requirements ofthis Section, NFPA 13 and NFPA 14 shall take precedence over requirements found in the following: 1.
Division 0 I - General Requirements.
2.
Section 07 84I3: Penetration Fireproofing.
3.
Section 09 9000: Paints and Coatings.
4.
Section I 0 4413: Fire Extinguishers and Cabinets
5.
Section 22 0500: Common Work Results for Plumbing.
6.
Section 22 0513: Basic Plumbing Materials and Methods.
7.
Section 22 0553: Plumbing Identification.
8.
Section 22 1000: Plumbing.
9.
Section 26 0500: Common Work Results for Electrical.
10.
Section 28 3100: Fire Detection and Alarm.
II.
Section 31 2323: Excavation and Fill for Utilities.
12.
Section331100: Site Water Distribution Utilities.
SUBMITTALS
1.02 A.
•
Section Includes:
Manufacturer's Data: 1.
Submit complete and detailed equipment and material list of items to be furnished and installed under this section.
2.
Submit manufacturer's specifications and other data required to demonstrate compliance the plans and specified requirements .
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 FIRE-SUPPRESSION SPRINKLER SYSTEM 21 1313-1
111001
B.
•
C.
D.
Drawings:
1.
Submit shop drawings of wet pipe fire protection sprinkler system in compliance to NFPA 13, Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems, Sprinkler systems shall comply with the provisions ofNFPA 13.
2.
Shop drawings shall fully comply with the most stringent provisions of this specification and plans, and with the applicable codes and standards.
3.
Shop drawings shall be same size as the Contract Drawings and shall be produced using AutoCAD.
Regulatory Requirements: 1.
Installation of fire sprinkler system shall not vary from the plans unless alterations have been approved by the State Fire Marshal at DSA.
2.
Complete DSA standard testing forms and get sign-off by the Project Inspector.
Closeout Submittals: Submit in accordance to Section 01 7700, Contract Closeout, and as specified herein: 1.
• 1.03
•
Record Drawings:
a.
Record drawings of installed Work shall be maintained current on the Project site, available for Fire Marshal and the Project Inspector to review.
b.
At completion of installation submit Record Drawings signed by installing Contractor in AutoCad format, including: 1).
Record Specifications.
2).
Record Product Data: Include specific model, type and size for equipment and material installed.
3.
Record Test Results.
4.
Maintenance Manuals.
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
Comply with applicable national or local codes and standards.
B.
Except where exceeded by the requirements of these specifications, the following are made part ofthis section: prints and details, and provisions of the NFPA 13 Standard for Installation of Sprinkler Systems and NFPA 14 Standard for the Installation of Standpipes and Hose Systems .
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR& P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 FIRE-SUPPRESSION SPRINKLER SYSTEM 21 1313-2
111001
•
c.
Qualifications of Manufacturer: Products used in work of this section shall be produced by manufacturers regularly engaged in manufacture of similar items and with a 5 year history of successful production that is acceptable to the Architect.
D.
Qualifications of Installer: Installer shall have a current C-16 license in the State of California in the installation of fire sprinkler systems. PRODUCT HANDLING
1.04 A.
Comply with the provisions specified in Sections 22 0500 and 22 0513. COORDINATION
1.05 A. 1.06
Coordinate activities in accordance with provisions of Section 22 0500. JOB CONDITIONS
A.
1.07
Unscheduled utility flow interruptions are not permitted. Schedule service interruptions in advance, with the OAR. EXTRA MATERIALS FOR MAINTENANCE
A.
•
Provide spare sprinkler heads in quantity equal to 2 percent of total number of each type of sprinkler head installed. There shall be no less than two heads of each type and temperature rating provided, and in no case less than six spare sprinkler heads per building. There shall be no fewer than 6 spare sprinkler heads for up to 300 sprinkler heads installed; no less than 12 spare sprinkler heads for up to 1,000 sprinkler heads installed; and no less than 24 spare sprinkler heads for the sites with more than 1,000 sprinkler heads installed. Spare sprinkler heads shall be kept inside of spare sprinkler head box(s). A spare sprinkler wrench for each type of sprinkler head shall also be provided inside of each spare sprinkler head box, at each building. Locations of spare sprinkler boxes shall be located at: 1.
Fire Sprinkler Riser, when enclosed and secure.
2.
Plant Manager's Office, when Fire Sprinkler Riser is exposed.
PART 2- PRODUCTS FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
2.01 A.
General: Provide systems complete including, but not limited to: 1.
•
Materials and equipment shall be UL/FM listed and approved as required by NFPA for their application. Required signage shall be provided and installed as required by NFP A 13 .
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 FIRE-SUPPRESSION SPRINKLER SYSTEM 21 1313-3
111001
•
•
•
2. B.
Provide overhead sprinkler system with sprinklers installed as required according to type, location and temperature rating .
Sprinkler Heads: 1.
Provide chrome pendant spray type sprinkler heads with matching escutcheons in areas with finished ceilings. Exterior escutcheons shall be poly-coated or concealed type to prevent rusting and oxidation.
2.
Provide upright sprinklers in areas with exposed piping.
3.
Provide poly-coated glass bulb corrosion resistance type sprinklers heads in areas exposed to a corrosive environment such as parking garages and coastal atr.
4.
Sprinklers shall be glass bulb type, with hex-shaped wrench boss integrally cast into the sprinkler body to reduce the risk of damage during installation,
5.
Sprinklers in concealed spaces, exterior locations, and other areas that will experience over 100 degrees F ambient temperature shall be furnished with 200 to 225 degree rated sprinklers. Sprinkler heads in boiler rooms, furnace rooms, or heater rooms shall be furnished with sprinklers rated at 250 to 290 degrees F. If a sprinkler is directly affected by a spotlight, steam, or other heat source, a 350 degree F or higher sprinkler head shall be furnished. Sprinkler heads in other locations, unless otherwise noted, shall be 15 5 to 165 degrees F rated .
6.
Automatic fire sprinkler head type shall be as follows: a.
In areas with ceiling heights of nine-feet or lower, sprinkler heads installed shall be recessed or fully concealed.
b.
Ceilings eight-feet or lower shall be provided with fully concealed sprinkler heads.
c.
Areas with ceiling height of nine-feet or lower, that are not constantly supervised such as corridors, arcades, students restrooms, and other restrooms shall be provided with fully concealed sprinkler heads.
7.
Sprinkler heads in light hazard occupancies are required to be Quick Response sprinklers as required in NFPA 13. Sprinkler heads shall be of the same manufacturer throughout the building/site as indicated. Sprinklers shall typically be Y2 inches NPT, standard orifice, minimum 5.6 nominal K factor, UL listed for 175 psi, and listed for light and ordinary hazard occupancies.
8.
Other specialized sprinkler heads such as walk-in refrigerator or freezer heads, side wall,% inches sprinklers above 5.6 K factor, and those sprinklers with a K factor below 5.6, shall only be used where required by project condition .
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 FIRE-SUPPRESSION SPRINKLER SYSTEM 21 1313-4
111001
Large drop sprinkler heads and extended coverage sprinkler heads shall not be installed .
• C.
9.
Sprinkler head location shall be designed and installed in an aesthetically pleasing manner and should generally be located in center of24-inch by 24inch ceiling tiles and in center of 24-inch by 48-inch ceiling tiles in the 24inch direction and no closer than 12-inch from the edge in the 48-inch direction.
10.
ULIFM listed Sprinkler head guards shall be provided on Sprinkler heads installed at seven feet six inches above floor or lower in exposed locations, or that are deemed subject to damage. Sprinkler head guards shall securely fasten with bolt-on feature to the base of the sprinkler or be a factory installed guard. Guards shall also be provided on upright and sidewall heads where sprinklers are installed at seven feet six-inch heights or lower.
Fire Sprinkler and Standpipe Systems: 1.
Pipe through ceilings at head locations shall be furnished with a two piece, or fully concealed escutcheon. Unless otherwise designated, escutcheons shall be identical and match the other escutcheons of the same type throughout the building or site. Piping through walls and ceilings shall have a split ring chrome escutcheon. a.
•
•
Flexible stainless steel sprinkler head drop system may be used. Flexible drops shall be UL listed, FM approved, and shall be compatible with ceiling systems. Flexible drop length shall be included in the Hydraulic Calculations. The drop system shall include the required support bracing.
2.
Furnish and install required signs, spare heads, special wrenches, and spare sprinkler head boxes as required to satisfy NFPA 13, NFPA 14 and this specification.
3.
Sprinkler system piping shall be provided with complete drainage as required by NFP A. Test valve discharge shall be piped away from planters to asphalt areas. Furnish protection of piping against accidental or malicious damage.
4.
Upon completion of the Work of this section, and before Substantial Completion, subject system, including underground supply connection, to tests required. A minimum hydrostatic test shall be two hundred pounds (200 psi) or fifty pounds (50 psi) in excess of the maximum system working pressure, whichever is greater, for two hours with no leaks or loss of pressure per NFPA 13. The Project Inspector shall be furnished with a NFPA 13 test certification.
5.
Local fire sprinkler alarm requirements shall be accomplished with a vane or paddle type water flow detector switch and an electrically powered fire sprinkler hom located on the street side of the building and connected to the fire alarm control panel with secondary power provided from the fire alarm
8736 CORWIN THEATERREPAJR& P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HJGH SCHOOL
10/0112011 FIRE-SUPPRESSION SPRINKLER SYSTEM 21 1313-5
111001
batteries. The drilled out disk shall be attached to the mounting U-bolt. Time delay shall be set at 45 to 60 seconds. Mechanically activated water bells with alarm valve and pressure switch are prohibited.
•
6.
Seismic separation assemblies shall be located between the buildings if space allows accessibility. Otherwise they shall be located inside the building providing the most space. Swing joints may be fabricated on site using flexible groove couplings and six grooved (Victaulic) 90 degree elbows in a teepee formation (see NFPA 13, figure A.9.3.3). Seismic separation assemblies can also be made utilizing a manufactured, UL/FM listed swing joint assembly rated at a minimum 175 psi.
7.
Hanging, bracing and support shall utilize only UL/FM listed approved products, and comply with NFPA 13, Chapter 9 requirements for rod and bolt sizes except for the following: 4 and 6 inch pipe shall be supported by a minimum Yz inch hanger rod, 8 inch pipe shall be supported by a minimum 5/8 inch hanger rod, 10 and 12 inch pipe shall be supported by a minimum % inch hanger rod. Hanger rods in exterior locations and in parking structures shall have Electrodeposited Zinc Coating per ASTM B633 to prevent rusting.
8.
Building Fire Sprinkler riser assemblies shall be provided as follows. Every building shall be provided with an accessible and electrically supervised riser shut off valve at a height not to exceed five-feet above the floor. Every building riser assembly shall be equipped with a check valve followed by a main drain valve and then the flow indicating switch and pressure gauge immediately after the shut-off valve. In cases where a riser assembly is provided for each floor in the building, a check valve, main drain and flow switch shall be provided for each floor; the main building shut-off shall not be required. An electrically supervised Post Indicator Valve located outside the building may serve as the building riser shut-off valve.
•
MATERIALS
2.02 A.
Access Panel: FAP-1
B.
Globe or Angle Valves: UL/FM listed. AV-1
C.
•
Square, steel, prime-coated, with vandal-proof door lock operated by Allen wrench: Or equal Smith Josam Elmdor DW-AKL 4760
Bronze angle valve: 2 inches and smaller, screwed-in bonnet, threaded ends, rising stem: United Or equal Nibco Kennedy Fairbanks T-301 98 SO 0210 126T
Automatic Fire Sprinkler Head, UL/FM listed:
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 FIRE-SUPPRESSION SPRINKLER SYSTEM 21 1313-6
111001
AFSH-1
•
Brass pendant type for areas with suspended ceilings: Victaulic V27
AFSH-2
•
Reliable F1FR300
Or equal
Viking VK300
Tyco TY3231
Viking VK302
Or equal
Reliable F1FR56
Tyco TY3531
Viking VK462 VK404
Or equal
Reliable F4FR G4A
Chrome plated, or white poly-coated, 2-piece canopy (escutcheon), 2.25 to 3.5 inches in extended position: FPPI 01 - 401 Chrome or White
ES-2
Reliable HBC (chrome) HBW (white)
Tyco No. 401 Chrome or White
Or equal
Chrome plated or white poly coated, 2-piece recessed: FPPI 01 - 400 01 -402
Tyco 410 420
Reliable (semi recessed) GF2-C (chrome) GF2-W (white)
Or equal
Gate Valves: GV-1
Bronze gate valves: 2-inch and smaller, class 175, solid bronze wedge disc, rising stem copper silicon alloy stem, ULIFM listed, threaded ends: Stockham B-133
GV-2
•
Tyco TY3131
Escutcheons ES-1
E.
Or equal
Fully concealed type sprinklers; chrome cover: Victaulic V38
D.
Reliable F1FR56
Chrome or poly coated semi recessed type with semi-recessed escutcheon: Victaulic V27
AFSH-4
Viking VK302
Brass upright type for areas with no ceilings: Victaulic V27
AFSH-3
Tyco TY 3231
Crane 459
Grinnell United Fig. 66 14
Or equal
Iron gate valves: 2 \12-inch and larger, class 175, IBBM, solid wedge disc, Teflon impregnated packing, ULIFM listed, flanged ends: Stockham G-634 Or equal.
Crane 467
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
Kennedy 68
Mueller A-2052
Victaulic 772
10/01/2011 FIRE-SUPPRESSION SPRINKLER SYSTEM 21 1313-7
111001
•
F
Gear Operated Ball Valves: GOBV-1
Nibco KT-505W-4 G.
H.
ULIFM Approved flexible seismic connector with grooved, or threaded ends for seismic separation requirements.
SJ-2
Fabricated swing joints as per NFPA 13 using six groove 90 degree elbows and flexible groove couplers such as Victaulic style 75.
Sprinkler Guards: Sprinklers installed at seven feet six inches above floor or lower in exposed locations, or that are deemed subject to damage shall be equipped with a ULIFM listed, head guard. Guards shall be listed, supplied and approved for use with the sprinkler by the sprinkler manufacturer. Sprinkler head guards shall securely fasten with bolt-on feature to the base of the sprinkler or be a factory installed guard. Guards shall also be provided on upright and sidewall heads where sprinklers are installed at seven feet six-inch heights or lower . Viking
•
FPPI
Victaulic
Tolco products or UL listed and FM or equal.
Threaded fittings: TF-1
Ductile iron, 300 psi rated, UL listed, FM orNFPA approved.
TF-2
Cast iron fittings, 175 psi rated, UL listed, FM or NFPA approved: Anvil
K.
Tyco
Hangers, Supports, Bracing: HSB-1
J.
Or equal.
SJ-1
Reliable Or equal. I.
Victaulic 728
Seismic Swing Joints:
SPG-1
•
Threaded ball valve for sizes two inches and smaller:
Ward
Taylor
Or equal
TF-3
Malleable Iron, 300 psi rated, UL, Listed, FM or NFPA approved
TF-4
Galvanized, 175 psi rated, UL Listed, FM orNFPA approved
Fire Sprinkler Pipes and Standpipes:
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR& P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 FIRE-SUPPRESSION SPRINKLER SYSTEM 21 1313-8
111001
FSP-1
•
•
a.
Piping 2 inches and smaller shall have threaded joints and fittings in concealed, non-accessible locations. Groove coupler connections (Victaulic, Viking VGS, or equal) on pipe sizes 1 inch through 2 inches are acceptable in accessible areas with required seismic bracing provided. Plain end connections such as "Plainlock" and "FIT" are prohibited.
b.
For pipe sizes 2 Y:z-inch and larger, grooved type (Victaulic, Viking VGS, or equal), welded, threaded and flanged connections may be used. Any connection that does not utilize a threaded, welded or grooved connection is prohibited, except for mechanical tee bolt-on branch outlet fittings sizes 2-inch and smaller (Victaulic 920 and the 920N).
c.
Submit Verification from manufacturer stating that p1pmg material furnished meets above criteria; (i.e.: threadable pipe has a UL assigned CRR of 1.00 minimum, that it meets ASTM A53, A135 or A795, and it is UL listed, FM or NFPA approved.)
FSP-2
Ductile iron pipe, A WW A C 151 (for pipes below grade). Gasketed self-retaining joints per ASME/ANSI B 16.4.
FSP-3
Plastic, PVC, thick wall (cast iron OD sized), DR 14 (200 PSI). UL listed for fire main service (underground). Gasketed self-retaining joints Johns Manville Blue Brute A WW A C900, JM Eagle C900 water pipe or equal.
FSP-4
Fire Sprinkler Pipe: 1 inch through 3-inch, Copper meeting NFPA 13 Standards. Pipe may be grooved.
FSP-5
Flexible Fire Sprinkler Head Connectors: 1 inch pipe size flexible stainless steel fire sprinkler head connectors "Flex Head Industries" Models 2024, 2036, 2048, 2060 and 2072, or equal..
ACCESSORIES AND APPURTENANCES
2.03
•
Fire sprinkler pipe: 1 inch through 8-inch, Schedule 40, black or galvanized steel meeting ASTM Standards A53, A135, or A795. Pipe Corrosion Resistance Ratio (CRR) shall be 1.00 or greater. Pipe may be threaded or grooved.
A.
Escutcheons: Polished chrome plated split-ring type for exposed piping at every penetration inside finished rooms.
B.
Guards: Provide sprinklers with guards at ceiling at or under seven feet six-inch high and where subject to damage or vandalism .
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/201 I FIRE-SUPPRESSION SPRINKLER SYSTEM 21 1313-9
111001
•
C.
PART 3- EXECUTION EXAMINATION
3.01
A.
A.
Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs. Bevel or groove plain end ferrous pipe ends.
B.
Remove scale and foreign matter, from inside and outside of pipes, before assembly.
c.
Provide piping connections to equipment with flanged or grooved connections. INSTALLATION
3.03
•
Examine areas and conditions under which Work of this section shall be performed. Correct conditions detrimental to proper and timely completion of Work. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. PREPARATION
3.02
•
Miscellaneous: Provide accessories and appurtenances for a complete system .
A.
Install underground supply line connected to detector check or water main indicated. Braced or clamped bends shall be in accordance with requirements of NFPA 24. Provide vertical clamp rods at flange and spigot piece of risers, long enough to pass through riser's base flange where required. Furnish concrete thrust blocks where required. Tracer wire shall be installed as per Section 22 0553: Plumbing Identification on PVC underground piping.
B.
Install FDCs, check valves, shut-off valves, gauges, Inspector's test and drain assemblies and flow indicator. FDC must be installed so that it is unobstructed and accessible for the Fire Department's first response unit.
C.
Pipe through floors, wall, and ceilings, at head locations, shall be furnished with required sleeves, and escutcheons and fire caulking where indicated and/or required by code. Escutcheons shall be polished chrome plated unless other finish is selected by the Architect.
D.
Sprinkler system shall be provided with complete drainage facilities in accordance with CBC standards. Drain discharge may discharge into a sewer, storm drain, sump pit or street gutter. Fire sprinkler drains shall not discharge onto a playground or across a sidewalk. Discharge to plumbing fixtures is prohibited due to the inability of a plumbing fixture to receive a full flow of water from a fire sprinkler drain valve under working pressure.
E.
Upon completion of the Work of this section, and before Substantial Completion, subject the entire system, including underground supply connections, to tests as required by NFP A 13, and CBC standards and furnish the Owner with a certificate of compliance as required .
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 FIRE-SUPPRESSION SPRINKLER SYSTEM 21 1313-10
111001
•
•
•
F.
Close nipples are prohibited. Threaded unions are prohibited. Where a threaded union or coupling is needed, a groove type fitting (Victaulic or equal) shall be used instead . If a groove style coupling is used in a concealed area, an access panel allowing full access to that connection shall be provided.
G.
Fire sprinkler systems piping hangers, seismic bracing, anchors and supports shall conform to NFPA 13, CBC and other applicable codes and the requirements of this specification.
H.
Grooved joints shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's latest published installation instructions. Grooved ends shall be clean and free from indentations, projections, and roll marks in the area from pipe end to groove. Gaskets shall be of an elastomer grade suitable for the intended service, and shall be molded and produced by the coupling manufacturer.
I.
Tee branch outlets on fire sprinkler mains shall be by the use of a threaded ductile iron tee fitting, a groove type tee fitting, (Victaulic or equal), or by the use of a thread-alet welded on by a certified welder as required by NFPA. Mechanical tee bolted branch outlet fittings are prohibited except for branch outlet sizes 2-inch and smaller.
J.
Sprinkler lines within the building shall be concealed within the structure. Risers shall be installed in utility, supply rooms or similar service areas whenever possible, and shall not obstruct access, or maintenance of other equipment within the space. Mains and risers shall be located within the area protected by the sprinkler system unless otherwise approved by fire authorities having jurisdiction .
K.
Sprinklers that have been dropped, damaged, have cracked bulbs, or show a visible loss of fluid shall not be installed.
L.
Sprinkler bulb protectors shall be removed by hand after sprinkler installation. Tools or other devices to remove the protector that could damage the bulb in any way shall not be used.
M.
Routing of piping in non-concealed exposed areas shall be subject to the Architect's review in the final shop drawings.
N.
Provide approved backflow prevention assemblies. Installations of backflow prevention assemblies shall be tested and certified by a certified Los Angeles County backflow prevention device tester prior to Substantial Completion. Tests shall be performed in the presence of the Project Inspector. Test reports shall be turned over to the Project Inspector for mailing to proper agency.
0.
Provide shunt trip when sprinklers are installed in the elevator machine rooms and elevator hoist way unless the sprinklers are located 2 feet or less from the hoist way pit floor.
P.
Test valve (lTV) shall be located at the opposite end ofthe sprinkler system from the supply. Test-and-drain type combination valves are prohibited. lTV discharge and
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HJGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 FIRE-SUPPRESSION SPRINKLER SYSTEM 21 1313-11
111001
main drain lines shall be piped to a sump pit or to the outside of the building to within a foot from the ground where it will drain away from the building to an exterior storm drain.
•
Q.
3.04
Each building with a sprinkler riser shall be furnished with an accessible shut off riser valve installed no higher than five feet from the finish floor. Each floor shall have a separate shut off valve with flow switch, and shall be securely enclosed or secured with a chain and break-a-way lock. Also see section 2.01- C-12 of this specification. PROTECTION
A.
Protect the Work of this section until Substantial Completion. CLEANUP
3.05 A.
Remove rubbish, debris, and waste materials and legally dispose at off-project site. END OF SECTION
•
•
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR& P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 FIRE-SUPPRESSION SPRINKLER SYSTEM 21 1313-12
111001
•
SECTION 22 0500 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING PART 1- GENERAL SUMMARY
1.01 A.
Section Includes: 1.
B.
This Section provides the basic plumbing requirements that apply to the Work of Division 22.
Related Requirements: 1.
Division 01: General Requirements.
2.
Division 22: Plumbing
3.
Division 26: Electrical.
REGULA TORY REQUIREMENTS
1.02 A.
•
Current federal Safe Drinking Water Act (SDWA) regulations require the furnishing of lead-free pipe, solder, and flux in the installation or repair of plumbing in non-residential facilities connected to public drinking water systems. Under this regulation, solders and flux are considered lead-free when they contain 0.2 percent lead or less. Under California regulations pipes and pipe fittings are considered lead-free when they contain 0.25 percent lead or less as defined in California Assembly Bill 1953 (AB 1953). No pipe, pipe fittings, or any other fitting or fixture intended to convey or dispense water for human consumption by drinking or cooking is allowed in the domestic plumbing system, if they do not meet the low lead definition of AB 1953. Weighted average lead content of the wetted surface area of pipes, fittings and fixtures may not exceed 0.25 percent. 1.
Provide lead-free water pipe, solder, and flux materials that meet the standards as outlined by the federal SDWA regulations and California AB 1953 if installed in drinking water system.
2.
Collect pipe, solder, and flux material samples as required by the Project Inspector. Test samples shall be delivered to an Owner designated testing laboratory for testing of lead content. a.
A.
•
Test samples for lead spectrophotometry method.
content
by
the
atomic
absorption
3.
Materials found not conforming to SDWA and California AB 1953 regulations shall be deemed defective Work and shall be replaced with lead-free materials.
4.
Comprehensive testing of the remaining materials for their lead content shall be performed as required by the Project INSPECTOR.
Materials, fabrication, equipment, and installation shall comply with industry standards and code requirements. Where manufacturer's recommendations exceed
10/0112011
8736 CORWIN THEATERREPAIR&P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGHSCHOOL
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING 22 0500-1
111001
industry standards, the manufacturer's recommendation shall establish the minimum standard. As a minimum, standards from the following organizations shall apply:
•
1.
ANSI- American National Standards Institute.
2.
ASME - American Society of Mechanical Engineers. a.
ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.
b.
ASME B31 - Standards for Pressure Piping.
3.
ASHRAE - American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers.
4.
ASTM - American Society for Testing and Materials. a.
•
B.
ASTM A53 Specification for Welded and Seamless Pipe.
5.
A WWA - American Water Works Association.
6.
CSA - Canadian Standards Association.
7.
FM Global -Factory Mutual Global
8.
IAPMO - International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials.
9.
NFPA- National Fire Protection Association.
10.
OSHA - Occupational Safety and Health Administration.
11.
SMACNA - Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association .
12.
UL - Underwriters Laboratories Inc.
13.
Intertek (ETL Certification).
Materials, fabrication, equipment, and installation shall comply with federal, state, and local codes including, but not limited to, the following: 1.
CBC, California Building Code, and CMC, California Plumbing Code. a.
2.
Latest edition as adopted by the City of Los Angeles, the County of Los Angeles, and the State of California including amendments effective on the Effective Date ofthe Contract.
California Code of Regulations, Title 8, Industrial Relations, Division 1, Chapter 4, Division of Industrial Safety.
30SHA - Occupational Safety and Health Administration.
•
4.
CDPH- California Department of Public Health.
5.
SCAQMD- South Coast Air Quality Management District.
C.
Specifications or Drawings shall not be construed to permit deviation from the requirements of governing codes unless approval has been obtained from legally constituted authorities having jurisdiction, and the Architect. The Contract Documents may contain more stringent requirements than those legally required.
D.
Permits and Fees: Refer to the General and Supplementary Conditions .
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING 22 0500-2
111001
•
1.03
. SUBMITTALS A.
Provide submittals in accordance with Section 01 3300: Submittal Procedures and with specific requirements of Division 22 sections, as applicable.
B.
The above information shall become the basis for inspecting and testing materials and actual installation procedures performed in the Work.
C.
Shop Drawings: Submit one additional copy when control diagrams having line voltage connections are indicated. Shop Drawings shall be specifically prepared for the Work of this Project. Drawings prepared in accordance with requirements of Section 0 I 3113: Project Coordination and Section 01 3300 may be provided by the Architect to serve as a background for the Shop Drawings. Shop Drawings shall comply with the requirements of Section 01 3113 and Section 01 3300 and shall indicate at a minimum: Complete system layout of equipment, components, plumbing fixtures, piping, indicating service clearances, and pipe sizes, fitting types and sizes and pipe elevations, distances of pipes and equipment from building reference points and hanger support locations. The above items shall be coordinated on the shop drawings according to the requirements of Section 01 3113.
2.
Schedule and description of equipment, piping and fittings.
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
1.04
A.
Comply with provisions of Section 01 7700: Contract Closeout.
B.
Project Record Drawings:
• C.
•
1.
1.
Provide a complete set of plumbing and fire protection drawings in AutoCAD and, if available, BIM, complete with external reference drawings, fonts, blocks and plotter pen color/line thickness settings on CD-ROM. Also submit one set of full size reproducible plots on vellum and 3 sets of prints.
2.
Before Contract Completion, deliver corrected and completed prints to the OAR. Delivery of project record documents to the OAR does not relinquish responsibility of furnishing required information omitted from project record documents.
Operation and Maintenance Manuals: I.
Submit two copies of operation and maintenance manuals in required form and content. If no revisions are required, furnish one additional copy. If revisions are required, one copy shall be returned with instructions for changes; perform such changes and return three copies of manuals. Manuals shall be bound in accordance to Section 01 7700. Deliver manuals to the OAR. Submit an electronic copy of the entire manual in PDF file format.
2.
Contents ofManual: a.
Title sheet with Project name, including names, addresses and telephone number of Contractor, installer, and related equipment suppliers.
b.
Manufacturer's operating instructions including, but not limited to, the following:
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR& P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING 22 0500-3
111001
• c.
• 1.05
Identification of components and controls .
2)
Trouble shooting checklist and guidelines.
3)
Recommendations for optimum performance.
4)
Warnings and safety precautions on improper or hazardous operational procedures or conditions
Manufacturer's product data and parts and maintenance booklet for each item of equipment furnished under Division 22 that includes the following as a minimum: 1)
Manufacturer's model, identification and serial numbers.
2)
Exploded view of assembly drawings identifying component or part with the relevant part number.
3)
Directory of manufacturer's representatives, service contractors and part distributors.
4)
Maintenance and trouble-shooting instructions, including schedule for preventive maintenance, periodic inspection and cleaning criteria.
each
d.
Project Record Drawings: Complete set of plumbing, fire protection and control system drawings in 50 percent reduced print format shall be furnished with the manual. Submit the above record drawings on CDROM in AutoCAD and, if available, BIM, complete with external reference drawings, fonts, blocks, and plotter pen color/line thickness settings.
e.
Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing reports: Section 23 0593.
f.
South Coast Air Quality Management District (SCAQMD) permits to install and operate boilers, water heaters and other fuel burning equipment and third-party source test reports as required by SCAQMD to allow start-up and operation of equipment.
g.
Los Angeles County industrial waste permits.
h.
Valve directory complete with location, function, size, and model of each valve with reference to the project record drawings.
1.
Equipment and component identification chart complete with location, function, size, and model of each equipment or component with reference to the project record drawings.
Submit as specified in
COORDINATION A.
•
1)
Contract Documents indicate extent and general arrangement of W ark under Division 22. Contractor shall coordinate work in accordance with Section 01 3113 requirements and make adjustments as required to provide maximum headroom, a neat arrangement to keep passageways and openings clear to provide accessibility and provisions for maintenance, and to meet code requirements .
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING 22 0500-4
111001
•
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
1.06 A.
Delivery and Storage: Deliver materials to Project site in their original unopened containers with labels intact and legible at time of delivery. Store in strict accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
B.
Do not store plastic pipe or materials in direct sunlight. PRELIMINARY OPERATION
1.07 A.
OAR may require any portion of plumbing Work to be operated before Substantial Completion. Such operation shall be in addition to regular tests, demonstrations and instructions required under the Contract Documents, and shall be performed as required.
B.
Notify the INSPECTOR at least 24 hours in advance of lighting or re-lighting pilots. TRAINING OF OWNER PERSONNEL
1.08 A.
•
Training of Owner's personnel shall include: I.
A minimum of 4 hours of on-site overview of the overall Plumbing System.
2.
Refer to Division 22 sections for specific training on each of the components of the Plumbing System.
B.
Contract shall include the cost of training Owner operation and maintenance personnel in operating, adjusting, maintenance, trouble-shooting, and Project site repair of each component, equipment, or system provided under this Contract.
c.
Operational and maintenance training shall be conducted on the Project site, unless indicated otherwise .
D.
Upon completion of Owner training, a completion certificate indicating the nature of the training and a description of the systems, complete with equipment and component lists shall be issued to each trainee. The certificate should be issued in duplicate with one copy retained by OAR.
E.
An attendance sheet with the names and signatures of all participants attending the training shall be submitted to the OAR and kept as part of the project documents. GUARANTEES AND DAMAGE RESPONSIBILITY
1.09
A.
Sound of water flowing in piping shall not be transmitted to building structure. Operation of mechanical system shall not produce operational sounds that can be heard outside of rooms enclosing apparatus or equipment.
PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01
•
MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT A.
Unless otherwise specified, materials and equipment shall be new, in good and clean condition. Equipment, materials, and components shall be of the make; type and model number noted on Drawings or specified. Pieces of equipment of the same type shall be by the same manufacturer.
B.
Whenever an item is listed by a single proprietary name, with or without model number and type, it shall be for purpose of design only, to indicate characteristics and quality
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING 22 0500-5
111001
desired. Proprietary designation listed on Drawings, or listed first in Specifications, is used as a basis for design to establish a standard for quality and performance and space requirements.
•
C.
Equipment and materials indicated or required to be installed outdoors shall be of the type that is designed, manufactured, listed or approved by authorities having jurisdiction for outdoor installation by being resistant to the adverse effects of weather. The additional protective measures against outdoor weather required by the manufacturers' installation instructions and prevalent practice shall be provided.
D.
For substitution of materials or products, refer to the General Conditions.
PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01
SERVICE INTERRUPTIONS, OFF-SITE, GAS AND WATER A.
Schedule Work so there shall be no service interruptions of existing systems or systems during normal hours of operation of affected systems and facilities.
B.
When service interruptions are mandatory, arrange in advance with the OAR as to time and date of such interruptions.
c.
Systems, which are interrupted, shall be returned back into operation in such manner that they will function as originally intended.
3.02
•
CUTTING, NOTCHING, AND BACKING A.
Conform to California Building Code, Title 24, Part 2, for notches and bored holes in wood and for pipes and sleeves embedded in concrete and for cuts in steel, as detailed on structural Drawings.
B.
Where pipes pass through, or are located within one inch of any construction element, install a resilient pad, Yz inch thick minimum, to prevent contact.
c.
Furnish provisions for recesses, chases, and accesses and provide blocking and backing for proper reception and installation of plumbing Work.
3.03
3.04
•
LOCATION OF PIPING AND EQUIPMENT A.
Location of piping, apparatus and equipment indicated on the Drawings is approximate and shall be altered to avoid obstructions, preserve headroom, and provide free and clear openings and passageways.
B.
Trenches parallel to footings shall not be closer than 18 inches to the face of footings and shall not be below a plane having a downward slope of 2 horizontal to one vertical, from a line 9 inches above bottom of footing.
c.
Pipe in tunnels shall be installed close to one side of tunnel to provide maximum space for passage. Pipe shall not be installed through crawl hole unless otherwise specified or detailed on Drawings.
D.
Place equipment in locations and spaces indicated, disassemble and/or reassemble equipment as required by Project conditions. TESTS AND TESTING
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING 22 0500-6
111001
•
A.
Tests shall be as required under the applicable sections of Division 22, including this Section .
B.
Additional tests may be required in the case of products, materials, and equipment if:
C.
• D.
1.
Submitted items are altered, changed, or cannot be determined as exactly conforming to the Contract Documents.
2.
Performance testing and results may also be required on certain items which are as specified, including fan, and pump performance.
Piping Tests: 1.
Perform tests required to demonstrate that operation of plumbing systems and their parts are in accordance with Specifications covering each item or system, and furnish materials, instruments and equipment necessary to conduct such tests. Tests shall be performed in presence of the Inspector, and representatives of any governmental agency having jurisdiction. Work shall not be concealed or covered until required results are provided.
2.
If required tests are not performed, Owner may provide in accordance with the Contract Documents.
3.
Pressure gauges furnished in testing shall comply with CPC. Air shall be bled from lines requiring hydrostatic or water tests.
4.
Systems shall be pressure-tested in accordance with pipe testing schedule below. Pipe test shall indicate no loss in pressure after a minimum duration of 4 hours at test pressures indicated. Where local codes require higher test pressures than specified herein for fire sprinkler systems, local codes shall govern.
5.
Fuel gas lines shall be first tested with piping exposed, before backfilling trenches or lathing; second with piping in finished arrangement, backfilled and paved where required, and walls finished.
6.
Piping systems may be tested as a unit or in sections, but entire system shall successfully meet requirements specified herein, before final testing by the Inspector.
7.
Repair of damage to pipes and their appurtenances or to any other structures resulting from or caused by these tests, shall be provided.
Pipe Testing Schedule:
System Tested Durham system, glass or plastic acid waste, vent and roof drain (except pipes running under a slab or underground) Cast-iron soil, waste and interior downspout, condensate drain from air conditioning equipment Storm water disposal lines Domestic water piping
•
Test Pressure (psig) Fill with water to top of highest vent; allow to stand two hours, or longer, as required by Inspector. Minimum head required for any joint shall be 10 feet in building. 10 feet ofwater, vertically
Test With: Water
Running water test
Water
200
Water
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING 22 0500-7
111001
E.
•
Equipment Performance Assurance Tests:
1.
Before operating any equipment or systems, a thorough check shall be performed to determine that systems have been flushed and cleaned as required and that equipment has been properly installed, aligned, lubricated, and serviced. Factory instructions shall be checked to verify installations have been completed and recommended lubricants have been installed in bearings, gearboxes, crankcases, and similar equipment. Particular care shall be furnished in lubricating bearings to avoid damage by over-lubrication and blowing out seals. Equipment shall also be checked for damage that may have occurred during shipment, after delivery, or during installation. Damaged equipment, products, and materials shall be replaced or repaired as required.
2.
Upon completion of the above, adjust the system settings to within normal operating conditions to prevent the system from being damaged upon start-up.
3.
Run-test the equipment after start-up for five consecutive days. Tests shall include operation of all equipment and systems for a period of not less than two 8 hour periods at 90 percent of the full specified capacities.
4.
Equipment Start-up Reports: For each equipment or system on which start-up is performed, submit 8 copies of start-up report for review by the Architect. a.
• F.
3.05
•
The start-up report shall include the manufacturer's standard start-up form completed and signed by the start-up technician.
5.
Provide, maintain, and pay costs for equipment, instruments, and operating personnel as required for specified tests .
6.
Provide electric energy and fuel required for tests.
7.
Final adjustment to equipment or systems shall meet specified performance requirements.
8.
Equipment, systems, or Work deemed defective during testing shall be replaced or corrected as required. Test until satisfactory results are provided.
Specific Coordinated Plan for Test and Balance: 1.
Provide a narrative of the operational intent that clearly describes the function and sequence of operation of each component, equipment, or system installed. Instruct designated Owner personnel in the operation of the installed systems.
2.
Prior to final test and balance, plumbing equipment and systems shall be operated and tested as indicated in Article 3.04.F above to demonstrate satisfactory overall operation of the installed systems.
3.
Welding performed as part of this Division may be subject to radiographic inspections at random in accordance with requirements specified in Section 22 0513: Basic Plumbing Materials and Methods.
NOISE AND VIBRATION REDUCTION
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR& P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING 22 0500-8
111001
•
A.
Correct noise or vibration caused by plumbing systems. Provide all necessary adjustments to specified and installed equipment and accessories to reduce noise to the lowest possible level
B.
Correct noise or vibration problems caused by failure to install work in accordance with Contract Documents. Include all labor and materials required as a result of such failure. Pay for re-testing of corrected noise or vibration problems by the project acoustical consultant including travel, lodging, test equipment expenses, etc. PROTECTION, CARE AND CLEANING
3.06
A.
•
In addition to storage criteria of the General Conditions, and provisions under Section 01 5000: Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls, the following shall be provided: 1.
Provide for the safety and good condition of materials and equipment until Substantial Completion. Protect materials and equipment from damage.
2.
Protect installed Work.
3.
Replacements: In case of damage, immediately provide repairs and/or replacements as required.
4.
Protect covering for bearings, open connections to tanks, pumps, compressors and similar equipment.
5.
Interior of piping shall be maintained free of dirt, grit, dust, and other foreign materials.
6.
Fixtures, piping, finished brass or bronze, and equipment shall have grease, adhesive, labels, and foreign materials removed. Chromium, nickel plate, polished bronze or brass Work shall be polished. Glass shall be cleaned inside and out.
7.
Before initial start-up and again before Substantial Completion, piping shall be drained and flushed to completely remove grease and foreign matter. Pressure regulating assemblies, traps, strainers, boilers, flush valves, and similar items shall be thoroughly cleaned. Tag system with an information tag listing responsible party and date of element, before initial start-up and again before Substantial Completion. Compressed air, oil, and gas piping shall be blown out with oil-free compressed air or inert gas.
END OF SECTION
•
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING 22 0500-9
131114
SECTION 22 05I3
•
BASIC PLUMBING MATERIALS AND METHODS
PART I- GENERAL SUMMARY
1.01 A.
Section Includes: I.
B.
•
1.02
Related Requirements: 1.
Division 01: General Requirements.
2.
Division 22: Plumbing.
3.
Division 26: Electrical.
4.
Section 33 1I 00: Site Water Distribution Utilities.
SUBMITTALS A.
Provide in accordance with Division 0 I, Section 22 0500 and specific requirements of each section of Division 22.
B.
Types ofwe1ding rods to be used. QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.03
A.
Standards: Comply with applicable national, state, and local codes and standards: ASTM, ASME, and ANSI. Federal Specifications, A WW A, SIS PI, NFPA, FM, UL, CPC (California Plumbing Code), CMC (California Plumbing Code), CSA.
B.
Qualifications of Manufacturer: Products used in the Work of this Section shall be produced by manufacturers regularly engaged in manufacture of similar items and with a history of successful production as reviewed by the Architect. COORDINATION
1.04 A.
•
This Section prescribes basic materials and methods generally common to the Work of Division 22.
Coordinate related Work in accordance with provisions of Section OI 3II3: Project Coordination.
PART 2- PRODUCTS
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
11114/2013 BASIC PLUMBING MATERIALS AND METHODS 22 0513-1
-
131114
•
2.01
GENERAL
A.
Provide the following products if they are indicated in the Contract Documents or if they are required for the proper installation, function or operation of equipment, systems or components indicated in the Contract Document.
B.
Provide the following products as a complete assembly with required accessories for a complete and functioning entity in compliance with governing codes and applicable standards as specified in Section 22 0500, manufacturer's instructions or as required. 1.
Omission of minor details in the Contract Documents does not waive and/or otherwise relinquish compliance with the above requirements.
MANUFACTURERS AND MATERIALS
2.02 A.
Ball Valves: Bronze, 2-inch and smaller: BV -1: Class 150, 600 psi, CWP, 2 piece construction reinforced Teflon seats, full port, adjustable packing gland, stainless ball and stem, threaded ends. Hammond UP-8303A/UP-8305/UP-8513, Milwaukee UPBA400S/450S, or equal.
NIB CO
T -685-80-LF/TS-685-66-LF,
NIBCO T-685-80-LF, Hammond UP-8303A, Milwaukee UPBA-400 or equal.
•
NIBCO T585 S6R66 (Stainless Steel), Milwaukee BA-260 (Stainless Steel). BV -3 Class 150, 600 psi CWP, 2-piece construction, bronze body, reinforced Teflon seats, adjustable packing gland, (no threaded stem designs allowed), threaded ends. Hammond UP8301A, NIBCO T-585-70, Milwaukee BA-400, or equal. Ball Valves in Insulated Piping: Use extended operating handle of non-thermal conducive material, and protective sleeve that allows operation of valve without breaking the vapor seal or disturbing insulation and memory stops that are fully adjustable after insulation is applied. NIBCO Nib-Seal Handle. B.
•
Piping: 1.
Piping shall be continuously and permanently marked with manufacturer's name, type of material, size, pressure rating, and the applicable ASTM, ANSI, UL, or NSF listing. On plastic pipe, date of extrusion must also be marked.
P-1
Cast iron: Hub less, service weight, ASTM A888, CIS PI 301, conforming to CIS PI 310 and installed in accordance to IAPMO 1S 06. American Foundry, Tyler, or AB & I or equal.
8736 CORWIN THEATER REP AIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES illGH SCHOOL
11/14/2013 BASIC PLUMBING MATERIALS AND METHODS 22 0513-2
131114
• C.
P-2
Copper water tube, Type L hard, ASTM B88. Mueller, Cambridge-Lee, Halstead or equal. (when used above ground only)
P-3
Copper water tube, Type K hard, ASTM B88, by Mueller, Cerro Brass, Cambridge-Lee, Halstead or equal.
P-4
Seamless copper tubing, tempered drawn, Type M, ASTM B88 by Mueller, Cerro Brass or equal.
Pipe Fittings: PF-I
Cast iron, soil or waste no-hub coupling with neoprene gaskets, stainless steel corrugated shields and stainless steel clamps. 2 bands for size I Yz-inch thru 4inch, IAPMO, ASTM C 564 and CISPI 3I 0. American Foundry, Mission, Tyler, or equal.
PF-2
Cast iron, soil or waste, Heavy-duty no-hub coupling with neoprene gaskets, stainless steel corrugated shields and stainless steel clamps. 4 bands for size 5inch thru I 0-inch. IAPMO, ASTM C564 and CISPI 3I 0. American Foundry, Mission, Tyler, or equal.
PF-3
•
Cast brass drainage fittings ASA B 16.23, ASTM B 42. Provide with copper drainage tube . Mueller Brass, Nibco, Stanley Flagg, Lee Brass Or equal.
PF-4
Wrought copper- solder type ANSI B 16.22 Mueller Brass, Nibco, Lee Brass or equal.
D.
Pipe and Fitting Requirements Schedule: Unless otherwise specified or indicated on Drawings, pipe and fittings shall be installed in accordance with the following table: TABLE I- PIPE AND FITTING SCHEDULE Fittings Limits Pipe
Use
Domestic Hot and Cold water, underground Copper, underground only Domestic hot and cold water, in buildin_g_ and above _ground In building above ground Vents
P-6
PF-5
P-7
PF-5
All
P-6
PF-5
2 to 8-inch
P-6
PF-5
Existing Buildings and Exposed Downspouts
P-2
PF-3
Up To8 inches
Waste lines, Sanitary
•
8736 CORWIN THEATER REP AIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HJGH SCHOOL
P-1
PF-1 or PF-2 (IRE) required by engineer
if
11114/2013 BASIC PLUMBING MATERIALS AND METHODS 22 0513-3
-
131114
•
E.
Unions: 1.
Unions shall be furnished and installed in accordance with the following requirements (unless flanges are furnished): a. b.
c.
d. 2.
At each threaded or soldered connection to equipment and tanks, except in Freon or fuel gas, piping systems, whether indicated or not. Immediately downstream of any threaded connection to each manually operated threaded valve or cock, and each threaded check valve, yard box or access box except those in Freon piping systems, whether indicated or not. At each threaded connection to threaded automatic valves (except those in Freon piping systems) such as reducing valves and temperature control valves, whether indicated or not. If grooved piping is used, couplings shall serve as unions. Additional unions are not required
Unions shall be located so that piping can be easily disconnected for removal of equipment, tank, or valve.
PART 3- EXECUTION
•
EXAMINATION
3.01 A.
INSTALLATION
3.02
•
Examine areas and conditions under which Work of this Section shall be performed. Correct conditions detrimental to proper and timely completion of Work. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
A.
Provide all materials and equipment for the Work. Furnish and install necessary apparatus, parts, materials, and accessories.
B.
Pipe Installation: 1.
Install piping parallel to wall and provide an orderly grouping of proper materials and execution.
2.
Piping shall clear obstructions, preserve headroom, provide openmgs and passageways clear, whether indicated or not. Verify the Work of other Divisions to avoid interference.
3.
If obstructions or the Work of other Divisions prevent installation of piping or equipment as indicated by the Drawings, perform minor deviations as required by the Architect.
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
11114/2013 BASIC PLUMBING MA TERlALS AND METHODS 22 0513-4
131114
•
•
C.
•
4.
Install piping after excavation or cutting has been performed. Piping shall not be permanently enclosed, furred in, or covered before required inspection and testing is performed.
5.
Exposed polished or enameled connections from fixtures or equipment shall be installed with no resulting tool marks or threads at fittings. Residue or exposed pipe compound shall be removed from exterior of pipe.
6.
Piping shall be concealed in chases, partitions, walls, and between floors, unless otherwise directed or specifically noted on Drawings. When penetrating wood studs, joists, and other wood members, provide such members with reinforcement steel straps of Continental Steel & Tube Co., ULINE, Independent Metal Strap, or equal.
7.
Reduce fitting where any change in pipe size occurs. Bushings shall not be furnished unless specifically reviewed by the Architect, or indicated on Drawings.
8.
Piping subject to expansion or contraction shall be anchored in a manner, which permits strains to be evenly distributed. Swing joints or expansion loops shall be installed. Seismic restraints shall be installed so as not to interfere with expansion and contraction of piping. Seismic loops required at all building separations.
9.
Immediately after lines have been installed, openings shall be capped or plugged to prevent entrance of foreign materials. Caps shall be left in place until removal is necessary for completion of installation.
10.
Couplings shall not be installed except where required pipe runs between other fittings are longer than standard length of type of pipe being installed and except where their installation is specifically reviewed by the Architect.
11.
Water piping shall be installed generally level, free of traps, unnecessary offset, arranged to conform to building requirements, clear of ducts, flues, conduits, and other Work. Piping shall be arranged with valves installed to provide for complete drainage and control of system. Piping shall not be installed which causes an objectionable noise from flow of water therein under normal conditions. Refer to Section 23 0500: Common Work Results for Plumbing.
12.
Water lines may be installed in same trench with sewer lines, provided bottom of water line is 12 inches minimum above top and to the side of sewer line.
13.
Changes in pipe sizes shall be furnished with eccentric reducers, flat on top. Offsets to clear obstruction shall not be installed so as to produce air pockets.
Pipe Sleeves and Plates:
8736 CORWIN THEATERREPAJR& P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
11/14/2013 BASIC PLUMBING MATERIALS AND METHODS 22 0513-5
131114
•
•
•
I.
Provide pipe sleeves of Schedule 40 black steel pipe or Schedule 40 PVC plastic pipe in concrete or masonry walls, footings, and concrete floors below grade. Provide adjustable submerged deck type sleeves at locations where pipes pass through concrete floors, except concrete slab floors on grade, and at locations where soil pipe for floor type water closets passes through concrete floors.
2.
Sleeves shall provide Yz inch clearance around pipes, except plastic pipe shall have 1 inch clearance. Caps of deck type sleeves shall be removed just prior to installation of pipe. Area around sleeves shall be smooth and without high or low spots. Sleeves in walls shall not extend beyond exposed surface of wall. Sleeves in concrete floors and walls shall be securely fastened to forms to prevent movement while concrete is being placed.
3.
Piping installed on a roof shall clear the roof surface by 10 inches minimum, with or without insulation. Bottom of individual fittings may infringe on 10 inches clear space but not groups of fittings or fittings located within 27 inches of each other.
4.
Stiles shall be provided to facilitate crossing of piping when parallel piping runs are laterally greater than 12 inches out-to-out, or any pipe is higher than 18 inches, and more than 40 feet long or runs between two or more major pieces of equipment or housings greater than 20 feet apart. Stiles shall be not less than 20 inches wide with a minimum tread depth of 10 inches. Where stiles are required, they shall be located so greatest obstructed distance is 30 feet.
5.
Where pipes pass through waterproofed walls, floors, or floors on grade, sealant with Link-Seal Modular Seals, or equal, between pipe and sleeve to provide a waterproof joint. Where earth is in contact with pipe on both sides of a wall or foundation, the waterproof joint is not required. Commercial rubber compression units may be furnished instead of sealed sleeves if reviewed by the Architect.
6.
A swing joint, or other required device, shall be furnished and installed in hot water lines with 10 feet of sealant or compression joint to allow for expansion.
7.
Provide polished, chrome-plated flanges when plumbing pipes pass through walls at plumbing fixtures, etcetera as specified in Section 22 4000 Plumbing. Provide polished steel, chromium-plated split floor and ceiling plates at locations where pipes pass through walls, floors, ceilings, and partitions in finished portion that neatly conceals pipe insert.
8.
Pipe sleeves shall be provided where pipes intersect footings or foundation walls and sleeve clearances shall provide for footing settlement, but not less than one inch all around pipe .
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR& P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
11/14/2013 BASIC PLUMBING MA TERJALS AND METHODS 220513-6
131114
•
D.
• E.
Welding of Pipe and Qualifications of Welder: 1.
Joints above grade or accessible conduit or tunnels in steel piping may be either welded or screwed unless specifically indicated otherwise on Drawings or specified. Joints in below grade steel piping, whether in insulation or not, shall not be welded, unless otherwise indicated.
2.
Welded joints in pipe shall be continuous around pipe and shall comply with ASME B31 : Code for Pressure Piping, unless otherwise specified.
3.
Each pipe weld shall be stamped with welder's identification mark. Welding shall be performed by welders possessing a valid certificate of qualification for welding carbon steel welding pipe in horizontal position (2G) and horizontal fixed position (SG) in accordance with the requirements of Section IX of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, by an Owner-recognized, DSA approved testing laboratory.
4.
Before any welder performs welding on the Work, furnish the INSPECTOR with a copy of welder's valid qualification papers and obtain verification. Welder qualification is not valid unless it has been issued while welder was performing work for current employer, and has performed type of work described by qualification in the preceding 3 months.
5.
Welding performed under these Specifications is subject to special tests and inspections including rigid Ultra Sonic Testing (UT) and radiographic inspection at random, in accordance with Technique for Radiographic Examination of Welded Joints by an Owner recognized, DSA approved testing laboratory.
Unacceptable Welds and Repairs to Welding: 1.
•
Welds containing any of the following types of imperfections shall be deemed defective Work: a.
Cracks of any type.
b.
Zones of incomplete (in excess of 1/32 inch) fusion or penetration.
c.
Elongated slab inclusions longer than 1/4 inch.
d.
Groups of slag inclusions in welds having an aggregate length greater than thickness of parent metal in a length 12 times the thickness of the parent metal.
e.
Undercuts greater than 1/32 inch.
f.
Overlaps, abrupt ridges or valleys .
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HJGH SCHOOL
11114/2013 BASIC PLUMBING MATERIALS AND METHODS 22 0513-7
131114
•
•
•
2.
When a defective weld is detected by examination as outlined above, two additional welds shall be radiographed at locations selected by the Project Inspector. If the two selected welds demonstrate compliant welding, then the two tested welds shall be deemed to be in compliance. Welding revealed by radiographs to be defective Work shall be removed, repaired, and tested by radiograph.
3.
If either of the two selected welds demonstrates welding deemed to be defective Work, all welding in that portion of the Work shall be deemed defective Work and either: all welds shall be cutout, prepare new ends for welding and weld to comply with this Specification, or radiograph all welds, removing and repairing only such welding deemed to be defective Work.
4.
Repair welding shall be performed in a manner in full compliance with ASME B31. The welded joints or repairs shall be spot examined with UT or radiographic tests in accordance with foregoing requirements.
5.
Owner shall cause to be performed additional random UT and radiographic examinations of welds. Owner shall be responsible for the costs of any UT and radiographic examinations found to be in compliance with specified requirements.
6.
Installer shall be responsible for the costs of UT and radiographic reexaminations of welds deemed defective Work and not in compliance with this Specification, and shall repair or replace said welds in accordance with specified requirements.
F.
Welding Rods: Submit a written list of materials and proposed type of welding rods.
G.
Backing Rings: Backing rings may be submitted for installation provided the Product Data is submitted with the material list.
H.
Qualification Tests for Low-pressure Welding: 1.
Tests shall be performed on 3-inch standard weight pipe ASTM A53, Grade A, and shall be welded by acetylene and electric arc. Each sample shall consist of 2 pieces, each 10 inches long, with 30-degree bevel at point weld.
2.
Two 20-inch samples shall be performed in the 2G and two 20-inch samples in the 5G positions, with positions defined in Section IX, ASME Boiler and Pressure V esse! Code. Welds shall have the reinforcement ground or machined flush to the surface of the pipe before testing. Samples shall be tested as full section tensile.
3.
Weld shall develop a load of 90 percent of 50,000 psi, i.e., 45,000 psi or shall develop a fracture in parent metal.
8736 CORWIN THEATERREPAIR&P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
11/14/2013 BASIC PLUMBING MATERIALS AND METHODS 220513-8
131114
• I.
•
•
J.
4.
Each qualified welder shall carry an identification card listing welder's name, date of test, and type of welding tests passed; signed by the welder and the laboratory.
5.
A valid certificate of qualification issued in compliance with requirements of the ASME Boiler Pressure Vessel Code Section IX shall qualify a welder for issuance of a certificate for low-pressure pipe welding.
Certificates of Qualification for Welding of Unfired Pressure Vessels: 1.
Certificates of qualification shall be issued by a laboratory recognized by the Owner in compliance with the requirements of the ASME Boiler Pressure Vessel Code Section IX. Qualifications shall be for both acetylene and arc welding of Schedule 40 ASTM A53, Type B ,steel welded or seamless pipe in the Horizontal Position (2G) and the Horizontal Fixed Position (5G) as defined by said code.
2.
Certificate described above is not valid unless it has been issued while welder was working for his current employer, and unless welder has performed type of work described by certificate in the preceding three months. Requirements for possession of a valid certificate shall not be waived for welders fabricating unfired pressure vessels when the Specifications require compliance with ASME code or when welding pipe carries working pressures greater than 75 psi and temperatures greater than 250 degrees F.
Pipe Joints and Connections: 1.
Pipe and tubing shall be cut per IAPMO Installation Standards. Pipe shall have rough edges or burrs removed so that a smooth and unobstructed flow shall be provided.
2.
Hot tapping of gas lines is strictly prohibited.
3.
Threaded Pipe: Joints in piping shall be installed according to the following service schedule: a.
Soap Piping: Litharge and glycerine, or Expando, Gasoila, or equal.
b.
Plastic Piping: Teflon pipe joint compound tape.
c.
Oxygen Piping: Wash treads with S.P., rinse, blow-dry and apply litharge and glycerine.
d.
Cleanout Plugs: No compound shall be used. After inspection and test, plugs shall be removed, cleaned, greased, and replaced.
b.
Other services furnish sealant, suitable and as reviewed by the Architect.
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
11114/2013 BASIC PLUMBING MA TERlALS AND METHODS 22 0513-9
131114
• K.
•
•
3.
Threads on pipe shall be cut with sharp, clean, unblemished dies and shall conform to ANSIIASME B2.1 for tapered pipe threads .
4.
Joint compounds shall be smoothly placed on male thread and not in fittings. Threaded joints shall be installed tight with tongs or wrenches and sealant of any kind is not permitted. Failed joints shall be replaced with new materials. Installation of thread cement or sealant to repair a leaking joint is not permitted.
5.
Sharp-toothed Stillson, or similar wrenches, is not permitted for the installation of brass pipe or other piping with similar finished surfaces.
Copper Tubing and Brass Pipe with Threadless Fittings: 1.
Silver brazed joints shall be used for attaching fittings to non-ferrous metallic refrigerant piping.
2.
Non-pressure gravity fed condensate lines may be soldered with 95/5 solder.
3
Silver brazing alloy, Class BCUP-5. Surfaces to be joined shall be free of oil, grease, and oxides. Socket of fitting and end of pipe shall be thoroughly cleaned with emery cloth and wiped to remove oxides. After cleaning and before assembly or heating, flux shall be installed to each joint surface and spread evenly. Heat shall be applied in accordance with instructions in the Copper Tube Handbook issued by Copper Development Associates. Joints constructed of rough bronze fittings shall be provided as recommended by manufacturer.
4.
Do not overheat piping and fittings when installing silver brazing.
5.
Joints in non-ferrous piping for services not covered above shall be installed with solder composed of 95/5 tin/antimony, ASTM B32, Grade 5A. Surfaces to be jointed shall be free of oil, grease, and oxides. Sockets of fitting and end of pipe shall be cleaned with emery cloth to remove oxides. Solder flux shall be sparingly installed and solder added until joint is completely filled. Do not overheat. Excess solder, while plastic, shall be removed with a small brush in order to provide an uninterrupted fillet completely around joint. Random inspection of joints shall be conducted by Project Inspector to ensure joints are lead-free.
6.
Grooved end joints for copper piping shall be assembled in accordance with the latest manufacturer recommendations. Pipe ends shall be clean and free from indentations, projections, and roll marks in the area from pipe end to groove for proper gasket sealing. Grooving tools shall be as manufactured by Victaulic, RIDGID, MAG Tool, or equal.
8736 CORWIN THEATER REP AIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HJGH SCHOOL
11/14/2013 BASIC PLUMBING MATERIALS AND METHODS 22 0513-10
131114
•
•
L.
Ring-Type Pipe: Joints shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer's instructions with grooved couplings, fittings and rubber rings. Couplings and pipe shall be compatible and of the same manufacturer. Rings shall be accurately located and installed by grooves in coupling. Pipe shall be installed with zero deflection unless otherwise specified. Pressure pipe shall be furnished with thrust blocks at each offset point.
M.
Welded Pipe Joints: 1.
Joints in welded steel pipelines shall be installed by oxyacetylene or electric arc process. Welding shall be continuous around pipe and provided as specified.
2.
Butt welds shall be of the single V -type, with ends of pipe and fittings beveled approximately 37 Y2 degrees. Piping shall be aligned before welding is started with the alignment maintained during welding.
3.
Welds for flanges and socket fittings shall be of the fillet type with a throat dimension not less than pipe wall thickness.
N.
Grooved End Pipe Joints: Grooved end joints for carbon steel ptpmg shall be assembled in accordance with the latest manufacturer recommendations. Pipe ends shall be clean and free from indentations, projections, and roll marks in the area from pipe end to grove for proper gasket sealing. Grooving tools shall be as manufactured by Victaulic, RIDGID, MAG Tool, or equal.
0.
Joints shall be Vic-Press 304TM, or equal, made with Victaulic Series 'PFT' tools and the appropriate sized jaw. Pipe shall be certified for use with Vic-Press 304TM system, and shall be square cut, properly deburred and cleaned, and marked at the required location to insure full insertion into the fittings and/or couplings.
4.
P.
•
a.
Steel-to-plastic (PE): Provide manufacturer's prefabricated standard transition fitting, transition from epoxy-coated steel pipe to plastic, R. W. Lyall Co., or equal.
b.
Plastic-to-plastic, PVC to PE: Provide manufacturer's prefabricated standard transition fitting, transition from PVC to epoxy-coated steel pipe toPE; R.W. Lyall Co., or equal..
c.
Plastic-to-plastic, PE to PE: Provide manufacturer's standard fused tapping tee assembly with shut-off feature.
Provide PE reinforcing sleeves where PE pipe is fused to multi-saddles, service punch tee, reducing tees, transition fittings and anodeless risers.
Valves: Valves shall conform to the following:
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR& P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
11/14/2013 BASIC PLUMBING MATERIALS AND METHODS 220513-11
131114
• Q.
1.
Piping systems shall be furnished with valves at points indicated on Drawings and specified, arranged to provide complete regulating control of piping system throughout building and the Project site.
2.
Valves shall be installed in a neat grouping, so that parts are easily accessible and maintained.
3.
Valves shall be full size of line in which they are installed, unless otherwise indicated on Drawings or otherwise specified, and shall be one of types specified.
4.
Valves for similar service shall be of one manufacturer.
5.
Except where otherwise specified, valves shall be Belimo, Victaulic, Stockham, Crane, Jenkins, Milwaukee, Hammond, American, NIBCO, Hoffman, or equal.
Hangers and Supports: 1.
Piping shall be securely fastened to building structure by approved iron hangers, supports, guides, anchors, and sway braces to maintain pipe alignment to prevent sagging and to prevent noise or excessive strain on piping due to uncontrolled or seismic movement under operating conditions. Hangers and supports shall conform to Manufacturer's Standardization Society Specification SP-69. Hangers shall be relocated as required to correct unsatisfactory conditions that may become evident when system is placed into operation. Appliances, heat exchangers, storage tanks, and similar equipment shall be securely fastened to structure in accordance with seismic requirements. Outdoor metal hangers and supports shall be hot-dipped galvanized steel, unless otherwise specified.
2.
Hose faucets, compressed air outlets, and similar items at ends of pipe branches shall be rigidly fastened to building construction near point of connection.
3.
Piping shall not be supported by wire, rope, wood, plumbers' tape, or other non-recognized devices.
4.
Hangers and supports shall be designed to support weight of pipe, fittings, weight of fluid and weight of pipe insulation, and shall have a minimum factor of safety of five, based on ultimate tensile strength of material installed.
5.
Burning or welding of any structural member under load is not permitted. Field welding not specified on Drawings or reviewed Shop Drawings is not permitted without review by Architect and DSA .
•
•
8736 CORWIN THEATER REP AIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
11/14/2013 BASIC PLUMBING MATERIALS AND METHODS 22 0513-12
131114
•
6.
Burning holes in beam flanges or other structural members is not permitted without review by the Architect and DSA .
7.
Pipe hangers on piping covered with low temperature insulation shall be installed on outside of insulation and not in contact with pipe unless otherwise detailed on Drawings. Insulation shall be protected by 18 gage galvanized steel shield, with a minimum length of I 0 inches, installed completely around pipe covering between covering and hanger. Installing hangers directly on pipe and butting adjoining sections of insulation against hanger is permitted provided void and hanger rod are properly insulated and sealed so that no sweating occurs at hangers.
8.
Hanger rods shall be fastened to structural steel members with suitable beam clamps. Clamps shall be Tolco, Carpenter & Patterson, Fee and Mason, or equal, as follows:
9.
•
•
a.
To leo I beam, Fig.62 for maximum 1000 pounds.
b.
Tolco I or WF beam, Fig. 329, for maximum of 1290 pounds.
Hanger rods shall be fastened to concrete inserts in concrete slabs or beams. Inserts shall be Tolco, Carpenter & Patterson, Fee and Mason, or equal, as follows: a.
To leo Fig.31 0 for maximum of 600 pounds.
b.
Tolco Fig. 309 for maximum of 1140 pounds.
I 0.
For fastening to wood ceilings, beams, or joists, furnish Grinnell Fig. 128R, Grinnell Fig. 153, Tolco 78, or equal pipe hanger flange fastened with drive screws. Under wood floors, 3/8 inch hanger rods shall be hung from 2-inch by 2-inch by 1/4 inch angle clips 3 inches long, with 2, staggered 1Od nails, clinched over joist.
11.
Hanger rod sizes for copper, iron, or steel pipe: 3/8 inch for pipe sizes Y2 inch through 2-inch, Y2 inch for pipe sizes 3-inch, 4-inch and 5-inch, 5/8 inch for pipe size 6-inch, and% inch for 8-inch and 10-inch pipe.
12.
Turnbuckles, if furnished, shall provide a load carrying capacity equal to that of the pipe hanger with which they are being installed.
13.
Pipe hangers shall be of same size, or nearest larger manufactured size available, as pipe or tubing on which they are being installed.
14.
Hangers, clamps, and guides furnished for support of non-metallic pipe shall be padded with 1/8 inch thick rubber, neoprene, or soft resilient cloth .
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR& P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
11114/2013 BASIC PLUMBING MATERIALS AND METHODS 22 0513-13
131114
•
•
•
15.
Where special pipe-supporting requirements in the Specifications conflict with any standard requirements specified herein, the Specification requirements shall govern.
16.
Vertical Piping:
17.
a.
Vertical pipe risers shall be securely supported with riser clamps of recognized type. Risers in reinforced concrete buildings shall be furnished with extension clamps fastened to pipe above each concrete floor slab with extended arms of clamp to rest on slab. Clamps shall be provided with lead or Teflon liners when installed on copper tubing. Clamps shall be plastic-coated when installed on non-ferrous pipe or tubing.
b.
Copper tubing in sizes 1 Yz-inches and larger and steel pipelines passing up through building shall be supported at each floor of building or every 15 feet whichever is less.
c.
Copper tubing sizes 1 Y4-inches and smaller shall be supported at not intervals not more than 6 feet on center. Special provisions shall be installed for vertical lines subject to expansion and contraction caused by operating temperature differences.
d.
Vertical cast iron pipelines shall be supported from each floor and at its base. Malleable iron or steel pipe clamps with minimum thickness of 1/4 inch shall be furnished and fastened around pipe for support.
Horizontal Piping: a.
Roof Mounted Piping: Pressure and non-pressure p1pmg shall be supported from channels, stands, clamps, trapezes, rollers, or structures mounted on 100% rubber, UV resistant rooftop supports with reflective strips, Dura-Block, or equal. Roller type supports shall be provided below and above pipe to prevent its dislodgement. Bottom of pipes shall clear the roof surface by 10 inches.
b.
Insulated steam and space heating hot water insulated condensate lines, insulated domestic hot water supply and return piping shall be supported with Tolco Figure 4, B-Line Figure B3140, Grinnell Figure 212, or equal, steel hangers with welded eye rods to permit hinge movement at point of attachment of hangers. Hinge movement at point of support shall be provided by welded eye linked rods Tolco Figure lOlL, B-Line Figure B3211X, Grinnell Figure 278, or equal.
c.
Domestic cold water piping, water supply and return piping, condenser water piping, insulated refrigerant piping gas piping, compressed air piping, cast iron soil piping, galvanized steel vents, waste and
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR& P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
11114/2013 BASIC PLUMBING MATERIALS AND METHODS 22 0513-14
131114
downspout piping and glass to be supported with To leo Figure I, BLine Figure B31 00, Grinnell Figure 260, or equal, hangers with rods, turnbuckles and inserts suitable for above hangers.
•
d.
R.
•
•
Maximum hanger and support spacing shall conform to CPC schedule for horizontal piping installed above grade.
18.
A hanger or support shall be installed close to the point of change in direction of a pipe run, in either a horizontal or vertical plane.
19.
When practicable, supports and hangers for cast iron soil pipe shall be installed as close as possible to joints and when hangers or supports are not located within one foot of a branch line fitting, an additional hanger or support shall be installed at fitting.
20.
In systems where grooved piping is used, couplings shall be provided with angle pattern bolt pads to comply with support and hanging requirements of ANSI/ASME B31.1, ANSI/ASME B3 I .9, and NFPA Pamphlet I 3.
Flashings: I.
Each pipe, duct, or gas-fired equipment vent passing through roof shall be installed with waterproof flashing.
2.
Flashing or flanges on pipes, vents, and ducts passing through a tile or slate roof shall be constructed of sheet lead. Flashing for pipes and heater vents passing through a roof shall be 4 pound soft sheet lead. Flashing and flanges for ducts and heater vents passing through exterior walls shall be 22 gage sheet metal. Flanges and flashing shall be installed waterproof at point of connection with pipe or duct. No soldered joints on roof flashings will be allowed.
3.
Lead flashing and flanges shall be constructed of 4 pound sheet lead with burned joints. Flange of lead flashing or lead flange on a duct shall extend out onto roof a minimum of 12 inches from pipe or duct. Lead flashing shall extend up the pipe or duct not less than 7 inches.
4.
Sheet metal flashing shall be constructed of 24 gage galvanized sheet steel. Flanges on these flashings shall extend out onto roof a minimum of I 0 inches from pipe or duct. Flanges on ducts through exterior walls shall extend out from duct a minimum of 2 Yz inches. Flanges on gas-fired equipment singlewall vents shall be of ventilated type. Type B gas vents through a roof shall be furnished with non-ventilated flashing as per NFPA Pamphlet 211.
5.
Cast iron, steel, brass, and copper pipe, which terminates less than 18 inches above roof, shall be furnished with a combination counter-flashing and vandalproof hood for protection against water, birds and foreign matter. Cast iron, steel, brass and copper pipe, which does not terminate within 18 inches of roof,
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR& P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
11114/2013 BASIC PLUMBING MATERIALS AND METHODS 22 0513-15
131114
shall be furnished with a counter-flashing sleeve. Pipe, which terminates more than 18 inches above roof, shall be furnished with protection against entrance of water, birds, and foreign matter.
• S.
6.
Counter-flashing and combination counter-flashing sleeves and vandal-proof hoods shall be cast iron, vandal-proof, threaded, sealed or approved gas-heated sleeve type. Counter-flashing sleeves on each of these items shall extend down over flashing a minimum of% inch.
7.
Flashing and flanges on ducts shall be installed waterproof at point of connection to the duct by riveting and soldering. Storm collars shall be securely screwed and installed waterproof around appliance vent pipe immediately above flashing.
8.
Vent piping above roof shall be furnished with a combination counter-flashing sleeve and vandal-proof hood.
Equipment Installation: Install roof or floor mounted equipment on level platforms, housekeeping pads or curbs and provide sound, vibration and seismic control measures per Section 23 0548 even if not indicated on Drawings. END OF SECTION
•
•
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
11/14/2013 BASIC PLUMBING MATERIALS AND METHODS 22 0513-16
111001
•
SECTION 22 0553 PLUMBING IDENTIFICATION
PART 1- GENERAL 1.01
•
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes: Marking and identification on mechanical piping systems, ducts, controls, valves, and apparatus.
B.
Related Requirements:
1.02
1.
Division 01 : General Requirements
2.
Section 21 1313: Fire-Suppression Sprinkler Systems.
3.
Section 22 0513: Basic Plumbing Materials and Methods.
4.
Section 22 1000: Plumbing.
5.
Section 22 2013: Plumbing Piping.
SUBMITTALS A.
Submit in accordance with Division 01 and Section 22 0500: Common Work Results for Plumbing.
B.
Submit product data and installation instructions for each item specified.
c.
Submit Samples ofmaterials. QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.03 A.
Comply with provisions of: 1.
Section 22 0500: Common Work Results for Plumbing.
2.
ANSI/ASME A 13.1: Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems.
3.
APW A: Uniform Color Code.
4.
IAPMO: Uniform Plumbing Code (UPC)
PART 2- PRODUCTS
•
2.01
MATERIALS
8736 CORWIN THEATER REP AIR & P,O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/11 PLUMBING IDENTIFICATION 22 0553-1
II 1001
•
A.
VALVES
2.02 A.
Furnish prepared chart or diagram for each piping system, indicating by identifying letter or model number of each valve in the system, its location, and function.
B.
Install charts in aluminum frame with clear glass front and secure on wall where designated by the Project Inspector.
c.
Bind copies of each chart in operating instructions manual.
D.
Provide each valve with a brass, aluminum, or plastic disc, not less than 1-1/4 inches diameter bearing engraved numbers corresponding to those indicated on chart. Fasten discs to valve with No. 14 brass wire.
E.
Provide an additional tag for safety valves and other valves that could be hazardous to safety and health of occupants. Distinguish these tags from regular valve tags by color (such as yellow with black letters, and marked "Danger"); submit Sample tag to the Architect for review. INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
2.03
•
A.
Identify panel-mounted instruments and controls with engraved bakelite nameplates permanently affixed to panel boards.
B.
Identify alarm indicating devices and alarm reset devices by nameplates.
c.
Identify automatic valves, flow switches, and pressure switches, with embossed aluminum or plastic tape affixed to controller, indicating service and setting. EQUIPMENT
2.04 A.
Identify each major piece of equipment with engraved bakelite nameplates permanently affixed to the equipment, indicating the room numbers it services, Equipment identification designation shall be the same to its designation indicated on the "As-Built Drawings". Room numbers in the nameplates shall correspond to the final room numbers. ABOVE GRADE PIPE IDENTIFICATION
2.05
•
General: Piping systems, controls, valves, apparatus, etc., except those that are installed in inaccessible locations in partitions, walls, and floors, shall be permanently identified .
A.
Identify pipes by means of colored labels with directional flow arrows and identification of the pipe content, in conformance to ANSI/ASME A 13.1 or the UPC.
B.
Materials: Precoiled acrylic plastic with clear polyester coating, all-temperature, selfadhering, as manufactured by Brady, Brimar Industries, Seton, Stranco, Inc., or equal.
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR& P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01111 PLUMBING IDENTlFICA TION 22 0553-2
111001
•
C.
Size:
Outside Diameter of Pipe or Insulation (in inches)
D.
•
Length of Color Field (in inches)
%to 1 Yt
8
Yz
1 Yz to 2
8
%
2 Yz to 6
12
lYt
8 to 10
24
2Yz
over 10
32
3Yz
Letter
(in
Locations: 1.
On accessible piping, whether insulated or not (including mechanical rooms, attic and ceiling spaces); except that labels shall be omitted from piping where contained material is obvious due to its connection to fixtures (such as faucets, water closets, etcetera.).
2.
Near each valve and branch connection in such accessible piping .
3.
At each pipe passage through wall or floor.
4.
At not more than 20 feet spacing on straight pipe run between bands required in 2 and 3 above.
5.
At each change in direction.
E.
Application: Install on clean surfaces free of dust, grease, oil, or any material that will prevent proper adhesion. Replace non-adhering or curling labels with new labels.
F.
Color Schedule:
Content of Pipe
Background Color Domestic cold water Domestic. C.W. Green Non-potable cold Caution: Non- Purple water potable Water Do Not Drink (1)(2) Domestic hot-water Domestic H. W. Blue 140°F 140°F Sanitary waste San waste Green
•
Size of inches)
Legend
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
Lettering Color White Black
Black White 10/01/11 PLUMBING IDENTIFICATION 22 0553-3
111001
•
Sanitary vent
San vent
White
Fire sprinkler supply
Fire supply Sprinkler drain
White
Fire sprinkler drain H.
Green Sprinkler Red Red
White
Notes on Schedule: 1.
Note (1) indicates 2 Y4 inch by I inch yellow label with Yz inch letters reading UNSAFE WATER at one end of primary label. Note (2) words should read "CAUTION: NONPOTABLE WATER DO NOT DRINK." with international do not drink symbol. Note (3) words should read "CAUTION: RECLAIMED WATER DO NOT DRINK." with international do not drink symbol.
PART 3- EXECUTION INSTALLATION
3.01
•
A.
Correct detrimental conditions prior to commencing the Work of this Section. Install markers and identification tags as specified with materials and installation procedures recommended by manufacturer.
B.
Place tracer wire on top of non-metal utility lines allowing some slack. Do not wrap tracer wire around pipe. Fasten tracer wire in place at approximately 10 feet on centers with non-metal ties.
C.
Install underground detectable pipe marking tape continuously buried 8 to 10 inches above the buried utility pipe. Wrap tape on pipe risers up to a height of 12 inches above grade. CLEANUP
3.02 A.
Remove rubbish, debris, and waste materials and legally dispose of off the Project site.
END OF SECTION
•
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR& P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/11 PLUMBING IDENTIFICATION 22 0553-4
111001
•
SECTION 22 0700 PLUMBING INSULATION PART 1 -GENERAL SUMMARY
1.01 A.
Section Includes: 1.
B.
•
•
Insulation for plumbing piping.
Related Requirements: 1.
Division 01: General Requirements.
2.
Section 22 0500: Common Work Results for Plumbing.
3.
Section 22 0513: Basic Plumbing Materials and Methods.
4.
Section 22 0553: Plumbing Identification.
5.
Section 22 1000: Plumbing .
REFERENCES
1.02 A.
American Society for Testing and Materials International (ASTM): 1.
ASTM C302 - Standard Test Method for Density and Dimensions of Preformed Pipe-Covering-Type Thermal Insulation.
2.
ASTM C411 -Standard Test Method for Hot-Surface Performance of HighTemperature Thermal Insulation.
3.
ASTM C423 - Standard Test Method for Sound Absorption and Sound Absorption Coefficients by the Reverberation Room Method.
4.
ASTM C533 - Standard Specification for Calcium Silicate Block and Pipe Thermal Insulation.
5.
ASTM C547- Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Pipe Insulation.
6.
ASTM C1104 - Standard Test Method for Determining the Water Vapor Sorption of Unfaced Mineral Fiber Insulation .
8736 CORWIN THEATER REP AIR & P .0. T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 PLUMBING INSULATION 22 0700-1
IIIOOI
• B.
7.
ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
8.
ASTM G2l - Standard Practice for Determining Resistance of Synthetic Polymeric Materials to Fungi.
Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. 1.
C.
National Fire Protection Association: 1.
D.
NFP A 25 5 - Standard Method of Test of Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
California Code of Regulation Title 24. 1.
California Green Building Standards Code.
SUBMITTALS
1.03 A.
•
Submit in accordance with Division 01 and Section 22 0500: Common Work Results for Plumbing . 1.
Complete material list of items to be furnished and installed under this Section.
2.
Manufacturer's specifications and other data required demonstrating compliance with the specified requirements.
3.
Shop Drawings, catalog cuts and manufacturer's data indicating insulation, jacketing, adhesives, and coating. Insulating materials shall be certified by manufacturer to comply with the California quality standards for insulating materials.
4.
Display sample cutaway sections.
5.
Manufacturer's recommended method of installation procedures, which will become part of this Section.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.04 A.
•
UL 723 -Test for Surface Burning Characteristics ofBuilding Materials.
Qualifications of Manufacturer and Installer, Materials, Fabrication, Execution, and Standard of Quality: Comply with provisions stated under Section 22 0500: Common Work Results for Plumbing and Section 22 0513: Basic Plumbing Materials and Methods .
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/20 II PLUMBING INSULATION 22 0700-2
111001
•
••
B.
Insulation Work shall be in accordance with the California Building Energy Efficiency Standards, CBC, and Uniform Mechanical Code and the California Green Building Standards Code.
C.
Test Ratings: 1.
Comply with provisions stated under Section 22 0500 and 22 0513 with emphasis on ASTM E84, NFPA 255, or UL 723. ASTM CI67, ASTM C302, UL label or listing of satisfactory test results from the National Institute of Standards and Technology, or a satisfactory certified test report from an acceptable testing laboratory. Approval by the State Fire Marshal is required.
2.
Furnish labels, legibly printed with the name of the manufacturer or listings indicate that fire hazard ratings do not exceed those specified for materials proposed for installation. Flame spread index of not more than 25 and smoke developed rating not exceeding 50.
3.
Tests shall be performed on each item individually when insulation, vapor barrier covering, wrapping materials, or adhesives are installed separately at the Project site.
4.
Test insulation, vapor barrier covering, wrapping materials and adhesives as an assembly when they are factory composite systems.
D.
Regulatory Requirements: Insulation furnished and installed under this Section shall meet minimum legal requirements ofthe Building Energy Efficiency Standards adopted and incorporated in the California Energy Commission, Title 24, Part 2, Chapters 2 through 53 and the California Green Building Standards Code unless otherwise noted, for the piping,
E.
Chemically based products such as sealers, primers, fillers, and adhesives, etcetera must meet the California air quality regulations. PRODUCT HANDLING
1.05 A.
Protection, Replacement, Delivery and Storage: Comply with provisions stated under Sections 22 0500: Common Work Results for Plumbing and 22 0513: Basic Plumbing Materials and Methods.
PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01
•
MATERIALS
A.
General:
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR& P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 PLUMBING INSULATION 22 0700-3
111001
•
1.
Insulating material shall be fire resistant, non-corrosive, shall not break, settle, sag, pack or disintegrate under vibration, nor absorb more than percent moisture by weight.
2.
Insulating material shall be furnished with thickness indicated in Table 1, and shall furnish thermal resistance in the range of R-4.0 to 4.6 in accordance with inch at 75 degrees F. For any other value of R, insulation thickness shall be calculated accordingly and submitted for review.
3.
Asbestos in any quantity in insulating material is not permitted.
4.
Provide insulation materials, adhesives, coatings, sealants, fitting covers, and other accessories with a fire hazard rating not to exceed 25 for flame spread, 25 for fuel contributed and 50 for smoke developed, except for materials listed as follows:
5.
•
a.
Nylon anchors for installing insulation to equipment.
b.
Treated wood blocks.
Flame-proofing treatments subject to moisture damage are not permitted. TABLE 1- MINIMUM PIPING INSULATION THICKNESS (lJ Insulation Thickness Required (in inches)
Piping System Type
Temp. Range (degrees F)
Run outs up to 2
1 and less
1.25 to 2
2.5 to 4
5 to 6
8 and larger
1.5
1.5
1.5
(2)
Service Water Heating Systems (recirculating, piping supply and return) Hot Water
Up to 180
0.5
1.0
1.0
NOTES: (1) For piping exposed to ambient temperatures, increase thickness by 0.5 inch. (2) Runouts to individual terminal units, not exceeding 12 feet in length.
•
B.
Lagging Adhesives: Shall be nonflammable and fire-resistant and shall have a maximum flame spread index of 25 and a maximum smoke developed index of 50 when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. Insulation finished with canvas shall be provided with laps adhered in accordance to manufacturer's recommendation. A finish coat of same material shall be applied to entire outer surface of lagging cloth at coverage specified by manufacturer.
C.
Canvas Jackets: Provide 6 ounce, in accordance with square foot minimum, 48 by 48 thread count canvas jacketing.
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 PLUMBING INSULATION 22 0700-4
111001
•
D.
•
Insulation Jackets: 1.
Exterior insulation exposed to weather shall be weatherproofed with Childers aluminum jacketing as basis of design, or Pabco, RPR, or equal. Jacketing shall be manufactured from 1100, 3105 or 5010 aluminum alloy with 3/16 inch corrugations. Smooth or embossed jackets may be permitted in special situations to match an existing installation. Jacketing shall be furnished with an integrally bonded moisture barrier over entire surface in contact with insulation. A minimum thickness of 0;0 16 aluminum jacketing is to be provided on ducts and piping. A minimum thickness of 0.020 shall be provided on tanks, equipment, and heat exchangers.
2.
Insulated elbows, of 90 degrees and 45 degrees, with a nominal iron pipe size of Y2 inch to 8-inch shall be provided with Childers aluminum Ell-Jacs insulation covers as basis of design, or Pabco, RPR, or equal, manufactured from 1100 aluminum alloy of 0.024 inch thickness. Insulated elbows with a nominal pipe size of 10-inch to 18-inch shall be provided with Childers 4piece aluminum Ell-Jacs as basis of design, or Pabco, RPR, or equal.
3.
Tees, Flanges, and Valve Insulation in Conjunction with Aluminum Jacketing: Furnish Childers Aluminum Special Fabrications Insulation Covers as manufactured by Childers Products Company, Pabco, RPR, or equal.
E.
Adhesives: Adhesives shall be water based, UL Classified, meet the requirements ofNFPA 90A and NFPA 90B, have been tested according to relevant ASTM requirements, and be acceptable to the State Fire Marshal. Name, type and method of installation shall be submitted for review.
F.
Valve and Fitting Cover: When installed in conjunction with PVC jacketing, furnish Zeston 25/50 rated polyvinyl chloride fitting covers as manufactured by Johns Manviiie, Knauf Insulation, Speed line, or equal. DOMESTIC HOT WATER PIPING SYSTEM INSULATION
2.02 A.
General: Insulate domestic hot water supply and return piping, including valves, strainers and fittings with insulation thickness as indicated on Table 1.
B.
Materials: I.
Classes oflnsulation: a.
•
Class A: Glass fiber molded pipe insulation suitable for service temperatures up to 850 degrees F. Pipe insulation shall be one piece, preformed, and provide a minimum R factor of 4.0 at 75 degrees F
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 PLUMBING INSULATION 22 0700-5
111001
•
mean temperature. Insulation shall be faced with all-purpose fire retardant vapor barrier jacket. Pipe insulation shall be Johns Manville Micro-Lok, Knauf Redi-Klad 1000, Owens Coming FIBERGLAS Pipe Insulation SSL II-ASJ, or equal.
•
2.
b.
Class B: Flexible open-cell melamine (foam insulation) suitable for service temperature -150 degrees F to 400 degrees F. Thermal conductivity at 75 degrees F, K= 0.26. Pipe insulation, one-piece pre-formed, laminated to heavy non-reinforced PVC jacket, with locking track, factory installed to jacket, to snap insulation and jacket onto pipe. Similar to TechLite 079 Series as manufactured by Accessible Products Co., or equal. Installation shall comply with manufacturers recommendations.
c.
Class C: Mineral fiber pipe insulation suitable for service temperatures up to 1200 degrees F. Pipe insulation shall be onepiece, preformed up to 3 inches thick, and provide a minimum R factor of 4.0 at 75 degrees F mean temperature. Insulation shall be faced with all-purpose fire-retardant vapor barrier jacket. Pipe insulation shall be 8 pounds in accordance with cubic foot density by Roxul Techton 1200, Fibrex COREPLUS 1200, Industrial Insulation Group, LLC (IIG) MinWool-1200, or equal.
Locations and Class oflnsulation Required: TABLE 2- LOCATIONS AND CLASS OF INSULATION REQUIRED LOCATION
CLASS OF INSULATION
Equipment Room
A, Bore
Other Locations
A, B orC
3.
Fittings on indoor piping shall be covered with flush, hand-wrapped Class A, B, or C insulation, to match the adjoining pipe insulation and covered with polyvinyl chloride fitting covers: Zeston 2000 25/50 by Johns Manville, Knauf Insulation Proto PVC Fitting Cover, Speedline Polyco Smoke Safe, or equal.
4.
Adhesive: Fibrous Adhesive to bond calcium silicate to itself and nonporous surfaces.
PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01
•
INSTALLATION
8736 CORWIN THEATER REP AIR & P .0. T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES IDGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 PLUMBING INSULATION 22 0700-6
111001
•
A.
Except as specified herein, install material in accordance with recommendations of manufacturer. Do not install insulation materials until tests specified in other sections are completed. Remove foreign material such as rust, scale, or dirt. Surfaces shall be clean and dry. Maintain insulation clean and dry at all times.
B.
On cold surfaces where a vapor barrier must be provided and maintained, insulation shall be installed with a continuous, unbroken moisture and vapor seal. Hangers, supports, anchors, or other projections that are fastened to cold surfaces shall be insulated and vapor sealed to prevent condensation.
C.
Surface finishes shall be extended in such a manner as to protect raw edges, ends, and surfaces of insulation.
D.
Pipe or duct insulation shall be continuous through walls, ceiling or floor openings, or sleeves; except where firestop or firesafing materials are required.
E.
Metal shields shall be installed between hangers or supports and the p1pmg insulation. Rigid insulation inserts shall be installed between the pipe and the insulation shields. Inserts shall be of equal thickness to adjacent insulation and shall be vapor sealed accordingly.
F.
Insulation shall not be installed in the following locations unless otherwise noted:
• 3.02
1.
On unions, flanged connections or valve handles.
2
Over edges of any manhole, clean-out hole, clean-out plug, and to restrict opening or identification of access.
3.
Over any label or stamp indicating make, approval, rating, inspection, or similar data, unless provision is made for identification and access to label or stamp.
INSTALLATION INSULATION
DOMESTIC
HOT
WATER
PIPING
SYSTEM
A.
General: Domestic hot water, tempered water supply and return p1pmg and condensate return piping, after having been tested, shall be cleaned and insulated.
B.
Application: Insulate condensate return piping, domestic hot water supply and return, including tempered supply and return piping in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and as specified herein.
1.
•
OF
Install insulation on valve bodies up to valve bonnet. Fill void in saddles, in accordance with Section 22 0513: Basic Plumbing Materials and Methods, with insulation and seal joints .
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 PLUMBING INSULATION 22 0700-7
111001
•
2.
C.
•
Insulation Jackets in Exposed Indoor Locations: 1.
Cover completed insulation with canvas jacket tightly pasted to covering with lagging adhesive. Lap jacket seams 1 1/2-inch minimum. Finish entire jacket with coating of undiluted adhesive.
2.
Equivalent factory applied pre-sized, glass fiber reinforced, or glass fiber jackets may be furnished. Seal jacket seams with adhesive in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
3.
Johns Manville Zeston 2000, Knauf Insulation Proto PVC Fitting Cover, Speedline Polyco Smoke Safe, or equal, fitting covers may be furnished, with molded or segmented insulation equal to specified insulation applied to fittings. Secure covers in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
4.
In addition to above requirements, cover exposed insulated piping within a distance of 8 feet above floors with 26 gage galvanized steel jacket. Omit jacket in areas accessible only to maintenance personnel, such as mechanical equipment rooms, utility corridors, accessible pipe tunnels and manholes .
D.
Concealed Indoor Locations: Cover insulation over fittings, valves, and strainers with canvas. Provide pipe insulation with factory or field applied standard jacket of 4 ounce minimum canvas, fiberglass cloth, or glass fiber reinforced jacket. Seal jacket laps with adhesive in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
E.
Exposed Outdoors: In addition to canvas or fiberglass cloth cover, pipe insulation exposed to weather shall be provided with an additional 0.016 inches thick aluminum jacket with 2-inch lap connected with one inch hem overlap joint located on side of pipe and turned down to shed water. Jacket shall be strapped 12 inches on center with Yz-inch wide stainless steel strapping and wing seals. Aluminum jacket shall be mitered to fit fittings. CLEANUP
3.03 A.
Remove rubbish, debris, and waste materials and legally dispose of off the Project site. PROTECTION
3.04 A.
•
Install insulating material to fittings, valves, and strainers and smooth to thickness of adjacent covering. Leave strainer clean-out plugs accessible. Covers fabricated from polyvinyl chloride shall be furnished.
Protect the Work of this Section until Substantial Completion.
~1~ 8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 PLUMBING INSULATION 22 0700-8
140214
•
SECTION 22 1000 PLUMBING
PART 1 - GENERAL SUMMARY
1.01
•
A.
Section Includes: Labor, materials, tools, and equipment to install plumbing systems as indicated.
B.
Related Sections:
2.
Section 07 9200: Joint Sealants.
3.
Section 22 0500: Common Work Results for Plumbing.
4.
Section 22 0513: Basic Plumbing Materials and Methods.
5.
Section 22 0553: Identification for Plumbing piping and Equipment .
6.
Section 22 0700: Plumbing Insulation.
A.
Provide in accordance with Division 01 and Section 22 0500: Common Work Results for Plumbing.
B.
Provide necessary documentation to Owner for processing rebates for water efficient fixtures. QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.03
•
Division 01 -General Requirements.
SUBMITTALS
1.02
1.04
1.
A.
Unless otherwise noted, the California Plumbing Code is hereby made part of this section.
B.
Conform to provisions of Section 22 0500: Common Work Results for Plumbing.
c.
Manufacturer of plumbing products must have ANSI/NSF Standard 61, Section 9 certification to demonstrate compliance with the federal requirements for lead contribution to drinking water, Safe Drinking Water Act SDWA and AB 1953. PRODUCT HANDLING
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR& P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
02/14/2014 PLUMBING 22 1000-1
140214
•
A.
Conform to provisiOns of Section 22 0513: Methods.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.01
PIPING SYSTEMS A.
Materials: Refer to Section 22 0513: Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods.
B.
Insulation for Piping: Refer to Section 22 0700: Plumbing Insulation. FIXTURES AND DRAINS
2.02 A.
General: Fixtures specified shall be furnished complete with trim and fittings. Cast iron plumbing fixtures shall be acid resistant enamel, and identified by casting letters "AR" or words "acid-resistant" into metal. Fixtures shall be white unless otherwise specified. Cast iron fixtures shall be white enamel inside and on back, rim and apron, with exposed unfinished surfaces painted white. Fixtures of same general classifications shall be of same make.
B.
Finished Brass:
• C.
1.
Unless otherwise specified, finished brass of a similar type shall be of same manufacturer and model throughout buildings.
2.
Finished and exposed brass equipment, except floor, shower and urinal drains shall be chromium-plated and polished. Floor, shower and urinal drains, unless otherwise specified, shall be nickel-bronze metal.
Traps, Trap Arms and Tailpieces: 1.
2.
•
Basic Plumbing Materials and
Fixture traps shall be all cast brass, chromium-plated and polished. Exceptions as follows: a.
Traps that are an integral part of a fixture.
b.
Traps concealed in floors, walls and furring.
c.
Traps standard for service sinks and Industrial Shop equipment.
d.
Laboratory traps and tailpieces shall be as specified in Section 22 0700, Basic Plumbing Materials and Methods.
Concealed traps and 17 gage tailpieces may be rough brass finish, except as otherwise specified. Laboratory traps and tailpieces shall be as specified in Section 22 0700, Basic Plumbing Materials and Methods. Furnish
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
02/14/2014 PLUMBING 22 1000-2
140214
•
chromium-plated and polished cast brass wall flanges with set screws and chromium-plated and polished brass casing on discharge side of each trap. 3.
D.
• 2.03
Tailpieces shall be not lighter than 17 gage, brass, chromium-plated, and polished. Furnish and install chromium brass plated wall flanges with set screws and chromium-plated 20 gage brass casing on discharge side of each chrome-plated all cast trap.
Fixture Supplies: 1.
Supplies to lavatories shall be furnished with chromium-plated and polished screwed type angle compression stops with square shank stems and lock shields extending beyond stem. Instead of solid supply piping, polished chrome-plated risers of 3/8 inch outside diameter with ferrule stop end and metal nosepiece may be furnished. The installation of braided stainless or easy hooker's supplies is not permitted. Exception: Supplies that rise vertically from floor shall be furnished with straight type instead of angle type stops.
2.
Each supply or pipe that penetrates a finished surface and plumbing pipes passing through a countertop or part of a cabinet shall be furnished with a chromium-plated brass flange except flanges furnished by manufacturer of flush valves as an assembly .
3.
Water supplies of plumbing fixtures shall be protected against back siphonage in event of a vacuum in piping system.
4.
Discharge outlets of supply faucets for lavatories and sinks shall clear top of overflow rim by at least one inch.
5.
Toilet and urinal flush valves shall be furnished with recognized atmospheric vacuum breakers, installed a minimum of 6 inches above fixture.
ACCESS PLATES A.
Schedule Numbers:
AP-1: Square, unless otherwise noted, steel, prime coated; frame, 18 gage minimum. Door shall be 16 gage minimum with concealed hinge or be removable, with vandal-proof lock operated by Allen wrench.
•
SMITH
ZURN
ELMDOR
MILK OR
WATTS
MIFAB
JOSAM
Fig 4760 AK
Z-1462-VP
DW-AKL
MORDW AK1
C0-300-S-6
UA-A
58650-VP OR EQUAL
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR& P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
02/14/2014 PLUMBING 22 1000-3
140214
•
AP-2: Round type, stainless steel, vandal-proof, 5116 inch No. 18 or 1/4 inch No. 20 flathead machine screw into cleanout plug. Plate shall be prirrie coated minimum 18 gage steel or polished chrome-plated brass, 18-8 No. 302 stainless steel, or polished nickel bronze. SMITH
ZURN
JOSAM
WADE
WATTS
MIFAB
4710U
Z-1469-VP
58600
8480R
C0-480-RD-6
C1400-RD-6
OR EQUAL
AP-3: Square, polished face chrome-plated bronze, aluminum alloy or brass chrome-plated brass frame with 14 gage polished 18-8 No. 302 stainless steel or brass chromeplated secured cover with vandal-proof screws. SMITH
ZURN
WADE
WATTS
MIFAB
JOSAM
4735U
Z-1460-VP
58630
C0-300-S-6
C1400-S-3-6
58640-VP
2.04
•
OR EQUAL
CLEANOUT ASSEMBLIES A.
Cleanout plug shall be line size.
B.
Schedule Numbers:
CO-l: Iron body cleanout tee full line size up to 4 inches and round access plate, plugs shall be brass, countersunk with tapped boss for 5/16 inch No. 18 or V4 inch No. 20 screws. AB&I and TYLER may be used as iron body cleanouts. Trim and accessories shall be Smith or Zum or equal. SMITH
ZURN
WATTS
MIFAB
JOSAM
4532-U
Z-1446-BP
C0-460-RD-348
C1460-RD-6
58600-CO
OR EQUAL
C0-2: Iron body with approved UPC plug, top and adjustable sleeve, cut-off ferrule, polished scoriated brass nickel bronze secured cover. AB&I and TYLER may be used as iron body cleanouts. Trim and accessories shall be Smith or Zum or equal Square: SMITH
ZURN
WATTS
MIFAB
JOSAM
4053L-U-NB
ZN-1400-T
C0-200-S
C 1220-S-1-61
55000-1-SQ
OR EQUAL
Round:
•
SMITH
ZURN
WATTS
MIFAB
JOSAM
4033-L-U-NB
ZN-1400
C0-200-R
C1220-1-6
55000-1
OR EQUAL
C0-3: Raised threaded head brass plug .
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES lllGH SCHOOL
02/14/2014 PLUMBING 22 1000-4
140214
•
FAUCETS
2.05 A.
Access compliant faucets: Force to activate controls shall be no greater than 5 pounds. Self closing metering, where specified, to remain open 10 seconds minimum when activated.
B.
See plumbing fixture schedule on Sheet POOl.
2.06
FLOOR DRAINS A.
See plumbing fixture schedule on Sheet POO 1.
FD-1: Cast iron body, no hub with seepage pan and flat, round nickel bronze strainers not less than 5-inch diameter for 2-inch outlet bodies, 7-inch for 3-inch outlet bodies and 8-inch for 4-inch outlet bodies, with maximum of Yz inch square holes or slots not larger than 114 inch by 1 114-inch. 2.07
FLUSH VALVE ASSEMBLY A.
See plumbing fixture schedule on Sheet POOl: Valves shall be furnished so that flush will remain constant and not require any adjustment .
•
1.
Each flush valve shall be provided with a loose key, square shank, lock shield angle service stop connected to flush valve with a union connection.
2.
Provide 17 gage pressed brass escutcheons for wall and fixture. Escutcheons shall be fastened to not turn or rattle.
3.
Each flush valve shall be furnished with a vacuum breaker providing one inch opening to atmosphere, which will not leak under any degree of back pressure and will not restrict rate of flow more than 10% at I 0 pounds pressure and will operate noiselessly.
4.
Tailpiece shall be not lighter than 17 gage, and shall be part of flush valve assembly.
5.
Exposed metal parts of flush valve assembly shall be nickel or chromiumplated on a brass or copper base.
FL V-1 :Manual Flush Valve for water closet shall deliver 1.28 gallon of water at each operation. 2.08
•
LAVATORIES
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR& P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
02/14/2014 PLUMBING 22 1000-5
140214
•
A.
Access compliant faucets for Lavatories: Force to activate controls shall be no greater than 5 pounds. Self closing metering, when specified, to remain open 10 seconds minimum when activated.
B.
Cast Iron Lavatories shall be acid resistant enamel, and shall conform to Commercial Standards CS 77.63. Unites furnished in conjunction with strainer installation or faucet installation shall be brass. Exposed brass nuts shall be chrome plated.
C.
Exposed trim shall be free from sharp edges or points. Fixture shall be furnished with other listed manufacturer specified trim. Instead of solid supply pipe, polished chrome-plated risers, 3/8 inch outside diameter with ferrule stop end and metal nosepiece may be furnished.
D.
Insulate cold water, hot water and drain lines under all access compliant lavatories with approved type insulation. See plumbing fixture schedule on Sheet POO 1.
L-1:
20-inch by 18-inch cast iron, acid-resistant enamel punched with three holes, 4-inch on center and supplied with tempered or cold water only. Unit shall be furnished with cast iron hangers. Stops shall be loose key, square shank, lock shield type.
2.09
•
PIPE HANGERS
A.
Refer to Section 22 0513, Basic Plumbing Materials and Methods. 1.
PH-1: Complete with clamps, inserts, etcetera. SUPERSTRUT
2.10
UNISTRUT
8-LINE
TOLCO
OR EQUAL
P-TRAPS PT-1: Cast brass complete, chrome-plated.
2.11
ZURN
AB&A
KOHLER
Z-8712-LC
107
K-9018
OR EQUAL
STOP VALVES
A.
Stops shall be loose key type, Yz-inches IPS inlet and outlet chrome-plated brass casting, except as noted.
STY -1: Angle:
•
CHICAGO,
CRANE
NIB CO
442-LKABCP
8.5113.
77
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
OR EQUAL
02/14/2014 PLUMBING 22 1000-6
140214
•
THERMOSTATIC MIXING VALVE ASSEMBLIES (TMV A)
2.12 A.
See plumbing fixture schedule on Sheep POO 1.
B.
General: Valve bodies shall be cast brass or bronze valve assembly provided with holding bracket and shall be installed on wall bracket. Valve shall be rough brass or bronze satin sprayed finish unless otherwise noted. Assembly shall include a 3 5/8inch diameter dial thermometer, color-coded with white face and black letters. The temperature range between 100 degrees F. and 150 degrees F. shall be background in red or red line enclosed. Valve complete with fail safe feature, square shank loose key stops, checks and strainers on both hot and cold water inlets and shutoff valve on outlet. Valves shall be sized on a 45 psig (maximum) pressure drop at the following flow rates:
TMVA-1: 5 to 15 GPM. TRAP PRIMERS
2.13 A.
•
See plumbing fixture schedule on Sheet POO 1. A TP-1: Automatic, multi-trap primer, cast bronze with access panel. Pressure drop of three p.s.i. shall activate trap seal primers. Manufactured by MIF AB, or equal. (Installed in accessible location.) WATER CLOSETS
2.14 A.
General: Water closets shall be vitreous china with Polyvinyl chloride bolt caps. Fixtures with auto-flush valves shall be provided with manual override button.
B.
See plumbing fixture schedule on Sheet POOl. WATER HAMMER ARRESTORS
2.15 A.
See plumbing fixture schedule on Sheet POOl.
WHA-1: Headers for Lavatories, Wash Sinks, Wash Fountains, Kitchen Sinks, Service Sinks, Urinals and Water Closets. For sizing purposes size according to manufacturer's recommendations. FIXTURE CONNECTIONS
2.16
A.
Branches to individual fixtures shall be of sizes as indicated on Drawings.
PART 3- EXECUTION
•
3.01
EXAMINATION
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES IDGH SCHOOL
02114/2014 PLUMBING 22 1000-7
140214
•
A.
3.02
INSTALLATION A.
•
•
Examine areas and conditions under which Work of this section will be performed. Correct conditions detrimental to proper and timely completion of Work. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
General: 1.
Unless otherwise specified, plumbing fixtures, equipment and appliances that require connections to plumbing line shall be connected. This shall include fixtures specified or indicated as furnished by others, furnished by Owner, or specified in other related sections. Install supplies, stops, valves, traps, wall flanges, or pipe casing for connection of this equipment.
2.
Install equipment as indicated on reviewed and accepted Shop Drawings.
3.
Avoid interference with Work of other trades. Do not deviate from Drawings without review of the Architect.
B.
Examination: Check each piece of equipment in system for defects verifying that parts are properly furnished and installed.
C.
For piping Work, refer to Section 22 0513: Basic Plumbing Materials and Methods .
D.
Plumbing Fixture and Equipment Installation: 1.
Unless otherwise indicated, fixtures shall be installed with 5/16 inch brass bolts or screws of sufficient length to securely fasten fixture to backing, wall, or closet ring.
2.
Fixtures installed against concrete or masonry walls shall have their hangers fastened with 5/16 inch brass bolts, Philip Shield type anchors, or 2 unit cinch anchors. Wood or plastic plugs are not permitted.
3.
Fixtures installed against wood or metal stud walls shall have their hangers fastened to metal backing plates with 5/16 inch brass bolts screwed into plate. Fixture hangers for urinals shall be fastened centered vertically on metal backing plate with three 5/16 brass bolts each for small individual hangers and six, for larger one piece hangers. Lavatories shall be hung with not less than four 5/16 inch brass bolts or not less than five 1/4 inch brass bolts. Each sink hanger shall be hung with not less than four 5/16 inch brass bolt or not less than five 1/4 inch brass bolts.
4.
Backing for hanging of plumbing fixtures and equipment shall be installed in supporting wall at time rough piping is installed. Backing for stud walls shall be steel plate 114 inch thick, not less than 4 inches wide. Backing for
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
02/14/2014 PLUMBING 22 1000-8
140214
•
•
•
urinals shall be 14-inches thick by 6-inch wide steel plate. Steel plate shall be attached to stud at each end of plate and to each stud it crosses. Plate shall be attached to metal studs by bolting with two Y4 inch U-bolts per stud with bolts through plate and around stud flange or by welding with a 1/8 inch fillet weld full width of stud flange, top and bottom of plate. At wood studs, plate shall be carefully recessed flush with face of stud and attached to each stud with 2 No. 14 flat-head wood screws, 2 inches in length into predrilled 1/8 inch holes. Backing for stud walls supporting wall-hung closets shall be as detailed.
E.
5.
Rough-in for fixtures, equipment and appliances shall be as indicated on Drawings and as specified, including those items indicated as furnished by others, furnished by Owner, or future capacity. When connections to equipment from capped or plugged lines are required, caps or plugs shall be removed at time equipment is set and stops or valves installed and connections provided as specified.
6.
Piping materials for trap arms shall be Brass, Cast Iron or DWV copper
7.
Piping shall be stubbed out to exact location of fixtures and stubs shall be installed symmetrical with fixtures. Hot and cold water supplies for center set faucets on lavatories shall be installed on 8-inch centers, unless otherwise specified or required .
Cleanouts in Drain, Waste, Vent and Sewer Lines: 1.
Cleanouts shall be installed at locations stated in the California Plumbing Code and accessible at following locations: a.
At locations above first floor as stated on construction documents and 5 feet outside of the building.
b.
Install an accessible main line upper terminal cleanout in all restrooms above water closet over flow. (Install above upper terminal water closet where there are more than one water closet in a restroom).
c.
Above overflow level of pot sinks with brass plug.
d.
At upper end of a horizontal vent line when any part of horizontal line is below overflow level of fixture it serves.
e.
Not to exceed 100-foot intervals in sewer and waste lines exterior of building.
f.
At property line connection .
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
02/14/2014 PLUMBING 22 1000-9
140214
•
•
•
g. 2.
Where indicated on Drawings .
Cleanouts shall be extended to grade as follows: a.
Not to exceed I 00-foot intervals in straight runs of pipe outside buildings.
b.
At horizontal changes of direction m aggregate greater than 135 degrees (underground).
c.
At property lines.
d.
Where cleanouts occur under concrete.
e.
Where marked for future connections.
3.
Cleanouts in building shall be extended to floor level or above floor level or above floor level in walls or furring when cleanouts are not accessible or where clearance is less than 18 inches.
4.
Cleanouts in floors of covered areas and those extended to grade in concrete areas shall be floor level type with extensions body brass plugs and detachable nickel-bronze or aluminum alloy scoriated.
5.
Concealed cleanouts in vertical lines shall be service weight soil cleanout tees with brass plugs and round cover plates unless otherwise specified or indicated. A snug fitting sleeve of galvanized sheet metal shall be placed around hub of tee and shall extend to flush with finished soil, or cleanout shall be extended to finished wall.
6.
Cleanouts extended from below floor to a wall or furring or on horizontal lines above floor that terminate at a wall or furring shall be iron body type with brass plugs and round cover plates.
7.
Cover plates over cleanouts in painted walls shall be steel, bonderized and prime coated. Cover plates cover cleanouts in tile walls shall be chromiumplated brass or nickel bronze. Plates shall be attached to cleanout plugs with 5/16 inch No. 18 or 1/4 inch No. 20 stainless steel vandal-prooftype screws. Plates shall be one inch larger in diameter than fitting opening.
8.
Cleanouts at bases of downspouts shall be tapped soil tees with brass plugs as hereinafter specified, full size of line.
9.
Cleanouts extended to grade in exterior sewer lines other than floors or concrete areas shall be a cleanout assembly with secured top, extra heavy
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR& P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
02/14/2014 PLUMBING 22 1000-10
140214
•
duty, adjustable sleeve, cut-off ferrule, countersunk threaded brass plug and scoriated tractor type cover.
A.
11.
Cleanout extensions shall be no-hub cast iron soil pipe. Exterior cleanouts, those in concrete excepted, shall terminate in a 14-inch by 6-inch thick concrete block with cleanout assembly and top of block flush with finish grade.
12.
Fittings in lines utilized as cleanouts shall be approved soil fittings including no-hub pipe. Tees and crosses in vent headers excepted.
13.
Pipe joint compound shall not be installed on cleanout plug. After lines are tested and approved, each cleanout plug shall be removed, greased, and replaced.
Perform trenching, excavation, and backfilling required for Work of this section as specified herein and in Section 31 2323, Excavating, Backfilling, and Compacting for Utilities. SERVICE CONNECTIONS
3.04 A.
Determine exact location of required water, drain, and sewer connections and provide proper connections.
B.
Potable water lines shall be purged completely before connecting to sources of water for the Project. Determine quality of water supply before connection. WATER HAMMER ARRESTORS
3.05 A.
B.
•
Other cleanouts shall be iron body type.
EXCAVATION, TRENCHING AND BACKFILLING
3.03
•
10.
Install water hammer arrestors indicated on Drawings and in following locations (only non-ferrous arrestors may be installed in copper water system): I.
Water lines to lavatory headers, water closet and urinal headers, service sinks, kitchen sinks, wash fountains, drinking fountains, laboratories with medical type faucets and on wash sinks having three or more stations and all other quick closing fixture such as clothes washers, as close to fixture as possible.
2.
Between last two fixtures when three or more fixtures, other than those listed in Number I above, are served by a common header.
When possible, arrestor shall be installed in wall or furring. When arrestor is installed in wall or furring, furnish an access plate large enough to permit removal
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR& P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
02114/2014 PLUMBING 22 1000-11
140214
•
of arrestor. Access plate shall be a minimum of 2 inches larger in each direction than the arrestor.
c. 3.06
CLEANING- PLUMBING PIPING SYSTEMS AND FIXTURES
A.
Plumbing lines and fixtures shall be flushed to remove dirt and foreign material until water runs clear and no foreign substance or odor is present. Strainers and screens on faucets shall be removed during this cleaning operation.
B.
After satisfactory cleaning of strainer and screen replacements has been witnessed by the Project Inspector, post and maintain signs stating: "CAUTION - Water at this construction project has not yet been certified for human consumption." Signs shall be furnished with letters at least 112 inch in height, and shall be conspicuously posted at entrances to the Project site. Signs shall be paneled, black and yellow, in conformance with OSHA Section I9IO.I455.
3.07
•
Fixture water lines shall be provided with mechanical water arrestor hammer dampening devices. Air chambers are not approved.
DISINFECTING DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SYSTEMS A.
Newly installed or replaced piping and/or fixtures dispensing potable water shall be disinfected and undergo an approved bacteriological analyses before water system is allowed for public use .
B.
Work shall be performed by Technicians Certified by the American Water Works Association (A WW A) and/or the State of California Department Health Services, Grade II Water Treatment Operator Certification or higher issued by the Department of Health Services (DHS) for the State of California. Comply with Title 22, Code of Regulations Division 4, Chapter I3, and Article 2 Operator Certification Grades.
C.
Method:
D.
I.
System is to be flushed to remove any materials that may have entered the system.
2.
Using a chemical feed metering pump and a chlorine tank, the chlorine solution is injected into the water system.
Disinfection and De-chlorination procedure (24 or 3 Hour Contact Time): I.
24-hour Test Method: a.
•
Prior to disinfection, post signs on all water outlets of the system to be disinfected. Sign or tags shall read, "Water System Being Chlorinated- "Danger Do Not Drink Water" or similar warning .
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR& P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
02/14/2014 PLUMBING 22 1000-12
140214
•
• 2.
•
b.
Piping system shall then be adequately flushed with water to remove any particles and eliminate air pockets.
c.
Using the continuous feed method, sodium hypochlorite conforming to ANSI/ A WW A B300 will be injected into the water system at a minimum of 50 PPM. A water flow meter provided by the water treatment technician will be used to determine the rate of injection and a chlorine test kit, Hach or equivalent, will be used to monitor the residual.
d.
Chlorine residual test will be taken at all appropriate points and outlets to verify 50 PPM residual levels.
e.
The chlorinated system shall be shut down for any use and the chlorinated water shall remain in the water system for retention of 24 hours.
f.
After 24 hours, chlorine residual levels will again be tested at various points throughout the system to insure a minimum of 25 PPM residual. If the system has not met the minimum of a 25 PPM residual, the above disinfection process shall be repeated.
g.
After satisfactory completion of the residual testing, flush out system until Hach or equivalent test reveal the water outlets have a free chlorine residual concentration less than 0.5 PPM. The procedure shall be in accordance with the A WW A standard C651-05.
h.
The OAR may allow temporary use of the water system for construction purposes pending results of the bacteriological test analysis. Sign or Tags shall be left on all outlets stating water system is not safe for consumption until laboratory results are complete and meet these specifications.
3-Hour Test Method: a.
If the water systems must be turned on for use as soon as possible, a 3 hours chlorine contact time to allow for disinfection is permitted with the OAR's approval.
b.
Prior to disinfection, post signs on all water outlets of the system to be disinfected. Sign or tags shall read, "Water System Being Chlorinated- "Danger Do Not Drink Water" or similar warning.
c.
Piping system shall be then adequately flushed with water to remove any particles and eliminate air pockets. Using the continuous feed method, sodium hypochlorite conforming to ANSI/ A WW A B300
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
02114/2014 PLUMBING 22 1000-13
140214
•
will be injected into the water system at a minimum of 200 PPM. A water flow meter provided by the water treatment technician will be used to determine the rate of injection and a chlorine test kit, Hach or equivalent, will be used to monitor the residual.
E.
•
3.08
•
d.
Chlorine residual test will be taken at all appropriate points and outlets to verify 200 PPM levels. The chlorinated system shall be shut down for any use and the chlorinated water shall remain in the water system for retention of 3 hours.
e.
After satisfactory completion of a 3-hour disinfection period, flush out system until Hach or equivalent test reveal the water outlets have a free chlorine residual concentration less than 0.5 PPM. The procedure shall be in accordance with the A WW A standard C651-05.
f.
The OAR may allow temporary use of the water system for construction purposes pending results of the bacteriological test analysis. Sign or Tags shall be left on all outlets stating water system is not safe for consumption until laboratory results are complete and meet these specifications.
Bacteriological Test: 1.
After final flushing and satisfactory results from the residual free chlorine concentration test, Bacteriological test samples shall be collected. The intent of the following is to provide insurance for an accurate representation to a complete Bacteriological test of the water system. At least two samples shall be taken from each floor of each building.
2.
Bacteriological test samples shall be delivered to a State of California Department of Health Services Certified Laboratory to perform qualitative and quantitative bacterial analyses on the water samples for the presence of any Total Coliform bacteria and Plate Count. This count must be less than 500 cfu/mL.
3.
The procedure shall be repeated if it shown by bacteriological examination made by an approved agency that the level of Disinfection does not meet these specifications.
4.
After satisfactory results for the bacteriological test are provided to the OAR, warning sign or tags shall be removed.
VALVES ON PLUMBING SYSTEM
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
02/14/2014 PLUMBING 22 1000-14
140214
•
A.
Furnish and install gates, ball, globes, angles, and check valves on plumbing Work at following locations whether indicated on drawings or not.
B.
Hot and cold valves shall be:
C.
• A.
2.
Above the ground copper water system, 2-inch and larger, may utilize Victaulic butterfly valves and fittings for their connections. A 2-inch or larger Victaulic valve may be in a wall if an adequately sized access panel is provided for maintenance or removal.
Valves shall be accessible and installed within an access panel approximately 3 feet above floor and no more than 7 feet above floor, or in a marked yard box to prevent tampering. 1.
For restrooms, a ball valve shall be installed in each restroom to isolate the hot and cold water supply into a restroom regardless of the number of fixtures. These valves shall control and be accessible only from within the restroom in which fixtures are installed. Valves shall be installed on the same wall as the group of fixtures it serves. Valves shall control only fixtures in restroom in which they are installed. Back to back restrooms shall be isolated separately and individually .
2.
Install a ball valve on each building branch line, which serves two or more fixtures, when these fixtures are not provided with a group isolation valve as specified above. These valves shall be located approximately 3 feet but not more than 7 feet above finish floor.
3.
Install a lose key angle stop, on each exposed fixture supply, and for each flush valve unless otherwise specified,
4.
Provide a handle or a key for each five, or fraction thereof, loose key valves, bibs, or stops and deliver them to the project OAR.
Minimum depth of below grade sewer lines shall be 24 inches to centerline of pipe. Sewer lines shall slope Y4 inch per foot minimum, unless otherwise indicated. Minimum depth at Owner property line shall be 6 feet, unless otherwise required. CLEANUP
3.10 A.
•
Lead free complying with AB 1953.
DEPTH OF SEWER LINES
3.09
3.11
I.
Remove rubbish, debris, and waste materials and legally dispose off project site. PROTECTION
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR& P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
02114/2014 PLUMBING 22 1000-15
140214
•
A.
Protect Work of this section until Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION
•
•
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
02/14/2014 PLUMBING 22 1000-16
111001
•
SECTION 23 0500 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC PART I- GENERAL SUMMARY
I.OI A.
Section Includes: 1.
B.
Related Requirements: I.
Division 0 I: General Requirements.
2.
Division 26: Electrical.
REGULA TORY REQUIREMENTS
1.02 A.
•
This Section provides the basic mechanical requirements that apply to the Work of Division 23.
Materials, fabrication, equipment, and installation shall comply with industry standards and code requirements. Where manufacturer's recommendations exceed industry standards, the manufacturer's recommendation shall establish the minimum standard. As a minimum, standards from the following organizations shall apply: 1.
AMCA -Air Movement and Control Association.
2.
ANSI -American National Standards Institute .
3.
ASME - American Society of Mechanical Engineers. a.
ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.
b.
ASME B3 I - Code for Pressure Piping.
4.
AHRI -Air-Conditioning, Heating, and Refrigeration Institute.
5.
ASHRAE - American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers.
6.
ASTM - American Society for Testing and Materials. a.
•
ASTM A53- Specification for Welded and Seamless Pipe.
7.
CSA- Canadian Standards Association.
8.
FM Global - Factory Mutual Global
9.
IAPMO- International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials.
10.
NFPA- National Fire Protection Association.
I I.
OSHA - Occupational Safety and Health Administration.
I2.
SMACNA- Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association.
I3.
UL- Underwriters Laboratories Inc.
14.
Intertek (ETL Certification) .
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/201 I COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HV AC 23 0500-1
111001
B.
•
1.
CBC, California Building Code, and CMC, California Mechanical Code. a.
•
Latest edition as adopted by the City of Los Angeles, the County of Los· Angeles, and the State of California including amendments effective on the Effective Date of the Contract.
2.
California Code of Regulations, Title 8, Industrial Relations, Division 1, Chapter 4, Division of Industrial Safety.
3.
OSHA- Occupational Safety and Health Administration.
4.
CDPH- California Department of Public Health.
5.
SCAQMD- South Coast Air Quality Management District.
C.
Specifications or Drawings shall not be construed to permit deviation from the requirements of governing codes unless approval has been obtained from legally constituted authorities having jurisdiction, and the Architect. The Contract Documents may contain more stringent requirements than those legally required.
D.
Permits and Fees: Refer to the General and Supplementary Conditions. SUBMITTALS
1.03
A.
Provide submittals in accordance with Section 01 3300: Submittal Procedures and with specific requirements of Division 23 sections, as applicable.
B.
After Architect's approval, the above information shall become the basis for inspecting and testing materials and actual installation procedures performed in the Work.
c.
Shop Drawings: Submit one additional copy when control diagrams having line voltage connections are indicated. Shop Drawings shall be specifically prepared for the Work of this Project. Drawings prepared in accordance with requirements of Section 0 1 3113: Project Coordination and Section 01 3300 may be provided by the Architect to serve as a background for the Shop Drawings. Shop Drawings shall comply with the requirements of Section 01 3113 and Section 01 3300 and shall indicate at a minimum:
1.04
•
Materials, fabrication, equipment, and installation shall comply with federal, state, and local codes including, but not limited to, the following:
1.
Complete system layout of equipment, components, ductwork, and piping, indicating service clearances, duct and pipe sizes, fitting types and sizes, top or bottom of duct and pipe elevations, distances of ducts, pipes and equipment from building reference points and hanger I support locations. All the above items shall be coordinated on the shop drawings according to the requirements of Section 01 3113.
2.
Schedule and description of equipment, ductwork, piping, fittings, valves, dampers, and controllers.
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A.
Comply with provisions of Section 01 7700: Contract Closeout.
B.
Project Record Drawings:
8736 CORWfN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HV AC 23 0500-2
111001
• C.
1.
Provide a complete set of mechanical and control system drawings in AutoCAD and, if available, BIM, complete with external reference drawings, fonts, blocks and plotter pen color/line thickness settings on CD-ROM. Also submit one set of full size reproducible plots on vellum and three sets of prints.
2.
Before Contract Completion, deliver corrected and completed prints to the OAR. Delivery of project record documents to the OAR does not relinquish responsibility of furnishing required information omitted from project record documents.
Operation and Maintenance Manuals: I.
Submit operation and maintenance manuals in required form and content. If no revisions are required, furnish one additional copy. If revisions are required, one copy shall be returned with instructions for changes; perform such changes and return manuals. Manuals shall be bound in accordance to Section 01 7700. Deliver manuals to the OAR. Submit an electronic copy of the entire manual in PDF file format.
2.
Contents of Manual: a.
Title sheet with Project name, including names, addresses and telephone number of Contractor, installer, and related equipment suppliers.
b.
Manufacturer's operating instructions including, but not limited to, the following:
• c.
•
I)
Identification of components and controls .
2)
Pre-start checklist and start-up procedures.
3)
Normal operation settings and checklists.
4)
Pre-shut down checklist and shut down procedures.
5)
Trouble shooting checklist and guidelines.
6)
Recommendations for optimum performance.
7)
Warnings and safety precautions on improper or hazardous operational procedures or conditions
Manufacturer's product data and parts and maintenance booklet for each item of equipment furnished under Division 23 that includes the following as a minimum: I)
Manufacturer's model, identification and serial numbers.
2)
Exploded view of assembly drawings identifying each component or part with the relevant part number.
3)
Directory of manufacturer's representatives, service contractors and part distributors.
4)
Maintenance and trouble-shooting instructions, including schedule for preventive maintenance, periodic inspection and cleaning criteria .
8736 CORWlN THEATER REPAlR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC 23 0500-3
111001
•
1.05
1.06
e.
Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing reports: Submit as specified in Section 01 4525.
f.
South Coast Air Quality Management District (SCAQMD) permits to install and operate boilers, water heaters and other fuel burning equipment and third-party source test reports as required by SCAQMD to allow startup and operation of equipment.
g.
Los Angeles County industrial waste permits.
h.
Valve directory complete with location, function, size, and model of each valve with reference to the project record drawings.
1.
Equipment and component identification chart complete with location, function, size, and model of each equipment or component with reference to the project record drawings.
Contract Documents indicate extent and general arrangement of Work under Division 23. Contractor shall coordinate work in accordance with Section 01 3113 requirements and make adjustments as required to provide maximum headroom, a neat arrangement to keep passageways and openings clear to provide accessibility and provisions for maintenance, and to meet code requirements. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Delivery and Storage: Deliver materials to Project site in their original unopened containers with labels intact and legible at time of delivery. Store in strict accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
B.
Do not store plastic pipe or materials in direct sunlight. PRELIMINARY OPERATION
1.07 A.
OAR may require any portion of mechanical Work to be operated before Substantial Completion. Such operation shall be in addition to regular tests, demonstrations and instructions required under the Contract Documents, and shall be performed as required.
B.
Notify the Project Inspector at least 24 hours in advance of lighting or re-lighting pilots.
1.08
TRAINING OF OWNER PERSONNEL A.
•
Project Record Drawings: Complete set of mechanical and control system drawings in 50 percent reduced print format shall be furnished with the manual. Submit the above record drawings on CD-ROM in AutoCAD and, if available, BIM, complete with external reference drawings, fonts, blocks, and plotter pen color/line thickness settings.
COORDINATION A.
•
d.
Training of Owner's personnel shall include: 1.
A minimum of 8 hours of on-site overview of the overall Mechanical System.
2.
Refer to Division 23 sections for specific training on each of the components of the Mechanical System .
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HV AC 23 0500-4
111001
••
4.
A minimum of 40 hours of (in classroom) software training for a minimum of20 LAUSD personnel on EMS/BMS if such systems are utilized in the project. Training shall be conducted at control contractor training facility with computer setup for each person attending.
Contract shall include the cost of training Owner operation and maintenance personnel in operating, adjusting, maintenance, trouble-shooting, and Project site repair of each component, equipment, or system provided under this Contract.
c.
Operational and maintenance training shall be conducted on the Project site, unless indicated otherwise.
D.
Upon completion of Owner training, a completion certificate indicating the nature of the training and a description ofthe systems, complete with equipment and component lists shall be issued to each trainee. The certificate should be issued in duplicate with one copy retained by OAR.
E.
An attendance sheet with the names and signatures of all participants attending the training shall be submitted to the OAR and kept as part of the project documents. GUARANTEES AND DAMAGE RESPONSIBILITY
A.
•
A minimum of 8 hours of on-site overview identifying location and function of all Control Valves and Actuator assemblies .
B.
1.09
•
3.
Sound of water flowing in piping shall not be transmitted to building structure. Operation of mechanical system shall not produce operational sounds that can be heard outside of rooms enclosing apparatus or equipment.
PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01
MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT A.
Unless otherwise specified, materials and equipment shall be new, in good and clean condition. Equipment, materials, and components shall be of the make; type and model number noted on Drawings or specified. Pieces of equipment of the same type shall be by the same manufacturer.
B.
Whenever an item is listed by a single proprietary name, with or without model number and type, it shall be for purpose of design only, to indicate characteristics and quality desired. Proprietary designation listed on Drawings, or listed first in Specifications, is used as a basis for design to establish a standard for quality and performance and space requirements.
C.
HV AC equipment products from different manufacturers are never identical. Equipment approved as being equal is interpreted as being equivalent in capacity, performance and quality. The dimensions, weight, configuration and utility requirements could be quite different from the equipment used as the basis of design. Due to these differences, additional coordination and adjustments by the Contractor are required. For the equipment to be deemed truly equal, the additional coordination and adjustments by the Contractor should not incur any additional cost to the Owner and any additional labor to the design team .
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HV AC 23 0500-5
111001
•
D.
Equipment and materials indicated or required to be installed outdoors shall be of the type that is designed, manufactured, listed or approved by authorities having jurisdiction for outdoor installation by being resistant to the adverse effects of weather. All the additional protective measures against outdoor weather required by the manufacturers' installation instructions and prevalent practice shall be provided.
E.
For substitution of materials or products, refer to the General Conditions.
PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01
SERVICE INTERRUPTIONS, OFF-SITE, GAS AND WATER A.
Schedule Work so there shall be no service interruptions of existing systems or systems during normal hours of operation of affected systems and facilities.
B.
When service interruptions are mandatory, arrange in advance with the OAR as to time and date of such interruptions.
c.
Systems, which are interrupted, shall be returned back into operation in such manner that they will function as originally intended. CUTTING, NOTCHING, AND BACKING
3.02
•
3.03
A.
Conform to California Building Code, Title 24, Part 2, for notches and bored holes in wood and for pipes and sleeves embedded in concrete and for cuts in steel, as detailed on structural Drawings.
B.
Where pipes or ducts pass through, or are located within one inch of any construction element, install a resilient pad, 1/2 inch thick minimum, to prevent contact.
c.
Furnish all necessary provisions for recesses, chases, and accesses and provide blocking and backing as necessary for proper reception and installation of mechanical Work.
TESTS AND TESTING A.
Tests shall be as required under the applicable sections of Division 23, including this Section.
B.
Tests required by other sections of the Contract Documents include the following:
C.
•
D.
1.
Test and balance of mechanical equipment and systems: Refer to Section 01 4525: Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HV AC.
2.
Hydrostatic test of boilers: Refer to Section 01 4525: Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing.
3.
Test of smoke and fire detectors: Refer to Division 26: Electrical.
Additional tests may be required in the case of products, materials, and equipment if: I.
Submitted items are altered, changed, or cannot be determined as exactly conforming to the Contract Documents.
2.
Performance testing and results may also be required on certain items which are as specified, including fan, and pump performance.
Equipment Performance Assurance Tests:
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HJGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HV AC 23 0500-6
111001
•
1.
Before operating any equipment or systems, a thorough check shall be performed to determine that systems have been flushed and cleaned as required and that equipment has been properly installed, aligned, lubricated, and serviced. Factory instructions shall be checked to verify installations have been completed and recommended lubricants have been installed in bearings, gearboxes, crankcases, and similar equipment. Particular care shall be furnished in lubricating bearings to avoid damage by over-lubrication and blowing out seals. Equipment shall also be checked for damage that may have occurred during shipment, after delivery, or during installation. Damaged equipment, products, and materials shall be replaced or repaired as required.
2.
Upon completion of the above, adjust the system settings to within normal operating conditions to prevent the system from being damaged upon start-up.
3.
Run-test the equipment after start-up for five consecutive days. Tests shall include operation of heating, ventilating, and air conditioning equipment and systems for a period of not less than two 8 hour periods at 90 percent of the full specified heating and cooling capacities. If equipment passes, install new filters. If equipment fails, it shall be adjusted and retested until system meets all applicable codes.
4.
Equipment Start-up Reports: For each equipment or system on which start-up is performed, submit 8 copies of start-up report for review by the Architect. a.
• E.
•
The start-up report shall include the manufacturer's standard start-up form completed and signed by the start-up technician.
5.
Provide, maintain, and pay costs for equipment, instruments, and operating personnel as required for specified tests.
6.
Provide electric energy and fuel required for tests.
7.
Final adjustment to equipment or systems shall meet specified performance requirements.
8.
Equipment, systems, or Work deemed defective during testing shall be replaced or corrected as required. Test until satisfactory results are provided.
Specific Coordinated Plan for Test and Balance: 1.
Provide a narrative of the operational intent that clearly describes the function and sequence of operation of each component, equipment, or system installed. Instruct designated Owner personnel in the operation of the installed systems.
2.
Prior to final test and balance, mechanical equipment and systems shall be operated and tested as indicated in Paragraph 3.04.F above to demonstrate satisfactory overall operation of the installed systems.
3.
Immediately before starting tests, air filter media shall be cleaned or renewed. Roll-type filters shall be advanced to provide new clean media. Cleanable type media shall be thoroughly cleaned and re-oiled with new, clean oil as recommended by manufacturer if they are of viscous impingement type. Disposable type filters shall be replaced with new filters. Replaceable media shall be replaced with new media .
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HV AC 23 0500-7
111001
• 3.04
•
An accurate means of measuring air flow and temperatures shall be furnished to balance air supply, return, and exhaust systems so uniform temperatures occur in every room and design airflow is obtained through registers, diffusers, and grilles.
5.
Systems shall be adjusted to provide airflows indicated including maximum fresh air and maximum return air. Dampers shall be checked for proper settings and operation. Air and water inlet and leaving temperatures at coils shall be checked. Complete operational data including airflows, room temperatures, fan speeds, motor currents, plenum, and duct static pressures shall be tabulated.
6.
Welding performed as part of this Division may be subject to radiographic inspections at random in accordance with requirements specified in Section 23 0513: Basic HVAC Materials and Methods.
NOISE AND VIBRATION REDUCTION
A.
Correct noise or vibration caused by mechanical systems. Provide all necessary adjustments to specified and installed equipment and accessories to reduce noise to the lowest possible level
B.
Correct noise or vibration problems caused by failure to install work in accordance with Contract Documents. Include all labor and materials required as a result of such failure. Pay for re-testing of corrected noise or vibration problems by the project acoustical consultant including travel, lodging, test equipment expenses, etc.
3.05
•
4.
PROTECTION, CARE AND CLEANING
A.
In addition to storage criteria of the General Conditions, and provisions under Section 01 5000: Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls, the following shall be provided: 1.
Provide for the safety and good condition of materials and equipment until Substantial Completion. Protect materials and equipment from damage.
2.
Protect installed Work.
3.
Replacements: In case of damage, immediately provide repairs and/or replacements as required.
4.
Protect covering for bearings, open connections to tanks, pipe coils, pumps, compressors and similar equipment.
5.
Interior of ductwork shall be maintained free of dirt, grit, dust, loose insulation, and other foreign materials.
6.
Air handling equipment shall not be operated until building is cleaned and air filters are installed.
7.
Fixtures, piping, finished brass or bronze, and equipment shall have grease, adhesive, labels, and foreign materials removed. Chromium, nickel plate, polished bronze or brass Work shall be polished. Glass shall be cleaned inside and out.
8.
Before initial start-up and again before Substantial Completion, piping shall be drained and flushed to completely remove grease and foreign matter. Pressure regulating assemblies, traps, strainers, boilers, flush valves, and similar items shall be thoroughly cleaned. Tag system with an information tag listing responsible
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HJGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HV AC 23 0500-8
lliOOI
•
party and date of element, before initial start-up and again before Substantial Completion. Compressed air, oil, and gas piping shall be blown out with oil-free compressed air or inert gas. Refrigerant piping shall be cleaned as specified. END OF SECTION
•
•
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HJGH SCHOOL
I 0/0I/20 II COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HV AC 23 0500-9
140326
•
SECTION 23 0513 BASIC HV AC MATERIALS AND METHODS
PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01
SUMMARY A.
Section Includes: 1.
B.
•
1.02
This Section prescribes basic materials and methods generally common to the Work of Division 23.
Related Requirements: 1.
Division 01: General Requirements.
2.
Division 07: Thermal and Moisture Protection: Polyvinyl-Chloride Roofing.
3.
Division 23: Heating, Ventilating, and Air-Conditioning.
4.
Division 26: Electrical.
5.
Section 31 2323: Excavation and Fill for Utilities .
SUBMITTALS
A.
Provide in accordance with Division 01, Section 23 0500 and specific requirements of each section of Division 23. QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.03 A.
Standards: Comply with applicable national, state, and local codes and standards: ASTM, ASME, and ANSI. Federal Specifications, A WW A, CISPI, NFPA, FM Global, UL, CPC (California Plumbing Code), CMC (California Mechanical Code), CSA.
B.
Qualifications of Manufacturer: Products used in the Work of this Section shall be produced by manufacturers regularly engaged in manufacture of similar items and with. a history of successful production as reviewed by the Architect.
1.04.
COORDINATION A.
Coordinate related Work in accordance with provisions of Section 01 3113: Project Coordination.
PART 2- PRODUCTS
•
8736 CORWIN THEATERREPAJR&P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
03/26/2014 BASIC HV AC MATERIALS AND METHODS 23 0513-1
140326
•
GENERAL
2.01 A.
Provide the following products if they are indicated in the Contract Documents or if they are required for the proper installation, function or operation of equipment, systems or components indicated in the Contract Document.
B.
Provide the following products as a complete assembly with required accessories for a complete and functioning entity in compliance with governing codes and applicable standards as specified in Section 23 0500, manufacturer's instructions or as required. 1.
Omission of minor details in the Contract Documents does not waive and/or otherwise relinquish compliance with the above requirements.
MANUFACTURERS AND MATERIALS
2.02 A.
Air and Dirt Separators:
AS-1 Furnish Spirotherm, Bell and Gossett, or Wessels air and dirt separation fitting on the hot water heating system, chilled water system, and closed loop fluid cooler system. Fittings shall be fabricated steel, rated for 150 psig design pressure and selected for less than one foot of water pressure drop and entering velocity not to exceed 4 feet per second at specified GPM. Performance curves from the unit manufacturer shall be furnished as part of the submittal for each unit. Units shall be furnished with internal copper coalescing medium to facilitate maximum air and dirt separation and suppress turbulence. Units shall be furnished with galvanized steel strainer and stainless steel collector tube. Provide integral high capacity float actuated air vent at top fitting of tank. Furnish cast iron float actuated air vent rated at 150 psig, threaded to the top ofthe fitting. Unit shall be furnished with the bottom of the vessel extended for dirt separation with the system connection nozzles equidistant from the top and bottom of the vessel and shall include a blowdown connection and valve.
•
Bell and Gossett, Spirotherm, Wessels, or equal.
PART 3- EXECUTION EXAMINATION
3.01
A.
INSTALLATION
3.02
•
Examine areas and conditions under which Work of this Section shall be performed. Correct conditions detrimental to proper and timely completion of Work. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
A.
Provide all materials and equipment for the Work. Furnish and install necessary apparatus, parts, materials, and accessories.
B.
Equipment Installation: Install roof or floor mounted equipment on level platforms, housekeeping pads or curbs and provide sound, vibration and seismic control measures per Section 23 0548, unless indicated otherwise whether indicated on drawings or not.
~ 8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
i
fu~
03/26/2014 BASIC HV AC MATERIALS AND METHODS 23 0513-2
IIIOOI
•
SECTION 23 0553 HV AC IDENTIFICATION PART 1 -GENERAL SUMMARY
1.01 A.
Section Includes: Marking and identification required on mechanical piping systems, ducts, controls, valves, apparatus, etcetera.
B.
Related Requirements:
••
•
Division 01 : General Requirements.
2.
Section 23 0513: Basic HV AC Materials and Methods.
3.
Section 23 0900: HVAC Instrumentation and Controls.
4.
Section 23 2013: HVAC Piping.
5.
Section 23 3000: Air Distribution.
6.
Section 23 6416: Oil Lubricated Centrifugal Water Chillers.
7.
Section 23 64 I 8: Oil Free Centrifugal Water Chillers.
8.
Section 23 6423: Scroll Water Chillers.
9.
Section 23 6426: Rotary-Screw Chillers.
10.
Section 23 6428: Air-Cooled Rotary Screw Chillers.
11.
Section 23 6500: Cooling Towers.
12.
Section 23 8000: Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning Equipment.
SUBMITTALS
1.02
1.03
1.
A.
Submit in accordance with Division 01 and Section 23 0500: Common Work Results for HVAC.
B.
Submit product data and installation instructions for each item specified.
C.
Submit Samples of materials. QUALITY ASSURANCE
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HJGH SCHOOL
I 0/0I/20 II HV AC IDENTIFICATION 23 0553-I
111001
A.
•
Comply with provisions of: 1.
Section 23 0500: Common Work Results for HV AC.
2.
ANSI/ASME Al3.1: Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems.
3.
APW A: Uniform Color Code. Or
4.
IAPMO: Uniform Plumbing Code (UPC).
PART2-PRODUCTS MATERIALS
2.01 A.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
2.02
•
A.
Identify panel-mounted instruments and controls with engraved bakelite nameplates permanently affixed to panel boards.
B.
Identify alarm indicating devices and alarm reset devices by nameplates.
c.
Identify damper motors and automatic valves, flow switches, pressure switches, etc., with embossed aluminum or plastic tape affixed to controller, indicating service and setting.
2.03
EQUIPMENT A.
Identify each major piece of equipment with engraved bakelite nameplates permanently affixed to the equipment, indicating the room numbers it services, Equipment identification designation shall be the same to its designation indicated on the "As-Built Drawings". Room numbers in the nameplates shall correspond to the final room numbers. UNDERGROUND PIPE
2.04 A.
•
General: Piping systems, controls, valves, apparatus, etc., except those that are installed in inaccessible locations in partitions, walls, and floors, shall be permanently identified.
Detectable Marking Tape: 1.
Provide and install detectable marking tape along buried piping. Tape shall be specifically manufactured for marking and locating underground utilities with electronic equipment. Tape shall be acid and alkali resistant, and manufactured with integral wires or foil backing, encased with protective cladding. Tape shall be a minimum of two inches in width.
2.
Manufacturer: Reef Industries, Inc., Advantage Brands, Inc., Northtown Company, Mutual Industries, Inc., or equal.
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 HVAC lDENTIF1CATION 23 0553-2
111001
3.
• B.
Detectable marking tape shall be color-coded per APWA Color Code: a.
Yell ow: Steam.
b.
Blue: Water.
c.
Red: Electric power lines, cables, conduit and lighting cables. By Division 26.
d.
Orange: Communication, alarm or signal cables. By Divisions 26 and 27.
Tracer Wire: 1.
Solid copper wire type THWN, 12 AWG gage, with heat and moisture resistant insulation.
PART 3 -EXECUTION INSTALLATION
3.01
•
A.
Correct detrimental conditions prior to commencing the Work of this Section. Install markers and identification tags as specified with materials and installation procedures recommended by manufacturer.
B.
Place tracer wire on top of non-metal utility lines allowing some slack. Do not wrap tracer wire around pipe. Fasten tracer wire in place at approximately 10 feet on centers with non-metal ties. CLEANUP
3.02
A.
Remove rubbish, debris, and waste materials and legally dispose of off the Project site. END OF SECTION
•
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HJGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 HV AC IDENTIFICATION 23 0553-3
111001
•
SECTION 23 0900 HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS
PART 1- GENERAL 1.01
SUMMARY A.
• B.
•
Section Includes: Temperature controls for air conditioning, heating, and ventilating systems as indicated. Work includes, but is not be limited to, the following: 1.
Automatic control valves and automatically operated dampers.
2.
Pneumatic or electric relays (magnetic starters excluded), electric or mechanical linkages, duct sensors, thermostats, dampers and motorized valves, and appurtenances and accessories.
3.
Wiring outlet boxes and conduits for control systems, including wiring to connect magnetic starters to control systems,
4.
Air compressor and receiver tank for pneumatic control systems, with appurtenances and air piping, including pressure regulator, automatic moisture eliminators, air line filters, relief valves, pressure gages and shut-off valves, drains, pneumatic piping distribution to control equipment, etcetera.
5.
Testing and adjusting temperature control system.
6.
Furnishing record drawings and operational data of systems as installed and finally adjusted.
7.
Formal instruction of Owner personnel in operation of equipment.
Following items are specified in other Sections: 1.
Magnetic starters, contacts, power relays and variable resistors or controllers for motors, and other electrical devices.
2.
Load carrying wiring for above listed devices and wiring for starting switches not interconnected with temperature control system. (Division 26: Electrical).
3.
Electrical power to control panels and other equipment. (Division 26: Electrical).
4.
Installing automatic valves in pipelines.
5.
Installing automatic dampers.
6.
Automatic controls and valves not connected with comfort heating, ventilating, and air conditioning systems .
8736 CORWIN THEATERREPAIR&P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 HV AC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS 23 0900-1
111001
•
C.
7.
Packaged self-contained equipment specified complete with temperature controls .
8.
DDC control equipment specified in Section 23 0923: Environmental Control and Energy Management Systems.
Related Requirements: 1. Division 01 : General Requirements. 2.
Division 26: Electrical.
3.
Section 23 0500: Common Work Results for HV AC.
4.
Section 23 0513: Basic HVAC Materials and Methods.
5.
Section 23 0800: HV AC Systems Commissioning.
6.
Section 23 3000: Air Distribution.
7.
Section 23 8000: Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning Equipment. SUBMITTALS
1.02 A.
•
1.03
•
Provide in accordance with Division 01 and Section 23 0500: Common Work Results for HVAC. 1.
Complete list of items proposed to be furnished and installed under this Section.
2.
Manufacturer's specifications and other data required to demonstrate compliance with specified requirements.
3.
Manufacturer's printed installation procedures.
B.
Shop Drawings: Provide Shop Drawings, in the same size as the Drawings, prepared, signed and sealed by a mechanical engineer licensed in the State of California. Shop Drawings shall indicate temperature control diagrams, complete with equipment appurtenances required for system. Include sequence of operation description for each system. Submit in accordance with of Division 01.
C.
Sequence of Operation: Provide complete, detailed, step-by-step sequence of operation for each item of equipment.
D.
Operating Instructions: Comply with provisions of Section 23 0500: Common Work Results for HVAC. Explain and demonstrate operation of system to Owner representatives as required.
E.
Guarantee: Refer to Section 23 0500: Common Work Results for HV AC. QUALITY ASSURANCE
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 HV AC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS 23 0900-2
111001
•
A.
Manufacturer and Installer Qualifications: Comply with provisions stated under Section 23 0500: Common Work Results for HV AC .
1.04
PRODUCT HANDLING A.
Production, Replacement, Delivery and Storage: Refer to Section 23 0500: Common Work Results for HV AC and Section 23 0513: Basic HV AC Materials and Methods.
PART 2- PRODUCTS MANUFACTURERS
2.01
•
A.
Equipment in system shall be of same manufacturer or their standard furnished items. Testing, initial start-up, and adjusting of control system shall be under continuous observation of the mechanical engineer responsible for Shop Drawing preparation.
B.
Pneumatic, electric, electronic, or direct digital microprocessor based control equipment shall be one of following manufacturers, unless otherwise noted:
2.02
1.
Honeywell, Inc.
2.
Johnson Controls, Inc.
3.
Invensys .
4.
Equal.
ELECTRIC EQUIPMENT AND ACCESSORIES A.
B.
Electric control equipment and accessories include, but are not limited to, the following: 1.
Electric control devices as indicated on Drawings and described herein, including thermostats, temperature controllers, valve and damper operators, switches, relays, and control panels for instruments as required to provide a complete and operable system.
2.
Wiring and conduit, unless otherwise noted, or control systems including wiring required, to connect magnetic starters, specified in other sections, to control systems.
Time Clocks: 1.
•
TC-1: Time clock shall be solid-state digital electronic type capable of 28 on/off set points to be distributed through the week, complete with a day repeat feature, time and set points to be adjustable to nearest minute with a minimum on duration of one minute and a maximum of 7 days. UL Listed, enclosed in standard case NEMA Type 1, lntermatic, Tork, Paragon, or equal, with battery operated carry-over .
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR& P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 HV AC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS 23 0900-3
111001
•
2.
TC-2: Interval timer (bypass), except for window units, shall be manually set and spring operated type, 0 to 6 hours, and without hold feature. Provide Intermatic, M.H . Rhodes, Paragon, or equal.
3.
TC-3: Bypass timer for window type air conditioner units shall be DPDT switch configuration, 12 hours, and without hold feature. Provide M.H. Rhodes, Intermatic, Tork, or equal. Provide double gang box as specified in Division 26: Electrical.
C.
Wiring: Wiring in connection with control systems regardless of voltage, except power supply circuits, is part of the Work of this Section. Wiring shall comply with Division 26: Electrical.
D.
See Section 23 0923 for DDC/Electronic controls.
PART 3 -EXECUTION CONTROL PANELS OR CABINETS
3.01
•
A.
Switches, clocks, temperature control instruments, and remote bulb thermometers, whose capillary tubes are less than 25 feet in length, shall be mounted in control panels with required wiring, piping, and tubing behind panel. Control panels shall be galvanized steel sheet metal, with light gray hammertone enamel finish, not lighter than 14 gage. Control panels shall be UL Listed. Panels shall be attached to wall at locations indicated, or as required. Adjustable apparatus shall be provided with P-Touch, or equal, labels to indicate function. A clear space of 30 inches in front shall be maintained .
B.
Control cabinets shall be provided with door locks. Door locks shall be the flush type, latched, 5/8 inch for metal door, keyed to a Corbin Cat. No. 60 key. Cabinet shall be prime coated and finish painted as specified in Section 09 9000: Painting and Coating. Cabinet shall be flush mounted. COORDINATION
3.02 A.
Coordinate this Work with other aspects of system balancing to obtain a complete operating mechanical system in accordance with design intent, including coordinating with balancing of the system.
B.
Coordinate this Work with all aspects of alarm, fire alarm, and smoke detector, specified in Division 26: Electrical. SEQUENCE OF OPERATION
3.03 A.
3.04
•
Each system, pneumatic, electric, electronic, or direct digital control shall operate as graphically and described on Drawings and in accordance with reviewed sequence of operation. CONTROL SYSTEM ADJUSTMENTS
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS 23 0900-4
111001
A.
•
Perform adjustments under operating conditions to provide sequence of operation for controls indicated. If required operating conditions cannot be obtained before Substantial Completion, due to outdoor seasonal temperatures, return to the Project site when requested by the Owner and readjust control system when outdoor temperatures will permit proper operating conditions. Start readjustment within seven calendar days after notification. Final settings of controls and pressure ranges indicated by gages shall be indicated on project record documents. PROTECTION
3.05 A.
Protect the Work of this Section until Substantial Completion. CLEANUP
3.06
A.
Remove rubbish, debris, and waste materials and legally dispose of off the Project site. END OF SECTION
•
•
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAJR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 HV AC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS 23 0900-5
Ill 001
•
SECTION 23 3000 AIR DISTRIBUTION
PART I -GENERAL SUMMARY
l.OI A.
Section Includes: Provide ductwork and appurtenances required for a complete air transmission and distribution system for the heating, ventilating, and air conditioning systems indicated on Drawings and as specified.
B.
Related Requirements:
•
Division 0 I: General Requirements.
2.
Section 09 9000: Painting and Coating.
3.
Section 23 0500: Common Work Results for HV AC.
4.
Section 23 0800: HV AC Systems Commissioning.
5.
Section 23 05I3: Basic HVAC Materials and Methods.
6.
Section 23 0548: HV AC Sound, Vibration and Seismic Control.
7.
Section 23 0900: HV AC Instrumentation and Controls.
8.
Section 23 8000: Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning Equipment.
SUBMITTALS
1.02
•
I.
A.
Provide in accordance with Division OI and Section 23 0500: Common Work Results for HVAC.
B.
Manufacturer's Data: I.
Complete list of items to be furnished and installed under this Section. Material lists that do not require performance data shall include manufacturer names, types and model numbers.
2.
Manufacturer's specifications and other data required to demonstrate compliance with specified requirements.
3.
Literature shall include descriptions of equipment, types, models, sizes, capacity tables or curves marked to indicate performance characteristics, electrical requirements, options selected, space requirements, including allowances for
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 AIR DISTRIBUTION 23 3000-1
111001
servicing, and other data. Data shall include name and address of nearest service and maintenance organization that regularly stocks repair parts. Listings of items that function as parts of an integrated system shall be furnished at one time.
•
• 1.03
Submit complete acoustical test reports showing that proposed products have been tested in accordance with latest editions of relevant ASHRAE and AHRI Standards (ANSIIASHRAE Standard 70 for air inlets and outlets; ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 130 and AHRI 880 for terminal units) and will be suitable for operation in Project spaces with specified maximum noise criteria (NC) requirements. The results of all testing shall be certified by an independent testing agency and submitted to the Architect for approval. The submittal shall include a complete description of the test conditions, methods and procedures.
5.
Submittals shall include a tabulation of proposed products, identification of Project spaces where proposed products are to be installed, maximum allowable NC for all Project spaces, and product NC (at specific design air volume) for all Project spaces.
6.
Shop Drawings: Shop Drawings indicating methods of installation of equipment and materials, sizes and gages of ducts, and details of supports. Items to be covered shall include but not be limited to following: a.
Layout of ductwork and equipment drawn to scale to establish that equipment will fit into allotted spaces with clearance for installation and maintenance. Indicate proposed details for attachment, anchoring to, and hanging from structural framing of building. Indicate vibration isolation units, foundations, supports, and openings for passage of pipes and ducts.
b.
Drawings indicating locations and sizes of sleeves and prepared openings for pipes and ducts.
c.
Typical details of supports for equipment and ductwork.
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
Installer's and Manufacturer's Qualifications: Comply with provlSlons stated under Section 23 0500: Common Work Results for HVAC.
B.
Sound power level measurements and Manufacturers' NC value calculations shall be conducted in complete accordance with the latest version of ANSI/ASHRAE Standards 70 and 130 and AHRI 880.
1.04
PRODUCT HANDLING A.
•
4.
Protection, Replacements, Delivery and Storage: Comply with provisions stated in Section 23 0500: Common Work Results for HVAC .
8736 CORWIN THEATER REP AIR & P .O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 AlR DISTRIBUTION 23 3000-2
111001
•
COORDINATION
1.05 A.
Coordinate activities in accordance with provisions of Section 23 0500: Common Work Results for HVAC.
PART 2- PRODUCTS
GENERAL
2.01
••
A.
Unless otherwise noted, provisions, including amendments thereto, of the HVAC Duct Construction Standards of Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractor's National Association (SMACNA) and the California Mechanical Code (CMC), are hereby made part of this Section.
B.
Rectangular, round and flat oval ducts shall be manufactured and installed in accordance with requirements of the HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible of SMACNA.
c.
Sheet metal ducts shall be fabricated from galvanized steel, aluminum or stainless steel.
D.
Galvanized steel ducts shall be fabricated of galvanized steel sheet, lock forming grade, conforming to ASTM A653 and A924.
E.
Galvanized steel ducts gage thickness and permissible joints and seams of concealed ductwork shall conform to requirements in HV AC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible of SMACNA and the CMC unless noted otherwise on the drawings. The more stringent requirements shall prevail. Galvanized steel ducts gage thickness and permissible joints and seams of exposed ductwork shall conform to requirements in Tables 2 and 3, Minimum Metal Gages, of this Section. When more stringent requirements are noted on the drawings the most stringent requirement shall prevail.
F.
Button punch snap-lock seams, using Lockformer or equal, shall be permitted only in concealed areas using 20 and 22 gage galvanized steel ducts with screws added at the ends. Button punch snap-lock is not permitted for aluminum or duct lighter than 22 gage.
G.
Ducts shall be reinforced in accordance with SMACNA standards: Cross-broken Duct: Duct sizes 19 inches wide and larger which have more than 10 square feet of unbraced panel shall be beaded or cross-broken. This requirement is applicable to 20 gage or less thickness and 3 inches w.g. or less pressure. For details, refer to SMACNA manual.
H.
Flexible Ducts 1.
•
Flexible duct shall be non-metallic, insulated for conditioned air supply and return. The flexible ducts shall be factory fabricated with exterior reinforced laminated vapor barrier, 1 \12-inch thick fiber glass insulation (K = 0.25 at 75 degrees F), encapsulated zinc-coated spring ·steel wire helix and impervious, smooth, non-perforated interior vinyl liner and factory fabricated steel connection
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 AIR DISTRIBUTION 23 3000-3
11I OOI
collars. For the composite assembly, including insulation and vapor barrier, comply with NFPA Standard 90A or 90B and tested in accordance with UL Standard, UL 181. Non-insulated metallic ducts shall be provided for exhaust only.
• I.
•
•
2.
Methods of installations, standards for joining and attaching, and supporting flexible duct shall conform to applicable provisions of SMACNA manual.
3.
Specifications herein shall not supersede installation requirements by flexible duct manufacturer if those are more stringent.
Aluminum Ducts: 1.
Material for aluminum duct shall be of 3003-H14 alloy aluminum sheets, with such designation embossed or stenciled on each sheet. Minimum tensile strength shall be 19,000 psi.
2.
Aluminum duct gage thickness and permissible joint and seams shall conform to Table 1, Construction Details for Rectangular ducts, in this Section.
3.
Aluminum ductwork shall be furnished to transport moisture-laden air from shower rooms, shower drying rooms, dishwashers and discharge ducts from evaporative condenser and cooling towers.
4.
Unless otherwise noted, follow construction details for steel construction standards as indicated for unreinforced duct, reinforced duct, or cross-broken duct.
5.
Button punch snap-lock seams on aluminum ducts are not permitted.
J.
Fittings and Other Construction Details: Details of fittings such as elbows, turning vanes, branch take-off and connections, duct access doors, connections for grilles, registers and ceiling diffusers, flexible connector at fan, etcetera, shall conform to applicable provisions of this Section or SMACNA manual.
K.
Duct Seam and Joint Sealant: Provide sealant or tape for metal ducts at duct joints which are defined as transverse joints between duct sections including girth joints, branch and sub-branch intersections, duct collar tap-ins, fitting subsections, louver and air terminal connections, access doors and frames, and abutments to building structure. Also provide the same at duct seams which are defined as longitudinal joint between duct sections. Spiral lock seams in factory fabricated round or oval ducts are excluded. 1.
Sealant for low-pressure ducts shall be: Design Polymerics DP 1010 or DP I 020, Childers CP-145A/CP-146 Chil-Flex, Foster's 32-19 Duct-Pas, Miracle-Kingco Glenkote Seal-Flex, Ductmate Industries PROseal or FIBERseal, or equal.
2.
Provide sealing material for medium-pressure ducts as described in the SMACNA manual for those pressures .
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
I 0/0 I/20 II AIR DISTRIBUTION 23 3000-4
111001
• L.
Sealant materials shall comply with the flame spread and smoke developed rating of current CMC when tested in accordance with ASTM E84 .
4.
Sealant for exposed to weather ducts shall pass the Weather Resistance Test per ASTM Gl54 at 2000 hours QUV.
Restrictions: I.
Zinc-coated steel duct shall not be installed for ductwork transporting moistureladen air. Flexible duct may only be furnished where specifically indicated on Drawings. Aluminum ducts shall not be installed for internal pressures above 2 inches ofwater.
2.
Fiberglass duct is not permitted as a substitute for sheet metal duct.
DAMPERS
2.02 A.
•
•
3.
Manually Operated Volume Control Dampers: I.
VD-1, Rectangular: Multi-blade type, opposed blade operation, 16 gage galvanized steel blades; center pivoted on 3/8 inch diameter steel trunnions; interlocking edges; dampers shall be in own angle frame, full duct size as indicated on Drawings; frame of minimum 16 gage steel channel construction. Provide with damper operator and axles positively locked to blade. Ruskin MD35, Pottorff MD-42, Greenheck MBD-15 or equal.
2.
VD-2, Round: Frame shall be constructed of not less than 20 gage galvanized steel, blades of not less than 20 gage galvanized steel channel construction with factory neoprene seals, Yz in~h diameter axle shafts and locking hand quadrant. Ruskin MDRS25, Greenheck MBDR-50, or equal.
3.
VD-3, Oval: Frame shall be constructed of not less than 14 gage galvanized steel channels with factory blade seals of not less than 12 gage galvanized steel with not less than Yz inch diameter axle shafts. Provide Ruskin standard construction for frame, blade and axle size, thickness and material variation. Provide adjustable locking hand quadrant. Ruskin CD025, or equal.
B.
Relief Dampers: Parallel multi-blade, counter balanced type with adjustable counter weights. Constructed of 20 gage galvanized sheet steel or extruded aluminum with solid stops all around. Bearings shall be dust proof, ball bearings. Damper shall open on a positive pressure of 0.01 inch within space and close to a backdraft. Interlocking edges shall prevent dust infiltration when closed. Air Balance, Inc., Pottorff, Ruskin, Metal Form Manufacturing Co. Inc., or equal.
C.
Duct Access Panels: Provide factory fabricated access panels in ducts where required for servicing fire or smoke dampers, and at other locations as specified in this Section. Units shall consist of removable panel, gasketed and pressure sealed by controlled spring tension locks. Construct unit, including interior parts, of same material as duct. Units
8736 CORWIN THEATER REP AIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 AIR DISTRIBUTION 23 3000-5
111001
•
•
•
shall be constructed to be suitable for installation in systems of up to 5 inches water gage static pressure . 2.03
AIR DISTRIBUTION DEVICES A.
General: 1.
Grilles, registers, diffusers and appurtenances shall conform to requirements specified herein and shall be of type and sizes as specified and indicated on Drawings. Performance shall be in accordance with ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 70 including airflow velocity, pressure, temperature, and sound measurements.
2.
Sponge neoprene, rubber, vinyl or felt border gaskets shall be provided for surface-mounted registers, grilles or diffusers.
3.
The noise generating characteristics of all specified grilles, registers, and diffusers shall be tested to, and comply with, all requirements of this specification. Representative samples shall be subjected to tests in accordance with applicable standards and procedures in order to demonstrate such compliance. A special test for this project is not required ifthe manufacturer has previous certified test results that can be made applicable to this project. Maximum Sound Levels of diffusers, grilles and registers shall be as follows: Administrative office area: Classrooms: Libraries and other noise sensitive areas: Gymnasiums, cafeterias, lockers areas:
NC30 NC20 NC25 NC 30.
4.
Provide suitable frame types to match the ceiling types as specified or indicated on the Architectural Drawings.
5.
Ceiling diffusers shall be provided with equalizing grids.
6.
Ceiling mounted grilles, registers and diffusers shall be provided with a factory applied, baked enamel, dull finish, bone white to match acoustical ceiling tile.
7.
Grilles or registers mounted on painted walls or other surfaces shall be furnished with a baked prime coat and finish painted in accordance with Section 09 9000: Painting and Coating.
8.
Do not provide opposed blade dampers at diffusers and registers to balance the airflow, as they tend to create noise. Provide a manual volume damper at each branch take-off and also at branch duct to each diffuser and register upstream of the flexible duct connections. Air throw patterns shall be as indicated on the drawings.
9.
Diffusers, registers and grilles indicated or scheduled on the drawings to comply with special requirements shall take precedence over the standard items specified .
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR& P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HJGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 AIR DISTRIBUTION 23 3000-6
111001
B.
•
C.
•
1.
GR-1
Acoustical Tile on Plaster Ceiling: Return and exhaust grilles shall be single deflection type with horizontal fixed face bars set at straight or 45 degree angle, Yz inch spacing and flush and flanged for surface mounting. Anemostat S3HD Series, Kruger Model S80/S85, Price 500/600 Series, or equal.
2.
GR-2 Prefabricated Acoustical Tile Ceiling with Inverted Exposed T-Bars: Return and exhaust grilles shall be with single deflection horizontal fixed face bars, set at straight or 45 degree angle, Yz inch spacing and flush, layin panel type with nominal overall dimension of 24-inch by 24-inch. Anemostat Type SAC3L Series, Krueger Model S80/S85, Price 500/600 Series, or equal.
Registers, Supply, Return, Wall: 1.
WR-1: Sidewall supply register shall be double deflecting type with loose keyoperated opposed blade volume control. Anemostat S2 Series, Krueger Model 80/880, Price 500/600 Series, or equal.
2.
WR-2: Sidewall return register shall be single deflecting type with horizontal fixed face bars set at 45 degree angle flush and flanged for surface mounting and complete with loose key-operated opposed blade volume control. Anemostat S3 Series, Krueger Model S80/S85, Price 500/600 Series, or equal.
PART 3- EXECUTION EXAMINATION
3.01 A.
Examine areas and conditions under which Work of this Section will be performed. Correct conditions detrimental to proper and timely completion ofWork. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. DUCTWORK
3.02
•
Grilles - Return, Exhaust, Ceiling, Square, Rectangular:
A.
Construct ductwork according to details of fabrication and methods of support, as indicated in the SMACNA manuals and CMC, unless specified or indicated otherwise in this Section or on Drawings. In event of conflict, the most stringent requirement shall be provided.
B.
Unless otherwise required, construct ducts to conform accurately to dimensions indicated and to be straight and smooth on inside, with joints neatly finished .
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 AIR DISTRIBUTION 23 3000-7
111001
•
c.
Duct dimensions indicated are net inside dimensions. If the indicated duct is to be furnished with an acoustic lining, add twice the thickness of the acoustic liner in both the duct width and height dimensions to provide the gross sheet metal duct dimensions.
D.
Where aluminum is welded, provide a minimum thickness of 16 gage, and use gas inert tungsten process of welding.
E.
Anchor ducts to building structural slab, framing and roof decking and detail method of anchoring and fastening if not indicated on Drawings. Supports shall be seismically constructed.
F.
Construct and install ducts to be completely free from vibration under operating conditions.
G.
Indicate on layout drawing, required for suspended ductwork, location of supports, loads imposed on each fastening or anchor, typical details for anchorage, and details for special anchorage for supports attached to metal roof decking.
H.
Attach supports only to building structural framing members and concrete slabs.
I.
Where supports are required between structural framing members, detail and install suitable intermediate metal framing.
J.
Ducts transporting air-conditioned or heated supply air shall be insulated in accordance with requirements of Section 23 0700: HVAC Insulation .
•
1.
K.
Ferrous angles and structural members and joining collars specified for construction and support of ductwork and plenums shall be primed with one heavy coat of required asphaltic aluminum paint before installation or fabrication. Metal surfaces shall be thoroughly cleaned before installation of paint. Galvanizing may be provided instead of painting. Installed duct hanger rods concealed in furred ceilings and walls are not required to be primed or painted.
L.
Broken places in galvanized coating shall be acid washed and then completely soldered over or painted with galvanizing paint. DUCT CONSTRUCTION
3.03 A.
•
Ducts exposed to weather shall be furnished with exterior insulation with weather jacket or interior lining as indicated on Table 2, Section 23 0700: HVAC Insulation.
Minimum ductwork gages, joints, reinforcing, and bracing of concealed ductwork shall conform to SMACNA and CMC. Exposed ductwork shall conform to the following tables in addition to SMACNA and CMC. The most stringent standards shall prevail. Hoods, plenums, and castings shall not be lighter than the duct gage listed in Table 2 for corresponding dimensions. Additional bracing shall be provided to prevent objectionable panel vibration .
8736 CORWIN THEATERREPAJR& P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 AJR DISTRiBUTION 23 3000-8
111001
•
B.
Provide longitudinal seams of the grooved snap lock and standing, sealed and taped, or sealed spiral or continuously welded. For exhaust duct, taping may be omitted . TABLE 1- SHEET METAL THICKNESS FOR CIRCULAR DUCTS AND FLATOVAL (FOR STATIC PRESSURES LISTED) Gage Thickness Water Diameter of Duct 2-inch Horizontal Column Girth Maximum S.P. Maximum Maximum Diameter Suggort Distance Round I Oval Up to 9 inch 26124 10-foot 9 to 14-inch 26 I 24 8-foot 14 to 23 inch 24122 8-foot 23 to 37-inch 8-foot 22 I 20 37 to- 51-inch 6-foot 20 I 18
C.
•
Joints 2-inch slip 4-inch 4-inch 4-inch 1 1ft-inch by 1 118-inch flange
Construction Details for Rectangular Sheet Metal Ducts for Low-Pressure Systems Velocities not Exceeding 2,000 Feet per Minute: 1.
For pressures in excess of 2 inches water column, duct wall thickness shall be 2 gages heavier than set forth in this table.
2.
Duct specifications shown below are applicable when ducts larger than 18 inches are cross-broken. Where cross breaking is not provided, duct wall thickness shall be 2 gages heavier on ducts 19 inches to 60 inches wide unless longitudinal standing seams are furnished.
TABLE 2- MINIMUM METAL GAGES- UNREINFORCED RECTANGULAR DUCT (2" W.G. OR LESS)
•
Minimum Gage Thickness Steel I Aluminum
Max. Side, Gross Dimensions
Duct Permissible Girth Joints
26 I 24
Up to 10-inch
Drive-slip, plain S-slip, or 1 inch government lock
10-foot
24122
11 to 12-inch
10-foot
22 I 20
13 to 14-inch
Drive-slip, plain S-slip, or 1 inch government lock Drive-slip, plain S-slip, or 1 inch government lock
20 I 18
15 to 18-inch
Drive-slip, plain S-slip, or 1 inch government lock
10-foot
181NA
19 to 20-inch
Drive-slip, plain S-slip, or 1 inch government lock
10-foot
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
Horizontal Support Maximum Distance
10-foot
10/01/2011 AIR DISTRIBUTION 23 3000-9
111001
•
16/NA
21 to 24-inch
Drive-slip, plain S-slip, or 1 inch government lock
10-foot
•
•
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAJR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 AIR DISTRIBUTION 23 3000-10
111001
•
TABLE 3 -MINIMUM METAL GAGES -REINFORCED RECTANGULAR DUCT (2" W.G. OR LESS) Reinforcement Ratings To Comply with SMACNA Standards Reinforcement Spacing Minimum Gage Max. Side, Gross Duct Permissible Girth Joints Max. Distance Thickness Steel I Dimensions Aluminum Up to 14-inch Drive-slip, plain S-slip, or 1 inch 6' 26 I 24 government lock with B rated reinforcement 13 to 18-inch Drive-slip, plain S-slip, with C rated 8' 24 I 22 reinforcement I9 to 30-inch Standing SID -slip, I inch bar slip, 5' or I inch government lock with E rated reinforcement 22 I 20
••
3I to 36-inch
I inch bar slip, reinforced bar slip, or 1 inch government lock with F rated reinforcement
5'
37 to 48-inch
1 518-inch standing S or I inch government lock with G rated reinforcement I 518-inch standing S or I inch government lock with H rated reinforcement or G rated tie rods
4'
20 I 18
49 to 54-inch
181NA
55 to 84-inch
1 518-inch standing S or 1 inch government lock with I rated reinforcement or G rated tie rods
4'
85 to I 08-inch
2 Yz-inch standing seam with K rated reinforcement or H rated tie rods
4'
4'
* Button punch snap-lock seams, using Lockformer or equal, shall be permitted only in non-accessible areas using 20 and 22 gage galvanized steel ducts with screws added at the ends. Button punch snaplock is not permitted for aluminum or duct lighter than 22 gage.
•
D.
Ferrous angles and structural members and joining collars specified for the construction and support of ductwork and plenums shall be primed with one heavy coat of asphalt aluminum paint before installation or fabrication. The metal surface shall be thoroughly cleaned before application ofthe paint. Galvanizing may be provided instead of painting. Installed duct hanger rods concealed in furred ceilings and walls is not required to be primed or painted.
E.
Broken places in galvanized coating shall be acid washed and then completely soldered over or painted with galvanizing paint.
F.
S-type or drive-slip type girths or longitudinal seams shall not be furnished for ductwork installed outdoors or mounted on roofs .
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HJGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 AIR DISTRIBUTION 23 3000-11
111001
•
G.
3.04
DUCT ELBOWS AND TURNING VANES A.
Duct elbows, including supply, exhaust, and return, shall be provided with a centerline radius of 1.5 times duct width parallel to radius whenever possible; centerline radius shall not be less than width of duct parallel to radius.
B.
Where space does not permit above radius, or where square elbows are indicated on Drawings, turning vanes shall be installed whether indicated on Drawings or not.
c.
Turning vanes shall be thick double-wall vane type, Ductmate Industries PROrail; or equal. Duro Dyne vane rail system duct turns may be furnished, provided they are of thick double wall type and Shop Drawings are submitted and reviewed by the Architect. Duct turning vanes shall be of same material as ductwork and shall be rigidly fastened in ductwork.
3.05
•
•
Broken places in galvanized coating shall be acid washed and then completely soldered over or painted with galvanizing paint.
DUCT JOINTS AND SEAMS A.
Conditioned air supply ducts shall be furnished with joints and seams sealed, taped or welded for air tightness, except spiral seam factory machine formed duct components. Spiral seam is exempted. Joints between slip-fit components may be assembled with all seams and joint connections fastened with screws and taped .
B.
Other ducts shall be furnished with joints and seams sealed by using sealant, taping, soldering, or welding. Ducts for grease hood exhaust shall be furnished with grease-tight welding or brazing on external surface for joints and seams. Fiberglass ducts shall be provided with a thermally activated closure system, Johns Manville Fortifiber ThermLock with Automatic Bond Indicator dots, or equal.
C.
S-slip or drive-slip type girths or longitudinal seams are not permitted on exterior or exposed rooftop mounted ductwork.
D.
Caulking, taping, or other joint or seam treatment shall be provided in accordance with recognized standards.
E.
Seams around fan, coil housing and plenums shall be sealed with gaskets or sealing compound to provide an airtight assembly.
F.
Stainless steel ductwork connected to range hoods and fume hoods shall be provided with grease-tight, gas tight welded seams, and shall be constructed and installed so that grease or other material cannot become pocketed in any portion thereof, and system shall slope downward toward hood not less than 114 inch per lineal foot. Gasketed flanged joints with sealing compound shall be used only at fan and fume hood connections .
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 AlR DISTRIBUTION 23 3000-12
111001
G.
•
A.
One of the specifically listed connectors 1s submitted and approved by the Architect and OAR.
2.
The correct size connector, application, and gage of material conform to SMACNA Standards.
3.
The connector is installed per manufacturer's specifications.
Slopes in sides of transition pieces shall be no greater than 1 to 5. Abrupt changes or offsets in duct system are not permitted, except when reviewed by the Architect. DUCT TEST HOLES
3.07 A.
Holes in ducts and plenums shall be provided for pilot or static tubes for obtaining air measurements to balance or check air systems. Holes shall be covered with neoprene gasketed sheet metal cover or plugged with a fitted neoprene plug chained to duct. FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS
3.08
A.
At points where sheet metal connections are installed to fans or air handling units, or where ducts of dissimilar metals are connected, a flexible connection of commercial grade, Duro Dyne Durolon, Ventfabrics Ventglas, Ductmate Industries Proflex, or equal, non-combustible material shall be installed and securely fastened by zinc-coated steel clinch-type bands or a flange type connection. Inlet and outlet openings shall be axially in-line, maximum deviation of centerline shall be less than 5 percent of diameter or shortest dimension of a rectangular inlet of fan or air handling unit, with system at rest. Duct end of connection shall be seismically restrained if more than 4 feet from last support. AIR TERMINAL DEVICES
3.09
•
1.
DUCT TRANSITION
3.06
•
Alternative duct connectors such as Ductmate Industries, Mez Industries, or equal may be used if the following conditions are met:
A.
General: Install supply devices after ducts, plenums, and casings have been cleaned and blown free of small particles, as specified. Devices shall be aligned to be parallel to ceiling construction or walls and ceiling surfaces, and shall be pulled tightly to compress gaskets and to fit neatly against surfaces.
B.
Diffusers: Support surface mounted ceiling diffusers from angles or channels resting on and fastened to ceiling construction. Do not support from ducts. Install lay-in diffusers on T -bar ceilings with hanger wires from each corner and not supported by ceiling structure. Provide sheet metal adaptor box above each diffuser to allow space for volume controller with round collars for connection to round ducts where indicated on Drawings. Fasten duct-mounted diffusers to duct collars .
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES 1-ITGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 AIR DISTRIBUTION 23 3000-13
111001
C.
• 3.10
•
1.
Install wall supply registers at least 6 inches below ceiling, unless otherwise indicated. Locate return and exhaust registers 6 inches below ceiling unless otherwise indicated.
2.
Support ceiling diffuser type inlets, registers, and grilles as required above for ceiling diffusers.
3.
Fasten wall mounted and duct mounted registers and grilles to flanges of duct collars.
DAMPERS A.
•
Registers and Grilles:
Manually operated dampers, gravity dampers, fire dampers, and motor operated dampers shall be furnished and installed as specified and indicated. Upon completion of installation, dampers shall be checked, lubricated, and adjusted so that they operate freely, without binding. Dampers shall be of standard commercial manufacture, complete with damper frame. Where painting is required, they shall be shop finished unless otherwise noted. 1.
Provide and install manual volume dampers per SMACNA standards to allow balancing per AABC, NEBB or T ABB Procedures and Standards whether indicated on the drawings or not.
2.
Balancing dampers shall be installed in main supply ducts from fan discharge plenums, where two or more ducts are connected to each plenum, although such balancing dampers may not be indicated. Each zone shall be provided with a manual volume damper. Sheet metal screws shall be installed through handles and into ducts to lock damper in place after test and balance.
3.
Each supply, return, and exhaust branch shall be provided with manual volume dampers.
4.
Do not provide opposed blade dampers at air inlets and outlets.
5.
Each supply, return, and exhaust inlet or outlet shall be provided with a manual volume damper. This damper shall be a minimum of 5 feet upstream of the air outlet and inlets. An acoustic flexible duct should be provided between the outlet and inlet and the damper for concealed ducts.
6.
Dampers installed in accessible locations shall be provided with locking and indicating quadrants. Ventfabrics Ventlok, Duro Dyne, Young Regulator Co., or equal.
7.
Dampers installed in ductwork in furred ceiling spaces or in roof spaces with less than 30 inches of clearance below beams, joists, or other construction, and where access panels are not provided shall be furnished with damper rods extended
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 AIR DISTRIBUTION 23 3000-14
111001
below ceiling and terminated with a concealed damper regulation. Ventfabrics Ventlok, Young Regulator Co., Duro Dyne, or equal.
•
A.
•
Dampers not identified as splitter, extractor, or butterfly dampers shall be of multilouver type arranged for opposed blade operation. Damper shall be same dimension as adjoining duct and be tight closing. Blades shall not be greater than 9 inches. Dampers shall be not less than 18 gage steel.
9.
Motor operated dampers shall be furnished by temperature control manufacturer as part of temperature control equipment and shall conform to requirements of Section 23 0900: HV AC Instrumentation and Controls.
10.
Dampers shall be provided with accessible operating mechanisms. Where operators are exposed in finished portions of building, operators shall be chromium-plated with exposed edges rounded. Splitter dampers are not permitted unless specified and reviewed by the Architect.
11.
Dampers shall not be installed in combustion air ducts.
12.
Access panels shall be installed for access at each damper's operating mechanism.
BACKDRAFTDAMPERS
3.11
•
8.
Backdraft dampers shall be installed at locations indicated in accordance with the State of California Building Energy Efficiency Standards, Title 24, CCR . DUCT SLEEVES AND PREPARED OPENINGS
3.12 A.
Furnish duct sleeves for 15-inch diameter ducts or less passing through floors, walls, ceilings, or roof and install during construction of the floor, wall, ceiling, or roof. Install round ducts larger than 15 inches diameter and square and rectangular ducts passing through floors, walls, ceilings or roof through prepared openings. Provide duct sleeves and prepared openings for duct mains and duct branches.
B.
Provide one inch clearance between duct and sleeve or between insulation and sleeves for insulated ducts, except at grilles, registers and diffusers.
C.
Provide prepared openings for round ducts larger than 15 inches in diameter and for square and rectangular ducts with one inch clearance between duct and openings or between insulation and opening for insulated ducts, except at grilles, registers and diffusers.
D.
Provide closure collar of galvanized sheet metal not less than 4 inches wide unless otherwise indicated on Drawings on each side of walls or floors where sleeves or prepared openings are provided except where grilles or diffusers are installed. Install collar tight against surface. Fit sharp edges of collar installed around insulated duct to preclude tearing or puncturing insulation covering vapor barrier. Fabricate collars from round ducts
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 AIR DISTRIBUTION 23 3000-15
111001
in steel. Provide not less than 4 nails to attach collar where openings are 12 inches in diameter or less and not less than 8 nails where openings are 20 inches in diameter or less .
•
E.
3.13
•
•
Pack space between sleeve or opening and duct or duct insulation with commercial grade packing yam. DUCT HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A.
Exposed or easily accessible ductwork: Single horizontal ducts shall be suspended from heavy steel hanger straps securely fastened to overhead structural members. Ducts shall be supported by a hanger strap passing around and fastened to duct with not less than two Parker No. I 0 screws set approximately 2 inches in from each edge, to form a supporting stirrup attached to overhead supports. Rectangular ducts shall be provided with two hanger straps, one located on each side of duct. Round ducts may be installed from a single hanger strap unless conditions require that duct be held tight against ceiling, in which case two hanger straps may be brought down each side of duct, oriented at right angles to axis of duct and securely fastened to duct standing leg seam or angle iron stiffener with a minimum of two bolts, measuring 114 inch, for each side of duct. Hanger straps shall be galvanized with a minimum size of 1 118-inch by 14 gage. Angles of galvanized steel of 1 118-inch by 1 118-inch by 16 gage (14 gage for ducts 60 inches or greater) may be furnished instead of straps.
B.
Non-accessible ductwork: Non exposed and hidden from sight during regular school operations ductwork, rigid round, rectangular, and flat oval metal ducts, shall be installed with support systems conforming to SMACNA Standards .
c.
Where ducts are installed one above the other, they shall be individually supported on a trapeze of steel angles with 3/8 inch supporting steel rods securely fastened to overhead construction. A minimum distance of 3 inches shall be maintained between ducts wherever possible, but in no event shall distance be less than 2 inches. Minimum sizes of steel angles shall be 1 Yz-inch by I Yz-inch by 118 inch for duct sizes through 60 inches in greatest dimension, 2-inch by 2-inch by 1/8 inch for duct sizes 61 inches through 84 inches, 2-inch by 2-inch by 3/16 inch for duct sizes 85 inches through 96 inches, and 2inch by 2-inch by 114 inch for duct sizes over 97 inches.
D.
Ducts 30 inches square area and greater and ducts 20 feet long and longer shall be seismically restrained. Refer to Section 23 0548: HV AC Sound, Vibration and Seismic Control.
E.
Hangers shall not be supported by, or fastened to, non-structural members including blocking. Toggle or Molly type bolts are not permitted.
F.
Vertical ducts shall be supported with suitable angles on each side of each duct located at each floor and at intervals not to exceed 8 feet. Angles shall be sized and installed according to SMACNA Standards for required span so that they will be rigid, without bending or sagging .
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR& P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 AIR DISTRIBUTION 23 3000-16
111001
G.
•
ACCESS PLATES AND DOORS
3.14
•
•
Roof-mounted ductwork shall be installed a minimum 12 inches above roof and shall be supported by galvanized welded pipe, one on each side, fastened to roof structure, flashed and sealed to roof membrane. Install supports at each tum, unit connections, and each penetration, and space at maximum 6 feet off-center in general. Pitch pockets are not allowed.
A.
Access plates and doors shall be furnished and installed where stops, valves, fire dampers, fusible links, coils, damper operating mechanism, control equipment, lubrication fittings, air filters, air handling equipment and similar items normally requiring adjustment or servicing are installed in concealed spaces.
B.
Access plates and doors shall be located to permit convenient access to equipment sized to permit removal of equipment for servicing. Access plates shall be no less than 12-inch by 12-inch in clear opening. Proper servicing of equipment requires adequate access for maintenance personnel. Access doors shall not be less than 24-inches by 24-inch, unless otherwise detailed. Two or more valves shall not be located in same access area unless sufficient clearance is provided for operation, servicing and removal of each valve.
C.
Openings in ducts or plenums whose longer dimension does not exceed 12 inches may be covered by a plate of same material as duct, gasketed and fastened to duct or plenum with sheet metal screws.
D.
Access plates in floors shall not be less than 8-inch by 8-inch and shall be carborundum surface brass with cast brass frames anchored into concrete. Access plates in tile walls shall be chromium plated brass and polished. Serrated plates furnished as part of a cleanout assembly are permitted in floors instead of a separate plate.
E.
Access plates and doors in walls and ceilings of finished rooms and in locations normally accessible to students shall be furnished with continuous piano hinges, unless otherwise specified, and a special flush type spring-loaded latch requiring an Allen wrench to operate. Access devices shall be installed after plastering in plaster ground openings.
F.
Access panels or doors penetrating one-hour fire resistive ceilings shall meet code requirements for such openings.
G.
Access panels shall be fire-rated; Milcor, or equal. Access doors shall be as required for installation in openings penetrating one-hour fire resistive ceilings. Access doors shall be furnished with a flush, key-operated cylinder lock, furnished with two keys each, instead of Allen headlock for non-rated ceilings.
H.
Access panels that are part of an integrated ceiling are specified in Section 09 8433: Cementious Wood Fiber Acoustical Units. Identification markers shall be affixed to adjacent supports, under this portion of Work, to indicate location and type of mechanical device to be serviced .
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/0112011 AIR DISTRIBUTION 23 3000-17
111001
•
•
I.
Access panels installed in ducts or plenums located in heater or equipment rooms containing gas-fired equipment shall be furnished with heavy-duty spring closing hinges and refrigerator door type catches unless otherwise required. When these panels are intended for maintenance personnel access, catches shall be operable from both interior and exterior.
J.
Other access panels, except those specified above, shall be furnished with suitable hinges and one or more sash fasteners.
K.
Panels located in ducts and plenums shall be installed with gaskets made of synthetic rubber, felt, or similar material to provide an airtight installation. Panels shall be constructed and reinforced to prevent vibration.
L.
Label the words "FIRE DAMPERS" on panels over fire dampers and words "DO NOT OPEN - HEATER IS OPERATING" on panels located in heater or equipment rooms. Letters shall be approximately 3 inches high, if space is available.
M.
Furnish a key to operate latch access plates, one for each access plate, but not to exceed five keys for any one Project.
N.
Access plates and panels shall be furnished with manufacturer's name or trade mark and model number cast or stamped thereon, or upon a label permanently affixed thereon.
0.
Provide duct through roof flashing as detailed in the SMACNA standards or as indicated on Drawings .
P.
Refer to SMACNA for access plate and door construction.
3.15
PRESSURE TESTING A.
Test all supply, return and exhaust ducts, plenums and casings at static pressure indicated for system to insure substantially airtight ducts per current industry standards before covering with insulation or concealing in masonry. Substantially airtight shall be construed to mean that no air leakage is noticeable through senses of feeling or hearing at duct joints. Test ductwork for leaks at 1 Yz times operating pressure but at a minimum of 2 inches of water. CLEANUP
3.16 A. 3.17
Remove rubbish, debris and waste materials and legally dispose off the Project site. PROTECTION
A.
Protect the Work ofthis Section until Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION
•
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 AIR DISTRIBUTION 23 3000-18
111001
•
SECTION 23 8000 HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING EQUIPMENT
PART I-GENERAL SUMMARY
l.OI
A.
Section Includes: Air conditioning and air handling equipment including but not limited to: I.
B.
I.02
Related Requirements: I.
Section 07 6000: Flashing and Sheet Metal.
2.
Section 23 05I3: Basic HVAC Materials and Methods.
3.
Section 23 3000: Air Distribution.
DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
A.
•
Work of this Section is based on HV AC equipment units indicated as Basis of Design in Part 2 of this Section. Products from different HVAC equipment manufacturers listed are never identical, although equivalent in capacity, performance and quality. In the cases where dimensions, weight, configuration and utility requirements differ from the products used as a basis of design, the Contractor, at no additional cost to the Owner, shall coordinate and submit, for Architect review, revisions to the design. SUBMITTALS
1.03 A.
Provide in accordance with Division OI and Section 23 0500: Common Work Results forHVAC.
B.
For products listed that are not the basis of design, submit the following in addition to above requirements: I.
Title 24 Calculations: Replace HVAC unit values in calculation files provided by the Architect and submit for review.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.04
A.
•
Fans.
Provide submittals in accordance with Section 23 0500: Common Work Results for HVAC.
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HJGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING EQUIPMENT 23 8000-1
111001
•
1.05
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A.
Provide Owner instructions on equipment operation and maintenance procedures, as indicated in Section 23 0500: Common Work Results for HVAC. WARRANTY
1.06 A.
Compressors shall be provided with manufacturer's five year warranty, (replacement only).
B.
Manufacturer shall warrant parts, except heat exchangers, for a period of five years.
c.
Heat exchangers shall be provided with manufacturer's ten year warranty, (replacement only).
PART 2- PRODUCTS EQUIPMENT
2.01
A.
•
PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01
GENERAL
A.
Examine areas under which Work of this Section will be performed. Correct conditions detrimental to proper and timely completion of Work. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. EQUIPMENT FOUNDATIONS
3.02
A.
3.03
•
Capacities of air conditioning equipment indicated on Drawings are net capacities actually required. Standard catalog ratings shall be adjusted to actual Project site environmental conditions.
Provide foundations (housekeeping pads, level platforms or curbs) for mechanical equipment whether indicated on drawings or not. Equipment foundations shall be of sufficient size and weight, and of proper design to preclude shifting of equipment under operating conditions, or under abnormal conditions imposed upon equipment. EQUIPMENT DESIGN AND INSTALLATION
A.
Uniformity: Unless otherwise specified, equipment of same type or classification shall be product of same manufacturer.
B.
Application: Only provide equipment as reviewed by Architect.
c.
Equipment Installation: Equipment installation shall be in strict accordance with these Specifications, and installation instructions of manufacturers. Equipment installed on
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING EQUIPMENT 23 8000-2
111001
concrete foundations shall be grouted before piping is installed. Piping shall be installed in such a manner as not to place a strain on equipment. Flanged joints shall be adequately extended before installation. Piping shall be graded, anchored, guided and supported, without low pockets.
•
2.
Provide flexible connections for duct, pipe and conduit connections at moving equipment.
A.
Operation of Equipment: Mechanical equipment and piping systems shall operate without exceeding specified noise and/or vibration levels.
B.
Corrective Measures: If specified noise and/or vibration levels are exceeded, provide necessary changes to reduce noise and/or vibration levels to within specified levels. FIELD TESTS AND INSPECTION
3.05 A.
General: Perform field inspections, field tests, and trial operations as specified in Section 23 0500: Common Work Results for HVAC. Provide labor, equipment and incidentals required for testing. The Project Inspector will witness field tests and trial operations as specified in Section 23 0500: Common Work Results for HVA C.
B.
Equipment and Material: Equipment and material certified as being successfully tested by manufacturer, in accordance with referenced Specifications and standards, will not require re-testing before installation. Equipment and materials not tested at place of manufacture will be tested before or after installation, as applicable or necessary, to determine compliance with reference Specifications and standards.
c.
Start-Up and Operational Test: System shall be started up and initially operated with components operating. During this test, various strainers or filters shall be periodically cleaned until no further accumulation of foreign material occurs. Adjust safety and automatic control instruments as required to provide proper operation and control sequence. Refer to Section 23 0500: Common Work Results for HVAC.
D.
Extent of Field Tests: After installation and before completion, Work of this Section shall be subjected to required field tests, including those specified here and in Section 23 0500: Common Work Results for HVAC.
E.
Operation and Maintenance Data: Provide required operation and maintenance data as specified in Section 23 0500: Common Work Results for HV AC. CLEANUP
3.06 A.
•
Install equipment in a neat and skillful manner, properly aligned, leveled, and adjusted for satisfactory operation.
NOISE AND VIBRATION
3.04
•
1.
Remove rubbish, debris and waste materials and legally dispose of off Project site.
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING EQUIPMENT 23 8000-3
111001
•
3.07
PROTECTION A.
Protect Work of this Section until Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION
•
•
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING EQUIPMENT 23 8000-4
111001
SECTION 26 0126 TEST AND ACCEPTANCE REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01
SUMMARY A.
B.
•
Principal items of work in this section include but are not limited to: 1.
Ensure quality assurance, testing and final acceptance requirements for premises cabling installations comply with industry standards and Project Construction Documents.
2.
The Los Angeles Unified School District (LAUSD) seeks to improve the quality of its network installations. In order to achieve this objective, the guidelines specified below are to serve as a technical reference for the Owner's infrastructure verification of the Installer's testing. The appendix of this section describes specific test procedures that the Owner shall perform during the acceptance testing, particularly those involving LAN, PABX, VTC, Convergence and WLAN equipment, and associated cable plants. The procedures provide a comprehensive series of visual, electronic, and optical tests to ensure the infrastructure installation complies with the standards set forth in the specifications. The successful culmination of these tests shall be used to document a physical configuration audit (PCA) as part of the Owner's Quality Assurance (Q/A) Report. Testing shall include physical Q/A review of installation and performance testing of components.
Responsibilities for this specification are as follows: 1.
Installer: The Installer shall follow CEC, CANSI/EWTIA and BICSI installation standards. The Installer shall perform horizontal cable installation including Category 5e and Category 6a unshielded twisted pair (UTP) cable runs terminated in the communications cabinet and cable terminations at each work area outlet, as well as vertical cable installation, including fiber optic cable runs and terminations. During installation the Installer shall perform tests as required by the Parent Specification and in compliance with testing standards found in Appendixes B, C, and D of this Section. The Installer shall notify the Project Inspector 48 hours in advance of any required testing so that the Project Inspector can notify the Owner's Quality Assurance Team to observe the Installer's test procedures. The Installer shall forward test documentation to the OAR prior to the Owner's formal acceptance testing.
2.
Contractor's Site Responsibilities during formal Owner's Quality Assurance: During formal Owner's Quality Assurance, the Contractor and his/her Subcontractor shall comply with testing standards and requirements detailed in
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HJGH SCHOOL
I 0/0112011 TEST AND ACCEPTANCE REQUIREMENTS 26 0126-1
111001
Appendices A through F. Under the guidance of the Project Inspector and in coordination with the Owner's Quality Assurance Team, the Installer shall:
• 3.
•
C.
•
a.
Verify LAN connectivity and WAN extension cabling to MDF.
b.
Configure the router(s) and switch(es) in compliance with the Contract Documents.
c.
Aid the Owner's Quality Assurance Team with network cut over. (e.g., existing systems with internet connectivity and administration systems including but not limited to SIS and payroll)
d.
Provide labor, materials, and testing equipment (e.g., Power Meter, OTDR) to correct any deficiencies with labeling, cable charts, terminations, and Installer supplied test results.
e.
Provide keys and access to installed network equipment.
Owner's Quality Assurance Team Responsibilities: Using the procedures specified in the Appendixes of this guideline, the Owner's Quality Assurance Team shall verify that the infrastructure installed under the Contract complies with the installation standards detailed in the Specifications. Specifically, testing shall be performed by the Owner on vertical and horizontal cable (e.g., fiber optic, Category 5e UTP and Category 6a UTP) along with component installations performed under the scope of the overall infrastructure effort (e.g., Ethernet switches and routers). Generally, testing specifications and procedures cover the following: a.
Q/A review of equipment rack installation; including placement in the communications cabinets, attachment to the floor, and seismic bracing.
b.
Q/A review of fiber terminations, patch panel installation, cable labeling, and cable bundling.
c.
Q/A review of Category 5e and Category 6a, T568B terminations, including cable end connections at the patch panel and work area outlets.
d.
Q/A review of the Contractor's Redlines for accuracy.
e.
Industry standard for fiber optic, Category 5e and Category 6a cable performance testing.
f.
Network equipment performance verification.
g.
Uninterruptible power supply performance verification.
h.
Communications cabinet layout and facility drop count verification.
Related Requirements:
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 TEST AND ACCEPTANCE REQUIREMENTS 26 0126-2
111001
•
D.
•
1.02
Division 01 - General Requirements.
2.
Section 00 7000: General Conditions.
3.
Section 01 7700: Contract Closeout.
4.
Section 06 I 000: Rough Carpentry.
5.
Section 26 0500: Common Work Results for Electrical.
6.
Section 26 0513: Basic Electrical Materials and Methods.
7.
Section 26 0526: Grounding and Bonding.
8.
Section 26 0533: Raceways and Boxes Fittings and Supports.
9.
Section 26 2416: Panelboards and Signal Terminal Cabinets.
10.
Section 26 5000: Lighting.
11.
Section 2 7 5116: Public Address Systems (Small Gyms, Multipurpose Rooms)(ES).
Acronyms: dB
Decibel
IDF
Intermediate Distribution Facility
ITO
Information Technology Division
LAN
Local Area Network
LAUSD
Los Angeles Unified School District
LDC LDF
Local Distribution - Classroom Local Distribution Facility
MDF
Main Distribution Facility
MPOE
Minimum Point of Entry
NVP
Nominal Velocity of Propagation
OAR
Owner Authorized Representative
PA
Public Address
PBX
Private Branch Exchange
QA
Quality Assurance
UTP
Unshielded Twisted Pair
VoiP
Voice over Internet Protocol
WLAN
Wireless Local Area Network
SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS A.
•
1.
Will be found in Parent Specification .
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 TEST AND ACCEPTANCE REQUIREMENTS 26 0126-3
111001
1.03 •
SUBMITTALS A.
1.04
• 1.05
CODES AND STANDARDS A.
Telecommunications Industry Association (TIA)/Eiectronic Industries Association (EIA)-568, Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard, current issue.
B.
EIA/TIA-569, Commercial Building Standard for Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces.
C.
ANSI/EIA/TIA-598-A, Optical Fiber Cable Color Coding, current issue.
D.
EIA/TIA-606 (2002), Administration Infrastructure of Commercial Buildings.
E.
EIA/TIA-607, Commercial Telecommunications.
F.
EIA/TIA-OFSTP-14A, Optical Power Loss Measurements of Installed Multimode Fiber Cable Plant.
G.
ANSI/TIA/EIA-758, Customer-Owned Outside Plant Telecommunications Cabling Standard, current issue.
H.
EIA/TIA-OFSTP-7, Optical Power Loss Measurements of Installed Singlemode Fiber Cable Plant.
I.
American National Standards Institute (ANSI)/EIA/TIA-455-59, Field Testing
J.
FCC Part 68.50.
K.
National Electrical Manufacturer's Association (NEMA).
L.
National Fire Protection Association (NFPA), NFPA-70.
M.
CCR Part 3 - California Electrical Code (CEC).
N.
CCR Part 2 - Uniform Building Code (UBC).
0.
Building Industry Consulting Services International (BICSI) TDMM, most recent reVISIOn.
P.
Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE).
Q.
Other Codes and Standards as defined in the Parent Specification.
and
the
Bonding
Telecommunications Requirements
for
System will be found in Parent Specification.
Will be found in Parent Specification.
WARRANTY A.
•
Grounding
for
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
1.07
Standard
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A.
1.06
Will be found in Parent Specification.
Will be found in Parent Specification .
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 TEST AND ACCEPTANCE REQUIREMENTS 26 0126-4
111001
PART 2- PROCEDURES •
2.01
EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION A.
2.02
PUNCH LIST A.
2.03
Per OAR request, The Owner's Quality Assurance Team shall assist in the Punch List for IT and low voltage systems and provide it to the OAR.
CLOSEOUT DOCUMENTATION A.
2.04
The Installer is responsible for basic installation and cross connection of LAN equipment required by the Contract Documents. The Owner's Quality Assurance Team shall verify that basic installation is complete and functional.
Will be found in Parent Specification.
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
Owner's Quality Assurance Test Schedule 1.
The Project Inspector shall schedule the Owner's Quality Assurance test after review of the Installers complete Test Results of the school.
PART 3- EXECUTION AND INSTALLATION
•
3.01
INSTALLATION A.
3.02
OWNER'S QUALITY ASSURANCE CERTIFICATION AND TESTING A.
3.03
Will be found in Parent Specification.
OWNER ORIENTATION A.
•
Will be found in Parent Specification.
CLEANUP A.
3.06
Will be found in Parent Specification.
PROTECTION A.
3.05
Will be found in Parent Specification.
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A.
3.04
Will be found in Parent Specification.
Will be found in Parent Specification .
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES I-llGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 TEST AND ACCEPTANCE REQUIREMENTS 260126-5
) ) ' LA USD Quality Assurance Guidelines
APPENDIX A- QUALITY ASSURANCE PROCEDURES A.l
Overview of Quality Testing Procedures
This appendix provides guidelines for visual Quality Assurance reviews of each site. The Owner's Quality Assurance Team shall examine the Work based upon the guidelines outlined in the following appendixes and their associated forms.
A.2
1.
Communications Cabinet Review. Verify the design and compliance with contract documents. This may include: EIAffiA and BICSI cabling practices, standard and specific labeling practices, and safe and logical equipment and wire management placement.
2.
Cable Plant Review. Cabling from the Communications cabinet, at various points along the cable path, and in functional work areas for compliance with TIAIEIA installation specifications including TIA/EIA-568-B and TIA/EIA-569 and documents referenced therein and professional installation practices.
3.
User Work Area Quality Assurance Review. Cabling at the user wall plate location in the functional work areas for compliance with TIAIEIA installation specifications including TIA/EIA-568-B and TIA/EIA-569 and documents referenced therein and professional installation practices.
4.
Redline As-Built Documentation shall be compared to physical installation. Deviations shall be noted and the Quality Assurance procedure halted until discrepancies have been rectified.
General Quality Assurance Guidelines
The Owner's Quality Assurance Team visually reviews the installation to verify that cabling is supported properly. Cable trays or structural ties shall support cable. No cable shall have been installed in pathways near sharp edges or objects that might cause damage. Cable shall not be supported by, on, or attached to a dry wall ceiling, ceiling tiles, ceiling grid, routed over pipes, conduit, lighting fixtures, or other wiring. The Owner's Quality Assurance Team should be able to determine the total number of drops dispersed from each communications cabinet, the number of drops for each supported room, and the agreed-upon labeling scheme for the site. The Installer should have met the following general labeling guidelines: 1.
Clearly labeled each drop number and Communications cabinet on the wall jack faceplate.
2.
Label each horizontal cable jacket using a permanent label at the workstation end, inside the wall, and the patch panel end no more than two inches from each end. ·
3.
At workstation end: communications cabinet, drop, and termination panel.
4.
At patch panel end: drop and cabinet numbers. A -1
26 0126-6
LAUSD Quality Assurance Guidelines 5.
Label each patch panel port with drop number and cabinet number.
Because work area room numbers may have been modified since the design, the installer shall provide as built documentation for each communications cabinet; reflecting the room numbers used in the labeling scheme as a reference point. The Contractor and his/her Subcontractor shall use these working prints to produce post-installation as-built drawings. A.3
Deficiency Reports
Before beginning any test, the Owner's Quality Assurance Team shall view any deficiency report(s) (DR) that have been filed with the OAR and Project Inspector. The Owner's Quality Assurance Team shall review the DR(s) as part of the Quality Assurance review to ensure the required corrective actions have been taken. A.4
Quality Assurance Test Procedures
The Owner's Quality Assurance Team shall follow the acceptance test and performance criteria outlined in TIA 568B, OFSTP-14A, OFSTP-7 and shall conduct acceptance and performance testing following each manufacturer's specification on their respective network components to verify compliance with manufacturer's installation instructions. The Owner's Quality Assurance Team shall also follow any specific local policy directives or instructions regarding installation practices and/or acceptance testing identified during the site orientation visit. The details for the design of a particular location shall also comply with any related State, County and Municipal standards. A.S
Construction Quality Assurance of Work:
During the installation of low voltage systems, upon request by the OAR, the Owner's Quality Assurance Team shall examine the following: 1.
General to Low Voltage Systems: a.
Conduit and raceway layout and installation for each low voltage system and verify that they meet project specifications.
b.
Equipment rack installation, including placement in the communications room, seismic bracing, and attachment to the floor.
c.
Cable punch-downs, patch panel installation, cable cross-connection, cable labeling, and cable bundling.
d.
Verify proper equipment installation, cable cross connection, system configuration, and testing.
e.
Verify system layout and device location(s) match the locations shown on the as-builds.
A-2
26 0126-7
LAUSD Quality Assurance Guidelines
2.
A.6
f.
Active components, terminal cabinets, cross connects, splices, etc. are located in a secure interior location.
g.
Verification ofUninterruptible power supply performance.
h.
Verification of proper air conditioning in MDF and IDFs. Room temperature should maintain between 65 - 72 degrees 7 days per week, 24 hours per day.
1.
Terminations punched down singly and cross-connected on 66 blocks. 66 blocks are primarily used in Public Address systems and Intercom. PBX cable plants are specified to use 11 0-blocks exclusively.
LAN, verify the following: a.
Examine Category 5e and Category 6a, T568B terminations, including cable end connections at the patch panel and wall drop receptacles.
b.
Examine fiber terminations and fiber termination boxes.
c.
Examine Installer's basic network components installation and operation.
d.
Review customized configuration and test results.
e.
Test overall network operation to ensure it meets Owner's strategic planning and acceptable performance level.
StartUp Start-up work is to be completed as a condition for Substantial Completion. Start-Up is to include the testing and commissioning of equipment and systems.
A.7
1.
After start up has been completed but prior to Substantial Completion, the Project Inspector shall schedule the Owner's Quality Assurance Team site visit.
2.
The Owner's Quality Assurance Team shall review documentation and test results for completeness.
3.
The Owner's Quality Assurance Team shall visit the site and verify the Contractor's test results by the Quality Assurance procedures detailed herein.
Contract Completion and Process Review The Quality Assurance Team shall review the entire Quality Assurance process and recommend changes to improve it on an as needed basis.
A.8
Test Procedures 1.
Visual Q/A Reviews A-3
26 0126-8
LAUSD Quality Assurance Guidelines a.
2.
Cable Performance Testing a.
3.
The Owner's Quality Assurance Team shall conduct a visual review of the installation including the communication cabinet, cable runs, and user work areas. Appendix A documents these Q/A review procedures.
The Owner's Quality Assurance Team shall test 100% ofthe fiber optic Backbone cable, a random sample of Category 5e and Category 6a UTP cable and the fiber optic Horizontal cable. Appendix C outlines these specific tests. (1)
Test Cable Sampling: The Owner's Quality Assurance Team shall randomly test 10% of installed horizontal cables from each communication cabinet on site. For example, if a communications cabinet has 100 drops, the Owner's Quality Assurance Team shall test a minimum of 10 drops for each cabinet. Where random testing shows a failure rate of more than 1% of the drops (2 in 10 of the random sample), an additional 10% of the installed horizontal cabling shall be tested. Appendix B outlines these specific tests.
(2)
Cable Testing: The Owner's Quality Assurance Team shall perform the following industry-standard operational and performance cable testing detailed in TIAIEIA 568B.l: (a)
Wire map
(b)
Length verification.
(c)
Insertion loss (attenuation)
(d)
Near-end crosstalk (NEXT)
(e)
Power sum near-end crosstalk (PSNEXT)
(f)
Equal level far-end crosstalk (ELFEXT)
(g)
Power sum equal level far-end crosstalk (PSELFEXT)
(h)
Return loss
(i)
Propagation delay
G)
Delay skew
Network Equipment Testing a.
The Owner's Quality Assurance Team shall perform network tests on hardware components for proper installation, per manufacturer's A-4
26 0126-9
LA USD Quality Assurance Guidelines
recommendations and configuration. Components shall be tested separately for initial power up and their ability to maintain system configuration. The specific test for network equipment components is described in Appendix D. A.9
A.lO
A.ll
Acceptance Criteria
1.
An overall Pass or Fail condition shall be determined by the results of the required individual test. Any Fail and Fail* shall result in an overall Fail. In order to achieve an overall Pass condition, individual results shall be Pass or Pass*. A Pass or Fail result for each parameter is determined by the allowable limits for that parameter. The test result of a parameter is marked with an asterisk (*)when the result is closer to the test limit than the accuracy of the field tester. The field tester manufacturer shall provide documentation as an aid to interpret results marked with asterisks.
2.
Cable plant acceptance by the Owner requires I 00% passing results for cable samples and corrected cabling deficiencies. Acceptance of other components is based upon satisfactory completion of a test configuration scenario, as defined in the appropriate appendix to this plan.
Corrective Procedures
1.
EIA!TIA testing specification details a pass/fail criterion, i.e., if a fiber optic cable is outside of specifications, the test fails, The Owner's Quality Assurance Team shall identify any deficiencies found during Quality Assurance (e.g., a cable or component failing a test) to site personnel before the Owner's Quality Assurance Teams departure and shall document these deficiencies in the Quality Assurance Report. If the link attenuation for any fiber optic cable strand is outside acceptable loss as specified in TIAIEIA-568-B, the Installer shall recomplete the terminations required to reduce the amount of attenuation. If retermination fails, the Installer shall be required to take steps up to and including the replacement of the cable to eliminate the testing deficiency. After corrective action, the Owner's Quality Assurance Team shall retest repaired fiber runs and document the results in the Quality Assurance Report.
2.
The Owner's Quality Assurance Team shall identify to the Owner in writing any deviation from acceptable EWTIA specifications for cabling resulting in a test failure. The Owner may choose to accept the deficiency via a written waiver. For example, if a fiber optic connection exceeds the allowable termination attenuation by 0.1 decibels (dB), but the total link attenuation is within the length attenuation budget, the Owner may choose to waive the specification. Other components (e.g., switches or routers) must function according to the specified configurations in the final Work Plan for Owner LAN projects.
Quality Assurance Reporting
1.
Acceptance Recommendation
A-5
26 0126-10
LA USD Quality Assurance Guidelines a.
2.
Quality Assurance Report a.
A.12
At the conclusion of testing, the Owner's Quality Assurance Team shall provide a recommendation to Owner to accept or not accept the installation.
The Owner's Quality Assurance Team shall deliver a Quality Assurance Report to the project OAR no later than seven (7) working days after completion of testing. This report shall include: (1)
A written test report for visual installation tests.
(2)
Electronic test results of cable testing including verified cable lengths, test personnel, test date, and individual test description.
(3)
Each detected deficiency with its correction date and retest results, if accomplished.
(4)
Network operational test results for the switch(s) and router connections.
(5)
Any condition(s) precluding strict adherence to NEC, EWTIA, and BICSI installations or Quality Assurance standards shall be marked for potential Owner waiver before system acceptance.
(6)
A summary confirming the acceptance recommendation given.
Test Equipment 1.
The Owner's Quality Assurance Team shall use the following test equipment or their equivalent during testing. a.
Fluke DSP 4300 Level III, or equal, tester with single-mode and multimode power meter and light source heads.
b.
Fluke Optifiber Optical Time Domain Reflectometer (OTDR)
c.
Personal computer with Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) protocol stacks.
d.
Thermometer
A-6
260126-11
LAUSD Quality Assurance Guidelines Table 2.6.1 T & A Checklist for Owner's Quality Assurance Team Projects Site Location Code I Name
________________ OAR _________________________
Network Engineer
-------------------------OAR Recommendation
Insp ector
------~----------------------
Electrical _______________________ Inspector
ReView Itent
:··.
·.·
,,
Yes
No
'NiA.'·
Pass/Fail
Have deficiencies been cleared by the Project Inspector or OAR? Has the vendor provided cable charts in the cabinets? Are there any horizontal cables over 90m? Do the cable runs used agree with the cable routing drawings? Are the cables routed and terminated per specification? Are cable run penetrations terminated to preclude strain on the installed cable? Are the copper and fiber optic cables installed per the manufacturer's recommendation? Is each cable clearly labeled at the user's location? Is each port on the patch panel labeled with the corresponding user outlet location? Are cable and patch panel labels securely fastened and easily readable? Are the fiber cables in the fiber termination box labeled per the approved labeling scheme and immediately adjacent to each termination within the fiber termination box? Is the cable for each drop identified with the correct labeling scheme at or near the point of termination? Does the user outlet plate display the correct labeling scheme and match the distant end label? Are connectors free of exposed metal, loose connectors, or other problems? Is the cable jacket stripped back only as far as required to terminate on connecting hardware? Is the physical plant installed in accordance with specifications of this project? For traditional, hierarchical star cable plants following 25568 specifications, are there at least 50% spare Backbone strands, in multiples of 6 strands, to each IDF from the MDF ?
A-7
26 0126-12
LA USD Quality Assurance Guidelines For new fiber optics cable plant installations following 25569 specifications, are there at least 15 percent spare Backbone strands, in multiples of 6 strands, to each IDF from the MDF ? Does this site have an existing Local Area Network? Is the Tl line correctly installed and ready to cut over? Also, has the extension to the MDF been installed? Will the site reutilize an existing router? If yes, specify exact model I serial number. Is the router configured and ready for cut over? Are the required amounts of GB Uplinks provided to accommodate the equipment installed including port expansion? Are classroom and administration switches mounted, connected, and operational? Has the vendor provided inventory and the drop count been verified or has an Inventory document been completed? If so, please attach.
A.13
Visual Q/A Review Worksheets The following pages provide the three visual Quality Assurance worksheets: 1.
Communications Cabinet Quality Assurance Review Form
2.
Cable Routing Quality Assurance Review Form
3.
User Work Area Quality Assurance Review Form
A-8
26 0126-13
LA USD Quality Assurance Guidelines
A.13.1 Communications Enclosure Quality Assurance Review Form Site
~
Date
. ·: . :r . .:
!·> .; . "·.• :-. ~ ._... -~· ·, •• ::~:· ·•
Q/A REVIEW ITEM . ' . : ' .. : .
.'
'
'
-~
'
,'
: ;~ :<
Quality Assurance _ _ _ _ _ _ Rep(s) '-.
..
: :>; .. :
.J
'
.·.PAsS'J·
FAIL. ·::.:r:..
Is the cabinet ready for a Q/A review? If not, list discrepancies (e.g., debris, punch- list, or un-terminated cable). Is the installation performed in the planned communications cabinet? Are there clearly identified final or redlined drawings showing the "as-built" installation? With all devices operating, are ambient cabinet and room temperatures within 50-80° F? The temperature is: Are heating, ventilation, and air conditioning (HVA C), lighting, and electrical outlets installed per contract? Are the requirements addressed in the Site Concurrence Memorandum or other documentation? Are cabinet rails and wire managers installed so as to preclude any space problems with the UPS? Are the cabinets seismically braced to the floor and/or wall? Is there adequate space around the racks and fiber termination panel for maintenance? Are patch panels, wire management panels, and network equipment properly affixed to the rack? Is debris cleaned from inside of cabinets? Are cable run penetrations installed so fire barriers are maintained in cabinet locations? Are cable run penetrations properly and securely fastened to supporting structures? Are cable run penetrations terminated to preclude strain on the installed cable in cabinet locations? Are cables routed and punched per specification and industry standards? Is each cable clearly labeled with the corresponding user location per specification? Is each port on the patch panel labeled with the corresponding user location per specification? Are cable and patch panel labels securely fastened and easily readable per specification? Is there Yz-inch or less of untwisting on any cable pair at the termination point? Is the UTP cable jacket stripped back only as far as required to terminate on connecting hardware? Is a bend radius of at least l-inch maintained for sheathed UTP cable? Is the fiber optic cable free from excessive strain or stress, sharp bends, or kinks? Are service loops in place at each end of the cable? Are the fiber cables in the fiber termination unit? Is the box labeled per the approved labeling scheme and immediately adjacent to each termination within the fiber termination box? A- 9
26 0126-14
LA USD Quality Assurance Guidelines Is excess fiber optic cable coiled in the termination box so it does not exceed the minimum bend radius per manufacturer's recommendations and specifications? Are fiber optic patch cords neatly routed to the network equipment via wire management?
A.13.2 Cable Routing Q/A Form Site
-------------------
Date _ _ _ _ _ _ Q/ARep(s) _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
Are cable bundles either secured to the wall or to a non-electromagnetic interferenceproducing source or hung from the ceiling (e.g., suspended via cable trays, inner duct, Jhooks, 0-rings, or ladder rack) per specification or best industry standards? Do the cable runs used agree with the redline drawings? If not, are accurate redlined drawings available showing the cable routing? Is debris from the cable run penetrations adequately cleaned up per specification? Is the fiber optic cable runs completely contained within inner duct? Where? Notes:
A-10
26 0126-15
LAUSD Quality Assurance Guidelines A.13.3 User Work Area Q/A Review Form Site
------------------····.·
•'
Q/A R~:VIEW fi'EM
Date _ _ _ _ _ _ Q/A Rep(s) _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __ .
.
'
··,·· ~
.. ·•.
.,
·r.t\88 ...· :FAiL·'.'; '.
I·
~,-
Are wall jack faceplates professionally installed and finished? Is cabling precluded from view on the external surface of walls (e.g., ducting used on solid core walls)? Does the user outlet plate display the correct labeling scheme? Is the cable for each drop identified with the correct labeling scheme and within 2 inches of termination per specification? Is the cable installed in a manner that precludes cable strain? Are connectors insulated from surrounding cable and objects (e.g., are cable barrel adapters, connectors, devices, and terminators insulated from any earth ground or current-conducting surfaces of the building structure)? Are connectors free of exposed metal, loose connectors, or other problems? Is there Y:z-inch or less of untwisting on any cable pair at the termination point? Is the cable jacket stripped back only as far as required to terminate on connecting hardware? Is a bend radius of at least l-inch maintained for sheathed UTP cable? Is the 4 or 6 strand fiber secured properly in the LDFs and LDCs? Notes:
A -11
26 0126-16
•'
LA USD Quality Assurance Guidelines APPENDIX B- CATEGORY 5E AND CATEGORY 6 UTP CABLE PERFORMANCE TESTS B.l
Overview of Cable Tests
This appendix provides guidelines for electronic testing of Horizontal Category 5e UTP wiring. The Owner's Quality Assurance Team shall meet the guidelines outlined in the following Q/A review and its associated forms. •
B.2
Electronic Testing. This testing verifies that the standard performance parameters for the UTP cable as outlined in TIA/EIA 568-B are within the specifications as noted below. TIAIEIA 568-B addresses specific field-tests for post-installation performance measurements of the designed cable plants. Owner only uses Category 5e, or Category 6a UTP cables for its LAN installations. Refer to Premise Wiring Specification. Test and Support Equipment 1. The types of cable to be tested are as follows :
a.
Category 5E UTP shall be tested based on TIAIEIA 568-B.1 section 11.2.3 specifications
b.
Category 6a UTP shall be tested based on TIA/EIA 568-B.2-1
Note: Sections B2 through B6 address Category 5E related tests, requirements, and specifications. Sections B7 through Bll address Category 6a related tests, requirements, and specifications. B.3
Electronic Tests
The Owner's Quality Assurance Team randomly selects cables for testing and every effort shall be made to avoid a typical testing pattern from communications cabinet to work area outlet, so that no testing pattern is discernible. The testing personnel shall inspect drops on the faceplate in multiple cases to ensure cables are labeled and no cross connects are visible, etc. The testing personnel shall perform a Q/A review of the cable termination(s) in the Communications cabinet(s) and the corresponding user location of selected cables (e.g., the faceplate labels or terminations behind the termination panel). The personnel must be consistent in testing selected cables. The permanent link test configurations described in TIAIEIA 568-B.1 section 11.2.4.1, performance parameters include wire map, length, Insertion loss (attenuation), NEXT, PSNEXT, ELFEXT, PSELFEXT, Return loss, Propagation delay and Delay Skew for 100 W 4-pair Category 5e cabling. 568-B.1 section 11.2.4.3 thru .11 identifies acceptable ranges of test results, test equipment checks, diagnostic information, and specific test procedures. TIAIEIA 568-B.l section 11.2.4.1, also specifies laboratory measurement methods, component and field test methods and computation algorithms over the specified frequency range. To ensure verifiable equipment calibration, the Owner's Quality
B -1
26 0126-17
·) ').LAUSD Quality Assurance Guidelines Assurance Team shall certify test equipment accuracy in compliance with 568-B.1 section 11.2.4.3 thru .1 0 each time a new list of tests is performed. The Owner's Quality Assurance Team shall consider cable(s) and cabling components as pre-tested by the manufacturer to meet TIAIEIA-568-B Category 5e specifications. Therefore, individual testing of connectors and other cabling components is not required.
B.4
Data Accuracy Tests shall be conducted on the premise that TIA/EIA-568-B and other applicable specifications were applied to the cable installation. Further, the Owner's Quality Assurance Team shall be provided the test result book to verify the Installer tested 100 percent of their work, so the sampling tests performed ensures system operability and customer satisfaction.
B.S
Data and Test Reporting The Quality Assurance Report shall clearly identify the test environment, test equipment used, name of each tester, acceptable results (as specified in 568-B), and actual results for each test performed. If a failure occurs, the test shall proceed, with the failure reported to the responsible Installer for repair at test end.
B.6
Communications Wiring Electrical Tests B.6.1 Wire Map Wire Map shall report Pass if the wiring of each wire-pair from end to end is determined to be correct. The Wire Map results shall include the continuity of the shield connection if present.
B.6.2 Length The field tester shall be capable of measuring length of all pairs of a permanent link or channel based on the propagation delay measurement and the average value for Nominal Velocity of Propagation (1). The physical length of the link shall be calculated using the pair with the shortest electrical delay. This length figure shall be reported and shall be used for making the Pass/Fail decision. The Pass/Fail criteria are based on the maximum length allowed for the Permanent Link configuration (90 meters- 295 feet) plus 10% to allow for the variation and uncertainty ofNVP.
B.6.3 Insertion Loss (Attenuation) Insertion Loss is a measure of signal loss in the permanent link or channel. The term "Attenuation" has been used to designate "Insertion Loss." Insertion Loss shall be tested from1 MHz, through the highest applicable frequency. It is preferred to measure insertion loss at the same frequency intervals as NEXT
B-2
26 0126-18
LA USD Quality Assurance Guidelines Loss in order to provide a more accurate calculation of the Attenuation-toCrosstalk ratio (ACR) parameter. Minimum test result documentation (summary results): Identify the worst wire pair (1 of 4 possible). The test results for the worst wire pair must show the highest attenuation value measured (worst case), the frequency at which this worst case value occurs, and the test limit value at this frequency.
B.6.4 NEXT Loss Pair-to-pair near-end crosstalk loss (abbreviated as NEXT Loss) shall be tested for each wire pair combination from each end of the link (a total of 12 pair combinations). This parameter is to be measured from 1 through the highest applicable frequency. NEXT Loss measures the crosstalk disturbance on a wire pair at the end from which the disturbance signal is transmitted (near-end) on the disturbing pair. The maximum step size for NEXT Loss measurements shall not exceed the maximum step size defmed in the draft standard as shown in Table 1, column 2. Minimum test results documentation (summary results): Identify the wire pair combination that exhibits the worst case NEXT margin (2) and the wire pair combination that exhibits the worst value ofNEXT (worst case). Table 1
1-31.25
0.15
31.26- 100
0.25
100- 250
0.50
NEXT is to be measured from each end of the link-under-test. These wire pair combinations must be identified for the tests performed from each end. Each reported case shall include the frequency at which it occurs as well as the test limit value at this frequency.
B.6.5 PSNEXT Loss Power Sum NEXT Loss shall be evaluated and reported for each wire pair from both ends ofthe link-under-test (a total of8 results). PSNEXT Loss captures the combined near-end crosstalk effect (statistical) on a wire pair when other pairs actively transmit signals. Like NEXT this test parameter must be evaluated from 1 MHz through the highest applicable frequency and the step size may not exceed the maximum step size defined in the draft standard as shown in Table 1, column 2. Minimum test result documentation (summary results): Identify the wire pair that exhibits the worst case margin and the wire pair that exhibits the worst value
B-3
26 0126-19
LA USD Quality Assurance Guidelines for PSNEXT. These wire pairs must be identified for the tests performed from each end. Each reported case shall include the frequency at which it occurs as well as the test limit value at this frequency.
B.6.6 ELFEXT Loss, pair-to-pair Pair-to-pair FEXT Loss shall be measured for each wire-pair combination from both ends of the link under test. FEXT Loss measures the crosstalk disturbance on a wire pair at the opposite end (far-end) from which the transmitter emits the disturbing signal on the disturbing pair. FEXT is measured to compute ELFEXT Loss that must be evaluated and reported in the test results. ELFEXT measures the relative strength of the far-end crosstalk disturbance relative to the attenuated signal that arrives at the end of the link. This test yields 24 wire pair combinations. ELFEXT is to be measured from 1 through the highest applicable frequency and the maximum step size for FEXT Loss measurements shall not exceed the maximum step size defined in the draft standard as in Table 1, column 2. Minimum test result documentation (summary results): Identify the wire pair combination that exhibits the worst-case margin and the wire pair combination that exhibits the worst value for ELFEXT. These wire pairs must be identified for the tests performed from each end. Each reported case shall include the frequency at which it occurs as well as the test limit value at this frequency.
B.6. 7 PSELFEXT Loss Power Sum ELF EXT is a calculated parameter that combines the effect of the FEXT disturbance from three wire pairs on the fourth one. This test yields 8 wire-pair combinations. Each wire-pair is evaluated from 1 MHz through the highest applicable frequency in frequency increments that do not exceed the maximum step size defined in the draft standard as shown in Table 1, column 2. Minimum test result documentation (summary results): Identify the wire pair that exhibits the worst case margin and the wire pair that exhibits the worst value for PSELFEXT. These wire pairs must be identified for the tests performed from each end. Each reported case shall include the frequency at which it occurs as well as the test limit value at this frequency.
B.6.8 Return Loss Return Loss (RL) measures the total energy reflected on each wire pair. Return Loss is to be measured from both ends of the link-under-test for each wire pair. This parameter is also to be measured from 1 through the highest applicable frequency in increments that do not exceed the maximum step size defined in the draft standard as shown in Table 1, column 2. Minimum test result documentation (summary results): Identify the wire pair that exhibits the worst case margin and the wire pair that exhibits the worst value
B- 4 26 0126-20
LA USD Quality Assurance Guidelines for Return Loss. These wire pairs must be identified for the tests performed from each end. Each reported case shall include the frequency at which it occurs as well as the test limit value at this frequency.
B.6.9 Propagation Delay Propagation delay is the time required for the signal to travel from one end of the link to the other. This measurement is to be performed for each of the four wire pairs. Minimum test result documentation (summary results): Identify the wire pair with the worst case propagation delay. The report shall include the propagation delay value measured as well as the test limit value.
B.6.10 Delay Skew This parameter shows the difference in propagation delay between the four wire pairs. Minimum test result documentation (summary results): Identify the wire pairs with the worst-case propagation Delay skew. The report shall include the Delay skew value measured as well as the test limit value.
B.6.11 ACR (Attenuation to crosstalk ratio) This parameter is not required by TIA standards but may be expected in order to obtain the premise wiring manufacturer's warranty. ACR provides an indication of bandwidth for the two wire-pair network applications. ACR is a computed parameter that is analogous to ELFEXT and expresses the signal to noise ratio for a two wire-pair system. This calculation yields 12 combinations- six from each end of the link. Minimum test result documentation (summary results): Identify the wire pair combination that exhibits the worst-case margin and the wire pair combination that exhibits the worst value for ACR. These wire pair combinations must be identified for the tests performed from each end. Each reported case shall include the frequency at which it occurs as well as the test limit value at this frequency.
B.6.12 PSACR This parameter is not required by TIA standards but may be required in order to obtain the premise wiring vendor's warranty. The Power Sum version of ACR is based on PSNEXT and takes into account the combined NEXT disturbance of adjacent wire pairs on each individual pair. This calculation yields 8 combinations - one for each wire pair from both ends of the link. Minimum test result documentation (summary results): Identify the wire pair that exhibits the worst case margin and the wire pair that exhibits the worst value
B- 5
26 0126-21
LAUSD Quality Assurance Guidelines for PSACR. These wire pairs must be identified for the tests performed from each end. Each reported case shall include the frequency at which it occurs as well as the test limit value at this frequency.
B- 6 26 0126-22
LA USD Quality Assurance Guidelines
8.7 Site
Communications Wiring Electrical Test Form
-----------------------------
Building and Communications Room Numbers
Date
-----------------
Q/A Rep(s)
B -7
26 0126-23
LA USD Quality Assurance Guidelines
B.8
Electronic Tests
The Owner's Quality Assurance Team randomly selects cables for testing and every effort shall be made to avoid a typical testing pattern from communications cabinet to work area outlet, so that no testing pattern is discernible. The testing personnel shall inspect drops on the faceplate in multiple cases to ensure cables are labeled and no cross connects are visible, etc. The testing personnel shall perform a Q/A review of the cable termination(s) in the Communications cabinet(s) and the corresponding user location of selected cables (e.g., the faceplate labels or terminations behind the termination panel). The personnel must be consistent in testing selected cables. The permanent link test configurations described in TIA/EIA 568-B.2-1, performance parameters include wire map, length, Insertion loss (attenuation), NEXT, PSNEXT, ELFEXT, PSELFEXT, Return loss, Propagation delay and Delay Skew for 100 W 4pair Category 6a cabling. 568-B.2 identifies acceptable ranges of test results, test equipment checks, diagnostic information and specific test procedures as related to Category 6a cabling. TIA/EIA 568-B.2-1 also includes laboratory measurement methods, component and field test methods, and computation algorithms over the specified frequency range. The test equipment (tester) shall comply with the accuracy requirements for level III field testers as defined in TIA/EIA 568-B.2-1. The tester including the appropriate interface adapter must meet the specified accuracy requirements. The accuracy requirements for the permanent link test configuration (baseline accuracy plus adapter contribution) are specified in Table B.2 of Annex B of e TIAIEIA 568-B.2-1 standard. (Table B.3 in this TIA document specifies the accuracy requirements for the Channel configuration.) The Owner's Quality Assurance Team shall consider cable(s) and cabling components as pre-tested by the manufacturer to meet TIA/EIA-568-8.2-1 Category 6a specifications. Therefore, individual testing of connectors and other cabling components is not required.
B.9
Data Accuracy Tests shall be conducted on the premise that TIA/EIA-568-B.2 and other applicable specifications were applied to the cable installation. Further, the Owner's Quality Assurance Team shall be provided the test result book to verify the Installer tested 100 percent of their work, so the sampling tests performed ensures system operability and customer satisfaction. The tester interface adapters must be of high quality and the cable shall not show any twisting or kinking resulting from coiling and storing of the tester interface adapters. In order to deliver optimum accuracy, preference is given to a permanent link interface adapter for the tester that can be calibrated to extend the reference plane of the Return Loss measurement to the permanent link interface. The contractor shall provide proof that the interface has been calibrated within the period recommended by the vendor. To ensure that normal handling on the job does not cause measurable Return Loss change, the adapter cord cable shall not be of twisted-pair construction. B-8 26 0126-24
LAUSD Quality Assurance Guidelines B.lO
Data and Test Reporting The Quality Assurance Report shall clearly identify the test environment, test equipment used, name of each tester, acceptable results (as specified in 568-B Category 6a related), and actual results for each test performed. If a failure occurs, the test shall proceed, with the failure reported to the responsible Installer for repair at test end.
B.ll
Communications Wiring Electrical Tests The test parameters for Category 5e and Category 6a are defined in TIAIEIA-568-B.2 standard. The test of each link shall contain of the following parameters as detailed below. In order to pass the test, measurements (at each frequency in the range from 1 MHz through 350 MHz) must meet or exceed the limit value determined in the abovementioned standard. B.ll.l Wire Map Wire Map shall report Pass if the wiring of each wire-pair from end to end is determined to be correct. The Wire Map results shall include the continuity of the shield connection if present.
B.11.2 Length The field tester shall be capable of measuring length of pairs of a permanent link or channel based on the propagation delay measurement and the average value for Nominal Velocity of Propagation. The physical length of the link shall be calculated using the pair with the shortest electrical delay. This length figure shall be reported and shall be used for making the Pass/Fail decision. The Pass/Fail criteria are based on the maximum length allowed for the Permanent Link configuration (90 meters- 295 feet) plus 10% to allow for the variation and uncertainty ofNVP.
B.11.3 Insertion Loss (Attenuation) Insertion Loss is a measure of signal loss in the permanent link or channel. The term "Attenuation" has been used to designate "Insertion Loss." Insertion Loss shall be tested froml MHz, through the highest applicable frequency. It is preferred to measure insertion loss at the same frequency intervals as NEXT Loss in order to provide a more accurate calculation of the Attenuation-toCrosstalk ratio (ACR) parameter. Minimum test result documentation (summary results): Identify the worst wire pair (1 of 4 possible). The test results for the worst wire pair must show the highest attenuation value measured (worst case), the frequency at which this worst case value occurs and the test limit value at this frequency.
B.11.4 NEXT Loss
B- 9 26 0126-25
LAUSD Quality Assurance Guidelines Pair-to-pair near-end crosstalk loss (abbreviated as NEXT Loss) shall be tested for each wire pair combination from each end of the link (a total of 12 pair combinations). This parameter is to be measured from 1 through the highest applicable frequency. NEXT Loss measures the crosstalk disturbance on a wire pair at the end from which the disturbance signal is transmitted (near-end) on the disturbing pair. The maximum step size for NEXT Loss measurements shall not exceed the maximum step size defined in the draft standard as shown in Table 2, column 2. Minimum test results documentation (summary results): Identify the wire pair combination that exhibits the worst case NEXT margin (2) and the wire pair combination that exhibits the worst value ofNEXT (worst case). Table 2
Fr~quency Rallge (l\1JIZ) I- 31.25
0.15
31.26- 100
0.25
100-250
0.50
250-350
1.00
NEXT is to be measured from each end of the link-under-test. These wire pair combinations must be identified for the tests performed from each end. Each reported case shall include the frequency at which it occurs as well as the test limit value at this frequency. B.11.5 PSNEXT Loss Power Sum NEXT Loss shall be evaluated and reported for each wire pair from both ends of the link-under-test (a total of eight results). PSNEXT Loss captures the combined near-end crosstalk effect (statistical) on a wire pair when other pairs actively transmit signals. Like NEXT this test parameter must be evaluated from 1 MHz through the highest applicable frequency and the step size may not exceed the maximum step size defined in the draft standard as shown in Table 2, column 2. Minimum test result documentation (summary results): Identify the wire pair that exhibits the worst case margin and the wire pair that exhibits the worst value for PSNEXT. These wire pairs must be identified for the tests performed from each end. Each reported case shall include the frequency at which it occurs as well as the test limit value at this frequency. B.11.6 ELFEXT Loss, pair-to-pair Pair-to-pair FEXT Loss shall be measured for each wire-pair combination from both ends of the link under test. FEXT Loss measures the crosstalk disturbance on a wire pair at the opposite end (far-end) from which the transmitter emits the disturbing signal on the disturbing pair. FEXT is measured to compute ELFEXT
B -10
26 0126-26
LAUSD Quality Assurance Guidelines Loss that must be evaluated and reported in the test results. ELFEXT measures the relative strength of the far-end crosstalk disturbance relative to the attenuated signal that arrives at the end of the link. This test yields 24 wire pair combinations. ELFEXT is to be measured from 1 through the highest applicable frequency and the maximum step size for FEXT Loss measurements shall not exceed the maximum step size defined in the draft standard as in Table 2, column 2. Minimum test result documentation (summary results): Identify the wire pair combination that exhibits the worst-case margin and the wire pair combination that exhibits the worst value for ELFEXT. These wire pairs must be identified for the tests performed from each end. Each reported case shall include the frequency at which it occurs as well as the test limit value at this frequency.
B.11.7 PSELFEXT Loss Power Sum ELF EXT is a calculated parameter that combines the effect of the FEXT disturbance from three wire pairs on the fourth one. This test yields 8 wire-pair combinations. Each wire-pair is evaluated from 1 MHz through the highest applicable frequency in frequency increments that do not exceed the maximum step size defined in the draft standard as shown in Table 2, column 2. Minimum test result documentation (summary results): Identify the wire pair that exhibits the worst case margin and the wire pair that exhibits the worst value for PSELFEXT. These wire pairs must be identified for the tests performed from each end. Each reported case shall include the frequency at which it occurs as well as the test limit value at this frequency.
B.11.8 Return Loss Return Loss (RL) measures the total energy reflected on each wire pair. Return Loss is to be measured from both ends of the link-under-test for each wire pair. This parameter is also to be measured from 1 through the highest applicable frequency in increments that do not exceed the maximum step size defined in the draft standard as shown in Table 2, column 2. Minimum test result documentation (summary results): Identify the wire pair that exhibits the worst case margin and the wire pair that exhibits the worst value for Return Loss. These wire pairs must be identified for the tests performed from each end. Each reported case shall include the frequency at which it occurs as well as the test limit value at this frequency.
B.11.9 Propagation Delay Propagation delay is the time required for the signal to travel from one end of the link to the other.
B-11
26 0126-27
LA USD Quality Assurance Guidelines This measurement is to be performed for each of the four wire pairs. Minimum test result documentation (summary results): Identify the wire pair with the worst case propagation delay. The report shall include the propagation delay value measured as well as the test limit value. B.ll.lO
Delay Skew
As defined in TIA/EIA-568-B.l; Section 11.2.4.11, this parameter shows the difference in propagation delay between the four wire pairs. The pair with the shortest propagation delay is the reference pair with a delay skew value of zero. Minimum test result documentation (summary results): Identify the wire pairs with the worst-case propagation Delay skew. The report shall include the Delay skew value measured as well as the test limit value. B.ll.ll
ACR (Attenuation to crosstalk ratio)
This parameter is not required by TIA standards but may be expected in order to obtain the premise wiring manufacturer's warranty. ACR provides an indication of bandwidth for the two wire-pair network applications. ACR is a computed parameter that is analogous to ELFEXT and expresses the signal to noise ratio for a two wire-pair system. This calculation yields 12 combinations - six from each end of the link. Minimum test result documentation (summary results): Identify the wire pair combination that exhibits the worst-case margin and the wire pair combination that exhibits the worst value for ACR. These wire pair combinations must be identified for the tests performed from each end. Each reported case shall include the frequency at which it occurs as well as the test limit value at this frequency. B.11.12
PSACR
This parameter is not required by TIA standards but may be required in order to obtain the premise wiring vendor's warranty. The Power Sum version of ACR is based on PSNEXT and takes into account the combined NEXT disturbance of adjacent wire pairs on each individual pair. This calculation yields 8 combinations - one for each wire pair from both ends of the link. Minimum test result documentation (summary results): Identify the wire pair that exhibits the worst case margin and the wire pair that exhibits the worst value for PSACR. These wire pairs must be identified for the tests performed from each end. Each reported case shall include the frequency at which it occurs as well as the test limit value at this frequency.
B -12
26 0126-28
LA USD Quality Assurance Guidelines
8.12 Site
Communications Wiring Electrical Test Form
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - D a t e - - - - - - - - - - Q/ARep(s)
Building and Communications Room Numbers
B-13
26 0126-29
LAUSD Quality Assurance Guidelines
APPENDIX C - FIBER OPTIC CABLE PERFORMANCE TESTS C.l
Overview of Cable Tests TIA/EIA-568-B.3 states, "The optical fiber cable construction shall consist of 50/125 mm or 62.5/125 mm multimode optical fibers or single mode optical fibers, or a combination of these media." Multimode fiber shall have a graded-index optical fiber waveguide with nominal 50/125 Jlm for installations following specification 27 1514, or 62.5/125 Jlm core/ cladding diameter for installations following specification 27 1513. Primary and secondary backbone cable testing shall be equivalent to backbone cabling as defined in TIAIEIA-568-B.1 section 11.3.3, such as cabling interconnecting telecommunications closets, equipment cabinets, and entrance facilities. Therefore, the Owner's Quality Assurance Team shall perform the following interrelated tests:
C.2
1.
Verification of multi-mode fiber optic cable installations.
2.
Verification of single-mode fiber optic cable installations.
3.
Electronic measurement of the distance and equivalent attenuation per kilometer (krn) to verify minimum data transmission capacity per specification.
4.
Total link attenuation measurements.
Test Equipment The following test equipment shall be used: 1.
Fluke DSP 4300 Level III, or equal, tester with single mode and multi-mode power meter and light source heads
2.
Fluke, or equal, OptiFiber Optical Time Domain Reflectometer (OTDR)
C.2.1 Cabling Distance Section 27 1513 states that the maximum allowable multimode cable distance from MDF to IDF is 450 meters. The Multimode strands shall primarily be utilized by the network electronics up to 450 meters and testing shall conform to OFSTP-14A. The Singlemode strands shall be required where cabling the Backbone distance exceeds 450 meters and testing shall conform to OFSTP-7.
C.2.2 Cable Attenuation The list below details the information presented in TIAIEIA - 568B.3 to illustrate the allowable attenuation per kilometer for 50/125, 62.51125 and 9J.Lm fiber. Table C.2.2-1. Maximum Cable Attenuation Coefficient for Backbone Fiber
c- l 26 0126-30
LAUSD Quality Assurance Guidelines·
50/125 Jlffi@ 850run
3.5 dB/km
50/125 J.Lm @ 1300run
1.5 dB/km
62.5/125 J.Lm@ 850run
.5 dB/km
62.5/125 Jlffi@ 1300run
.5 dB/km
9 Jlffi @ 1310 run (indoor)
1 dB/km
9 Jlm@ 1550 run (indoor)
1 dB/km
9 Jlffi@ 1310 nm (indoor)
1 dB/km
9 Jlm@ 1550 run (indoor)
1 dB/km
C.2.3 Connector Attenuation Per ANSIIEIAITIA-455-59, the maximum optical attenuation per connector pair shall not exceed 0.75 dB.
C.3
Test Procedures For multi-mode fiber the Owner's Quality Assurance Team shall use the Omni Scanner 2 to test the length and total attenuation at both the 850 run and 1300 run wavelengths in each direction (bi-directionally). If the test fails, the Owner's Quality Assurance Team shall complete a repeat test using the OTDR to assess the failure point and address corrective actions. (See Methods A and B attached.) For single-mode fiber, the Owner's Quality Assurance Team shall use a power meter and light source. The specific nanometer wavelength(s) at which the single-mode fiber shall be tested (i.e., 1310 run and/or 1550 nm) shall be determined based on the length of the fiber cable being tested.
C.3.1 Cable Distance Using the Omni Scanner 2 or OTDR, the Owner's Quality Assurance Team shall determine the overall fiber optic cable length to ensure the cabling distance is within the maximum allowable length.
C.3.2 Attenuation TIAIEIA-568-B.l section 11.3.3, states, "When installing components compliant with this standard, the single performance parameter necessary for performance testing is link attenuation." Also "The backbone optical fiber cabling link segment should be tested in one direction at both operating wavelengths, to account for attenuation deltas associated with wavelength. 1.
50/125 f.!m backbone links shall be tested at 850 and 1300 run in accordance with ANSIIEIA/TIA-526-14-A, Method B, with One "Reference Jumper."
2.
62.5/125 f.1ID backbone links shall be tested at 850 and 1300 hm in accordance with ANSIIEWTIA-526-14-A, Method B, with One "Reference Jumper."
c -2 26 0126-31
LA USD Quality Assurance Guidelines 3.
9Jlm backbone links shall be tested at 1310 and 1550 nm in accordance with ANSI/EWTIA-526-7, Method A. I." The Owner's Quality Assurance Team shall use the Omni Scanner 2 or OTDR to measure the attenuation due to fiber optic cable and connectors. The Owner's Quality Assurance Team shall test and record attenuation at both 850nm/1300nm for each Multi-mode and 131 Onm/1550nm for Single-mode fiber optic strand respectively terminated under this initiative. These tests shall be performed at each communications cabinet and from the MDF cabinet, as required.
C.3.3 Information Transmission Capacity The fiber optic cable is assumed to be within the allowable attenuation per kilometer as specified in TIA/EIA-568-B.1 section 11.3.3.4. The Owner's Quality Assurance Team shall presume the transmission capacity of the cable is within specification.
C.4
Data Reporting and Accuracy The Owner's Quality Assurance Team shall report loss measurement results, with locations and wavelength identifications, to the Owner in accordance with EWTIA OFSTP-14 and OFSTP-
Figure C- Testing Methods A, Band Adaptive B 1.
C.S
Diagrams and Explanations for testing
Fiber Optic Cable Installation Test Forms
The following pages provide the two fiber optic cable installation test forms: 1.
Fiber Optic Cable Installation Test Form-OTDR
2.
Fiber Optic Cable Installation Test Form-Power Meter and Light Source
Figure C - Method A, Method B and Adapted Method B Explained Solution The testing of premises fiber optic cabling links requires precise methods for referencing to obtain accurate and valid test results. Loss testing for multimode fiber cabling is specified in ANSIITIAIEIA526-14A. This standard contains two test procedures: Method A and Method B. This article describes Methods A and B, and explains why Method B is the proper method for testing fiber links contained in premises networks. This article also proposes a new test procedure as an adaptation to Method B to overcome some disadvantages associated with Method B. This new test procedure is the preferred method because it provides results conforming to Method B while offering installers more flexibility for testing fiber links with types of connectors, including Small Form Factor (SFF) connectors. This article also details other advantages of the Method B adaptation for simplifying the testing process and reducing the opportunity for errors.
Method A C-3
26 0126-32
LAUSD Quality Assurance Guidelines Method A is used for testing links in which the total attenuation is dominated by the loss in the fiber cable, rather than the loss of the connectors, as is often the case for telecom networks. The referencing procedure for Method A uses two patch cords and an adapter connector per fiber link to be tested (See Figure 1).
Figure 1 - Reference Configuration with a Dual Fiber Tester Simultaneously Testing Two Fiber Links
The two patch cords and one adapter connection are referenced out when the test is performed. Therefore, the test results include the loss of the fiber link under test plus only one connection (Note the blue section in Figure 2).
pa.tcb panel -
Jinks under test
Figure 2 - Test Configuration with Dual Fiber Tester
While this method has been used effectively in the testing of long haul telecom fiber links, it is less precise than what is necessary for the premises market today. Because the network operation actually sees the
C-4
26 0126-33
LA USD Quality Assurance Guidelines loss of the fiber link plus the connections at both ends, Method A understates the power loss in the link since it includes only one connection. For long-haul telecom links, this is not an issue since the majority of the loss is in the long lengths of fiber with minimal loss in the precision connectors. However, in premises applications, fiber lengths are very short and the amount of loss in the fiber cable itself is minimal. The majority of power loss is found in the connections at either end. The increasingly stringent power loss budgets of applications like Gigabit Ethernet require that the entire link loss be measured. That is where Method B becomes applicable. Method B
Method B is used for testing links for which the connector loss is a significant portion of the total attenuation. This is the case for premises links. The referencing procedure for Method B uses one patch cord per fiber link to be tested (See Figure 3). (Note: This figure depicts a dual fiber tester that tests two fiber links at a time.)
Figure 3 - Method B Reference Configuration
Since only one patch cord (per link) is part of the reference, the test results shall include loss from the fiber cable under test plus the connections at BOTH ends (see blue section in Figure 4).
C-5
26 0126-34
LA USD Quality Assurance Guidelines
patch panel -
l1nlls under leSt
Figure 4 - Method B Test Configuration
Technically, it shall also include any loss in the additional patch cord but this is negligible because the length is so short. For premises fiber networks, this method provides an accurate measure of the loss in the fiber link because it includes the fiber cable plus the connections at BOTH ends. However, when using Method B, be aware of the following shortcomings: 1.
When going from the reference setup to the test setup, it is necessary to disconnect one end of the patch cords from the tester. It is very important never to disturb the connection at the OUTPUT or source end. If this connection is disrupted, the reference is lost, and proceeding without re-referencing shall seriously compromise the test results. Unfortunately, one could easily disconnect the patch cord from the source (OUTPUT) end instead of from the detector (INPUT) end.
2.
Although you must disconnect the patch cords from the detector (INPUT) end of the tester, extreme care is required as dirt and other elements can cause damage to the detector.
3.
To test Small Form Factor (SFF) connectors that have the transmit and receive fibers in the same connector, you are forced to disconnect from the source (OUTPUT) end in violation of proper referencing and test procedures.
4.
Using Method B requires that you have the same type of connector on the tester as you shall be testing in the fiber link.
Presented in the next section is a new test procedure that is an adaptation to Method B, but provides the same test results and preserves integrity to testing Standards while overcoming the short-comings listed above. Adaptation to Method B
c- 6 26 0126-35
LAUSD Quality Assurance Guidelines A simple adaptation to Method B allows us to retain the accuracy (every measurement includes the cable and both connections) but avoid the major disadvantages. The referencing procedure for this adaptation is performed using 2 patch cords and an adapter connector per fiber link to be tested (See Figure 5).
Figure 5 - Adaptation to Method B Reference Configuration
However, the test procedure is new, and is depicted in Figure 6.
Test)lllllper
patch panel
-
1iDJm under test
-
reference links
Figure 6 - Adaptation to Method B Testing Configuration
The test procedure includes the addition of a short test jumper with a connector so that the test results shall now be the same as the test results obtained with Method B. Just like Method B, the results contain
c -7 26 0126-36
LAUSD Quality Assurance Guidelines the loss for the fiber cable plus the connections on BOTH ends (note the blue section in Figure 6). The two patch cords and one connection per link from the reference setup have been referenced out.
Make the Correct Loss Measurements The Method B adaptation gives us several key advantages over the original Method B while preserving its accuracy: The Method B adaptation gives loss results that conform to ANSI/TIAIEIA-526-4A, Method B. According to Method B, to measure the link loss correctly, the test path must have two more adapters in each fiber link than in the Set Reference path. The test procedure described in this article adheres precisely to this requirement. In this way, the measured loss shall be the loss of the fiber in a link plus the loss of a connection at each end of the link. This value ofloss is the real value encountered by network application hardware. The Method B adaptation allows the use of hybrid patch cables to connect test equipment to the links under test. This allows consistent testing of links with all types of connectors, including those that use small form-factor (SFF) connectors.
Preserve the Integrity of your Test The adaptation to Method B makes it unnecessary to disconnect the patch cords from the test equipment, thereby reducing the possibility of errors caused by reinsertion of patch cords or by contamination or damage of test equipment fiber interfaces.
C-8
26 0126-37
LA USD Quality Assurance Guidelines C.5.1 Fiber Optic Cable Installation Test Form-Omni Scanner 2 and OTDR
Q/A Site
- - - - - Rep(s)
Omni Scanner2 Serial#: OTDR Serial#:
------------
-------------:.
Wave-, length (om) 850
-----------------
Strand·
Omni Scanner2 Location
Disk Conunents
ff
850 850
3-green
850
4-brown
850 850 850
7-red
850
8-black
850
-
16-brown 17-slate 18-white 19-red 20-black
1300 9-yellow
850
21yellow
1300 10-violet
850
22-violet
1300 11-rose
850
1300 850
-
1300
1300 850
15-green
1300
1300 850
14orange
1300 6-white
1300 850
tl
1300 5-slate
1300 850
ftiti.l,
A,tirlta~
13-blue
1300
1300 850
1300
1300 850
Sttai.d ..
1300 2-orange
1300 850
Wave,-, length '(om)
.
'·.
1-blue
1300 850
Distant End Location
·. '
1300 850
Q/A Review Form: Pass I Fail
Distant End TFBM Serial #:
'Totai
.JJeitgth· Atfu,(dB) ,·, . ·, (m)';
--------
-----------
Near End TFBM Serial#:
1300 850
Date
23-rose
1300 12-aqua
850
24-aqua
-
C-9
26 0126-38
) ) LAUSD Quality Assurance Guidelines
C.5.2 Fiber Optic Cable Installation Test Form-Power Meter and Light Source Q/A Site - - - - - Rep(s)
---------------- Date -----
Power Meter Serial#:
Power Meter Location
Light Source Serial#:
Light Source Location
.. :,:;
1310
1-blue
2-
1310
orang e 3-
1310
green 4brown 5-s1ate
6white
15green
1310
16brown
1310
17slate
1310
18white
1550
1550 1310
14orang e
1550
1550 1310
13blue
1550
1550 1310
::.
1550
1550 1310
------------------------
1550
1550 1310
·.
-------------
1550
1550 1310
1310
'··
Q/A Review Form: Pass I Fail
7-red
1310
19-red
c -10 26 0126-39
LA USD Quality Assurance Guidelines
1550 1310 1550 1310
1550 1310 1550 1310
8black
1550 1310 1550 1310
yello
21yello
w
w
9-
10violet 11-
1550 1310 1550 1310
rose 1550 1310 1550
20black
12aqua
1550 1310
22violet 23rose 24aqua
1550
C-11
26 0126-40
LA USD Quality Assurance Guidelines
APPENDIX D- NETWORK EQIDPMENT PERFORMANCE TESTS D.l
Overview of Equipment Tests These equipment tests verify the operation of the network components (e.g., switches, and routers) either purchased or provided for use as part of the particular project. This plan addresses industry-standard TCPIIP tests that collectively address Network layer connectivity and IP packet path routing; it does not address network performance (i.e., total throughput capabilities) tests. The Owner's Quality Assurance Team shall perform the following interrelated tests: 1.
Spanning Tree Root Bridge identification test. Spanning tree protocol is one of the most important layer 2 protocols at work in switches. Spanning Tree ensures that no loops occur in a network by a designated root bridge. The root bridge is a central point of a spanning-tree configuration and it controls how the protocol operates. It is best practice to configure the core switch to be the root bridge. Run the following command on the core switch to identify it is set as the root bridge: Show spanning-tree summary.
2.
Internet Control and Message Protocol (ICMP) Ping Test. This test verifies the Network layer for connectivity by using Ether-type frame pings to reach IP target addresses and obtain or verify four results-the target IP address, the local media access control (MAC), the number of responses, and the response time. The target IP addresses are the upstream and/or downstream gateway IP addresses based on the device's connectivity in the network. The source is the management console on the device. Each test includes two steps, if necessary, as follows: a.
Obtain the four results by performing an address resolution protocol (ARP) for the target IP address and verifying the ping.
b.
If test 1 is unsuccessful, obtain the four results by executing an ARP for the default router, then use the acquired MAC address to determine the IP address, send an ICMP echo request and monitor for the ICMP reply.
3.
Trace Route/Path Discover. This test determines the path IP packets follow, and reports each router encountered in the path. Testing elicits an ICMP TIME-EXCEEDED response from each router encountered. Each hop is tested three times to help identify changing routes.
4.
Configuration Test. This test verifies that each new network port is operational. Perform an ICMP ping from each port not previously tested, ensuring each port has a link light indicating port operability.
5.
VLAN configuration verification. Inspect VLAN configuration and port assignments to be matching the provided documentation. Inspect VLAN trunking, and verify forwarding state of required VLANs on VLAN trunks.
D -1
26 0126-41
LAUSD Quality Assurance Guidelines
0.2
Test Equipment The following test equipment shall be used:
0.3
1.
Fluke 682 Enterprise LAN Meter or equivalent.
2.
Computer with TCPIIP protocol stack, TELNET application and data capture software (optional).
Test Methodology The basic test methodology is to verify connectivity from user access ports through and within the installed intra-network to the WAN Router. Overall connectivity is verified by testing to and from points in the network. Site testing reflects the specific switch(s) and router(s) implemented at the site.
0.4
Test Hierarchy for Connectivity (Pings, Trace Routes and Telnets) Table 0.4-1 contains the network equipment performance tests and corresponding descriptions.
Table D.4-1. Network Equipment Performance Tests TEST
TEST DESCRrPTION
Ping from Wall outlet WAN Connect the computer into the network via the wall plate, obtain DHCP IP or Internet location address and perform a ping to a known IP address or URL outside the campus network. D.5
Network Equipment Configuration Verification and Performance Tests The Owner's Quality Assurance Team shall follow the test sequence shown. The following sample form lists tests to be performed at this site. For the set of Network Equipment Performance Test forms tailored to the individual communications cabinets, please see enclosed file Network Checklists.doc.
0.5.1 Network Equipment Configuration Verification Form
Site
-----------------------
Date ______________ Tester(s)
Building and Communications Cabinet Numbers
.
.
.
'
'neVic{Name!IP. ., '. -~ ·' ·<·:~ • < '"-(
• ..
"~ • •
"
''•-
.
~ '.!
}·..·:
. ••
'
< ,_
PAS~.
-FAIL . :: . t
.
Ethernet Switch
·. .
.;;
~
;:>..: ..
.; : ;_ . ; ;::·; .
VLAN I STP/ port activation/ Trunking
D-2
26 0126-42
LA USD Quality Assurance Guidelines VLAN I STP/ port activation/ Trunking
Ethernet Switch Router/ switch
L3
IP Routing/ SNMP/ Access-lists
Router/ switch
L3
IP Routing/ SNMP/ Access-lists
D.5.2 Network Equipment Performance Test Form Site
-----------------------
Date
-------------- Tester(s)
Building and Communications Cabinet Numbers (a packet loss in excess of 1% during ping test is not acceptable and is considered a FAIL)
Ping from Wall outlet to WAN Router location Trace route from Wall outlet to WAN Router location
D-3
26 0126-43
LAUSD Quality Assurance Guidelines APPENDIX E- PHYSICAL CONFIGURATION AUDIT
E.l
Overview of Physical Connectivity Audit A Physical Connectivity Audit is completed comparing the vendor supplied Equipment Inventory List (ElL) against the Cabinet Equipment Survey generated by the test team at Quality Assurance. This appendix provides the detailed audit of the physical equipment and materials installed under this expansion effort.
E.2
Physical Connectivity Audit Quality Assurance Review lists The following sample form shows the general information to be documented for a standard Cabinet Equipment Survey.
Site
---------------------
Date
- - - - - - - Tester(s)
Building and Communications Cabinet Numbers
IDF7 LDFl LDF2 LDF3 LDF4 Notes:
E -1
26 0126-44
LA USD Quality Assurance Guidelines
APPENDIX F- CABLE DOCUMENTATION SPECIFICATION F.l
Documentation.
F.l.l The test result information for each link shall be recorded in the memory of the field tester upon completion of the test. F.1.2
Individual test reports shall be submitted in hardcopy and electronic format. Hand-written test reports are not acceptable.
F.1.3
The test results records saved by the tester shall be transferred into a Windows™- based database utility, such as MS Access, or SQL, or MS Excel spreadsheet, that allows for the maintenance, review and archiving of these test records. A guarantee must be made that the measurement results are transferred to the PC unaltered, i.e., "as saved in the tester" at the end of each test and that these results cannot be modified at a later time.
F.1.4 Hardcopy reports may be submitted in labeled 3 ring binders with an attached affidavit verifying passing execution of tests. For large installations electronic reports with hardcopy summaries are preferred. Hardcopy summary reports shall contain the following information on each row of the report: circuit ID, test specification used, length, and date of test and pass/fail result.
F.l.S Electronic reports are to be submitted in CD format. If proprietary software is used, disk or CD shall contain any necessary software required to view test results. If the results are delivered in a standard format like Excel, Access, CSV files, etc., then software to read these files is not needed. Electronic reports must be accompanied by a Certificate signed by an authorized representative of the Contractor warranting the truth and accuracy of the electronic report. Certificate must reference traceable circuit numbers that match the electronic record. F.1.6 Test reports shall include the test measurement information specified in Section 5 for each cabling element tested, in addition to: F.1.7
Cable manufacturer, cable model number/type and NVP.
F.l.S Tester manufacturer, model, serial number, hardware version and software Ver. 6. F.1.9
Circuit ID number.
F.l.lO Auto test specification used. F.l.ll Identification of the tester interface. F.1.12 Overall pass/fail indication. F.1.13 Date and time of test. Table F .2 Cable Test Parameter Preferences
F -1
26 0126-45
LA USD Quality Assurance Guidelines When reading the printed test result output, the following parameters must be shown with the associated cable test.
Cable T~~tlng Paraiileter".Preferences . . -- - ·.. . ..... . - . ' -. ;,.. ' . ·. ' _._, __ <-- '. ·-;' :.·_ '•. ·.,,·. ·~
..
' ·.. ·
·'!
'~
. . -···
,.
.Cabie Test
:. !:·:.
..
-~·;."
.....
,,_•
.... -
-·~-
',. : : '.
:Fiber Type
Cable
c' ··/.::..,,,· ,,
;
··.·:--·:·.--;· ,· -~' ' ,...
.:·
···-:···
q,Ri: ···•· · Reference.
>
_;,· . : :,
,.
Qi~ction
:Plil~~ . Widtll
i~Si
Level (liE) Category 5 E Tester
6972
Cat5E
Cat SE Perm link
n/a
n!a
n!a
n/a
nla
Level (III)
69-
Cat 6
n/a
n!a
n!a
n/a
n/a
Category 6
72
Cat 6 Perm link
Tester Power Meter Horizontal MM FlO@ 850nrn/1300nm
n/a
62.51125 Mnfr
568B Horizontal
Multimod e 50 or 62.5
I.4920@ 1300nm
I jumper method
BiDirectiona 1
n/a
Power Meter Backbone MM FlO@ 850nrn/1300nm
n!a
62.51125 Mnfr
568B Backbone
Multimod e 50 or 62.5
1.4920@ 1300nm
1 jumper method
BiDirectiona I
nla
Power Meter Backbone SM FlO@ I310nrn/I550n m
n/a
SM Mnfr
1000 Base
Single Mode
I.4640 @1300n
I jumper method
BiDirectiona 1
n!a
-LX
OTDR Horizontal MM FlO@ 850nrn/1300nm
n/a
n/a
n/a
Single Mode
n!a
n/a
UniDirectiona I
OTDR Backbone MM FlO@ 850nrn/1300nm
nla
nla
n/a
Single Mode
n!a
n!a
UniDirectiona 1
OTDR Backbone SM FlO@ 1310nrn/I550n
n/a
n/a
n/a
Single Mode
n!a
nla
UniDirectiona I
m
m
NOTE: The length of the cable is the variable of which the Power Meter and light source determines the expected dB loss for Backbone cable tests. Table F .3 Allowable Distance per Fiber Length Use this table as a guideline to compare references for dB loss in the installed Backbone Fiber. Total loss includes .75 dB loss per mated connector pair.
F-2
26 0126-46
LAUSD Quality Assurance Guidelines
100'
1.6
1.53
1200'
2.7
1.86
200'
1.7
1.56
1300'
2.8
1.89
300'
1.8
1.59
1400'
2.9
1.92
400'
1.9
1.62
1500'
3.0
1.95
500'
2.0
1.65
1600'
3.1
1.98
600'
2.1
1.68
1700'
3.2
2.01
700'
2.2
1.71
1800'
3.3
2.04
800'
2.3
1.74
1900'
3.4
2.07
900'
2.4
1.77
2000'
3.5
2.10
1000'
2.5
1.80
2100'
3.6
2.13
1100'
2.6
1.83
2200'
3.7
2.16
F-3
26 0126-47
111001
•
SECTION 26 0500 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL
PART 1 - GENERAL l.OI
SUMMARY A.
This Section specifies the basic requirements for electrical installations and includes requirements common to more than one section of Division 26. It expands and supplements the requirements specified in sections of Division OI.
B.
Related Requirements:
• C.
•
1.
Division 01 - General Requirements.
2.
Section 03 3000 - Cast-in-Place Concrete.
3.
Section 09 9000 - Painting and Coating.
4.
Division 14 - Conveying Equipment.
5.
Division 23 - HV AC.
6.
Division 27- Communications.
7.
Division 28 - Electronic Safety and Security.
8.
Section 3I 2323 - Excavation and Fill for Utilities.
Applicable Standards 1.
ASTM D 709 (2007)- Laminated Thermosetting materials.
2.
ANSIINEMA FB-I (20 I 0)- Standard for Fittings, Cast Metal Boxes, and Conduit Bodies for Conduit, Electrical Metallic Tubing, and Cable.
3.
ANSIINEMA 250 (2008) - Enclosure for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum).
4.
California Electrical Code (CEC).
5.
IEEE C57.I2.28 (2005) - Standard for Pad-Mounted equipment (Enclosure Integrity).
6.
UL I (2005)- Standard for Flexible Metal Conduit.
7.
UL 1242 (2007)- Standard for Electrical Intermediate Metal Conduit.
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HlGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL 26 0500-1
1!1001
• A.
B.
•
UL 506 (2008)- Specialty Transformers .
9.
UL 6 (20 10)- Electrical Rigid Metal Conduit-Steel.
10.
UL 797 (2007)- Electrical Metallic Tubing-Steel.
11.
UL 870 (2008) - Standard for Wireways, Auxiliary Gutters, and Associated Fittings
BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
1.02
•
8.
Quality Assurance: 1.
Workers possessing the skills and experience obtained in performing work of similar scope and complexity shall perform the Work of this Division.
2.
Refer to other sections of the Specifications for other qualification requirements.
Drawings and Specifications Coordination: I.
For purposes of clearness and legibility, Drawings are essentially diagrammatic and the size and location of equipment is indicated to scale whenever possible. Verify conditions, dimensions, indicated equipment sizes, and manufacturer's data and information as necessary to install the Work of this Division. Coordinate location and layout with other Work .
2.
Verify final locations for rough-ins with field measurements and with the requirements of the equipment to be connected.
3.
Drawings indicate required size and points oftermination of conduits, number and size of conductors, and diagrammatic routing of conduit. Install conduits with minimum number of bends to conform to structure, avoid obstructions, preserve headroom, keep openings and passageways clear, and comply with applicable code requirements.
4.
Routing of conduits may be changed provided that the length of any conduit run is not increased more than 10 percent of length indicated on the Drawings.
5.
Outlet locations shall be coordinated with architectural elements prior to start of construction. Locations indicated on the Drawings may be distorted for clarity.
6.
Coordinate electrical equipment and materials installation with building components and the Work of other trades
7.
As much as practical, connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum of interference with other installations.
8.
Coordinate connection of electrical systems with existing underground utilities and services .
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HJGH SCHOOL
10/0!/201 I COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL 26 0500-2
111001
•
C.
Terminology: 1.
Signal Systems: Applies to clock, bell, fire alarm, annunciator, sound, public address, buzzer, telephone, television, inter-communication, elevator access controls, lighting control systems and security systems.
2.
Low Voltage: Applies to signal systems operating at 120 volts and less, and power systems operating at less than 600 volts. Medium voltage: Applies to power systems operating at more than 600 volts.
3.
UL: Underwriter's Laboratories Inc, Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL), or equal.
D.
Regulations: Work shall comply with the requirements of authorities having jurisdiction and the California Electrical and Building Codes. Material shall conform to regulations of the National Board of Fire Underwriters for electrical wiring and apparatus. Materials shall be new and listed by UL, or another NR TL.
E.
Structural Considerations for Conduit Routing:
• F.
1.
Where conduits pass through or interfere with any structural member, or where notching, boring or cutting of the structure is necessary, or where special openings are required through walls, floors, footings, or other buildings elements, conform to CBC, Part 2, Title 24, Section 1906.3 for conduits and pipes embedded in concrete and Sections 2308.9.10 and 2308.9.11 for notches and bored holes in wood; for steel, as detailed on the structural steel Shop Drawings .
2.
Where a concrete encasement for underground conduit abuts a foundation wall or underground structure which the conduits enter, encasement shall rest on a haunch integral with wall or structure, or shall extend down to footing projection, if any, or shall be doweled into structure unless otherwise indicated. Underground structures shall include maintenance holes; pull boxes, vaults, and buildings.
3.
Holes required for conduit entrances into speaker poles, floodlight poles or other poles, shall be drilled with the conduit nipple or coupling welded to poles. Welds shall be provided by the electric arc process and shall be continuous around nipple or coupling.
Electrically Operated Equipment and Appliances: 1.
Furnished Equipment and Appliances: a.
•
Work shall include furnishing and installing wiring enclosures for, and the complete connection of electrically operated equipment and appliances and electrical control devices which are specified to be furnished and installed in this or other sections of the Specifications, wiring enclosures shall be concealed except where exposed Work is indicated on the Drawings .
8736 CORWfN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL 26 0500-3
111001
b.
• 2.
Connections shall be provided as necessary to install equipment ready for use. Equipment shall be tested for proper operation and, if motorized, for proper rotation. If outlets are of incorrect electrical characteristics or any specified equipment fails to operate properly, repair and/or replace the outlet and/or equipment.
Equipment and Appliances Furnished by Others: a.
Equipment and appliances indicated on Drawings as "not in contract" (NJC), "furnished by others," or "furnished by the Owner," will be delivered to the Project site. Required electrical connections shall be performed for such equipment and appliances. Motorized equipment will be furnished factory-wired to a control panel or junction box unless otherwise indicated. Appliances will be furnished equipped with portable cord and cap. Provide disconnect switches where required.
b.
Connections to equipment furnished under this Division shall be part of the Work of this section. Work shall include internal wiring, installation, connection and adjustment of bolted drive motors in which the motor is supplied as a separate unit, and connections only for equipment furnished with factory installed internal wiring, except as further limited by Drawings and this Specification. Work shall include furnishing and installing suitable outlets, disconnecting devices, starters, push-button stations, selector switches, conduit, junction boxes, and wiring necessary for a complete electrical installation. Work shall also include furnishing and installing conduit and boxes for HV AC control systems, furnished under Division 23. Devices and equipment furnished shall be of same type used elsewhere on the Work or as specified.
c.
Electrical equipment furnished under other sections, for installation and connection under Work ofthis section, will be delivered to the Project site ready for installation.
d.
Mechanical equipment furnished under other sections, and requmng electrical connection under this section, will be set in place as part of the Work ofthe section furnishing such equipment unless noted otherwise.
e.
Suitability and condition of equipment furnished under other sections shall be determined in advance of installation. Immediate notice of damage, unsuitability, or lack of parts shall be given to the entity providing such equipment.
• G.
Protection of Materials: 1.
•
Protect materials and equipment from damage and provide adequate and proper storage facilities during progress of the Work. Damaged materials and/or equipment shall be replaced .
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL 26 0500-4
111001
H.
•
I.
Cleaning: 1.
Exposed parts of Work shall be left in a neat, clean, usable condition. Finished painted surfaces shall be unblemished and metal surfaces shall be polished.
2.
Thoroughly clean parts of apparatus and equipment. Exposed parts to be painted shall be thoroughly cleaned of cement, plaster, and other materials. Remove grease and oil spots with solvent. Such surfaces shall be wiped and comers and cracks scraped out. Exposed rough metal shall be smooth, free of sharp edges, carefully steel brushed to remove rust and other spots, and left in proper condition to receive finish painting.
3.
Remove rubbish, debris, and waste materials and legally dispose of off the Project site.
WARRANTIES I.
Provide one year warranty on all material and labor performed, unless noted otherwise in specific sections.
PART 2- PRODUCTS- NOT USED
•
•
PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A.
Advise the Inspector before starting the Work of this Division.
B.
Exposed conduits shall be painted to match the surfaces adjacent to installation.
C.
Salvaged materials removed from buildings shall be removed from the Project site as required by the OAR.
D.
Trenches outside of barricade limits shall be backfilled and paved within 24 hours after being inspected by the Inspector. Provide traffic plates during the time that trenches are open in traffic areas and in areas accessible to students and staff.
E.
Where existing structural walls are cored for new conduit runs, separation between cored holes shall be three inches edge to edge from new or existing holes, unless otherwise required by the Architect. All coring to be laid out and reviewed by Architect prior to drilling. Contractor to verify location of structural steel, rebar, stress cabling or similar prior to lay out.
F.
Electrical equipment shall be braced and anchored for CBC Seismic Design requirements, or as otherwise indicated on the Drawings .
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL 26 0500-5
111001
•
DELIVERY STORAGE AND HANDLING
3.02 A.
Deliver products to project site with proper identification, which shall include names, model numbers, types, grades, compliance labels, and similar information needed for District identification; all products and materials shall be adequately packaged and protected to prevent damage during shipment, storage, and handling.
B.
Coordinate deliveries of electrical materials and equipment to minimize construction site congestion. CUTTING AND PATCHING
3.03 A.
Cutting and patching of electrical equipment, components, and materials shall include the removal and legal disposal of selected materials, components, and equipment.
B.
Do not endanger or damage installed Work through procedures and processes of cutting and patching.
C.
Repair or restore other work, or surfaces damaged as a result of the work performed under this contract. CLEANUP
3.04
•
A.
Remove rubbish, debris and waste materials and legally dispose off the Project site.
B.
Remove equipment and implements of service, and leave entire work area neat and clean, to the satisfaction of the Owner Authorized Representative. PROTECTION
3.05 A.
Protect the Work of this section until Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION
•
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HJGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL 26 0500-6
111001
•
SECTION 26 0513 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS PART I- GENERAL
l.OI
SUMMARY
A.
B.
•
I.
Boxes, enclosures, keys and locks.
2.
Receptacles and switches.
3.
Identifications and signs.
Related Requirements:
I.
Division 0 I - General Requirements.
2.
Division 26- Electrical.
3.
Division 27- Communications.
4.
Division 28- Electronic Safety and Security .
PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.0I
BOXES, ENCLOSURES, KEYS AND LOCKS A.
•
Section Includes:
Outlet Boxes and Fittings:
I.
Outlet boxes installed in concealed Work shall be galvanized steel, pressed, or welded type, with knockouts.
2.
In exposed Work, where conduit runs change direction or size, outlet boxes and conduit fittings shall be cast metal with threaded hubs cast integral with box or fitting.
3.
Fittings shall be cast metal and non-corrosive. Ferrous metal fittings shall be cadmium-plated or zinc galvanized. Castings shall be true to pattern, smooth, straight, with even edges and comers, of uniform thickness of metal, and shall be free of cracks, gas holes, flaws, excessive shrinkage, and burnt-out sand.
4.
Covers for fittings shall be galvanized steel or non-corrosive aluminum and shall be designed for particular fitting installed.
5.
Light fixture outlets shall be 4-inch octagon, 4-inch square, 2 118-inch deep or larger, depending upon number of conductors or conduits therein. Plaster rings
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HJGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 26 0513-1
111001
shall be furnished with round opening with two ears drilled 2 23/32 inches center to center.
•
•
B.
6.
For local device outlets provide 4-inch square 2 118-inch deep, boxes for single gang, 5-inch square boxes for two-gang, and special solid gang boxes with gang plaster ring for more than two switches.
7.
For TV outlets, and horns and strobes provide manufacturer's supplied back box as needed. For television outlets, provide 4-gang deep boxes and 4-gang plaster rmgs.
8.
Plaster rings shall be provided on flush-mounted outlet boxes except where otherwise indicated or specified. Plaster rings shall be same depth as finished surface. Install approved ring extension to obtain depth to finish surface.
9.
In existing plywood wall or drywall construction, and where flexible steel conduit is fished into walls, single-gang and 2-gang outlets for wiring devices may be sectional steel boxes with plaster ears. Boxes shall be fastened to plywood with flat-head screws in each plaster ear screw hole. Boxes fastened to gypsum board shall be Raco, Appleton, Cooper, Bowers, or equal.
10.
Factory made knockout seals shall be installed to seal box knockouts, which are not intact.
11.
Where flexible conduit is extended from flush outlet boxes, provide and install weatherproof universal box extension adapters.
Junction and Pull boxes: 1.
Junction and pull boxes, in addition to those indicated, shall only be used in compliance with codes, recognized standards, and Contract Documents.
2.
Interior and non-weatherproof boxes shall be constructed of blue or galvanized steel with ample laps, spot welded, and shall be rigid under torsion and deflecting forces. Boxes shall be furnished with auxiliary angle iron framing where necessary to ensure rigidity.
3.
Covers shall be fastened to box with a sufficient number of machine screws to ensure continuous contact all around. Flush type boxes shall be drilled and tapped for cover screws if boxes are not installed plumb. Surfaces of pull and junction boxes and covers shall be labeled in black marker ink designating system, panelboard and circuit designation contained in box. In exposed Work, designation shall be installed on inside ofpullbox or junction box cover.
4.
WeatherproofNEMA 3R pull and junction boxes shall conform to foregoing for interior boxes with following modifications: a.
•
Cover of flush mounting boxes shall be furnished with a weather-tight gasket cemented to, and trimmed even with, cover all around .
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES IDGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 26 0513-2
111001
•
b.
Surface or semi-flush mounting pull and junction boxes shall be UL, or another Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) listed as raintight and shall be furnished complete with threaded conduit hubs.
c.
Exposed portions ofboxes shall be galvanized and finished with one prime coat and one coat of baked-on gray enamel, unless already furnished with factory baked-on finish.
5.
Junction and pull boxes shall be rigidly fastened to structure and shall not depend on conduits for support.
6.
Underground Concrete Pull Boxes: a.
Pre-cast concrete pull boxes. Concrete pull boxes shall be traffic type, reinforced for H-20 wheel loading, pre-cast concrete. Pull boxes with inside dimensions of 2 feet by 3 feet by 3 feet deep shall consist of a base section, top ring, and cover. Base section shall be furnished with 2 knockouts measuring 10 inch by 10 inch in each 3 feet side, and one 20 inch by 20 inch knockout in each 2-foot side. Pull boxes with inside dimension 4 feet by 4 feet by 4 feet deep shall consist of a base section, midsection, topping, and cover. Base section shall be furnished with 2 knockouts measuring 8-inch by 16~inch on each of two opposite sides, and one 20-inch by 20-inch knockout on each of other two opposite sides. Pull boxes shall be furnished with a minimum of 6-inch diameter sump knockout and one inch diameter ground rod knockout. In pull boxes, furnish and install cable racks on walls. Racks shall be furnished with 3 porcelain cable holders on vertical steel mounting bars. Pull boxes shall be furnished with 3/4 inch diameter pull irons. Covers shall be traffic-type consisting of steel safety plate bolted to frame. Covers shall be marked as electrical, power, or signal as required. Pull boxes shall be as manufactured by Oldcastle Precast, Jensen Precast, Kistner, Western Precast, or equal.
b.
Provide end bells in duct entrances. Terminate each metal conduit with insulated bushing provided with a grounding terminal.
c.
Install pulling irons on opposite walls and below horizontal centerlines of ducts and bricked-up openings, and in bottom. Install pulling irons with each end hooked around a reinforcing bar.
d.
Remove floor drain knockout and provide a depth of24 inches of crushed rock below box extending a minimum of 12 inches beyond on all sides.
e.
Permanently and effectively ground metal equipment cases, cable racks, and similar items in pull boxes to site grounding electrode system. Provide grounding conductor in compliance with CEC Article 250.
f.
Provide 6-inch deep sand base under pull boxes.
g.
Identify power and signal cables by tagging in manholes and pull boxes. Tie securely to cables with nylon cord .
•
•
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 26 0513-3
111001
• C.
•
••
h.
Top of steel plate shall provide a minimum coefficient of static friction of 0.5 for either wet or dry locations, when tested for any shoe sole material. Test shall comply with ASTM D 1047 or F 489 or F 609 standards. Submit manufacturer's test results for Architect's review as part of materials and equipment submittals.
1.
The use of underground extension boxes shall be limited to not more than 1 times the original depth of pull box.
7.
Underground utility boxes shall be reinforced concrete with non-setting shoulders to prevent settlement following installation. Boxes shall be furnished with cast iron cover with finger hole, size as indicated on Drawings. Utility boxes shall be as manufactured by Oldcastle,Jensen, Kistner, Western Precast, or equal.
8.
Manholes, vaults, and pull boxes required by a utility company, and installed as part of this Contract, shall meet requirements of servicing utility company.
Floor Outlets: 1.
Provided floor outlets, except for extension outlets, shall be Harvey Hubbell Inc. B-2503, Thomas & Betts 640 series, Legrand Omnibox, or equal, adjustable, cast iron, watertight floor boxes with flush brass floor plates, and shall be set to finish flush with finish floor covering, whether it be carpeted, wood, resilient floor covering, or other finish materials. Floor boxes shall be used in office, classrooms, and in library areas only.
2.
Telephones above floor outlets, where not subjected to water, shall be provided with Harvey Hubbell Inc. SC-3098 pedestals with SC309T plates, Legrand 525 series, Thomas & Betts FPT -400 Series, or equal. Refer to other Division 26 sections. Floor boxes shall be used in office, classrooms and in Library areas only.
3.
Plugs above floor outlets where not subjected to water shall be provided with Legrand 525 series, Thomas & Betts FPT-400 Series, Harvey Hubbell Inc. SC3098, or equal, pedestal and with SS309D, or equal, device plates. Refer to other Division 26 sections. Floor boxes shall be used in office, classrooms, and library areas only.
4.
Plugs above floor outlets where subjected to water shall be provided with a Harvey Hubbell Inc. SA-6685 or equal, single-gang outlet box, or SA-6687 or equal, 2gang outlet box. Provide required cover plate. Refer to other Division 26 sections. Floor outlets shall be used in Cafeteria, Cafeteria serving areas, or any areas where floors are subjected to water.
5.
Furnished extension floor outlets shall be cast iron floor boxes with cast iron covers and 1/2 inch offset entries for above-floor conduit extensions; Harvey Hubbell F3186, or equal. Boxes shall be designed to permit access to wiring without disturbing above-floor extensions and shall be set flush with finish floor.
6.
Furnished above floor service fittings for surge suppression receptacles shall be Hubbell SC3098 with cover plates SS309DS, Legrand 525 series, Thomas & Betts FPT-400 Series, or equal.
8736 CORWINTHEATERREPAIR&P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HJGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 260513-4
111001
7.
•
D.
•
E.
2.02
Furnished above floor service fittings for data outlets shall be Hubbell SC3098 with required cover plates, Legrand 525 Series, Thomas & Betts FPT-400 Series, or equal. Refer to other Division 26 sections.
Floor Pockets: 1.
Three-Gang: Furnished three-gang floor lighting pockets shall be flush floor type, with cast iron floor plate and hinged cast iron door notched for cables. Three-gang floor pockets shall be owner approved Legrand or Hubbell Recessed Floor Boxes, C.W. Cole TLS-353-6, or equal, for wood floors and C.W. Cole TLS-353-6-C, or equal, for concrete slabs. Each floor pocket shall be provided with three 20 amp, 3 wire, 125 volt receptacles with matching caps.
2.
Single Gang: a.
Receptacle floor pockets shall be single gang, flush floor type, with cast iron floor plate, hinged cast iron door notched for cable and cast iron box; C.W. Cole TLA-362-1-FE, or Owner approved Legrand or Hubbell recessed floor box or equal. Provide each pocket with a standard, single grounding type receptacle unless otherwise indicated. Provide C.W. Cole TLS-362-1, or equal, in wood floors.
b.
Microphone or projector floor pockets shall be single gang flush floor type with cast iron floor plate, hinged cast iron door, notched for cable and cast iron box, or owner approved Legrand or Hubbell recessed floor box, C.W. Cole TLA-362-3-FE, C. W. Cole TLS-362-3,in wood floors, or equal.
Keys and Locks: 1.
Provide two keys with furnished door locks, including cabinet door locks and switchboard locks, two keys for lock switches on switchboards or control panels, and two keys with interlocks or other furnished lock switches. Deliver keys to OAR.
2.
Locks shall be keyed to Corbin No. 60 keys for access to operate equipment and Corbin 70 keys for service access. Special keys and locks shall only be provided where specified.
RECEPTACLES AND SWITCHES
A.
Receptacles: 1.
Duplex receptacles shall be heavy-duty specification grade, grounding type. Terminal screws shall be back and side wired with internal screw pressure plates. Mounting strap shall feature heavy-duty brass construction. Receptacle back body shall be PVC. Receptacle face shall be ivory, impact resistant nylon. Receptacles shall have triple wipe brass power contacts. NEMA # (20 amps) NEMA 5-20 (15 amps) NEMA 5-15
•
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HJGH SCHOOL
Pass & Seymour PS5362-I PS5262-I
Hubbell HBL5362-I HBL5262-I
Leviton 5362-I 5262-I
10/01/20 II BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 26 0513-5
Ill 001
•
2.
Duplex receptacles on circuits supplied by panel boards with integral surge suppression shall be Pass & Seymour model number PS5262BL (blue), Hubbell DRUBTVSS15, Leviton 5262-SBU, 15 amps, 120 volts, or equal.
3.
Single receptacles shall be heavy-duty specification grade, grounding type. Terminal screws shall be back and side wire with internal screw pressure plates. Mounting strap shall feature heavy-duty brass construction. Receptacle back body shall be thermoplastic. Receptacle face shall be ivory, impact resistant nylon. Receptacles shall have triple wipe brass power contacts. For circuits consisting of one single receptacle only, ampere rating of receptacle shall be same as circuit breaker or fuse. NEMA# (20 amps) NEMA 5-20R (15 amps) NEMA 5-15R
•
Leviton 5361-1 5261-1
4.
15 and 20 amps single receptacles on circuits supplied by panel boards with integral surge suppression shall be Pass & Seymour NEMA 5-20R model number 5361-BL (blue), and NEMA 5-15R model number 5261-BL (blue) respectively. Equal receptacles by other Owner approved manufactures are acceptable.
5.
For kiln receptacles and range receptacles, provide 3-pole, 4-wire, grounding type, rated 50 amps at 125/250 volts NEMA 14-SOR. Provide with 2-gang, stainless steel plates, SS 703, or equal. NEMA # NEMA 14-SOR WALL PLATE
6.
Hubbell HBL9450A S703
Leviton 279 84026
Pass& Seymour 3860 SS703
Hubbell HBL9350 S703
Leviton 5207 84026
Provide specification grade ground-fault circuit interrupter (GFCI) type receptacles in accordance with 201 0 UL standards. GFCI receptacles shall have a trip indication light. Receptacle terminal screws shall be back and side wire with internal screw pressure plates. Test and reset buttons shall match device body and shall be ivory. GFCI receptacles shall be manufactured in standard configuration for installation with stainless steel smooth plates. Exterior mounted receptacles shall be mounted inside weatherproof enclosure. NEMA # NEMA 5-20R NEMA5-15R
8.
Pass & Seymour 3894 SS703
For dryer receptacles, provide 3-wire, non-grounding type, rated 30 amps at 125/250 volts, NEMA 10-30R, with 2-gang stainless steel plates. Coordinate location of junction box with the work of Section 10 2815, Hand and Hair Dryers. NEMA # NEMA 10-30R WALL PLATE
7.
•
Pass & Seymour Hubbell 5361-1 HBL5361-I 5261-I HBL5261-I
Pass & Seymour 2095-1 1595-1
Hubbell GFR5352-IA GFR5252-IA
Leviton 7899-1 8598-1
Provide weatherproof receptacles, except where otherwise indicated or specified, consisting of GFCI receptacles, as specified herein, and metal plates with die-cast lockable hinged lids and weatherproof mats;
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPA1R & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 26 0513-6
111001
9.
•
In Kindergarten and Early Education Center Classrooms provide tamper-resistant receptacles with thermoplastic dual mechanism shutter system to help prevent insertion of foreign objects. Receptacles shall have extra heavy-duty brass, onepiece mounting strap with integral ground. Receptacles shall be ivory color, impact resistant nylon face and back body. For tamper-resistant receptacles rated 20 amps/125 volts, provide NEMA 5-20R, ivory in color,. For tamper-resistant receptacles rated 15 amps/125 volts, provide NEMA 5-15R, ivory in color. NEMA # Pass & Seymour (20 amps) NEMA 5-20R TR63-I (15 amps) NEMA 5-15R TR62-I
10.
•
B.
Pass& Seymour 53528LSP 52528LSP
Hubbell H8L5360SA HBL5260SA
Leviton 53808 52808
Receptacles within 6 feet of water fountains, counter tops, or any sources of water shall be GFCI type.
Switches: 1.
Local Switches: a.
Provide local switches, high strength thermoplastic toggle, specification industrial grade, rated 20 amps at 120-277 volts AC only, with plaster ears, external screw pressure plate back and side wired, and standard size composition cups which fully enclose mechanism. Switches shall be approved for installation at currents up to full rating on resistive, inductive, tungsten filament lamp and fluorescent lamp loads, and for up to 80 percent of rating for motor loads. Switches shall have oversized silver alloy contacts for long life and better heat dissipation. Provide switches as single pole, double pole, 3-way, 4-way, non-lock type. Provide non-lock type switches with ivory handles; Single pole Double pole Three way Four way
•
Leviton 8300SGI 8200SGI
Provide transient voltage surge suppression (TVSS) receptacles offering metal oxide varistors (MOVs) protecting normal and common modes, (L-N, L-G, NG) with 500V suppressed voltage. TVSS devices shall offer 3-mode equal protection with 210 joules minimum per mode of energy absorption and 13,000 amp maximum surge capability. TVSS devices shall have 3 thermal fuses and two over-current protection fuses. TVSS devices shall have LED visual only surge status indicator to alert user to surge suppression circuit condition. Visual indicator will be illuminated (red) when power is on and surge suppression circuit is fully functional. Visual indicator will not be illuminated when power is off or unit experiences loss of surge suppression protection. Terminals shall be back and side wire including ground terminal. Color shall be blue. NEMA# (20 amps) NEMA 5-20R (15 amps) NEMA 5-15R
11.
Arrow Hart TR8300V TR8200V
8736 CORWIN THEATERREPAIR&P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
Pass & Seymour PS20AC11 PS20AC21 PS20AC31 PS20AC41
Hubbell HBL1221 I HBL12221 H8L1223I HBL12241
Leviton 1221-2I 1222-21 1223-21 1224-21
10/01/2011. BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 26 0513-7
111001
•
b.
Provide lock type switches, specification industrial grade, 20 amp, 120277 volts with metal or nylon key guides with on/off indication, and operable by same key. Key shall be District standardized vertically oriented, tamper resistant, forked key with two each 5116-inch long forks, 5/32-inch spacing between forks and 5/16-inch width overall. Single pole Double pole Three way Four Way
c.
•
Arrow Hart 1221L w/1201LK Key 1222L w/120 1LK Key 1223L w/1201LK Key 1224L w/1201LK Key
Rotary lock switches shall incorporate a tumbler type lock to prevent unauthorized operation. Lock shall be tumbler type by Corbin, keyed to a HH41 key. Lock switch to be installed with pin tumblers facing downward. Key shall be removable in all positions. Each device shall be complete with 2 keys. Keys shall be delivered only to the OAR. Switches shall be rated at 20 amps, 120-277 volt AC. Switch plates shall be of stainless steel, engraved with on and off positions indicated. Single pole Double pole Three way
d.
Pass & Seymour PS20AC1L w/#500 Key-2L PS20AC2Lw/#500 Key PS20AC3L w/#500 Key PS20AC4L w/#500 Key
Arrow Hart AH1191N AH1192N AH1193N
Pilot light switches shall be rated 20 amps and shall conform to specifications for local switches. Switches shall be furnished with red, Lexan handles that are lighted by long-lasting neon lamps. Pilot light shall light when load is on. Pilot light 120 volt switches Single pole Double pole Three way
Pass& Seymour PS20AC1-RPL PS20AC2-RPL PS20AC3-RPL
.:o.;H=u=b=be=l"-1_ _ _--=L=ev-'-'i=to=n.:....__ HBL1221-PL 1221-PLR HBL1222-PL 1222-PLR HBL1223-PL 1223-PLR
Same as above except rated at 20 amps at 277 volts. Single pole e.
Pass & Seymour PS20AC1-RPL
•
Hubbell HBL1221-PL7
Provide remote control switches for mechanically held contactors arranged for 3-wire control, toggle type, momentary contact, single pole, 3-position with center off position, rated 20 amps at 120-277 volts AC only, with plaster ears, binding screws for side wiring, standard size composition cups which fully enclose mechanism, and ivory handles Pass & Seymour 1251-l
f.
Leviton 1221-7PR
Hubbell HBL1557-l
Leviton 1285-I
Provide remote control switches for magnetically held contactors arranged for 3-wire control, toggle type, maintained contact, single pole, 3-position with center off position, rated 20 amps at 120-277 volts AC only, with
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 26 0513-8
111001
plaster ears, binding screws for side wiring, standard size composition cups which fully enclosed mechanism, and ivory handles .
•
Pass and Seymour 1225-I g.
Hubbell HBL 1385
Leviton 1285-I
Momentary Contact locking key type switch. 20A 120/277V center off. Key shall be District standardized vertically oriented, tamper resistant, forked key with two each 5/16" long forks, 5/32" spacing between forks and 5/16" width overall. Arrow Hart AH1995L w/ AH2000 key
h.
Momentary Contact switch low voltage 1 pole 3A 24VAC 3 position center off. Key for locking switch shall be District standardized vertically oriented, tamper resistant, forked key with two each 5/16" long forks, 5/31" spacing between forks and 5/16" width overall. Pass and Seymour 10811 Toggle Locking 1081KGRY w/#500 Key
2.
•
•
Time Switches and Photoelectric Controls for existing construction; use section 26 0923 for new construction.
a.
Provide time switches with a 7-day, solid-state, electronic type capable of fully automatic or manual operation and housed in a sheet steel enclosure unless built into a panel or switchboard. Contacts rated for 25 amps resistive or inductive, each pole 240 V AC; 5 amps tungsten or 277 VAC pilot duty, each pole 240 VAC. Time switches to contain a non-volatile clock and non-volatile memory with a built-in rechargeable super capacitor power carry-over system. Battery carryover is not acceptable. Provide a minimum of 15 on/off set points per week. Timing to be in one minute increments with a minimum on or off time of one minute. Time switch digital displays to indicate days of week, hours, and minutes. Display to contain a load status light to indicate when equipment is in operation. Time switches; Paragon Model EC7000 Series, Tork Model EW 101B series, Intermatic ET7000 series, or equal. Features required for application:. 1)
Liquid crystal display panel.
2)
Holiday scheduling: Up to 40 dates may be assigned special holiday schedules, up to one year in advance.
3)
Automatically adjusts to and from daylight savings time and for leap year.
4)
Contact ratings: 10 amp at 240 VAC .
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR& P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 26 0513-9
111001
• b.
3.
•
•
5)
Safety override switch for each circuit to either provide shut down of circuit or to override on .
6)
Selective review: All or part of schedule shall be displayed at touch of a key.
7)
Super Capacitor for power carry over system.
8)
Supply voltage: 120 V.
9)
365-day advance scheduling.
Photoelectric control: Shall be rated 2,000 watts, 120V with single pole, single throw, normally closed contact, enclosed in a die-cast aluminum gasketed enclosure with 1/2 inch conduit fitting, Tork series 2100, or equal.
Emergency Lighting Control Unit a.
The Emergency Lighting control Unit shall provide all required functionality to allow an standard lighting control device to control emergency lighting in conjunction with normal lighting in any area within a building.
b.
The emergency lighting control unit shall allow control of emergency lighting fixture in tandem with normal lighting in an area while ensuring that emergency lighting will tum on immediately to full brightness upon loss of normal power supplying the control device. Emergency lighting operation shall be independent for each controlled area and shall not require a generalized power failure for proper operation.
c.
The device shall have normally closed dry contacts capable of switching 10 amp emergency ballast loads at 120-277 V AC, 60 Hz, or 2 amp tungsten loads at 120 VAC, 60Hz.
d.
The device shall have universal rated voltage inputs provided for normal power sense and normal switched power at 120-277 VAC, 60 Hz.
e.
The device shall provide separate LEDs to indicate the presence of normal and emergency power sources. The LEDs shall indicate the unit's current operational mode (normal or emergency)
f.
The device's normal power input terminal shall be connected to the line side of the control device such that any upstream fault causing a loss of power, including the tripping of the branch circuit breaker, will force the unit into the emergency mode and tum on the emergency lighting.
g.
The unit shall automatically switch emergency lighting on and off as normal lighting is switched. When normal power is not available, the unit shall force and hold emergency lighting on regardless of the state of any external control device until normal power is restored .
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 26 0513-10
111001
h.
•
4.
2.03
School Main Entrance Intercom Station: See other Division 26 sections a.
Hands free single button telephone auto dialer with major applications access control. Dialer shall dial a primary telephone number. If the number is busy or does not answer, the unit shall hang up and dial up to nine backup numbers. When call is answered and the visitor is identified, the called individual depresses telephone button to gain access. Unit shall be provided with a black and white camera, lighted hood, and an interface for Proximity option. Unit shall be a stand alone entry host for various types of access cards, through a 26-bit Wiegand protocol interface card.
b.
Trigon Electronics HF-2 or equal.
c.
Trigon Electronics HF-2 Weather mounts or equal.
IDENTIFICATION AND SIGNS A.
• B.
Identification Plates: 1.
Provide identification plates for the following unless otherwise specified, for switchboards, unit substations, motor control centers, control panels, push~button stations, time switches, contactors, motor starters, motor switches, panelboards, and terminal cabinets .
2.
Identification plates shall be of plastic stock and shall adequately describe function, voltage and phase of identified equipment. Where identification plates are detailed or described on Drawings, inscription and size of letters shall be as indicated. For lighting and power panels, identification plates shall indicate panel designation, voltage, and phase of panel. For terminal cabinets, identification plates shall indicate system contained in terminal cabinet.
3.
Identification plates shall be black-and-white nameplate stock of bakelite with characters cut through black exposing white. Plates shall be furnished with beveled edges and shall be securely fastened in place with No. 4 Phillips-head, cadmium-plated steel, self-tapping screws. Characters shall be 3/16 inch high, unless otherwise indicated.
Markings: 1.
•
Device shall be WattS topper ELCU -1 00 Emergency Lighting Control Unit, LVS #EPC-PM Series, Lighting Control Design #GR 2001 series or Equal.
Install identification markings to surface-mounted starters, switches, disconnect switches, contactors, and other devices controlling motors and appliances. Provide abbreviations required along with an identifying number. Markings to be provided with locking type stencils using paint of a contrasting color. Figures shall be 3/8 inch high unless otherwise indicated. Dymo Industries Inc., self-sticking plastic labels, with embossed characters made with a typewriter may be installed instead of stencils and paint; p-touch self adhesive plastic, or Brother P-Touch self sticking laminated plastic labels may be installed .
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR& P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 26 0513-11
111001
2.
• C.
High Voltage: High voltage switchboards, cabinets, boxes, and conduits exposed in accessible locations, including under buildings and in attics, are required to be marked "WARNING-HIGH VOLTAGE- ABOVE 600 VOLTS". Markings for switchboards shall consist of 18 gage steel, porcelain enamel sign of standard manufacture. Markings for boxes, cabinets, and conduits shall be by means of stenciling or printed self-adhesive markers, Westline Tel-A-Pipe, or equal. Provide letters of black on orange background and not less than 1-7/8 inches high. On conduit runs, install markings at intervals not exceeding 10 feet in any individual area. Markings shall be installed after other painting Work is complete.
Warning Signs: 1.
Provide a warning sign on outside of each door or gate to rooms or enclosures containing high voltage equipment. Signs required reading, "WARNING -HIGH VOLTAGE- KEEP OUT". Provide 2-inch high lettering.
2.
Provide a warning sign on each high-voltage non-load break disconnect and fused cutout (not oil filled). Signs required reading, "DO NOT OPEN UNDER LOAD". Provide 2 inch high lettering.
3.
Provide signs of standard manufacture, 18 gage steel, with porcelain enamel finish. Provide red lettering on a white background.
PART 3- EXECUTION
•
•
INSTALLATION AND SUPPORT OF BOXES
3.01 A.
Install outlet boxes flush with finished surface of wall or ceiling. Install plumb and securely fastened to structure, independent of conduit. Except where otherwise indicated, provide factory-fabricated adjustable attachment bar hangers between studs to support outlet boxes. When installation is performed in fire rated walls, maintain the wall's rating integrity by means of approved fire stop methods.
B.
Outlet boxes installed in suspended or furred ceilings with steel runner or furring channels shall be supported, except where otherwise indicated, by a Unistrut P-4000 Tessco A1200HS-10, Cooper B-Line B22s-HG, or equal channel spanning main ceiling runner channels. Each box shall be supported from its channel by a 3/8 inch 16 threaded steel rod with a Unistrut P-4008, Fastenal #48604, Copper B-Line 78101140346 or equal nut and a Tomic No. 711-B Adapta-Stud, or equal. Rod shall be tightened to a jamb fit with channel and its nut. Box shall be locked to rod by means of a 112 inch locknut on stud and a 3/8 inch 16 hex nut locking stud to rod.
C.
Heights of outlets and equipment indicated on Drawings shall govern. In absence of such indications, following heights shall be maintained with heights measured to centerline unless otherwise noted: 1.
Install wall-mounted telephones, light switches, and other switches, 48 inches above finished floor. Refer to other Division 26, 27 and 28 Sections.
2.
Outlet boxes for fire alarm pull stations shall be mounted at 45 inches above finished floor to insure that the operating handle of the initiating device is no
8736 CORWIN THEATER REP AIR & P .O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 26 0513-12
111001
higher than 48 inches at finished floor. Under no circumstances shall operating handle ofthe device exceed 48 inches above finished floor regardless of indicated height on drawing.
•
• 3.02
•
3.
Wall mounted fire alarm strobe or hom/strobe devices shall be mounted such that the entire lens is not less than 80 inches above finished floor. If ceiling heights allow, wall mounted appliances shall have bottom oflens a minimum of 80 inches but not more than 96 inches to the top of lens.
4.
Install outdoor fire alarm audible devices or fire alarm sprinkler flow bells at least 10 feet but not more than 12 feet above finished floor to center. Provide STI or equal protective covers for devices when required.
5.
Voice evacuation speakers mounted indoors shall be mounted in ceiling space or if mounted on wall shall not be less than 10 feet to center above finished floor.
6.
Install clocks and speakers, in classrooms and offices, 8 feet above finished floor. Unless otherwise indicated.
7.
In rooms other than places of assembly such as, but not limited to, multipurpose rooms, auditoriums, and libraries, clock outlets and speakers in classrooms and offices shall be mounted 8 feet above finished floors. Other assembly areas such as gymnasiums shall be mounted 10 to 12 feet above finished floor. Provide STI, or equal protective covers for clocks when required.
8.
Install fire alarm strobe lights 80 inches to bottom oflight above finished floor.
9.
Install outside bells and yard light outlets 4 feet above second floor level for 2 or more story buildings, 12 inches below top plate level for one story buildings without covered porch or arcade, and 12 inches below covered porch and arcade ceilings.
10.
Install desk telephones, power receptacle outlets, and data outlets 15 inches above finished floor.
11.
Install panelboards and terminal cabinets 6 feet 6 inches from finish floor to top of cabinet.
12.
Install television outlets at a height corresponding to location of television monitor, or a minimum of 15 inches above finished floor.
13.
The use of extension boxes shall be limited to not more than 1 times the original depth of junction box.
COVER PLATES A.
Provide a plate on each switch, plug, pilot light, data, interphone, public telephone, and television outlet, and on existing and reset outlets where so indicated or required. Plates shall be of stainless steel unless otherwise specified.
B.
Flush wiring device and signal system outlets indicated to be blank covered, shall be covered with blank stainless steel plates. Flush lighting outlets to be blanked shall be
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 26 0513-13
111001
covered with Wiremold 5736 steel covers, or equal, painted to match surrounding finish. Provide stainless steel covers to blank indicated or required surface-mounted outlets .
•
c.
•
I.
Three-gang and larger gang switches in locations other than classrooms.
2.
Lock switches.
3.
Pilot switches.
4.
Switches so located that operator cannot see fixtures, or items of equipment controlled while his hand is on the switch.
5.
Switches not in same room with fixtures or items of unit heaters, air curtains, fly fans, etcetera.
6.
Receptacles operating at other than 120 V shall be identified with the operating voltage.
7.
Switches operating on 277 V shall be identified with the operating voltage.
8.
Where indicated on Drawings.
D.
Designations shall be as indicated on Drawings or as specified by Architect.
E.
Standard GFI cover plates shall be Pass & Seymour 4600, Raco 5028-0, or equal. GFI cover plates shall be provided with a CAM lock mechanism with two keys or a padlock hasp that does not protrude through the face of the cover and will allow the shank oflocks keyed Corbin No. 60 keys. IDENTIFICATION OF CIRCUITS AND EQUIPMENT
3.03
•
In the following cases, and at required locations. Switch and receptacle plates shall be engraved with the device(s), or fixtures being controlled, or as indicated:.
A.
Provide descriptive nameplates or tags permanently attached to switchboards, motor control centers, transformers, panelboards, circuit breakers, disconnect switches, starters, pushbutton control stations and other apparatus installed for operation or control of circuits, appliances, fire alarm control panel(s), fire alarm annunciator(s), power supplies, terminal cabinets, energy management control units, and Information technology system backbone and distribution equipment points.
B.
Provide nameplates of engraved laminated plastic, or etched metal. Submit Shop Drawings denoting dimensions and format to Architect before installation. Fasten to equipment with escutcheon pins, rivets, self-tapping screws, or machine screws. Selfadhering or adhesive backed nameplates are not permitted.
c.
Fasten tags to feeder wiring in conduits at every point where runs are broken or terminated, including pull wires in empty conduits. Indicate circuit, phase, and function. Tag branch circuits in panel boards and motor control centers. Tags may be manufactured of pressure-sensitive plastic or embossed self-attached stainless steel or brass ribbon .
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 26 0513-14
111001
•
D.
Provide circuit identification cards and cardholders in all panel boards. Cardholders shall consist of metal frame retaining a clear plastic cover permanently attached to inside of panel door. List of circuits shall be typewritten on a card. Circuit description shall include name or number of circuit, area and connected load.
E.
Junction and pull boxes shall have covers stenciled with box number when indicated on Drawings, or circuit numbers according to panel schedules. Data shall be lettered in a conspicuous manner with a color contrasting with finish.
F.
Name shall be correctly engraved, with a legend indicating function or areas, when required by codes or indicated on Drawings. PROTECTION
3.04 A.
Protect Work ofthis section until Substantial Completion. CLEANUP
3.05 A.
Remove rubbish, debris, and waste materials and legally dispose of off Project site. END OF SECTION
•
•
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HJGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 BASIC ELECTRICAL MA TERlALS AND METHODS 26 0513-15
111001
•
SECTION 26 0519 LOW-VOLTAGE WIRES (600 VOLT AC)
PART 1- GENERAL SUMMARY
1.01 A.
Provisions of Division 01 apply to this section.
B.
Section Includes: Low-voltage wire, splices, terminations and installation. SUBMITTALS
1.02 A.
Provide in accordance with Division 01.
PART 2- PRODUCTS WIRES
2.01
A.
Wires shall be single conductor type THHN or THWN insulated with polyvinyl chloride and covered with a protective sheath of nylon, rated at 600 volts. Wires may be operated at 90 degrees C. maximum continuous conductor temperature in dry locations, and 75 degrees C. in wet locations and shall be listed by UL Standard 83 for thermoplastic insulated wires, listed by Underwriter's Laboratories (UL) for installation in accordance with Article 310 of the California Electrical Code (CEC). Conductors shall be solid copper for 12 AWG and smaller conductors, and stranded copper for 10 AWG and larger conductors. Conductors shall be insulated with PVC and sheathed with nylon. Wires shall be identified by surface markings indicating manufacturer's identification, conductor size and metal, voltage rating, UL symbol, type designations and optional rating. Indentations for lettering are not permitted. Wires shall be tested in accordance with the requirements ofUL standard for types THWN, orTHHN.
B.
Conductors shall be solid Class B or stranded Class C, annealed uncoated copper in accordance with UL standards, or another Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL).
••
STANDARDS
2.02
A.
•
THWN/THHN wires shall comply with the following standards: 1.
UL 83 for thermoplastic insulated wires.
2.
UL 1063 for machine tool wires and cables .
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 LOW-VOLTAGE WIRES 600 VOLT AC 26 0519-1
111001
•
•
•
PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01
INSTALLATION A.
Wires shall not be installed until debris and moisture is removed from conduits, boxes, and cabinets. Wires stored at site shall be protected from physical damage until they are installed and walls are completed.
B.
Wire-pulling compounds furnished as lubricants for installation of conductors in raceways shall be compounds approved and listed by UL, NRTL, or equal. Oil, grease, graphite, or similar substances are not permitted. Pulling of2 AWG or larger conductors shall be performed with a cable pull machine. Any runs shorter than 50 feet are exempt. When pulling conductors, do not exceed manufacturer's recommended values
C.
The Project Inspector will observe installation of feeder cables. Notify the Project Inspector not less than two working days in advance of the proposed time of feeder installation.
D.
At outlets for light, power, and signal equipment, pigtail splices with 8-inch circuit conductor leads for connection to fixtures, equipment, and devices.
E.
Pressure cable connectors, pre-insulated 3M Scotchlok, Hubbell Power, 0-Z/Gedney or equal, Y, R orB spring-loaded twist-on type, may be furnished in splicing number 8 A WG or smaller wires for wiring systems; except public address and telephone systems.
F.
Joints, splices, taps, and connections to switchboard neutral, bonding or grounding conductors, conductors to ground busses, and transformer connections for wires 6 gage and larger shall be performed with high-pressure cable connectors approved for installation with copper conductors. Connectors shall be insulated with heavy wall heat shrink WCSM, or cold-applied roll-on sleeve RVS. Insulation level shall be a minimum of 600V and joints, splices, and taps shall be qualified to ANSI C 119.1, UL, NRTL, or equal listed mechanical pressure connections.
G.
Connections to any bussing and high-press cable connectors shall be securely bolted together with corrosion-resistant plated carbon steel, minimum grade five machine screws secured with constant pressure-type locking devices.
H.
Connection of any bonding or grounding conductors shall be securely bolted together with corrosion-resistant plated carbon steel, minimum grade five machine screws secured with constant pressure-type locking devices.
I.
Wire switchboards, panel cabinets, pull boxes, and other cabinets except public address, shall be neatly grouped and tied in bundles with nylon ties at 10-inch intervals. In switchboards, panels and tenninal blocks, wires shall be fanned out to terminals. If bundles are longer than 24 inches, a maximum of nine current carrying conductors may be bundled together.
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HJGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 LOW-VOLTAGE WIRES 600 VOLT AC 26 0519-2
111001
•
•
•
J.
Install conductor lengths with a minimum length within the wiring space. Conductors must be long enough to reach the terminal location in a manner that avoids strain on the connecting lug.
K.
Maintain the conductor required bending radius.
L.
Neutral conductors larger than 6 gage, which are not color identified throughout their entire length, shall be taped, painted white or natural gray, or taped white where they appear in switchboards, cabinet, gutters or pull boxes. Neutral conductors 6 gage and smaller shall be white color identified throughout their entire length.
M.
Fire alarm and clock wiririg shall be continuous from terminal cabinets or from equipment to each device. Splices are not permitted between devices and/or terminal cabinets at junction and pull boxes. Wiring shall be terminated at terminal blocks or devices only.
N.
Wiring systems shall be free from short circuits and grounds, other than required grounds. The contractor shall be responsible for the testing offeeder and branch circuit conductor's insulation resistance. The insulation of the conductors shall be tested prior to connections to any panelboards, switchboards, variable frequency drives, lighting control systems, ballasts, and wiring devices such as but not limited to GFI receptacles, TVSS receptacles, or equipment. Insulation testing of panel boards and switchboards shall be independently performed from the insulation testing of any conductors as specified in other sections of this specification. 1.
Utilize the services of an approved independent testing laboratory to perform megger time-resistance insulation testing of feeder conductors. Tests must be conducted with wires disconnected at both ends. a.
Provide calibration program records to assure the testing instrument to be within rated accuracy. The test equipment accuracy shall be in accord with the requirements stated by the National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST).
b.
Test equipment shall be provided with a label stating the date of last calibration. As a minimum the equipment shall have been calibrated within the past 12 months.
c.
Test reports shall include the following: I)
Identification of the testing organization.
2)
Equipment identification.
3)
Ambient conditions.
4)
Identification of the testing technician.
5)
Summary of project.
6)
Description of equipment being tested.
7)
Description oftests .
8736 CORWINTHEATERREPAIR&P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 LOW-VOLTAGE WIRES 600 VOLT AC 26 0519-3
111001
•
2.
Test results .
9)
Analysis, interpretation and recommendations.
Utilize the services of an approved independent testing laboratory or a qualified contractor's employee (Technician certified in accordance with ANSIINETA ETT-2000 Standard for Certification of Electrical Testing Personnel) to perform megger time-resistance insulation testing of branch circuit conductors. Tests must be conducted with wires disconnected at both ends. a.
3.02
8)
Test equipment and report requirements stipulated under paragraph 3.0l.N.l apply to branch circuit testing.
3.
Tests shall be performed in the presence of the Project Inspector.
4.
Insulation resistance shall not be less than I 00 mega-ohms.
COLOR CODES A.
General Wiring: 1.
Color code conductor insulation as follows:
Conductor Phase A Phase B Phase C Neutral
•
SYSTEM VOLTAGE 480Y/277 208Y/120 Black Brown Red Orange Yellow Blue White Natural Gray
Neutrals shall be colored-distinguished if circuits of two voltage systems are used in the same raceway. 2.
B.
For phase and neutral conductors 6 gage or larger, permanent plastic-colored tape may be furnished to mark conductor end instead of coded insulation. Tape shall cover not less than 2 inches of conductor insulation within enclosure.
Signal Systems: Wires for signal systems shall be color-coded and installed under observation of the Project Inspector. Except where otherwise specified, color-coding shall be as follows: SYSTEM Clocks Program Bells (some existing elementary schools) Initiating Devices (Non-Addressable) Program Bells (some existing secondary schools)
•
Fire Alarm Horns
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR& P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
COLOR CODE Pink, Gray and Orange White (Common)Black Red(+) and Black(-) White (120 volt, common) Black (C.R. program) Blue (Shop program) Brown (Gym program) Yellow (Auditorium fire alarm) Pink(+) and Gray(-) 10/01/2011 LOW-VOLTAGE WIRES 600 VOLT AC 26 0519-4
111001
Fire Alarm Strobes On-Interruptible 24 Volt Power (Annunciator, Water Flow, and Audible Device)
•
Interruptible 24 Volt Power (4 wire smoke detectors, duct detectors) Switch-Leg Sprinkler Beii (Between water flow and audible device) Door Holding Magnets (Non Power Limited)
Orange(+) and Blue(-) Yeiiow (+)and White(-) Note: A single white wire may be common to both Brown(+) and White(-) Note: A single white wire may be common to both Violet(+) and White(-) Black(+) and White(-)
FEEDER IDENTIFICATION
3.03
A.
Feeder wires and cables shall be identified at each point the conduit run is broken by a cabinet, box, gutter, etc. Where terminal ends are available, identification shall be by means of heat shrink wire markers, which provide terminal strain relief. Markers shall be by Tyco Electronics, Panduit, Brady Penna-Sleeve, or equal. Identification in other areas shall be by means of wrap-around tape markers from Tyco Electronics, Panduit, Brady Penna-Code or equal. Markers shall include feeder designation, size, and description. TAPE AND SPLICE KITS
3.04 A.
•
Splices, joints, and connectors joining conductors in dry and wet locations shall be covered with insulation equivalent to that provided on conductors. Free ends of conductors connected to energized sources shall be taped. Voids in irregular connectors shall be filled with insulating compound before taping. Thermoplastic insulating tape approved by UL, NRTL, or equal for installation as sole insulation of splices shall be furnished and shall be installed according to manufacturer's printed specifications. PROTECTION
3.05 A.
Protect the Work of this section until Substantial Completion. CLEANUP
3.06 A.
Remove rubbish, debris and waste materials and legally dispose of off the Project site.
END OF SECTION
•
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 LOW-VOLTAGE WIRES 600 VOLT AC 26 0519-5
111001
•
SECTION 26 0526 GROUNDING AND BONDING
PART 1 - GENERAL SUMMARY
1.01
A.
Section Includes: Provide and install grounding system as indicated or required.
B.
Related Requirements: Refer to related sections for their system grounding requirements.
2.
Section 26 0500: Common Work Results for Electrical.
3.
Division 27: Communications.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.02
A.
•
Reference Standards: 1.
IEEE 142 Green Book.
2.
Underwriter's Laboratories (UL) .
3 ..
California Electrical Code.
4.
Building Industry Consultant Services International (BICSI) (Signal).
5.
EIA/TIA (Signal and power).
6.
Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) or equal.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
1.03
•
1.
A.
Metallic objects on the Project site that enclose electrical conductors, or that are likely to be energized by electrical currents, shall be effectively grounded.
B.
Metal equipment parts, such as enclosures, raceways, and equipment grounding conductors, and earth grounding electrodes shall be solidly joined together into a continuous electrically conductive system.
C.
Metallic systems shall be effectively bonded to the main grounding electrode system.
D.
A separately derived AC source shall be grounded to the equipment grounding conductor, and to separate "made" electrode of building grounding electrode system .
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAJR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
I 0/01/20 II GROUNDING AND BONDING 26 0526-1
111001
•
E.
Electrical continuity to ground metal raceways and enclosures, isolated from equipment ground by installation of non-metallic conduit or fittings, shall be provided by a green insulated grounding conductor of required size within each raceway connected to isolated metallic raceways, or enclosures at each end. Each flexible conduit over six feet in length shall be provided with a green insulated grounding conductor of required size.
F.
Cold water, or other utility piping systems, shall not be utilized as grounding electrodes due to the installation of insulating couplings and non-metallic pipe in such installations. In addition to bonding to cold water pipe provide at least one of the following made grounding electrodes: 1.
A dedicated "made" electrode, fabricated of at least 20 feet of galvanized 1/2 inch diameter rebar encased by at least two inches of concrete, and placed next to the bottom of a concrete foundation, or footing in direct contact with earth A welded extended portion shall surface at the location of the common grounding electrode bus bar and be extended by a 3/0 CAD welded bare copper cable, or be CAD welded directly to the bus. The CAD weld shall be at least four inches above finished floor in a dry location. The main grounding electrode and associated grounding conductors shall be in an enclosure and in conduit.
2.
Grounding electrodes as specified hereafter in this section.
3.
Concrete enclosed electrode, fabricated of at least 20 feet of No. 2 A WG, minimum size, bare copper conductor, encased by at least two inches of concrete, located within or near bottom of a concrete foundation, or footing, which is in direct contact with earth. Footing rebar shall be connected to copper wire with approved connectors. An external electrode, as specified hereafter or as required by the CEC, shall be installed and connected to foundation or footing rebar.
•
•
G.
Non-current carrying metal parts of high-voltage equipment enclosures, signal and power conduits, switchboard and panelboard enclosures, motor frames, equipment cabinets, and metal frames of buildings shall be permanently and effectively grounded. Provide a CEC sized grounding conductor in every raceway.
H.
Metallic or semi-conducting shields and lead sheaths of cables operating at high voltage, shall be permanently and effectively grounded at each splice and termination.
I.
Neutral of service conductors shall be grounded as follows: 1.
Neutral shall be grounded at only one point within the Project site for that particular service. Preferable location of grounding point shall be at the service switchboard, or main switch.
2.
Equipment and conduit grounding conductors shall be bonded to that grounding point.
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES IDGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 GROUNDING AND BONDING 26 0526-2
111001
•
3.
If other buildings or structures on the Project site are served from a switchboard or panelboard in another building, power supply is classified as a feeder and not as a service.
4.
Equipment grounding conductor is installed from switchboard to each individual building. At building, grounding conductor is bonded with power equipment enclosures, metal frames of building, etc., to "made" electrode for that building.
5.
Feeder neutrals shall be bonded at service entrance point only, neutrals of separately derived systems shall be bonded at the source only.
J.
If there is a distribution transformer at a building the secondary neutral conductor shall be grounded to "made" electrode serving the building.
K.
Within every building, the main switchboard or panel board, shall be bonded to the cold water line. Metallic piping systems such as gas, fire sprinkler, or other systems shall be bonded to the cold water line.
1.04
SUBMITTALS
A.
Provide in accordance with Division 01.
PART 2- PRODUCTS
•
2.01
MATERIALS A.
Furnished yard boxes shall be precast concrete and shall be approximately 14 inches wide by 19 inches long by 12 inches deep or larger, if necessary to obtain required clearances. Boxes shall be furnished with bolt-down, checkered, cast iron covers and cast iron frames cast into boxes. Yard boxes shall be Jensen Precast, Oldcastle Precast, Western Precast, Kistner, or equal.
B.
"Made" electrodes shall be copper-clad steel ground rods, minimum 3/4 inch diameter by ten feet long.
PART 3- EXECUTION INSTALLATION
3.01
•
A.
Grounding electrodes shall be installed in the nearest suitable planting area, where not otherwise indicated on Drawings, and each electrode shall terminate within a concrete yard box installed flush with finish grade. In planting areas, finish elevation of concrete yard boxes shall be two inches above planting surfaces.
B.
If concrete enclosed electrode is provided, grounding wire shall be terminated to a suitable copper plate with grounding lugs and must be enclosed in a raceway or box ...
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HJGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 GROUNDING AND BONDING 26 0526-3
111001
•
C.
Grounding rods shall be driven to a depth of not less than eight feet. Permanent ground enhancement material, (GEM) as manufactured by Erica Electrical Products, Loresco Powerset, Tessco Ultrafil or equal, shall be installed at each ground rod to improve grounding effectiveness. Install m accordance with manufacture's installation instructions.
D.
Grounding electrodes shall provide a resistance to ground of not more than 25 ohms.
E.
When installing grounding rods, if resistance to ground exceeds 25 ohms, two or more rods connected in parallel, or coupled together shall be provided to meet grounding resistance requirements.
F.
Ground rods shall be separated from one another by not less than ten feet.
G.
Parallel grounding rods shall be connected together with recognized fittings and grounding conductors in galvanized rigid steel conduit, buried not less than 12 inches below finish grade. TESTING
3.02 A.
• B.
A.
•
1.
Visually and mechanically completeness and adequacy .
examine
ground
system
connections
for
2.
Perform fall of potential tests on each ground rod or ground electrode where suitable locations are available per IEEE Standard No. 81, Section 8.2.1.2. Where suitable locations are not available, measurements will be referenced to a known dead earth or reference ground.
3.
Perform the two point method test per IEEE No. 81, Section 8.2.1.1 to determine ground resistance between ground rod and building steel, and utility piping such as water, gas and panelboard grounds. Metal railings at building entrances and at handicapped ramps shall also be tested.
4.
Test shall be performed in the presence ofthe Inspector.
Submit 3 copies of test results to the Architect. Test results shall be submitted on an official form from the independent testing laboratory recording Project location, test engineer, test conditions, test equipment data, ground system layout or diagram, and final test results. PROTECTION
3.03
3.04
Provide the services of an approved independent testing laboratory to test grounding resistance of "made" electrodes, ground rods, bonding of building steel, water pipes, gas pipes and other utility piping. Tests shall be performed as follows:
Protect the Work of this section until Substantial Completion. CLEANUP
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 GROUNDING AND BONDING 26 0526-4
111001
•
A.
Remove rubbish, debris, and waste materials and legally dispose of off the Project site. END OF SECTION
•
•
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
I 0/01/2011 GROUNDING AND BONDING 26 0526-5
141112
SECTION 26 0533
•
RACEWAYS, BOXES, FITTINGS, AND SUPPORTS
PART 1 - GENERAL SUMMARY
1.01 A.
B.
c.
•
Section Includes: 1.
Raceways and wire ways.
2.
Conduit installation.
3.
Underground requirements.
Related Requirements: I.
Section 26 0500: Common Work Results for Electrical.
2.
Section 26 0513: Basic Electrical Materials and Methods.
3.
Division 27: Communications.
4.
Division 28 - Electronic Safety and Security.
Applicable Standards and Codes. 1.
EWTIA 569 Standards.
2.
National American Standards Institute (ANSI).
3.
National Electrical Manufacturer's Association (NEMA).
4.
Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL).
5.
California Electrical Code (CEC).
6.
Uniform Building Code (UBC).
7.
Underwriters Laboratory (UL).
SUBMITTALS
1.02 A.
Materials List: Provide in accordance with Division 01.
PART 2- PRODUCTS RACEWAYS
2.01 A.
Conduit Materials: 1.
•
Metallic conduit, and tubing shall be manufactured under the supervision of an UL, or another NRTL factory inspection and label service program. Each ten-foot length of conduit and tubing shall bear the UL or another NRTL label and manufacturer's name .
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
11/12/2014 RACEWAYS, BOXES, FITTINGS, AND SUPPORTS 26 0533-1
141112
•
2.
Rigid metallic conduit shall be rigid steel, heavy wall, mild steel, zinc-coated, with an inside and outside protective coating manufactured in accordance with ANSI C 80.1. Couplings, elbows, bends, conduits, bushings and other fittings shall be the same materials and finish as the rigid metallic conduit. Fittings, connectors, and couplings shall be threaded type, manufactured in accordance with ANSI C 80.1 and UL 6.
3.
Electrical metallic tubing shall be steel tubing, zinc-coated with a protective enamel coating inside, manufactured in accordance with NEMA C 80.3. Fittings, couplings, and connectors shall be gland compression type, set screw couplings and connectors not permitted. All parts shall be manufactured in accordance with NEMA C80.3 and UL 6A Electrical metallic tubing is designated hereinafter as EMT. Steel and rain tight fittings shall be approved and listed for the intended application.
4.
Flexible steel conduit shall be of flexible interlocking strip construction with continuous zinc coating on strips, manufactured in accordance with UL 1. a.
•
•
Connectors and couplings shall be required fittings of the type, which threads into convolutions of flexible conduit.
5.
Liquid-tight flexible metal conduit shall be galvanized heavy wall, flexible locked steel strip construction, UV rated, with smooth moisture and oil-proof, abrasionresistant, extruded plastic jacket. Connectors shall be as required for installation with liquid-tight flexible conduit and shall be installed to provide a liquid-tight connection .
6.
Non-metallic conduit shall be rigid PVC electrical conduit extruded to schedule 40 dimensions of Type II. Grade 1 high impact, polyvinyl chloride, sweeps, couplings, reducers and terminating fittings shall be listed under the UL, or another NRTL, and shall bear the manufacturer's listed marking.
7.
Multi-cell raceway shall be four inch PVC, Type 40, UL or another NRTL listed for underground use with optical fiber and signal system cables. Raceway shall be furnished with 3-1/2 inch factory installed inner ducts with required internal spacers, and required couplers, sweeps, and end bells. Multicell raceway shall be Carlon Multigard, or District approved equal.
8.
Metal Clad (MC) cable system is not allowed.
B.
Sleeves for Conduits: Sleeves shall be adjustable type by Carlon, U.S. Plastic, PEP Plastic or equal.
C.
Where conduit enters a building through a concrete foundation below grade, or ground water level, or where it is necessary to seal around a conduit where it passes through a concrete floor or wall, provide 0-Z/Gedney Type FSK Thru Wall and Floor Seal, equivalent Cooper Crouse Hinds Thru-Wall, Legrand Thru-Wall, or equal.
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
11/12/2014 RACEWAYS, BOXES, FITTINGS, AND SUPPORTS 26 0533-2
141112
•
D.
E.
• F.
Expansion Joints-Seismic Separations between building(s) and other locations as indicated on drawings: 1.
Provide Thomas & Betts XJG-TB, 0-Z/Gedney. type AX with bonding strap and clamps, Cooper XJGD or equal. At exterior locations, provide Thomas & Betts XJG-TB, 0-Z/Gedney type EX, Cooper XJGD, or equal. Provide 0-Z/Gedney type AXDX, or equal combination deflection/expansion fittings at all seismic separations. Provide manufacture's internal and external bonding jumpers at all locations. Liquid-tight metal conduit or flexible metal conduit shall not be approved at expansion joints, separations between buildings or seismic separations.
2.
Provide expansion fittings at intervals not exceeding 100 feet in conduits exposed to direct sunlight. Fittings may be installed in the conduit run or where conduit attaches to junction or pull boxes. OZ/Gedney type AX, TX or EXE series, or equivalent by Thomas and Betts, Crouse-Hinds or approved equal.
Conduit Seal Fittings: 1.
Provide conduit seal fittings where indicated on the Drawings. Conduit seals shall be of rigid galvanized steel. Seals in horizontal conduit installations shall be Thomas & Betts EYS, Appleton Type ESU, Crouse Hinds Type EYS, or equal. Seals in vertical conduit installations shall be Thomas & Betts EYD, Appleton Type SF, Crouse Hinds Type EYD, or equal, with continuous drain. When installing conduit seals make provision for percent fill space reduction in accordance with CEC.
2.
Install sealing compound after wire has been installed. Ensure drain is not blocked in vertical seals when installing compound. Where conduit seals are installed in hazardous area applications, there shall be no conduit coupling, fitting, etc., between seal and boundary ofhazardous area.
Surface Steel Raceway: 1.
The surface steel raceway system for branch circuit wiring, data network, voice, video, and other low voltage wiring shall be as manufactured by the Wiremold Company, Hubbell, or Mono-Systems, Inc. or equal. The raceway system may be supplied pre-wired in accordance with all sections of these specifications and requirements herein, and shall be UL or another NRTL listed. Computer data installation shall be as required by other sections of this Division. a.
•
If furnished pre-wired, the system must be listed in accordance with UL or another NRTL for "Multiple Outlet Assemblies" and so labeled on interior of the assembly. The pre-wired installation must contain no extra wire splices in the raceway as compared to a contractor assembled installation assembled from components. The pre-wired steel raceway shall be Hi-Pot tested at the factory to prevent any potential bare wire or shot circuit defects .
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
11112/2014 RACEWAYS, BOXES, FITTINGS, AND SUPPORTS 26 0533-3
141112
•
• G.
•
2.
The raceway base, cover, and device bracket shall be manufactured of steel and finished in ivory, gray enamel or custom colors suitable for field painting to match adjacent finishes.
3.
The raceway shall be a two-piece design with a metal base and snap-on metal cover, except for the Wiremold V700 system, Hubbell HBL 750 series and MonoSystems Inc. S 145-700 series that shall be a one-piece design. The base and cover sections shall be a minimum of 0.040 inch wall thickness. The base section shall be available in ten-foot lengths. A hand-operated cutting tool shall be available for the base and cover to ensure clean, square cuts. Wiremold V500, Hubbell V500, and Mono Systems inc. SM500 series are not permitted.
4.
A full complement of fittings shall be furnished, including but not limited to, flat internal and external elbows, tees, entrance fittings, wire clips, cover clips, couplings, support clips, C-hangers and end caps. The fitting color shall match the raceway color. Fittings shall be supplied with a base where indicated and/or required. A take-off fitting shall be furnished as required to adapt to existing flush wall boxes.
5.
Device brackets shall be furnished for mounting single or two-gang devices within the raceway. Devices shall be provided with the ability of mounting flush or in conjunction with standard steel, stainless steel, or manufacturer's metal faceplates.
6.
The raceway shall be furnished with a complete line of connectivity outlets and modular inserts for unshielded twisted pair including category 5, fiber-optic, coaxial, and other cabling types with face plates and bezels to facilitate installation. Computer data installation shall be as required by other sections of this Division, and Division 27.
7.
Raceway shall be furnished with corner elbows and tee fittings to maintain a cable bend radius which meets the requirements of fiber-optic and copper cables under EIA/TIA 569 for communications pathways.
Factory Pre-Wired Surface Metal Raceway: 1.
Furnish and install pre-wired surface metal raceways as indicated on Drawings and as specified.
2.
Metal Raceway shall be galvanized steel Wiremold V4000, Hubbell4000 series, or Mono-Systems Inc. SMS-4000 series complete with raceway base, cover, fittings, receptacles and mounting plates required for a complete assembly. Raceway shall have two wiring compartments with integral dividing barrier for isolating the wiring compartments.
3.
Pre-wired assembly shall be UL, or another NRTL listed as a multi-outlet assembly and surface raceway as labeled on interior of assembly.
4.
Wiring devices and other components shall be factory installed, electrically wired and covers labeled as indicated on drawings. Each receptacle shall be identified with panelboard and circuit number from which it was fed. Grounding shall be maintained by means of factory installed grounding conductors .
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
11/12/2014 RACEWAYS, BOXES, FITTINGS, AND SUPPORTS 26 0533-4
141112
•
•
5.
Where shown on Drawings, Raceway covers shall have provisions for mounting computer data outlets .
6.
Complete assembly is to consist of required fittings such as elbows, slide couplings for joining raceway sections, blank end caps and flat tees.
7.
Prewired assembly must contain no wire splices.
8.
Receptacles and wiring shall be as indicated on drawings and as specified.
9.
Where raceway is used for power and computer data outlets, installation of data outlets shall be as required by other sections of this specification.
10.
Prior and during installation, verify and comply with manufacturer's installation instructions.
11.
Entire assembly shall be tested for shorts, opens, ground faults, and wire insulation at factory and certified. Raceways shall be electrically continuous and bonded in accordance with California Electrical Code.
12.
Submit shop drawings for approval showing the complete layout of all components of each raceway, raceway lengths, each component description, location and circuit identification.
13.
All wiring devices shall be removable without requiring disassembly ofwireway.
14.
Standard non OEM wiring devices shall be used as specified in District's specifications.
H.
Wireways shall be 16 gage galvanized steel enclosed hinge/screw wiring troughs, surface metal raceway, wireway, and auxiliary gutter designed to enclose electrical wiring . Wireway fittings shall be furnished with removable covers and sides to permit complete installation of conductors throughout the entire wireway run. Cover shall be furnished with keyhole slots to accept captive screws locking the cover securely closed. Wireways shall be UL or another NRTL listed, and shall be SquareD Type LDB NEMA-1 enclosure for interior applications, or Type RDB NEMA-3R enclosure for exterior applications, or equal by Cooper B-Iine, Hoffman, Wire Guard, or Circle A W.
I.
Penetration in Fire-Rated Structures: Provide 3M, or equal, sealant and fire barriers for installing fire-rated seals around penetrations through floors, walls, and elevator hoistways. Fire stop system must be UL, or another NRTL listed, and classified for through-penetration applications of metallic conduits and busways.
1.
Pull Wires: Install 118 inch polypropylene cords in empty or spare conduits.
PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01
CONDUIT INSTALLATION A.
General Requirements: 1.
•
Provide complete and continuous systems of rigid metallic conduit, outlet boxes, junction boxes, fittings and cabinets for systems of electrical wiring including lighting, power, and signal systems, except as otherwise specified .
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
11112/2014 RACEWAYS, BOXES, FITTINGS, AND SUPPORTS 26 0533-5
141112
•
2.
EMT may be installed in interior concealed applications and in areas approved by owner. EMT shall not be installed in concrete, directly buried underground, outdoors, in boiler rooms, elevator pits, or where subject to damage.
3.
Within buildings, flexible steel conduit may be installed instead of rigid steel conduit where permitted by code. Flexible steel conduit shall be installed: a. For continuous lengths not exceeding more than 50 feet between pull points (pull boxes, outlet boxes, etcetera). b. With no maximum total raceway length located within a building interior when the flex is located in concealed locations.
•
•
4.
Flexible Steel conduit shall not exceed 1-112 inches in size.
5.
Liquid-tight flexible steel conduit shall only be installed, except where otherwise specified, for final connection of motor terminal boxes, shop equipment, cafeteria equipment, HV AC equipment and other equipment, or for frequent interchange, and shall be of sufficient length, not exceeding 36 inches, to permit full travel or adjustment of motor on its base. Liquid-tight flexible conduit shall not be used for equipment not requiring adjustment or frequent interchange.
6.
Connectors for flexible metal conduit shall be made of steel, and of the types which threads into convolutions of conduit. Connectors for watertight flexible metal conduit shall be as required for installation and shall be installed to provide a watertight connection.
7.
Exposed conduit shall be installed vertically and horizontally following the general configuration of the equipment, using cast threaded hub conduit fittings where required and shall be clamped to equipment with suitable iron brackets and one hole pipe strap.
8.
If connection is from a flush wall-mounted junction box, install an approved extension box.
9.
Underground feeder distribution conduits for systems may be non-metallic conduit instead of rigid conduit except where otherwise specified or indicated.
10.
Conduit shall be concealed unless otherwise indicated. Conduits exposed to view, except those in attic spaces and under buildings, shall be installed parallel or at right angles to structural members, walls, or lines of building. Conduits shall be installed to clear access openings.
11.
Bends or offsets will not be permitted unless absolutely necessary. Radius of each conduit bend or offset shall be as required by ordinance. Bends and offsets shall be performed with standard industry tools and equipment or may be factory fabricated bends or elbows complying with requirements for radius of bend specified. Heating of metallic conduit to facilitate bending is not permitted. Public telephone conduit bends and offsets shall be provided with a radius which is not less than ten times trade size of conduit unless otherwise permitted. Refer to underground installation, specified in this section, for radius of bends and offsets required for underground installations .
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
11/12/2014 RACEWAYS, BOXES, FITTINGS, AND SUPPORTS 26 0533-6
141112
•
•
•
12.
Running threads are not permitted. Provide conduit unions where union joints are necessary. Conduit shall be maintained at least six inches from covering of hot water and steam pipes and 18 inches from flues and breechings. Open ends of conduits shall be sealed with permitted conduit seals during construction of buildings and during installation of underground systems.
13.
Expansion Joints/Seismic Separations/Separations between buildings/Locations Indicated: Provide Thomas & Betts XJG-TB, 0-Z Electrical Mfg. Co. Inc. Type AX with bonding strap and clamps. Crouse Hinds XJGD, or equal. At exterior locations, provide Thomas & Betts XJG-TB, 0-Z Electrical Mfg. Co. Inc. Type EX, Crouse Hinds XJGD, or equal. Provide Crouse Hinds, Thomas & Betts, or 0-Z Electrical Mfg. Co. Type AXDX, or equal Combination Deflection/Expansion Fittings at all seismic separations. Provide manufactures internal and external Bonding Jumpers at all locations. Liquid-tight flexible conduit shall not be approved at expansion joints or seismic separations.
14.
Where conduits are terminated in groups at panelboards, switchboards, and signal cabinets, etc., provide templates or spacers to fasten conduits in proper position and to preserve alignment. Conduits terminating at signal cabinets shall only enter cabinets in the following locations: a.
Conduits entering top, side, and bottom of cabinets shall be aligned in a single row, centered two inches from rear of cabinet.
b.
Conduits entering back of cabinet shall be aligned in a single row centered two inches from top of cabinet.
c.
Conduits shall not be spaced closer than three inches on centers .
15.
Conduits above metal lath ceilings shall be rigidly suspended with pipe hangers or pipe racks or shall be secured to superstructure with factory fabricated pipe straps. Conduits in metal lath or steel stud partitions shall be tied to furring channels or studs. In ceiling spaces and in partitions, tie wires shall be spaced not more than 5 feet apart, shall fasten conduit tight against channels and studs at point of tie and shall not support any of conduit weight. Tie wire shall be 16 gage galvanized double annealed steel.
16.
Where auxiliary supports, saddles, brackets, etc., are required to meet special conditions, they shall be fastened rigid and secure before conduit is attached.
17.
Conduit in ceiling spaces, stud walls, and under floors, shall be supported with factory fabricated pipe straps or shall be suspended with pipe hangers or pipe racks. Pipe straps shall be attached to and shall fasten conduit tight at point of support against ceiling and floor joists, rafters, and wall studs, or two-inch x fourinch headers fitted between joists or wall studs.
18.
Conduits installed on exposed steel trusses and rafters shall be fastened with factory fabricated conduit straps or clamps, which shall fasten conduit tight against supporting member at point of support.
19.
Conduits installed under buildings shall be strapped with factory fabricated conduit straps to underside of concrete floor or joists, or wood floor joists, or shall
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
11112/2014 RACEWAYS, BOXES, FITTINGS, AND SUPPORTS 26 0533-7
141112
•
•
•
be suspended with pipe hangers or pipe racks. Conduits under building are not permitted to be placed directly on grade; they shall be suspended from building or shall be buried below surface or ground. 1-114 inch and larger conduits under buildings shall be installed with conduit hangers or racks. 20.
Pipe hangers for individual conduits shall be factory fabricated. Steel rods shall be 3/8 inch for two-inch conduit hangers and smaller and shall be 112 inch for 2 Yz-inch conduit hangers and larger.
21.
Pipe racks for groups of parallel conduits and for supporting total weights not exceeding 500 pounds shall be trapeze type and shall consist of a cross channel, Steel City Kindorf B-900, Unistrut P-1 000, equivalent Cooper B-Line or equal, suspended with a 3/8 inch minimum diameter steel rod at each end. Rods shall be fastened with nuts, top and bottom to cross-channel and with square washers on top of channel. Conduits shall be clamped to top for cross-channel with conduit clamps, Steel City Kindorf C-1 05 or Unistrut P-1111 through P-1124, equivalent Cooper B-Line, or equal. Conduits shall not be stacked one on top of another, but a maximum of two tiers may be on same rack providing an additional crosschannel is installed. Where a pipe rack is to be longer than 24 inches, or if the supported weight exceeds 500 pounds, submit Shop Drawings of installation to the Architect for review.
22.
Conduits suspended on rods more than two feet long shall be rigidly braced to prevent horizontal motion or swaying. Installation shall meet zone 4 seismic requirements.
23.
Factory fabricated pipe straps shall be one or two-hole formed galvanized clamps, heavy-duty type, except where otherwise specified.
24.
Hangers, straps, rods, or pipe supports under concrete shall be attached to inserts set at time concrete is placed, or with approved concrete anchors. Under wood, install bolts, lag bolts, or lag screws; under steel joists or trusses, install beam clamps. Contractor shall submit size of anchors, bolts, screws, and installation method to Architect for approval prior to start of any work.
25.
Conduits shall be supported at intervals required by code, but not to exceed ten feet. One inch and smaller exposed conduits shall be fastened with one-hole malleable iron straps. Perforated straps and plumber's tape is not permitted for the support of conduits.
26.
Conduits stubbed up through a roof or an arcade shall be flashed with a waterproof flashing. Refer to Division 07 for additional requirements.
27.
Bushings and locknuts for rigid steel conduit shall be steel threaded insulating type. Setscrew bushings are not permitted.
28.
Flex conduits shall be cut square and not at an angle.
29.
Routing of conduits may be changed providing length of any conduit run is not increased more than ten percent of the length indicated on Drawings .
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
11112/2014 RACEWAYS, BOXES, FITTINGS, AND SUPPORTS 26 0533-8
141112
•
•
•
B.
Underground Requirements: 1.
Conduits and multicell raceways installed underground shall be entirely encased in three inch thick concrete on all sides , except where otherwise specified. Provide required spacers to prevent any deflection when concrete is placed and to preserve position and alignment. Conduits and raceways shall be tied to spacers. Anchors shall be installed to prevent floating of conduits and raceways during placing of concrete. Provide red colored concrete to encase conduits of systems operating above 600 volts.
2.
Underground conduits and raceways shall be buried to a depth of not less than 24 inches below finished grade to top of the concrete envelope, unless otherwise specified.
3.
Assemble sections of conduit with required fittings. Cut ends of conduit shall be reamed to remove rough edges. Joints in conduits shall be provided liquid-tight. Bends at risers shall be completely below surface where possible.
4.
Conduits and raceways in a common trench shall be separated by at least three inches of concrete. Electrical power and/or lighting conduit runs installed in a common trench with conduits containing signal system wiring such as public address, telephone, intrusion detection, fire alarm, television, computer networking, and clock systems shall maintain a separation of a minimum of six inches from these types of signal system conduits and raceways. Electrical power, lighting and signal conduits and raceways installed in a common trench with other utility lines such as gas, water, sewer and storm lines shall maintain 12 inches separation from these types of utility lines .
5.
The Inspector will observe underground installations before and during concrete placement. A mandrel shall be drawn through each run of conduit in presence of the Inspector before and after placing concrete. Mandrel shall be six inches in length minimum, and have a diameter that is within 114 inches of diameter of conduit to be tested.
6.
Non-metallic conduit installations shall comply with following additional requirements. Joints in PVC conduit shall be sealed by means of required solventweld cement supplied by conduit manufacturer. Non-metallic conduit bends and deflections shall comply with requirements of applicable electrical code, except that minimum radius of any bend or offset for conduits sized from 112 inch to 1 Yz-inch inclusive shall not be less than 24 inches. Bends at risers and risers shall be PVC-coated rigid steel conduit. Radius of curve of bends or offsets in nonmetallic conduit for public telephone system shall be not less than ten times trade size of conduit, unless otherwise specifically permitted.
7.
Furnish and install a six-inch wide, polyethylene, red underground barrier type 12 inches above full length of concrete reading, "CAUTION ELECTRIC LINE BURIED BELOW".
8.
Underground conduit systems provided for utility companies shall be furnished to meet the requirements of the utility companies requiring service .
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
11/12/2014 RACEWAYS, BOXES, FITTINGS, AND SUPPORTS 26 0533-9
141112
• C.
9.
Protect inside of conduit and raceway from dirt and rubbish during construction by capping openings .
10.
Add bell-end bushings for conduit stub-up including underground entries to pull boxes, and manholes. Under floor standing switchboards and motor control centers provide a four-inch galvanized nipple with ground bushing.
11.
Underground conduit for systems operating above 600 volts shall be a minimum size of four inches.
12.
At portable classroom all stub ups shall be installed with a coupling flush to finish grade.
13.
Underground conduits and raceways shall be swabbed prior to wire pull.
Rooftop conduit shall be supported from channels, stands, clamps, trapezes, rollers, or structures mounted on 100% rubber, UV resistant rooftop supports with reflective strips, Dura-Blok, or equal. Roller type supports shall be provided below and above conduit to prevent its dislodgement. Bottom of conduits shall clear the roof surface by 10 inches. 1.
• 2.
D.
•
At PVC roofing provide walk tread, polyester reinforced, UV resistant, with surface embossment at rooftop supports. Heat welding of walk pads shall only be done by manufacturer certified installers. a.
Sika-Samafil and Carlisle: Walk tread shall be no more than one inch larger than the plan area of the pipe support blocks and adhered to the roof membrane with Sika 1A or Carlisle Universal Single-Ply sealant, as applicable.
b.
Johns Manville: Walk tread shall be installed under the pipe support blocks and adhered to the blocks, if possible, and left loose laid on top of the PVC roof system. Walk-pad shall have a minimum of 4 inches of material past perimeter on all 4 sides of block.
Built-up roofing: Provide APP granulated modified torch-down at each pipe support block. Torch-down shall extend 2 to 4 inches beyond the edges of the block and adhered by torch application over existing cap sheet membrane. This work shall be performed by a certified roofer.
General Installation Requirements for Computer Network System Conduits: I.
Location of outlet boxes and equipment on Drawings is approximate, unless dimensions are indicated. Drawings shall not be scaled to determine position and routing of wireways, drops, and outlet boxes. Location of outlet boxes and equipment shall conform to architectural features of the building and other Work already in place and must be ascertained in the field before start of Work.
2.
The maximum pulling tensions of the specified cables shall not be exceeded and proper radius of cable bends shall be maintained .
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
11/12/2014 RACEWAYS, BOXES, FITTINGS, AND SUPPORTS 26 0533-10
141112
•
•
•
3.
For computer network wiring, conduit types shall be limited to rigid metal conduit, electrical metallic tubing, schedule 40 PVC, multi-cell raceways, and flexible metallic conduit for lengths less than six feet.
4.
Interior section of conduit run shall be not longer than 100 feet and shall not contain more than two bends of 90 degrees between pull points or pull boxes.
5.
The inside radius of a conduit bend shall be at least six times the internal diameter of the conduit. When the conduit size is greater than two inches, the inside radius shall be at least ten times the internal diameter of the conduit. For fiber-optic cable, the inside radius of a conduit bend shall be at least ten times the internal diameter of the conduit.
6.
Conduit shall be sized in accordance with Table 4.4-1 of EW TIA 569 standard.
7.
Splicing or terminating cables in pull boxes is not permitted.
8.
For indoor application, a pull box shall be provided in conduit run where: a.
The length is over 100 feet.
b.
There are more than two bends of 90 degrees.
c.
There is a reverse bend in the run.
9.
Boxes shall be provided in a straight section of conduit and shall not be installed in lieu of a bend. The corresponding conduit ends are to be aligned with each other. Conduit fittings shall not be installed in place of pull boxes.
10 .
Where a pull box is provided with raceways, pull box shall comply with the following: a.
For straight pull-through, provide a length of at least eight times the tradesize diameter of the largest raceway.
b.
For angle and U-pulls: 1)
Provide a distance between each raceway entry inside the box and the opposite wall of the box of at least six times the trade-size diameter of the largest raceway, this distance being increased by the sum of the trade-size diameters of the other raceways on the same wall of the box.
2)
Provide a distance between the nearest edges of each raceway entry enclosing the same conductor of at least: a)
Six times the trade-size diameter of the raceway; or
b)
Six times the trade-size diameter of the larger raceway if they are of different size.
c)
For a raceway entering the wall of a pull box opposite to a removable cover, provide a distance from the wall to the cover of not less than the trade-size diameter of the largest raceway plus six times the diameter of the largest conductor .
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
11112/2014 RACEWAYS, BOXES, FITTINGS, AND SUPPORTS 26 0533-11
141112
11.
•
E.
F.
3.02
•
•
Drawings generally indicate Work to be installed, but do not indicate all bends, transitions of special fittings required to clear beams, girders or other Work already in place. Investigate conditions where conduits and wireways are to be installed, and furnish and install required fittings.
Slabs on Grade: 1.
Unless specifically reviewed by the Architect and DSA, conduits 1 Y4-inches and larger are not permitted to be installed in structural concrete slabs. Where conduits are permitted, and are installed in concrete slabs on grade, slabs shall be thickened at bottom where conduits occur to provide three inches of concrete between conduit and earth. Required excavation shall be part of the Work ofthis section.
2.
If concrete slab is five inches or more in thickness with a moisture barrier plastic sheet between earth and slab, one inch and smaller conduits shall be installed in the slab with a minimum of one inch concrete between earth and conduit.
Concrete Walls, Beams, and Floors: Provide sleeves where conduits pierce concrete walls, beams, and floors, except floor slabs on grade. Sleeves shall provide 1/2 inch clearance around conduits. Sleeves shall not extend beyond exposed surfaces of concrete and shall be securely fastened to forms. Where conduits pass through walls below grade, seal with required sealant and backer materials between conduit and sleeve to provide a watertight joint. Sealant shall be as indicated in Section 07 9200: Joint Sealants. STUBS
A.
Panelboard: Install two one inch conduits from each flush mounted panelboard to access under floor space and to access above ceiling space where these conditions occur. Cap conduits with standard galvanized pipe caps.
B.
Floor: At points where floor stubs are indicated in open floor areas, for connections to machines and equipment, conduits shall be terminated with couplings, tops flush with finished floor. Stubs shall extend above couplings the indicated distance. Where capped stubs are designated, couplings shall be closed with cast iron plugs with screw drive slots.
C.
Underground: 1.
Underground conduit stubs shall be terminated at locations indicated, and shall extend five feet beyond building foundations, steps, arcades, concrete walks and paving. Rigid metallic conduit stubs and non-metallic conduit stubs shall be capped by installing a coupling flush in end wall of concrete encasement and plugging with a permitted plug. Project record drawings shall indicate location of ends of underground conduit stubs fully dimensioned and triangulated with reference to buildings or permanent landmarks. These dimensions, including depth below finished grade, shall be marked on project record drawings in presence of the Inspector before backfilling trench. Where extending existing concrete encased stubs, clean, chip and wire brush end of existing concrete and brush on a heavy coat of neat cement paste or epoxy bonding agent.
2.
Over ends of individual underground conduit stubs or groups of conduit stubs, install four-inch by 18-inch deep PVC filled with concrete, flush with finished grade in asphaltic concrete or lawns, and two inches above finished grade in
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HJGH SCHOOL
11/12/2014 RACEWAYS, BOXES, FITTINGS, AND SUPPORTS 26 0533-12
141112
•
planting areas. Cast a three-inch by three-inch brass plate engraved "ELECT" flush in top of concrete. Secure plate to concrete with brass dowels or as indicated on drawings. PROTECTION
3.03 A.
Protect the Work of this section until Substantial Completion. CLEANUP
3.04 A.
Remove rubbish, debris and waste materials and legally dispose of off the Project site. END OF SECTION
•
•
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
11112/2014 RACEWAYS, BOXES, FITTINGS, AND SUPPORTS 26 0533-13
111001
•
SECTION 26 0923 LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01
SUMMARY A.
Section Includes: 1.
B.
•
•
1.02
Low-voltage lighting control system.
Related Requirements: 1.
Division 01 - General Requirements.
2.
Section 26 0500: Common Work Results for Electrical.
3.
Section 26 0513: Basic Electrical Materials and Methods.
4.
Section 26 0519: Low-Voltage Wires (600 Volt AC).
5.
Section 26 0533: Raceways, Boxes, Fittings, and Supports.
6.
Section 26 2416: Panelboards and Signal Terminal Cabinets.
7.
Section 26 5000: Lighting.
SUBMITTALS A.
Provide in accordance with Division 01.
B.
Submit a complete one-line diagram of the proposed system configuration for Architect/Engineer's review. The riser diagram shall identify but not be limited to wiring, equipment, components, interconnection with other systems, and location and type of raceways.
C.
Manufacturer's Data: Submit catalog cuts and description of each system component.
D.
Provide wiring diagrams and installation details for lighting control equipment.
E.
Shop Drawings: Submit a complete set of detailed Shop Drawings for the entire lighting control system; the shop drawings shall include but not be limited to relay panels with designations and dimensions, day light sensors locations based on manufacturer's recommendations, and system components with manufacturer's part numbers .
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEMS 26 0923-1
111001
•
F.
1.03
1.04
•
•
1.05
Installation Instructions: Submit manufacturer's written installation instructions, wiring diagrams. Instructions shall include recommendations for handling of equipment and parts, and protection and storage requirements.
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
Components shall be listed and labeled by Underwriter's Laboratories (UL), or another Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL).
B.
Lighting Control Systems shall comply with the state of California Building and Electrical Codes, and Title 24 energy requirements in effect at time of submittal for building permit.
C.
Conduct a coordination meeting with the lighting control contractor, electrical contractor, EOR, Manufacturer Representative, and the OAR to validate the location of lighting control system components, including daylight sensors. Sensors shall be located based on manufacturer's recommendations.
WARRANTY A.
Manufacturer shall provide a three year material warranty.
B.
Installer shall provide a two year installation warranty.
SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS A.
Systems shall be furnished with networkable relay panels complete with relays, transformers, and control electronics. The system shall be furnished with hardware and resident software, occupancy sensors, constant light controllers, exterior light sensors, occupancy sensors, local wall switches and dimmer switches, conduit and wiring for a complete and functional installation.
B.
The lighting control system must be able to communicate with fully digital centralized relay panels, remote relay panels, digital switches, photocells, analog switches, various interfaces, and shall include operational software. The lighting control system shall be integrated into a single system, except for areas controlled by a motion sensor; such as rooms with one luminaire and emergency fixtures designed to operate 24 hours a day, seven days a week. Distributed lighting control shall be provided using a networkable remote relay panel. A Centralized relay panel shall control corridors and site lighting. Lighting control system shall include hardware and software; software shall be resident within the lighting control system. System shall provide local access to programming functions at the master Lighting Control Panel (LCP) and remote access to programming functions via dial-up modem and through any standard computer workstation running an industry standard internet browser. Lighting control system shall have a server built into the master LCP that "serves" HTML pages to any authorized workstation. WEB front end shall be accessible over an LAUSD provided Ethernet 10/100 Mpbs to the local area network. Protocol shall be TCP/IP and allow either http (hypertext transfer protocol) or https (hypertext transfer protocol secured) connections. Desktop
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEMS 26 0923-2
111001
computers are not part of this section and will be provided by others. Non-networked, non-digital, non-server capable systems are not acceptable .
•
•
•
1.06
c.
System software shall provide real time status of each relay, each zone and each group.
D.
Lighting control system shall be able to be monitored and take commands from a remote Personal Computer (PC); should the remote PC go off-line system programming uploaded to the lighting control system shall continue to operate as intended. Systems requiring an on line PC or server for normal operation are not acceptable
E.
Devices shall be able to be pre-addressed at the factory. addressing only are not acceptable.
F.
Programs, schedules, time of day, etcetera, shall be held in non-volatile memory at power failure. At restoration of power, lighting control system shall implement programs required by current time and date.
G.
System shall be capable of flashing lighting OFF/ON for any relay or lighting zone prior to the lights beings turned OFF. The warning interval time between the flash and the final lights off signal shall be definable for each zone. Occupant shall be able to override any scheduled OFF sweep using local lighting zone override switches within the zone or occupied space. Occupant override time shall be pre-programmed not to exceed two hours, or current California Title 24 requirements.
H.
The system shall be capable of implementing ON, OFF, Raise (dimming), and Lower (dimming) commands for any relay, group or zone by means of digital specification grade line voltage type wall switches, analog low voltage switches, photocells, web based software, or other devices connected to programmable inputs in the lighting control system.
I.
The lighting control system shall provide the ability to control each relay and each relay group. Programming and scheduling shall be able to be done locally at the master LCP and remotely via dial up modem and via the Internet. Remote connection to the lighting control system shall provide real time control and real time feedback.
J.
System may consist of centralized relay panels, remote relay panels, digital switches, analog switches, photocells, motion sensors, lumen control devices, dimmer switches, and various digital interfaces. Remote relay panels, smart breaker panels, centralized relay panels and digital switches shall communicate as one network. Remote Relay Panels (RRP) shall control lighting fixtures in that area or space, provide power to occupancy sensors and take input from daylight and occupancy sensors. RRP's shall be capable of taking inputs from LA USD specification line voltage type switches, and if classroom dimming is indicated on the plans, they shall be capable of outputting an independent Ov to 1Ov dimming signal for each remote relay provided. Remote relay panels, switches, photocells and occupancy sensors shall be wired per lighting control manufacturers instructions.
Systems requiring field
LIGHTING CONTROL OVERVIEW-BY AREA CONTROLLED
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEMS 26 0923-3
111001
•
A.
Classrooms: 1.
B.
•
The occupancy sensor is to automatically switch lights OFF when the room is not occupied.
b.
Daylight controls shall automatically adjust light intensity according to the natural light level in the room. The daylight sensors shall be enabled and disabled by the occupancy sensors to ensure daylight controlled lights never automatically tum ON when room is unoccupied. The lighting control system shall allow an authorized person to disable the daylight sensors and dimming controls.
c.
Wall switches are to manually switch lights ON and OFF. Switches shall comply with the operational requirements ofthe current T24, and include location of device, accessibility and override capability.
d.
Quiet time switch is to temporarily bypass the occupancy sensors for a programmed time period, typically one hour.
Corridors and other common areas are to be controlled by a combination of programmable low voltage keyed switches and time schedules supplied by the networked lighting control system. a.
Low voltage keyed switches are operable 24 hours a day and are to manually switch lights ON and OFF.
b.
The central timer is to automatically sweep lights OFF after hours, and provide scheduling capability.
c.
Interior corridors require occupancy sensors.
Custodial and Equipment Rooms: 1.
D.
a.
Corridors and Open Areas: 1.
C.
Classrooms are controlled by a combination of occupancy sensors, daylight controllers and dimmers switches, ON/OFF and quiet time switches.
Custodial, Equipment rooms and unsupervised rooms shall be provided with occupancy sensors with automatic on-off capability in addition to manual switches. These sensors shall tum off the lights in the room via a pre-set but programmable interval after the room has been vacated.
Exterior Security Lights: 1.
Exterior wall packs and security lights are to be controlled via exterior light sensors. a.
•
When natural light level is insufficient, the lights are ON .
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEMS 26 0923-4
111001
b.
•
When natural light level is sufficient, the lights are OFF .
E. Exterior, Non-Security Lights: I.
F.
Exterior parking lot lights, pathway lights and decorative lights are controlled by an exterior light sensor in conjunction with time schedules provided by the networked lighting control system. a.
When natural light level is insufficient or the timer is ON, the lights are ON.
b.
When natural light level is sufficient or the timer is OFF, the lights are OFF.
Restrooms: I.
Student Restroom Lighting and Exhaust Fans (Fans interlocked with lights): a.
•
2.
Staff Restrooms Lights and Exhaust Fans (Fans interlocked with lights): a.
G.
Restroom lights shall be controlled from the lighting control panel via assigned relays. Provide by-pass lock type, vandal resistance key operated switch adjacent to the door, and ceiling mounted occupancy sensors for on/off controls. The sensor shall turn off the lights in the room via a pre-set but programmable interval after the room has been vacated.
Restrooms lights and fan shall be controlled from the lighting control panel via assigned relays. Provide ceiling mounted occupancy sensors, and by-pass toggle switches for system override adjacent to the door. The sensor shall turn off the lights in the room via a pre-set but programmable interval after the room has been vacated.
Emergency Lighting: I.
Emergency lighting controls shall be equipped with bypass circuitry that will bypass all manually operated switches, lighting control systems, dimmers and occupancy sensors during power failure situations. Design shall comply with applicable codes and regulations. Each area of luminaries or groups of luminaries shall be equipped with and controlled by a UL924 listed emergency lighting control unit to allow the detection of localized power failure.
PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01.
•
CENTRAL LIGHTING CONTROL PANELS
8736 CORWIN THEATER REP AIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HJGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEMS 26 0923-5
111001
•
A.
• 2.02.
•
Central Lighting Control Panels (CLCP) shall be located in the electrical closets and shall be Douglas Dialog Series, LC & D #GR-2400 series, series or equal. Panels shall be surface or flush mounted type as indicated on Drawings, with a hinged door assembly. Doors shall be furnished with flush type locks, spring latching, Corbin locks for metal doors, keyed to Corbin No. 60 keys. Panels shall include the following components or features: 1.
Shall be preprogrammed and preassembled with control equipment and relays as indicated on the lighting plans.
2.
Shall be equipped with suitable dividers separating Class 1 and Class 2 compartments, 120v and 277v compartments as well as "normal and emergency" compartments.
3.
Lighting control relays as indicated on Drawings. Provide 10 percent spare relays for centralized relay panels up to the maximum capacity of panel.
4.
Shall be equipped with a neatly typewritten schedule with number and name of rooms or areas served by the relay circuits. Room numbers and names used shall be determined at the Project site and may not be those indicated on Drawings. Schedule shall indicate panel designation and voltage and shall be mounted in a frame under transparent plastic 1132 inch thick on inside of panel cabinet.
5.
Each panel shall be rated for 120 or 277 VAC.
6.
Shall be preassembled, preprogrammed and include relays capable of switching 20 amps lighting loads for 120 or 277 VAC.
7.
Central lighting control panels, remote lighting control panels, relays, low voltage switches, interior light sensors, exterior light sensors, and associated control electronics shall be furnished by Lighting Control and Design (LC & D), Douglas Lighting Controls, or equal.
REMOTE LIGHTING CONTROL PANELS
A.
Remote lighting control panels shall be mounted in the ceiling space per plans and shall be LC&D GR-2404 Series or Douglas WRM-3414. , Each panel shall be connected to the network lighting control system using manufacturer's recommended wiring method and configured using central lighting control software. Add a printed label "RLCP" to the T-bar grid below the RLCP".
B.
Each remote relay panel shall contain the following hardware features: I.
Programmable, matrix able switch inputs
2.
12 VDC and 24 VDC inputs for occupancy sensors requiring DC voltage.
3.
DC power supply rated for 250 rnA for supplying power to occupancy sensors .
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEMS 26 0923-6
111001
4.
• 2.03
•
•
2.04
Digital light sensor inputs .
c.
Switch inputs are to be capable of switching individual relays, local groups of relays within the panel or global groups of relays system wide. Each switch input can be configured for connection to momentary 24 V AC switches or maintained contact 24 V AC switches. Each input can also be configured to be ON, OFF or Toggle.
D.
The remote panels shall accept 12 or 24 VDC or 24 VAC occupancy sensors. The inputs may be configured for OFF only or ON/OFF switching scenarios. It shall be possible to link the photo sensor control with occupancy sensing so that when light levels are high enough, the occupancy sensor will not switch the photo controlled relays ON.
RELAYS A.
Relays shall be warranted for a minimum of three years.
B.
Relays shall be individually added or replaced. Lighting control systems incapable of replacing individual relays are not acceptable.
C.
Each lighting control relay shall be capable of controlling incandescent, fluorescent, electronic ballast and HID lighting loads. Relays not rated for all types of lighting loads are not acceptable.
D.
Relays shall be: 1.
Single Pole: Douglass WR-6161, LC&D SL-277-NC, or equal.
2.
Double Pole: Douglass WR-6172, LC&D SL-480-NC, or equal.
LOW VOLTAGE SWITCHES A.
Low voltage switches shall be wired per the lighting control manufactures requirements. Digital switches shall be part of the lighting control system network. Analog switches shall be wired to lighting control panel designated by manufacturer. Use LC&D Chelsea series or Douglas WSW-3500 series, or Owner-approved analog switch.
B.
Physical removal of any single switch shall have no effect on the communication between relay panels in the rest of the lighting control network. Lighting control systems requiring the continuous connection of all low voltage switches are not acceptable.
C.
Keyed switches shall be analog or digital and connect to programmable inputs in the nearest lighting control panel or be digital and connect to the lighting control system network. Use Douglas WSK-35XX Series, LC&D KS Series, or equal.
D.
Provide stainless steel switch covers as specified.
E.
Local switches controlling lights in classrooms shall be wired to programmable inputs in the remote lighting control panels. Each switch shall be programmable to control
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEMS 26 0923-7
111001
one, some or all relays in the entire network ON only, OFF only or ON and OFF. Use standard toggle switches as specified or digital low voltage switches by lighting control manufacturer as indicated on plans.
•
2.05
• 2.06
F.
Switches controlling the "quiet time" function in the remote lighting control panels shall connect directly to programmable inputs within the panel or connect to the lighting control system network. Use standard toggle switches or digital low voltage switches by lighting control manufacturer as indicated on plans.
G.
High abuse areas (common areas, gymnasiums, etcetera) shall be controlled using a vandal resistant, touch sensitive high abuse switch and available with up to three buttons in a single gang. Multi gang versions shall also be available. Touch pads shall be stainless steel and capable of handling both high abuse and wash down locations. High abuse switches shall be digital or analog. Each high abuse switch touch button shall be able to control any relay or any group in any panel or panels that is part of the lighting control system. Each touch button shall be able to be programmed for ON, OFF, Toggle or Maintain operation. Programming shall be done locally or remotely via dial up modem or web interface as described in other paragraphs of this section. High abuse switches shall be able to be enabled or disabled digitally. Each touch pad is to be identified as to function by an engraved label. Switches must be capable of handling electrostatic discharges of at least 30,000 volts (1cm spark) without any interruption or failure in operation.
INTERIOR DAYLIGHT SENSORS A.
In rooms requiring day lighting control provide an interior daylight sensor. Refer to lighting plans to determine which switch legs are controlled by the daylight controller. Use LC&D iPC Series, Douglas WPH-3711, or equal.
B.
Interior daylight sensors shall cause light fixtures within the room to brighten or dim to maintain pre-determined and uniform light levels between 30 and 50 foot candles; in areas not provided with dimming ballasts the sensors shall permit any relay to switch at a unique light level and shall attempt to maintain a constant light level by switching individual relays ON or OFF as the ambient light level changes. Controllers offering single set point controls are not acceptable.
C.
Each interior daylight sensor shall continuously monitor the true light label and shall broadcast this level to lighting control network. Controllers requiring readings at the sensor head itself are not acceptable.
D.
Each interior daylight sensor shall be fully adjustable via the lighting control software. Controllers requiring adjustments at the sensor head are not acceptable.
EXTERIOR LIGHT SENSORS A.
•
Provide one exterior rated light sensor for control of exterior lights. Use Douglass WPH-3751, LC&D PCO or equal.
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
I 0/01/2011 LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEMS 26 0923-8
111001
• 2.07
B.
One exterior light sensor shall permit different relays to switch at different light levels. Sensors offering less than 14 remotely settable trip points are note acceptable .
c.
Exterior light sensor shall continuously monitor the true light level and shall broadcast this level over the lighting control network. Sensors requiring adjustments at the sensor head are not acceptable.
D.
Exterior light sensor shall be fully adjustable via the networked lighting control system. Controllers requiring adjustments at the sensor head are not acceptable.
DIMMING BALLAST CONTROLLER A.
If plans indicate classrooms and other areas to be dimmed, remote relay panels shall be capable of outputting one independent OV- 1OV dimming signal for each relay provided in the remote relay panel. Dimming ballasts shall be controlled by industry standard OV1OV control input. Ballasts using proprietary control protocols shall not be acceptable. In order to maximize daylight harvesting and minimize disruption to occupants, each dimming output shall provide adjustment for baseline, start point, mid-point, end point, trim fade up rate, fade down rate, time delay and enable/disable masking. Photocell settings must be remotely accessible. Systems that provide ON, OFF with Time Delay only and systems that do not provide remote access are not acceptable.
B.
Mount photocells in locations indicated on plans and according to manufacturer's recommendations for daylight system type, open or closed loop. Trip points shall be able to be changed remotely via internet or dial up modem. Photocells requiring manual trip point adjustment are not acceptable. Photocell used for interior lighting control shall have multiple settings such as start-point, mid-point, off-point, fade-up rate, fadedown etc. Settings shall be remotely accessible and adjustable. Systems that provide local adjustments only are note acceptable. Photocells are to be certified to be in compliance with California Energy Commission Title 24 requirements at time of submittal of plans for building permit. Use Douglass WPCH-3711, LC&D iPC series, or equal.
• 2.08
OCCUPANCY SENSORS A.
Occupancy Sensors: 1.
•
Ceiling-Mounted Dual Technology Sensors: a.
Sensors shall be dual technology infrared-ultrasonic capable of detecting presence in floor area to be controlled, by detecting Doppler shifts in transmitted ultrasound and infrared technology.
b.
Detection shall be maintained when a person moves only within a maximum distance of 12 inches, in either a horizontal or vertical manner, at approximate speed of 12 inches per second. Lights shall not go off when a person is reading or writing while seated at a desk .
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HlGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEMS 26 0923-9
111001
• 2.
•
•
c.
Each sensor shall be furnished with a convenient shunt provision, which will enable a person to by-pass sensor in event of failure .
d.
Sensitivity shall not change more than ten percent in temperature range of 0 degrees F. to 120 degrees F., and in humidity range of ten percent to 80 percent. Sensitivity adjustment shall be provided for each technology.
e.
Time delay range shall be adjustable from 15 seconds to 15 minutes.
f.
Sensors shall operate on DC power (12 volts to 24 volts). Power supply shall be provided by power pack, consisting of a transformer and contact closure relay in one package. Power output of transformer shall be capable of operating a minimum of two sensors.
g.
Manufacturers: Watt Stopper No. DT-200, similar as manufactured by Leviton, Sensor Switch, Unenco, or equal.
Passive Infrared Wall Switch Sensors with Daylight Controls: a.
Sensors shall be capable of detecting presence in floor area to be controlled, by detecting changes in infrared energy. Small movements shall be detected such as when a person is writing while seated at a desk.
b.
Passive infrared sensor shall utilize a dual-element sensor and a multielement fresnel lens .
c.
Sensor shall be furnished with a daylight filter which ensures that sensor is insensitive to short-wavelength infrared waves, such as those emitted by the sun.
d.
Sensors shall be furnished with convenient bypass provisions, which enable lighting to be turned on in case of failure.
e.
Time delay range shall be adjustable from 15 seconds to 15 minutes.
f.
Sensitivity adjustment shall range from 0 (off) to ten (maximum).
g.
Adjustments and mounting hardware shall be concealed under a removable cover to prevent tampering with adjustments and hardware.
h.
Each sensor shall cover up to 800 square feet, with a field-of-view of 150 degrees.
1.
Sensor shall be two-wire, completely self-contained control system that replaces standard toggle switch. Power supply shall be an internal transformer, and switching mechanism shall be a latching dry contact relay .
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEMS 26 0923-10
111001
• 2.09
k.
Sensor shall be furnished with a daylight feature, adjustable from ten to 400 foot-candles, that maintains lighting off when a desired foot-candle level is present.
1.
Sensors shall be dual voltage, 120 volt and 277 volt.
m.
Manufacturers: Watt Stopper No. WI 200, I 300, similar as manufactured by Leviton Sensor Switch, Unenco, or equal.
A.
Controller shall be capable of detecting changes in lighting levels; it shall utilize an internal photoconductive cell to measure light levels through 50 percent diffused lens.
B.
Controller shall be capable of controlling any type of lighting. It shall be a selfcontained 24 VDC device that controls lighting through use of power switch packs.
C.
Controller shall be capable of turning lighting on and off between ten and 200 foot-candles.
D.
Controller shall be furnished with an adjustable dead-band feature often percent to I 00 percent, to prevent lighting from cycling when lighting goes on and off and from minor changes due to cloud cover.
E.
Controller shall be furnished with an adjustable time delay range of three seconds to five minutes.
F.
Controller shall be furnished with a dual color LED-indicating status of sensor. LED shall have an on level with one color and an off level with another.
G.
Adjustments and mounting hardware shall be concealed under a removable cover, to prevent tampering with adjustments and hardware.
H.
Each controller shall be furnished with a convenient by-pass provision, which will enable lighting to be turned on in event of failure.
I.
Manufacturers: Watt Stopper No. LS-I 00 XA, similar as manufactured by Leviton, Sensor Switch, Unenco or equal.
UNIT INVERTERS A.
•
Sensor shall be capable of switching from 50 to 1000 watt, incandescent or fluorescent.
LIGHT LEVEL CONTROLERS (EXISTING FACILITIES)
•
2.IO
j.
Unit Inverters shall be rapid start type consisting of emergency fluorescent power packs designed to be installed in channels of new lighting fixtures .
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HlGH SCHOOL
10/0112011 LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEMS 26 0923-11
111001
•
•
B.
Power pack construction shall be of durable polycarbonate housing having same size as low profile rapid start ballast.
C.
Units shall be furnished with test switches and pilot lights.
D.
Units shall automatically power designated fluorescent lamp(s) in fixture to provide a minimum of 1100 lumens for 90 minutes of emergency service upon failure of utility power.
E.
Upon return of utility power, battery shall automatically recharge for future emergency use.
F.
Batteries shall be field-replaceable, sealed, rechargeable, spill-proof, maintenance-free nickel cadmium.
G.
High efficiency inverter/charger design shall include low-voltage disconnect to prevent deep discharge of battery and dual voltage designed for connection to either 120 or 277 volts. Chargers shall recharge fully discharged batteries to provide 90 minutes operation within 24 hours. An additional hot wire shall connect to unit in order to signal unit in event of a power failure. Power pack will not operate if shut off manually.
H.
An unconditional five year warranty is required.
I.
Units shall be Dual-Lite UF0-5 Series, Bodine, Iota I series, Beghelli Luce, or equal. INTERFACE TO BUILDING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
2.11
A.
When interface to the Building Management System is required, the lighting control system shall provide a BACnet/IP interface module that communicates with the BMS via a BACnet/IP network (a collection of one or more IP sub networks (IP domains) that are assigned a single BACnet network number). Verify if interface to BMS is required.
B.
BACnet/IP interface module shall provide the capability for the BMS to:
C.
1.
Communicate directly with each relay in the lighting control system network and each group used within the lighting control system.
2.
Monitor the current status and status changes of each relay and each group.
Install wiring and confirm operation of the lighting control BACnet/IP interface module per the lighting control manufacturer's instructions. Installing, wiring, and interfacing of BMS components to the lighting control system.
PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01
•
GENERAL
8736 CORWIN THEATER REP AIR & P .0. T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEMS 26 0923-12
111001
• 3.02
•
•
A.
Lighting control system shall not be used for any other purpose other than its intended use and application .
B.
Provide required interconnections with other systems such as emergency power sources, fire alarm systems, and building management system as required or indicated on drawings.
C.
Installation shall meet or exceed standard practice of workmanship and quality.
D.
Drawings generally indicate work to be provided, but do not indicate bends, transitions, or special fittings required to clear beams, girders or other work already in place. Investigate conditions where conduits are to be installed, and furnished and install required fittings.
INSTALLATION AND SET-UP A.
Verify that conduit for line voltage wires enters panel in line voltage areas and conduit for low-voltage control wires enters panel on low-voltage areas. Refer to manufacturer's drawings for location of line and low-voltage areas.
B.
Provide for classroom Digital type switches, and wire according to lighting control manufactures requirements.
C.
Digital switches and wire shall be according to lighting control manufactures requirements .
D.
Central lighting control panels and remote lighting control panels are connected via a data line (Douglas uses a non-polarized two No. 18 LC&D use Cat5 four twisted pair cable, with RJ45 end connectors). Connect entire lighting control system per manufacturer's requirements. Do not exceed manufacturer's total data line length requirement.
E.
Panels shall be located so that they are readily accessible and not exposed to physical damage.
F.
Panel locations shall be furnished with sufficient working space around panels to comply with the California Electrical Code.
G.
Panels shall be securely fastened to the mounting surface by at least four points.
H.
Unused openings in the cabinet shall be effectively closed.
I.
Cabinets shall be grounded in accordance with Article 250 of the California Electrical Code, and manufacturer's recommendations.
J.
Lugs shall be suitable and listed for installation with the conductor being connected .
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR& P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEMS 26 0923-13
111001
•
K.
Conductor lengths shall be maintained to a minimum within the wiring gutter space. Conductors shall be long enough to reach the terminal location in a manner that avoids strain on the connecting lugs.
L.
Maintain the required bending radius of conductors inside cabinets.
M.
Clean cabinets of foreign material such as cement, plaster and paint.
N.
Distribute and arrange conductors neatly in the wiring gutters.
0.
Follow the manufacturer's torque values to tighten lugs.
P.
Before energizing the panelboard, the following steps shall be taken:
Q. 3.03
•
•
Retighten connections to the manufacturer's torque specifications. Verify that required connections have been furnished.
2.
Remove shipping blocks from component devices and the panel interior.
3.
Remove debris from panelboard interior.
Follow manufacturers' instructions for installation.
OPERATING/SERVICE MANUALS A.
3.04
1.
Service and Operation Manuals: I.
Submit operation and service manuals. Complete manuals shall be bound in flexible binders and data shall be typewritten or drafted.
2.
Provide a printed copy of the systems configuration as programmed, including system labeling codes, and passwords.
3.
Provide an electronic copy on compact disk of the system configuration program.
4.
Manuals shall include instructions necessary for proper operation and servicing of system and shall include complete wiring circuit diagrams of system, wiring destination schedules for circuits and replacement part numbers. Manuals shall include as-built cable Project site plot plans and floor plans indicating cables, both underground and in each building with conduit, and as-built coding used on cables. Programming forms of systems shall be submitted with complete information.
5.
Record Drawings: Provide a copy on vellum of Project site and building drawings, indicating location of equipment, conduit and cable runs, and other pertinent information.
PROTECTION
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEMS 26 0923-14
111001
A.
•
3.05
TESTING A.
•
3.06
I.
Confirmation of system programming.
2.
Confirmation of operation of individual relays, switches, occupancy sensors and daylight sensors.
3.
Operation of system's features under normal and emergency operations.
4.
Before energizing check and demonstrate in the presence of the Project Inspector that cables and wire connections are free from short circuits, ground faults, and that there is continuity, and necessary insulation.
5.
Confirm system operations and functionality.
6.
Check system interface response to other systems such as fire alarm and emergency power system conditions.
7.
Provide training to cover installation, maintenance, troubleshooting, programming, and repair and operation of the lighting control system.
Before Substantial Completion, arrange and provide an eight hours Owner instruction period for designated personnel.
SPARE PARTS A.
3.08
Set-up, commissioning and testing of the lighting control system, and Owner instruction shall include:
INSTRUCTION PERIODS A.
3.07
Protect the Work of this section until Substantial Completion.
Provide a minimum of five percent spare parts of each type of relay, sensors, switches, and peripheral devices.
CLEANUP A.
Remove rubbish, debris, and waste materials and legally dispose of off the Project site. END OF SECTION
•
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES l-llGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 LJGHT1NG CONTROL SYSTEMS 26 0923-15
111001
•
SECTION 26 2416 PANELBOARDS AND SIGNAL TERMINAL CABINETS
PART 1 - GENERAL SUMMARY
1.01
•
A.
Section Includes: Lighting and power distribution facilities, including panelboards.
B.
Related Requirements: Division 01 - General Requirements.
2.
Section 26 0500: Common Work Results for Electrical.
3.
Section 26 0513: Basic Electrical Materials and Methods.
4.
Section 26 5000: Lighting.
5.
Division 27: Communications.
6.
Division 28: Electronic Safety and Security.
SUBMITTALS
1.02 A.
Provide in accordance with Division 01.
B.
Shop Drawings: Include a front elevation indicating cabinet dimensions, make, location and capacity of equipment, size of gutters, type of mounting, finish, and catalog number of locks. General layout of internal devices, wiring drawings with wire numbers and device connections, vendor cut sheets of devices in enclosure and bill of materials listing description, manufacturer, part number, and quantity of items shall be included.
c.
Installation Instructions: Submit manufacturer's written installation instructions. DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
1.03 A.
•
1.
Panelboards: 1.
Panelboards shall be wall-mounted, enclosed safety type with 120/240 volt, threewire solid neutral277/480 volt, four-wire or 120/208 volt, four-wire solid neutral mains as indicated on Drawings or specified. First panelboard of each building shall be provided with main or sub-feeder circuit breakers where so indicated.
2.
Single pole branches shall be molded case, thermal magnetic circuit breakers with inverse time delay, trip free, quick-make, quick-break mechanism and silver alloy contacts. Circuit breakers shall be fully rated, with ampere rating marked on handle and shall indicate on/off and tripped positions. Ground fault interrupters
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 PANELBOARDS AND SIGNAL TERMINAL CABINETS 26 2416-1
111001
shall be incorporated into circuit breakers where indicated. They shall be listed by UL, or other NRTL as ground fault devices. Provide appropriate lug kit of sufficient size to accommodate the feeders.
•
3.
Two- and three-pole branches shall be enclosed, and shall be thermal magnetic circuit breakers with inverse time delay, tamper-proof, ambient compensated, single handle, internal common trip, and quick-make, quick-break mechanism with silver alloy contacts. Circuit breakers shall be fully rated or as otherwise indicated on the Drawings.
4.
Main and subfeeder circuit breakers shall be enclosed, thermal magnetic type with inverse time delay, single handle common trip, quick-make, quick-break mechanism, corrosion-resistant bearings and silver alloy contacts. Ampere frame size and trip rating shall be as indicated on Drawings. Breakers over 225 amperes shall be furnished with interchangeable trip units. Handles of main and subfeeder circuit breakers shall be provided cabinet door. Voltage rating shall be as indicated on Drawings.
5.
Circuit breakers shall be fully rated and of one-piece, bolt-on type and shall meet short-circuit interrupting capacity requirements indicated on Drawings. Series rated circuit breaker combinations are not acceptable.
6.
Internal connections shall be fabricated with plated copper bus bars and the busses shall extend for full length of space available for branch circuit breakers. Feeder cable connectors shall be installed at point of feeder entrance. Terminals shall be furnished with copper conductors. Panelboards fed by conductors having overcurrent protection greater than 200 amperes shall be protected on supply side by over-current devices having a rating not greater than that of panel boards. Copper bussing shall be fully rated. Heat rated bussing is not acceptable.
7.
Except where otherwise indicated, circuit breakers shall be in two vertical rows connected to bus bars in a distributed phase arrangement. Two-pole branches shall be balanced on busses. Single pole branches shall be numbered adjacent to its circuit breaker, with odd numbers on left and even numbers on right.
8.
Specified circuit breaker spaces shall be furnished with hardware required for future installation of circuit breakers.
9.
Provide locking devices for individual circuit breakers. Padlocking devices shall be secured to circuit breakers and by panel dead front plates.
• B.
Surge Suppressors: Where indicated on Drawings, provide transient voltage surge suppressors as an integral part of panel boards. Panelboards shall be complete with 200 percent rated copper neutral bus, ground bus and isolated ground bus in addition to requirements ofthis section. Surge suppressors shall be as follows: I.
•
Surge Capacity:
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HJGH SCHOOL
10/0112011 PANELBOARDS AND SIGNAL TERMINAL CABINETS 26 2416-2
111001
• 2.
3.
•
•
a.
Line-to-neutral for wye systems: 80 KA .
b.
Line-to-ground: 80 KA.
c.
Neutral-to-ground: 80 KA, three-phase wye.
d.
Line-to-neutral plus line-to-ground: 160 KA.
UL 1449 2nd Edition Suppressed Voltage Rating for 208/120 Wye System: a.
Line-to-neutral: 400 volts.
b.
Line-to-ground: 400 volts.
c.
Neutral-to-ground: 400 volts.
d.
Maximum continuous over-voltage: 150 volts.
EMIIRFI High-Frequency Noise Power Filter (Characteristics): a.
100KHz at 444 dB.
b.
100 MHz at 44 dB.
c.
10 MHz at 44 dB.
d.
100 MHz at 444 dB.
4.
MOVs shall be thermally protected for low current faults and shall be fused with surge-rated fuses. The surge-rated surge current passes and clears the circuit safely if the surge capacity is exceeded. Enhanced diagnostics shall continuously monitor the unit's status and shall include LEDs to signal a reduction in surge capacity or the loss of a suppression circuit. An audible alarm, with test and silence features, shall be furnished in diagnostic package.
5.
Each phase or the entire unit shall be replaceable and have bolted-on, tin-plated copper connections. Unit to have UL witnessed fault current rating of 65,000 symmetrical amperes.
6.
Surge suppression units shall comply with the following: a.
UL certified.
b.·
UL 1283.
c.
UL 1449.
d.
IEEE C 62.45 .
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 PANELBOARDS AND SIGNAL TERMINAL CABINETS 26 2416-3
111001
•
C.
• D.
•
e.
IEEE C 62.41 .
f.
Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) or equal.
Panelboard Cabinets: 1.
Panelboard cabinets shall be code gage galvanized steel or blue steel; fronts, doors, and trims shall be code gage furniture steel. Cabinets shall be furnished with at least six-inch high gutters at top and bottom where feeder cable size exceeds four gage or where feeder cable passes through cabinet vertically. Cabinets shall be furnished with top and bottom gutters sized as required by inspection department having jurisdiction, but never less than six inches where more than one feeder enters top or bottom of cabinets. Side gutters shall not be less than four inches wide. Width of cabinets shall be 20 inches, unless otherwise indicated on Drawings.
2.
Doors shall be cut true, shall accurately fit opening and finish smooth across joints. Rabbets shall be inside. Hinges shall be entirely concealed except for barrels and pins. Hinge flanges shall be welded to door and trim. Doors shall be equipped with flush type, spring-latching, Corbin locks for metal doors, keyed to Corbin No. 60 keys.
3.
Where contactors, time switches, and control devices are specified or indicated to be installed within panel board cabinets, a separate compartment and door shall be provided at top of cabinet for such devices. Door shall be sized as required to permit removal of contactor and other devices intact. Gutters shall be provided at sides and top of compartment. Doors shall be equipped with flush type, springlatching, Corbin locks for metal doors keyed to Corbin No. 60 keys.
4.
Provide and install panelboard manufacturer's permanent circuit number kit option.
5.
Panelboards with control devices in compartment shall arrive at the Project site completely assembled with control devices installed and wired.
6.
Outdoor cabinets shall be NEMA Type 3R. Construction shall be formed from code gage galvanized steel with ANSI No. 61 gray enamel finish. Provide heavyduty, three point latching, vault type door handles with padlocking provisions. Provide stainless steel or galvanized butt hinges on doors. Padlocks shall be furnished, keyed to Corbin No. 60 keys.
7.
Self-tapping screws and bolts not permitted.
Panelboard Schedule: Provide a neatly typewritten schedule with number or name of room or area, or load served by each panelboard circuit. Room numbers or names shall be determined at the Project site and shall not necessarily be those indicated on the Drawings. Schedule shall also indicate panel designation, voltage and phase, building and
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 PANELBOARDS AND SIGNAL TERMINAL CABINETS 26 2416-4
111001
•
distribution panel or switchboard from which it is fed. Schedule shall be installed in a frame under transparent plastic 1132 inch thick on inside of each panel board cabinet door . E.
Panel board nameplate: Provide a nameplate identifying panel board. Plates shall be black and white plastic nameplate stock, with character cut through black exposing white and shall bare designation of service. Name plate shall be mechanically fastened to switchboard.
F.
Provide additional labeling on dead-front of panelboard. Label shall be a P-Touch or equal with a minimum width of 3/8 inch with black letters on white background. Label shall re-identify panel board and also identify name and location of power source feeding this panel. Location information shall include building name if located in different building and name or room location. If power source is installed in same room, label should indicate source name and "In this Room"
G.
Panelboard Standards: Panelboards shall be UL, or other NRTL listed and labeled. Panel boards shall meet latest revisions of following standards:
• H.
•
1.
California Electric Code, Article 3 84.
2.
UL 67, Panelboards.
3.
UL 50, Cabinets and Boxes.
4.
UL 943, GFCI.
5.
UL 489, Molded Case Circuit Breakers.
6.
NEMAPB1.
7.
Federal Specifications W-P- 115C and WC-375B.
Signal Terminal Cabinets: 1.
Signal terminal cabinets shall conform to the Specifications for panelboard cabinets, except as modified herein.
2.
Terminal cabinets shall be flush type, with two-inch trim or surface mounted type, as indicated on Drawings. Terminal cabinets shall be furnished with sections and barriers to separate each system. Sections over 24 inches in width shall be provided with double doors and locks. Terminal cabinets, or sections ofterminals housing separate systems, shall measure 12 inches long by 18 inches high by 5%inch deep, unless otherwise indicated on Drawings. Trims for sectional cabinets shall be of one-piece construction.
3.
Terminal cabinets shall be furnished with% inch thick plywood. Plywood shall be fastened in place with machine screws or factory installed mounting screws .
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 PANELBOARDS AND SIGNAL TERMINAL CABINETS 262416-5
111001
•
4.
Flush-mounted terminal cabinets shall be finished as specified for flush-mounted panelboard cabinets. Surface and semi-flush mounted terminal cabinets shall be finished as specified for surface-mounted panelboard cabinets.
PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01
MANUFACTURERS A.
Panelboards shall be manufactured by Siemens, W.A. Benjamin, General Electric, Cutler Hammer, Square D or equal.
PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01
•
•
INSTALLATION
A.
Panelboards shall be located so they are readily accessible and not exposed to physical damage.
B.
Panelboards installed outdoors shall be specifically listed for wet locations and shall be weatherproof in NEMA Type 3R cabinets.
c.
Panel board locations shall provide sufficient working space around panels to comply with the California Electrical Code .
D.
Panelboards shall be securely fastened to structure and mounted on surface by at least four points.
E.
Unused openings in cabinets shall be effectively closed as required by the manufacturer.
F.
Cabinets shall be grounded as specified in Article 250 ofthe California Electrical Code.
G.
Conduits shall be installed so as to prevent moisture or water from entering and accumulating within the enclosure.
H.
Lugs shall be suitable and listed for installation with the conductor being connected.
I.
Conductor lengths shall be maintained to a minimum within the wiring gutter space. Conductors shall be long enough to reach the terminal location in a manner that avoids strain on the connecting lugs.
J.
Maintain the required bending radius of conductors inside the cabinet.
K.
Clean the cabinet of foreign material such as cement, plaster, and paint.
L.
Distribute and arrange conductors neatly in the wiring gutters .
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR& P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES IDGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 PANELBOARDS AND SIGNAL TERMINAL CABINETS 26 2416-6
111001
• 3.02
M.
Use the manufacturer's torque values to tighten lugs .
N.
Before energizing panelboards, the following steps shall be taken:
•
2.
Remove shipping blocks from component devices and panelboard interiors.
3.
Manually exercise circuit breakers to verify they operate freely.
4.
Remove debris from panelboard interior.
Follow manufacturer's instructions for installation.
P.
Do not install in highly corrosive environments, unless rated for the application.
PROTECTION Protect the Work ofthis section until Substantial Completion.
CLEANUP A.
•
Retighten connections to the manufacturer's torque specifications. Verify that required connections have been provided.
0.
A. 3.03
1.
Remove rubbish, debris, and waste materials and legally dispose of off the Project site. END OF SECTION
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 PANELBOARDS AND SIGNAL TERMINAL CABINETS 26 2416-7
111001
•
SECTION 26 5000 LIGHTING
PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01
SUMMARY A.
Section Includes: Lighting fixtures, including lamps, ballasts, wmng, and lighting controls.
B.
Light fixtures model numbers were determined at the time this specification was written; model numbers may need to be modified, or may require the addition or deletion of options to fully meet specification requirements.
C.
Related Requirements:
• 1.02
•
1.
Division 01 - General Requirements.
2.
Section 26 0500: Common Work Results for Electrical.
3.
Section 26 0513: Basic Electrical Materials and Methods.
4.
Section 26 0526: Grounding and Bonding .
5.
Section 26 0519: Low-Voltage Wires (600 VoltAC).
6.
Section 26 0923: Lighting Controls Systems.
SUBMITTALS A.
List of Materials: Submit a complete list of materials proposed for this section.
B.
Shop Drawings: Provide detailed and dimensioned Shop Drawings indicating kind, weight and thickness of materials, method of fitting and fastening parts together, location and number of sockets, size of lamps, and complete details of method of fitting suspension and fastening fixtures in place. Provide wiring diagrams for lighting control equipment. Drawings shall contain sufficient information to assemble and install equipment at the Project site without further instructions.
C.
Prior to start of construction; provide photometric calculations with graphic of luminance levels of work plane, ceiling and walls of each representative classroom, library and multipurpose room. Calculations shall comply with IESNA recommendations.
D.
Installation Instructions: fixtures and accessories .
Submit manufacturer's written installation instructions for
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR& P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 LIGHTING 26 5000-1
111001
•
E.
Light fixtures shall be Underwriters Laboratory (UL) or Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) listed, and in compliance with applicable industry standards and codes.
F.
Submittals must comply with contract general provisions. MOUNTING REQUIREMENTS
1.03
A.
Design of lighting fixtures, accessories, supports, and method of fixture installation shall comply with requirements for earthquake-resistant construction of the State of California.
B.
Provide suspension points at no more than two feet from fixture ends. Spacing between supports shall not exceed eight feet. QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.04
A.
Components and fixtures shall be listed and approved for the intended application by Underwriter's Laboratories (UL), or other Nationally .Re.cognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL).
B.
Owner's approval shall be obtained for any equipment or materials substitutions. GUARANTEE
1.05
•
A.
Provide a two year labor warranty.
B.
Provide material warranty as specified:
C.
1.
Lamps: two years.
2.
Ballasts: five years.
3.
Standards: one year.
4.
Controls: three years.
Warranty period begins at substantial completion or project acceptance for beneficial occupancy.
PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01
MATERIAL AND FABRICATION A.
•
Lighting fixtures shall be the type indicated on Drawings and as specified. Fixtures of same type shall be of one manufacturer .
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES IDGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 LIGHTING 26 5000-2
111001
• 2.02
B.
Fixtures shall be of the types and manufacturers described in the FIXTURE TYPES section below, with lamps, wattage and voltage as indicated on Drawings Specific manufacturer and model number references are indicated as a standard of performance and quality; other manufacturers' models may be supplied provided the product meets or exceeds the specifications. The alternate fixtures must achieve the same photometric levels and uniformity ratios.
C.
All fixtures shall be baked-on enamel or powder-coated, unless otherwise specified in subsections below.
D.
Fluorescent fixtures shall be equipped with low or tall profile, medium Bi-Pin fluorescent lamp holders of high-strength, and quickwire pressure terminals with recessed wire wells to insulate against shorting. Lamp holders shall be manufactured of chemical-resistant thermoplastic body and be equipped with a captive nut.
E.
Lighting fixtures shall have a minimum luminaire efficiency rating (LER) equal or greater than 75; fixtures with lower LER shall not be accepted without written approval from LAUSD Design Standards section.
LAMPS AND BALLASTS A.
Fluorescent Lamps and Ballasts: 1.
• 2.
•
Approved Ballast Manufacturers: a.
Osram Sylvania.
b.
Advance.
c.
Universal-Triad.
d.
Lutron.
e.
General Electric.
Ballast Type and Characteristics: a.
High efficiency program-start unless otherwise noted.
b.
Dimming ballasts where indicated shall be for 0-10 volt DC control circuits, or two wire variable inputs such as Advanced Mark 10 series. Or equal Ballasts shall be specifically compatible with the lighting control system being provided.
c.
Power Factor greater than 90.
d.
Harmonic distortion less than 15 percent.
e.
ANSI 82.11 color-coded .
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 LIGHTING 26 5000-3
111001
• 3.
4.
•
f.
Class A noise rated .
g.
Comply with applicable state, federal, and industry standards including FCC 47, part 18 non-consumer RFIIEMI standards, and IEEE standards for line voltage transient protection and harmonic distortion.
h.
0 degrees Celsius minimum starting temperature.
1.
Ballast per schedule as follow: RLO = reduced light output, ballast factor 78 percent or less.
2)
NLO = normal light output, ballast factor nominal 88 percent.
3)
HLO =high light output, ballast factor nominal 120 percent.
Approved Lamp Manufacturers: a.
Osram Sylvania ("Sylvania" or "OSI").
b.
General Electric.
c.
Philips.
Lamp Characteristics:
a.
Color Temperature: lamps shall be 4100K unless indicated otherwise in lighting fixture schedule, or Drawings.
b.
T-8 Lamps:
c.
•
1)
1)
Four-foot unless otherwise indicated. Lamps shall be rated 3150 nominal initial lumens at 32 watts - GE "HL," Sylvania "Xtreme", Philips "Advantage," or equal.
2)
Color Rendering Index (CRI) shall be 82 m1mmum, unless indicated otherwise in lighting fixture schedule or lighting drawings.
3)
Low-mercury type meeting federal "T-clip" standards.
4)
Lamps must be from same manufacturer and batch.
Compact Fluorescent Lamps: 1)
CF42, CF32, and CF26: triple tube amalgam, four pin lamp.
2)
CF13: twin tube, four pin lamp .
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 LIGHTING 26 5000-4
111001
•
B.
2.
3.
4.
2.03
4)
Lamps must be from same manufacturer and batch.
Approved Ballast Manufacturers: a.
Osram Sylvania.
b.
Advance.
c.
Universal-Triad.
Ballast Type and Characteristics:
a.
High frequency electronic ballast for pulse-start metal halide lamps, unless otherwise noted.
b.
Ambient temperature rating of 55 degrees C max.
c.
Power factor: greater than 90 percent.
d.
Minimum ambient starting temperature of minus 20 degree Celsius .
e.
Non-PBC dialectric capacitors.
f.
Class H UL or another NRTL listed coil insulation.
Approved Lamp Manufacturers: a.
Osram Sylvania ("Sylvania" or "OSI").
b.
General Electric.
c.
Philips.
Lamp Characteristics a.
Voltage or wattage of lamps shall be as indicated on the Drawings.
b.
Provide lamps with fixtures.
FLUORESCENT FIXTURES A.
Lighting Fixture Types: 1.
•
Other lamps as indicated m lighting fixture schedule or Drawings .
Metal Halide Lamps and Ballasts: 1.
•
3)
Type A, Ceiling Surface-Mounted with wraparound diffusers:
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 LIGHTING 26 5000-5
111001
•
•• 2.
•
a.
Lens shall be extruded of clear acrylic plastic, 12 pattern prismatic with minimum 25 DR meeting the ASTM specifications for methacrylate molding compounds D-788-69A. The overall length of the lens, including end caps shall be same as the Holophane 7100 or 7400, or equal, of size and shape specified, 0.187 nominal thickness. Labels shall be attached to fixtures with manufacturer business information and date manufactured.
b.
Furnish fixtures with four-foot lamps as listed above.
c.
Spring-loaded barrel latches shall consist of sliding steel pins or rods operating through spring-loaded steel cylinders tack-welded or popriveted to fixture body. Pins shall be fabricated of solid steel with round cross-sectional areas of sufficient size to prevent bending when operating latches. Latches shall engage when pins are fitted into corresponding catches on diffusers. Latches shall disengage by applying finger pressure to a portion of the pin, turned up at 90 degrees, at operating end.
d.
Fixture channels shall be formed as single pieces of 20 gage metal without joints or splices and shall be assembled by means of spotwelding. Fixtures shall only permit super T8 lamps to be installed. Metal surfaces of fixtures shall be powder-coat painted after fabrication. Labels shall be fastened to fixtures with manufacturer business information and date manufactured. Provide two 8-32 screw knockouts for alignment on each end plate .
e.
Supply three, four and six lamp fixtures with minimum of two ballasts.
f.
Manufacturers shall be: Holophane HW Series, LA Lighting Mfg. Co. WBE 200 and 300 Series, Prudential CL Series, Lithonia CLM Series, Cooper-Metalux WN Series, Lamar Lighting WI Series, Day-Brite HWN and HWW Series, and HE Williams 31 and 32 Series.
Type AB, Linear Suspended Indirect Fluorescent: a.
Fixture shall be minimum 20 gage CRS with die-cast end cap mechanically attached with no exposed fasteners.
b.
Housing shall come in three styles perforated, pierced or solid with a clear acrylic dust cover.
c.
Cable suspension canopy shall be a minimum of3 Y:z-inch diameter with 1/16 inches diameter stainless steel aircraft cable adjustable up to 36 inches.
d.
Reflector shall be semi-specular aluminum.
e.
Lamp shall be two- super T8 .
8736 CORWIN THEATER REP AIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HJGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 LIGHTING 26 5000-6
111001
•
f.
3.
4.
•
•
Manufacturer shall be: Lightolier- LSC Series, Peerless Cerra-1 0 Series, Alera Lighting Curv Series, Prudential WV Series, or equal.
Type AC, Linear Suspended Direct/Indirect Fluorescent: a.
Fixture shall be minimum 20 gage steel, cast aluminum end caps. No exposed fasteners or hardware.
b.
Cable suspension shall be minimum 3 Yz-inch diameter canopy with 1/16 inch diameter stainless steel aircraft cable adjustable up to 36, inches unless otherwise specified.
c.
Housing shall be supplied with a clear acrylic dust cover.
d.
Reflector shall be highly reflective aluminum.
e.
Lamps shall be one, two, three super T8 lamps or one, two T5HO.
f.
Manufacturer shall be Lightolier- Energos Series, Focal Point Verve III, Prudential CL Series, Alera Lighting CVSL Series, Finelite 12-ID,Series or equal.
Type AD, Ceiling Recessed Troffer Fixtures: a.
Fixture shall be 20 gage cold rolled steel housing with no exposed fasteners or hardware .
b.
Approximately 4 Yz-inch maximum depth housing with full length dieformed stiffeners, and contoured ballast wireway cover.
c.
Die-formed captive lamp holder bracket.
d.
Positive cam action steel latches and safety Jock T -hinges to allow hinging and latching on ether side.
e.
Baked white enamel finish.
f.
Trim shall be painted to match ceiling color.
g.
Reflector reflectance shall equal or exceed 89 percent.
h.
Flat non-glare acrylic panel.
1.
Minimum lens thickness 0.187 inch.
J.
Furnish fixtures with number of lamps listed below, with ballasts, sockets, wiring and accessories.
k.
Mounting shall be compatible with standard or slot T -grid systems .
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR& P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 LIGHTING 26 5000-7
111001
• 5.
• 6.
•
1.
Furnish mounting frames on recessed fixtures in plaster and tile surfaces .
m.
Supply three-lamp fixtures with two dimmable ballasts.
n.
Lamps shall be one, two, or three super T8 lamps or one, or two TSHO as indicated on drawings.
o.
Manufacturers and catalog numbers: Modify catalog numbers for proper ceilings type as required. 1)
40 foot by 24 foot by 9 foot classrooms: Ledalite 9724D 1T232 (Vectra), H.E. Williams HETG-S24-232-A-EB2-UNV, or equal.
2)
30 foot by 32 foot by 9 foot classrooms: H.E. Williams HETGS24-232-A-EB2-UNV, H.E. Williams DIG-S24-232-WP-EB2, Lithonia RT8B 232MVOLT BSNP L835HT8,
3)
Equal or better products from other manufactures are acceptable. Any substitutions shall be accompanied with foot-candle level calculations based on LAUSD design guide requirements.
Type AG, Linear Suspended AV Mode Indirect/Direct Fluorescent: a.
Fixture shall be minimum 20 gage perforated steel, cast aluminum end caps. No exposed fasteners or hardware.
b.
Cable suspension shall be minimum 3 Yz-inch diameter canopy with 1116 inch diameter stainless steel aircraft cable adjustable up to 36, inches unless otherwise specified.
c.
Housing shall be supplied with a clear acrylic dust cover.
d.
Reflector shall be highly reflective aluminum.
e.
Fixture shall have three super T8 lamps- Two indirect and one direct.
f.
Each fixture shall have dual switching.
g.
Fixture shall be Lightolier Energos EG 1 Series, Finelite Series 12-ID, Focal Point Verve III, or equal.
Type AH Linear Suspended 100 percent Direct Fluorescent: a.
Fixture shall be minimum 20 gage steel housing with steel ends.
b.
Fixture shall have a top reflector for 100 percent down light.
c.
Lens shall be high impact vandal resistant acrylic hinging from either side of housing .
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 LIGHTING 26 5000-8
111001
•
d.
7.
8.
• 9.
•
Fixture shall be Prudential Pru-7 Series, Fine liteS 10 Series, Focal Point FVRS, Lite Control SAE Series, or equal.
Type C, Wall-Mounted Fixtures: a.
Fully enclosed, with high impact white acrylic diffuser.
b.
Die-formed, prime quality 20 gage steel body, 48 inches long with two F32T8 lamps.
c.
Provide ballasts and accessories for proper installation.
d.
Manufacturers shall include: Prudential P-51 00 series, CGF Design Inc. Yuma Series, Nulite 16 Series, LSI DW Series, Columbia W4 Series, or equal.
Type D, Surface-Mounted Industrial Fixtures: a.
White polyester powder-coated reflectors and protected lamp holders, with recessed double contact bases and ten percent to 14 percent uplighting.
b.
Approximately 48-inch or 96-inch long by 16-inch wide by 7 Y:l-inch deep.
c.
Two, three, or four T8 lamps per cross section as indicated on drawings.
d.
Provide couplings, clips and end caps for continuous row installation.
e.
Furnish fixtures with screw-on wire guards. Design guards to accommodate fixture, provided by same manufacturer as fixture.
f.
Fixtures shall be, Lightolier TF series, Day-Brite IF Series, LA Lighting IND 500 series, or equal.
g.
Housing shall be made of die formed 20 gage cold rolled steel.
Type E, Enclosed and Vandal Resistant Fixtures: a.
Fixture shall be 20 gage extruded aluminum with die cast end caps.
b.
Fixture shall have opal polycarbonate lens.
c.
Fixture shall be provided with two T8, 32 watts lamps.
d.
Fixture shall have tamper resistant hardware.
e.
Fixture shall have the ability to be in continuous rows with seamless appearance .
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 LIGHTING 26 5000-9
111001
•
••
10.
11.
12.
•
f.
Fixture shall be listed for wet location .
g.
Fixture shall be Exceline P Series, Day-Brite VMA Series, series, Morelite VLP series, Kenall MLHA8 Series or equal.
Type HA, High Abuse Surface Fixtures: a.
Lens shall be extruded polycarbonate, clear prismatic refractor, nominal thickness 0.125 inch, UV stabilized.
b.
Base-plate shall be 18 gage prime cold-rolled steel with corrosionresistant, 92 percent reflective, white polymer finish.
c.
End caps shall be 16 gage prime cold roll steel with corrosion-resistant, white polymer finish and shall be spot welded to the base-plate.
d.
Lens/housing shall be furnished with a minimum of two large or four small stainless steel fasteners to secure lens/housing to base plate.
e.
Fixture shall be listed for wet location.
f.
Fixture shall be: Failsafe FWS Series, Kenall No. SH8 Series, LC Doane SW6 Series, Morelite 8709 Series, or equal.
Type HB, Wall Mounted Vaportite Fixture:
a.
Fixture housing shall be die cast aluminum with corrosion resistant polyester powder coated finish.
b.
Fixture shall be heat and shock resistant, with prismatic glass optical chamber with neoprene gasketing.
c.
Fixture shall be 26, 32 or 42 watt compact fluorescent; lamp and ballasts as indicated on drawings.
d.
Fixture shall be equipped with lens guard.
e.
Fixture shall be Exceline RLW, Cooper Vaportight Small, Spectrum WJ2CF- RLM Series, or equal.
Type 12, Ceiling I Wall Mounted Fixtures: a.
Fixture shall be die-cast aluminum.
b.
Fixture shall have reinforced four-point mounting system construction to resist breakage from impact and prying.
c.
Fixture finish shall be as indicated on drawings .
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 LIGHTING 26 5000-10
111001
• 13.
• 14.
15.
d.
Lens shall be Injection molded UV stabilized, high impact resistant opal polycarbonate .
e.
Fixture shall have option trim ring to fit between housing and inside lip of trim ring for a smooth transitional look.
f.
Provide fixture with one quad 26 watts, or 32 watts compact fluorescent lamps as indicated on drawings.
g.
Ceiling fixtures shall be supplied without eye lid option, wall mounted fixtures shall be supplied with eye lid option.
h.
Fixture shall be Kenall MR13FL (ceiling mounted), or MR13El (wall mounted), Day-Brite VR Series, Failsafe TRll Series, or equal.
Type K 1, Recessed Interior/Exterior Vandal Resistant Fixtures (Square): a.
Housing/door shall be fabricated from 16 gage cold-rolled steel, and polyester powder coated after fabrication.
b.
Fully gasketed for exterior installation.
c.
0.187 inch clear polycarbonate UV stabilized safety lens.
d.
Provide one 26-watt triple-tube fluorescent lamps .
e.
Fixture shall be power factor corrected.
f.
Manufacturers: Kenall No. RQCA Series, L.C. Doane HAR Series, or equal.
Type K2- Recessed Interior/ Exterior Vandal Resistant Fixture (Round): a.
Lens shall be vandal resistant acrylic with flat or drop diffuser. (Refer to fixture schedule in drawings for type of diffuser).
b.
Die formed aluminum reflector.
c.
Fixture shall have a 2-18, 2-26, 2-32, or 2-42 watt triple tube (TTT) lamp as indicated on drawings.
d.
Fixture shall be Lightolier Calculite - 8098 Series, OM82H42PLT Series, Kirlin RV81 030 Series, or equal.
Type Ll, Outdoor Wall-Mounted Fixtures (Vandal Resistant): a.
•
Omega
Seamless, one-piece, injection molded polycarbonate lens/housing, 0.187 inch, UV stabilized polycarbonate lens. The wraparound lens design encloses and protects the interior of unit .
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR& P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES IDGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 LIGHTING 26 5000-11
111001
• 16.
• 17.
18.
•
b.
Die cast aluminum mounting plate .
c.
One-piece, full size, closed cell neoprene rubber gasket.
d.
One stainless steel tamper-proof screw.
e.
Fixture shall be UL listed for wet locations.
f.
Fixtures shall be triple tube 26 watts compact fluorescent technology with electronic ballast.
g.
Manufacturers: Kenall No. S711D Series, Failsafe HDR Series, Luminaire Lighting LPL58 Series, or equal.
Type M- Wall Mounted Full Cutoff Exterior Wall. Fixture shall be mounted at no less than nine feet above finished grade, or as indicated in drawings. a.
Housing shall be made of 20 gage die cast aluminum, and be equipped with hinged doors.
b.
Fixture shall have Stainless steel tamperproofhardware.
c.
Fixture shall use triple tube compact fluorescent technology.
d.
Fixture Optics shall be full 90 degree horizontal cutoff on all distributions. Reflector shall be specular aluminum. Fixture shall have tempered glass lens with optional wire guard.
e.
Fixture shall be Exceline GS Series, Gardco 100 Series, Lithonia WST Series, Cooper-Lumark PLIP Series, Hubbell Lighting LMC Series, or equal.
Type P-Recessed Low Level Step Light: a.
Housing shall be die cast aluminum with captive stainless steel hardware.
b.
Fixture shall be gasketed with a single piece of molded silicone.
c.
Lens shall be Louver and completely sealed to prevent water, dust and insect infiltration.
d.
Fixture shall be equipped with high power factor electronic ballast and compact fluorescent lamp with wattage as indicated in drawings.
e.
Fixture shall be Hadco RSC2 Series, Gardco 941 Series, Phoenix Saga series, Allscape SP Series, Cole F2158 Series, Lumenton SL 730 Series, Prescolite Ltg. 37CFQ series, or equal.
Type Q, Explosion-ProofFixtures:
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 LIGHTING 26 5000-12
111001
• I9.
2.04
Designed for Class I, group CD location, ceiling-mounted, with 200 watt lamp .
b.
Manufacturers: Rigalite XPI Series, GE Lighting Systems H8 Series, Hubbell Lighting HLE Series, Crouse Hinds EVCX Series, or equal.
TypeR, Safe Light Fixtures: a.
Provide red letters on a white background.
b.
Provide two seven-watt PL fluorescent lamps for each fixture I 0,000 hour lamp life.
c.
Manufacturer: McPhilben 33 line, Fail Safe DRX Series, Vista AG I 004S, or equal.
HIGH INTENSITY DISCHARGE FIXTURES A.
High-Pressure Sodium/Metal Halide Fixtures: I.
• 2.
•
a.
Type NI, Wall-Mounted Fixtures (Vandal Resistant): a.
One-piece prismatic refractor held by cast metal door, hinged to die-cast anodized aluminum weatherproof housing with visor to limit light pollution .
b.
High power factor ballast.
c.
Fixture shall be High Pressure Sodium or Metal Halide with type and lamps as indicated in drawings.
d.
Manufacturers: Kenall H I2I2ED Series, Failsafe GC Series, Luminaire Lighting No. LPL12I2 Series, or equal.
Type N2- Wall Mounted Full Cutoff- Fixtures: a.
Fixture shall be injection molded, impact resistant polycarbonate lens, with optional wire guard.
b.
Fixture shall have Tamperproof hardware.
c.
Reflector shall be hydro-formed anodized aluminum.
d.
Lens shall be injection molded UV stabilized high impact acrylic.
e.
Lamp shall be Metal Halide with wattage as indicated in drawings.
f.
Housing shall be 20 gage die cast aluminum with hinged doors .
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR& P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 LIGHTING 26 5000-13
111001
• 3.
• 4.
g.
Fixture Optics shall be full 90 degree horizontal cutoff on all distributions .
h.
Fixture shall be Exceline PC2M Series, Day-Brite Lighting WCL Series, Gardco 101/102 Series, Cooper-Lumark MHM4-P Series, or equal.
Type Y, Floodlight Fixtures: a.
Housing shall be marine-grade die-cast aluminum, dust-tight and coated with electrostatically deposited and thermally set powdered polyester paint. Fixture shall be supplied with a mounting yoke, or slip fitter as required for the installation and as indicated on drawings.
b.
Fixtures shall be capable of being aimed in any direction from any mounting surface orientation. Doors shall be hinged to provide easy access during Iamping, and shall be secured to fixtures while open. Door fastening devices shall be captive. Door assembly shall include mechanical stops to assure proper compression of hollow core silicone gasket.
c.
Electrical components, including socket and quick disconnect, shall be removable and replaceable as single units without disturbing aiming.
d.
There shall be multi-faceted high performance reflector systems made from high purity anodized aluminum, mounted in frames to create optical modules that are field-rotate able and exchangeable .
e.
Lens shall be tempered glass to withstand thermal and physical shock.
f.
Ballast shall be high power factor with copper coil windings with Class H (180°C) rated insulation.
e.
Lamps shall be metal halide pulse-start with wattage oflamp as indicated on drawings. Voltage shall be as indicated on Drawings.
f.
Finish color shall be as selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard colors.
g.
Manufacturers: Widelite EFX Series, Gardco DF 12 Series, McGraw Edison AMF Series, or equal.
Type Y1, Pole Mounted Cut-Off Luminaires: a.
5.
•
Manufacturers: Spaulding Vandalia VA series, Lumux Lighting PT700 series or equal.
Type V, Surface Horizontal-Mounted Only, Outdoor Fixtures:
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 LIGHTING 26 5000-14
111001
•
a.
Heavy-duty cast aluminum housing with injection molded polycarbonate refractor; smooth finish on exterior, fluted prisms on sides and dispensing prisms at bottom on the interior. Assemble refractor housing with four stainless steel, tamper-proof, threaded fasteners.
b.
Provide ballasts to operate 175-watt metal halide lamps.
c.
Factory-installed molded nylon-pin plug-in connector between ballast secondary leads and lamp holder supply leads. Separate ballast from lamp compartment by an internal, formed aluminum reflector finished in low-gloss white acrylic oven-cured enamel.
d.
Factory pretreatment by chromate conversion process on exposed cast aluminum surfaces with textured, polyester powder, oven-cured, black paint finish.
e.
Fixture shall be UL listed for wet locations.
f.
Manufacturers: Day-Brite Lighting VSS Series, Fail Safe HUD Series, Holophane PARK-175 MH Series, or equal.
PART 3- EXECUTION
•
•
3.01
INSTALLATION
A.
Install a lighting fixture for each lighting outlet indicated and mark new ballasts with day of installation.
B.
Fixture voltage shall be as indicated on Drawings.
c.
Install recessed and surface-mounted fixtures, with plaster frames compatible with ceiling and wall systems employed; secure fixtures mechanically to frames.
D.
Align rows of suspended and surface-mounted fluorescent fixtures to form straight lines at uniform elevations.
E.
Recessed fixtures shall fit snugly against ceilings to prevent light leakage.
F.
Fixture installations shall comply with CBC Seismic requirements
G.
Support suspended recessed fixtures in T -bar ceilings as follows: Fixtures shall be attached to ceiling grid to resist a horizontal force equal to weight of fixtures. For heavyduty grid systems, fixtures weighing less than 56 pounds must also have two 12 gage slack safety wires from diagonal corners to the structure above; fixtures weighing more than 56 pounds shall be independently supported by not less than four taut 12 gage wires capable of supporting four times load. For intermediate duty grid systems, fixtures shall be independently supported by not less than four taut 12 gage wires capable of
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES illGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 LIGHTING 26 5000-15
111001
supporting four times load. Fixture hanger wire ends shall be twisted three tight turns within a 1 Y:z -inch distance. Provide positive point of attachment to T -bar ceiling with four, #8 wafer head tek screws (one at each comer), avoiding conflict with operation of the lens. Fixture installation shall be coordinated with acoustical ceiling installation.
•
•
H.
Emergency light fixtures shall be labeled "Emergency Fixture" with one inch high letters produced with a P-touch or similar labeling system.
I.
Continuous suspended fixtures: Fixture suspension device shall allow vertical adjustment of fixture without the use of tools. Cable shall be minimum seven strand twisted stainless steel capable of supporting minimum four times the fixture weight. For continuous linear suspended fixtures longer than eight feet, provide not less than three suspension points.
2.
Top of fixture shall be suspended as shown on the Drawings, typically 24 inches below the ceiling and a minimum of 18 inches from the ceiling.
3.
Fixture shall utilize factory furnished or approved hardware and canopy for either hard or T-bar ceilings.
4.
White Board Lights shall be suspended 24 inches from the wall unless specifically shown otherwise.
J.
Where emergency battery packs are installed, provide constant hot for emergency fixtures. When powering unit inverter power packs, use the same circuit that powers the switched ballast to power the inverter.
K.
Surface mount fixtures shall be attached to structure. Toggle bolts are NOT permitted. Provide backing where required.
L.
Low level exit signs shall be installed with the bottom of the sign not less than six inches, or more than eight inches above the floor level and shall indicate the path of exit travel. For exit and exit-access doors, the sign shall be on the door or adjacent to the door with the closest edge of the sign within four inches of the door frame. TESTING
3.02 A.
Check and adjust fixtures for required illumination.
B.
Replace defective lamps and ballasts.
c.
Test and adjust lighting control equipment for proper operation. SPARE PARTS
3.03 A.
•
1.
Furnish ten percent spare lamps with a minimum of one spare lamp of each type.
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR& P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 LIGHTING 26 5000-16
111001
•
B.
Furnish ten percent spare motion detectors of each type with a minimum of one spare detector of each type .
c.
Furnish ten percent spare ballasts of each type with a minimum one spare ballast of each type. PROTECTION
3.04 A.
CLEANUP
3.05 A.
Remove rubbish, debris, and waste materials from all areas of work each day.
B.
Clean fixture surfaces of dirt, cement, plaster and debris. Furnish cleansers compatible with material surfaces being cleaned. HAZARDOUS WASTE DISPOSAL
3.06
•
Protect the Work of this section until Substantial Completion.
A.
Hazardous waste disposals shall be handled and disposed of by an approved, licensed contractor.
B.
Ballasts are assumed to contain PCB unless clearly marked "NO PCB."
c.
Place ballasts and lamps in appropriate containers provided by hazardous waste contractor labeled clearly with: I.
Project Name
2.
Quantity of lamps
3.
Date lamps became waste
D.
Store, remove, transport and dispose of hazardous materials in all accordance with state and federal regulations.
E.
Provide Owner with copy of manifest and certificate of destruction. END OF SECTION
•
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 LIGHTING 26 5000-17
111001
•
SECTION 27 0126 TEST AND ACCEPTANCE REQUIREMENTS FOR STRUCTURED CABLING PART 1- GENERAL 1.01
SUMMARY A.
•
•
B.
Principal items of work in this section include but are not limited to: 1.
Ensure quality assurance, testing and final acceptance requirements for premises cabling and wireless installations comply with industry standards and Project Construction Documents.
2.
The Los Angeles Unified School District (LAUSD) seeks to improve the quality of its network installations. In order to achieve this objective, the guidelines specified below are to serve as a technical reference for the Owner's infrastructure verification and acceptance of the Contractor's testing. The appendix of this section describes specific test procedures that the Owner shall perform during the acceptance testing, particularly those involving LAN, PBX, VTC, and Convergence equipment, and associated cable plants. The procedures provide a comprehensive series of visual, electronic, and optical tests to ensure the infrastructure installation complies with the standards set forth in the specifications. The successful culmination of these tests shall be used to document a physical configuration audit (PCA) as part of the Owner's Quality Assurance (Q/A) Report. Testing shall include physical Q/A review of installation and performance testing of components.
Responsibilities for this specification are as follows: 1.
Installer: The Contractor shall follow ANSIITIA and BICSI installation standards. The Contractor shall perform horizontal cable installation including Category 5e and Category 6 unshielded twisted pair (UTP) cable runs terminated in the communications cabinet and cable terminations at each work area outlet, vertical cable installation, and fiber optic cable runs and terminations. During installation the Contractor shall perform tests as required by the Parent Specification and in compliance with testing standards found in Appendixes B, C, and D of this Section. The Contractor shall notify the Project Inspector 48 hours in advance of any required testing so that the Project Inspector can notify the Owner's Quality Assurance Team to observe the Contractor's test procedures. The Contractor shall forward test documentation to the OAR prior to the Owner's formal acceptance testing.
2.
Contractor's Site Responsibilities during formal Owner's Quality Assurance: During formal Owner's Quality Assurance, the Contractor and his/her Subcontractor shall comply with testing standards and requirements detailed in
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 TEST AND ACCEPTANCE REQUIREMENTS FOR STRUCTURED CABLING 270126-1
111001
Appendices A through F. Under the guidance of the Project Inspector and in coordination with the Owner's Quality Assurance Team, the Installer shall:
• 3.
•
•
a.
Verify LAN connectivity and WAN extension cabling to MDF.
b.
Configure the router(s) and switch(es) in compliance with the Contract Documents.
c.
Aid the Owner's Quality Assurance Team with network cut over. (For example: existing systems with internet connectivity and administration systems including but not limited to SIS and payroll).
d.
Provide labor, materials, and testing equipment (For example: Power Meter, OTDR) to correct any deficiencies with labeling, cable charts, terminations, and Installer supplied test results.
e.
Provide keys and access to installed network equipment.
Owner's Quality Assurance Team Responsibilities: Using the procedures specified in the Appendixes of this guideline, the Owner's Quality Assurance Team shall verify that the infrastructure installed under the Contract complies with the installation standards detailed in the Specifications. Specifically, testing shall be performed by the Owner on vertical and horizontal cable, (For example: fiber optic, Category 5e UTP and Category 6 UTP) along with component installations performed under the scope of the overall infrastructure effort (For example: Ethernet switches and routers). Generally, testing specifications and procedures cover the following: a.
Q/A review of equipment rack installation; including placement in the communications cabinets, attachment to the floor, and seismic bracing.
b.
Q/A review of fiber terminations, patch panel installation, cable labeling, and cable bundling.
c.
Q/A review of Category 5e and Category 6, T568B terminations, including cable end connections at the patch panel and work area outlets.
d.
Q/A review of the Contractor's Redlines for accuracy.
e.
Industry standard for fiber optic, Category 5e and Category 6 cable performance testing.
f.
Network equipment performance verification.
g.
Uninterruptible power supply performance verification.
h.
Communications cabinet layout and facility drop count verification.
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 TEST AND ACCEPTANCE REQUIREMENTS FOR STRUCTURED CABLING 270126-2
111001
C.
•
••
D.
Related Requirements:
1.
Section 00 7000: General Conditions.
2.
Section 01 7700: Contract Closeout.
3.
Section 06 I 000: Rough Carpentry.
4.
Section 26 0500: Common Work Results for Electrical.
5.
Section 26 0513: Basic Electrical Materials and Methods.
6.
Section 26 0526: Grounding and Bonding.
7.
Section 26 0533: Raceways and Boxes Fittings and Supports.
8.
Section 26 2416: Panelboards and Signal Terminal Cabinets.
9.
Section 26 5000: Lighting.
10.
Section 27 5115: Public Address and Intercommunication Systems.
11.
Section 27 5128: Public Address Systems (Auditoriums, Performing Art, M-P Rooms)(MS and HS).
Acronyms: dB IDF lTD
Intermediate Distribution Facility Information Technology Division
LAN LAUSD
Local Area Network
LDC LDF
Los Angeles Unified School District Local Distribution - Classroom Local Distribution Facility
MDF
Main Distribution Facility
MPOE
Minimum Point of Entry
NVP
Nominal Velocity of Propagation
OAR
Owner Authorized Representative
PA
Public Address
PBX QA
Private Branch Exchange
UTP
Unshielded Twisted Pair
VoiP
Voice over Internet Protocol Wireless Local Area Network
WLAN 1.02
•
Decibel
Quality Assurance
CODES AND STANDARDS
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 TEST AND ACCEPTANCE REQUIREMENTS FOR STRUCTURED CABLING 270126-3
111001
•
•
1.03
A.
ANSI/TIA-568-C.O Generic Telecommunications Cabling for Customer Premises.
B.
ANSI/TIA-568-C.l Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard, current issue.
c.
ANSIITIA-568-C.2 Balance Components Standards.
D.
ANSIITIA-568-C.3 Optical Fiber Cabling Components Standards.
E.
ANSI/TIA-1152 Requirements for Field Test Instruments and Measurements for Balanced Twisted Pair Cabling.
F.
EIA/TIA-569-B, Commercial Building Standard for Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces and all current addenda.
G.
ANSI/EIA/TIA-598-A, Optical Fiber Cable Color Coding, current issue
H.
EIA/TIA-606A, Administration Standard for the Telecommunications Infrastructure of Commercial Buildings.
I.
ANSI-J-STD-607-A Commercial Building Grounding and Bonding Requirements for Telecommunications.
J.
EIA/TIA-OFSTP-14A, Optical Power Loss Measurements of Installed Multimode Fiber Cable Plant.
K.
ANSI/TIA/EIA-758, Customer-Owned Outside Plant Telecommunications Cabling Standard, current issue in accordance with TIA TR-42.4.
L.
EIA/TIA-OFSTP-7, Optical Power Loss Measurements oflnstalled Single mode Fiber Cable Plant.
M.
American National Standards Institute (ANSI)/EIA/TIA-455-59, Field Testing.
N.
FCC Part 68.
0.
National Electrical Manufacturer's Association (NEMA).
P.
National Fire Protection Association (NFPA), NFPA-70.
Q.
CCR Part 3 - California Electrical Code (CEC).
R.
CCR Part 2 - Uniform Building Code (UBC).
s.
Building Industry Consulting Services International (BICSI) TDMM, most recent reVISIOn.
T.
Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE).
u. v.
Other Codes and Standards as defined in the Parent Specification.
Telecommunications
Cabling
and
Fluke Networks DTX Series Cable Analyzer Technical Reference Handbook 01111 or newer.
PUNCH LIST A.
•
Twisted-Pair
Per OAR request, The Owner's Quality Assurance Team shall assist in the Punch List for IT and low voltage systems and provide it to the OAR.
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 TEST AND ACCEPTANCE REQUIREJ\1ENTS FOR STRUCTURED CABLING 270126-4
111001
•
1.04
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
Owner's Quality Assurance Test Schedule: 1.
The Project Inspector shall schedule the Owner's Quality Assurance test after review ofthe Contractor's complete Test Results of the school.
PART 2- MATERIALS- NOT USED PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01
EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION A.
The Installer is responsible for basic installation and cross connection of LAN equipment required by the Contract Documents.
B.
The Owner's Quality Assurance Team shall verify that basic installation is complete and functional.
END OF SECTION
•
•
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 TEST AND ACCEPTANCE REQUIREMENTS FOR STRUCTURED CABLING 270126-5
LA USD Quality Assurance Guidelines APPENDIX A- QUALITY ASSURANCE PROCEDURES A.l
Overview of Quality Testing Procedures This appendix provides guidelines for visual Quality Assurance reviews of each site. The Owner's Quality Assurance Team shall examine the Work based upon the guidelines outlined in the following appendixes and their associated forms. 1.
Communications Cabinet Review. Verify the design and compliance with contract documents. This may include: ANSI/TIA and BICSI cabling practices, standard and specific labeling practices, and safe and logical equipment and wire management placement.
2.
Cable Plant Review. Cabling from the Communications cabinet, at various points along the cable path, and in functional work areas for compliance with ANSI/EIA installation specifications including ANSI/TIA-568-C and TIA/EIA569 and documents referenced therein and professional installation practices.
3.
User Work Area Quality Assurance Review. Cabling at the user wall plate location in the functional work areas for compliance with ANSIIEIA installation specifications including ANSI/TIA-568-C and TIA/EIA-569 and documents referenced therein and professional installation practices.
4.
Redline As-Built Documentation shall be compared to physical installation. Deviations shall be noted and the Quality Assurance procedure halted until discrepancies have been rectified.
General Quality Assurance Guidelines
A.2
The Owner's Quality Assurance Team visually reviews the installation to verify that cabling is supported properly. Cable trays or structural ties shall support cable. No cable shall have been installed in pathways near sharp edges or objects that might cause damage. Cable shall not be supported by, on, or attached to a dry wall ceiling, ceiling tiles, ceiling grid, routed over pipes, conduit, lighting fixtures, or other wiring. The Owner's Quality Assurance Team should be able to determine the total number of drops dispersed from each communications cabinet, the number of drops for each supported room, and the agreed-upon labeling scheme for the site. The Installer should have met the following general labeling guidelines:
•
Clearly labeled each drop number and Communications cabinet on the wall jack faceplate.
•
Label each horizontal cable jacket using a permanent label at the workstation end, inside the wall, and the patch panel end no more than two inches from each end.
• At workstation end: communications cabinet, drop, and termination panel.
•
At patch panel end: drop and cabinet numbers .
A -1
27 0126-6
LA USD Quality Assurance Guidelines •
Label each patch panel port with drop number and cabinet number. Because work area room numbers may have been modified since the design, the installer shall provide as built documentation for each communications cabinet; reflecting the room numbers used in the labeling scheme as a reference point. The Contractor and his/her Subcontractor shall use these working prints to produce post-installation as-built drawings.
A.3
Deficiency Reports
Before beginning any test, the Owner's Quality Assurance Team shall view any deficiency report(s) (DR) that have been filed with the OAR and Project Inspector. The Owner's Quality Assurance Team shall review the DR(s) as part of the Quality Assurance review to ensure the required corrective actions have been taken. A.4
Quality Assurance Test Procedures
The Owner's Quality Assurance Team shall follow the acceptance test and performance criteria outlined in ANSI/TIA-568-C, OFSTP-14A, OFSTP-7 and shall conduct acceptance and performance testing following each manufacturer's specification on their respective network components to verify compliance with manufacturer's installation instructions. The Owner's Quality Assurance Team shall also follow any specific local policy directives or instructions regarding installation practices and acceptance testing identified during the site orientation visit. The details for the design of a particular location shall also comply with any related State, County and Municipal standards. A.S
Construction Quality Assurance of Work:
During the installation of low voltage systems, upon request by the OAR, the Owner's Quality Assurance Team shall examine the following: 1.
General to Low Voltage Systems: a.
Conduit and raceway layout and installation for each low voltage system and verify that they meet project specifications.
b.
Equipment rack installation, including placement in the communications room, seismic bracing, and attachment to the floor.
c.
Cable punch-downs, patch panel installation, cable cross-connection, cable labeling, and cable bundling.
d.
Verify proper equipment installation, cable cross connection, system configuration, and testing.
e.
Verify system layout and device location(s) match the locations shown on the as-builds.
A-2
27 0126-7
LA USD Quality Assurance Guidelines
2.
A.6
f.
Active components, terminal cabinets, cross connects; splices, etc. are located in a secure interior location.
g.
Verification of Uninterruptible power supply performance.
h.
Verification of proper air conditioning in MDF and IDFs. Room temperature should maintain between 65 - 72 degrees seven days per week, 24 hours per day.
1.
Terminations punched down singly and cross-connected on 66 blocks. 66 blocks are primarily used in Public Address systems and Intercom. PBX cable plants are specified to use II 0-biocks exclusively, except for one termination block used for the PA interface cabling.
LAN, verify the following: a.
Examine Category 5e and Category 6, T568B terminations, including cable end connections at the patch panel and wall drop receptacles.
b.
Examine fiber terminations and fiber termination boxes.
c.
Examine Installer's basic network components installation and operation.
d.
Review customized configuration and test results.
e.
Test overall network operation to ensure it meets Owner's strategic planning and acceptable performance level.
StartUp
Start-up work is to be completed as a condition for Substantial Completion. Start-Up is to include the testing and commissioning of equipment and systems.
A. 7
I.
After start up has been completed but prior to Substantial Completion, the Project Inspector shall schedule the Owner's Quality Assurance Team site visit.
2.
The Owner's Quality Assurance Team shall review documentation and test results for completeness.
3.
The Owner's Quality Assurance Team shall visit the site and verify the Contractor's test results by the Quality Assurance procedures detailed herein.
Contract Completion and Process Review
The Quality Assurance Team shall review the entire Quality Assurance process and recommend changes to improve it on an as needed basis. A.8
Test Procedures
A -3
27 0126-8
LAUSD Quality Assurance Guidelines 1.
Visual Q/A Reviews a.
2.
Cable Performance Testing a.
3.
The Owner's Quality Assurance Team shall conduct a visual review of the installation including the communication cabinet, cable runs, and user work areas. Appendix A documents these Q/A review procedures.
The Owner's Quality Assurance Team shall test 100 percent of the fiber optic Backbone cable, a random sample of Category 5e and Category 6 UTP cable and the fiber optic Horizontal cable. Appendix C outlines these specific tests. (1)
Test Cable Sampling: The Owner's Quality Assurance Team shall randomly test 10 percent of installed horizontal cables from each communication cabinet on site. For example, if a communications cabinet has 100 drops, the Owner's Quality Assurance Team shall test a minimum of 10 drops for each cabinet. Where random testing shows a failure rate of more than 1 percent of the drops (2 in 10 of the random sample), an additional 10 percent of the installed horizontal cabling shall be tested. Appendix B outlines these specific tests.
(2)
Cable Testing: The Owner's Quality Assurance Team shall perform the following industry-standard operational and performance cable testing detailed in ANSIIEIA-568-C: (a)
Wiremap
(b)
Length verification
(c)
Insertion loss (attenuation)
(d)
Near-end crosstalk (NEXT)
(e)
Power sum near-end crosstalk (PSNEXT)
(f)
Equal level far-end crosstalk (ELFEXT)
(g)
Power sum equal level far-end crosstalk (PSELFEXT)
(h)
Return loss
(i)
Propagation delay
G)
Delay skew
Network Equipment Testing
A-4
27 0126-9
LAUSD Quality Assurance Guidelines a.
A.9
A.lO
A.ll
The Owner's Quality Assurance Team shall perform network tests on hardware components for proper installation, per manufacturer's recommendations and configuration. Components shall be tested separately for initial power up and their ability to maintain system configuration. The specific test for network equipment components is described in Appendix D.
Acceptance Criteria
I.
An overall Pass or Fail condition shall be determined by the results of the required individual test. Any Fail and Fail* shall result in an overall Fail. In order to achieve an overall Pass condition, individual results shall be Pass or Pass*. A Pass or Fail result for each parameter is determined by the allowable limits for that parameter. The test result of a parameter is marked with an asterisk (*) when the result is closer to the test limit than the accuracy of the field tester. The field tester manufacturer shall provide documentation as an aid to interpret results marked with asterisks.
2.
Cable plant acceptance by the Owner requires I 00 percent passing results for cable samples and corrected cabling deficiencies. Acceptance of other components is based upon satisfactory completion of a test configuration scenario, as defined in the appropriate appendix to this plan.
Corrective Procedures
I.
EIA!fiA testing specification details a pass/fail criterion, i.e., if a fiber optic cable is outside of specifications, the test fails, The Owner's Quality Assurance Team shall identify any deficiencies found during Quality Assurance (e.g., a cable or component failing a test) to site personnel before the Owner's Quality Assurance Teams departure and shall document these deficiencies in the Quality Assurance Report. If the link attenuation for any fiber optic cable strand is outside acceptable loss as specified in ANSI/EIA-568-C, the Installer shall recomplete the terminations required to reduce the amount of attenuation. If retermination fails, the Installer shall be required to take steps up to and including the replacement of the cable to eliminate the testing deficiency. After corrective action, the Owner's Quality Assurance Team shall retest repaired fiber runs and document the results in the Quality Assurance Report.
2.
The Owner's Quality Assurance Team shall identify to the Owner in writing any deviation from acceptable ANSIITIA specifications for cabling resulting in a test failure. The Owner may choose to accept the deficiency via a written waiver. For example, if a fiber optic connection exceeds the allowable termination attenuation by 0.1 decibels (dB), but the total link attenuation is within the length attenuation budget, the Owner may choose to waive the specification. Other components (e.g., switches or routers) must function according to the specified configurations in the final Work Plan for Owner LAN projects.
Quality Assurance Reporting
A- 5
27 0126-10
) ) LA USD Quality Assurance Guidelines
1.
Acceptance Recommendation a.
2.
Quality Assurance Report a.
A.l2
At the conclusion of testing, the Owner's Quality Assurance Team shall provide a recommendation to Owner to accept or not accept the installation.
The Owner's Quality Assurance Team shall deliver a Quality Assurance Report to the project OAR no later than seven (7) working days after completion of testing. This report shall include: (l)
A written test report for visual installation tests.
(2)
Electronic test results of cable testing including verified cable lengths, test personnel, test date, and individual test description.
(3)
Each detected deficiency with its correction date and retest results, if accomplished.
(4)
Network operational test results for the switch(s) and router connections.
(5)
Any condition(s) precluding strict adherence to CEC, ANSIITIA, and BICSI installations or Quality Assurance standards shall be marked for potential Owner waiver before system acceptance.
(6)
A summary confirming the acceptance recommendation given.
Test Equipment
1.
The Owner's Quality Assurance Team shall use the following test equipment or their equivalent during testing. a.
Fluke DTX 1800, or equal, tester with single-mode and multi-mode power meter and light source heads.
b.
Fluke DTX 1800 OTDR module, Optifiber Optical Time Domain Reflectometer (OTDR), or equal.
c.
Personal computer with Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) protocol stacks.
d.
Thermometer
A-6
270126-ll
LAUSD Quality Assurance Guidelines Table 2.6.1 T & A Checklist for Owner's Quality Assurance Team Projects Site Location Code I Name Network Engineer
__________________ OAR--------------------------
Insp _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ ector - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
OAR Recommendation
------------
Electrical Inspector
Review Item
Yes
· No'
, ..
N/A
Pass/Fail
Have deficiencies been cleared by the Project Inspector or OAR? Has the vendor provided cable charts in the cabinets? Are there any horizontal cables over 90 m? Do the cable runs used agree with the cable routing drawings? Are the cables routed and terminated per specification? Are cable run penetrations terminated to preclude strain on the installed cable? Are the copper and fiber optic cables installed per the manufacturer's recommendation? Is each cable clearly labeled at the user's location? Is each port on the patch panel labeled with the corresponding user outlet location? Are cable and patch panel labels securely fastened and easily readable? Are the fiber cables in the fiber termination box labeled per the approved labeling scheme and immediately adjacent to each termination within the fiber termination box? Is the cable for each drop identified with the correct labeling scheme at or near the point of termination? Does the user outlet plate display the correct labeling scheme and match the distant end label? Are connectors free of exposed metal, loose connectors, or other problems? Is the cable jacket stripped back only as far as required to terminate on connecting hardware? Is the physical plant installed in accordance with specifications of this project? For traditional, hierarchical star cable plants following 27 1013 specification, are there at least 50 percent spare Backbone strands, in multiples of 6 strands, to each IDF from the MDF?
A-7
27 0126-12
LA USD Quality Assurance Guidelines For new fiber optics cable plant installations following 27 1014 specification, are there at least 15 percent spare Backbone strands, in multiples of 6 strands, to each IDF from the MDF? Does this site have an existing Local Area Network? Are the T 1 lines correctly installed and ready to cut over? Also, has the extension to the MDF been installed? Will the site reutilize an existing router? If yes, specify exact model I serial number. Is the router configured and ready for cut over? Are the required amounts of GB Uplinks provided to accommodate the equipment installed including port expansion? Are classroom and administration switches mounted, connected, and operational? Has the vendor provided inventory and the drop count been verified or has an Inventory document been completed? If so, please attach.
A.13
Visual Q/A Review Worksheets The following pages provide the three visual Quality Assurance worksheets: 1.
Communications Cabinet Quality Assurance Review Form
2.
Cable Routing Quality Assurance Review Form
3.
User Work Area Quality Assurance Review Form
A-8
27 0126-13
LA USD Quality Assurance Guidelines A.13.1 Communications Enclosure Quality Assurance Review Form Site
Quality
Date
Assurance _ _ _ _ _ _ Rep(s)
Is the cabinet ready for a Q/A review? If not, list discrepancies (e.g., debris, punch- list, or un-terminated cable). Is the installation performed in the planned communications cabinet? Are there clearly identified final or red lined drawings showing the "as-built" installation? With devices operating, are ambient cabinet and room temperatures within 50-80° F? The temperature is: Are heating, ventilation, and air conditioning (HVAC), lighting, and electrical outlets installed per contract? Are the requirements addressed in the Site Concurrence Memorandum or other documentation? Are cabinet rails and wire managers installed so as to preclude any space problems with the UPS? Are the cabinets seismically braced to the floor and/or wall? Is there adequate space around the racks and fiber termination panel for maintenance? Are patch panels, wire management panels, and network equipment properly affixed to the rack? Is debris cleaned from inside of cabinets? Are cable run penetrations installed so fire barriers are maintained in cabinet locations? Are cable run penetrations properly and securely fastened to supporting structures? Are cable run penetrations terminated to preclude strain on the installed cable in cabinet locations? Are cables routed and punched per specification and industry standards? Is each cable clearly labeled with the corresponding user location per specification? Is each port on the patch panel labeled with the corresponding user location per specification? Are cable and patch panel labels securely fastened and easily readable per specification? Is there
~-inch
or less of untwisting on any cable pair at the termination point?
Is the UTP cable jacket stripped back only as far as required to terminate on connecting hardware? Is a bend radius of at least l-inch maintained for sheathed UTP cable? Is the fiber optic cable free from excessive strain or stress, sharp bends, or kinks? Are service loops in place at each end of the cable?
A- 9
27 0126-14
LA USD Quality Assurance Guidelines Are the fiber cables in the fiber termination unit? Is the box labeled per the approved labeling scheme and immediately adjacent to each termination within the fiber termination box? Is excess fiber optic cable coiled in the termination box so it does not exceed the minimum bend radius per manufacturer's recommendations and specifications? Are fiber optic patch cords neatly routed to the network equipment via wire management?
A.13.2 Cable Routing Q/A Form Site
-------------------
Date _ _ _ _ _ _ Q/A Rep(s) _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
Are cable bundles either secured to the wall or to a non-electromagnetic interferenceproducing source or hung from the ceiling (e.g., suspended via cable trays, inner duct, Jhooks, D-rings, or ladder rack) per specification or best industry standards? Do the cable runs used agree with the redline drawings? Ifnot, are accurate redlined drawings available showing the cable routing? Is debris from the cable run penetrations adequately cleaned up per specification? Is the fiber optic cable runs completely contained within inner duct? Where? Notes:
A-10 27 0126-15
LA USD Quality Assurance Guidelines A.l3.3 User Work Area Q/A Review Form Site
-------------------
Date ----'------- Q/A Rep(s) _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __ •
Q/A REVIEW ITEM
'.'
'
.('<,
"
..
.
.i?AIL. . . .. · :, :>·. ;i~~§.< V•.''
....
./,
''j'.'·
."·
.;.: ·;. .-~
\
·
Are wall jack faceplates professionally installed and finished? Is cabling precluded from view on the external surface of walls (e.g., ducting used on solid core walls)? Does the user outlet plate display the correct labeling scheme? Is the cable for each drop identified with the correct labeling scheme and within 2 inches of termination per specification? Is the cable installed in a manner that precludes cable strain? Are connectors insulated from surrounding cable and objects (e.g., are cable barrel adapters, connectors, devices, and terminators insulated from any earth ground or current-conducting surfaces of the building structure)? Are connectors free of exposed metal, loose connectors, or other problems? Is there \12-inch or less of untwisting on any cable pair at the termination point? Is the cable jacket stripped back only as far as required to terminate on connecting hardware? Is a bend radius of at least l-inch maintained for sheathed UTP cable? Is the 4 or 6 strand fiber secured properly in the LDFs and LDCs?
Notes:
A-ll 27 0126-16
LA USD Quality Assurance Guidelines APPENDIX B- CATEGORY 5E AND CATJEGORY 6 UTP CABLE PERFORMANCE TESTS
B.l
Overview of Cable Tests This appendix provides guidelines for electronic testing of Horizontal Category 5e UTP wiring. The Owner's Quality Assurance Team shall meet the guidelines outlined in the following Q/A review and its associated forms. •
B.2
Electronic Testing. This testing verifies that the standard performance parameters for the UTP cable as outlined in ANSI/EIA-568-C are within the specifications as noted below. Refer to Premise Wiring Specification.
Test and Support Equipment I. The types of cable to be tested are as follows : a.
B.3
Category 5E/6 UTP shall be tested based on ANSI/EIA-568-C
Electronic Tests The Owner's Quality Assurance Team randomly selects cables for testing and every effort shall be made to avoid a typical testing pattern from communications cabinet to work area outlet, so that no testing pattern is discernible. The testing personnel shall inspect drops on the faceplate in multiple cases to ensure cables are labeled and no cross connects are visible, etc. The testing personnel shall perform a Q/A review of the cable termination(s) in the Communications cabinet(s) and the corresponding user location of selected cables (e.g., the faceplate labels or terminations behind the termination panel). The personnel must be consistent in testing selected cables. The permanent link test configurations described in ANSIIEIA-568-C.2, performance parameters include wire map, length, Insertion loss (attenuation), NEXT, PSNEXT, ELFEXT, PSELFEXT, Return loss, Propagation delay and Delay Skew for 100 Ohm four-pair Category 5e/6 cabling. 568-C identifies acceptable ranges oftest results, test equipment checks, diagnostic information, and specific test procedures. ANSIIEIA-568-C.2, also specifies laboratory measurement methods, component and field test methods and computation algorithms over the specified frequency range. To ensure verifiable equipment calibration, the Owner's Quality Assurance Team shall certify test equipment accuracy in compliance with the ANSI/EIA568-C.2 each time a new list of tests is performed. The Owner's Quality Assurance Team shall consider cable(s) and cabling components as pre-tested by the manufacturer to meet ANSIIEIA-568-C Category 5e/6 specifications. Therefore, individual testing of connectors and other cabling components is not required.
B.4
Data Accuracy
8-1
27 0126-17
LAUSD Quality Assurance Guidelines Tests shall be conducted on the premise that ANSI/EIA-568-C and other applicable specifications were applied to the cable installation. Further, the Owner's Quality Assurance Team shall be provided the test result book to verify the Installer tested 100 percent of their work, so the sampling tests performed ensures system operability and customer satisfaction.
B.5
Data and Test Reporting The Quality Assurance Report shall clearly identify the test environment, test equipment used, name of each tester, acceptable results (as specified in 568-C), and actual results for each test performed. If a failure occurs, the test shall proceed, with the failure reported to the responsible Installer for repair at test end.
B.6
Communications Wiring Electrical Tests B.6.1 Wire Map Wire Map shall report Pass if the wiring of each wire-pair from end to end is determined to be correct. The Wire Map results shall include the continuity of the shield connection if present.
B.6.2 Length The field tester shall be capable of measuring length of pairs of a permanent link or channel based on the propagation delay measurement and the average value for Nominal Velocity of Propagation (1 ). The physical length of the link shall be calculated using the pair with the shortest electrical delay. This length figure shall be reported and shall be used for making the Pass/Fail decision. The Pass/Fail criteria are based on the maximum length allowed for the Permanent Link configuration (90 meters- 295 feet) plus 10 percent to allow for the variation and uncertainty ofNVP.
B.6.3 Insertion Loss (Attenuation) Insertion Loss is a measure of signal loss in the permanent link or channel. The term "Attenuation" has been used to designate "Insertion Loss." Insertion Loss shall be tested from1 MHz, through the highest applicable frequency. It is preferred to measure insertion loss at the same frequency intervals as NEXT Loss in order to provide a more accurate calculation of the Attenuation-toCrosstalk ratio (ACR) parameter. Minimum test result documentation (summary results): Identify the worst wire pair (1 of 4 possible). The test results for the worst wire pair must show the highest attenuation value measured (worst case), the frequency at which this worst case value occurs, and the test limit value at this frequency.
B.6.4 NEXT Loss
B-2
27 0126-18
LA USD Quality Assurance Guidelines Pair-to-pair near-end crosstalk loss (abbreviated as NEXT Loss) shall be tested for each wire pair combination from each end of the link (a total of 12 pair combinations). This parameter is to be measured from 1 through the highest applicable frequency. NEXT Loss measures the crosstalk disturbance on a wire pair at the end from which the disturbance signal is transmitted (near-end) on the disturbing pair. The maximum step size for NEXT Loss measurements shall not exceed the maximum step size defined in the draft standard as shown in Table 1, column 2. Minimum test results documentation (summary results): Identify the wire pair combination that exhibits the worst case NEXT margin (2) and the wire pair combination that exhibits the worst value ofNEXT (worst case). Table 1
,;1k::;, ~~itf~~t~j:e·.
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~--~
;fil~~~~~.;~:.·~r.~,~~~•; I- 31.25
0.15
31.26-100
0.25
100-250
0.50
NEXT is to be measured from each end of the link-under-test. These wire pair combinations must be identified for the tests performed from each end. Each reported case shall include the frequency at which it occurs as well as the test limit value at this frequency.
B.6.5 PSNEXT Loss Power Sum NEXT Loss shall be evaluated and reported for each wire pair from both ends ofthe link-under-test (a total of8 results). PSNEXT Loss captures the combined near-end crosstalk effect (statistical) on a wire pair when other pairs actively transmit signals. Like NEXT this test parameter must be evaluated from I MHz through the highest applicable frequency and the step size may not exceed the maximum step size defined in the draft standard as shown in Table 1, column 2. Minimum test result documentation (summary results): Identify the wire pair that exhibits the worst case margin and the wire pair that exhibits the worst value for PSNEXT. These wire pairs must be identified for the tests performed from each end. Each reported case shall include the frequency at which it occurs as well as the test limit value at this frequency.
B.6.6 ELFEXT Loss, pair-to-pair Pair-to-pair FEXT Loss shall be measured for each wire-pair combination from both ends of the link under test. FEXT Loss measures the crosstalk disturbance on a wire pair at the opposite end (far-end) from which the transmitter emits the disturbing signal on the disturbing pair. FEXT is measured to compute ELFEXT
B-3
27 0126-19
LAUSD Quality Assurance Guidelines Loss that must be evaluated and reported in the test results. ELFEXT measures the relative strength of the far-end crosstalk disturbance relative to the attenuated signal that arrives at the end of the link. This test yields 24 wire pair combinations. ELFEXT is to be measured from l through the highest applicable frequency and the maximum step size for FEXT Loss measurements shall not exceed the maximum step size defined in the draft standard as in Table l, column 2. Minimum test result documentation (summary results): Identify the wire pair combination that exhibits the worst-case margin and the wire pair combination that exhibits the worst value for ELFEXT. These wire pairs must be identified for the tests performed from each end. Each reported case shall include the frequency at which it occurs as well as the test limit value at this frequency.
B.6. 7 PSELFEXT Loss Power Sum ELFEXT is a calculated parameter that combines the effect of the FEXT disturbance from three wire pairs on the fourth one. This test yields 8 wire-pair combinations. Each wire-pair is evaluated from l MHz through the highest applicable frequency in frequency increments that do not exceed the maximum step size defined in the draft standard as shown in Table I, column 2. Minimum test result documentation (summary results): Identify the wire pair that exhibits the worst case margin and the wire pair that exhibits the worst value for PSELFEXT. These wire pairs must be identified for the tests performed from each end. Each reported case shall include the frequency at which it occurs as well as the test limit value at this frequency.
B.6.8 Return Loss Return Loss (RL) measures the total energy reflected on each wire pair. Return Loss is to be measured from both ends of the link-under-test for each wire pair. This parameter is also to be measured from l through the highest applicable frequency in increments that do not exceed the maximum step size defined in the draft standard as shown in Table l, column 2. Minimum test result documentation (summary results): Identify the wire pair that exhibits the worst case margin and the wire pair that exhibits the worst value for Return Loss. These wire pairs must be identified for the tests performed from each end. Each reported case shall include the frequency at which it occurs as well as the test limit value at this frequency.
B.6.9 Propagation Delay Propagation delay is the time required for the signal to travel from one end of the link to the other. This measurement is to be performed for each of the four wire pairs.
B- 4
27 0126-20
LA USD Quality Assurance Guidelines
Minimum test result documentation (summary results): Identify the wire pair with the worst case propagation delay. The report shall include the propagation delay value measured as well as the test limit value. B.6.10 Delay Skew This parameter shows the difference in propagation delay between the four wire pairs. Minimum test result documentation (summary results): Identify the wire pairs with the worst-case propagation Delay skew. The report shall include the Delay skew value measured as well as the test limit value. B.6.11 ACR (Attenuation to crosstalk ratio) This parameter is not required by TIA standards but may be expected in order to obtain the premise wiring manufacturer's warranty. ACR provides an indication of bandwidth for the two wire-pair network applications. ACR is a computed parameter that is analogous to ELFEXT and expresses the signal to noise ratio for a two wire-pair system. This calculation yields 12 combinations- six from each end of the link. Minimum test result documentation (summary results): Identify the wire pair combination that exhibits the worst-case margin and the wire pair combination that exhibits the worst value for ACR. These wire pair combinations must be identified for the tests performed from each end. Each reported case shall include the frequency at which it occurs as well as the test limit value at this frequency. B.6.12 PSACR This parameter is not required by ANSI!TIA standards but may be required in order to obtain the premise wiring vendor's warranty. The Power Sum version of ACR is based on PSNEXT and takes into account the combined NEXT disturbance of adjacent wire pairs on each individual pair. This calculation yields 8 combinations- one for each wire pair from both ends of the lit?<. Minimum test result documentation (summary results): Identify the wire pair that exhibits the worst case margin and the wire pair that exhibits the worst value for PSACR. These wire pairs must be identified for the tests performed from each end. Each reported case shall include the frequency at which it occurs as well as the test limit value at this frequency.
B- 5
27 0126-21
LA USD Quality Assurance Guidelines
B.7 Site
Communications Wiring Electrical Test Form
-------------------------------
Date
Building and Communications Room Numbers
MICROTEST SAVE ID
------------------ Q/A Rep(s)
CABLE TESTED ROOM/DROP#
PASS/FAIL
COMMENTS- IF FAILED·. (Wire Map, Length, Attenuation, Continuity, or NEXT Tests)
B-6
27 0126-22
LAUSD Quality Assurance Guidelines
• B.8
Electronic Tests The Owner's Quality Assurance Team randomly selects cables for testing and every effort shall be made to avoid a typical testing pattern from communications cabinet to work area outlet, so that no testing pattern is discernible. The testing personnel shall inspect drops on the faceplate in multiple cases to ensure cables are labeled and no cross connects are visible, etc. The testing personnel shall perform a Q/A review ofthe cable termination(s) in the Communications cabinet(s) and the corresponding user location of selected cables (e.g., the faceplate labels or terminations behind the termination panel). The personnel must be consistent in testing selected cables. The permanent link test configurations described in ANSIIEIA-568-C, performance parameters include wire map, length, Insertion loss (attenuation), NEXT, PSNEXT, ELFEXT, PSELFEXT, Return loss, Propagation delay and Delay Skew for 100 Ohm 4pair Category 6 cabling. 568-C identifies acceptable ranges of test results, test equipment checks, diagnostic information and specific test procedures as related to Category 6 cabling. ANSI/EIA-568-C also includes laboratory measurement methods, component and field test methods, and computation algorithms over the specified frequency range. The test equipment (tester) shall comply with the accuracy requirements for level III field testers as defined in ANSI/EIA-568-C. The tester including the appropriate interface adapter must meet the specified accuracy requirements. The accuracy requirements for the permanent link test configuration (baseline accuracy plus adapter contribution) are specified in Table B.2 of Annex B of the ANSIIEIA-568-C standard. (Tables B.3 in this.ANSI!fiA document specifies the accuracy requirements for the Channel configuration.) The Owner's Quality Assurance Team shall consider cable(s) and cabling components as pre-tested by the manufacturer to meet ANSI/EIA-568-C Category 6 specifications. Therefore, individual testing of connectors and other cabling components is not required.
B.9
Data Accuracy Tests shall be conducted on the premise that ANSIIEIA-568-C and other applicable specifications were applied to the cable installation. Further, the Owner's Quality Assurance Team shall be provided the test result book to verify the Installer tested 100 percent of their work, so the sampling tests performed ensures system operability and customer satisfaction. The tester interface adapters must be of high quality and the cable shall not show any twisting or kinking resulting from coiling and storing of the tester interface adapters. In order to deliver optimum accuracy, preference is given to a permanent link interface adapter for the tester that can be calibrated to extend the reference plane of the Return Loss measurement to the permanent link interface. The contractor shall provide proof that the interface has been calibrated within the period recommended by the vendor. To ensure that normal handling on the job does not cause measurable Return Loss change, the adapter cord cable shall not be of twisted-pair construction. B-7
27 0126-23
LA USD Quality Assurance Guidelines B.lO
Data and Test Reporting The Quality Assurance Report shall clearly identify the test environment, test equipment used, name of each tester, acceptable results (as specified in 568-C Category 6 related), and actual results for each test performed. If a failure occurs, the test shall proceed, with the failure reported to the responsible Installer for repair at test end.
B.ll
Communications Wiring Electrical Tests The test parameters for Category 5e and Category 6 are defined in ANSI/EIA-568-C standard. The test of each link shall contain the following parameters as detailed below. In order to pass the test, measurements (at each frequency in the range from 1 MHz through 350 MHz) must meet or exceed the limit value determined in the abovementioned standard. B.ll.l Wire Map Wire Map shall report Pass if the wiring of each wire-pair from end to end is determined to be correct. The Wire Map results shall include the continuity of the shield connection if present. B.11.2 Length The field tester shall be capable of measuring length of pairs of a permanent link or channel based on the propagation delay measurement and the average value for Nominal Velocity of Propagation. The physical length of the link shall be calculated using the pair with the shortest electrical delay. This length figure shall be reported and shall be used for making the Pass/Fail decision. The Pass/Fail criteria are based on the maximum length allowed for the Permanent Link configuration (90 meters- 295 feet) plus 10 percent to allow for the variation and uncertainty ofNVP. B.l1.3 Insertion Loss (Attenuation) Insertion Loss is a measure of signal loss in the permanent link or channel. The term "Attenuation" has been used to designate "Insertion Loss." Insertion Loss shall be tested froml MHz, through the highest applicable frequency. It is preferred to measure insertion loss at the same frequency intervals as NEXT Loss in order to provide a more accurate calculation of the Attenuation-toCrosstalk ratio (ACR) parameter. Minimum test result documentation (summary results): Identify the worst wire pair (1 of 4 possible). The test results for the worst wire pair must show the highest attenuation value measured (worst case), the frequency at which this worst case value occurs and the test limit value at this frequency. B.11.4 NEXT Loss
B-8
27 0126-24
LAUSD Quality Assurance Guidelines Pair-to-pair near-end crosstalk loss (abbreviated as NEXT Loss) shall be tested for each wire pair combination from each end of the link (a total of I2 pair combinations). This parameter is to be measured from I through the highest applicable frequency. NEXT Loss measures the crosstalk disturbance on a wire pair at the end from which the disturbance signal is transmitted (near-end) on the disturbing pair. The maximum step size for NEXT Loss measurements shall not ·exceed the maximum step size defined in the draft standard as shown in Table 2, column 2. Minimum test results documentation (summary results): Identify the wire pair combination that exhibits the worst case NEXT margin (2) and the wire pair combination that exhibits the worst value ofNEXT (worst case). Table 2
1-31.25
0.15
31.26- 100
0.25
100- 250
0.50
250-350
1.00
NEXT is to be measured from each end of the link-under-test. These wire pair combinations must be identified for the tests performed from each end. Each reported case shall include the frequency at which it occurs as well as the test limit value at this frequency. B.11.5 PSNEXT Loss Power Sum NEXT Loss shall be evaluated and reported for each wire pair from both ends of the link-under-test (a total of eight results). PSNEXT Loss captures the combined near-end crosstalk effect (statistical) on a wire pair when other pairs actively transmit signals. Like NEXT this test parameter must be evaluated from I MHz through the highest applicable frequency and the step size may not exceed the maximum step size defmed in the draft standard as shown in Table 2, column 2. Minimum test result documentation (summary results): Identify the wire pair that exhibits the worst case margin and the wire pair that exhibits the worst value for PSNEXT. These wire pairs must be identified for the tests performed from each end. Each reported case shall include the frequency at which it occurs as well as the test limit value at this frequency. B.11.6 ELFEXT Loss, pair-to-pair Pair-to-pair FEXT Loss shall be measured for each wire-pair combination from both ends of the link under test. FEXT Loss measures the crosstalk disturbance on a wire pair at the opposite end (far-end) from which the transmitter emits the disturbing signal on the disturbing pair. FEXT is measured to compute ELFEXT B-9
27 0126-25
LAUSD Quality Assurance Guidelines Loss that must be evaluated and reported in the test results. ELFEXT measures the relative strength of the far-end crosstalk disturbance relative to the attenuated signal that arrives at the end of the link. This test yields 24 wire pair combinations. ELFEXT is to be measured from 1 through the highest applicable frequency and the maximum step size for FEXT Loss measurements shall not exceed the maximum step size defined in the draft standard as in Table 2, column 2. Minimum test result documentation (summary results): Identify the wire pair combination that exhibits the worst-case margin and the wire pair combination that exhibits the worst value for ELFEXT. These wire pairs must be identified for the tests performed from each end. Each reported case shall include the frequency at which it occurs as well as the test limit value at this frequency. B.11.7 PSELFEXT Loss Power Sum ELFEXT is a calculated parameter that combines the effect of the FEXT disturbance from three wire pairs on the fourth one. This test yields 8 wire-pair combinations. Each wire-pair is evaluated from 1 MHz through the highest applicable frequency in frequency increments that do not exceed the maximum step size defined in the draft standard as shown in Table 2, column 2. Minimum test result documentation (summary results): Identify the wire pair that exhibits the worst case margin and the wire pair that exhibits the worst value for PSELFEXT. These wire pairs must be identified for the tests performed from each end. Each reported case shall include the frequency at which it occurs as well as the test limit value at this frequency.
B.l1.8 Return Loss Return Loss (RL) measures the total energy reflected on each wire pair. Return Loss is to be measured from both ends of the link-under-test for each wire pair. This parameter is also to be measured from 1 through the highest applicable frequency in increments that do not exceed the maximum step size defined in the draft standard as shown in Table 2, column 2. Minimum test result documentation (summary results): Identify the wire pair that exhibits the worst case margin and the wire pair that exhibits the worst value for Return Loss. These wire pairs must be identified for the tests performed from each end. Each reported case shall include the frequency at which it occurs as well as the test limit value at this frequency. B.11.9 Propagation Delay Propagation delay is the time required for the signal to travel from one end of the link to the other.
8-10
27 0126-26
LAUSD Quality Assurance Guidelines This measurement is to be performed for each of the four wire pairs. Minimum test result documentation (summary results): Identify the wire pair with the worst case propagation delay. The report shall include the propagation delay value measured as well as the test limit value. B.ll.lO
Delay Skew
As defined in ANSIIEIA-568-C.2, this parameter shows the difference in propagation delay between the four wire pairs. The pair with the shortest propagation delay is the reference pair with a delay skew value of zero. Minimum test result documentation (summary results): Identify the wire pairs with the worst-case propagation Delay skew. The report shall include the Delay skew value measured as well as the test limit value. B.ll.ll
ACR (Attenuation to crosstalk ratio)
This parameter is not required by TIA standards but may be expected in order to obtain the premise wiring manufacturer's warranty. ACR provides an indication of bandwidth for the two wire-pair network applications. ACR is a computed parameter that is analogous to ELFEXT and expresses the signal to noise ratio for a two wire-pair system. This calculation yields 12 combinations- six from each end of the link. Minimum test result documentation (summary results): Identify the wire pair combination that exhibits the worst-case margin and the wire pair combination that exhibits the worst value for ACR. These wire pair combinations must be identified for the tests performed from each end. Each reported case shall include the frequency at which it occurs as well as the test limit value at this frequency. B.11.12
PSACR
The Power Sum version of ACR is based on PSNEXT and takes into account the combined NEXT disturbance of adjacent wire pairs on each individual pair. This calculation yields 8 combinations - one for each wire pair from both ends ofthe link. Minimum test result documentation (summary results): Identify the wire pair that exhibits the worst case margin and the wire pair that exhibits the worst value for PSACR. These wire pairs must be identified for the tests performed from each end. Each reported case shall include the frequency at which it occurs as well as the test limit value at this frequency.
B -11
27 0126-27
LA USD Quality Assurance Guidelines
8.12 Site
Communications Wiring Electrical Test Form
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Date - - - - - - - - - - Q/A Rep(s)
Building and Communications Room Nwnbers i
MICROTEST SAVE ID
CABLE TESTED ROOM/DROP#
PASS/FAIL
COMMENTs.:_ IF FAILED (Wire Map, Length, Attenuation, Continuity, or NEXtTests)
B-12
27 0126-28
LAUSD Quality Assurance Guidelines
APPENDIX C - FIBER OPTIC CABLE PERFORMANCE TESTS C.l
Overview of Cable Tests ANSI/EIA-568-C states, "The optical fiber cable construction shall consist of 50/125 mm or 62.5/125 mm multimode optical fibers or singlemode optical fibers, or a combination of these media." Multimode fiber shall have a graded-index optical fiber waveguide with nominal 50/125 fliD for installations following specification 27 1014, or 62.5/125 fliD core/ cladding diameter for installations following specification 27 1013. Primary and secondary backbone cable testing shall be equivalent to backbone cabling as defined in ANSI/EIA-568-C, such as cabling interconnecting telecommunications closets, equipment cabinets, and entrance facilities. Therefore, the Owner's Quality Assurance Team shall perform the following interrelated tests:
C.2
1.
Verification of multi-mode fiber optic cable installations.
2.
Verification of single-mode fiber optic cable installations.
3.
Electronic measurement of the distance and equivalent attenuation per kilometer (km) to verify minimum data transmission capacity per specification.
4.
Total link attenuation measurements.
Test Equipment The following test equipment shall be used: 1.
Fluke DSP 1800, tester with copper single mode and multi-mode power meter and light source heads or equal
2.
Fluke, DTX 1800, OptiFiber Optical Time Domain Reflectometer (OTDR) Module, or equal.
C.2.1 Cabling Distance The combined primary (450m) and secondary (lOrn) backbone multimode fiber strands shall primarily be utilized by the network electronics up to 550 meters and testing shall conform to OFSTP-14A. The Singlemode strands shall be required where cabling the backbone distance exceeds 550 meters and testing shall conform to OFSTP-7.
C.3
Test Procedures For multi-mode fiber the Owner's Quality Assurance Team shall use the Fluke DTX 1800 to test the length and total attenuation at both the 850 nm and 1300 nm wavelengths in each direction (bi-directionally). If the test fails, the Owner's Quality Assurance Team may request a repeat test using the OTDR to assess the failure point and address corrective actions. (See Methods A and B attached.)
c -1 27 0126-29
LAUSD Quality Assurance Guidelines For single-mode fiber, the Owner's Quality Assurance Team shall use a Fluke DTX 1800 with single mode test heads. The specific nanometer wavelength(s) at which the single-mode fiber shall be tested (i.e., 1310 nm and/or 1550 nm) shall be determined based on the length of the fiber cable being tested.
C.3.1 Cable Distance Using the Fluke DTX 1800, the Owner's Quality Assurance Team shall determine the overall fiber optic cable length to ensure the cabling distance is within the maximum allowable length.
C.3.2 Attenuation ANSIIEIA-568-C, indicates that components compliant with this standard, the single performance parameter necessary for performance testing is link attenuation. The backbone optical fiber cabling link segment should be tested in one direction at both operating wavelengths, to account for attenuation deltas associated with wavelength. The Owner's Quality Assurance Team shall use the Fluke 1800 or OTDR to measure the attenuation due to fiber optic cable and connectors. The Owner's Quality Assurance Team shall test and record attenuation at both 850nm/1300nm for each Multi-mode and 131 Onm/1550nm for Single-mode fiber optic strand respectively terminated under this initiative. These tests shall be performed at each communications cabinet and from the MDF cabinet, as required.
C.3.3 Information Transmission Capacity The fiber optic cable is assumed to be within the allowable attenuation per kilometer as specified in ANSIIEIA-568-C.3. The Owner's Quality Assurance Team shall presume the transmission capacity of the cable is within specification.
C.4
Data Reporting and Accuracy The Owner's Quality Assurance Team shall report loss measurement results, with locations and wavelength identifications, to the Owner in accordance with EWTIA OFSTP-14 and OFSTP-7. The contractor shall provide copies of the test results in native format to the Owner's Quality Assurance team at the conclusion of the structured cabling testing or any time during the testing process.
c- 2 27 0126-30
LA USD Quality Assurance Guidelines C.4.1 Fiber Optic Cable Installation Test Form- Fluke DTX 1800 and OTDR
QIA Rep(s)
Site FlukeDTX 1800 Serial #:
850
Fluke DTX 1800 Location Near End TFBM Serial#:
OTDR Serial#:
1-b1ue 2-orange
850
3-green
850
4-brown
850 850
5-slate
850
6-white 7-red
850 850
8-black 9-yellow
850
21yellow
1300 850
10-violet
22-violet
1300 850
11-rose
23-rose
1300
1300 850
20-black
1300
1300 850
19-red
1300
1300 850
18-white
1300
1300 850
17-slate
1300
1300 850
16-brown
1300
1300 850
15-green
1300
1300 850
14orange
1300
1300 850
13-blue
1300
1300 850
Distant End Location
850
1300 850
Form:
Distant End TFBM Serial #:
1300 850
Q/A Review Pass I Fail
Date
12-aqua
850
24-aqua
C-3
27 0126-31
LAUSD Quality Assurance Guidelines
1300
13oo
1
1
C.4.2 Fiber Optic Cable Installation Test Form-Power Meter and Light Source Q/A Site - - - - - Rep(s)
--------
Date
-----
Power Meter Serial#:
Power Meter Location
Light Source Serial#:
Light Source Location
Wave
leO:gt' h .. (om) 1310
Stran d
1-blue
2orang e 3green 4brown
Comment s ;
lengt l;t (om) 1310
Stran
Lengt
d
ll'tm>
(dB)
Dis k
Comment s
tt 13blue
1310
14orang e
1310
15green
1310
16brown
1310
17slate
1550 6white
1550 1310
Dis k
Tota I AttJI
1550 5-slate
1550 1310
Wave·
1550
1550 1310
-------------
1550
1550 1310
--------------------
1550
1550 1310
(dB)
tt
1550 1310
Lengt h(m)
Tota I Attn
Q/A Review Fonn: Pass I Fail
1310
18white
1550 7-red
1310
19-red
C-4
27 0126-32
LAUSD Quality Assurance Guidelines
1550 1310
8black
1550 1310
9yello
1550 1310 1550 1310
1550 1310 1550 1310 1550
10violet 11rose 12aqua
21yello w
w
1550 1310
20black
1550 1310 1550 1310 1550 1310
22violet 23rose 24aqua
1550
C-5 27 0126-33
) l
)
LAUSD Quality Assurance Guidelines APPENDIX D - NETWORK EQUIPMENT PERFORMANCE TESTS
D.l
Overview of Equipment Tests These equipment tests verify the operation of the network components (e.g., switches, and routers) either purchased or provided for use as part of the particular project. This plan addresses industry-standard TCPIIP tests that collectively address Network layer connectivity and IP packet path routing; it does not address network performance (i.e., total throughput capabilities) tests. The Owner's Quality Assurance Team shall perform the following interrelated tests: 1.
Spanning Tree Root Bridge identification test. Spanning tree protocol is one of the most important layer two protocols at work in switches. Spanning Tree ensures that no loops occur in a network by a designated root bridge. The root bridge is a central point of a spanning-tree configuration and it controls how the protocol operates. It is best practice to configure the core switch to be the root bridge. Run the following command on the core switch to identify it is set as the root bridge: Show spanning-tree summary.
2.
Internet Control and Message Protocol (ICMP) Ping Test. This test verifies the Network layer for connectivity by using Ether-type frame pings to reach IP target addresses and obtain or verify four results-the target IP address, the local media access control (MAC), the number of responses, and the response time. The target IP addresses are the upstream and/or downstream gateway IP addresses based on the device's connectivity in the network. The source is the management console on the device. Each test includes two steps, if necessary, as follows: a.
Obtain the four results by performing an address resolution protocol (ARP) for the target IP address and verifying the ping.
If test 1 is unsuccessful, obtain the four results by executing an ARP for the default router, then use the acquired MAC address to determine the IP address, send an ICMP echo request and monitor for the ICMP reply. Trace Route/Path Discover. This test determines the path IP packets follow, and reports each router encountered in the path. Testing elicits an ICMP TIME-EXCEEDED response from each router encountered. Each hop is tested three times to help identify changing routes. b.
3.
4.
Configuration Test. This test verifies that each new network port is operational. Perform an ICMP ping from each port not previously tested, ensuring each port has a link light indicating port operability.
5.
VLAN configuration verification. Inspect VLAN configuration and port assignments to be matching the provided documentation. Inspect VLAN trunking, and verify forwarding state of required VLANs on VLAN trunks.
D -1
27 0126-34
LA USD Quality Assurance Guidelines
D.2
Test Equipment The following test equipment shall be used:
D.3
1.
Fluke 685 Enterprise LAN Meter or equivalent.
2.
Computer with TCP/IP protocol stack, TELNET application and data capture software (optional).
Test Methodology The basic test methodology is to verify connectivity from user access ports through and within the installed intra-network to the WAN Router. Overall connectivity is verified by testing to and from points in the network. Site testing reflects the specific switch(s) and router(s) implemented at the site.
D.4
Test Hierarchy for Connectivity (Pings, Trace Routes and Telnets) Table D.4-1 contains the network equipment performance tests and corresponding descriptions.
Table D.4-1. Network Equipment Performance Tests
Ping from Wall outlet WAN Connect the computer into the network via the wall plate, obtain DHCP IP or Internet location address and perform a ping to a known IP address or URL outside the campus network.
D.5
Network Equipment Configuration Verification and Performance Tests The Owner's Quality Assurance Team shall follow the test sequence shown. The following sample form lists tests to be performed at this site. For the set of Network Equipment Performance Test forms tailored to the individual communications cabinets, please see enclosed file Network Checklists.doc.
D.5.1 Network Equipment Configuration Verification Form Site
-----------------------
Date _ _ _ _ _ _ Tester(s)
Building and Communications Cabinet Numbers
Ethernet Switch
VLAN I STP/ port activation/Trunking
D-2
27 0126-35
LAUSD Quality Assurance Guidelines VLAN I STP/ port activation!Trunking
Ethernet Switch Router/ switch
L3
IP Routing/ SNMP/ Access-lists
Router/ switch
L3
IP Routing/ SNMP/ Access-lists
D.5.2 Network Equipment Performance Test Form Site
-----------------------
Date
--------------
Tester(s)
-------------------
Building and Communications Cabinet Numbers (a packet loss in excess of I percent during ping test is not acceptable and is considered a FAIL)
TEST
DESTINATION ADDRESS/LOCATION''
S,OURCE . ADDRESS/LOCATION
PASS
FAIL
Ping from Wall outlet to WAN Router location Trace route from Wall outlet to WAN Router location
D-3
27 0126-36
LAUSD Quality Assurance Guidelines APPENDIX E- PHYSICAL CONFIGURATION AUDIT
E.l
Overview of Physical Connectivity Audit A Physical Connectivity Audit is completed comparing the vendor supplied Equipment Inventory List (ElL) against the Cabinet Equipment Survey generated by the test team at Quality Assurance. This appendix provides the detailed audit of the physical equipment and materials installed under this expansion effort.
E.2
Physical Connectivity Audit Quality Assurance Review lists The following sample form shows the general information to be documented for a standard Cabinet Equipment Survey.
Site
----------------------
Date ________ Tester(s) __________
Building and Communications Cabinet Numbers
E -1
27 0126-37
LAUSD Quality Assurance Guidelines APPENDIX F- CABLE DOCUMENTATION SPECIFICATION
F.l
Documentation.
F.l.l The test result information for each link shall be recorded in the memory of the field tester upon completion of the test. F.1.2 Individual test reports shall be submitted in hardcopy and electronic format. Hand-written test reports are not acceptable. F.l.3 The test results records saved by the tester in .flw format shall be kept in .flw format for opening at anytime with Fluke Networks LinkWare software, version 6 or newer. It may also be transferred into, an excel spreadsheet, pdf, or zipped in a .RAR file that allows for the maintenance, review and archiving of these test records. A guarantee must be made that the measurement results are transferred to the PC unaltered, i.e., "as saved in the tester" at the end of each test and that these results cannot be modified at a later time. F.l.4 Hardcopy reports may be submitted in labeled three ring binders with an attached affidavit verifying passing execution of tests. For large installations electronic reports with hardcopy summaries are preferred. Hardcopy summary reports shall contain the following information on each row of the report: circuit ID, test specification used, length, and date of test and pass/fail result. F.1.5 Electronic reports are to be submitted in CD format. If proprietary software is used, disk or CD shall contain any necessary software required to view test results. If the results are delivered in a standard format like Excel, Access, CSV files, etc., then software to read these files is not needed. Electronic reports must be accompanied by a Certificate signed by an authorized representative of the Contractor warranting the truth and accuracy of the electronic report. Certificate must reference traceable circuit numbers that match the electronic record. F.1.6 Test reports shall include the test measurement information specified in Section 5 for each cabling element tested, in addition to:
F.l.7 Cable manufacturer, cable model number/type and NVP. F.l.8 Tester manufacturer, model, serial number, hardware version and software Ver. F.1.9 Circuit ID number. F.l.lO Auto test specification used. F.l.ll Identification of the tester interface. F.l.l2 Overall pass/fail indication. F.l.13 Date and time oftest.
Table F.2 Cable Test Parameter Preferences
F -1
27 0126-38
LAUSD Quality Assurance Guidelines When reading the printed test result output, the following parameters must be shown with the associated cable test.
.r
Level (liE) Category 5 E Tester
69-
Level (III)
69-
Category 6
72
'~~ri~i:~~~~~~~ ~i~~{~~"I{f~ ;il~~"']:;:~\
Cat SE
Cat5E Perm link
n/a
n/a
n/a
n/a
n/a
Cat6
Cat 6 Perm link
n/a
n/a
n/a
n/a
n/a
72
Tester Power Meter Horizontal MM FlO@ 850nm/1300nm
n/a
62.51125 Mnfr
568B Horizontal
Multimod e 50 or 62.5
1.4920@ 1 jumper 1300nm method
BiDirectiona I
n/a
Power Meter Backbone MM FlO@ 850nm/1300nm
n/a
62.51125 Mnfr
568B Backbone
Multimod e 50 or 62.5
1.4920@ 1 jumper 1300nm method
BiDirectiona I
n/a
Power Meter Backbone SM FlO@ 1310nm/1550n m
n/a
SM Mnfr
1000 Base -LX
Single Mode
1.4640 @1300n m
1 jumper method
BiDirectiona I
n/a
OTDR Horizontal MM FlO@ 850nm/1300nm
n/a
n/a
n/a
Single Mode
n/a
n/a
UniDirectiona I
OTDR BackboneMM FlO@ 850nm/1300nm
n/a
n/a
n/a
Single Mode
n/a
n/a
UniDirectiona I
OTDR Backbone SM FlO@ 1310nm/1550n m
n/a
n/a
n/a
Single Mode
n/a
n/a
UniDirectiona 1
NOTE: The length of the cable is the variable of which the Power Meter and light source determines the expected dB loss for Backbone cable tests.
Table F.3 Allowable Distance per Fiber Length
F-2
27 0126-39
LAUSD Quality Assurance Guidelines Use this table as a guideline to compare references for dB loss in the installed Backbone Fiber. Total loss includes .75 dB loss per mated connector pair.
JH~~~!~~-~~ si'rigleiiu)~e Distaiii({': ·:: fi\i~(fi#{cid~. :dBLo~s.'n_· _ -~L_._--•(»_s_s . '··' ~·' ···-;
" ·\'•
.'~
:.· .. •
.
.,
. ~-:
.
. .' .
.
<
, ...,
-_t.~a·.~- a_: _:~_·:ie_.,-. ~- .•- :_;_•.;_-Mdu_~ -_~-_: ._! ·.'_ti._-·;~_-!ns·;.:_sb_'·_-~•:_._e_·:~_-,;_- :_ :._- ·,~.- :_-.·,f ._: '_m :_~B-_ ,-._·: _·- ~_- :_·~- -~ o':_, :_~ ,s.-_ '_s~.- :_~i ._d - ~.- · - ~ - -_; :-
,·DF_iiS,b __ _
·n::c-Ce
_._-B ______
._
_
·_j_:Ds __
___-_..
_
DU
_._ ._ ._
.
__-_-_:____
LJ __
.,.
100'
1.6
1.53
1200'
2.7
1.86
200'
1.7
1.56
1300'
2.8
1.89
300'
1.8
1.59
1400'
2.9
1.92
400'
1.9
1.62
1500'
3.0
1.95
500'
2.0
1.65
1600'
3.1
1.98
600'
2.1
1.68
1700'
3.2
2.01
700'
2.2
1.71
1800'
3.3
2.04
800'
2.3
1.74
1900'
3.4
2.07
900'
2.4
1.77
2000'
3.5
2.10
1000'
2.5
1.80
2100'
3.6
2.13
1100'
2.6
1.83
2200'
3.7
2.16
END OF APPENDICES
F-3
27 0126-40
111001
•
SECTION 27 5116
PUBLIC ADDRESS AND INTERCOMMUNICATION SYSTEMS PART 11.01
SUMMARY A.
• B.
•
GENERAL
Principal items of Work in this Section include but are not limited to: 1.
Centralized racks, as indicated on the Drawings, containing a fully operational public address (PA) system, intercommunication system, and UPS. Features required include all-call paging, zone paging, class-tone activation, intercom access to individual speakers, phone to phone communications, radio and CD audio distribution, and classroom phone outside line access to 911. These features are accessible from the PBX, main PA phone, classroom phone or audio microphone. System shall also provide for interfacing with a master clock system for a class change signaling system, and with a Fire Alarm system for override of the tone signaling, PA audio, or both.
2.
Conductors, conduits, and terminal strips, including interface cabling to PBX system, autonomous system overrides, Master Clock system and the Fire Alarm system.
3.
Provide labor, engineering, design, testing, materials, supervision, tools, mounting hardware, cable management, software and components to provide a complete operable installation. The system shall be installed in compliance with project documents, applicable codes, manufacturer's published recommendations, and industry standards to deliver a system that meets standards of quality and functionality.
4.
Provide services on Project site including specified connectivity for administration areas, classrooms, computer and science laboratories, libraries, auditoriums, multipurpose rooms, P.E. areas, quad area, other instructional areas, and work areas as indicated in Project Drawings.
Related Requirements: 1.
Division 01 - General Requirements.
2.
Section 26 0500: Common Work Results for Electrical.
3.
Section 26 0526: Grounding and Bonding.
4.
Section 26 0513: Basic Electrical Materials and Methods.
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES IDGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 PUBLIC ADDRESS AND INTERCOMMUNICATION SYSTEMS 27 5116-1
Ill 00 I
• C.
5.
Section 26 0519: Low Voltage Wires (600 Volt AC).
6.
Section 26 2416: Panelboards and Signal Terminal Cabinets.
7.
Section 28 3100: Fire Detection and Alarm.
8.
Section 27 5128: Public Address Systems (Auditoriums, Performing Art, M-P Rooms)(MS and HS).
Acronyms: DTMF IC LCD OAR PA PBX VFD LED SLC
1.02
SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS A.
•
•
Dual Tone Multiple Frequency Intercom Liquid Crystal Display Owner Authorized Representative Public Address Private Branch Exchange Vacuum Fluorescent Display Light Emitting Diode Small Learning Community
Intercommunication System: System shall be a combined public address and intercommunication system with UPS. I.
Communication hardware shall be furnished with the capacity for internal communication between operator and selected classrooms. Normal and emergency alerts from classroom telephones to the main office shall be annunciated by an alerting tone, appear on a wall-mounted administrative display located where most office staff can view at the same time, and identify the calling room's extension. These alerts shall function as described by the manufacturer. Calls shall be displayed in the order in which they are received and the additional calls stored in memory. The main operator shall be able to answer calls in sequence or out of sequence. Caution office staff during training about using any que-clearing commands without verifying the nature of each call. Dialed calls to classroom phones are initiated by ringing the classroom telephone. These phones shall have their ringer volume control locked in the maximum ring volume position. Dialed intercom calls to the classroom speaker are preannounced by an alert tone and repetitively beep during the connection. Ifthe classroom handset is lifted from its cradle and the conversation shall automatically transfer from the speaker to the classroom phone. Predetermination as to whether to ring the telephone or to permit talking over the speaker shall be user selectable when dialing. Signal switching for communication operations shall be accomplished by electronic methods.
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGHSCHOOL
10/01/2011 PUBLIC ADDRESS AND INTERCOMMUNICATION SYSTEMS 275116-2
111001
•
2.
Direct Dial Telephones: A direct-dial telephone system with electronic switching shall be furnished to accomplish the above description. The system control circuit shall be state-of-the-art design with modular plug-in printed circuit construction and advanced type technical mechanism. The central switching exchange shall utilize standard DTMF signaling for conformance with standard telephone practices.
3.
Administrative Telephones: Administrative telephone communication system shall provide the following minimum requirements: a.
b.
c.
••
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
•
Administrative control center shall be a standard pushbutton dialing telephone complete with solid state pre-tuned tone oscillators identical to those employed by public telephone companies. Central switching exchange shall be of the modular plug-in printed circuit board type, solid state sensing and logic, and shall also provide two-wire balance transmission complete with dial tone, automatic ringing and busy signal facilities. Central switching exchange shall be furnished with facilities for a minimum of 8 unrestricted, simultaneous, private telephone conversations between: 1) Administrative and administrative telephones 2) Administrative and staff telephones Staff and stafftelephones. 3) Capability as provided for direct dialing, private, two-way telephone communication between locations furnished with administrative telephone and staff telephone shall be provided. Capability as provided for any administrative telephone to transfer a call from another administrative telephone or any staff (classroom) telephones to any other telephone. Capabilities, as provided for the instantaneous distribution of emergency announcements simultaneously to all locations furnished with loudspeakers, by dialing a predetermined code number. Provisions for restricting access to the emergency announcements to certain administrative telephone. This shall be accomplished by the use of an authorized administrative telephone. Capabilities as provided for the origination of both normal and priority emergency calls from any staff station location shall be provided. Priority emergency calls shall take precedence over normal calls.
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 PUBLIC ADDRESS AND INTERCOMMUNICATION SYSTEMS 27 5116-3
111001
•
I.
J.
k.
l. m.
n.
•
o.
p.
•
Facilities as provided for answering calls registered in the readout by pressing a single response button. Provisions for instantaneous distribution of announcements to prescheduled groups of speakers from any location equipped with an administrative telephone. Provide an all-cancel function from an administrative telephone to cancel all classroom annunciated calls. Note: During training session, caution users to verify the nature of each call-in before clearing the que. Local diagnostic functions shall be provided to simplify maintenance. The system shall incorporate non-volatile memory for programs, which shall not be affected by the loss of line voltage. Central switch shall be designed to fit in any standard 19 inch rack-mounting. It shall be possible to remove individual circuit boards from the system for inspection and service without disturbing or disconnecting any exchange wiring. Analog PA shall remain operational when circuit boards are removed. Reasonable exceptions are permitted in the design phase (base effort). DTMF programming: Administrative telephone shall be able to distribute announcements to each individual speaker or (intercom), zone page a group of speakers, or distribute all-call. Audio level of the telephone intercommunication system shall be attained at sound levels sufficient to override typical ambient school noise levels and to provide for a satisfactory and serviceable system with a minimum of 70 dB isolation between PA and intercommunication signals. Upon notification from the Contractor, the OAR shall contact the Telecommunications Branch of LAUSD to arrange for ordering of necessary additions to the voice system to coincide with the completion ofthe installation of the PA or Intercom system. Any work to the PBX system will be provided by the Owner to encompass both hardware or software additions and any necessary programming, and is outside of the scope of this specification. The Telecommunications Branch will manage connections to the PBX voice system. Any vendor working on the telecommunications system must be pre-approved by the Telecommunications Branch pnor to any work commencmg.
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 PUBLIC ADDRESS AND lNTERCOMMUNICA TION SYSTEMS 27 5116-4
111001
•
B.
1.03
•
1.
Reproduction of speech shall be clear, high fidelity and with frequencies within range of system faithfully reproduced with no detectable noise, hum or distortion. The signal to noise ratio for the frequency range of 30 Hz to 20 kHz shall be a minimum of 90 dB.
2.
Reproduction shall be attained at sound levels sufficient to override noise levels typical for schools, to provide a thoroughly satisfactory and serviceable system with a minimum of 30 dB signal-to-noise ratio between public address program and background noise level of 65 to 70 dB.
SUBMITTALS A.
•
Public Address: Public address system reproduction shall provide the following minimum requirements:
Provide the following submittals: 1.
Material list: Submit a complete material list for the materials and products of this section. Each submittal shall be bound and shall contain an index organized vertically by assembly and item number and horizontally by columns. The first assembly shall be the major head end equipment. The leftmost column shall be the item number; next shall be the description, followed by the applicable specification section number, followed by the specified item, which is followed by the submitted item. The rightmost column shall be for notes, which shall be used to reference the reason for submitting items other than as specified.
2.
Product Data: Include Product Data sheets or catalog cut sheets for items listed in index. Data shall be clearly marked and noted to identify specific ranges, model numbers, sizes, and other pertinent data. Items shall be arranged in the same order as the index and if more than one item is indicated, the submitted items shall be highlighted or marked with an arrow. Product Data shall be sufficiently detailed to allow the Architect to review the product and to allow other trades to provide necessary coordination.
3.
Include in the Product Data list submission, copies of manufacturer certificates that the Contractor is an authorized distributor of the submitted manufacturer's products; and each member of the installation crew has been trained and certified in the installation of those products. Contractor shall submit proof that his or her company has a service organization capable of responding within 24 hours of receipt of written notification and resolution within one day.
4.
Contractor shall have completed at least five projects of equal scope to systems described herein and shall have been in the business of
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 PUBLIC ADDRESS AND INTERCOMMUNICATION SYSTEMS 27 5116-5
111001
•
supplying and installing specified type of systems for at least five years.
5.
B.
•
•
Provide a letter from the Manufacturer assuring the availability of spare parts common to proposed system for a period no less than five years on components.
Shop Drawings: Shop Drawings shall indicate the following : 1.
Drawn to scale, details of racks, consoles and cabinets with designations, elevations, dimensions, doors, barriers, mounting details, catalog number of locks, finishes and color. Provide a dimensioned detail of console nameplate including school name, address, and power load. Indicate manufacturer's part numbers for controls, switches, connectors and indicators. Provide a complete set of drawings of wiring diagram for each rack, instrument wiring and schematic diagrams of circuits of equipment.
2.
Detailed drawings as to interfaces with equipment furnished by others including number of wires, termination requirements, input or output voltages, input or output signals and other required coordination items, items including point to point connection details for devices and equipment,
3.
Provide a terminal block layout for the main public address terminal cabinet indicating the locations of terminal blocks for cables from the field, the public address rack, PBX, and as otherwise required. Indicate the typical lay down for each cable type and the number of blocks and space required. Include a front elevation indicating cabinet dimensions, make, location and capacity of equipment, size of gutters, type of mounting, finish, and catalog number of locks. General layout of internal devices, wiring drawings with wire numbers and device connections, vendor cut sheets of devices in enclosure and bill of materials listing description, manufacturer, part number, and quantity of items shall be included. Indicate terminal cabinet layouts for remote terminal cabinets as required.
4.
Power load of public address system and UPS operational time calculations shall be separately calculated and included with Shop Drawing submittal. Provide cabling and conduit from rack-mounted UPS to one of the MDF cabinets. Notify OAR to contact lTD for SNMP connection from the UPS to the LA USD network when system is ready.
5.
Shop drawings shall indicate equipment locations, wiring and schematics, details, panel configurations, sizes and a point-to-point wiring diagram of circuits. Shop drawings shall indicate interfaces to equipment furnished by others, identifying numbers of wires,
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/0112011 PUBLIC ADDRESS AND INTERCOMMUNICATION SYSTEMS 275116-6
111001
•
termination requirements, input or output voltages, input or output signals and other pertinent details. Responsibility for each end of interfaces shall be noted on shop drawings.
C.
•
•
1.04
6.
Submit Drawings prepared, signed, and sealed by structural engineer licensed in the State of California. Details shall be provided indicating the proposed means of support and attachment of wall and floor mounted racks. Calculations shall be based on the maximum load rating of the cabinet by the manufacturer per CBC seismic environment requirements, not the weight at time of occupancy.
7.
Provide Shop Drawings, in the same size as the Record Drawings. Shop Drawings shall be prepared in the latest version of AutoCad with three- CD-ROM electronic copies submitted along with one set offull sized Shop Drawings.
8.
Installation and coordination drawings for items in other sections shall be included with submittal of Shop Drawings. Submit blue line copies and one reproducible copy of installation and coordination drawings.
Sample Materials: Provide samples of material and equipment as required by the Architect. If samples are requested, they shall be submitted within ten days from the date of request.
CODES AND STANDARDS A.
Complete installation shall meet or exceed the latest edition of following standards. 1.
EIA/TIA-568: Commercial building telecommunications wmng standard.
2.
EIA/TIA-569: Commercial building telecommunications pathways and spaces.
3.
EIA/TIA-606: Administration standard for telecommunications infrastructure of commercial buildings.
4.
EIA/TIA-607: Commercial building grounding and bonding requirements for telecommunications.
5.
CCR Part 2- California Building Code (CBC)
6.
CCR Part 3- California Electrical Code. (CEC)
7.
ANSI, ASTM, UL, NEMA, IEEE and FCC standards as applicable.
8.
BICSI Telecommunications Distribution Methods Manual, current edition.
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
standard
for
10/01/2011 PUBLIC ADDRESS AND INTERCOMMUNICATION SYSTEMS 27 5116-7
111001
•
•
•
1.05
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A.
The Public Address or Intercommunications system shall be comprised of two separate inter-operating systems which shall provide redundant means of performing an all-call public address function and class tone distribution. Besides all-call and telephone functions, only the softwareprogrammable system provides zone paging, zoned class-change tone distribution, two-way loudspeaker intercommunication, AM/FM radio-CD audio distribution and tone choices. The analog PA system only provides an emergency all-speaker public address from a main office microphone with feedback elimination circuitry, and an all-speaker class tone distribution activated by a service switch. Both public addresses systems shall be furnished with totally separate active electronic components. It shall be possible to remove power from components in one system while retaining the functionality of the other system. Both systems shall share a common, rack-mounted UPS with a SNMP, centrally monitored, network connection. Systems not providing public address and class tone distribution redundancy are not permitted 1.
As a minimum a two hundred and fifty (250) watt public address amplifier shall be provided for the analog PA system. The total wattage load of all the speakers in the system shall be measured to determine if additional two hundred and fifty (250) watts or higher wattage public address amplifiers are needed. The spare wattage capacity for each public address system amplifier shall be a minimum of 33 percent of the total wattage load for each amplifier at the time of occupancy.
2.
Provide antifeedback circuitry or rack mounted feedback eliminator in PA rack. No feedback shall be detected from the fixed volume, always-hot microphone.
3.
Combine networks shall be used to convert stereo auxiliary inputs unless the dual input aux input of a preamp module provides this.
4.
A microphone shall be installed in the main office in a lockable foldup wall cabinet which also contains an Am/Fm/single CD player. This microphone shall be "always hot" - activating a microphone switch will connect it directly to the analog public address system, permitting an emergency all-call announcement to be performed. A volume control for this microphone may be provided only if the minimum setting is still audible.
5.
A public address administrative telephone shall also be installed in the main the office, in each SLC, and in each Academy on the school site and terminate in the PA rack. Each shall use power originating from the PA UPS so they will be operational during a building power outage. The paging trunk outputs from the PBX shall be connected
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR& P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 PUBLIC ADDRESS AND INTERCOMMUNICATION SYSTEMS 27 5116-8
111001
•
to unassigned phone ports of the programmable P A system, with PA ports programmed high enough for all-call, and labeled.
•
6.
Program-All distribution through all loudspeakers, outdoor speakers, auditorium system speakers, gymnasium speakers, and multi-purpose room speakers through a relay control. Program-All shall furnish full priority over switching between amplifier and speakers of central control system, except as specified. Program-All shall obtain signal sources as selected.
7.
For each autonomous system, a selector switch on the custom control panel shall be provided to automatically override autonomous system speakers.
8.
Automatic class change signaling system shall include manual controls to select program and to do all call. A panel mounted in the P.A. rack shall include at a minimum a selector switch to provide selection of three programs and a separate switch to do all call. The number of class change signaling systems shall be determined by the number of small learning communities or other academies at the site. The Public Address and Intercommunication system shall be able to support as many class change signaling needed, by providing a custom panel which can provide additional signal zones and tones. The design shall include the use of additional signal generators in order to provide different tone signals and the selection of three programs and a separate switch to do all call for each of the additional Learning Communities or other academies. The class change signaling selector switches shall be wired to the clock program controller for selection of one of three programs for each independent Learning Community or Academy. The selected program shall be distributed over the microprocessor based loud speaking intercom and P.A. system. At school sites where there are no independent Learning Communities or Academies, and a master clock remote input panel zone selector has been installed, typically in the main office, the automatic class change signaling system control on the PA rack shall be bypassed. a.
B.
•
In Middle and High schools, the class change signaling system shall be programmed to include dressing and cleanup tones for gymnasiums and shop zones.
In Middle and High schools, the master clock will transmit three contact closures from three separate relays per schedule. The other system shall be a microprocessor based, DTMF tone controlled modular loud speaking intercom and public address system. The intercommunication system shall provide communication between classroom telephones, speakers, administrative phones and P ABX system and shall operate in conjunction
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 PUBLIC ADDRESS AND INTERCOMMUNICATION SYSTEMS 27 5116-9
111001
•
with Public Address equipment. features and capabilities: I.
The system shall be available in a rack mounted card cage configuration with a printed circuit backplane or a card shelf with a modular shelf assembly with through plug-in circuit cards. The processor card, speaker control cards, telephone control cards and PBX telephone interface cards shall plug into card connectors on the backplane or into a modular shelf assembly with through plug-in circuit cards.
2.
Speaker cards shall be installed in card cages or card shelves. Each speaker or telephone card can control sixteen or twenty-four speaker circuits depending on the system. Provide speaker and telephone cards for each switch bank as needed.
3.
DTMF tone capable cards shall be installed in any one-card cage or modular shelf. Each card can control sixteen to twenty-four call stations, DTMF telephones or display phones in any combination. Provide one station card for the first switch bank to allow connection ofthe system control display phone. Provide additional station cards for emergency call buttons or phones.
4.
One relay card or more per switch bank and one or more analog cards are required on switch bank. These relay cards are connected to the printed circuit backplane directly or with ribbon cables. The relays in the relay card allow the system to seize control of speakers and station circuits as required. Control voltage to the relays may be interrupted to drop out system functions and give the intercom or program control panel and associated equipment priority. The relay card is the only item common to both systems. It contains no active circuitry. Each relay card has provisions for attachment of an external power amplifier if required.
5.
A power or program panel shall be provided to supply the manufacturer's specified power for the analog speaker cards, telephone cards and for other components in the system. The power supply of the DTMF controlled system shall be independent of the switch bank based Public Address and Intercom System. It shall also be provided with a three channel auxiliary program input chassis into which three modules of various types may be installed. These modules shall include microphone pre-amplifiers; transformer couples line pre-amplifiers, microphone, and telephone paging modules, a multiple tone generator, and a FM tuner module. Three outputs from the auxiliary program input chassis shall be connected to the backplane where their programs may be selected for distribution by the microprocessor-based system.
•
•
The system shall provide the following
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR& P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 PUBLIC ADDRESS AND INTERCOMMUNICATION SYSTEMS 27 5116-10
111001
•
•
•
6.
One DTMF based control console administrative telephone with an LCD display shall be installed in the main office in each SLC and in each Academy. It shall be possible to program and control microprocessor-based equipment with this control console, if this feature is provided by the manufacturer. It shall also be possible to make zone pages and all call pages to assign programs to any or all speakers, to assign individual speakers to time and page zones and to make loud speaking intercom calls.
7.
An external 250-watt power amplifier shall be provided for the last switch bank, or ofthe last 2 switch banks if required.
8.
Telephones: System shall be ADA compliant and utilize DTMF based, 2554 type wall mounted or 2500 type desk phones. Wall phones shall be fully modular. System shall automatically transfer an intercom call made to a loudspeaker to the associated intercom telephone when the phone is taken off hook.
9.
Emergency Calls: System shall posses an emergency call feature, which may be activated by either one of the three following methods: dialing * * and hanging up, by four or more flash-hooks within a two second interval or lift the phone off the hook and wait for a configured length of time (typically 15 or 30 seconds). Emergency calls shall appear at the top of the answer queue and shall ring with a distinctive ring cadence on the designated administrative station or wall display unit.
10.
Wall Display Unit: System shall be furnished with only one wall display unit, which displays the time and call-in information. Emergency calls take priority and flash "HELP", "E" or display station number. Information shall be displayed on LED, VFD, or LCD segments and shall be accompanied by distinct tones for emergency, normal, and call waiting originations. Tone level shall be adjustable. The information from telephones installed in the Public Address system shall be displayed on only one wall display installed at the main office. (In some systems the emergency call will not appear until the display phone line is no longer being used).
11.
Privacy Feature: System shall have a privacy feature, which renders impossible unannounced monitoring of intercom conversations from the PA or IC rack, administrative telephones or other intercom station.
12.
Channels: A minimum of eight channels of intercommunication shall be provided together with the Public Address System.
13.
Loop Start Trunk Ports: System shall provide intercom system dial tone for loop start trunk ports from the P ABX via Intercom station
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 PUBLIC ADDRESS AND INTERCOMMUNICATION SYSTEMS 27 5116-11
111001
•
•
•
ports or telephone adapter modules. PABX based DTMF phones shall hear a beep and then receive PA or IC dial tone. It shall be possible to assign various levels of intercom capability to these ports via intercom system programming. These ports shall allow calls from the PABX to individual intercom stations or to access page functions. The Intercom station ports or telephone adapter modules shall have transformer based isolation circuits to protect both P A or IC and PABX from harmful transient signals that may be present in the lines. Each Intercom station port or telephone adapter module shall use optical isolators to detect the 90 volt ring signal from PABX station ports. In middle schools and high schools, a minimum of four loop start trunk ports from the PABX via intercom station ports or telephone adapter modules, shall be connected. Two such circuits shall be connected for primary centers and elementary schools. 14.
Interface Modules: System shall be furnished with a telephone interface module to provide up to eight DTMF based telephone ports, which are compatible with 2500 Series, PABX station ports. System shall be provided to allow up to eight simultaneous calls from the intercom system to PABX connected instruments, or to outside lines. These ports shall allow calls from the intercom system to the PABX and shall appear transparent to the PABX. Each port requires one telephone cable pair. Four such circuits shall be connected to the PABX at time of installation. Circular or linear hunt shall not interfere with P ABX to PA or IC interface.
15.
Intercoms: System shall provide 2554 or 2500 series telephone in rooms.
16.
Provision shall be furnished to connect up to six separate time zone schedule controllers to the microprocessor-controlled system. When a contact closure is provided by a remote time controller, speakers assigned to the time zone will sound a passing tone of standard tone and duration.
17.
The Public Address System shall be configured in such a way as to prevent tones initiated automatically or manually from the Public Address console and manually from any telephone when the Fire Alarm Control Panel is in alarm. See standard detai I SO 5.14 for Fire Alarm Control Panel to Public Address System physical interface requirements. An additional separate circuit shall also be required to inhibit loudspeaker audio outputs when another separate relay contact closure occurs from the Fire Alarm system. This second closure shall also require activating activation of the muting relay circuits to autonomous PA systems.
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR& P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 PUBLIC ADDRESS AND INTERCOMMUNICATION SYSTEMS 27 5116-12
111001
•
18.
1.06
•
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
Work shall conform to CCR, Title 24 Part 3, Basic Electrical Regulation and National Electrical Code, latest edition.
B.
Only a qualified Contractor holding licenses required by legally constituted authorities having jurisdiction over the work, shall do the work.
C.
Persons skilled in trade represented by work, and in accordance with applicable building codes, shall install system in accordance with best trade practice.
D.
Work shall be performed by a Contractor that has completed at least five school systems of equal scope to system described herein and shall have been engaged in business of supplying and installing specified type of systems for at least five years. Contractor shall maintain a fully equipped service organization capable of furnishing repair service to equipment
E.
Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are currently manufacturer certified, thoroughly trained and experienced on the necessary crafts and completely familiar with the specified requirements and methods needed for the proper performance of the work.
F.
Coordinate cable runs, and rack equipment locations with the Owner's Authorized Representative during the initial design of the cable installation. Contractor and OAR must agree as to the final location of devices and the cable plant design.
G.
Provide technicians and tools required to participate in Owners Quality Assurance Testing as detailed in Attachment "A" of this specification. 1.
1.07
Items on check list of Attachment "A" will be examined as a minimum at the Public Address Head End, terminal cabinets, ground vaults and classrooms. Should the examination show deficiencies related to items in the checklist, Owners acceptance testing will be discontinued until corrections have been made. When the Contractor has completed the corrections, a subsequent Quality Assurance test shall be initiated. This procedure is in addition to the system functionality testing required in Article 3.03 below.
WARRANTY A.
•
Central Intercom Switch: Central intercom switch shall fit in standard 19-inch mounting rack. Circuit boards shall be removable from system for inspection and service without disturbing or disconnecting exchange wiring. Units and electronics switches shall be engineered to fit in one 65-inch rack (exchange system and PA system).
Warranty that work executed and materials furnished shall be free from defects in materials and workmanship for a minimum period of three years
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 PUBLIC ADDRESS AND INTERCOMMUNJCA TION SYSTEMS 27 5116-13
111001
•
from date of installation acceptance, date of Contract Completion, excluding specific items of work that require a warranty of a greater period as set forth in this Specification. In the event a manufacturer's warranty is longer than three years, the manufacturer's warranty shall be the warranty period. Immediately upon receipt ofwritten notice from the Owner, repair or replace at no expense to the Owner, defective material or work that may be discovered before final acceptance of work or within warranty period; any material or work damaged thereby; and adjacent material or work that may be displaced in repair or replacement. Examination of or failure to examine work by the Owner shall not relieve Contractor from these obligations. B.
Equipment or materials failure rates of ten percent or more during the warranty period: 1.
•
•
District shall monitor the performance and reliability of the installed base of Equipment and Materials installed in this Contract. Any deficiencies or malfunctions will be referred to the Contractor for repairs or equipment replacement.
C.
If the District detects a defect within a warranty period as defined here in, it shall notify the Contractor Representative in writing ("Notice of Defect"). Make available and provide the District with the telephone number of a fax machine to receive Notices of Defect. This fax machine shall be available to receive faxes 24 hours per day seven days per week, including weekends and holidays
D.
Upon receipt of written notice from the District of any failure or defect ("Defect") in any such Equipment or Work, the Contractor shall diligently perform work necessary to determine the cause thereof, and the time necessary to remedy the Defect, and shall propose in writing to the District how and in what manner it will remedy the Defect. If the District determines that the proposal complies with the terms of the Contract, it shall authorize Contractor to proceed to redesign, repair, or replace the defective or failed Equipment or Work within the agreed time period.
E.
In determining the cause of the Defect, perform such investigations and tests as may be required to determine the cause, and to verify that such redesign, repairs, and replacements comply with the requirements of the Contract Document. Cost associated with such investigation, redesign, repair, replacement, and testing, including, but not limited to, the removal, replacement, and reinstallation of equipment and materials necessary to gain access to defective Equipment, shall be borne by the Contractor. Should the Contractor fail to promptly make the necessary investigations, redesign, repair, replacement, and test, the District may perform or cause to be performed the same at the Contractor's expense.
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 PUBLIC ADDRESS AND INTERCOMMUNICATION SYSTEMS 27 5116-14
IIIOOI
•
••
F.
Contractor will warrant the redesigned, repaired, or replaced Equipment against defective design, materials, and workmanship for the remainder of the warranty period or a period of three years from and after the date of acceptance of the redesigned, repaired or replaced Equipment thereof, whichever occurs later.
G.
Contractor shall be liable for the satisfaction and full performance of the warranties as set forth herein.
H.
Warranties are deemed and acknowledged to explicitly extend to the future performance of the Equipment warranted.
I.
The rights and remedies provided for herein are cumulative, and shall not be exclusive and are in addition to any other rights and remedies provided by law, whether in contract or tort, or under this Contract.
J.
Contractor is deemed and acknowledged to be a merchant with respect to components and replacement parts furnished pursuant hereto, and the District is acknowledged not to be a merchant with respect thereto.
K.
In the event any Supplier or manufacturer offers any extended warranty not specified herein, state the terms of such warranty or warranties in writing and extend the same to the District without additional cost to the District.
L.
Warranties and guarantees of Suppliers of any tier and Manufacturers, whether expressed or implied, are deemed to be made for the benefit of the District regardless of whether stated as such, and Contractor shall enforce such warranties and guarantees for the benefit of the District.
M.
Include a letter signed by a corporate officer, partner, or owner of the contracting company describing their service organization, its capabilities and commitment to servicing the warranty on work executed and materials furnished.
PART22.01
MANUFACTURER
A.
•
PRODUCTS
Public Address Intercommunications system shall be Bogen Multicom 2000/MCP-35A (modified), Bogen Quantum Multicom 2000/MCP-3A (modified), Dukane StarCall/(with or without 3200 using alternate audio card), Rauland Telecenter V/MCZ-300 (modified) or Rauland Telecenter VI/MCZ-300 (modified), or equal. In small site projects approved by the lTD PMO office, small paging systems (Bogen PCM2000 or equal) may be integrated with the site PBX.
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
I 0/0 I/20 II PUBLIC ADDRESS AND INTERCOMMUNICATION SYSTEMS 27 5II6-I5
111001
• 2.02
1.
A Public Address and Intercommunication system shall not be expanded past the stations or ports capacity stated in the manufacturer's product specifications.
2.
The Bogen Quantum Multicom 2000/MCP-35A is permitted for sites with any number of stations. Interconnecting two card cages, each with a Quantum processor card by use of an Ethernet cable is permissible. Use of SIP I classroom phones are not permitted.
3.
Voice over IP systems or Voice over IP integrated design systems shall not be accepted except in projects approved by the ITO PMO office .. Voice over IP designs to increase the station capacity of any public address intercommunications system shall not be accepted. Manufacturer designed Ethernet interconnections between card cages are permissible if evaluated by ITO.
SYSTEM EQUIPMENT A.
System Equipment Rack: The following specifications apply to equipment furnished with the Public Address or Intercommunications System. 1.
• B.
The equipment rack shall provide a minimum of 77 inches of vertical panel space to accommodate I9-inch panels having I Y4inch by Yz inch mounting spacing. The rack shall be 22 3/8-inch wide by 18 Yz-inch deep by 81 3/8-inch high, with louvers and knockout openings on the sides and rear. There shall be a rear door having slip-joint hinges for easy removal without the use of tools. The rack shall be constructed of I6-gage steel. The rack shall be finished in black enamel Cabinet shall be constructed with mounting rails tapped for No. I 0-32 screws on EIA spacing front and rear. Cabinet shall be tested and certified to the seismic specifications set forth by NEBS Telcordia Technologies GR-63-CORE. Calculations for seismic bracing shall be based on the maximum load rating of the cabinet by the manufacturer in a CBC regulated environment, not the weight at time of occupancy. Rack shall be UL listed.
Central Card Cage or Shelf Assembly: I.
Central Processor Card Contains the system software that controls system features, functions, connections, audio, data and configuration for the DTMF controlled part of the Public Address and Intercommunication System.
2.
Intercom Telephone Cards or Speaker Cards: An intercom telephone card or speaker card shall be provided for PA or IC ports for which intercom telephones are provided or for which intercom access is required.
•
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR& P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 PUBLIC ADDRESS AND INTERCOMMUNICATION SYSTEMS 27 5116-16
111001
•
3.
Interface P A or IC to PBX System shall be equipped to provide eight simultaneous calls from the intercom system to a PBX., Direct connection to outside lines in the absence of a PBX, if software restricted to 911 only, may be permitted on a case by case basis with permission from the Telecommunication department.
4.
Interface PBX to PA or IC Provide Intercom station ports or telephone adapter modules to allow four loop start trunks from PBX to obtain access to intercom system dialing capabilities.
C.
Administrative Display Telephone: I.
• D.
•
Telephones shall be designed to work with intercom system, shall utilize DTMF dialing and shall be furnished with the following features: a.
Function keys and display: Telephone shall be furnished with a standard 12-button keypad and LCD display for full alphanumeric menu-driven operation.
b.
Telephone shall display station numbers with priority levels for incoming calls. Unique ring tones and flashing message or station number on display shall distinguish emergency calls from other calls.
c.
Telephone shall provide two-way, hands-free speaker operation and private handset operation. Handset shall be fully modular with a dynamic receiver and transmitter compatible with adjustable volume handset for the hearing impaired.
Intercom Instruments: 1.
Wall-mounted: Intercom instrument shall be fully modular Series 2554 telephone instrument with industry standard DTMF keypad and 90 volt, 20 Hz compatible bell ringer. Unit color shall be cocoa brown. Unit shall be mounted with screws through the base; connections shall be provided directly to the network card. The handset cord shall be fully modular.
2.
Desk-mounted: Intercom instrument shall be fully modular Series 2500 telephone instrument with industry standard DTMF keypad and 90 volt, 20 Hz bell ringer. Unit color shall be cocoa brown.
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HlGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 PUBLIC ADDRESS AND INTERCOMMUNICATION SYSTEMS 275116-17
111001
•
3.
E.
Ring Adapter Cards: 1.
F.
The bell ringer loudness control for both classroom wall-mounted and classroom desk-mounted sets shall be fixed to the loud position permanently. The loudness control for the ringer shall not be adjustable.
A ring adapter card shall be provided at PA or IC ports for which intercom telephones are required. This card shall provide standard 90 volt, 20Hz cycle to the telephone instruments to allow industry standard 2500 Series desk and 2554 Series wall telephones to be furnished.
Wall Display Unit: One wall display unit shall be provided and shall display time of day, station number and call priority. Unit shall provide unique ring tones to distinguish emergency calls from non-emergency calls. Emergency calls shall move immediately to the top of the queue and shall be accompanied by flashing "HELP", "E" message or the classroom extension number. Alternative characteristics are permissible if they follow the manufacturer's published description.
G.
•
•
Intercom or Program Distribution Control Panel: 1.
The analog PA system shall be modified versions of the Bogen Model MCP-35A, Rauland MCZ-300 or Dukane 3200 without switchbanks. The intercom function shall be disabled due the absence of switch banks. Remove or cover intercom operational labeling that has been deactivated.
2.
The control panel shall be solid-state and designated for continuous duty service on line voltages of 120 volts, 60 Hz AC.
3.
It shall be furnished with two separate amplifiers. The program amplifiers shall provide a minimum of 35 watts RMS at less than one percent distortion at rated power and bandwidth. The frequency response shall be within + one, -3dB from 80 Hz to 15 KHz. The intercom amplifier shall be furnished with an output rating of 15 watts RMS; frequency response shall be shaped for maximum intelligibility. Both amplifiers shall provide balanced 25-volt line output.
4.
It shall be furnished with inputs for two Lo-Z balanced microphones, one Hi-Z unbalanced auxiliary input, telephone paging accessories and booster amplifier. Terminals shall be provided to activate the time signal feature and Telco page feature.
5.
It shall provide controls necessary for two-way intercom communication with any classrooms, communication with any
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/0112011 PUBLIC ADDRESS AND INTERCOMMUNICATION SYSTEMS 27 5116-18
111001
•
classroom, distribution of general announcements or program material to classrooms, and transmission of emergency announcement to classrooms. Provisions shall be included to permit emergency paging from a remote telephone, or microphone, which shall capture system priority and override all functions except for the emergency page feature. H.
AM-FM Tuner and CDPlayer.
I.
CD Player/Changer
J.
Power Amplifier
• 2.03
I.
The Power amplifier shall be a solid-state amplifier with transformer isolated output for 25V systems. Direct coupled amplifiers shall not be accepted.
2.
The amplifier shall provide an audio output of 250 watts rms continuous or value as determined by design calculation. The rated output shall be obtained with and input that is not greater than 500m V(rms).
3.
The amplifier shall provide either balanced or unbalanced constantvoltage outputs of 25 volts and 70 volts, plus four and eight ohm balanced or unbalanced outputs. Output regulation shall be within 2dB from no load to full load .
4.
The amplifier shall incorporate electronic shutdown circuitry, which shall activate whenever and overload or short occurs on the output of the amplifier. A front panel overload shutdown LED shall illuminate to indicate the discontinuance of power output once the cause of the shutdown condition had been removed.
5.
The amplifier shall be furnished with thermostatic control to prevent operation at excessive ambient temperatures. The amplifier also shall include electronic overload limiting and short-circuit protection and shall be properly fused and rated for continuous operation.
6.
The standard amplifier shall be furnished with an EIA I9-inch front panel suitable for rack mounting.
ANTENNA AND GROUNDING A.
Antenna and Accessories: I.
•
FM Antenna: Furnish and install a Blonder Tongue BTY -2-FM, or equal, all-direction FM dipole antenna on roof at indicated location. Lead-in cable shall be 75-ohm weatherproof coaxial type, equipped with necessary weatherproof matching transformer at each end.
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR& P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HJGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 PUBLIC ADDRESS AND INTERCOMMUNICATION SYSTEMS 27 5116-19
111001
•
•
•
Cable shall be Belden 8241, or equal. Provide a weatherproof surge protector, with # 6 A WG grounding conductor to a grounding electrode. The grounding conductor shall be bonded to the mast and surge protector
B.
2.
AM Antenna: Furnish and install a whip type AM antenna. Antenna shall be insulated from ground. Guy AM antenna whip from mast with an insulated standoff. If signal strength is not adequate from such an antenna, provide and install a 30 foot length of hard drawn #12 copper wire between new roof antenna masts. Lead-in wire shall be 75 ohm coaxial cable, Belden 8241, or equal, furnished with necessary matching transformers at each end. Provide a weatherproof surge protector, or equal with # 6 AWG grounding conductor to a grounding electrode. The grounding conductor shall be bonded to the mast and surge protector.
3.
Provide and install an AM/FM antenna coupler in outdoor housing mounted on antenna mast.
4.
Provide and install an antenna mast on roof of closest building to the PA rack or as indicated on Drawings. Mast shall be 1-1/4 inch galvanized steel and shall be secured to roof joists with steel straps specifically manufactured for installation.
5.
Provide and install % inch antenna conduit from PA console to antenna. Provide and install a weather head, roof flashing .
Grounding: 1.
Wiring enclosures, terminal cabinets, outlets, frames of cabinet racks and other enclosures shall be grounded in accordance with requirements of California Electrical Code and as specified.
2.
Chassis of amplifiers, power supplies, and other electronic power equipment shall be grounded by bonding to control cabinet.
3.
Housing and grips of microphone and conductive housings and other equipment shall be grounded by means of grounding wire or shield in cord or cable furnished for equipment connections.
4.
Circuits shall be grounded as recommended by manufacturer of equipment to which they are connected unless otherwise specified.
5.
Furnish, install and bond a #6 AWG, green grounding wire from the main public address terminal cabinet to console equipment rack main terminal. Frame of console and circuit wiring requiring grounding shall be grounded to ground system at equipment rack main terminal. Loudspeaker circuits and communication circuits shall operate balanced to ground.
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HJGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 PUBLIC ADDRESS AND INTERCOMMUNICATION SYSTEMS 27 5116-20
111001
•
2.04
SPEAKERS AND ACCESSORIES A.
• B.
•
Loudspeakers: 1.
Each loudspeaker mechanism shall be mounted in flush back-box or surface baffle as indicated on Drawings and as specified.
2.
Frequency response of loudspeakers shall be considered to be frequency response of speaker together with its associated line transformer. Power rating of each speaker shall be its capacity to reproduce, with satisfactory frequency response and performance, at rating level specified. Adjust power delivered to each speaker, as necessary, to insure a satisfactory sound level, with reproduction of good quality, in each of locations where speakers are installed.
3.
Speaker mechanism shall be eight inch diameter, cone type radiating element, 9,500 gauss per square inch Alnico 5 magnet, and moving coil type. Cone shall be seamless. Sensitivity shall be a minimum of 94 dB SPL per meter at one watt. Power handling capacity shall be a minimum of 15 watts RMS. Magnet shall have a minimum weight of ten ounces. Nominal frequency response shall be 80 to 8,000 Hz. Speakers shall be Quam 8C 1OP AOT, or equal, unless otherwise specified.
4.
Loudspeaker Volume Controls: Loudspeaker volume controls shall be "L-Pad" attenuators of suitable impedance or autotransformer attenuators with 10 steps (and off). "T -Pad" or potentiometer shall not be accepted as a loudspeaker volume control. Furnish, install and connect volume controls on loudspeakers located in areas other than classrooms. For wall-mounted baffles, install control within baffle with shaft extending through bottom. For ceiling-mounted speakers, install volume control on wall in a convenient location. Provide shaft with round knob and dial-plate to indicate position of setting. Loudspeaker volume controls shall be installed only where indicated on Drawings.
Impedance Marching: 1.
Speakers: Each loudspeaker shall be provided with a line transformer having taps as necessary for proper matching and proportioning power to speaker. Frequency response of each transformer shall be within 3dB from 70 to 10,000 Hz. Minimum power handling capacity of each transformer shall be a minimum of 2.5 watts. Transformers shall be Triad S-79Z, or equal.
2.
Line:
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 PUBLIC ADDRESS AND INTERCOMMUNICATION SYSTEMS 27 5116-21
IIIOOI
•
Each line-matching transformer shall be furnished with similar frequency response as speaker transformer, and be shielded and equal to TC-LS-34.
C.
a.
Speaker line impedances shall be selected as necessary to limit distortion to a minimum. Line loss to any speaker operating at normal input shall not exceed I dB. Speaker matching transformer shall be connected to provide a satisfactory division of power among speakers. Sum of power distributed to speakers connected to any one-power amplifier shall not exceed 66 percent of amplifier power output rating specified herein.
b.
Impedance and signal level matching is required.
Types of Speakers: I.
Type "A" Flush Mounted Speakers: a.
Speaker baffle shall be a vandal-proof, round, flush-mount Quam model BR8VP, or equal. It shall be constructed of#l4 gage carbon steel with a tensile strength of at least 55,000 psi. Finish shall be white baked powdered epoxy, virtually scratch and mar resistant. Baffle shall incorporate a subplate fabricated from heavy-gage steel that shall provide an interlocking lattice grid pattern to protect speaker from tampering and vandalism. Protective sub-plate shall be acoustically transparent. Sub-plate and speaker shall be secured by means of casehardened square-shanked carriage bolts. Baffle shall mount in a Quam ERD-8NS backbox by means oftamper-proofhardware provided.
b.
Backbox shall be a Quam ERD-8NS, or equal, recessed round enclosure designed to accommodate 8-inch speaker or baffle assemblies. It shall be made of one-piece #22 gage drawn steel with a rust-inhibiting coating, and an interior treated with a fire-retardant resonance damping material. Bottom inside of backbox shall have affixed a 9-inch pad of 3/8 inch thick acoustic foam to provide additional resonance and vibration control. Four combination conduit knockouts Y:z inch and % inch shall be deeply scored, but not through, to preserve leakfree integrity of enclosure in air plenum installation. These combination knockouts shall be spaced 90 degrees apart.
c.
Provide spanner type tamperproof screws to secure grille to backbox.
•
2.
•
Type "B" Surface-Mounted Speakers:
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/20 II PUBLIC ADDRESS AND INTERCOMMUNICATION SYSTEMS 275116-22
111001
•
••
•
3.
a.
Type "B" surface-mounted speakers shall be a Quam VP2, or equal. Speaker shall be quality 8-inch type, complete with a 25V /70V line matching transformer tapped at 112, I, and 2 watts. Speaker frequency response shall be 50 to IS,OOO Hz, with an axial sensitivity of 96dB per meter with one watt input. Power rating shall be IS watts. The speaker shall incorporate a I 0 ounce ceramic magnet; the voice coil shall be % inch in diameter and shall have an impedance of 8 ohms.
b.
Speaker or transformer assembly shall be mounted in a wallmount, sloped baffle constructed of special heavy-gage coldrolled steel which shall be virtually impervious to direct blows: steel back mounting plate shall be pre-punched to fit any standard outlet box and shall be so designed as to make it practically impossible to gain access to speaker. Type 632 tamperproofmachine screws shall be used to attach baffle to steel mounting plate. Mounting plate shall be installed so that baffle is perfectly level.
c.
Entire assembly shall measure I3 %-inch high, 10 7/16-inch wide, 5 %-inch maximum depth, and 4 3/8-inch minimum depth. Baffle shall be finished in semi-gloss white epoxy. Complete hardware shall be provided with speaker assembly.
Hom Loudspeakers: a.
Type "C" Hom Loudspeakers: Hom loudspeakers shall be weatherproof vandal-proof type. Speakers shall be Atlas model APFIST with Soundolier VP4IOS baffle and VPAAPF adaptor, or equal. Furnish and install weatherproof cover plates with plastic bushed holes in plates to admit waterproof cable to speaker in drip loops. Each hom speaker assembly shall be mounted in a vandal-proof steel enclosure. Submit a drawing of assembly to the Architect for review. Type "C" hom loudspeakers shall be furnished for outdoor areas such as lunch shelters, arcades, walkways, etcetera. Note that sound travel distance for this hom is less than the C I hom due to its higher low frequency cutoff point.
b.
Type "C I" Hom Loudspeakers: Hom Loudspeakers shall be weatherproof and vandal-proof types. Speakers shall be Atlas Model APC-30, or equal. Furnish and install weatherproof cover plates with plastic bushed holes in plates to admit weatherproof cable to speaker in drip loops. Each speaker assembly shall be mounted in a vandal-proof steel
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/0112011 PUBLIC ADDRESS AND INTERCOMMUNICATION SYSTEMS 27 5116-23
111001
•
enclosure. An optional access door may be provided if secured with fasteners that require a tool to remove, or secured with a Cat-60 padlock. The access door, if provided, shall be large enough to remove the horn driver, change taps, adjust the tilt of the horn, or remove and test the cabling. Submit a drawing of assembly to the Architect for review. Type "C 1" horn loudspeakers shall be furnished for large outdoor areas such as playgrounds, physical education fields, athletic fields, etcetera. 2.05
ELECTRONIC RECEPTACLES A.
•
•
2.06
Microphone receptacles shall be Cannon XLR or SLR Series, or equal. Receptacles shall be furnished with mounting brackets for floor boxes, Sierra, or equal, .040 inch stainless steel plates, unless noted otherwise on Drawings. Each plate shall be engraved with its receptacle function in 3/16inch high letters filled with black paint. Receptacles shall conform to following: ~
Description
"A"
Single male
Microphone
LR-3-14, on a one-gang plate receptacle wall mounting
"B"
Single male
microphone
LR-3-14N, with a CA015-0094-000, receptacle floor mounting yoke.
CONDUCTOR OR CABLES A.
Cable for overriding Autonomous P A system shall be one twisted pair, # 18 conductor; West Penn #CL2 293, or equal. For outdoor and underground applications, West Penn Wire Corp. # AQ 293 shall be furnished. This stranded wire shall not terminate on 66 or 110 blocks. Install and use screw terminal strips adjacent to the punch blocks.
B.
Cables for microphone and other input sources and speakers shall comprise one twisted pair of#22 gage solid copper conductors; polyethylene shielded with an aluminum foil-mylar shield, a #22 gage stranded tinned copper drain wire and polyvinyl jacket. Cable shall be West Penn Wire Corp. CL2 290, or equal. For outdoor and underground applications, West Penn Wire Corp. # AQC 291 shall be furnished.
C.
Two-pair #22 gage, fully annealed copper wire. One twisted pair (black and red) conductors shall be shielded and the other twisted pair (green and white) shall be unshielded. Both pairs shall be under one jacket. This cable is to be provided for combination telephone and public address Work. Furnish shielded pair for speaker lines. Mohawk #1772, West Penn CL2
8736 CORWIN THEATER REP AIR & P .0. T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 PUBLIC ADDRESS AND INTERCOMMUNICATION SYSTEMS 27 5116-24
111001
•
#355, or equal. For outdoor and underground applications, West Penn Wire Corp. # AQC 355 shall be furnished.
• 2.07
•
D.
Jumper wire or cross connect wire shall consist of solid copper conductors, insulated with polyvinyl chloride and color coded, #22 gage, Brand-Rex, or equal.
E.
Cable for types C and C-1 speakers shall be West Penn CL2, AQ or AQC, as required, 289, 290, 291, 292, 293, 294, 295 or 296. Cable provided shall be selected based on calculation of the cable gage required to produce no more than a 1 dB drop in voltage at the load, given the load at which the speaker is tapped and the distance the cable is run. At the main PA termination field or at any other termination field, do not use the 66 punch blocks for any stranded wire. Install and use screw terminal blocks adjacent to the 66 blocks or remove one of the 66 blocks if adequate room is not otherwise available for these screw terminal blocks.
F.
Interface cable from clock controller to the Public Address rack shall provide a minimum of twelve A WG 20 insulated conductors. Cable shall be West Penn 265, West Penn 283, or equal. For exterior or underground applications, provide West Penn AQ224 two conductor A WG 18 cables, or equal. Termination shall be inside the master clock and inside the PA rack only for a continuous cabling run. Label clock connections where cable terminates inside of rack.
G.
Cables between the P.A. rack and P.A. terminal cabinet for connection of switch bank positions to field circuit shall be Two-pair #22 gage, fully annealed copper wire. One twisted pair (black and red) conductors shall be shielded and the other twisted pair (green and white) shall be unshielded. Both pairs shall be under one jacket. Mohawk #1772 or West Penn CL2 #355.
TERMINAL BLOCKS AND CABINETS A.
Terminal blocks shall be solderless push-on (#20 to 22 gage solid) with integral fanning strip. Solderless push-on type blocks shall be Siemon Company 66-Series. Terminals for connections to external circuits shall be properly labeled. 66B blocks shall be mounted directly to terminal location without use of mounting legs. 66M blocks shall be mounted on 89B mounting spacers. Install the required terminal blocks as necessary within each cabinet.
B.
Terminal blocks shall be installed on back of cabinets only, not on sides. Incoming cables shall be terminated on outside pins of terminal blocks and outgoing cables shall be terminated on second pin from buttside edge. This method shall be provided at satellite terminal locations. At main or crossconnect terminal locations incoming or outgoing cables shall be terminated on outside pins, but with jumper wires terminated on other points. Do not
8736 CORWfN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 PUBLIC ADDRESS AND INTERCOMMUNICATION SYSTEMS 27 5116-25
111001
•
install grouped station cables other than 25, 50, 75 and I 00 patrs of telephone cables under terminal blocks.
c.
2.08
KEYS AND LOCKS A.
2.09
Auxiliary cabinets shall be securely floor or wall-mounted, in a position that will not block removable panel or swing open doors needed for normal system expansion or service. Doors shall be lockable with a door-mounted lock.
Provide keys and locks for cabinets and equipment; locks shall be keyed to a Corbin #60 key, for access to operate equipment and Corbin #70 key, for access to service equipment.
PORTABLE EQUIPMENT A.
Furnish and deliver to the OAR, one auxiliary console microphone with coiled cord and press-to-talk switch.
B.
Portable equipment shall remain in individual boxes and be delivered to the OAR.
2.010 LOADS ON EQUIPMENT AND COMPONENTES
•
A.
Equipment and component parts shall carry continuously, without undue heating or change in rated value, loads connected thereto and rated output loads where such are specified. Equipment shall be properly fused. Components and parts shall be designed for continuous operation.
B.
Operating voltages on capacitors shall not exceed 60 percent of their rated working voltages.
c.
Operating wattages to be dissipated by resistors shall not exceed 25 percent of their ratings.
PART 33.01
3.02
•
EXECUTION AND INSTALLATION
INSTALLATION A.
Install equipment as specified, as indicated on Shop Drawings, and as required. Installation shall be in accordance with manufacturers' instructions and applicable codes. Installation shall be in accordance with manufacturers' instructions and applicable codes.
B.
Systems that are re-designed with the intention to increase station or port capacity of systems shall not be accepted.
C.
Systems not installed as manufacturer instructions shall not be accepted.
RELATED SYSTEM OR SUB-COMPONENT INSTALLATION
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 PUBLIC ADDRESS AND INTERCOMMUNICATION SYSTEMS 27 5116-26
111001
•
•
•
A.
Public Address system installation I.
Rack Equipment Installation: Equipment within each rack shall be logically arranged for accessibility of convenient maintenance. Equipment shall be mounted on shelves or panels and shall be securely attached. Allow 20 percent expansion in the form of empty rack units at time of occupancy. Empty rack unit spaces shall be covered with factory made plates of the same manufacture as the cabinet.
2.
Amplifiers, power supplies and other heavy devices shall be mounted on steel shelves made by manufacturer of console and cabinet racks and shall be attached to cabinet by means of rack mount brackets. Heavy devices shall be mounted in the lowest practical space in the rack. Cabinet, console, and panel faces, including drawers shall be the same color. Punch blocks, screw terminals and ancillary equipment shall be installed on metal rack panels mounted on rear rails. Cables to such panels shall be dressed only from the right side of the rack, as viewed from the rear. The cable bundle must be dressed so as to allow the panel to be swung out for service.
3.
Wiring within console and cabinets shall be installed to conform to standard engineering practice, and shall be terminated on terminal strips having a terminal for each required external connection. Wiring shall be cabled, laced and securely fastened in place so that no weight is imposed on any equipment, control switches, or terminals. Wires shall be contiguous between console and cabinets. Splices are permitted only at cross connect points where terminated on punch blocks.
4.
Wires carrying audio power shall be shielded. Input and output circuits and terminal strips shall be installed to provide separation necessary for proper operation. Wires shall be identified by number and chart.
5.
Cable charts shall be bound to rear cabinet door ofPA or IC cabinet, MP A TC or backboard, terminal cabinets and service manuals inside transparent plastic envelopes. The information in these charts shall include cable's switch selector position number, designated switch bank, EZ label number from switch bank to main cross connection, EZ label number from main cross connection to end device, speaker wattage, telephone extension number, punch block locations and end device location (classroom number, office, hallway, exterior wall etc).
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR& P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 PUBLIC ADDRESS AND INTERCOMMUNlCA TION SYSTEMS 27 5116-27
111001
•
•
•
6.
PA or IC cable terminations and connections on 66 Series blocks at terminal cabinets, backboards and MP A TC shall be installed from top to bottom in office and classroom logical numerical order and shall maintain the same numbering system throughout the site. It shall follow the orderly sequence used for switchbanks room selector switches.
7.
Conductor shields for each system shall be grounded at one location only. Grounding shall be provided within console and cabinet racks. There shall be no metallic connection between systems. Conduits for system and 120 volt AC system shall be bonded together at console and cabinet racks.
8.
120 volt AC supply conductors shall be terminated directly on disconnect switches specified and in a recognized raceway.
9.
A minimum of 24 spare stations or ports shall be provided for system expansion capacity, even if this requires installation of a second card cage and ancillary equipment. The required equipment and connectivity shall be provided to allow for this 24 stations spare capacity regardless of the stations provided at the time of occupancy. The 24 spare stations shall be readily available for connectivity to classrooms, offices or specified location. The 24 station shall be clearly labeled and terminated on a punch block in the main public address terminal cabinet
10.
A minimum of 25 spare communication cables shall be provided between the P.A. rack and the main PA terminal cabinet. 25 communications cables shall be connected to the respective telephone card, speaker card, relay module, ring module and switch bank. The 25 spare ports shall be active and ready for connectivity now or for future expansion. These 25 spare communication cables are for connection of switch bank positions to field circuits and are in addition to override, remote input, and other miscellaneous cables required for the P. A. rack.
11.
At the main PA cabinet these cables, along with the other miscellaneous cables shall be neatly dressed and secured to the backboard. At the backboard they shall be routed around the exterior of the backboard so as to assure the availability of at least six feet of spare cable, terminated, bundled, secured and routed by the most direct path.
12.
At the PA rack the cable bundle shall be neatly dressed and secured to the back mounting rails of the P A rack. If the conduits enter from the top of the rack, route the bundle down the left side of the rack as
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 PUBLIC ADDRESS AND INTERCOMMUNICATION SYSTEMS 27 5116-28
111001
•
viewed from the rear, across the bottom of the rack and up the right side. Cables shall be broken out from the right hand side, dressed, secured, and routed to their termination point. If cables enter from the bottom, route them up the left side, over at the top and down the right side for breakout, dress and termination. B.
•
C.
D.
•
Telephone interface system installation 1.
Install, program and connect 4 circuits to the PABX system. Upon notification from the Contractor, the OAR shall contact the Telecommunications Branch to arrange for ordering of necessary additions to the voice system to coincide with the completion of the installation of the P A or Intercom system. Label circuits with tag at the punch block, and inside the P A rack.
2.
The work provided by the Owner will encompass both hardware or software additions and any necessary programming.
3.
The Telecommunications Branch will manage connections to the PBX voice system from the 66 block located under the PBX to the 110 block also located under the PBX. The contractor is responsible for the cabling, conduit, and connections from this 66 block (ports on block typically labeled by the Telecom Branch) to the main PA termination field 66 blocks.
4.
Contractors working on the telecommunications system must be pre-approved by the Telecommunications Branch prior to start of construction.
Telephone access installation for incoming call: 1.
Provide, install and connect 4 ports for High and Middle schools and 2 access ports for Elementary schools and primary Centers to allow loop start trunks from the PABX to obtain access to intercom system dialing and function capabilities. These circuits shall be used only to interface P ABX to PA or IC.
2.
Clearly label cabling for PBX connected telephone ports with a tag inside rack and on the punch blocks.
Administrative display telephones I.
Provide, program, install and connect a mtmmum of one administrative telephone in the Main Office, in each SLC and in each Academy.
2.
Connect the administrative telephones in sequential order starting on the first circuit of the first switch bank relay card.
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 PUBLIC ADDRESS AND INTERCOMMUNICATION SYSTEMS 27 5116-29
111001
•
3.
E.
F.
Wall Display Unit: Install unit in the main office unless indicated otherwise on Contract Drawings, in accordance with manufacturers instructions. For Bogen PA systems, verify and change if necessary, the ring voltage for the display tip and ring pair by moving the voltage selection shorting plug to 12v on the ringer card inside the PA rack. This associated ringer card station port is typically port number one, and shared with the main display phone (they ring together, both were designed to operate off of a 12v ring signal and act erratic if provided a 90v ring signal. (To be precise, the Bogen Multicom 2000 delivers a 60v ring signal from the ringer card, or a 12v square wave ring if the card is bypassed).
Intercom instruments 1.
Wall-mounted: Install where indicated modular wall plate.
2.
Desk mounted: Install and connect where indicated and specified.
Special programming requirement 1.
Privacy a.
• G.
Terminal cabinet installation 1.
•
The system shall be configured to prohibit the initiation of a two way conversation from any telephone or speaker to any speaker connected to the system without the presence of a supervisory, or privacy tone. This requirement extends to calls from the office to any classroom, from a classroom to any other classroom and from any classroom to any office. The tone shall annunciate at the initiation of the call and a minimum of every 15 seconds thereafter. The tone shall have sufficient volume to alert the occupant of a classroom with typical ambient sound that a two-way communications path has been initiated.
Lines and cables within cabinets and on main terminal backboards shall be carefully dressed with cable ties. Cables shall be formed into bundles from their emergence from conduits and shall make a 360-degree wrap around the inside of the cabinet or the exterior edge of the backboard. Cables shall be formed into a rectangular configuration and secured to the backboard. Each cable shall be properly enumerated in numerical order with commercial wire markers and shall maintain the same number throughout the site. Wire markers shall be uniformly located within one inch ofthe end of the cable jacket and the numbers shall be immediately visible.
8736 CORWfN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 PUBLIC ADDRESS AND fNTERCOMMUNICA TION SYSTEMS 27 5116-30
IIIOOI
•
•
•
2.
Conductors shall be color-coded and individual cables shall be rung out, and tagged with code markers such as W .H. Brady Co. or E-Z Code wire markers. Each cable index strip shall be typed and installed on terminal cabinet door. Each index strip shall be covered with Zellerbach# R125, or equal, typed on "as-built" drawings.
3.
Terminations and connections throughout system shall be on Siemon # 66 series blocks, except at equipment that requires removal for servicing and for terminating stranded type cable. Connections to such equipment and cables shall be screw-terminal type or plug-in type. Wires connected to screw-terminal blocks shall use spade lug type terminal connectors for attachment. 11 0 terminating blocks shall not be accepted as a replacement for 66 series terminating blocks. Cables shall be identified as to buildings and rooms served, and terminated in terminal cabinets and backboards.
4.
Cables from Telco interface blocks shall terminate on left side of 66 M1-50 blocks, with jumpers leaving from right side-bridge with Siemon Co. sneak current protector units.
5.
Cables to public address system console or amplifier inputs shall terminate on 66 M1-50 blocks .
6.
Cables from public address console or amplifier outputs shall terminate on 66M1-50 blocks; provide blocks for required number of switches.
7.
Cables to PABX switch (trunk inputs) shall terminate on 66 M 1-50 blocks, if only PABX system is included in this Contract.
8.
Cables to PABX switch (extension, console, night bells, etc.) shall be terminated on 66 M 1-50 blocks. Provide blocks and cables for maximum possible system configuration, if only PABX system is included in this Contract.
9.
Cables to satellite terminal locations and or classrooms shall be terminated on 66 M1-50 blocks. Provide blocks as required, plus 2 vertical rows of 89B spacers for future expansion, at main crossconnect locations only.
I 0.
Cables from auxiliary equipment shall be terminated on 66 Ml-50 blocks. Provide blocks as required, plus space for a future block.
11.
Feeding cables at remote cross-connect locations shall be terminated on 66 M 1-50 blocks for jumpering.
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
I 0/01/20 II PUBLIC ADDRESS AND INTERCOMMUNICATION SYSTEMS 27 5II6-3I
111001
• H.
12.
Blocks shall be mounted in vertical rows only. Cable with lowest number shall be terminated on upper left side, with next cable in numerical order just below first cable and so on. When left side of first row of blocks is full, next cable in numerical order shall be terminated on the upper right side of first row of blocks, and so on.
13.
Do not pass grouped cables in area that is to be used for jumpering. Cables shall enter blocks from top or bottom only, and shall not be in same area as jumper wires.
14.
Cable distribution rings for jumper wires shall be Dracon Industries # 1091 0-00, or equal.
15.
Cable distribution rings for inside wiring cable and distribution cable shall be Dracon Industries # 10941-000, 10942-000 or I 094000, size as required.
Conduit 1.
• 3.03
•
No more than 6 feet of flexible conduit shall be used in any conduit run.
a.
Flexible conduit shall not be used in concealed or inaccessible areas such as interstitial wall spaces or hard lid ceilings.
b.
Where flexible conduit is used, the conduit fill shall be derated by one trade size.
c.
Flex shall not be used from MPA TC or backboard to the PA or IC rack.
2.
Pull boxes shall not be used in place of conduit bends unless site conditions do not allow the use of conduits with data sweeps. If pull boxes are proposed, it must be approved by the Owner.
3.
Where not required elsewhere in District Specification or Code, pull boxes shall be sized per the BICSI TDMM current Edition, Chapter 5, Table 5.13.
OWNERS QUALITY ASSURANCE CERTIFICATIONS AND TESTING A.
Provide instruments for testing and demonstrate, in presence of the Owner, that circuits and wiring test free of shorts and grounds.
B.
Provide test and reception gear to test for specified performance of active equipment.
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 PUBLIC ADDRESS AND INTERCOMMUNICATION SYSTEMS 275116-32
111001
• 3.04
c.
Furnish labor, instruments, appliances, equipment, and materials necessary to demonstrate to the Owner the installation performs as required and specified.
D.
Before Substantial Completion, submit test results and related documents to the Project Inspector.
E.
The Owner reserves the right to perform independent tests of equipment furnished, to determine whether or not equipment complies with requirements specified, and to proceed in accordance with the Contract Documents.
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A.
As-Built Documentation 1.
Provide three copies size E (30 by 42-inch) of Project site and building plans, indicating location of equipment, conduit, cable routing, ground vaults terminal cabinets, pull boxes and other installation information.
2.
Provide three CDs of the system CPU programming and configuration.
3.
Provide two copies of the record Drawings in DWG format prepared using the most recent version of AutoCAD on a labeled CD-ROM for use on a Windows platform .
•
4.
•
a.
LAUSD utilizes layers as a key tool in controlling visibility of drawing elements and to provide consistent information between drawings, yet provide control over what is seen on each sheet. Public Address wiring shall be shown on a separate layer, labeled as "Public Address" that uses both building floor plans and conduit supporting structure layers below. The use of any version control blocks or company logos shall be on a layer separate from the premise wiring as-built drawings.
b.
AutoCAD files (software copies) supplied shall be multilayer drawings with the following layers as a minimum: 1)
Layer one shall contain title blocks only.
2)
Layer two shall contain building or site plan backgrounds only.
3)
Layer three shall contain devices, cabling and other system components.
Floor plans indicating devices, terminal cabinets and cross connect locations, conduit runs, ground vaults, wire types, cable routing of
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HJGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 PUBLIC ADDRESS AND INTERCOMMUNICATION SYSTEMS 275116-33
111001
•
cables, both underground and in each building with conduit fill and count, and as-built coding used on each cable.
B.
•
Drawings shall include block diagrams indicating items and their point-to-point connections in a manner following floor and site plan layout. Drawings shall also include as-built single line diagram, cable site plot plan and floor plans indicating cables, both underground and in each building with conduit, and as-built coding used on each cable.
b.
Floor plans shall indicate devices, terminal cabinets and cross connect locations, conduit runs, ground vaults, wire types, cable routing of cables, both underground and in each building with conduit fill and count, and as-built coding used on each cable
Operating and Servicing Manuals, Record Drawings: 1.
•
a.
Deliver three copies of operating and servicing manual. Each complete manual shall be bound in three ring binders and data shall be typewritten or drafted. a.
Each manual shall include a page with Project site and Project name, date of Substantial Completion, Contractor name, address, telephone, and fax numbers.
b.
Each manual shall contain a letter, signed by an officer of the company indicating the beginning and ending date of any warranties described in Article 1.07 of this section and shall describe the companies' commitment to service the warranty during the terms specified.
c.
Each manual shall include instructions necessary for proper operation and servicing of system and shall include: 1)
A single line diagram of the system indicating items and their point-to-point connections in a manner following floor and site plan layout.
2)
A complete two wire diagram of connections made between components inside the system console.
3)
A wiring destination schedule for each circuit leaving console and each rack.
4)
Custom fabricated circuits, components and connections not detailed in the manufacturer's manuals shall have wiring diagrams detailing to component level, the manner in which the circuits are connected. Provide details of input or output voltages and input or output signal levels.
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 PUBLIC ADDRESS AND INTERCOMMUNICATION SYSTEMS 27 5116-34
111001
•
5)
d.
3.05
•
•
Protect the Work of this section until Substantial Completion.
CLEANUP
A.
3.07
Each manual shall also include as-built single line diagram, cable site plot plan and floor plans indicating cables, both underground and in each building with conduit, and as-built coding used on each cable. Drawings Size A (8 Y2 by II) and size B (11 by 17) shall be bound into the manual. Larger drawings shall be folded and inserted into transparent envelopes bound into the manual. Programming forms of each system shall be submitted with complete information.
PROTECTION A.
3.06
A schematic diagram of each amplifier and other components, transistor complements and replacement part numbers.
Remove rubbish, debris and waste materials and legally dispose of off the Project site.
OWNER ORIENTATION
A.
Before Substantial Completion, provide an eight hour Owner instruction period to designated Owner personnel. Contact OAR first, if assistance is needed in scheduling an appropriate time, location, or list of attendees for this training.
B.
Instruction shall be based on manufacturers written operating instructions covering those features of interest to the Owner and applicable to the Work. Instruction shall include the following: 1.
Making normal calls from intercom telephone to other intercom telephones or to the intercom administrative station. Revisit office staff preferred method for clarity and understanding of function and methodology.
2.
Answering normal calls from intercom telephones.
3.
Transferring loudspeaker intercom calls from the speaker to the intercom phone.
4.
Answering normal or emergency administrative station.
5.
Returning calls shown in the administrative station display queue.
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
calls
from
the
intercom
10/01/2011 PUBLIC ADDRESS AND INTERCOMMUNICATION SYSTEMS 275116-35
111001
•
• C.
•
6.
Answering calls shown on the wall display from P ABX phones (remote answer feature).
7.
Answering calls ringing at a secondary station from admin phone or assigned intercom phone.
8.
Placing calls from PABX phones to intercom station.
9.
Placing calls from intercom stations to PABX phones.
10.
Placing calls from intercom telephone to the public switched telephone network (PSTN).
11.
Making intercom calls from PA or IC rack to classrooms.
12.
Show how to set the passing bell schedules if selector switch is located on PA rack but might have been replaced by a remote selector in the main office.
13.
Making an emergency all call from the rack, program all call, zone all call and individual announcement from the admin telephone and PABX telephone, and all-call from the hand held microphone located in the main office. Explain that emergency all-call from rack activates the hearing assistance system. Also explain where these hear assistance systems and the autonomous systems are located .
14.
Show distribution of radio or cassette player and CD player programs. and from which web sites the instructions can be downloaded.
15.
Provide copies of manufacturer user's manual to training staff and explain users' manual functions described. Provide 3 quick user's functions reference guides in a plastic laminated form. The training shall include hands on equipment.
After Substantial Completion, and before contract completion, provide two additional one hour "refresher" instruction sessions at times agreed upon by the Owner.
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/0112011 PUBLIC ADDRESS AND INTERCOMMUNICATION SYSTEMS 27 5116-36
111001
•
ATTACHMENT "A" PUBLIC ADDRESS AND INTERCOMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM OWNERS QUALITY ASSURANCE Site Location Code/Name Network Engineer PM Recommendation
----------------------------------------lOR ------------------- Electrical
Owner is to examine the following items based on the criteria defined in sections 27 5113 (Public Address System) Owner is to examine 100 percent of rack contents. Other items not included in main rack will be tested at 10 percent rate. If deficiencies are noted, the system will be failed. Owner will consider continuing testing at a 20 percent rate to determine the integrity ofthe system. YES
NO
N/A
0 0
0 0
0 0
0 0 0
0 0 0
0 0 0
0
0
0
Are shields grounded only at main punch block or rack end only and cross-patched at any intermediate blocks?
0
0
0
Are terminations at console and terminal cabinets, including paging and 911 lines to/from PBX labeled properly? Does cable number match list posted?
0
0
0
0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0
0
0
0
P A System Check List Is equipment installed as indicated in as-built? Does workmanship installation follow industry standards, specifications and manufacturer's instructions? Is the UPS operational and show batteries are fully charged?
•
TERMINAL CABINETS AND CROSS-CONNECT TO BE INSTALLED INDOORS .
Use punch blocks to terminate field cable (66 blocks). Stranded 18 ga hom cabling on screw terminals. Is cabling in terminal cabinets and console neat in appearance with sufficient cable slack?
Are cables marked clearly and indelibly? Are charts posted at console and terminal cabinets? Are inside and outside speakers installed as specified? Verify all-speaker emergency mic in main office has no feedback and radio/CD player operates. Are cables in UG (under-ground) vaults racked as specified and marked oudoor rated (AQ or AQC).
•
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
Pass/Fail
10/0112011 PUBLIC ADDRESS AND INTERCOMMUNICATION SYSTEMS 27 5116-37
111001
•
Is classroom equipment (phone, speaker and raceway) installed as specified with ringer locked at max volume?
D
D
D
If classroom phones are not on PBX, has the wall display in main office been installed?
D
D
D
Verify physical interface with master clock and transfer switch of first relay to either PA system for all-speaker tone.
D
D
D
Verify physical connection and labeling of PBX to PA/IC.
D D
D D
D D
Contractor to provide the system program downloadable to laptop or disk and examine. Main System Functionality
•
YES
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D D D
D D D
D D D
D D
D D
D D
D D
D D
D D
Are manual tones from the main PA console defeated when the Fire Alarm system is in alarm? (also first relay)
D
D
D
Are loudspeaker audio sources defeated when the Fire Alarm system is in alarm? (second fire alarm relay)
D
D
D
Verify all call with microphone, pbx phone and class tones. Check for clarity and sound level in the following areas: Perimeter areas farthest away from system. Verify no horns are facing off campus. If found, tap down or disable. In a sample of classrooms verify that steady class tone and all-calls are not too loud in classrooms. Do gyms and auditoriums have equipment (speakers and phones) attached to main PA. Verify emergency all call with microphone and PBX phone Verify each group all call (zone paging) with PBX phone. Verify every speaker connection by making intercom call to each speaker or horn.
main office
Verify volume controls are working. Verify acceptable level of loudness and clarity for outside, inside, and hallway speakers. Manually test passing tones, verify specific tones for gyms. Are automatic PA system tones defeated when the Fire Alarm system is in alarm? (first fire alarm relay)
Intercommunication Systems
YES
Does classroom phone have dial tone when picked up?
•
NO N/A Pass/Fail
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
D
NO N/A Pass/Fail
D
D
10/01/2011 PUBLIC ADDRESS AND INTERCOMMUNICATION SYSTEMS 27 5116-38
111001
•
Make call to main office, and check for clarity and sound level and verify that the person can hear you. Repeat 4 to 8 times depending on the number of PBX interconnection lines.
D
D
D
Receive call from main office, and check for clarity and sound levels.
D
D
D
Receive room PA announcement and passing tone from main office, checking for clarity and sound level in both instances.
D
D
D
Verify code to access the PBX and make the connection to a station. Repeat for a total of four times to test lines.
D
D
D
Verify emergency alert to main office(30 second off-hook, dialing **, or triple-hook flash).
D
D
D
Verify hands-free, two-way communication between main office and speaker. Check for clarity and sound level.
D
D
D
Demonstrate that the supervisory tone is present during calls placed from PBX, System administrative and Intercom staff phones to any speaker on the system.
D
D
D
YES
NO
N/A
D D
D D
D D
D
D
D
PBX System Verify PBX station transfer to IC system.
••
Test both EL or four Verify all-call paging from PBX. HS/MS paging lines in sequence by hanging up and repeating the all call page. Verify true 911 access from all classrooms by sample testing only one or more rooms. Contact with 911 operator shall not require dialing any extra digits (9-911) unless approved by the lTD Telecommunications Department.
Pass/Fail
END OF SECTION
•
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 PUBLIC ADDRESS AND INTERCOMMUN1CA TION SYSTEMS 27 5116-39
111001
SECTION 27 5128 AUTONOMOUS PUBLIC ADDRESS SYSTEMS PART 1- GENERAL 1.01
SUMMARY A.
B.
C.
Principal items of Work in this Section include but are not limited to: 1.
Autonomous public address (P A) sound system in auditoriums of middle and high schools.
2.
Conductors and terminal strips to provide for functions and requirements, including interface cabling to PA/Intercom system.
3.
Provide labor, engineering, design, testing, materials, components, and supervision necessary to provide a complete operable installation.
Related Requirements: 1.
Division 01 -General Requirements.
2.
Section 26 0500: Common Work Results for Electrical.
3.
Section 26 0513: Basic Electrical Materials and Methods.
4.
Section 26 0526: Grounding and Bonding.
5.
Section 26 0519: Low Voltage Wires (600 Volt AC)
6.
Section 26 0533: Raceways and Boxes Fitting and Supports.
7.
Section 26 2416: Panelboards and Signal Terminal Cabinets.
8.
Section 27 5116: Public Address and Intercqmmunication Systems.
Acronyms: DTMF Dual Tone Multiple Frequency IC
Intercom
LCD
Liquid Crystal Display
OAR Owner Authorized Representative PA
Public Address
PABX Private Auxiliary Branch Exchange TDS
Time Domain Spectrometry
MLS
Maximum Length Sequence Measurement Technique or Analyzer 10/01/11
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
PUBLIC ADDRESS SYSTEMS 27 5128-1
111001
SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS
1.02 A.
Reproduction shall be attained at sound levels sufficient to override nmse levels typical for schools, to provide a satisfactory and serviceable system.
B.
Audio level of telephone intercommunication system shall be attained at sound levels sufficient to override noise levels typical for schools, to provide a satisfactory and serviceable system with a minimum of 70dB isolation between public address and intercommunication signals.
c.
Entire system shall be supported by engineering documentation including: 1.
Floor plans indicating devices, conduit runs, wire types, and terminal cabinets.
2.
Block diagrams indicating items and their point-to-point connections in a manner following floor plan layout.
SUBMITTALS
1.03 A.
Submit the following: 1.
Provide catalog cuts, technical data, and descriptive literature on components. Data shall be clearly marked and noted to identify specific ranges, model numbers, sizes, and other pertinent data.
2.
Submittals shall be bound and shall contain an index organized vertically by assembly and item number and horizontally by columns.
3.
a.
The first assembly shall be the major head end equipment.
b.
The leftmost column shall be the item number; next shall be the description, followed by the applicable specification section number, and followed by the specified item, which is followed by the submitted item.
c.
The rightmost column shall be for notes, which shall be used to reference the reason for submitting items other than as specified.
Submittals shall contain product data sheets or catalog cut sheets for each item listed in the Index. These shall be arranged in the same order as the index and if more than one item is shown, the submitted items shall be highlighted or marked with an arrow. a.
The product data shall be sufficiently detailed to allow the Architect to evaluate the suitability of the product and to allow other trades to provide necessary coordination.
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/11 PUBLIC ADDRESS SYSTEMS 27 5128-2
111001
4.
Provide Shop Drawings, in the same size as the Record Drawings. Shop Drawings shall be prepared in latest version of AutoCAD with three CD-ROM electronic copies submitted along with full sized Shop Drawings. a.
Provide a complete set of scaled drawings of racks, consoles, and cabinets with designations, dimensions, color, operating controls, instrument wiring, and schematic diagrams of circuits, following Drawings as baseline.
b.
Shop Drawings shall provide details as to interfaces of equipment of other Work, identifying numbers of wires, termination requirements, voltages, and other pertinent details. Include front elevations, cabinet dimensions, types of mounting, doors, barriers, catalog number of locks, and finishes for terminal cabinets.
c.
Include a dimensional Shop Drawing of console nameplate. Nameplate shall contain school name, firm, address, telephone number for warrantee and maintenance, and power load.
d.
For Signal Terminal Cabinets: (Refer to Structured Cabling Specification, Section 2 7 1514) Include a front elevation indicating cabinet dimensions, make, location and capacity of equipment, size of gutters, type of mounting, finish, and catalog number of locks. General layout of internal devices, wiring drawings with wire numbers and device connections, vendor cut sheets of devices in enclosure and bill of materials listing description, manufacturer; part number, and quantity of items shall be included.
e.
Shop drawings shall indicate equipment locations, wiring and schematics, details, panel configurations, sizes and a point-to-point wiring diagram of all circuits. Shop drawings shall indicate interfaces to equipment furnished by others, identifying numbers of wires, termination requirements, and other pertinent details. Responsibility for each end of interfaces shall be noted on shop drawings.
f.
Submit Drawings prepared, signed, and sealed by structural engineer licensed in the State of California. Details shall be provided indicating the proposed means of support and attachment of speakers and all wall and floor mounted racks. Calculations shall be based on the maximum seismic loads as determined by the CBC based on specifications provided by the cabinet manufacturer.
5.
Permits and Inspections: Obtain and pay for required permits and inspections, deliver certificates of inspection to the Project Inspector.
6.
Installer shall have completed at least five projects of equal scope to systems described herein and shall have been in the business of supplying and installing
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
I 0/01/11 PUBLIC ADDRESS SYSTEMS 27 5128-3
111001
specified type of systems for at least five years. Installer shall include the telephone number of the customer's client contact for each project 7.
Installer shall include in the Material List Submission copies of the manufacturers' certifications that the Installer is an authorized distributor and service provider of the submitted manufacturers' products and Installer's staff has been adequately trained and certified in the installation of those products.
8.
Installer shall provide a letter from the Manufacturer warranting the availability of spare parts common to proposed system for a period no less than five years on all components
9.
Calculations: Power load of P A system shall be calculated by the Installer on a separate sheet and shall be included in submittal.
10.
Design Analysis: Installer shall submit an electro-acoustical design analysis for review. Provide scale drawings indicating plans and sections of the auditorium along with an elevation of the cluster. One drawing shall indicate contours with the maximum predicted sound pressure level for the 1KHz octave with a band limited pink noise test signal. Another drawing shall indicate the calculated area within which the specified electro-acoustic frequency response may be maintained for the first arrival sound from the cluster. Submit the name and the organizational affiliation of the individuals responsible for performing the electro-acoustical design analysis. Submit evidence, including appropriate certificates, that these individuals are trained in the specified modeling application. The design shall be generated by or based upon the output of a Computer Aided Electro-Acoustical Design Program such as Ease, Acousta CADD, Bose Modeler, Array SHOW, CATT, JBL CADP2 OR MAPP Online Pro.
CODES AND STANDARDS
1.04 A.
Complete installation shall meet or exceed the latest edition of following standards. 1.
EIA/TIA-568: Commercial building telecommunications wiring standard.
2.
EIA/TIA-569: Commercial building standard for telecommunications pathways and spaces.
3.
EIA/TIA-606: Administration standard for telecommunications infrastructure of commercial buildings.
4.
EIA/TIA-607: Commercial building grounding and bonding requirements for telecommunications.
5.
CCR Part 2- California Building Code (CBC).
6.
CCR Part 3 - California Electrical Code (CEC). 10/01/11
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
PUBLIC ADDRESS SYSTEMS 275128-4
111001
1.05
7.
ANSI, ASTM, UL, NEMA, IEEE and FCC standards as applicable.
8.
BICSI Telecommunications Distribution Methods Manual, current edition.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A.
The system shall consist of a fully operational autonomous Public Address system that provides loudspeaker coverage for Auditoriums within Schools. The system shall consist of multiple input, output and amplification components integrated into a school operational system. QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.06 A.
Work shall conform to CCR, Title 24 Part 3, Basic Electrical Regulation and National Electrical Code, latest edition.
B.
Only a qualified Installer holding licenses required by legally constituted authorities having jurisdiction over the work, shall do the work.
C.
Persons skilled in trade represented by work, and in accordance with all applicable building codes, shall install system in accordance with best trade practice.
D.
Work shall be performed by an installer that has completed at least five school systems of equal scope to system described herein and shall have been engaged in business of supplying and installing specified type of systems for at least five years. Installer shall maintain a fully equipped service organization capable of furnishing repair service to equipment
E.
Use adequate numbers of skilled technicians who are manufacturer and CTS certified, thoroughly trained and experienced on the necessary crafts and completely familiar with the specified requirements and methods needed for the proper performance of the work.
F.
Coordinate cable runs, and rack equipment locations with the OAR during the initial design of the cable installation. Installer and OAR must agree as to the final location of devices and the cable plant design.
G.
Provide manpower and tools required to participate in Owners Quality Assurance Testing as detailed in Appendix "A" of this specification. 1.
Items on check list of Appendix "A" will be examined as a minimum at the Public Address Head End, terminal cabinets, ground vaults and classrooms. Should the examination show deficiencies related to items in the checklist, Owners acceptance testing will be discontinued until corrections have been made. When an Installer has completed the corrections, a subsequent Quality Assurance test shall be initiated. This procedure is in addition to the system functionality testing required in Article 3.02 below. 10/01/11
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
PUBLIC ADDRESS SYSTEMS 27 5128-5
111001
H.
Design analysis shall be performed by certified individuals under the direct observation of the sound engineer responsible for preparation of the Shop Drawings.
I.
Perform system startup and electro-acoustical testing with the TDS Techron TEF20 instruments under the direct observation of the sound engineer responsible for preparation of the Shop Drawings. Alternatively, an MLS analyzer such as Acoustisoft ETP 5 Acoustisoft, RPlusD, EAW Smaart or Meyer Sound SIM System 3 may be used to perform the testing. Use all manufacturer recommended options with any of these programs. WARRANTY
1.07 A.
Warranty that work executed and materials furnished shall be free from defects in materials, fabrication and labor for a minimum period of three years from date of installation acceptance, excluding specific items of work that require a warranty of a greater period as set forth in this Specification. In the event a manufacturer's warranty is longer than three years, the manufacturer's warranty shall be the warranty period. Immediately upon receipt of written notice from the Owner, repair or replace at no expense to the Owner, any defective material or work that may be discovered before final acceptance of work or within warranty period; any material or work damaged thereby; and adjacent material or work that may be displaced in repair or replacement. Examination of or failure to examine work by the Owner shall not relieve Contractor from these obligations.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.01
ANTENNA AND GROUNDING A.
Antenna and Accessories: 1.
FM Antenna: Provide a Blonder Tongue BTY-2-FM, or equal, all-direction FM dipole antenna on the indicated roof location. Lead-in cable shall be 72 ohm weatherproof coaxial type, furnished with necessary weatherproof matching transformer at each end. Cable shall be Belden 8241, or equal. Provide and install a weatherproof surge protector, PolyPhaser, or equal with # 6 AWG grounding conductor to a grounding electrode. The grounding conductor shall be bonded to the mast and surge protector.
2.
AM Antenna: Furnish a whip type AM antenna. Insulate antenna from ground. Guy AM antenna whip from mast with an insulated standoff. If signal strength is not adequate from the antenna to provide interference-free reception, provide and install a 30-foot length of hard-drawn 12 gage copper wire between new roof antenna masts. Lead-in wire shall be 72 ohm coaxial cable Belden 8241, or equal, and furnished with necessary matching transformers at each end. Provide and install a weatherproof surge protector, PolyPhaser, or equal with # 6
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/11 PUBLIC ADDRESS SYSTEMS 27 5128-6
111001
A WG grounding conductor to a grounding electrode. The grounding conductor shall be bonded to the mast and surge protector.
B.
3.
Provide an AM/FM antenna coupler in an outdoor housing mounted on antenna mast. Rauland No. LM0027 or equal.
4.
Provide an antenna mast on the roof of the administration building or as indicated on Drawings. Mast shall be 1 lf4-inch galvanized steel and shall be secured to roof joists with steel straps specifically manufactured for specified installation.
5.
Provide a % inch antenna conduit from PA console to antenna.
Grounding: 1.
Wiring enclosures, terminal cabinets, outlets, frames of cabinet racks, and other enclosures shall be grounded in accordance with the requirements of the California Electrical Code, as specified, or required.
2.
Chassis of amplifiers, power supplies, and accessories shall be grounded by being bonded to the control cabinet.
3.
Housing, grips of all microphones, conductive housings, and other equipment shall be grounded by means of grounding wire or shield in cord or cable furnished for equipment connections.
4.
Circuits shall be grounded as recommended by manufacturer of equipment to which they are connected unless otherwise specified or required.
ELECTRONIC RECEPTACLES
2.02 A.
Microphone receptacles shall be Cannon XLR/SLR Series, or equal. Receptacles shall be furnished with mounting brackets for floor boxes, Sierra, or equal, 0.040 inch stainless steel plates, unless noted otherwise on Drawings. Plates shall be engraved with receptacle function in 3/16 inch high letters filled with black paint. Receptacles shall conform to following: ~
Description
Model
(A)
Single microphone, male.
LR-3-14, on a one-gang plate receptacle wall mounting.
(B)
Microphone receptacle, male.
Appleton Model RE-725, or ceilingmounted on a manual Reelite Retractable reel with take-up reel, Belden No. 8412 cable, or equal, and Cannon XLR Series plug and support chain.
10/01111
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
PUBLIC ADDRESS SYSTEMS 27 5128-7
111001
(C)
Single microphone, male.
LR-3-14N, with a CA015-0094-000, receptacle floor mounting yoke.
B.
Projector receptacles shall be Switchcraft No. D4F or equal and mounted on a SierraS 13 single-gang stainless steel plate or on a yoke or insert in a floor box.
C.
Speaker connectors shall be Neutrik two- or four-conductor jacks specifically provided for the specified installation. Stage monitor speaker jacks shall be furnished with one jack on a Sierra No. S-13 plate. Cluster speakers shall be furnished with jacks as required on a custom, brushed, anodized, engraved and filled aluminum plate mounted on a six inch by six inch by 12-inch screw cover box. Connectors for the assistive listening system FM antenna and the central system override speaker shall be located on this panel. Flush or surface mounting condition and finish shall be as required by Architect.
2.03
CONDUCTORJCABLES A.
Cable for overriding autonomous PA system shall be one twisted pair, No. 18 conductor; West Penn No. CL2 293 or equal. The furnished cable shall be the same type of cable furnished for zone paging, switching, and interfacing.
B.
Cable for microphone and other input sources and speakers shall be one twisted pair of 22 gage stranded tinned copper conductors, polyethylene shielded with an aluminum foil-mylar shield, a 22 gage stranded tinned copper drain wire and polyvinyl jacket. Cable shall be Belden 8761, or equal.
C.
Power cables to speakers in the cluster shall be one jacketed, twisted, stranded 12 AWG pair, West Penn CL3 227, or equal.
D.
Coaxial cables from wireless microphone antennas to antenna splitters and from assistive listening transmitter to antenna shall beRG-58 AIU, Belden 8219, or equal.
2.04
KEYS AND LOCKS A.
2.05
Provide keys and locks for cabinets and equipment; locks shall be keyed to a Corbin No. 60 key, for access to operate equipment and Corbin No. 70 key, for access to service equipment. AUDITORIUM AUTONOMOUS PA SOUND SYSTEM
A.
System shall provide the following functions: 1.
Selective inputs for microphones, central sound rack, projector, AM-FM tuner/cassette tape player and output jacks for a tape recorder with tone, volume, and mixer controls on front panel.
2.
"Program All" and "Emergency All" audio shall be reproduced in the auditorium over loudspeakers through parallel speaker system and a relay activated by
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
I 0/01/11 PUBLIC ADDRESS SYSTEMS 27 5128-8
111001
central console under these conditions. During "program all" and "emergency all" autonomous speakers are automatically disconnected from the Auditorium PA amplifiers using the relay and a speaker load placed on output of that amplifier to prevent damage so that a feed from central sound console to the parallel central sound system may be heard. Alternatively, muting the amplifier at the input or by power disconnection is acceptable. 3.
Auditorium PA system shall provide a line level output to central console.
4.
On program transmission mode to or from auditorium PA system, following operations shall be provided: a.
Local P A system shall be manually energized before transmission. If one of the amplifiers and/or mixers is connected to an "always-on" ac outlet, this may not be necessary.
b.
"From" line: Program from central PA system is manually switched to local amplifier input and audio level adjusted with local amplifier volume controls.
c.
"To" line: Program to central PA system is manually switched to local amplifier output and locally originated program is transmitted to central PA console .
. d. B.
"TO" or "FROM" switch shall be located on amplifier front panel.
System Components: 1.
Equipment shall be contained in a freestanding cabinet, with matching sides and top panel, providing at least 78 %-inch panel space and furnished with a louvered rear door with recessed handle and lock. Exterior rack dimensions shall be 87 %-inch high by 22-1/8-inch wide by 22 1/8-inch deep. Rack shall be furnished with key locking steel front and rear doors. The rack shall be constructed of 16-gage steel. Cabinet shall be constructed with mounting rails tapped for No. 10-32 screws on EIA spacing front and rear, and shall be provided with CBC compliant earthquake reinforcing kits. Calculations for seismic bracing shall be based on the maximum seismic loads as determined by the CBC based on specifications provided by the cabinet manufacturer. Cabinet shall be UL listed.
2.
Program for digital mixer-preamplifier shall be a TOA D-901- rack mount digital stereo mixer, or equal, with four stereo line inputs, six microphone/line inputs, six mix busses, a stereo output, a sum of stereo mono output, one auxiliary output and one monitor output. The mixer shall not occupy more than three rack spaces.
3.
Automatic microphone mixer/pre-amplifier shall be a TOA M-9000, or equal, with modular inputs as required. It shall be possible to link up to five mixers
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01111 PUBLIC ADDRESS SYSTEMS 27 5128-9
111001
together into one unit and the system shall provide an adjustable number of open microphone (NOM) circuits to allow optimization of gain sharing for each situation. 4.
AM-FM tuner shall be a TOA DT-930, or equal, with 40AM and/or FM presets, three uV FM/26 uV AM sensitivity, and -8dB unbalanced mono output. Tuner shall not occupy more than two rack spaces.
5.
CD player shall be a Marantz No. PMD371, or equal, five disk rotary changer with IR remote control. Features shall include full random play, single or multiple track repeat change disks while playing, index access via remote control audible cue and review, full programming and program editing, automatic music search and AMX controller computability.
6.
Digital Sound Processors shall be furnished with two 64-bit processors, 24-bit AID and D/A converters, and firmware upgradeable functionality. It shall be furnished with two-channel, 31-band, 1/3 octave equalization and three bands per channel of parametric equalization and shall have six bands of automatic feedback elimination. The processors shall be furnished with real-time analyzer capability with automatic equalization adjustment and dual channel, multi-band limiter, and dual channel noise gate and digital delay. Digital audio processors shall be Behringer DEQ 2496, or equal.
7.
Rack-mounted equipment shall be identified by engraved designations mounted either on the vent or blank panels above or below the equipment or on designations mounted between the mounting screws on each side. The designations on the rack shall match those indicated on the Shop Drawings. Designations are to be engraved in V4 inch high white letters on black micarta stock. Bevel the edges of designations.
8.
Dual-channel power amplifiers for loudspeakers: Amplifier shall be provided with a minimum FTC output power rating of 500 watts/channel into eight ohms at less than 0.25 percent THD from 20Hz to 20KHz. Hum and noise shall be-l 00 dB or better referred to rated power output into eight ohms. Amplifier shall be furnished with thermal, short circuit and clipping protection. Provide one amplifier channel for every two hom speakers, at a minimum, and provide a controller module, if specified by the manufacturer, appropriate to the associated loudspeakers for each amplifier to optimize array performance. Amplifier shall be Electro-Voice P2000, Apogee Sound CA8000 or QSC CX902. Amplifier and array speakers shall be the products of one manufacturer. A subwoofer, such as the TOA F120B/W may be added to the system if it can be appropriately attached to one of the existing amplifier outputs.
9.
Auditorium Loudspeakers: Quantity, selection of coverage patterns and locations shall be as required to provide specified levels and uniformity of coverage for first arrival sound over the required coverage area. Loudspeaker
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/11 PUBLIC ADDRESS SYSTEMS 27 5128-10
111001
shall be available with a minimum coverage pattern of 60 by 40 degrees and shall provide a minimum frequency range of 50 Hz to 15 KHz. Speaker shall have sensitivity of at least 95 dB, 1w, 1m at 1KHz. Speakers shall be ElectroVoice Fri+152 series, Apogee AFI-3 or Ohm Ltd B-15 or equal. The frequency response for first arrival sound from the cluster within the specified coverage area as measured with a Techron TEF 20 shall be plus and minus four dB from 60Hz to 15KHz when a 1/3 octave smoothing function is applied. Amplifier and speakers shall be the products of one manufacturer.
C.
10.
Flying hardware to hold the cluster speakers together shall be as required by the manufacturer.
11.
Dual-channel power amplifier for the booth monitor speakers shall be a Sampson Servo 200, or equal, with 100 watts per channel into four ohms.
12.
Booth monitor speakers shall be Tannoy No. Di5 point source, or equal, dual concentric single drive, induction coupled full range loudspeaker, not requiring any electronic processor or control unit. The speaker, without control unit, shall provide a frequency response of plus or minus four dB 125Hz to 20khz when measured on axis with 1/3 octave smoothed swept signal. The sensitivity shall be 90 dB at 1m with 2.83 volts applied signal. Maximum sound pressure level shall be 110 dB SPL at 1m on axis with band limited noise. An output jack shall be provided on the rack front to allow recording. Connect as appropriate to an amplifier or line-level output.
13.
Type C1 hom loudspeakers shall be Atlas No. APC-30T or equal. Speakers shall be used in conjunction with the autonomous system override controlled by the central system PA system.
14.
Preprogram at least two preset configurations into the D-901 (and/or the Behringer DSPs). Label each to allow one setup for optimum voice intelligibility, and the other for music. Label the rack to indicate the two preset buttons, one for VOICE and the second MUSIC. Provide an explanation during the training sessions as to the proper operation of these two presets.
A wireless microphone sub-system shall be furnished and shall accommodate a total of ten microphones. The antenna splitters and wireless microphone receivers shall be mounted in a wall-mounted rack back stage, in close proximity to the diversity receiver antennas. The system shall be furnished with ten wireless lapel microphones and four hand held wireless microphones. Any combination totaling ten microphones may be used at one time. Provide the following: 1.
Wireless microphone receivers shall be Telex FMR-500, or equal, UHF true diversity receiver with :S1.0mv RF sensitivity, 90dB of squelch quieting and hum and noise-90dB. Two units shall mount in one rack space and the antennas shall be removable for use with antenna splitters.
2.
Wireless microphone splitters shall be Telex APD-4, or equal.
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/11 PUBLIC ADDRESS SYSTEMS 275128-11
Ill 001
D.
E.
3.
Wireless receiver antenna shall be Telex ANU-14, or equal, V4 wave antenna mounted for optimal signal reception from the stage and forestage.
4.
Wireless belt pack transmitter shall be Telex WT-500, or equal, with metal case and T A -4 connector.
5.
Lavalier microphone shall be an ELM-22S, or equal, omni-directional condenser, microphone with aTA-4F connector.
6.
Hand-held wireless microphone shall be a Telex HT-500, or equal, with EV 767 super cardioid dynamic microphone element.
Production Intercom System: 1.
System shall be microprocessor controlled with two-party line channels and 12 VDC phantom power. The rack-mounted controller shall be furnished with "TALK", "LIS TEN" and "TAB" keys for each channel, an "ALL-TALK" key and a "PA" key. The rack-mounted power supply shall furnish a two amp power supply and an amplified 5W speaker. The system shall be provided with wall-mounted intercom and speaker stations. Furnish one single-sided headset and one 30-foot headset extension cable for each station, including the rack mount controller.
2.
Component/Accessory Manufacturers: a.
Intercom controller shall be Telex US-2002, or equal.
b.
Intercom power supply shall be a Telex SPS-2001, or equal.
c.
Wall-mounted, two-channel intercom station shall be Telex WM-2000, or equal.
d.
Wall-mounted, two-channel intercom speaker station shall be Telex SS2002, or equal.
e.
Single-sided headset shall be Telex PH-1, or equal.
f.
Headset extension cables shall be Telex HE-30, or equal.
Hearing Assistance System: FM hearing assistance system shall be as manufactured by Williams Sound, Phonic Ear, or equal, and shall be furnished with the following components:
1.
No. PPA-375 base station mounted inside the amplifier cabinet. The base station shall operate in 72 MHz-76MHz band and shall be furnished with remote-mounted antenna to cover a minimum of 500 feet.
2.
No. PPA-R35 single channel receiver for use by the listener with standard nstyle headset connection including headphones .. Receiver shall be capable of
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/11 PUBLIC ADDRESS SYSTEMS 27 5128-12
111001
being clipped to a pocket or belt. Unit shall be furnished with two AA rechargeable nickel Metal Hydride batteries with receivers furnished at 100:4 ratio of seats in the auditorium to receivers provided, but never less than two receivers. Deliver receivers to the OAR before Substantial Completion. 3.
Number CHG-3512 battery charger organizer. Unit shall be capable of storing or recharging up to 12 receivers at one time. The charger shall be capable of recharging the nickel Metal Hydride batteries without removing the batteries from the receiver. Battery chargers shall be furnished in sufficient quantity to charge all provided receivers simultaneously, and transmitted to the OAR before substantial completion.
PORTABLE EQUIPMENT
2.06 A.
Provide four, low-impedance, dynamic cardioid microphones with floor stand. Microphone shall be a Shure Type SM 58, or equal, with on/off switch and microphone holders. Microphones will be furnished with 15-foot Shure microphone cables. The floor stands shall be Atlas MS-20, or equal.
B.
Provide one, 100-foot, one-piece microphone extension cable. Provide two cables, 20 gage, shielded, Belden No. 8412, or equal, terminated with Cannon No. XLR-3-11C and No. XLR-3-12C plugs.
C.
Provide eighteen, Switchcraft No. 20QD20NO, two-foot long, 1/4 inch tip, ring, sleeve patch cords.
D.
Portable equipment shall remain in the manufacturer boxes and shall be transmitted to the OAR before Substantial Completion.
PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01
AUTONOMOUS INSTALLATION
PUBLIC
ADDRESS
SYSTEM
(AUDITORIUMS)
A.
Console and Cabinet Rack Equipment Installation: Equipment within consoles and cabinet racks shall be logically arranged for convenient accessibility and maintenance. Equipment shall be mounted on shelves or panels and shall be securely attached.
B.
Amplifiers, power supplies, and other heavy devices shall be mounted in the lowest ava:ilable rack spaces on steel shelves fabricated by manufacturer of console and cabinet racks. Amplifiers and other heavy components shall be mounted in the lowest usable spaces in the rack. Cabinets, consoles, and panel faces including drawers shall be the same color.
C.
Wiring within console and cabinets shall be installed to conform to standard engineering practice, and shall be terminated on terminal strips having a terminal for each required external connection. Wiring shall be cabled, laced, and securely fastened 10/01/11
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
PUBLIC ADDRESS SYSTEMS 27 5128-13
111001
in place so no weight is imposed on any equipment, control switches, or terminals. Wires carrying audio power shall be shielded. Input and output circuits and terminal strips shall be installed to provide separation necessary for proper operation. Wires shall be identified by number and chart. D.
Conductor shields for each system shall be grounded at one location only. Grounding shall be provided within console and cabinet racks. There shall be no metallic connection between systems. Conduits for system and 120 volt AC system shall be bonded together at console and all cabinet racks.
E.
Terminate 120 volt AC supply conductors directly on disconnect switches specified and in required raceway.
3.02
OWNERS QUALITY ASSURANCE CERTIFICATION AND TESTING A.
Provide instruments for testing, and demonstrate in the presence of the Owner that the circuits and wiring test free of shorts and grounds.
B.
Provide labor, instruments, appliances, equipment, and materials necessary to demonstrate to the Owner the installation performs as required.
C.
Owner has the right to perform independent tests of equipment furnished, to determine whether or not equipment complies with requirements specified, and to proceed based on results obtained.
D.
The system shall be fully tested and operational before final inspection. Test results shall be provided to the Owner before final inspection.
E.
System startup and electro-acoustical testing with the Techron TEF20 instrumentation (or equivalent MLS system) shall be performed under the direct observation of the engineer responsible for preparation of the Shop Drawings.
F.
Reproduction of speech shall be clear, high fidelity, and with all frequencies within range of system faithfully reproduced without detectable noise, hum and distortion. 1.
With 0 dBm sine wave test signal applied at a line input of the TOA D-901 program mixer, with gain adjusted so that the sum of stereo electronically balanced output has a 0 dBm output, and with the Digital Signal Processor bypassed, demonstrate that each channel of the Cluster Amps can deliver 250 watts RMS or greater into an 8 ohm resistive load from 80Hz to 10,000 Hz within their respective bandwidths, (below 250Hz for the low-frequency amp, above 250 Hz the high-frequency amp). Record measurements at 80Hz, 125Hz, 200Hz, 315Hz, 315Hz, 1KHz, 3.15KHz, and 10KHz for each amplifier.
2.
With setup and gain adjusted as specified above, short the balanced line input with a 620 ohm resistor; 20KHz band limited noise at any cluster amp channel output shall be 80 dB below the level required to produce 250 watts RMS. I 0/01111
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
PUBLIC ADDRESS SYSTEMS 27 5128-14
111001
Record the measured noise level for each line input to a given high-frequency cluster AMP output.
3.03
3.
With setup and gain adjusted as specified above and with a 500Hz test signal, measure the total harmonic generation and noise (TH&G) throughout the audio chain. THG&N shall be 0.25 percent or less. Record the THG&N for each line input to a give high-frequency cluster amplifier channel. Record the THG&N from given line input to each high frequency cluster amplifier channel.
4.
With a 500Hz, 1mV sine wave signal applied to a microphone input of the TOA D-901 program mixer, with the gain adjusted so that the sum of stereo electronically balanced output has a 0 dBm output, with the digital signal processor bypassed, adjust the level of a given high-frequency cluster amplifier to deliver 250 watts RMS into an eight ohm resistive load. Record the THG&N for each microphone input to a given high-frequency cluster amplifier channel output. THG&N shall be 0.25 percent or less.
5.
With setup as specified above, short the input with a 120 ohm resistor and measure the 20 KHz band limited noise at the output. 20KHz band-limited noise shall be 80 dB below the level required to deliver 250 watts RMS into an eight ohin resistive load. Record the noise level for each microphone input to the given High Frequency Cluster Amplifier channel output.
6.
From a selected line level input to the effects amplifier outputs perform the measurements described above, except adjust the amplifier to deliver 100 watts RMS into an eight ohm resistive load.
7.
Perform measurements of first arrival sound pressure levels to verify compliance with the reviewed design analysis. System shall be capable of producing first arrival levels of 90 dB SPL over the specified 40Hz to 17KHz frequency spectrum in the center of the last row of fixed seating and in more than 90 percent of the fixed seats when measured with the Techron TEF-20 electro-acoustical test equipment. One-third octave smoothed first frequency response is plus and minus four dB over the specified 40Hz to 17KHz spectrum and plus and minus two dB from 1OOHz to 1OKHz in more than 90 percent of the fixed seats. First arrival requirements do not apply to areas in the acoustical shadow of columns, etc. Provide full TEF contours at six locations to provide the Architect with information on which to base recommendations for acoustical treatment.
8.
Perform two recordings of ambient noise testing with the HVAC system turned both on off. Provide test documentation to the Architect and indicate any unusual noise spikes or bands in the frequency domain caused by the HV AC.
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A.
As-Built Documentation:
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01111 PUBLIC ADDRESS SYSTEMS 27 5128-15
111001
1.
Provide three copies size E (30-inch by 42-inch) of Project site and building plans, indicating location of equipment, conduit, cable routing, ground vaults terminal cabinets, pull boxes and other installation information.
2.
Provide two copies of the record Drawings in .DWG format prepared using the most recent version of AutoCAD on a labeled CD-ROM for use on a Windows platform. a.
3.
B.
LAUSD utilizes layers as a key tool in controlling visibility of drawing elements and to provide consistent information between drawings, yet provide control over what is seen on each sheet. Public Address wiring shall be shown on a separate layer, labeled as "Public Address" that uses both building floor plans and conduit supporting structure layers below. The use of any version control blocks or company logos shall be on a layer separate from the premise wiring as-built drawings.
Floor plans indicating all devices, terminal cabinets and cross connect locations, conduit runs, ground vaults, wire types, cable routing of all cables, both underground and in each building with conduit fill and count, and as-built coding used on each cable. a.
Drawings shall include block diagrams indicating all items and their point-to-point connections in a manner following floor and site plan layout. Drawings shall also include as-built single line diagram, cable site plot plan and floor plans indicating all cables, both underground and in each building with conduit, and as-built coding used on each cable
b.
Floor plans shall indicate all devices, terminal cabinets and cross connect locations, conduit runs, ground vaults, wire types, cable routing of all cables, both underground and in each building with conduit fill and count, and as-built coding used on each cable
Operating and Servicing Manuals, Record Drawings: 1.
Deliver three copies of operating and servicing manual. Each complete manual shall be bound in three ring binders and all data shall be typewritten or drafted. a.
Manuals shall include a page with Project site and Project name, date of Substantial Completion, Contractor's name, address, telephone, and fax numbers.
b.
Manuals shall contain a letter, signed by an officer of the company indicating the beginning and ending date of any warranties described in Article 1.07 of this specification and shall describe the companies' commitment to service the warranty during the terms specified.
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
I 0/01/11 PUBLIC ADDRESS SYSTEMS 27 5128-16
111001
c.
Manuals include as-built floor plans indicating all cables, both underground and in each building with conduit, and as-built coding used on each cable. Drawings Size A (8 Yz by 11) and size B (11 by 17) shall be bound into the manual. Larger drawings shall be folded and inserted into transparent envelopes bound into the manual. Programming forms of each system shall be submitted with complete information.
d.
Manuals shall include all instructions necessary for proper operation and servicing of system and shall include: 1)
2) 3) 4)
5) 3.04
A single line diagram of the system indicating items and their point-to-point connections in a manner following floor and site plan layout. A complete two wire diagram of all connections made between components inside the system console. A wiring destination schedule for each circuit leaving console and each rack. All custom fabricated circuits, components and connections not detailed in the manufacturer's manuals shall have wiring diagrams detailing to component level, the manner in which the circuits are connected. A schematic diagram of each amplifier and other components, transistor complements and replacement part numbers.
PROTECTION A.
3.05
Protect the Work of this section until Substantial Completion. CLEANUP
A.
Remove rubbish, debris, and waste materials and legally dispose of off the Project site. OWNER ORIENTATION
3.06 A.
Before contract completion, provide and arrange for a manufacturer's technical representative to instruct designated Owner personnel in correct operation of system. Instruction shall be provided on the Project site and shall be a minimum of four hours.
B.
Instruction shall be based on manufacturers written operating instructions covering those features of interest to the Owner and applicable to the Work.
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
I 0101111 PUBLIC ADDRESS SYSTEMS 275128-17
ATTACHMENT "A" Safety and Technology Owners Quality Assurance Site Location Code/Name
--------------------------
Network Engineer
__________________________Project Inspector _________________________
PM Recommendation
-----------------------Electrical ------------------------------
Owner is to examine the following items based on the criteria defined in this Section. If deficiencies are noted, the system will be failed. As a courtesy, Owner will consider continuing testing at a 20 percent rate to determine the integrity of the system. Autonomous Public Address System Check List
Pass
Check all conduit and raceway layout and installation for each low voltage systems and verity that they meet all project specifications and Record Documents. Examine Head-end equipment installation, cable cross connection, system configuration for compliance with specification and conformance to Record Documents. Equipment rack installation, including placement in the communications room, seismic bracing and attachment to the floor are in conformance with specification and Structural Engineers Submittal Drawings. Are all cables clearly and indelibly marked? Is the cross-connect field clearly marked? Are all terminations punched down singly and cross-connected? Has a wiring index and destination chart been placed within the system console? Ensure that all active components, terminal cabinets, cross connects are located in a secure location. Verity that "program transmission modes" to Main Public Address/Intercom Console are fully functional. Verity that all-call override is in place and functions per Specification. Verity the functionality of the hearing assistance system. the room and quality of sound.
~onsider
coverage with
I Fail
D
D
D
D
D
D
D D D
D D D
D D
D D
D
D
D D
D D
I
Important Note: Failure on any category, constitute failure of the entire system
END OF SECTION
CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01111 PUBLIC ADDRESS SYSTEMS 27 5128-18
1309I7
•
SECTION 28 3100 FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM PART I -GENERAL SUMMARY
1.01 A.
B.
• 1.02
I.
Fire alarm system shall consist of fire alarm control panel or networked nodes, of the same make and CSFM (California State Fire Marshall) listed for the application.
2.
Labor, equipment, materials, connections, testing, and performance of operations in the installation of fire alarm system.
Related Requirements: I.
Division 01 General Requirements.
2.
Section 21 1313: Fire Suppression Sprinkler Systems.
3.
Section 23 0900: HV AC Instrumentation and Controls.
4.
Section 23 3813: Kitchen Ventilation System.
5.
Section 23 8000: Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning Equipment.
6.
Section 26 0500: Common Work Results for Electrical.
7.
Section 26 0513: Basic Electrical Materials and Methods.
8.
Section 26 0519: Low-Voltage Wire (600 VoltAC).
9.
Section 26 0526: Grounding and Bonding.
10.
Section 26 0533: Raceways, Boxes, Fittings, and Supports.
11.
Section 27 5116: Public Address and Intercommunication Systems.
12.
Section 27 5128: Public Address Systems (Auditoriums, Performing Art, Mp Rooms) (MS and HS).
SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS A.
•
Section Includes:
Fire detection system shall continually supervise and monitor the following initiating, signaling, and monitoring circuits: 1.
Manual fire-pull stations.
2.
Smoke and heat detectors, duct detectors, including those installed under other sections.
3.
Fire sprinkler flow and tamper switches. In existing installations also include PIV tamper switches.
4.
Alarm signaling circuits including alarm bells, horns and visual alarm units .
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
9/17/2013 FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM 283IOO-I
130917
•
6.
Power supplies and batteries.
7.
Interconnection with Central and Autonomous Public Address systems, telephone network system, Clock System-Classroom or Program schedule change, HV AC system where applicable, kitchen fire suppression system, Theatrical and House Lighting, and elevator equipment for control of recall function and elevator circuit breaker shunt trip.
System controls shall be UL listed for power limited applications in accordance with California Electrical Code.
c.
The fire alarm devices and equipment shall be listed for installation for the fire alarm control panel to which they are being connected.
D.
Complete installation shall conform to the version of NFPA 72, California Fire Code, California Building Code (CBC), and California Electrical Code (CEC) as approved by DSA on stamped drawings.
E.
System labels and devices programming addresses shall be based on final signage and building labeling submittals. For existing facilities contractor shall obtain from Owner Authorized Representative a copy of the current site layout and building labeling designations. CERTIFICATION
A.
Certification: Installation of fire alarm system shall not begin until Shop Drawings, including State Fire Marshal listing numbers of fire alarm components, are submitted and reviewed by the Architect. Written certification by fire alarm equipment distributor or manufacturer shall be submitted to the Architect stating that system and its component parts are as approved and listed by the State Fire Marshal, and that the design conforms to requirements set forth in CBC. PERFORMANCE
1.04 A.
System shall be fully programmable, configurable, and expandable in the field without special tools or PROM programmers and shall not require replacement of memory ICs. Installer shall provide a CD of system installed software, site specific system programming and information and tools required to re-program or modify the system. SYSTEM FUNCTIONAL OPERATION
1.05 A.
•
Annunciators.
B.
1.03
•
5.
When a fire alarm condition is detected by one of the system alarm initiating devices, the following functions shall occur: 1.
System alarm LED shall flash.
2.
Local sounding device in panel shall be activated.
3.
The LCD display shall indicate type of device, custom label location label and point status alarm condition .
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HJGH SCHOOL
9/17/2013 FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM 28 3100-2
130917
• B.
4.
Appropriate change of status message shall be transmitted to remote annunciator(s) .
5.
Automatic programs assigned to alarm point shall be executed and associated indicating devices and relays activated.
6.
In the event of a fire alarm control panel activation, manual and automatic electronic tone or electromechanical bell class passing signals shall be disabled.
7.
In the event of a fire alarm condition the Central and Autonomous Public Address System shall be overridden.
8.
UDACT (Universal Digital Alarm Communicator Transmitter) shall activate.
9.
Provide necessary hardware and labor for a complete and tested interfacing of the fire alarm system with the lighting controls systems in Auditoriums, Multi-Purpose rooms, and Gymnasiums; lighting in these areas shall be brought to full brightness in the event of a fire alarm.
Trouble and Supervisory Conditions. 1.
• C.
D.
•
When any trouble condition is detected the following functions shall occur: a.
System trouble LED shall flash.
b.
Local sounding device in panel shall be activated.
c.
The LCD display shall indicate the type of trouble and custom label location associated with the trouble condition and its location . Unacknowledged alarm messages shall have priority over trouble messages. If such an alarm is displayed, then trouble messages shall not be displayed.
d.
Appropriate message shall be transmitted to remote annunciators.
e.
UDACT shall activate.
When any supervisory condition occurs such as a sprinkler valve tamper, the following function shall occur: 1.
System supervisory LED shall flash.
2.
Local sounding device in panel shall be activated.
3.
Appropriate message shall be transmitted to remote annunciators.
4.
UDACT shall activate.
Activation of control panel ACKNOWLEDGE switch in response to a single new alarm, trouble or supervisory condition shall silence panel sounding device and change system alarm, trouble, or supervisory LED from flashing to steady-ON. If additional new alarm, trouble, or supervisory conditions exist in the system; activation of this switch shall advance display to next alarm, trouble, or supervisory condition that exists, and shall not silence local audible device or change LED to steady until new conditions have been so acknowledged. New alarm conditions shall always be displayed before new trouble conditions. Occurrence of a new
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
9/17/2013 FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM 28 3100-3
130917
alarm, trouble, or supervisory condition shall cause panel to resound, and sequences as described above, shall repeat.
•
•
E.
Activation of the signal silence switch shall cause appropriate notification (indicating) appliances and relays to return to normal condition. Selection of notification appliance circuits and relays silenced by this switch shall be fully programmable.
F.
Activation of system reset switch shall cause electronically latched initiating devices or zones, as well as associated output devices and circuits, to return to normal condition after sixty seconds of alarm. If alarm conditions exist in system after system reset switch activation, system shall then re-sound alarm conditions as indicated hereafter.
G.
Activation oflamp test switch shall tum on LED indicators, LCD display, and local sounding device in panel, and then return to previous condition.
H.
Fire alarm indicating appliances may be silenced or extinguished, after one minute, by operating signal silence switch at the F ACP or by use of key supervised alarm silence switch at remote annunciators. A subsequent zone alarm shall reactivate signals. Audible indicating appliances shall be automatically silenced after no less than five nor more than ten minutes of operation. Visual indicating appliances shall be extinguished at system reset, or automatically after no less than five nor more than ten minutes of operation. Fire sprinkler flow alarm bells shall not silence until the contacts in the fire sprinkler flow switch return to the normal non-alarm state. Appropriate signage must be installed on or next to the sprinkler alarm bell.
I.
Elevator lobby, machine room and hoistway smoke detectors shall, in addition to operations listed above, cause elevator cars to be recalled as follows: Elevator cars shall be recalled to main level of egress through the use of a primary recall interface relay.
2.
Elevator cars shall be recalled to predetermine alternate level if main lobby smoke detector is activated.
3.
Fire Fighter's hat light indicator in elevators shall provide visual warning when elevator lobby, machine room, and hoistway smoke detectors are activated.
J.
System's circuits including but not limited to initiation, indicating, and equipment interfacing shall be monitored for open or short circuit and ground fault conditions, these conditions shall be indicated on the Fire Alarm Control Panel and Annunciator displays while remaining circuits continue to operate normally.
K.
Notification appliance circuits shall be silenceable for testing purposes by authorized persons. Protected pass-codes, keys, or another secure method that does not require entering into the system programming shall be used. POWER REQUIREMENTS
1.06 A.
•
I.
The fire alarm control panel and remote power supply shall receive 120 V AC power, 60 Hz, through a dedicated 20 amps circuit. Circuit breaker protection for the dedicated fire alarm power circuits shall be equipped with a handle lock-on
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
9/17/2013 FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM 28 3100-4
130917
device; the breaker handle shall be colored red and labeled "FIRE ALARM". Clearly label the Electrical panel name, location and circuit number on the inside of the fire alarm control panel and remote power supplies using a p-touch style labeling system. Transient voltage surge suppression shall be provided at the 120VAC input terminal.
•
B.
System shall be provided with sufficient battery capacity to operate entire system upon loss of normal 120 V AC power, in a normal quiescent mode, for a period of 24 hours with five minutes of alarm indication at end of this period. System shall automatically transfer to standby batteries upon power failure. Battery charging and recharging operations shall be automatic. Batteries, once discharged, shall recharge at a rate to provide a minimum of 70 percent capacity in 12 hours.
c.
Circuits requiring system operating power shall be 24 VDC and shall be individually protected at control panel. SUBMITTALS
1.07
•
A.
Provide in accordance with Division 01.
B.
Component Plan Submittal: Availability and listing for its application shall be verified for system components before presentation of the submittal. Include the following information and details as applicable: I.
Installer name, address, telephone number.
2.
List of system components, equipment and devices, including manufacturer model numbers, quantity and California State Fire Marshal listing numbers, mounting heights, and symbols per LAUSD symbol list.
3.
Copies of manufacturer specification sheets for equipment and devices indicated. Highlight or identify the specific components on Catalog cut sheets.
4.
Voltage Drop Calculations: Include the following information for the worst case:
5.
•
a.
Point-to-point or Ohms law calculations.
b.
Zone used in calculations.
c.
Voltage drop percent. Voltage drop shall not exceed manufacturer's requirements. If voltage drop exceeds ten percent, indicate manufacturer listed operating voltage ranges for equipment and devices.
Battery types, amp hours, and load calculations including the following: a.
Normal operation: 100 percent of applicable devices for 24 hours to equal control panel amps plus list of amps per device that draw power form the panel during standby power condition including, but not limited to, zone modules, detectors and devices as identified.
b.
Alarm condition: 100 percent of applicable devices for five minutes to equal control panel amps plus list of amps per device that draw
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR& P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
9/17/2013 FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM . 28 3100-5
130917
power from panel during alarm condition including, but not limited to, the following:
• c. 6. C.
Zone modules.
2)
Signal modules.
3)
Detectors.
4)
Signal devises.
5)
Annunciator.
6)
Other devices as identified.
Normal operation plus alarm operation load calculation shall include total amp hours required and total amp hours provided.
Provide one copy oftesting procedures.
Shop Drawings: Provide Shop Drawings, in the same size as the design Drawings, include the following: 1.
Provide drawing scale, elevations of system enclosures, and actual layout of the Fire Alarm Control Panel, power supply, annunciator, and main system components.
2.
Site Plan indicating PIV and related fire sprinkler system devices and equipment to be monitored or supervised; such as water flow valves, and main equipment such as control panels, power supplies, annunciators, and components such as outdoor wall-mounted horns, sprinkler bells, pull boxes, underground pull boxes , wiring routes on buildings exterior and underground locations. In each conduit or raceway run indicate conduit sizes, and quantities and type of wires.
•
•
1)
a.
In existing facilities make a distinction between existing and new installation.
3.
Complete battery calculations, and voltage drop calculation shall be included; these calculations shall be based on the devices maximum UL current rating.
4.
One line drawing for the entire system network indicating system components and wiring. The one line diagram shall show but not be limited to panel to panel interconnections, conductors gage and quantity, conduit size and type (designation) and specific function.
5.
System panel one-line drawings indicating the quantity and type (designation) of conductors entering and exiting the fire alarm terminal cabinet in each building (enclosure) for initiating, notification, or other command control functions required for complete system operation: a.
Individual floor or building plan view drawings indicating device locations including end of line resistors "EOLR" in accordance with the legend provided.
b.
Individual point addresses for initiation and notification devices .
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HJGH SCHOOL
9/17/2013 FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM 283100-6
130917
c.
•
•
6.
Provide interfacing with equipment furnished by others including voltages, and other required coordination items. Refer to 3.01-B.
7.
Each of the pictorial diagrams included shall appear identical to the products they are intended to depict, in order to speed installation of the system, and to enhance the accuracy of the installation Work. Typical wiring diagrams or catalog sheets are not permitted.
8.
Background Drawings with device locations ofDSA approved drawings are available in electronic format and may be obtained from the Owner Authorized Representative (OAR). Contractor is solely responsible for the accuracy and completeness of shop drawings. Buildings that are not part of the contract shall be clearly identified "NOT IN CONTRACT". Shop Drawings shall be prepared in the latest version of AutoCAD with three CD ROM electronic copies submitted along with full sized Shop Drawings.
9.
Other installation and coordination drawings specifically related to this section shall be included as follows: a.
Size A (8 Y2 by II) and size B (II by I7) shall be bound into the manual.
b.
Larger drawings shall be folded and inserted into transparent envelopes and bound into the manual.
10.
Installation and coordination drawings for items in other sections shall be included with submittal of Shop Drawings. Submit blue line copies and one reproducible copy of installation and coordination drawings.
11.
Samples: Provide Samples of material and equipment as required by the Architect. If Samples are requested, they shall be submitted within ten days from date of request.
D.
In addition to the above requirements, provide submittals to meet any additional requirements of DSA.
E.
Submittal of Equivalent Systems: I.
F.
•
Device "typical" wiring diagrams. These drawings shall indicate specific termination details for peripheral equipment and interface devices .
In addition to the submittal requirements of this section, if an equivalent system listed in Section 2.0IA is submitted in lieu of the designed system shown on DSA approved drawings, the Contractor shall also submit a letter stating that the system is equivalent, and that device locations and quantities of devices are unchanged. Attached to this letter shall be a copy ofthe revised equipment schedule with corresponding CSFM numbers and a cut sheet for each item.
Modifications or additions to existing fire alarm systems shall be compatible and of the same manufacturer as the existing system. Contractor shall be solely responsible for engineering, plan check and any fees resulting form an installation that deviates from this requirement.
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
9/17/2013 FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM 28 3100-7
130917
G.
•
•
•
Prior to Substantial Completion submit to the Architect or Engineer of Record and to Owner Authorized Representative a complete updated set of the Shop Drawings showing changes made to the Fire Alarm System during construction . These drawings will become the System As-Built Drawing set for the Fire Alarm System Owner's Manual. QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.08 A.
Installer shall have successfully completed at least five projects of equal scope in the past five years, and have been in business of furnishing and installing fire alarm systems of this type for at least five years.
B.
Installer shall be a factory authorized distributor and service provider for the brand of equipment offered and shall provide documentation to the Architect upon request.
c.
Installer shall maintain a fully equipped service organization capable of furnishing repair service to the equipment and shall maintain a spare set of major parts for the system at all times.
D.
Installer shall furnish a letter from manufacturer of equipment certifying equipment has been installed according to factory standards and that system is operating properly.
E.
Certifications: Installer shall submit certification from the equipment manufacturer indicating that installer is an authorized representative of the equipment manufacturer and is trained on network applications.
F.
Materials and equipment installed shall be new.
G.
Equipment in this specification shall be furnished and installed by the Authorized Factory Distributor of the equipment. Furnish a letter from the manufacturer of major equipment, which certifies that the installer is an authorized distributor and that the equipment has been installed according to factory intended practices. Furnish a written guarantee from the manufacturer that they will have a service representative assigned to this area for the life of the equipment.
H.
Installer shall be Underwriters Laboratory (UL) listed company under the UUJS classification, and shall certify that the installation has been made in accordance with UL requirements.
I.
The fire alarm contractor shall have a NICET II Certified Technician on staff in their facility directly involved with this project to ensure technical expertise to this project and adherence with these specifications.
J.
Contractor or Installer's Electricians and fire and life safety technicians shall be certified in accordance with Labor Code sections 3099, and 3099.2, and section 209.0 ofthe California Code of Regulations.
K.
System startup and testing shall be performed under the direct observation of the Project Inspector and OAR. Provide a legible half size reproduction of the original completed fire alarm red-line drawings (this copy will be retained by the Owner), an accurate copy of the fire alarm system points list, and a copy ofthe construction drawings on CD in AutoCad format.
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
9117/2013 FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM 28 3100-8
130917
•
L.
At the time of installation the most current software package available shall be provided .
M.
Provide at the time of Owner Acceptance of the installation, equipment, and updated software which is to include the appropriate operating system, pass-codes, electronic keys and program disks, manuals and cables employed in the installation of the system. These components shall be delivered to the OAR.
N.
Provide a backup copy of the most current software revision, in disk format. This copy shall be delivered to the OAR
0.
A software license agreement shall be made available for the responsible Owner representative to sign at the time of training. WARRANTY
1.09 A.
The Fire Alarm Equipment Manufacturer shall provide a three year material warranty. Installer shall provide a three year labor warranty.
B.
Complete maintenance and repair service for the fire alarm system shall be available from a factory trained authorized representative of the manufacturer for a period of five years after expiration ofthe warranty.
PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01
•
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A.
Fire alarm equipment shall be standard products of the Notifier Co., Edwards Systems Technology, Siemens Building Technologies, Inc. Simplex Grinnell, Johnson Controls and Gamewell-FCI, or equal.
B.
Catalog and model numbers listed are intended to establish type and quality of equipment and system design as well as operating features required. Deviations from intended functions of specified system are not permitted. Equipment shall not be ordered or installed until such equipment has been reviewed and approved by the Architect.
c.
Products specified below are based on Notifier system components. manufacturers approved system components, refer to Attachment A.
2.02
FIRE ALARM (EXISTING)
PANEL
(FACP)
OR NETWORK. NODES
A.
Furnish Notifier Model No. NFS-320, (CSFM 7165-0028:0243), or NFS2-640 (CSFM 7165-0028:0243), or NFS2-3030 (CSFM 7165-0028:0224) Fire Alarm Control Panels as indicated on drawings.
B.
Operator Control: 1.
•
CONTROL
For other
Acknowledge Switch: Activation of control panel acknowledge switch in response to a single new trouble or alarm condition shall silence panel sounding device and change system alarm or trouble LED from flashing to steady-ON. If additional new alarm or trouble conditions exist in system,
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
9117/2013 FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM 28 3100-9
130917
activation of this switch shall advance display to next alarm or trouble condition that exists, and shall not silence local audible device or change LED to steady until new conditions have been so acknowledged. New alarm conditions shall always be displayed before new trouble conditions. Occurrence of a new alarm or trouble condition shall cause panel to resound, and sequences as described above, shall repeat.
•
• C.
•
2.
Signal (Alarm) Silence Switch: Activation ofthe signal silence switch shall cause programmed alarm notification appliances and relays to return to the normal condition after an alarm condition. The selection of notification circuits and relays that are silenceable by this switch shall be fully fielded programmable within the confines of applicable standards at the job site. The FACP software shall include silence inhibit and auto-silence timers.
3.
Alarm Activate (Drill) Switch: Alarm activate switch shall activate notification appliance circuits. The drill function shall latch until the panel is silenced or reset.
4.
System Reset Switch: Activation of the System Reset switch shall cause electronically-latched initiating devices, appliances or software zone, as well as associated output devices and circuits, to return to their normal condition.
5.
Lamp Test Switch: Switch shall activate local system LEDs, light each segment of the liquid crystal display and display the panel software revision for service personnel.
6.
Hot Button Switch: Hot Button Key switch shall be provided in FACP to disable all output devices for testing or repair of system. Key switch shall silence all horn and strobes, disable PA cutouts, HV AC shutdowns, door closures, and Autonomous PA systems. Key switch shall be password protected to enable function. LED indicator shall illuminate a trouble condition while Hot Button Switch is activated and shall turn off when system is re-enabled.
System Capacity and General Operation 1.
The control panel or each network node shall provide, or be capable of expansion to 318 intelligent or addressable devices for the NFS-320 or 636 Intelligent or addressable devices for the NFS2-640 and 3180 intelligent, addressable devices for the NFS2-3030.
2.
The control panel or each network node shall include Form-C alarm, trouble, supervisory, and security relays rated at a minimum of two amps at 30 VDC. It shall also include four Class B (NFP A Style Y) or Class A (NFPA Style Z) programmable Notifications Appliance Circuits.
3.
The control panel or each network node shall support up to two output modules (signal or relay) for a total often circuits for the NFS-320 or eight output modules (signal or relay), each with eight circuits for a total of 64 circuits for the NFS2-640. The NFS2-3030 shall support 12 output modules for a total of96 circuits. Programmable notification appliance circuits shall be class B .
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES ffiGH SCHOOL
9/17/2013 FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM 28 3100-10
130917
•
•
•
4.
The system shall include a full featured operator interface control and annunciation panel that shall include a backlit Liquid Crystal Display (LCD), individual color coded system status LEOs, and an alphanumeric keypad with easy touch rubber keys for the field programming and control of the fire alarm system.
5.
The system shall be programmable, configurable, and expandable in the field without the need for special tools, PROM programmers or PC based programmers. It shall not require replacement of memory ICs to facilitate programming changes.
6.
The system shall allow the programming of any input to activate any output or group of outputs. The FACP shall support up to 20 logic equations, including "and" "or" and "not", or timed delay equations to be used for advanced programming. Logic equations shall require the use of a PC with software utility designed for programming.
7.
The FACP or each network node shall provide the following features: a.
Drift compensation to extend detector accuracy over life. Drift Compensation shall also include a smoothing feature, allowing transient noise signals to be filtered out.
b.
Detector Sensitivity tests, meeting requirements of NFP A 72 Chapter seven.
c.
Maintenance alert, with two levels (maintenance alert or maintenance urgent), to warn of excessive smoke detector dirt or dust accumulation .
d.
Nine sensitivity levels for alarm, selected by detector. The alarm level range shall be 0.5 to 2.35 percent per foot for photoelectric detectors and 0.5 to 2.5 percent per foot for ionization detectors. The system shall also support sensitive advance detection laser detectors with an alarm level range of 0.03 percent per foot to one percent per foot. The system shall also include up to nine levels of Pre- alarm, selected by detector, to indicate impending alarms to maintenance personnel.
e.
Circuit boards, programming, and interconnecting cables to enable the system to display or print system reports.
f.
Alarm verification, with counters and a trouble indication to alert maintenance personnel when a detector enters verification 20 times.
g.
PAS pre-signal, meeting NFP A 72 requirements.
h.
Rapid manual station reporting (less than three seconds) shall meet NFPA 72 Chapter one requirements for activation of notification circuits within ten Seconds of initiating device activation.
1.
Periodic detector test, conducted automatically by the software .
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
9/17/2013 FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM 283100-11
130917
•
•
Self optimizing pre-alarm for advance fire warning, which allows each detector to learn its particular environment and set its pre-alarm level to just above normal peaks .
k.
Cross zoning with the capability of counting: two detectors in alarm, two software zones in alarm, or one smoke detector and one thermal detector.
l.
Walk test, with a check for two detectors set to same address.
m.
Control-by-time for non-fire operations, with holiday schedules.
n.
Day or night automatic adjustment of detector sensitivity.
o.
RS 232 serial port to support a District supplied printer to be used for silent testing and certification of the system.
8.
The FACP shall be capable of coding main panel(s) node notification circuits in temporal code (NFPA 72 A-2-2.2.2).The panel shall also provide a coding option that will synchronize specific strobe lights designed to accept a specific "sync pulse".
9.
Network Communication:
• D.
J·
a.
The network architecture shall be based on a Local Area Network (LAN), a firmware package that utilizes a peer-to-peer, inherently regenerative communication format and protocol. The protocol shall be based on ARCNET or equivalent non-proprietary protocol.
b.
Failure of any node shall not cause failure or communication degradation of any other node or change the network communication protocol among surviving nodes located within distance limitations. A node may be an intelligent Fire Alarm Control Panel (F ACP), Network Control Station PC (NCS) or Network Control Annunciator (NCA).
c.
Each network node address shall be capable of storing Event Equations which shall be used to activate outputs on one network node from inputs on other network nodes.
System Display: 1.
Utilize the 640-character display option. The design of the CPU shall provide for a configuration with the 640-character display mounted on the front of the unit in place of the standard SO-character display.
2.
The 640-character display shall provide the controls and indicators used by the system operator: The 640 character display shall include the following operator control switches; Acknowledge, Alarm, Silence, Alarm Activate (drill), System Reset and Lamp Test.
3.
The display shall annunciate status information and custom alphanumeric labels for intelligent detector, addressable modules, internal panel circuits, and software zones .
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
9/17/2013 FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM 28 3100-12
130917
• E.
•
•
4.
The 640-character display shall provide ten Light-Emitting-Diodes (LEDs) that indicate the status of the following system parameters: AC Power and Network Communication, Fire Alarm, Pre alarm Warning, Security Alarm, Supervisory Event, System Trouble, Alarm Silence, Disabled Points, CPU failure.
5.
The 640-character display shall use ten "soft" keys for screen navigation or to accomplish dedicated programming functions. Full programming access shall require use of a laptop and the proper programming utility. The programming utility shall be provided to the OAR who will forward it to the local maintenance area representative.
6.
The system shall support the display of battery charging current and voltage on the LCD display.
Network Control Annunciator (NCA-2):
1.
When a networked system is installed a network controlled annunciator shall be provided to display system intelligent points. The NCA-2 shall be capable of displaying information for all possible points on the network.
2.
The NCA-2 shall include a minimum of 640 characters, backlit by a long life, solid-state LCD display. Additionally, the network display shall include ten soft keys for screen navigation and the ability to scroll events by type. i.e. Fire Alarm, Supervisory Alarm, Trouble, etc.
3.
The NCA-2 shall have the ability to display up to eight events in order of priority and time of occurrence. Counters shall be provided to indicate the total number of event by type .
4.
The NCA-2 shall mount in a Notifier ABS-2DB or equal box; provide the NCA-2 with a key enable or disable switch for the network node fire alarm control panels. The network display may mount in a backbox designed for this use. The network shall support the NCAs.
5.
The network control annunciator shall have an event history buffer capable of storing a minimum of 1000 events in nonvolatile memory. Additionally, the NCA-2 shall have a fire alarm history buffer capable of storing a minimum of200 events in nonvolatile memory.
6.
The NCA-2 shall include two EIA-232 ports for UL864 listed printers and CRT's.
7.
The NCA-2 shall include control switches for system wide control of Acknowledge, Signal Silence, System Reset, Drill, and local Lamp Test. A mechanical means, by which the controls switches are locked out, such as a key, shall be provided.
8.
The NCA-2 shall include long life LEDs to display Power, Fire Alarm, PreAlarm, Security Alarm, System Trouble, Supervisory, Signals, Silenced, Disabled Prints, other (non-fire) Events, and CPU Failure.
9.
The NCA-2 shall include a Master Password and up to nine user Passwords. The Master password shall be required to access the programming and alter status menus. Each User password may have different levels of
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
9/17/2013 FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM 28 3100-13
130917
authorization assigned by the Master password. Passwords installed into the NCA-2 shall be made available to the OAR who will forward them to the local maintenance area representative .
• F.
10.
The NCA-2 shall allow editing of label for points within the network, control on or off of outputs, enable or disable of network points, alter detector sensitivity, clear detector verification counters for any analog addressable detector within the network, clear any history log within the network, change the Time or Date settings, initiate a Walk Test.
11.
The NCA-2 shall include a time of day clock.
12.
Each NCA-2 shall support SO-character remote display annunciators for displaying network activity. These "Terminal Mode" displays will mimic the activity appearing on the corresponding NCA. There shall be only one annunciator or control system consisting of components manufactured by one manufacturer for the fire alarm system.
Signaling Line Circuits (SLC): 1.
Each FACP or F ACP network node shall support a minimum of one SLC for the NFS-320 for the NotifierNFS2-640 or ten SLC's for the NFS2-3030. Each SLC interface shall provide power to and communicate with up to 159 intelligent detectors (ionization, photoelectric or thermal) and 159 intelligent modules (monitor or control) for a loop capacity of 318 devices.
2.
CPU shall receive analog information from intelligent detectors to be processed to determine whether normal, alarm, pre-alarm, or trouble conditions exist for each detector. The software shall automatically maintain the detector's desired sensitivity level by adjusting for the effects of environmental factors including the accumulation of dust in each detector. The analog information shall also be used for automatic detectors testing and for the automatic determination of detector maintenance requirements.
• G.
H.
Enclosures: 1.
The control panel shall be housed in a UL-listed cabinet suitable for surface or semi-flush mounting. The cabinet and front shall be corrosion protected, given a rust-resistant prime coat, and manufacturer's standard finish.
2.
The back box and door shall be constructed of0.030 steel with provisions for electrical conduit connections into the sides and top.
3.
The supplied door shall include a key lock and shall include glass or other transparent opening for viewing of indicators. For convenience, the door may be site configured for either right or left hand hinging.
Power Supply: 1.
•
An off-line switching power supply shall be available for the fire alarm control panel or network node and provide six amps of available power for the NFS2-640, and 4.5 amps for NFS2-3030 and six amps for the NFS-320 for control panel and peripheral devices .
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES IDGH SCHOOL
9117/2013 FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM 28 3100-14
130917
• 2.03
Provisions shall be made to allow the audio-visual power to be increased as required by adding modular expansion audio-visual power supplies .
3.
Over-current protection shall be provided on power outputs. The power supply shall provide an integral battery charger. Battery arrangement may be configured in the field.
4.
The power supply shall continuously monitor field wires for earth ground conditions, and shall have the following LED indicators: a.
Ground Fault LED.
b.
AC Power Fail LED.
c.
NCA-2 on LED (4).
5.
The main power supply shall operate on 120 VAC, 60Hz, and shall provide power for the FACP or network node(s).
6.
The main power supply shall provide a battery charger using dual rate charging techniques for fast battery recharge and be capable of charging batteries up to 60 AH for the NFS-640 and 200 AH for the NFS2-3030.
REMOTE ANNUNCIATORS
A.
• B.
•
2.
A non-networked fire alarm system annunciator is required when there is only one FACP in the system. Provide a Notifier Model LCD-80TM (CSFM71650028:0243), or LCD-160 (CSFM7120-0028:0227) alphanumeric display remote annunciator, or equal. A Network annunciator is required for any system that contains more than one fire alarm control panel (F ACP) or network node. Provide a Notifier Model NCA-2 (CSFM7165-0028:0224, alphanumeric display remote annunciator, or equal. Display shall be back lit and be furnished with a maximum of 20 characters of 4 lines for the LCD-80, or 80TM and 40 characters on 16 lines for the LCD-160 or NCA-2. Provide the following functions: I.
Control switches for system acknowledge, signal silence and system reset via a touchpad.
2.
Time and date display field.
3.
Local piezo sounder with alarm or trouble resound.
4.
On-line green LED (flashing).
5.
Evacuation and drill switches, via a touchpad.
6.
Pre-signal hold via a touchpad.
7.
System test at control panel and CTR.
Following additional features shall be furnished: I.
Device Fire Annunciation.
2.
Device Trouble Annunciation.
3.
System Operation Annunciation.
4.
"Power On" LED .
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
9117/2013 FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM 28 3100-15
130917
c.
•
POWER SUPPLIES
2.04 A.
•
Remote Notification Appliance Circuit (NAC) extender power supplies shall be Notifier No. FCPS-24S6 (CSFM 7315-0028:0225), or equal. Unit shall be furnished with main printed circuit board, transformers, lockable cabinet, and batteries. Unit shall be configured to drive 4 notification appliance circuits. The remote power supplies shall be configured with a monitor module to report trouble conditions to the controlling FACP via an SLC. Triggering ofNAC inputs shall be directly controlled from the FACP without the use of addressable control or relay modules. PERIPHERAL DEVICES AND EQUIPMENT
2.05
•
Typewritten operating instructions and a site map shall be posted adjacent to remote annunciator(s). The site map shall be sized and include designations and devices as described in paragraph 3.02 N. of this specification. Project site map shall depict fire alarm devices in the building(s) in which they are installed. The instruction and site map shall be mounted in suitable document frames and attached to the wall with a minimum of two screws each. Contractor's name and telephone number shall not be placed on either the instruction or the site map.
A.
Manual Stations: Interior Use: Station shall be Notifier, Model No. BNG-1R (CSFM 7150-0028:0003) or equal, addressable semi-flush, non-breakable glass type. Station housing shall be fabricated of die-cast aluminum with reset lock and key. Provide an addressable monitor module Model No. FMM-101(A) (CSFM 7300-0028:0219) for each manual station .
B.
Smoke Detectors: Smoke Detectors shall be Notifier Model No. FAPT-851 (CSFM 7272-0028:0206) or equal, addressable smoke detectors. Provide base Model No. B71 OLP. (CSFM 7300-0028:0173). Detector shall be microprocessor based, using a combination of photoelectric, and thermal sensing technologies. The smoke detector shall have its loop number and electronic address permanently and clearly labeled onto the device base using a p-touch type labeling system. The label shall be visible without removing the detector head.
C.
Non-Explosion Proof Automatic Heat Detectors shall be combination rate-of-rise and fixed-temperature type. When fixed-temperature portion is activated, units shall provide visual evidence of such operation (LED). Addressable Heat detectors shall be Notifier Model No. FST-851R (CSFM 7270-0028:0196) or equal. Provide base Model No. B-710LP. (CSFM 7300-0028:0173) The location of the heat detector must be clearly marked below the ceiling and the detector must be readily accessible. The heat detector shall have its electronic address permanently and clearly labeled onto the device and be readily accessible. For spaces where the normal ambient temperature can reach temperatures as high as 150 degrees F. such as in attic spaces, use Notifier FST-851H with base B-710LP. The heat detector shall have its loop number and electronic address permanently and clearly labeled onto the device using a p-touch labeling system. The label shall be visible without removing the detector head .
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HJGH SCHOOL
9117/2013 FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM 28 3100-16
130917
D.
Explosion Proof Automatic heat Detectors: These detectors shall be Thermotech Model 302-EPM-135 (CSFM 7270-0021:0001) or equal; it shall be rated for 135 degree Fahrenheit alarm temperature. Mount the detector on a JL threaded hub cover manufactured by Killark Electric, or equivalent from other owner approved manufacturers. Seals, conduit type, and fittings shall be suitable for the hazardous zone and location where the device will be installed. Provide an appropriate wire protective cover over box and detector. Addressable module(s) associated with this type of devices shall be installed outside of the hazardous area.
E.
Weatherproof Automatic heat Detectors: These detectors shall be Thermotech Model 302-ET-135 (CSFM 7270-0021 :000 I) or equal; it shall be rated for 135 degree Fahrenheit alarm temperature. Detector shall be mounted horizontally in a two gang weatherproof box with cover manufactured by Hubbell/Bell or equivalent from other owner approved manufactures. Install an appropriate wire protective cover over box and detector. Conduit type and fittings shall be suitable for the environment where the device will be installed.
F.
Duct Smoke Detectors: Duct smoke detectors shall be Notifier Model No. FSD751 RPL(A) (CSFM 3240-0028:0205) or FSD-751 PL(A) (CSFM 3240-0028:0205) or equal, and shall be of solid state photoelectric type and shall operate on lightscattering photodiode principle. The location of the duct detector must be clearly marked below the ceiling and the detector must be readily accessible. The duct smoke detector shall have its electronic address permanently and clearly labeled onto the device. The label shall be visible without removing the detector head. Duct smoke detectors that are already installed as part of packaged ventilation equipment that are not the detector specified above shall be connected to the fire alarm system via a monitor module. The existing power source shall be disconnected and resettable power from the FACP or Remote Power Supply shall be connected in place of the existing power source for fire alarm system resettable power and alarm initiation.
G.
Projected Beam Infrared Type Smoke Detectors shall be Notifier Model No. FSB200S (CSFM 7260-0028:0228), or equal, and shall consist of a transmitter I receiver unit and reflector to be used in accordance with manufacturers recommendations. Each detector shall include six user-selectable sensitivity levels. Alignment shall be achieved with a signal strength meter incorporated into the beam detector. The detector shall feature automatic detection and adjustment to the optimum level for the specific environment. Provide remote test stations with key lock for detectors, Notifier Model RTS-45IKEY, or equal, located below ceiling.
H.
Linear Heat Detectors: Linear detectors shall be Protectowire Model No, PHSC190-EPR less messenger wire or PHSC-190-EPR-M with messenger wire (CSFM 7270-0854:0101) or equal linear detectors rated for 150 degree Fahrenheit installed ambient temperature and 190 degree Fahrenheit alarm temperature. Damaged detector due to excessive bending or kinking during installation shall not be accepted. Interface the Protectowire detector with the FACP system via addressable monitor module(s) located on one extreme of the detector and an end ofline resistor at the other extreme. End of line resistor shall be readily accessible for testing. Provide appropriate signs indicating the existence of linear heat detectors at the entrances of areas protected with this type of fire detection. Installation shall be
•
•
•
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
9117/2013 FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM 28 3100-17
130917
done in accordance with applicable codes and standards, and manufacturer's published installation recommendations .
•
1.
I.
•
a.
One circuit of linear heat detection shall be utilized for areas not exceeding 4,000 square feet above multiple rooms.
b.
Areas above Gymnasiums and Auditoriums exceeding 4,000 square feet shall be considered one zone.
c.
Areas divided by a fire rated wall shall be protected separately and considered an independent zone.
Multi-Criteria Fire Detectors (MS and HS Only) shall be Notifier Model FSC851 (A) IntelliQuad (CSFM 7272-0028:0255) or equal. 1.
Multi-Criteria Fire Detectors shall be used on performing stages and surrounding areas of the performing stage where the use of special effect smoke is to be used.
2.
Multi-Criteria Fire Detector shall combine four separate sensing elements into one unit:
• J.
Provide a system that utilizes linear heat detectors in concealed or controlled access areas. The detection wire shall be installed within 20 inches of the underside of the building roof or the above floor as recommended by the manufacturer. In shallow areas install the detection wire within the upper part of the space to be protected.
a.
Photoelectric chamber shall sense airborne particulate for smoke detection .
b.
Electrochemical cell technology shall monitor carbon monoxide.
c.
Infrared sensing shall measure ambient light levels and flame signatures.
d.
Thermal detection shall monitor temperature.
3.
Multi-Criteria Detector shall be capable of generating only one alarm signal from at least two sensors of the four when positively confirming a fire. The sensor output shall be mathematically evaluated to determine when a signal is warranted.
4.
Twin LED indicators shall provide 360 degree visibility.
Monitor Modules: 1.
Monitor module shall be Notifier Model No. FMM-1(A) (CSFM 73000028:0219), or equal. Module shall connect a supervised zone of conventional initiating devices, N.O. dry contact devices, including fourwire smoke detectors, to one of SLC loops. Monitor module shall install in a four-inch square by 2 118-inch deep electrical box. The module shall have its loop number, electronic address, and function label on the front cover using a P-Touch type or equal labeling system.
2.
Monitor module shall provide address-setting means using rotary decimal switches and shall store an internal type of device. An LED shall be
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
9117/2013 FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM 28 3100-18
130917
•
provided which shall flash under normal conditions indicating that monitor module is operational and in regular communication with control panel. K.
L.
• M.
•
Control Modules: 1.
Control module shall be Notifier Model No. FCM-1 (CSFM 73000028:0219), or equal. Module shall be used to connect a conventional indicating appliance or MR type isolation relay to one of the SLC loops. Control module shall install in a standard four-inch square by 2 1/8-inch deep electrical box. Audio or visual or relay power shall be provided by a separate loop from main control panel or from supervised remote power supplies. The module shall have its loop number, electronic address, and function label on the front cover using a p-Touch type or equal labeling system. Provide Air Products PAM-3 Relay Model A77-716B (CSFM 7300-1004:0101) or equal power supervision relay to monitor 24 volt DC power.
2.
Control module shall provide address-setting means using rotary decimal switches and shall store an internal identifying code which control panel shall use to identify type of device. An LED shall be provided which shall flash under normal conditions, indicating that control module is operational and in regular communication with control panel.
Relay Mod.ules: 1.
Relay Module shall be Notifier FRM-1 (CSFM 7300-0028:0219) the module shall provide as a minimum one set of form "C" dry contacts and have its loop number, electronic address, and function labeled on the front cover using a P-Touch type labeling system .
2.
Provide a buffer relay that is part of the control system if controlled circuit(s) exceeds the voltage or current rating of the relay module.
3.
Relays used to interface control of other systems shall be electrically supervised and shall only be wired in a fail-safe mode of function during a power failure.
Isolator Modules: 1.
Isolator module shall be Notifier, Model No. ISO-X, (CSFM 71650028:0243) or equal. Module shall isolate wire-to-wire circuits on an SLC loop in order to limit number of other modules or detectors that are incapacitated by short circuit fault. If a wire-to-wire short occurs, isolator shall automatically open-circuit SLC loop. When short is corrected, isolators shall automatically reconnect isolated section of SLC loop.
2.
Isolator module shall not require address setting, although isolators will electrically reduce capacity of loop by two detectors or module addresses. Isolator module will install in a standard 4-inch deep electrical box. It shall include a single LED that shall flash to indicate that isolator is operational and shall illuminate steadily to indicate that a short has been detected and isolated .
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR& P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
9/17/2013 FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM 28 3100-19
130917
N.
•
Horns and Strobes: Horns and strobes shall be products of the same manufacturer. In order to establish a standard of quality, items are specified from the products manufactured by System Sensor, acceptable manufacturers are Honeywell, Wheelock Inc., Gentex or District approved equal. Addressable or multifunction two wire indicating (Audible or Visual) appliances shall not be acceptable. 1.
Alarm horns shall be System Sensor Model No. HR (CSFM 71351653:0 189) or equal, and shall be polarized and operated by 24 VDC. Entire unit shall be red finish. Hom assemblies shall be furnished with separate wire leads for in or out wiring for legs of associated signal circuits. T tapping of signal device conductors to signal circuit conductors is not permitted. Suitable gaskets shall be provided for weatherproof installation. Horns shall provide a minimum sound pressure level of 100 dB at 10 feet. Horns shall be mounted on manufacturer's recommended outlet boxes. Weatherproof horns shall be Model No. HRK (CSFM 7135-1653:0189); Provide a Model No. BBS-2 back box skirt on indoor surface mount outlet boxes.
2.
Hom/strobe shall be wall mounted System Sensor Model No. P4R standard candela output or Model No. P4RH high candela output (CSFM 71351653:188); or equal. Hom/strobe shall operate on two separate two wire 24 VDC polarized circuits and shall be provided with a semi-flush mounting plate. Entire unit shall be red finish. Strobe light shall have a clear Lexan lens. The word "FIRE" shall be printed on the two sides of the strobe body. Hom shall provide a minimum sound output of 100 dB at 10 feet. The strobe shall provide a selectable minimum light intensity of 15, 30, 60, 75, 90, 110, 135, 150, or 185 Candela as indicated on Drawings to meet or exceed requirements of CBC, CHAPTER liB AND ADAAG and UL 1971. Hom/Strobes shall be mounted on manufacturer recommended outlet boxes. Weather proof hom or strobe shall be model No. P4RK or Model No. P4RHK. Provide a model No. BBS-2 back box skirt on indoor surface mounted outlet boxes.
3.
Strobe indicating appliances shall be System Sensor Model No. SR standard candela output or Model No. SRH high candela output (CSFM 71251653:0 186), or equal. Devices shall be UL listed and shall be wall-mounted. Entire unit shall be red finish. Strobe light shall have a clear Lexan lens. The word "FIRE" shall be printed on two sides of the strobe body. Strobes shall meet CBC, CHAPTER liB AND ADAAG and UL 1971 requirements. The strobe shall provide a selectable minimum light intensity of 15, 30, 60, 75, 90, 110, 135, 150, or 185 Candela as indicated on the Drawings to meet or exceed requirements of CBC, CHAPTER 11 B AND ADAAG and UL 1971. Strobes shall be mounted on manufacturer recommended outlet boxes. Weather proof strobe shall be model No. SRK or Model No. SRHK. Provide a model No. BBS-2 back box skirt on indoor outlet boxes.
4.
Strobe synchronization modules if required shall be System Sensor Model No. MDL3R (CSFM 7300-1653:0202) or equal, to be installed in conjunction with two or more strobes located in same room or corridor or
•
•
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
9117/2013 FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM 28 3100-20
130917
•
as indicated on Drawings. (Strobe synchronization modules must be compatible with installed strobes) . 0.
Electromagnetic Door Holder: Electromagnetic door holders shall be installed on doors as indicated on Drawings or as required. Electromagnetic Doors shall consist of a wall-mounted electromagnet and a door-mounted armature with an adjustable contact plate. Electromagnets shall provide a force of attraction of 35 pounds when energized and less than three pounds residual with power disconnected. Armature contact plates shall provide a horizontal adjustment of 25 degrees. The holding force of Electromagnetic Doors shall be totally electromagnetic and without the use of mechanical linkage or other moving parts. Electromagnetic Door Holders shall normally be energized, and a release shall be accomplished by interrupting the circuit. Door holders shall be Reliable Security Group DH Series (CSFM 35501039:0100) or equal. The door holder power supply shall be an Altronix Model AL400ULM (CSFM 7315-1335:0100) for three amp. Output, AL600ULM (CSFM 7315-1335:0100) for six amp output, AL1024ULM (CSFM 7315-1335:0100) for ten amp output. The power supply shall be equipped with a fail safe input trigger circuit and five individually protected outputs. (Electromagnetic Door holders shall not be powered by an FACP or remote NAC power supplies).
P.
Bells: System Sensor Model No. SSM-24-10, or equal, with Weather proof back box No. WBB for installation with surface raceway. Bells shall be polarized and operated by 24 VDC. Bell shall be powered from FACP or Remote NAC power supply. When used as a notification appliance to indicate fire sprinkler water flow the bell shall be directly controlled by contacts in the associated flow switch. Addressable relays or control modules shall not be used to supervise sprinkler bells. Bell assemblies shall provide separate wire leads for in or out wiring for legs of associated signal circuits. Bells shall be vibrating type providing a minimum sound pressure level output of 84 - 87 dB at ten feet. Bells shall be ten inches in diameter, finished with baked-on red enamel paint, UL listed for fire alarm installation, and suitable for surface or semi-flush mounting. Provide a sign adjacent to the water flow bell with one inch tall and 3/8 inch stroke white lettering on a bright red background. The sign shall read: "NOTIFY FIRE DEPARTMENT WHEN ALARM SOUNDS".
Q.
Water-flow Switches:
•
1.
•
Water-flow switches shall be Potter Electric Model No. VSR-F (CSFM 7770-0328:0001) or equal. Vane-type water-flow switches shall be installed on system piping as designated on Drawings or as required. Detectors shall install on clear pipe spans of appropriate nominal size, either a vertical or horizontal run, at least six inches from fittings or valves which may change water direction, flow rate or pipe diameter, and not closer than 24 inches to valves or drains. Detector shall respond to water-flow in specified direction after a preset time delay that is field adjustable. Actuation mechanism shall include a polyethylene vane inserted through a hole in the pipe and connected by a mechanical linkage to delay mechanism. Output shall consist of ten amps (dual SPDT switches form-C contacts). A conduit entrance for standard electrical conduit fittings shall be provided on detectors. Detectors shall be listed by UL for indoor or outdoor installation .
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
9/17/2013 FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM 28 3100-21
130917
No more than 18 inches of seal-tight flex may be used to connect the water flow or tamper switch to the site conduit system at any one location .
•
2.
R.
•
•
Sprinkler valve tamper switches shall be System Sensor Model No. OSY2 (CSFM 7770-1653:0 118) for use with outside screw-and-yoke valves or System Sensor Model No. PIBV2 (CSFM 7770-1653:0118) for use with post indicating valves or equal. Supervisory switch shall be installed on valves as designated on Drawings or as required. Switches shall be installed to not interfere with normal valve operation and shall be adjusted to operate within two revolutions of valve control or when stem has moved no more than 1/5 of distance from its normal position. Mechanism shall be housed in a weatherproof die cast metal enclosure, also providing a 3/4 inch tapped conduit entrance to incorporate necessary facilities for attachment to valve. Switch mechanism shall be furnished with a minimum rated capacity often amps at 125 VAC and 2.5 amps at 24 V AC. Entire installed assembly shall be tamper-resistant. Tamper switches shall be UL listed. No more than 18 inches of seal-tight flex may be used to connect the water flow or tamper switch to the site conduit system at any one location.
Universal Digital Alarm Communicator Transmitter shall be Notifier Model No. UDACT (CSFM 7300-0028:0174). The UDACT is an interface for communication of digital information between a fire alarm control panel and a UL-Listed central station. 1.
The UDACT shall be compact in size, mounting in a standard module position of the fire alarm control cabinet. Optionally, the UDACT shall have the ability for remote mounting, up to 6000 feet from the fire alarm control panel. The wire connections between the UDACT and the control panel shall be supervised with one pair for power and one pair for multiplexed communication of overall system status.
2.
The UDACT shall include connections for dual telephone lines (with voltage detect), per UL or NFPA or FCC requirements. It shall include the ability for split reporting of panel events between up to three different telephone numbers.
3.
It shall be completely field programmable from a built in keypad or laptop computer, and shall be capable oftransmitting events in multiple formats.
4.
Communication shall include vital system status such as: a.
Independent Zone (Alarm, trouble, non-alarm, supervisory.
b.
Independent Addressable Device Status.
c.
AC (Mains) and Earth Fault.
d.
System OffNormal.
e.
12 and 24 Hour Test Signal.
f.
Abnormal Test Signal (per UL requirements).
g.
EIA-485 Communications Failure.
h.
Phone Line Failure .
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
9/17/2013 FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM 28 3100-22
130917
• S.
5.
The UDACT shall support independent zone or point reporting when used in the Contact ID format. This enables the central station to have exact details concerning the origin of the fire or response emergency .
6.
The UDACT shall be supplied with two eight conductor, two to six foot long line cords. One end of the cords shall plug into the jacks on the UDACT. The other end of the cords shall plug into industry standard RJ31X surface mounted telephone jacks. Install jacks in a screw cover box adjacent to the FACP if sufficient space is not available within the FACP, or adjacent fire alarm terminal cabinet. The line cords shall be installed in conduit when it is necessary to locate the jacks remotely from the FACP enclosure. The jacks shall be mounted to the rear of the box. The telephone number for each line shall be labeled on its respective jack.
Voice Evacuation System: 1.
•
•
The Voice Evacuation Control (EVAC) Panel shall be Notifier Model No. NFV -25/50 (CSFM 6911-0028:0229) The self contained control panel shall be equipped with dual 25 watt audio amplifiers each with a single style Y (Class B) supervised 25 V rms output circuit. The EV AC panel shall have the ability to record a minimum of two field-programmable messages of up to 60 seconds total duration with an integral microphone or an external source via an audio input jack. The messages shall be stored digitally onto a non-volatile EEPROM. The message(s) shall be individually field programmable for three, four, six, eight, or indefinite repeat while triggered by the host FACP. Any message being delivered at the time of the trigger circuit(s) reset shall not stop in mid sentence but shall be completed to the end of the message. A tone generator shall be provided capable of emulating a field programmable lead-in or trailing alert tone or an Audible Emergency Evacuation Signal (Temporal Pattern). The EV AC panel shall be capable of electrically supervising in both active and standby conditions, the amplifier outputs, field wiring, message generator, tone generator, microphone and primary or secondary power supplies to an internal trouble relay(s). The trouble relay(s) contacts shall be accessible via a terminal strip and be configured and connected to report internal or external trouble conditions to the host FACP via the trigger circuit or a separate monitor module. The minimum of two trigger circuits shall be individually fieldconfigurable for triggering with a NAC circuit or a supervised dry contact. The control panel shall be equipped with LED indicator lights for Power On, System Trouble, Message Generator Trouble, Tone Generator Trouble, Microphone Trouble, Battery Trouble, Charger Trouble, Ground Fault, Output Circuit Trouble and Amplifier Supervisory. The panel shall be equipped with an internal monitor speaker for reviewing the field recorded messages. The primary power supply shall operate at 120 VAC through a dedicated 20 amp. circuit and shall be capable of charging 18 AH lead acid batteries. Provide two 12 volt batteries that will provide a secondary power source for the same or longer duration than is required by the host FACP. An auxiliary 24 volt DC power output shall be provided for use by an associated addressable control module. The EVAC control panel shall be triggered either directly by the associated F ACP with a NAC circuit or by
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
9/17/2013 FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM 28 3100-23
130917
an addressable control module. Provide 3/8 inch m1mmum P Touch labeling on the window in front of the built in microphone indicating that "THE INTERNAL MICROPHONE IS TO BE USED FOR THE RECORDING OF ANNOUNCEMENTS ONLY. NOT FOR USE BY STAFF OR FIRE DEPARTMENT PERSONNEL."
•
2.
Ceiling Mounted eight Inch EV AC Speakers shall be Wheelock Model No. S8-70-25 (CSFM 7320-0785:0164) to be mounted in a Model CBB-8 backbox. The speaker assembly shall be supplied with a white 12 inch round metal grill. The 8 inch speaker shall have an impedance of 8 ohms, minimum 9.5 ounce magnet and an attached 25 volt audio line matching transformer with 118, 114, 112, 1, 2, 4 and 8 watt tap settings and DC blocking capacitor. Wattage shall be selectable by the use of a jumper or shunt. Audio levels shall be 75, 78, 81 87, 90 or 93 dba at ten feet. Input or output terminals that will accommodate 12 to 18 A W G wire shall be provided. Speakers orientated in the same direction shall be connected in phase with each other. Multiple speakers in areas such as Auditoriums or Gymnasiums shall be divided into two circuits in a checker board pattern and connected separately to the two audio output circuits.
3.
Wall Mount four Inch EVAC Speakers shall be SpectrAlert Model No. SPRY (CSFM 7320-1653:0201) to be mounted on a manufacture recommended outlet box. When mounted on a surface mount outlet box, Provide a Model No. BBS-SP201R surface mount backbox skirt. The speaker assembly shall be supplied with a square high impact red grill. The four inch speaker shall have an attached 25 volt audio line matching transformer with 114, 112, 1 and 2 watt tap settings and a DC blocking capacitor. Wattage shall be selectable by the use of a jumper or shunt. Audio levels shall be 80, 84, 86 or 89 dba at ten feet. Input or Output terminals that will accommodate 12 to 18 AWG wire shall be provided. Speakers orientated in the same direction shall be connected in phase with each other; but when installed facing opposite directions they shall be connected out of phase.
• T.
Network Cables or SLC or Annunciator Data or Audio Output Cables: The construction and physical characteristics such as aqua-seal water block, wire gage, insulation and jacket types, etc. shall not be altered. Equivalent cables must be specifically approved and recommended by the manufacturer of the fire alarm system equipment. Substitutions will require review from the Architect or Engineer of Record.
U.
The cable types listed below are based and specified on the recommendations of Notifier Fire Alarm Systems. If the submitted fire alarm system requires a different cable configuration with additional conductors, multi-conductor versus twisted pairs, etcetera than is specified above, request a substitution to supply and install the configuration of cables by the make and model of the fire alarm system that is to be installed. 1.
•
Indoor Network and EVAC System Audio Output Circuit(s) applications shall be in conduit or in surface mounted raceway as indicated on drawings:
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES IITGH SCHOOL
9/17/2013 FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM 28 3100-24
130917
West Penn No. D980, one pair 18 gage solid copper, unshielded, Copolene II insulated and PVC jacketed, or equal.
•
V.
2.
Indoor SLC applications in conduit or in surface mounted raceway where it is indicated on drawings: West Penn No. D990, one pair 16 gage solid copper, unshielded, Copolene II insulated and PVC jacketed, or equal.
3.
Indoor Annunciator applications in conduit or in surface mounted raceway where it is indicated on drawings: West Penn No. D975, one pair 18 gage solid copper, shielded, Copolene II insulated and PVC jacketed, or equal.
4.
Outdoor or Underground Network Applications: West Penn AQ224, twoconductor 18 gage stranded copper, unshielded, water-blocked construction and PVC insulated, or equal.
5.
Outdoor or Underground SLC applications: West Penn AQ225, 2conductor 16 gage, AQ226, 2 conductor 14 gage, or AQ227, 2 conductor 12 gage stranded copper, unshielded water-blocked construction and PVC insulated, or equal.
6.
Outdoor or Underground Annunciator applications: West Penn AQ293, 2 conductors, 18 gage stranded copper, shielded water-blocked construction and PVC insulated, or equal.
Protective Covers 1.
•
PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01
•
Provide protective covers for pull stations, smoke and heat detectors, and audible and visual devices located in areas occupied by students that can be subjected to vandalism such as gyms, restrooms, locker and shower rooms, and all hallways and corridors associated with these spaces. Installation of cover must not protrude over current ADA limitations.
GENERAL A.
Fire alarm system shall not be used for any purpose other than fire alarm functions.
B.
Fire alarm shall be interconnected but not limited to the following systems: 1.
Systems required by code to be connected to the fire alarm systems shall be connected.
2.
Public address system for disabling the manual and automatic bell or tone class passing signals. Manual and automatic class passing signals shall not be operable during alarm conditions.
3.
Ventilation systems where required for the purpose of fan shutdown
4.
Damper control or smoke management systems.
5.
Water based fire sprinkler systems.
6.
Chemical fire extinguisher systems.
7.
Central and Autonomous PA system(s) .
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR& P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
9/17/2013 FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM 28 3100-25
130917
•
C.
•
Theatrical lighting control system.
9.
Elevator controls for the purpose of elevator cab Phase I recall and shunt trip control, circuit supervision and shunt trip power supervision.
I 0.
Fire pump controller for required signaling and trouble supervision.
Fire alarm system shall not be interconnected to any of the following: I.
Sump warning systems,
2.
Carbon monoxide detection systems.
3.
Methane gas detection systems.
4.
Elevator car alarm bell circuit.
5.
Other unrelated system.
SYSTEM INSTALLATION
3.02
•
8.
A.
Install required conductors to devices indicated on Drawings. Provide required conductor terminations to devices for a complete system to function as specified and indicated on Drawings. Refer to Section 26 05I9: Low-Voltage Wire (600 Volt AC), for installation and color coding requirements.
B.
Splices are not allowed in junction boxes. cabinets or on equipment terminals.
C.
Conductors shall be installed within conduits, boxes, and terminal cabinets in a totally enclosed installation. Furnish and install conductors required to connect incoming and outgoing circuits, including spare conductors, to terminal strips within terminal cabinets.
D.
Wiring within equipment and terminal cabinets shall be installed to conform to contract documentation and NFP A 72 standards, and shall be terminated on terminal blocks having terminals for required connections. Wiring shall be cabled, laced, and securely fastened in place so that no weight is imposed on equipment or terminals.
E.
Install required terminal blocks within terminal cabinets. Terminal blocks shall be installed on inside back of cabinets only, not on side. Incoming wiring shall be terminated on the left side of terminal blocks; outgoing wiring shall be terminated on the right side of the terminal blocks.
F.
Conductors shall be color-coded per specification section 26 05I9 Low Voltage wires and tagged with code markers at terminal cabinets, and equipment. A wire index shall be typed and installed on terminal cabinet doors. Index shall be covered with clear plastic adhesive covers. Wiring shall be identified as to building and location of devices in the index.
G.
Wiring within equipment and terminal cabinets shall be carefully strapped, and shall be formed in rectangular configuration. Wires shall be properly numbered in numerical order and shall maintain same number throughout the Project site .
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR& P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
Terminations shall be in terminal
9117/2013 FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM 283100-26
130917
•
•
•
3.03
H.
Complete installation shall comply with local building codes and applicable provisions of the California Electrical Code, California Fire Code and the NFPA 72 National Fire Alarm Code .
I.
Location of outlet boxes and equipment on Drawings is approximate, unless dimensions are indicated. Do not scale Drawings to determine locations and routing of conduits and outlet boxes. Location of outlet boxes and equipment shall conform to architectural features of the building and other Work already in place, and must be ascertained in the field before the start of Work.
J.
Drawings generally indicate Work to be provided, but do not indicate all bends, transitions or special fittings required to clear beams, girders or other Work already in place. Investigate conditions where conduits are to be installed, and furnish and install required fittings.
K.
Provide P-touch label of approximately one inch wide with red lettering for each initiating device that is hidden from view. Tags shall indicate the name and type of device: Heat Detector, or Duct Smoke Detector. Tags shall be permanently attached on access panel or t-bar grid which is used to access a hidden device.
L.
Provide smoke and heat detectors in elevator hoist-ways if a fire sprinkler head is located at the top of the elevator hoist-way. Provisions shall be made for access to the detector without entering the elevator hoist-way. Access shall be provided through an approved enclosure with self-locking fire rated door. The detectors shall be so placed as to allow service to them without the service personnel having to reach into the hoist-way in the way of travel of the elevator car. Access to elevator hoist-ways and machine rooms (including escalators) must be supervised by the Owner's licensed elevator or escalator maintenance contractor. OAR is responsible for coordinating access in accordance with Contractor's schedule. Contractor shall provide a minimum of 48 hours notice.
M.
Provide adjacent to each annunciator a neatly typewritten copy of the Fire Alarm Operating Instructions. The instructions shall reflect the installed and programmed features of the system. Instructions that include information on non-installed or programmed features will not be acceptable. The instructions shall be placed into a suitably sized dark colored wood or metal frame with a glass document face cover. The frame shall be attached to the wall with a minimum of two screws into the wall material with appropriate anchors.
N.
Provide adjacent to each annunciator a neatly drawn site map showing rooms with designations and buildings with names as programmed into the system. This map shall be sized to allow (normal vision) reading of the designations, names etc. A map so reduced in size to the point of not being readable will not be acceptable. This map shall include symbols indicating the locations of installed fire sprinkler flow switches, riser shut off valves, post indicating valves and manual pull stations. Provide a symbol list on the map for the symbols used. The site map shall be placed into a suitably sized dark colored wood or metal frame with a glass document face cover. The frame shall be attached to the wall with a minimum of two screws into the wall material with the appropriate anchors. SYSTEM PROGRAMMING
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
9!17/2013 FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM 28 3100-27
130917
•
•
A.
Programming shall be performed in accordance with District requirements set forth in this section - the local authority having jurisdiction and applicable codes. If a conflict arises or a clarification is required, the contractor through the project's OAR shall contact the Districts Fire Life Systems Testing Group (FLSTG) for clarification
B.
As part of the 50 percent construction completion label devices and locations in the manner indicted in the attached guidelines on a separate copy of the shop drawings. Request a meeting with OAR, Project Inspector, and representative of FLSTG to review, finalize and obtain approval of the proposed device, equipment and location descriptors that will be programmed into the system. The District may at time of substantial completion request minor changes to program descriptors if needed to conform to site conditions.
c.
The following functions and features as required by the site or system configuration and installed peripheral equipment and systems shall be programmed into LAUSD fire alarm systems. The definition of programming shall include but not be limited to the use of a built in keyboard, the use of a connected PC with the appropriate software, dip or rotary switches, wiring or installable or removable jumpers as required or provided in the fire alarm equipment. 1.
Signal Silence Switch Inhibit: The audible signal silence switch located on the remote fire alarm annunciator(s) or any fire alarm control panel(s) shall be programmed to not silence the audible or extinguish the visual alarm circuits during the first minute (60 seconds) of the fire alarm hom or strobe activation. Activation of this switch after the initial 60 seconds signaling shall silence only the audible signals. Enabling or disabling this feature shall be allowed only by authorized District maintenance personnel and shall be protected by a maintenance level password.
2.
Audible and Visual Signal Auto Silencing Extinguishing: Audible coded signals and visual signals throughout the site, unless silenced by the above switch, shall be programmed to automatically self-silence or extinguish in no less than 5 minutes (300 seconds) and no more than 10 minutes (600 seconds). This feature shall not apply to the fire sprinkler water flow audible appliance.
3.
Fire Sprinkler Water Flow Audible Appliance: The fire sprinkler water flow appliance (bell) shall not require any programming because of our requirement for this appliance to be directly controlled by a set of dry contacts within the associated sprinkler water flow switch(s). The 24 volt DC auxiliary power for the sprinkler water flow audible appliances shall be supplied by an FACP or a remote power supply. This audible appliance shall operate continuously during the detection of fire sprinkler water flow and shall not be coded in any manner nor silenced automatically by any FACP or manually by any user controls at any FACP or remote annunciator.
4.
Fire Sprinkler Water Flow Switch: Fire sprinkler water flow switches shall be programmed in a manner that shall prevent the above Signal Silence
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
9/17/2013 FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM 28 3100-28
130917
•
Switch from silencing the audible coded signals or visual signals after the initiation of an alarm by a fire sprinkler flow switch . 5.
Audible Notification Appliance Circuits: Audible notification appliance circuits shall be programmed to emulate the temporal code (ANSI S 3.41) from fire alarm audible appliances (horns). This coding shall originate and be controlled by a single coder residing within the FACP(s). The use of coders within remote power supplies either mounted adjacent to an F ACP or at a remote location or directly by an audible notification appliance will not be permitted. Programmable audible notification appliances shall be configured to emulate a steady tone at approximately 1000 Hz. Audible notification appliance circuits shall be programmed to be silenced as described above. Notification appliance circuits throughout the site shall be activated by any alarm initiating device. Coded audible signals shall be controlled by a single synchronized FACP.
6.
Visual Notification Appliance Circuits: Visual notification appliance circuits shall be programmed to provide steady non-coded power to the visual appliances (strobes). As required by code and the system configuration, a synchronization signal shall be superimposed onto the NAC by the FACP, a remote power supply or an add-on synchronization module. Visual notification appliance circuits shall be programmed to be extinguished as described above. Visual notification appliance circuits through out the site shall be activated by any alarm initiating device.
7.
System Reset Button: The system reset button located on FACPs and remote annunciators in addition to resetting the fire alarm system and silencing or extinguishing notification appliances except for the sprinkler water flow appliances shall be programmed to reset analog and addressable smoke detectors, duct detectors, beam detectors and relays, addressable control modules and addressable relay modules used to interface to other systems and equipment. Each installed system reset button shall be programmed to operate as a "single point of reset" for the complete system.
8.
HV AC Shutdown: Relays and addressable relay modules used to interface to HVAC equipment dampers, and supply and exhaust fan motors shall be programmed to shut down this equipment only within the same building where the detection of smoke, heat or fire sprinkler water flow has taken place. Manual pull stations within any building shall not effect the operation of the HV AC equipment. These relays shall return to normal only after the system is reset.
9.
Elevator Recall: The addressable relay modules for the primary and alternate elevator recall function shall be programmed to activate only with the detection of smoke by a detector located in the elevator machine room, elevator hoistway or the main floor or alternate floor landing(s) smoke detector associated with that elevator or bank of elevators. Recall of an elevator shall be on a per-elevator or on a per-bank of elevators basis. Activation of other initiating devices shall not cause the recall of an elevator.
•
•
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
9/17/2013 FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM 28 3100-29
130917
•
••
•
10.
Fire Fighter Warning: In conjunction with the above elevator recall function, an additional addressable relay module shall be programmed to operate only with the detection of smoke by a detector located in an elevator machine room or elevator hoistway to provide a warning signal to fire fighters attempting to use the phase II elevator function.
11.
Elevator Shunt Trip: The addressable control module or MR control relay for the elevator shunt trip shall only be activated by the heat detector located within the elevator machine room or elevator hoistway for each elevator or bank of elevators. Circuit integrity, and AC and DC power to the MR control relay shall be electrically supervised. Activation of other initiating devices shall not operate the shunt trip.
12.
Smoke Detector Maintenance Alert: Addressable smoke detectors shall be programmed with the capability of initiating a maintenance alert when any one detector becomes obscured by dust or any other contaminates at approximately 10 percent below the level of obstruction that would initiate an alarm.
13.
Disabling Class Passing Signals: The relay or addressable relay module shall be programmed to disable the class passing signals during any alarm condition at the site. This relay or addressable module shall return to normal only after the system is reset.
14.
Disabling Audio of a Public Address System: The relay or addressable relay module shall be programmed to mute the audio output of the associated public address system during any activation of an audible notification appliance circuit or a voice evacuation announcement. This or these relays shall automatically restore to normal upon the silencing of the audible NACs and the voice evacuation announcement.
15.
Release of Electro-Magnetically Held Doors: The relay or addressable relay module shall be programmed to open or close the control circuit as needed of the 24 volt DC door holder power supply. This relay(s) shall operate during any alarm condition within the same building as the door holders. The contacts shall return to normal only after system reset.
16.
Illumination of House Lighting: The relay or addressable relay module shall be programmed to tum on to full brilliance the house lighting of an Auditorium, MP Room, etc during any alarm condition at the site. This relay or addressable module shall return to normal only after the system is reset.
17.
UDACT: The FACP and the associated Universal Digital Alarm Communication Transmitter shall be programmed to transmit to the central monitoring station separate indications for General Alarm, Fire Sprinkler Water Flow Alarm, System Trouble and Supervisory Conditions. These indications shall be in addition to any indications initiated by the UDACT itself.
18.
Voice Evacuation Panel: The NAC originating at, or the addressable control module controlled by the associated FACP that is controlling the
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
9/17/2013 FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM 283100-30
130917
EV AC panel shall be programmed to emulate the above paragraph "E" Audible Notification Appliance Circuits except that it shall be non-coded. Trouble conditions at the EV AC panel shall report back to the associated FACP via the controlling NAC or addressable control module or a separate addressable monitor module. Transformer taps at the EV AC speakers shall be selected to provide the proper balance of audio volume in larger and smaller areas. The message shall be programmed in a female voice in the English language as follows: A minimum oftwo but no more than three cycle sounding of an approximate 1000 Hz tone in the pattern of the NFP A required temporal code followed by: "May I have your attention please. May I have your attention please". The fire alarm has been activated in the building. The fire alarm has been activated in the building. Please proceed to the nearest exit and leave the building." The sounding of the temporal patterned signal followed by the indicated message shall repeat indefinitely until the controlling NAC is reset.
• 19.
D.
Device Descriptors: I.
•
•
Power Failure Reporting Time Delay: Main and remote NAC power supplies shall be programmed to delay the reporting of a site AC power failure for a minimum of 6 hours.
Descriptors shall enable responding personnel to identify the location of a fire quickly and accurately, and shall indicate the status of emergency equipment or fire safety functions that might affect the safety of occupants. The minimum required information for devices intended to report smoke, fire, or fire sprinklers water flow include, but may not be limited to: Building, floor (if multiple floors exist in the building), room or space description, and device type and digital address (Smoke detector, Heat detector, Fire sprinkler water flow switch, etc). a.
Building: The building must always be included in the descriptor, even if there is only one building one the site. Additional building(s) may be added at a later date creating the possibility of confusion by similar designated spaces, such as "Work room" or "Staff restroom" if more than one building has these similar designated spaces. The building designation in the descriptor must be what the site-based personnel call the building. The building should be provided with signage to aid fire department personnel in the identification ofthe building.
b.
Floor: In multi-floor buildings the floor designation (1st, 2nd, etc) must be included in the descriptor.
c.
Room Description: The room or space description must be unique. Using the same designation for multiple spaces, such as ''Workroom", "Counselor's Office", or "Men's restroom", etc. is not acceptable. If, during a project, the room numbers or the use of the room changes then the room or space descriptor must be changed to agree with the change. Proper signage should be
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
9/17/2013 FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM 28 3100-31
130917
provided for each space to aid fire department personnel in the identification of the room or space .
•
d.
E.
••
ACCEPTABLE ABBREVIATIONS Rm.-Room Corr.- Corridor Eng.- English Fir.- Floor Ht.- Heat Lib.- Library Lkr. - Locker Stu Str- Student Store Stor Rm - Store Room I st_ First Hopr Rm - Hopper Room
Bldg.- Building Lby- Lobby N- North S- South E-East W- West Kit- Kitchen Sci - Science Cafe - Cafeteria 2nd_ Second Det - Detector
Smk.- Smoke Asst. - Assistant Nrs.- Nurse Cnclr - Counselor Off. - Office PE- Physical Education RR- Rest Room By= near PM- Plant Manager 3rd_ Third Elev - Elevator
Prin - Principal Park- Parking
Blr Rm- Boiler Room Bsmt -Basement
Conf- Conference MPR.- Multi-Ptl_!]~ose room
SYSTEM OPERATION
3.04 A.
•
Device Type, Address and Compass Designations: The device type and digital address must be included with the descriptor, such as smoke detector or heat detector, etc. Some systems provide this information automatically in the descriptor. Compass designations, (N, S, E, and W) are required in spaces such as corridors where there are multiple detectors and this information would be helpful to responding fire department personnel in locating the device reporting alarm. It is not necessary to include compass designations in smaller spaces where there are multiple detectors located in close proximity to each other.
Unless otherwise specified, but not limited to actuation of manual stations, smoke detectors, heat detectors, linear heat or smoke detectors, or water-flow switches shall cause the following operations to occur, refer to Attachment B: I.
Activate audible circuits.
2.
Actuate strobe units until the panel is reset or strobe circuit time-out.
3.
Release magnetic door holders to doors to adjacent zones on the floor from which the alarm was initiated.
4.
Where required, return elevators to the primary or alternate floor of egress.
5.
Smoke detectors in elevator lobbies shall, in addition to the above functions, return elevators to the primary or alternate floor of egress.
6.
Smoke detectors in elevator machine rooms or tops of hoist-ways shall return elevators to the primary or alternate floor. Smoke detectors or heat detectors installed to shut down elevator power shall perform this function in accordance with ANSI A I7.1 requirements and shall be coordinated .
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
9/17/2013 FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM 28 3100-32
130917
•
•
Duct type smoke detectors shall, in addition to the above functions, shut down the ventilation system or close associated control dampers as required .
8.
Activation of fire sprinkler system low-pressure switches, post indicator valve or tamper switches shall initiate a system supervisory alarm indication.
9.
UL listed central station shall be notified via - Universal Digital Alarm Communicator Transmitter (UDACT).
TESTING
3.05
•
7.
A.
A 48 hour notice shall be provided to the Project Inspector before final testing.
B.
Testing of fire detection system shall be as required by the State Fire Marshal and local authorities having jurisdiction. Installer is responsible for identifying required testing, coordinating, scheduling, and conducting tests before Substantial Completion. Tests shall include the following: 1.
Operation of signal-initiating devices (smoke detectors, heat detectors, pull stations etc.).
2.
Operation of indicating devices (alarm horns, alarm bells and alarm strobes).
3.
Operation of system features under normal operation.
4.
Operation of system supervisory features.
5.
Operation of system features on standby power, with primary power turned off.
6.
Before energizing the cables and wires, check for correct connections and test for short circuits, ground faults, continuity, and insulation.
7.
Close sprinkler system flow valves and verify proper supervisory alarm at the FACP.
8.
Verify activation of flow switches.
9.
Open initiating device circuits and verify that trouble signal actuates.
10.
Open signaling line circuits and verify that trouble signal actuates.
11.
Open and short notification appliance circuits and verify that trouble signal actuates.
12.
Open and short (wire only) network communications and verify that trouble signals are received at network annunciators or reporting terminals.
13.
Ground initiating device circuits and verify response of trouble signals.
14.
Ground signaling line circuit and verify response of trouble signals.
15.
Ground notification appliance circuit and verify response of trouble signals.
16 .
Check alert tone to alarm notification devices.
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
9/17/2013 FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM 28 3100-33
130917
•
17.
Check installation, supervision, and operation of intelligent smoke detectors .
18.
Alarm conditions that the system is required to detect shall be introduced on the system. Verify the proper receipt and the proper processing of the signal at the FACP and the correct activation of the control points.
19.
When the system is equipped with optional features, consult the manufacturer manual to determine proper testing procedures.
20.
Theatrical lighting house light control override.
21.
Central and Autonomous PA systems for muting during the sounding of the audible notification appliances and voice evacuation announcements.
22.
Disabling electronic tone or electromechanical bell class passing signals until system reset.
C.
Upon completion of installation of fire alarm equipment, provide to the OAR a signed, written statement confirming that fire alarm equipment was installed in accordance with the Specifications, Shop Drawings, instructions and directions provided by the manufacturer.
D.
Demonstrate in presence of the Project Inspector that circuit and wiring tests are free of shorts and grounds and that installation performs as specified herein and within manufacturer's guidelines.
E.
Software Modifications:
• F.
1.
Provide the services of a factory trained and authorized technician to perform system software modification, upgrades or changes. Response time of the technician to the Project site shall not exceed 24 hours.
2.
Provide hardware, software, programming tools, and documentation necessary to modify the fire alarm network on the Project site. Modification includes: addition and deletion of devices, circuits, zones and changes to system operation and custom label changes for devices or zones. The system structure and software shall place no limit on the type or extent of software modification on-site. Modification of software shall not require power-down of the system or loss of system fire protection while modifications are being provided.
Complete the inspection and testing form as required by NFPA 72, and submit one copy of the completed form to the Architect and Project Inspector. SERVICE MANUALS
3.06
A.
Deliver to OAR, three copies of the service manuals. Each manual shall include the following: 1.
•
Installation manuals, programming manuals and user manual if applicable for every control panel, control panel power supply, F ACP input or output or relay or control module, auxiliary power supply, UDACT, remote NAC extender power supply, door holder power supplies, installed annunciators,
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
9/17/2013 FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM 28 3100-34
130917
initiating and indicating devices and addressable monitor, relay and control modules. Catalog cut sheets are not acceptable .
•
• 3.07
A printed copy of the system configuration as programmed, including system labeling codes, and passwords.
3.
An electronic copy on compact disk of the system configuration program
4.
Final test report.
5.
Detailed explanation of the operation ofthe system.
6.
Instructions for routine maintenance.
7.
Detailed wiring diagram for the connection of relays, addressable monitor, and control or relay modules as applied in the interfacing of peripheral systems or equipment to the fire alarm system. Updated shop drawings shall include revisions made in the field via plan changes, RFis, Field Change Directives, and any other construction change documents including interface details with ancillary systems.
8.
An electronic copy (CD) of the posted site or fire alarm map in Auto-Cad and pdf formats.
9.
Provide a CD ROM electronic copy of the updated system As-Built Drawings to the OAR, prepare this copy in the latest version of AutoCAD; along with the electronic copy provide a full size bond copy. Include one CD-ROM of the up-dated As-Built Drawings into each of the Service Manuals. CD and folded drawings shall be secured and inserted into the Service Manuals via a three-hole punched protective CD case and protective envelopes for the drawings.
10.
Provide codes and passwords for fire alarm system at testing.
SPARE PARTS A.
The following new spare parts shall be furnished in unopened boxes: 1.
Five percent spare pull stations including the associated monitor module (minimum one spare pull station per type).
2.
Five percent spare smoke and heat detectors (minimum one spare smoke and heat detector per type).
3.
Five percent spare audible devices (minimum one spare audible device per type).
4.
Five percent spare strobe devices (minimum one spare strobe device per type).
SYSTEM USER AND MAINTENANCE PERSONNEL TRAINING
3.08 A.
•
2.
Before Substantial Completion, provide one instruction period for the Project site based Owner operators and system users. The instruction period shall be scheduled and coordinated by the OAR .
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
9/17/2013 FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM 283100-35
130917
B.
•
Training materials and required deliverables shall be submitted to the OAR. 1.
C.
User Instruction and Training 1.
D.
Before substantial completion and with a fully functional fire alarm system installed at the site, the contractor shall provide a minimum of four hours of user training for site based staff. The date and time for this training shall be coordinated by the project OAR.
Instruction period training for site based staff shall consist of the following: 1.
••
Prior to beginning the operational demonstration, notify Central monitoring Station that an instructional activity is beginning; inform them that it includes setting and resetting the system in test mode. After the demonstration is completed and the system restored, notify the Central Monitoring Station that the system has been restored and it is back on line for continuous monitoring.
Overview: a.
Explain the fire system is "addressable" which means every device-smoke detector, heat detector, sprinkler water flow switch, manual pull station, etc. has a unique address or identity. This makes it possible to positively identify the exact device causing an alarm, trouble or supervisory condition.
b.
Explain the fire alarm control panel also controls the horns and strobes throughout the campus or building.
c.
Explain that the fire alarm system is interconnected to various other systems and equipment through out the site such as:
d.
•
1)
Elevators to recall them to the main floor or to an alternate floor and as an option dependent circumstances tum off the power to the elevators.
2)
Heating and air conditioning equipment to tum off fans and close dampers to stop the spread of smoke through out a building.
3)
The class passing signaling system to disable the bells or tones to not accidentally signal students and staff to return to the buildings.
4)
Magnetically held doors to close them to stop the spread of smoke.
5)
To tum up house lighting in an occupied Auditorium or Multi-Purpose room to provide adequate egress lighting.
6)
The Central and Autonomous PA systems to mute them during the sounding of the alarm signal.
Explain the fire system has a battery backup in case of power failure and that it will continue to function for a minimum of 24 hours after a total power failure .
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
9/17/2013 FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM 28 3100-36
130917
• 2.
• 3.
•
e.
Explain that the fire alarm system components and wiring are monitored to report a malfunction, damage or vandalism. When this occurs, a trouble indication will appear on the fire alarm annunciator and FACP and this indication will be transmitted to the central monitoring station.
f.
Explain that other equipment and systems are monitored for abnormal conditions such as the fire sprinkler water being turned off. When this occurs, a supervisory condition is created. A supervisory indication will appear on the fire alarm annunciator and FACP and this indication will be transmitted to the central monitoring station.
g.
Explain that the fire system in addition to notifying the occupants of a possible fire condition also transmits an alarm indication to the central monitoring station that will in tum notify and dispatch the local fire department to your site.
Basic: a.,
Hand out the SYSTEM OPERATION instructions to attendees.
b.
Point out the Fire Alarm Control Panel and have them observe the normal LED status (one green LED only should be on): 1)
GREEN =Normal.
2)
YELLOW =Trouble.
3)
RED=ALARM.
c.
Have the attendees observe the LCD display that should be indicating a SYSTEM NORMAL message.
d.
Point out the Fire Alarm System Annunciator and have attendees observe the LCD display that should be indicating a SYSTEM NORMAL message.
Operation and Demonstration: a.
After putting the system or having someone put the system central station monitoring into the test mode demonstrate the following:
b.
Activate a Manual Pull Station to demonstrate ALARM. 1)
Demonstrate audible and visual notification appliances and if installed the voice evacuation signal announcement.
2)
Demonstrate panel or annunciator sounder tone for ALARM.
3)
Have staff SILENCE system.
4)
Show LCD display and LED of alarm.
5)
Demonstrate and have staff reset the manual pull station.
6)
Have staff RESET fire system .
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
9/17/2013 FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM 283100-37
130917
c.
• d.
e.
•
•
Activate Smoke Detector with canned smoke to demonstrate address identification: 1)
Have staff SILENCE system.
2)
Show LCD and display LED of ALARM.
3)
Have staff RESET fire system.
Remove Smoke Detector to demonstrate SYSTEM TROUBLE. 1)
Demonstrate panel or annunciator sounder tone for TROUBLE.
2)
Have staff SILENCE system.
3)
Show LCD display and LED of TROUBLE.
4)
Replace the smoke detector.
5)
Have staff RESET fire system.
Remove power to demonstrate function during power failure. 1)
Have staff SILENCE system.
2)
Show LCD display and LED of TROUBLE.
3)
Activate Manual Pull station to demonstrate audible or visual functions in power failure mode.
4)
Reset manual pull station.
5)
Reset fire system.
6)
If applicable, point out sprinkler riser and shut off valves.
7)
Show location of a water flow switch.
8)
Show location of a valve tamper switch.
9)
Point out valves must always be OPEN or fully counter clock wise.
10)
Point out PIV (Post Indicator Valves) if applicable.
11)
Have water flow through the inspectors test valve and point out the ringing water flow bell.
12)
After the horns are silenced by an assistant, show that the water flow bell is ringing continuously indicating water flow.
13)
Have the assistant turn off the inspectors test valve to show that water flow alarm bell turns off.
14)
Reset system.
15)
Unlock and tum off a PIV or riser valve to show a supervisory condition.
16)
Turn valve back on, lock the valve open and demonstrate the end of the indication of a supervisory condition .
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
9/17/2013 FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM 28 3100-38
130917
4.
•
Training documentation. a.
Insure fire panel is reset and indicates normal and central station monitoring is taken off of the test mode.
b.
Have staff attendees sign off training sheet and provide a copy to the PROJECT INSPECTOR.
PROTECTION
3.09 A.
Protect the Work of this section until Substantial Completion. CLEANUP
3.10
A.
Remove rubbish, debris, and waste materials and legally dispose of off Project site. END OF SECTION
•
•
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
9/17/2013 FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM 28 3100-39
•
•
•
-
roo
w
O;j
,.,
r:/)0\
>n zo 0::0
tn~
~z
rn,_,
FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS- APPROVED SYSTEMS COMPONENTS- ATIACHMENT A
\~ ......."'
LOS A.'iGEI..I:S Ul'llFIED SCHOOL DISTRICT FACILITIES SER\'ICES DI\'ISION
~~ p> ::r::,_, rntn
n:;.:;
§Sg; [2~ ~ ?::> "0
0
;...,
~
p
~
tn r:n
"Tl
~
1ntPGanD~J
tn
~astPGca.D)I:;I:J WaitPa11110m
We:;::PmmD974
Wert P.llll.i\.0'1.:!5
\\iw. PUm AQ:!:!3
-,., Poan.\Q2ll
U'o.: Pm:mA0:!:!<4 War.Pv:miAQ1P:!
0
;l n
WutP;un.o\~1-4
>--3
~ > Nz
000\0
w>;:::; -r'-~ o;p.---
?~~ -w
-4 0
N
[2J
Th~ O~rlctl~ stueMtll~g on a s.1:~~n:!!I!U t.ey~mled metal pul S'1!lllerUtiL:e ~xcvetl Neuner unns.
U'oc Pmm DS!C· Wu:PmmD989"
0 \0
'-1
•
•
• roo
w
O;:j
0
r:/]0\
::>n
zo Cl~
m:;:e ~z
FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS- SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS- ATTACHMENT 8
~iii
LOS :\.t~GELES tJL'I,lFIED SCHOOL DlSTRICT HCTI.UIES SER\1CES I>n'ISIO~
r:/J-l
::r::....,
r:/J("rj (')~
a§
0'"0
rp.
;:a R.o '"0
0
~
sa
~
(/]
.,.,
~
0
("rj
~WTES:
~ (')
[1] lndil;ate trruole en wiii~g faua cr deYii:i:a& ;equ;rccl_ [2] ShL1 dJIVn oo yair hl!lld er ~quiJ~l!:!n1 in tile buii:ling cr s-ea wher= alfml crn•1ti•Jn Jcc~rs.
-l
[3) erose
0
z ~
·lnl~
smo
lnfdin~
or E.rea •Nil:!re alsm1 eorditbn cc~urs
[4] Close •llll~ smo.udtlcriums. ard ~im!ar areas e<~uip~ild whh ligh:in£ cortrols, the geneal hcuse ligh1i~ sh311 cone to lullllrighf in ire e~em of a lire alam1 oordition.
~0\0
wP.::::;
~r-..J op.--.. o~N ' 0
"""
~.....
-.;
Clp.
~
'"" IJ.
w
[6] Re(illi rnlythe elevabrs in tile buil!:lllg w~1ere ·le lllorm oomitrn h!ls occurred
:l
.)
,~-
"' -...]
•
SECTION 31 1000 SITE CLEARING
PART 1- GENERAL SUMMARY
1.01 A.
B.
•
Section Includes: 1.
Removal of vegetation, grass, grass roots, shrubs, tree stumps, trees, upturned stumps, weed growth, tree roots, brush, masonry, concrete, rubbish, debris and other materials.
2.
Removal of concrete and bituminous surfaces.
3.
Removal of existing fences and gates.
Related Requirements: I.
Division 0 I - General Requirements.
2.
Section 31 2200 - Grading.
3.
Section 31 23I3 - Excavation and Fill.
4.
Section 31 23I6 - Excavation and Fill for Pavement.
5.
Section 3I 2326 - Base Course.
6.
Section 32 3113 - Chain Link Fences and Gates.
SUBMITTALS
1.02 A.
Shop Drawings: Submit site plan indicating extent of site clearing. QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.03 A.
Comply with Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction, current edition, as a minimum requirement.
PART 2- PRODUCTS- NOT USED PART 3- EXECUTION CONCRETE AND BITUMINOUS SURF ACING REMOVAL
3.02 A.
•
Break up and completely remove existing concrete surfacing, curbs, gutters, walks and bituminous surfacing to indicated limits. Cutting shall be performed to a neat and even
8736 CORWIN THEATER REP AIR & P .OT. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
12/25/2012 SITE CLEARING 31 1000-1
•
line with proper tools or a concrete cutting saw. Minimum depth of cut shall be 1 l/2inch, unless otherwise indicated. Remove concrete broken beyond the indicated limits to the nearest joint or score line and replace with new concrete to match existing. FENCING
3.03 A.
Existing fences scheduled to remain may be removed to facilitate the Work, provided they are installed to their original condition in accordance with requirements of Section 32 3113 -Chain Link Fences and Gates.
B.
Fencing indicated to be removed and not reinstalled shall be completely removed, including footings. Fill and compact excavations.
c.
Install chain link fencing indicated to be relocated or reset in accordance with applicable requirements specified under Section 32 3113 - Chain Link Fences and Gates. CLEANUP
3.04 A.
Remove rubbish, debris and waste materials and legally dispose of off the Project site.
END OF SECTION
•
•
8736 CORWfN THEATER REPAIR & P.OT. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES IDGH SCHOOL
12/25/2012 SITE CLEARfNG 31 1000-2
•
SECTION 31 2200 GRADING
PART 1- GENERAL SUMMARY
1.01 A.
Section Includes: I.
B.
•
General exterior grading, cutting and filling, including grading for building area, paving, planting areas, banks and hillsides.
Related Requirements: I.
Division 01 -General Requirements.
2.
Section 31 1000 - Site Clearing.
3.
Section 31 2313 -Excavation and Fill.
4.
Section 31 2316- Excavation and Fill for Pavement.
5.
Section 31 2326- Base Course.
PROJECT REQUIREMENTS
1.02 A.
General: 1.
Fees: Pay as required by authorities having jurisdiction over the area.
2.
Bonds: Post as required by authorities having jurisdiction over the area.
3.
Haul Routes and Restrictions: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction over the area.
4.
Before grading, contact Underground Service Alert of Southern California (USASC) for information on public buried utilities and pipelines. Retain the services of an underground utility locator for on-site utilities.
PART 2- PRODUCTS MATERIALS
2.01 A.
Materials shall conform to requirements specified in this and related sections.
PART 3- EXECUTION
•
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.OT. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HJGH SCHOOL
09/25/2012 GRADING 31 2200-1
•
3.01
3.02
PREPARATION A.
Protect and maintain installed stakes until their removal is required for the Work. Provide replacement grade or location stakes lost or disturbed.
B.
Install grade stakes and compare to indicated grades. If discrepancies are found between existing grades and grades indicated on Drawings, do not proceed until discrepancies are resolved.
ROUGH AND FINE GRADING A.
•
B.
Rough grade area sufficiently high to require cutting by fine grading: 1.
Grade area for bituminous surfacing and other paving to the indicated grades, equal to the section of the indicated base and pavement.
2.
Slope banks to required finish grades as cut progresses or leave cuts full and finish grade by mechanical equipment to provide grades and soil densities indicated on the Drawings.
3.
Rough grade, fill and compact banks beyond indicated finish grades. Finish grade banks and slopes to indicated grades and specified soil densities.
4.
Grade Only Areas: In areas not indicated to receive pavement, rough grade to approximate finish grades and then scarify, moisten and roll to obtain required density and indicated finish grades .
5.
Tolerances: Finish grades shall be within a tolerance of 0.05 inch per foot above or below grades indicated. Provide an average grade as indicated.
Base or Subgrade: I.
2. 3.03
•
After subgrade has been constructed to approximate required grades, scarify to a depth of at least 6 inches: a.
After scarifying, process loosened material to a finely divided condition and adjust moisture content to optimum condition by addition of water, addition and blending of dry suitable material, or by drying of existing material.
b.
Subgrade material shall be compacted by tamping, sheepsfoot rollers or pneumatic tire rollers. Required relative compaction shall be [90] percent minimum for the top 6 inches below subgrade.
c.
Install base course in accordance with Section 31 2326 - Base Course.
Tolerance of completed grades of base or subgrade shall not vary more than 0.03 inch per foot from grades indicated. Provide an average grade as indicated. SHORING
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.OT. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HJGH SCHOOL
09/25/2012 GRADING 31 2200-2
•
A.
Provide shoring as necessary to properly and safely support earth sides of excavations, and existing curbs, sidewalks, gutter, drives and stairs, against movement and collapse.
B.
Design and Calculations: Provide in accordance with requirement of CalOHSA.
c.
Remove shoring upon completion of the Work of this section or when no longer needed unless required otherwise by authorities having jurisdiction. EXCESS MATERIAL DISPOSAL
3.04 A.
Remove rubbish, debris, and waste materials and legally dispose of off the Project site. PROTECTION
3.5 A.
Protect the Work of this section until Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION
••
•
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.OT. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
09/25/2012 GRADING 31 2200-3
•
SECTION 31 2313 EXCAVATION AND FILL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
SUMMARY
A.
B.
• 1.02
1.03
•
1.
Excavating, filling, backfilling, and compacting for Project site pavement, planting areas, buildings, and other structures.
2.
Trenches for utility lines such as water, gas, irrigation, storm drain and sewer lines, concrete-encased conduits, manholes, vaults, valve boxes, catch basins, underground tanks, thrust blocks, yard boxes, pull boxes, and other utility appurtenances.
Related Requirements:
I.
Division 0 I - General Requirements.
2.
Section 31 1000 - Site Clearing.
3.
Section 31 2200 - Grading.
4.
Section 31 2326 - Base Course.
5.
Section 32 0117 - Pavement Repair.
6.
Section 32 1313- Site Concrete Work.
7.
Section 32 3113- Chain Link Fences and Gates.
8.
Division 22 - Plumbing.
PROJECT REQUIREMENTS A.
1.4
Section Includes:
Import and Export of Earth Materials: 1.
Fees: Pay as required by authorities having jurisdiction over the area.
2.
Bonds: Post as required by authorities having jurisdiction over the area.
3.
Haul Routes and Restrictions: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction over the area.
SUBMITTALS A.
Imported Soils: A geotechnical engineer, retained by the Owner as an Owner Consultant, shall obtain initial product Sample for testing in accordance with the terms of Article 3.05 of this section.
B.
Shoring calculations as required in Article 3.03 of this section. QUALITY ASSURANCE
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.OT. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
07/26/2012 EXCAVATION AND FILL 31 2313-1
•
A.
Comply with the Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction, current edition, except as modified herein .
B.
Sampling, testing, and certification of imported and exported soils shall be performed in accordance with Section 01 4523. PROJECT CONDITIONS
1.5 A.
Information on Drawings or in soil investigation report does not constitute a guarantee of accuracy or uniformity of soil conditions over the Project site.
B.
A copy of the foundation investigation and soils report is available for examination at the Architect's office during regular office hours of Architect.
PART 2- PRODUCTS FILL AND BACKFILL MATERIALS
2.1
•
A.
Fill and backfill material shall be a granular material previously removed from excavation or imported fill material, free of clods and stones larger than 3 inches, (212 inches for utility trenches) foreign materials, vegetable growths, sod, expansive soils, rubbish and debris. Material shall conform to these specified requirements and related sections.
B.
Fill material exhibiting a wide variation in consistency and moisture content shall be blended and aerated to stabilize and upgrade the material.
c.
Bedding material from trench bottom to one foot above the pipe: 1.
Sand, gravel, crushed aggregate or native free-draining granular material providing a sand equivalent of at least 30 or a coefficient of permeability greater than 1.4 inches per hour.
2.
Sand complying with the Specifications for cement concrete aggregates.
D.
Other Fill Materials: Brick rubble and broken concrete originating from the Project site may be legally disposed of off the Project site, or incorporated in fill, if reviewed by a geotechnical engineer, retained by the Owner as an Owner Consultant. Unless otherwise indicated, no such material shall be imported from outside the Project site.
E.
Permeable Backfill: I.
Provide permeable backfill material behind retaining structures consisting of gravel, crushed gravel, crushed rock, natural sands, manufactured sand, or combinations of these materials conforming to the following gradations: Sieve Size: 3/4 inch (19mm) 3/8 inch (I Omm) No. 100 No. 200
•
2.
Percentage Passing: 100 80 to 100 0 to 8 0 to 3
Those portions of fill material passing a No. 4 sieve shall provide a sand equivalent of at least 60 .
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.OT. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
07/26/2012 EXCAVATION AND FILL 312313-2
• F. 2.02
3.
Provided backing for weep-holes shall consist of two cubic feet of aggregate in burlap sacks, securely tied. Aggregate shall conform to requirements for No. 3 concrete aggregate as specified in subsection 200-1.4 of the Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction.
4.
Permeable Backfill Alternate Materials: Instead of the materials specified for retaining structures backfill, a drainage matting system Miradrain by Mirafi, Inc., American Wick Drain, JDR Enterprises, or equal, may be provided if reviewed by the Architect.
Cement-sand slurry shall be provided with one sack of cement per cubic yard of the mixture. BASE MATERIALS
A.
Concrete Slabs on Grade: Provide "Crushed Aggregate Base" as specified in Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction, Section 200 -Rock Materials, with 3/4 inch maximum size aggregates. Provide 3 inch thick base, unless noted otherwise.
B.
Bituminous Surfacing: Provide as indicated on Drawings and specified in Section 31 2326 Base Course.
PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1
•
GENERAL
A.
Before excavation, contact Underground Service Alert of Southern California (USASC) for information on buried public utilities and pipelines. For onsite utilities retain an underground utility identification service.
B.
Where the Work includes a building extension or addition on an occupied Project site, perform Work in such a manner, and at such times, as not to disrupt performance of existing utility services to existing Project site facilities. Where an interruption is necessary, obtain review from the OAR before proceeding.
C.
Remove concrete or bituminous pavement to straight lines by saw cutting.
3.2
•
PROTECTION A.
Protect and guard excavations against danger to life, limb, and property as required by, but not limited to, OSHA regulations.
B.
Protect existing improvements including landscaping against damage. Repair or replace damaged items.
c.
Protect existing utility services and distribution systems from damage or displacement.
D.
Remove conduits or pipes not in service, exposed during Work, unless a minimum cover of two feet is provided. Remove concrete, clay or other non-metallic pipe over 8 inches in diameter, unless otherwise indicated.
E.
Shore, crib, or lag excavations and earthen banks as necessary to prevent cave in, erosion or gullying of sides .
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.OT. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HJGH SCHOOL
07/26/2012 EXCAVATION AND FILL 312313-3
F.
•
SHORING
3.3 A.
Provide shoring as necessary to properly and safely support earth sides of excavations, and existing curbs, sidewalks, gutter, drives and stairs, against movement and collapse.
B.
Design and Calculations: Provide in accordance with requirement of governing CalOSHA requirements.
C.
Remove shoring upon completion of the Work of this section or when no longer needed unless required otherwise by authorities having jurisdiction.
EXCAVATION
3.4
•
Provide excavations free from standing water by pumping, draining, or providing protection against water intrusion. If soil becomes soft, soggy, or saturated, excavate to firm undisturbed earth and fill as required. Slope adjacent grades away from excavations to minimize entry of water.
A.
Unclassified Excavations: Comply with the Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction, Section 300: "Earthwork", except as modified herein.
B.
Form sides of footings, pads, grade beams, and slab foundations, unless otherwise indicated. Provide excavations of sufficient size to permit installation and removal of forms and other required Work.
c.
Machine-drill excavation for round footings to size and depth indicated. Provide a collar or casing, or other adequate protection, to exclude dirt and debris. Protect excavations with plank covers until concrete is placed.
D.
Provide excavation bottoms level and free from loose material. Excavate to indicated or required elevations of undisturbed earth.
E.
Barricade trenches, ditches, pits, sumps, and similar Work outside the barricaded working area with chain link fence as specified in Section 01 5000 - Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls, and in accord with Cal-OSHA standards and requirements.
F.
Trenches over five feet in depth shall comply with the Construction Safety Orders of the California Division of Industrial Safety.
G.
Where indicated or required to excavate in lawn areas, protect adjoining lawn areas outside of the Work area. Replace or install removed sod upon completion of backfill by installing sod level with adjacent lawns. If installation of removed sod fails, furnish sod and install to match existing lawns.
H.
For Structures: 1.
•
Calculate excavation quantities based on elevations or depths indicated on Drawings .
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR& P.OT. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
07/26/2012 EXCAVATION AND FfLL 31 2313-4
• I.
2.
Provide 2,000 psi concrete for backfill of over-excavated areas to indicated or required elevations .
3.
Special preparation of bottom of excavated planes areas: Excavate areas shown on Drawings as bottom of excavated planes (B.E.P.), by excavating and filling to indicated grades and elevations.
For Utilities: I.
Excavate trenches to required depth for utility lines, such as pipes, conduits, and tanks, with minimum allowance of 6 inches at the bottom and 6 inches at the sides for bedding or concrete encasement as indicated on Drawings. Grade bottom of trenches to a uniform smooth surface. Remove loose soil from the excavation before placing sand bedding or concrete encasement.
2.
Do not install piping lengthwise under concrete walks without review by the Architect.
3.
Do not excavate trenches parallel to footings closer than 18 inches from the face of the footing or below a plane having a downward slope of two horizontal to one vertical, from a line 9 inches above bottom of footings. a.
• b.
•
Unless otherwise indicated on Drawings, depth of excavations outside buildings shall provide for a minimum coverage above top of piping, tank or conduit measured from the lowest adjoining finished grade, as follows: Steel Pipe
24 inches below finish grade
Copper Water Tube
18 inches below finish grade
Cast-Iron, Pressure Pipe
36 inches below finished grade
Plastic Pipe (other than waste)
30 inches below finished grade
Tanks or other structure
36 inches below finished grade
Soil, sewer and storm drain
minimum 18 inches below finished grade, and as required for proper pitch and traffic load. Install polypropylene sewer pipe with at least 24 inches of coverage.
Irrigation Pipe:
12 Non-pressure pipe pressure pipe - 24 inches.
inches,
Trench width shall provide space for fitting and joining. Excavate for piping bells and fittings, bell and spigot pipe and other fittings.
4.
Where portions of existing structures, walks, paving, or other improvements are removed or cut for piping or conduit installation, replace the material with equal quality, finished to match adjoining existing improvements. Repair pavement as specified in Section 32 0117 - Pavement Repair.
5.
Provide a minimum clear dimension of 2 inches from sides of wall excavation to outer surfaces of buried pipes or conduits placed in the same trench or outside surfaces of containers and tanks .
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR& P.OT. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
07/26/2012 EXCAVATION AND FILL 312313-5
•
IMPORT/EXPORT OF MATERIALS
3.05 A.
Unclassified Fill and Compaction: Comply with the Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction, Section 300 - Earthwork, except as modified herein. Install and compact fill in layers not to exceed 6 inches in thickness.
B.
Provide fill materials as specified in Part 2- Products. If excavated materials from the Project site are not of required quality or sufficient quantity, import additional materials as necessary.
C.
In addition to the requirements of this section, import and/or exported materials shall comply with the requirements of Section 01 4523.
D.
Imported fill materials shall be sampled by a geotechnical engineer, retained by the Owner as an Owner Consultant, for compliance with the requirements of Part 2 of this section.
E.
A geotechnical engineer, retained by the Owner as an Owner Consultant, shall submit the samples to an independent DSA approved testing laboratory for testing.
F.
Initial sampling and testing shall be performed before importing material to the Project site. Identify the location of the source site in addition to the address, name of the person and entity responsible for the source site. A geotechnical engineer, retained by the Owner as an Owner Consultant, shall obtain both the initial and additional samples from the identified site and submit samples for required testing.
G.
The geotechnical engineer, retained by the Owner as an Owner Consultant, shall perform additional sampling during import operations. If the total quantity of import is determined to be greater than I 000 cubic yards of material, one sample shall be obtained and submitted for testing for each 250 cubic yards of imported material. If the total quantity of import is determined to be less than 1000 yards, one sample shall be obtained and submitted for testing for each I 00 cubic yards of imported material.
H.
The independent approved testing laboratory shall perform the required tests and report results of tests noting if the tested material passed or failed such tests and shall furnish copies to the Project Inspector, Architect, OAR, DSA, Contractor, and others as required. Report shall state tests were conducted under the responsible charge of a licensed State of California professional engineer and the material was tested in accordance with applicable provisions of the Contract Documents, California Building Code, and the DSA. Upon completion of the Work of this section, the independent testing laboratory and geotechnical engineer shall submit a verified report to the DSA as required by the CBC.
I.
Bills of lading or equivalent documentation will be submitted to the Project Inspector on a daily basis.
J.
Upon completion of import operations, provide the OAR a certification statement attesting that imported material has been obtained from the identified source site.
•
INSTALLATION OF MATERIALS
3.06
•
A.
Pavement: Fill or backfill materials shall be installed in horizontal layers of 6 inches, unless otherwise required. Each layer shall be evenly placed and moistened or aerated
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR& P.OT. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
07/26/2012 EXCAVATION AND FILL 31 2313-6
as necessary. Unless otherwise reviewed by the geotechnical engineer, retained by the Owner as an Owner Consultant, each layer of fill material shall cover the length and width of the area to be filled before the next layer of material is installed. Top surface of each layer shall be installed to an approximate level with a crown or crossfall of at least 1 in 50, but not more than 1 in 20. Provide adequate drainage at all times during installation of the Work of this section.
• B.
• C.
•
Structures: 1.
After concrete has been placed, forms removed, and concrete Work inspected, backfill excavations with earth to indicated or required grades. Backfill simultaneously on each side of walls or grade beams. Remove rubbish, debris and other waste materials from excavations before placing backfill.
2.
Before placing backfill, adequately cure concrete and provide bracing, if required to stabilize structure. Protect waterproofing or damp-proofing against damage during backfilling operations, with required protection board. Remove bracing as backfill operation progresses.
3.
Do not furnish or install expansive soils for retaining wall backfill.
4.
Rigidly control the amount of water to be installed to provide optimum moisture content for type of fill material furnished. Do not over-saturate or compact by flooding or jetting.
5.
Install wall backfill before installing railings and fences on walls.
6.
Install weep hole drainage at the backside of walls so the backing completely covers the weep holes, is horizontally centered and extends at least 12 inches above the bottom of the weep opening. Provide an 8-inch square section of 114 inch galvanized or aluminum screen, with a minimum wire diameter of 0.03 inch, and install at the backside of each weep hole before installing the backfill material.
7.
Where a reviewed drainage matting system is provided instead of permeable backfill for retaining structures, install in accordance with the manufacturer recommendations.
Utilities: l.
Do not install backfill until the Work of this section has been inspected and tested. Do not furnish or install materials excavated from the Project site containing materials not permitted for backfill.
2.
Backfill electrical or other excavated utility trenches located outside of barricaded installation areas within 24 hours after inspection by the lOR.
3.
Install backfill in layers not exceeding 4 inches in thickness, except cementsand slurry.
4.
If materials excavated from the Project site are not permitted for trench backfill in paved areas, backfill trenches with a cement-sand slurry mix. Install backfill to an elevation of the existing undisturbed grades plus one inch .
8736 CORWIN TI-IEATER REPAIR & P.OT. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
07/26/2012 EXCAVATION AND FILL 31 2313-7
•
COMPACTING
3.7 A.
Each layer of fill material shall be compacted by tamping, sheepsfoot rollers, or pneumatic-tired rollers to provide specified relative compaction. At inaccessible locations, provide specified compaction by manually held, operated and directed compaction equipment.
B.
Install and compact sand bedding to provide a uniform bearing under the full length of piping and conduits.
C.
Unless otherwise indicated, compact each layer of fill material to a relative compaction of at least ninety percent.
D.
When fill materials, or a combination of fill materials, are encountered or provided which develop densely packed surfaces as a result of installation or compacting operations, scarify each layer of compacted fill before installing the next succeeding layer.
INSPECTION AND TESTING
3.8
•
A.
The geotechnical engineer, retained by the Owner as an Owner Consultant, will inspect and test excavations, sample material quality for testing as set required in Part 2, and observe installation and compaction of fill materials.
B.
The geotechnical engineer, retained by the Owner as an Owner Consultant, will sample imported fill materials from their designated source and submit samples to the independent approved testing laboratory before delivery to the Project site .
c.
Installation of backfill shall be observed by the geotechnical engineer, retained by the Owner as an Owner Consultant.
D.
The geotechnical engineer, retained by the Owner as an Owner Consultant, will inspect and test excavation Work before the installation of fill and other materials.
E.
Compaction: Test compaction in accordance with ASTM Dl557, Method C.
F.
The Project Inspector will inspect foundation excavations when completed and ready for forms, after forms are in place, and before first placement of concrete.
PROTECTION
3.9 A.
CLEANING
3.10 A.
•
Protect the Work of this section until Substantial Completion.
Remove rubbish, debris, and waste materials and legally dispose of off the Project site.
END OF SECTION
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.OT. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
07/26/2012 EXCAVATION AND FILL 31 2313-8
•
SECTION 3I 2316 EXCAVATION ANDFILLFORPAVING
PART I - GENERAL
l.OI
SUMMARY A.
B.
• A.
Excavating, backfill, and compacting for paved areas.
2.
Installation of fill materials.
Related Requirements: I.
Division OI -General Requirements.
2.
Section 01 4524 - Environmental Import/Export Material Testing.
3.
Section 3I I 000 - Site Clearing.
4.
Section 3I 2200 - Grading.
5.
Section 32 2326 - Base Course.
6.
Section 32 0117 - Pavement Repair.
7.
Section 32 12I6- Asphalt Paving.
8.
Section 32 1313 - Site Concrete Work.
Import and Export of Earth Materials: I.
Fees: Pay as required by authorities having jurisdiction over the area.
2.
Bonds: Post as required by authorities having jurisdiction over the area.
3.
Haul Routes and Restrictions: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction over the area.
SUBMITTALS
1.03
A.
•
I.
PROJECT REQUIREMENTS
1.02
1.04
Section Includes:
Imported Soils: A geotechnical engineer, retained by the Owner as an Owner Consultant, shall obtain initial product Sample for testing in accordance with the terms of Article 3.05 ofthis section. QUALITY ASSURANCE
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
07/27/2012 EXCAVATION AND FILL FOR PAVING 31 2316-1
•
A.
Comply with Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction, current edition, except as modified herein .
B.
Sampling, testing, and certification of imported and/or exported soils shall be performed in accordance with Section 01 4524 - Environmental Import/Export Material Testing. PROJECT CONDITIONS
1.05 A.
Information on Drawings or in soils report does not constitute a guarantee of accuracy or uniformity of soil conditions over the Project site.
B.
A copy of the foundation investigation and soils report is available for examination at the Architect's office during regular office hours of Architect.
PART 2- PRODUCTS BASE MATERIALS
2.01
•
•
A.
Concrete Slabs On Grade: Provide "Crushed Aggregate Base "as specified in the Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction, Section 200: "Rock Materials," with % inch maximum size aggregates. Provide 3-inch thick base, unless noted otherwise.
B.
Bituminous Surfacing: As indicated on Drawings and specified in Section 31 2326 Base Course . FILL AND BACKFILL MATERIALS
2.02 A.
Fill and backfill materials shall be previously excavated materials or imported fill material, free of clods and stones larger than 3-inch, foreign materials, vegetable growths, sod, expansive soils, rubbish and debris. Material shall conform to these specified requirements and related sections.
B.
Fill material exhibiting a wide variation in consistency and moisture content shall be blended or aerated to stabilize and upgrade the material.
C.
Imported Fill Material: I.
Provide suitable materials obtained from Project site excavations for earthwork and fill materials. If excavated materials are not of suitable quality or sufficient quantity, import additional materials as necessary.
2.
Imported fill shall be a granular material with sufficient binder to form a firm and stable unyielding subgrade and shall not have more than 60 percent of fines passing 200 mesh sieve. Material shall have a coefficient of expansion of not more than 2 percent from air dry to optimum moisture content and not more than 6 percent from air dry to saturation. Imported material shall be clean and free of rubbish, debris, and toxic or hazardous contaminants. Adobe or clay soils are not permitted .
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
07/27/2012 EXCAVATION AND Fll.L FOR PAVING 31 2316-2
•
D.
Other Fill Materials: Brick rubble and broken concrete originating from the Project site may be legally disposed of off the Project site or incorporated in fill, if reviewed by a geotechnical engineer, retained by the Owner as an Owner Consultant. Unless otherwise required, no such materials may be imported from outside the Project site.
E.
Permeable Backfill: 1.
Provide permeable backfill material behind retaining structures consisting of gravel, crushed gravel, crushed rock, natural sands, manufactured sand, or combinations of these materials conforming to the following gradations: Sieve Size: 3/4 inch (19mm) 3/8 inch (I Omm) No. 100 No. 200
•
2.
Those portions of fill material passing a No. 4 sieve shall provide a sand equivalent of at least 60.
3.
Provided backing for weep holes shall consist of two cubic feet of aggregate in burlap sacks, securely tied. Aggregate shall conform to requirements for No. 3 concrete aggregate as specified in subsection 200-1.4 of the Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction.
4.
Permeable Backfill Alternate Materials: Instead of the materials specified for retaining structures backfill, a drainage matting system, Miradrain by Mirafi, Inc., or equal, may be provided if reviewed by the Architect.
PART 3- EXECUTION SITE PREPARATION
3.01
A.
A.
Protect and guard excavations against danger to life, limb, and property as required by, but not limited to, Cal-OSHA regulations.
B.
Protect adjacent existing improvements including landscaping against damage.
3.03
3.04
Clear the Project site as required in Section 31 I 000 - Site Clearing. PROTECTION
3.02
•
Percentage Passing: 100 80 to 100 0 to 8 0 to 3
EXISTING UTILITY LINES
A.
Protect existing utility lines from damage or displacement.
B.
Remove conduits or pipes not in service, exposed during Work, unless a minimum cover of 2 feet is provided. Remove concrete, clay or other non-metallic pipe over 8 inches in diameter, unless otherwise indicated. EXCAVATION
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
07/27/2012 EXCAVATION AND FILL FOR PAVING 31 2316-3
•
A.
FILL
3.05 A.
Unclassified Fill and Compaction: Comply with the Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction, Section 300: "Earthwork," except as modified herein.
B.
Provide fill materials as specified in Part 2 - Products. If excavated materials from the Project site are not of required quality or sufficient quantity, import additional materials as necessary.
C.
In addition to the requirements of this section, import and/or exported materials shall comply with the requirements of Section 0 I 4524 - Environmental Import/Export Material Testing.
D.
Imported fill materials shall be sampled by a geotechnical engineer, retained by the Owner as an Owner Consultant, for compliance with the requirements of Part 2 of this Section.
E.
The geotechnical engineer, retained by the Owner as an Owner Consultant, shall submit samples to a DSA approved independent approved testing laboratory for testing.
F.
Initial sampling shall be performed by the geotechnical engineer, retained by the Owner as an Owner Consultant, before importing material to the Project site. Identify the location of the source site in addition to the address, name of the person and/or entity responsible for the source site. The geotechnical engineer, retained by the Owner as an Owner Consultant, shall obtain both the initial and additional samples from the identified site and shall submit samples to the approved independent testing laboratory for testing.
G.
The geotechnical engineer, retained by the Owner as an Owner Consultant, shall perform additional sampling during import operations. If the total quantity of import is determined to be greater than 1,000 cubic yards of material, one sample shall be obtained and submitted for testing tested for each 250 cubic yards of imported material. If the total quantity of import is determined to be less than 1,000 yards, one sample shall be obtained and submitted for testing for each 100 cubic yards of imported material.
H.
The independent approved testing laboratory shall perform the required tests and report results of tests noting if the tested material passed or failed such tests and shall furnish copies to the Project Inspector, Architect, OAR, DSA, Contractor, and others as required. Report shall state tests were conducted under the responsible charge of a licensed State of California professional engineer and the material was tested in accordance with applicable provisions of the Contract Documents, CBC, and the DSA. Upon completion of the Work of this section, the independent testing laboratory and geotechnical engineer shall submit a verified report to the DSA as required by CBC.
I.
Bills of lading or equivalent documentation will be submitted to the Project Inspector on a daily basis .
•
•
Unclassified Excavations: Comply with the Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction, Section 300: "Earthwork," except as modified herein .
8736 CORWIN THEATER REP AIR & P .0. T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
07/27/2012 EXCAVATION AND FILL FOR PAVING 31 2316-4
•
J. 3.06
INSTALLATION OF MATERIALS A.
3.07
•
A.
Each layer of fill material shall be compacted by tamping, sheepsfoot rollers, or pneumatic-tired rollers to provide specified relative compaction. At inaccessible locations, provide specified compaction by manually held, operated and directed compaction equipment.
B.
Unless otherwise indicated, compact each layer of earth fill to a relative compaction of at least 90 percent.
C.
When fill materials, or a combination of fill materials, are encountered or provided which develop densely packed surfaces as a result of installation or compacting operations, scarify each compacted layer before installing the next succeeding layer . INSPECTION AND TESTING
A.
The geotechnical engineer, retained by the Owner as an Owner Consultant, will inspect and test excavations, sample material quality as required in Part 2, and observe installation and compaction of fill materials.
B.
The geotechnical engineer, retained by the Owner as an Owner Consultant, will sample imported fill materials from their designated source before delivery to the Project site.
c.
Installation of backfill shall be observed by the geotechnical engineer, retained by the Owner as an Owner Consultant.
D.
The geotechnical engineer, retained by the Owner as an Owner Consultant, will inspect and test excavation Work before the installation of fill and/or other materials.
E.
Compaction: Test compaction in accordance with ASTM D 1557, Method C.
3.9
PROTECTION A.
•
Fill or backfill materials shall be installed in horizontal layers of 6 inches, unless otherwise required. Each layer shall be evenly placed and moistened or aerated as necessary. Unless otherwise reviewed by the geotechnical engineer, retained by the Owner as an Owner Consultant, each layer of fill material shall cover the length and width of the area to be filled before the next layer of material is installed. Top surface of each layer shall be installed to an approximate level with a crown or crossfall of at least I in 50, but no more than I in 20. Provide adequate drainage at all times during construction of the Work of this section. COMPACTING
3.08
3.10
Upon completion of import operations, provide the OAR a certification statement attesting that imported material has been obtained from the identified source site .
Protect the Work of this section until Substantial Completion. CLEANING
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
07/27/2012 EXCAVATION AND FILL FOR PAVING 31 2316-5
•
A.
Remove rubbish, debris, and waste materials and legally dispose of off the Project site .
END OF SECTION
•
•
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HJGH SCHOOL
07/27/2012 EXCAVATION AND FILL FOR PAVING 31 2316-6
•
SECTION 31 2326 BASE COURSE PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01
SUMMARY A.
Section Includes: I.
B.
•
Related Requirements: 1.
Division 01 - General Requirements.
2.
Section 31 1000 - Site Clearing.
3.
Section 31 2200 - Grading.
4.
Section 31 2313- Excavation and Fill.
5.
Section 31 2316- Excavation and Fill for Paving.
6.
Section 32 0117 - Pavement Repair .
7.
Section 32 1216- Asphalt Paving.
8.
Section 32 1313- Site Concrete Work.
SUBMITTALS
1.02
•
Installation of base material.
A.
Prior to import, submit written certification to OAR that crushed Miscellaneous Base (CMB) does not contain Polychlorinated biphenyls (PCB) above laboratory detection limits when tested in accordance with EPA Method 8082, and obtain written approval from LAUSD-OEHS prior to import at the subject site, refer to Article 2.02 for sampling frequency.
B.
Crushed aggregate base (CAB) shall consist of native rock without naturally occurring asbestos or recycled materials. The Contractor shall submit written documentation, which identifies the source, volume, and proposed transport date of the material for review and approval by LAUSD-OEHS prior to importing the material. A statement on company letterhead from the source, stamped by either a California Professional Geologist or Engineer, which states that the subject materials are native rock, do not contain any recycled materials and that the source does not mine ultramafic materials, a source of natural occurring asbestos shall be included in the submittal to OEHS. The Contractor may request variance from testing by Section 01 4523 for CAB. To be considered for a variance, the Contractor shall submit a documentation package,
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.OT. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
I0/0 1/20 I I BASE COURSE 3I 2326-I
which includes all of the aforementioned information at least 48 hours in advance of planned import .
•
I.
Frequently used suppliers: a.
Hansen Aggregates.
b.
Vulcan Materials, Reliance Company.
c.
Vulcan Materials Durbin.
C.
Product Data: Submit material source, technical information and test data for base materials. Gradation and quality certifications shall be dated within 30 days of the submittal.
D.
Sample: Submit Sample of proposed base course material. QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.03 A.
Comply with the following as a minimum requirement: Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction, current edition.
PART 2- PRODUCTS
•
UNTREATED BASE MATERIALS
2.01 A.
B.
I.
Crushed Aggregate Base.
2.
Crushed Miscellaneous Base. a.
CMB meeting requirements of Article 1.02, A, may be used on-site for pavement base only.
b.
CMB may be used off-site when in accordance to the Greenboook.
Materials generated on site shall not be used as a base course material. SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
2.02 A.
•
The following base materials shall conform to the requirements of the Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction: Section 200- Rock Materials.
Sampling and testing of imported and/or exported crushed miscellaneous base (CMB) shall be performed in accordance with the following Table 1 schedule:
8736 CORWIN THEATER REP AIR & P.OT. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 BASE COURSE 31 2326-2
•
TABLE 1: MINIMUM SAMPLING FREQUENCY
2.03
Volume (CY)
Sampling Frequency
0 to 500
1 per 100 Cubic Yards
501 to 1 000
1 per 250 Cubic Yards
1,001 to 5,000
1 per 250 Cubic Yards for first 1,000 Cubic Yards I per 500 CY thereafter
5,001 to 20,000
12 samples for first 5,000 Cubic Yards 1 per 1,000 Cubic Yards thereafter
over 20,000
1 per 2,000 Cubic Yards for first 20,000 Cubic Yards 1 per 2,500 CY thereafter
MATERIAL APPROVAL A.
Base material shall be inspected by the Project Inspector for gradation and material content prior to installation. The owner may choose to have additional tests performed by a geotechnical engineer, retained by the Owner, before installation.
PART 3 - EXEC UTI ON 3.01
•
INSTALLATION
A.
Install base course material in layers not exceeding 4 inches in thickness, unless required otherwise. Grade and compact to indicated levels or grades, cut and fill, water and roll until the surface is hard and true to line, grade and required section. Provide a relative compaction of at least 95 percent, unless otherwise required.
B.
Grade base course to elevations indicated on Drawings, ready to receive surfacing, in accordance with Section 31 2200 - Grading.
3.02
PROTECTION A.
3.03
Protect the Work of this section until Substantial Completion. CLEANUP
A.
Remove rubbish, debris, and waste materials and legally dispose of off the Project site.
END OF SECTION
•
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.OT. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
I 0/01/2011 BASE COURSE 31 2326-3
•
SECTION 32 0117 ASPHALT PAVEMENT REPAIR
PART I- GENERAL SUMMARY
1.01 A.
B.
•
Section Includes: 1.
Bituminous Surfacing Repair: Areas removed for utility trenches, heaved by tree roots, cracked areas, protruding areas where pavement meets hard surfaces, depressed areas, holes and areas around new structures, and raveled bituminous pavement.
2.
Areas heaved by tree roots, cracked areas, holes and trenches, and areas around new structures.
Related Sections: 1.
Division 0 I - General Requirements.
2.
Section 31 2200 - Grading.
3.
Section 31 2313 -Excavation and Fill.
4.
Section 31 2316 - Excavation and Fill for Paving.
5.
Section 31 2326 -Base Course.
6.
Section 32 1216 - Asphalt Paving.
7.
Section 32 1313- Site Concrete Work.
8.
Section 32 1236- Seal for Bituminous Surfacing.
SUBMITTALS
1.02 A.
Shop Drawings: Submit Shop Drawings indicating areas to be repaired.
B.
Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical data for materials and products. QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.03 A.
Comply with Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction, current edition.
PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01
•
MATERIALS
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR& P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
09/25/2012 ASPHALT PAVEMENT REP AIR 320117-1
•
A.
Base course materials: Section 31 2326 - Base Course.
B.
Asphalt paving materials: Section 32 1216 - Asphalt Paving.
c.
Seal materials: Section 32 1236- Seal for Bituminous Surfacing.
D.
Headers: Section 32 1216 - Asphalt Paving.
2.02
BITUMINOUS MA TERJALS A.
Provide materials and products of the class, grade or type indicated, conforming to relevant provisions of Section 203 - Bituminous Materials of the latest Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction.
PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01
•
PAVEMENT REMOVAL A.
Remove bituminous and concrete pavement in accordance with applicable provisions of Section 300 . . Earthwork of the Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction.
B.
Pavement Heaved By Roots: Remove pavement to limits of distortion and expose roots. Trim roots to provide at least 12-inch clearance to pavement.
c.
Remove protruding bituminous surfaces flush with the surrounding grade usmg a suitable tool or equipment so that adjacent finishes are not blackened .
D.
Remove raveled and depressed bituminous pavement to limits indicated or required.
E.
Saw cut existing improvements, trim holes and trenches in bituminous and concrete pavement to permit mechanical hand tampers to compact the fill.
F.
Remove broken concrete by saw cutting. If the required cut line is within 30 inches of a score or joint line or edge, cut and remove to the score, joint line, or edge.
3.02
EXCAVATING, BACKFILLING AND COMPACTING
A.
Conform to requirements in Section 31 2313 - Excavation and Fill; Section 31 2316 Excavation and Fill for Paving; Section 31 2319 - Excavation and Fill for Structures; or Section 31 2323 -Excavation and Fill for Utilities, as required.
B.
Where subgrade or base is deemed to be unstable or otherwise unsuitable, excavate such materials to firm earth, and replace with a required material. Install and compact fill materials in accordance with the requirements of related Specification sections.
3.03
HEADERS A.
•
Install headers along edge of bituminous surfacing abutting turf, earth, or planting area, unless indicated otherwise .
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
09/25/2012 ASPHALT PAVEMENT REPAIR 320117-2
•
B.
Install headers so the bottom surface has continuous bearing on solid grade. Where excavation for headers is undercut, thoroughly tamp soil under the header. Compact backfill on both sides of header to the density of the adjacent undisturbed grade.
C.
Fasten headers in place with redwood or Douglas fir stakes of length necessary to extend into solid earth a minimum of 12 inches. Stakes shall be of sound material, neatly pointed, driven vertically, and securely nailed to headers. Space stakes, not to exceed 4 feet on centers with top of stakes set one inch below top of header. Provide a minimum of two 12d galvanized common nails through each stake.
D.
Remove existing headers where new surfacing is installed adjacent to existing surfacing.
E.
Install temporary headers at transverse joints of paving where continuous paving operations are not maintained.
F.
Provide additional stakes and devices as required to fasten headers. BASE COURSE
3.04 A.
Unless otherwise indicated, base course shall be crushed aggregate base, fine grade, 3 inches thick or equal to thickness of the existing base, whichever is greater.
B.
Fill grade and compact as specified in Section 31 2200 - Grading. RESURFACING
3.05
•
A.
Holes and Trenches: Remove loose dirt and backfill with cement-sand slurry allowing for surfacing one inch thicker than existing. Resurface flush with existing adjoining pavement installing the same type of materials and section provided in existing improvements.
B.
Other Areas: Other surface improvements damaged or removed shall be cut to a neat even line and excavated one inch below the bottom of the existing pavement. Resurface by following the original grades and installing the same type of materials provided in existing improvements.
c.
Where bituminous surfacing abuts concrete, masonry, walks or paving, tamp joint smooth, if necessary, as described above to obtain a uniformly even joint, true to line and grade. Tamp and smooth materials before asphalt cools. REPAIRING AND RESEALING EXISTING SURFACES
3.06 A.
Preparation of Surfaces: Prior to filling cracks, clean existing bituminous surfacing of loose and foreign materials and coat with a film of asphalt emulsion.
B.
Repair of Existing Surfacing: 1.
•
Fill cracks Yz inch wide and less with RS-1 emulsion and silica sand or other required material. Cracks larger than Yz inch wide shall be filled with Type C2 Asphalt Concrete as specified. Cracks shall be filled to the level of adjacent surfacing .
8736 CORWIN TIIEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
09/25/2012 ASPHALT PAVEMENT REPAIR 320117-3
2.
•
C.
Testing: Flood test entire area in presence of the Project Inspector. Entire area tested shall be free of standing water or puddles.
D.
Surface Seal: After surface has been repaired and tested, install seal coat over entire area indicated. Surface seal shall be as specified in Section 32 1236 - Seal For Bituminous Surfacing.
3.07
CLEANING A.
Remove all stains on the Project site and adjacent properties caused by or attributed to the Work of this section.
B.
Remove rubbish, debris, and waste materials and legally dispose of off the Project site.
3.08
PROTECTION
A.
•
•
Where low areas, holes, or depressions occur in existing surfacing, repair with emulsified asphalt. Install material, strike off the emulsified asphalt with a straightedge flush with adjoining surfacing. Finish with a steel trowel, and after dehydration, compact by rolling or tamping.
Protect the Work of this section until Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
09/25/2012 ASPHALT PAVEMENT REPAIR 320117-4
•
SECTION 32 1216 ASPHALT PAVING
PART 1 - GENERAL SUMMARY
1.01
A.
Section Includes: I.
B.
•
Paving for playground, parking areas, areas between buildings, synthetic track surfacing adjacent to planting and turf areas as indicated.
Related Requirements: 1.
Division 01 - General Requirements.
2.
Section 31 2200 - Grading.
3.
Section 32 0 117 - Pavement Repair.
4.
Section 31 2326 - Base Course.
5.
Section 32 1236- Seal for Bituminous Surfacing.
6.
Section 32 1313 - Site Concrete Work .
SUBMITTALS
·1.02
A.
Shop Drawings: Submit site plan indicating extent of paving and accessories.
B.
Product Data: Manufacturer's technical data for materials and products. QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.03 A.
Comply with the following as a minimum requirement: Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction. PROJECT CONDITIONS
1.04
A.
Information on Drawings or in soils report does not constitute a guarantee of accuracy or uniformity of soil conditions over the Project site.
B
A copy of the soils report is available for examination in the office of the Architect during regular office hours of the Architect.
PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01
•
BITUMINOUS MATERIALS
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.OT. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
09/25/2012 ASPHALT PAVING 32 1216-1
•
A.
2.02
Provide materials of the class, grade, or type indicated on the Drawings, conforming to relevant provisions of Section 203 - Bituminous Materials of the Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction. HEADERS
A.
Concrete: Per specification Section 32 1313- Site Concrete Work.
B.
Wood: 1.
Redwood, Construction Heart Grade, size 2 by 6, unless otherwise indicated.
2.
Stakes: 2 by 4 redwood or 2 by 3 Douglas fir, Construction Grade.
3.
Nails: Common, galvanized, 12d minimum.
PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01
•
HEADERS A.
Install headers along edge of bituminous surfacing abutting turf, earth, or planting area, unless indicated otherwise.
B.
Install headers so the bottom surface has continuous bearing on solid grade. Where excavation for headers is undercut, thoroughly tamp soil under the header. Compact backfill on both sides of header to the density of adjacent undisturbed earth .
C.
Where wood headers are indicated on drawing, fasten headers in place with redwood or Douglas fir stakes of length necessary to extend into solid grade a minimum of 12 inches. Stakes shall be of sound material, neatly pointed, driven vertically, and securely nailed to headers. Space stakes, not to exceed 4 feet on center with top of stakes set one inch below top of header. Provide a minimum of two 12d galvanized common nails through each stake.
D.
Remove existing headers where new surfacing is installed adjacent to existing surfacing.
E.
Install temporary headers at transverse JOints of paving where continuous pavmg operations are not maintained.
F.
Provide additional stakes and anchorage as required to fasten headers in place.
3.02
•
CONSTRUCTION OF ASPHALT CONCRETE PAVEMENT A.
Thickness of Surfacing: Unless otherwise indicated on Drawings or specified, install bituminous surfacing to a compacted thickness of2 inches.
B.
Provide surfacing material over base course as specified in Section 31 2326 - Base Course .
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR& P.OT. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
09/25/2012 ASPHALT PAVING 32 1216-2
•
•
•
c.
Surfaces of walls, concrete, masonry, or existing bituminous surfacing indicated to be in direct contact with installed bituminous surfacing shall be cleaned, dried and uniformly coated with an asphaltic emulsion film.
D.
Thicken edges of bituminous surfacing that do not abut walls, concrete, or masonry, and edges joining existing bituminous surfaces. Remove headers at existing bituminous surfacing where new bituminous surfacing is to be installed. Thicken edges an additional 2 inches and taper to the indicated or specified thickness 6 inches back from such edges.
E.
At stairways, adjust thickness of paving such that the first tread is equal in height to all other treads.
F.
Provide adequate protection for concrete, planting areas, and other finish Work adjacent to areas indicated to receive bituminous surfacing.
G.
Placing: 1.
Do not install bituminous surfacing when atmospheric temperature is below 40 degrees F; or when fog or other unsuitable weather conditions are present. Temperature of mixture at time of installation shall not be lower than 260 degrees F in warm weather or higher than 320 degrees F in cold weather.
2.
Where 2-inch or 3-inch thick surfacing is indicated or specified, install surfacing in one course. Where surfacing is indicated or specified 4 inches or more in thickness, except for thickened edges, install bituminous surfacing in courses of approximately equal thickness, each course not exceeding 2 V2 inches in thickness .
H.
Stakes or Screeds: Provide grade or screed stakes spaced not more than 15 feet apart in flow lines with grades of less than one percent. Continuous screeds may be provided instead of stakes.
I.
Spreading: Install bituminous surfacing in a manner to cause least possible handling of mixture. In open areas and wherever practicable, install by mechanical means with a self-propelled mechanical spreader. In confined or restricted areas, install mixture with hot shovels and rakes, and smooth with lutes.
J.
Joints: Provide vertical joints between successive runs. Install joints true to line, grade, and cross section. Lapped joints are not permitted.
K.
Rolling: 1.
Finish roll with a self-propelled tandem roller weighing at least 8 tons. Break down roll with a self-propelled roller weighing between 1 V2 tons and 8 tons.
2.
Roll in a manner that preserves flow lines and the established finished grades. Break down roll in areas adjacent to flow lines parallel to flow lines. Break down roll after bituminous surfacing is installed without shoving or cracking of mixture under roller. Continue finish rolling until surfacing is unyielding, true to grade, and meets requirements for specified smoothness. Areas inaccessible to finish roller may be finish rolled with breakdown roller or
8736 CORWINTHEATERREPAIR&P.OT. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HJGH SCHOOL
09/25/2012 ASPHALT PAVING 32 1216-3
tamped with hot tamping irons and smoothed with hot smoothing irons or hand roller .
•
Where bituminous surfacing abuts concrete, masonry, walks or paving, tamp joint smooth, if necessary, as described above to obtain a uniformly even joint, true to line and grade. Tamp and smooth to properly compact.
4.
Compacted bituminous surfacing shall be provided with a bulk specific gravity of at least 2.31 when tested in accordance with ASTM D 1188.
TOLERANCE
3.03 A.
Smoothness: Surface of bituminous surfacing after rolling, shall be even, smooth and uniform in texture with no voids or rock pockets, free of roller marks or other irregularities, and not varying by more than 0.03 foot, except at local depressions or raised areas as indicated, when a I 0-foot straightedge is placed on surface.
B.
Grade: Finished grade shall not vary more than 0.02 foot above or below required grade. Variations within prescribed tolerance shall be compensating so that average grade and cross-section are provided.
C.
Premium paving tolerances and requirements for synthetic track:
• 3.04
I.
General: Test in-place asphalt concrete courses for compliance with requirements or thickness and surface smoothness. Repair or remove and replace unacceptable paving as directed by Owner's representative.
2.
Thickness: Tolerances for thickness shall be Y4 inch, plus or minus .
3.
Planarity: The asphalt substrate shall not vary from the planned cross slope by more than plus or minus 0.1 percent. The finished asphalt shall not vary, plus or minus, under a 10 feet straight edge greater than 118 inch. Flood test the surface with the use of a water truck. If, after 30 minutes on a 70 degree F day, "bird baths" are evident at a depth more than 118 inch repair using the best method of correction.
4.
Corrective Measures: Determine if the planarity, cross slopes, and general specifications have been met. If all of the conditions have been met notify the Owner in writing of the acceptance of the asphalt paving.
TESTING A.
3.05
After first coat of surface seal has been installed and after a 24 hour period, the flood test shall be completed of the bituminous surfacing in presence of the Project Inspector. Repair areas of standing water or puddles and flood test locally; install surface seal and retest as necessary. SURF ACE SEALING
A.
•
3.
After bituminous surfacing has passed flood test, clear and allow to dry and provide one more coat of surface seal as specified in Section 32 1236 - Seal for Bituminous Surfacing .
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.OT. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
09/25/2012 ASPHALT PAVING 32 1216-4
•
B.
Where indicated, provide multiple coats of surface seal to existing bituminous surfacing .
c.
Where new bituminous surfacing joins existing bituminous surfacing, overlap surface seal a minimum of 12 inches onto existing bituminous surfacing. PROTECTION
3.6 A.
Protect the Work of this section until Substantial Completion. CLEANUP
3.7 A.
Remove rubbish, debris and waste materials and legally dispose of off the Project site.
END OF SECTION
•
•
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.OT. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HlGH SCHOOL
09/25/2012 ASPHALT PAVING 32 1216-5
•
SECTION 32 1236 SEAL FOR BITUMINOUS SURF ACING
PART 1- GENERAL SUMMARY
1.01 A.
Section Includes: 1.
B.
1.02
•
Surface sealer over bituminous surfacing.
Related Requirements: 1.
Division 01 -General Requirements.
2.
Section 32 0117 -Pavement Repair.
3.
Section 32 1216- Asphalt Paving.
4.
Section 32 1723 - Pavement Marking.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product information and application procedures for bituminous surfacing . QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.03
A.
Comply with the Standard Specifications For Public Works Construction, current edition.
B.
Agitate bulk materials during transport. MAINTENANCE
1.04 A.
Extra Materials: Provide I 0 gallons in unopened containers.
PART 2- PRODUCTS MATERIALS
2.01
A.
Provide one ofthe following surface seals: Product Name
•
Manufacturer
1.
Guard-Top
CALMAT I Industrial Asphalt
2.
Over Kote
Diversified Asphalt Product
8736 CORWIN TIIEATERREPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 SEAL FOR BITUMINOUS SURF ACING 32 1236-1
•
3.
Park Top
Western Colloid Products
4.
Sure Seal
Asphalt Coating Engineering
5.
Super Drive Top.
SAF- T Seal. Inc.
6.
Equal.
PART 3- EXECUTION SURF ACE PREPARATION
3.01 A.
APPLICATION
3.02
•
Thoroughly wash surfaces with water to remove dirt, debris, excessive oil and grease, or other foreign matter.
A.
Install seal coat m strict accordance with manufacturer's written directions and recommendations.
B.
Install two coats of surface seal to new bituminous surfacing. First coat shall be installed before flood testing. Clean surface and allow to dry before installing second coat. Second coat shall be installed after bituminous surfacing has passed flood test.
c.
Where new bituminous surfacing is installed adjacent to existing bituminous surfacing, overlap surface seal a minimum of 12 inches onto existing bituminous surfacing .
D.
Where existing bituminous surfacing is indicated to be patched and sealed, install two coats of surface seal after patching. Refer to Section 32 1216 - Asphalt Paving. PROTECTION OF SURF ACES
3.03 A.
Protect sealed and unsealed surfaces from damage and traffic during performance of the Work of this section and until surface seal has thoroughly set and cured. Do not permit traffic of any kind for at least 24 hours after completion of installation.
B.
Protect the Work of this section until Substantial Completion. TESTING
3.04 A.
Owner reserves the right to obtain samples, perform tests to ensure compliance with the Specifications, and to review weight slips and invoices of materials delivered to the Project site. · CLEANUP
3.5 A.
Remove rubbish, debris, and waste materials and legally dispose of off the Project site.
END OF SECTION
•
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HJGH SCHOOL
10/01/201 I SEAL FOR BITUMINOUS SURF ACING 32 1236-2
•
SECTION 32 1313 SITE CONCRETE WORK
PART 1- GENERAL 1.01
SUMMARY A.
Section Includes: 1.
B.
•
Related Requirements: I.
Division 01 -General Requirements.
2.
Section 03 2000 - Concrete Reinforcement.
3.
Section 31 2200 - Grading.
4.
Section 31 2313 -Excavation and Fill .
5.
Section 31 2316 - Excavation and Fill for Pavement.
6.
Section 31 2326 - Base Course.
7.
Section 32 0117- Asphalt Pavement Repair.
8.
Section 32 1216 - Asphalt Paving
9.
Section 32 3113- Chain Link Fences and Gates.
SUBMITTALS
1.02 A.
Shop Drawings: Submit plans, elevations and details of concrete site Work.
B.
Product Data: Submit mix designs and manufacturer's technical data for materials and products. Submit 3-inch by 3-inch concrete Sample of each specified color.
c.
Material Sample: Submit one concrete bumper to the Project Inspector for destructive testing. QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.03
A.
•
Portland cement concrete pavement, cement walks, curbs, gutters, trash pickup area, ramps, mowing strips, fence post footings, sliding gate concrete tracks, catch basins, pipe bedding and encasements, thrust blocks, transition structures, flagpoles and light standard bases and footings, athletic equipment footings and equipment pads.
Comply with Standard Specifications For Public Works Construction.
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR& P.OT. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
09/25/2012 SITE CONCRETE WORK 32 1313-1
PART 2- PRODUCTS •
MATERIALS
2.01 A.
B.
Concrete, Mortar and Related Materials: Comply with applicable prov1s1ons of Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction, Section 201 - Concrete, Mortar and Related Materials: 1.
Concrete: 28-day compressive strength 2,500 psi, unless specified otherwise.
2.
Reinforcing Mesh: ASTM Al85, 4 by 4/W1.4 by Wl.4 welded wire mesh.
3.
Expansion Joint Filler: Preformed expansion joint filler, bituminous type, complying with ASTM D994.
Form Materials: I.
Side forms: Douglas fir, Construction Grade or Better or metal forms.
2.
Stakes: Douglas fir, Construction Grade or Better or metal stakes. (REFER TO ARCHITECTURAL)
PART 3- EXECUTION
••
3.02
•
CONSTRUCTION OF FORMS FOR CAST-IN-PLACE STRUCTURES
3.01
A.
Concrete Pavement: Install Portland cement concrete pavement in compliance with the Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction, Section 302- Roadway Surfacing.
B.
Miscellaneous Exposed Concrete: Install concrete curbs, walks, gutters, cross gutters, access ramps, driveways, catch basins, yard boxes, vaults and similar structures, in compliance with the Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction, Section 303 - Concrete and Masonry Construction.
c.
Exposed Concrete Bases: Install bases, such as for post, flagpole, light standards and similar bases, in compliance with the Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction, Section 303 - Concrete and Masonry Construction.
D.
Post, flagpole, light standard footings below grade, underground conduit bedding, encasements, thrust blocks and similar structures may be placed \directly in excavations conforming to the required sizes.
E.
Reinforcement installation and concrete placement, surface finishes, curing and removal of forms shall be performed in compliance with applicable provisions of Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction, Section 303 - Concrete and Masonry Construction. Provide heavy broom finish at slopes exceeding six percent and medium broom finish at slopes up to six percent. INSTALLATION OF PARKING BUMPERS
8736 CORWIN THEATER REP AIR & P .OT. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
09/25/2012 SITE CONCRETE WORK 32 1313-2
•
A.
Install bumpers as indicated on the Drawings. On bituminous paving, install anchors through pavement and into the ground a minimum of 12 inches. On concrete pavement, install bumpers in a continuous bed of adhesive. CLEANUP
3.3 A. 3.4
Remove rubbish, debris, and waste materials and legally dispose of off the Project site. PROTECTION
A.
Protect the Work of this section until Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION
•
•
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.OT. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
09/25/2012 SITE CONCRETE WORK 32 1313-3
•
SECTION 32 1723 PAVEMENT MARKINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL SUMMARY
1.01
A.
Section Includes: 1.
B.
Related Requirements: 1.
Division 0 I - General Requirements.
2.
Section 32 1236- Seal for Bituminous Surfacing.
SUBMITTALS
1.02
•
Parking stripes, markings and accessibility symbols.
A.
Shop Drawings: Submit Shop Drawings, indicating location, extent, color and texture of markings.
B.
Material Samples: Submit color Samples. PROJECT CONDITIONS
1.03
A.
Do not install markings when adverse weather conditions are forecasted.
PART 2- PRODUCTS MATERIALS
2.01 A.
•
Paint: Water emulsion-based traffic paint must be approved by OEHS (LAUSD's Office of Environmental Health and Safety) l.
Dunn Edwards: Vin-L-Stripe.
2.
Pervo Paint Company: Acrylic Traffic Paint.
3.
Sherwin Williams: Setfast Acrylic Traffic Paint.
4.
Vista Paint Corporation: Traffic Paint.
5.
Equal.
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HJGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 PAVEMENT MARKINGS 32 1723-1
•
PART 3- EXECUTION PAVEMENT MARKINGS
3.01 A.
B.
Application of Paint: l.
Prior to application of paint, allow the pavement to properly cure. Clean and prepare in accordance with paint manufacturer's written recommendations.
2.
Provide mechanical equipment to apply paint in a uniform, straight or curved pattern, without gaps, holidays, runs, or other defects.
3.
Do not permit traffic until paint has completely cured.
4.
Apply two coats in thickness recommended by manufacturer.
5.
Playground Markings: Submit Samples to Architect for review. Limited color palettes may be submitted.
Marking Width and Color: Unless indicated otherwise, marking width and color are as follows: Location Width Parking stall lines 4 inches Traffic markings Striping: 4 inches General 4 inches Accessible Parking 4 inches International Symbol of Accessibility (ISA) 2 inches
•
Athletic Court Lines: Letters and numbers:
2 inches
Color White Yellow Yellow Blue White on blue background *White As indicated
*Where two sets of lines overlap, one set shall be white and the other set shall be yellow. PROTECTION
3.02 A.
Protect the Work of this section until Substantial Completion. CLEANUP
3.03 A.
Remove rubbish, debris, and waste materials and legally dispose of off the Project site.
END OF SECTION
•
8736 CORWfN THEATER REPAIR & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES ffiGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 PAVEMENT MARKINGS 32 1723-2
SECTION 32 1726
•
TACTILE WARNING SURFACING PART 1 - GENERAL SUMMARY
l.OI
A.
B.
I.
Cast in Place detectable warning tiles.
2.
Cast in Place replaceable detectable warning tiles.
3.
Surface Applied detectable warning tiles.
Related Requirements: I.
Division 01 - General Requirements.
2.
Section 32 1313 - Site Concrete Work.
PROJECT REQUIREMENTS
1.02 A.
•
Section Includes:
Regulatory Requirements: installation. SUBMITTALS
1.03 A.
Shop Drawings: Submit Shop Drawings indicating all pertinent characteristics, including profile, sound-on-cane contact amplification feature, and installation methods.
B.
Samples for Verification: I.
Submit two (2) tactile warning surface samples minimum 8 inch x 8 inch of the kind proposed for use.
2.
Material Samples shall be properly labeled and shall contain the following information: Name of Project, Submitted by, Date of Submittal, Manufacturer's Name, and Catalog Number.
C.
Product Data: Submit manufacturer's catalog data for each product proposed for installation.
A.
Material Test Reports: 1.
•
Comply with CBC requirements for design and
Submit current test reports from qualified, accredited independent testing laboratory in accordance with ASTM guidelines and indicating that materials proposed for use are in compliance with specification requirements and the meet properties indicated .
8736 CORWIN THEATER & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
I 0/01/20 II TACTJLE WARNING SURFACING 32 I726-I
B.
Maintenance Data: manuals .
•
1.
A.
B.
1.05
Comply with following as a minimum requirement:
I.
ASTM Test Methods B 117, C 501, C 1028, D 543, D 570, D638, D685, D790, G 151,0155, and E84
2.
2013 California Building Code, Seciton llB-406 "Curb Ramps, Blended Transitions and Islands" and Section 11 B-705 "Detectable Warnings and Detectable Directional Texture".
Qualifications: Experienced installer, certified in writing by tactile warning surface manufacturer, who has successfully completed tactile warning surface installations similar in material, design, and extent to work in project.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Cold-Weather Protection: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice or frost. Do not build on frozen subgrade or setting beds. Remove and replace unit paver work damaged by frost or freezing.
B.
Weather Limitations for Adhesive Application: 1.
C.
•
Maintenance Instructions: Include copies of manufacturer's specified maintenance practices for each type of tactile warning surface tiles and accessones.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.04
•
For tactile warning surfacing, to include m maintenance
Apply adhesive only when ambient temperature is above 50 deg F and when temperature has not been below 35 deg F for 12 hours immediately before application. Do not apply when substrate is wet or contains excessive moisture.
Weather Limitations for Mortar and Grout:
I.
Cold-Weather Requirements: Comply with cold-weather construction requirements contained in ACI 530.1 I ASCE 6/TMS 602.
2.
Hot-Weather Requirements: Comply with hot-weather construction requirements contained in ACI 530.11ASCE 6/TMS 602. Provide artificial shade and windbreaks, and use cooled materials as required. Do not apply mortar to substrates with temperatures of I 00 deg F and higher .
8736 CORWIN THEATER & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 TACTILE WARNING SURF ACING 32 1726-2
a.
•
1.06
When ambient temperature exceeds 100 deg F, or when wind velocity exceeds 8 mph and ambient temperature exceeds 90 deg F, set unit pavers within 1 minute of spreading setting-bed mortar.
WARRANTY
A.
Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of tactile warmng surfaces that fail in materials within specified warranty period. 1.
Warranty includes: manufacturing defects, breakage, and deformation.
2.
Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2- PRODUCTS
2.01 A.
•
TACTILE WARNING SURFACING, GENERAL Accessibility Requirements: Comply with applicable provisions in the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities [ICC A 117.1] for tactile warning surfaces. 3.
2.02 B.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS Compliance: Tactile Warning Tiles. 1. 2.
C.
Compliant with ADAAG, PROWAG, and CBC Title 24 requirements. Compliant with Division of the State Architect IR 11B-3 (1/26/05) and IR 11B-4 (1/01/11).
Test Criteria: methods. 1.
2. 3. 4.
•
For tactile warning surfaces composed of multiple units, provide units that when installed provide consistent side-to-side and end-to-end dome spacing that complies with requirements.
Meet or exceed the following test criteria, usmg the most current test
Water Absorption: Not to exceed 0.20 percent, when tested in accordance with ASTM D 570. Slip Resistance: 0.80 minimum combined wet/dry static coefficient of friction, when tested in accordance with ASTM D 695. Compressive Strength: 25,000 psi minimum, when tested in accordance with ASTM c 1028. Tensile Strength: 10,000 psi minimum, when tested in accordance with ASTM D 638 .
8736 CORWIN TIIEA TER & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 TACTILE WARNING SURFACING 32 1726-3
5.
•
6.
7. 8. 9. 10. 11.
2.03
Flexural Strength: 25,000 psi minimum, when tested in accordance with ASTM D 790 . Chemical Stain Resistance: No reaction to 1 percent hydrochloric acid, motor oil, calcium chloride, gum, soap solution, bleach, and antifreeze, when tested in accordance with ASTM D 543. Abrasion Resistance: 300 minimum, when tested in accordance with ASTM C 501. Flame Spread: 25 maximum, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84. Accelerated Weathering: ~E less than 5.0 at 2,000 hours minimum exposure, when tested by ASTM G 155 or ASTM G 151. AASTHO_ H20 Load Bearing Test: No damage at 16,000 pounds loading. Salt and Spray Performance: No deterioration or other defects after 200 hour of exposure, when tested in accordance with ASTM 8 117.
DETECT ABLE WARNING TILES A.
Cast in Place Detectable Warning Tiles: Accessible truncated-dome detectable warning tiles configured for setting flush in new concrete walkway surfaces, ramps, or new construction with slip-resistant surface treatment on domes and field of tile. Cast in Place Tiles have a 114 inch nominal thickness and feature embedment ribs 3 inches on center through entire length of tile. I.
•
Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide ADA Solutions, Inc.; Cast in Place Detectable Warning Tile or comparable product by one ofthe following: a. b. c.
2. 3.
Material: Homogeneous glass and carbon composite material which is colorfast and UV stable. Color: Uniform throughout, and not reliant on any type of paint coating to achieve color stability. Federal Yellow (Y) per Federal Standard 5958 Table IV, Color No. 33538. Verify shapes and sizes available from manufacturers.
4.
Shapes and Sizes: a. Rectangular panel, 2.35 inch dome spacing: [24 by 36 inches] [24 by 48 inches] [24 by 60 inches] [36 by 48 inches] [36 by 60 inches], field verify size.
5.
Mounting:
a.
•
Armorcast Products Co. Detectile, Inc. Or Equal.
Permanently embedded detectable warning tile wet-set into freshly poured concrete .
8736 CORWIN THEATER & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 TACTILE WARNING SURFACING 32 1726-4
B.
•
Cast in Place Replaceable Detectable Warning Tiles: Accessible truncated-dome detectable warning tiles configured for setting flush in new concrete walkway surfaces, ramps, or new construction applications, shall have slip-resistant surface treatment on domes and field of tile. 1.
Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide ADA Solutions, Inc.; Cast in Place Replaceable Detectable Warning Tile or comparable product by one of the following: a. b. a.
2. 3.
Material: Homogeneous glass and carbon composite which is colorfast and UV stable. Color: Uniform throughout, and not reliant on any type of paint coating to achieve color stability. Federal Yellow (Y) per Federal Standard 595B Table IV, Color No. 33538.
4.
Shapes and Sizes: a.
•
5.
Replaceable, fully assembled, detectable warning tile wet-set into freshly poured concrete.
Surface Applied Detectable Warning Tiles: Truncated-dome detectable warning for surface application on existing concrete walkway surfaces, with slip-resistant surface treatment on domes; large perimeter beveled edges for smooth transition, secured with color matched fasteners, and structural adhesive. Surface Applied tiles are 3116 inch thick with beveled edges. 1.
Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide ADA Solutions, Inc.; Surface Applied Detectable Warning Tiles or comparable product by one of the following: a. b.
2. 3.
4.
•
Rectangular panel, 2.35 inch dome spacing: [24 by 36 inches] [24 by 48 inches] [24 by 60 inches] [36 by 48 inches] [36 by 60 inches], field verify size.
Mounting:
a. C.
Armorcast Products Co. Detectile, Inc. Or Equal.
Armorcast Products Co. Or Equal.
Material: Homogeneous glass and carbon composite material which is colorfast and UV stable. Color: Uniform throughout, and not reliant on any type of paint coating to achieve color stability. Federal Yellow (Y) per Federal Standard 595B Table IV, Color No. 33538. Shapes and Sizes:
8736 CORWIN THEATER & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 TACTILE WARNING SURFACING 32 1726-5
a.
•
5. 2.04
Mounting: Adhered and fastened to existing concrete substrate.
ACCESSORIES A.
Fasteners and Anchors: Manufacturer's standard as required for secure anchorage of tactile warning surfaces, noncorrosive and compatible with each material joined, and complying with the following: I. 2.
•
Furnish color appropriate nylon sleeve, stainless-steel fasteners for exterior use. Fastener Heads: For nonstructural connections, use flathead or oval countersunk screws and bolts with tamper-resistant heads, colored to match tile.
B.
Adhesive: As recommended by manufacturer for adhering tactile warning surfacing unit to substrate.
C.
Sealant: As recommended by manufacturer for sealing perimeter of tactile warning surfacing unit.
PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01
EXAMINATION A.
3.02
3.03
Verify that concrete is in suitable condition to begin installation according to manufacturer's written instructions. Verify that installation of tactile warning surfacing will comply with accessibility requirements upon completion.
INSTALLATION OF TACTILE WARNING SURF ACING A.
General: Prepare substrate and install tactile warning surfacing according to manufacturer's written instructions unless otherwise indicated.
B.
Place tactile warning surfacing units in dimensions and orientation indicated m contract documents.
INSTALLATION OF DETECTABLE WARNING TILES A.
Cast in Place Detectable Warning Tiles: I.
•
Rectangular panel, 2.35 inch dome spacing: [24 by 36 inches] [24 by 48 inches] [24 by 60 inches] [36 by 48 inches] [36 by 60 inches], field verify size .
Concrete Installation: Comply Section 321313 "Concrete Paving."
8736 CORWIN THEATER & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HJGH SCHOOL
with installation requirements m Mix, place, and finish concrete to 10/0 !120 ll TACTILE W ARNlNG SURF ACING 32 1726-6
•
2. 3.
4.
5.
6.
•
7. B.
Cast in Place Replaceable Detectable Warning Tiles: 1.
2. 3.
4.
5.
•
conditions complying with detectable warning tile manufacturer's written requirements for satisfactory embedment of tile . Tile Installation in new concrete: Follow manufacturer's detailed installation guidelines. To the maximum extent possible, the Cast in Place Tiles shall be oriented such that the rows of in-line truncated domes are parallel with the direction of the ramp. When multiple Cast in Place Tiles regardless of size are used, the truncated domes shall be aligned between the tactile warning surface Tiles and throughout the entire tactile warning surface installation. In accordance with the Proposed Accessibility Guidelines for Pedestrian Facilities in the Public Rights of Way (7/23/11, Access Board): Sections 304 + 305), Tactile Warning Surface Tile shall be located relative to the curb line as shown within Sections 304+305 ofthe Guidelines. Cast in Place Tiles shall be tamped or vibrated into the fresh concrete to ensure that there are no voids or air pockets, and the field level of the Cast in Place Tile is flush to the adjacent concrete surface or as the Drawings indicate to permit proper water drainage and eliminate tripping hazards between adjacent finishes. Tiles shall be cut into size and configuration indicated on the Drawings using a . 60 tooth carbide blade on a table saw or equivalent cutting device. Minimize any cantilever effect (to the maximum extent practicable) when cutting between successive embedment ribs as concrete will tend to flow up and over the Cast in Place Tiles. The top of the body of the Cast in Place Tiles shall be fully seated and flush with the adjacent concrete substrate. For specific instructions for cutting and setting refer to Tactile Warning Surface manufacturer's written instructions. Clean tiles using methods recommended in writing by manufacturer.
Concrete Installation: Comply with installation requirements in Section 321313 "Concrete Paving." Mix, place, and finish concrete to conditions complying with detectable warning tile manufacturer's written requirements for satisfactory embedment of removable tile. Tile Installation: Follow manufacturer's detailed installation guidelines. To the maximum extent possible, the Cast in Place Replaceable Tiles shall be oriented such that the rows of in-line truncated domes are parallel with the direction of the ramp. When multiple Cast in Place Replaceable Tiles regardless of size are used, the truncated domes shall be aligned between the tactile warning surface tiles and throughout the entire tactile warning surface installation. In accordance with the Proposed Accessibility Guidelines for Pedestrian Facilities in the Public Rights of Way (7/23/11, Access Board): Sections 304 + 305), Tactile Warning Surface Tile shall be located relative to the curb line as shown within Sections 304+305 ofthe Guidelines. The Cast in Place Replaceable Tiles shall be tamped or vibrated into the fresh concrete to ensure that there are no voids or air pockets, and the field level of
8736 CORWIN THEATER & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/0 l/20 11 TACTILE WARNING SURFACING 32 1726-7
•
6.
7. C.
Surface Applied Detectable Warning Tiles: 1. 2.
3.
•
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
•
the Tactile Warning Surface Tile is flush to the adjacent concrete surface or as the Drawings indicate to permit proper water drainage and eliminate tripping hazards between adjacent finishes. On Continuous Runs: The Installer shall leave a 3/16" nominal gap between successive Tactile Warning Surface Tiles. As part of the concrete finishing operation, the Installer shall apply 118 - 1/4 inch edge treatment around the perimeter of the Tactile Warning Surface Tiles to facilitate future replacement of the Tactile Warning Surface Tile. A Urethane Sealant such as Sikaflex I a or BASF NP 1 shall be applied to the edge treatment for a watertight Tactile Warning Surface Tile installation. Clean tiles using methods recommended in writing by manufacturer.
Tile Installation: Follow manufacturer's detailed installation guidelines. To the maximum extent possible, the Surface Applied Tiles shall be oriented such that the rows of in-line truncated domes are parallel with the direction of the ramp. When multiple Surface Applied Tiles regardless of size are used, the truncated domes shall be aligned between the tactile warning surface tiles and throughout the entire tactile warning surface installation. In accordance with the Proposed Accessibility Guidelines for Pedestrian Facilities in the Public Rights of Way (7 /23/11, Access Board): Sections 304 + 305), Tactile Warning Surface Tile shall be located relative to the curb line as shown within Sections 304+ 305 of the Guidelines. Cutting of Surface Applied Tiles may be required to accommodate specific site conditions. All ,possible attempts shall be made to minimize cutting of the Surface Applied Tiles. Minimum acceptable width of the cut Surface Applied Tile shall be 9 inches. Environmental Conditions: Air and substrate temperatures must exceed 40 degrees for at least 8 daytime hours for a sound and proper installation. A "weed torch" may be used to boost the substrate temperature to expedite cure of adhesives and sealants. Immediately prior to installing the Surface Applied Tiles, the concrete surfaces must be inspected to ensure that they are clean, dry, free of voids, curing compounds, projections, loose material, dust, oil, grease, sealers and determined to be structurally sound with a minimum four (4) day concrete cure period (unless otherwise directed by the Surface Applied Tile manufacturer) and that the surface is flat. As necessary, substrate may be mechanically cleaned with a diamond cup grinder or shot blaster to remove any dirt or foreign material although a broom or leaf blower is usually adequate for cleaning of the substrate. Apply adhesive on the backside of the Surface Applied Tiles following the perimeter border and internal cross pattern established by the Surface Applied Tile manufacturer. Sufficient adhesive must be placed on the prescribed areas to have full coverage across the 2 inch width of the adhesive locator. For certain applications, generally encountered in the retail environment, the Tactile Warning Surface manufacturer may direct that full coverage adhesive
8736 CORWIN THEATER & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/20 II TACTILE WARNING SURFACING 32 1726-8
•
9. l 0.
11.
12.
13.
14.
•
15. 3.04
•
be applied so as to optimize the tactile warning surface Tile's performance and load bearing capacity. Set the Surface Applied Tile(s) true and square to the curb ramp areas as detailed in the Drawings. Allow 3/16 inch separation between successive Surface Applied Tiles for expansion/contraction. Drill holes true and straight to a depth of 2 112 inches by 114 inch using the recommended bit. As necessary, additional countersunk holes may be added to the Surface Applied Tile by using a 5 point 112 inch (82 degree) countersink to create the necessary holes. Mechanically fasten Surface Applied Tile to the concrete substrate using a 32oz. to 48oz. hammer to set the composite sleeve anchors. Ensure that the fastener has been set to full depth, straight and true. Care should be taken when setting the fastener to avoid any advertent blows with the hammer to the Surface Applied Tile. Following the installation of the Surface Applied Tile, the sealant system should be applied to the perimeter edge. Follow the Tactile Warning Surface manufacturer's recommendations when applying the sealant in a cove type profile to blend and seal the Surface Applied Tile edge to the adjoining surfaces. Do not allow foot traffic on installed Surface Applied Tile until the perimeter edge sealant has cured sufficiently to avoid tracking. If the Surface Applied Tile must be placed into immediate pedestrian service, apply baby powder to the sealant to minimize the possibility of tracking while the sealant cures. Foot imprints may appear in the fully cured sealant application On Continuous Runs: The Installer shall leave a 3/16 inch nominal gap between successive Tactile Warning Surface Tiles. As part of the concrete finishing operation, the Installer shall apply 118 - 114 inch edge treatment around the perimeter of the Tactile Warning Surface Tiles to facilitate future replacement of the Tactile Warning Surface Tile. A Urethane Sealant such as Sikaflex la or BASF NPI shall be applied to the edge treatment for a watertight Tactile Warning Surface Tile installation. Protect installed tiles from traffic until adhesive has set.·
CLEANING AND PROTECTION A.
Protect detectable warning tiles against damage during construction period to comply with tile manufacturer's specifications.
B.
During and after the detectable warning tiles installation and the concrete curing stage, it is imperative that there are no walking, leaning, or external forces placed on the tile to rock the tile, causing a void between the underside of the tile and the concrete substrate.
C.
Remove protective plastic sheeting from detectable warning tiles within 24 hours of installation .
8736 CORWIN THEATER & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 TACTILE WARNING SURFACING 32 1726-9
•
D.
Clean tiles not more than four days prior to date scheduled for inspection intended to establish date of substantial completion in each area of the project.
END OF SECTION
•
•
8736 CORWIN THEATER & P.O.T. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 TACTILE WARNING SURF ACING 32 1726-10
•
SECTION 32 3113 CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES PART I - GENERAL SUMMARY
1.01 A.
Section Includes: 1.
B.
•
Related Requirements: I.
Division 0 1 - General Requirements.
2.
Section 05 5000- Metal Fabrications.
3.
Section 31 2316- Excavation and Fill for Paving.
4.
Section 32 0 1I7- Asphalt Pavement Repair.
5.
Section 32 1313- Site Concrete Work.
SUBMITTALS
I.02 A.
Shop Drawings: I.
Submit plans and details indicating extent of fences, locations of gates, and details of attachment and footings. Indicate means and methods for surface preparation and finishing.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.03
•
Chain link fences and gates as indicated.
A.
Chain Link Fence Manufacturers Institute: CLFMI Product Manual.
B.
ASTM AI23: Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dipped Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products.
C.
ASTM A392: Specification for Zinc-Coated Steel Chain Link Fence Fabric. ASTM F567: Practice for Installation of Chain Link Fence.
D.
ASTM F626: Specification for Fence Fittings.
E.
ASTM F668: Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) and Other Organic Polymer-Coated Steel Chain Link Fence Fabric.
F.
ASTM F900: Specification for Industrial and Commercial Swing Gates.
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.OT. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES 32 3113-1
•
G.
ASTM F I 083: Specification for Pipe, Steel, Hot-Dipped Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Welded, for Fence Structures.
H.
ASTM F 1184: Specification for Industrial and Commercial Horizontal Slide Gates.
J.
ASTM F1553: Guide for Specifying Chain Link Fence.
PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01
MATERIALS
A.
Concrete Materials and Properties: Comply with requirements of Section 03 3000 Cast-in-Place Concrete to provide normal-weight, air-entrained concrete with a minimum 28-day compressive strength of 3,000 psi, 4-inch slump, and one inch maximum size aggregate. I.
Concrete may be provided in the following volumetric proportions: Portland Cement Fine Aggregate Coarse Aggregate ( 1/4 inch to 1-1 /2 inches) Water
•
•
B.
I part 2 parts 4 parts 7 1;2 gallons, maximum per sack of cement
Chain Link Fence Fabric: Conforming to ASTM A 392, Class C2 zinc coating, 2.00 ounces minimum per square foot of uncoated wire surface, hot-dipped galvanized after weaving, and top and bottom edges knuckled. I.
Fabric for perimeter fencing and interior fencing shall be 9 gage woven wire with 2 inch mesh, unless otherwise specified.
2.
Fences 12 feet high or less shall be furnished with single width fabric.
3.
Installed fence fabric shall be free from barbs, icicles, or other projections and installed fence fabric with such defects will be deemed defective Work.
C.
Posts, Top Rails, Brace Rails and Gate Frames: Standard weight, galvanized, welded or seamless steel pipe conforming to ASTM F I 083, with a minimum yield strength of 35,000 psi. Embed posts into footing 6 inches less than the depth of the footing unless noted otherwise on drawings.
D.
Schedule of Posts and Footings: [tern
Height
Top Rail, Brace Rails
Up to 10'-0"
Footings* Nomina Outside Weight I Pipe Diameter (pounds Diameter Depth (inches) per foot) (inches) (inches) Size (inches) 1.660 N/A 2.27 N/A 1-114
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.OT. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES illGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES 323113-2
Item
•
and Transom Rails Line Posts
Terminal, Comer, Angle & Pull Posts Pedestrian Gate Posts Gate Frames
Nomina Outside Weight Footings* 1 Pipe Diameter (pounds Diameter Depth Size (inches) per foot) (inches) (inches) (inches) 10'-1" to 16'-0" N/A N/A 1-1/2 1.900 2.72 Up to 6'-0" 2 2.375 2.65 12 24 6'-1" to 8'-0" 2 2.375 2.65 12 36 Height
Up to 8'-0"
2-1/2
2.875
5.79
12
36
Up to 8'-0" Up to 8'-0"
2-1/2 1-1/2
2.875 1.900
5.79 2.72
14 NIA
36 NIA
Up to 8'-0" Up to 8'-0"
3 1/2 3-1/2
4 4
9.11 9.11
16 16
42 42
Driveway DoubleLeaf Swing Gate Posts: Opening Up to17'-3-l/2" 17'-4" to 20'-3-1/2"
•
•
E.
Post Caps: Malleable iron, ASTM F 626, , designed to fit snugly over posts with a minimum projection of 1-1/2 inches below top of posts. Post caps shall be manufactured with a curved top.
F.
Eye Tops: Malleable iron, ASTM F 626, , designed to fit over line posts, and for through passage of top rail.
G.
Expansion Sleeve Couplings for Top Rails: Steel, 6 inches long, designed to fit tightly on inside of rail, fitted with raised center.
H.
Rail Ends for Top Rails and Brace Rails: Malleable iron, ASTM F 626, , with holes to receive 3/8 inch bolts for securing to rail end bands.
I.
Tension Bands and Bands for Securing Rail Ends: Mild steel flats, at least II gage x one inch, tension bands in gates shall be 11 gage by 1 inch. Bolts for use with tension bands and rail end bands shall be 3/8 inch by 1 'li-inch.
J.
Tension Bars: Mild steel flats at least 3/16 inch by 3/4 inch.
K.
Tension Wire for Installation at Bottom of Fabric: 6 gage steel spring wire, conforming to requirements of AISI Steel Products Manual, Carbon Steel Wire, Section 16, merchant quality, galvanized, soft temper with Type I coating. Wavy type wire is not acceptable.
L.
Turnbuckles for installation with Tension Wires: Eye and hook type, drop forged steel, right and left hand threads, at least 3/8 inch screw diameter with at least 4 Yz-inches of take-up .
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR& P.OT. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES 32 3113-3
•
M.
Tie Wire: Aluminum ties 6 gage for fastening fabric to posts, top rails and brace rails. At bottom tension wire 9 gage galvanized hog rings shall be installed.
N.
Finish of Metal Parts: Post caps, couplings, rail ends, tension bands, tension bars, turnbuckles, rivets, bolts, and other metal parts and fittings shall be hot-dipped galvanized after fabrication, except bolts, which may be galvanized or cadmium-plated. Galvanizing shall conform to ASTM Al23 Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products, and ASTM F 626Specification for Fence Fittings.
0.
Paints for Refurbishing Existing Fence Posts, Rails, and Accessories: As required to provide the galvanized color of a new installation.
PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01
•
•
INSTALLATION A.
Install fences to heights indicated on Drawings.
B.
Space fence posts at equal intervals between terminal, angle, corner, and gate posts, and not more than l 0 feet apart measured from center to center of posts. In curved fence sections having a radius of 50 feet or less, space posts not more than 5 feet - 6 inches apart. Install posts so that top of eye of post caps are level with top of fabric .
C.
Install angle or corner posts at each change in direction of 15 degrees or more, at change of 5 percent or more in grade of fencing, and at the beginning and end of curved fence sections.
D.
Install terminal posts at ends of runs of fencing. Install gateposts on both sides of driveway and pedestrian gates. For double-leaf gates, net opening between gate posts shall be gate size as indicated on Drawings, plus 3 lh-inches; for single leaf gates, net opening shall be gate size plus 2 lh-inches.
E.
Where a fence is to be installed on a curb, construct footings with top of footing level with the lower finish grade. Align posts, set plumb and true before placing footings. Remove splattered concrete from exposed pipe surfaces while concrete is still soft. In bituminous surfaced areas, install seal coat on top of concrete footings.
F.
Install fences with top rail. Top rail shall pass through eye tops and be secured at ends with rail-end fittings and bands.
G.
Install fences over 10 feet in height, in addition to top rail, with a full length horizontal mid-rail set at mid-height of fence and rigidly secured to posts with rail end fittings and bands .
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR& P.OT. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES 323113-4
•
•
H.
In fences higher than 10 feet, install brace rails at angles, comers, and terminals at 1/4 and 3/4 of fence height. Provide one horizontal brace rail in panels adjacent to terminal, angle, comer, and gateposts, install at mid-height of fence and rigidly secured to posts with rail end fittings and bands. Provide horizontal brace rails, as specified, in panels of curved sections having a radius of 50 feet or less. Brace rails are not required in fencing 4 feet or less in height.
I.
Provide a transom rail and fabric at top of pedestrian gate openings. Install transom rail 6 feet 8 inches above high point of grade at gate opening. Ends of transom rails shall be pinned or riveted to rail end fittings with 1/4 inch mild steel rivets. Pin or rivet must go through rail and peen. Welding on rail ends is notpermitted.
J.
Install bottom tension wire a minimum of 3 inches from grade for fencing, and provide a turnbuckle for each 150 feet of wire or fractional part thereof. Turnbuckles are not required in runs of 15 feet or less. Install ends of tension wires to posts in a manner to prevent slipping or loss of tension. Wrap should start from fence side of post. Tum end of wire around post tightly twisted at least three times around wire. At turnbuckles, wire through eye and tightly twist end at least three times around wire. Cut tail of bottom wire flush.
K.
Install fence fabric on outward facing side of posts, except for tennis courts. Install fence fabric with top edge projecting above top rail of fence.
L.
Install bottom of fence fabric to clear finish grades, except on bituminous surface install 3/4 inch above such surface. Locally shape and trench ground surfaces where necessary to provide uniform top and bottom alignment of fence.
M.
Tightly stretch fabric and at terminal, pull comer, angle, and gateposts, secure with tension bars extending full height of fence. Secure tension bars to posts with bolted tension bands spaced not more than 14 inches apart.
N.
Bands and Ties: Install bands and ties in accordance with following schedule: 7 bands on 8 feet fence 6 bands on 6 feet fence 4 bands on 4 feet fence
•
7 ties on 8 feet fence 6 ties on 6 feet fence 4 ties on 4 feet fence
0.
Fasten fabric to line posts with wire ties spaced not more than 16 inches apart. Where 6 gage aluminum ties are furnished, hook the tie at both ends. Installation of hooked ties with links is not permitted.
P.
Fasten fabric to top rails, mid-rails, brace rails, with wire ties spaced not more than 18 inches apart. Bend back ends of tie wires so as not to be a hazard. At bottom tension wire, install hog rings spaced not .more than 18 inches apart. Where 2 fabrics are furnished, lap the fabrics one mesh at mid-rail and tie both fabrics with 9 gage wire or 6 gage aluminum ties to midrails .
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.OT. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES 323113-5
•
Q.
Grind all field welds smooth, clean off flux and spatter, damaged galvanizing removed, burrs and projections ground off, properly prepared, then heavily coated with galvanizing repair coating as specified in Section 05 5000; or equal product approved by Owner's Office of Environmental Health and Safety. Install coating in accordance with written recommendations of manufacturer.
R.
Fabrication of Gates:
•
1.
Frames: Fabricate gate frames from steel pipe of size specified, with joints at corners miter cut and continuously welded to sides.
2.
Fabric: Install fence fabric to side members with tension bars and tension bands as specified, spaced not more than 14 inches apart. Tension bars shall extend full height of gate. Install fence fabric to top and bottom members and to brace rail with wire ties as specified for top rails, spaced not more than 12 inches apart.
3.
Latches: Gate latches and strikes will be furnished by the Owner. Weld gate latches and strikes to gate posts and frames. Welding shall be performed before gate frames are galvanized, or welds shall be finished as specified for field welds.
4.
Hinges: Install and adjust hinges; burr or center punch threads of gate hinge bolts to prevent removal of nuts. Install 3 hinges on each post for swing gates more than 16 feet wide. Hinges will be provided by the Owner .
5.
Grind welds flush and smooth. Hot-dip galvanize fabricated parts after welding, or finish weld as specified for field welds.
6.
All gates to meet applicable specifications for doors. See plans for height and type of hardware.
7.
The bottom 10 inches of gates to have a smooth uninterrupted surface. See plans for details.
FENCING ADJUSTMENTS
3.02 A.
Where the finish grade is raised 6 inches or less, cut and re-knuckle the existing fence fabric. Adjust tension wire and tie to fabric. Bottom of fence fabric shall be installed %" above finish grade.
B.
Where the finish pavement is lowered 6 inches or less, demolish the fence footing flush with the finish grade and adjust the fabric and its attachments. Bottom of fence fabric shall be installed % inches above finish grade.
C.
Post footings and fabrics that require readjustment after installation shall be entirely replaced.
\ \36 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR& P.OT. UPGRADES 1 \>S ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
\
10/01/2011 CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES 323113-6
•
INSTALLATION OF GATES
3.03 A.
Provide gates of the sizes indicated on Drawings. Allow clearance on gates of 1-112 inches at bottom and one inch at top. Construct gates installed in sloping areas to conform to the grade. Provide an opening in each gate for access to locking device or padlock. Knuckle ends of fabric cut for opening to eliminate hazards.
B.
Sliding Gates and Swing Barricade Gates: Fabricate and install as indicated on Drawings. Wheel housing must be designed to fit tightly to roll track and prevent gate from rolling over objects. Unsupported cantilever type roll gates are not acceptable. Install gate stops in accordance with the drawings. Both top and track stops are required. COMPLETION
3.09
•
A.
Completed fencing shall form continuous units between points indicated with required parts, accessories, and fittings provided and installed. Clean exposed metal surfaces of cement, grout and other foreign substances.
B.
Fill in holes left by removal of existing fence footings, except in areas where grading Work is indicated or specified, to existing grade with clean earth thoroughly compacted to at least same density as adjoining soil. PROTECTION
3.10 A.
Protect the Work of this section until Substantial Completion. CLEANUP
3.11 A.
Remove rubbish, debris and waste materials and legally dispose of off the Project site.
END OF SECTION
•
8736 CORWIN THEATER REPAIR & P.OT. UPGRADES LOS ANGELES HIGH SCHOOL
10/01/2011 CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES 32 3113-7
